Full text of "Chemicals and allied products"

See other formats

^^3<^.

Digitized by the Internet Archive

in 2007 with funding from

Microsoft Corporation

http://www.archive.org/details/chemicalsalliedpOOmunruoft

urNroq^CV>cuac«itx:^voourd & Onc^cxjra ,T. ^ .1

Twelfth Census of the United States.

Census Bulletin.

N->. 2lO.

WASHINGTON, D. C.

June 28, 1902.

MANUFACTURES.

CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS.

Hon. William R. Merriam, .

Dlrcct<yr nf thu C'tii-fw^.

Sir : I transmit herewith, for publication in bulletin
form, the statistics of chemicals and allied products,
prepared under my direction h\ Charles E. Munroe,
Ph. U., professor of chemistrj', Columbian University,
Washington, D. C, and by T. M. Chatard, Ph. D., his
associate, acting as expert special agents of the division
of manufactures.

The unusually exhaustive and valuable character of
the work is described in the introduction to this report
by the expert special agents. Nothing approaching it
in any particular has ever before been presented at any
census of the United States.

The statistics are presented in 9 tables: Table 1 is a
sununary of the statistics for the entire industry, by
states, lyOO; Table 2 is a summary for fertilizers, by
states, 1900; Table -S is a summary for dyestuli's and
tanning materials, by states, 1900; Table 4 is a sum-
mary for paints, by states, 1900; Table 5 is a summary
for varnishes, by states, 1900; Table 6 is a summary
for explosives. b\' states, 1900; Table 7 is a summary for
essential oils, by states, 1900; Table 8 is a sununary for
chemicals, by states, 1900; and Table 9 is a summary
for bone, ivory, and lampblack, bj' states, for 1900.

In drafting the schedules of inquiry for the census of
1900 care was taken to preserve the basis of comparison
with prior censuses. Comparison may be made safely
with respect to all the items of inquiry except those re-
lating to capital, salaried officials, clerks, etc., and their
salaries, the average numl)er of employees, and the total

amount of wages paid. Live capital, that is, cash on
hand, I)ills receivable, unsettled ledger accounti, raw
materials, stock in process of manufacture, finished
products on hand, and other sundries, was first called
for at the census of 1890. No definite attempt was
made, prior to the census of 1890, to secure a return of
live capit<il invested.

Changes were made in the inquiries relating to em-
ployees and wages in order to eliminate defects found
to exist on the form of inquiry adopted in 1890. At
the census of 1890 the average number of persons em-
ployed during the entire year was called for, and also
the average number employed at stated weeklj- rates of
pay, and the average number was computed for the
actual time the establishments were reported as being
in operation. At the census of 1900 the greatest and
least numbers of employees were reported, and also the
average number employed during each month of the
year. The average number of wage-earners (men,
women, and children) employed during the entire year
was ascertained by using 12, the number of calendar
months, as a divisor into the total of the average num-
licrs reported for each month. This difterence in the
method of ascertaining the average number of wage-
earners during the entire year may have resulted in a
variation in the number, and should be considered in
making comparisons.

At the census of 1890 the number and salaries of pro-
prietors and firm members actively engaged in the busi-
ness or in supervision were reported, combined with
clerks and other officials. In ca.ses where proprietors

.and fii'm membei's were reported without salaries, the
amount that would ordinarily be paid for similar serv-
ices was estimated. At the census of 1900 only the
number of proprietoi"s and tirm members actively en-
gaged in the industry or in supervision was ascertained,
and no salaries were reported for this class. It is there-
fore impossible to compare the number and salaries of
salaried officials of any character for the two censuses.

Furthermore, the schedules for 1890 included in the
wage-earning class, overseers, foremen, and superin-
tendents (not general superintendents or managers),
while the census of 1900 separates from the wage-earning
class such salaried employees as general superintendents,
clerks, and salesmen. It is possible and probable that
this change in the form of the question has resulted in
eliminating from the wage-earners, as reported by the
present census, many high-salaried employees included
in that group for the census of 1890.

In some instances, the number of proprietors and firm
members, shown in the accompanying tables, falls short
of the number of establishments reported. This is
accounted for by the fact that no proprietors or firm
members are repoi'ted for corporations or cooperative
establishments. The number of salaried officials, clerks,
etc., is the greatest number reported employed at any
one time during the year.

The reports show a capital of $238,529,641 invested
in the manufacture of chemicals and allied products.

This sum represents the value of land, buildings,
machiner\', tools, and imjjlements, and the live capital
utilized, but does not include the capital stock of aiij'
of the manufacturing corporations of the state. The
value of the products is returned at $202, .582,390, to
produce which involved an outlay of $11,340,385 for
salaries of officials, clerks, etc.; $21,799,251 for wages;
$14,825,112 for miscellaneous expenses, including rent,
taxes, etc.; and $124,043,837 for materials used, mill
supplies, freight, and fuel. It is not to be assumed,
however, that the difference between the aggregate of
these sums and the value of the products is, in any
sense, indicative of the profits in the manufacture of
the products during the census j'ear. The census
schedule takes no cognizance of the cost of selling man-
ufactured articles, or of interest on capital invested, or
of the mercantile losses incurred in the business, or of
depreciation in plant. The value of the product given
is the value as obtained or fixed at the shop or factor}'.
This statement is necessarj- in order to avoid erroneous
conclusions from the figures presented.
Verj' respectfully,

Chief Statistician f err Manufactures.

CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS.

By Charles E. Mujjroe and Thomas M. Cjiatard.

The publication of special reports relating to the
manufacture of chemicals, which was begun in the
Tenth Census, was a feature of the Eleventh Census.
although, as stated in the report on "chemicals and
alliod products" of the latter census (Eleventh Census,
Msuuifacturing Industries. Part III. page 275). "owing
to changes in the form of inquiry and the inclusion of
certain allied industries not reported as chemicals at
the census of 1880, and the exclusion of others that
were included under this head at the Tenth Census, a
true comparison is impossible.'"

The same ma}' be said of the report on chemicals and
alliod products for the Twelfth Census, now presented.
Pharmaceutical preparations, included as chemicals
by the Eleventh Census, have been excluded from the
present report, while "bone, ivorj', and lamp black,"
previously reported elsewhere, is here included. Still,
the data for so many of the industries included in the
classilication are comparable that a fairl}' correct idea
of the growth of the combined industries as a whole,
during the past decade, may be obtained.

The total number of active establishments included
in this inquiry, as set forth in this report, is 1,827.
Thirty-six establishments were reported as idle, mak-
ing the total number of establishments 1,863. The
report on "chemicals and allied products" for 1890
covei'ed 1,()26 establishments, including those making
pharmaceutical preparations as the principal product,
but the latter arc not considered in the present report.
The Census Office classities an establishment according
to the nature of its principal product, this being deter-
mined by its value as compared with that of any other
product which may be made therein. The special
schedules for the various industries call for the main
products of the industry with sufficient detail, while
subordinate products are, in most cases, brought to-
gether under the caption " all other products." Hence,
chemical products made b}' works belonging to other
categories can not, in most cases, be ascertained from
the returns and do not appear in this report except in
a few specified instances. The amount so lost to this
in(iuiry is, however, not so large as to materially afiect
these returns, and as the value of such products is
included in the figures of the other categories, the final
total value of all manufactures is not affected. More-
over, establishments whose products during the census
year were valued at less than $500 are not included in
the general tabulations, but are taken into considera-
tion in this special report.

Owing to the hearty cooperation of most of the lead-
ing chemical works it is believed that the figures here
presented are as nearly coirect as the difficulties attend-
ing the collection of the information have permitted.
In proV)ablj' no Ijranch of the census work is the need
of a permanent, trained force more keenly felt than in
this particular inquiry, the wide range of which is shown
by the character of the " Special Schedule, No. 17,''
used in the collection of these returns. The products
were classified under 19 groups, as follows: Group 1,
Acids; II, Sodas; III, Potashes; IV, Alums; V, Coal-
Tar Products; VI, Cyanides; VII, Wood Distillation;
VIII, Fertilizers; IX, Bleaching Materials; X, Chemi-
cals produced by the aid of Electricity; XI, Dyestuflfs;

XII, Tanning Materials; XIII, Paints, Pigments, and
Varnishes; XIV, Explosives; XV, Plastics; XVI, Essen-
tial Oils; XVII, Compressed and Liquefied Gases;
XVIII, Fine Chemicals; and XIX, General Chemicals.
In the course of the work it was found necessary to form
a subgroup, XIX A, to classif}' certain establishments
whose main products were not originalh' included in
"chemicals." A final group named "miscellaneous"
includes a number of products not chemical but made
by works belonging to the categor}- of "chemical in-
dustries." By bringing such products together their
nature, quantity, and value are given and the figures
may be used to supplement the returns elsewhere given
for such substances so far as they may be separately
reported.

Separate tabulations have been made of the data for
Group VIII, Fertilizers; Groups XI and XII, D^-e-
stufl's and Extracts; Group XIII, Paints; also Group

XIII, Varnishes; Group XIV, Explosives; and Group
XVI, Essential Oils. The data for the remainder of the
groups are included in the general tabulation of "chem-
icals." There is also a tabulation of "bone, ivorj-, and
lamp black," but as results showed that the product was
exclusively hydrocarbon black or lampblack, the figures
may be properly included in those for "paints," and
are so treated in the special group report. These
tribulations are continued from previous censuses and
are necessar}' in order that the condition of the manu-
factures of states, cities, etc., may be promptly shown
with sufficient detail, but for the proper presentation
of the chemical indu.stries of the United States a cer-
tain reclassification of products became needful. For
example, a certain large establishment made paints,
acids, and general chemicals, its paint product being
the largest in value; the establishment was classified

under "paints," the other products being there re-
ported as subproducts. In another instance a large fer-
tilizer works, making its own acid, had such an extensive
business in the manufacture of cottonseed products
that, although it was really a chemical works of much
importance, it could not be put in this category, but
had to go elsewhere. So far as possible, the chemical
products of this latter class of works have been taken
into consideration in the special group reports, but
separately noted, so that any duplication may be made
evident.

In the special group reports, all of the products
belonging to the group are brought together. When
the main product of a works belongs to the group under
consideration, the establishment is a "main" one and
belongs to Class A. When the group product is a
minor one for an establishment, this is counted in, but
as a " sub" works and placed in Class B. The chemical

product of an establishment not belonging to the cate-
gory of "chemical industries," as noted above, is also
taken into account, but the establishment and its chem-
ical product are placed in a third class, C. By this
system each group report can present its special opera-
tions and products in any desired detail; and while the
figures of product may differ from and often exceed
those of the general tabulations, no confusion can result
if it is clearly understood that the purpose of the special
group reports is to give as clear and complete a presen-
tation of the American chemical industry as the avail-
able information may permit.

The following table gives, first, the totals for estab-
lishments, capital, labor, cost of materials, and value of
products as shown in the tabulations, and second, for
purposes of comparison, the total values for the same
classes of products as shown bj' the reclassified figures
of the group reports:

COMPARISON OF TABULATION VALUES WITH GROUP VALUES: 1900.

TABULATION.

Total ,

Chemicals

Dyestufis'

Essential oils

Explosives

Fertilizers

Paints and varnishes'.

Number of
establish-
ments.

1,740

4.59

422

615

WAGK-EARNERS.

Capital.

Average
number.

Total wages.

«23S,6!29,641

89,091,430

7,839,034 -

012,657 I

19,4l)!>,846 I
60,6a'J,7.W

60,834.921 '

19,0.54

1,648

199

4, ,502

11,. 581
9,782

821,799,251

9,401,467
787, 942
69,100
2,383,766
4, 185. 289
4,971,697

Materials,
cost.

(124,043,837

34,564,137
4,745,912
596, 112
10,334,974
28,958,473
44,844,229

Products,
value.

$202,582,396

62, 676, 730
7, 350, 748
850,093
17, 125, 418
44,657,385
69, 922, 022

Reclassified

products,

value.

«221, 217, 217

'78,414,840

7, 767, 226

8.59, 401

816,950,976

45,911,382

71, 313, 392

> Including miscellaneous, 84,175,656 from all tabulations.
2 Including tanning materials.

3 Excluding miscellaneous,

♦Including bone, ivory, and lamp black.

Taking the table of "principal products, their quan-
titj^ and value, 1890," given on page 275 of the above-
mentioned special report of the Eleventh Census, and

comparing the returns for the same products as given
by the figures of the Twelfth Census, the following
results are shown:

COMPARISON OF THE QUANTITIES AND VALUES OF
THE PRINCIPAL PRODUCTS REPORTED: 1890 AND 1900.

Total .

Alum, pounds

Coal-tar products

Dyeing and tanning
extracts and sumac,
pounds

Gunpowderand other ex-
plosives, pounds X.

Fertilizers, tons

Paints, colore, and var-
nishes

Potash and pearlash,
pounds

Sodas, pounds

Sulphuric acid, 50°;
pounds

Sulphuric acid, 60",
pounds

Sulphuric acid, 66",
pounds

Wood alcohol and acetate
of lime

Chemicals (including all
acids, bases, and salts
not heretofore enumer-
ated )

All other products

1890

Quantity.

$163,547,686

93,998,008

187,906,911

125,646,912
1,898,806

5, 106, 939
333, 124, 375

1,009,863,407

20,379,908

354,533,667

Value.

IflOO

Quantity.

179,467,471

169,626,536

215, 690, 719
3,091,717

1,616,710
687,591

8,857,084

10,993,131
35,519,841

62,908,252

197,507 3,864,766

5,432,400 1,279,082,000

4,307,067 1,906,878,903

122,940 ! 34,023,131

3,249,466 I 754,558,455

1,886,469

Value.

8221,217,217

24,751,974
13,018,263

2,446,576
1,421,720

7,767,226

16,950,976
45,911,382

71,313,392

178,180
10,237,944

7,966,832

246,284

6,035,069

6,775,290

'40,791,690
4,175,6.56

> Including essential oils, 8859,401.

This table shows that while the chemical industries of
the United States have greatlj^ advanced in quantity of
product, the value per unit of product has much de-
creased, a tendency of much importance to those indus-
tries which use the.se products as matei'ials for their
own operations.

Each of the groups into which products are classified
represents a special form of establishment, sometimes
two or more forms, even though a single establishment
may, and often does, furnish products belonging to two
or more groups. Hence it is practically impossible to
construct for this special branch of inquiry a single
schedule which, by the wording of the interrogatories
and the indications as to the proper nature of the re-
plies, will enable the Census Office to elicit the desired
information from all alike. The difficulties experienced
in collecting the statistics have, however, indicated
improvements needed for future work, and, with a
permanent Census Bureau, there is every reason to
expect that at the next census the statistics of chemical
manufactures will show results of much wider scope
than it has been possible to present even at the census
of 1900.

The willingness of the niiuiufacturers, notably of the
great coinbinutions, to furiii.Hh in formation has l)cen
uiost gratifying, and whon difficulties have occurred
in most cases they have been duo to the fact that the
establishments did not have such records as would give
the information desired. The absence of such records
has generally been regretted by the manufacturers, who
have recognized the value such information would have
been to them in their business. In the few cases where
information was at first refused on the ground of inter-
ference with private business, a courteous letter of ex-
planation rarely failed to elicit a pleasant reply, giving
everything desired so far as it could be furnished.

While the groups above mentioned cover most of the
products usually recognized as chemicals, inspection of
the index of any standard work on chemical technology
will show that the subjects considered as belonging to
this domain are far more numerous. The reason for
this becomes evident when it is remembered that every
form of industry must be either physical or chemical
or a combination of both. The manufacture of pig
iron or the tanning of a hide is a chemical process, while
the rolling of a mil or the making of a shoe is a phys-
ical process, but many manufacturing processes in
which chemical reactions occur can not be sharply
classified, since, while the products arc the results of
chemical action, the practical success of the operations
depends upon the correct arrangement of the mechan-
ical plant, a good example of this Ijeing the ammonia-
soda process. Modern industrial ehemistr}- tends to
develop itself more and more along engineering lines;
hence the increasing demand for the chemical engineer —
a mechanical engineer with a special equipment of chem-
ical .science and technology.

A list of the topics treated of in Wagners Chemical
Technology is here given as an example of what the
term "chemical technology-" as a rule embraces, to
which is added a list of the special schedules and bulle-
tins issued by the Census Office showing how far these
topics are the subject of special inquiries and reports at
the census of 1900, thus facilitating the obtaining of a
comprehensive view of this industrial complex.

COMPARISON OF THE TOPICS OF CHEMICAL TECHNOL-
OGY WITH THE CLASSIFICATIONS OF THE CENSUS
OF 1900.

COMPARISON OF THE TOPICS OF CHEMICAL TECHNOL-
OGY WITH THE CLASSIFICATIONS OF THE CENSUS
OF 1900— Continual.

Fuel:

Clunnal (chemical manufactures)

Coke

Oas, tllumlnttting and fuel

Oil, mineral (petroleum refining) .

Paraffln, etc (petroleum rfllning)..
Mi'lalhirgj':

Iron and steel

SSr':::::::::::::::;::::::::::;::

zinc

Other metals, general schedule

Special
acnedule
number.

(no number)

g
8

21 and 23
24
2S
28
8

(chemical manufactnres) .

(chemical manufactures) .

Chemical manufactures. Inorganic:

Common salt

Adds, bases and Htlts .

Fertilizers

Explosives

Comprt'sMed gsKes

Klectrolylii,' ])r<)diK'ts. .

Pulnts iind varnishes. .
Chemical nuiiiufaetures, organic:

Alc'iliols and ethers

Organic aclcls

OrgHulc coloring matters...

Coal-tar products and colors.,
(ilass:

Pottery and flreKjlay products

Bricks

(■enicntsand mortar, general schedule

Foo<l. beverHges, etc.:

Stan-li, general schedule

Sugar, general schedule

Feriiielilation

Brewing, general schedule

Wine making, general schedule

Spirit'J, genenil schedule

Flour and gris*t pnxlucts

Meat prmlucts (slaughtering and meat packing)

Milk, butter, and cheese

Fibers:

Preparing, bleaching, dyeing, printing, and finishing.

Rilk

W(H>1

Cotton

Hemp, flax, and jute ■. ..

Paper .

Miscellaneous:

Tanning (leather, tanned and curried) .

Glue, !*ize, gelatine, general schedule ...

Bone distillation-
Bone charcoal, general schedule

Bone oil

Fats, oils, soans, general schedule

Stearin and givcerin. general schedule .

Kesins, general schedule

Essential oils (chemical manufactures) .

Wood preser\'ation, general schedule ...

>ehedule
number.

31
33

IB
14 and 15
11
18
34

While some of these topics may at first appear to the
la3-men to have but a veiy slight connection with chem-
istry, as, for example, the manufacture of flour or bricks,
yet flour and bricks, as well as all of the other chemical
substances named, are chemical substances, and they
have been the subject of extended chemical study by
specialists, through which there has resulted great im-
provement in the quality and cheapness of the products.
In such industrial chemical investigation Germauv,
leads all other countries, and its present preeminence
in the field of chemical manufacture has been deservedly
won by its work, although it has been materialh* aided
by the character of the patent laws of England and of
the United States.

The German chemical manufacturer is far in advance
of those of all other nations in recognizing the value of
specialized chemical skill in the conduct of the works
and in emploj'ing trained chemists in laboratory inves-
tigations. Thus McMurtrie' points out that the Fa-
briken der Actien-Ge.seli.schaft Farbewerke Meister
Lucius und Bruning in HOchst, who were in 1S90 mak-
ing Ijetween 1,700 and 1,8(X) diflferent colors, numbered

' The Relations of the Industries to the Advancement of Chem-
ical Science, by William McMurtrie, Proc. A. A. A. S., Vol. 44,
page 79, 1895. '

among their 3,000 employees 70 chemists and 12 en-
gineers. Green' states that in 1900 the six largest
coal-tar color firms in Germany employed about 500
chemists and 350 engineers and technical men, while
Sir Henr}^ Roscoe" states that at the German works
which he had visited, highly trained chemists were em-
plojed in original researches with a view to new dis-
coveries. "One employee, who received £1,000 a year,
worked for several years without producing an3' results;
but eventually he made a discover3' which repaid the
firm ten times over, and placed an entirely new branch
of manufacture in their hands."

Owing to the extended discussions going on in Eng-
land and America relative to the tremendous growth of
the chemical industi'ies of Germany during the past
twenty years, in which many have attributed much of
this growth to the extensive emploj-ment of doctors of
philosophy in chemistry and other university-bred
chemists in the German technical works, a census has
been taken of the establishments in the United States
which are the subject of this report, with the following
result:

CHEMISTS EMPLOYED IN THE ESTABLISHMENTS
TREATED OF IN THIS REPORT.

GROUP
NCMBER.

Group name.

Numberof
chemists.

Acids

Sodas

III

Coal-tar products '- . .

VIII

Fertilizers

Electro-chemicals

Dvestufis

XII

XIII

Paints and varnishes

."iS

XIV

XVI

Essential oils

XVII

XVIII

XIX

General chemicals

Total

276

When, in German works, the results of the investi-
gations of the expert chemists indicate commercial pos-
sibilities, practical working tests follow, and, in the
end, one more patent is added to those which hamper
the development of chemical industry in countries
which, like the United States, give the foreigner the
monopoly of a patent without requiring that the pro-
tected article shall be made where the patent is issued.
The effect is that since it is often more profitable to make
the higher grade chemicals abroad than in the United
States, foreign labor and capitsil are protected to the in-
jury of the labor and capital of this countiy. Hence,
while the manufacture of acids, alkalies, fertilizers, and
other heavy chemicals has greatly increased in the
United States, this is mainly because ol' tran.sportation

' The Coal-tar IndvLstry, by A. G. Green, Science, Vol. 14, page
663; 1901.

*J. Soc. Chem. Ind., Vol. Ki, page .570, 1897.

costs. The tariff on alkalies has certainly added much
in the development of this branch because it has been to
the interest of the foreign patentees to establish alkali
works here either by their own capital or by granting
licenses to others. When, as in the case of dyestuffs
and other high-grade chemicals, the transportation cost
is a minor consideration, the tariff has little effect in
inducing the domestic manufacture of a foreign article
protected by a local patent. So long as the demand for
his article insures a sufficient price, the foreign patentee
can make it abroad and ship it here, paying whatever
duty may be demanded; bv simply refusing to grant a
license for manufacture here, he is secured from
all competition. Other countries may have refused
to grant him a patent, which may even have be-
come void in the original country, and the article be
made by others; j^et under our laws, he, and he alone,
may vend the article here. The English, who are suf-
fering from a similar condition of their patent laws,
are bestirring themselves to have the situation amelio-
rated, and a special committee of the Society oir Chem-
ical Industry has lately made a report upon this sub-
ject.' The effects of granting British patents to for-
eigners without requiring domestic operation are thus
stated:

1. We foster foreign labor and assist in the development of for-
eign industries.

2. As the introduction of a new article generally replaces an-
other article hitherto in use, we throw out of employment a cer-
tain number of our own workpeople.

3. Very frequently the foreign patentee has either not succeeded
in getting a patent in his own country or such patent has already
run its course there, whilst his British monopoly remains in full
force. The result is that we stifie invention and increase the prices
of a number of articles by closing the doors to our own inventors
and manufacturers, whilst our foreign competitors may make and
vend abroad the patented article without any restriction or pay-
ment of royalty.

Several examples are given of the practical working
of the English patent laws. Artificial alizarine was
invented in Germany but no patent was granted there.
English patents were, however, granted, with the result
that the patentees, having the monopoly of the English
market anyhow, simply made it in Germany, as being
cheaper so to do, and built up an enormous trade which
was the foundation of Germany's present supremacy in
the manufacture of coal-tar dyestuffs. Again, the pro-
duction of artificial indigo is destroying the natural
indigo industry of India and producing much distress
there. England, which is thus a heavy loser, can do
nothing to offset this loss, because the patent monopoly
gi'anted to the foreigner enables him to supply the
English market on his own terms.

Every country, save England and the United States,
has a provision in its patent laws that a patent can be
revoked if not worked in the counti'y granting the
patent. Moreover, the French patent law has, in addi-

' J. Soc. Chem. Ind., 1002, pages 212 to 301.

tion, the following provision, article 32, scotion 3, "The
patent shall ho revoked if the i)iitentee has introduced
into France articles of manufacture made abroad and
similar to those which are protected by the patent."
In this way France provides that, in giving to anyone
the protection of her patent laws, her domestic industry
shall be fostered, and not, as in England and the United
States, ofti'n injured and sometimes destroyed. In-
stances have occurred in this country where chemical
substances once made heie are *no longer produced,
because the foreign manufacturer, protect(Hl \>y his
American patent, has been able to make the domestic
manufacture unprofitable.

The report under consideration states that "There is
but one remedy for this vexed question which is both
simple and efficacious, viz, to enact that 'A patent
may Ije revoked if it be proved that an article patented
is worked abroad and not in the United Kingdom, the
onus of proof that the patent is worked, bona fide, in
this country, resting with the patentee or licensee.'"
Some such provision as this in the laws of the United
States would materially aid the development of our
American chemical industry.

In order to bring out the relations existing between
the growth of the chemical industr}- and of the patents
which have been granted in this country covering
inventions in this industiy, an abstract has been made
of all chemical patents issued from the founding of
the United States Patent Office up to the year 1900,
and this Digest of Chemical Patents is given as an
appendix to this report. It was prepared b}- Mr. Story
B. Ladd, M. E., whose experience as a patent attorney
especially fitted him for this duty, and he elsewhere
shows the effect which the granting of these monopolies
has produced on the industries of the United States.

The Nineteenth century, the closing 3' ear of which
is marked by the taking of the Twelfth Census, will
always be a notable one in the history of chemical
manufacture, since practically all of its present work-
ing processes have had their origin and development
during this period. Indeed, chemical maimfacture, as
such, can hardly be said to have existed until the con-
tinuouslj- working chamber process for sulphuric acid
was introduced, about 1810, while the Leblanc soda
process, although discovered by him in 1789, failed to
get a footing until 181i, when it was introduced into
England bj- Losh. Thereafter the development of
chemical technology proceeded rapidly, and now, at the
end of the century, we find that the great Leblanc proc-
ess is approaching extinction through the inroads of the
later ammonia-soda process and the electroh'tic chlorine
process, while the chamber process for sulphuric acid
appears to be about to meet a foi-midable competitor in
the recently developed contact process.

As the nature and working conditions of this process
have been only lately made public, and as its general intro-
duction will have such a profound effect upon industrial
chemistry, especial attention is given to it in the next

section. Moreover, contact action or cataljsis contin-
ually occurs in chemical operations, has already numerous
applications, and the number is continually increasing.

Hv catalysis in meant that p(!culiar action of a sub-
stance by which it can, when in contact with two or
more substances cajmble of reacting upon each other,
either cause the reaction, or, if the rea<;tion is already
occurring, greatly diminish the time required for its
completion. At the same time, the catalytic substance,
so far as respects the nature of the ultimate products,
appears to have undergone no change. Hence, Ost-
wald's definition, "A catalytic agent is such material
as affects the velocity of a chemical reaction without
itself appearing in the final product." A very familiar
example of catalytic action is the effect of adding man-
ganese peroxide to potassium chlorate when making
oxygen. Either of the substances gives off oxygen when
heated to a temperature sufficiently high, but when
mixed the reaction is effected at a much lower tempera-
ture and with much less danger of explosion. When
the reaction is completed, examination of the residue
shows that only the chlorate has lost its oxygen, becom-
ing chloride, the peroxide being apparently unchanged.
It is probable that the latter has taken full part in the
reaction, giving off' oxygen and taking it up again, but,
looking only at the final result, it appears to have been
effective merely by its presence.

The action of the niter gas in the sulphuric acid
chamber is also catalytic. The union of sulphur diox-
ide and atmospheric oxygen can and does take place
without the help of the niter gases, but the unassisted
reaction is very slow and incomplete. The niter gases
are oxygen carriers; the ox3'gen which they contain is
in a much more active condition than that of the air,
so that they oxidize the sulphur dioxide but replace
the loss by taking up oxygen from the accompanying
air. As water, in the form of steam, is alwajs present
in this reaction, the final product is sulphuric acid,
which, in theory at least, is free from oxides of nitro-
gen, the niter gas remaining in its original active con-
dition. In practice, however, a certain amount of this
gas is reduced to inactive forms and this loss must be
made up by addition of fresh gas, so that for every
hundred parts of acid produced, a certain quantity of
niter is used up, but this quantity, being theoretically
nothing, depends upon the care of the management and
other conditions.

Other applications of catalysis are met with in the
Deacon chlorine process, the manufacture of chlorates,
aldehydes (the formaldehyde lamp for disinfection
being an example), acetone, carbon tetrachloride, and
many other organic products, the entire subject being
one of great and increasing imiwrtance.

Group I. — Acids.

Sulphwic Add. — The manufacture of sulphuric acid
has practically doubled during the past decade, the in-
crease of product resulting more from the expansion of

worfo than from an increase in their number. The fol-
lowing table gives a comparison between the output for
the census year of 1900 and that for 1890. The figures
for quantity and value of 50"^ acid include acid made
and consumed in the works in the production of ferti-
lizers and other products.

COMPARISON OF SULPHURIC ACID PRODUCED IK 1890
AND 1900.

1900—127 ESTABLISHMENTS.

1890—105 ESTABLISHMENTS.

STEEXGTH,

Acid produced.

Pounds.

Value.

Value
per
ton.

Pounds.

Value.

Value
per
ton.

Total..

2,69.5,460,489

814,247,185

1,384,776,962

87,679,473

50°

60°

66°

1,906,878,903

34,023,131

754, 558, 455

7,965,832

246,284

6,035,069

$8.35
14.47
,16.00

1,009,863,407
20,379,908
354,533,657

4,307,067

122,940

3,249,466

88.63
12.06
18.33

The figures of quantity and value of the 50° acid for
both periods include the amount of this acid made at
certain works and consumed there in the manufacture
of fertilizers. In addition there is given the quantity
and value of the acid consumed at works in 1900 for
makiqg mixed acids for explosives and for other pur-
poses. The acid used for fertilizers was really 50° or
chamber acid. The rest of the acid included for 1900
was of various strengths, but for purposes of compari-
son these have been reduced to 50°. In reducing 66°
acid to 50°, the quantity is multiplied by 1.50, and for
60° acid, multiplied Ijy 1.25, these factors being closely
approximate to the usual strengths.

1900.

1890.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

2,097,268,570

$8, 819, 526

581,536,200

82,480,495

1,678,718,000
518,560,570

6,591,147
2,228,379

.581,536,200

2,480,495

(')

Even with these rcsti-ictions a comparison is interesting
as showing the growth of this branch of manufacture.

' Not given.

The census report for 1890 also gave the total acid
production reduced to a uniform strength of 50°.
Doing this for the acid production of the present cen-
sus gives the following comparison:

Total acid as 50°:

.1900 3,081,245,500

1890 1, 567, 138, 777

Gain, practically 100 per cent 1, 514, 106, 723

The census of 1870 was the first at which separate
figures were given- for sulphuric acid, but only the
number of establishments and the total value of product
were given. In 1880 the total quantity in pounds was
given, but no separation into the various strengths was
made, so that the returns are not strictly comparable.

Year.

Number
of works.

1S70
1880
1890
1900

4
49
105
127

Quantity of
products.

308, 765, 432
1,384,776,972
2, 695, 460, 489

Value of
products.

8212,150

3,661,876

7, 679, 473

14,247,185

1 Not given.

The first manufacturer of sulphuric acid in the United
States appears to have been Mr. John Harrison, of
Philadelphia, who in 1793 had a lead chamber capable
of producing 300 carboys of acid per annum. ^ The
business proving very remunerative, he built, in 1807, a
lead chamber 50 feet long, 18 feet wide, and IS feet
high. This was a large chamber for the time, and was
capable of making nearly half a million pounds of sul-
phuric acid annually, the price of the acid being then
as high as 15 cents a pound. Mr. Harrison was also
the first person in the United States to use a platinum
still for the concentration of the acid, this having been
up to then done in glass, a very precarious and danger-
ous operation. This first still was made in ISl-l by Dr.
Eric BoUman, and was at once put in use. It
weighed 700 ounces, had a capacity of 25 gallons, and
was in continuous use for fifteen years.

Powers & Weightman, of Philadelphia, report that
they began the manufacture of sulphuric acid in 1825,
while a letter from Mr. Nicholas Lennig, containing
much valuable information, states that about 1829 his
father, the late Mr. Charles Lennig. erected a sulphuric-
acid plant which "was so successful that the then exist-
ing New York Chemical Company went into liquidation,
and put the funds realized therefrom into a banking
company now well known as the Chemical National
Bank."

It also appears that, in 1829, the manufacture of sul-
phuric acid was begun in Baltimore by two companies,
the Maryland Chemical Works and the Baltimore
Chemical Manufactory. The industry extended, and
the figures given at the census of 1870 of i works, with
a total product of the value of $212,150, are undoubt-
edly erroneous. Of the works reporting acids as prin-
cipal products at the census of 1900, 16 reported starting
in business prior to 1870, while some of the fertilizer
factories were making acid prior to that time. While
nothing positive can now be said on this subject, it is
not unlikely that in 1870 there were at least 25 sul-
phuric acid works in operation, with a product of over a
million dollars in value. Such a supposition is certainly
more reasonable when compared, as above, with the
figures of subsequent censuses, since everyone, at all
conversant with this subject, is well aware that between
1870 and 1880 there was no such outburst of energy in
this branch of industry, as would be indicated by the

' Catalogue, Harrison
Philailelphia, 1902.

Brothers & Company, Incorporated,

figures of the respective j*ears. Moreover, the figures
of value for tlio total flit>iui<'al industry, so far as tlicv
can 1)0 compared, weic, for 187U, $(iO,yiiS,214, and for
1880, *89,388,172; while the figures for 1890 were
l^ltil. 0(57. 190. The comparatively small increase of the
figures of total value of product for 1880 over those for
1870 is what would be expected in the slow uphill course
of business between 1878 and 1880, while the next decade
opened with a revival which, with occasional backsets,
held good until 1893.

The total number of sulphuric-acid works reporting
at the census of 1900 was 127. Of these, 31 burned brim-
stone only, 79 burned pyrites only, while 17 reported
that they used both brimstone and pyrites.

BriiiiHtonc PlanU. — Seven brimstone-burning plants
made 66" acid, burning 18,042,072 pounds of brimstone
and producing 51,204,775 pounds of 66" acid, or an
average of 279 parts of 66^ acid (equivalent to 419 parts
of oO'^ acid) to 100 brimstone, the figures for each plant
running from 308 to 260 parts of acid. Thirteen brim-
stone plants, making 50- acid only, used 35,955,680
pounds of brimstone and produced 140,534,027 pounds
of 50"^ acid, an average of 391 parts of acid to 100 parts
of brimstone, the figures running from -H-6 to 321 parts
of acid for 100 parts of brimstone. Two works report-
ing, re.spectively, a yield of 321 and 334 parts, stated
that they were using a very low grade of brimstone,
which was obtained under advantageous conditions.
Taking the 20 works together and the whole product as
50^ acid, it is found that the grand average is 402 parts
of acid for each 100 parts of brimstone.

l\/rite>< Plants. — Nine pyrites plants, making 66°
acid only, consumed 248,026,399 pounds of pyrites and
produced 311,924,674 pounds of 66^^ acid, an average
of 133.8 part*; of acid (equivalent to 200.7 parts of 50^
acid), for 100 parts pyrites. Thirty pyrites plants,
making 50^- acid only, consumed 425,050,296 pounds of
pj-rites and produced 889,222,560 pounds of 50*^ acid,
an average of 209 acid to 100 pyrites, the figures run-
ning from 234 to 160 parts. The gi'and average for the
39 works is 206 acid to 100 pyrites.

The figure 160 is given by 3 works l)urniiig low grade
domestic pyrites, while the highest figure, 234 parts
acid, is furnished by a new model plant burning pyrites
with an average content of 50.05 per cent of sulphur
and using 1.26 parts of nitrate of soda to everj- 100
parts of pyrites. Other works give, per 100 pyrites,
224 acid, 1.66 niter; 213.4 acid, 2.13 niter, while a
large combination reports that it allows 2.5 pai-ts of
niter and expects a yield of 225 parts of 50^ acid. The
l)rimstone works show approximately a consumption
of 4.29 parts of niter per 100 brimstone. In considering
these figures, it must be remembered that the 66" acid
does not average more than 93 per cent of H^SO^, cor-
responding to 65.6- B. Similarly, the 50 acid runs
from 52^ to 48° B., and even lower, and the chamber
acid made and used in fertilizer works is usuallj- under

60'-'. The continued use of brimstone in this industry
in the United States is remarkable, as practically no
brim.stone acid is now made in England or on tlur con-
tinent of Europe.

Tht' C'oiiidct I'mceHH. — In 19fK), at the meeting of the
German Technical Chemists at Hanover, Clemens Wink-
ler, the founder of the contact proc;ess, as we now have
it, delivered an address entitled "The Development of
the Sulphuric Acid Industry During the Nineteenth
Century." In this paper, published in Zeitschrift fur
Angewandte Chemie, 1900, page 731, he gives a .shoi-t
review of the history and present stutus of the chamber
process, and then shows the lines he followed in his cele-
brated research upon contact action in the prfxluction
of sulphur trioxide, which he made public in 1875. He
then speaks of the subsequent development of this
process, and concludes \i\ impressively stating that the
contact process has already demonstrated its ability
to compete with and finally to supersede the chamber
process. The subject is so important that a summary
of this paper is given here, and, following it. an abstract
of the very valuable paper by Knietsch upon the devel-
opment of the contiict process in the works of the
Badische Anilin und Soda Fabrik to which Winkler
calls attention. This paper is very recent, having been
published in the "Berichte der Deutschen Chemischen
Gesellschaf t " for December, 19U1, and is so full of
valuable information that its presentation here, in ab-
stract, seems appropriate.

Winkler stated that the only acid known to the
ancients was vinegar, and that the first indication of the
recognition of any other acid is when Geber, in the
Eighth century, speaks of the "spirit" which can be
expelled from alum and which possesses sohent powers.
Albertus Magnus, Thirteenth centur\-, speaks of a
".spiritus vitrioli Roraani" which can only have been
sulphuric acid, while Basilius Valentinus, Fifteenth cen-
tury, describes its preparation not only from copperas,
but also by burning together sulphur and saltpeter,
pointing out verj' distinctly not only that sulphur, in
burning, produced some sulphuric acid, but also that
the yield is much increased if saltpeter is added.

Dornaeus, in 1570, descrited its properties accurately; Libavius,
1595, recognized tlie identity of the acids from different processes
of preparation; Angelus Sala, 161.3, pointed out the fact, which tiad
sunk into ol)livion since Basilius, that sulphuric acid can be made
by burning sulphur in moist vessels; after that time it was pre-
pare<i by the apothecaries in that way.'

The addition of saltpeter was introduced by Lefevre
and Lemeiy, 1666, and Ward, in London, 1740, began
to make sulphuric acid on a large scale in glass vessels.
The lead chamber was first used by Roebuck, of Bir-
mingham, who, in 174t>, erected such a chamber 6 feet
square. The first chamber erected in France was at
Rouen, in 1766. At this place, in 1774, De la Follie
introduced the important improvement of the intro-

1 Lunge: Sulphuric Acid and Alkali, 1891, Vol. I, page 7.

duction of steam into the chambers during the combus-
tion of the brimstone. In 1793 Clement and Desormes
showed that the chambei-s could be fed by a continuous
current of air, by which much saltpeter could be saved.
By this time the general principles of sulphuric-acid
making were established, and by the end of the century-
there were alread}^ six or eight works in Glasgow alone,
while the price of a kilogram (2.2 pounds), which, in
ITJrO, in German}', was about $1.12, sank in 1799 to 22
cents, and is now (1900) about three-fourths of a cent.

Lampadius (Grundriss d. tech. Chemie, Freiberg,
1815, p. 3) has given a description of a sulphuric-acid
works and the manner of operation at the beginning of
the Nineteenth century. From this it is learned that
a mixture of five parts of sulphur and one part of niter
was burned in successive charges in the lead chamber,
steam being admitted at the same time and air being
let in when deemed necessary. The acid obtained
was weak and had to be concentrated in glass retorts
up to about 1.80 sp. gr., while the yield was less than
half of what would be obtained at present.

The proper construction of lead chambers involved
great difliculties, it being almost impossible to make
them gas-tight, until Debassyns de Richemont invented
autogenic soldering. The chamber described by Lam-
padius contained about 300 cubic meters (10,594 cubic
feet), but the dimensions have been increased until now
the biggest chambers contain 4,000 to 5,000 cubic meters
(140,000 to 176,000 cubic feet). The last figures appear
to be too large, and the present practice is not to in-
crease the chamber space, but to supplement the sur-
face by means of other devices, such as the Lunge-
Rohrmann plates.

Finallj^ in the earlier years of the Nineteenth century,
the chamber process became a continuously working
one, and thus was enabled to be what it now is, the
foundation of the chemical industry and the measure
of its extent. Improvements rapidly followed. The
investigations of Gay-Lussac, on the recovery of the
nitrogen oxides from the escaping gases, have given us
the tower which bears his name, while the form of
tower invented by Glover furnishes an efficient deni-
trator for the acid flowing from the Gay-Lussac tower.
The simultaneous use of these two towers is a necessitj^
in any modern, rationally managed establishment.

The use of pyrites, in place of brimstone, was first in-
troduced in 1836, on a manufacturing scale, l>y AVehrle,
in Nussbaum, near Vienna, and by Brem, in Bohemia.
In 1862, Spanish jjyrites began to be used in p]ngland,
and by 1868 the- use of brimstone in English works had
almost entirely ceased, and now very little brimstone is
used in any country of Europe for the manufacture of
sulphuric acid, while the consumptio!i in the United
States for this purpose is still quite large, aiuounting,
in the census year 1900, to 128,427,000 pounds, or
about one-tenth of the total weight of the pyi'ites so
used.

Attempts to use the roaster gases from smelting
works were made in 1S56-1S5S, and in 1859 a set of
chambers using such gases was started at Oker. At
present the smelting works in Germany produce (1899)
186,000 tons of H^SO,, about 22 per cent of the total
production. As elsewhere, the principal use of this
acid is in the manufacture of superphosphate, of which
500,000 tons were made in Germany in 1899.

The methods of concentration of the weaker acids
have been greatly improved, the increasing cost of
platinum making it necessary to exercise the greatest
economy. Platinum, which in 1870 cost about $1.50 per
kilogram, cost in 1900 over $700 per kilogram, and the
price is now little less than that of gold. Herteus, in
1891, introduced the use of gold-plated platinum stills,
which were found to be a great improvement.

Fuming sulphuric acid, or Nordhausen acid, as it is
also called, is a mixture of sulphur trioxide (or sul-
phuric anhydride), with a varying proportion of mono-
hydrated sulphuric acid. When the relation is about one
part of SO3, to one jjart of H^SO,, it is solid at ordinary
tenipei'atures, melting at 35^ C, and is the '"solid sul-
phuric acid" of the trade. As it is obtained by heating
copperas, alum, or other metallic sulphates, it was the
first foi'm of sulphuric acid known, and the Pilsen acid
works are already mentioned in 1526. This industry
was desti'oycd during the Thirty Years War, but was
revived at Nordhausen. In 1778 Starck reestablished
the industry' in Bohemia, where, on account of the
cheapness of labor and of the necessary vitriol stone,
his successors enjoyed a practical monopoly of this sub-
stance, until the increasing demand for it, in the manu-
facture of alizarin, and for many other purposes, led to
researches which have given methods by which it can
])e made far more cheaply than by the distillation of
vitriol stone, since when this is used only small charges
can be worked, because the larger the charge, the higher
the heat required, and the greater the loss of acid
through the consequent splitting up of sulphur trioxide
into sulphur dioxide and oxygen.

That these two gases could be made to recombine by
the contact action of platinum and other substances, had
long been known and methods of utilization proposed,
but nothing of importance had been accomplished until
Clemens Winkler published, in 1875, the results of his
researches. In the beginning of his work, Winkler
heated the vitriol stone in much larger quantities, with-
out regard to the decomposition of the trioxides, passed
the gases over platinized asbestos, thus recomtnning
the SOj and O, and then absorbed the trioxide in strong
sulphuric acid. The results were very satisfactory,
but it was necessary to find a material cheapei- than the
vitriol stone. As the course of the work indicated that,
for the best results, the SOj and O should be in stochi-
ometrical proportions, sulphuric acid was used, be-
cause when heated sufticientlv high it breaks up thus:
H,S0i=S03+0+H,0.

The water vapor was easily removed and the resid-
ual fjuscs roiniiinod in the oxact proportion needed.

Tiie nood of a still clieaper material than sulphurio
acid becoming manifest, Winkler began to experiment
with the roaster gases of the Freiberg Smelting Works,
and in time it was found that in this way two-thirds up
to three-fourths of the SO, in these gases could be con-
verted into SO,. Still there were many difficulties in
tlie way of commercial success, such as purification of
the gases, etc., so that Winkler was unable to publish
his further results for many years.

In the meantime the matter was taken uj) by the
Badische Anilin und Soda Fabrik at Ludwigshafen on
the Rhine, and after years of unwearied scientific in-
vestigation, in which no expense was spared, this great
corporation has succeeded in solving the pi'oblem and
has reaped a rich pecuniary reward.

What the commercial success of the contact process
means for the future of industrial chemistry njay best
be expressed in the words of Winkler, who, having
stated that at Ludwigshafen the new process can com-
pete with the lead -chamber acid, goes on to say:
"Therefore we can anticipate that, in no distant time,
the lead chambers of to-day will be dispensed with, a
condition amounting to a complete revolution in the
domain of sulphuric-acid manufacture." Such a state-
ment from so authoritative a source is a sufficient war-
rant for the presentation in this place of the following
abstract of Knietsch's paper:

TUK CONTACT PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF
SULPHURIC ACID.'

I. Historical. — The production of sulphuric acid is a
matter of the greatest importance, as it is not only the
foundation of the inorganic heavy -chemical industry and
is used for many other pui-poses, but also has lately be-
come a most impoitsmt material in the organic dyc-stufi
industry, especially in the production of alizarine colors
and of synthetic indigo. The contact process is causing
a complete revolution in the methods of manufacture of
sulphuric acid; hence an account of its historical devel-
opment and present status should be of great interest.
The historical development of this process may be di-
vided into four periods.

First period : Phillips, in 1831, discovered the catalytic
action of platinum in hastening the union of SO2 and O
to form SO3.

Second period: Wohler and Mahla, in 1852, showed
that many other substances besides platinum possess
catalytic properties, and explained the character and
course of the reaction.

Third period: Winkler used definite gas mixtures for
the production of sulphuric anhydride, as it was then
considered that only in this way could good quantitative
yields be obtained.

Fourth period, the present one, is noted by the suc-
cessful use of the furnace gases directly.

' R. Knietsch, Ber. d. d. Gesell, 1901, page 4069.

The investigations of the third period were directed
toward the production of fuming suljjhuric acid, which
was then very expensive, while the investigations of
the first and second periods had the same end as the
work of the present time, that is, the replacement of
the chamber process b}' improved methods.

The catalytic action of platinum was discovered by
Humphry Davy in .January, 1818, who showed that
platinum wire, when warmed and then introduced into
a mixture of oxygen (or air) with 11, CO, ethylene, or
cyanogen, became incandescent, and that the gas mix-
ture oxidized, usually gradually, but often rapidly.

Edmund Davy, in 1830, discovered that finely divided
precipitated platinum, when moistened with alcohol
and exposed to the air, becomes incandescent and the
alcohol burns.

Doebcreincr, in 1822, found that finely divided plati-
num, obtained by heating ammonio-platinic chloride,
acted in the same maimer, and, in 1824, that such plati-
num could ignite a stream of hydrogen, when this im-
pinged upon it in contact with air, and utilized this
discovery in his celebi-ated "lighting machine."

The honor of having first utilized this catalytic action,
for the production of sulphur trioxide, is due to Pere-
grine Phillips of Bristol, England, who, in 1831, took
out an English patent for his discovery, and, in 1832,
Doebereiner and Magnus each confirmed the obser-
vations of Phillips. Although this discovery attracted
much attention, nothing practical followed until 18-t8,
when Schneider exhibited a working model of an appa-
ratus, which produced sulphuric acid through the contact
action of a specially prepared pumice. This alleged
discovery was presented with great claims, but never
was able to show a success, although wonderful results
were confidently predicted. The same may be said of
the method of Richard Laming, who also used a contact
mass of pumice, prepared by boiling it in concentrated
sulphuric acid, washing it in ammoniacal water, diying,
and then impregnating it with about 1 per cent of
manganese dioxide, finishing bj' heating the mass in a
retort to 600° and allowing it to cool out of contact
with the air. Here we note for the first time, the use
of another contact substance which, like platinum, can
exist in various grades of oxidation, namely, manganese.

Especially noteworthj- in this connection it, the English
patent of Jullion, 1846, because here, for the first time,
the use of platinized asbestus as a contact mass is
claimed. In 1819, Blondeau passed a current of a mix-
ture of sulphur dioxide, steam, and air through a highly
heated tube containing ferruginous, argillaceous sand
and obtained sulphuric acid, while, in 18o2, Wohler and
Mahla found that oxides of iron, copper, and chrome
also work catalytically upon a mixture of SO., and O, a
mixture of cupric and chromic oxides being especially
efficacious. These investigators gave, moreover, a cor-
rect explanation of this catalytic action; they found,
namel}', that cupric and ferric oxide, when heated in a
current of sulphur dioxide free from oxygen, became

reduced to cuprous and fen'oso-ferric oxides with
.simultaneous formation of sulphuric acid which, how-
ever, ceased as soon as the reduction of the oxides was
completed. On the other hand, chromic oxide, under
similar conditions, remained entirely unaltered and no
sulphuric acid was produced, while metallic copper, in
spongy form, exerts no action upon a mixture of 2 vol.
SO2 + 1 vol. O at ordinary temperatures, but, when
heated, cupric oxide is first formed, and then sulphuric
acid.

They also call attention to the fact that this union of
SO., and O can take place in the complete absence of
Hfi.

Upon these important discoveries are based the later
researches of Lunge and others upon the catalytic ac-
tion of pyrites cinder in causing the formation of SO3.
Quartz has also been recommended for this purpose, as
have also platinized asbestus, platinized pumice, and
even platinized clay.

Hundt, 1854, passed the 'hot roa.ster gas through a
flue, filled with quartz fragments and heated by the gas,
expecting to convert the greater part of the SOj into
sulphuric acid with further treatment of the residue.
The work of Schmersahl and Bouk, 1855. followed the
same lines, as did aLso the method of Henry Deacon,
which was patented in 1871, and may be considered as
closing the second period.

So far, not onlj^ had all attempts to supersede the
chamber process failed, but also no j^ractical method for
the production of fuming sulphuric acid had been de-
vised. In 1875, Clemens Winkler published his cele-
brated researches upon the formation of sulphuric
anhydride, for which industrial chemistry must always
be greatly indebted to him, as originating successful
methods for the economical production of the fuming
sulphuric acid for which, as it has become cheaper,
many new uses have been discovered.

Winkler concluded, as a result of his experiments,
that the SO^ and O should alwaj's be present in the
molecular proportion of 2:1, any excess of either gas
having a deleterious influence upon the completeness of
the reaction, and he obtained this desired proportion by
simply breaking up ordinary hydrated sulphuric acid
into HjO, SO2, and O, removing the H^O, and then
recombining the SO^ and O by means of appropriate
contact substances, the preparation of which he greatly
improved by utilizing the reducing action of formic
acid. All subsequent work in this branch continued to
follow the lines laid down by Winkler; hence, while
little j)rogress was made toward superseding the lead
chamber, the manufacture of fuming sulphuric acid
became highlj^ developed.

II. KnieUcKs Work — Purijicatimi of the Gas. — This
work was undertaken by the Badische Anilin und Soda-
Fabrik to determine if a complete conversion of the
SOj in roaster gas was as practically feasible as it is
theoretically possible. .

It is well known that the outgoing gases of the cham-
ber process still contain C volume per cent of oxygen,
and that the roaster gas emplo^-ed in the contact work
contained a similar excess. Hence it was diificult to
understand why, in the latter process, the yields were
not nearer that of the former.

Experiments showed that when pure SO^ was used
the yield was close to the theoretical, even when a very
large excess of O was jjresent, which was contrary to
the accepted views of W' inkier.

When roaster gas was used in laboratory experiments,
it was found that when this was carefully cooled, washed
with sulphuric acid, and completely purified before it
was allowed to enter the catalytic tube, the results were
very satisfactory, nor could any diminution of the effi-
ciency' of the contact mass be noted even after several
days' use. It was therefore supposed that the problem
had been solved, and arrangements were made to carry
on the process on full working scale.

It was, however, soon found that in practice the con-
tact mass gradually lost all of its efficiency, no matter
how carefully the gases were cooled and purified. Ex-
tended laboratory investigations were undertaken to
determine the cause of this inefficiency, and it was ulti-
mately discovered that there are substances which, when
present in the gas, even in excessively small quantities,
injure the catalytic properties of platinum to an extraor-
dinary degree. Of all of the substances which may be
found in roaster gas, arsenic is by far the most dele-
terious, next mercury, while Sb, Bi, Pb, Fe, Zn, etc.,
are injurious onh' so far as they may coat the contact
mass.

It was also found that as the white cloud of sulphuric
acid which was present in the gas contained arsenic, the
complete removal of this was necessarv. although such
removal had always been considered an impossibility.
This was, however, finally accomplished after an enor-
mous expenditure of time, labor, and money, so that,
in the end, b}- extended washing and filtration, the
gases were obtained in a condition absolutely free from
all impurities. (D. R. P. 113933, July 22, 1S9S.)

Slow cooling of the gas was found to be absolutely
necessary as a preliminary to its purification. It is a
fact, the cause of which is not yet clearly known, that
the removal of the white cloud is rendered far more
difficult if the gas is rapidly cooled.

To insure slow cooling, a system of iron tubes was
u.sed because it was supposed that, as the sulphuric acid
in the gas was in a so highly concentrated condition,
any action upon the metal would yield SOo only. It
was now found that although the contact mass remained
active for a much longer period, it still gradually lost
its power, no matter how carefully the gas was purified.
The cause of this was ultimately found to l)e a gas con-
taining arsenic, probably hydrogen arsenide, produced
by the action of the acid upon the iron by which hydro-
gen was evolved, although the formation of this gas

under such conditions had always been considered im-
possible. As soon as the cooling apparatus was so
arrungod that no condensed acid could attack the iron,
the trouble from tliis source entirely ceased.

A final difficulty occurred in the occa.sional formation
of a faint cloud of vmburiit sulphur which contained
arsenic. Tiu? cure for this was found to be a proper
mixing of the hot gases, thus insuring complete com-
bustion, and this mixing wasetFected l)y means of steam,
which is also benelicial, by diluting the strong sulphuric
acid present in the gas, so that it did not condense in the
iron pipes of the first portion of the cooling apparatus,
and attack them; when condensing in the lead pipes of
the remainder of the apparatus, the acid was too weak to
injure the lead. The use of steam also prevented the
formation of hanl dust crusts, which tend to stop up the
pipes.

III. Cooling of the Gases. — The next important ele-
ment in the successful carrying out of the contact pro-
cess is the effective and economical utilization of the
heat dev^eloped by the reaction which is exothermic.
s6,+0=S0,-f 22600 cal.

The utilization of this heat had been suggested by
Lunge, but only in the case of the use of a mixture of
pure SOo and air, containing about 25 per cent of the
former. On the other hand, it was universally consid-
ered that it was necessaiy to employ extra heat when
the much weaker roaster gases are to be treated.
Hence the apparatus used in this work was furnished
with special heating arrangements so that the tubes
could be kept at red heat, the tubes being ai-ranged
vertically like those of an upright boiler. Small, ver-
tical tubes arc much supei-ior to the larger, horizontal
ones, originally employed, as economizing the expen-
sive platinized asl)estus and insuring a more certain
contact of the gases with the mass. The proper filling
of the tubes with the asbestus is a matter of impor-
tance; it must be so done that no portion of the gas can
pass through a tube without coming in contact with the
mass, while the mass must not offer much resistance to
the piissage of the gas. Owing to the nature of the
asbestus, this latter difficulty is likely to occur, but can
be avoided by the simple device of packing the asbestus
in successive layers, separated by perforated diaphragms
sliding upon a central rod, but kept apart at regular
intervals. In this wa\^ all of the tubes can be similarly
and evenly packed.

As soon as this apparatus was started in the ordinary
way at low red heat, the sui-prising discovei-y was made
that not only was the output of acid increased, but that
the strength of the gas current could be made greater
when the tubes, instead of being heated artificially,
were, on the contrarv, cooled by the admission of cold
air. This discovery, a contradiction of what had been
considered correct practice, gave a rational method of
work; i. e., the apparatus uuist be systematically cooled
to obtain the maximum effect and production. As now

operated, the tubes are coolc<l by the cold, purified
gases, which thi's become heated to the proper tem|>er-
ature for the reaction. In this way the following ad-
vantages are gained:

First. Overheating of the apparatus is avoided, and
thus a yield of 'J6 per cent — 98 per cent of the theoret-
ical— is ol)tained.

Second. The iron parts of the apparatus are pro-
tected by this cooler working, and are therefore more
durable.

Third. The contact mass does not become overheated
and its efficiency remains unimpaired.

Fourth. The absolute efficiency of the contact mass,
and of the entire apparatus, is greatly increased fjecause
the rapidity of the gas stream can be increased, and the
contact mass be maintained at the most efficient tem-
perature.

Another important discovery is that the reaction
proceeds at atmospheric pressure, since it was formerly
supposed that compression of the gases was necessary
to overcome the hindrance of the indifferent gases pres-
ent. In fact, if the other conditions are right the
reaction proceeds almost quantitsitively at atmospheric
pressure. This is very important since, if this method
is to compete with the chamber process, every unneces-
sary expense must be avoided.

IV. Ahsorptiim of the Produced Anhydride. — The
affinity of sulphuric anhydride for water is greater
than for concentrated sulphuric acid, as shown by the
relative amount of heat developed during the absolu-
tion; hence it might be expected that the easiest and
most complete absorption of anhydride from the con-
tact process would be eflected by the use of water. It
is found, however, that oil of vitriol containing 97-99
per cent of H^SO, js much more efiective than either
water or sulphuric acid of any other strength. The
absorbing power of the acid at this degree of concen-
tration is so great that a single absorption vessel is suf-
ficient for the remoxal of the SO, from a ver}' rapid
current of gas, provided that the strength of the acid
be kept uniformly between the above limits by a steady
inflow of water or weak acid, and a proportional outflow
of the excess of strong acid thus produced.

Sulphuric acid, at this particular degree of concen-
tration, possesses certain marked qualities. Its boiling
point is a maximum, so that if a weaker acid is evapo-
rated, it loses water or weak acid until the residue
attains a strength of 98.83 per cent HjSO„ at which
point it distills without further change at a constant
temperature of about ZZO^. Similarly, a stronger acid
gives ofl' anhydride until this constant strength is
reached. Again, at this particular degree, the vapor
pressure is at its minimum, the specific gravity is at
the maxinmm, the electrical resistance suddenly rises,
while the action on iron decreases considerably.

When fuming sulphuric acid is to be made, one or
more absorption cells must precede the regular appa-

ratus. For these, cast iron, which is quite suitable as
the material for the other vessel, liecomes unavailable,
because, although it is onh* slowly attacked, it, what is
worse, becomes fragile and even explodes. This ap-
pears to be due to the fuming acid diffusing into the
ii"on and then breaking up into SOj and H^S, thus
causing a condition of internal stress. Wrought iron
is attacked by fuming acid containing less than 27 per
cent of SO3, but when the contents of anhydride
exceeds this, the acid has practically no action upon
wrought iron, and vessels of this material can be used
for j-ears without sensible corrosion.

V. Theory of the Contact Process. — The results of
many experiments showing the influence upon the re-
action of variations in the temperature, the composi-
tion of the gases, the rate of flow (or the proportion of
contact substance over which the gas passes) are given
in the form of curves, and discussed, j'ielding the fol-
lowing results:

1. Complete conversion of the SO^ into SO3 occurs
only when there is at least twice as much oxygen pres-
ent as the reaction formula indicates. When using the
gas obtained from the roasting of pyrites, and which
contains about 7 vol. per cent of SO2, 10 vol. per cent
of O, and 83 vol. per cent of nitrogen, the nitrogen is
absolutelj' without influence upon the reaction, except
as diluting the gas and reducing the output.

2. The completeness of the reaction depends solely
upon the temperature and not upon the nature of the
contact substance. The reaction begins at about 200^.
As the temperature rises, so does the degree of conver-
sion, until, at about -100^, a nearly complete (98 to 99 per
cent) conversion of the SO^ is feasible. Any further
rise in temperature is injurious, the degree of conver-
sion falling .so that at about 700° only about 60 per cent
can be converted, while at about 900° the reaction
ceases entirclj'.

3. The nature of the contact substance has no influ-
ence upon the completeness of the reaction, but, for
practical results, a substance must bo employed which
shows a high degree of efliciencj' at the proper tempera-
ture of 400°. Substances, which require a higher
temperature to develop their greatest efficiency, are
evidently unsuited, since, as shown above, the degree
of conversion falls with the rise in temperature. Up
to the present time only one substance fulfilling the
necessary conditions is known, and that is platinum.
None of the other metals of the platinum group ap-
proaches it in eflnciency.

This valuable paper concludes with a series of tables,
giving the results of exhaustive sets of determinations
of the following properties of sulphuric acid, and of
fuming sulphuric acid of various strengths from 1 to
100 per cent of SO3:

1. Melting point. 2. Specific gravity. 3. Specific
heat. 4. Heat of solution. 5. Electrical resistance.
6. Action upon iron. 7. Boiling point. 8. Vapor pres-

sure. 9. Viscosity. 10. Capillarity. 11. Table giv-
ing the percentage of free SO3 in a fuming sulphuric
acid when the total contents of SO3 is known.

Production of Sulphur Trioxidc. — The growth and
pi'esent magnitude of the operations of this process in
the works of the Badische Anilin-und-Soda-Fabrik are
shown by the following figures:

Sulphur trioxide produced in — Tons.

1888 18,500

1894 39,000

1899 89,000

1900 116,000

It will be seen from the foregoing, that this process
has long passed the experimental stage, and now that the
general conditions of successful operation are known,
its speed}' adoption in this country' is to be expected.
The advantages are many: First, no expense of con-
struction and maintenance of the entire chamber S3's-
tem, including the Gay-Lussac and Glover towers and
the s-team and niter plant. Second, no expense for niter
and for the sulphuric acid used therewith; although the
resulting niter cake can be utilized, it is rarely a desir-
able product. Third, the acid produced is pure, strong
oil of vitriol, requiring no concentration for sale or
use. Concentration of chamber acid to high strengths
requires the use of platinum stills, which thereby lose
in weight, the dissolved platinum being irrevocably lost.
The rate of loss is much reduced by previous purifica-
tion of the acid, but is alwaj's a considerable item of
cost. Fourth, the contact acid is also free from arsenic,
lead, or iron salts. The fundaiuental difference in the
character of the reactions in the chamber process and
of those in the contact method indicates the possibility
of substantial improvements in the methods of roasting.
Fifth, although the 50 degree acid, as it comes from the
chambers, is desirable for many purposes— for example,
in making superphosphates — it is held by some authori-
ties that it can be made more cheaply by diluting the
strong acid with the needed proportion of cold water,
than l)y introducing this water into the chambers in the
form of steam. This, however, is denied b}- others, and
it is probable that the chamber process will continue to
exist, though in a more restricted field.

On the other hand, this new process appears to require
a well planned and carefullj- managed sj'stem of purifi-
cation for the roaster gases, and will need, for its suc-
cessful operation, a higher order of chemical engineer-
ing skill than has usuallj- been deemed necessary for the
operation of. an acid plant. This, however, should
hardly be considered an ol)stacle in this countiy, where
all other branches of engineering manufacture have
reached such a height, mainh- because the works have
demanded and made liberal use of the highest order
of trained abilit}', and have not hesitated to "scrap"
expensive plant where it failed to give satisfactory
results. In this connection the Badische Anilin-und-
Soda-Fabrik is an instructive example. Its chemical

force numbers over 100 men, many of whom are engaged
solely upon researches, the results of which, when prom-
isinjj. are at once jjiit into operation on a sufficiently
larffe scale to (li'terminc tiieir practical \alue. That
such a course pays in a strict business sense is shown
l)y the enormous dividends paid by this company, and
i)y tlie practical monopoly wiiich it has loiiiJ- maintained
in certain lines, simply i)ecause it has been a little ahead
of its competitors in knowing just how a given thing
should ln> done, and then at once protecting the discov-
ery l)y patents.

In addition to siilpliurii' acid, reports have been re-
ceived regarding the production of the acids enumerated
in the following table:

ACIDS, OTHER THAN SULPHURIC, BY KIND, QUANTITY,
AND VALUE: 1900.

KIND.

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments.

Quaiillty.

Value.

Nitric

34
9

31
3

12
3
4
5
3

Poiindt,
30.961,501

42.:W1.819

116,848,001

2,384,».»

26, 600, .565

3,886.382

2,677,004

282,515

141,291

$1,454,909

Mixed

1,111.2.58

Muriatic

1 , 020. .574

198,212

Acetic

426, 892

I>ictic and oitiic

33.5, 297

781,603

Tannic .

135, 662

Gallic

20,275

It is to be understood that the quantities and values
given in this table represent only the acids .sold as such,
or produced for sale in the establishments, for the actual
production, in many cases, is much greater than that
given above. Thus the first item on the list, nitric
acid, is used in the making of the "mixed acids," which
is the second item on the list. This mixed acid is not
only manufactured in the acid factories and sold to ex-
plosive works, to manufactuiers of pyroxjdin for u.se
in the making of pla.stics and of varni.shes, and to other
manufacturers, but many of the larger works now make
the nitric acid which they consume in this manner.
There is thus made and consumed more nitric acid than
is sold as such, the production as reported amounting
to (i2,473,29.5 pounds, which is probablv less than the
total amount actually made for use and .sale. Theoret-
ically, 74.13 parts of nitric acid monohydrate can be
made from 100 parts of pure .sodium nitrate, but in
practice, only 95 per cent of this is conden.sed, while 5
per cent passes to the towers. From this, then, there
would he required 43,8-11 tons of nitrate of soda and
47,348 tons of sulphuric acid to produce the above-
given quantity of nitric acid, and there would result as
a by-product 5ii,609 tons of niter cake. It is to be
borne in mind that nitric acids of various degrees of
strength, ranging from single aquafortis of .specific
gravitv 1.22, and doul)le aquiifortis of specific gravity
1.30, to the .strongest nitric of 1.50 .specific gravity, and
red fuming of 1.60 specific gravitj- are to be found in
the market, and that no attempt has been made to sepa-

rate them as to fpiantity, or to reduce them to u cf)m-
mon basis, so that the data must l»e regarded as of aver-
age value.

Nitric acid was manufactured at Philadelphia in 1834
by Carter & 8cattergood. The most notable recent ad-
vance made in its manufacture is in the form of appa-
ratus employed, which is du(^ to Edward Hart and Osciir
Guttman. It is used in the manufacture of nitrates
like silver nitrate, or nitrites like sodium nitrite: in
making "mixed acids" and aqua regia; in making
nitrosubstitution compounds, like nitrobenzene, nitro-
naphthalene, and picric acid; organic nitrates, such as
gun cotton and nitroglycerin; as an oxidizing agent in
many chemical proces.ses; and for the etching of metals.

By "mixed acids" is meant mixtures of nitric and
sulphuric acids which are employed in "nitrating"
organic sub.stJinces such as glycerin, cellulose, and car-
bolic acid. The commex'cial use of such a mixture
began with the manufacture of nitrobenzene and picric
acid, but it received its greatest impetus about 1862
when the commercial manufacture of nitroglycerin be-
gan. Originally the users of this mixed acid purchased
the sulphuric and nitric acids and mixed them in the
desired proportions for u.se, the acids being trans-
poi'ted in separate carbo3's of glass. These not infre-
quently became broken during transportation, smd as
the nitric acid rapidly reacts with and "fires" such
organic matter as is used as packing for carbons, its
tnuisportation gave rise to man}- seiious accidents, which
led to restrictive legislation. It is not known to whom
the credit is due for the discovery- that mixed acids of
the highest concentration did not act upon iron, but for
upward of twenty years manufactuiers have been mak-
ing the desired mixtures at the acid woi'ks and .shipping
them in iron drums, old glycerin drums having been
first employed. With the increase in the production in
works, attention has naturallj' been given by chemists
to the utilization of the residues, and large economies
have resulted from the regaining of the "spent acids"
by which the sulphuric acid has been obtained of a
.strength sufficient for reuse in the ordinary course of
manufacture, and the nitric acid, though recovered in
a weak state, has been of value in other arts.

Owing to the necessity of having concentrated nitric
acid to mix with this regained sulphuric acid, and to the
fact that the transportation charges on nitric acid are
A'ery high, and the necessary regulations governing its
tran.sportation are vexatious to the consumers, many
of the larger establishments have erected nitric-acid
plants. In considering the magnitude of this industry
there is to be noted not only the mixed acid sold as
such, 42,368,819 pounds, the mixed acid produced and
consumed in chemical works, 8,902,371 pounds, and the
mixed acid reported produced and consumed in explo-
sive works, 12,000,000 pounds, making in all 63,271,190
pounds, but there is also to be taken into account this
repeated reuse of the acid. From the product* re-
ported of all kinds, nitroglycerin and dj-namite: gun-

cotton; pyroxylin for varnishes, for smokeless powder,
for plastics, and for photography; and the nitro-
substitution compounds, it is safe to say that 65,000
tons of mixed acids were employed during the year
1899-1900.

Hydrochloric acid, commercially known as muriatic
acid, is made by acting on common salt with sulphuric
acid. The ordinar\' muriatic acid of commerce is an
aqueous solution containing about -±0 per cent by weight
of dry hydrogen chloride. For the amount of hydro-
chloric acid reported on this standard there would be
required for its production 37,000 tons of common salt
and 39,000 tons of sulphuric acid of 60^ Baume, and
there would be obtained in addition to the muriatic acid
47,U00 tons of salt cake, which consists of sodium sul-
phate, together with some undecomposed common salt,
and an excess of sulphuric acid. A new development
in this trade is in the use of wooden barrels as contain-
ers in place of the glass carboys in which it was for-
merly transported.

Carter & Scattergood manufactured muriatic acid in
Philadelphia in 1834, and Charles Lennig began its
manufacture b}' modern methods in Philadelphia in
1869. Hj^drochloric acid is used in the preparation of
many organic and inorganic chlorides. Mixed with
nitric acid it forms aqua regia, which is used in dis-
solving the precious metals. It has largely been used
as a source of chlorine in the manufacture of bleaching
powder and potassium chlorate. It is used in the
manufacture of acetic acid and gelatin, in the manu-
facture of soda, and in a multitude of minor arts. The
salt cake is used in the Le Blanc process for the manu-
facture of soda, for glass making, for ultramarine, in
dyeing and coloring, and for the production of Glauber's
salts.

Acetic acid as treated of under "chemicals" does not
include vinegar, which is a very dilute acetic acid made
largely by fermentation, but it covers such acid as is
produced by chemical action from acetates, principally
the calcium and sodium acetates. Calcium acetate is
obtained in the destructive distillation of wood. The
acetic acid is obtained from it by treatment with h\'dro-
chloric acid and distillation. This may be purified by
rectification with potassium dichroniate. A better
product is obtained by converting the acid into a sodium
salt and evaporating to dr^^ness to destroy tarry matters
and then distilling with hydrochloric or sulphuric acids.

Acetic acid, varying in strength from 28 per cent to
90 per cent, is sent to the market in barrels holding
on an average 425 pounds. Acetic acid is used in the
preparation of metallic acetates, which are extensively
used in dyeing and printing; or of organic acetates,
such as ethyl and amyl acetates, which are used as
solvents and flavors; in the manufacture of white lead;
and the preparation of organic compounds. As an
example of its use Lachman' states that in the prepa-
ration of the chloracctic acid used by the Badische
Anilin-und Soda-Fabrik in the manufacture of synthetic
indigo in 1900 there were used 4,500,000 pounds of
glacial acetic acid, requiring 26,000 cords of wood for
its production.

Lactic acid, citric acid, and tartaric acids are used in
dyeing and in calico printing. Lactic acid is prepared
by fermenting a sugar solution by means of certain
bacteria, neutralizing the acid with calcium carbonate,
and decomposing the calcium lactate thus formed with
sulphuric acid. Lactic acid was manufactured by the
Aver}' Chemical Company at Littleton, Mass., in 1882.

Citric acid occurs in the free state in the juices of all
the plants of the genus CUrm. such as limes, lemons,
and sour oranges, (iood lemons yield about 5^ per
cent of the cr3\stallized acid. It is obtained by neutral-
izing the juice of the fruit with chalk and decompos-
ing the resulting calcium citrate with an equivalent
amount of sulphuric acid. This acid was manufactured
by Carter & Scattergood at Philadelphia in 1834.

Tartaric acid occurs free or combined in many plants,
but the only source from which it is commercially ob-
tained is the grape. During the fermentation of grape
juice, as the alcohol increases in quantity the calcium
and potassium tartrates present in the juice are pre-
cipitated out, together with a quantity of organic color-
ing matter, forming what is known as argols. After
purification it is treated with chalk and calcium sulphate
to convert it into calcium tartrate, and this when de-
composed with sulphuric acid yields free tartaric acid.
This acid was manufactured by Carter & Scattergood
in Philadelphia in 1834.

The foreign commerce in acids is exhibited in the
following tables, compiled from the publications of the
Bureau of Statistics, of the United States Treasury
Department:

'J. Am. Cliem. Soc, vol. 23, page 912: 1901.

IMPORTS FOR CONSUMPTION DURING THE YEARS ENDING JUNE 30, 1891-1900.

'SULPIIUBIC ACID
OR OIL OP VIT-
RIOL (M. E. 8,).

>8CLPHCRIC ACID.

BORACIC ACID.

CHROMIC ACID.

CHROMIC AND LAC-
TIC ACID.

YEAK.

Pound*.

Value.

Pounds.

Volnc.

Commercial.

Pure.

All kinds.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounda.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

1891

189'2

16,377

8,277

634

17,068

12,874

86,796

8,200
26,350
40,176
M,9ii

1886

478

406

188
475
43
786
1,874
972

162.093

$7,975

89,894

$2,906

475,378

701,628
771,776
292,990
926,164
85.5,769
548,603

$30,138

89,418
40,568
19,282
42,066
21,899
19,494
46,265
66,428
83,626

/ ,j--

$1,5871
166
156
609
824
707
409
430
906

8,786

8,736
400

7,469
48,759
69,729

2,726

$339

1,033

461

1,606

4,074

\ 606
426
8,318
8,048
4,461
2,440
2,708
6,720

1894 .-..

189t>

1S9S

134,707

4,a53

244,078
436,968
466,879

7,994
14,308
17,467

64,066
28, MR
84.741

•4 m

1,843

1900

8,044

CITBIC

ACID.

TARTARIC ACID.

OXALIC ACID.

SAUCYLIC ACID.

ACID, TANNIC OR
TANNIN.

ALL oTH,BB Aana.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

45,197
80,034
13,315
5,502
8,895
39, 671
73,133
4,323
65,190
60,364

$15,482

27, 461

4,633

1,810

2,480

12,521

18,158

1,108

16,669

14,213

1,511
10

130
113

$468

2,743,222
2,209,940
2,464,443
2,783.876
2,889,613
3,164,969
3,602,124
3,747,011
3,981,768
4.990.123

$200, .595
150, .529
143,194
1.59,026
189, .506
219,630
246,200
242, 276
246,027
275,747

659
564
1,443
794
1,600
1,745
3,144
2,335
3,697
1,416

$239 1

216

597

287

597

681
1,296

927
1,371

671

1,350,710
1,024,680
686,677
836,216
1,798,417
1,027,2*5
3,040,325

$380,064

1892

347, 510

1893 '. . .

260,027
252, 332
193,974
335,354
616,187
92,943
185,368
240,687

8264,022

231.946

140,197

138, 013

201,980

28,688

67,192

89.175

175,637

1894

134,665

1895

355 1 88
212 1 66
225 i 71
456 ' 128
23,298 i 6,737
954 1 252

228,480

1896

240,522

1897

223,458

1898

4.5.265

1899 1

58.428

1900

56,826

1 From the value given this would appear to be fuming sulphuric acid.

Group II. — Soda Products.

The great increase in this branch noted in the Census
report for 1890 has continued during the past decade.
The number of establi.shments making soda products as
the main part or as a subsidiary of tlieir business has
increased from 32 to 50, while the products have in-
creased as shown in the following table. To these fig-
ures for 1900 mu.st be added "other soda products," not
otherwise specified, produced by these works and valued
at$143,4:32, and also 11,756,000 pounds of borax, valued
at $541,160, made by seven borax works. These items
were not included in the report for 1890 and are there-
fore not taken into the comparison. Where the figures
of this table show an increase over the figures for the
same items in other tables of this census, the difference
is due to the inclusion here of all such products made by
works belonging to other groups, for example, the
caustic soda produced by electrolysis, which is included
in the products of that group and not .separately re-
poi'ted. This table shows the total actual production of
the United States for the census year from all sources;
and while the figures differ, there is no discrepancy.

SODA PRODUCTS,

BY QUANTITY AND VALUE, 1890 AND
1900.

1900

1890

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Total

1,279,082,000

$10,237,944

388,124,376

$6,482,400

Soda ash

781,306,000 4,859,666
126,498,000 876,243
187,712,000 1 1 332,765
233 668 000 1 3 170 'Mtfl

94,801,200
144,641,705
60,678,760
33,002,720

1,179,720

1,681,766

2,009,800

661 114

Sal soda

Bicarbonate of soda

Caustic soda

The decrea.se in the production of sal soda is note-
worthy and is due to the increasing u.se of soap powders
and other specially prepared washing materials. A
comparison of these totals with the corresponding fig-
ures for 1880 is interesting.

SODA PRODUCTS, BY DECADES, 1880 TO 1900, WITH
PERCENTAGES.

YEAR.

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments.

TOTAL PRODUCT.

PER CENT OF IN-
CREASE.

Pounds.

Value.

Quantity.

Value.

1880

3
32
50

40,269,938

333,124,375

1,279,082,000

$868,560
5,432,400
10,237,944

1890

727.4
284.0

526 9

1900

88.6

There are no figures for soda products anterior to
1880, except that at the census of 1860, 11 establishments
were reported manufacturing saleratus, with a total
value of $1,176,000, while at the census of 1870, only
4 were reported, with a value of products of $231,647,
a decrease which is remarkable in view of the general
development of other industries during that decade.

Although the production has almost quadrupled
during the past decade, the value per unit has fallen
greatly. Taking the customary unit of 100 pounds, we
find the following decrease of values:

Soda ash.

1890 $1.24

1900 .62

Decrease .62

Percentage 50.00

Sal soda.

$1.09
.77

Bicar-
bonate of
soda.

$3.31
.97

Caustic
soda.

.82
29.35

2.34
70.69

$2.00
1.36

.66
32.50

No. 210 2

This great increase in domestic production has re-
sulted in a corresponding diminution of importations.
The Treasury report of importations for 1890 gives
soda ash and sal soda together as 332,733,952 pounds,
valued at $3,493,288; caustic soda, 80,125,732 pounds,
valued at $1,470,335; and bicarbonate of soda, 917,034
pounds, valued at $16,319; while the same report for
1900 gives soda ash, 78,571,870 pounds, valued at
$648,450; sal soda, 6,624,194 pounds, valued at $31,072;
and caustic soda, 11,429,989 pounds, valued at $177,857;
but does not report bicarbonate separately. A com-
parison of these quantities shows what progress has
been made toward supplying the home market.

1890

1900

Decrease...
Percentage

Soda ash

and .sal soda,

pounds.

332,733,962
85,196,064

247,637,888
74.39

Caustic soda,
pounds.

80, 125, 732
11,429,989

68,695,743
S6.73

The ratios of quantities of these materials imported to
the domestic production are as follows:

YEAR.

SAL SODA AND SODA
ASH.

CAUSTIC SODA.

Foreign.

Domestic.

Foreign,

Domestic.

1890

100
100

72
1,075

100
100

1900

1,979

Some of the imported soda ash and caustic has un-
doubtedly been used to make a part of the soda products
reported at the census of 1900, but the quantity so used
can not be ascertained and is in any case not large.
The remainder, so far as concerns works making .soda
products from purchased soda ash, etc. , was drawn from
domestic sources, hence to this extent there is a duplica-
tion of quantities and values. This duplication is un-
avoidable. Had there been no imported stock on hand
at the beginning of the census year and no importations
during it, there would have been no difficulty in mak-
ing any deductions needed to make the totals of quan-
tities and values given in the table of soda products
by quantity and value, 1890 and 1900, quite accurate.
The returns for 1900 have been sufficiently studied to
show that this duplication is proportionally small, that
the totals given above are fairly correct, and that the
real growth and present condition of the industry is
substantiall}^ as shown. Most of the soda ash and
bicarbonate reported are products of the ammonia-soda
process, the cryolite process being limited by the supply
of the mineral, and the natural soda industi'y restricted
by cost of transportation to markets.

Natural Soda. — The manufacture of soda products
from the natural soda of the West has increased from
10,964,390 pounds, valued at $124,783, in 1890, to
20,420,000 pounds, valued at $106,600, in 1900. This

increase is very small, because, although the raw
material is available in inexhaustible quantities (and
with a well-arranged plant, soda ash can be deliv-
ered f . o. b. cars at the works at a cost less than one-
half of that of ash at any ammonia-soda works in this
or any other country), the distance from large eastern
markets and consequent high freight rates have pre-
cluded successful commercial competition, especially in
the face of steadily falling prices of the product. Of
late the economic conditions have materially changed
and will continue to improve. The past two years
have seen great enlargements in the industries and
commerce of the Pacific states, while the recent political
occurrences in the Pacific and in Asiatic countries have
profoundly altered trade conditions and indicate an
enormous increase in our Pacific commerce in the near
future. In supplying the demands of this commerce
our natural soda deposits, when properly developed,
can distance all rivals.

Although the operations so far carried on have been
on a comparatively small scale, the subject has been care-
fully studied ana much valuable information obtained.
For example, at Owens Lake, California, the cost of
making a ton of soda ash under local conditions is fairly
well ascertained, and the lines to be followed to reduce
manufacturing cost clearly indicated. Again, the extent
of land suitable for evaporating vats is, in this locality,
the measure of the possible development of the industry,
and this is known. Many other important data have
thus been secured, and as a general conclusion it may
be safely stated that at Owens Lake alone there is space
for works large enough for a production of soda ash
more than equivalent to the entire demand of this coun-
try for soda products. All this is unquestioned by any-
one having a practical acquaintance with the matter, and
only the limited radius of profitable marketing has
retarded the development of this locality. This industry
is therefore not a hypothetical one, but based on solid
fact and experience, and because of this and the pros-
pects for the future, it has been deemed advisable to
devote especial attention to it in this report.

The report on chemical products for the census of
1880 gave an interesting resume of the existing infor-
mation concerning the occurrences of natural soda,
and later the subject was investigated, the result being
published in "Natural Soda, its Occurrence and Utiliza-'
tion," T. M. Chatard, Bulletin No. 60, United States
Geological Survey, 1888. An extensive abstract of this
paper was made by Prof. George Lunge and published
in the Zeitschrift fiir Angewandte Chemie, 1893, pages
3-11, because, as he states, he considered the existence
of such enormous quantities of natural soda a most
important factor in the future of the alkali industry.
This same eminent authority, in The Mineral Industry
for 1892, page 64, also says:

There can be no doubt that the immense quantities of "natural
soda" shown by Dr. Chatard and other authorities of the United
States Geological Survey to exist in the Californian and other soda

lakes, will not be allowed to lie dormant any longer. I f these lakes
are once worke<l with the energy whioh id otherwise not wanting
in America, the days are nuniljeretl when Liverpool wxia will rule
in the New York niarketn

In lSi>2 Dr. Lunffo visit«d Owen,s Lake, California,
the most iiiiportniit natiinil .soda lotality, and, while
conlirining the general conclusions given in the above-
mentioned bulletin, placed the cost of product at a much
lower figure than there stated.

In the same volume of "The Mineral Indu.stry " there
is an article on "Natural Soda'' which gives additional
data and suggestions as to the lines to be followed in
the commercial development of this industry.

Natural soda is the residue obtained by the evapora-
tion of natural alkaline waters without the aid of arti-
ficial heat. It is composed of sodium carbonate and
bicarbonate in varying proportions, mixed with other
salts, mainly sodium sulphate and chloride. It is found
to some extent in all dry regions, such as Hungary,
Egj'pt, and the deserts of Africa and Asia, but in no
other country does it occur in such enormous quanti-
ties as in the region lying east of the Sierra Nevadas.
It forms the white incrustations of the alkali plains,
but the.se are rarely of sufficient thickness and extent
for prospective utilization, particularly as the "sinks,"
or lakes without outlet, in which nature has collected
and concentrated the leachings and drainage of the alka-
line districts, already contain more sodium carbonate
than would suffice to supply the entire world demand
for generations. That this is no exaggeration is made
evident by considering only three of these lakes, the
dimensions of which are known and the waters of which
have been repeatedly and carefully analyzed.

In southeastern Oregon is Abert Lake; area 40
square miles, average depth 10 feet. In Mono County,
Cal., we find Mono Lake; area 85 square miles, average
depth 60 feet. In Inyo County, Cal., lies Owens Lake,
with an area of 110 square miles and an average depth
of over 17 feet. In computing the volume of water the
usual unit is an acre-foot, which is equal to 43, 560 cubic
feet, and as the analysis tells the amount of the sodium
carbonate, NajCOj, and bicarbonate, NaHCO,, in a given
volume, we get the following results for these three
lakes:

Acre-feet.

NfiiCOs, tons.

NaHCO,, tons.

266,000
3,264,000
1,088,000

3,428,382
75,072,000
39,875,200

1,560,000

Mono l.ake

17,936,000

Owens Lake

8,431,000

ToUI

118,375,552

27,927,000

These are the largest occurrences, but there are many
others, aggregating probably a far greater amount.

In addition to these two carbonates the waters of
these lakes contain much sodium sulphate and chloride,
with smaller proportions of sodium borate, potassium
chloride, and other salts. The valuable constituents are

the two carlwnates, and the method of separating them
from the other salts is fjawed on fractional crystallisa-
tion, which means the methodical stoppage of a crys-
tallizing process by drawing off the mother liquor from
the "crop" of crystals so far formed. This "first
crop" may be either the desired material in a purer
condition than it was in the original solution, or else
may consist mainly of impurities which we wish to re-
move, this depending upon the proportions of the sub-
stances in solution or their relative solubilities under
the conditions.

Now, all solutions of natural soda contain both sodium
carbonate and bicarbonate, and it is upon the property
of these two salts when in solution to unite to form a
compound more soluble than bicarbonate but less solu-
ble than carbonate, that the method of extraction is
founded. If a solution of the two salts be exposed to
spontaneous evaporation, there will be formed, at a cer-
tain degree of concentration, a crop of acicular crystals
which have a composition corresponding to 46.90 per
cent of NajCO,, 37.17 per cent of NaHCO,, and 15.93
per cent of H^O (water). The scientific name of this
salt is urao, but it is u.sually called "summer .soda."
The amount of this .salt thus obtained will depend upon
the amount of bicarbonate present, as every 37. 17 parts
of bicarbonate will, in crystallizing, take with it 46.90
parts of NajCOj. If more bicarbonate is present than is
needed to form summer soda, the excess will crystallize
out before the summer soda forms. If too little is
present, the excess of carbonate remains in solution.

If a sample of water be evaporated from an}- of these
lakes to a certain concentration point (sp. gr. 1.260 for
Owens Lake water), crystallization will begin, the crys-
tals being crude summer soda. Owing to the presence of
so much sulphate and chloride in the solution, the crop
becomes more and more contaminated with these .salts
as the concentration proceeds. Hence, to obtain an
article of a fair degree of purity, the process must be
interrupted at some definite degree of specific gravity
and the mother liquor drawn off. If the mother liquor
be further evaporated, successive crops can be obtained,
the earlier ones, in the case of Owens Lake, being
principally sulphate and the later ones chloride. Finally
remains a mother liquor rich in potash salts, from
which, on cooling to a low temperature, the ordinarj'
sal soda (NajCOj.lOHjO) crystallizes.

While all of these localities can produce .summer
soda in the manner described, the proportion of bicar-
bonate present is, in each case, insufficient to give the
largest possible yield. To obtain this, it is necessary to
increase the proportion of bicarbonate, which can be
done in several ways but most economically, probabi}',
bj- utilizing the carbonic acid driven off in the process
of furnacing to convert the urao into soda ash. When
summer soda is heated to a moderate degree (about
150° C, 300° F.) it lo.ses its water and excess of car-
bonic acid; 100 parts yielding 70.35 parts ash, 9.74 parts

gas, and 19.91 parts of water. This furnacing must be
done in any case to reduce weight and save transporta-
tion charges; hence, if the gas can be economically used,
there is a clear gain in so doing. While the refining
work in which the crude product is converted into vari-
ous marketable forms requires special training and use
of improved machineiy, arranged and handled to save
labor and fuel, the production of the crude material is
comparatively simple and can be done on a large or
small scale with probably equal advantage. At the
"little lake" at Ragtown,Nev.,two men, in 1886, made
300 tons and could have made much more had the con-
ditions of the locality permitted. The product of the
"big lake," made under very adverse conditions, re-
quired but little more labor in proportion. The entire
product was hauled 16 miles to the railroad and shipped
to San Francisco where it was refined. Notwithstand-
ing these heavy transportation costs, the operations were
profitable and the works have been running steadily
ever since.

The.se examples show that in the development of this
industry the innumerable small localities can be utilized
quite as well as the larger ones, if transportation to the
refining point be not too expensive. An intelligent,
industrious man, working a small but well-situated pool,
can produce, with onl}' occasional outside aid, an amount
of summer soda which a refining works can take at a
price advantageous to itself and remunerative to him.
Furnacing before ■shipping to the refinery is not always
advantageous, since, although the reduction in weight
is about 25 per cent, the saving in transportation will
rarelv paj' for the cost of furnacing when this is done
on a small scale. Moreover, refiners prefer unfur-
naced material, and by devoting attention exclusively
to the production of summer soda, regularity of com-
position, which is very important, can be better as-
sured. Such work can therefore be made a ' ' poor man's
job," a thing much needed in that region, and in time
there would be a large direct consumption of the crude
materials.

Borax and Other Soda ProdxicU. — Seven establish-
ments manufactured borax during the census year, with
a combined production of 11,756,000 pounds, valued at
11541,160. No figures for borax were given at the cen-
sus of 1890, so that no comparison can be instituted.
The present number of borax works is undoubtedly
smaller than it was ten years ago, because it has been
found more economical to ship the crude material to
central points for treatment than to work it up locally,
as was formerly done.

" Other soda products," valued at $143,432, represent
the total value of products so reported by many estab-
lishments. As they are not otherwise specified, no
further distribution is possible.

The following table gives the geographical distribu-
tion of the .soda industry, states having less than three
establishments being grouped:

SODA PRODUCTS, BY STATES, ARRANGED GEOGRAPH-
ICALLY: 1900.

. United states

North Atlantic division

New Jersey

New Yorli

Pennsylvania

Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Maryland, and Virginia

North Central division

Illinois

Michigan

WLsconsin

Indiana, Missouri, and Ohio

Western division

California

Nevada

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments.

Value of
products.

$10,922,536

6,559,295

105,607

4,699.481

861, 195

893, 112

3,694,436

353,429

2,814,969

173, 101

352,937

668,806

647, 175
21,630

The foreign commerce in soda products is set forth
in the following table, compiled from the reports of
the Bureau of Statistics of the United States Treasury
Department:

SODA ASH IMPORTED DURING THE YEARS ENDING JUNE

30, 1891 TO 1900.

YEAB.

Pounds.

Value.

1891

' 354, 744, 335

'339,057,006

388, 910. 183

2,56,293,395

300,599,257

251,067,856

162,585,074

87,809,619

45,444,305

78, 571, 870

$4, 382, 917

1892

4,496,597
4,85.5,098
2, .520, 921
2, 367, 109
1,950,981
1,241,321
689, 714

1893

1894

1895

1896

1897

1898

1899

310, 742

1900

648,450

' Includes sal soda for 1891 and 1892.

SAL SODA IMPORTED DURING THE YEARS ENDING JUNE
30, 1893 TO 1900.

YEAR.

Pounds.

Value.

1893

27,531,554
16,893,760
28,761,108
17,966,9%
18,875,029
8,851,011
4,224,680
6,624,314

$238,029
120, 794

1894

1895

167,325
84 423

1896

1897

8'' 695

1898

40 266

1899

20,905
81,072

1900

CAUSTIC SODA IMPORTED DURING THE YEARS ENDING
JUNE 30, 1891 TO 1900.

YEAR.

Pounds.

Value.

1891

78,743,976
64,741,106
67,485,106
38,987,832
57,653,959
61,713,044
66,476,152
29,697,185
18,405,272
11,429,989

$1,874,700
1,598,903
1,344,. 525

1892

1893

1894

860 753

1895

1 044 809

1896

1,071.169

1897

1 147 763

1898

476,032
252 297

1899

1900

177, 857

ALL OTHER SALTS OF SODA LMPORTKD DURING THE
YEARS ENDING JUNE 30, 1891 TO lUOO. "

TKAR.

Ponndm

Value.

1891

18,186,888
22,818,570
47,664,9.S8
14,829,622
11,803,171
9,090,367
3,919,339
21,400,585
23,891,135
23,632,374

$118, 718

1892

167.634
297 7f',I

1893 ....

1894

104. NX]
141,070

1895

1896

1897

67,684
225, 62X
817, 0:«
814,425

1«9,M

1899

1900

1 1893 to 1900 Includea bicarbonate of soda.

Group III. ^Potashes.

This classitication wa.s intended to include not only
potu.sh, which is im impure potassium carbonate, but
also pearlash, which is the refined potassium carbonate,
yet, though returns for the census year 1900 were
received from 67 establishments, producing 3,864,766
pounds of potash, valued at $178,180, no pearlash was
reported manufactured. Of these 67 establishments, 12
produced products valued at less than $500.

The burning of wood and the lixiviation of the ash to
extract the potash, though of minor importance so far
a.s the monetary value of the product is concerned, is
one of the oldest of the purely chemical industries.
Cognizance was taken of it in the census reports of the
United States as early as 1850, so that the data is at
command for comparing the condition of the industry
in this country for each decade since 1850, as set forth
in the following table:

TOTAL PRODUCTION OF POTASHES, BY DECADES: 1860
TO 1900.

TKAK.

Number
of estab-

Itsh-
mentfi.

PKODUCT.

Average

Pounds.

Value.

pound
(cents).

1860

569

212

105

75
67

(1,401,633
688,660
327,671
232, M3
197,607
178,180

1860

1870

1880

4,571,671
,5,106,939
3,864,766

5.09
3.86
4.82

1890

1900

This table shows that there has been a constant
decrease in the value of the product, though the quantity
has varied somewhat. Starting with 1880, for which
year both quantity and value were reported, it appears
that the increase in the quantity of product for 1890
over that for 1880 was 11.7 per cent, but the decrease
in the value for 1890 compared with that for 1880 was
15.1 per cent. In 1900 the decrea.se in the quantity
as compared with that of 1890 was 24.3 per cent, while
the decrea.se in the value was 9.8 per cent. The estab-
lishments reported were distributed as follows:

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF POTASH FACTORIh»:

1900.

(TATn.

Knmber

OfM-

Ublldh-
menM.

Artngt
number
of wavr-
eamen.

CaplUl.

Valneof
product.

Percent
of total.

United States

ro,m

$178,180

100.0

MIchlffan ,

15
3

fi2
25
4

28,861

20, cm

2,275
22,728

79,642
86, 619
6,660

M,4S»

44.7
19.9

3.7

$1.7

Ohio

Maine, Wl^-onsln, and 1111-

There were reported as having been used in this
manufacture 812,399 bushels of wood ashes, valued at
$40,191. The yield of potash per bushel of ashes, as
reported, varied from 2.4 to 7 pounds. In the product
given above there is included potash packed in cans,
amounting to 820,000 pounds, having a value of
$53,349. Excluding this, as being in the nature of a
duplication, it appears that the total production of
potash for 1900 was 3,044,766 pounds, and that there-
fore the average yield of potash per bushel of wood
ashes, as shown by the entire returns, was 3.75 pounds.
Pelouze and Fremy ' give the yield by weight as 10 per
cent, and this appears in other text-books; but all re-
turns for ashes received at the census of 1900 were
given in bushels.

As stated, potash is prepared by dissolving out the
soluble contents of wood a.shes and evaporating the solu-
tion to dryness. The process as carried out on a com-
mercial scale is described by Mu.spratt,^ as follows:

The American process for the extrai'tion of potashes is thus de-
scribed by Morfit. The incineration of the plant is effected in dry
pits sunk into the ground to a depth of 3 or 4 feet. The plant is
thrown in in portions, and burned until the pit is nearly full of
ashes. The latter are then removed, mixed with about 5 per
cent of lime, and drenched with successive portions of fresh water.
The ash tubs or vat« employed in this operation are usually formed
from tar l)arrel8, by cutting them in half. A numl)er of these are
furnished with two crossbeams, upon which rests a false cullen-
deretl bottom covered with straw, and below this is a cock for the
removal of the lye. The -first liquor running through, being sat-
urate<l, is passed at once to the evaporating pan; while the second
or third runnings, l)eing weaker, are reser\'ed and poured upon
fresh ash until completely saturated. The evaporating pans are
broad and shallow, and made of iron, with corrugated bottoms, to
produce greater extent of heating surface; and as evaporation pro
gresses, new supplies of strong liquor are poured in, and the heat is
continued until a sirupy consistence is attained, when the fire ia
gradually slackene<l and the contents of the pan, becoming solid,
are dug out and placed aside as crtcde potashes. By subjecting this
mass to the heat of a reverberatory furnace, most of the sulphur (*iV)
and all excessive wat«»r and empyreumatic matters are expelled,
causing a loss of 10 to 15 per c-ent. This modified product is white,
with a bluish tinge; contains more carbonic acid than the original
crude product, and takee the name of ptarUuh. The proceee em-

729.

' Traits de Chimie, 1865, Vol. II, page 22.5.

'Chemistry as Applied to Arts and Maimfactures, Vol. II, page

ployed in Russia and northern Europe is the same in principle as
that above described, and is conducted in a similar manner, except
that no lime is used in the lixiviation process.

According to Mendeleeff:'

For the extraction of potash, which was formerly carried on
extensively in the east of Russia (before the discovery of the Stass-
furtsalt), the ash of grasses and the green portions of potatoes,
buckwheat, etc., are taken and treated with water (lixiviated), the
solution is evaporated, and the residue ignited in order to destroy
the organic matter present in the extract. The residue thus
obtained is composed of raw potash. It is refined by a second dis-
solution in a small quantity of water, for the potash itself is very
soluble in water, whilst the impurities are sparingly soluble. The
solution thus obtained is again evaporated, and the residue ignited,
and this potash is then called refined potash, or pearlash.

According to Wiley : '

The composition of the ash of woods is extremely variable. Not
only do different varieties of trees have varying quantities of ash,
but in the same variety the bark and twigs will give an ash quite
different in quantity and composition from that furnished by the
wood itself. In general, the hard woods, such as hickory, oak, and
maple, funiish a quality of ash superior for fertilizing purposes to
that afforded by the soft woods, such as the pine and tulip trees.
The character of the unleached wood ashes found in the trade is
indicated by the subjoined analyses. The first table contains the
mean, maximum, and minimum results of the analyses of 97 sam-
ples by Goessmann.'

MKAN COMPOSITION OF WOOD
ASHES.

Means.

Maxima.

Minima.

5.6
1.9
34.3
8.5
12.9
12.0
29.9

10.2
4.0

60.9
7.5

27.9

28.6

2.5

phosphoric acid

0.3

18.0

Magnesia

2.3

2.1

0.7

The data obtained in sixteen analyses made at the Connecticut
station are given below:*

Means.

Maxima.

Minima.

Potash .

5.3
1.4

7.7
1.8

4.0

1.9

In fifteen analyses of ashes from domestic wood fires in New
England stoves the following mean percentages of potash and
phosphoric acid were found:

Potash .' 9. 63

Phosphoric acid 2. 32

' Principles of Chemistry, 1897, Vol. I, page 548.

' Principles and Practice of Agricultural Analysis, 1895, Vol. II,
pages 251 to 253. .

'Annual report, Massachusetts agricultural experiment station,
1888, page 202.

'Annual report, Connecticut agricultural experiment station,
1890, page 110.

In leaching, ashes lose chiefly the potassium carbonate and phos-
phate which they contain. Leached and unleached Canada ashes
have the following composition:

Unleached
(percent).

Leached
(per
cent).

13.0

12.0

61.0

5.5

1.9

6.6

13.0

30.0

51.0

1.1

1.4

3.5

In the wood ashes of commerce, therefore, it is evident that the
proportion of the potash to the lime is relatively low.

The number of parts by weight of the chief ingredients of the
ash in 10,000 iwunds of woods of different kinds is given in table
below, together with the percentage composition of the pure ash;
that is, the crude ash deprived of carbon and carbon dioxide.

POUNDS OF THE INGREDIENTS NAMED IN 10,000
POUNDS OF WOOD.

Dogwood

(Cfymus
Florida).

Sycamore

(Platanus

Occident-

alu).

Post oali
•Jofa')"-

Ash {F.
Ameri-
cana).

Red oak
{Quercua
rubra).

Hickory
(Oarya
lomeTi-
torn).

9.02
5.72
6.41
14.67

18.06
9.55

24.73
0.49

16.85
6.96
36.61

5.28

14.94
1.16
7.60
0.10

13.95
5.98

27.40
3.05

13.80

Phosphoric acid . . .

5.83
18.40

Magnesia

4.86

Potash

Phosphoric acid

Lime

Magnesia

White
oak ( Q.
aiba)

10.60
2.49
7.86
0.90

Magno-
lia (.W.
grandi-
flora).

7.13
3.19
14.21
2.94

P'"f,i5pine(P.
TrU). ""■'*»)■

6.01
1.24
18.04
2.03

4.54
0.96
15.16
0.74

Black

Chest-
nut

Old field

(Mem <£™?'',''Pi';.f,F-

nigra).

3.02
0.92
12,46
0.10

vesca or
sativa).

2.90
1.09
7.93
0.34

mitig).

0.79

0.73

12. 12

1.17

The pure ashes of the woods contain the following per cents of
the ingredients named:

Potash

Phosphoric acid

Lime

Magnesia

Potash

Phosphoric acid

Lime

Magnesia

Dogwood

( CV>r7iiw*
Florida).

Sycamore po.,^].
(.Plalanut ^««'<»»
Occident-

28.04
8.51

38.93
6.80

alii).

23.17
12.23
31.62
0.62

(Q.obtu-
Biloba)

21.92

9.00

46.39

6.S8

Ash(F. Redoak Hjykonr

Ameri- [{Quercm i^r^T
cana). lYubra). ^""^

46.04

23.57
0.60

24.66
10.55

48.26
6.38

toia).

28.60
11.97
87.94
10.04

White

oak (Q,

alba).

42.16
9.48

29.85
3.43

Magno-
lia (.Jf.
grandi-
flora).

19.54
8.75

38.94
8.05

Georgia

pine (P.

patus-

trig).

Yellow
pine (P.

miiie).

15.35 19.70

3. 82 4. 18

56.24 { 66.63

6.25 j 3.20

Black
pine

(Picea
nigra).

14.30
4.33

58.98
0.60

Cheat-
nut

[Castana
vesca or
saliva).

Old field
pine (P.
mitis).

18.10
6.76

49.18
2.11

3.35

4.11

67.73

6.54

From the data for production given above it is evident
that, although the average price of potash for 1900 was
higher than for 1890, the industry was not remunerative,

and that consequently the quantity and value of the
prtwhict decreased. Indeed, owing to the competition
of fon>if,'ii potash, the industry can now oxist only in
locaiiti»>s whi'io wood is very eiieap and whore tlicrt" is
a local demand for the product. In such places the
product is of domestic manufacture and is an article of
trade at the country stores, hut with the increasing
value of timber, the field of operations is continually
being contracted.

The cost of producing a barrel of 650 pounds of
potash is stated in a private coninmnication from a
Michigan manufacturer to be as follows:

Ashes, 150 bushels, at S i-enta $4.50

Hauling ashes •>. 00

Fuel 2.00

Labor 3.00

Barrel, t-ost of 1. 25

KepaifM, iiiterect, etc 1.50

Total cost 18.25

Selling price at works 25. 00

Gross profit per barrel 6. 75

The ashes therefore yielded ii pounds of potash per
bushel, and the potash sold at 3.85 cents per pound. It
will be noted that the weight of a l«irrcl of potash is
given above as 650 pounds. From the returns it appears
that the net weight of a barrel of this material varies
from 650 pounds to 740 pounds, the average being about
700 pounds.

Competition with the ashes of wood as a source of
potash is found in beet-root molasses and residues;
wool scourings, known as suint; and the potash .salts
mined at Stassfui't and elsewhere abroad. In the case
of the beet-root molasses and residues, and of the
suint, the mass is calcined and the potassium carbonate
extracted, as is done for wood. The potassium exists
in the Stassf urt and other mineral salts as chlorides and
sulphates in combination with magnesium and calcium,
and after the potassium chloride is extracted from them,
it is converted into pearlash by the Le Blanc process,
or it may be converted into carbonate by the Solvay
process, using trimethylammonium carbonate. Men-
deleeff ' states that about 25,000 tons of potsish annually
are now (18!<7) prepared from KCl at Stassfurt. Other
proposed .sources of potash salts are sea water; the
mother liquor of .salt works and minei'al springs; the
residues from seaweeds; and the feldspars and similar
rocks.

There are, moreover, some industries which produce
considerable quantities of wood ashes as a by-product,
from which jjotash maj- be extracted with profit. For
example, the wood-distillation industry uses hard wood
and consumes nuich of the charcoal produced as fuel
under the retorts. Hard-wood ashes are richer in pot-
ash than soft-wood ashes, and as the extra cost of
obtaining the potash should be verj- trifling in connec-

' Principles of Chemistry, 1897, Vol. I, page 549.

tion with the other operation, considerable quantities
of it might be obtained from this source.

As jKjtassium (•arbonatt< crystallizes with difficulty, it
can not well be purified by the method often employed
for purifying salts. The pure material nm.st, there-
fore, be obtained by indirect means. Among other
methods in vogue, one is to purify cream of tartar,
obtained from grapes, by repeated crystallization, and
then, by burning it, obtain the refined potash. When
the cream of tartar is ignited by contact with air
there is left a mixture of finely divided charcoal and
potassium carbonate, and this comes into the market
under the name of " black flux," and is used in smelting
operations as a reducing agent.

Potash is u.sed in the manufacture of .soft .soap; in
making potassium .salts, such as potassium chromate; in
making caustic potash; and, in the form of pearlash, in
the making of glass.

The potassium found in wood ashes is extracted from
the soil by the plant during its growth, the presence of
potassium compounds in the soil being essential to the
growth of vegetation. Consequently, wood ashes are
a valuable fertilizing material. Wiley ' says of this:

The beneficial effects following the application of ashes, are
greater than would be produced by the same quantities of matter
added in a purely nianurial state. The organic origin of these
materials in the ash has caused them to be presented to the plant
in a form i)eculiarly suited for absorption. Land treated generally
with wood ashes becomes more amenable to culture, is readily kept
in good tilth, and thus retains moisture in dry seasons and permits
of easy drainage in wet. These effects are probably due to the
lime content of the ash, a property, moreover, favorable to nitrifica-
tion and adapted to correcting acidity. Injurious iron salts, which
are sometimes found in wet and sour lands, are precipitated by the
ash and rendered innocuous or even beneficial. A good wood-ash
fertilizer, therefore, is worth more than would lie indicated by its
commercial value calculated in the usual way.

From the census returns for 1900 it appears that the
leached ashes have a certain manurial value and the
returns show that the establishments reported above
sold 87,040 bushels of leached ashes to be used as a
fertilizer at a total value of $3,268, or, on an average, at
3. 75 cents per bushel. It is stated by the manufacturers
that wood ashes in leaching gain one-third in bulk; one
manufacturer specifically stating that his 15,000 bushels
of raw ashes yielded 20,0(X) bushels of leached ashes.

From Wagner's Chemical Technolog\', 1892, page
299, it appears that "the yearlj* production of potash,
according to H. Griineberg, is from

Wood ashes, Russia, Canada, United States, Hungary, and Tons.

Galicia 20,000

Beet sugar ash, France, Belgium, Germany 12, 000

Mineral saltj*, Germany, France, Kngland 15, ()00

Suint, German J', France, Belgium, Austria 1, 000

Total from all sources 48,000

"The.se conditions differ .strikingly from those which
existed thirty [thirty-eightj years ago, when wood ash
was in exclusive use and Russia potash ruled the mar-

'PrinciplesandPracticeof Agricultural Analysis, Vol. II, page2.'v4.

ket. The potash extracted from wood ashes amounts
to scarcely one-half of the total production; it decreases
year by year, and the time when it will disappear from
the market seems within measurable distance."' This
agrees with the data shown -in the table above for the
"Total Production of Potashes by Decades, 1850 to
1900."

The foreign commerce in potashes for the United
States if exhibited in the follovving tables compiled
from "The Foreign Commerce and Navigation of the
United States for the years ending June 30, 1891-1900,
Vol. II."

DOMESTIC EXPORTS OF ASHES, POT AND PEARL: 1891 TO
1900, INCLUSIVE.

YEAR.

Pounds.

Value.

YEAR.

Pounds.

Value.

430,582
1,307,634
634,421
650,261
664,876

$24,432
99,566
31,775
29,205
30,188

1896

969,874
511,830
869,841
745,433
1,273,906

841,208

1892

1897

21,727

1898

33,202

1894

1899

29,676

1900

49,566

IMPORTS OF ASHES, WOOD AND LYE OF, AND BEET-
ROOT aSHES, FOR CONSUMPTION: 1891 TO 1900, IN-
CLUSIVE.

YEAR.

Value.

YEAR.

Value.

1891

842,624
54,855
76,306
74, WO
77,708

1896

867,393

1897

66,423

1898

62,206

|g((4

189S

59,970

1900

66,453

IMPORTS OF POTASH, CARBONATE OF, OR FUSED, FOR
CONSUMPTION: 1891 TO 1894, INCLUSIVE.

YEAK.

Pounds.

Value.

1891

839,980

1891

6,297,419

8,745,268
10,115,017
8, 130, 975

219,557

1892

309,586

329,896

1894 .

262, 818

IMPORTS OF POTASH, CARBONATE OF, CRUDE OR BLACK
SALTS, FOR CONSUMPTION: 1895 TO 1900, INCLUSIVE.

YEAR.

Pounds.

Value.

1895

11,602,272
12, 439, 180
7,601,497
15,844,374
16,018,889
21,191,258

8364,506

1896

401,819

1897

229,029

1898

471,919

1899

437,675

1900

625,922

LITERATURE.

Chemistry aa Applied to the Arts and Manufactures, by Sheridan
Mugpratt, Glasgow, 1860.

Trait4 de Chimie, by Pelouze and Freniy, \'ol. II, Paris, 1865.

A Manual of Chemical Technology, by Rudolf von Wagner,
translated by William Crookes, New York, 1892.

Principles and Practice of Agricultural Analysis, by Harvey W.
Wiley, Vol. II, Easton, Pa., I89.J.

The Principles of Chemistry, by D. Mendel^eff, New York, 1897.

Group IV.— Alums.

During the census year 1900 there were 13 establish-
ments engaged in the manufacture of alums either as a
principal or subordinate product. The comparison
with previous censuses is as follows:

PRODUCTION OF ALUMS, BY DECADES: 1880 TO 1900,
INCLUSIVE.

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments.

PRODUCT.

PER CENT OF IN-
CREASE.

Pounds.

Value.

Quantity.

Value.

1880

6
10
13

39,217,725
93,998,008
179,467,471

8808,165
1,616,710
2,446,676

1890

189.7
90.9

100.0

1900

51. S

There are no census statistics of production anterior
to 1880, and the census of 1900 is the first one at which
the various alums were separately reported, as shown
in the table which follows:

KINDS OF ALUM PRODUCED IN 1900.

Total.

Ammonia alum

Potash alum

Burnt alum

Concentrated alum .

Alum cake

Other alums

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments.

Pounds.

179,467,471

6,680,373
14,200,393
16, 028, 464
103,016,815

4,048,655
35,592,771

Value.

$2,446,576

102,308
215,004
403,100
1,062,. 547
34,047
629, 570

The legend "other alums" is as reported on the
schedules, and no doubt under it are included some of
the kinds named in the li.st above, but it has not been
possible to separate them. However, there are in the
classification 1,626,000 pounds of aluminum hydroxide
(hydrate of alumina), valued at $31,500. There are
included under "burnt alum" 9,399,550 pounds of ma-
terial, with a value of t>228,500, returned as "soda alum "
from 4 establishments. In addition, there were reported
3,928,160 pounds of ammonia alum, valued at $58,922,
and 1,149,666 pounds of aluminum sulphate, valued at
$10,922, as having been produced and consumed in the
manufacture of other products.

It should be said that of the 13 establishments reported
above but 2 of them were reported as producing alum
onl}-, the others being engaged in the manufacture of
many other chemical substiinces. Taking the ratio of
value which the alum bears to the total value of prod-
ucts for these last-mentioned establishments as a guide,
it appears that these 13 establishments employed 802
wage-earners and a capital of $3,888,446 in the produc-
tion of alum, and that there were consumed 34,000 tons
of bauxite, having a value of $230,000; 5,000 tons of
cryolite, of a value of $110,000; 2,000 tons of sodium
sulphate, in the form of .salt cake or niter cake, of a

value of If4,100; 8»50 tons of ammonium sulphate, of
a value of ♦21,1>00; 477 tons of potassium sulplmto, of a
value of li!19,fi()0; and fit ,424 tons of sulpluiiic acid,
there lioing usod for this acid 3,328 tons of sulphur, of
a value of $66,000; 49.081 tons of pyrites, of a value
of ^U 17,000; and 513 tons of sodium nitrate, of a value
of *1S.(X)0.

The jfeographical distribution of these establishments
is set forth in the following- table:

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBITION OF ALUM FACTORIKS:

1900.

STATU.

Number

ofes-

labllsh-

menta.

Average
number
ol wage-
eamen.

Capital.

Value of
product.

Per cent
of total.

United Slates

802

«8, 888, 445

«2, 446, 576

100.0

6
a

530
74

198

2,747,482
256,930

885,033

1,411,652
306, 7M

728,170

57.7

12.5

Illinois. New York, and
Michigan

29.8

Alum was known to the ancients and was u.sed by them
in d^-eing, tanning, and in making medicine. Aluminum
sulphate, mixed with more or less iron sulphate, occurs
as effloi-escences on rocks and as the mineral feather
alum, and it was this limited natural supply that was the
source of the material used. The manufacture of alum
is of oriental origin and was introduced into Europe
about the Thirteenth century, the materials used being
the mineral alunite or alum stone, which has the for-
mula K2SO,.Alj(SO,)3.4Al(OH)3 mixed with compounds
of iron. This mineral is insoluble in water, but by
calcining it and exposing it in heaps, with occasional
moistening, the mass weathers, and after some months
a potassium alum may be dis.solved out which crystal-
lizes in cubes and contains inclosed iron oxides which
give it a red color. Such alum is known as "Roman
alum" from its having been extensivelv manufactured
at Tolfa, near Rome. Later, alum slates and shales,
clay, bauxite, and cryolite have been employed as the
raw materials of the alum manufacture, and the last-
named two are the sub.stances which are now almost
exclusively used for this purpose.

When the minerals — clay, in its purer form of 'kaolin
(AljSijO,.2HjO), or bauxite, which is aluminum hydrox-
ide mixed with ferric, silicic, and other oxides in vary-
ing proportions, are used as the source of alumina, the
process consists in decomposing the mineral with sul-
phuric acid and evaporating the solution of aluminum
sulphate formed until, when cool, it sets to a stone-like
ma.ss. This cake contjiins impurities in the form of
silica, ferric sulphate, and free sulphuric acid, there
being usually from 2 to 3 per cent of the latter present.
When but little iron is present, the sub.stance is known
as "alum cake;" when much iron is present it is known
as ••alumino-ferric cake." Bauxite is especially liable
to jield this last-named product.

A purer aluminum sulphate is made from bauxite by
calcining it with soda ash until sodium aluminatc i»
formed. This is dis.solved. the solution filU^ed, and
carbon dioxide pa.s.sed through it, by which the
aluminum is precipitat<'d as hydroxide. This purified
hydroxide is di.s.soIved in hot sulphuric acid and the
solution formed run into leaden pans to c<X)l, when it
forms a crystalline mass much u.sed in the arts under
the name of "concentrated alum," and having the
composition Alj(SC),)320HjO, though the separate
crystals have but 18 molecules of water of crystalliza-
tion. Manufacturers specify that bauxite for u.se in
the manufacture of alum shall contain not-more than 3
l>er cent of ferric oxide nor less than 60 per cent of
aluminum oxide.

Cryolite is used not onh-^ as a source of alum, but also
for the manufacture at the same time of caustic soda,
calcium orsodium fluorides, and hydrofluoric acid. This
mineral, which in commercial quantities is found only
in southern Greenland, is a double fluoride of sodium
and aluminum, having the formula AlFj(NaF),. By
calcining cryolite with powdered limestone and lix-
iviating the frit, or by boiling cryolite with milk of
lime, sodium aluminate is obtained as one of the prod-
ucts of the reaction, and this may be converted into
"concentrated alum" by the means above described.
A modification of this consists in boiling sodium alumi-
nate liquor with powdered cryolite, through which
the sodium in each molecule is converted into sodium
fluoride and the aluminum into alumina, and then pro-
ducing "concentrated alum" by dissolving the alumina
in sulphuric acid.

When "concentrated alum" is dissolved in water and
mixed with a solution of potassium sulphate, the solu-
tion, on concentration, deposits beautiful, tran.sparent,
colorless, octahedral crystals, which have a vitreous
luster and the composition K,Als(SOj),.24H20. This
sub.stance is known as "potassium alum " or " potash
alum," and was the first complex alum recognized. It
was the first to be manufactured commerciallj', since
by this means the easily soluble aluminum sulphate
wa.s separated from the iron sulphates, and a very su-
perior article for use in dyeing was obtained. Since
purer raw material has been found, and improved
methods for purification have been devised, concen-
ti-ated alum has largely displaced the complex alums in
dyeing as well as in the other arts.

Crystallized potassium alum of the composition given
above is the type of a large number of complex alums
which may be produced by mixing a .solution of alumi-
num sulphate with a solution of an alkaline sulphate and
crystallizing out the double salt. Among these we have
in commerce crystallized ammonium and cr3'stallized
sodium alum, though the latter is not common, owing
to its being difficult to crystallize and to the fact that the
crystals, when formed, readil}- eflioresce. When these
crystallized alums are heated, the water of crystalliza-

tion, and usually a little of the sulphuric acid, is driven
off and the material falls to a white powder known as
"burnt alum," which is used in pharmacy. A similar
sodium alum which is largely used in baking powders
is prepared by mixing concentrated solutions of sodium
sulphate and aluminum sulphate, allowing them to set
in a cake, and roasting the alum to drive off the ,water,
or bj' mixing the sulphates in the solid condition and
heating them. By varying the proportions of the sul-
phates and the temperature, various desired properties
are imparted to the burnt alum, and these preparations
are sold under various trade names.

Effloresced sodium alum is sometimes known under
the name of "porous alum," but this name, in the
trade, is given to porous alum cake containing a little
sodium alum and basic aluminum sulphate, which is
made by stirring into alum cake, just before it sets, a
desired quantity of soda ash. As the aluminum sul-
phate possesses an acid reaction it reacts with the so-
dium carbonate and the carbon dioxide evolved puffs
up the mass and leaves it in a condition so that it may
be readily dissolved.

Alums may be formed with selenic and other acids in
place of the sulphuric acid of ordinary alum. More-
over, chromic, ferric, manganic, and other sulphates
form double salts with the alkali sulphates, and though
these compounds contain no aluminum whatever, they
ai'e called alums because they crystallize in the same
form, have the .same crystalline habit, the same oxy-
gen ratio, and the same number of molecules of water
of crystallization as the double sulphates of alumina
and the alkali metals. None of these numerous alums
has any commercial importance except "chrome alum,"
which has the formula K,Cr2(SO,),.24H,0.

Potash and ammonia alums were made by Charles
Lennig, of Philadelphia, in 1837, and concentrated
alum was manufactured by him in 1859. Harrison
Bros. & Co., of Philadelphia, began the manufacture of
cr\'stal alum about 1840, and they began the manufac-
ture of concentrated alum from haiKcite in 1877. The
Pennsylvania Salt Manufacturing Company began the
manufacture of concentrated alum at Natrona, Pa., in
1876, and they were the first to manufacture porous
alum.

Alums are used in dyeing, printing, tanning, paper
making, in making lakes and other pigments, in puri-
f^'ing water and sewage, as a constituent of baking
powder, in medicine, in stucco work for hardening
plaster, in photography for hardening films, in render-
ing woodand fabrics non-inflammable, in "carbonizing"
wool, in bleaching, and in the preparation of various
aluminum compounds.

The foreign conmierce in alums is shown in the fol-
lowing table, compiled from the reports of the Bureau
of Statistics of the United States Treasury Department:

IMPORTS OF ALUMS FOR CONSUMPTION: 1891 TO 1900,
INCLUSIVE.

YEAR.

Pounds.

Value.

YEAR.

Pounds.

Value.

1891

4,652,985
4,140,916
4,572,923
1,838,728
2,983,682

858,863
59,&3« 1
73,806
30,831
46,815

1896

5,525,825
5,301.514
2,787,639
1,601,829
2,186,266

886,871
96,529

1892

1897

1893

1898

36,099
14,244
19,354

1894

1899

1895

1900

And in the following tables, obtained from the same
source, are shown the quantities and values of the raw or
partlj^ manufactured materials so far as they were set
forth:

IMPORTS OF CRYOLITE FOR CONSUMPTION: 1891 TO 1900,
INCLUSIVE.

YEAR.

Tons.

Value.

YEAR.

Tons.

Value.

1891

7,129
8,298
8,459
12,756
8,685

895,405
76,350
111,796
170,215
116,273

1896

7,024
3,009
10,788
5,529
5,878

893, 198
40 056

1892

1897

1893

1898

144, 178
79,455
78,658

1894 .

1899

1895

1900

IMPORTS OF BAUXITE FOR CONSUMPTION: 1897 TO 1900,
INCLUSIVE.

YEAR.

BAUXITE, CRUDE.

ALUMINUM HYDRATE,
OR REFINED BAUXITE.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

1897

8,722,074

$14,915

1898

2,092,082
2,955,339
3,474,421

860,194

92, 019

1899

7,722,000
6,850,000

14,168
11,413

1900

109,674

LITERATURE.

Outlines of Industrial Chemistry, F. H. Thorp: Macniillan, New
York, N. Y., 1898.

Manufacture of Alum, Lucien (ieschwind: D. Van Nostrand, New
York, N. Y., 1901.

Manual of Chemical Technology, Rudulf von Wagner: D. Apple-
ton & Co., New York, N. Y., 1892.

Watts, Dictionary of Chemistry, Vol. V, Longmans, Green
& Co., London, 1869.

Group V. — Coal-Tar Products.

Notwithstanding that as early as 1816 Accum had
devi-sed a process for obtaining a volatile oil from coal
tar for use as a substitute for spirits of turpentine; that
in 1845 A. W. Hofmann had discovered that this body
contained benzene; that in 1856 a great impetus was
given to tar distilling by the discovery of anilin colors
by Perkin, since the benzol, which is the raw material
for their maimfacture, was exclusively derived from
coal tar, and that from 1806, when coal gas was intro-
duced for lighting by David Melville at Newport, R. I.,
coal tar had been a bj'-product of the industry in this
country; yet it was not until 1880 that an\' mention was
made in the United States Census Reports of these

bodies, and they are apparently given there in two

clii.s.><irication.>s, a.s follows: On page 1(X)1 of Statiwti<'.>* of
Manufactures there are reported 344,114 pound.s of
aiitlinuone of a value of !^99,242, and in the table of
speeitied indu.strle.s on page 20 of the same report, it is
stated that three works produced ''coal tar" having a
value of $4(i().8()(l, from which it is inferred that as the
original coal tar was being produced in the several hun-
dred gtvs works then exi.sting, the three works enumer-
ated were engaged in producing coal-tar products. On
pages 288 and 289 of Part III. Census of Manufactur-
ing Industries, 1890, there are reported coal-tar prod-
ucts of a value of $687,591. The establishments were
distributed as follows:

GECMJRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF FACTORIES FOR
COAL-TAR PRODUCTS: 1890.

United SUtes

New Jersey

Pennsylvania

New York

District of Columbia

Georgia

Ma.s.sachusetts and Tennessee

Value of
products.

»6S-,591

330,200
168,180
13'<,324
20,000
20,000
10,887

Per cent
of total.

48. P
24.5
20.1
2.9
2.9
1.6

At the census of 1900 there were reported 14 estab-
lishments devoted to the manufacture of coal-tar protl-
ucts, which amounted in value to $1,322,094, and 8
establishments in which this manufacture was of sec-
ondary importance, with a value of $99,626, the total
value being $1,421,720. These establishments were
distributed as follows:

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF FACTORIES FOR
COAL-TAR PRODUCTS: 1900.

8TATX8.

Number
of e.stab-

lish-
mcnts.

Average
number
of wage-
earners.

Capital.

Value of
products.

Per cent
of total.

United States

466

•1,448,622

»1, 421, 720

100.0

Missouri

3
6
3

l.io
177
33

101

381,969
661,482
26,467

389,724

416,600
396,759
44,016

666,346

29 2

New Yorii

3 2

Louisiana, Tennessee,
Ohio. California, Min-
ne.sota, Massachusetts,
and New Jersey

89.7

Of these products, chemicals having a value of
$205,047 were obtained from further action on the dis-
tillate of the coal tar. In addition, the.se factories pro-
duced tarred felt and tarred paper (in which part of
the material from the coal tar was consumed), having a
value of $442,529.

Coal tar, as its name implies, is obtained from coal,
and it is produced by the destructive distillation of coal
out of contact with the air, the other products lieing
gas, coke, and ammoniacal liquor. From the begin-
ning of the Nineteenth century the chief commercial

.source of the coal tar was found in the manufacture of
coal gas for illuminating purposes, but to-day it is also
obtained from the by-pnxluct coke ovens, while gas
producers, blast furnaces, and water-gas plants furni.sh
tars which now find commercial use.s, though they differ
in comixjsition from coal tar. In the special report on
coke for the census of 1900, it is reported that the pro-
duction of tar from the by-product coke ovens for
1899 amounted to 104,687,330 pounds, or 52,344 tons.
Although the returns for gas for 190<J are given in the
special report on gas for the census of 19(X), no .separate
returns are therein presented for the by-product of tar.
This may, however, be estimated as follows: In Table 8
of that report it is stated that the total production of
gas was 67,093,553,471 cubic feet, and in Table 9 that
over 75 per cent of the gas manufactured during the
census year was water gas. Putting the coal gas at 20
per cent, we have 13,418,710,694 cubic feet of coal gas.

The average yield of gas per ton of gas coal is 10,000
cubic feet, and dividing the volume of gas by this there
results 1,341,871 tons of coal as having been used for
making coal gas. The yield of tar per ton of coal is
about 5 per cent by weight, which gives from the above
figure 67,094 tons of tar. The total quantity of coal
tar from the by-product coke ovens and the coal-gas
industry in 1900 was, then, approximately 119,438 tons.
The quantity of "water-gas tar" may also l>e estimated
from the quantity of oil consumed, which is given in
the special report on gas as 194,857,296 gallons. Ac-
cording to Douglas,' about 25 per cent of the oil is
recovered as tar, which gives for the oil recorded above
48,714,324 gallons of tar. As, accorditig to A. H.
Elliott,* "water-gas tar" has a specific gravity of 1.1,
a gallon will weigh 9.15 pounds, and therefore the
total weight of " water-gas tar" obtained in the United
States for 1900 as derived from the data given above is
222,868 tons. No tar is reported from any other
source, though it is known that abroad the blast fur-
naces and gas producers are utilized as sources of this
material. The total computed production of coal tar
and water-gas tar for the United States for the census
year 1900 is therefore 342,306 tons. It is worth noting
that though the first by-product coke oven in the United
States was erected in 1892,* yet the industry has grown
so fast that the jield of coal tar from this source
closely approaches that from coal gas making.

In connection with these estimates it is interesting to
compare the following statement made by Lunge* in
the recent edition of his standard work: "White and
Hess (Jour. Soc. Chem. Ind., 1900, page 509), quote a
number of anah'ses, from which they conclude that
American coal tai-s aie not well adapted to distillation
for the recovery of benzol, etc. , as they are inferior in

'J. of Gas-Lighting, page 1130. 1891.

» Am. Clieiii. J., page 248. 1884.

'J. D. Pennock, J. Am. Chem. Soc., vol 21, page 681.

*Coal Tar and Ammonia, 3d ed., Appendix, page 917.

quality to European tars except as regards anthracene.
Their estimate of the production of coal tar in the
United States, 400,000 tons, is probably much too high,
since by far the greater portion of illuminating gas
made there is (carburetted) water gas. Probably the
quantity of 120,000 tons, which I gave as the produc-
tion of coal tar in the United States in 1886, is not
much, if at all, exceeded at the present time." The
amount of coal tar reported as consumed in the United
States in the census 3'ear 1900 was 22,004,650 gallons,
which at 10 pounds per gallon gives 110,023 tons.

The j'ield of tar from the manufacture of gas in
Europe in 1898 is given by Lunge' from data supplied
by Dr. Bueb, as follows:

TAR PRODUCED IN MAKING GAS IN EUROPE IN 1898.

COUNTRY.

Tons.

COLSTEY.

Tons.

1,120,000

20,000

Italy

16,660
16,650

666,650
166,650
135,000
41,500
21,650

Holland

15,000

13,500

Austria-Hvingarv

Switzerland

6,750

The data of the census of 1900 places the United
States fourth in the list of countries in the amount of
tar produced in the distillation of coal for the manu-
facture of gas.

It is of historical interest that the first English patent
referring to the de,structive distillation of coal (that of
John Joachum (sic) Becher and Henry Serle, dated
August 19, 1681) does not treat of the manufacture of
illuminating gas, but of "a new way of makeing pitch
and tarre out of pit coale, never before found out or-
used by any other," and this German chemist, Johann
Joachim Becher, appears to have been the originator of
the coal-tar industry, he having employed the coal tar
as a substitute for "Swedish tar from firwood" in tar-
ring wood and ropes. The French metallurgist de
Gensanne^ describes a furnace in use before 1768 at
Sulzbach, near Saarbriicken, for coking coal and recov-
ering tar, the light oil from the tar being used for
burning in lamps.

Notwithstanding the various inventions for producing
coal tar, it is, according to Lunge " —

Certain that the manufacture of coal tar was never carried out on
any extensive scale until it appeared as a necessary by-product in
the manufacture of illuminating gas from coal, the idea of which
seems to have occurred toward the end of the last century at the
same time to the Frenchman Lebon and the Englishman William
Murdoch. The former had already recommended the use of tar
for preserving timber; but it was the latter who, along with his
celebrated pupil Samuel Clegg, really laid the foundation of the
enormous industry of gas making. The first private gas works
was erected in 1798 at the engineering works of Bolton & Watts;

•Coal Tar and Ammonia, 3d ed., page 17; ibid., page 4.
'De Gensanne, "Traits de la fonte des Mines, Paris, 1770,
Vol. I, ch. 12.

'Coal Tar and Ammonia, pages 11-13.

the first public gas works in London in the year 1813; in Paris,
1815, and in Berlin, 1826.

The tar formed in the manufacture of coal gas necessarily forced
itself upon the notice of the gas manufacturer, since it could not
be thrown away without causing a "nui.«ance." It was probably
from the first burnt under the retorts, but the method of doing
this without giving very much trouble was not understood then.
Other quantities, no doubt, were used, in lieu of wood tar, as a
cheap paint for wood or metals, but it must have been soon found
out that in the crude state it is not well adapted for this purpose.
* * * It was also quickly perceived that in this respect tar is
improved by boiling it down to some extent, and as early as 1815
Accum showed that if this boiling down is carried out in clo.sed
vessels (stills) a volatile oil is obtained which may be employed
as a cheap substitute for spirits of turpentine. But this does not
seem to have been carried out to any great extent, and coal tar
remained, for more than a generation from the first introduction
of gas lighting, a nuisance and hardly anything else.

In Germany the first more extensive employment of gas tar was
for making roofing felt, for which purpose it has to be deprived of
water and the more volatile constituents. Instead of condensing
these, they were at first almost everywhere, and later on in many
cases, removed by evaporating the tar in open vessels, thus creat-
ing a considerable risk from fire. In Germany, Briinner, of
Frankfort, was the first (in 1846) to condense the more volatile
tar oils, from which he prepared a detergent, long after known by
his name, and consisting principally of benzt^ne.

In England, where the manufacture of illuminating gas origi-
nated, and where it has always been, and still is, carried on to a
very much greater extent than on the Continent, a more extensive
industrial employment for coal tar was first opened out by the in-
vention of Bethell (1838) for preserving timber, especially railway
sleepers, by impregnation with the heavy oil distilled from gas tar.
From that time dates the introduction of tar distilling on a large
scale. The light oils may have been lost even here in some cases,
but more usually they were condensed and employed as "coal-tar
naphtha" for burning and for dissolving India rubber.

The day of the light tar oils came after A. W. Hofmann (1845)
had shown the presence of benzene in them, but especially when
Mansfield, in his patent specification (1847), for the first time
accurately described the composition of these oils, along with a
process for preparing benzene in a pure state and on a large scale,
and with proposals for utilizing the tar oils of lowest boiling point
for lighting purposes. The industrial preparation of benzene was
soon followed by that of nitrotenzene, at that time only employed
as a substitute for the essential oil of bitter almonds, and known
by the French fancy name of "essence de Mirbane." But all these
applications produced only a limited demand for the light oils
which could be made from the rapidly increasing quantities of gas
tar; so that the latter, except in a few instances locally, did not
attain any considerable commercial value. But a sudden impetus
was given to tar distilling in 1856 by the discovery of the anilin
colors, the material which forms their starting point, benzol, being
exclusively derived from coal tar.

Coal tar is an extremely complex mixture of chem-
ical compounds, some of which have not yet been even
isolated. As before stated, the tars from other pro-
cesses than the destructive distillation of coal contain
other constituents, and varying quantities of similar
constituents, from those existing in coal tar. Likewise,
coal tar will vary in its composition with the coal which
is distilled and the manner in which the distillation is
carried out. The "products" are obtained from the
coal tar by fractional distillation, and the first products
are crude naphtha and light oils of a specific gravity
below 1.000, distilling over below 180^ C. ; dead oils and

creosote oils of a specific gravity above 1.000. distilling
ovpi- between 180 V. and 270° C.; green or anthracene
oils, distilling over between 270° C. and 360- C. ; and soft
pitch, which is left in the still.

The proportions of yields from different coals is shown
in the following tables given by J. D. Pennock,' chem-
ist in charge of the oldest by-product coke-oven plant
in the United States:

ANALYSES OF COAL.

Per cent.

Percent.

34.20

87.15

8.65

0.93

32.68

59.40

Ash

7.92

1.19

ANALYSES OF TAR.

Specific gravity

Water

Light oil

Creosoting oil . .

Dead oil

Naphthalene...

Anthracene

Soft pitch

1.163

Per cent.

2.40
4.60
1.26

22.81
6.00
0.60

68.80

1.203

Per cent.

2.70
2.03
0.50
16.40
Trace.
Trace.
70.50

1.205

Percent.

1.40
3.12
0.29

26.09
0.20
0.19

67.40

1.231

Percent.

1.10
1.63
0.34

19.23
1.72
0.24

74.14

Tars A and B, made from Coals A and B, whose anal-
yses are given above, show what diilerences may exist
in tars made from coals very similar in composition as
shown by proximate analysis. Tars I and II represent
two tars from gas works. They also vary greatly in
composition. As a usual thing, they are found to be of
much higher specific gravity and to contain less light
oils than tars from the by-product coke oven, making
them inferior as sources of benzene and for the manu-
ture of tarred paper.

To obtain the desired commercial products, the dis-
tillate must be subjected to further treatment. Thus
the light oil on fractional distillation, gives "benzol"
to the extent, for the coke-oven practice, of from 0.6 to
0.9 per cent of the weight of the coal used. According
to Lunge," "the final products of general trade into
which the crude benzol should be split up without
I'esidues, are the following:

FDBNISHES DI8TILLATE PEE CENT UP TO—

Specific

100».

120°.

180».

180°.

200°.

gravity.

90 per cent benzol

0.885

fiO per cent benzol

0 880

Solvent naphtlia

96"

0.876

Heavy naphtha

0 880

' J. Am. Chem. Soc., vol. 21, page 696. 1899.
'Coal Tar and .\mmonia, M e<i., page 588.

"Ninety percent benzol" is a product of which 90
per cent by volume distills before the thei'mometer rise*
above 100° C. A good sample should not begin to dis-
till under 80° C, and should not yield more than from
20 to 30 per cent at 85^ C, or much more than 90 jH-r
cent at 10(J° C, but it .should distill completely below
120° C. A 90 per cent benzol of good quality contains
about 70 per cent of benzene, 24 per cent of toluene,
including a little xylene, and from 4 to 6 per cent of
carbon disulphide and light hydrocarbons.

"Fifty per cent benzol," often called 50 90 benzol,
is a product of which 50 per cent by volume di.stills
over at a temperature not exceeding 100° C, and 40
per cent more (making 90 per cent in all) below 120° C.
It should wholly distill below 130° C. It contains a
larger proportion of toluene and xylene than the 90 per
cent benzol. It is nearly free from carbon disulphide,
and contains comparatively little of the light hydro-
carbons. It is employed for producing the heavy
anilin used in manufacturing ro.saniline or magenta.

"Thirty per cent benzol" is a product of which 30 per
cent distills below 100° C. and about 60 per cent more
pa.ssing over between 100° and 120° C. It consists
chiefly of toluene and xylene with smaller proportions
of benzene and cumene.

" Solvent naphtha" consists of xj'lene, pseudocumene,
and mesitylene and is used in dissolving caoutchouc in
the manufacture of watei-proof materials and other
articles.

From these " light oils," by fractional distillation and
purification with .sulphuric acid, water, milk of lime, and
caustic .soda, pure benzene, QH,, toluene, C,!!,, and
xylene, CgHjo, may be obtained, the benzene being crys-
tallized out.

According to Pennock' the light oil obtained is from
6.6 pounds to 8.5 pounds per long ton of coal and it
varies with the percentage of volatile matter in the
coal. The light oil contains from 58 to 63 per cent of
benzene, divided thus:

Per cent.

90 per cent benzol 57

50 per cent benzol ." 2

Solvent naphtha 4

The dead oils and creosote oils which compose the
material that is collected from the coal-tar distillate be-
tween 180° and 270° C. contain the "middle oil," and
this fraction on further treatment yields crystallized
carbolic acid, cresols, heavy solvent naphtha, pj-ridine
bases, and naphthalene. In practice this is divided
into further fractions, the fraction between 240° and
270° C. furnishing the creosote oil, which is a commer-
cial source of naphthalene, coal-tar creosote, and the
cresols. The naphthalene, which exists to the extent
of 40 per cent or more in the creosote oil, is removed
by chilling the oil, which causes the naphthalene to
crystallize out, leaving the cresols. The crystals are

•J. Am. Chem. Soc., vol. 21, page 703.

then drained and pressed and purified further by sub-
limation.

The heavy coal-tar oil is used not only as a source of
the more valuable products obtained by rectification or
by ' ' breaking " in red-hot tubes, but also for ' ' pickling "
timber; softening hard pitch; preparing varnishes; pre-
paring cheap mineral paints, where the heavy oil is
used in place of linseed oil; as an antiseptic; in the
blue steaming of bricks; in carburetting gas; in the
manufacture of lampblack; and by burning, as a source
of heat and light.

The fraction between 150^^ and 200° furnishes the
carbolic acid, it being obtained by treating the oil with
caustic soda, through which sodium phenolate is formed,
which sepai'ates from the oil. The sodium phenolate
is drawn off and then decomposed by sulphuric acid or
carbon dioxide and the carbolic acid set free. The
crude carbolic acid is now purified by distillation or
other means and the pure carbolic acid, or phenol, which
crystallizes in colorless crystals, obtained. Pure car-
bolic acid is used in the manufacture of the dyestuffs,
picric acid, and corallin, and of some azo dyes, also in
the manufacture of salicylic acid, but most of the car-
bolic acid, both pure and crude, is used for antiseptic
purposes. The oil drawn off from the sodium phe-
nolate contains some of the higher homologues of ben-
zene, and naphthalene with pyridine bases. In com-
merce it furnishes principally naphthalene, pyridine
bases, and solvent naphtha of various degrees, the treat-
ment being determined by the products sought. The
pyridine bases are used in the manufacture of pharma-
ceutical preparations and in denaturizing grain alcohol
for use in the arts.

The anthracene oil, which is the portion of the coal-tar
distillate passing over above 270° C, is known also as
green oil, green grease, and red oil, and it contains
naphthalene, methyl naphthalene, anthracene, phenan-
threne, acenaphthene, diphenyl, methyl anthracene,
pyrene, chrysene, retene, fluoranthene, chrysogen,
benzerythrene, carbazol, and acridine, together with a
mixture of liquid high-boiling oils, of whose composi-
tion nothing is j'et known, the whole forming a mass
rather thinner than butter, filled with crystalline scales
of a greenish-yellow color. The anthracene oil is
treated by cooling and pressing, the liquid portion
being sent to the heavy oil to be reworked with it.
The solid portion is either sold as rough anthracene or
it is fui'ther purified by washing with solvents which
dissolve the impurities. On oxidation anthracene
yields anthraquinone, which is used for the production
of alizarine and other coal-tar colors. According to
Pennock' there is as yet no market for anthracene in
this country, but it is necessary that some anthracene
should be present in coal tar pitch in order to produce a
pitch of the right consistency for roofing purposes.

As indicated, the naphthalene is accumulated in the

' J. Am. Chem. Soc, vol. 21, page 697.'

creosote oil and extracted from it in the crude condi-
tion by freezing and pressing, when it is purified by
sublimation. It is used in the manufacture of artificial
colors and as a substitute for camphor in protecting
goods from the ravages of moths.

The coal-tar pitch, which forms the residue in the
.still, is used in the manufacture of roofing composi-
tions and tarred felt and tarred paper; incorporated
with coal or coke dust, it is fashioned into briquettes
for use as fuel; dissolved in creosote oil or other sol-
vents, it is used as a paint for iron and woodwork; and
it is used as a substitute for asphalt in street pavements.

Benzene is employed as a solvent in the manufacture
of nitrobenzene and diniti'obenzene, which are used in
several arts and in the manufacture of many benzene
derivatives. One important product is anilin, which
is obtained by the reduction of mononitrobenzene.
The anilin of commerce, which is known as anilin oil,
is obtained from benzol, and this, as before stated, is a
mixture of different cyclic hydrocarbons, the particu-
lar mixture used being determined by the color which
it is sought to produce. In this case, as with pure
benzene, the mixture is nitrated by exposure to a mix-
ture of nitric and sulphuric acids, and the nitrosubstitu-
tion compounds that are produced are reduced by
exposure to tin and hA'drochloric acid or some other
source of nascent hydrogen. Benzol is also used as a
cleansing agent and as a vehicle in paint.

The niti'osubstitution compounds, and amido bodies,
like anilin oil, represent in this group the "chemicals
made from coal-tar distillery products."

The foreign commerce in coal-tar products is set
forth in the following tables, compiled from the reports
of the Bureau of Statistics of the Treasury Department
on imported merchandise entered for consumption into
the United States:

IMPORTS FOR CONSUMPTION OF COAL TAR DURING THE
YEARS ENDING JUNE 30, 1891 TO 1896.

TEAS.

COAL TAB, CRUDB,
AND PITCH.

Barrels.

Value.

1891

89,313
117,066
102, 136

96,068
112, 536
139,976

$263, 593

1892 .. .

302 791

1898

244,291
218 514

1894

189i)

247,957
288,750

1896

IMPORTS FOR CONSUMPTION OF COAL-TAR PRODUCTS,
NOT MEDICINAL AND NOT COLORS OR DYES,' DURING
THE YEARS ENDING JUNE 30, 1898 TO 1900.

YEAR.

Value.

1898

»228,037
393,602

1899

1900

397,780

> These preparations are known as benzol, toluol, naphthalene, xylol, phenol,
cresol, toluidine, xylldlne, cumidine, biuitrotoluol. binitrooenzol, benzidine,
tolidine, dianisidine, naphthol, naphthylamine, diphenylamine, benzaldehyde,
benzyl chloride, resorcin, nitrobeuzol, and nitrotoluol.

IMPORTS FOK CONSUMPTION OF PREPARATIONS OF
COAL TAR, EXCKPT MEDICINAL, AND PRODUCTS OF,
NOT SPECIALLY PROVIDED FOR, FOR THE YEARS
ENDING JUNE 1, 1896 TO 1900.

VIAR.

Value.

INK

tl87,873

1896

313,943

1897

1896

184, 416

1899

221, 101

1900

274,946

LUeralure.

A Treatise on Chemistry, by H. E. Roeooe and C. Schorlemmer,
Vol. Ill: New York, 1887.

The Rise and Development of Organic Chemistry, by Carl Schor-
lemmer: I>ondon, 1894.

A Handtook of Industrial Organic Chemistry, by Samuel P.
Sadtler: Philadelphia, 1895.

The Retort Coke Oven and the Chemistry of ita By-Products, by
J. D. Pennock, .7. Aiiier. Chem. Soc, 21, 678-70.5. 1899.

The Spirit of Organic Chemistry, by Arthur Lachman: New
York, 1899.

Coal Tar and .\mmonia, by George Lunge: 3d ed. New York,
1900.

Group VI. — Cyanides.

In thi.s classification are included potassium ferro-
cyanide, potassium ferricyanide, potassium and ammo-
nium sulphocj'anates (known commercially a.s sulpho-
cj'anides), and potassium, sodium, and other cyanides.
No .separate account was taken of the cyanides at any
census previous to 1900. At the cen.sus of 1900 returns
were made only for potassium ferrocjanide and for
pota.ssium cyanide. Twelve establishments were re-
ported in which the cyanides were the principal prod-
ucts, the value being $1,466,061, and 6 establishments
in which they fonned secondary products, the value
being $12,8-14. These 18 establishments employed
$1,322,719 of capital and 391 wage-earners and pro-
duced $1,595,505 of product. They were distributed
as follows:

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF
FACTORIES: 1900.

CYANIDE

STATES.

Number
of estab-

li.sh-
ments.

Average
number
of wagc-
eamen*.

Capital.

Value of
product.

Per cent
of total.

United States

391

SI, 322, 719

SI, 695, 505

100.0

New Jersey

6
4

166
107
43

633.001
317,816
71,750

400,252

1,053,472
303,245
86,852

151,936

66.0
19.0
5.5

9.6

Pennsylvania

Ohio

Maryland, Massachusetts,
and Missouri

Of the products reported, 6,165,407 pounds, having
a value of $994,014, were potassium ferrocyanide, and
2,317,280 pounds, having a value of $601,491, were the
so-called potassium cyanide. There were consumed in
this manufacture 9,315,080 pounds of potassium car-

bonate, having a value of $279,602; 3,456 tons of hoofs
and of horn wa.ste, having a value of $87,502; 19,417
tons of scrap leather, having a value of $150,213; l,2W
tons of spent iron oxide from the gas works, having a
value of $:^,000; 300,000 pounds of sodium, having a
value of $93,183; 2,400 bu.shels of lime, having a value
of $480; $9,520 worth of scrap iron, and 2,401,180
pounds of pota.ssium ferrocyanide.

Pota.ssium ferrocyanide (ferrocyanide of pota.ssium;
yellow prussiate of pota.sh; blood-lye salt) was di.scov-
ered by Macquer in 1752, through acting upon pru.ssian
blue with an alkali. It is made by fusing potassium
carbonate in cast-iron vessels and adding to the fused
mass a mixture of nitrogenous organic matter, such as
horns, hair, blood, wool waste, and leather scraps, with
from 6 to 8 per cent of iron turnings or borings, until
the mixture added equals about li parts of the potash.
The fiLsed mass, when cooled, contains, among other
substances, pota.ssium cyanide, carbonate, and sulphide,
iron sulphide, metallic iron, and separated carbon.
This mass is broken up and digested with water at 85° C.
for several hours, during which reactions take place by
which the potassium ferrocyanide is formed. The solu-
tion is clarified and the potassium ferrocyanide purified
bj' crystallization, when it appears in fine large yellow
crystals, having the formula K,Fe(CN),.3HjO.

Pota.ssium ferrocyanide is also prepared from the
spent oxide of iron from gas works' purifiers, thereby
utilizing the nitrogen compounds that have been taken
up or formed during the process of purification. In
this operation the oxide is lixiviated with warm water
to remove the ammonium sulphocyanate and other
ammonium compounds, and the residue is mixed with
quicklime and heated by steam in closed vessels to
100" C, through which calcium ferrocyanide is formed,
and separated by lixiviation. By treating this with
potassium chloride, the difficultly .soluble calcium
pota.ssium ferrocyanide is formed, and by decomposing
this with potassium carbonate the potassium ferro-
cyanide results.

Potassium ferrocj'anide was manufactured on a com-
mercial scale by Carter & Scattergood in Philadelphia,
before 1834. It is used largely for making prussian
blue, pota.ssium cyanide and ferricyanide, prussic acid,
in calico printing, in dj^eing, for ca.se-hardening iron,
and in white gunpowder and pj'rotechnics.

Potassium ferricyanide (ferricyanide of potassium;
red prussiate of potash) was discovered by Leopold
Gmelin in 1822,' and is formed by pa.ssing chlorine gas
through a solution of potassium ferrocyanide until the
solution will no longer give a blue reaction with a ferric
salt. Or the salt maj' be formed 1)3- exposing dry pow-
dered ferrocyanide to the action of chlorine gas; or by
acting on a calcium and potassium ferrocyanide solu-
tion with potassium permanganates; or. according to

'Schw. J., vol. 34, page 325.

Lunge,' by boiling a solution of the ferrocyanide with
lead peroxide, while a stream of carbon dioxide is passed
through the solution. Potassium ferricyanide crystal-
lizes without water of crystallization in blood-red
prisms. It is very soluble, yielding an intensely yel-
low solution which forms the blue pigment, known as
Turnbull's blue, with ferrous salts.

Carter & Scattergood were manufacturing red prus-
siate of potash on a commercial scale at Philadelphia in
1846. When in solution with caustic potash, it is a
powerful oxidizing agent, and as such is used in calico
printing as a "discharge" on indigo and other dyes.
It also forms a part of the sensitive coating for photo-
graphic "blue-print" papers, and has been recommended
for use with potassium cyanide in the extraction of
gold from its ores.

Ammoniimi sulphocyanate (sulphocyanate of ammo-
nium; ammonium thiocyanate; ammonium sulphocya-
nide), the acid of which was first observed by Bucholz
in 1799, is prepared by heating carbon disulphide and
auunonium hydroxide to 125° C. in an autoclave until
the pressure rises to 15 atmospheres, when the ammo-
nium dithiocar hamate is formed. The pressure is now
released and the autoclave heated to llO'^ C. , when the
dithiocar bamate is decomposed and the products dis-
tilled over. The ammonium sulphocyanate produced
is obtained by evaporating the liquid remaining in the
still in tin vessels and crystallizing out.

As pointed out above, ammonium sulphocyanate is
also obtained by lixiviating the spent iron oxide used
in purifying illuminating gas. The salt crystallizes in
colorless plates which are very soluble in water and
alcohol. It is used as a source of other sulphocyanates
and in dyeing, to prevent the injurious action of iron
on the color.

Among the sulphocyanates produced from it is the
barium sulphocyanate which results from heating
ammonium sulphocyanate with barium hydroxide solu-
tion under slight pressure; and this barium salt is used
generally for the manufacture of potassium and alumi-
num sulphocyanates, which are used in textile dyeing
and printing.

Potassium cyanide (cyanide of potassium) has been
generally prepared by fusing potassium ferrocyanide
with potassium carbonate until the evolution of gas
ceases. Potassium cyanide, potassium cyanate,' carbon
dioxide, and metallic iron are formed. The metallic
iron sinks to the bottom of the crucible and the fused
mixture of cyanide and cyanate is run oflf. Part of the
cyanate maj^'be reduced to cyanide by adding powdered
charcoal to the fused mass, or it may be reduced by
metallic zinc or sodium; or the cyanide may be extracted
from the mass by a solvent such as alcohol, acetone, or
carbon disulphide. By fusing the potassium ferrocy-

'Ding. poly. J., vol. 238, page 75.
' Gmelin, vol. 7, page 413.

anide with sodium carbonate a mixture of sodium and
potassium cyanide known under the name of "cyan-
salt " may be produced. An almost pure cyanide can
be obtained by heating the ferrocyanide per se accord-
ing to the following equation:

K,Fe(CN),=4 KCN+N,+FeC,

but this method entails the loss of one-third of the ni-
trogen in the ferrocyanide, and to avoid the waste of
nitrogen Erlenmeyer proposed to add the proper
amount of an alkali metal to the melted ferrocyanide,
giving for sodium the following reaction:

K,Fe(CN),+2 Na=4 KCN+2 NaCN+Fe

and it is in this way that most of the so-called chem-
ically pure potassium cyanide now sold is made, though
it consists of a mixture of potassium and sodium cj-a-
nides. It also contains a considerable quantity of potas-
sium carbonate, which is added to it during the course
of manufacture to reduce its strength, for the combined
cyanides produced as above described have a higher
percentage of cyanogen than chemically pure potassium
cyanide could possibly have. The carbonate is added
in sufficient amount to reduce the cyanogen contents to
from 39 to 40 per cent, which is equivalent to from 98
to 100 per cent potassium cyanide.

Other processes have been devised for using sodium
in making cyanides. One is to first convert the sodium
into sodamine, thus: 2 Na+2 NHs = 2 NaNH,+H, by
heating it in contact with ammonia gas, and then heat-
ing the amine with carbon to form the cyanide thus:
NaNH2+C=NaCN-(-H2. Another and later method by
which it is claimed a better yield is obtained, is to form
a stable cyanamid, at a temperature of about 400^ C. ,
from the sodamine and carbon, thus:

2 NaNH,+C=Na,N,C+2 H,,

and then i-eacting on the cyanamid with a further quan-
tity of carbon at a temperature of 800° C. to form the
cyanide according to the equation:

Na,N,C+C=2 NuCN.

Each of these methods requires a large amount of
expensive sodium for a given output of cyanide. J. D.
Darling has lately devised a process of using sodium in
the synthetic production of sodium cyanide, which gives
good results and in which the larger portion of the
metallic base is furnished in the form of caustic soda,
and but a small amount of sodium is needed to finish
the process. It is claimed that by this process a mod-
erate-sized sodium plant can produce enough metal to
manufacture a large amount of cyanide.

Potassium cyanide has been commercially manufac-
tured by passing nitrogen over an intensely heated
mixture of charcoal and potassium carbonate. Cya-
nides have also been produced by conducting ammonia

gas through vertical retorts, heated to a red heat, and
coiiUiiniiig a inixturo of charcoal and alkali carbonates.
Potiussiuni cyanide is sonietinies oiitained in considera-
t)lo (juantity from blast furnace."*, being foniied from the
jiotassium carbonate in the ash of the fuel.' Because of
this reaction between carbon and nitrogen in the presence
of alkaline salts numerous effoi-ts have been made to
utilize the reaction in making the atmospheric nitrogen
available.

Potassium cyanide was commercially manufactured
by the H. V. Davis Chemical Works, at New Bedford,
Mass., in 1852. As it is a powerful reducing agent,
potassium cyanide is used as a flux in assa3'ing and in
metallurgy; as a solvent of silver sulphide it is u.sed in
cleaning silver articles; it has been used as a fixing
solution in photography; for the preparation of Grdnat
soluble and potassium i.sopurpurate in dyeing; and, as
it forms a soluble double cyanide with silver, gold, cop-
per, and other metals, it is much used in electroplating;
but its largest use is now found in the cyanide process
for the extraction of gold from its ores.

The foreign commerce in the cyanides is set forth in
the following tables, compiled from the publications of
the Bureau of Statistics of the Treasury Department of
the United States:

IMPORTS FOR CONSUMPTION DURING THE YEARS
ENDING JUNE 30, 1891 TO 1900.

YEAR.

YELLOW PRUSSIATK
or POTASH.

RED PBUSSIATK OF
POTASH.

Pounds.

Value.

Founds.

Value.

1891

2,223,164
1,302,632
1,047,910
699,103
878,727
1,066,562
3,2.'i2,931
1,340,305
1,809,089
l.TTl.SM

(368,366
232,058
206,259
114,826
161,009
157,467
369,037
132,608
2(M,974
224,274

36,826
35,933
16,679
11,136
26,703
30,890
69,087
77,246
62,697
53,716

S10,660
11,111
5,743
3,339
7,693
8,679
14,893
18,674
16,211
12,964

1892

1893

1894

1895

1896

1897

1898

1899

1900

IMPORTS FOR CONSUMPTION DURING THE YEARS
ENDING JUNE 30, 1897 TO 1900.

IWT 16,232

18»8 549,697

.,„ 1,102,780

1900 j 2,0«M,974

CYANIDE OF POTASH.

Pounds. Value.

tM.190
120,262
263,613
444,703

LITEBATURB.

Handbook of Chemistry, by Leopold Gmelin, Vol. VII: London,
1852.

Encyclopedia chimique, by M. Fremy, vol. 2: Paris, 1886.

On the Fixation of Atmospheric Nitrogen, by A. A. Breneman.
J. Am. Chem. Soc., 11, 2-»8. 1889.

A Dictionary of Chemistry, Henry Watts, vol. 2: London, 1870.

'Blozam's Chemistry, page 619. 1890.

No. 210 3

Manual of Chemical Technology, by R, von Wagner: Ixmdon,
1892.

Outlines of Industrial Chemistry, by F. H. Thorp: New York,
1898.

The Cyanide Process for the Extraction of Gold, by M. Eissler:
I>ondon, 1898.

Die Cyan-Verbindungen, by F. FeuerlMch: Leipzig, 1896.

Manufacture and Uses of Metallic Sodium, by J. D. Darling,
J. Frk. Inst., 1.53, 65-74. 1902.

The Composition of Commercial Cyanide of Potassium, by Rus-
sell W. Moore, J. Soc. Ch. Ind., 21, 391-392. 1902.

Group VII. — Wood Dlstillation.

Wood distillation as now classified for census pur-
poses deals solely with that treatment of wood by which
wood alcohol, acetic acid, acetate of lime, pyroligueous
acid, and charcoal, or any of these, are produced.
This interpretation was given to it in 1880, the first
census at which separate returns were set forth for the
industry. The manufacture proceeds in two stages:
First, the production of crude wood alcohol or wood
spirits and crude acetate of lime; second, the refining
of the alcohol, and the refining of the acetate of lime, or
the production therefrom of acetic acid or acetone.
The refining processes are usually carried out at other
works than those in which the crude materials are pro-
duced, but while in the census reports the alcohol
refineries remain identified and classified with the wood
distillation works, the factories where the acetate of
lime is treated are classified with "chemicals, acids."
With this preface it can be stated that 99 establishments
were reported as producing some of the crude sub-
stances enumerated above during the census year 1900.
Of these, 84 were regular wood-distilling establish-
ments and produced of crude alcohol 4,191,379 gallons,
having a value of $1,660,061; of acetate of lime
81,702,000 pounds, having a value of $926,358; and of
charcoal 14,428,182 bushels, having a value of $612,009.

These works employed $4,858,824 of capital, and
1,268 wage-earners. There were 9 establishments re-
porting the production of the crude material and the
refining of the alcohol in the same factory; and these
establishments produced of refined alcohol 637,856
gallons, having a value of $370,513; of acetate of lime
5,124,000 pounds, having a value of $54,928; and of
charcoal 2,726,120 bushels, having a value of $114,663.
They employed $760,156 of capital and 254 wage-
earners. Besides these there were 9 establishments
engaged in refining wood alcohol onh-, producing
2,400,284 gallons of refined alcohol, having a value of
$1,926,385, and employing $1,098,719 of capital, and
52 wage-earners. Finally, there were 6 other estab-
lishments engaged in the production of pyroligueous
acid or pyrolignite of iron as incidental to other manu-
facturing processes, the total quantity of pyroligueous
acid reported from all sources being 182,446 gallons,
valued at $9,481; of dye liquors 308,400 gallons, valued
at $29,440, and of sundries, such as wood creosote.

wood oil, ashes, tar, and the like, amounting in value
to $71,452.

At the first census of this industry in 1880 only crude
materials were reported. At the census of 1890 refined
wood alcohol was reported for the first time, and it was
then stated that the total output of crude alcohol was
found by adding to that produced at the "acid facto-
ries" that which was produced and refined in the same
establishment. Proceeding in this way for the 9 estab-
lishments reported above for 1900 as producing the
crude alcohol and refining it in the same establishment,
and converting the refined 97 per cent alcohol into crude
82 per cent alcohol at a value of 42 cents per gallon, a
total is obtained for these establishments of 754,584
gallons of crude alcohol having a value of $316,925.
By taking, in these instances, the per cent of the total
value for all products added in the refining of the
alcohol, the proportion of capital and labor devoted to
the production of the crude material is found to be, for
these 9 establishments, $641,052 of capital and 219
wage-earners. There were, therefore, 93 factories pro-
ducing crude alcohol, in which $5,499,876 of capital and
1,487 wage-earners were employed. The total output
thus ascertained is compared with the returns for the
previous censuses in the following table:

WOOD DISTILLATION, CRUDE MATERIAL PRODUCED:
1880 TO 1900.

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments.

WOOD ALCOHOL.

ACETATE OF LIME.

CHARCOAL.

Oalions.

Value.

Pounds,

Value.

Bushels.

Value.

1880

17
53

$86,274

688,764

1,976,986

6,593,009
26, 778, 415
86,826,000

$166,892
315, 430
981,286

$31, 770

1890

i, 116,075
4, 940, 963

1900....

17,164,302

726,672

The increase of 1890 over 1880 in acetate of lime was
306.2 per cent in quantity and 101 per cent in value.
The increase for 1900 over 1890 was 224.2 per cent in
quantity and 211.1 per cent in value. The increase for
1890 over 1880 in wood alcohol was 698.3 per cent in
value. The increa.se for 1900 over 1890 was 343.2 per
cent in quantity and 187 per cent in value.

These establishments were distributed as follows:

WOOD DISTILLATION, GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION
OF WORKS PRODUCING CRUDE PRODUCTS: 1900.

STATE.

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments.

Average
number
of wage-
earners.

Value of
products.

Per cent
of total.

1,487

$3,833,266

100.0

878

354

169

2,339,536

786,252

505,069

18,409

184,000

61.3

New York

20.3

13.2

North Carolina

0.4

New Jersey, Indiana, and Massachu-
setts

4.8

Only the number of i-efineries and quantity of prod-
ucts were reported for 1890, and only with these can

the present condition of the refined wood-alcohol in-
dustry be compared, but this is suflicient to show how
marked the growth has been.

PRODUCTION OF REFINED WOOD ALCOHOL: 1890 AND

1900.

TEAR.

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments.

Gallons.

Value.

1890

4
18

166, 842
3,038,140

1900

$2, 296, 898

The increase of 1900 over 1890 is more than seven-
teenfold.

Although wood is u.sually spoken of as consisting of
cellulose, it really consists of cellulose associated with
a great variety of other organic substances, the kind
differing with the different species of wood, and it is
only necessary to recall the various gums, resins, tan-
nins, sugars, and coloring matters found in commerce,
which are obtained by simple processes of extraction
from wood, to make this fact especially apparent.
When subjected to heat out of contact with the air, the
constituents of the wood ai'e decomposed into liquids,
gases, and a solid residue, and this process has been
resorted to for ages as a means for obtaining charcoal.
During the middle ages it became known that wood
vinegar or pyroligneous acid could be obtained by dis-
tilling wood, but the identity of the acetic acid present
with that obtained by the fermentation of alcohol was
not known until 1802, when it was established by
Thenard. The presence of wood spirit in the. distillate
from wood was di.scovered by Robert Boj'le, in 1661,
but its analogy to grain alcohol was first recognized by
Taylor in 1812, and its composition was definitely fixed
by Dumas and Peligot in 1831. Although charcoal,
acetic acid, and methyl alcohol are the principal
commercial products of the wood distillation industry,
there is also produced, besides methyl alcohol, other
alcohols, acetic acid and other acids, furfural and other
aldehydes, acetone and other ketones, methyl acetate
and other esters, methj'lamine and other amines, wood-
tar creosote containing guaiacol and other phenols, and
various hydrocarbons.

Originally wood was treated for charcoal alone by
charring it in heaps or in kilns, thus allowing all the
other products named above to go to waste. This proc-
ess is still carried on, but before the middle of the
Nineteenth century the process of distillation in retorts,
by which the acetic acid in the form of pyroligneous
acid, pyrolignite of iron, or acetate of lime, and the
wood spirits were recovered, was well established in
Europe. The manufacture of pyroligneous acid was
begun in the United States by James Ward in 1830, at
North Adams, Mass. The manufacture of acetate of
lime and methyl alcohol was started in the United
States about 1867 by James A. Emmons and A. S.

Saxon, in Crawford County, Pa., and in 1874 George
C. Edwards «>st4vl)lislied the Burce}' Chemical Works
at liintrhiiinton, N. Y.,' to refine the crude wood
spirit produced by the various acetate manufacturers.
In 1876 Dr. H. M. Pierce obtained the tirst of a series
of United States letters patent rehiting to inventions
in this industry, which ho was the tirst to apply to
the recovery of the by-products from the smoke of
the charcoal kilns in Michigan, where charcoal was
being produced for use in t)last furnaces. From that
time he was most active in the promotion of the wootl
distillation industry, and largely contributed to the
revolution which has since been effected in our foreign
commerce in the products of this industry.

The wood us«!d for the making of wood alcohol and
acetate of lime is hard wood, preferably oak, maple,
birch, and beech. It is cut in 50-inch lengths, so that
a cord of wood in this industry measures 48 by 48 by 50
inches. It should be seasoned two and one-half years
before "burning," to get the best results. The wood
is burned in retorts, in ovens, or in kilns. The retorts
are cylindrical, are made of three-eighths inch steel, 9
feet long by .50 inches in diameter, and are provided
with a large, tightly fitting door at one end and an
outlet pipe about 15 inches in diameter at the other
end. The retorts are set horizontally in pairs in brick-
work, and batteries of from 6 to 16 pairs are common.
The cord wood is fed through the door and carefully
stacked so as to completely fill the retort. The ovens
consist of rectangular iron chambers set in pairs in
brickwork and provided with large doors at one end
and three or more delivery pipes on the side of each
oven. They are usually 27 feet long, 6 feet wide, and
7 feet high inside, and rails are laid upon the floor of
the oven ))y which steel cars loaded with cord wood may
be run in. These cars each hold 2i cords of wood, and
an oven of the above dimensions will receive two such
cars. Ovens, however, are in use in this country that
are from 48 to 50 feet in length and capable of receiving
four cars at one charge. The retorts are heated from
beneath by burning wood, coal, or charcoal, supple-
mented by the tar, red oil, and gas, which are by-
products of the industry. A very large part of the
charcoal made in retorts is thus consumed. This fur-
nishes another example of a chemical industry in which
the former by-products have now become the principal
products. The ovens are heated by natural gas.

When the wood is heated the moisture is driven out,
but no decomposition occurs until the temperature
approaches 160'" C. Between this and 275^^ C. a thin,
watery di.stillate, known as pyroligneous acid, is chiefly
formed; from 275^ to 350^ C. the yield of ga.seous
products becomes marked; and between 350"^ and 450°
C. liquid and solid hydrocarbons are most extensively
fonned. The quantity and character of the yield

' Tenth Census of the United States, Manufactures, ireneral folio
1013.

depend upon the character and age of the wood and the
temperature and rate at which the charge in heated.
In the ovens the wood is heated for twenty-four hours
and then the cars containing the charcoal are drawn and
immediately run into iron sheds where, when the doors
are closed and luted, the charcoal is allowed to cool.
The volatile portions, from retorts or ovens, are car-
ried to conden.sers where the pyroligneous acid and tar
are condensed and the ga.ses are carried off to be burned
under the boilers for generating steam, or under the
retorts.

The yield of pyroligneous acid is about 30 per cent
and of tar about 10 per cent of the weight of the dry
wood. The acid averages about 10 per cent of acetic
acid, 1 per cent of methyl alcohol and 0. 1 per cent of
acetone. As acetone is produced by the heating of
acetates the yield of these two bodies will vary with
the manner in which the heating is carried on. The
pyroligneous acid is a dark red-brown liquid, having a
strong acid reaction and a peculiar enip^reumatic odor,
and its density varies between 1.02 and 1.05 specific
gravity. It is used to a limited extent in the manufac-
ture of an impure acetate of iron, known as " black iron
liquor," or " pyrolignite of iron," but it is usually treated
to separate the methyl alcohol, acetone, and acetic acid
from it. This is done by distillation, the alcohol being
concentrated by dephlegmators, as is done in the manu-
facture of grain alcohol, to 82 per cent, when it is
shipped to the refinery in iron drums holding about
110 gallons each, or in barrels holding from 45 to 46
gallons each. The acetic acid is recovered in two forms,
viz, as "gray acetate of lime" or as "brown acetate of
lime;" the first being produced when vapors from the
distillation are passed through milk of lime, while the
second is produced when the pyroligneous acid is neu-
tralized with lime before distilling off the alcohol, and
the resulting acetate of lime is thus contaminated with
considerable tar.

The crude wood alcohol is sent to the refinery to be
purified and rectified, which is accomplished by further
distillation from lime or caustic alkalies. The acetone
can not \)e separated b\' simple distillation, but it may
be converted into chloracetones of high boiling points
and thus removed, or the separation maj- be effected
b}- crystallizing out the methyl alcohol with calcium
chloride, or the acetone maj' be converted into chloro-
form and volatilized by distilling the mixture with
chloride of lime. Mo.st of the methyl alcohol of com-
merce contains acetone in varying quantities, even as
much as 15 per cent, and such acetone containing alco-
hols are especiallj- desired in several art^^, as the}' serve
for the purpose to which they are put better than pure
methyl alcohol. A pure methyl alcohol is now pro-
duced in very considerable quantity which is of 100 per
cent strength as it leaves the works, but it soon absorbs
water on exposure so as to reduce its alcohol strength
to 98 or 97 per cent.

In the Pierce process, as described by Landreth, the
charring of the wood is effected in circular, flat-top,
brick liilns holding 50 cords of wood each. The wood
is charred by the heat produced by gas burned in a brick
furnace under the kiln, into and thi'ough which the
products of combustion pass. The gaseous products of
the dry distillation of the wood pass from the kiln to con-
densers, where the tarry and liquid products are con-
densed and the gas sent back to the kiln. Thus none
of the charcoal produced is burned to carbonize other
wood, as in the common pits or ovens. The gas which
elsewhere is wasted is here not only sufficient to effect
the carbonizing of the wood, but furnishes fuel for the
boilers required about the works.

The wood used is as thoroughly seasoned as the con-
ditions of maintaining a year's supply in advance, cost
of storage room, and interest on capital invested in
stock render economical. If not thoroughly dry when
placed in the kilns, the carbonization of the wood is
automatically deferred, by the absorption of the heat
in the evaporation of the sap and other moisture, until
the seasoning process is complete. This seasoning com-
mences at the top of the kilns and proceeds regularly
downward, by a definite plane of seasoning. When
this plane reaches the bottom and the seasoning is com-
plete, which is indicated by a sudden change in the
color of the escaping vapors, the process of charring
begins at the top and proceeds downward precisely like
the seasoning process.

The watery vapors driven off during seasoning are
not preserved, but are allowed to escape through vents
temporarily left open around the base of the kilns and
through the top of the kiln chimneys, which, during
this stage, are open at the top, but which, .so soon as
the watery vapor has escaped, are connected with a
suction main. The time required for the several stages
in the cycle of operations in producing a kiln of char-
coal is as follows:

Days.

For charging one kiln with wood 2

For completing the seasoning of the wood 1

For carbonizing the wood 7

For cooling the charcoal 6

For drawing the charcoal 2

Total length of cycle 18

As one 60-ton blast furnace requires 5,000 bushels of
charcoal daily, or the output of 2 kilns, the total num-
ber of kilns in a plant to furnish a continual supply of
fuel must be equal to twice the number of days in a
C3'cle plus a margin for relays, for repairs, and unusual
delaj^s; the margin is usually chosen at one-sixth the
effective number of kilns, so that the total number of
kilns comprising a plant = 2(18) + 1(36) = 42, of which
at any one time —

4 kilns are being charged and closed.

2 kilns are being seasoned.
14 kilns are being carbonized.
12 kilns are being cooled.

4 kilns are being drawn.

6 kilns are idle or acting as relays.

These 42 kilns are arranged in 2 distinct batteries of
21 kilns each. Each battery has its own condensers and
suction main carrying the products of distillation to the
condensers, and its own gas main leading the noncon-
densable gases back to the kiln furnaces.

The condensers are composed of tall wooden tanks, 5
feet square by 20 feet high, through which the products
of distillation pass, each inclosing 99 vertical copper
pipes, 2 inches in diameter, through which the condens-
ing water flows. The condensed products are trapped
out at the bottom of each condenser, of which 10 com-
prise a battery, and conveyed to cooling tanks, where
the tar is separated from the pyrolignepus acid liquor
by cooling. The tar is used to coat the kilns to render
them impervious to air, and for this purpose one coating
of tar suffices for four burnings, while the usual coating
of lime whitewash has to be repeated after each burn-
ing. The circulation of the gaseous products through
the system is maintained bj^ exhaust fans, which draw the
noncondensed gases through the condensers and force
them through the gas main back to the kilns, when they
are injected into the furnaces by a steam jet from a
one-sixteenth-inch orifice playing in the center of an
inch nozzle on the gas pipe. The minimum amount of
air necessary to effect the perfect combustion of the
gases is admitted through regulating dampei's in the
front of the furnace.

From the liquor coolers the pyroligneous acid liquor
is conveyed to the distilling house, where the acetic
acid in the liquor is converted into acetate of lime; the
liquor is then sent to the fractional distillation system,
which comprises 8 primary stills and condensers, 4
intermediate stills and condensers, and 2 final or ship-
ping stills and condensers. The stills are circular tanks
each holding about 2,500 gallons and are heated by
steam coils of 2-inch copper pipe. The several stills of
each of the 3 series are operated abreast. The distilla-
tion is not carried on continuously, but each series is
charged and the distillation carried on until all of the
alcohol available is evaporated, when the stills are
emptied and recharged with new liquor. The degree
of concentration attained in each series of stills is as
follows:

The liquor entering the primary stills contains IJ per cent of
alcohol.

The distillate from the primary stills contains 15 per cent of
alcohol.

The distillate from the intermediate stills contains 42 per cent of
alcohol.

The distillate from the final stills contains 82 per cent of alcohol.

The jdelds of products differ with the different works
and with the different processes employed. According
to Landreth the yields by the Pierce process with brick
kilns are as follows:

DRY WOOD.

Volume per cord
of wood.

Mass per
cord.

Per cent.

50.6bush

4. 4 gnls

4. 6 gals

16.5gals

220.7gals

ll,00O.Ocu. ft ....

1,012 lbs....

301bs....

40 lbs....

160 lbs....
1,838 lbs....

920 lbs....

25.80

Resulting niethylic alcohol

0.75

1 00

Resulting tarry compounds

4.00

Resulting water

45 95

Resulting noncondensable gases . . .

23.00

Total

4, 000 lbs.

100 00

Thoujfli I t'ttctory reports as high as 12.93 gallons of
ulcohol per cord of wood, yet the yields from the retort
and ovon processes average about 10 gallons of alcohol,
200 pounds of acetate of lime, and 50 bushels of charcoal
per cord of wood in addition to the pas, tar, and chemical
oil, all of which uic burned. The yield of brown acetate
of lime is about one-third larger than that of gray. As
has been said, where retorts are used much of the charcoal
is burned. Where coal is used, four-tenths of the char-
coal produced is burned under the retorts. Where no
coal is used six-tenths of the charcoal produced is thus
con.sumed. In all of the works the whole of the gas,
tar, and chemical or red oil is burned by the aid of
steam, but it is probable that investigation will show
that the tar and red oil are too valuable to be thus con-
sumed.

The methyl alcohol is used for domestic fuel, as a
solvent in varnishes, as a solvent in the manufacture of
pyro.xylin plastics, in the production of formaldeh3'de,
in the making of methylated spirit, and in the manu-
facture of anilin colors.

The acetate of lime is used for the manufacture of
acetic acid, acetone, "red liquor," and, when purilied,
as a mordant in dyeing.

Acetone is employed in the manufacture of chloro-
form, iodoform, and sulphonal, for denaturating grain
alcohol, in making smokeless powder, and as a siolvent
in sevei'al of the arts.

A complete treatment of the wood distillation industry
should include the production of turpentine, rosin, and
tar by the distillation of the wood of the long-leaved
pine, but this is made the subject of special report No.
12t), issued January 11, 1902, entitled '"Turpentine and
Rosin."

The factories for the production of the crude prod-
ucts of this industry must be located near an abundant
supply of hard wood and where there is a suiEcient sup-
ply of water for cooling the condensers and charging
the steam-generating boilci-s, this steam being employed
in distilling the liquors, evaporating the acetate solu-
tions, drying the acetate, and operating the pumps by
which the liquors are raised from one level to another.
In some cases, however, the acetate pans are placed
over the retorts so that the heat radiated from them
may be usefully employed. The total amount of wood
reported as consumed in this industry for 1900 was
490,939 cords, having a value of $1,241,972, which gives
an average value for it of $2.53 per cord as laid down
at the works. Assuming one man to average one and
one-half cords of wood per day, the cutting of the wood
u-sed would give employment to 3,273 men for one hun-
dred days each. Comparing this total quantity of wood
reported with the totsd quantities of crude wood alco-
hol, acetate of lime, and charcoal the average yields per
cord of wood for all processes are found to he 10 gal-
lons of alcohol. 176 pounds of acetate of lime, and 35
bushels of charcoal.

It is alleged in the "trade" that the importations of
acetate of lime into the United States before the intro-
duction of the by-product processes amounted to as
much as 3,0<M>.(J<X) pounds annually. The only statis-
tics di.scoverable in the records of the Treasury Depart-
ment relative to this, is that in 1880 there were 38,0<X)
pounds imported, having a value of $76. On the other
hand, the following table, compiled from "The Foreign
Commerce and Navigation of the United States for the
Year Ending June 30, 1900," shows that the United
States is exporting large quantities of both acetate of
lime and wood alcohol:

EXPORTS, WOOD ALCOHOL AND ACETATE OF LIME:
1898 TO 1900, INCLUSIVE.

WOOD AI/OOHOL.

ACITATK or LIIfB.

Gallons.

Value.

Poonda.

Value.

Total

1,663,799

(934,411

m,274,5«

12,014,269

1898

386,938
727,062
640,799

199,230

414,875
320,306

37,496,288
48,987,511
47,790,765

637,866
700,900
776,413

1899

1900

From the same source is the following record of
imports of charcoal and pyroligneous acid:

IMPORTS, CHARCOAL: 1891 to 1898, INCLUSIVE.

YEAR.

Value.

YEAR.

Value.

1891

$56,020
48,029
61,634
40,249

1895

120,272

42,970

82,106

2,404

1892

1896

1893

1897

1894

1898

IMPORTS, FOR CONSUMPTION, ACETIC OR PYROLIG-
NEOUS ACID: 1891 TO 1900, INCLUSIVE.

YEAR.

Pounds.

Value.

1891

10,946
12,280
18,421
22,244
92,889

tl.036
2,302
2 795

1892

1893

1894

3.959
8,938

1895

1896

1897

1898

127.949
202.838
292,891

9,776
14.467
19,189

1899

1900 ----

LITERATCRB.

Acetic Acid, Chemistry of Arts and Manufactures, by Sheridan
Muspratt, Vol. 1, 1-48. 1860.

The Economical Production.of Charcoal for Blast Furnace Pur-
poses, by O. H. Landreth, Proc. A. A. A. S., 27, 145-151. 1888.

Outlines of Industrial Chemistry, by F. H. Thorp: New York,
1898.

Handbook of Industrial Chemistry, S. P. Sadtler: Philadelphia,
1895.

The Distillation of Pine Wood in the South, by Franklin S. Clark,
School of Mines Quarterly, 9, 16S-166. 1888.

Charcoal Production and Recovery of By-Products, by Consul-
Gen. Frank H. Mason, U. S. Consular Reports, 66, S5S-S61. 1901.

The Manufacture of Charcoal in Kilns, by T. Egleston, Trans.
Amer. Inst, of Mining Engineers, May, 1879.

The Composition of Wood Oil, G. S. Fraps, Amer. Chem. Jour.,
25, S6-54. 1901.

Commercial Organic Analysis, Alfred H. Allen, revised by Henry
Leffmann, 3d ed., Vol. 1: Philadelphia, 1898.

Group VIII. Fertilizers.

The term "fertilizer," as used in this report, includes
all manufactured products which are intended to pro-
mote the growth of plants and which can be, and
customarily are, so used without needing any further
factory treatment. Under this definition raw phosphate
rock, even if finely ground, can hardly be included,
nor can crude cottonseed, ordinary tankage, nor un-
ground bone. All of these have fertilizing properties,
but require further treatment, usuall}- chemical, if the
full effect is to be economically obtained. The term
"fertilizer works" should, strictly speaking, be con-
fined to establishments producing "finished fertilizers,"
such as superphosphate, with or without ammoniates;
"complete fertilizers," by which is meant a mixture of
superphosphate with both potash and ammoniates; and
"all other fertilizers," including bone meal and similar
substances. But under the principle governing the
classification of industries at the census of 1900 there
can be included in fertilizer works all factories of
which the main product, though not a finished ferti-
lizer, was, nevertheless, a fertilizer material — say,
tankage — in a condition of advanced manufacture, such
products being included in "all other fertilizers."

The total number of establishments thus classified as
fertilizer works, and forming Class A, is 422. In addi-
tion there are 18 small establishments, each of which
reported a value, for all products, of less than $500,
and hence are not included in the regular census tabula-
tions. As the total fertilizer product of the 18 estab-
lishments amounted to but 46 tons of complete fertilizer,
valued at $1,047, and 213 tons of "all other fertilizers,"
valued at $3,489, it will be seen that the omission to
tabulate establishments under $500 is of small conse-
quence. J

Under Cla.ss B are included 10 establishments whose
main product places them in some one of the 19 groups
of " chemical industries," but which made more or less
fertilizers as a subordinate, though sometimes very
important, part of the product. The total fertilizer
product of this class amounted to superphosphate, tons
1,810, value $20,417; complete fertilizer, tons 17,707,
value $350,077; and " all other fertilizers," tons 7,983,
value $98,510.

Class C includes 28 works, none of which belongs
to " chemical industries," yet at which were made a
certain amount of fertilizers. The importance of
taking this class into consideration, if a full presenta-
tion of the industry is desired, is evident, since the
total product of this class was superphosphate, tons
12,000, value $100,000; ammoniated superphosphate,
tons 750, value $13,500; complete fertilizer, tons

24,391, value $521,825; and "all other fertilizers,"
tons 27,409, value $443,147.

Class D includes such by-products of "slaughtering
and meat packing," "garbage reduction," "glue," and
similar industries as were reported as "fertilizers."
So far as known, such materials are bones, bone tank-
age, ammoniates, and the like, utilized in the prepara-
tion of ammoniated and complete fertilizers. While
included here for the sake of completeness, it must be
remembered that the amounts and values of these prod-
ucts, as well as those of Class C, are elsewhere reported
in the census tables of their respective industries, and
their presence here is a not unnoticed duplication. Of
this class, 10 " garbage-reduction " works produced such
materials aggregating 17,809 tons, value $256,322, while
the report for "slaughtering and meat packing" gives
"fertilizers," tons 160,962, value $3,326,119, and "glue"
gives tons 15,942, value $331,268, a total of 204,713
tons, and a value of $3,913,709.

Included in "all other fertilizers" is fish scrap, the
residue after the oil is pressed out of the fish, amount-
ing to 27,035 tons, of a reported value of $448,602, in
addition to which certain establishments made 1,942
tons which were consumed in works in making ferti-
lizers. The fish oil reported from the 25 establish-
ments engaged in this industry amounted to 1,135,264
gallons, valued at $222,929. The returns of scrap and
oil per thousand fish, the customaiy unit of measure,
naturally vary considerablj', according to the condition
of the fish, whether fat or lean, the lean fish yielding
little oil in proportion to the scrap. In one case of a
large and well-managed factory having good fish, the
yield per thousand fish was given as 4.17 gallons of oil
and 185 pounds of scrap, while another large works,
having very lean fish, reported a yield of only 1.87
gallons of oil and but 140 pounds of scrap. The general
average for all reports was, 2.98 gallons of oil and
149.2 pounds of scrap per thousand fish. After the
scrap leaves the press in which the oil is expressed, it
must be protected from decomposition, as this not only
produces a local nuisance but results in serious pecu-
niary loss. In one case where 500 tons of good scrap
were valued at $10,000, 500 tons of decomposed scrap
were valued at only $3,000. In order to prevent this
decomposition the laws of several states, for example,
Massachusetts and Connecticut, require that the daily
output of scrap shall be sprinkled with sulphuric acid,
as this prevents the lighting of flies upon it and the
consequent development of maggots. When acid is so
used, finely ground phosphate is often mixed with the
scrap before shipment, thus taking up the excess of
acid and hindering the rotting of the bags in which the
scrap is shipped.

The use of fish as a fertilizer was known to the abo-
rigines of New England before the arrival of the whites,
since it is stated in the records of the Plymouth colony
that Squantum, a friendly Indian^ showed the colonists

how to manuro their corn b\- putting a fish into each
hill. It would seem, therefore, that the colonists were
ignonint of the fertilizin<,' valuo of fish, which is rather
surprising, since the value of barnyard manure has been
known since a very early period in the history of agri-
culture, and marl, a phosphatic lime earth, was used in
England, at least, prior to this i)eriod. It is possible,
however, that the value of marl was considered to lie in
its improving the physical condition of the soil rather
than as furnishing any plant food, as the advantage of
mixing clay with sandy soils or sand with clayey soils
■was known to the Romans.

As soon as the true action of fertilizers became known,
it was seen that the presence of grease or oil in a ferti-
lizer wa.s harmful, as hindering the conversion of the
fertilizing ingredients into the soluble forms into which
they must pass before they can be assimilated by the
plant. Hence by extracting the oil from fish a valuable
substance was obtained and the residue of scrap became
more quickly cfllicient. The same thing occurs in the
cottonseed industry, the oil and "linters," valuable for
other purposes, containing very little fertilizer material,
while the cake and hulls are in much better condition
for utilization as feed or fertilizer than in their original
condition as part of the seed.

Little is known about the beginnings of the fish-oil
industry, but it is stated that the HerreshofTs, of Rhode
Island, were making fish oil and .sci^ap as early as 1863.
The fish generally used for this purpose is the menhaden
or mossbunker, which appears on the Atlantic coasts in
the summer in large schools and is a very oily fish, in
no demand for edible purposes. The number reported
as caught during the cen.sus year is 4:58,963,200, and
3'ielded the quantities of oil and scrap noted above.

The most available statistics of this industry are
those given by Eugene G. Blackford in One Hundi'ed
Years of American Industr}', 1895, page 394. These
are here presented with the .stati.stics derived from
reports classified at the census of 1900 as chemical
industries, group "fertilizers," and may therefore not
include all of the reports received from this indu.stry.
It is believed, however, that the showing Ls substan-
tially complete, although the figures show an enormous
reduction in capital invested and number of men

employed, from the figures given for 1894. It is tme
that in some ca.ses where complete fertilizers are also
made, the men reported as employed are tho.se engaged
at the factory only, tho.se employed in fishing tieing
represented only by the cost of the fish as covering
wages, supplies, and maintenance of ve.s.Hels. Still the
total capital, $497,760, bears a fair relation to total
value of product, which is $703,866, made up of oil,
$222,929; scrap sold, $448,602; and .scrap u.sed in works,
1,942 tons, of a calculated value of $32,237; and the
general statistical position of the industry bears out
the statements of some of those engaged in the
industry to the effect that in 1900 there was little profit
in it.

MENHADEN INDUSTRY, SEASONS OF 1874, 1880, 1890,
1894, AND 1900.

YEAB.

Fac-
to-
ries.

Sail
ves-
sels.

Steam-
ers.

Hen
em-
ployed.

Capital
Invested.

Nnmber of
flsh caught.

Gallons
ofoH
made.

Tons

of
scrap.

1874

1880

1890

1894

1900

64
79
28
44
25

283
366
27
30

25
82
52
57

2,438
3,261
4,368
2,560
500

r2, 500, 000

2,550,000

1,750,000

1,737,000

497,760

492,878.000
776,000,000
.5.53,686,1.56
540,361,900
458,963,200

3,372,847
2,035,000
2,939,217
l,9i9.Sul>
1,135,264

50,976
19,195
21,173
27,782
28,977

"Slaughtering and meat packing" furnishes a large
quantity of fertilizer materials, becau.se, in the large
packing establishments of the present day nothing util-
izable is allowed to go to waste. The blood is carefully
collected and dried, making a high-priced ammoniate,
and the gelatin, glue, grease, etc., of the horns, hoofs,
and other bones and other offal extracted. The residues
from this part of the work are sold as bones, tankage
(which is meat ofl'al dried and ground), and as "bone
tankage" (which is tankage containing bone fragments).
Dried blood, tankage, and all of the like materials,
which are called "ammoniates," are valuable by-prod-
ucts of the packing industry, and are the most expen-
sive constituents of a complete fertilizer.

The final aggregate of the reported amounts and val-
ues of the fertilizer products for 1900 from all sources
so far as found, superphosphate and other products
made but consumed in the works in the making of mixed
fertilizers not being included, is as follows:

FERTILIZER PRODUCTS: KINDS, QUANTITY, AND VALUE, 1900.

Number

ofertab-

Itsb-

ments.

RDPBRPHOePBATE.

AHMOMIATED 8CPEB-
PHOSPHATI.

COMPLBTE FEETILIZEK.

ALL OTBXR FKBTIU-

Tons.

Value.

Tons.

Value.

Tods.

Value.

Tons.

Value.

ClassA

422
18
10
28

923,198

<8, 471, 943

142,898

12,349,388

1,436,682

17,707

24,8*1

825,446,046

1,W7

850,077

S21.82S

291,917

213

7,983

27,409

(t, 178, 284

Under fMO

3,489

ClassB

> i,8i6

12,000

20,417
100,000

96,510

ClassC

750

13,500

443,147

Total

478

987,006

8,592.860

143,648

2,362,888

1,478,826

26,318,>95

837,922
204,718

4,728,480

Class D

8,918,709

Pinal total

478

987,008

8,592,860

148,648

2,462,888

1,478,828

26,318,995

632,285

8,637,139

The total product, by classes, is as follows:

Tons.

Value.

Class A

2, 794, 695

259

27,500

64,550

$40,445,661

4,536

469,004

1,078,472

Under $500

Class C

Total

2,887,0(M
204,713

42,097,673
3,913,709

Class D

Final total

3,091,717

46,011,382

The total number of establishments in Classes A, B,
and C, the only ones which can properly be denominated
fertilizer works, is 476. This shows a considerable
increase — 392 — over the figures for the census of 1890
but falls short of the estimates for 1898 made by the
author of "The Fertilizer Industry."' The estimated
number given by him, is "about 700." It is evident
that this figure was too high, because while the busi-
ness, as a whole, has much increased, the tendency,
as in all other branches of manufacture, is to concen-
trate the industry into the hands of larger companies
or combinations, who by reason of greater facilites
in, and control of, the market can, if necessary, un-
dersell competitors and work on a closer margin of
profit. The author of the interesting bulletin, just noted
complains of the indifference, even " positive unwilling-
ness of manufacturers to furnish the information de-
sired." The experience of the Census Office with this
group has been much more satisfactory. With but one
exception, every establishment that was reached, either
by the field force or by correspondence, endeavored to
give a correct statement of the operations. From the
large combinations and firms, reports were often re-
ceived which were most valuable, and offers of any fur-
ther information which might be needed. In other cases
the reports, owing to the deficiencies of a hastih' a.ssem-
bled field force were sometimes unsatisfactory, but cor-
respondence brought the information, if existing. In
the case of the positive refusal above mentioned, a little
local inquiry enabled us to construct a satisfactory report,
because the nature, quantity, and value of the product
of the establishment were known, and from correct
reports from establishments in the vicinity the quantities
of ingredients and their cost could be fairly estimated.
Such editing work must be done with great caution if
the results are to have real value, and it is satisfactory
to be able to state that, owing to the cheerful coopera-
tion of manufacturers, such work has been reduced to
a minimum.

"Fertilizers" appears as a special item for the first
time in the census report for 1860. The condition of
the indu.str}' then and its growth since are shown by
the following comparison, the percentage of gain for
each decade over the preceding one being also given:

' Miscellaneous Bulletin No. 13, United States Department of
.Agriculture, 1898, page 5.

FERTILIZER MANUFACTURE, BY DECADES: 1860 TO 1900.

YBAE.

Number
01 estab-
lish-
ments.

Per cent

of
increase.

Product

(tons).

Per cent

of
increase.

Value.

Per cent

of
Increase.

1860

47
126
278
392

478

8891,344
5,815,118
19,921,400
86,519,841
41,997,673

1870

i68
120
41
21

552

1880

727,458
1,898,806
2,887,004

1890

161

1900

These figures are fairly in accordance with what is
otherwise known of the history of the development of
this industry. Of the 422 establishments in Class A
only 7 stated that the}' manufactured fertilizers prior to
1860, 3 of these being in Baltimore, Md., where, so far
as is known, the manufacture of fertilizers began. In
1840 Liebig published his classical researches on plant
nutrition, in which he assei'ted that "the food of all
vegetation is composed of inorganic or mineral sub-
stances." This was contrary to the then prevailing
view, which was that the humus of the soil was the sup-
port of plant life, the mineral substances, the ash of the
plant, being considered of subordinate importance.
The researches of Wiegman and Polstorf showed, how-
ever, that a luxuriant plant growth could be obtained
by planting the seeds in soil which had, by burning,
been deprived of the last trace of humus or other
.organic matter, and then watering them with dilute
solutions of the needed inorganic salts. Other investi-
gators continued this line of research, and a rational
agriculture was then developed. It was found that a
plant derives its carbon from the air directly- by means
of its leaves, and also, but in a minor degree, through its
roots by the absorption of water containing carbonic
acid. On the other hand, while the plant can to a small
extent supply its demand for nitrogen from the ammonia
of the atmosphere by means of its leaves, this supply
is quite inadequate for healthy growth. The deficiency,
as also the demand for mineral salts, must be supplied
through the roots. As these can only take up such
substances when dissolved in water, it follows that not
only the nitrogen which is taken up by the plant must
be in soluble forms which are now considered to be
nitrates, which are always soluble, but also the mineral
constituents such as phosphoric acid, silica, lime, pot-
ash, iron, etc., must be in forms soluble in water to be
available for the nourishment of the plant.

The importance of phosphoric acid being early
recognized, the manufacture of superphosphate began.
According to Kerl the fir.st scientifically planned ferti-
lizer works in Germany were erected in 1860. A letter
from Dr. II. W. L. Rasin, of Baltimore, states that —

The manufacture of chemical fertilizers in the United States
began about 1850. In that year Dr. P. S. Chappell, and Mr. William
Davison, of Baltimore, made some fertilizer in an experimental
way. About the same time Professor Mapes was experimenting.
Later De Burg utilized the spent bone black derived from the
sugar refineries and made quite a quantity of "dissolved bone black"

(guperphodphate). In 1863 or 1864 Mr. P. 8. Chappell commenced
thp manufafture of fertilizerti, as dirt B. M. Rhodes, both of Balti-
more. In 1866 Mr. John Kettlewell, recognizinK tlie fact tliat
Peruvian guano (then becoming quite popular), and containing at
that time 18 to 21 per cent of ammonia, waa too Htimulating and
deficient in plant foo<l (phosphates), conceived the idea of manip-
ulating the Mexican guano, containing no ammonia but 60 to 60
pert-ent of (bone) phosphate of lime, and called his preparation
"Kettlewell's manipulated guano."

While in I85« the salcM of I'eruvian guano had increased to 60,000
tons and of Mexican guano to some 10,000 tons, there was not at
that date 20,000 tons of artificial fertilizers manufactured in the
entire country. Baltimore waa not only the pioneer but the prin-
cipal market for fertilizers until some time after the Civil War.
The 50,000 tons of Peruvian guano referred to was bought and sold
in this market, and there was little demand for that or the Mexican
guano in any other market unless the inspection brand of the guano
inspector of Baltimore was upon the package. The Peruvian Gov-
ernment agent, who received and disposed of all importations, was
locatefl here, an<l all other markets were supplied from Baltimore.
At that time no fertilizers were sold west of Pennsylvania.

Owing to the exhaustion of the sources of supply the
importation of guano has ahnost ceased. In 1900 but
1,150 tons, value $15,543, were imported frotn Peru,
the total amount of guano imported being 4,756 tons,
value $56,956. Much of this is, however, pi-actically
phosphate rock, requiring chemical treatment before
using. The original guano of Peru was produced from
the excrements and remains of sea birds deposited upon
islands in a vexy arid region. Its agricultural value
was well known to the ancient Peruvians, whose wise
laws forbade the killing or molestation of the birds.
Owing to the scarcity of rain the ammoniacal salts devel-
oped in the deposits remained in the guano, while in
less arid regions the soluble salts were leached out, and
where the underlying rock was a limestone this became
altered to a certain depth, becoming a more or less pure
tricalcic phosphate, usually called bone phosphate of
lime. The guanos of Sombrero, of Navassa, and of
many other places are examples, and all require chem-
ical treatment.

The importation of phosphate rock for 1900 amounted
to 110,065 tons, value $504,092, coming mainly from
Germany and Spain. The term ''phosphorite" is used
to cover all of the varieties of phosphate rock which
range from the crystallized apatite of Canada to the
comparatively amorphous rock of South Carolina, but
was originally applied to the fibrous phosphate from
Estremadura, Spain, which occurs in large quantities
and is extensively exported. The German phosphate
from the Lahn region and other places is usually con-
cretionary in appearance. This concretionary .structure
is very characteristic of phosphorites, as shown in many
jjlaces in Florida and in the so-called eoprolites of
England and other localities.

By treating phosphate rock or bones with sulphuric
acid, superphosphate or acid phosphate is formed. The
works making thi.s, mix more or less of it with ammoni-
ates, or potash or both, producing the various grades
of ammoniated superphosphate, superphosphates with

potash, or complete fertilizer. The remainder i» sold
a.s such, being bought by establishments that make
various mixtures to suit local demands, while a very
large quantity goes directlj" into con.sumption, being
bought by farmers, who make their own composts.

Of the 422 fertilizer works belonging to Cla.ss A, 76
made sulphuric acid. The total quantity of acid thus
made amounted to 642,938 tons of chamber acid of 50°
Baume, of which 571,831 tons were consumed by the
works producing it in making superphosphates, while
the remainder, 71,107 tons, was .sold elsewhere mainly
as chamber acid, only 5,360 tons being concentrated to
higher strengths before sale. Thirty acid-making
works did not make enough for their own demand and
supplied the deficiency from other sources. In Cla.s.ses
B and C, 3 works made 12,028 tons of 50° acid and con-
sumed it in making superphosphate, making a total of
583,859 tons thus made and consumed by 79 works.

Of the 478 works producing fertilizers, 76 made
superphosphate, but purchased the needed acid, while
208 bought the superphosphate; in each ca.se the final
product sold was mixed fertilizers. The remaining
works, 115 in number, as well as all of Class D, pro-
duced the fertilizer materials above mentioned and
placed under "all other fertilizers." In so far a.s any
of these products are purchased by other fertilizer
works and used in making mixed fertilizers, the quan-
tities and values of such purchases reappear in the
mixed fertilizers, and to that extent there, is a duplica-
tion. The extent of this duplication can only be esti-
mated, since a considerable quantity of the products
included in "all other fertilizers" consists of bone meal
and other substances, which are used for composting or
put on the land without further treatment. On the
other hand, it is certain that "all other fertilizers" —tons
532,235, value $8,637, 139— falls far short, both in quan-
tity and value, of the real production of such materials.
For example, the establishments under Class A report
using 37,868 tons of cottonseed meal, and those in Class
C, 3,608 tons, a total of 41,476 tons. These figures
evidently represent only a fraction of the amounts
actualh' used for fertilizer puiposes, since the total
product of cotton seed meal for 1900 was 884,391 tons,
value $16,030,576, a very large proportion of which,
amounting to 638,638 tons, was used in composting, as
shown by the large qiiantity of superphosphate which
goes into consumption as such.

The figures for superphosphate, ammoniated super-
phosphate, and complete fei'tilizer are quite close to the
truth, as an examination of the complete returns will
show. The total quantity of superphosphates reported
as made and sold as such by all of the classes A, B, and
C is 937,008 tons. The quantity of supeiphosphate pur-
chased for mixing purposes is, for Class A, 286,918 tons;
Class B, 240 tons; Cla.ss C, 9,402 tons; a total of 296,560
tons. Deducting this from the total, 937,008 tons, leaves
the residue of 640,448 tons which was sold as such to

the ultimate consumer. To this amount must be added
the superphosphate in the mixed fertilizers to obtain
the total quantity pi'oduced for the census year. The
returns show great variations in the proportions of
superphosphate in the products of the various estab-
lishments, but comparisons show that ammoniated
superphosphate will average 70 per cent of superphos-
phate and complete fertilizer 50 per cent, giving the
following result:

Superphosphate, sold as such, total tons 937, 008

Superphosphate, purchased, total tons 296, 560

Difference, equals finally consumed as such, tons 640, 448

In ammoniated sujierphosphate, 70 per cent of 143,648

tons 100, 553

In complete fertilizer, 50 per cent of 1,478,826 tons 739, 413

Total superphosphate produced, tons 1, 480, 414

The total product of superphosphate may also be
ascertained from the amount of sulphuric acid reported
as being used in its manufacture. Comparison of the
returns at the census of 1900 fully confirms the current
statement that in making superphosphate from a stand-
ard phosphate such as South Carolina rock the practice
is to mix equal weights of phosphate and chamber acid.
Reaction at once sets in, the mixture becoming quite
hot and giving off vapors consisting of steam and vola-
tile ingredients of the phosphate, such as carbon diox-
ide, fluorine, and chlorine. This volatilization loss
amounts, for South Carolina rock, to 10 per cent of the
total weight of the ingredients. ■ Other phosphates, such
as high-grade Florida rock, bones, etc., will of course
require other proportions of acid and the volatilization
loss will also differ, but the general average of all returns
shows that every ton, 2,000 pounds, of phosphatic
material required 2,000 pounds of chamber acid, lost
10 per cent, 400 pounds, by volatilization, and yielded
3,600 pounds of superphosphate. Taking all of the sul-
phuric acid reported as consumed in works and that
purchased the results are as follows:

Class A .
■Class B .
Class C .

SULPHURIC ACID.

Con-
sumed
(tons).

571, 831
5,028
7,000

Total

Add total, consumed .

583,859

Total acid used

Add phosphate rock, equal amount.

Deduct 10 per cent loss

Total superphosphate produced, tons.

Purchased

(tons).

231,528
268
200

231,996
683,859

815, 855
815,855

1,631,710
163, 171

1,468,539

Comparing the final quantitj^ with that reported
above, namely, 1,480,414 tons, the difference is found
to be only 11,875 tons, or 0.80 per cent. This agree-

ment is surprisingly close, since, under the conditions,
a much larger difference would have been sufficient to
demonstrate the general correctness of the returns.

The quantity of phosphate rock estimated above as
used is 815,855 tons. Class A reported the purchase of
806,445 tons; Class B, 4,810 tons, and Class C, 7,700
tons; a total of 818,955 tons, or a difference of only 3,100
tons. This close agreement is, however, only fortuitous.
Many of the larger works undoubtedly had more or less
phosphate rock in stock at the beginning and end of
the census year, and it is not always clear that the
quantity reported is the amount actually used or only
that which was purchased during the year. A part of
the superphosphate estimated above as contained in the
mixed fertilizers was made from bones, spent bone-
black, and other materials, but how much can not be
ascertained, because, although Class A reported the
consumption of 96,679 tons of l)ones, part of this was
used to make boneblack, part was disposed of as bone
meal, and part mixed with the compounded fertilizers
without any special addition of acid. Again, part of
the tankage bought by the works is " bone tankage,"
containing considerable quantities of crushed bone, so
that it is ijnpossible to determine how uuich of the acid
used actually went to make bone superphosphate.

Examination of the reports shows that only a com-
paratively small quantity of " concentrated phosphate"
is made, although it would seem that there ought to
be a considerable demand for this product which is so
largely made in England, France, and Germany. It is
made bj' treating pho.sphate rock with an amount of
sulphuric acid sufficient to entirely decompose it, con-
verting all of the lime into sulphate, allowing this to
settle, and drawing off the solution of phosphoric acid.
" The solution is then evaporated in lead pans to a
density of 45° Baume, at which strength the solution
contains nearl}^ 45 per cent PjOg. During this concen-
tration the iron and aluminum phosphates separate and
are removed. The strong solution of phosphoric acid
is then treated with finely ground phosphate rock to
form mono-calcium phosphate, which is dried and dis-
integrated."'

The phosphoric acid solution may be made from any
form of phosphate, and low-grade material too poor for
the manufacture of superphosphate can be used for this
purpo.se. The phosphate rock added in the second
stage of the process should, however, be high grade, if
the best results are to be attained. For this reason,
the Florida rock which contains up to 80 per cent or
more of phosphate is mainly shipped abroad to supply
the foreign demand for this purpose, while our own
manufacturers, making only ordinary superphosphate,
mainlj- use South Carolina rock containing about 60 per
cent phosphate. The manufacture of superphosphate
from South Carolina rock is a much simpler process and

'Thorp, Outline of Industrial Chemistry, page 144; 1898.

the product is o satisfactory one, although its contents
in soliiMo phosphoric acid is low. ranginj; from 2(1 to 24
per cent as compared with concentrated phospiiate or
"double super," which may contain up to 47 per cent.
The further development of this industry in this
countiy will depend uj)on transportation conditions as
well as upon the advance of agricultural knowledge,
but it would seem that there is a field for tnis worlx in
the i)hos])hate regions where much poor rock occurs
for which there is no present demand, but which might

be utilized in the local manufacture of "double super."
The use of tetrabasi<' phosphate, or slag phosphate,

appears to have almost completely ceased in the United

States, while its use is continually extending in Fiurope.

The reasons assigned for this situation nee<l not be given

here, but doubtless in time this valuable material will

assume the importance it deserves.
The following tabic shows the total fertilizer product

of the United States, arranged geographically:

FERTILIZERS, PRODUCTS, BY STATES,

STATES.

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments.

TOTAL.

SUPEEPHOSPHATE.

Tons.

Value.

Tons.

Value.

Per cent
of prod-
uct.

Per cent
of value.

Value
per ton.

United States

478

2,887,004

842,097,673

937,008

$8,592,360

32.5

20.4

89.17

North Atlantic division

•?

165

685,893

11,978,666

139,232

1, 316, 208

20.3

11.0

9.45

Maine

3
10

9
37
30
66

198

1,828
83,733
11,077
164,266
247,144
177,845

1,531,688

27,902
2,108,675
313,610
2,610,435
3,820,189
3,097,956

19,462,816

Massachusetts . .

1,282

12,820

1.5

0.6

10.00

New York

9,810
108, 168
22,978

622,614

105,645
887, 470
310,273

5,302,997

6.0
42.6
12.9

40.7

4.0
23.2
10.0

27.3

10.77
8.44
13.89

8. ,52

Pennsylvania

Delaware

11
42

42
20
24
45
7

49,942
386,133

3,859
258,474
139,682
388, ,572
278, 982
26,144

258,726

634,213
5,213,926

76,480
3, 326, ,542
1, 727, 270
4,6.57,275
3.331,469
496, 642

4,349,157

2,386
124, 6%

28,250
1,178,367

4.8
32.3

4.8
22.6

11.84
9.45

District of Columbia . . .

Virginia

120,633
60,820
173. 183
131,803
9,394

62,946

1,024,893

497,397

1,404,669

1,076,681

93,940

814,300

46.7
43.6
44.6
47.1
35.9

-24.3

30.8
28.8
30.2
32.3
18.9

18.7

8.49
8.17
8.12
8.17
10.00

12.93

North Carolina

1ft

Georgia

Florida

North Central division . ...

Ohio

1ft

28
12
16
4
3

103,814
1(M,120

11,668
8,753

30,371

362,778

1,. 562, 638

1,842,300

238,161

166,115

549,943

6, 053, .564

24,72,'i
26,108
365
2,766
8,978

110, 649

288,698
313,850
10,006
44,248
160,498

1,140,376

23.8
26.1
3.1
31.6
29.6

31.4

18.3
17.0
4.2
28.3
29.2

22.8

11.56
, 12.02
27.41
16.00
17.11

10.30

Illinois

Indiana

Kansas

17,818
93,054
139, 282
37,704
65,423

22, 131

295, ,520

1,464,788

1,944,283

492, 772

856,201

636,687

Tennessee

35, 969

38,246

7,200

29,244

456,868
369,887
50,400
263,821

38.6
27.6
19.1
44.7

31.2
19.0
10.2
30.8

12.70
9.70
7.00
9.00

?ft

California

22,131

636,687

All other states'

•^0

3.5,788

616,783

1,668

18,479

4.4

3.0

11.80

'Includes establishments distributed as follows: Iowa, 1; Michigan, 1; Minnesota, 1; Nebraska, 1; Oregon, 1; Rhode Island, 1; Texas, 2; Washington, 1; West
Virginia, 2.

ARRANGED GEOGRAPHICALLY: 1900.

AinoNIATKD aOFERPHOSPHATI.

COHPLBTK riKTILIUBI.

ALL ormn mriLizut.

Tom.

Value.

Per cent
o( prod-
uct.

Per pent
of value.

Value
per ton.

Tons.

Value.

Per cent
of prod-
uct.

Per cent
of value.

Value
per ton.

Tons.

Value.

Per cent
of prod-
uct.

Per cent
of value.

Value
per ton.

M8,«8

», 462, 888

6.0

6.9

117.14

1,478,826

•26,818,996

61.2

82.6

•17.79

827,522

H 728. 430

U.»

U.2

tU. 42

21,429

674,251

8.1

4.8

26.79

481,521

8,899,584

62.9

74.8

20.62

98,711

1,188,828

18.7

9.9

12.68

828
78,171
7,325
87,862
125,839
131,196

701,361

21,602
1,988,606
205,931
1.623,638
2, 629. ,511
2, 430. 297

11,307.083

45.3
98.4

66.1
58.5
51.0
73.9

45.8

T7.4
94.8
66.7
62.2
68.8
78.5

58.1

26.09
26.44
28.11
18.48
20.90
18.48

16.26

1,000
4,280
2,752

66,294
8,887

20,828

136,052

6,300
107,150

84,679
542,752
143,628
304,114

1,796,194

64. 7
. 6.1
24.9
84.8
3.6
11.6

8.9

22.8
5.1
27.0
20.8
3.8
9.8

9.2

25 08 ' ^

1,000
10,300
7,283
2,846

71,661

23,000
338.400
159,880

68,271

1,056,542

9.0
6.3
8.0
1.6

4.7

7.3

13.0

4.2

1.7

6.4

28.00
32.85
21.91
18.71

14.74

80.84
9.94
16.22
14.81

18.20

6
6
7
8

17 180

WH ms

34.4

47.7
88.4
41.8
43.7
63.5
37.8
69.0

40.7

60.8
67.8
91.3
51.8
86.8
. 67.8
49.3
76.0

43.5

16.52
16.21
20.47
17.41
18.08
16.14
15. .56
24.46

17.95

80,877
28,734
449
26,713
14,345

7,514
26,60.5

1,315

56,683

822,090
359,872
6,680
407,778
197, 3W
105,504
871,799
25,167

1,078,316

60.8
7.4
11.6
10.8
10.3
2.0
9.5
6.0

21.5

44.8
6.9

8.7
12.3
11.4

2.3
11.2

5.1

24.8

10.61
12. .52
14.87
15.26
18.75
14.04
13.98
19.13

19.40

48,608

690,671

12.6

18.2

14.21

184,095 : 2,985.015
3,410 ■ fi« Km

1'*

4,800
3,400

72,100
61,000

1.7

2.4

2.2
8.0

16.72
15.00

106, 8'28

61,017

207, 875

106,521

15,435

105,3,58

1,820.771

981,569

3, 147, 202

1,641,318

377, 535

1,891,260

13
14

1S,SS3

242,771

5.5

7.3

15.81

34,840

565,281

18.6

13.0

16.22

23,806

4,160

880,936

58,100

500

28.0
4.0
0.2

24.4
3.2
0.2

16.00
14.00
14.81

43,861

48,483

5,7.50

2,774

10,000

199,609

700,606
83.5,335
116,280
39,039
200,000

8,242,648

41.8
41.8
49.3
31.7
33.0

56.6

44.8
45.3
48.8
25.0
36.4

64.2

16.21.
19.21
20.22
14.07
20.00

16.78

11,930
30,379
5,526
3,213
4,535

27,488

195,398
63.5,015
111,375
72,828
63,700

413,941

11.8
29.2
47.4
36.7
14.9

7.8

12.8
34.6
46.8

46 7

16.39
20.90
20.16

09 «7

19
20
21

6,868
15,037

125,745
256,599

22.6
4.3

22.9
5.1

18.38
17.06

11.6 14.05
8.2 16.06

23
2t

17,315
36,69.5
92,2.53
30, ,504
22,842

19,570

295,520
7W,220
1,433,3.55
442.372
367, 181

591,187

100.0
39.4
66.2
80.9
34.9

84.4

100.0
48.1
73.7
89.8
42.9

92.9

17.07
19.22
1.5.42
14.50
16.07

. 32.08

20,400
6,783

3M.OO0
106,341

21.9
4.9

20.8 14.90
5.5 15.70

Ofi

2,000

35,000

1.4

1.8

17.50

18,037
.!

221,599

20.0

25.9

17.00

300
2,561

3,600
45,500

0.5
11.8

0.4 12.00
7.2 17.76

19,570

591,187

84.4

92.9

32.08

2,561

45,600

11.6

7.2 17.76

681

10,215

1.9

1.7

15.02

21,407

387,233

59.8

62.8

18.08

12,132

200,866

33.9

82.6

16.65

The establishments of the above table have been
grouped according to the customary census divisions.
Of the total product of the United States, 2,887,004; tons,
valued at $42,097,673, superphosphate, sold as such,
amounted to 32.5 per cent of quantity, and 20.4 per
cent of value, the average value per ton being $9.17;
ammoniated superphosphate, to 5 per cent quantity,
6.9 per cent value, and $17.14 per ton; complete ferti-
lizer, 51.2 per cent quantity, 62.5 per cent value, and
$17.79 per ton; and all other fertilizers, 11.3 per cent
quantity, 11.2 per cent value, and $14.42 per ton. It
must be remembered that while the quantities given in
this table and elsewhere in this report are substantially
correct, the values given in the reports are in most
cases far below the market prices, since freight and
other expenses must be added so that the final price to
the consumer is very much higher. Moreover, as
already stated, of the 937,008 tons of superphosphate,
sold as such, 296,560 tons, or 31.7 per cent, were bought
by other works and used for making mixed fertilizers,
leaving 640,448 tons, or 08.4 per cent, which went
directly into final consumption. At the average value
of $9.17 per ton, the 296,560 tons would be worth
$2,719,755, and, from one point of view, might be
deducted, leaving superphosphate 640,448 tons, valued
at $5,872,605, and the total product of the country
2,590,444 tons, valued at $39,377,918. Such a presen-
tation, while possiblj' nearer the truth as regards ulti-
mate consumption, would, however, be incorrect in a
census report of manufactures which deals with capital,
labor, materials, and products. The production of the
296,560 tons of superphosphate required capital, labor,
and materials, and the figures of these demands are
included in the general tables for this industry. The
establishments purchasing this mateiial saved the cap-
ital and labor required to produce it, so that if the
deduction were made from the product, it would be
necessary to make a corresponding deduction on the
other side, which is plainly impossible.

On examining this table it will be noted that the
South Atlantic division leads in quantity and value of
product, the North Atlantic division being second.
The average fertilit}' of the Atlantic coast states is not
high, and rational fanning requires the continued appli-
cation of fertilizer, nmch of it of high grade. The
general status of agriculture in the various states in
these two divisions is well shown by the figures. When
the size of the average farms is small and most of these
devoted to the growth of vegetables, fruit, and such
products, as is the case in New England, the fertilizers
demanded are high priced, as the requirements of the
soil must be carefully studied and supplied if profits are
sought. Proceeding southwardly, agriculture is on a
larger individual scale and of a simpler character, until,
in the cotton states, we find practically only a single
market product, requiring a simpler fertilizer, low in
price, and to be applied with judgment. Any excess of

fertilizer acts injuriously upon the crop by stimulating
a growth which can not resist the inevitable drought of
the region. Moreover, a too liberally stimulated cotton
plant runs to stems and foliage, with but little fruit, as
maj' be seen in plants grown in gardens. For conven-
ience in picking, the cotton plant should not be more
than 3 feet high, nor more than an average arm's
length to the center, and the bolls should open nearly
simultaneously.

When a plant is grown in the rich soil of a gai'den,
as is frequently done, for its beauty, it may reach a
height of seven, eight, or more feet, with corresponding
diameter, but, while quite beautiful, the yield of cotton
is comparatively small, and costlj^ to gather. The
possibilities in cotton culture become evident when it is
considered that for upland cotton the average yield of
lint cotton is from 150 to 250 pounds per acre, while
careful cultivation under favorable weather conditions
has been known to bring up this yield to 1,000 pounds.
Indeed, although a yield of 1,500 pounds has never been
attained, it is the goul which manj" intelligent planters
consider can be reached by careful selection of seed,
and proper methods of planting, fertilizing, and tend-
ing. While it is not ff>asible, here, to make an extended
comparison between the quantities and values of the
fertilizers used in the different states in relation to the
character of the agriculture and products, such a study
will disclose that, while each state can show poor farm-
ing, yet in the main, what is done is best suited to local
conditions so far as understood. The methods which
maj' enrich a farmer in Massachusetts would impov-
erish him in South Carolina, while the methods which
insure a good cotton crop are quite inapplicable to
truck growing.

In comparing the various states it will be noted that
South Carolina leads in quantity of product, 388,572
tons, while Maryland leads in value, $5,213,925. In
the jn-oduction of superphosphate, sold as such, South
Carolina leads with 173,183 tons, valued at $1,404,569,
Georgia being second with 131.503 tons, and Maryland
third with 124,696 tons. The Maryland product is,
however, valued at $1,178,367, thus exceeding the
Georgia valuation of $1,075,581. In the proportion of
such superphosphate to the total production of the
state, Georgia is first as it disposes of 47.1 per cent of
its total product in this form, and is followed by Vir-
ginia, Louisiana, South Carolina, North Carolina, New
Jersey, and Maryland, in the order given. This large
sale of superphosphate in these states is due to the
numerous manipulators who mix special brands for local
consumption, and also to the demands of farmers for
home composting. This latter kind of work is natu-
rally most frequent in the cotton states where the cotton-
seed and cottonseed cake furnish a large local supply
of ammoniates, while the extensive truck farming of
New Jersey and Maryland causes a similar demand.

The value of the superphosphate per ton ranged from

$7 in Mississippi to $27.41 in Indiana. The Mississippi
valuation is very low, the average for the United
States, $9.17. hpin^j about tlic prict^ for sui)erphosphate
mado from rock. Tho high viiiiie of this product in
Indiana and other states of the North Centml division
is due to its having lun-n made from raw hone and being
practically an ammoniatod superphosphate. Indeed,
this value is higher than that given by any state for its
product of "amnioniated super," with the exception of
New York, which rates this product at $82.85, the
average for the United States being only $17.14. In
the production of "'anunoniatod super," Maryland loads
all of the states, with a production of 48,()()8 tons, valued
at $690,671, which is, however, only $14.21 per ton.

In the production of complete fertilizer South Caro-
lina leads both in quantity and value, producing 207,875
tons, valued at $3,147,202, but the value per ton is low,
$15.14. Leaving out California, the high valuation of
whose fertilizer, $32.08, is due to the high cost of
materials, it is found that the North Atlantic division,
especially the New England states, makes the most
expensive complete fertilizers. Connecticut leads with
$28.11 average value per ton, followed by Maine with
$26.09, and Massachusetts with $25.44. The Maryland
product, next in quantity and value to South Carolina,
being 184,095 tons, valued at $2,985,015, is quoted at
only $16.21 per ton.

''AH other fertilizers" amounts, for the United
States, to 327,522 tons, valued at $4,723,430, being 11.3
per cent of the total product, 11.2 per cent of the total
value, and averaging $14.42 per ton. As might be ex-
pectetl. New York leads in quantity, with a production
of 56,294 tons, of an average value of $9.64 per ton.
This low value shows the nature of the product, which
is mainly garbage tankage, made by the garbage-reduc-
tion works near the large cities. Illinois, next in ton-
nage, 30,379 tons, is first in value, $635,015, or $20.90
per ton, while Missouri gives a value of $22.67 per ton;
the reason in both cases being that the product is
largely made from slaughterhouse offal, which j'ields
high-grade products. The "fertilizers" of Class D,
204,713 tons, valued at $3,913,709, show an average
value of $19.12 per ton, and belong to this category.

So far as it is possible to show the capital employed,
also the labor and other elements of cost in the produc-
tion of fertilizers, the statistics are given in the special
tabulation of Cla.ss A for this industry. It is, however,
not possible to do this for the other classes, since fei-til-
izers form only a subordinate part of the product, and
the capital employed and the costs can not be separated
from the general operations of the works.

The importations of fertilizer materials for the cen-
sus years 1890 and 1900, as given by the United States
Treasury Department in "The Foreign Commerce and
Navigation of the United States," 1890, pages 1160 to
1151; 1900, page 102, is as follows:

IMPORTS FOR IMMKDI.MK CONSUMPTION FOH THE
YEARS ENDING JUNE 30, 1890 AND 1900.

TBAB.

raoirBikTn, crooe

OR HATIVl.

KinRRITE, KTAICITB
OR CYAHITK, AMD

KAixm.

•OAKO.

Tons.

Valne.

Ton».

Vslne.

Tom.

ValDC.

1890

81,179
14,075

t309,764
86,763

82, 871

8,482
4,766

«111.8U
S8,474

1900

133,244 762,498

TEAR.

BOKB DCOT OR Ajn-

MAI. CARBON A.SD

BONE ASH, FIT ONLY

FOR FERTILIZIXQ

PDBTOaER.

APATITE.

A LI. nrnER iicB-

(TAMCEK XOT ELSE-
WHERE (rEciriES.

Ton*.

Value.

Ton*.

Valoe.

Tom.

Valae.

1890

8,219
1,968

<!)9,069
80,189

126
333

«,297
4,019 ;

21,277
99,169

$333. 10»
745 724

1900

The literature of the fertilizer industry is very volu-
minous, and it is difficult to make a selection. The
books giving the most useful information are probably
The Phosphates of America, by Francis Wjatt, Scien-
tific Publishing Company; Principles and Practice of
Agricultural Analysis, Vol. II, Fertilizers, H. W. Wiley,
Chemical Publishing Company, 1895; and the articles
on Fertilizers in Muspratt — Kerl, Technical Chemistry,
Wagner's Technology, and The Mineral Industry, the
yearbook published by the Engineering and Mining
Journal.

Gkoup IX. — Bleaching Materials.

Although bleaching materials of various kinds have
been long in use and bleaching by chlorine or hypo-
chlorites has been in vogue since the latter part of the
eighteenth century, no separate returns have been
secured for this industry at any previous census. Chlo-
rine production has practically been, until I'ecently,
incidental to the manufacture of soda by the Le Blanc
process, and as this process has not secured a foothold
in the United States, the production of chlorine bleaches
has heretofore undoubtedly been insignificant in quantity
and value. As pointed out in the treatment of Group
X, with the inti'oduction of electricity as an agent in
effecting chemical transformations, common salt and
other chlorides are being electrolyzed on a commercial
scale with the result that the production of chlorine
and hypochlorites is assuming importance. The chlo-
rine thus produced is converted into bleaching powder
by means of lime, but other hypochlorites, and notably
sodium hypochlorite, are made from imported bleaching
powder. In addition there are produced and used in
bleaching, disinfection, or as a preservative, hydrogen
dioxide, sodium dioxide, sulphurous acid, sodium, cal-
cium, and potassium bisulphites, and many special com-
positions.

In considering this industry in its entirety there must
be discussed, not only those bodies specificallj- rejwrted

as bleaching materials produced by the older processes,
but also such bleaching agents as have been produced
by the aid of electricity, or sent out for use in the com-
pound or liquefied state, and ahso those which are the
subordinate products of establishments whose principal
products classify them with other industries. Com-
bining these there were 26 establishments in 7 states,
producing 26,794,338 pounds of material having a value
of $592,658, and employing a capital of $672,969 and 216
wage-earners. These establishments were distributed
as follows;

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF FACTORIES PRODUC-
ING BLEACHING MATERIAL: 1900.

STATES.

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments.

Average
number
of wage-
earners.

Capital.

Product.

Per cent
of

total.

United States

216

8672,969

$592,658

100.0

New York

10
6
3
3

126
4
10
12

529,746
25,853
14,500
15,039

87,831

407,327

15, 878
39, 171
42. 399

87,883

68.7

Pennsylvania

2.7

New Jersey

Illinois

6.6

7.2

Missouri, Michigan, and
Ohio

14.8

Among the principal products were 10,979 tons of
hypochlorites of a value of $462,9-19; 588,336 pounds
of hydrogen dioxide of a value of $63,751:; 350,585
pounds of sulphur dioxide of a value of $4,826, and
1,461 tons of bisulphites of a value of $34,486. There
were consumed in this manufacture 15,000 tons of salt
brine, equivalent to 1,574 tons of salt, or, together
with the other salt consumed, 9,055 tons of salt of a
value of $19,105; 158,561 bushels of lime of a value of
$20,532; 168 tons of caustic soda of a value of $7,618;
92,600 pounds of metallic sodium; 93,000 pounds of
black oxide of manganese of a value of $1,325; 227 tons
of muriatic acid of a value of $4,325; 974 tons of soda
ash of a value of $23,368; 7 tons of potash of a value
of $420; 171 tons of sulphur of a value of $4,000; 74
tons of barium dioxide of a value of $16,540; 74,490
pounds of phosphoric acid of a value of $14,898; and
44 tons of bleaching powder of a value of $1,570.

SuLpJmr Dioxide (sulphurous acid gas; sulphurous
anhydride; SOj). — This sub.stance has been u.sed as a
bleaching agent from ancient times. It results from
the burning of sulphur or sulphur-containing bodies in
air or oxygen. In the presence of water it bleaches
wool, hair, straw, and other tissues; but the bleaching
is not permanent. Sulphur dioxide is used also as a
disinfectant and germicide; in ice machines as a refrig-
erating agent; in the preparation of bisulphites; to a
small extent in the leather and glucose industries; and
as the first product in the manufacture of sulphuric
acid. Next to its use in making sulphuric acid, the
largest consumption of sulphur dioxide is undoubtedly-
in the sulphite process for converting wood into wood
pulp for the pui-pose of making paper. As it is made
and consumed in the works no returns are available to

determine how much of the gas is produced in this
industr}'.

Blsulj}hites. — TheYe is retarned as having been manu-
factured during the census year bisulphites of sodium,
calcium, and potassium. They are manufactured by
saturating a solution of sodium carbonate, milk of
lime, or potassium carbonate with sulphur dioxide and
crj^stallizing out the salt formed. Or the solution may
be u.sed as made. These bodies are employed as anti-
chlors in bleaching to remove the excess of chlorine
from the fibers of the goods which have been bleached
b}' hypochlorites, and thus prevent this chlorine from
rotting the fiber. They are thus used to treat wood
pulp in paper making, and it is probable that much of
the material used in this art is not included here. The
bisulphites are also employed in chrome tannage, in
brewing, in glucose and starch making, and as preserva-
tives.

Hydrogen Dioxide (hydrogen peroxide, HjOJ. — Hy-
di'ogen dioxide is made bj- treating barium dioxide, or
sodium dioxide in suspension or .solution in water, with a
dilute acid, and keeping the temperature at a low point
by means of ice. Hydrochloric, hydrofluoric, sulphuric,
nitric, or even carbonic acid may be emploj-ed. The
hydrogen dioxide is set free as a gas, which dissolves
in the water present. This solution is decanted off or
filtered, phosphoric acid is added to it, and it is diluted,
if necessary, so as to contain 3 per cent of H^O^, when
it is sent into commerce, and is then known as a 10-
volume solution. Hydrogen dioxide is a powerful oxi-
dizing agent, and it is used in bleaching hair, silk, wool,
feathers, bone, and ivory. It has been quite exten-
sively used for toilet purposes; also as an antiseptic and
disinfectant in surgerj'; as an antichlor; as a reducing
agent in chrome tannage; and as a preservative for
milk, beer, wine, and other fermentable liquids. The
Oakland Chemical Company began the manufacture of
hj'drogen peroxide in Brooklyn, N. Y., in 1881.

Sodium Dioxide (sodium peroxide, Na^Oj). — Sodium
dioxide is made by heating metallic sodium in alu-
minum trays, in a specially contrived furnace, to 300°
C. while purified air is being passed over it. It is a
yellowish white very hygroscopic powder, and is chiefly
used as a bleaching agent, being a very powerful one,
as it gives off 20 per cent of its weight of active oxy-
gen. Its solution is too strongly alkaline for silk or
wool bleaching, and for this purpose it should be con-
verted into magnesium dioxide, which is easily effected
by adding a solution of magnesium sulphate to the solu-
tion of sodium peroxide.

Hypochlorites. — There have been returns made for
bleaching powder (which, according to Lunge, is a com-
pound containing in the satne molecule calcium attached
to chlorine and to a hypochlorous acid residue) and
.sodium hj-pochlorite. The bleaching powder is made
by passing chlorine gas into absorption chambers so as
to come into contact with lime which has been so slaked

as to contain from 24.5 to 25.5 per cent of water. The
lime is exposed to the action of the gas until the test
shows that the product contains from 36 to 37 per cent
of available chlorine. The yield from 100 pounds of
good lime is 1.50 pounds of bleachinfj powder. Bleach-
in};: powder is but partly soluble in water and when
treated with water forms a iiiilk-liko fluid. It is an
efficient bleaching, deodorizing, and disinfecting agent.
To liberate the chlorine for bleaching purposes, an acid
should be employed. The carbon dioxide of the atmos-
phere will effect this result, but in practice a dilute
mineral acid is usually employed, the cloth first being
saturated in the bath of bleaching-powder emulsion,
called the "chemic," and then in the bath of dilute
acid, called the " sour." Bleaching liquors may be made
by passing chlorine gas into the milk of lime, and it
was in this form that it was first used.

The enuilsion of bleaching powder reacts with mag-
nesium sulphate to form magnesium hypochlorite, with
alum to form aluminum hypochlorite, with zinc sul-
phate to form zinc h^'ixjchlorite, and with sodium car-
bonate to form sodium hypochlorite. They are all
efficient bleaching agents and are especially desirable
because they are completely soluble in water. Potas-
sium hypochlorite and sodium hypochlorite have been
sold under the respective names of Eau de Javelle and
Eau de Labarraque, they having been prepared b}'
passing chlorine gas through a solution of potassium
carbonate for the first, and sodium carbonate for the
sfecond. Sodium hyiiochlorite is still used for domestic
purposes in removing spots from linen and also, together
with oxalic acid, as an ink eradicator.

Bleaching b\- chlorine was first suggested and applied
by BerthoUet in 1785, and its adoption revolutionized
the textile industry. He employed solutions of chlo-
rine gas in water, but Tennant in 17!>8 patented a
liquid bleach consisting of a solution of calcium or
sodium hypochlorite prepared bj- passing the gas into
milk of linje or a solution of caustic soda. This liquid
bleach is difficult to transport and keep, and Tennant
introduced a marked improvement b\' the invention of
bleaching powder in 1799. Bleaching powder was
made in this country at Bridesburg, Pa., by Charles
Lennig in 1847. The Mathieson Alkali Works, at
Niagara Falls, N. Y.,and the Dow Chemical Company,
of Midland, Mich., began the manufacture of bleach-
ing powder from electrolytic chlorine in 1898.

Bleaching powder is still imported in very large
quantities. The extent is shown in the following table,
compiled from Volume II of the Foreign Commerce
and Navigation of the United States for the years
ending June 30, 1891 to 1900:

IMPORTS OF LIME. CHLORIDE OF, OR BLEACHING
POWDER: 1891 TO 1900, INCLUSIVE.

YEAR.

Ponnds.

Value. 1

YEAR.

Poands.

Value.

1«91

107,475,715
110,748,289
120,811,918
81,610,463
100,466,774

$1,429,509
1,889.640 1
2,213,121
1.507,076
1,644,835
!

1896

104,053,877
99,274,188
114,232,578
118,107,250
136,403,151

11,579,356

1892

1897

1,375,560

1898

1,421,920

18W

1899

l,159,2n
1,464,019

1896

1900

LITKRATTRB.

Die Bleinhmittel, Beizen und Farlwitoffe, by J. Herzfeld, Volume
I: Berlin; 1889.

Pharmacopoeia of the I'niUxI Statea. 1890.

The ChemiBtry of Paf)er Making, by R. B. Griffin ami A. D.
Little: New York, 1894.

A Theoretical and Practical Treatiue on the Manufacture of Sul-
phuric Acid and Alkali, by George Lunge, Volume III: London,
1896.

Bleaching and Calico Printing, by George Duerr: London, 1896.

Outlines of Industrial Chemistry, by Frank Hall Thorp: New
York, 1898.

Practical Treatise on the Bleaching of Linen and Cotton Yam
and Fabric.^, by L. Tailfer: Ixmdon, 1901.

Group X. — Chemical Substances Produced by the

Aid ok Electricity.

In no prior census has any mention been made of this
art. As a fact, as shown in the historical account which
follows, this industiy has practically been developed
since the census of 1890 was taken. Nevertheless, it
has already grown to such magnitude in these ten years
as to effect serious inroads on the older processes, and
it will undoubtedly in the future assume a greater
importance. Already it is found that sodium and other
metals, caustic soda, bleaching powder and other bleach-
ing agents, bromine and potassium bromide, potassium
chlorate, litharge, graphite, calcium carbide, carbo-
rundum, carbon disulphide, and phosphorus are reported
as being produced on a commercial scale, the total value
of the output for 1900 being reported at $2,045,535. It
is particularly to be noted that the Le Blanc soda pro-
cess, which has for a century been a standard process
for chemical manufacture, is now endangered not only
by the Solvay ammonia process, but that the last prop
on which it relied for profit has been thrown down by
the development of economic methods for the electro-
lytic production of bleaching powder. It is to be
regretted that statistics of the electrical energy effi-
ciency, and other data which are essential to a full
understanding of this art are not at present accessible.
But it can be stated that, apart from works producing
aluminum (which is not included in the chemical indus-
tries), there are 14 establishments in the United States
belonging in Group X, and that these employ $9,173,060
of capital and 739 w^age-earners. These establishments
were distributed as follows:

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRO-CHEMICAL
FACTORIES: 1900.

STATES.

Number
of e8tat>-

Uali-
menta.

I
Average

°,T^i capital.

eomen. I

Value of
producta.

Percent
of toul.

United States

7S0

«, ITS. 080

12,045,836

100.0

New York

10
4

«I4
125

8,311,638
861, 5!a

1,836,606
208,(29

89 8

Maine, Michigan, Con-
necticut, a n <1 - N e w
Hampablre

10 2

It is to be observed that the total value of the prod-
uct given here differs from that given in the tabulation

No. 210 1

of "Chemicals" under the legend "Electro-chemicals,"
because caustic soda is classed with Group II, bleach-
ing powder with Group IX, and the like; while
there is gathered here the value of everything in all
the classes which has been reported as having been
produced bj' the use of the electric current. It is
evident that while in the tabulation the value for a sub-
stance appears but once, by this method of treatment
the value of a given substance will appear each time
that it is treated of in a'diflferent group, and that there-
fore the value of that caustic soda which was produced
electrolytically will not only appear in the total value
given for Group X, now under consideration, but also
under Group II, when the caustic-soda industry is con-
sidered as a whole. For this reason, as well as because
the establishments devoted to the manufacture by elec-
tricity of any particular pi'oduct are too few to be dis-
cussed under the rules separately, the statistics will be
found combined with other statistics in the treatment
of other groups.

Sodium. — The remarkable experiments conducted by
Sir Humphry Davy in 1807, which resulted in the isola-
tion of sodium' and of potassium, not only added to
the list of known chemical elements two of its most
interesting and important members, but the method
devised by him and used here for the first time, in which
an element was isolated by the passage of an electric
current through its fused electrolyte and in which also
the vessel used to contain the fused electrolyte and in
which the fusion was effected was made of conducting
material and served simultaneously as a container, and
as one pole of the decomposing cell, has been largelj"^
applied in recent times, since easily controlled supplies
of electrical energy at reasonable cost have been at com-
mand. Unfortunately no adequately cheap source of
electrical energy was available until the dynamo was
invented in 1867." In the meantime, and subsequent
to Davy's discovery, Gay-Lussac and Thenard found
that sodium could be displaced from fused caustic soda
by metallic iron at a high temperature, and later Brun-
ner discovered that this reduction could be effected
under these circumstances by carbon also. Upon this
discovery, and making use of the condenser of Donny
and Maresca, Sainte-Claire Deville based the method of
manufacture which he devised, and this was for many
years the only one employed in the commercial pro-
duction of this metal. In practicing this process a mix-
ture of sodium carbonate, lime or chalk, and charcoal
were heated in iron retorts, and the displaced sodium
distilled off and condensed, the reaction taking place
being represented b}' the equation:

Na^CO, + 2 C = 2 Na + 3 CO.

Darling says, " Deville brought its manufacture

to a high degree of perfection, reducing the cost of a

> Phil. Trans., vol. 98, page 1. 1808.

' Borcher, Electric Smelting and Refining, page 104.

kilo from 2,000 francs, in 1855, to 10 francs, in 1859."'
About 1886, H. Y. Castner, an American, greatly
simplified the manufacture by acting on sodium hydrox-
ide with iron and carbon, or iron carbide, effecting the
following reaction:

6 NaOH+FeC, = 2 Na^COj+Fe-f 2 Na+3 H,
by fusing the mass in steel or iron crucibles and pass-
ing the vapors into condensers opening under high-test
petroleum. According to Mendeleeff,* "At present
(1897) a kilogram of sodium may be purchased for
about the same sum (2 shillings sterling) as a gram
cost thirty years ago."

In 1890 Castner devised an electrolytic process which
completely superseded the chemical processes for the
isolation of sodium, and this has since been, until re-
cently, the only pi'ocess in use in this country or abroad
for the commercial production of this metal. The
electrolyte consists of fused caustic soda, which is
melted in a cylindrical steel crucible with a contracted
neck at the bottom, so set in a flue that as the crucible
is heated from the outside the body of it only becomes
heated while the neck remains cool, so that the caustic
soda which fills the crucible remains solid in the neck
and protects the joint between the cathode and the cru-
cible at that point. There is a perforation in the bot-
tom of the crucible at the neck, through which the
cathode is passed up verticall}' and sealed by the solid
caustic soda, as described above. The electrodes are of
iron, and the anode, which may be cylindrical in form,
is inserted from above so as to surround the end of the
cathode. Encircling the cathode within the anode, and
depending from a collecting pot above, is a cylinder of
iron-wire gauze which serves to prevent the sodium, as it
is liberated, from passing into the anode compartment.
The inverted collecting pot above the cathode is filled
with hydrogen, which is one of the products of the elec-
trolysis, and this protects the sodium, as it collects, from
chance oxidation. The sodium is baled from the col-
lecting pot as soon as it has accumulated in suflicient
quantity. More recently Darling has devised a process
by which sodium is obtained fi'om sodium nitrate.

Metallic Sodium and Nitric Acid from Fused Sodium
Nitrate. — The Darling process, as carried out in the
works of Harrison Bros. &.Co., of Philadelphia, Pa.,
is characterized by the kind of diaphragm used. A
cast-iron pot, set in a brick furnace and containing the
nitrate to be decomposed, acts as the anode or positive
electrode. A 6-inch layer of refractory insulating
material is placed in the bottom of the pot and the por-
ous cup rests centrally upon this, leaving a 3-inch
space between the cup and the pot. This space is then
tilled with sodium nitrate and the cup itself nearly
filled with melted sodium hydroxide. The cathode, or
negative electrode, consisting of a short length of
4-inch wrought-iron pipe, provided with proper elec-

'J. Frk. Inst., vol. 153, page 65. 1902.

*The Principles of Chemistry, 1). Mendeleeff, vol. 1, page 5:^5:
London, 1897.

trical connections, is suspended inside the cup, reachinjf
nearly to the bottom, and bridges made of wrought-
iron pipe support these cathodes in a row of porous
cups. When external heat is applied to the furnace,
the electrolytes melt, and, permeating the walls of the
cup, allow the passage of the current which, when of
suitable strength, causes the decomjwsition of the
sodium nitrate into sodium, nitrogen dioxide, and oxy-
gen. The nitrogen dioxide and oxygen are liberated
as gases at the positive electrodes, escape through a
hole in the cover provided for that purpose and are
utilized.

The positive sodium ions pass through the walls of
the cup and on through the molten sodium hydroxide
to be ultimately liberated in the metallic state at the
cathodes. The first sodium liberated is absorbed by or
combined with the sodium hydroxide, hydrogen gas
being evolved and sodium monoxide, probably, being
formed. After some time, metallic sodium rises to the
top of the electrolyte in the cups and at intervals of
about one hour is dipped off with a spoon and preserved
under mineral oil. This style of porous cup and furnace
gives excellent results. The use of two electrolytes of
different character, yet having a common base, allows
of the sodium being liberated in a neutral medium away
from all danger of oxidation by the nitrate from which
it is obtained. At first the sheet-metal walls of the
porous cup had a verj' short life, being quickly eaten
away by the local action caused by the secondary effects
of the current. This trouble was overcome by shunt-
ing about 5 per cent of the current directly through the
metal walls of the cup, making them positive. This
plan reduced the local action and increased the life of
the cup about ten times. The material now used for
the porous cup is a mixture of ground dead-burnt mag-
nesite and Portland cement, and it makes a very satis-
factory diaphragm.

The nitrogen dioxide and oxygen evolved at the posi-
tive poles are conducted by means of earthenware pipes
to a number of receivers or Woulff bottles connected
together and containing water. The nitrogen tetrox-
ide which is produced on coming in contact with the
water combines to form nitric acid, 3N,04+2H,0=4
HN0j+N,0j. The N,Oj takes up a molecule of oxygen
to again form NjO,, and more nitric acid is formed. If
it is desired to make a very strong acid for use in the
manufacture of high explosives, a system of towers
that automatically brings the strength of the acid up
to a high degree is used.

Each furnace takes a current of about 400 amperes
at an average E.M.F. of 15 volts. External heat is
used only when starting up and when changing the cups,
which have a life of from 425 to 450 hours; at other
times during the operation the heat generated by the
resistance to the passage of the current is sufficient to
keep the electrolytes melted.

It is interesting to note, in connection with this proc-

ess, that in DecemV>cr, 1902, the supply of metallic
sodium on hand and in storage at thc.H4> works had
become so great that the city authorities, fearing acci-
dents, compelled the ojMiration of the process to ceatie.'

Up to some ten years ago, about the only viae for
sodium outside of the lalwratory was in the isolation of
aluminum, and when the electrolytic method for the
production of aluminum was developed it l(K)ked as if
the isolation of sodium on any large scale would cease.
It was only when electricity was also applied to the
isolation of sodium that it could Im; obtained cheaply
enough to permit of its use in fields that had hitherto
been closed to it on the score of cost. Chief among
these new uses is the manufacture of alkaline cj-anides,
which are so largely used in the extraction of gold
from low-grade ores and tailings; for "quickening"
mercury in gold amalgamation; for electroplating; in
photography; and other minor uses. Large amounts
are also converted into sodium peroxide to be used in
bleaching wool, silk, and feathers, and thereby replac-
ing the more expensive hydrogen peroxide. It is also
used in making certain anilin colors and organic com-
pounds, and wherever a powerful reducing agent is
needed.

Caustic soda and hypochlorites. — When common salt
is electrolyzed it is separated into its constituents,
sodium and chlorine, and this electrolysis may be
effected by passing a proper current through fused
sodium chloride, or through an aqueous solution of the
salt; but in the latter case the sodium set free at the
cathode immediately reacts with the water present,
fomiing sodium hydroxide and liberating hydrogen.
As shown in the discussion in Group II, the soda indus-
try is one of the most important of the chemical in-
dustries, and as common salt is used in the Le Blanc,
iSolvay, and the other established processes of soda manu-
facture as the raw material of the art, it is not surpris-
ing that since, as stated above, common salt is readily
electrolyzed, numerous processes and devices have
been invented for effecting this on a commercial scale.
Among them are the Vautin, Hulin, and the Borchers
processes, in which fused sodium chloride is the electro-
lyte, and' the Holland and Richardson, Hargreaves-
Bird, Castner or Castner-Kellner, Solvay, Le Sueur,
and the Dow, in which an aqueous solution of common
salt, which in some instances is native brine, is used as
the electrolyte. According to Blount,* the Castner-
Kellner process is the only one which in 1900 was
being worked in England on a large scale and in a
profitable manner, but while this process is carried on
in the United States, the Le Sueur and Dow proc-
esses are also in active operation here.

The difficulties in making the simple electrolysis of
common salt a commercial success have been various.
In the fused electrolyte processes they have been

•Science, vol. 15 (N. 8.), page 129, Jan. 24. 1892.
' Practical Electro-Chemiatry, page 309.

largely due to the corrosive action which fused salt
exerts on most materials that can be used for making
the vessels in which the electrolysis can be conducted,
while, since the melting point of sodium chloride is
800° C, and metallic sodium begins to distill below
900° C. , the metal comes off mostly as a vapor, which
greatly increases the difficulties of collecting it. In
the dissolved electrolyte processes, among other diffi-
Qulties, trouble has arisen from the evolved chlorine
wandering into the cathode compartment and reacting
with the previously fomied sodium hydroxide, or vice
versa, to form hypochlorites and chlorates, while the
complete separation of the caustic soda from the sodium
chloride was not at first easily effected.
C. L. Parsons,* writing in 1898, says:

Ernest A. Le Sueur enjoys the distinction of having in-
vented the first electrolytif process for the commercial decompo-
sition of sodium chloride, which became a regular contributor to
the markets of the world. Since February, 1893, caustic soda and
bleaching powder have been manufactured at Rumford Falls, Me.,
on a commercial scale.

It appears that Le Sueur began his experiments in
the winter of 1887-1888, and after associating with him
Charles N. Waite, who afforded him valuable assistance
and some facilities at his chemical works in Newton,
Mass., they together ran an experimental cell from
October, 1890, to May, 1891, in a paper mill at Bellows
Falls, Vt. In 1892 an association was formed, which in
August of that year began the erection of a plant at
Kumford Falls, and in February, 1893, began the man-
ufacture of caustic soda and bleaching powder, using
to generate the required current one 200-kilowatt
dynamo of the Thompson-Houston pattern. The suc-
cess of the venture was such that three more dynamos
of the same capacity were installed in the fall of 1894,
and the Electro-Chemical Company was organized.

Parsons describes the Le Sueur cell as follows:

The cell as now used is contained in a tank 5 by 9 feet and 1} feet
deep, and made of one-quarter inch boiler steel. Excepting the
asbestos, which composes the diaphragm, the wire netting of the
cathode, and the materials of the positive electrode, it is built
entirely of spruce, red brick, Portland cement, sand, and slate.
These substances are so disposed in the cell as to be practically
permanent, the wood being exposed to no action except that of the
caustic solution, which has little effect upon it. The anodes are
introduced from the top of the cell and may be removed singly
without interrupting the process. Troublesome joints are closed
with a specially prepared plastic cement. The diaphragm is tipped
somewhat from the horizontal for the purpose of permitting the
easy egress of the hydrogen bubbles. The foundation of the cell
within the tank consists of an oblong frame of spruce, 8 feet 4 inches
by 4 feet 10 inches, outside measurement, and 8 inches less on both
dimensions inside. This frame is 11 inches deep, only the side
pieces, however, resting upon thefloor of the tank. The end pieces
consist of four 4-inch timbers, whose upper surfaces are 10 inches
above the floor of the tank and 1 inch below the top surface of
the longer side. The frame is divided transversely by a timber,
similar to each of the end timbers, which crosses the middle of the
frame at the same level as the end pieces. This center beam forms a
bridge over which the flat iron ribs supporting the cathode are hung.

'J. Am. Chem. Sec, vol. 20, page 868. 1898.

The cell is thus divided into two equal spaces merely for mechanical
convenience. The ribs referred to consist of four parallel pieces
of flat iron, three of them being IJ by three-eighths inch, and
the fourth, twice as wide. This wider piece is fastened at both
ends to the containing tank, so as to receive from the latter
the electric current, which enters through the material of the tank
and communicates the current to the cathode, which rests upon
these iron ribs. The diaphragm rests directly upon the cathode.
The depth of the trough formed by the slanting ribs is 4 inches.
There is an adequate arrangement at the ends of the bridge pieces
by means of whicli the hydrogen, finding its way to this higher
level, is delivered to exit pipes communicating with the atmosphere,
or with any system of piping to which it is desired to deliver it.
Xhe inch of space between the tops of the cross timbers and the
side pieces is utilized to take a piece of slate 4 feet long bv 4 inches
wide by 1 inch thick. This presses down upon the diaphragm and
the cathode netting and keeps all solid. On top of the sides and
ends of the frame there are four courses of common brick laid in
clear cement. There is a coating of cement applied to the inside
walls of the portion of the cell forming the anode compartment,
and this includes not only the brick walls, but the small portion
of the wooden sides above the cathode, which would otherwise
come in contact with the anode liquid. The ceiling of the cell
consists simply of pieces of slate, 2 feet by 1 foot, and suitably
supported by transverse strips of slate, 1 inch thick by 4 inches
wide. Through the ceiling plates pass the glass tubes to which
the anodes are attached.

The anodes which are now used are made from an alloy of iridium
and platinum, and are so constructed that a very large anode sur-
face is presented at an almost incredibly small cost, when it is
considereii that it is not at all of the nature of a plated surface, but
is an anode of solid metal. Sixty anodes on an average are used
to each cell, and each anode costs 73 cents at the present market
price of platimmi. They are acted upon chemically but slightly,
if at all. If the glass holders break there is no loss of platinum,
and a new anode can immediately be put in place. The total cost
for the anodes of a plant producing, per month, 200 tons of bleach-
ing powder, is approximately $5,000, or |40 for a cell producing .55
pounds of sodium hydroxide and 50 pounds of chlorine per day;
and this allows for a very low cell efficiency. The total cost for
the renewal of the platinum, including labor, is less than half the
cost of the bare carbon alone, as it was formerly used. Besides, it
must be remembered that carbon anodes are certain to give more
or less carbon dioxide if hypochlorite be present, while with these
iridio-platinum anodes no carbon dioxide can possibly be produced.

At Rumford Falls, the Electro-Chemical Company obtains power
at a very low cost, so that it pays to obtain a maximum of work
from each cell by using a higher current density in proportion to
the anode surface than might be tenable under other conditions.
As the cells are now constructed, a current of 1,000 amperes is
passed through each cell under a pressure of six and one-half volts.
I am aware that this voltage is high, and from a statement in Lunge ''
he would probably, at first thought, condemn the process on this
ground alone. But it will readily be understood how this increased
voltage can be economically employed when it is considered that
at $8 per electrical horsepower per year, which is the cost of
power to the company at Rumford Falls, the extra cost per pound
of product, on an average eflSciency of 80 ]ier cent, is but $0.00015
for each extra volt used. This high voltage is by no means an
essential of the process, and each cell can be run on a lower
amperage, when of course less pressure would be required. It is
simply a fact that at Rumford Falls it is economical to run the
cells on this voltage, forcing through them all the current they can
take without undue heating. Under these conditions, the renewal
of the cell is usually made necessary only on account of the deterio-
ration of the diaphragm. The diaphragms have an average life of
seven weeks, and have been used twenty-four consecutive weeks

' Alkali Industry, vol. 3.

withonl roiiewal. The cathcxlew are but little acted upon, and the
Bteel tanks are practically indestructible.

The cells are arranged so that twenty-two are in series, and
three series are run in parallel on two dynamos. The hydrogen is
used only for working platinum, the larger part being allowwl to
escape into the atmosphere. The chlorine is conducted by earthen-
ware pipi's to lead chainl)ers and alworbed by liine in the usual
manner, although at present a i>art is U8e<l for manufacture of
potassium chlorate. The i^austic solution is concentratetl by evap-
oration in raaw, and is separate<l from the major part of the unde-
composed salt by centrifugals. Any chlorate is now readily
removed, and the solution is then boile<1 down in cast-iron kettles
to a first-quality caustic sotla, analyzing alx)ut 74 per cent sodium
oxide. The recovered salt is converted into brine and is used in
the cathode com[>artnient of the cells, nothing but fresh brine and
some hydrochloric acid ever being added to the anode side. Whole
bays of twenty-two cells have shown daily averages of over 90 per
cent chlorine efficiency, and weekly averages of 87 per cent. If
the anode compartment could be kept constiintly acid, as can be
done with single cells, a chlorine efficiency approaching very closely
to the theoretical may be reached. The efficiency, reckoned upon
the sodium hydroxide produceil, is not quite so high.

One great fielil for electrolytic processes is the production of
bleaching liquors and caustic solutions for bleacheries, paper mills,
and the like. l.«rge economies might be introduced by companies
of this kind by making their own solutions electrolytically instead
of by the usual method of first transporting the chlorine in the
form of bleaching powder and the alkali in the solid state. This
is almost self-evident when one considers that the final evaporation
of the caustic soda, which is quite costly, is done solely for pur-
poses of transportation; that the absorption of chlorine by milk of
lime is a very simple operation, and the bleach liquors so produced
are much more efficient per unit of chlorine than bleaching pow-
der; and that the raw material (salt) is easily and cheaply obtained
and transported without deterioration, while a small plant can be
run almost as economically as a large one. In fact, the Electro-
Chemical Company has sold a great deal of chlorine in the form
of bleach liquors to pulp mills at reasonable distances from the
works, that preferred to take this liquid carrier of chlorine on
account of its ready-settled solution, ease of manipulation, and its
greater efficiency, although the cost of transportation might be
somewhat greater. In works which do not require caustic soda,
the process would also be highly economical, for under such con-
ditions the cathode liquor can be directly used to absorb the chlo-
rine, in excellent condition for bleaching purposes, thus doing away
entirely with the cost and use of lime. I do not hesitate to predict
that we shall yet see many Le Sueur plants established in connec-
tion with mills now using bleaching powder. In fact, one of our
largest American sulphite pulp mills has already made arrange-
ments for a trial of the Le Sueur plant, with a view of bleaching to
a very large extent.

Parsons points out that the chief difficulty of the pro-
cess from the outset has been to keep the .sodimn
hydroxide in its proper compartment, for with the best
of diaphragms a limited amount of diffusion into the
anode compartment goes on, and sodium hypochlorite
is foi-med, which is oxidized to sodium chlorate either
before diffusion into the outer space or during evap-
oration of the cathode solution, and is eventually
recovered as a b}- -product in the form of potassium
chlorate. In addition, the diffusing sodium hydroxide
is partly electrolyzed, and, if carbon anodes are used,
the oxygen liberated will attack them, forming carbon
dioxide. The sodium hypochlorite niav also be elec-
trolyzed, giving rise to nascent oxygen and increasing

the amount of carljon dioxide produced, and this forma-
tion of carlwn dioxide is u very serious matter, for
unless removed from the chlorine gas, it renders the
manufacture of a standard grade of bleaching powder
imiM)ssibIe. Ia' Sueur has overcome many of these
difficulties, first, by having the liquid in the anode com-
partment at a higher level than that of the cathode,
thus diminishing the entrance of sodium hydroxide by
diffusion; second, by using platinum-iridium anodes;
and third, by adding hydrochloric acid to the anode
compartment .so as to keep the solution slightly acid.
This acid, so added, at once decomposes any hypochlo-
rite, and is itself oxidized so that all of its chlorine
is regained in the form of that gas. No chlorine '\»
lost by this operation, for the chlorine obtained as
bleaching powder is greater than the equivalent of
the sodium hydroxide by the amount of chlorine in the
added hydrochloric acid. This use of hydrochloric acid
is a matter of some expense, for an equivalent of chlo-
rine at Rumford Falls costs more in the form of hydro-
chloric acid than it is worth as bleaching powder, but
in other localities, and especially near the Le Blanc soda
factories, such use of hydrochloric acid may prove a
positive advantage from the standpoint of economy.
Parsons points out that while in 1892, when the Rum-
ford Falls plant was built, bleaching powder sold in
Boston for ^5 per ton and caustic soda for $74 per ton,
in 1898 the prices were $30 and $36, respective!}-.

According to Chandler,' all the difficulties enumerated
above were completely overcome by the Castner process,
in which the usual porous diaphragm is avoided, and a
moving cathode of quicksilver is u.sed in its place which
absorbs the metallic sodium as fast as it is produced
and removes it at once from the decomposing cell to a
neighboring one, where the sodium is withdrawn elec-
trolytically and converted into sodium hydroxide. The
operation is accomplished in what is known as the "tip-
ping cell," which is so arranged that once a minute it is
rocked upon its support just enough to cause the mer-
cury cathode in the bottom to flow back and forth under
the partition to and from the neighboring cell, where
the sodium hydroxide is produced free from chlorine.
The metallic sodiimi never exceeds more than 0. 2 per
cent of the mercury, and consequently there is very
little loss from the recombination of sodium and chlo-
rine in the decomposing cell.

An important adjunct to the tipping cell is Castner's
graphitized anode. With the ordinary carbon anodes,
such as have been previously employed, it was found that
the combined action of the chlorine and other sub-
stances resulting from the electrolysis of sodium chlo-
ride, together with the chemical reactions which oc-
curred at or near the surface, disintegrated them
rapidly. By converting the anodes after they have Ijeen
shaped and baked into the graphitic form, they are of
much greater durability, and the graphitizing process

' The Mineral Industry, vol. 9, page 765. 1901.

has been regularly employed on a large scale for this
purpose. Other modifications and improvements in the
details of construction of the tipping cells have been
made which facilitate the pi'oduction and have increased
the efficiency of the process. The Castner process
yields pure caustic soda and pure chlorine, and has
been in successful operation for several years in Eng-
land, on the Continent, and at Niagara Falls, N. Y.
At the last-named locality the company now using it is
extending its plant.

According to Blount,' the Castner- Kellner process is
at work in England, at Weston Point, in Lancashire,
where a plant of about 1,000 horsepower is in use and
where a second plant of equal size is now being put down.
Another plant of 2,000 horsepower (also about to be
doubled), belonging to the Mathieson Alkali Company,
is running at Niagara, using current supplied bj' the
Niagara Falls Power Company. The output of this
company is stated to be 10 tons of caustic soda and 24
tons of bleaching powder per day of twenty-four hours;
the current efficiency, from 85 to 90 per cent; the
pressure required, 3.5 volts — i. e., the energy efficiency
is from 55.6 to 58.9 per cent. These statements are
found to be concordant if we assume that the joint effi-
ciency of the transformers and dynamos is 80 per cent.

This is not an unreasonable loss, inasmuch as the cur-
rent has not only to be let down in voltage, but has to
be transformed from an alternating to a direct current.
The current comes from the power house at a pi'essure
of 2,200 volts; it is transformed down in stationary
transformers to a pressure of 120 volts. At this pres-
sure the current, (which is, of course, still alternating,)
passes to motor transformers, which transform it to a
direct current delivered at a pressure of 200 volts, this
being a convenient voltage for working a group of
electrolytic cells.

The anodes used are ordinary "squirted" carbons;
they are subjected to a "special treatment," designed to
render them more refractory, and are said to last a year.
Connection is made with them by means of a lead cap
cast on one end. The caustic soda solution obtained is
fairly concentrated, e. g., about 20 per cent strength.
Much is sent in liquid form in tank wagons to soap-
makers in Buffalo, about 20 miles from Niagara. Some
is boiled down and sold in the solid state to the Electro-
Chemical Company, whose works are close to those of
the Mathieson Alkali Company.

The Dow process, as set forth in United States patent
No. 621908, of March 28, 1899, has for its object the
production of the chlorine and sodium hj^droxide from
common brine, consisting of sodium chloride, calcium
chloride, and magnesium chloride in aqueous solution,
and the invention is in the peculiar kind of diaphragm
employed and its method of formation. To form this
diaphragm a quantity of metallic iron is introduced into
the brine in the neighborhood of the anode. On the

' Practical Electro-Chemiatry, pages 313-314.

electric current being passed through the solution the
first actions that take place are the decomposition of
the electrolytic solution near the anode and cathode,
free chlorine being formed at or near the anode, and
free sodium, calcium, and magnesium being formed at
the cathode. These latter in turn react with the water
of the electrolyte to form sodium, magnesium, and cal-
cium hydroxides, this formation also taking place near
the cathode, thus 2NaH-2H30=2NaOH+H,. Part of
the chlorine at the anode combines with the iron and
forms iron chloride (SCl^ + 2Fe = 2FeCl3). The sodium,
calcium, and magnesium hydroxides and the iron chlo-
ride diffuse toward the middle of the cell and meet
between the electrodes. On such meeting the iron is
precipitated as iron h3'droxide, which forms part of the
diaphragm,

3NaOH+ FeCl, = Fe(0H)3+ 3NaCl ,
3Ca(OH),+2FeCl3=2Fe(OH)3+3CaCU,
3Mg(OH),+2FeCl3=2Fe(OH)3-f3MgCl2.

Calcium and magnesium h}'droxides are precipitated
by the sodium hydroxide from the calcium and mag-
nesium chlorides,

2NaOH+ CaCl, = Ca(OH),+ 2NaCl,
2NaOH+ MgCl, = Mg(OH), + 2NaCl.

The diaphragm begins to form and build up from
these precipitates, consisting of iron, calcium, and mag-
nesium hydroxides. The chlorine diffusing toward the
cathode on passing into the diaphragm, is absorbed by
the calcium and magnesium hydroxides, forming cal-
cium and magnesium hypochlorites, thus preventing
the contamination of the cathode solution bj' the chlo-
rine. These hypochlorites, whose formulae are not
positively known, decompose very rapidly, probably
into chloride and oxygen. In actual working these hy-
pochlorites are not found present. The iron hydrox-
ide being inert so far as the chlorine is concerned, is
not disturbed, so that eventually the side of the dia-
phragm near the anode is almost completelj' depleted of
calcium and magnesium hydroxide by the action of the
chlorine, and only iron hydroxide is left, while the
cathode side consists mainlv of calcium and magnesium
hydroxides. The iron hydroxide prevents to a great
extent the chlorine of the anode compai'tment from
being consumed by the parts of the diaphragm with
which it will combine. As the pores of the diaphragm con-
tain iron, calcium, and magnesium chlorides, the sodium
hydroxide of the cathode side upon entering the dia-
phragm is absorbed by these chlorides before it can
diffuse to the anode side, so that the sodium hydroxide
can not contaminate the anode solution.

Thus the products of electrolysis are effectually pre-
vented from passing into and contaminating the opposite
solutions. The precipitation and formation of the dia-
phragm will take place most rapidly where the diffu-
sion is the greatest, and should any portion become

detached or mutilated diffimion will be greater at the
niutilixtod point, and the consequent greater precipita-
tion at this point will niond the break. It is thus seen
that the diaphragm will thicken evenly. While one or
more sheets of porous material — such as paper, cloth,
a.sbe8tus, and the like — might be placed as a nucleus
upon which the two essential layers of the diaphragm
would be precipitated in the practical working of the
cell, such a procedure has not been found necessary
or advantageous, the diaphragm being readily pro-
duced in the proper place without such foundation.
The physical qualities of the mixed hydroxides when
made into a diaphragm in thi.s manner are such that
they form a coherent and self-supporting mass oflfering
very little resistance to the passage of the electric cur-
rent, but at the same time they oflFer a high resistance
to the diffusion of the products of electrolysis and the
electrolyte.

In the Dow process carbon electrodes are used. In
all the processes bleaching powder is produced by ab-
sorbing the chlorine in dry slaked lime kept at a tem-
perature below 46° C. The yield of bleaching powder
from 100 pounds of good lime is 150 pounds.

Chlwates. — Chlorates have heretofore been prepared
by passing chlorine into alkaline solutions maintained
at a temperature at or above 100° C. In making potas-
sium chlorate, which is the salt most largely used, the
chlorine was first passed into a hot milk of lime, and
after this had become saturated with chlorine and had
acquired a density of 25° to 30° Twaddle, the solution
was run off to settle. When clear, potassium chloride
in calculated quantity was added, which, by reacting
with the calcium chlorate, gave rise to calcium chloride
and potassium chlorate.

As noted above, sodium chlorate may be obtained as
a secondary product in the Le Sueur and other processes
of electrolyzing common salt, and by metathesis with
potassium chloride the potassium chlorate results. Since
potassium chloride occurs native, and is mined at Stass-
f urt, it would appear to be a simple matter to electrolyze
a hot solution of this salt directly to the chlorate, using
a vessel without any diaphragm, but this is found
feasible only up to a small concentration. Kellner has
proposed to add to a saturated potassium chloride solu-
tion about 3 per cent of a sparingly soluble hydroxide,
such as slaked lime or magnesia, and to keep the whole
in agitation as the current is passed. The lime or
magnesia assists in the formation of the chloric acid and
serves to bring about the transfer of the potassium
from its combination as a chloride to that as a chlorate.
By concentration of the solution the potassium chlo-
rate foraied crvstallizes out. As shown by United
States patent 493023, of March 7, 1893, Gibbs and Fran-
chot make use of a cathode of copper oxide in electro-
lyzing the potassium chloride. The theoretical yield
of potassium chlorate is 164 parts for every 100 parts
of potassium chloride used.

Potassium chlorate is used in manufacturing explo-
sives, fireworks, fuse compositions, safety and parlor
matches, and as an oxidizing agent in color works, io
dyeing, and in other arts.

Lead Oxides. — Under Sulom's process these are pro-
duced by the oxidation of spongy metallic lead, which
is obtained by the electrolytic reduction of galena.
Dilute sulphuric acid is used as the electrolyte, and
sheets of lead are employed for electrodes. As neither
the galena nor the lead reduced from it is soluble in
the electrolyte, there is no ionization of the lead com-
pounds or conveyance of the lead, but the latter is left
as a porous mass, having the form of the original mass
from which it was obtained, while the sulphur is evolved
as hydrogen sulphide, and in this regard this process
differs from all other electrolytic processes in use or
proposed for u.se. The porous lead heats up on ex-
posure to air, and is readily converted to oxides, or
may be employed in the Dutch process of making white
lead, where its porous condition constitutes an advan-
tage in promoting the speed of corrosion. The lead may
also be directly compressed into grids for secondary
batteries.

Graphite. — Graphite is distinguished by being the
first substance existing in nature as a mineral which
has been commercially produced in the electric furnace.
Its existence as a mineral under the names plumbago
and black lead has long been known, and its employ-
ment in pencils is described in a work written by Con-
rad Gessner in 1565, but it was not until 1779 that its
identit}' was established by Scheele and it became recog-
nized as one of the allotropic forms of carbon. Sev-
eral methods for the artificial production of graphite
have been discovered, and that it is obtained from other
forms of carbon by exposure to high temperatures, such
as obtain in the electric furnace, has long been known,
but the discovery that this is brought about through
the formation first of carbon compounds, such as silicon
carbide, and their subsequent decomposition is due to
E. G. Acheson, and he has reduced this discovery to
practice, producing graphite in quantity. An interest-
ing feature of his discovery is that the phenomenon
of the conversion is a progressive one and that a small
portion of the other constituent of the carbide acts, as
he says, "by catalysis" to convert a large mass of the
amorphous carbon into graphite. This conversion is
effected in a similar furnace to that used in the manu-
facture of carborundum, and the methods employed are
similar.

The factory for working this process and making
graphite from coke, bituminous coal, or other amor-
phous forms of carbon was established at Niagara Falls
in 1899, and is to-day the only factory in the world, and
the material has been here produced in several forms.
One is an intimate mixture of pure amorphous carbon
and graphite in fine powder-for use as paint and for
foundry facings. Another consists of articles pre-

viously molded from amorphous carbon which contains
the catalytic agent. Among them are electrodes for
use in alkali processes, like the Castner process, and
carbon plates for use as brushes in dynamos and motors;
and the life as well as the efficiency of these articles
is much increased by being graphitized. It is expected
that this process may utilize much of the fine refuse
from the coke ovens.

Graphite is used in the manufacture of pencils, cru-
cibles, stove polish, foundry facing, paint, motor and
dynamo brushes, antifriction compounds, electrodes
for metallurgical work, conducting surfaces in electro-
typing and for glazing powder grains.

As pointed out, the chief source of graphite is from
mines, and the extent of its production from this source
in the United States will be shown when the census of
the mining industry is taken. The amount imported
is, however, very large, as shown by the following
table, compiled from Vol. II of the Foreign Commerce
and Navigation of the United States, for the year ending
June 30, 1900:

IMPORTS OF PLUMBAGO, 1891 TO 1900, INCLUSIVE.

YEAR.

Tons.

Value.

1891

10,135

13,511

14,207

7,935

7,051

»509,809
726, 648
866,309
410,819
208,936

1892

1893

1894 . . .

1896

1896,
1897
1898
1899
1900

Tons.

11,891
12,469

11,154
16, 970
20,597

Value.

tS84,554

821,355

472, 401

1,081,859

2,345,294

Calcium Carbide, CaCj, was prepared in 1862 by
Woehler, by heating an alloy of zinc and calcium with
an excess of carbon, and in 1893, by Travers, by heat-
ing a mixture of calcium chloride, carbon, and sodium.
Its commercial production began in the United States
at Spi-ay, N. C, in 1894, when Thomas L. Willson
produced it by heating lime and coke together in an
electric furnace, and out of this has grown the large
industry which exists to-day. The furnace employed
by Willson was of the simplest kind, as it consisted
merely of a rectangular fire-brick box lined with carbon,
to serve as one electrode, into which a stout carbon rod
or bundle of rods dipped vertically to serve as the other
electrode. The charge of mixed lime and coke was
piled about the vertical electrode, which, after making
contact to establish the arc, was raised as the mass was
caused to react. Since the reaction is effected solely
by the high temperature attained in the electric furnace,
and not through electrolysis, either an alternating or a
direct current can be employed, and as the former can
be brought from a distance at a high voltage and trans-
formed on the spot where it is to be used, by a .station-
ary transformer, it is generally to be preferred.

As carried on at Spray, the opei-ation was a discon-
tinuous one, since, when the movable electrode had been
raised to its greatest height and a prismatic mass of
the carbide had been formed between the electrodes, the
current had to be cut off, the furnace cooled, and the

carbide removed, before a fresh charge could be put in.
Besides, a very large part of the charge of coke and
lime failed to be heated to the reaction temperature,
and yet its presence was necessary to protect the walls
of the furnace from the high temperature of the arc.

Through the invention of Charles S. Bradley, this
process has now been made continuous. He prefers to
employ a rotary wheel or annulus, into which projects
at one side an electrode; the wheel being provided
with means for preventing the material from spilling;
with means for supplying fresh material to be acted
upon b3^ the current; and with facilities for removing
the product; the whole being so arranged that the
operation may be carried on in an uninterrupted man-
ner, as the furnace is constantly forming fresh addi-
tions to the product and permitting the latter to be
removed as frequently as may be necessary. The
wheel is preferably turned by power-driven machinery,
and is provided with a hollow periphery', to which (over
an arc covering the lower part of the wheel) buckets
are attached, forming throughout the arc a closed
receptacle for the material to be operated upon.
These buckets are arranged to be withdrawn or opened
when they reach the discharge-end of the wheel-arc.
The material, in the form of powder or granules, is
supplied to the side of the wheel which contains the
electrode or electrodes. The electric arc, or the limits
of the space within which the electric action on the
material takes place, is wholly within the mass of pul-
verized material, so that a wall of unchanged or uncon-
verted material will surround the product of the
furnace, and the motion of the wheel is in such direc-
tion as to keep the converted material surrounded by a
body of unconverted material, and thus to exclude air
until the converted mass has become sufficiently cool to
permit of its removal and further treatment for pack-
ing for shipment or storage.

In the formation of the calcium carbide, the intimate
mixture of ground lime and ground carbon is supplied
to that side of the wheel-arc into which the current is
introduced and is here fused and forms a pool of liquid
carbide within the wheel rim, the pool being surrounded
by a mass of the uncombined mixed carbon and lime
which acts as an efficient heat insulator and keeps the
walls of the receptacle comparatively cool. As the
wheel turns, the pool is withdrawn from the neighbor-
hood of the arc, or region of electrical activity, so that
the liquid carbide cools and solidifies under a superin-
cumbent and surrounding mass of material, which pre-
vents access of air and thus prevents wasteful consump-
tion of carbon by combustion. Thus a core of solid
calcium carbide is formed within a granular or pulver-
ized mass of material, the core growing in length as the
receptacle recedes from the electrode until it emerges
from the other end of the wheel-arc, when the remova-
ble sections of the wheel rim may be taken off one at a
time, which permits the pulverized material to fall away

from the solid core of carbide, so that the latter may bo
broken off or otherwise removed periodically. Thus
the formation of carbide goes on continuously without
any necessary interruption for recharging or removal
of the product.

The wheel used is formed in sections which un-
bolted together, and it has a horizontal axis mounted
in boxes at or near the Hoor level. The rim of the
wheel is concave in cross section and is provided at in-
tervals with pivoted latches to engage studs on setni-
cylindrical sections of plate iron and thereby support
them on the wheel. Auxiliary plates of thin sheet
iron may be bent around the joint between the sections
on the. inside of the wheel rim, to prevent the pulver-
ized material from sifting through the cracks at the
joints. The wheel may with advantage be made about
15 feet in diameter, and the rim and plate-iron sections
of such proportions as to form a circular receptatUe of
36 inches in diameter. The inner wall of the wheel
rim is provided with holes at intervals to receive cop-
per plugs connecting with the several plates of a com-
mutator on which bears a brush, connecting with one
pole of an electric generator. The other pole of the
generator connects with a carbon electrode about 4
inches in diameter, mounted in a sleeve and provided
with a screw thread on the outside, which engages an
internally threaded sleeve secured to a bevel gear, on
the axis of which is a crank for adjusting the electrode.
The electrode and its regulating mechanism are
mounted on a framework adjacent to the wheel pit, so
that the electrode may be fed into the receptacle
formed by the wheel rim and the rim sections when
partly consumed.

A feed hopper is provided with a spout projecting
into the wheel rim and a gate for regulating the supply
of mixed material to be acted upon. The wheel pit is
preferably provided with sloping sides, so that any
powdered material which drops from the wheel at its
discharging end or elsewhere may slide by gravity' to
a conveyor, the buckets of which return it to the feed
hopper, to again pass through the furnace.

The wheel is preferablj' connected with an electric
motor by speed-reducing gearing. The motor shaft
carries a worm, acting on a spur gear, on the shaft of
which is secured another worm, meshing with another
gear, on the shaft of which is a third worm, meshing with
a gear on the wheel shaft. By this mechanism, a very
slow speed of the wheel may be maintained, a complete
revolution being made once in five da3's. In using the
apparatus, the rim sections are latched over the wheel
rim above an arc covering the lower part of the wheel,
and the gate of the feed hopper is opened. A charge
of intimately mixed carbon and lime, in proper propor-
tions to form calcium carbide, falls into the receptacle
around the wheel rim and accumulates until the top of
the electrode is immersed therein. The circuit of the
electric machine may then be closed and the electric

motor thrown into operation. As the charge is moved
away from the electrode, intense heat is created and the
refnuitory material fu.ses. As the wheel turns, the \hm)\
gradually recedes from the electrode and slowly cools
while inclosed within walls of refractory, uncombined
matt^rial on all sides, and the cool product forms a
bottom for the liquid compound. Thus a continuous
core of the product is formed, new rim sections \mng
added by the workman at intervals of a few hours.

The electrode, at starting, should project well into
the receptacle, and, a.s the wheel turns, the electrode
rises relatively to the charge, and when it reaches a
point near the top of the rim section, a new rim section
is hung on the wheel by means of the next set of sup-
ports, and a strip of sheet iron is bent around the joint
between the rim sections. The gate of the hopper is
then opened and the rim filled, or partly filled, with
material. As thLs material in its jjowdered state is a
very poor conductor of electricity as well as of heat, the
immersion of the electrode does not interfere with the
heating action. When a new rim section is added on
the electrode side of the wheel,' one is removed at the
other side. Thus the process continue.s until the solid
core of the furnace product appears at the discharge
end of the wheel, when a rim section is taken off and
the powdered material falls into the pit, leaving a pillar
of solid product projecting vertically, which may be
broken off or otherwise removed. Solid calcium carbide
is a conductor of electricity, and the copper plugs make
a good contact with it, thereb}' constituting the carbide
itself one of the electrodes. The action of the conmiu-
tator leads the current to a )>oint of the carbide core
close to the electrode, and prevents unnecessary resist-
ance, which would intervene if the plugs were more
widely spaced. The conducting plugs which are remote
from the arc help to carry the current, and thus the
heating of any one contact with the carbide core is
reduced.

Calcium carbide is used in generating acetylene gas,
the reaction taking place when it is brought in contact
with water at the ordinary temperature. As the man-
ufacture of calcium carbide is a fairly efficient process,
and as it may be produced wherever a head of water is
available, as the energy is stored in it in a compact
form, and as this energy may be readilj- made available
again by generating the acetylene and burning it. cal-
cium carbide is looked upon as a material bj- means of
which the energj' of remote waterfalls that is now going
to waste may be made useful to man.

Oarlwrundum (Silicon carbide, SiC), the production of
which is covered by E. G. Acheson in United States patent
No. 4'.>iJ767, of February 28, 1893, is made in the I'nited
States onl^-, and is made by heating a mixtui-e of 34.2
per cent of coke, 54.2 per cent of sand, 9.9 per cent of
sawdust, and 1.7 per cent of common salt in an electric
furnace. The furnace is built up of bricks put together
without any binding material, l)ecau8e of the necessity

of permitting the gases generated during the process
to freely escape, and because the furnace must be
pulled down at the end of each run. At each end of
the bin-shaped furnace, which is about 15 feet long, 7
feet high, and 7 feet wide, is a heavy bronze casting to
which the leads are attached, which carries, on its inner
surface, a bundle of sixty 3-inch carbon rods, each of
which is 2 feet in length. These electrodes project into
the furnace and are discontinuously connected by a
cylindrical mass of coarsely powdered coke which forms
a core about 9 feet long bj^ 2 feet in diameter in the cen-
ter of the furnace. The charge of the above-described
mixture, weighing about 10 tons, is packed all about
this core.

When the current is turned on, heating proceeds
slowly until, after about two hours, carbon monoxide
is evolved at all the openings in the brickwork and from
the upper surface of the charge, where it burns with a
blue flame. After some twelve hours the outside of
the charge becomes red hot, and after twelve hours
more the reaction has proceeded as fai' as practicable.
After cooling, the furnace walls are pulled down, when
the charge is now found to be separated into several
layers, viz. ; an outer one consisting of about 11 per cent
salt, 56 per cent silica, and 33 per cent of carbon, which
represents the portion of the charge which has not been
heated sufficiently high to be converted into carbide.
Within this outer layer is a layer of greenish-colored
material, concentric with the core and consisting of
amorphous silicon carbide, mixed with raw materials.
It is not hard enough for use as carborundum, and is
reworked in the next charge. The third layer, which
is about 10 inches in thickness, consists of crystallized
silicon carbide, the crystals being small on the outside
and increasing in size toward the core. This is the car-
borundum. Within this layer is the poition about or
within the core, which has been converted into graphite.
The 10-ton charge yields about 2 tons of carborundum,
though the theoretical yield of a charge of this size,
consisting of silica and carbon mixed in equivalent pro-
portions is about 4.2 tons. The energy used is about
1,000 horsepower.

Although pure silicon carbide is colorless, the crystals
obtained in the commercial manufacture are blue, black,
or dark brown, and are iridescent; and as they possess
an almost adamantine luster, they are very beautiful.
They are hard enough to scratch ruby and very penna-
nent. Carborundum is largely used as an abrasive, the
crystals being crushed in edge runners, washed with
water and acid, dried, and graded by sieving. In this
condition it is molded in a great variety of forms. It
is also employed in the manufacture of steel as a sub-
stitute for ferro-silicon, and in the manufacture of
graphite.

Carbon DimLpKide.—Onz of the most ingenious as
well as one of the most recent chemical applications of
electricity is in the manufacture of carbon disulphide

(carbon bisulphide; bisulphide of carbon; CSj), a sub-
stance which was discovered by Lampadius in 1796,
and which has been heretofore manufactured by pass-
ing the vapors of sulphur over coke or charcoal which
has been heated to a "cherry red" in retorts made of
cast iron or glazed earthenware. The further steps in
the process are for the purpose of purifying the car-
bon disulphide by removing uncombined sulphur, hy-
drogen sulphide, sulphur dioxide, and other foreign
bodies which may be present, and this is accomplished
by condensation in towers, washing in water, treatment
with chemicals, such as lead acetate, caustic soda, milk
of lime or anhydrous copper sulphate, mercury or mea-
curie chloride, and redistillation. For certain uses the
presence of certain of the impurities adds to the effi-
ciency of the material, and in such cases the methods of
purification alluded to are dispensed with. Owing to
the corrosive action of the heated sulphur vapors and
their products, but few materials can be employed in
the construction of retorts, and those which have been
used have been short lived, so that the manufacture has
not only been conducted in a discontinuous manner, but
the renewal account has been large.

In the electric process of Edward R. Taylor, which
was put into operation in 1900 at Torrey, N. Y., sev-
eral sets of carbon electrodes are introduced into the
base of a stack furnace and connected by a bridge con-
sisting of broken coke or other conductive carbon,
while the bodj- of the stack is filled with charcoal.
Sulphur is fed in by suitable ports so as to cover the
electrode faces when, as the current is passed through,
it becomes melted and vaporized. At the same time
the charcoal is heated above the electrodes, and reaction
with the sulphur occurs. From the construction of the
furnace, the heat radiated through the walls of the
stack is utilized in heating the sulphur to the melting
point, and the heat resident in the carbon disulphide
vapors is largely utilized in heating up the charcoal as
the latter descends the stack. The process is a contin-
uous one, and the curi'ent may be regulated either by
the amount of conductive carbon introduced into the
furnace or by reducing the working surfaces of the
electrodes by partly submerging them in the molten
sulphur.

Carbon disulphide is extensively used as a solvent
and extractive agent, as it dissolves sulphur, phosphorus,
iodine, rubber, camphor, wax, tar, resins, and nearly
all oils and fats. It is a germicide and insecticide and
is very largely used by transportation and storage com-
panies for the destruction of weevils in wheat, and other
insect pests, and by farmers for exterminating mice,
i-ats, prairie dogs, gophers, and other subterranean ani-
mals that damage the crops. It is employed in the
manufacture of thiocyanates, carbon tetra-chloride,
sulpho-carbonates, viscose, rubber cement, and in or-
ganic prepai-ation work, and for prisms.

Phosphm'MS. — Heretofore phosphorus has been pro-

duced from burnt bone or mineral phosphates by treat-
ing them with sufficient sulphuric acid, to convert part
or all of the calcium present into calcium sulphate and
the phosphorus contents into calcium metaphosphate or
eventually into phosphoric acid, and reducing these
products by charcoal.

Quite long ago Wohler suggested that the manufac-
ture be carried out by heating the calcium phosphate,
such as exists in burned bones or rock phosphates, with
sand and carbon, by which a reaction of the following
nature may be realized:

2Ca,(PO.),+6SiO,+10C=6CaSiO,+10CO+P,;
but until recently it has been impracticable to use this
simple process on account of the high temperature re-
quired. This diflSculty is now met in the electric fur-
nace, and at present the electric production of phos-
phorus is on a profitable basis. In the continuous
process of Readman, Parker, and Robinson, 100 parts
of calcium phosphate, 50 parts of sand, and 50 parts of
coke are intimately mixed and heated in a tightly cov-
ered electric furnace provided with an outlet pipe lead-
ing to a condenser and a tap hole. The phosphoi'us
volatilizes as it is liberated, and, together with the car-
bon monoxide, passes to the condenser, where the phos-
phorus condenses and is collected in water. The
residue of calcium silicate and foreign bodies fuses to a
slag and is tapped off at intervals, fresh charges of the
phosphate mixture being introduced into the furnace
without interrupting the electric current.

The phosphorus as first produced is contaminated
with sand, carbon, clay, and other impurities, and this
crude phosphorus is purified by melting under warm
water and straining through canvas, or by redistillation
from iron retorts. For final purification it is treated,
when molten, with a mixture of potassium dichromate
and sulphuric acid, or by sodium hypobromite. Theo-
retically, 100 parts of Ca,(PO,)j should yield 20 parts of
phosphorus, but in practice with the electric furnace
only about 17 parts are recovered. This is, however,
much more than the yield given by the older process, in
which part of the phosphate was converted into calcium
metaphosphate; there the maximum yield on the origi-
nal phosphate was but 11 parts in 100.

Phosphorus is used in the manufacture of friction
matches and fuse compositions; for making rat poison;
and as a source of phosphoric acid and other phospho-
rus containing compounds that are used in medicine and
in the arts. As phosphorus is a very active reducing
agent, it has found some application in the precipitation
of the precious metals and in electr«t}'ping.

Other Products. — As an evidence of what may be ex-
pected in the future, attention is called to the fact that
hydrogen sulphide (which may be burned to produce
sulphuric acid), white lead, chromic acid from chromium
sulphate, and lampblack from acetylene are being made
by the aid of electricity. Especial activity is to be
looked for in the field of organic chemistry. So long

ago as 1S49 KoHw' electrolyzed alkaline salts of fatty
acids, obtaining hydrm^arbons, and since then halogen
derivatives of the hydnxiarlions have been made from
organic salts or alcohols and haloid compounds; chloral
from alcohol and potassium chloride; mono and dich-
loracotones and monobrom acetone from acetone and
hydrochloric or hydrobromic acid; azoxybenzene, azo-
benzene, hydrazobenzene, benzidine, and anilin from
the reduction of nitrobenzene; piperidine by the reduc-
tion of pyridine in acid solutions; and vanillin and
heliotropine from the ozonization of eugenol or oil of
cloves; and many other laboratory reactions. Accord-
ing to Swan' the manufacture of iodoform, vanillin,
chloral, azo and hydrazo compounds, oxidation products
of fusel oil, dyestuflfs of the triphenylmethane type,
anilin blue, anilin black, Hofmann's violet, alizarin,
Congo red, oxidation products of the alcohols, sulphonic
acids, piperidine, dihydroquinone, benzidine, and ami-
dophenol have already been pi'oduced abroad by electro-
chemical means, and that at least the first five are being
so produced on a commercial scale.

LitERATUBB.

Electric Smelting and Refining, W. Borchere: Philadelphia,
1897.

Practical Electro-Chemistry, Bertram Blount: New York, 1901.

Notes on Electro-Chemistry, by Charles F. Chandler. The
Mineral Industry, vol. 9, 763-772. 1901.

Manufacture and Uses of Metallic So<lium, .Tames D. Darling,
J. Frk. Inst., 153, 65-74. 1902.

The Le Sueur Process for the Electrolytic Production of Sodium
Hydroxide and Chlorine, Charles Lathrop Parsons, J. Am. Chem.
Soc, 20, 868-878. 1898.

Production of Phosphorus and Chlorides of Carbon by means of
the Electric Furnace, Sci. Am., 74, 180. 1901.

Lighting by Acetylene, William E. Gibbs: New York, 1898.

Carbon Bisulphide in the Electric Furnace, Elect. World and
Engineer, 38, 1028. 1901.

Graphite; Its Formation and Manufacture, E. G. Acheeon,
J. Frk. Inst, June, 1899.

Some Electrolytic Processes for the Manufacture of White Lead,
Sherard Cowper-Cowles. The Electro-Chemist and Metallurgist
and Metallurgical Review, 1, 145-147. 1901.

Applications of Electrolysis to Organic Compounds, J. T. Hewitt
The Electro-Chemist and Metallurgist, 1, 34-35, 99-100, 120-122,
170-172. 1901.

Chemical and Technical Education in the United States, Charles
F. Chandler, J. Soc. Chem. Ind., 19, 591-620. l^K).

Electro-Chemical Industry, Jos. VV. Swan, J. Soc. Chem. Ind.,
20, 663-675. 1901.

Group XJ. — Dtkstuffs.

Under the classification "dyestuffs and extracts"
reports have been rendered for the two previous cen-
su.ses. As the sources of much of the natural raw
materials of the two industries and the methods for
their treatment are in many respects similar, both dye-
stuffs and tanning materials were embraced in this

■ Liebig's Annalen, vol. 69, page 259. 1849.
*J. Chem. Soc., vol. 20, page 668; 1901.

classification. Combining the returns of the census of
1900 in the same manner we have the following com-
parison:

COMPARISON OF DYESTUFF AND EXTRACT FACTORIES:
1880 TO 1900.

YEAR.

Number
of estab-
lishments.

Capital.

Wage-
eamers.

Value of
product.

1880

41
62

J2, 363, 700
8,645,468
7,839,034

992
2,302
2,094

S5, 253, 038

1890

9,292,614

1900

7,360,748

This comparison shows a gain of 76.9 per cent in the
value of the product for 1890 over that for 1880, and a
loss of 20.9 per cent in the value of the product for 1900
as compared with that of 1890. Considering the general
character of trade conditions in 1900 and the activit}' of
the dyeing and tanning industries, it is believed that this
falling off is not real, but that it is due to a difference
in rulings as to the category in which certain of the
products reported should be put. For instance, the
chromium compounds are used in dyeing, in tanning,
for paints, and as chemicals in many arts. Where shall
they be classified? Again, citric, lactic, tartaric, and
other acids are used in calico printing and in other arts.
Shall they be classified under acids or under dyestuffs?
Questions like these continually^ arise, and they will
necessarily be settled, to a certain extent, in different
ways in the different censuses. The endeavor in the
present report has been to classify substances as chem-
icals in the categories of acids, sodas, potashes, alums,
cyanides, and fine or heavy chemicals unless they very
distinctivelj'^ belonged in one of the other categories in
the scheme of classification.

Another cause might arise from an extension of the
work and an increase in the output of an establishment,
if that increase took place in another industry, for the
return would be classified under the principal product.
Thus, if in 1890 an establishment were grinding sumac
leaves part of the time and wheat part of the time, and
the value of the ground sumac in 1890 exceeded that of
the flour, the establishment would in that year have
been classified under "dyestuffs and extracts;" but if
in 1900 the value of the flour exceeded that of the
sumac, the returns would be classified under "food and
kindred products." As a rule these variations tend to
balance one another and to give a result that is a close
approximation to the true one, but in certain instances
this maj^ not be the case, though in each census they
all appear in the final summation.

Taking the. returns thus assembled, the geographical
distribution of the dyestuff and extract industry is pre-
sented in the following table:

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF DYESTUFF AND
EXTRACT FACTORIES: 1900.

STATES.

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments.

Capital.

Wage-
earnera.

Value of
product.

I'er cent
of value.

United States

$7,839,034

2,094

87,360,748

100.0

New York

19
10
12
10

8
5

2, .548, 136
592,510

1,778,173
591,916
386,904
272, 192

1,670,203

562
56
361
172
271
98

574

2,111,811

1,320,881

1,269,246

502,798

479,372

246,754

1,420,886

28.7

18.0

17.3

6.9

6.5

West Virginia

3.3

California. Connecticut,
Florida, Illinois, Ken-
tucky. Maine, Michi-
gan, Rhode Island, and

19.3

A clearer idea of the dyestuffs industry may be ob-
tained by sepamtingthe statistics for this industry from
those rendered for tanning materials and by combining
with them the data from those schedules in which dj^e-
stuffs have appeared as a minor product and which have
therefore been sunk in another classification. There
have been 72 establishments found in which such man-
ufacture is carried on and the product is shown in the
following table:

TOTAL PRODUCTION OF DYESTUFFS IN THE UNITED
STATES: 1900.

CHARACTER OF PRODUCT.

Total

Natural dyestuflfs .
Artificial dyestuffs

Mordants

Iron liquor

Red liquor

other products

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments.

Quantity
(pounds).

61,209,231

48,245,628

7,698,435

734,000

3,344,568

707,040

479,560

Value.

$5,868,006

3, 435. 808
2. 280, 899
8.5,466
32,065
7,340
26, 428

There were consumed in the manufacture 51,955 tons
of logwood, of a value of $1,084,746; of fustic 3,104
tons, of a value of $51,586; of cutch 798,508 pounds, of
a value of $61,697; of indigo 109,034 pounds, of a value
of $125,069; of yellow oak bark 4,907 tons, of a value
of $29,451; of anilin dyes 1,734,717 pounds, of a value
of $840,229; of alizarine and other coal tar colors
1,417,325 pounds, of a value of $333,317; of logwood
extract 2,364,792 pounds, of a value of $163,408; and of
wood for the manufacture of iron liquor 2,838 cords, of
a value of $9,629; besides small amounts of nicwood,
quercitron, turmeric, quassia, persian berries, mja-a-
bolans, gambler, sumac, nutgalls, quill-bark and oils, and
other materials for assistants and mordants.

Coloring matter obtained from vegetable or animal
sub.stances have been used in coloring textiles from pre-
historic times, and as they were supposed to exist ready

formed in the organism, they became known as natural
dyestuflFs. Prominent ainonfj niitiiral dye.stuffs i« the
coloring matter obtained from logwood aiid known as
" hsematein." The color-forming substance (or chromo-
gen), hivmatoxj'lin, exists in the logwood partly free
and partly as a glucoside. When pure, hiematoxylin
forms nearly colorless crystals, but on oxidation, espe-
cially in the presence of an alkali, it is converted into
the coloring matter hrematcin, which forms colored
lakes with metallic bases, yielding violets, blues, and
blacks with various mordants. Logwood comes into
commerce in the form of logs, chips, and extracts.
The chips are moistened with water and exposed in
heaps so as to induce fermentation, alkalies and oxidiz
ing agents being added to promote the "curing" or
oxidation. When complete and the chips have assumed
a deep reddish-brown color, the decoction is made
which is employed in dyeing. The extract offers con-
venience in transportation, storage, and use. It is now
usually made from logwood chips that have not been
cured. The chips are treated in an extractor, pressure
often being used, but a pressure above 15 pounds to
the square inch is to be avoided, as it may cause a
decrease in the coloring power of the product. The
liquor is settled to remove fibers and resin, and evap-
orated in a vacuum pan to a density of about 50° Tw.,
or it may be continued until a solid extract is obtained
on cooling. The yield of solid exti-act produced with
pressure is about 20 per cent and without pressure
about 16 per cent. The extiact is sometimes adulter-
ated with chestnut, hemlock, and quercitron extracts,
and with glucose or molasses. Reynolds & Innis made
"dyestuffs'' at Poughkeepsie, N. Y., in 1816. Brown-
ing and Brothers made extracts in Philadelphia in 1834.

Fustic is the heart wood of certain species of trees
indigenous to the West Indies and tropical South Amer-
ica. It is sold as chips and extract, yields a coloring
principle which forms lemon-yellow lakes with alumina,
and is chiefly used in d3'eing wool. Young fustic is the
heart wood of a sumac native to the shores of the
Mediterranean, which yields an orange-colored lake
with alumina and tin salts.

Cutch, or catechu, is obtained from the wood and pods
of the Acacia catechu, and from the betel nut, both
being native in India. Cutch appears in commerce in
dark brown lumps, which form a dark brown solution
with water. It contains catechu-tan nic acid, as tannin
and catechin, and is exteu.sively used in weighting black
silks, as a mordant for certain basic coal-tar dyes, as a
brown dye on cotton, and for calico printing.

Indigo, which is obtained from the glucoside indican
existing in the indigo plant and in woad, is probably one
of the oldest known dyestuffs. It is obtained from the
plant by a process of fermentation and oxidation, the
yield being from 0.2 to 0.3 percent of the weight of the
plant. Indigo appears in commerce in dark blue cubical
cakes, varying very much in composition as they often

contain indigo red, and indigo brown (which affect the
color produced b}' the dye), besides moisture, mineral
matters, and glutinous substances. Thus Java' indigo
contains from 70 to 80 per cent of the pure color; Ben-
gal, 6(» to 70 per cent; and Kurpah, 80 to 55 per cent.
It has been found that *' lots" of natural indigo .sold an
one quality varied in themselves, and that samples drawn
from the same chest and identical, so far as appearances
went, differed as much as 7 to 8 per cent in their contents
of pure indigo. Powdered indigo di.ssolves in concen-
trated fuming sulphuric acid, forming monosulphonic
and disulphonic acids. On neutralizing these solutions
with sodium carbonate and precipitating the indigo car-
mine with common .salt there is obtained the indigo
extract, soluble indigo, and indigo carmine of com-
merce. True indigo carmine is the sodium salt of the
disulphonic acid, and when sold dry it is called " indigo-
tine." Alexander Cochrane made extract of indigo at
Lowell, Mass., in 1849.

One of the most important of the recent achieve-
ments of chemi.stry is the synthetic production of indigo
on a commercial scale. For some years approaches
have been made, as in the case of what was known as
" propiolic paste," containing about 25 per cent of
o-nitrophenylpropiolic acid, which was used for a time
in calico printing, but abandoned because of the un-
pleasant odor which was developed in the process, and
which persistently adhered to the goods, and because
the blue color produced was slightly gray in shade, and in
the case of Kalle's artificial indigo prepared from o-nitro-
benzenc chloride. The S3'nthetic indigo now made by
the Badische Anilin und Soda Fabrik is manufactured
by the Heumann' process (D. K. P. 91202). Starting
with naphthalene, the cheapest and most abundant of
the coal-tar products, by treatment with highly con-
centrated sulphuric acid, phthalic acid is obtained.
This phthalic acid is converted into phthalimide by the
use of ammonia; the phthalimide is converted to
anthranilic acid by means of sodium hypochlorite; the
anthranilic acid is united with chloracetic acid to form
phenylglycocollorthocarboxjlicacid; by fusing this last
mentioned acid with caustic soda, indoxyl or indoxj'lic
acid is formed, according to the existing conditions,
and when these are oxidized by air, in the presence of
alkalies, they pass into indigo. In this manufacture
10,000 tons of naphthalene, over 1,200,000 pounds of
ammonia, 4,500,000 pounds of glacial acetic acid, and
10,000,000 pounds of salt are consumed. The recov-
ery of the 40,000 tons of sulphur dioxide, which
occurs as a by-product in the treatment of the naph-
thalene with sulphuric acid (which is the first step in
the process of making indigo) is an important matter,
and the recently jx'rfected contact process for its con-
version into sulphuric acid for reuse comes in most
opportunely.

'J. Frk. Inst., vol. 153, page 50. 1902.

»J. Am. Chem. Soc., vol. 23, page 911. 1901.

Lachman says:'

The present annual production of synthetic indigo has not been
given to the public, but from the data obtainable it can not be far
from 3,000,000 pounds, about one-fourth of the world's supply. It
is going to be a question of business rather than of manufacture
when the indigo factories will have supplanted the indigo fields.
Some of the above calculations will give a faint idea of the purely
commercial side of this stupendous undertaking. The 'Badische'
has already invested over $4,500,000 in the plant and the prelimi-
nary experiments.

Although mineral dyes such as prussian blue, chrome
yellow, orange and green, and iron buflf, or nankin yel-
low, have long been used, artificial dyestuffs assumed
preponderating importance with the discovery of the
lilac color mauve by Perkin in 1856, and fuchsine or
magenta by Verguin in 1859, for with each succeeding
year other colors have been discovered, until at the
present time there are several thousand artificial organic
dyes or colors on the market. Since the first of these
were prepared from anilin or its derivatives the colors
were known as ' ' anilin dyes," but as a large number
are now prepared from other constituents of coal-tar
than anilin they are better called "coal-tar dyestuffs."
There are many schemes of classification. Benedikt-
Knecht^ divides them into I, aniline or amine dyes; II,
phenol dyes; III, azo dyes; IV, quinoline and acridine
derivatives; V, anthracene dyes; and VI, artificial
indigo.

Of the anthracene dyes, the alizarin is the most im-
portant, since this is the coloring principle of the madder.
The synthesis of alizarin from anthracene was effected
by Grabe and Liebermann in 1868, but a commercial
process for its production was not developed until some
years later, when it was worked out by the above-named
chemists in conjunction with Caro, though the process
was discovered simultaneously by Perkin. Schorlem-
mer' said in 1894: "Grabe and Liebermann's discovery
produced a complete revolution in calico printing,
turkey-red dyeing, and in the manufacture of madder
preparations sooner than was expected. Madder finds
to-day only a very limited application in the dyeing of
wool. Twenty years ago the annual yield of madder
was about 5,000,000 tons, of which one-half was grown
in France, while ten years ago the whole export from
Avignon was only 600 tons."

It is to be observed that the quantities of substances
like indigo, coal-tar dyes, alizarin, and the like re-
ported as consumed in the United States in the further
manufacture of dyestuffs are less than the amount of

'Loc. cit.

' Chemistry of Coal-tar Colors.

• Rise and Development of Organic Chemistry, page 248.

these articles that is imported; but this follows natu-
rally from the fact that a large, and in some instances the
largest, part of this material goes directly to the dye
works and print works, while there is recorded here
only such as is the subject of further manufacture be-
fore being offered for sale. As much of the material is
made up in the dye and print works into other composi-
tions of matter before being used, a complete summary
of the dyestuff manufacture of the country would em-
brace also the manufacture at this point of consumption,
but such data are not at command.

In textile dyeing and printing, substances called mor-
dants are largely used, either to fix or to develop the
color on the fiber. Substances of mineral origin, such as
salts of aluminum, chromium, iron, copper, antimony,
and tin, principally, and many others to a less extent, and
of organic origin, like acetic, oxalic, citric, tartaric, and
lactic acid, sulphonated oils, and tannins are employed
as mordants. In all technologies and treatises on dyeing
and printing the mordants are regarded as of equal im-
portance with the coloring matters, and from this stand-
point thej^ are properly included in a census of the
dyestuffs industry; but in the larger scheme of the
chemical industries, such as is now under consideration,
the point of view will necessarily be different, and there-
fore when a substance like alum or copperas or tannic
acid is a distinctively chemical substance and is applied
to other uses than in dyeing or printing, it is classified
in its proper category under acids, bases, or salts, but
when a substance is a composition of matter and is used
exclusively or principally as a mordant it is embodied
under that heading in the table given above.

Iron liquor, known as black liquor or pyrolignite of
iron, is made by dissolving scrap iron in pyroligneous
acid. It is sold as a dirty olive-brown or black liquid,
having a density of about 25 Tw. (1.12 sp. gr.) and con-
sists mainly of ferrous acetate with some ferric acetate
and tarry matters. It is used as a mordant in dyeing
silks and cotton and in calico printing. It was manu-
factured by James Ward, at North Adams, Mass., in
1830.

Red liquor is a solution of aluminum acetate in acetic
acid, and is produced by acting on calcium or lead
acetate solutions with aluminum sulphate or the double
alums, the supernatant liquid forming the red liquor.
The red liquor of the trade is often the sulpho-acetate
of alumina resulting when the quantity of calcium or
lead acetate is insufficient to completely decompose the
aluminum salt. Ordinarily the solutions have a dark-
brown color and a strong pyroligneous odor. It is
called red liquor because it was first used in dyeing
reds. It is employed as a mordant by the cotton dyer
and largely by the printer.

IMPORTS FOR CONSUMPTION DURING THE YEARS KNDING JUNE 80, 1881-1900.

YEAR.

LOoirooD.

EXTRACTS AND DEOOC-

TlOia OF LOGWOOD AMD

OTBER DYEWOODS.

CAMWOOD.

Fvtnc

ALL oran otb-
woon.

evOMBAn.

Tom.

Value.

Pounds. Value.

Tons.

ValTie.

Tons.

Value.

Ton*.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

1891

84.381
60,297
66,404
63,709
60,683
66,074
33,462
46,977
87,618
48,190

$1,842,964

1,238,592

1,218,934

1,313,376

1,478,618

1,622,069

611,010

744,135

647,384

628,464

3,282,227 1275.802

8
29
26
70
23
50

8,888
8^ 74ft
6,770
1,<76
8,748

»,100
8,490
10,293
7,765
<,2»9
8,882
7,918
9,823
»,196
4,440

8132,841
126,067
166,807
126,809
89,696
90,389
102,472
187,666
121,666
60,886

1,002

2,527

479

847

668

1,185

689

2,726

8,884

20,9ff7

828.969
60,131
8,»78
4; 426
12,886
18,688
8,827
33,476
106, 27<
205,361

402,241
276,680
830.348
151,121
148,024
118,517
88.804
68,796
88,487
81,306

837.889

1892

4,227,017
3,757,259
2,817,451
8,566,277
4,910.176
6,459,302
3,664,623

825,576
287,723
196.397
261,762

287, 120
277,79s
232 9W.

24,597

1898

25.317

1894

12.686

1895

13,129

1896

9; 266

4,102

1898

4;7»

3,113,658 1 267; 406
8,420,276 j 227,827

2,(10

1900

3,944

TEAR.

OAKBIER

JAPO

OR TEBKA

NICA.

CRUDE INDIQO.

INDIGO CARMINE.

EXTRACTS OR PASTES
OF INDIQO.

SDBsn-

TCTE
INDIGO.

MADDER AND MUNJECT,

OR INDIAN MADDER,
GROUND OR PREPARED.

ORCHIL

OR
ORCBIL
LIQUID.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

1891

27,610,594
25,808,495
35,762,646
26,408,458
29,022,603
82,343,256
31,349.665
42,333,486
38,123,478
38,857,515

tl, 843, 604

1,069,043

1,305,468

981,328

963,255

1,108,611

959,501

1,021,288

754,497

906,282

2,069,500
2,460,635
8,226,314
1,717,635
3,411,539
2,707,928
3,010,005
3,058,787
3, 127, 182

«, 600, 865
1,772,606
8,137,511
1,218,680
1,940,260
1,671,018
1,586,309
1,807,336
1.B98.S83

28,175
23,600
29,687
12, ."^M
26,173
34,967
52,192
25,671
17,506
18, 2W

838,145
28,636
35,304
16,907
83,406
42,369
59,182
28,642
17,172
1§,767

881,969
826,887
1,317,835
829,380
605,750
590,664
469,729
396,760
254,531
261,538

868,288
58,846

101,847
68,474
67,817
85,361
51,153
59,001
23,324
20,094

8416

878,260
618,786
668,779
262,663
829,477
818,313
292,462
246,218
280,081
120,736

839,806
52,063
61,720
17,576
18,541
15,746
12,963
11,816
12,296
5,869

881,974

1892

68,779

1893

2,798

1,687

187

64,928

1894

43,236

1896

69,317

1896

82,881

1897

38,965

1898

66,766

1899

46,494

1900

2,747,043 1 1,446,490

47,184

TEAR.

SAFFLOWER
AND EX-
TRACT OF,
SAFFRON

AND

SAFFRON

CAKE.

COCHINEAL.

OIL OF ANIUNE.

SALTS OF
ANILINE.

AUZARIN, NATURAL OR
ARTIFICIAL AND DYES
COMMERCIALLY KNOWN
AS ALIZARIN YELIX)W,
ORA.NOE, GREEN. BLUE,
BROWN, AND BLACK, IN-
CLUDING EXTRACT OF
MADDER.

COAL-TAR
COLORS OR

DYES NOT
SPECTALLY

PROVIDED
FOR.

ALIZARIN ASSIST-
ANT OR SOLUBLE
OIL, OROLEATEOF
SODA, OR TURKEY-
RED OIL.

ALIZARIN AS-
SISTANT, ETC.,
ALL OTMIB.

Value only.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Value only.

Pounds.

Value.

Value only.

Qallons.

Value.

Pounds

. Value.

1891

*44,59S
55,391
27,697
24,841
16,462
83,765
38,022
52,482
32,477
44,502

86,797
230,039
215,512
104,284
130,205
160,422
137,261
168,055

97,668
158,911

819,935
55,883
52,572
28,124
37,285
50.988
41,943
45,762
23,207
31.408

1,489,908
1,428,070
1,211,818
951,671
1,315,934
1,364,674

«299,662
263,248
163,539
116,141
148,426
164,288

8713, 732
536,477
432, 134
395,575
548,110
662,469
812,884
1,087,704
748,130
537 812

3, 443, 167

8674. 101

81,682,642
1,640,024
2,322,258
1,429,101
2,739,933
2,918,332
3,163,182
3,723,888
8,900,099
4, 792- 10R

653

8437

1,32!
3,W
2,90
1,16,

i tin

Iggg

4,838,220 ! 1,029,122
5 729,221 1.12.S .VK

J 2,262
I 1,157

1898

1894

3,960,079
8,287,720
6,154,156
6,169,018
5,871,962
5,226,452
6, 009, !A2

722,919
870,388
994,396
1,023,425
886,349
700,786
771. 136

1895

92,158
82,876

25,785
24,626

1896

1897

1898

1899

1900

LITERATURE.

A Practical Handbook of Dyeing and Calico Printing, by Wil-
liam Crookes: London, 1874.

History of Anilin and Allied Coloring Matters, by W. H. Perkin:
London, 1879.

Chemistry of the Coal-Tar Colors, by R. Benedikt: London, 1889.

Chemistry of the Organic Dyestuffs, by R. Nietzki: London,
1892.

The Rise and Developnvnt of Organic Chemistry, by C. Schor-
lemmer: London, 1894.

Systematic Survey of the Organic Coloring Matters, by G.
Schultz and P. Julius: London, 1894.

Handbook of Industrial Organic Chemistry, by S. P. Sadtler:
Philadelphia, 189.5.

Dyeing and Calico Printing, by Antonio Sansom, London, Vol.
I, 1895; Vol. II, 1896; Vol. Ill, 1897.

Outlines of Industrial Organic Chemistry, by F. H. Thorp: New
York, 1898.

Group XII. — Tanning Material.s.

The making of leather is one of the older arts.
From the best records attainable, according to Robert

H. Foerderer,' it appears that the first tannery in this
country was operated about the year 1630 in Virginia.
A year or two later the first tannery in New England
was established in the village of Swampscott, Lynn,
Mass., by Francis Ingalls, and the vats used by him
remained until 1825. With the establishment of the
tanning industry necessarily came the gathering of the
tanning materials from forest and field, and subse-
quently their preparation for use, but the first mentior
of this industry in census reports appears under the
head of "sumac" in the report for 1850, and from this
time, except in 1880, separate returns for tanning
materials have been made in each census report, though
the methods of statement have been so varied as to make
comparison, except in certain items, almost impossible.
Thus in 1850, 1860, and 1870 there are the classifications
"sumac," "sumac bark and prepared sumac," and
"ground sumac;" in 1860 and 1870 also, "ground

495.

'One Hundred Yeara of American Commerce, Vol. II, page

bark;" in 1870, also "hemlock-bark extract;" in 1890,
"dyeing and tanning extract," and "chipped wood
and other products of this group."

In this report for the census of 1900 there are in-
cluded, under "tanning materials," the ground, chipped,
and other comminuted materials, and the exti-acts ob-
tained from oak bark and wood, hemlock, sumac, and
palmetto root, together with the chrouie solutions that
are employed in tanning. Under this classification, and
taking into account establishments not in the chemical
classification of the census, but which produce tanning
materials in addition to other products, like drugs or
leather, 39 establishments were reported, employing
$2,107,040 of capital and 700 wage-earners, and produc-
ing $1,899,220 of product. They were distributed as
follows:

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF FACTORIES PRODUC-
ING TANNING MATERIALS: 1900.

STATES.

Number
of estab-
lishments.

Capital.

Wage-
earners.

Value of
product.

Per cent
of total.

United States

$2,107,040

700

81,899,220

100.00

8
8
4
4
6

385,904
566,869
311,870
270,192
94, 762

447,443

271
103
90
90

119

479,372
357, 462
295,356
232,365
181,800

352,865

25 33

Peiinsvlvania

18 82

New York

15.55

9.57

Ma^achusetts. Mary land,
Florida, Tennessee,
Kentucky, Illinois,
Michigan, and Califor-
nia

18 50

There were 23 establishments employing $1,065,666
of capital and 351 wage-earners in the manufacture of
tanning materials from the oak. There were used of
oak and chestnut oak 36,897 coi'ds of bark, of a value of
$265,657, and 34,871 cords of wood, of a value of
$92,252, and there were produced of ground bark
29,948,237 pounds, having a value of $186,381, and of
extract, 34,673,997 pounds, having a value of $661,119.

There were 10 establishments employing $586,681 of
capital and 156 wage-earners engaged in the manu-
facture of tanning materials from the hemlock. There
were used of hemlock bark 43,666 cords, having a value
of $210,930, and there were produced 35,591,329 pounds
of extract, of a value of $572,882, whei'cas in 1870 (the
only previous record at command) 2 establishments
were reported employing $85,000 of capital and 37
wage-earners, and having a product valued at $185,300.

There were reported 11 establishments employing
$333,648 of capital and 105 wage-earners engaged in
the manufacture of tanning materials from sumac.
There were used of sumac leaves 11,538 tons, having a
value of $214,353, and there were produced 9,528,800
pounds of ground sumac, valued at $114,660, and
8,102,742 pounds of sumac extract, valued at $215,677.
This output is compai'ed with data accessible in pre-
vious census reports in the following table:

PRODUCTION OF SUMAC, BY DECADES: 1850, 1860, 1870,
AND 1900.

YEAK

Ntunber
of estab-
lish-
ments.

Capital.

Wage-
earners.

Value of
product.

1850

$15,550

11,700

167,450

333,648

105

836,731

1860

16,850
267, 180

1870

1900

330,337

There was produced of chrome tannage solution, as
reported, 1,837,134 pounds, of a value of $52,516, but
it is probable that much of this material produced and
consumed in tanneries is not accounted for. Besides
these materials there was a quantity of tannic acid from
nutgalls and other sources reported, but this is more
properly classified and treated of under acids.

The sources of tannin in nature are very numerous.
Bernadin, in his book,' treats of 350 different vegetable
sources. Mineral salts have also been employed as tan-
ning agents, while more recently still the electric cur-
rent and organic compounds, such as formaldehyde,
have been employed to convert hides or skins into
leather. The tannin which exists in or is produced
from vegetation varies with the genus and the species,
and even, it is believed, with the part of the plant from
which it is obtained. Trimble^ classifies the tannins as
follows: Group rt, gallo-tannic acid; chestnut- wood tan-
nin; chestnut-bark tannin; pomegranate-bark tannin;
sumac tannin. Group h, oak-bark tannin; mangrove
tamnin; canaigre tannin; rhatany tannin; kino tannin;
cetechu tannin; tormentil tannin. According to the
pi-evailing views, tannin is a glucoside and the tannic
acid obtained from it is digallic acid. Gallnuts arc the
richest in tannin contents of any vegetable source,
amounting to upward of 50 per cent, but the sources
of tanning materials reported as used in tanning in the
United States are oak and hemlock barks, oak wood,
sumac leaves, and palmetto root.

Oak and Hemlock. — The bark and the wood are chip-
ped fine and sold in this form for making the tan liquor,
or they are treated to extract the tannin and other prin-
ciples, and this extract is put upon the market. For
maki. g leather it has been found essential that the aque-
ous extract shall contain sugars, gums, resins, and col-
oring matters as well as tannin, since the above-men-
tioned substances play an important part in the conver-
sion of the hides into leather. According to Hough, ^
the yield of bark is 3 cords per acre, and 4 to 6 trees
j'ield a cord of bark.

Sumac. — The sumac stands next in importance to the
hemlock as a source of tanning material in the United
States. It is obtained from several species of the
Shies, but chiefly f i"om the H. glabra and B. tyhina.

' See Literature at the end of this group.
•■"The Tannins, Vol. II, page 132.
' Report upon Forestry, page 145.

The sumac host suited for tanning and dyoinp purposes
^rows wild in a l)olt of country extending from Mary-
land down throujjh the Atlantic states to (icorjfia,
Alabama, Mississippi, Louisiana, and Texas, and in
portions of Kentucky and Tennessee. The northern
climate appears too cool for developing the tanning
properties of this plant to the best advantage, although
in the past large quantities of the leaves gathered in
Pennsylvania and New York have been sold to tanners
of goatskins, who put them in vats to strengthen and
keep the sewed skins from leaking, and they have been
used by many tanners to brighten the color of their
leather.

According to Hough.' in 1877 the state of Virginia
led in the production of sumac, and the business of
collecting, grinding, and packing was carried on at
Richmond, Fredericksburg, Alexandria, Culpeper,
Winchester, and perhaps other places. According to
Bernadin,' in 1880, 6,000 tons of American sumac
were annuall}' brought into the market, principall}'
from Alabama, Tennessee, Kentucky, and, above all,
Virginia. Sumac leaves contain 2-1 per cent of tannin,
but a sample of Rkus glabra from Georgetown, D. C,
went as high as 26.10 per cent in tannin contents.

The season for picking sumac begins about the first
of July and ends the last of September, or with the
first frost, for when the leaves turn red in the autumn
the}' are no longer of value. The tanning properties
of the sumac reside in the leaves, and only these should
be gathered. The differences existing in various sam-
ples of sumac is found often to be due to the care with
which the leaves were gathered and dried. The blos-
soms and berries, as well as the stems, should be thrown
out and the leaves should be dried in the shade. When
cured, the sumac is ground in mills under heavy wooden
wheels, revolving in circles, at the ends of axles attached
horizontally to a vertical shaft. These grinding wheels
are inclosed in a tight covering to prevent the escape
of the dust, which arises quite abundantly. John G.
Hurkamp began grinding sumac at Fredericksburg,
Va., in 1847.

Palmetto Root. — The palmetto root is a source of
tannin which has attracted attention in recent years in
the South. It is found abundantly in Florida, and
grows in Alabama, Louisiana, and Tennessee. It shows
10 per cent of tannin and the root can be cut up like
bark. The tannin from this source produces tough
grain and strong, durable leathei*. It tans rapidly,
giving a pleasing light color, toughness, and pliability,
and is a good filler of leather. There was but one fac-
tory reporting palmetto extract at the census of 1900.
The extract is put up in barrels containing 52 gallons,
and a gallon weighs about lOi pounds.

Tanning FJxtracts.^ — ''The u.se of extracts in tan-
ning has grown to large proportions during the past

' Report upon Forestry, page 153.

* Claseification de 350 raatieree tannaiites, page 23.

fifteen years. Th(M'e are many advantages in the use
of such exti-acts. The li((uids are always under jjerfect
control; that is, by putting in so much extra<'t the
<iuantity of tanning material is known. It does away
with the storing of large quantities of t»ark, as 1 tmr-
rel of extract is equivalent to alK>ut 1 cord of l)ark —
128 cord feet. Where space costs money, this is quite
an item, and it also saves interest and insurance on the
bark.

" There is no difference in the fiber produced by Uirk
liquors and pure tanning extracts, as properly prepared
extract is nothing more than concentrated liquor.
Tanning extracts in common use in the United States
are made from chestnut oak bivrk, chestnut oak wood,
chestnut wood, hemlock bark, quercitron bark, canaigre,
and sumac. Black oak bark extract is used to give a
bloom to leather, and coloring or dyeing extracts are
made from logwood, fustic, and from a large number of
other materials.

"The chestnut tree, after it is felled is peeled of the
bark, which is objectionable on account of the coloring
matter which it contains. The chestnut oak tree is used
as it comes from the stump. The chestnut tree and the
chestnut oak tree are cut into suitable lengths, say about
4 feet long, in the forest. These pieces are then carried
to the factory, where they are further reduced by ' chip-
ping ' by a machine built especially for the purpose.
This machine is a cast-steel disk 4 feet in diameter, re-
volving rapidly, and carrying a suitable arrangement of
knives, which cut the wood into small chips. These
chips are carried to the leaches and leached or extracted
as is usual in tanneries. No chemicals should be used
in the leaches. The liquor is then run into settling
tanks, and next passed through 10 wire-cloth strainers
of the finest meshes to clarify it, after which the liquor
goes to the vacuum pan and is concentrated under dimin-
ished pressure at a temperature of between 120-^ and
140° F.

"The above-described method of settling and strain-
ing is the one in common use in the United States, and
it.produces a liquor which is pure and transparent enough
to be made into an extract suitable for tiinneries.

" When the degree of heat has been carried too high
in the leaches, such liquor can only be clarified suflS-
ciently b}- first lowering the temperature below the
coagulating point of blood and adding blood; second,
raising the temperature of the liquor suflicienth' high
to coagulate the blood, which gathers up the fine sus-
pended matter and settles to the bottom of the vat or
tank, and is then still further strained. It is then con-
centrated as usual.

"Extract, however, made from a liquor which has
been produced at too high a degree of heat, although
clarified by blood albumen, will not produce a satis-
factory article; that is, such an extract is not, strictly
speaking, a concentrated liquor.

•The Manufacture of Leather, by Charles T. Davis, pages 74-77.

Ko. 210-

' ' The extract maker, it is true, obtains a larger yield or
number of pounds of finished extract from his material,
but it is at the expense of the tanner. The excessive
degree of heat in the leaches extracts not only nontan-
ning substances, which are objectionable, but destroj^s
also certain bodies which act favoi'abljr in the production
of leather.

"In the concentration of the liquor in the vacuum
pan, extreme caution must be observed as to the degree
of heat. A temperature of over 140° F. or thereabouts
produces a change in the tanning substances and in its
allied nontanning substances which is verj^ objection-
able, and which produces an undesirable leather, not
only in color but in quality. In other words, a liquor,
although carefully made, when subjected in the pan to
a degree of heat in excess of 14-0° F., or thereabouts,
yields an extract which, when diluted with water, is
not what it was before concentration It is on this
account that the multiple vacuum pans — that is, more
than one pan — can not successfullj^ be used in the con-
centration of liquors or the making of extracts.

' ' In the use of extracts the tanner should always be
on the lookout for only the pure article, free from
adulterations of any kind. Extract is now being ex-
tensively used for sole, upper, belting, harness, union,
enameled, and patent leather, and in nearly all the cases
which have fallen under our observation giving good
results in both tannage and weight.

"There are various methods followed in the prepara-
tion of hemlock extract, but that used bj' a prominent
extract company in Pennsylvania is a good one. The
bark is ground in the old-fashioned mill and is very
carefully leached in the old-fashioned way and boiled
down in the vacuum pan under the least degree of heat
that can be employed. No chemicals whatever are
used. They do not press or crush their bark to get
from it a larger yield, but are doing their best to giv^
a pure article which will produce a pure, strong, old-
fashioned liquor. They take a good, fresh 10° bark-
ometer liquor and boil it down to 27^° Baum^ in vacuum.
There is no other description than this, for this is all
thej' do.

"The manufacture of tanning extracts now closely re-
sembles the process for extracting sugar; the sliced
wood is exhausted by diffusion in autoclaves under
slight pressure, and the liquor is filter-pressed and
evaporated in some cases in triple- effect apparatus
which differs from those used at the sugar works
merely in being constructed entirely of copper and
bronze, to the exclusion of iron, and in being worked
at a higher vacuum than sugar pans are. Most manu-
facturers decolorize the liquor before concentration,
either by the addition of some metallic salt or with
albumen and bisulphite of soda. In the former case
the acid of the salt remains in the extract, and in the
latter, sulphate of soda and noncoagulable albuminoids
are retained, whilst in both cases tannin is necessarily
precipitated. The presence of salts in tanning extracts

is much to be deprecated, since they accumulate in the .
tan pits to the detriment of the leather.

" Roy has shown that the so-called decolorizing proc-
esses are beneficial to the.extract, not because they elimi-
nate coloring matters, for they do this in a very minor
degree, the color of the liquor after treatment being
but slightly diminished if estimated on the basis of equal-
ity of tannin content, but because they precipitate to-
gether with the first portions of tannin, certain earthy
and metallic bases, such as lime, magnesia, manganese,
iron, and copper, derived from the wood and from the
apparatus. It is these foreign matters combined with
tannin, which are taken up, by the leather, imparting bad
color and harsh and brittle grain. By substituting an
aqueous solution of potassium ferrocyanide for the pre-
cipitate previousl}^ used, Roy has succeeded in removing
these metallic compounds without appreciably decolor-
izing the extract, and finds that the leather produced
by the treated extract is in every waj" comparable with
that prepared with oak-bark liquor made in the tanyard.
"It follows that tanning extracts must be examined
for salts of the alkalies and the alkaline earths and for
metallic compounds, and valued in accordance with their
content of these, as well as with their content of tan-
nin."

John H. Heald & Co. began the manufacture of hem-
lock-bark extracts at Baltimore, Md., in 1860; at El-
mira, N. Y., in 1862; and at Lynchburg, Va., in 1869.
Chrome Solution. — As far back as 1856 the system of
tanning, or tawing, by the use of chromium compounds
was discovered by a German chemist,' but all the earlj'^
experiments failed because the tannage could not be
made permanent. A remedy was finally' found in the
subsequent use of hyposulphite of soda by which the
tannage was made lasting. The discovery of the rem-
edy and its successful application were made in Phila-
delphia, and the use of hyposulphite of soda for this
purpose is covered by United States letters patent
of June 28, 1888, granted to William Zahn. Accord-
ing to Foerderer* the consequence of this invention
was the creation in Philadelphia of what is to-day
the largest and best equipped leather factory in the
world. In carrying out the process, the skin is first dip-
ped in a solution of a chromium salt, such as potassium
dichromate, acidified with hydi'ochloric acid, and sub-
sequently in a solution of sodium thiosulphate or a bi-
sulphite acidified with hydrochloric or sulphuric acid.
It appears that for 100 pounds of skins 4 to 5 pounds of
potassium dichromate, 2.5 to 4.5 pounds of hydrochlo-
ric acid, 8 to 10 pounds of sodium " hj-posulphite," and
0 to 1.5 pounds of sulphuric acid are consumed. Of
course anj' equivalent chromium salt may be used, and
latterly the use of other metallic radicals as coagulants
has been tried.

Considering leather as a chemical product (and it is
always treated as such in the full chemical technologies)
a notable example of the application of electricity is
found in its use in the tanning of hides and skins to con-

' One Hundred Years of American Commerce, Vol. II, page 497.
'Ibid.

vert thcni into leftther. Thoro have been many «uch
electric j)roce!s.se.s invented, some employing bvnnin
solutions, hut mo.st of them referring to the use of
mineral tannage, with chromium, aluminum, tin, and
other metallic salts, on light skins, such as calf, goat,
and sheep. One of these electric proccs.ses, " the Groth
system of rapid tannage by electricity," has, according
to Davis,' "so far been demonstrated in the United
States at Kansas City, Mo., where good results are
claimed for it."' Further on, in discussing electric and
other ri\pid tannage systems, Davis' says:

The bark uiethcxls of tanning are jjassing away with great rapid-
ity, extracts and chrome are taking their place, and in the larger
establishments the chemist has become an invaluable part of the
personnel of the tannery, and he is kept but^y making investiga-
tions and suggestions.

The foreign commerce in tanning materials is set
forth in the following tables, compiled from the publi-
cations of the Bureau of Statistics of the United States
Treasury Department.

' The Manufacture of Leather, page 626.
•Ibid., page 530.

IMPORTS FOR CONSUMPTION DURING THE YEARS
ENDING JUNE 30, 1891 TO 1900.

YBAR.

SrMAC, EXTRACT OF.

imtAC, oBomto.

BUMAC, UNMANDRAC-
TDBED.

Pounds, j Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

1891. ..;

2,899,028
1,902,089
2,880,210
1,277,609
1,604,024
2.472,923
2,907,621
1,266,542
1,133,662
1.419,827

177,152
68,863

108,447
54,535
53,260
78,604
84,150
48,399
88,709
60,295

11,412,297
10,822,614
14,363,922

8,315,551
12,242,216
13,349,233
18,530,104

8,336,117
14,156,344
10,644,001

$236,729
225,891
289,953
191,333
236,541
231,324
245,992
121,461
202,606
233,846

2,953,202
2,841,200
3,817,568
970,207
2,203,645
1,027,824
2,117,439
3,7M,307
3,011,810
1,048,955

865,802
60,667
70 162

1892

1893...

1894

21,427
40,021
24,861
30 554

1895

1896

1897

1898

62,5.53
42,297
20,800

1899

1900

IMPORTS OF TANNING MATERIALS FOR CONSUMPTION
DURING THE YEARS ENDING JUNE 30, 1891 TO 1896.

HEHLOCK BARK.

HEMLOCK EX-
TRACTS.

OTHER THAN
HEMLOCK.

Hem-

lOCli

and
other,
value.

Other
articles
in crude

YEAR.

Ooida.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.
114,968

Pounds.

Value.

state used
in tan-
ning not
specially
provided
lor.value.

1891

1892

57,284 11274,426
53,018 256,346
60,688 241,244
46,173 ! 212,360
47,286 1 230,943
43,964 214,891

768,710

3,810

12,973

672

1229

408
71

C2,603
1,918
8,361
10,630
16,629
23,499

1893

1894

1895

»3,470
19,046

1896

DOMESTIC EXPORTS OF BARK AND EXTRACTS FOR
TANNING DURING THE YEARS ENDING JUNE .TO, l«fil
TO 1900.

TIAB.

Value.

TSAB.

ValiM.

1891

1241,382
239, 708
212, a»
271,236
290,862

1896

•3M,0O7

1892

1897

241,979
829, MM
869, 6»
376,742

1898

1899

IH94

1896

1900

LITERATURE.

Report upon Forestry, by Franklin B. Hough: Washington,
Government Printing Office, 1878.

Classification de 350 matieres tannantes, by M. Bemadin: Paris,
1880.

The Tannins, by Henry Trimble, Philadelphia, Vol. I, 1892;
Vol. II, 1894.

One Hundred Years of American Commerce; Hides and I^eather,
by Robert H. Foerderer, Vol. II, pages 494-497: New York, 1895.

The Manufacture of Leather, by Charles Thomas Davis: Phila-
delphia, 1897.

Organic Chemistry, V. Von Richter, Philadelphia, Vol. I, 1899;
Vol. II, 1900.

Group XIII. — Paints (Including Varnishes, and
Bonk, Ivoky, and Lami* black).

Although paints (including pigments), varnishes, and
bone, ivory, and lampblack have been separately tabu-
lated, a large proportion of the establishments of the first
two classes make both classes of products, and the product
of the last class belongs entirely to pigments; hence it
is advisable to consider them together in this special
treatment.

The following table gives a summary of the princi-
pal totals of the three tabulations, with a final column
giving the value of that portion of the products which
really belongs to this group, the remainder belonging
to other groups and being there considered. To the
total of this column is added the value of the paint and
varnish products from other groups, Class B, and also
from other categories, Class C, so far as known, the
values of these last being of course reported elsewhere
under their respective classes, although usually not
separately.

Number
of estab-
lishments.

Capital.

SALARIED OFFICERS,
CLERKS, ETC.

WAGE-EARNERS.

Miscella-
neous ex-
penses.

Cost of
materials.

Value of
products.

I'roducts be-
longing to
this group.

Number.

Salaries.

Average 1 vvam>a
number. wages.

Total

615

S60,834,921

3,731

$5,040,301

9,782 $4,971,697

J5, 122, 881

$44,844,229

$69,922,022

$67, 376, 641

419

181

42,801,782

782,247

17,550,892

2,512

1,198

3,077,318

23,650

1,939,333

8,151 1 3,929,787

86 1 46,107

1,546 j 995,803

3,430,061

75, 678

1,616,642

33,799,386

106,712

10,939,131

50,874,996

359,787

18,687,240

48,440,780

369,787

18,576,074

Bone ivory and lampblack .

Total

&)7

71,313,392

Class B

10
22

541,892
8,394,869

Class C

The importance of considering, in this connection, the
products of Class C is shown by the following list of
their kinds, quantities, and values:

White lead, dry, pounds

Oxides of lead, pounds

Oxide of zinc, pounds

Dry colors, pounds

Paints in oil, in paste, pounds.
Paints, ready mixed, gallons..

Total.

Quantity.

6,968,000
11,626,033
60,236,154
1,394,595
2,694,824
1479,998

Value.

$289,897

312,403

2, 212, 787

55,450

255,566

268,766

3,394,869

^Quantities not always given; in such cases, calculated from the average
value of product.

There were 23 establishments of Class A and 2 estab-
lishments of Class C reported as making white lead and
oxides of lead. Including the figures of Class C, the total
quantity of white lead reported as having been sold dry
was 123,070,316 pounds, valued at $4,501,078, in addi-
tion to which 131,621,628 pounds were reported as
having been consumed in the manufacture of other
paint products, making a total of 254,691,944 pounds.
The total quantity of oxides of lead reported as sold as
such is 62,385,656 pounds, valued at $2,862,743, in addi-
tion to which 2,080,374 pounds were reported as being
consumed, making a total of 64,466,030 pounds. The
entire paint and varnish products, sold as such, from
all sources are as follows:

White lead, pounds

Oxides of lead, pounds

Oxide of zinc, jiounds

Lamp black, pounds

Fine colors, pounds

Iron oxides and other earth colors, pounds .

Dry colors, pounds

Pulp colors, sold moist, pounds

Paints in oil, in paste, pounds

Paints, ready mixed, gallons

Varnishes —

Oil and turpentine, gallons

Alcohol, gallons

Pyroxylin, gallons

Liquid dryers, etc., gallons

Putty, pounds

All other products

Total .

Quantity.

123,
62,
60,
7,
4,
33,

169,
20,

310,
17,

070, 316
38.5,656
236, 1.64
619, 345
080,902
772, 266
128,836
060,935
072,089
380,348

286,768
563,212
204,069
664,370
287,323

Value.

$4,501,078

2,862,743

2,212,787

420,037

1,028,754

324,902

4,483,478

861,531

17,858,693

15,139,431

14, 337, 461
943,069
237, 012

3,085,264
238,427

2,778,725

71,313,392

While it is not possible to give an equally complete
list of materials, since the reports frequently give
merely an aggi-egate of "all other materials" or report

only one or two constituents separately, the following
list may be of interest:

Gums, pounds

Alcohol, grain, gallons
Alcohol, wood, gallons
Dry colors, pounds' . . .
Wliite lead, pounds ...

Whiting, pounds

Linseed oil, gallons

Turpentine, gallons . . .
Benzine, gallons

Total .

Quantity.

36,533,632

78,309

310,059

39,689,235
10,690,441
16, 167, 117
6,519,408
10,081,945

Value.

$3,

470,695
176, 907
285,510
0O2, 913
970, 614
.55, 157
495, 196
965,0.51
045, 488

24,466,531

' Dry colors includes zinc oxide, barytes, earth colors, and other dry paint
materials not otherwise specified.

The growth of this industry as shown by previous
census reports is as follows, the same chemicals being
included for each census as far as comparable, although
the Census Report for 1850 has some remarkable
figures. This report gives 51 establishments making
white lead with 1,508 employes, combined capital of
$3,124,800, and a total product valued at $5,242,213,
while onl\- 4 paint works and 3 varnish works are
reported, with a total force of 26 employees, capital
$14,550, and product valued at $92,375. These figures
seem to be erroneous, unless the "white-lead works"
were really paint works, although each may have cor-
roded lead for its own use, but this too is doubtful.
This view seems to be borne out by the figures of the
next census, that of 1860, which gives white lead 36
establishments with 994 employees, capital $2,453,147,
product $5,380,347; paints 50 establishments; varnish
48; total employees 991; and capital $3,711,450; product
$286,675. Included in paints for 1860 is an e.stab-
lishment reported as making zinc paints, with a
capital of $1,000,000, employing 100 people, the prod-
uct being valued at $250,000. Also 4 establishments
making zinc oxide, with a combined capital of $1 , 328,000,
employing 141 people, the total product amounting to
only $226,860. These remarkable cases show that even
at that early date overcapitalization was not unknown,
at least in the zinc industry, unless, as is probable, the
entire capitalization of the New Jersej' zinc-mining
companies, which were then the sole producers, was
entered as being employed in the manufacture of this
by-product.

f;9

PAINT AND VARNISH: 1860 TO 1900.

YEAR.

Number

of cs-
labllsh-
menta.

Capital.

Wage-
caniere.

Value of
producta.

68
164
224
326
822
616

83,217,100
7,402,697
13,949.740
17.333.392
46,318,146
00,834,921

1,679
2,216
8,604
6,0M
10,688
13,513

86.466,062

IflSO

11,107,842

1870

22,512,860

1880

29,111,941

1890

54,233,681

1900

67.876,641

In order to make the figures for 1900 fairly compar-
able with those of the preceding censuses, only the
establishments of Class A are taken into account, the
capital, value of products, and total number of em-
ployees, office force as well as factory workers, being
given. The table at the beginning of this special group
report gives the true statistical position of this indus-
try, but so far as can be learned no attempt was made
in any former census to separate the products there
given under Classes B and C.

The paint and varnish industry in this country had
its beginning in the early part of the last century. In
1804 Samuel Wetheril! & Son began the manufacture of
white lead in Philadelphia, followed in 1806 by Mr.
John Harrison, the founder of the present firm of Har-
rison Brothers & Co. , of Philadelphia. At that time
all of the white lead used in this country was imported,
but was greatly adulterated and very high priced.
A letter from Mr. W. H. Wetherill, of Wetherill &
Brother, the successors of Samuel Wetherill & Son,
states that the American manufacture of white lead
was much opposed by the agents of the foreign manu-
facturers and that the factoiy started in 1804 was
shortly after destroyed by fire and that "evidence was
not wanting" that this was done "by an incendiary
sent to this country for this purpose." In 1808 opera-
tions were again started against heavy foreign compe-
tition, which lasted until the War of 1812 which enabled
the domestic manufacturers to get a solid footing.
From that time the business rapidly increased.

According to an article by W. P. Thompson in One
Hundred Years of American Commerce, 1895, page 436,
by 1830 there were 12 establishments in the country, of
which 8 were east of the Alleghenies. This author
gives the white-lead production of the country by dec-
ades as follows:

WHITE-LEAD PRODUCTION: 1810 TO 1890.

YEAB.

Tons.

YEAH.

Tons.

1810

369

I860

16,000
86,000

1820

1870

1830

3,000
."i.OOO
9.000

1880

60,000

1840

18S7

65,000

18S0

1890

75,000

The manufacture of oxidoH of lead nppoani t^) have
begun at alM>ut the same time as that of white lead,
since by 1812 there were at least three establishments
in Philadelphia. Both proccsscH were very simple,
litharge and red lead Iniing made from. the metal by
regulated heating in a reverl)eratory furnace, while the
white lead was made by the sfi-called Dutch proces.x,
which is still the favorite, the prcxluct Inking considered
to be superior in quality to that made by any other
process. While, as in everything else, skill is required
to make a good grade of product in an economical
manner, the process itself is so simple that the large
number of white lead works reported for the census
of 1850 may lie explained by the development of the
lead regions of Missouri and Illinois during the forties,
as furnishing cheaper material, together with the idea,
then probably prevalent, that anyone could make it,
since it appeared to require only pots, lead, a little
vinegar, and .some spent tan bark.

The mixing of paints for .sale naturally preceded the
making of white lead, but there is no information avail-
able as to the beginning of such work. The fir.st var-
nish factory, according to an article by D. F. Tiemann,'
was founded by P. B. Smith, in New York in 1828,
another earlj' manufacturer being Christian Schrack. of
Philadelphia, who began business as a maker of paints
in 1816. The quality of the American varnishes proved
so satisfactory that as early as in 1836 an export
trade began. In 1857 D. F. Tiemann & Co. began
making carmine from cochineal, and in 1860 .soluble
laundry blue and quicksilver vermilion, these products
not having previously been made here. At present,
American paint and varnish products enjoy a large and
increasing foreign demand, and although the census
returns for 1900 show that the great increase in the cost
of materials during the census year has decreased
profits, still the general condition seems to be. a .satis-
factory one.

The foreign commerce in paints and varnishes for the
United States is exhibited in the following tables, com-
piled from "The Foreign Commerce and Navigation of
the United States," for the years ending June 30, 1891-

1900.

' One Hundred Yeare of American Commerce, 1896, Vol. II, page 621.

PAINTS, PIGMENTS, AND COLORS: IMPORTS AND DO-
MESTIC EXPORTS, FOR THE YEARS ENDING JUNE 30,
1891-1900.

TBAB.

Imports,
volne.

Exports,'
value.

YEAR.

'^ssr-

Exporta,!
ralue.

18J1

$1,439,127

1,372,052

1,466,761

980.715

1,246,924

•690.696

' 1888

1,065,088
1,XI7,440
1,586,461

1880,841

1892

709.857

1897

944,686

1883

700,308
825,987
729,706

1898

I 1899

680. 7V7

1894

968,736

1895

, 1900

1.213,512

> Includes carbon black, gas black, lamp black, and oxide of ilnc, prior to 188B

VARNISHES, SPIRITS, AND ALL OTHER, IMPORTS AND
DOMESTIC EXPORTS FOR THE YEARS ENDING JUNE
30, 1891-1900.

IMPORTS.

EXPORTS.

Gallons.

Value.

Gallons.

Value.

1891

35,073
38,737
41,216
20,337
39,095
40,644
62,665
32,848
33,227
43,743

$97,298

101,692

111,675

54,746

106,927

105,551

159,024

79,702

79,461

103, 985

153,365
215,266
210,067
226, 760
256,890
335, 979
409,569
398,841
436,817
588,545

$203,285

1892

293,059

1893

268,400

1894

282,278

1895

303,959

1896 .

362,975

1897

431,761

1898

422, 693

1899

463,547

1900

620,104

Group XIY. — Explosives.

This industry, which, as measured by the value of the
output, is the fifth iu importance among the industries
classified under chemical products, has shown a most
promising growth during the last decade, as presented
by the returns of the Census of 1900, for 97 regular
establishments in 21 different states were engaged in
the production of explosives. These establishments
employed $19,465, 846 of capital and 4,502 wage-earners,
and produced 215,590,719 pounds, having a value of
$16,950,976. They were distributed as follows:

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF EXPLOSIVES FAC-
TORIES: 1900.

STATES.

Number
o£ estab-
lishments.

Value of
products.

Per cent
of total.

$16,950,976

100.0

Maine, Massachuaetta, Connecticut, and Ver-

54
6

654,862

6,846,212
1, 447, lOO

3,728,249
4,274,553

3.9

New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Dela-

40.4

Alabama, Tennessee, Missouri, and Kansas..
Iowa. Indiana, Illinois, Ohio, Michigan, and

8.6
22.0

25.2

These factories were most numerous in the sections
where mining or engineering operations were carried
on most extensively. Though Pennsylvania had 36 fac-
tories and the largest output was in the Middle Atlantic
states, yet California alone manufactured over one-fourth
of the entire annual output, and was much the largest
producer in the United States. In addition to these
establishments 5 were reported idle, 1 in operation with
less than $500 in value of products, and 2 belonging to
the United States Government that were in active oper-
ation during the census year, making 80,000 pounds of
explosives, having a value of $60,506.

The growth of this industry may be shown by a com-
parison of the returns at the various censuses for which
reports have been recorded. In compiling this data it
was observed that the different methods of collecting
and reporting the statistics would not permit of a com-
parison in every detail, yet so far as it can be made it is
A'ery instructive. It was also borne in mind that while

up to 1860 the data of the explosives industry were for
gunpowder alone, in that year blasting powder was
included, in 1870 nitroglycerine, in 1880 dynamite, in
1900 smokeless powder, and for several of these decades,
variable small amounts of guncotton, fulminate of mer-
cury, and perhaps other explosives. The returns for
seven decades are as follows:

TOTAL PRODUCTION AND VALUE OF EXPLOSIVES, BY
DECADES: 1840 TO 1900.

Number
of estab-
lishments.

Capital.

Average
number
of wage-
earners.

PRODUCTS.

Pounds.

Value.

1840

137
54
58
36
54
69
97

$875,875
1,179,223
2,305,700
4,099,900
6,585,185
13,539,478
19,465,846

579

747

973

1,340

2,353

4,502

8,977,348

1850

$1, 590, 332

I860

3,223,090

4, 237, 539

1880

5,802,029

1890

98,645,912
215,980,719

10,993,131

1900

U6, 960, 976

1 This value is for the explosive substances only. When materials of all kinds
produced in these establishments are included the value is $17,125,418.

A better idea of the industry may be had by the
discussion of each of the products so far as the statis-
tics will permit. This is done for gunpowder (blasting
powder being included in this term) in the following
table:

PRODUCTION AND VALUE OF GUNPOWDER, BY DE-
CADES: 1840 TO 1900.

Number
of estab-
lishments.

Capital.

Average
number
of wage-
earners.

PRODUCT.

Pounds.

Value.

1840

137
54
58
33
33
37
47

$878,875
1,179,223
2,305,700
4,060,400
4,983,560
9,609,975
8,297,773

496

579

747

939

1,011

1,622

1,708

8,977,348

I860

$1, 590, 332

I860

8,223,090

1870

4,011,839

1880

3,348,941

1890

95,019,174
123,314,103

6, 740, 099

1900

5, 310, 351

Gunpowder. — Although since the Eleventh Census
smokeless powder has come to be used for military and
sporting purposes, 1 pound, speaking roughly, replac-
ing 3 pounds of black gunpowder, yet the amount
of black gunpowder produced and consumed is still
large, and it bids fair to be so for some years to come.
This is due to several causes, among which are the
following: First, because in ordnance it is necessary to
use a priming charge of black gunpowder with which
to fire the smokeless powder. Second, because smoke-
less powder can not be efficiently substituted for black
gunpowder in the older forms of small arms that are
widely scattered over the country. Third, because
black powder is most suitable for use in fuses and in
pyrotechnics. Fourth, because smokeless powder is
too expensive, and in no way superior to black gun-
powder for saluting purposes. From the returns it is
found that in the census year there were 10 establish-
ments in 9 different states making black gunpowder,
and that they employed $3,397,288 of capital, and 556

wage-earners, and produoed 25,638,804 pounds of pow-
der, having a value of $1,452,377. In making this
there were consumed 8,614 tons of potassium nitrate
(India saltpeter). 174,810 bashels of charcoal, and
1,282 tons of refined sulphur. About 6,800 tons of the
potassium nitrate were made by conversion of sodium
nitrate with potassium chloride, consuming 5,700 tons
of sodium nitrate (Chile saltpeter). The wood employed
for the making of the charcoal was willow, alder, or
dogwood, and the yield of charcoal was about 25 per
cent by weight of the air-dried wood.

While the composition of gunpowder may vary some-
what, the formula usually followed for black gunpowder
is 75 per cent of potassium nitrate, 15 per cent of
black charcoal, and 10 per cent of sulphur. In recent
yeai's brown prismatic powder has been used in heavy
ordnance of the general composition of 78 per cent of
potassium nitrate, 20 per cent of charcoal, and 8 per
cent of sulphur, in which the "charcoal" was under-
burned charcoal from peat or rye straw, or in which
carbohydrates were used, but such gunpowder has been
almost, if not completely, displaced.

The manufacture of gunpowder is a very old one,
this material having been used as a propeliant in cannon
at the battle of Crecy in 1346. It was manufactured
in the United States prior to and during the Revolu-
tionary War by means of stamp mills which consisted
of mortars and pestles of wood and bronze by which
the ingredients wei'e pulverized and mixed, the damp
material being giained by inibbing through sieves.
This method produced not onlj- a very coarsely made
and irregulari\- acting powder but it was very danger-
ous, as, for instance, according to Chaptal, in France
about one-sixth of the total stamps at work blew up an-
nualh'. In 1787, Cossigny introduced at the Isle de
France the practice of pulverizing and mixing the
ingredients in wheel mills. In 1791, Carny devised the
method of pulverizing in drums, wheel mills being used
for incorporating the mass. During the latter part of
the Eighteenth centur}- the manufacture of gunpowder
was brought to a high degree of perfection in France
by the eminent chemist Lavoisier, who had supervision
of the Government powder works.

The modern methods of manufacture in the United
States began with the founding of the works at Wil-
mington, Del., in 1802, by Eleuth^re Irende du Pont de
Nemours, who had learned powder making from La-
voisier, and who obtained from France the most ap-
proved machinery; and these works, constantly grow-
ing, have been in regular operation up to the present
time, and the methods and kinds of machiner}' employed
have been introduced into the mills subsequently erected
elsewhere in this country.

The more recent improvements have been in the
introduction of retorts for burning the charcoal, the
manufacture of the .saltpeter by conversion, and the
devising of various foiins of press mills. The method

of manufacturing potassium nitrate from sodium
nitrate by metathesis with potaMsium chloride was
suggested by Longchamps, Anthon, and Kuhlnmnn in
185J», and was adopted at the Dupont works al)out 1H68.
With the larg»^ deposits of sodium nitrate available in
Chile and pota.ssium chloride accessible at Stassfurt, in
Germany, this artificial source for saltpeter success-
fully competed with the native sources in India, where
the supply is limited. This method of manufacture of
potassiiun nitrate has also so reduced the cost of the
article as to remove all temptation to continue the
vicious system of niter plantjitions, which robbed the
soil of one of its most valuable plant foods.

Blasting powder. — This industry, which is a develop-
ment of the last century, was pursued during the last
census year in 37 different establishments, located in 13
different states, the state of Pennsylvania alone having
19 separate works. There was employed $4,900,485
of capital, and 1,153 wage-earners, and the product
amounted to 97,744,237 pounds of powder, having a
value of $3,880,910. In the manufacture of this
powder there were consumed 38,000 tons of sodium
nitrate (Chile saltpeter), 746,000 bushels of charcoal,
and 5.100 tons of sulphur.

Between 1802 and 1840 two large gunpowder fac-
tories, as well as a few smaller ones, were established in
the United States. The active construction of canals
and the exploitation of mines caused a considerable and
growing demand for gunpowder for use in blasting,
which eventualh' became so marked that to meet it the
powder makers placed a "blasting powder" upon the
market, which contained the same ingredients as black
gunpowder except that they were not so carefully
purified and the powder was less carefully made. In
1856 the material now commonh' known as blasting
powder was made, and it differs from the older blasting
powder chiefly in the fact that the expensive potassium
nitrate (India saltpeter) of the latter is replaced by the
cheap sodium nitrate (Chile saltpeter). For some years
prior to the above date, the idea of using sodium nitrate
had obtained, but the fact that it was a deliquescent
substance had proved an obstacle; yet the difficulties
which were supposed to be insurmountable were over-
come, and in 1856 its manufacture was begun on a large
scale by the leading powder makers. A patent for a
gunpowder containing sodium nitrate was granted to
L. Dupont in 1857, and upon this an enormous industry,
not only in the United States but throughout the world,
has been built, and through it an additional impetus
has been given to engineering and mining operations.
Furthermore, this increased consumption of Chile salt-
peter led to an increased development of the enormous
deposits of this salt in the desert of Tarapaca, which so
cheapened the nitrate as to benefit and stimulate the
nitric acid, fertilizer, and many other industries in
which this material is used.

The proportions of the ingredients in blasting pow-

der may varj- widely. Thus the census returns for
1900 showed gunpowders composed of 67.3 per cent of
sodium nitrate, 22.9 per cent of carbon, and 9.4 per cent
of sulphur, up to powder composed of 77.1 per cent of
sodium nitrate, 8.6 per cent of carbon, and 14.3 per
cent of sulphur. Guttman, in his "Manufacture of
Explosives," gives a powder consisting of 60.19 per cent
of sodium nitrate, 21.36 per cent of charcoal, and 18.45
per cent of sulphur. From a large number of returns
we tind the average composition to be 74 per cent of
sodium nitrate, 16 per cent of charcoal, and 10 per cent
of sulphur.

Blasting powder is usually put upon the market in
corrugated iron kegs, holding 25 pounds each.

Nitroglycerin. — Nitroglycerin appeared for the first
time among the chemical products of the United States
in the census returns for 1870, but in 1890 it disap-
peared under the legend "high explosives," which term
usuallj' includes dynamite, gun cotton, nitrosubstitution
explosives, and fulminates. While the larger part of
the nitroglycerin made is subsequently consumed in
the manufacture of dynamite, blasting gelatine, and
smokeless powder, there is still a quantity made and
sold as such. For the census year 1900 there were 22
establishments located in 6 different states, employing
$293,881 of capital and 105 wage-earners. The product
amounted to 3,618,692 pounds and had a value of
$783,299. There were consumed in its manufacture
1,897,448 pounds of glycerin and 12,134,869 pounds
of mixed acids.

In addition to the nitroglycerin produced and sold
as such, 31,661,806 pounds were made and consumed,
and there were required to make it 15,043,483 peunds
of glycerine and 96,092,451 pounds of mixed acids.
The total production of nitroglycerin, therefore, for
the census year was 35,482,947 pounds, and there were
used as materials 16,983,918 pounds of glycerin and
108,227,320 pounds of mixed acids. Although all but
two of the factories purchased their sulphuric acid
originally, many of them regained their spent acids
and some of them manufactured their nitric acid. The
quantity of acid reported as regained was 15,916,907
pounds, and of nitric acid manufactured, 26,058,779
pounds. There were consumed in the manufacture of
this nitric acid 19,817 tons of nitrate of soda and
28,177,000 pounds of 66° sulphuric acid, but much of the
latter was regained acid.

The production of nitroglycerin for 1900 as com-
pared with that reported in previous decades is set
forth in the following table:

PRODUCTION OF NITROGLYCEKIN FOR THREE DEC-
ADES, 1870, 1880, AND 1900.

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments.

Capital.

Average
number
of wage-
earners.

PRODUCT.

YEAR.

Pounds.

Value.

1870

3
19
22

$39,500

1,601,625

293,881

34
329
105

""3,'6s9,72i'
3,618,692

$226,700

1880

1,830,417

1900

783,299

Nitroglycerin was discovered by Ascanio Sobrero in
Turin, Italy, in 1847, and it is interesting to note that
upwards of 7 ounces of the first nitroglycerin made by
Sobrero are still kept at the Nobel dynamite factory at
Avigliana, in Italy, and are tested every year. Itscom-
mercial manufacture seems to have been begun by Alfred
Nobel, in Sweden, in 1862, and in 1863 he received his
first patent in this art for a mixture of ordinary gun-
powder with nitroglycerin, he having at fir.st employed
gunpowder as a means of exploding the nitroglycerin.
In 1863, however, he discovered that nitroglycerin
could not only be exploded with certainty by means of a
copper capsule containing mercuric fulminate (now
known as a blasting cap or detonator), but that the
power developed by the nitroglycerin was enormously
greater than could be obtained from it by any other
means, and this discovery marked an epoch, not only in
the history of nitroglycerin, but in that of all high ex-
plosives, since it revealed the method of inducing explo-
sion bj' detonation.

So near as can be ascertained, the manufacture of
nitroglycerin in the United States began at the Giant
Powder Company's works in California, in 1867, using
Nobel's methods. In 1867 George M. Mowbray also
began the manufacture, by independent methods, at
North Adams, Mass. Mr. Dupont says:'

There are two engineering works which indicate very well the
era of the introduction of high explosives in this country. In the
year 1870 the Nesquehoning tunnel, near Wilkesbarre, was exca-
vated in very hard rock by the use of black powder only. The
engineers in charge were unwilling to introduce the then new and
untried explosive. The work was, however, completed in good
form and very quickly, owing largely to the extensive use of com-
pressed air drills. About the same time the Hoosac tunnel was
completed, nitroglycerin alone being used in the work. This ex-
plosive was principally manufactured upon the ground, and was
much used in the liquid state. This work was a greater one than
the tunnel first mentioned, but the two serve to mark the transi-
tion period in the practical use of explosives. One of the greatest
of modern engineernig works, the Chicago drainage canal, is now
(1895) being carried on largely by high explosives. It is an
example of the magnitude of the work that is attempted with
explosives.

Nitroglycerin is manufactured by mixing glycerin
with a mixture of nitric acid and sulphuric acid. Each
of the materials used is the most concentrated that can
be made, and the demand for large quantities of nitric
and sulphuric acids and glycerin of the highest grades
which has been created by the high-explosives industry
has had a marked effect on the development of the acid
and glycerine industries. The acids are usually mixed
in the proportion of 3 parts by weight of sulphuric acid
to 2 parts by weight of nitric acid, and they should con-
tain 61.9 per cent of H^SO, and 34.5 per cent of HNO3,
with not more than 0.7 per cent of NjOj. These pre-
viously mixed acids are sent out from the acid works
in iron drums holding about 1,500 pounds, and this
weight of mixed acids makes a convenient charge for
one run in the nitroglycerin converter, from 210 to
230 pounds of glycerin being there mixed with it.

> One hundred years of American Commerce, Vol. I, page 192.

Tlio reaction {joes on >)ctween the glycerin and the
nitric acid, the sulphuric acid present serving chiefly
to take up and retain the water which is one of the
products of the reaction. When the reaction is com-
pleted the materials are run into a tank, where they
rest until, owing to their differences in specific gravity,
the nitroglycerin and spent acids form into separate?
layers; then the nitroglycerin is run oil' into washing
and purifying tanks, and the acids are run off to be
reworked. The dilute nitric acid thus obt^iined is some-
times used in the manufacture of ammonium nitrate
for use in dynamite dopes. The diluted sulphuric acid
is sometimes used in the manufacture of nitric acid, but
it is moie often concentrated in iron pans, and, after
being mixed with strong nitric acid, again used in mak-
ing nitroglycerin. This spent acid averages in com-
position 72 per cent of sulphuric acid, 10 per cent of
nitric acid, and 18 per cent of water. Theoretically,
100 parts by weight of glycerin should yield 246 parts
of nitroglycerin, but in practice the yields are from
200 to 220 parts.

Nitroglj'cerin is used directly in torpedoes, which
are cylinders holding 20 quarts each, for "shooting"
oil wells. It also is used in medicine as a heart stimu-
lant. The principal use of nitroglj^cerin is in making
dynamite and blasting gelatin.

6uti Cotton or Pxjroxylui. — By the returns for the
census of 1900 there were 10 establishments in 3 dif-
ferent states engaged in the manufacture and sale of
cellulose nitrates, for various uses and they employed
$255,343 of capital and lt)3 wage-earners. There were
produced 922,799 pounds of the various cellulose
nitrates, having a value of $486,773, and there were con-
sumed 691,115 pounds of cotton and 8,247,668 pounds
of mixed acids. Besides these there were produced
and consumed in other establishments 2,739,834 pounds
of cellulose nitrates, making a total product for the year
of 3,662,633 pounds.

Gun cotton, or pyroxylin, is the name given to various
cellulose nitrates which were discovered b^^ Schonbein
iu 1846, and which result from the reaction between
nitric acid and cellulose. There is a considerable num-
ber of cellulose nitrates; authorities differ as to their
number. In fact, there is still doubt as to the real con-
stitution of cellulose, and therefore nothing can be pro-
nounced with certainty as to the constitution of the
nitrates produced from it. However, it is generally
accepted that the formula of cellulose is some multiple
of C.HidOs, and that the nitrates are produced by replac-
ing one or more atoms of the hydrogen present by NO,.
It is also accepted, following Vieille, that, taking the
fornmla as C^H^Oj,, there may be at least 8 different
cellulose nitrates in which from 4 to 11 groups of NO,
have been introduced into the molecule. In the follow-
ing table these different nitrates are so named as to
indicate the number of NO, groups present, and there
is also shown the per cent of N present in each.

IT,, 1,1 W'll">">t>-

"'V Uliieilfrom
nltrofen. ^efiulow.

CellnloM endecanltnte
Cellulono decanltralv. . .
Cellulose enneaiiKrate .
Cellulone octonltrate . . .
Cellalom! heptanltrHte..
CellukMc hexanitralc...
CvllulcMc iwiitanitratc.
Celluloae tetnuiitnUi. . .

U.47

176.4

12.7ft

160. 4

11. M

162. 8

11.11

186. 7

10.18

148.6

9.U

141.7

8.02

1S4.7

6.78

m.8

In addition to these nitrates containing different per
cents of nitrogen, there are undoulitedly i.somers of
many of them. According to their difference in nitro-
gen contents, or in intermolecular arrangement, these
nitrates exhibit different degrees of solubility toward
organic solvents, and are in consequence put to different
commercial uses. Thus the higher ones are, under
ordinary conditions, in.soluble in a mixture of 2 parts of
strong ethyl ether and 1 part of strong ethyl alcohol,
and such cellulo.se nitrate is called gun cotton. On the
other hand, the lower nitrates are .soluble in the mixed
solvent named under these conditions, and the.se cel-
lulose nitrates are called pyroxylin. It should be
said that later researches tend to show that, according
to the conditions under which they are nitrated or the
conditions under which they are expo.sed to the solvent,
the higher nitrations are acted upon by the ether-alcohol
solvent.

Cellulo.se nitrates are prepared by immersing purified
cotton in mixtures of nitric and sulphuric acid. In
making gun cotton, the acid mixture consists of 1 [)art,
by weight, of nitric acid of 1.5 specific gravity to 3 pails,
by weight, of sulphuric acid of 1.845 .specific gravity,
and 1 pound of steam-dried cotton is immer.sed in and
digested for twenty-four hours with 12 pounds of this
acid mixture. The acid is then wrung out and the gun
cotton is pulped, washed, and compressed into blocks
for use. The spent acids which are thrown out in the
wringing have been found to contain 79.91 per cent of
H,SO„ 9.52 per cent of HNO,, 1.04 per cent of N,0.,
and 9.65 per cent of water, and they are reworked to be
used again. In making the lower cellulose nitrates
weaker acids are used, the strength being determined
by the use to which the nitrate is to tie put. Examples
of such acid mixtures are given under smokeless pow-
der and under pyroxylin plastics.

Cellulose nitrates are used for many purposes in the
arts. Finely pulped, compressed material, consi-sting
principally of the highest nitration, is known as gun
cotton and is used in militar}- mines and torpedoes, and
for destructive purposes generally in military opera-
tions. Owing to the discovery by E. O. Brown, of
Woolwich, in 1868, that it can be detonated when
wet, it is now stored and used while saturated with
water. In 1847 or 1848 Doctor May nard, of Boston, dis-
covered that pyroxylin was soluble in ether-alcohol and
that the liquid, called "collodion," could be used as a
vehicle for medicine and as a substitute for sticking

plaster. In 1851 Frederick Scott Archer invented the
process of coating photographic plates with collodion.
In 1869 John W. Hyatt, Jr., and Isaiah S. Hyatt, of
Albany, N. Y., invented the process for manufacturing
" celluloid " from cellulose nitrate. Still later, Fred-
erick Crane invented pyroxylin varnishes, and Char-
dennot invented a process for making artificial silk
from pyroxylin. A large use for cellulose nitrates is
in the manufacture of smokeless powder, explosive
gelatine, and gelatine dynamite. By the use of pyrox-
ylin solutions a form of artificial leather is obtained.

Dynamite. — This explosive first appears in the report
of the census of 1880, and then amounted in value to
but one-third of that for the nitroglycerin produced.
According to the census of 1900, there were 31 different
establishments, located in 8 different states, employing
$7,561,121 of capital, and 1,758 wage-earners engaged
in the manufacture of dynamite. There were produced
85,846,456 pounds, having a value of $8,247,223, and
there were consumed in making it, 31,661,806 pounds of
nitroglycerin, 20,090 tons of sodium nitrate, 9,934,360
pounds of wood pulp, 82,558 pounds of pyrox3lin, and
483,975 pounds of ammonium nitrate.

The production and value of dynamite for 1900, com-
pared with that reported in previous decades, is set forth
in the following table:

PRODUCTION OF DYNAMITE, BY DECADES: 1880 to 1900.

Number
of estab-
lishments.

Capital.

Average
number
of wage-
earners.

PRODUCT.

Pounds.

Value.

1880

2
32
31

$622,671
4, 263, 032

1890

((3,929,503
7,551.121

731
1,758

30,626,738
85,846,466

1900

8,247,223

Dynamite was invented hj Alfred Nobel in 1866, and
its manufacture began shortly after at the various
works established by him. In his testimonj' before the
select committee on explosive substances of the British
Parliament, in 1874, Nobel testified that there were then
18 factories, in which he was interested, engaged in this
manufacture, 2 of them being in America, while there
were many independent works in addition. The returns
for dynamite were not so rendered in the prior census
reports that the growth of this important industry can
be readily ascertained, but some general idea of its
growth may be gained from the following table, given
by George McRobert, setting forth the annual sales
of dynamite for each of sixteen years, from the factories
with which Nobel was associated.

McROBERT'S TABLE.

YEAR.

Sales,
tons.

YEAR.

Sales,
tons.

1867

184

424

785

1,350

2,050

8,120

1875

3,600
4,300
5,500
6 200

1868

1876

1869

1877 .

1870

1878

1871

1879 ...

7,000
7,500
8,500
9,500

1872 <

1880

1873

1881

1874

1882

Dynamite is a material of most variable composition.
It consists of a .solid porous absorbent which holds the
liquid nitroglycerin, and its invention was a necessity,
since so many frightful accidents due to the liquid state
of nitroglycerin led to legislation in Europe which
forbade the transportation and use of the latter explo-
sive. Kieselguhr (known as infusorial silica) was largely
used at first, and is still much used in Europe, as the
absorbent, but this "dope," as the absorbent base is
called, is almost entirely replaced in this countrj' by an
explosive dope, which is most frequently a mixture of
wood pulp and sodium nitrate, with a very small per-
centage of calcium or sodium carbonate to act as a neu-
tralizer to anj' acid present. Such a dynamite is known
as a straight dynamite, but there are others which con-
tain a dope of coarsely made gunpowder or of resinous
compositions. In 1875 Nobel invented an explosive
made by dissolving p3'roxylin or soluble cellulose nitrate
in nitroglycerin until, when the mixture was cool, it
set to a jelij'-like mass which is known as explosive or
blasting gelatin. This is often mixed with wood meal
or wood pulp, and then gelatin dynamite is produced.
As maj' be inferred, dynamites vary greatly in their
nitroglj'cerin contents, and they may be found on the
market containing from 5 per cent, as in a bank blast-
ing powder, up to 94 per cent, as in a blasting gelatin.
The grade which is probably the most extensively used
is that known as 40 per cent dj'namite, and analysis has
shown a straight dynamite of this grade to contain of
nitrogh'cerin 39.8 per cent, sodium nitrate 46.1 per
cent, wood pulp 11.5 per cent, calcium carbonate, 0.7
per cent, moisture 1.9 per cent. It can be safely
assumed that 40 per cent is the average nitroglycerin
content of the dynamites of all kinds put on the market.

Dynamite as sold is usually loaded into parafiined
paper cases, thus making it into "sticks" or "car-
tridges." These sticks may vary much in size, but the
average stick will be 8 inches in length by 1^ inches in
diameter, and they are packed in sawdust in boxes
holding 60 pounds each.

Smokeless Powder. — At the time the Eleventh Census
was taken no smokeless powder was reported, nor was
there then any factory in operation for its regular pro-
duction, while for the census year 1900 there was an
output of 3,053,126 pounds of powder having a value
at the works of $1,716,101. This industry, which is
wholly a growth of the last ten years, embraced 9 fac-
tories, having $2,153,958 of capital, gave employment
to 730 wage-eai"ners, and consumed 14,000,000 pounds
of mixed acids, 1,600,000 pounds of cotton, 2,600,000
pounds of alcohol, 1,400,000 pounds of ether, 143,000
pounds of acetone, and 88,000 pounds of nitroglycerin.
There is little doubt that the growth will be much more
rapid in the immediate future, as smokeless powder is
rapidly supplanting black gunpowder for militaiy and
sporting pui-poses, and, as a large part of the time dur-
ing the last ten years has been spent in the invention
of machineiy for handling the materials, in planning

works so as to secure the maximum of safety with the
nmxinniiii of speed and ocononiy in manufacture and in
the devisinj,' of means for the recovery and renewal of
the spent acids and solvents.

The verj' earliest manufacture of smokeless powder
in the United States was carried on by Charles Lennig,
at Philadelphia, Pa. , alwut 1850. His small-arm charges
were made of long staple, fibrous gun cotton, and, as
elsewhere, they were found to be so dangerous that
their use was soon abandoned. The next factory to be
started was erected by Carl Dittmar, at Quincy, Mass.,
about 1870, where a soft, granulated powder was made,
but this was also abandoned.

The first of the factories erected for the manufacture
of modern smokeless jjowder was planned, erected, and
operated at the United States Naval Torpedo Station at
Newport, R. I., in 1890, by Charles E. Munroe, under
tlie direction of Commander Theodore F. Jewell, United
States Navy, inspector of ordnance, in charge of the
station, and it is to-dav in regular operation, having
been much enlarged. Following this, i factories were
erected in 1891, 1 in 1895, 1 in 1898, and 2 in 1900, all
of which were producing during at least a part of the
census year. These factories were scattered through 7
states, 3 of them being in New Jersey and 2 of them
being factories belonging to and operated by the United
States Government. The Government factories pro-
duced militarj' powder only, 4 of the private factories
produced sporting powder onlj-, while the remaining
private works, though manufacturing largel3' for mili-
tary purposes, produced some sporting powder also.

The earliest I'ecorded attempt to use a smokeless ex-
plosive as a propellant is found in the experiments of
Howard, who in 1800 attempted to use mercury ful-
minate in place of gunpowder in a firearm, with the
result that he burst the piece. Immediately after the
discovery of gun cotton by SchOnbein in 1846, extensive
trials of it as a propellant were made in Germany,
France, England, and the United States, but as it was
then used in the ordinary fluffy or thread-like condition
of cotton it proved too violent. In 1860 Frederick A.
Abel devised a method for gi-anulating gun cotton by
introducing pulped nitrocellulose containing water and
a small quantity' of a binding material into a vessel to
which a vibrating motion was imparted, thereby pro-
ducing soft grains, but this does not seem to have come
into vogue.

The first person to realize any considerable degree of
success was Captain Schultze of the German army,
who, in 1862, made a soft-grained powder from well-
purified and partly nitrated wood. The first nitrocel-
lulose powder to approach modern requirements was
the E. C. powder, invented by Reid and Johnson in
1882, in which the .soft grains, produced by rolling
pulped nitrocellulose containing water in barrels were
superficially hardened or waterproofed after granula
tion. The first successful militarj- smokeless ]X)wder

was made in France by Viellle, and it consisted of a
hard, dense-grained flake, or fagot powder, made from
nitrocelluloses mixed with a nitrate, like barium nitrate,
and with or without picric acid. This was followed in
1888 by the ballistite of Nobel, and in 1889 by the cord-
ite of Abel and Dewar, each of which was composed
of mixtures of nitrocelluloses with nitroglycerine and
a restrainer of some kind. The whole was worked, by
admixture with suitable solvents and by use of the
proper machinery, into grains which were hardened
throughout. In 1889 Richard Von Freeden discovered
that gelatinized nitrocellulose, still containing the solu-
tion employed for its gelatinization, on being exposed
to certain liquids, or the vapors thereof, undergoes a
kind of coagulation and division into small lumps,
which latter is promoted b}' stirring, and upon this he
based a method of manufacture b3- which small-grained
powders that are hardened throughout could be pro-
duced, and the method is now quite extensively fol-
lowed.

Up to this time all gunpowders throughout the world,
both black and smokeless, were made of mixtures of
various ingredients, even the smokeless powders, which
were made from nitrocellulose only, being made from
mixtures of cellulose nitrates of different degrees of
nitration; but in 1889 Charles E. Munroe proposed that
smokeless powders be made of a single chemical sub-
stance in a state of chemical puritj', and he pointed out
that cellulose nitrate, of uniform nitration, then offered
the best material from which to produce such a pow-
der, and this is the principle which to-daj' governs the
manufacture of military smokeless powders, at least in
the United States.

Although up to 1898 the United States Army pro-
posed to use smokeless powder composed of nitrocellu-
loses and nitroglycerin, the United States Navy adopted
in 1890 a cellulose powder of uniform nitrogen con-
tents, and the Army followed in 1898. As made to-day,
the nitrocellulo.se used contains from 12.45 to 12.80 per
cent of nitrogen. Such cellulose nitrate is made bj-
dipping 1 pound of cotton (free from oil and mechan-
ical impurities and containing about 57 per cent of
moisture) in 19 pounds of "mixed acids," containing
about 57 per cent of HjSO,, 28.2 per cent of HNO,, and
not more than 2 per cent of N,0«. The acid has an
initial temperature of 25° C, and the crock containing
the mixed acids and cotton is heated to 36^ C. , the cot-
ton being exposed at this temperature, with one turn-
ing over of the cotton, for sixty minutes. After puri-
fication b^' wringing, washing, and steaming to remove
the acid, the nitrocellulose is freed from the water
remaining in it by extraction with alcohol, and it is
converted into a gelatinous ma-ss by kneading or stirring
in a Werner and Pfleiderer mixing machine with a mix-
ture of ethyl ether and ethyl alcohol, 2 parts by weight
of ether and 1 part by weight of alcohol being usied
for every 3 parts by weight of nitrocellulose. The

subsequent processes have for their object the more
intimate mixing of the material and straining off of
the unconverted portions, the shaping of the mass into
grains, and the drying of the grains. The finished
grains still contain some of the solvent, particularly
alcohol, the amount varjnng with the thickness of the
walls of the grains. In the very smallest grains this
amounts to about one-half of 1 per cent, while in the
larger grains there maj'^ be as much as 4 per cent of
solvent present.

It is not easy to check the data in this manufacture,
and for this reason round numbers are given. It may
be said, however, that 100 pounds of perfectly drj^ cot-
ton will yield 169 pounds of this nitrocellulose, but the
cotton as used may contain as much as 7 per cent of
moisture, while the final product may contain from
one-half of 1 per cent to 2 per cent of solvents. The
quantities of acids can not well be checked, because the
spent acid is "rebuilt" and used again. The difficulty
is even greater with the solvents, since most of the
works manufacture the ether used from part of the
alcohol purchased or supplied to them besides reusing
the recovered solvents. An additional complication in
comparing costs arises from the fact that, when the
powder is being made in private works for the United
States Government, the manufacturer is permitted to
use tax-free alcohol, while if he be making such powder
for other parties he must use tax-paid alcohol. Where
the Government supplies the alcohol, the weight of
alcohol allowed is l.i times the weight of the finished
powder.

The foregoing description is for military powder, and
though picrates and metallic salts, such as nitrates and
bichromates, are used to some extent in sporting pow-
ders, yet they are to so large an extent composed of
nitrocellulose that they may be regarded for purposes
of census classification as composed wholly of this
material. The methods of manufacture are as a rule
quite different from those employed in the making of
military powders, and the gelatinizing agents used are
ethyl acetate, amyl acetate, and the like, in place of
ether-alcohol. It is to be noted that a small portion of
the smokeless powder reported for the census year was
a nitrocellulose-nitroglycerin powder which had been
gelatinized by acetone. Smokeless powder is usually
sold in metal canisters holding 1 bulk pound each.

Fulminates. — Although charges of dynamite and
other high explosives are invariably fired by detonators
or blasting caps charged with mercuric fulminate, and,
although percussion caps, friction primers, and fixed
ammunition are also charged with this explosive, yet
the amount of this most important and essential explo-
sive which is returned as manufactured in the United
States was quite insignificant. On the other hand, as
shown by the following table, compiled from the records
of the Bureau of Statistics of the United States Treas-
ury Department, the importation of fulminate is assum-

ing greater and greater importance as our home industry
in other explosives grows, and this is shown even more
markedly if to the values for the fulminates there be
added those for the blasting caps, percussion caps, and
cartridges that are also imported:

IMPORTS, FOR CONSUMPTION, OF FULMINATES, FULMI-
NATING POWDERS, AND LIKE ARTICLES: 1884 TO 1900,
INCLUSIVE.

YEAR.

Value.

YEAR.

Value.

8487
5,577
10,647
10,099
20,984
10, 717
19,460
44,403
36,278

1893

$48,509

1885

1894

42,567

1895

65,891

1887

1896

77, 197

1897

76, 515

1889

1898

46,703

1890

1899

108,741

1891

1900

105,999

1892

The fact that, notwithstanding the dangers attendant
on the transportation of this violent explosive substance,
its home manufacture has been almost completely su-
perseded by the foreign product, is explained on stating
that it is manufactured from grain alcohol, mercury,
and nitric acid; that for every 12 parts by weight of
mercury fulminate produced 110 parts by weight of 95
per cent alcohol are consumed; and that the tax levied
in the United States on alcohol makes the foreign com-
merce in this article a very profitable one, and home
competition practically impossible.

Wage-earners and wages. — There were employed- in
the entire explosives industry 4,31:9 men, 117 women,
and 36 children under 16 years of age. The wages for
the men varied from $365 per annum in New Jersey
to $790 per annum in California, the average for the
whole country being $539 per annum. The average
wage for women was $263 per annum, and for children
$169 per annum.

Power. — The total horsepower reported as being
employed in these factories was 22,920 horsepower, of
which 5,674 horsepower was supplied by 190 water
wheels, 13,242 horsepower by 315 steam engines, 2,885
horsepower by 177 electric motors, and 279 horsepower
from other sources. The returns are chiefl\' interest-
ing in marking changes in methods, for, formerly, in
erecting black gunpowder works especial care was taken
to secure a location for the works where there was an
abundant water supply and plenty of wood for charcoal
making; whereas, in the manufacture of the modern
explosives, while a sufficient isolation to obtain security
for the works and limit the damage resulting from acci-
dental explosions is sought, yet readiness and conven-
ience in transportation of the materials used and the
goods manufactured are regarded as of the first impor-
tance. The improvements in the methods for generat-
ing, conveying, and transforming the energy in steam
or electricity have now rendered it relatively safe to
employ these sources of energy.

Imports and Exports. — A more nearly' correct idea of

the condition of thi.s industry may be obtained if there
i)e added to the censu.s statistics those for the ini[)orts
and exports* of explosives. The imports of fulminates
have already been considered, and attention is now
called to the .statistics for the foreign commerce in all
explosives as compiled from "The Foreign Commerce
and Navigation of the United States for the year end-
ing June 30, 1!>()0," Vol. II.

IMPORTS OF GUNPOWDER, FULMINATES, AND ALL LIKE
ARTICLES: 1891 TO 1900, INCLUSIVE.

YEAR.

OtINPOWDER.

All other
explosives,
fulminates,
etc., value.

Total

Pounds.

Value.

value.

1891

84,312
81,111
78,306
86,481
104,990
68,998
87,921
98,708
44,406
81,212

S19,148
29,533
68,974
71,285
84,882
49,867
63,722
79,992
29,824
16,836

tl24,528
100,977
124,661
67,342
96,940
77,192
98,727
65,123
160,620
169,073

»143,676
130, .'ilO
193,635
138,627
181,822
127,049
162.449
145, 115
190,444
184,908

1892

1893

1894

1896

1897

1896

1899

1900

DOMESTIC EXPORTS OF GUNPOWDER AND OTHER
EXPLOSIVES: 1891 TO 1900, INCLUSIVE;

1891
1892
189S
1894
1896
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900

OONPOWDEB.

Founds. Valbe.

733, 8»t

903,077

885,263

496,566

972,271

1,11)9,936

1,086,465

1,202,971

1,504,624

1,612,822

S8S,676
108,276
105,647
66,839
102,885
124,823
118,001
139,644
181,642
197,488

All other

explosives,

value.

Total
value.

$806,870

1996,546

762,079

860,355

765,966

861,513

935,287

1,002,126

1,174,396

1,277.281

1,2.56,279

1,381,102

1,437,317

1,, 555. 318

1,255,762

1.395,406

1,3.')0,247

I,.W1,889

1,694,166

1,891,601

LITEK.\TURE.

Powder and Explosives, by Francis G. Du Pont. One Hundred
Vears of American Commerce, I, 192.

The Manufacture of Explosives, Oscar Guttmann: Macmillan
& Co., New York, 1895.

Report and Proceedings of the Select Committee on Gun Cotton,
etc., 1871-1874: London, 1874.

Ascauio Sobrero, by Vincenzo Fino: Turin, 1889.

On the Manufacture of Dynamite, G. E. Barton. Jour. Amer.
Chem. Soc., 19, ,500-509. 1897.

Notes on Nitroglycerine, Dynamite, and Blasting Gelatine, Geoi^
McRoberts. Philosophical Soc. of Glasgow, April 25, 1883.

Lectures on Chemistry and Explosivee, Charles E. Munroe:
Torf)edo Station Print, 1888.

On the Development of Smokeless Powder, (Charles E. Munroe.
Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc., 18, 819-846. 1896.

Sf)ecification8 for United States Navy Smokeless Powder. Pro-
cee<ling8 U. S. Naval Inst., 24, 477-480. 1898.

Smokeless Powder, Lieut. Joseph Strauss, U. S. N. Proceed-
ings U. S. Naval Inst., 27, 7.S3-738. 1901.

Geschichte der Explosivstoffe, S. J. Von Romocki: Berlin, 1895.

Christian Friedrich Schonbein 1799-1868, by Kohlbaum & Schaer.
Monographieen aus der Geschichte der Chemie IV Heft 1900, VI
Heft 1901, Leipzig.

Gkoui" XV. — Plahtics.

Duringthe census year 8 establishments manufactured
cellulose plastics and also engaged in the further manu-
facture of these plitstics into articles of various sorts.
The value of the plastics produced was *2,099,400. The
totwl value of the plastics and of the finished articles
was SWi,063,673. There were employed a capital of
$7,568,720, and 1,221 wage-earners. The growth of the
indu.stry can \)e shown only for the pyroxylin plastics,
including the finished article as displayed in the follow-
ing table:

PRODUCTION OF PYROXYLIN PLASTICS, BY DECADES,
1880 TO 1900, INCLUSIVE.

Naint>er
YEAK. of estab-
lishments.

Number
Capital. of em-
ployees.'

Value of
products.

1880 6

11,214,000 1 736
3,158,487 , 1,023
7,210,548 1,176

•1,261,640
2,675,736
2,864,M4

1890 12

1900 1 7

> For 1900 this means wage-earners only.

Pyroaylin Plastics. — The best known of all the pyrox-
ylin plastics is "celluloid." The art of making pyrox-
ylin pla.stics was begun in England when Alexander
Parkes discovered, in 1855, that a solution of pyroxylin,
mixed with other substances, could, after the solvent was
evaporated, be made into a substance having the quali-
ties of horn or ivory, and could then be easily molded
or worked or colored as desired. He entered vigor-
ously upon the manufacture of this substance, which
he called " parkesine," and put on exhibition various
articles made from it, but the enterprise did not succeed
and was abandoned in 1867. About this time Daniel
Spill began the making of what he styled "zylonite"
from pyroxylin or zyloidin by treatment with solvents
and admixture with other materials, but owing to the
fact that quite fluid solutions were employed, and to
the difficulty of getting rid of the excess of the solv-
ents, the operations were not commercially practicable.

In 1869, John \V. Hyatt, Jr., and Isaiah S. Hyatt, of
Albany, N. Y., made the important discovery that cam-
phor by itself is a .solvent for pyroxylin, if, after the
camphor has been mixed with the pyroxylin, the mix-
ture be heated to from loO'^ to 200° F. and subjected
at the same time to a heavy pressure, and that the prod-
uct can be worked like rubber. To this discovery, for
which United States Patent No. 105338, July 12, 1870.
and its reissues were granted, to the process which
tho.se inventors based on it, and to the knowledge and
skill which were developed by its practice, is due the
present commercial success of pyroxylin plastics.

The Hyatt Brothers began the manufacture of cellu-
loid in a small way at Albany, N. Y., in 1869, but cap-
ital was soon interested in the venture, and in 1870 the
business was removed to Newark, N. J., where the Cel-

liiloid Manufacturing Company has since remained in
active operation. It had so expanded in 1896 that the
floor space occupied at the factory was nearly eight
acres in extent, and it is claimed that over 6,000 per-
sons throughout the country were employed, either in
producing the celluloid, or shaping the product of this
factory into various articles.

The manufacturing operations at the factory involve
the production of the pyroxylin, its conversion into
celluloid, and the manufacture of part of the product
into wearing apparel and toilet and fancy articles.
According to Field, the pyroxylin is made by dipping
cotton or tissue paper into a mixture of sulphuric acid
66 parts, nitric acid 17 parts, and water 17 parts, 100
pounds of the acid mixture being used for 1 pound of
the paper, and the immersion being continued from
twenty to thirty minutes at 30° C. The pyroxylin
used in this art is of low nitration, containing about
10.18 per cent of nitrogen.' The purified pyroxylin is
mixed with camphor by sprinkling it with a solution
of camphor in wood alcohol, and incorporating the mass
with other desired ingredients on steam-heated maxil-
lating rolls. The .solid celluloid which is thus obtained,
and which is a composition of pyroxylin with camphor,
an ant-acid, and coloring matter, is then shaped by cut-
ting into sheets, stuffing through die plates, molding
under pressure while hot, turning, and the like, into
various objects.

Celluloid is used in making collars and cuffs; piano
and organ keys; billiard balls; paper cutters; combs;
backs for brushes and hand mirrors; handles for canes,
umbrellas, whips, and cutlery; mouthpieces for pipes,
cigarette and cigar holders; chessmen; dolls' heads and
other toys; electrotype plates, and a great variety of
other articles of adornment and use.

Viscose. — This body represents the most recent de-
velopment in the production of plastic bodies from cel-
lulose, and was invented by C. F. Cross, E. J. Bevan,
and C. Beadle, to whom United States Patent No.
520770, of June 5, 1894, was issued. In the manufacture,
purified cotton is treated with an excess of a 15 per cent
solution of sodium hj'droxide and squeezed until it re-
tains about three times its weight of the solution. It
is then placed in a vessel with carbon disulphide, the
quantity used being about 40 per cent of the weight of
the cotton. After digestion for about three hours at
the ordinary temperature, sufficient water to cover the
mass is added and digestion allowed to proceed over-
night, when, on stirring, a homogeneous liquid is ob-
tained, which is a solution of cellulose thiocarbonate,
or xanthate, and from which a jelly or coagulum of cel-
lulose is produced by spontaneous decomposition, by
precipitation with dehydrating agents, or by heating
the solution. By incorporating viscose with mineral
matters, hydrocarbons, and like substances, solid ag-

' See Explosives: Gun Cotton or Pyroxylin, ante, page 73.

gregates are produced which may be cast or molded
into convenient fonns, and after purification and suffi-
cient aging made available for various structural uses.
More recently these investigators have found the
cellulose tetracetate to be especially suitable for the
formation of viscose.

Other Plastics. — Many plastic substances are now
made from caoutchouc, gutta-percha, casein, fibrin,
gluten, and like bodies which act as gelatinizing or
cementing agents, by which the zinc oxide, antimony
sulphide, kaolin, and other fillers are held in solid aggre-
gations which may be molded or shaped with lathes and
other tools as desired.

The foreign commerce in the pyroxylin plastics, as
compiled from the Foreign Commerce and Navigation
of the United States for the year ending June 30, 1900,
Vol. II, is set forth in the following table:

IMPORTS AND EXPORTS OF PYROXYLIN PLASTICS,
1891 TO 1900, INCLUSIVE.

YEAR.

Imports,

value.

Exports,
value.

1891

*10,696
43,363
67,062
96,977
371,873
337,862
262, 675
160,836
249, 619
378,583

1892

839,004
36,697
86,234
72,926
146,354
149 631

1893

1894

1895

1896

1897

1898

155! 444
173,771
174,310

1899

1900 -•.

LITERATURE.

Pyroxylin, Its Manufacture and Applications, by Walter D. Field,
J. Am. Chem. Soc, vols. 15 and 16, 1893 and 1894.

Das Celluloid, by Fr. Buckmann, Leipzig, 1880.

Cellulose, by Cross and Bevan, London, 1895.

Researches on Cellulose, 1895-1900, by Cross and Bevan, London,
1901.

Group XVI. — Essentia r. Oils.

Though one of the less important, as measured by
the value of the product, this is one of the oldest of the
chemical industries, and it received lecognition as a dis-
tinct industry in census statistics so long ago as 1860. It
appears, however, that there have been var3-ing views
at the several censuses as to what substances should prop-
erly be placed under this classification. For the census
of 1900, there are included in this report, under this
title, all those bodies reported as having been manufac-
tured in the United States during the census year, that
are usually included in the text-books and treatises under
the legends "volatile oils"' or "essential oils," except
vanillin, and oil or spirits of turpentine, which was
made the subject of a special census report, while in
addition witch-hazel is included. In this classification,
then, there are, for the year ending June 1, 1900, 100
establishments in 14 states, engaged wholly or chiefly
in the production or refining of these oils. Of these,
30 establishments produced a product of less than

^500 in value. These 100 establishments employed
J>622,S85 of capital and 201 wage-earners, and the value
of their products was $850, 133. In addition, there were
3 establitshnicnts which produced $9,268 of essential oils
as a subordinate product. As pointed out, there is
included here the refined natural oils and tho crude
natural oils, and in addition the artificial oils. These
last named are manufactured by 4 establishments, em-
ploying $33,720 of capital and 13 wage-earners, and they
reported $54,450 in value of products. The vanillin in-
dustry, which is classified with "fine chemicals,"
returned 124,874 ounces of the product, having a value
of $113,050. This was manufactured in 4 establish-
ments, and gave employment to 26 wage-earners and
$65,689 of capital. The product of refined natural oils
for 1900 amounted in value to $370,500. The estab-
lishments for the production of the crude natural oils
were distributed as follows:

GEOURAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF CRUDE ESSENTIAL
OIL FACTORIES: 1900.

irrATis.

Number
of estab-
lishments.

Average
number
of wage-
earners.

Capital.

Product.

Per cent
of total.

United States

167

(426,892

$434,451

100.0

Connecticut , ...

5
11
15
10
28

8
15
31
14
91

65,500
183,675
15, 149
20,050
107,509

35,009

45,580
249,160
38,165
14,898
70,126

16,687

10.5

New York

57.3

Virginia

!<.9

3.4

Michigan

16.1

New Hampsliire, Ver-
mont, MassaehusettA,
I'onnsylvania, North
Carolina. Florida,
Tennessee, Illinois,
Wisconsin, and Cali-
fornia

3.8

This tabular view shows that though this industry
was widelj' distributed, it did not attain to any magni-
tude except in the states of New York, Michigan, Con-
necticut, and Virginia, and that in these states, as else-
where, it was carried on by a large number of persons
in a very small way. In fact it is usually carried on as
an employment accessory to farming, the farmers taking
advantage of the idle time between seasons to gather
roots, herbs, bark, and leaves, and by means of a simple
and often portable still (which is frequently erected for
the time being in the woods near where the material is
gathered) extracting their essential oils. This accounts
for the small number of wage-earners in proportion to
the number of establishments reported, as the farmer,
in a large nuiuber of instances, carries out all the
operations without hired labor. The character of the
industry and the methods employed are especially illus-
trated by the great variety of products reported, for
there are, among others, returned and combined in the
values given in the table, the natural oils of peppermint,
speaniiint, erigeron (iieabane), pennyroyal, wormwood,
tansy, fireweed, golden rod, wintergreen, black birch,
sassafras, spruce, cedar, junipei*, and witch-hazel.

The peppermint-oil industry was confined princi{Milly
to Michigan, Indiana, and New York, there having ()een
95,0<)() pounds produced in these three states; the
sassafras-oil industry was lo<rated principally in Vir-
ginia, where 104,931 pounds of this oil were produ<«d;
the wintergreen-oil industry was located chiefly in
Penn.sylvania, where 2,075 pounds were reported as
having been produced; and the witch-hazel industry
was located chiefly in Connecticut and New York,
where 110,260 gallons of this substance, having a value
of $54,649, were produced.

As previously stated, the methods of classifying this
industry, as well as the methods u.sed for collecting the
statistics, have varied somewhat in the different cen.suses,
but they have been suflSciently consistent for the last
three decades to admit of the comparison made in the
following table:

TOTAL PRODUCTION OF ESSENTIAL OILS (CRUDE) BY
DECADES, 1880 TO 1890, INCLUSIVE.

YEAR.

Nnmber
of ertab-
Ushments.

Capital.

Average
nnmber
of wage-
earners.

Value of
prodnct

1880

124
67
97

167,755
102,223
428, 8«2

278
191
167

•248,858

1890

2.56 847

1900

434,451

The increase in the value of the product for 1890 over
the value for 1880 was but 2.8 per cent, while the in-
crease for 1900 over 1890 was 69.8 per cent. It is not
possible to state how great a part of this increase for
1900 is due to a more complete collection of the returns
for this rural industry. There is an apparent falling off
in the number of wage-earners, but if, since these
operations are usually conducted by the owner of the
establishment, there were added one man for each estab-
lishment to the number of wage-earners, there would be
a total of 264, which is probably not far from the truth.
Another method of reckoning the number of wage-
earners would be to take into account those engaged
in the cultivation of the herbs, like mint, which aro
grown for the production of es.sential oils, and it is
probable that at the census of 1870, where the number
of hands employed is reported as 2.365, a method such
as this has been followed. It is necessary to recall that
the essential-oil distilleries would, as a rule, be in opera-
tion but a part of each year.

The essential oils are those volatile oils which exist
ready formed in animal and vegetable organisms, and
they are called essential becau.se they possess, in a concen-
trated form, certain of the characteristic properties of
the plants from which they are derived. They are also
known as the wlatile oils, because they are easily evap-
orated, and as distilled oils, from the method bj- which
a number of them are usually extracted from the plant.
They exist in all odoriferous vegetation, sometimes
pervading the plant, and in other cases being confined

to a single part of the plant. In some instances the oil
is contained in distinct cells, where it is preserved after
desiccation of the part, while in others, as in flowers, it
is secreted on or near the surface, and exhaled so soon as
formed. Occasionally two or more different oils are
formed in different parts of the same plant, as in the
orange tree, which contains one kind of oil in its leaves,
another in its flowers, and a third in the rind of its fruit.
Some essential oils are formed during distillation from
substances of a different nature preexisting in the plant,
as in the case of oil of bitter almonds, which is produced
bj' the action of water on the amygdalin which exists in
the bitter almond. These oils are compound substances,
or mixtures of compound substances, consisting of car-
bon and hydrogen alone, or of these elements combined
with oxygen, sulphur, or nitrogen. These compounds
are found among the derivatives of both the acj'clic
and cyclic series, and in addition to the various hydro-
carbons there have been found among them alcohols,
aldehydes, acids, esters, ketones, phenols, phenol-
ethers, lactones, quinones, oxides, sulphides, nitrils,
and isothiocyanates. In the mixed oils the oxygenated
bodies are often of greater importance than the hydro-
carbons because they are usuallj^ the possessors of the
characteristic odor of the oil in which they are con-
tained. Latterly these oils have been concentrated for
sale by the removal of the nonfragrant hydrocarbons,
this concentrate representing from 2 to 30 volumes of
the original oil. Thus, 1 volume of the concentrated
oil represents 2 volumes of the oils of anise, cassia,
fennel, gingergrass, mentha crispa, mentha piperita,
cloves, sassafras, and star anise; 2^ volumes of the oils
of bergamot, caraway, and lavender; 4 volumes of cu-
min and rosemary; 5 volumes of thyme; 6 volumes of
coriander; 8 volumes of calamus; lOvolumesof absinthe
(wormwood); 20 volumes of juniper; 30 volumes of an-
gelica, lemon, and orange. It is asserted that these
concentrated oils are more permanent, more soluble in
alcohol and water, have a finer odor, and a more nearly
constant composition than the original oils. They are
undoubtedly superior to the ordinary essential oils both
in odor and strength, and they are now offered in the
market under the name of " terpeneless volatile oils."

The natural essential oils as ordinarily obtained are
of a thin, oily consistency at ordinary temperatures.
They partly rise in vapor at ordinary temperatures, dif-
fusing their peculiar odors, and are wholly volatile at
higher temperatures; they have a characteristic and
generally pungent odor; they are sparingly soluble in
water, but readily soluble in alcohol and ether, and
most of them are optically active. In the later works,
solid camphor-like bodies and vanillin are included with
the essential oils.

The essential oils are recovered by several different
processes, depending upon the nature of the plant in
which the oil exists and the nature of the oil. Thus,
oils such as those of peppermint, sassafras, winter-

green, and the like, are obtained by distillation; oils,
such as those from the orange and lemon peel may be
recovered by expression; and oils, such as those existing
in blossoms and constituting their perfumes, may be
obtained by the process of enfleurage.

The process of distillation is well described in a cir-
cular issued by Albert M. Todd, of Kalamazoo, Mich.,
entitled "The Essential Oil Industry of Michigan," of
which the following is an abstract:

The essential-oil industry of Michigan was inaugu-
rated in St. Joseph county in 1835, being confined for
many years to the production of oil of peppermint by
the crude and primitive apparatus brought from the
East, consisting of a copper kettle containing water in
which the plants were placed, to which heat was directly
applied, this being connected with a rude form of worm
for condensation of the distillate.

As the area under cultivation increased, the need for
better appliances was felt, and Michigan's genms gave
to the world the greatest invention of the century in the
distillation of essential-oil plants — the steam distillery —
by which the rate of distillation was increased from
about 15 pounds to over 100 pounds of essential oil per
da}\ The increased rapidity of distillation now se-
cured was unfortunately not followed by a correspond-
ing advance in quality, for no true system of tests was
known by which the quality of the oil could be estab-
lished, and weedy, resinous, or adulterated oil continued
to be the rule. Beginning in 1808, Mr. Todd labored
to advance the standard, the I'esult being that a system
of tests was established, and a process of steam rectifi-
cation, with elaborate appliances, was perfected for
bringing the crude oil to a uniform state of purity and
excellence.

The manufacturing system is as follows: The plants
having been carefuU}' cultivated ai'e cut when in full
bloom, usually'during the months of August and Sep-
tember, and after being partially dried are placed in
large wooden vats having a capacity of from 2,000 to
3,000 pounds dried plants each, which, after being filled,
are closed with steam-tight covers. A pipe from the
steam-generating boiler is connected with the distilling
vats, entering them at the bottom under the plants.
As the steam enters it is diffused evenly and forced up-
ward through the plants. The heat of the steam ex-
pands the globules of oil, which are contained in the
minute cells of the leaves, causing them to burst, and
the oil being thus freed is carried off' in the current of
steam. This steam, now charged with the essential oil,
having passed through the mass of plants to the top of
the vat, escapes through a " changing valve" to the pri-
mary condenser, which consists of a series of tin-coated
pipes about 6 inches in diameter and 12 feet long, over
which a large supply of cold water is made to flow
evenly through a perforated trough from above.

The steam of the distillate, consisting of oil and
water, is condensed in a primary condenser, but, for the

purpose of roducin^' to a uniform temperature, it is
conveyed to a large hlock-tin worm, .supplied eonstftiitiy
with cold water. The di.stillate, after traversing this
worm, falls into the receiver, a vessel al>out 3 foet in
height and 10 inches in diameter, having an exterior
pipe leading from the bottom to a height nearly equal
to that of the receiver. As the distillate flows into the
receiver, the water, l)eing heavier than the oil of pep-
permint, sinks to the bottom of the vessel, and is forced
from thence upward and out through the pipe men-
tioned. The essential oil collects upon the top of the
receiver and is dipped off. The same separation occurs
with spearmint, wormwood, tansy, and the other oils
lighter than water. With wintergreen and .sassafras,
which are heavier, the system is reversed; the water
rising to the top and being returned from thence to the
boiler, while the oil sinks to the bottom. As the water
of the distillate does not throw off the entire amount of
essential oil contained, it is returned to the boiler and
reconverted into steam and continuously used. Many
of the distillers, however, allow this water to run to
waste, and the amount wasted in America (which in
England was formed}' bottled and sold) amounted, until
recenth', to not far from 5,000,000 pounds. The vats
in the largest distilleries in the United States require
about 3,000 pounds of the dried plants for a charge.
If the plants are properly dried, and an adequate sup-
ply of steam is at command, the oil ma}' be distilled
from the charge in forty-tive minutes. As thus dis-
tilled from the plants the product obtained is the
natural oil, which, even though pure plants are used,
always contains an insoluble resin, and it is in this form
that oil is usually sold.

For the purpose of rendering the oil of absolute purity
and the highest possible concentration, aroma, solubi lity,
and therapeutic value, and freeing it from any foreign
substances contained therein, it is placed in special
retining stills, by means of which fresh steam is diffused
through the oil in numerous jets, evaporating the most
valuable and aromatic portions. This steam is gener-
ated at a distance from the refiners, so that no direct
heat is used, and by this process the scorching of the
oil or formation of any empyreumatic product is ren-
dered absolutely impossible. The supply of steam ad-
mitted and the consequent rate of distillation is care-
fully regulated. The first fraction is distilled very
slowly, so that any foreign hydrocarbons present are
eliminated. Afterwards the pure aromatic essential
oil is volatilized, the speed of distillation being in-
creased. After the aromatic oil has been recovered,
there remains an oleo-resin (the bitter and insol-
uble principle), which is cast away. This in old and
oxidized oil, sometimes is found to the extent of over
25 per cent. The refined es.sential oil thus obtained has
the pure and sweet odor of its true plant in a high de-
gree, is of the greatest strength, unusual solubility,
brilliant and limpid, and is absolutely pure.

The method of enfleurage consi.stH in the al)«orptlon
of the perfume exhaled from fresh blos.soms by a neu-
tral fat or oil. For this puqx)se pans are filled with
fresh lard or l)eef fat and thickly covered with fresh
petals, this covering Ixjing renewed until the fat in sat-
urated with the perfume. The fat is then pressed
through a sieve, and the thick substance which is ex-
pressed and which contains the odoriferous principle is
styled pomade; or plates of gla.ss are smeared with
fresh lard, or cotton wool is coated with fresh olive oil,
and the perfume is allowed to pass over these surfaces,
and when the fat or oil is saturated the perfume is ex-
tracted from them by .solution in alcohol.

The oil of pep|)ermint, which is commercially among
the more important of the natural oils produced in the
United States, is obtained from several varieties of
mint, all classified under the species Mentha piperita,
which are cultivated in Europe and North America.
The plant from which Japanese oil of peppermint is
obtained belongs to another species. It is not known
that any of the mints referred to in the Lif>er cU: arte
dlstillandi ' were peppermint. The oldest known speci-
mens of this plant were those collected by John Ray
in Hertfordshire, England, in 1696, and to which,
in his Ilistoria Plunta7iuiu, published in 1704, he gave
the name of peppermint. These specimens are still
preserved in the herbarium of the British Museum, and
they correspond in all essential characteristics with the
peppermint which is to-day cultivated in England. The
commercial history of this industry dates from about
the year 1750, when the cultivation of peppermint was
begun in a very small way at Mitcham, Surrey county,
England, and by the year 1800 the area under cultiva-
tion had reached 100 acres. The industry in England
reached its maximum about 1850, when 500 acres were
under cultivation, but from that time it diminished,
owing to American competition.

According to a private communication from Leander
S. Drew, of Lodi, Wis., the records of his establish-
ment show that oil of peppermint was produced in Con-
necticut before 1812, and that his grandfather, Daniel
Drew, made oil of peppermint in Corinth, Orange
county, Vt., before 1814. and redistilled oil bought near
Cleveland, Ohio, in 1819. Further, he states that Lean-
der Drew, M. D., his father, began the distillation of
oils of wormwood, peppermint, spearmint, erigeron,
and dittany, in Wisconsin, in 1843. The distillation of
peppcrment oil began in Wayne county, N. Y., in 1816,
and later this became the most important center of its
production in the United States. As stated, the cul-
tivation of peppermint was begun in St. Joseph c<mnty,
Mich., in 1835 and this state has since rivaled New
York in this industry.

Formerly it was supposed that a larger yield of oil
was obtained from the use of fresh plants in the still,
but Todd has shown experimentally, and experience

' Brunachwig, 1500.

No. 210 — 6

has verified the showing, that the yield is equally large
from the dried as from the fresh material, while a
larger quantity of the dried material may be placed in
a given still for a single charge, and oil may be dis-
placed from it with threefold the rapidity that it can be
from the fresh mint. In addition, as it is the practice
of the local distillers to treat not only their own crop
but that of their neighbors (one distillery, on an aver-
age, serving for about ten planters), the cost of trans-
portation is reduced by previously drying the mint,
since the shrinkage in weight is over 49 per cent.
Gildemeister and Hoffman," however, suggest that
the known difference in solubility of the English and
American oils may be due to the fact that the former
is distilled from the fresh herb and the latter from the
dried herb. The charge for treatment by the distillers
is about 25 cents for each pound of oil produced.

Peppermint plants are propagated from roots or run-
ners, the ''sets" being planted out in the spring.
There are therefore "old or second-crop" plants of
previous plantings, which mature usually in August,
and the " new ci'op," which matures in September.
The proper time for cutting the mint is when the
plants are full blown. The average yield of essential
oil varies greatly, depending largely on the extent to
which the plants are covered with leaves and blossoms,
as it is these which contain the oil. The average yield
of oil from green plants is about one-third of 1 per
cent, or 6| pounds of oil for each 2,000 pounds of
plants. Todd '' has obtained 18 pounds of oil from 2,000
pounds of well-leaved plants, and but li pounds from
a like quantity of coarse plants devoid of leaves. The
average yield of oil per acre for the first and second
year's crop is 11 pounds.

According to Todd,' the average annual production
of peppermint oil for the ten years prior to 1886 was
about 100,000 pounds. According to Gildemeister and
Hoffman,' the largest yearly production of peppermint
oil in the United States was in 1897 and was distributed
as follows:

Michigan: Pounds.

Eastern 13, 000

Western 79, 000

Northern 25, 000

Southern 55, 000

Total 172,000

Indiana 32, 000

New York 37,000

Other localities 10, 000

Total United States 251,000

The consequence of this enormous production was an
entirely unexpected drop in price, which has since re-
stricted production.

' Volatile Oils, page 641.

= Amer. Phar. Assn., page 121. 1886.

"Ibid.

•The Volatile Oils, page 636.

A by-product of the mint distillation industry is
found in the mint hay. After the distillation is com-
pleted this is lifted from the steam vat in the form of
a large cylindrical cake, and when dried it is eaten
with great relish by horses and cattle, or it is com-
posted and i-eturned to the fields as a fertilizer.

Peppermint oil is used as a flavor in food, drink,
and confectionery, and in medicine. It is also u.sed as
a source of menthol, or peppermint camphor. This
menthol separation differs according to the oil used.
The Japanese oil is so rich in menthol that it forms a
crystalline mass, saturated with the oil, at ordinary
temperatures. The American oil solidifies completely
in a freezing mixture. The English and Saxon oils
ver}' often show crystalline separations only after
standing for a long while in the freezing mixture.

Spearmint Oil.^ — The American spearmint oil is dis-
tilled in New York and Michigan from the fresh herb
of Mentha viridis, L. The herb is cultivated to a not
inconsiderable extent, as much as 12,000 pounds being
obtained in the two states mentioned. The oil is color-
less, yellowish or greenish yellow, is liquid, and pos-
sesses the characteristic penetrating and disagreeable
odor of spearmint. With age and on exposure to the air
the oil becomes viscid and darker. It has a specific grav-
it}^ of 0.92 to 0.94 and is soluble in equal parts of 90 per
cent alcohol, but the solution is rendered turbid b}' the
addition of more solvent. An oil distilled by Fritsche
Brothers had somewhat different properties. The spear-
mint had been cultivated on the factory grounds at Gar-
field, N. J., and was just in blossom when distilled.
The 3neld was just 0.3 per cent. The oil had a specific
gravity of 0.98 with an odor quite different from the
commercial oil. It is possible that in the distillation of
the commercial oil a part of this heavy oil is lost, thus
accounting for the lower specific gravity. After the
first harvest, toward the close of July, a second was
made early in October. The yield from the fresh herb
was onl}' 0.18 per cent. The odor of this oil was some-
what less delicate, its specific gravity and rotatory
power were lower, 0.961, but it was still heavier than
the conmiercial oils, though never heavier than water.

Oil of Wmnnwood.'' — Artemisia absinthium^ Z., is in-
digenous to many European countries. It has been
introduced into North America and is frequently culti-
vated for commei-cial purposes. The distilled oil of
wormwood was known to Porta about 1570, who called
attention to its blue color. It is named in the price ordi-
nances of Frankfort in 1587, and was first examined by
Hoffman in 1722 and recommended by him for medici-
nal purposes.

Whereas, the French oil formerly controlled the mar-
ket, it is now largely replaced by the cheaper American
oil from New York, Michigan, Nebraska, and Wiscon-

' The Volatile Oils, page 636.
'Ibid., page 684.

sin. The consumption of wormwood oil has decroased
considerably, due pt)ssibly to the toxic properties of
the oil to which attention has been directed. The fresh
herb cultivated in Germany yields one-half per cent of
oil, which at tirst is colored dark brown but changes to
},'reen after long exposure to the air.

Oil of Eritjerott} — Erigeron canachrut/K, Z., is a very
common weed, which is known in America as tteabane,
horseweed, or butterweed. It is frequently found in
peppermint fields. The fresh herb yields upon distil-
lation 0.2 to 0.4 per cent of oil, which finds limited
medical application in the United States, and which was
made official in the United States Pharmacopoeia of
1890.

Oil of Sassafras.' — The sassafras tree is widely dis-
tributed in North America, from Canada to Florida and
Alabama, and westward as far as Kansas and the north-
ern part of Mexico. The older bark and wood are
odorless; the green parts of the tree, when crushed,
smell faintly aromatic, but not of safrol; the wood of
the roots, and especially the root bark, are more rich
in oil cells.

Next to turpentine oil the oil of sassafras was the first
volatile oil distilled in a primitive fashion in North Amer-
ica. On account of the pleasant aroma the I'oot bark was
chewed by the aborigines, who called it jHivame. It was
also mixed with smoking tobacco (Rafinesque) and added
as an aromatic to refreshing beverages and was used as a
remed}'. On account of its marked characteristics the
sassatras tree is said to have attracted the attention of
the Spaniards at their tirst landing in Florida under
Ponce de Leon in 1512; also under De Soto in 1538.
They are said to have regarded it as a kind of cinnamon
tree. As late as the first half of the Nineteenth century
the bark, leaves, and buds were used in the Middle and
Central states as a substitute for Chinese tea. As early
as 1582, sassafras wood and bark became known in Ger-
many as a new American drug and were used under the
name of Lignum pavanuia (German, Fenchelholz).
The bark and wood were apparently first distilled by
Angelus Sala in 1620, who mentions that the oil is heav-
ier than water. Schroeder's Pharmacopceia msdico-
chymica, published in Frankfort-on-the-Main in 1641,
is the fii"st pharmacopoeia that gives directions for the
distillation of the oil, whereas the municipal price ordi-
nance of Frankfort-on-the-Main of 1587 already enu-
merates Oleum ligni soLssafras. Schoepf, who was a
careful observer, and who traveled through the Atlantic
states in 1783 and 1784, repeatedly refers to the sassa-
fras tree, but does not mention the oil. Evidently the
distillation of the oil did not become an industry until
the close of the Eighteenth or the early part of the
Nineteenth century.

The original process of distillation seems to have been
generally very primitive, but it is now conducted in a

> The Volatile Oils, paf^ 668.
•Ibid., page 395.

.somewhat more rational manner. The stills, made of
3-inch planks, an- from 4 to 5 feet high, aliout 12 feet
square, and strengthened by iron bandn. Que of the
sides is provider! with two clo.se-fitting doors, an upper
one for charging the .still, and a lower one for remov-
ing the exhausted material. The wood is split or sawed
into thin pieces. The steam, generated in a Itoiler,
enters the still at the bottom, and the distillate is cooled
in a coiled conden.ser and collected in a large copper
flask of 20 gallons capacity. About 2 inches from the
bottom this fiask is provided with a stopcock, through
which the oil is drawn off from time to time. The ex-
hausted wood is dried and used as fuel. Such a still
has a capacity for 20,00») pounds of wood, and the dis-
tillation of this quantity lasts from about forty -eight to
fifty hours. The root bark yields from 6 to 9 per cent
of oil, and the wood part of the root less than 1 per
cent. According to W. H. Phelps,' Big Island, Va.,
35 pounds of oil per ton of 2,000 pounds of sassafras is
a good average yield. The yield from all the factories
in Virginia, by the returns, average 23 pounds per ton.

Up to the middle of the Nineteenth century the oil
was distilled principally in Pennsylvania, Maryland, and
Virginia, and Baltimore and Richmond were the prin-
cipal commercial centers. In 1860, just prior to the
Civil War, not less than 50,000 pounds of sassafras oil
were sold annually in Baltimore alone (Sharp). Since
the sixties considerable quantities of the oil have also
been distilled in New Jersej-, New York, Ohio, Indiana,
Tenne.ssee, and the New England states, but the practi-
cal extinction of the tree has rendered the industry
unprofitable.

Wintergreeti Oil.* — Wintergreen, Gaultfu^'iaprocum-
bens, L. (Family Ericacete) grows from the New Eng-
land states to Minnesota and south as far as Georgia
and Alabama. On account of the peculiar odor and
taste which develop when the plant is chewed, it was
early used by the natives. The distillation of the oil
was probably begun in the first decades of the Nine-
teenth century along with that of sassafras bark and
birch l)ark in the states of Pennsylvania, New Jersey,
and New York. At first these aromatics were used for
chewing, later for the preparation of refreshing bever-
ages and home remedies, and especially for the much-
used "blood purifiers." When the preparation of the
volatile oils became successful, these were often used
instead of the aqueous extract of the drug. This use
is of considerable importance in the hi.story of the in-
troduction of wintergreen and sas.safras oils, as both
of these were used as popular remedies in the United
States since the Ijeginning of the Nineteenth century
under the title of patent medicines. The preparation
and use of these remedies soon became general, and
with these came a greater demand for the oils. Win-
tergreen oil was especially in demand for the prepara-

' Private communication.
•The Volatile Oils, page 585.

tion of one of the oldest known remedies in the United
States, namely, Swaim's Panacea, introduced in 1815,
which at that time had an enormous sale and in the
efficiency of which great confidence was placed.

Wintergreen oil does not appear to have been used
at that time for any other purpose. The first mention
of it in literature is found in a botanical work by Bige-
low, a physician of Boston, published in 1818. In it
Gaultheria oil is mentioned as a staple article of the
drug stores, and it is also stated that this oil occurs not
only in Gaultheria, but also in Sjnrxa ubnaria, the root
of Spirseu lohata, and especially in the bark of Betida
lenta. The oil first appeared in pharmacopoeias in the
United States Pharmacopseia of 1820. The medicinal
use of the oil did not become general until after 1827,
when the New York Medical Society made known its
use in the preparation of the popular specific mentioned
above.

Although the similarity of the volatile oil from
Gaultheria procumbetu, Z., with that from the bark of
Betxda lenta, Z., was known before 1818, the identity
of their principal constituent was shown scientifically
about the same time by William Proctor, jr., of Phila-
delphia, in 18-12 and Cahours in 1844. From that time
on, the oil was no longer distilled exclusively from
wintergreen, but often from this, together with birch
bark, or from the latter only. The oil came more and
more into use as an aromatic for pharmaceutic and cos-
metic preparations, for beverages and medicinal reme-
dies, and thus became an article of commerce. In
recent time, however, it is often adulterated with kero-
sene and alcohol. Methyl salicylate has been prepared
on a large scale and brought into the market as artificial
oil of lointergreen since 1886 b}' Schimmel & Co. It is
official in the United States Pharmacopoeia.

The preparation of oil of wintergreen has alwaj's been
carried on in a primitive manner, the distillation being
conducted by the smaller farmers at the place where the
plant grows. This was first done in the New England
states and later in the mountain and forest districts of
the states of New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania,
Virginia, and Maryland. Usually old copper whisky
stills of various sizes, mostly from 200 to 400 gallons
capacity, serve as stills. Sometimes the distillation is
done in boxes of oak wood about 8 feet long, 4 feet
high, and from 4 to 5 feet broad; mostly, however, in
larger alcohol barrels, held together bj' strong iron
hoops, the perforated bottom of wliich is fitted as tightly
as possible into a suitable cast-iron kettle, which is filled
with water for distillation. On the upper part of the
barrel is placed a copper helm, which is connected with
a condensing worm in a large wooden tub.

In the distillation, which is carried on for only a few
months in the year, the still, barrel, or box is filled
with finely chopped, well-wetted plants. The charge is
allowed to stand over night and firing begun in the
morning. The distillation is usually complete in eight

hours. About 90 per cent of the oil passes over during
the first two or three hours, the remaining 10-per cent
in the course of the next three or four hours. The
crude oil is colored dark by the iron of the condenser.
The small producers sell the crude oil obtained to whole-
sale druggists, who purity it by rectification.

Sweet-birch oil (wintergreen oil).' — Cherry birch, or
sweet or black birch {Betula lenta, L., family Betu-
laceae) is a tree which grows on good forest soil
throughout southern Canada and the northern United
States, westward as far as Minnesota and Kansas, and to
the south as far as Georgia and Alabama. When
chewed, its reddish bronze-colored bark develops a
peculiar fragrance and taste, and on this account has
been used by the natives for chewing and in the prep-
aration of refreshing and medicinal beverages. Next
to turpentine oil, the oils of sassafras, wintergreen, and
birch bark were among the first oils obtained by
distillation in the United States. The similarity in
odor and taste of birch-bark oil, with true oil of
wintergreen from Gaultheria procuinhens, was shown
before 1818 (Bigelow). The chemical identity of the
principal constituent of both was demonstrated by Proc-
tor in 1843. As the demand for wintergreen oil in-
creased, sweet-birch bark was distilled indiscriminately
with wintergreen leaves, or even distilled alone, as a sub-
stitute, so that the commercial oil is at present obtained
almost exclusively from the bark of sweet birch {Betula
lenta, L.).

For purposes of distillation the young trunks and
branches were formerly used. These were cut into
pieces from 1 to 4 inches in length, which were macer-
ated for twelve hours previous to distillation. For the
latter operation stills like those described under winter-
green oil were used. The bark of the trunk and larger
branches is now used, being peeled off in late summer,
and either cut or torn by means of toothed rollers, and
freshly distilled with water from copper stills. If win-
tergreen grows abundantly in the neighborhood, it is
added to the bark in the still. Preference is given to
the one which is the more abundant and more conven-
iently gathered. According to Kennedy, maceration for
twelve hours is considered indispensable to a good yield.
A ton of 2,240 pounds of birch bark yields about 5
pounds of oil, which amounts to 0.23 per cent. A like
amount of wintergreen jaelds about 18 pounds of oil.
By rational distillation, however, as much as 0.6 per
cent of oil can be obtained from the bark.

Proctor recognized, in 1843, that the oil does not pre-
exist in the bark, but results from the interaction of two
of the constituents present with water in a similar way to
that attending the formation of the oils of bitter almonds,
nmstard, etc. According to more recent investigations
by Schneegans, these substances are Betulase, a ferment,
and Gaultherin, a glucoside, which crystallizes with one
molecule of water.

'The Volatile Oils, page 331.

Oil of Red Cedar Wood.^ — The Virfjiniii or rod <'edar
is IV shrub or tree which is distributed throughout the
United States. Its wood is used in the niamifacture of
tipir boxes, lead pencils, and small ornanKuits. It is
adapted to this pur|^)ose on account of its uniform struc-
ture, its mild sandalwood odor, and because it is not
attacked by insects. For the distillation of the oil, the
waste from the lead-pencil manufactory is used, yield-
ing from 2.5 to 4.5 per cent. The exhausted chips are
then utilized by the furriers in the preparation of skins.
A very inferior oil is ol)tained in this country as a by-
product from the drying chambers of the lead-pencil
factories. These chambers are so constructed that the
escaping vapors from the cedar wood ciin be condensed.
In this ca.se, however, the high-boiling constituents of
the wood remain behind and only the more volatile
constituents are obtained. The oil thus obtained is
more mobile and its odor is both less fine and less
permanent than that of the normal, making it unserv-
iceable for use in perfumery.

Hemlock m' spruce iieedi^i oll^ — The needles and young
twigs used in the distillation of this oil seem to be
contributed by thi-ee different species: The hemlock or
spruce, which occurs throughout North America from
Canada to Alabama and westward as far as the Pacific;
the white spruce; and the black spruce. They are
equally widely distributed. In the collection of the
leaves and twigs it seems highly probable that no dis-
tinction is made between these three species, so that a
commercial oil may contain variable amounts of the oils
from all three. In fact, the oils, being regarded as
identical, are brought into the market under the common
name of hemlock or spruce oil. Inasmuch as they are
alike in properties and composition, quantitatively, the
confusion in this case may be regarded as being of little
or no consequence.

Witch-hazel^ {Ilamamelis virginiana, L.). — Witch-
hazel is a shrub indigenous to and growing in almost all
sections of the United States. It is the only species of
the genus found in eastern North America. The bark
has a bitter, astringent, somewhat sweetish and pungent
taste, but no odor. Walter B. Cheney examined witch-
hazel bark and found in it tannin, resin, and an extract-
ive, but no indication of an alkaloid or other crystalline
principle.* It contains a trace of volatile oil, however.
Dr. John Marshall, of the University of Pennsylvania,
found that hamamelis root contains tannic acid and a
trace of volatile oil, but no other active substance.'

The bark of the witch-hazel is said to have first
attracted attention on account of its use by the North
American Indians as a sedative application to external
inflammations. It was many years ago strongly recom-
mended by Dr. James Fountain and Dr. N. S. Davis for

' The Volatile Oils, page 276.
'Ibid., jMige263.

•U. .S. Dispensatory, 18th ed.: 1899.
* Am. Jour. I'har., page 418. 1886.
'Therap. Gaz., vol. 11, page 296.

hemorrhage of the lungs and stomach.' Of late years
professional attention has In-en very strongly directed
to witch-hazel on account of the enormous sale of a
proprietary remedy said to have Iwen made by distilling
the bark with very dilute alcohol (B i>er cent), and UH«?d
externally for sprains and bruises and internally for
many diseases.

The preparation known as witch-hazel extract, or
witch-hazel water, is obtained by digesting 100 parts by
weight of Hamamelis shoots and twigs with 200 volumes
of water and 15 volumesof alcohol for twenty-four hours.
The mixture is then distilled by applying direct heat,
but bett«;r by means of steam, until KX) volumes of the
distillate have been obtained. The preparation should
be made from the fresh young twigs of the Hamamelis
only, and these are preferably to be collected in the
late autumn when the plant is in flower. The returns
for 1900 show that 13,248 gallons of alcohol, having a
value of $31,606, were consumed in this industry during
the census year.

Artificial Essential Oils. — One of the greatest achieve-
ments of modern chemistry is the production in the
laboratory of chemical substances, such as have been
previously known only as the results of vital proces.ses
going on in vegetable or animal organs, and this achieve-
ment is especially marked in the production of those
essential oils which are used as flavors or perfumes.
The first step in this development was the discovery by
analysis of the compound or compounds which consti-
tuted the odorous or fragrant principle existing or pro-
duced from the natural substance, as in the recognition
by Woehler and Liebig of the existence of benzalde-
hyde in the oil of bitter almonds; the next was the
discovery of a method or methods by which this chem-
ical substiince could be artificially produced. Some-
times, however, bodies have been discovered which,
while unlike the natural principle, possess an odor which
resembles that of the naturally occurring body. There
is an example of this in the mono-nitrobenzene, which
in its odor resembles oil of bitter almonds and which,
together with mono-nitrotoluene, is sold for scenting
soap underthe name of oil-of-mirbane. In addition to the
above, there have long been known and used, amyl acetate
as essence of Jargonelle pear, amyl valerate as essence
of apple, cinnamic aldehyde as oil of cinnamon, cumic
aldehyde as oil of cumin, and many others.

One of these synthetic flavors that has especiallv at-
tracted attention is vanillin, which is the active odorous
ingredient of the vanilla pod, in which it exists to the
extent of about 2 per cent, appearing on the surface of
the fjean as a fine white crystalline efilorescence. It
was found to be methyl protocatechuic aldehyde, and it
was first prepared artificially by Tiemann from con-
iferin, which is a glucoside occurring in the cambium
of various coniferous woods. Later, Tiemann, and

•N.Y.Jour. Med., Vol. X, page 208; Trans. Amer. Med. Aaeoc.,
Vol. I, page 360.

simultaneously De Laire, discovered that it could be
produced by the oxidation of eugenol, the chief constit-
uent of oil of cloves, and this is now the principal .source
of artificial vanillin, which is manufactured on a con-
siderable scale both in this country and abroad.

Another artificial principle is cmimai-hi, which is the
chief ingredient in the favorite perfume known as
" new mown hay." This body is in nature the active,
odorous principle of the Tonquin (Tonka or Tonco) bean,
and it is found chemically to be the d-lactone of cou-
maiinic acid. Perkin' pointed out that if .salicylic
aldehyde be heated with acetic anhydride and sodium
acetate, and the melt be treated with water and again
heated, coumarin and acetic acid are formed.

The odorous body present in the heliotrope blossom
finds its liken&ss in the methylene ether of protocate-
chuic aldehyde, which is also known to chemists under
the name of heliotropin and also piperonal. It was
originally made from piperine extracted from pepper,
but it is now commercially prepared by the oxidation
of saf rol or iso-safrol.

The odor of may blossom, or hawthorn, is fairly well
reproduced b}' anisic aldehyde, which, chemically speak-
ing, is the methyl ether of para-oxybenzaldehyde. It
can be prepared from carbolic acid h\ a series of reac-
tions, but it is more easily obtained by oxidizing anise-
seed oil.

The much-desired perfume of the violet finds its syn-
thetic rival in the chemical ionone, which Tiemann and
Kriiger succeeded in producing in 1893, after years of
patient research. This is produced by the condensation
of citral with acetone in the presence of alkalis, by
which pseudo-ionone is formed, and the subsequent heat-
ing of this pseudo-ionone with dilute sulphuric acid and
a little glycerine or with alkalies. Citral, which is the
aldehyde of geraniol, is found in lemon oil, orange oil,
the oil of Eucalyptus maculata (var. citrioCUn'd), and
lemon-grass oil, the last two named having a consider-
able proportion of it.

The production of artificial musk has aroused especial
interest, since, while in the cases of the preceding chem-
icals their character had been ascertained from a careful
study of the plants in which they naturally occurred, in
the case of musk, which is the preputial secretion of
the musk deer, the chemistry of the substance is yet
unknown. There have been several artificial musks
produced, but practicallj- the only one used is manu-
factured under the patents of Albert Baur and is known
as "musk Baur." The patents cover several nitro-
derivatives of tertiary butyl-xylene, each of which has
the odor of musk.

The synthetic nerolin is prepared by heating b-naph-
thol with methyl alcohol and sulphuric acid, while
the artificial neroli oil is a mixture of geraniol and linalol
with their acetic esters and the methyl ester of anth-
ranilic acid. Artificial lilac is tei*pineol prepared from

'J. Chem. Soc, vol. 21, pages 53 to 181.

oil of turpentine, and this body is used in mixtures for
the preparation of other perfumes, such as artificial
hj'acinth. Cinnamyl alcohol and benzyl alcohol have
the odor of hyacinth; methyl benzoate the odor of niobe
oil; linalyl acetate the odor of bergamot oil; while sec-
ondarj' stj'rolyl acetate has a marked odor of ja,smine oil.

It has already been noted that methyl salicylate has
been prepared on a large scale and brought into the
market since 1886 as artificial oil of wintergreen. Yet
this enumeration of .synthetic chemicals used as flavors,
or as perfumes, by no means exhausts the list, and it is
easih' believable that the number of these substances and
the quantity of the product will greatly increase. It
should be especially noted that these artificially pre-
pared sub.stances are often purer and better than those
which are extracted from plants or animal substances.

Foreign Commerce in Enitential Oils. — The extent of
this commerce is displayed in the following tables, com-
piled from "The Foreign Commerce and Navigation of
the United States" for the year ending June 30, 1900:

IMPORTS OF OILS, VOLATILE OR ESSENTIAL AND DIS-
TILLED, 1891 TO 1900, INCLUSIVE.

TKAB.

Pounds.

Value.

YEAR.

Pounds.

Value.

1891

3,4.59,533
3, 451, 519
4,022,117
2.861,875

$1,523,491
1,676,064
1,664,036
1,102,108
1,398,956

18%

$1, .554, 2,89

1892

1897

1,88,5,523

1893 . .

1898

1,611,078

1894

1899

1,691,257

1895

1900

1, 8,59, 184

EXPORTS OF OILS, VOLATILE OR liSSENTIAL AND
DISTILLED: 1891 to 1900, INCLUSIVE.

PEPPERMINT OIL.

Another,
value
only.

YEAR.

PEPPERMINT OIL.

All other,
value
only.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

1891

1892

1893

1894

1895

45,321
54,987
99,629
80,225
87,633

8120,831
1.56,418
267, 422
209,722
194,616

865,104
68,501
79,920
64,907 '

190, 798

1896 ....

1897 ....
1898....
1899....
1900....

85,290
162,492
145,375
117,462

89,558

8174,810
257,484
180,811
118,227
90,298

8102,487
146, .569
201,497
162, 3,58
166,424

LITERATURE.

Watts'a Dictionary of Chemistry, 4, 182-191. 1868.

The Volatile Oils, Gildemeister and Hoffmann, trans: Ed. Kre-
mers, Milwaukee, 1900.

Essential Oils and Resins, AVagner's Chem. Tech., Crookes &
Fischer. Pages 935-938; 1892.

United States Dispensatory; Volatile Oils (18th ed. ), pages 904-
910; 1899.

The Treatment and Distillation of Peppermint Plants, A. M.
Todd, Am. Druggist, July, 1888.

The Oil of Peppermint, A. M. Todd, Proc. Am. Phar. Assn., 34,
121. 1886.

Semiannual Report of Schimmel & Co. (Fritzsche Brothers),
April, 1895-October, 1901, Miltitz, London and New York.

Scientific and Industrial Bulletin of Roure-Bertrand Fils, of
Grasse, Semiannual from March, 1900, Evereux, France.

Piesse's Art of Perfumery, Charles H. Piesse, London, 1891.

A Practical Treatise on the Manufacture of Perfumery, by C.
Deite: Philadelphia, 1892.

Odorographia, by J. Ch. Sawer, London: 1892.

The Chemistry of Essential Oils and Artificial Perfumes, by
Ernest J. Parry: London, 1899.

Group XVII.— Comhresskd and Liquefird Gaskh.

In tho roport of tho Eleventh Census, Part III. piijre
279, it is stilted that " the use of compressed luunioniii
gas has reached large proportions in the last decade, and
has proved a valuable aid in the preservation of food,
the refrigeration of malt liquors, and the manufacture
of ice. The introduction of the use of anh}-drou8 am-
monia has given great imjx>tus to the manufacture of
spi>cial machinery adapted to its employment in the
departments named. Taken as a whole, its manufac-
ture may be classed as a distinct industry." Although
Prof. A. C. Twining,' of New Haven, Conn., had in
1850 received a patent for an ice machine using ethyl,
ether, or other compressed gas, and had in 1855 a ma-
chine of 1 ton capacity in operation in Cleveland, Ohio,'
and although in 1867, and probably earlier, the am-
monia ice machines of Ferdinand Carr6 were in active
operation, this seems to have been the first allusion in
the census reports to compressed gases, and no data are
there given for them. At the census of 19(X> returns
were made not only for compressed or liquefied ammonia
(known technically as anhydrous ammonia), but also
for sulphur dioxide, carbon dioxide, nitrogen monoxide
(known technically as nitrous oxide), oxygen, and
liquid air, the manufacture being carried on during the
census j-ear in 30 different establishments regularly
devoted to this business. In addition there were 6
estsiblishments reported in which liquefied gases were
produced as a subordinate part of the product, the major
part of the product being in some instances other than
chemicals. Besides, 1 idle establishment was reported.
Taking the returns together, it is found that there were
37 establishments devoted to this manufacture, produc-
ing $1,220,297 of products and giving employment to
251 wage-earneis and $2,185,535 of capital. These es-
tablishments were distributed as follows:

GEOGKAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF ESTABLISHMENTS
FOR COMPRESSING AND LIQUEFYING GASES: 1900.

United States .

New York

New Jersey

Pennsylvania

Ohio

Illinoin

Missouri, Michigan, Dela-
ware, California, Massa-
chusetts, Vermont, and
Wisconsin

Number

ofen-

tablLsh-

ments.

CapltAl.

12,186,535

Arenige
number
of wage-
eamen.

251

631,148
232,542
467,720
52,980
285,436

526,715

Product.

•1,220,297

144,276

239,713

63,086

180,850

363,991

Per cent
of total.

lOO.O

19.6

11.8

19.6

4.3

14.8

Of these establishments 19, employing 181 wage-
earners and $1,650,094 of capital, were engaged in pro-
ducing liquefied carbon dioxide, and the output for the
census year amounted to 12,196,061 pounds, of a value

386.

> Bamard'8 Report on Paris Exposition of 1867, pagee 368 to
' Refrigerating and Ice- Making Machinery, page 24.

of $708,864. In addition, 1 establishment using carlwn
dioxide in iiiaiiufa(;tun> reported having produced and
consumed 165,000,00(J pounds of this gas during the
yea.'; but, though it was compressed, it was not lique-
fied for use. There was employed in the manufacture
of the lique,fied carbon dioxide reported aljove, 7,'»27
tons of magnesite, 2,011 tons of limestone, 774 t«ns of
coke, and 4,771 tons of sulphuric acid, and among
other products there were obtained 3,095,(WX) pounds of
Ep.som .salts, 3,278 tons of calcined magnesite, and 5,(X>0
bushels of lime. About 3,500,000 pounds of the carbon
dioxide reported came from fennentation or from
effervescent springs.

Ten establishments employing 52 wage-earners and
$453,328 in capital were engaged during the census year
m producing anhydrous ammonia, and the output for
the year amounted to 2,443,729 pounds, having a value
of $448,157. and there were consumed in this manufac-
ture 2,148 tons of ammonium sulphate, 4,199,708 pounds
of aqua ammonia, and 83,402 bushels of lime.

Carbon Dioxide (carbonic acid gas, CO,). — Carbon di-
oxide was liquefied by Faraday in glass tubes as early
as 1823, through the pressure resulting from the gas
being set free from combination. In 1834 Thilorier
operated this method on a much larger scale by the use
of wrought-iron cylinders in place of the glass tubes.
He discovered that by allowing the liquid to rapidly
evaporate the reduction in temperature was so great
that a portion of the CO, became solid. By moistening
this solid CO, with ethyl ether he obtained a tempera-
ture of -100° C. In 1837 Dr. John Torrey, of New
York, liquefied this compound in tubes and applied the
liquid to guns as a propellent. In 1844 Natterer in-
vented a pump by which very high pressures were ob-
tained, and through which the liquefaction of carboD
dioxide could be better accomplished than by the self-
compression method previously used. In all these cases
when liquefying carbon dioxide the gas was not only
subjected to pre-ssure, but it was al.so cooled. In 1869
Prof. W. N. Hill, at the United States naval torpedo
station, Newport, R. I., proposed the use of liquefied
CO, in torpedoes. In June-August, 1873,' he made
more than 500 pounds of the material, and the manu-
facture was continued at the station at intervals for some
years.

In a private communication from John B. Stobaeus,
of Charles Cooper & Co., Newark, N. J., it appears
that he began the liquefaction of carbon dioxide on a
commercial scale in the United States in July, 1884. and
put the product on the market. The gas was generated
from magnesite imported from Greece, by reaction with
sulphuric acid, and the by-product was Epsom salts.
The material was sent to the trade in steel tubes weigh-
ing about 27 ix)unds each, and these tubes were fitted
with a valve having a conical seat, which was invented
by Mr. Stobaeus. The booksof this firm showthat 1,188

* Liquid Carbonic Acid, page 4.

cylinders, containing 14,256 pounds of COj, were pro-
duced in 1885, and 10,704 cylinders, containing 128,448
pounds of COj, in 1891. The manufacture has since
been taken up by others, and in addition to the method
used bj' Mr. Stobaeus the carbon dioxide is now obtained
by burning magnesite, by which magnesia is obtained
as the by-product; or dolomite, by which a cement is
obtained as the by-product; or marble or limestone, by
which quicklime is obtained as the by-product; by
treating marl with sulphuric acid; and bj' burning
coke. The carbon dioxide issuing from effervescent
mineral springs, and that produced in the fermenting
tubs during the brewing of beer, is also collected and
liquefied. In all of these processes the gas is washed
and otherwise purified before compression.

From the data given bj' Mr. Stobaeus it appears that
the cylinders supplied by his firm held 12 pounds of
CO2 each. The American Carbonate Company, of New
York, advertise to supply cylinders in two sizes, con-
taining 10 and 20 pounds of CO^, respectively, repre-
senting 600 and 1,200 gallons of gas, the net weight of
the cylinders being 27 and 70 pounds. Several of the
companies announce that the cylinders are tested for a
pressure of 3,700 pounds per square inch.

Compressed carbon dioxide is used in charging soda
water, mineral waters, cider, beer, and other efferves-
cent drinks. By attaching a charged cylinder of the
gas, governed by a proper regulating valve, to a barrel
of beer or other beverage the liquid is not only contin-
uous!}' charged with the gas, but by the gas pressure the
liquid is forced to the point where it is desired to serve it.
By its use the old art of " Ki-aeusen," which consisted in
adding to stored beer, as it was being casked or bottled,
some beer in the first stages of fermentation, has been dis-
placed. Carbon dioxide is used in the manufacture of
salicylic acid and of many carbonates. It is proposed
for use as a medicinal agent by inhalation and in baths;
for raising dough in the manufacture of aerated bread;
as a refrigerating medium; as a buoyant material in
raising wrecks or preventing disabled ships from sink-
ing; and for extinguishing fires, K. Ogden Doremus
having found that but 20 per cent of CO^ in the air of
the locality where fire exists is sufficient to arrest the
progress of the flames. It has been used by the Gov-
ernment as a motive power for automobile torpedoes.

Anhydrous ammonia. — This material is the chemical
substance ammonia (NHj) in a pure and dry condition
and in a compressed and liquefied state, and it is manu-
factured by the distillation of the ordinarj' 26° ammo-
nia of commerce in a suitable apparatus. This appa-
i*atus, which should be of sufficient strength to stand a
pressure of 65 pounds to the square inch, comprises a
still, a condenser, three separators, and a drier or
dehydrator. The still is heated by a suitable steam
coil to a temperature of about 212° F., when the ammo-
niacal gas, together with a certain amount of water,
passes off into the first separator, which latter is usually
situated on the top of, and forms an upwai'd extension

of, the still. In this first separator the greater portion
of the watery particles carried over are eliminated by
a series of perforated plates, through the perforations
of which the gas has to pass, and ai-e returned to the
still through a dip pipe. From this first separator the
partly dried gas passes through a water-cooled worm
in the condenser, and then successively through the
two other separators to the drier or dehydrator, where
it is passed through a set of similarly perforated plates
to those in the first separator, but having small-sized
lumps of freshly burnt lime placed upon them, hj which
any moisture that may still remain in the gas is re-
moved, and the completely anhydrous product can then
be passed into the ammonia pump or compressor. It
is found advisable to work the still at a pressure above
30 pounds to the square inch, so as to admit of the liquid
being raised to a slightly higher temperature than the
boiling point of water at atmospheric pressure, with-
out causing the water to boil, the result of this being
that the whole, or practically the whole, of the ammo-
nia will be set free, while at the same time the least pos-
sible amount of the water will be vaporized and passed
over with the ammonia gas.

Or it may be obtained from ammonium salts by heat-
ing them with lime and treating the gas as above
described. The salt usually employed is ammonium
sulphate. Aqua ammonia, or ammonia water, is of dif-
ferent strengths, according to the amount of NHj dis-
solved in it, but the standard sti-ength has a specific
gravitj' of 26° Beaume, and it contains 38.5 per cent by
volume, or 26.6 per cent by weight of anhydrous ammo-
nia. Thus 3. 76 pounds of 26° ammonia will be required
to make 1 pound of anhydrous ammonia. An excel-
lent table of the yields of anhydrous ammonia from 26°
ammonia is given by Iltyd I. Redwood.' The ammo-
nium sulphate or sulphate of ammonia of commerce
is reckoned as containing 25 per cent of anhydrous
ammonia.

It is believed that some at least of the owners of ice
machines produce the anhydrous ammonia that they
employ, either in originally charging their machines, or
in making good any loss which may take place, but
there are no returns on this point. It appears also that
there is some anhj^drous ammonia imported, the repoi't
on "The Foreign Commerce and Navigation of the
United States" from the Treasury Department placing
this at 14,210 pounds, having a value of $5,870 for the
yQdiV 1891, but the data for such importations as may
have occurred in other years of the past decade do not
appear separately.

Although Fourcroy and Vauquelin and, at about the
same time, Guyton de Morveau, announced that they
had accomplished the liquefaction of ammonia gas, it is
believed that, as they had no suitable means for drying
the gas, they failed to obtain the anhydrous ammonia.

'Theoretical and Practical Ammonia Refrigeration, page 113.

It was first i-ortainly li(]tiofi(>(l by Faraday in 1828. and
it was not lonjf lieforc it was beinj^ produced in consid-
erable ((uantities. Luriiin and Schetfer began the com-
incrciai nianufacturo in St. Ijoiiis, Mo., in 1H79.

Aniiydrous ammonia apiKjars, as stated above, to
have tirat been used for refrigeration by Ferdinand Carr^
in his absorption machine, but it was not long before it
was employed in compression machines of the type
invented by Peritins and Twining, based on the refrig-
erating principle, which was demonstrated by Doctor
Culien in 1755, and although it has had to compete with
ethyl ether, carbon dioxide, sulphur dioxide, and air, it
is to-day the material which is most largely used in ice
machines, and this is the principal use for this sub-
stance, though recent researches indicate that other
uses will soon be found for it in chemical manufacture
and in other arts.

Sidphur Dioxide (sulphurous acid gas, SO,). — This
substance is produced by burning sulphur in air or oxy-
gen, 1 pound of sulphur giving 2 pounds of sulphur
dioxide. It was liquefied by Monge and Clouet about
the beginning of the Nineteenth century. The liquefied
sulphur dioxide is now a regular article of commerce,
and is sent into the trade in glass "siphons" and in
iron flasks, a.s being a convenient means of transporta-
tion and storage of the substance for use in chemical
laboratories and in manufacture. The liquid has found
some use in ice machines. The substance is used as a
reducing agent, as a bleaching agent, and as a disin-
fectant. Hardin' states that at present (1899) "about
4,0!)0.0<)0 kilograms of this liquid are being prepared
annually."

Nitr<Hfeti Monoxide (hyponitrous oxide, nitrous oxide,
laughing gas, N^O). — This body is prepared by heating
anunonium nitrate to a temperature not exceeding 258°
C, when the gas is evolved. It is carefully purified,
well washed, and then compressed in steel cylinders.
This gas was first liquefied by Faradaj* in 1823. The
Lennox Chemical Company began the liquefaction of
the gas for the trade at Cleveland, Ohio, in 1883. The
exhilarating properties of the gas were discovered by
Sir Humphry' Davy, who was the first to inhale it, in
1809, and it then received the name of laughing gas.
It is now used sis an anaesthetic agent in minor surgical
ov)erations, especially in dentistry, its use for this pur-
pose having l)een suggested by Dr. Hoi^ace Wells, and
it was fir.st applied to him in the extraction of a tooth
at Hartford. Corm.. December 11, 1844.

Oxygen. -This gas, as commercially supplied in the
compressed condition, is produced by heating potassium
chlorate mixed with black oxide of manganese. It is
sold in the market for use in medicine by inhalation,
when it is usually mixed with nitrous oxide, essential
oils, and other bodies which are believed to possess

234.

'The Rise and Development of the Liquefaction of Gases, pa^e

therap<'Utic cjualities. Liquid oxygen is not known to
lie produced commercially except as referred to under
li(|uid air, but it was the first of the so-called permanent
gases to be licjuefied, this having been independently
effected by Pictet and Cailletet in 1877.

Lifjuid Air. — Atmospheric air is a mixture of approx-
imately 21 per cent of oxygen and 78 pt^r cent of nitro-
gen by volume, with nin«'ty-four one-hundredths of 1
per cent of argon, about four one-hundredths of 1 per
cent of carbon dioxide, and variable (|uantities of water
vapor, ammonia, and other bodies, according to local-
ity and conditions. After 1823, when Perkins' errone-
ously Iwlieved that he had li(|uefied air, numerous un-
successful attempts were made to accomplish this result,
but in 1877 Raoul Pictet and Louis Cailletet, working
independently in Switzerland and in France, achieved
the result on a small laboratory scale, and it was later
repeated by Wroblewski, Olzewski, and Dewar, who ini-
proved the methods so as to notablj' increase the yields,
and in 1893 Dewar froze air into a clear, transparent
solid. The liquefaction of air on an industrial scale
began about this time with the invention of the ma-
chines of Linde, Hampson, and Tripler, and later those
of Ostergren and Burger, Dewar, Kuhn, Chase, Code,
O'Doherty, Johnson, and others.

The methods may be dass-ified as the cascade method
of Pictet, Cailletet, Wroblewski, and Onnes; the self-
intensive motor method of Siemens, Kuhn, and John-
son; the countercurrent free-expansion sxstem of Linde,
Hampson, Tripler, and Ostergren, and Burger; and the
self-intensive work method of the American Liquid
Air Companj-, known as the Ala S3^stem. Emmens'
states that the principal features of the method by
which the liquefaction of air can be effected on a com-
mercial scale was clearly described in the specifications
of British patent No. 2064, granted to Charles William
Siemens in 1857.

Owing to the complex composition of air, several
different products are obtained by its liquefaction,
notably liquid oxygen and nitrogen and solid carbon
dioxide. Pictet has invented a separator by which
these bodies may be rapidly separated for use, and there
is thus drawn off at —70° F., solid carbon dioxide; at
—290° F., commercial oxygen gas of 50 per cent purity;
iVt —296° F., oxygen gas of 99 j)er cent purity; at — 3(X>^
F., liquid oxygen and nitrogen gas of 95 per cent purity;
at —310° F., nitrogen gas of 99 per cent purity; at
— 312° F., liquid air; and at —316° F., liquid nitrogen.

While many commercial uses for liquid air have
been proposed, it is not known to be so used at present.
It may, however, be now looked upon as a source of
oxygen which promotes combustion and enables man
to obtain high temperatures and high illuminating
power, but it is not yet proved that this method of

' .Annals of Philosophy, vol. 6, page 66.
' Liquelie<l Air, page 2.

heating and lighting can compete economical!}' with
electricity. Liquid air does enable man to readily obtain
low temperatures, which can be usefully emploj'ed in
chemical operations, and a continually extending use
may be looked for in this direction. Elihu Thomson
has pointed out that it may possibly find a useful appli-
cation in increasing the efficiency of conductors of
electricity.

Chlorine. — This gas, which may be produced by the
action of muriatic acid on black oxide of manganese or
by the electrolysis of common salt, is produced com-
mercially abroad in the liquid state, but no returns are
made of it in this country. It is used in chemical
manufactures and for bleaching and disinfection. It is
sent out to the trade in iron cylinders.

LITBRATl'RE.

Reports of the United States Commissioners to the Paris Uni-
versal Exhibition, 1867, Volume III. Machinery and Processes
of the Industrial Arts, and Apparatus of the Exact Sciences, by
F. A. P. Barnard: Washington, 1870.

Liquid Carbonic Acid, Its Preparation and the C'onstruetion of
Vessels to Contain It, by Walter N. Hill, United States Torpedo
Station. 187-5.

Encyclopedic Chiniique, by M. Freniy, 2, Section 1 : Paris, 1885.

Compressed Carbonic Acid (jas. American Carbonate Com-
pany, New York, 1887.

No More Kraeusen; Carbonating of Beer: The l^niversal Car-
bonating Company, New York, 1897.

Refrigerating and Ice-Making Machinery, by A. J. AVallis-Tay-
ler: London, 1897.

Theoretical and Practical .\nuuonia Refrigeration, by Iltyd I.
Redwood: London, 1898.

The Rise and Development of the Liquefaction of Gases, by
Willet L. Hardin: New York, 1899.

Liquid Air and the Liquefaction of (iases, by T. O'Conor Sloane:
New York, 1899.

Liquefied Air; an address delivered by the president of the
American Liquid Air Company, by Stephen B. Enunens: New-
York, 1899.

Liquid Air: the Separation of Its Constituent Gases and Their
Commercial Application, by Raoul Pictet and Moritz Burger:
Philadelphia, 1900.

The Experimental Study of Gases, by Morris W. Travers: Lon-
don, 1901.

Group XVIII. — Fine Chemicals.

Under this classification are grouped the chemically
pure chemicals manufactured for sale, the chemical sub-
stances which are made for use in laboratories and in
pharmac\% and tho.se in which, like the salts of silver
and of gold, the price of the unit of measure is relatively
very high. It is to be noted that though this term is
used in the market the dividing line between "fine
chemicals" and "heav\' chemicals" is by no means
sharply drawn or constant. The statistics for fine chem-
icals, 1900, are:

FINE CHEMICALS, BY KIND, QUANTITY, AND VALUE:

1900.

KIND.

Number
of estab-
lish-
ment.

Unit of measure.

Quantity.

Value.

8
6
3
8
7
7
3
3
3
3
3
9
4

1,638,715

2, 847, .575

3,387,522

254, 952

263,238

576, .'>71

8, .594

20,714

19,030

487,090

7, 312

5,373

1,252,604

124,874

8178,666

148,971

Alkaloids . .

Ounces .

1,743,264

18, 131

Ether

Pounds

129,876

66, 676

Gold salts

Ounces

90,145

32, 831

Pounds

76, 120

Pounds -

1.50, 100

54,600
28,200

499,345

Vanillin

Ounces

113,050

In this table only those fine chemicals that were pro-
duced in notable quantity and in more than two differ-
ent establishments are enumerated. How large the list
is may be understood when it is stated that the total
value of all the products classified under this legend is
$-1,2 10,744: while the total value of those enumerated in
the table, excluding such as appear also in other classifi-
cations, is $3,148,974.

Under the term alkaloids is included caffeine, mor-
phine, pilocarpin, quinine and the other alkaloids from
the cinchona barks, and strychnine. To the quantity of
ether given in the table should be added 1,400,000
pounds of ether used in the explosive indu.stiy, much
of which was made from tax-free alcohol and known as
"Government ether." Among the esters manufactured
for sale were ethyl acetate, ethyl butyi-ate, amyl ace-
tate, and amyl butyrate. Under the legend "phos-
phorus" are included upward of 300,000 pounds which
were produced by electro-chemical processes. Under
"rare earths" there were reported ctesium zirconate,
cerium oxide, didymium oxide, lanthanum oxide, radio-
active barium, thorium nitrate, and thorium oxide. The
gold and platinum .salts were chlorides and the silver
salts consisted of the nitrate. The vanillin was synthetic.

In addition, as showing the variety of this manu-
facture, it may be remarked that there were returned
reports on acetanilide, bromine, chloral, chloro-
form, chloride of sulphur, coumarin, eth^l chloride,
formaldehyde, and glycosine. Many fine chemicals are
undoubtedly lost to this group from having been re-
ported under the head of "pharmaceutical prepara-
tions" or drugs, and thus passed to another classification
outside of the "chemical industry."

Acetone is produced by the dry distillation of calcium
acetate or other acetates, the other product of the re-
action being a metallic carbonate. A commercial source
of it is therefore found in the treatment of the residue
left after manufacturing anilin by the distillation of
nitrobenzene with acetic acid and iron. E. R. Squibb,

M. O..' bus dovol<)|«>d H eonimerriiil procesH for it«
nmiiutHctiiio from noetic iicid. It ot^curs largely in
some varieties of wood spirit.

Formerly iill iiitroijcii-containinj'' bodies oecui'rinjf in
pltiiits iind i)ossessiii},'' liiisic chtiriicters or the derivatives
of these, from which bases could be isolated were desig-
nated u.s alkaloids, but with the bettor knowledge of
their constitution which modern organic chemistr\' has
furnished, these bodies have been distributed among
various classes of organic compounds. Thus caffeine
is a uric acid derivative; piperine, a pyridine derivative;
quinine, a quinoline derivative; and morphine, an iso-
quinoline derivative. In the commercial treatment of
these Iwdies. however, it has seemed best to use the
term alkaloid with its old significance because, that
substances of a similar nature have been found in ani-
mals, we nnist more properly speak of these as vege-
table alkaloids; all of the bodies i-eturned in this census
Ijeing from this source. As they occur in plants they
are generally combined with acids such as malic, citric,
or tannic and the like, and the commercial preparation
of the alkaloids consists in their extraction from the
bark, fruit. leaf, or root by means of suitable solvents,
among which ether, chloroform, amyl alcohol, grain
alcohol, petroleum ether, and benzene may >>e enumer-
ated. By the use of alkalies the bases may be isolated,
and l)y the use of sulphuric, or other acids, salts may be
formed hy which to facilitate the extraction and puri-
fication of the alkaloids.

In 1820 the separate alkaloids in cinchona bark (qui-
nine, cinchonine, ett\) were determined, and. shortly
after, Pelletier began their manufacture in Fi-ance.
About the same time John Fai-r started a quinine fac-
tory in Philadelphia, and was followed at a later day by
John Currie, who built one in New York. From the
correspondence it appears that the establishment of
Rosengarten & Sons, of Philadelphia, manufactured
sulphate of quinine in 1823, sulphate of moi-phine and
acetate of morphine in 1832, piperine in 1838. strych-
nine in 1834. veratrine in 1835, and codeine in 1836.
Extract of quinine was manufactured by John Farr,'
of Philadelphia, in 1825.

Ether (ethyl ether, common ether, sulphuric ether)
is the di-ethyl oxide and is made by the reaction of
grain alcohol with sulphuric acid. The process in-
vented for its manufacture bv Williamson is a contin-
uous one, and, theoretically, one portion of sulphuric
acid will convert an unlimited quantity of alcohol into
ether. As a fact, some of the sulphuric acid is reduced,
and not only is there loss of acid and alcohol, but in con-
.sequence of this reduction the ether becomes contami-
nated with sulphur dioxide and must be purified for
use. According to Squibb,' 360 pounds of concen-
trated sulphuric acid suffices to etherify 120 barrels of

'J. .■^in. Chem. S<k\, vol. 17, pajte 197. 1895.
»J. Phil. Coll. Phariii., Vol. I, So. 2. May, 1826.
' Ephemeris, vol. 2, page 590.

clean spirit. The acid charge Tnust then \yti changed, a.«t
the mixture has l>ec'ome dark and tarry, and liable to
froth in the still. The production of sulphur dioxide
in the j)rocoss may Ih- prevented by using l>enzene-
sulphonic acid in place of sulphuric acid in the still.
Other ethers are also prtxluced in the continuous proc-
ess by substituting other alcohols for ethyl alcohol.

Ether was manufactured by liosengarten & Sons at
Philadelphia in 1823, and by Carter & Scattergood, of
the same <-ity, in 1834. It is used a.s an ana;sthetic agent
and as a solv'ent in many arts; but it» largest use to-day
is as a solvent in the manufacture of smokeless powder.

The esters known also as ethereal .salts, were form-
erly styled compound ethers. They are compounds
in which there is present both an alcohol radical and an
acid radical. They are usually commercially prepared
by treating an alcohol with sulphuric acid in the pres-
ence of a mineral salt containing the desired a<;id radical.
Thus, ethjl acetate (known as acetic ether) is obtained
by distilling dried sodium acetate with ethj'l alcohol and
sulphuric acid, and ethyl nitrite (which isthe active prin-
ciple of spirit of niter or spirits of nitrous ether) is pre-
pared by distilling sodium nitrate with ethyl alcohol
and sulphuric acid. Acetic ether and spirit of niter
were manufactured at Philadelphia by Rosengarten &
Sons in 1823.

According to Mr. John McKes.son' it was an Ameri-
can surgeon, Beaumont, who made, between 1825 and
1833, the famoiis classical observations upon the phe-
nomena of digestion in the living stomach, which
revealed the functions of the gastric juice, and it is to
Schwann that the discovery of the active principle of
this juice in 1836 is due. Schwann named this principle
pepsin, though he was unable to separate it. The
history of American commerce in pepsin practically
begins with the introduction of Scheffer's pepsin in
1872. To Scheffer is due the credit of the invention of
the simple, practical, and widely adopted ''.salt" proc-
ess for isolating the pepsin from the gastric juice of the
stomachs of hogs. "Pepsin prepared b\' this method
appeared in commerce principally as 'saccharated pep-
sin.' the ferment being incorporated with a large pro-
portion of milk sugar. In 1879 Fairchild introduced
the original form of pepsin in scales, 'free from added
substance or reagents.' The appearance of this pepsin
of phenomenal strength, with the recognition of the
fallacy of administering the fennent in the largely
diluted form then in vogue, was the signal for great
activity in the manufacture and improvement of com-
mercial pepsins. The obvious importance of stomach
digestion naturally directed attention chiefly to the
stomach ferments, and the medicinal use of the digest-
ive ferments still remains popularly identified with
pepsin; yet the other digestive ferments, especially
those of the pancreas, po.ssess far wider scope of activity

*One hundred yearn of American Cotuiiierce, Vol. II, page 610.
1869.

and are relatively of wider importance. Practical
recognition and application of thef<e pancreas ferments
must fairly be attributed to Fairchild, who in 1880 in-
troduced the extractnm j)anc7'eati><^ containing diastase
for the conversion of starch, trypsin for the conversion
of albumin, the emulsifying ferment for the digestion
of fats, and the milk-curdling ferment.

"Pepsin now appears in a great number of popular
as well as official forms, and is prepared generally by
pharmaceutical manufacturers everywhere. We have
in the United States the only house in the world engaged,
in the manufacture of the digestive femients and pre-
digested foods, as an exclusive specialty. The digest-
ive ferments occupy a brilliant position in modern
therapeutics, and the progress of physiological chem-
istry suggests still further utilization of the animal
organic principles as recently shown in the successful
and important treatment of disease by the thyroid
gland." The pancreatin, trypsin, and other ferments,
except pepsin, mentioned above are included in the
statistics for pharmaceutical preparations.

The statistics for the bromine production of the
United States in 1900 were largely collected on the
Salt schedule (No. 9), and were published in a special
report of the census. Since this element is isolated
from the mother liquors of salt works it is natural that
the material should be returned as a minor product of
that industr}-. There are instances, however, where
the bromine collected as such, or in the form of bro-
mide, is the chief or sole product of the industry,
and these more naturally have been reported on the
Chemical schedule (No. 17). Reducing the bromides
thus produced to bromine and combining the data re-
ceived on all the schedules, it ai>pears that during the
census year 1900 there were produced in the United
States 480,742 pounds of bromine having a value of
5^111,121, which is the value at the works.

It may be of interest to compare this result with
the following statistics from The Mineral Industry for
1899, page 68. The production of bromine in the
United States, including the proportionate amount of

bromine contained in potassium bromide, decreased
during 1899. falling from 486,978 pounds to 433,003
pounds; the price, however, increased from 28 to 29
cents. The production of bromine in the world is still
controlled by the association of American producers,
and hj the Leopoldshall-Stassfurt convention, which
has several years longer to run.

PRODUCTION OF BROMINE IN THE UNITED STATES.

1895
1896
1897
1898
1899

Michi-
gan,
pounds.

30,280

42,000

'147, 2t6

'141, -232

'138,272

Ohio,
pounds.

152,360
212,860
124,972
106,860
82,368

Pennsyl-
vania,
pounds.

104,647
1.52, 600
116,967
119,998
111,160

West
Virginia,
pounds.

107, 567
149,836
97, 954
118,888
101,213

Total, ' Metric
pounds. ! tons.

Total
value.

394,8.54
559,285 !
487,149 '
488,978 I
433,003

179 '

249 1
221 !
221 1
196 !

$102, 662
143, 074
136,402
136,354
126, 571

' Including the bromine equivalent of the product recovered as potassium
bromide.

The manufacture of bromine was begun in the United
States in 1846 by Dr. David Alter,' of Freeport, Pa.
In 18ti6 works were erected at Tarentum, Pa. , and in 1868
at Pomeroy, Meigs County, Ohio. By the introduction
of improved processes the price of this article has fallen
from $6 per pound in 1856 to 28 cents per pound, which
is the approximate price to-day.

Among the chemicals used as anresthetic agents and
as a .solvent for organic sub.stances, chloroform holds a
high position. It was formerly manufactured In' the
action of bleaching powder on grain alcohol, but the
latter is now largely replaced by acetone. Squibbs"
saj's that if 58 pounds of acetone be used to 600 pounds
of bleaching powder containing 35 per cent of available
chlorine, the yield of chloroform will be 150 to 180 per
cent of the weight of acetone employed.

The foreign commerce in fine chemicals is exhibited
in the following tables, compiled from the publications
of the Bureau of Statistics of the United States Treasury
Department:

' Tenth Census of the Unites States, report on manufactures,
page lOU.

M. Am. Chem. Soc, vol. 18, pajje 244; 1896.

IMPORTS FOR CONSUMPTION FOR THE YEARS ENDING JUNE 30, 1891-1900.

1891.
1892.

1885.
1896.
1897.
1898.
1899.
1900.

ACONITE BARK,
LEAF, A.ND ROOT.

Pounds.

2,761

4,351
1,329

3,034
4,020

1,392
3,808

Value.

$266

236
108

197
620

120
274

Nl'X VOMICA.

Pounds.

1,394,
1,392,
1,720,
1,720,
595,
1,275,
1,298,
2,026,
1.636,
8,070,

Value.

1(32,930
34,038
41,567
89,821
9,620
15,668
1.5,200
29,529
28,995
66,460

I SULPHATE or MOR-
ALL SALTS OF MOR- , PHIA OR MORPHINE
PHIA OR MORPHINE. AND ALL ALKALOIDS
OR SALTS OF.

29,564
38,758
23,580
29,076
16,029
896
14,949
2,382

Value.

$42,269
43, 301
25,035
36,452
18,507

1,083
30,301

2,832

Pounds. Value.

13,409 I $32,836
13,081 ! 85,357
26,208 ; 75,274

ALL SALTS OF
STRYCHNIA OR
STRYCHNINE.

0unce.s.

230
305
16,538
566
1,158
8,766
1,377
13,049
15,394
7,753

Value.

$175
163

7,063
259
502

3,405
678

6,381

6,570

ETHERS,
SULPHCRIC.

Pounds.

100
20
146
65
191
466
476
187
817

Value.

$1
28
2
32
6
24
44

103
36

110

FRUITS, ETHERS.
OILS, OR ES.SENCE.

Pounds.

611
762
1,148
766
1,132
2.375
3,276
2,290
2.673

Value.

SI, 540
800
2,286
964
1,731
9.1.58
5,781
3,669
4,507

IMPORTS FOR CONSUMPTION FOR THE YEARS ENDING JUNE 30, 1891-1000-ContiniMd.

ALKALOIDS 0> SALTS Or CIICCRONA B.tKK.

PIIOSPHORI-S.

■ —
lODIXI.

VEAB.

Bark or other miitcrliil
(rom which quinine
may be extracted.

CIncbonldta.

Buliihatc ofqulnta.

UlIMllR SALTS OF
CI.HCHDNA.

BROMIKK.

Crate.

Poanda.

Value.

Onnoea.

Value.

Ounces.

Value.

Ounces.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Ponnds.

Value.

Pound*.

Valoe.

1891

2,672,8l>t
S. 423, Ml
2,374,041
2,602,224
2,012,399
2,699,789

•901,086
299,998
196,867
143,194
117,998
166,699

156.229
11,483

364,192

313,640
72,426

282,321

•3,866
1,686

11,714
7,177
3.634
9,980

3,079,000
2,6S(i,677
3.027.819
2,141.130
1.808,969
2.»fi0.07R
2,714,147
8,643,298
2,788,663
2,628,060

$806,821
642,440

.').'i6.7M2
470, .816
327. .Ml
764,060
489,821
762,211
666,819
763,986

112,013
166,442
48,030
40,8,'iO
37,027
78.607
367,873
424,666
986,480
616,168 j

•28,977
29,366
11,695
10,991
10,867
23,147
67,237
106.961
262. 141
l.'>8.817

161.166
86,622
89,874
20.767
28.747
.'iO.027
60,731
43,361
12,399
26,228

•63,690
31,643
44.068
11,927
14.131
26,646
29,870
21,849
7,366
9,789

241.186 •882.009

1892

1893

18W

1895 .

63..V.3
780
20

r.oM

234
11

164.186 167,893
127.248 609,186
401,601 887,127

1H96

:::::::::::i::::::::::

1897

1898

803,278
233,886
101,838

38,802
34,932
16,924

46i,!d4i 806, 7IU
818, 476 673, 469

1899

1900

673.128 1.462 434

iR.

loDiNB— contlnned.

CHLORAL HYDBATE.

CHLOROFORM.

tODOrORM.

HYDRIODATR, IO-
DIDE. AND Ut-
DATE OF POTASH.

CALOMKL AVD

YKJ

Crude and resub-
Umed.

Resubltmed.

RIAL XEDICIIfAL
PREPARATIONS.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

1891

«1C6
14
26
31

1,242

244

176

lOS

168

243

116

j 202

•19,459
890
649
382
683
926
437
96
163
602

1,024
186
187
181
236

6,489

2,774
280

2,168
1 1,288

•036
S05
475
464

561
9,289
6,032

649
3,607
2,165

7,801
12,680
13,496
8,486
8,280
13,900
12.349
, 12,316
21,963
16,647

•6,244

1892

t
7

239
137
91
.M2

227
75

•16
14
18

164
46
18

123
72
36

8.114

1893

7,941

4,715

1S95

; 31,374

291.895

391,561

$48,360
666,908
872,626

20,097 310.976

4,209

1896

80,275
63,360
40,263
12,370
796

17,367

35.138

23,063

7, .562

1,634

7,154

1897

6,063

1898 . ..

601

63
146
410

6,386

1899 i

11,848

1900

10,163

Group XIX. — Chemicals General (Including all
Chemical Products not Especially Enumerated
Elsewhere).

Thi.s group includes a very large variety of products,
and while they are enumerated here more in detail than
has been feasible in any previous census report, it is
not to be concluded that the presentation is complete.

The total number of establishments belonging to this
group, and forming Class A, is 78, while 107 other es-
tablishments, forming Class B, made these products as a
subordinate part of their industry. The great variety
of products belonging to this group permits onl}^ a few
general division.s, tubulated in table below, the amount
of each product made in the works, but con.sumed there
in the manufacture of other products, being entered
separately so far as known. Classes A and B are com-
bined for the sake of brevity.

CHEMICALS GENERAL, BY KIND, QUANTITY, AND
VALUE: 1900.

A, 16; B,12.

A,2; B,4.

Ammonia, aqua

AmniDiiiH, conHume<l

Ainniuniiim. anua Kulphate

Amuioniiim. MilphateconKumed .

Ammonium salU), sundry ] A, 2; B,4.

Ammonium silts, consume*!

Antimony salts j A. 3; B,3.

Number of estab-
lishments.

Chritme products.

C'oppi>ras

Copjicraa, consumed .

Crt-am tartar

Dyers' chemicals

A,5; B.5

A,l; B,9

A, 8.
A, 2;

B.8.

Pounds.

26,768,068
1, 624, 632

11,094, 6.M

1,681,700

1,904,479

423, <83

211,966

16,407,882

27,746,670
1,987.000

11,288,680
6,663,247

Value.

•1,237,745
20,488

288,667
43,724

128,768

22,778

1,180,267

133,892

7 948

2, 130! 104

106,896

CHEMICALS GENERAL, BY KIND, QUANTITY, AND
VALUE: 1900— Continued.

PRODnCTS.

Epsom salts -.

Glauber's salts

Glycerin

Glycerin, consumed .

Lead acetate

Saltpeter

Silicate, sodium

Sulphur, refined

Tin salts

Vitriol, blue

Zinc sails

Number of estab-
lishments.

Pounds.

A, 2;
A, 3;
A. 5;

B,5..
B,15.,
B,5..

A, 3:
A,6.
A, 6;
A, 4.
A. 4;
A, 2:
A, 4:

B,3..
b',3.'.

B,9..
B,2..
B,10.

9, -.239, 809

31,314,256

l.i 383,798

4,000,000

1,296,991

13,088,680

66,302,901

25,996,638

6, '247, 205

8,460,243

9,511,909

Value.

•75,086
160,065
2,012,886
480,000
73,190
482,680
416,005
398,548
603,937
544,817
353.902

> Not given.

The incompleteness of even this partial return is evi-
dent when it is noted that the ammonium sulphate pro-
duced by the gas and coke industries, the glycerin from
soap and other works, and the metallic salts, such as
blue vitriol, etc., produced in metallurgical works, are
not included here. The difficulty of obtaining a fairlj'
complete enumeration of chemical products is shown by
the fact that the returns collected on Special Schedule
No. 17 give a total value for "chemicals, not otherwise
specified," of !P2, 1-12,41 J*. In many cases it would not
have been possible for the respective establi.shments
to give these products in more detail, because this
item is made up in part of .small quantities of special
chemicals made to rill certain orders, nor would the in-
formation have sufficient practical value to warrant the
e.\penditurc of the labor required to make more com-
plete returns. In some instances, however, more defi-
nite information would have l>een desirable and could
have been secured had circumstances permitted.

While 17 establishments reported a production of
26,506,818 pounds; of niter cake, valued at $37,360, 15
establishments produced 81,191,424 pounds of salt cake,
valued at $345,277, and 10 establishments produced
62,701 tons of pyrites cinder, valued at $105,631, it is at
once evident that these figures are only a small portion
of the actual product. Where an acid chamber is op-
erated in connection with a fertilizer works, the niter
cake is usually consumed in the manufacture of ferti-
lizers. While there is usually no sale for the pyrites
cinder, a few works report using pyrites, the cinder of
which is returned to other works for special treatment,
but. in most cases, the cinder is simply "dumped," in
the hope that at some time in the future a market may
be found for it.

The following table gives the quantities and values
of the various chemical products enumerated in this
group, the amounts designated by "C" being the fig-
ures collected from other branches of industry. As
these are elsewhere reported, they must be so entered
to prevent appai'ent duplication :

Unit.

Acetate:

Lead

Sodium

Alumirmm chloride

Ammt)nia, aqua

Ammonium carbonate

Ammonium chloride

Ammonium nitrate

Ammonium sulphate:

Class A and B

class C

Antimony salts

Barium carbonate

Barium chloride

Barium sulphate (satin white)

Bone ajih

Calcium chloride

Carbon disulphide

Chemicals not specified

Chrome products

Copper salts (see also vitriol blue)

Copperas

Cream of tartar

Dyers' chemicals

Epsom salts

FItiorides (of allialies)

Fluoride, calcium residue

Glauber's salts

Glycerin:

Class A and B

Class C

Iron salts (see also copperas)

Magnesium salts (see also Epsom salts)

Manganese salts

Metals (sundry, by-products)

Metallic oxides (sundry)

Nitrite, sodium

Niter cake

Paris green

Phosphate:

Acid calcium

Sodium

Sundry

Salt:

Common (by-product)

Scouring

Salt cake

Saltpeter

Silicate, .sodium ,

Sulphur, refined

Sulphur chloride

Sulphate:

Sodium

Sodium hi- ,

Sulphide sodium . . . '.

Sulphites:

Sundry ,

Sundry hi-

Sulphite, sodium hypo-

Sulphate, calcium, residues

Tin salts

Vitriol, blue:

Class A and B

ClassC

Zinc salts

Sundries

Pound . .
Pound.,
Pound . .
Pound . .
Pound..
Pound.,
Pound.,

Pound..
Pound.,
Pound . .
Pound..
Pound..
Pound..
Pound . .
Pound.,
Pound.,
Pound.,
Pound . ,
Pound.,
Pound . ,
Pound . ,
Pound .
Pound .
Pound .
Pound .
Pound.

Pound.
Pound.
Pound.
Pound .
Pound .
Pound.
Pound.
Pound .
Pound.
Pound .

Pound .
Pound .
Pound .

Pound.
Pound .
Pound.
Pound.
Pound.
Pound .
Pound.

Pound.
Pound .
Pound .

Pound .
Pound.
Pound .
Pound.
Pound.

Pound.
Pound .
Pound.
Pound .

Quantity.

1,296,991

708.360

903. 118

■28, 282, 700

1,851,889

516,410

36,680

11,094,854
12,200,931
211,956
2,400,000
1,100,000
2,144,000
2,596,500
7, 079, 040
773,800

15,407,882

100,000

29, 733, 670

11,286,680

6, 653, 247

9, '239. 809

480,000

9,906,900

31,314,255

1.5,383,798
11,128,676
2, 246, 358
26,312,000
30,000

48,000

769, 170

26,506,818

674,660

2, 510, 694
4,231,160
1,221,150

53,978,689
631,250
81,191,424
13,088,680
66,302,901
25,998,638
10,000

6,467,744
6, 156, 742
2,967,717

149,500
2,922,850
10, 469, 744

6, 247, 205

8,460,243
26,274,358
9,511,909

Value.

873,190
'21,193
12, 7'24
1,258,233
97,808
26, 742
4,218

288,668

334,869

22, 778

24,800

16,600

47,962

58,130

28,357

31,392

2,142,419

1,130, '2.57

18,180

143, 3'27

2, 137, 104

105, 895

75,066

40,000

7,000

160,066

'2,012,886

1,202,715

83,287

134,700

1,000

503,648

16,000

67,194

37,360

80,9.58

95,307
121,7%
70,343

80,832
19,9'22
345,277
482,580
416,005
393, 548
3,500

'29,689
27,103
32,634

19,300
34,486

144,868
25,402

603, 937

544,817

1,174,081

353,902

169,036

In considering the various items of this table, the
quantities given for the lead and sodium acetates, as also

for aluminum chloride, probably, fairly represent the
total production of these articles, since they are made
only in works which belong to "chemical indu,stries,"
and which have given fairly detailed reports. Still,
and this is true for all other cases, where these sub-
stances are made in small quantities, thej' maj' be, and
usually are, included in " chemicals not specilied," which
aggregates so large a value.

The quantities of aqua ammonia and of the various
ammonium salts enumerated are probably less than the
true amounts, since these are made in many industries,
some of which do not belong to the chemical category.
It is, however, reasonable to suppose that these figures
do cover the greater part of such product because, al-
though it has not been possible to get direct figures for
the quantity of ammonia liquors, produced by the gas
works, still most of these sell their liquors to outside
chemical works which have furnished figures of their
own production. Similarly, while some of the makers
of boneblack, and other industi'ies producing artimonia
liquors, were cla.ssified in other categories, most of their
ammonia product was refined elsewhere, and appears
in this tabulation.

The ammonium products reported, other than sul-
phate, and their contents in NH, (anhydrous ammonia)
are as follows:

Pounds. Pounds.

Ammonia, anhydrous liquid 2, 443, 729=NH, 2, 44.'5, 729

Ammonia, aqua, 20 per cent 28, 282, 700=NH3 5, 656, .540

All other ammonia salts 1, 894, 474=NHs 531,387

32,620,903 8,631,686

In addition to these figures, a certain amount of am-
monium nitrate, picrate, etc., has been made and con-
sumed in the explosive industry, and, moreover, it is
likely that not all of these products have been so re-
ported as to be identified and separated. It is, there-
fore, fair to assume that the total quantity of ammonium
products, other than sulphate, made in the United States
during the census year, and entering into consump-
tion, is equivalent to 10,000,000 pounds of anhydrous
ammonia.

The total reported quantity of ammonium sulphate
is as follows:

Pounds. Pounds.

From chemical industry 1 1,094, 5.54 =XH, 2,773,639

From chemical industry, consumed. 1, 681, 700=NH3 420,425

From coke industry 11, 984, 931=NH, 2,996,283

From other categories 216,000=NHs 54,000

24, 977, 185=NH, 6, 224, 347
Used by fertilizer industry 8, 239, 445=NH3 2, 059, 061

Available for other purposes . 16, 737, 740=NH3 4,165,286
Deficit Nils 5,834,714

Total required NH, 10,000,000

To supply this deficit, the coke industry reports in
addition, a production of ammonium liquor of 1,572,325
gallons which, at 8 pounds to the gallon and an average
of 18 per cent NH3, equals 2,517,720 pounds, leaving
3,316,994 pounds to be supplied either as ammonia
liquor, or sulphate, by the gas industry and by such
other industries as are not already included. Since the

qimntity contriliutod by this liist cliiss is compamtivf ly
very siimll,tlie 3,81(!,9!t4 pounds may ho taken iiw heinjj
furnished by the gas industry. The total amount of
aniinoiiiii produced by it is undoubtedly nuich greater.
t)ut it nuist be reiueinbered that, in many of the smaller
works, the local conditions are such that the ammonia
liquor can not be protital)ly utilized, and hence is run
to waste. Despite the demand for ammonium sulphate
for fertilizer purposes, it is not a simple matter to make
a sulphate suitable for this u.se, since the crude salt
contains sulphocyanate and other impurities which
must be removed, as they are highly deleterious to
vegetation. Such purification reipiires special skill and
can not be profitably undertaken unless the supply of
ci'ude material is sufficiently large to warrant the erec-
tion of the proper plant.

C'onsiderable (juantities of ammonia liquor and sul-
phate are made in Europe as by-products from the
gases of olast furnaces, and this i)r()duction will un-
doubtedly increase with the extending use of gas-driven
engines. This use requires that the furnace gases nuist
be carefully cooled and systematically washed, so that
the gas shall enter the engine with the miniumm of
impurities, as these rapidly destroy the working parts
of the combustion chambers. Where the gas h used
only for heating the stoves and for burning under
boilers, such purification is not necessary, and so far, no
serious attempt has been made here to produce am-
monium salts in blast-furnace work.

In considering the other items of this list, the quan-
tities of antimonj- salts and barium salts probably cover
the entire product. The quantity of bone ash reported
is undoubtedly less than the actual product, as is also
the case with calcium chloride, since none is reported
in the special census rejwrt on salt, although formerly
a large quantity was produced as a by-product in the
Ohio River salt region. The salt of this region con-
tains calcium chloride in place of the calcium sulphate
of the New York, Michigan, and other regions, and
owing to its presence the salt when made is "soft salt,"
slightly deliquescent and quickly dissolved. The north-
ern salt, which contains no calcium chloride, is "hard
salt" and dissolves much more slowly. Owing to its
ready solubility the "soft salt" was formerly preferred
in the South for curing meats, as it "struck in" faster,
hence there was a better chance of saving the meat in
the comparatively warm climate, where ice was unat-
tainable.

Calcium chloride is largely used in solution as the
circulating medium in the manufacture of ice and in re-
frigeration; also, to a subordinate extent, as an air drier
and in the manufacture of textile goods; also to some
extentas the solution used in charging fire extinguishers.
It reconunends itself for this last- mentioned use l)ecause
of the low freezing points of strong .solutions of the
salt. It is stated that a solution of calcium chloride of
1.25 specific gravity, and containing 27 per cent of the
salt, freezes at 32.6^ F., and that one at 1.175 specific
gravity, freezes at zero. It is, therefore, an easy matter

to prepare solutions which will not freeze at the lowest
winter temfjerature of the locality where used, and
hence be always ready for sen'ice in case of fire.

Chrome products, mainly bichromates of potash or
soda, fonn a considerable item in this li.st. Ten estab-
lishments reported making such products during the
census year. The industry has an especial interest,
because the methods of manufacture have been largely
developed in this country. The Ikltimore Chrome
Works, still the largest producer, began operations in
1845. which have been continued with great success up
to the pi-esent time.

The copperas reported is only a portion of the total
product, as the product of the met^illurgical works is
not included. It is made in large quantities by wire
mills galvanizing works from the "spent pickle." Be-
fore wire rods can be drawn or iron can be galvanized
the surface must be carefully cleaned, part of this work
being the pickling or immersion of the steel or iron
in a bath of moderately diluted sulphuric acid. This
dissolves the rust and also some of the metal, so that in
time the bath becomes spent, being then a .solution of
ferrous sulphate containing still much free acid. To
neutralize this acid, and at the same time to utilize an
otherwise waste material, the iron clippings and other
iron scrap of the shops are added to the pickle which
dissolves them. The solution is then evaporated and
allowed to crystallize. The crystals are removed and
the mother liquor used to make Venetian red, by treat-
ing it with lime. This causes a precipitation of calcium
sulphate mixed with hydrated oxide of iron, various
shades of color being obtained by regulating the pro-
portion of lime added and by subsequent treatment.

Cream of tartar, so extensively' used in baking
powders, is another large item. Eight establishments
reported making it, but the bulk of the business is done
bj- two of them.

This manufacture illustrates the refinements of which
chemical manufacture on a large scale is capable; for
the Tartar Chemical Co., at its works in Brooklyn,
N. Y., is producing cream of tartar by the ton in a
chemically pure condition.

The Epsom and Glauber's salts reported prolwibly
cover the production, but the figures for gU'cerine rep-
resent only a small part of the actual production, as
the product of only a few of the soap-making establish-
ments and other sources is here included.

Sodium silicate, or water gla.ss, is produced in large
quantities, as it is extensivelj' used in soap making,
calico printing, and fresco painting; for rendering cloth
and other draperies noinnflammable; as a preservative
for timber and porous stone; in the manufacture of
artificial stone and in making cements for glass and
pottery.

Sulphur chloride is used in vulcanizing caoutchouc;
sodium sulphide as a depilatory in tanning; and sodium
hyposulphate in photography, dyeing, and calico print-
ing, and for other purposes. The quantity of sulphites
reported is only a very small part of that actually made,

since the sulphite used in making paper pulp is usually
made and consumed in the works, and is not separately
reported.

The other items receive no special mention. The
quantities given are believed to fairly represent the
production of the country-, and their methods of prepa-
ration and uses may be found in the standard works on
technical chemistry.

Subgroup A. — In the course of this work schedules
were received from 19 establishments, whose principal
products were not originally classified in "chemicals,"
though the products were the result of operations of
a chemical nature. As such establishments are more
properly included in this category than in any other,
and 3'et can not well be placed in any of the regular
groups, it is deemed advisable to form a special sub-
group, XIX A, in which all such are included. Their
character and the extent of their operations are shown
in the following list:

PRODUCTS INCLUDED IN SUBGROUP A— Continued.

Camphor, refined .

Casein

Dextrin and sizes.

Milk sugar

Sliellac, refined ...
Sundry products . .

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments. I

Quantity.

Pounds.

598, 708

609,210

12,204,570

1,395,290

1,123,752

Value.

8254,190
30,336
221,995
110, 247
187, 333
176,92?

In addition, a number of establishments classified
under other groups report such substances as subprod-
ucts of their operations, the aggregate becoming con-
siderable both in quantities and values, and also
emphasizing the importance of care in the preparation
and correlation of schedules and in the collection of
returns.

At the beginning of this report a list has been given
of the principal topics included in the field of "chemi-
cal technology," and it has been indicated how far these
have been separately treated of in the present census.
Referring to this list, it will be ob.served that no pro-
vision was made for taking .special returns of establish-
ments manufacturing certain important products, such
as glue, soap, starch, etc., noted below, the general
schedule for manufactures, No. 3, being used for this
purpose.

The following list of the products included in this
group, while fairly correct for the special industries
enumerated above, must therefore, for all of the other
items, be taken as representing only a portion of the
total product of such articles throughout the country
during the census year.

PRODUCTS INCLUDED IN SUBGROUP A.

Boiler compounds

Bone black

Brandy

Camphor, refined .

Caramel

Casein

Cement

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments.

Unit.

Barrels .
Tons

Quantity.

200
18,100

Pounds.
Pounds.
Pounds .
Tons....

625,128

1,736,000

609,210

10,150

Value.

$6,400
586,736

14,561
264.830

87,000
30.9.'vl
82,500

Chemical compounds, sundry

Cider

Dextrine, sizes, etc

Disinfectants

Extracts, flavoring

Filler, crown

Filler for fertilizing

Gelatine

Glue

Gum compound

Gvpsum, precipitated ,

Ink

Licorice extract

Milk sugar, refined

oils for textile work ,

Paste, or fiour

Pyrites cinder

Residues, factory

Shellac, refined

Soaps, etc

Starch

Wax, sealing

Number
of estab-

lish-
ments.

Unit.

Quantity.

Value.

Pounds I 19,106,784

Gallons.

Tons

Pounds .
Pounds .
Pounds .
Tons

6,000

2,963

14,677

922,261

11,0^9,408

336,012

1,264

Pounds .
Pounds .
Pounds .
Pounds.
Tons....

1,178,226

1,375,290

133,300

Pounds .

Pounds.
Pounds .

62, 701
'i,'832,'296'

1,372,889
111,500

8102,228

563

470, 518

1,865

60,000

3B, 931

35,000

251, 872

701, 596

38,716

1,264

41,000

89,610

110,290

7,000

15,042

105,631

15,637

817,585

207,716

30,890

12,400

3,726,292

Miscellaneous. — The examination of schedules for
tabulation has furnished a large amount of products
which are not chemical, and therefoi'e would not be
included in our returns, except that they are side prod-
ucts of establishments belonging to this category. In
addition, there are values such as "custom work," in-
creasing the profits of an establishment, and the " bonus"
paid by cities to garbage-reduction works, which is
necessary to the existence of such works.

The following list shows the variety and value of
these articles, quantities being given where possible,
and may be useful as supplementing the returns for
such products so far as these may be separately reported:

Number
of estab-
lish-
ments.

Unit.

Quantity.

Value.

Apples, evaporated

1
1
2
1
2
1
3
3
6
9

7
1
1
7

3
3

2
6

Pounds

Case

Pounds

Dozens

35,000
47,000

755,806
13,718

200,000
350

81,100

1,364

84,068
30 865

Birdseed

7,600

Brushes

8,000
68,440
181,475
161,790

Candles

Pounds

1,792,075

213,675

5,000

189,021

79 940

Corks . ..

Custom work

Dent^il plaster

Fish, edible

3,864,000
2,000

77,270

Barrels

8 000

Flo\ir

2,000

2,400

1,034,248

158 198

Tons

200

Grease, tallow, etc .

Hides

Horns, hoofs, etc

22 443

7,200
2,100

15,000

Hay, mint

Tons

6,356

74 '>18

Mirrors

Oils:

Animal

655,363
222,9'.'9
207 155

Fish

Gallons

Pounds

1,135,264

460,344

6,051,400

2,265,352

Linseed

Cake

60 514

31,528

Potterv, chemical ..

462

Pounds

112,894

5, 815

Rooting materials

438, 779

62,859
42 918

Sundries:

Metallic

Mineral

12,400

34,123

8 780

Wax, modeling'

Pounds

25,000

Total

84,175.686

The foreign commerce, in substances treated of in this
group, is set forth in the following tables, compiled from
the publications of the Bureau of Statistics of the
United States Treasury Department:

IMPORTS FOR CONSUMPTION FOR THE YEARS ENDING JUNE 80, lWl-1900.

IWi.
1893.
1894.
1H95.
1896.
1)197.
1898.
1899.
1900..

AQOA, OR WATIR AM-
MOMIA.

Pounda.

376, 7M

Vftlne.

•12.888

8,1M

AmOMIA, CARBONATE
or, MDRIATIC OR SAL-
AMMOmAC, AND tVL-
PHATB or.

PoBOdl.

24,831,118
14,275,882
18,7M,«I9
7,8t8,848
19,888,879
80,fi2S,S18
24,891,808
20.fi9ft,623
19.228,811
22, 18ft. 985

Value.

1740, 6«7
472,278
680,222
809,701
668,146
804,671
576,152
456,273
520,752
684,901

rOTAIH, CHROMATB
AHD BICBROMATS.

Pounds.

Valo*.

•ODA, BICHROMATK
AKO CHROMATB.

Ponndi.

1,284,085
1,058,521

969,067
1,009,499
2,024,776
1,444,716
1,366,074
1,016,029
1,099,098 ,

645,188

•95.951
81,287
79. 174
83,420
173,139
129,389
112.783
79,495
75,2.'>4
41,449

545.456
706,246
671,503
267,397
600.600
566,631
319,641
296,549
598.262
474,654

VrIoc

131,565
44,091
44.183
17,657
40,321
38,103
22,070
19,027
29,861
21,962

ABOAI. OB ABOOL, OB
CBVDl TABTAB.

Poundi,

21,579,102
24,813,171
28,770,810
22,878,180
27,911,122
28,4X1,665
23. 1.W.576
741.150

VbIo*.

82,197,507 i
2.216,525
2,341,575
I.W4,200

i,tm,7ao

2,724,709

1,967,042

65.1.M

ABaoU, OB WINE Lin.

VBloa.

18.461,479
28. 800. 7*2
27.t8»,4SI

$1,526,878
1,914,460
2,888,698

WITRATl or POTASH OB
SALTPETEB, CRUDE.

Pounds.

1881.
1892.
1898.
18M.
1885..
1896.
1897.
1898..

1900!'

040,787

251,514
560,599
671.217
73.'), 290
"58,974
719, 876

985, .'iO,')
332.836

Value.

t459,084
43.5,839
4te, 6(i<i
■251,418
246,552
389, .524
406,761
270,291
409,818
269,739

NITRATE or aODA,

Tons.

100,428
109,863
91,661
88,079
124,803
127,667
83,331
125,081
122,314
184,247

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

*2, 928, 874
2,976,816
8,062,715
2,785,048
4,124,712
8,870,724
2.640,389
2,729,750
2,064,805
4,786,807

18,975,577
14,197,549
16, .540, 213
8,321,853
13,488,825
21, 1.58, 829
12,717,098
12,274,987
15, 665, 2.52
27,943,106

•996,686

831.810

898,686

519,296

784,613

1,472,802

1,182,099

774.709

1.024,131

2,1.55,414

CAMPHOB. BXriHED.

Pounds.

56,820
156,291
137,882
271,164
IS8.912
349,994
170,406

90,743
109,971

Value.

•21
17,361
.51,229
44,233
88,882
68,786
84,539
54,602
28,806
42.901

DIXTBIN, BPBNT

BTABCH, oim scnnn-

TOTE,
QUM.

OR BRITISH

Pounds.

6,819,

8,275,
4,6.50,
3,968,

4.874,
3,787,
3,402,
5,960,

Value.

•212,968
137,408
161,480
121.963

124,719
108,919
99,056
169,470

IRON. SCLPHATB Or,
OB COPPEBAS.

Pounds. Value.

806,987
496,596

1,010,089
927,162
542,316

1,123,443

991,000

260.270

127,041

2,700

•4,103
2,597
4,099
3,619
1,344
4,161
6,925
1,087
606
111

1891 .
1892.
1898.
1894.
1896.
1896.
1897.
1896.
1899.
1900.

Brown, acetate of. Wblte, acetate of.

Poundii.

2,902

3,510
30,154
26,020
6,006
3,487
18,192

Value.

1123

154
934
860
257
188
711

Pounds.

13,279
1,230
2,185
3,217
.59,399
48,060
8,122
8,594
6,146
4,0)8

Value.

•707
101
154
220
2,822
1,873
190
231
337

MAONKSIA, SULPHATE
OF, OR EPSOM SALTS.

Pounds.

16,370
31,742
61,337
59,294
660
100,8,59
240,573
91, 137
74,186
377,274

Value.

•206
360
480
402
16
691

1,122
614
626

2,168

MILK, SDOAB or.

Pounds.

251,406
236.869
98,785
31,346
14,117
16,365
17,117
1,844
4,064
2,378

Value.

•42,
34,
12,

3,
1,
2,

BEriNED SULPHUR.

Tons.

5
48
122
305
430
56
227
186

Value.

•6,579

118
1,255
2,392
5,388
9,111
1,642
5.802
4,470

SULPHATE or COPPER,
OR BLUE TITBIOL.

Pounds. Value.

3,432

2,189

8,941

2.470

24.5.787

876, 401

192,114

12.302

15.961

2.184

•810
166
363
140

5,481
28,792

6,797
618
1«I
lU

1891.
1892.
1893.
1894.
1896.
1896.
1897.
1896.
1899.
1900.

HYPOSULPHITE OF
SODA.

Pounds.

6,965,581
11,007,111
10,686,997

8,676,361

Value.

•74,501
98,733
94,634
78,591

NITRITK OF SODA.

Pounds. Value.

156

5,456

806,386

15,8

•87
298

I SILICATE OF SODA, OR
PHOSPHATE OF SODA. OTHER ALKALINE

SILICATES.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds. Value.

606,373
1,436,171
3,723,907
2,226,885

•9.045
24,599 :
59,175
43,817 I

.535,080
571,153
608,228
485,435
492,207
.580,310
600,132
417, 476
527,531
1,306,782

•6,429
7,090
6,991
.5,054
4,562
5,277
5,468
3,971
4,266
9,586

SULPHATE OF SODA OR
GLAUBER'S SALTS.

Pounds.

Value.

SULPHATE or SODA.
SALT OR NITER CAKE.

Pounds. Value.

274,784 :
187,396 I
489,796 :
924,874
49,414

,916,486
612,026
732,094
519,080

,028,240

927,804
4fi^878
180.349
791,586
248.332
692,755
748,600
228.000
984,940
382,260

131,900
221,846
43,988
107.4.59
71,801
86.5)0
20, 682
20, M9
29,«B(

No. 210 7

Table 1.— FERTILIZERS:

2
3
4

5
6
7
8
9
10

11
12

13
14

15
16

17
18

19
20

21
22
23
24

25
26

40
41
42
43
44
45
46

47
48
49
50
51
52

58
54
55
56
57
68
59
60
61
62
63
64
66
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
76
76

78
79
80
81
82
88
84

86
W
87

Number of establishments .^

Character of organization: W

Indi vidual

Firm and limited partnership

Incorporated company

Capital:

Total

Land

Buildings

Machinery, tools, and implements

Cash and sundries

Proprietors and firm members

Salaried officials, clerks, etc.:

Total number

Total salaries

Officers of corporations —

Number

Salaries

Genera! superintendents, managers, cl'^rks, etc. —

Total number

Total salaries

Men-
Number

Salaries

Women —

Number

Salaries

Wage-earners, including pieceworkers, and total wages:

Greatest number employed at any one time during the year

Least number employed at any one time during the year

Average number

Wages

Men, 16 years and over-
Average number

Wages

Women, 16 years and over —

A verage number

Wages

Children, under 16 years —

Average number

Wages

Miscellaneous expenses:

Total

Rent of works

Taxes, not including internal revenue

Rent of offices, insurance, interest, and all sundry expenses not hith-
erto Included.

Contract work

Materials used:

Total cost

Pish, thousands

Cost

Kainit, tons

Cost

Limestone, tons

Cost ;

Phosphate rock, tons

Cost

Pyrites, tons

Cost

Acids —

Sulphuric, tons

Coat

Nitric, pounds

Cost

Acid phosphate, tons

Cast

Ammonia-
Aqua, pounds

Coat

Sulphate, pounds

Cost

Bones, tan kage, and offal

Common salt, tons

Cost

Cotton seed and meal

Lime, bushels

Cost

Nitrate of potash, tons

Cost

Nitrate of soda, tons

Cost

Potash salts

Sulphur, tons

Cost

Tallow and fats

■ All other components of products

Fuel

Rent of power and heat

Mill supplies

All other materials

Freight

Products:

Aggregate value

Acids-
Sulphuric, 50 Baum^, tons

Value

Sulphuric, 60 Baum<;, tons

Value

Sulphuric, 66 Baum4, tons

Value

Other acids :

.Sodas —

Sal soda, tons

Value

Other soda products

United States.

Alabama.

California.

Connecticut.

Delaware.

422

136
103
183

2
9

6
2

7
1
3

860,685,753
88,6.59,641
88,930,424
87,092,354

$41,003,334
361

81,407,323
$18,118
822.5,500
$17,5, .518
$988, 187
32

8647. .506
879,476

8128, 210
$.59,314

$380, .506
3

$382, 518
830. 00«
$48, 669
$'16,766

8237,083
8

$496,784
$l:), 500
$82, .567
$103,639
$297, 078
9

1,712
82,124,972

60
$61,975

16
$20,148

$28,063

17
$16,685

243
$662,741

10
821,700

$7,500

4
87,200

3
$5,000

1,469
$1,462,231

.50
$40,275

12
$12,648

26
$20,863

811,685

1,381
$1,420,596

48
$39,476

11
$12,168

21
$19,460

13
$11,205

88
$41,635

2
$800

1
$480

5
81,403

1
$480

20,267

7,202

11,581

$4,185,289

840

260

439

$94,965

$40,138

212

133

$53,708

393
69

148
$50,5.53

11,435
$4,142,853

439
$94,965

70
$40,138

118
$48,319

148
$50,553

131
$39,463

15
$2,973

83, 734, 285

896,605

$288,006

$3,326,181

20
$6,889

$92, 704

8900

$22,924

$68,880

817,638
81,430
81,403

$14,805

$19,784

8400

$1,164

$18,190

818,137

850

$1,043

$17,044

$23,493

$28,968,473

4,589,632

$183,542

54,700

8520,833

7.1.58

87,322

806,445

$3,554,174

288,778

$1,466,285

231,527

81,355,382

1,075

841

286,898
82,176,245

$1,387,385

$482,818

$228,242

17,560

$25,189

200

$7,500

$399,642

200,000

$40,000

1,461

$16,235

2,106

$7.52

2,062

$7,5«9

13,048
$132,172

23,940

8244,216

9,520

862 600

1,166
$12,462

17
$143

600
85,000

2,075
$82,000

231
$1,736

1,972
$11,824

68,385
$169,820

1,800
$25,000

3,226

$28, 248

21,262
$154,292

2,620

$681

8,239,446

$186,609

89,766,73,5

481

82,211

8167,410

13,130

$887

884

$32,156

19, .518

$709, 841

83,098,400

12,728

$268,670

$28,500

$1,029,163

$797,639

817, 603

$175, ,507

$2,213,182

$1, 199. 455

844,657,385

2,303,000

860,709

8176,956

$340,611

$88,514

$51,708

$80,218

252

$9,800

$31,270

810

$18,000

999
831,868
898,484

263
$6,102

409
$14,112

827,726

58
82,312

838,861

$1,200

$12,390
$19,622
81,032
$10, 743
8131,265
8118 826

$6,425
$7,707
$1,112
$2,077
$21,917

$10,664

$6,368

$50

$860

$9,254

$7, 879

84,368

87,150

8262

82,790

$29,613

$31,706

$2,068,162

$670,517

$390,805

$738,708

65, 747

8380,691

1,388

$13,678

2,417

844,019

2,934
828,000

634

$12,680

$277

$1,245

SUMMARY BY STATES, 1900.

Dlatrlct o( Columbia.

PloriiU.

QeorvU.

IlUnolt.

Indlaiw.

KUMM.

Kmtockr.

1 ■ "

l/oubilsna.

1
4

$783, 3a>
$92,164
$13K, IK)
$109,748
$386,272
4

29
$26,781

8
$9,166

21
$17,666

18
$16,266

3
$1,800

242

117

$39,961

114

$39. .Ml

11
10
20

(t, on, 618
hs7,762

r, 044, 804
$661,1X4

$4,819,918
39

114
$147,018

1.S
$42,376

99
$104,043

97
$103,683

2
$960

2.125

624

1.128

$2»t.887

1.121
r293.887

2
1

$1,632,606

$200,200

$213,200

$84,810

$1,134,296

62
$74,960

3
$9,000

$65,960

17
$66,000

2
$960

438

308

337

$172.2.'i0

287
$154,250

.50
$18,000

7
6

r215,K76
$8,676
$26,360
$30,600
$160,330
19

18
$11,640

4
$4,900

14
$6,740

12
$6,840

2
$400

104

n8,640

45
$18,640

•

$229,733
$19,000
(66.480
(44,448
$99,886
1

6
(6.300

(186, (74

(40,788

(247,686

16
(17,660

$9,600

12
$8,060

$7,460

2
$600

166

$39,788

89
$39,738

•

n.(B0,l«2
(46, 8M

^420

rw,4»2

t9S,0N6
122,000
111,000
n8,686
$43,500
8

7
$1,788

27
(61.107

10
(80,000

17
(21,107

17
(21.107

U
12

7
$1,738

7
$1,783

6
$6,800

16
U

17
18

$9,061

242

166
(70.882

166

$70,882

410

179

778

$87,280

269
$88,656

19
$8,600

21
22
2S
24

2S
20

:::;::::::::::;::::::::::::::;:;;:::;;;:

3
$460

$34,080
$1,496
$2,307

$30,228

6
$1,000

$406,936

$4,261

$36,174

$3«),376

$126

$2,349,636

8ft

$2,617

$1,210

$100

$1,307

$84,997

$40

$2,833

$82, 124

$9,602
$1,100
$1,389
r,118

$6(2.380

$40

$2,000

$60,340

$16,608
(2,400
$2,938

$11,170

$108,720

$265

$1,116

$102,839

81
32
83
34

$80,273

$330,649

$1,005,731

$159,089

$411,139

$166,215

(014,481

30
87

ti,sia

723
$8,640

10,205
$98,181

1,888

(17,416

$64

15,180

$64,015

2.457

$13,088

8.040
$82,177

3.177
$17,473

300
$1,800

120.981

$417,037

37,879

$213,466

24.202
$133,207

10,280
$69,820

.5.626
$17,804

9,280
$81,468

320
$4,100

8,000
$84,440

4.814

$32,187

$14. .vn

6,647
$48,447

30. 306
$276,183

.5,366
$48,3,52

1,106
$12, 180

760

r.iio

1.910
$20,700

17.419
$164,627

61
62

600,000

$16,000

$96,926

$48

30.000

$900

$,'534,781

$100

$78,192

1,000.000
$31,000
$.540,785

$24,123

$123,706

(296,496

$66,060

$216,218

140

$660

$9,000

.59

$676

$8,680

269
$9,619
$64,300

1.333

$60,086

$136,906

360

$8,760

.500
$19,000
*79,87»

89
$4,600
$6,400

$1,702

$16,044

2,027

$61,627

$1,628

(17,647

07
08

$1,236

$260
$206

$78,980

$6,828

-OS

$2,088
$23,389
$8,306

$900,239

90
$623

$28,146
$62,698

$7,407
$48, M

$1,440
$2.»)0

(8,878
(16,700
$13,600

(8,170
(1»,201

$18,887
$4,380

$636

$17,970

$11,461
$192,417
$117,181

$8,307,863

866

$6,436

$2,904
$86,930

$846
$8,375
$8,875

$266,331

$1,390
(4,6«1
$6,387

$121,345

$3,745
(49.284

75
70

$1,886,160

(649, »«8

(m,6ei

$8,960

208

$8,736

(11.214

$210

'■

i :

I-"-:::: ::::::::i::::::::::;:::::::::

., ::..::..:..:.::. ::::::i::.:.:..:..:....:;:.i ::i....::.;:..: :.

(840

100

Table 1.— FERTILIZERS: SUMMARY

Number of establiphmcnts

Character of organization:

Individual

Firm and limited partnership

Incorporated company

Capital:

Total

Land

Buildings

Machinery, tools, and implements

Cash and sundries ■

Proprietors and firm members

Salaried officials, clerks, etc.:

Total ;uimber

Total salaries

Officers of corporations—

N umber

Salaries

General superintendents, managers, clerks, etc.—

Total number

Total salaries

Men-
Number

Salaries

Women —

Number

Salaries :

Wage-earners, including pieceworkers, and total wages:

Greatest number employed at any one time during the year

Least number employed at any one time during the year

Average number

Wages

Men, 16 years and over-
Average number

Wages

Women, 16 years and over —

Average number

Wages

Children, under 16 years-
Average number .-

Wages

Miscellaneous expenses:

Total

Rent of works

Taxes, not including internal revenue

Rent of offices, insurance, interest, and all sundry expenses not hith-
erto included.

Contract work

Materials used:

Total cost

Fish, thousands

Cost

Kainit, tons

Cost

Limestone, tons

Cost

Phosphate rock, tons

Cost

Pyrites, tons

Cost

Acids —

Sulphuric, tons

Cost

Nitric, pounds

Cost

Acid phosphate, tons

Cost

Ammonia —

53 Aqua, pounds

54 Cost

55 Sulphate, pounds

56 Cost

57 Bones, tankage, and offal

,«>8 Common salt, tons

59 Cost

60 Cotton seed and meal

61 Lime, bushels

62 Cost

63 Nitrate of potash, tons

64 Cost

65 Nitrate of soda, tons

66 Co.st

67 Potash salts

68 Sulphur, tons

69 ■ Cost

70 Tallow and fats

71 All other components of products

72 Fuel

73 Rent of power and heat

74 Mill supplies

75 All other materials

76 Freight

Products:

77 Aggregate value

Acids—

78 Sulphuric, 50 Baum^, tons

79 Value

80 Sulphuric, 60 Baumi5, tons

81 Value

82 Sulphuric, 66 Baum6, tons

88 Value

84 Other acids

Sodas—

85 Salsoda, tons

fig Value

87 Other soda products

5
6
7
8
9
10

11
12

13
14

15
16

17
18

19
20

21
22
23
24

23
26

27
28

29
30

31
32
S3
34

Maine.

S49,3.y)

81,050
$4,900
826,400
817,000
1

2
83,400

2
$3,400

$6,990

Maryland.

11
12
17

$7, 003, 376

$713,011

$965,287

$1,108,947

$4,216,131

212

$245,528

42
$98,892

170
$146,6:?6

162
$143,389

8
$3,247

1,983

758

1,016

8457, 692

1,010
$455,576

$2,116

Massachusetts.

82, 120

$220
$1,900

$22,190

5,000

$1,500

160

81,500

330

$4,600

85,580

$354, :i44

$34,846

■ $35,054

8284,444

3, 643, 846

12,000

$16,500

6,895

858,547

123,562

$562, 861

41,075

$179,259

24,747
$146,009

29,571
$237, Ml

278, 521

$7,939

81,159,28.1

140

8700

83, 2.60, 030
$130, 179
$•227, 967
$396, 601

$2,476,283
7

171
$186,685

2
825,000

169
8161,685

153
$153,563

16
$8,132

349

161

227

$116,083

226
$114,619

1
$464

Mississippi.

8353,497
817, 322
840,000
857, 162

$239, 013

$199,787

$4,126

$15,209

$180, 432

$1,115,818

$133

18, 722

$131,7:!4

9,0)4

$43, 459

1,600
$11,600

1,076
Ml

6.853
$62,368

200,000

$6,600

$402, 020

$72

38
$1,600
$2,480

82,310
$250

$265

$1,430

$875

$40,002

2,668
$95, 602
$436, 219

6,277
$141,281

$81,863
$56,762
8100
$32, 845
$310, 329
$120, 224

$5,481,903

19, 912
$118,185

$406

$16

3,120

8112, 176

$■209, 755

$8,823
$13, 674

$7, 322
$92. 993
$14,130

$2,074,590

15
818,660

6
$6,150

9
812,600

9
812,500

172
46
94

$32,800

Missouri.

$40,186

$6,067
$34,119

8342,389

3,234
$35,800

9,000
822,000

4,000
$28,000

800
$5,000

7,892
867, 178

893,046

150
$6,400
$18,660

$8,-2»0
$3, 376

$5, l."0
$34,000
816,600

$492,772

$219,201
$20,767
$46, 9.37
$37, 607

$113,870
1

812,907

4
83,935

$8,972

$8,120

$852

81
50
60

$27,986

$27, .390

1
$396

836, 449
$300
$7S3

$30,714

$4, 652
$137,306

40
$400

6:W
$1,819

432
$2,935

173
$1,748

$64,690

$1,340

$47,968
$7,608

8439

$236,638

BY STATES, 1900— Continued.

101

New York.

North Carolina.

Ohio.

PennajrlvanlB.

Sooth Carolina.

TanncMee.

Vtlflllto.

AllaUMr(M(ai.i

11
S

•'

(616,545
•21,144

•120,883

126.811

247,207

19
•26.898

5
•10.600

14
•18,398

13
•16.670

1
•728

286

168

218

•110.857

218
•110.867

11
8
9

•5,690,270
»66,.'>85
(808,382
»6.S2,477

•3,872,826
30

166
•230,330

21
•88,130

134

•142,200

r26

tl3«. 746

8
(6.454

1.308

7.W

962

•441. 1T7

929
•432.4.51

30
•7,894

8
(832

•312,500
•11,069
•18,429

•282,268

•784

•8.146,022

14,118

•9,765

486

•4,382

17
8
12

»4,eOO,,V)9

•462,071

r20,629

•1,012,878

•2,415,481

192
•211,207

20
•59,770

172
•161,437

158
•144,887

•6,670

2,001

784

1,033

•491,898

1,083
•491,898

1
7
10

•2,818,921

•911,534

•408,281

•213,508

•2,102,598

51
•65,838

•29,823

40
•36,015

t
t

•1.887,937

•98,762

•273,879

C«6,003

(1,179,293

80
•103,608

18
•26,860

67
•76,758

62
r4,098

6
•2,660

868

246

400

•173,888

394
•171,768

5
•2,000

1
•120

•112,317
•1,044

ts,e26

•107,447

•200

•1,016,501

700

•2,800

2, .530

•21.360

•160

28,516

•114,172

5,000

•13,000

21,328
•143,806

22
16
18

(3,802,794
•490.711
•681,845
(508,872

•2,121,866
43

167
•200,755

16
•57,708

■ 151

•143,047

140
•137,608

11
•5,439

956

692

766

•351,873

764
(361,773

2
1
19

•10,. 505, 043

•109.441

•1,642.600

•487.117

•8,265,886

85
•164,716

9
•35,976

76
•128,740

75
•128,600

1
•240

3,068
754

1,772
H79.449

1,772
•479,449

•
12
IS

•4,908,(81
•164. S28
•679,504
•488,402

•3.681.087
85

112
•141,872

22
•54,266

•87,606

89
•87,156

1
•460

2,286

487

1,171

•820,774

1,171
•820,774

1
1

2
8

•HO, 397
•76,947

•818,519
•68,889

•491,592
4

45
•48,668

7
•19,800

38
•29,268

37
•28,788

1
•480

747

201

443

•94,101

443
•94,101

1
4

6
8
7
8

(
10

11
13

IS
14

16
18

17
18

1«

790

242

427

•109,192

426
•109,117

21
22
28
24

26
28

1
•75

•108,209

•39

r7,535

(90,625

•10

•1,044,267

4,215,600

•18.668

967

•9.587

1,815

•2,400

38,858

•160,564

16,684

•88,818

8,402
•19,061

1
(100

•238,324
•15,023
•10,414

•203,364

(9, .523
(2,584,272

•317,826

r,410

•20,420

•289.846

•ISO

•1,909,168

•675,589

«,050

•53,200

•621,339

•110,963

•306,382

•6,187

•27.040

•272,844

(311

(2,161,423

104.754

•57,4.51

1,107

•10,781

1,666

•2,000

82,482

•290,778

35,988

•147,312

16,211
•99,236

•61, 276
•1,920
•1,905

•49,663

•7,788

•362,221
20,000
•11,669

•2,713
•106,240

33
34

1^f>

•8,107,710

•790,101

i,268

•15,075

169

r66

20.834

•142.701

5,940

•30.611

16,559
•113,662

i.265

(11,479

1,100

•3.50

33,413

•200,320

9,114
•71,226

168

r2«

10
•02

85,293

•397,982

14,064

•74,916

60,082
•262,099

141,464

•565,861

83,272

•399,010

4,469
•24,632

36,431
•118,067

20,668
•155,428

310
•2,412

43
44
45

3,5,057
(193, 7.59

646
8,429

47
48
49

12,551
•119,061

18,123
•154,685

10,256
•87,276

8.774
•82,519

15,600
(137,548

12,702
•121,141

1,200
(9,000

14,646
•130,626

730,000

•21,900

•567,892

•86

20O
•1,696

61
52

726,300

•20,246

•1,104,361

22,624
r21,316
•588.«4

•336

60.000

•1,600

•354,015

2,400,000
•800

(249,169

1
(60

.55

•344,183

•50

(1,094,136

(200

•1,061,977

•141,576

.57

1,343

•225

•200

1,199

•41,884

•279,899

1,740

•29,680

11,430
(600

357

•62

877

•81,880

1,774

•64,901

•205,327

tt7

•60

336

•11,650

•36,633

(30

•1,000

•46,456

(20,348

2,097

•71,770

•626,341

600

•12,100

745

•28,609
•105,866

667
(26.729
•829,619

2,168
•82,669
•310,118

489
•19,707
•114,224

116

•8.021

•11,880

•27,500
•290,702

•54,414
•130

•14,101
•162,031

•40,654

•8.644,320

•141,664
•49,966

•79,737

•196,602

•97

(21,074

•185,769

•6,987

•3,147,894

610

•4,060

•188

1,575
•22,603

•8,145
•23.703
(600
(13,683
•86,138
•36,669

•1,407,625

•99,456

•88,786

•19,014
•17,071

•78,424
•55^668

noo

•7,180
•170,017
•284,378

•8.415,850

309

•1,699

1,205

r,230

•26.189
•20.698

71
78

(14,989
•160,116
•187,874

•4,290,629

(6,353
•96,158
•75,873

•1,667,068

•6,909

•223,276

•63,750

•4,882,506

41,088
•225, 608

•2.643
•88,140
•102,819

•1,486,288

•1.865
•16.976
•6.080

•828. S72

74
75
76

18
•277

'Includes establishments distribated as follom: Iowa, 1; Michigan, 1:
Virginia, 2.

UlnneaoU, 1: Nebraska, 1: Ongon, 1; Rhode Island, 1; Texas. 2: Washington, 1; Wot

102

Table 1.— FERTILIZERS: SUMMARY

100
101
102
103

104
106
106

107
108

109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118

119
120

121
122
123
124

125
126
127
128
129

Product»— Continued.

Aggregate value — Continued.
Fertilizers —

Total value

Superphosphates —

From minerals, bones, etc., tons

Value

Ammoniated, tons

Value

Complete, tons

Value

All other, tons

Value

Chemicals, not otherwise specified —

Epsom salts, pounds

Value

Value of all other products

Products consumed:

Sulphuric acid, tons ,

Acid phosphate, tons

Charcoal, nushels

All other products consumed, pounds

Comparison of products:

Number of establishments reporting for both years

Value for censu.s year

Value for preceding business year

Power:

Number of establishments reporting

Total horsepower

Owned —

Engines —

Steam, number

Horsepower

Gas or gasoline, number

Horsepower

Water wheels, number

Horsepower

Electric motors, number

Horsepower

Other power, number

Horsepower

Rented—

Electric, horsepower

Other kind, horsepower

Establishments clas.sified by number of persons employed, not including pro-
prietors and firm members:

Total number of establ ish men ts

No employees

Under 5

6 to 20

21 to 50

61 to 100

101 to 250

251 to 500

501 to 1,000

United States,

140, 445, 661

923, 198

$8,471,943

142, 898

J2, 349, 388

1,436,682

$2.5,446,046

291,927

M, 178, 284

1,400,000

810,500

$3,749,890

571,831

88,964

14,600

36,512,386

329

$31,249,688
$27,420,663

361
39,621

591
37, 121

30
410

16
359

841

220
480

81
160
68
43
63
17
1

Alabama, California,

$1,942,708

38,246

$369, 587

2,000

$35,000

92, 2,53

$1,433,3.55

6,670

$104, 766

$100,454
22,020

18, 200, 000

11
$1,762,700
$1,627,287

17
1.450

27
1,360

$586,687

17, .570

$M1, 187

2, .561

$45,500

$71,150
538

$670,617
$640,828

7
416

340

Connecticut, i Delaware.

$313,610

1,000
$23, 000

7, 326
$205, 931

2,752
$84,679

$77,195

7
$344,605
$354, 160

7
834

6
245

$634,213

2,385
$28,250

17,180
$283, 873

30,377
$322,090

$104,490

9
$460,213
$401,881

775

19
705

1U3

BY STATES, 1900-Continued.

UlatrlctofColumblii.

•71.480

Florida.

G«i»|te.

Illlnoll.

ladiaiw.

Kadmi.

Kcntookjr.

UmliiUna.

•496.642

9.3M
•83, WO

•3,240,804

131,608

•1,076.681

14.603

•229,271

101,219

•1.663.653

26,606

•371,799

•1,721,760

26,108

•313,860

4.160

•58.100

43.483

•836.336

23.433

•614,476

«as,8U

86ft

•10, 006

•600

5,760
•116,280

6,431
•109,060

•649,943

8.978

•160.49*1

6.858

•126.746

10,000

•200,000

4. .585

•63.700

•296,620

•866.201

29,244
•2n,821

18,087
•231.699

2.'. 842

•367. 181

300

•8.600

W
99

M
96

3.160

•64.800

449

•6.680

1.5.485

•377.63.5

1.315

•25,167

17.816
•296.520

•7,460

•2,764
7,065

•121,613

78,6.55

•133,400

•19,496

•26, 726

•26.606'

17.7)8
3,026

101

102

380,000

7
•500,239
•438,292

5
412

8
400

•

108

6
•78,930
•73,300

2
8fi

20
•1,432,461
•1.317.770

32
3.823

■54
3,795

•514.660
•392,860

1,315

1,316

13
•254,571
•211,270

14
666

628

8
•649,943
•421,928

2
820

2
320

4
•321.246
•293.629

488

7
483

6
•896,351
•617,632

<
828

11
796

IM
10&
106

107

loe

109

112

1 .

114

■■^ 2"

2
81

118

300

121

1
4

1
1
4

2
14
10
8
6
1

2
- 1

4
9
1

123

2
I

t
2

124

2
2

125

126

128

104

Table 1.— FERTILIZERS: SUMMARY

100
101
102
103

104
105
106

107
108

109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118

119
120

121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129

Products — Continued.

Aggregate value — Continued.
Fertilizers —

Total value

Superphosphates —

From minerals, bones, etc., tons ,

Value

Ammoniated, tons

Value

Coinplete, tons

Value

All other, tons

Value

Chemical, not otherwise specified—

Epsom salts, pounds

Value

Value of all other products

Products consumed:

Sulphuric acid, tons

Acid phosphate, tons

Charcoal, bushels

All other products consumed. j>ounds

Comparison of producU^:

Number of establishments reporting for both years

Value for census year

Value for preceding business year

Power:

Number of establishments reporting

Total horsepower

Owned —
Engines-
Steam, number

Horsepower

Gas or gasoline, number

Horsepower

Water wheels, number

Horsepower L

Electric motors, number

Horsepower

Other power, number

Horsepower

Eented—

Electric, horsepower

Other kind, horsepower

Establishments clas.sified by number of persons employed, not including pro-
prietors and firm members:

Total number of establishments

No employees

Under .")

6 to 20

21 to 50

51 to 100

101 to 250

261 to 500

501 to 1,000

Maine.

$27,902

828

821,602

1,000

86,300

Maryland, Massachusettfi. Mississippi. Missouri.

85,174,357

124,444

81,176,099

48,608

8690, 671

183, 705

82,977,015

27,017

8330,572

812, 100

2
$28,002

828,500

8188,958
94,490

5,823,200

34
83,936,185
83,731,268

3,647

51
3,268

4
75

2
44

7
205

82,060,575

1,282
812,820

76,571

81,940,605

4,280

8107, 150

$14,015
18,590

$2,073,910
$1, 517, 852

7
1,217

26
785

382

8492,772

7,200
850,400

30,604
8442,372

9,000
9,000

8492, 772
8429,000

3
415

4
415

8139,395

2,766
$44,248

2,774
839,039

2,354
856,108

$97,240

$236,635
8234, 176

6
609

BY STATES, 1900— Continued.

105

New Jersey.

New York.

North Carolina.

Ohio.

Fennnylvanla.

South OaroUna.

Teoneaee.

Virginia.

All othn itatw.!

(8,703,712

106,135

(887,020

7,283

(69. ,580

126,839

(2.629,611

8,039

(127.601

(2,444,420

9,810

(106,646

10,800

(338,400

87,862

(1,628,688

44;086

(876,787

(1,487,388

48,820

(897,897

8,400

(61,000

68,528

(841,632

14,346

(197,304

(1,662,518

24,728
(285,698

28.806
(380. 93A

■C), :i'ii
ruo.eoti

11,918
(196,278

rA69*>.969

22,976

(310,273

2,846

(63,271

120,161

(2,166,826

10,467

(167,000

1,400,000

(10, .VX)

(936,861

(4,666,806

173,188
r, 404, 569

(1,464,788

85,969

(456,668

(8,328,479

120,688

(1.0M,8»

4,800

(72,100

106,828

(1,820,771

26,687

(406,715

(266,729
40

•2?

661

(10,216
6,6.^

(107,646
9,510

(147,089

W
(0
VI

207,860

(8,146,916

7,497

(105,824

36,696
(7W,220

20,400
(804.000

94
96
96

(686.640

25,836
17,627

(678,833
18,968

(10,292

88,047
6,545

(94,640

8,000
18,060

(1,500

36,495
5,071

(88,442
68,946

(867,648

188,978

too

35,746

101

107

967,186

26
(3,724,270
(3,649,571

2,778

2,638

9,400,000

26
(2,628,762
(2,390,249

27
2,461

40
2,436

i, 666, 666

13
(1.130, 60.")
(1,062,897

16
1,292

1,163

762,000

60
(3,,'>93,820
(3,064,029

48
3,836

3,682

123

106

$1,071,156

(916,066

26
2,168

1,998

175

(792|863

18
3,940

36
8,940

(1,126,890

(609,894

5
948

14
943

29
(2,129,961
(1,878,606

4,240

69
4,065

loJ

3
27

1
40

8
(680,747
(480,338

10
788

788

104
106
106

107
106

109
110
lit

11?

113

114

9
100

1
5

116

::::::::::::;:::::!:::;:::::::::;::::

117

118

119

51
5
16
22
6
1
1
1

170

32
1

10
10
6

18
1
3
5
8
3
3

27
2
6

13
3
1
1
2

121
1??

2
3
1
2
11
3

8
8
6
8

7
2

5
3

I'^l

124
ITS

176

1 3

4
1

177

! 2

178

179

< Includes establishments distributed as follows: Iowa, 1; Michigan, 1; Minnesota, 1; Nebraska, 1; Oregon, 1; Rhode Island, 1; Texa^ 2; Washington, 1; West
Virginia, 2.

106

Table 2.— DYESTUFFS AND EXTRACTS, SUMMARY BY STATES: 1900.

United

States.

Nirmber of establishments

Character of organization:

Individual

Firm and limited partnership

Incorporated company

Capital:

Total

Land

Buildings

Machinery, tools, and implements

Cash and sundries

Proprietors and firm members

Salaried officials, clerks, etc.:

Total number

Total salaries

Officers of corporations —

Number

Salaries

General superintendents, managers, clerks, etc.—

Total number

Total salaries

Men —

Number

Salaries

Women-
Number

Salaries

Wage-earners, including pieceworkers, and total wages:

Greatest number employed at any one time during the year...

Lea^t number employed at any one time during the year

Average number

Wages

Men, 16 years and over-
Average number

Wages

Women, 16 years and over-
Average number

Wages

Children, under 16 years —

Average number

Wages

Miscellaneous expenses:

Total

Rent of works

Taxes, not including internal revenue

Rent of offices, insurance, interest, and all .sundry expenses

not hitherto included ■

Contract work

Materials used:

Total cost

Gums

Wood, for extracts, tons

Cost

Acids —

Sulphuric, tons

Cost

Nitric, pounds

Cost

Mixed, pounds

Cost

Ammonia, aqua, pounds

Cost

Alcohol, wood, gallons

Cost

Bones, tankage, and offal

Common salt, tons

Cost

Dry colors

Lead. tons

Cost

Lime, bushels

Cost

Tallow and fats

All other components of products

Fuel

Rent of power and heat

Mill supplies

All other materials

Freight

Products:

Total value

Acids

Alums, pounds

Value

Fertilizers, tons

Value

Dyestuffs—

Natural, pounds

Value

Artificial, pounds

Value

Tanning materials —
Natural —

Ground or chipped, pounds

Value

Extracts, pounds

Value

Artificial, pounds

Value

Epsom salts, pounds

Value

Value of all other products

Products consumed

chusetts.

28
19
30

$7,839,034
81,027,908
$1,075,033
81,839,946
$3, 896, 147
61

229
$312, 109

8' IB, 880

186
8193,229

163

8181,750

23
811,479

2,094

1,486

1,648

$787,942

1,607
8781,370

85,911

5
$661

$458,212
$23,052
$24,071

$410,870
8219

$4, 745, 912

$325

245,198

$2,393,179

814

$16,757

1,55,367

$5,434

209,061

83,763

1,227,000

$73,620

1,000

$(>J0

8750

2,254

87,829

$447, 649

125

$11, 140

3,840

$800

$9,000

81,175,402

8183, 307

$4,153

$71,613

8267,918

$69, 473

$7, 350, 748

$72,900

1,600,000

$90,000

$1,500

46, 662, 023

82,621,682

6,681,880

$1, 806, 730

49,002,037

8465, 966

60, 395, 392

$1,216,346

1,837,134

$62, ,616

87,500

$1,600

81,121,618

8842,260

New
Jersey.

7
1
2

$592, 510
$91,800
868,000
$60, 973

$371,737
11

27
$36,120

3
811,100

24
$26,020 I

21 I
$23,740

3
81,280

;«

49
828,226

48
$27, 626

$600

$20,449
83,606
$1,910

$14,933

81,123,833

3,750
842,638

370
$9,990
10.5,000
84,200

2
6

$591,916
$121,000
$76,000
$131, .553
$263,363
7

32
$33, 783

8
817,100

24
$10,683

18
$14, 817

6
81,866

172

$40,067

78
$38,618

10
$1,449

1,227,000
873, 620

$397,495

"""s'sio

$538,462
88,266

8595

843,653

84,115

81,320,881

1,500,000
890,000

3, .532, OOU
8283, 800

2,123,816
$871,213

New York.

Pennsyl-
vania.

849, 482
$3, 745
$2,220

$43,617

$2,548,136
$667,463
$345,504
8436, 703

$1, 198, 466

78
$91,680

11
$28,300

67
863,380

60
859,876

7
$3,504

562

517

638

$300,832

538
$300,832

Virginia.

$128, 447
$10,460
$1P,432

$107,555

$282,332

12,326
8207, 867

100
$447

826

811,

81,

821

811,

8602,
872,

$1,263,843

34,441
8594, 826

81,297

4
3
5

$1,778,173
8121,460
8273, 179
$637,993
8845,561
5

36
$60,686

12
$39,900

24
$20,786

21
819, 057

81,729

361

286

267

8118, 544

251
8117, 169

5
$1,260

1
8126

8168,262
81,785
83,272

$163,134
$61

$661,444

4
3
1

$385,904
$37,923
$54,360
$72,100

8221,531
12

20
$22,060

2
$1,920

18
820,130

18
$20,130

West
Virginia.

1
2
2

8272,192
$17,860
$38,000
$66,049

$160,293
7

8
$7,930

$4,780

5
$3,160

5
83,150

All other
states. '

209,061
$3,763

2,1,54

$7, 382

$40,500

126

811, 140

376, 470
816,000

6, 160, 000

$206, 210

267, 100

$41,858

13, 872, 000
$98,600
719, 228
$16,684
1,460,664
$36, 516

$466,939
$31,193
8373
$12, 713
$82, 177
$11,640

$2,111,811

63,447
$614, 266

246
$4,000

$8,000

$9,000
838,768
822,447

271

174

201

858,588

183

15
$1,200

3
$400

$17, 739
$1,081
$1,956

814, 703

8307, 481

48,216
$246,680

$26,325

74
826,325

815, 320
$400
8745

814,017
$158

$144, 068

$750

7,880,048

$1,005,079

2,457,162

$787, 976

$4,508
$46,329
$15, 126

$1,269,246

7,024,440
$295,356

869,868

$23,400
$842,250

23,831,150

$816,135

42.5,800

$50,400

415,117

87,78»

18, 663, 124

$339,618

$2, 610
$14,090
$1,323
81, 165
823,363
817,600

8479, 372

65
$1,600

35,700
$106,900

113
81,470
50,367
$1,234

5
6

$1, 670, 203

$70, 422

$220,000

8534,575

$845,206

28
859,880

816, 780

24
$44,080

20
$10, 980

$3,100

674

312

441

$216,360

435
$213,812

81, 412

8136

$68, .523
81,976
$3,537

$63,011

$5,115
$9,000
$578
81,670
$18, 101

$245,754

26, 145, 920
$180, 1.58

17, 936, 725
$290,066

87,500
$1„500
$53,910

$7,649

1,292,360
$11,389

7,925,000

$166, 915

3,889,875

$76,450

8962, 911

8326

47, 319

$680,002

1,000
8800

81,6.54

897, 019
887, 159

$52,947
833.483
$9,622

81,420,886

$2,000

5,258,825

$210,428

15,612

$43, 894

1,644,000

$22, .500

12, 272, 000

$169,273

$974, 791

1 Includes establishments distributed as follows: California, 1; Connecticut, 2; Florida, 2: Illinois, 2: Kentucky, 1; Maine, 1; Michigan, 1; Rhode Island, 2;
Tennessee, 1.

107

Tablb 2 DYKSTUFFS AND EXTRACTS, SUMMARY BY STATES: lUOO-Coatinued.

United
SUtw.

chUMtU.

New

Jener.

New York.

Henn«yl-
vaiila.

VliKtnU.

We«
VIrflnla.

All other

riteteii.>

Comrariflon of products:

W
•6,929,8eo
18,240,278

11,518

144

10,458

300

828

159

20
2S6

!S5

10
II.820.H81
tl. 218, 858

«
347

6
2S7

•490,798
•441,617

7
8M

10
7M

17
•1,WI8.0M
•1,808,320

12
4,208

48
4,148

8
•1. 088, 478
•1.012,812

11
2,818

2,482

300

R
•479,872
•380,116

8
786

14
470

8
•215,254
•189, 50*

S
4S6

8
4U

•1.89«,4M
•1,214.481

Value for prect'diuK buslneiw year

Power:

2,081
88

Own*Mi—

Eiifrlni'i*—

Stettni number

1.901

Gas or fcasollne number

1
50

3
140

8
8

5
SB

8
40

Rentetl—

17S

■a

Est&bllshmeuts t'laMsiliert by number of persons employed, not
including proprietors and tlrm membera:

7
8
4

1
1

12
1

1
3
5
1
1

Under5 *

3
7

3
5

5 to 20

1
8

21to60

101 to 2S0

fiOl to 1 000 .

■Includes establUhmentg distributed as follows: California, 1; Connecticut, 2; Florida, 2; Illinois, 2; Kentucky, 1; Ualne, 1; Mlctiigan, 1; Ebode Island, 2:
rennessee, 1.

108

Table 3.— PAINTS: SUMMARY

13
14

15
16

19
20

21
22
23
24

25
26

27
28

29
30

31
32
33
34
35

36
37
38
39
40
41

42
43
44

4S
47
48
49
50
51
52
53

54
65
56
57
68
69
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67

Number of establishments

Character of organization:

Individual

Firm or limited partnership

Incorporated company

Capital:

Total

Land

Buildings

Machinery, tools, and implements

Cash and sundries

Proprietors and firm members

Salaried officials, clerks, etc.:

Total number

Total salaries

Officers of corporations —

Number

Salaries

General superintendents, managers, clerks, etc. —

Total number

Total salaries

Men-
Number

Salaries

Women —

Number

Salaries

Wage-earners, including pieceworkers, and total wages:

Greatest number employed at anyone time during the year

Least number employed at any one time during the year

Average number

Wages

Men, 16 years and over —

Average num,ber

Wages

Women, 16 years and over —

Average number

Wages

Children, under 16 years —

Average number

Wages

Miscellaneous expen.ses:

Total

Rent of works

Taxes, not including internal revenue

Rent of offices, insurance, interest, and all sundry expeni-es not hitherto included .

Contract work

Materials used:

Total cost

Gums

Limestone, tons

Cost

Pyrites, tons

Cost

Wood—

For alcohol, cords

Cost

For extracts, tons

Cost

Acids-
Sulphuric, tons

Cost

Nitric, pounds

Cost

Mixed, pounds

Cost

Acid phosphate, tons

Cost

Alcohol-
Grain, gallons

Cost

Wood, gallons

Cost : .

Bones, tan kage. and ofTal

Common salt, tons

Cost

Dry colors

Glycerine, pounds

Cost

Lead, tons

Cost

Lime, bushels

Cost

Lin.seed oil, gallons

Cost

Nitrate of soda, tons

Cost

Potash salts

Sulphur, tons

Cost

Tallow and fats

All other components of products

FueK

Rent of power and heat

Mill supplies

All other materials

Freight

Products:

Aggregate value

Acids-
Sulphuric, 60 Baum^, tons

Value

Sulphuric, 66 Baum^, tons

Value

Nitric, pounds

Value

United States.

120
109
190

W2,i501,782
$5,263,179
i5, 128, 578
«7, 068, 854

«2.'>,041,17!
293

2, 512
$3,077,318

324
$814,037

2,188
$2,263,281

1,910
$2, 130, 270

278
$133,011

9,514

6,971

8,151

$3,929,787

7,357
$3,711,685

744
$209,540

50
$8,562

$3,430,061
$289. 366
$200, 720

$2,802,642
$1,S7,333

$33,799,386

$354,660

18,234

$50,368

20,598

$122,300

$52

11,746

1,989

$13,915

68,568

$3,687

1,75.5,822

$26,002

190

$1,519

9,813

$16, 778

32,488

$26,806

$2,278

458

$2,260

$8,758,499

692

$87

99,0.52

$8,585,688

33,007

$6,098

11,835,174

$6,431,227

1,086

$36,395

$21,675

2, 764

$58,088

$i,700

$5. 929, 030

$.514,372

$42, 672

$169,090

$3,234,658

$316, 709

$60,874,995

23,964

$201,299

4,053

$89, 179

749,666

$28,112

California.

5
2
4

$873,378
$8,300
$159, 588
$117,463
$688, 027
10

33
$39,922

4
$6,550

29
$34,372

179
153
163

$100, 4^4

154
$97,047

$3,397

$19, 165
$6,300
$1,776

$10,972
$117

$853,231

Georgia.

$130,476

1,908
$152, 6,50

172, 630
$99,556

$342, 275
$9, 070
$2,690
81,435
$99,404
$15, 675

$1,128,64:)

2
1
2

$101,300

$4,000

$4,600

$11,500

$81,300

12
$9,170

2
$1,650

10
$7,520

$9,844

19
$8,704

$600

3
$540

$10,905
$2,720
$1,360
$6,825

$112,474

$6,400

$48, 943

49, .551
$29, 997

$8.0.51
$492
$460
$245

$7,690
$10,296

$182,279

BY STATES, 1900.

1U9

Illliiots.

Indlaiw.

Iowa.

Kentucky.

Loulalana.

Maryland.

MaaMHsbiuetu.

Mlchlsan.

MlnneMrta.

4
2

•3,387,850
•379.442
•228,439
•436.939

•2.343.030
8

347
8460,379

49
•111,184

298
•&«9,196

265
•325,242

• 3

•207,486

•7,242

•22,550

«»,813

•156,880

•23,480

1
(2,400

30
•21,080

24
819,380

6
(1,700

•29

(14,739

34
(13,510

6
(1,229

8
2

•174.586
820.422
K-MiOO
(•27,837

(100,827
7

12
(12, WO

6
(7,600

6
8,5,300

6
(5,300

•290.222
•18.000
•28.000
(78.760

(165.462
21

'26
•26.900

r.ooo

23
•18,800

818,900

7
10
18

•1,800,706
(80,476
•207. '241
r20'2.'269
(810. 7'22
26

75
•102.784

19
•39,700

56
•63.064

47
•69,026

•1,058

384

291

337

•176, 101

311
•166.473

■26
(9,6'28

. 18
4

I
1
4

tm.an

86, 329

•44! 874

•247.796

29
•28,816

7
•10,288

22
•18,140

19
•17,160

8
•880

•6

•20,806

42
•17,667

10
•2,749

1
2

(140.491
(21. MO
(18.600
(32.499
(67.892
8

(14.242

•6.460

10
r.782

9
(7.002

1
(780

(10. 116

19
(9.544

2
(572

5
8132,431

•

81..VV9..546
8111.299
8230.969
81.59.674

•1.067.608
4

183
n35,266

20
•47.020

168
•88.246

183
•81,192

80
r.OfiS

426
330

384
8129.690

293
•111. IM

80
•16.837

11
•1.659

•220.482
•5.604
r,325

•207,653

•7.463
•50.751
•74.217

13
•11,166

•
•4,600

10
•6.566

10
•6,566

7
8
9

11
»

18
14

16
16

17
18

•23 953

836

574

702

•348,674

629
•324,862

72
•23.512

•13.641

27
•12.835

6
•806

(20,326

46
(18,826

6
(1,500

119

104

110

(46,273

94
(41.688

9
(2.585

7
(l.OOO

(2-2.172
(5.407
(1.349

(15,416

22
28
24

26
26

27
28

•300

•414. 110
•41.485
821.822

«3tO,76S
890

•17,330

•4,381

(450

•10.999
(1,500

(19.833

(20

8783

(19.030

(7,848

(1,440

(838

(5, ,570

(19,452

(112,789
(18,170
(11,591
883. 0-28

•61,381

r.216

•778

•61.138
•2.200

•209,145

(815
818,637

33
84
36

«, 375, 872
816 375

•111,015

(255.510

(263,952

(8-2,271

(265,743

81.332.899

(37.848

•1,1,53,783
•46,030

4
•109

2
(40

9.668
1286

itt

20
(54

11,710
•10,140

600
r50

IV7

,59

•1,764,935

•71,819

(84.170

(106,826

2.5,338

(84,074

8378.334

•431,064

r.5.449

61
67

11,866

•991. M2

2.457

8149

1.640.240

8730.473

3.614

•325.309

6.443

•2.706

890.248

r71.938

.5.57

(160

65,691

•32,846

,54.906
•22,226

182,866
(73.947

221,140
(93,506

102,660
(50,060

587,416
•260,300

154.619
•75,168

68
»
71)

•21.000

850,238

•10,966

•7.7S2

•346.098

821.734

».5,987,M8

•4,022
•717
•51
•271
•11,561
(348

(166,335

•72.987
•4.558

•32,288

•1,JW0

(l.IOl

(445

(23.476
(1.7S6

(359.085

•12,669
•2,102

•14

•2T2

•7.062

•1.806

•132,102

•90,231

•6,477

•200

•810

(24.362

(9.400

(442.744

•219.152

•26.108

n.60O

•3,209

•128,365

814,262

•2,006,982

•182,454

•10,917

(813

•3,219

•192.802

•26.194

•1.826.742

•38.563

•2.176

i661

•12.808

•3. 619

•357.816

77
78

•640
•15.156
•4.062

•336.867

79
80
81

8ft

■8

110

Table 3.— PAINTS: SUMMARY

31
32
38
34
36

36
37
38
39
40
41

42
43
44
46

46
47
48
49
60
51
52
53

64
65
66
67
68
69
60
61
62
63
64
66
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81

Number of establishments

Character of organization:

Indi vidua]

Firm or limited partnership

Incorporated eompa n y

Capital:

Total

Land

Buildings

Machinery, tools, and implements

Cash and sundries :

Proprietors and firm members

Salaried officials, clerks, etc.:

Total number

Total salaries

Officers of corporations —

Number

Salaries

General superintendents, managers, clerks, etc.—

Total number

Total salaries

Men-
Number

Salaries

Women —

Number

Salaries -

Wage-earners, including pieceworkers, and total wages:

Greatest number employed at any one time during the year

Least number employed at any one time during the year

Average number

Wages

Men, 16 years and over —

Average number

Wages

Women, 16 years and over-
Average number

Wages

Children, under 16 years —

Average number

Wages

Miscellaneous expenses:

Total

Rent of works

Taxes, not including internal revenue

Rent of offices, insurance, interest, and all sundry expenses not hitherto included.

Contract work

Materials used:

Total cost

Gums

Limestone, tons

Cost

Pyri tes, tons

Cost

Wood—

For alcohol, cords

Cost

For extracts, tons

Cost -■

Acids —

Sulphuric, tons

Cost

Nitric, pounds

Cost

Mixed, pounds

Cost

Acid phosphate, tons

Cost

Alcohol-
Grain, gallons

Cost

Wood, gallons

Cost

Bones, tankage, and offal

Common salt, tons

Cost

Dry colors

Glycerine, pounds

Cost

Lead, tons

Cost

Lime, bushels

Cost

Linseed oil, gallons

Cost

Nitrate of soda, tons

Cost

Potash salts

Sulphur, tons

Cost

Tallow and fats

All other components of products

Fuel . ;

Rent of power and heat

Mill supplies

All other materials

Freight

Products:

Aggregate value

Acids-
Sulphuric, 60 Baum^, tons

Value '

Sulphuric, 66 Baum6, tons

Value

Nitric, pounds

( Value

Missouri,

2
6
13

83.078,899
8267,368
8362, 018
8402, 858

82, 066, 656
12

138
8213,626

26-
863,690

112
8149, 936

104
8146,336

$4,600

577

382

488

»2'25, 830

486
8217,587

24
86,924

8
81,319

8169,984
819,659
815,827

8134,498

83,234,423

878

Nebraska.

8881,6.57
860,000

83.56,000
898, .500

8367, 157

41
858,456

89,000

849,456

32
846,420

7
83,036

105

93
853,020

82
849, .590

11
83,430

870, 405

$480

m, 147

867, 778

8534,256

8680,596

15, 447
$1,332,088

1,155,791
8506,392

8434,809

826,614

83,870

86,948

$236,679
86,349

84, 323, 355

New Jersey.

7
7
18

82, ,507, 867
8122. 350
$3,57. 206
$404,697

$1,623,614
20

131
$178, 228

17
$32, 015

114
8146,213

106
$141,137

$5,076

729

564

626

$317, 786

5.58
$299, 972

68
817,814

8191,449
88, .524

810, 564
8158,290

814,071

$2, 519, 447
$33,886

119
$2,984

330,000
$5,000

New Y'ork.

$92,610

4,136
$4,953 I

458

$2,260

$483,423

2,901
8242, 666

213,779
8102, 773

$24, 471
812,959

81,505
$44,364
813, 018

3838,151

3,000
$275,600

402,636
8184,826

620
818,500

81, 106, 330
865, 810
8550
$11,207
$296, 694
$38,534

83, 460, 362

811,318,449
82, 129, 678
81,09,5,653
81,495.299
86, .597. 819
34

.506
8717,339

8178,420

454
8538,919

$512,815

56
$26, 104

2,521

1,855

2,173

$1,175,277

1.976
81,126.011

187
848,086

11
82,180

881.5, 946
$99, 494
860,984

$650,468
$5,000

88,344,9;^6

8116, 527

8,734

$26, 268

293
$16,523

1,400
82,160

1,426,822
821,002

769
$500

$2,210,230

692

$87

24.083

82,124.948

4.000

$800

2.632,319

81,248,766

$1,219

600

812,595

8.5,700

81.573,1.51

$109,981

SI 1.932

$56, 535

8799, 475

$6,647

$12, 543, 825

BY STATES, 1900— Continued.

Ill

Ohio.

Oregon.

PentuylTsnla.

Rhode Uland.

TenneMee.

Texw.

Wuhlngtnn.

WtKOfWill.

All other iiute«.i

7
16
22

(4.306.499
(490.596
(474,906
(433,921

(2,907,077
41

396
(470.581

55
(123. 160

340

(347.421

297
(325.283

43
(22.138

919

601

733

(336,746

635
(308,493

96
(33,253

1
1
1

r2K.332
(5,000
(6..'iflO
(18.247
(98.585
2

7
(8.880

2
(4,800

5
(4.080

(3.600

1
(480

(22.836

37
(21,876

2
(960

27
23

(10.268,616
n, 601, 877
(1,333,868
(2.767.768
(4,660,002
47

406
(468,024

(124,780

369
(328,244

329
(306.018

r22,22«

1.862
1,430
1.649

rse.m

1,,W7
(711,636

87
(23,512

5
(964

(eii.53.<<

(26,641

(23,298

(408,839

(52,856

(5,203,343

(38,410

9.500

(24, 100

20, .598

(iat,300

1
1

(104, 781

(6.000

(21.800

(16.700

(61.281

18
(16.164

2
(6,000

11
(11,164

8
(10, 124

(1.040

21
15

18
(9.998

17
(9,890

1
(108

6
8

2
3

1
(

(463. 236

7
4
•

(WI.016
•25,800
(183, a«s

48
•63,083

7
•12.750

•40.283

•87.411

8
•2.872

329

222

•108, «00

240
•96,912

•7,288

4
•600

•85,154
(7,042
(3,446

r3,ie6

(1,500

(731,298
(5.766

(66.982

(6,600

(31,000

(6,822

r22.610

4
(4.620

2
(8.000

2
(1.620

(1.200

1
•420

•6.770

9
•6,620

1
•160

(73.545

(4.500

(6,000

(14,276

(48,770

8
(11.000

•4

(8,300

f2,700

3
ri,220

1
. (480

(17,742

42
r7, 142

3
(600

(14,076

(2.926

(12,060

(39.414

(423.822

43
(28.761

(5.700

40
(23.061

80
(17.046

10
(6.016

108

•28.117

68
•24.117

10
•4,000

(6,600

13
(6,600

(filS.OiO
(23, .576
132,090

(.W2.384
(60.000

(3,2W,5.«
(63,116

(8,033

(2,100

fc54

(3,379

•6,688

(1,269

(313

(4.116

(.5.160
(996
(291

(3.873

(2,760

(1,240

(86

(1,434

(1,082
(4*3
(140
(479

•21,400
(6,400

(2,093
(13.907

(86,680

(106,376

(88,995

(22,032

(31.436

(67.5.711
(225

26
(62

11,462
(62,260

187
(3,060
4-5.000
(2,619

A68

14,000

(782

270
(S.404

190
(1,519

8,839

(15,808

9,132

186
(tl«

185
(162

4.225
(6.173

2,500
•2.075

(907.584

(22,937

(622,542

(61,812

(47,902

(11,434

(11,279

r2S6,94«

•167.883

9.831
(817.413

(10
1,431,006
(722,229

26.402

(2,824,072

17,100

(1,200

1,547,008

(637,216

1,066

(35,176

(675

1,544

(26,993

3.400
(1.071
151.857
(74.167

62.660
(23,758

84,338
(15,182

48,093
(24,047

11,822
(5,811

28.. 558
(9.097

493,576
(236.945

::::;:::;::;:;;:;;:::::::::::::;;;:;i

(340,791

(34,480

(1.625

(15.094

e7I,,532

(6,166,001

(27,266

(720

(220

(100

(5.230

(6.450

(141,669

(637,264

(141,966

(1,378

(45,762
(633,864

(30,348

(9,137,970

23,964

(201,299

4,063

(89.179

M9.666

(28.112

•14.100
(963
(920
(479

(17.996
(4.924

(166.818

(4,764
(2,721

(1,443

(2.V2

(72

(55

(1,,590
(1,376

(39,830

(3.914

(25

(420

(60

(3.828

•8.318

•67,600

(81,660
•2,5(23

(361.441
(10.923
(780
(11.130
(63.199
(68.(04

(1.M2.924

(348
•160,790

•1,008
•(8.611

riA

(881.767

29
(0

31
32
33

34
36

33
37
38
39
40
41

42
48
44
46

47
48
49
SO
51
.52
S3

54
S5

57
56
50
60
61
62
63
84
«5
«6
C7
<8
(9
70
71
72
78
74
75
7S
77
78
7«
80
81

'Includes establlabments distributed wfollowa: Colorado. 2: Connecticut, 2: Delaware, 2: District of Columbia, 1; Kama*, 1; Maine, 2: )liMiarippl,l: Nevada. 1:
North Carolina. 2: Vermont. 2: Virginia. 1.

112

Table 3.— PAINTS: SUMMARY

100
101
102
103

104
105
106
107

108
109

111
112
113
114
115
116
117
lltt
119
120
121
122
123
124

las

126
127
128

129
130
131
13!
133
1S4
135
IW
137

133
139
140

141
142
143
144
145

]4fi
147
148

149
150

152
153
164
156
156
167
158
169
160

161
162
163

164
165
166
167
188

170

171
172

Products— Continued.

Aggregate value — Continued.
Acids — Continued.

Acetic. pound.s

Value

Soda.s

Alums, pounds

Value

Coal-tar distillery products

Wood distillation—

Wood alcohol, refined, gallons

Value

Charcoal, bushels •.

Value

All other

Fertilizers —

Complete, tons

Value

All other, tons

Value

Dyestuffs —

Natural, pounds

Value

Artificial, pounds

Value

Tanning materials —

Natural, extracts, pounds

Value '.

Paints, colors, and varnishes-
Total value

Pigment —

White lead, pounds

Value

Oxides of lead, pounds

Value

Lamp, and other blacks, pounds

Value

Fine colors, pounds

Value

Iron oxides and other earth colors, pounds

Value

Dry colors, pounds

Value

Pulp colors, sold moist, pounds

Value

Paints:

Paints in oil, in paste, pounds

Value

Paints already mixed for use, gallons

Value

Varnishes and japans —

Oil and turpentine varnishes, gallons

Value

Alcohol varnishes, gallons

Value ,

Pyroxyline varnishes, gallons

Value

Liquid dryers, japans, and lacquers

All other paints, colors, and varnishes

Fine chemicals

Chemicals not otherwise specified—

Copperas, pounds

Value

Value of all other products

Products consumed:
Acids-
Sulphuric, tons

Nitric, pounds

Lead oxides, pounds

White lead, pounds

All other products consumed, pounds

Compari.son of products:

Number of establishments reporting for both years

Value for census year

Value for preceding business year

Power:

Number of establishments reporting

Total horsepower

Owned—

Engines —

Steam, number

Horsepower

Gas or gasoline, number

Horsepower

Water wheels, number

Horsepower

Electric motors, number

Horsepower

Other power, number

Horsepower

Rented—

Electric, horsepower

Other kind, horsepower

Furnished to other establishments, horsepower

Establishments classified by number of persons employed, not including proprietors and firm members:

Total number of establishments

No employees

Under 6

5 to 20

21 to 60

61 to 100

101 to 250

251 to 500

601 to 1,000

United States. California.

1,715,007
$30,569
839, 614
25,445,612
J342, 969
«16.716

78
8110
1,138
J137
»684

465

JID, 497

685

$1,878

1,843,749

$99,779

680,000

$390,000

.5M,896
810, 161

$48, 440, 780

116, 102, 316
$4,211,181

m, im, 623

$2, .V«. 340

1,06.1,000

860,2.50

3. 3-J.\ 'isa

$736. 796

33. Va. 89<)

831 K, 242

157, 472. 838

84,066,147

20, 060, 935

$861,. 531

303, 460, 028

817.40.5,822

16,591,745

814,618,277

1,373,603

81,236,861

46, 369

871,707

16,291

816, 225

8303, 495

81,983,90*;

84.092

5, 786, 400

$29,346

81,139.073

27,141

611,427

374, 061

24,922,647

15, 997, 525

371
848,8,84,792
$43,348,494

342
27. 183

388
23,191

18
345

24
845

839

300

771
892
414-

419

120

148

$823,224

4, 800, noo

8237, 180

.500, 01)0

825, 895

2,411,622
8207,797
a55, 837
8349,352

Georgia.

8182,279

$3,000

$305,419

10
$1,124,965
81, 215. .560

8
964

525

3.50

870,683

(66,065

91,394

$93,714

$7, .500
$25,000

$84,000
$92,000

118

BY STATES, 1900— Continued.

IlllllOll*.

Indiana.

Iowa.

Kentucky.

Loulalana.

Maryland.

Manachiuett*.

MIchlfao.

MInnanU.

815.000

100

101

in?

104

10S

108

107

108

109

11,037,475
8531.962

8165,335

8335,367

250.000
$24,750

8367,086

8132,102

8396,931

80,000
84,000

81,938,682

110,496

86,625

8,726,279

8197,440

700,000

842,000

346,000

83.5,000

2,278,000

$2.S,435

3,44-1,701

8218,607

739,312

867,426

10,362,389
86.3;?. -551
479,011
«67,829

111,913

895,772

1,400

82,800

81,826,742

8867,816

110
HI

113

114
115
U6
117
118

365,000
818,260

190,000
331,000

814,617
9,8.'«,710
8300.789

81,000

45.021.424

82.631,1.19

2,586,440

120
121

3,012,000
8n,666

1,533, .509
833. .t06
5.58.300
831,042

1,101.227

887. .519

232.514

8205,740

2,8,750
83,875

4i7,4i8
no, 737

128

1,726.100

8120,806

2.5, 112

826,279

1,405,000

874, l.W

181,485

8134,901

1,022. MO

870,610

387,575

$282,525

189,831

$.10, 686

91,017

$81,416

9,761,846

8684,716

847,206

8974,318

69,290

886, .363

3.100

86.940

796,282
8100,084

296,661
8267,732

126
126
127
128

129
130
131

1 S2fi, 2.tO

Sill. 000

16,000

816,000

8363,200

132
138
184
186

136
137

$4,260
826,000

816,483
8128,216

815,468
818,200

$30,000

$3,950

812,696

139

81,500

82,000

846,813

852,400
14,969

140

141
142
143
144
146

;.::::......

27
85.889,568
♦5,200,700

27
2,763

2,491

1
15

3
8156,806
8130,000

5
2S9

S
20P

1
86

6
8336,867
8238,540

6
147

5
147

8
8329,085
8300,467

5
189

1
10

3
8132, 102
8183,306

2
101

1
40

I
36

13
8142,744
8367,193

8
828

soe

28
81,953.0)7
81, 712. -414

26
1,287

21
1,132

12
81,824,382
81,643,346

12
837

12
739

6
>33»,08I
8277,500

5
203

2
133

146
147
148

149
ISO

151
162
153
154
156
ISO
157
U8
ISO
160

161
162
163

164
166
166
187
168
169
170
171

2
40

9
83

3
221
80

27
68

5
10
60

1
4
S
1
2
2

6
2
1

1
2

1
6
16
6
2

8
8
10

4
3

1
8
1

6
S

6
5
3

1
3
2

1
1

No. 210 8

114

Tablb 3.— PAINTS: SUMMARY

Missouri. Nebraska. New Jersey. New York

100
101
102
103

104
105
106
107

108
109

111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124

125
126
127
128

129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
187

138
139
140

141
142
143
144
146

146
147
148

149
150

151
152
153
154
165
156
167
158
169
160

161
162
163

164
166
166
167
168
169
170
171
172

Products— Continued.

Aggregate value— Continued,
Acids — Continued.

Acetic, pounds

Value

Sodas .

Alura.s. pound.s.

Value .

Coal-tar distillery products

Wood distillation-
Wood alcohol, refined, gallons .

Value

Charcoal, bushels

Value

All other

Fertilizers —

Complete, tons

Value

All other, tons

Value

Dyestuffs —

Natural, pounds

Value

Artificial, pounds

Value

Tanning material —

Natural, extracts, pounds

Value

Paints, colors, and varnishes —

Total value

Pigments —

White lead, pounds

Value

Oxides of lead, pounds.
Value .

Lamp, and other blacks, pounds .
Value

84,108,476

4, 942, 814
8243, 681

3,581,604
8183, 189

Fine colors, pounds .

Value

Iron oxides and other earth colors, pounds

Value

Dry colors, pounds

Value

Pulp colors, sold moist, pounds

Value

Paints —

Paints in oil, in paste, pounds

Value

Paints already mixed for use, gallons

Value

Varnishes and japans —

Oil and turpentine varnishes, gallons

Value

Alcohol varnishes, gallons

Value

Pyroxyline varnishes, gallons

Value'

Liquid dryers, japans, and lacquers

All other paints, colors, and varnishes

Fine chemicals ,

Chemicals not otherwise specified —

Copperas, pounds

Value

Value of all other products ,

Products consumed:
Acids-
Sulphuric, tons

Nitric, pounds ,

Lead oxides, pounds ,

White lead, pounds

All other products consumed, pounds

Comparison of products:

Number of establishments reporting for both years

Value for census year

Value for preceding business year

Power:

Number of establishments reporting

Total horsepower

Owned—
Engines-
Steam, number

Horsepower

Gas, or ga.soline, number

Horsepower

Water wheels, number

Horsepower

Electric motors, number

Horsepower

Other power, number

Horsepower

Rented—

Electric, horsepower

Other kind, horsepower

Furnished to other establishments, horsepower

Establishments ela.ssitied by number of persons employed, not including proprietors and
firm members:

Total number of establishments

No employees

Under 5

5 to 20

21 to 50

51 to 100

101 to 250 :

251 to 600

501 to 1,000

8,4.55,000
882, 494

45,782,816

82, 267, 924

1,. 527, 528

81,285,649

650
8650

821,250
823,639

8214, 879

18
84,161,356
84,460,387

15
1,703

1,565

660,000
8390,000

8838, 151

1,126,262
861,889

$3,022,557

14,471,171
8717, 047

8,&'>0,306

8553.9,50

221,712

8219, 712

1,136,284

8190,893

.500,000

825,000
4,7.5(i,080

$441,. 580
5.156,948

8162,556

8, 545, 2.56

8517, 159

622, .542

$680,189

178,832

8148, 245

3.285

84,571

82,600

823,857
8211,460

$47,805

7,261,300

8838,161
$7.58, 424

310

1,147,946

22
$2,490,554
82,042,534

1,886

1,792

106
20

8716

1,843,749
899,779

812,226,159

39, 109, 000
$547,440

12,426,000
$663,176

1,192,466

$443. 7.55

15.4.58,000

$121,. 534

41,433.177

82,118,799

12, 941,. 596

$.580, 623

68,997,820

84,009,797

2.876,234

82, 862, 426

460, .500

$417. •195

1.000

$1,000

$.53,044

$406,070

$4,092

$214, 079

71
$12,276,700
811,743,756

63
5, 723

,762

266

288

296

BY STAT1':S, nHX>— Continued.

116

Ohio.

Oregon.

PeoMylvanla.

Rhode Inland.

Tennnne.

Teziu.

Wuhlngton.

Wliic<>n>lii.

All other Matoki

1,715,007
$30,669
$39,614

$1,000

«1

::::::::"::::::::::::::::::::::::::

(■

4.a

«0,497

685

$1,878

ino

101

107

ira

104

inn

lOtI

107

664,896
$10,161

$8,237,632

' 32,478,546
$1,516,121
27,893,478
$1,338,959

109

$5,127,261

8,822,814

$383,475

1,506,000

$79,792

$96,131

$166,818

$145,790

$39,830

$67,600

$881,717

$1,039,598

110
111

•

117

118

114

115

::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::

116

2,'>l,000

$19,900

80,000

$1,200

267.562

$16,048

6,294,331

$96,816

67,164,490

$616,561

594,379

$12,842

56,313,415

$2,908,062

1,994,333

$1,381,036

218,534

$189,491

17,829

$31,612

291

$225

$57,902

$171,957

1,000
$200

117

118

7,660,000
$30,640

119

i?n

1,441,781

26,929.972
$146,499

171

$95,010

60.400
$6,043

6,000,000

$412,600

430.000

$387,560

I'M

::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::

1?4

80„'>95,967

$1,752,553

2, ,^74, 468

12,362,313

229,976

30,576

$7,644

78,991

$88,487

629,800
$70,776
36,554
$33,829

142,000
$28,400
106,073
$86,750

241,429

$15,600

26,200

$23,930

2.662,09?

$141,315

471,329

$396,886

84,168

$31,483

600

$1,200

ITS

126

48,600
$57,600

127
128

^f9

$237,237

130

1,505

1,250
$1,260

2,600
$3,824

1H1

$3,510

182

134

$48,429
$143,842

$300

$14,300
$58,000

$4,201
$317,809

135

$60,964

137

3,700,000
$16,650
$128,410

12,182

611.427

374,061

17,609,347

14,846,296

65
$9,124,9.52
$7,365,106

62
6,267

108

5,492

210

127

300

28
60
156

138

1S1>

$87,740

$45,428

$5,000

$50

$2,400

140

•

141

8,283

$1,027,660

r 66, 295

IS
1,018

12
651
1
6
4
329
1
9

145

39
$4,955,569
$3,934,070

37
2,350

2,033

12
120

$141,559

$90,794

2
36

1
80

4
$166,818
$185,822

1
106

2
100

5
$160,790
$131,600

2
122

100

6
»89,880
$28,060

2
$17,600
«1&,100

2
50

6
$881,767
$516,500

6
867

387

146
147
148

149
ISO

161

168
154

166

167

Ifift

169

47 6

1«1

57
28

2
»
18
11
2
2
1

8
16

1
1
2

6
1
2
1

17
I
7
6
1
1
3

164
166
166
IC7

23
22
11
5
4

2
1
1

3
2

i«

170
171

172

< Include)) establlabmentH diatributed a.* follows: Colorado,2: ConnecUcat,2; Oelmwue,2; Dlatiict of Columbia, I; Kanaaa,!; Malne,2: MiaiailpDt. I: Nevada.!:
North Carolina. 2; Vermonl, 2; Virginia, 1. -. rt- . — -,

116

Table 4.— VARNISHES:

Number of establishments

Character of organization:

Individual

Firm or limited partnership

IneorjM>ratod company

Capital:

Total

Land

Buildings

Machiner>", tools, and implements

Cash and sundries

Proprietorft and firm members

Salaried olhciiils, clerks, etc.:

Total number

Total salaries

Officers of corporations-
Number

Salaries

General superintendents, managers, clerks, etc. —

Total number

Total salaries

Men —

Number

Salaries

Worn en—

Number

Salaries

Wage-earners, including pieceworkers, and total wages:

Greatest number employed at any one time d\iring the year

Least numberemployea at anyone time during the year

Average number ...'.

Wages

Men, 16 years and over-
Average number

Wages

Women, 16 years and over-
Average nnmber

Wages

Children, under 16 years-
Average number

Wages

Miscellaneous expenses:

Total

Rent of works

Taxes, not including internal revenue

Rent of offices, insurance, interest, and all sundry expenses not
hitherto included.

Contract work

Materials used:

Total cost

Gums

Acids-
Sulphuric, tons

Value

M i xed, pounds

Cost

Alcohol-
Grain, gallons

Cost

Wood, gallons

Cost

Dry colors

Lime, bushels

Cost

Linseed oil, gallons

Cost

Potash salts

All other components of products

Fuel

Rent of power and heat

Mill supplies ;

All other materials

Freight

Products:

Aggregate value

Cyanides-
Potassium C5'anide, pounds

Value. . "

Yellow prussiate of potash, pounds

Value

Dyestuffs, artificial, pounds

Value

Paints, colors, and varnishes-
Total value

Pigments —

Fine colors, pounds

Value

Dry colors, pounds

Value

Paints-
Paints in oil, in paste, pounds

Value

Paints already mixed for use, gallons

Value

Varnishes and japans —

Oil and turpentine varnishes, gallons

Value

Alcohol varnishes, gallons

Value

Pyroxyline varnishes, gallons

Value

Liquid driers, japans, and lacquers

All other paints, colors, and varnishes

Explosives, gun cotton, or pyroxyline, pounds

Value

United States.

California.

Connecticut.

Illinois.

Indiana.

Kentucky.

181

59
41
81

$17,550,892
$1, .573, 916
$2,3.58.905
$1,448,609

812,169,462
119

1,198
$1,939,333

1.54
8463,819

1,044
81,475,514

919
81,410,643

125
864,871

1,658

1,546
8995,803

1,479
8976, 174

818,878

5
8751

81,616,642
847, 4.58
$84, 431

81,425,031

$59,722

810,939,131
82,947,060

886

144, 482

$3,667

G5, 146

8151,089

274.221

8255.354

8260,317

600

$100

4,308,943

$2, 0,56. 469

$l»9

$3.713.6,81

$105, 366

S4. 741

$13..5:J4

81,261.9,52

8165, 206

818,687,240

25,945
810,0.82
2,5,000
$.500
40,000
85,000

818,676,074

81,000
8211,000
6,600,000
8304,000

2,9.50,370
$19.5.637
287, 8.50
'5245, 849

12,909,248

$13, 096, 693

603,442

$833, .522

143. .836

$162,601

$2,7,81.115

$74.5.6.57

42.752

$45. 959

8
2

1
2

8373,962
822, 400
825, 4.54
$25,072

8301,036
6

17
821,550

88,560

8
813,000

$2,344,728
$297,178
8348, 279
$180,996

$1,518,275
10

171
$242, 157

19
866,104

152
$176,053

132
$166,616

20
$9,437

210

163

187

8124,688

177
8122,980

9
81,552

1
8156

$138,423

85,611

810,498

$120,584

81,730

$1,276,709
8438,643

$148,500
842,000
821,000
811,000
874,600
1

87,860

82,700

4
85,160

4
$5,160

8208,039
$11,. 556
$■57,0.56
$23, 322

8116,105

8187, 749

$S..5(X)

$25, 775

$13,807

8139,667

25
$32,480

6
88,372

824,108

32
826,564

2
82,150

30
824,404

24
822,650

6
81,754

819,940

41
819, MO

87, 316

14
87,316

819,250

22
816,260

10
$3,000

89,632

18
89,632

84,8.50
8120
8380

84,360

846,9.59

87.50

$1,646

844,663

89,9.54

83,841

8240

$1,061

$2,540

81,407
88,547

888,900
822,714

8234, 474
8107,499

$143, ,51 4

848,872

$206,668
$49,102

940

82,1.50

2,773

83,766

100
$220

690
81,400
$4,043

2,890

8.5, 491

88,206

873, 230

87,302

601

$1,396

.591

8591

33. i54

818,627

40, 831
821, 772

481,471
8'20.5,038

87,3.56
$37, .589

47,485
827,351

832,420

8715

878,984

81,790

850

8215

815, .569

82,932

8399,769

8399,736
817,235
$50
8994
8114,604
814,386

82,190,265

$38, .516
$975

$114,211
$994

84, ,503
84,100

8130,805

825
$11,23.5
84,315

8237,502

$135

813, 875

8334,978

8130,805

$399,759

82,190,265

11,000
81,000

8237,602

8315,978

8, .500
8330

9, ,500
85,800

263, 624

8195,260

1,210

83, .569

383

8594

821,949

$10,000

8,034

817, 196

1, ,576, 053

81,594,904

134,943

$187,538

123,670

8120,392

2,670

85,300

133,521

8304,479

175

$404

28,810

836,012

843,104

815, 760

454,5.50

8314, 603

100

8145

86,113

$2.59,293
$130,334

81,230

SUMMARY BY STATER, 1900.

117

Maryland.

MuwchUKtt*.

Michigan.

Mtnouri.

New leney.

V«W York.

Ohio.

TennqrlvaDla.

All other tuten.!

1
1

6
3
6

•358.384
•18,900
•86.088

tM.8ao

•248,596
11

42
•44,174

11
•22,423

31
•21,751

25
119,601

6
(2,150

$31,505

$29,995

5
(1,600

2
2

7
2

8
15

(3.949.266
(300.548
(1173.931
R^U.Ml

(2.610,145
11

2.51
(372.559

31
899.470

220
8273.089

193
$257,424

27
$13, (ifio

235

212

221

81.W.085

217
$157,173

2
$612

2
$300

$197,2.58

$7,645

815, .564

8174,049

19
10
U

•A <80,083

•680,618

617,987

426,433

•4,066,194

298
•641,208

88
(148,620

'265
•492.588

244
•480,508

(12.085

.554

527

.537

(343. .5.58

515
•836.003

21
(8.360

1
8195

(537.238
$13,202
(26.204

(497,332

(.500

(3,964,068
(1,011,516

2
(86

«
10

•1.19.5.885

(90.081

•163.352

•84.519

•857,933

'21

120
(16.5.317

20
•68,060

100

•107,267

•101,645

(5,622

120

111

109

(70,841

108
(76, Ml

1
(800

18
»

(1.816.431
(198,436
(IKl, 138
8170.350

(1,2IH,508
17

120
•172,216

12
(32,900

108
(138,716

96
(134.022

12
(5,694

181

ltJ4

167

(119.4'28

165
(119.088

1
•240

1
(100

•201,497
•4,054
•5,474

•134,477

•57,492

$1,391,371
(-209,530

•

•189.570

•8.800

•21.398

•10,700

•149,172

23
•28,400

5
•10,800

18
•17,600

12
•14,030

6
•8,580

'25

•13,205

23
•12,906

1
•300

(16.'>. 323

(17. (KX)

$8. (TO

819.717

•119. ina

19
(27.194

2
(3,000

17
(24,191

17
$24, IW

848.604

•984,870
•28,500

•167.887
•.53.796

•684.237
10

66
•150,400

(9.000

(9,4.V1

(30.148

9
(7,264

2
•1,080

7
•6,184

6
•6,100

1
(84

(5,488

11
(5,2M

1
(234

7
8
9
10

11
13

66
(150,400

50
(141,600

15
(8.800

108

103

106

(49.416

95
(46,736

11
(2.680

1«

17
18

•10

(17,361

27
$17,361

21
22
23
24

25
28

3ft

$3,994
$740
8197

83,057

$26,439
$5,976
(1,828

(18,635

(262.401

$180

(10,296

(251,925

•10,368

•2,990

$687

(6,691

(165,960
(6,110
(8,494

(162,356

•6,926

31
32
33
34

(34,734
(3,204

(274,441
(101,632

(814,857
(176,920

(12.1,021
828,551

$1,306,244
$500,884

(910,910
(180,586

•178,200
•87,407

3<
37

144, 4S2

$3,567

10,124
$23,669

40.h67

S41..H.W

8.>59

1,080
(2,604

1,200
(1,100
(2,929

9.434

(21.698

200

(200

100
•245

6,899
84,112
(4,041

34.168

(80.080

109,676

•103,880

•1,634

1,070

(2,434

4,635

(6,230

(4,100

,500

(100

375,066

(186,960

4,296

(10,303

14,702

(13,8.50

(217.075

353

•799

3,782

•5,145

•14,334

•1,400

9,726
•4,863

99,091
•47,958

815,607
(156,799

4.5,925
(20,240

441, 7a5

8214.7.55

8609

8399. !*M

$11,768

$.504

81.622

8101,307

$5, -296

$2,753,562

2.5, 945

1.567,096
$721,707

676.611
8348.312

88,820
•44,598

49
60
61

(18,851
i614

(95,600

(3,175

(220

(194

(15,795

(3,234

(500,672

(197.279
(3,706

$58,207

$1,396

$50

$85

(7,283

(811

(231,168

$1,417,212

$42,685

(2,955

. (4.563

(534,149

(3,721

(6,334,467

(428,366

(8,940

(292

(1,530

•81,423

(9.»t9

(1,538,623

8375,533
(9,874

•68.912

•1,500

i620

•100

•12,885

•1,900

•248,273

52
53

(102

(1^950

(750

(64,521

(3.080
(155.176
(100,000

(1,561,150

(884

(192,198
(13,812

(2.161,496

55
6«

58
59

(10,082

25,000

•500

40,000
$5,000

86, 272, 219

70.000
(210,000

$64,521

(600,672

(1,661,150

(230,168

•2,731,726

•1,635,623

•2,167,413

•248,273

6.600.000
•304.000

2,758,108

•142,914

168,926

•124,013

1,190.122

•1.047.181

'27.301

(46,041

40,000
$2,000

14,107

(16,000

14,740

(9,600

109,519

$12ti.9y0

2.106

(3,277

6.900

(16.000

•59,301

127,655
(86,293

2.000

noo

46.900
(46.016

4.467,708

(i, "248, 219

219,705

(400,428

102,777

(99,000

(1,021.069

(247.388

35.000

(35,000

8.'7.»

•3.626

1,016. .589

(940. UK)

41.799

(46.597

•6,000

ss».eao

178,637

$188,577

5,700

•10.000

27,060
(19.990

824,619

(346,828

3,000

(9,060

1,963,673

(1,543,074

475

(1,511

1,486,013

$2,106,076

64.258

$119,652

6.366

$10,995

$350,382

•109.328

7.752

(10.969

(16,571
(28,000

(122,910
(19,874

(16,193
(1,372

•463.870
•81,371

(401. aM
(92. 230

$96

•10.000

80
81

' Includes establUbmentu distributed asfollonri: Louisiana, 1: Maine. 1; Minnesota. 1: Oregon. 1; Rhode Island. 1: Virginia, 1.

118

Table 4.— VARNISHES: SUMMARY

92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101

102
103
104

105
106
107
108
109
110
111

Products— Continued.

Aggregate value — Continued.

Fine chemicals

Value of all other products

Products consumed

Comparison of products;

Number of establishments reporting for both years

Value for census year

Value for preceding business year

Power:

Number of establishments reporting

Total horsepower

Owned —
Engines-
Steam, number

Horsepower

Gas or gasoline, number

Horsepower

Water wheels, number

Horsepower

Electric motors, number

Horsepower

Other power, number

Horsepower

Rented—

Electric, horsepower

Other kind, horsepower

Furnished to other establishments, horsepower

Establishments classified by number of persons employed, not includ-
ing proprietors and firm members:

Total number of establishments

No employees

Under 5

5 to 20

21 to 50

■51 to 100

101 to 250

United States.

85,000
$44,625

S748,624

162
$17,441,726
815,510,030

4,192

102

3,699

1,56

lOS

ai
29
120

181
5
58
85
21

California.

8130,805
8119, 660

Connecticut.

$21,000

8
8399, 7.»
$435, 113

18
82,137,765
81, 960, 058

482

422

»2

Indiana.

8237,502
$209,676

Kentucky.

$19,000

$285,700
$220,000

2
140

4
140

119

BY STATES, 1900— Continued.

Marj-land.

Miunchuiett«.

Michigan.

MlMuiirl.

New Jeraejr.

Now York.

Ohio.

PeniujrIvaDla.

All nther •Utca.i

$5,000
$17,248
$116,000

86
$6,644,006
$4,796,784

24
1,136

82
1.0M

$1,000

t2«5

$M6,000

20
ri, 638, 552
$2,400,716

11
47t

10
4S8

$3,000

$4,«H
$66,824

$1,836,481
$1,768,808

796

2
60

3
tM,52l
$T2, 686

2
52

1
40

1
12

$492,672
>i23,439

6
430

6
S2S

3
$l,fi60,M0
$t.2&2,SU

1
250

1
280

7
$231,168
$215, 8tM

2
18

1
25

19
$1,684,373
$1,486,418

10
230

206

$248,278
$198,474

1
25

87
M
88

1-
100

«7

1
10

100

101

3
2

10
17
20

40
1

14
15
6
2
2

107

1
1
1

104

24
1
6

12
3
1
1

27
2

13
8
3

106
106

5
9

3
4

1
5

107

lOK

in«

110

III

> Includes establisluneDts distributed as follows: Louisiana, 1: Maine, 1; Minnesota, 1: Oregon, 1; Rhode Island, 1: Virginia, 1.

120

Table 5.— EXPLOSIVES: SUMMAEY BY STATES, 1900.

Number of estab!i.«hmeiits

Character of organization:

Individual ,

Firm and limited partnership

Incorporated company

Capital:

Total ,

Land

Buildings ,

Machinery, tools, and implements

Cash and sundries ,

Proprietors and firm members ,

Salaried officials, clerks, etc:

Total number

Total salaries ,

Officers of corporations —

Number

Salaries

General superintendents, managers,
clerks, etc.—

Total number ,

Total salaries

Men-
Number

Salaries

Women —

Number ,

Salaries ,

including pieceworkers, and

Wage-earners,
total wages:
Greatest number employed at any one time

during: the year

Least number employed at any one time

during the year

Average number

Wages

Men, 16 years and over —

Average number

Wages

Women, 16 years and over —

Average number

Wages

Children, under 16 years-
Average number

Wages

Miscellaneous expenses:

Total

Rent of works

Taxes, not including internal revenue..
Rent of offices, insurance, interest, and
all sundry expenses not hitherto in-
cluded

Contract work

Materials used:

Total cost

Wood, for alcohol, cords

Cost

Acids-
Sulphuric, tons

Cast

Nitric, pounds

Cost

Mixed, pounds

Cost

Ammonia, aqua, pounds

Cost

Alcohol —

Grain, gallons

Cost

Wood, gallons

Cost

Glycerine, pounds

Cost

Lead, tons

Cost

Nitrate of potash, tons

Cost

Nitrate of soda, tons

Cost

Potash .salts

Sulphur, tons

Cost

All other components of products

Fuel

Rent of power and heat

Mil] supplies

All other materials

Freight

Products:

Total value

Acids —

Sulphuric, 60° Beaumii, tons

Value

N i trie, pounds

Value

Other kinds of acids

Explosives—

Gvnipowdcr, pounds

Value

Nitroglycerine pounds

Value

Guncotton, or pyroxyline, pounds. .

Value

DJ^lamjte, pounds

Value

United
States.

10
11
76

S19, 465, 846
$1,168,753
$3,003,089
$3,114,120

S12, 179,884
23

768
$914, 447

161
$349, 371

607
$.56.5, 076

558
$544,421

49
820,6.55

5,352

3,830

4,502

$2,383,756

4,349
$2, 346, 887

117
$30, 781

36
$6,088

$1,096,601

$«,3o0

$64, 161

$1,018,435
$7, 6.58

$10,334,974

600

$4,800

7,864

$130, 699

467, 587

$17, 171

66,906,146

$1,505.7.54

649, 703

$11,303

122,516

$47,406

14,004

$10, 531

16,983,918

$2,016,557

$910

1,847

$1.50, 544

88,524

$2,902,866

$4.5,947

12, 742

$317, 38S

$1,056,602

$356,950

$5,500

$130,3*4

$1,258,883

8364, 784

$17,125,418

310

87,478

1,507,126

$22,054

82,111

123,314,103

85,310,351

3.618,692

8783,299

228,342

8103, 702

85 846,456

$8, 247, 223

California.

$3, 283, 928
$206, 987
$909,985
$394,029

$1,772,927

82
$130, 860

820,650

69
$110,210

64
$107, 450

5
$2,760

1,047

762

906

$602,765

882
8593, 128

24
89,637

8255, 278
81,600
$10, 178

8213,500
82, 669, 634

140

82,296

319, 987

813, .359

12,100,000

8148, 718

7,712
817,350

5,7ft5,997
8681,840

22,503
8700, 396

5,482
8126, 3,55
3403,278
8110,645
$.5,500
$.53,611
$288, 107
$118, 179

84,283,818

500,000
$80,000

50,000

$30,000

27,055 910

82,895,703

Illinois.

8493, 566

832, 474

$.52, 240

$124, 443

8284,409

14
814, 133

5
$10, 180

9
$3, 953

7
$3,560

8393

115

$32,064

71
832,064

$15, 007

'"'$i,'68i'

$13, 926
8143, 937

257

819,826

2, 182

869, 776

323
$7,004
$8, ,503
$3, .576

$2,304
820, 161
812, 787

8289,735

6,358,250
8270,974

Indiana.

$876, 146
$27, 2,50

8181,825
878, 114

8588,957

37
$55,400

0
814,400

31
841,000

28
839,720

$1,280

291

16(1

245

$118,979

217
8114,299

28
84,680

$43, 546

825
83,081

838,440
82,000

8610,209

2,005
$36, 895

3,020,000

886,449

120, 703

$3,438

1,407,659
8157, 945

4, 735
$164,567

198
86, 773
847,541
818,209

81,747
866,306
820,339

$976,247

140, 706
82,814

4,925,000

8214, 824

675,000

$118,750

6,456,041
8614,934

Michigan

8351,930
$9,680
847,200
850,598
8244,452
1

24
$42,580

■ 89,200

20
833,380

18
$32,020

S
$1,360

113

866,282

108
864, 749

5
81,533

$19,833

8200

81,183

814,250

84,200

8501,584

406

1,748

6,694,964

$189, 276

110,000

$2,000

1, 152, 501
8142, 873

2,203
876, 342

$1,002

$18,138

$6,731

$1,824
$27,995
$25,655

$691, 766

4,000
82,000

6,643,975
8652, 174

New
Jersey.

84, 283, 307
$136,125
$.502, 664
$.556, 104

83,088,414

255
8206,822

33
$63,907

222
8142,915

208
$137,711

$5,204

926

1,146

8,563, 621

1,137
8561,743

81,732

1
8146

8215, 621
"'§8,' 326

8207,296

82,048,837

4,954
$65,736

21,052,244

$372, 403

340,000

83,400

113,7.53

828,930

13,604

810,166

3,866,604

8434, 101

82,780

14,513

$485, 704

$20, 902

308

$7, 296

$244, 041

$82, 763

$23,458
8254,321
812, 836

83, 649, 216

187

85,428

1,366,420

819, 240

$2,111

5, 477, 900

$240,027

14,199

$2,191

178,842

$73, 702

25, 5.50, 543

$2, 185, 365

New York.

1
4

$451,505

$40,000

$67, 475

$101,815

8242,215

19
$18, 003

10
$9,180

$8,823

$52,288

$11,543

'"$!,' 968

89,575

8201,331

548,861
$15, 221

72, 883
$9, 110

549

848,807

1,883

$62, 821

344

8n,0&5

$9,070

$4,678

82,956
$36,351
81,285

$332,998

Ohio.

1
1

81,972,4.51
$315,000
$365, 786
8373.000
$918,665

.56
892, 520

17
$51,300

39
$41,220

32
838,260

7
$2,960

313
352

$178, 786

350

$178, 286

2
8500

8103, 756
81,110
89,198

892,748
8700

$773,269

6, 208, 183
8164,207

816, 169
8109,304

383

$31,282

8,379

$277, 529

1,355
$33, 243
$13, 781
$24,168

$12,260
$86,568
$20, 927

$1,330,489

$263, 594

200 21,627,675

671,218
$69,404

$927, 098
1,465,113
$351,970

Pennsyl-
vania.

9
19

$2,819,458
8110,466
8391,515
8943, 102

81,374,375
17

102
8130,394

28
861,280

74
$69, 114

66
$65,139

»,975

727

553

629

$320, 362

.598
$312,357

27
87,406

8200, 371
83,215
$10, 889

8186,267
81,500,282

342

$15,728
113,600
82, 272
9, 874, .537
8238, .593
48, 640
F2, 443

1,051

81,126

400

8365

1,913,237

$258,357

8910

f3,354

14,876

8495, .576

81,000

2,031

$57, 872

$70, .582

832,721

$4, 933, .5.55
8290, 771
$484, 399
8492,915

$3, 66.5, 470

$20,633

$228, 748

869, 972

82,898,180

1-23
82,050

All other
states.1

179

$223, 736

45
8109, 274

134
$114,461

126

8111,738

$2,723

1,165

913

9.55

$448,609

901
$437, 973

23
85,294

$5, 342

$231,649

$200

$18, 257

$212,434
$758

$1, 885, 921

600

$4,800

$296

34,000

$1,540

7, 407, 3.57

$290. 887

360

822

1,988,868
8223,027

586

844. 495

17.250

8570, 1.55

824, 045

2, 6,50

866 803

$2411668

$73,462

811,. 591
$2.50,326
882, 804

$3, 075, 969

34,961,649 43, .524, 429
$1,. 507, 807 $1, sot;, 627

1,163,918
$256,289

8, .507, 676

306, 462
$52,099

10.961,096

> Includes establishments distributed as follows: Alabama, 2; Connecticut, 1; Delaware, 1;
»ee, ^i Vermont, 1; Virginia, 1; West Virginia, 1; Wisconsin, 1.

$790,372 1$1,039,271
Iowa, 1; Kansas, 1; Maine, 1: Massachusetts, 2; Missouri, 1; Xennes-

121

Tablb 5.— EXPLOSIVES: 8UMMAKY BY STATES, 1900-Conrtnaed.

Product!"— Oimtlnncrt.

ToUil viilvK' — ronttniUMl.
ExpWw^ivt'*— *'*intlinie<1.

!?UHiki*leKH {K>w(kT, pounds

Valuv

All othtT explosives

Vnlueof all utbcr product*

Produels cousumed:
Aflds—

Siilphurlr, toiu

Nitric. p<nnul!i

Mixed, (Ktunds

rharcon 1, Imsliels

Ether. iHiuiids

Niiriile o( iiinmonlH. pounds

Nitn t^l vccrinc. pttunda

Pvnix vllno, ih>iiik1s

A^l other priKlmtx conaumed, pounds

Comparisou of protUictj*:

Number of establishmcnta reporting tor

tMitli years

Value for census year

Value for preceding business year ,

Power:

Number of establishments reporting

Total horsepower

Owned—
Engines—

Steam, number

Horse|>ower

Ga-s or gasoline, number

HorseiK>wcr

Water wheels, number

Horsepower

Electric motors. numl)er ,

HorscfKiwer ,

Other power, number ,

Horsepower

Rented—

Electric, horsepower

Ftimlshed to other establishments, horsc-

runver

Establishments classified by number of persons
employed, not including proprietors and firm
members:

Total uuml)er of establishments

Under 5

5 to 20

21 to 60

51 to 100

101 to'iTO

251 to 500

501 to 1,000

UniMd
SUM*.

2,9T3,12«

tl.«55,«4S

$850. '153

«142,799

32,8«6

14,.%58.135 I

12,000.000

4)<,2«5

1,192,7(M

l.'W,307

31,661,S06

1,S01,461

6,230,313 ;

80
«16,'218,510
tl3,607,449

22,080

315

13,242

190

5,674

177

2,885

110

180

CaUfomla.

1,301,000

|Hifi,r>oo

8452, 2.-i0
!9,265

25,200
8,600,000
12,0(10,000

700,679
i6,'895,'tid3'
'i,'7i5,'372'

S4. 236, 568
S3, 573, 032

7
,279

695

200

220

IlUnolii.

tl8,761

2
1272,678
«241,768

.■HK)

560

Indlaita.

Michlcao.

«8,«88
122, 93«

t2,48»

3.605
«6,740

81,115

2,254,788

4,310

5
I9;2,498
(774,203

760

11
660

22
100

t37,M2

586,106

77,192
2,647,820

(603,426
(490,370

5
271

11
121

150

New
Jeraejr.

1,477,633

1765,991

(17.5,000

(80,161

3,561
8,885,290

393,125

8,877,764

1,297,151

275,617

(3,471,183
(2,553,6»3

:,458

56
2,582

826

New York.

182,000

5
(3S2.998
(308,986

390

817

Ohio.

<l,t85
•49,021
(2,400

109,360

Pmiwyl- All other
■talc*.'

(16,900
•21.762

2,7tt,7M

4,000

(1.400

(147.560

(2B.122

«I.2M

4,M1.672
4,'2»,'324

28 13

(1.276.489 (2,073,731 (2,979.009
(1.144.097 (1,813.112 92,713.189

3,979

34
2,136

602

1,241

180

3,673

101

2.803

15
46
853

lA
6,771

«6

3,296
2
16

3.062

■ Includes establishments distributol as follows: Alabama, 2: Connecticut, 1; Delaware, 1; Iowa, 1; Kansas. 1; Maine, 1; Massachusetts. 2; Missouri, 1: Tenncs-
«ee, 2; Vermont, 1; Virginia. 1; West Virginia, 1; Wisconsin. 1.

122

Table 6,— OIL, ESSENTIAL: SUMMARY BY STATES, 1900.

Number of establishments

Character of organization:

Individual

Firm and limited partnership .

Incorporated company

Capital:

Total.

Land

Buildings

Machinery, tools, and implements

Cash and sundries

Proprietors and firm members

Salaried officials, clerks, etc.:

Total number

Total salaries

Officers of corporations —

Number

Salaries

General superintendents, managers, clerks, etc.—

Total number

Total salaries

Men-
Number

Salaries

Women —

Number

Salaries

Wage-earners, including pieceworkers, and total wages:

Greatest number employed at any one time during the year.

Least number employed at any one time during t lie year

Average number

Wages

Men, 16 years and over-
Average number

Wages

Women, 16 years and over —

Average number

Wages

Children, under 16 years-
Average number

Wages

Miscellaneous expenses:
Total.

Rent of works

Ta.\es, not including internal rsvenue

Rent of offices, insurance, interest, and all sundry expenses not hith-
erto included

Contract work

Materials used:

Total cost

Gums

, Wood, for extracts-
Tons

Cost

Alcohol, grain-
Gallons

Cost

All other components of products

Fuel

Rent of power and heat

Mill supplies

All other materials

Freight

Products:

Aggregate value

Es.sential oils —

Total value

Natural, pounds

Value

Witch-hazel, gallons

Value

Artificial, value

Value of all other products

Comparison of products:

Number of establishments reporting for both years

Value for census year

Value for preceding business year

Power:

Number of establishments reporting

Total horsepower

Owned—

Engines —

Steam, number

Horsepower

Gas or ga.sollne, number

Horsepower

Water wheels, number

Horsepower

Rented —

Electric, horsepower

Other kind, horsepower

United
States.

47
17
6

8612,6.57
S180, 831
S130, 401
$78, 219
S2-23, 706
73

825, 523

7
S3, 680

35
821,843

821,343

4
8500

.503

283

199

869,100

191
867, 186

7
31,839

875

849, 762
82, 720
83,240

843, 398
S404

8596,112
8440

1,441

86,726

13,258

831,630

8513, 188

316,241

8543

32, 481

821,604

34, 259

3850,093

8843, 731
881,829

8737, 032
110, 260
354,649
852,060
86, 362

66
8805, 605
8763, 770

52
1,048

Connecti-
cut.

2
1
2

365,500
811,700
$;!2, 100
811,200
810,500
4

2
32,000

2
82,000

2
32,000

82,957

7
82,503

1
$4M

82,260

810

8235

31,615
8400

829,208

10,000
323, 8.50

3i50

878

81,925

8102

345,530

845,530

300

S4.S0

91,000

845.050

3
335,480
825,000

137

Indiana.

818, 425

314, 235

81,020

31,950

31,220

82,903

8152
8214

32,876

82,307
8305

39
3255

814, 180

814. 180

17,683

314,180

814, 180
816, 898

Michigan.

8227, 496
Sas. 246
357,390
825,010
856,850
28

13
89,290

13
39,290

13
89,290

263

828,667

93
828,032

3560

375

87,868

810

81,376

85, 982
8124,803

3116,723
31,996

31,065

34,519

3500

8208, 568

8202, 258
218, 453
3202, 268

86,310

21
8206,768
8204,490

17
252

22
252

New York.

3256,886
852,220
835, 910
329,076

8139,680
2

24
813, 318

7
83,680

13
39,138

8500

324,295

323,470

8825

338,411
82,427
81,326

834,658

8412, 832

8440

8,248

37,766

3373, 894

811,929

3543

31, 125

813,515

33,630

8531,000

3531,000

517, 462

8469, 331

19,260

89,699

852, 050

Virginia.

11
3513, 030

3482, 830

11
432

417
1
2

313,884
3145
83, 120
84,719
38,900
22

3619

2
3519

2
$519

36,819

29
86,819

8183
851

3457

321,807

819, 194
81,246

8170

81,182

813

337,772

837, 772
117, 721
837,772

7
324,643
323,060

13
193

14
193

All other
states.'

830, 467

813, 785

3861

36,265

89,856

1
3396

1
8396

1
$396

83,459

10
83,459

8666

$90

$100

8472
84

84,586

749
82,723

321

81, 070

8515

$208
312

813,043

312,991

10,210

$12,991

852

7
811,504

811,492

4
26

1 Includes establishments distributed as follows: California, 2: Florida, 1: Massachusetts, 1: North Carolina, 1; Pennsylvania, 2; Wisconsin, 2.

123

Taulk O.— }<»8KNTIAL: SUMMARY BY STATES, IMO-Continued.

Cnlted
States.

Oonneeti-
cut

IndUn*.

HichlRiin.

X.w York.

Virginia.

All other
•Ut«a.>

EiiUihlliihinenbi rlniHinect by number of pengns employed, nut InrliiilInK
proprietor" nnti firm momner":
Total luinilK'r of t't^tabllitinientM....

6
1

I
9
3
1

•

No einploveos

4
1

2
5

7
«

8 to 20

21 to SO

101 IO280

> Includes establlshmenta distributed on {oUowa: OaUtomla, 2: Florida, 1; Hanachnsetts, 1; North Carolina, 1; Pennsylvania, 2; Wisconsin. 2.

124

Table T.— CHEMICALS:

19
20

23
24

25
26

27
28

31
32
33
34

36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

44
45
46
47

Number of establishments

Character of organization:

Individual

Firm and limited partnership

Incorporated company

Capital:

Total

Land

Buildings '

"Machinery, tools, and implements

Cash and sundries. ^

Proprietors and firm members

Salaried officials, clerks, etc.:

Total number

Total salaries ,

Officers of corporations —

Number

Salaries

General superintendents, managers, clerlis, etc. —

Total number

Total salaries

Men-
Number

Salaries

Women —

Numi>er

Salaries

Wage-earners, including pieceworkers, and total wages:

Greatest number employed at any one time during the year

Least number employed at any one time during the year

Average number

Wages

Men, 16 years and over —

Average number

Wages

Women, 16 years and over —

.■V verage num ber

Wages

Children, under 16 years —

A verage number

Wages

Miscellaneous expenses:

Total

Rent of works

Taxes, not including internal revenue

Rent of ofBces, insurance, interest, and all sundry expen.ses, not
hitherto included.

Contract work

-Materials used:

Total cost

Gums

Limestone, tons

Cost

Phosphate rock, tons

Cost

Pyrites, tons

Cost

Wood—

For alcohol, cords

Cost

For extracts, tons

Cost

Acids-
Sulphuric, tons

Cost

Nitric, pounds.

Cost

Mixed, pounds

Cost

Acid phosphate, tons.

Cost
Argols
Ammonia-
Aqua, pounds

Cost
Sulphate, pounds.
Cost
Alcohol-
Grain, gallons

Cost
Wood, gallons
Cost
Bones, tankage, and offal
Common salt, tons.

Cost
Dry colors

Glycerine, pounds

Cost

Lead, tons

Cost

■Lime', bushels

Cost

Lin.seed oil, gallons

Cost

Nitrate of potash, tons

Cost

Nitrate of soda, tons

Cost

Potash salts

Sulphur, tons

Cost

Tallow and fat'!

Wood ashes, bushels

Cost

All other components of products

United States.

118

249

889,091,430
89, 924, 613
814,447,998
825, 173, 778
S39,M5,W1
242

2,123
82, 923, 033

326
8741,570

1,797
82,181,463

1,660
82, 115, 477

137
865,986

22,081

16.603

19,054

89,401,467

18,132
89,141,804

856
8248,011

66
811,652

84,363,868
8153,715
8306,696

83,870.595

832,862

834,564,137

8514,627

765, 064

8660, 220

9, 845

866,088

324,461

81,512,490

494,447

81,250,942

3,000

818,000

37, 832

8429. 903

2, 439, 297

8127,811

6.M),500

821,047

.59

84,5.52

82,204,800

415, 609, 303

81,0.51,703

8, 745, 568

8471,117

120,474

8263, 472

3,371,090

81,457,854

8543, 898

38,996

8130, 108

89,868

17,651,212

81,402,762

5,217

820, 359

7,378,408

8434,367

13,000

97,600

3,3.53

8117,499

S7, 892

81,250,520

•728,187

55,296

81,080.716

8337,317

801,047

839,507

810,423,149

California. Connecticut.

4
4
13

81,844,928
8248, 7.52
8289,511
8651,992
8654, 673
11

62
870, 493

19
821,300

43
849, 193

36
844, .543

7
84,6.50

628

263

390

8230. 395

387
8228,973

81,422

889,823
81,280
88,089

880,454

$1,406,425

1,600

88,000

300

83,900

6,331

834,658

3,000

818,000

746
822,122

398,500

83,186

82,000

8245,000

89,158.596

812, 542

200,000

84,250

856.000

454

81,639

3,509
8700

3,410

8104, 758

88, ,500

4, 454
8102,926

$406, 743

8311,399
$.8,8.50
$21,000
8146, 849
8134, 700

12
89,068

4
82,800

86,268

86,060

8208

831,716

45
$31,716

88,877

$4,000

8608

84,269

8105,106

2,597
813,585

$11

Illinois.

5
i
18

$2,384,062
8449, 938
$299,569
$887,849
$746, 706
13

$119,028

16
830,125

80
888,903

$84,458

11
84,445

692
S05
579

8309,286

.513
8293,006

48
813, 187

18
83,093

890,293

811,100

87, 113

$72,080

81, 175, .571

816

9,2.50

81,330

200

8.'J00

4,337

825,965

6,797

866. .525
2.5,000
81,000

Indiana.

3
4

$1,076,390

890, 269

$206, 398

8478, 601

8301,122

853,077

5
813,000

36
840,077

35
839, 877

1
8200

299

297

8154, 173

294
$153, 408

8105

$74,406

$:»

• $5,183
869, 193

$187,066

18,867
8108, 789

1.5,000
$40,000

130,268
84,056

400

$76

1,070
835,692

1,655
832,104

$3,666

862,998

5,058

819, 120

617, 195
$57, 642

2,002
8397

490

817, 668

81,200

2, 265

$46, 397

8577,112

245
$3, .520

7,000
$350

3,048
810, 494

18,432
83,090

4,222
8148, 631

2.5,200
$1,280
890. 239

Maine.

8550, 426

$2, 335

847,396

$467, 4.59

833,236

7
$2,733

1
$1,000

6
$1,733

6
81,733

$4,928

12
84,928

82,991
$500
$263

$2,228

$16, 758

1,000
$5,000

81,200
82,289

21,960

82. 044

830

Sl'MMARY BY STATES, 1900.

125

Maryland.

1
1
6

■ Jl,»0ii,2W
S.V>1.001)

t.'W6,46.%

83
tfil.424

8
t22,6S0

25
«»,774

22
127, 2M

8
tl,490

406

475

ta4«.4M

472
•24S.M8

8
1806

MasMchii-
•etta.

tl03,a88
>4.087

K.284
»91,067

1781,909

3
4
11

»1,877.S71

SKA.UrtD

8348.314

$3(i7.912

tl. 100. 176

92
8188,091

16
«42,240

T7
I90,8.M

186,244

11
$4,607

747

629

62:

8388.716

680
1828,631

89,476

8
t60»

«268,236

»5,780

*16,791

r240,665

86,000

•1,080,826
(98,881

3,195 I.

((19,775 :.

14. 107 I

868,731 :

25,«M0
tlOl.OU

280
81,680

Mlcbi|[*n.

80
7
14

<7,.vn.&.'ss

J1,(M7,,')60
81,631.261
83.2.'>8.406
81,666,624
46

143
8216, 999

80
864,690

113
8151,309

106
8147,286

>4,023

8,409

2,341

2.897

81,162,634

2. S51
81,158,673

46
86.961

Mtaouri.

31.% 690

8271.161

3. 4lW

SH<.K)7

831.791

82, 691
8124.830

8603,732

83,085

82.S,674

8471.183

S(,790

82,707,464 81,335,798

81,969,875
8181,224
82»*,389
8427, ."iafi

81.066,676
1

78
8111,606

10
r27,237

8»i.369

62
881.032

6
83,337

366

3.S6

340

8162,351

277
8150, .W7

37
87. 152

26
84,642

8135,806

87,200

816,775

8111,831

Nevada.

848.075
J.5.000
82.0."iO
87.025

834,000
7

1
8600

87,170

18
86,680

2
8490

82,086

8126
81,960

86,050

New Jersey.

14
10
87

817,284.675
82,114,179
fti.797,240
83.728,737
88,644,619
38

402
8577,837

8132.060

363
8445.277

348
8438.3.58

15
86,919

S.4I9

2,611

3,048

81,576,132

2,765
81,473,582

289
8100,918

4
8632

8638.013
817.337
8.'a,403

8-549,796

818,477

86, 994, ,508
8163,902

1,337

812,016

71.718

8315.729

3,208
812,364

New York,

18
49

822.106.887
8l.15y.illl
83,3J1,799
8.5,484.870

812,069,667
23

.503
8718. 831

69
8192,684

434

t526,247

404
S-MI.149

30
81.5.098

.5,332

3.8.5)1

4. .531

82.302,999

4,4-29
82,269.816

102
833,184

81,142,851
864.620
881.947
8993.784

82, .500

88, 669. .561

81<st5,388

316.016

8289, 722

1.270

812. 700

48. 43a

8196. 847

108,885
8271,681

Ohio,

13
a

83.670,401
8397,680
8618,046
8V76.144

81,778,682
21

164
8199.166

22
832,710

142
8166, 4.56

126
81.58.424

16
88,032

745
551

609
8340,332

.583

24
(7,000

81.57. 810

87, .587
816, 744
$132,877

8602

82,083,721

81,200

100

81,000

37,421
8181,025

Paniwyl-
vanU.

100

11
38
68

823,766,6.56
•2. 030, .146
13.939,376
86,709.182

810,077,762
64

416

(572.846

8138.098

349
8434,748

8423,111

26
811,637

4,651
4,101

4,278
(2,198,243

4,055
82,186,905

211
869,036

12
(2,302

(981,869
816, 881
860,838

8861,657

82,493

(6,805,769

869,240

61,829

(49,669

(390

76,961

(378, 4T7

280,872
(791,417

Rhode
Itlaod.

3
1
1

(840,724
(18.000
(43,800
(31,800

(348,924
3

(12,908

1
(2,600

10
810,403

(9,968

1
(420

161

100

843,201

&)
(40,804

16
(2,400

(36,996
(i,126

(2. 866
(29,004

Wlaconiln.

(288, 4M

(164,9(6

(138,4(0

8»

H8,060

82,876

27
(40,174

70
66

64
(28,258

49
(24.569

16
(1,689

(67,649

(6,700

8834

861,016

Allocber
iuu«.>

(8,272,081

•i,6e«.«ao

(484.966

M»,407

IMS. 768

30
•81,781

16
•16,700

16
•16,081

18
•16,161

3
•920

8117,828
(.500

4,183
(26,470

(131, 421

727
•263,846

20
•8,630

•120,143

•463

•12.168

•107.532

•668,867

70,879
•86,348

7,402
(22,412

8,506
(8,970

3
S

B
<
7
8

9
10

11
13

IS
U

16
16

17
18

909 I 21

647 22

747 23

(287,476 ' 34

26
26

27
38

39
30

82
83
S4

86
87
38

9t
40
41
42
43

46
46
47

48
49
GO
61

set

83
64
65

57
58
69
60

64
66

66
67
68
89
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87

3,868 \
(18,640

2,166
832, 473
659,287
826,889

3,463
838, 173

622 '
(6,779 i

10. 162

8118,806

1,692,610

(97,496

3,017

85.5,446

15.400

tt\n6

200.000
86,000

436
•26

29,291,188
8488, 162

(1.700

(260

190,000
(22,000

1,011

(36,848

(131,800

937

(21,300

(290,704

15 '

837
M,271 i
843,470

1,568
82,310
86,631

J414,9'24

1,462

(6,014

27
(2,409
18,000
(7,200

2,067

(70,799

•4,868

3,809
(61,291

(344,721

131, '2.56

(22, 4.V2

(67.906

684,617

829,440

8119,986

41,W9.931
8116.538
1,13:1,931 '
(136, .561 '

36,837

881,841

7,250

85.700

3125

609

(2,124

50,474

(8,095

82,198

8-5.400

1,008

(22.021

(849,244

(1,044,800

98,949,132

(82,740

4,299. 4-24

(118.332

36,747

(74,657

252,622

(147,689

6,989

(26,980

(4,237

8452

591,5,000

180.000

89.000

5.57.7.53

(143. 189

14.2.50

$»(.628

3,001.916

(1,226.4W

87.809

11,475

(30,643

241
(3,369
12,000

(20

7,005

(67,160

36,000

(1,760

62,000

(10,861

(2,100

100,000
(7,000

96,664
(16,467

10,000,000

(830,000

6,181

(16,845

5, 800. 194

(264,246

14,666
(468,808
(234,302

16,482
•273,429

(6,446

4,561

(148,360

•66,032

12,302

•264,271

(4,000

(1,726 1 (2.808.376 1 (1.679.708

43,017,000

(26,810

19,619

(679

5,675

81-'. »*0

3,500

84,000

5,226
(13, 130

106,392,160
(197,894
1.062,458

(29,468

24, 1,50

8.5.3,091

51,, 531

830, ,591

8312 ,

4,020

817,968

14,128
(478

2,400
85,600

(614,970

27.429
84.;«»

5.870

(197. 4.57

(25, 149

2.4«0

8IS.61W
S-.T3, 31 1

169,270

(6, 743

(647,697

l.OOO

(160

(1.106

1,017,281

$92,499

13.000

(7,500

3,274

(112,063

818-5. 763
10.381

$19N.a64
8<K).000

6.085
(1.826

113
(3.903

9*7
(18,188

(2,686,378 (39,251 I (113.626

8,663,870

(148,641

1.127,729

(28,198

130
(360

12,079
(2.092

334

(14,308

111
•2.125

•61.061

< Includes c<tabll>hmenL<< dixtributed aa follow*: Arizona, 1: Colorado, 2: Delaware. 1: Distrii'l o( Columbia, 1: Kentucky, 1: Nehraska. 1: New Hampiihiiv, 1;
North Carolina, 2: Tennessee, 1: Vermont. 2: Virginia, 1; Went Virginia. I.

126

Table 7.— CHEMICALS: SUMMARY

88
89
90
91
92

9S
%
97

99
100
101
102
103
104
105
10«
107
108
109

110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125

126
127

128
129
ISO
131
132

133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141

142
143
144
145
146
147

148
149
150
151

152
153
154
155

156
157
158
159

161
162
163
164
165
166

167
168
169
170

171
172

Materials used — Continued.
Total cost— Continued.

Fuel

Kent of f>owerand heat

Mill .supplies

All other materials

Freight

Products:

Aggregate value

Acids —

Total value

Sulphuric, 50° Baumfi, tons

Value

Sulphuric, 60° Baum6, tons

Value

Sulphuric, 66°Baum6, tons

Value

Nitric, pounds

Value

Mixed, pounds

Value

Tartaric, pounds

Value

Acetic, pounds

Value

Other acids

Sodas-
Total value

Sal soda, tons

Value

Soda ash, tons

Value

Bicarbonate of soda, tons

Value

Caustic soda, tons

Value

Borax, tons

Value

Other soda products

Pota.shes, pounds

Value

Alums, pounds

Value

Coal-tar products-
Coal-tar distillery products

Chemicals made from coal-tar distillery products .
Cyanides—

Potas.sium cyanide, pounds

Value

Yellow prussiate of potash, pounds

Value

Other cyanides

Wood distillation —
Wood alcohol —

Crude, gallons

Value

Refined, gallons

Value

Acetate of lime, tons

Vahie

Charcoal, bushels

Value

All other wood distillates

Fertilizers —

Superphosphates —

From minerals, bones, etc. , tons

Value

Complete, tons

value

All other fertilizers, tons

Value

Bleaching materials —

Hypochlorites, tons

Val ue

Other bleaching agents

Electro-chemiciil products ;

DyestufTs—

Natural, pounds

Va lue :

Artificial, pounds

Value

Tanning materials —
Natural-
Extracts, pounds

Value

Artificial, pounds

Value

Paints, colors, and varnishes-
Total value

Pigments-
Fine colors, pounds

Value

Iron oxides and other earth colors, pounds .

Value

Dry colors, pounds .•

Value

Paints-
Paints in oil, in paste, pounds

Value

Paints, already mixed for use, gallons

Value

Varnishes and japans —

Oil and turpentine varnishes, gallons

Value

United States.

»3,539,0y^

8222,356

$212, 434

S2,991,l.=>ti

81,021,710

862, 676, 730

$11,853,498

97,8.58

$427,393

16, 829

$242,879

409,547

$5,508,625

28,704,709

$1,404,743

36,468,819

$1,111,158

997,004

$294,603

14,641,673

$345, 951

$2,518,146

$11,596,915

63,231

$779, 166

386,361

$4, 768, 383

68,185

$1,324,843

78, 779

$2,917,955

5,637

$502,480

$1,304,088

3,764,806

$174, 476

152,520,2,59

$2, 013, 607

$809,830
$512,264

2,291,335
$591,280

6, 140, 406

$993, 514

$129

4,191,379

$1,660,061

3, 038, 140

$2, 296, 898

43,41;^

$981, 286

17,154,302

$726, 672

$9,534

1,810

$20, 417

17,242

$339,600

7, 243

$95, 132

2, 143

$115,608

$376, 478

$1,305,368

513, 302

$36,547

3,896,4.58

$54,948

1,062, .500
$82, 500
616,9.50
$12, 639

$541,892

674, 6,50
$80, 9.58
318, :«io
$6,660
3,661,403
$57,881

67, 467
81,668
20,756
$6,559

3,907
83,907

California. Connecticut.

$147,200

$70, 256
$147,712

$2,061,470

$654,
3,

$44,
2,

$33,

$103!
3,380,
$158,

90,
827,

$288,472

$660,025

3,870

$58,370

1,320

$17,160

225

$9,000

$125

5,502

8490,330

$91,040

$11,415
$19,217

2,000
$60,000

1,0.50,000
$30,000

$15, 7.50

2,100,000
815, 750

$9,164

$.507
$10,250

$290,320
$279,804

Illinois.

$81,056

$300

$8,860

$149, 693

$52,798

$2, 086, 625

$407,263

9, 126

$162, 815

1,592,280

$79, 871

1,466,014

836, 600

12,450

$224,130

,508, 758

835,600

$518
$7,038

87,038

Indiana.

$42,419

$1,398

$36,176
8680

$1,037,832

$572,148

19,419

8231,487

3-50, 748

816, 530

6,434,418

$240, 510

867,920
$11,120

8136.413 I

$303,771 ;

.5,061
$67,489

884,621

8299.463

3,487

$34, 874

2,458
$221,325

$14,957
820,000
853, .349
10,130,000
895,600

$264,589
135,200
86,350

1,900
$33,145

297

$38, 649

12, .500
82,500

100,000
8(i5, 000
1,000
830,000
7.50,000
830,000

$490

Maine.

$1,635

$1,055

$127

$810

$2,665

831,638

$17,542

402

$3,214

1,034

814, 328

88,290
82,935

89,631

BY STATES, 1900— Continued.

127

Maryland.

Haaaohu-

NttS.

Ulchlgan.

MlHOOTt.

Nerada.

New Jttwej.

Naw York.

Ohio.

Pannnjrl-
vania.

Rhode
(■land.

Wfanonilii.

A]lo<ber
lUtek'

$90,013

$60

$33,609

»«0,589

$94,058

$1,118

89,781

$188,998

$35,696

$2,010,830

$900,968

37.895

$36,110

$838,706

$30,990

$1,881

81.758

$64,543

$476

8375,770
81,620

837. 183
$544,202

$49,704

$12,207,289

$8,358,192

8,936

$56,lil6

$959,487
$212,997

$47,847
$858,468

$6»,8M

$I5,»»4,866

$1,712,961

81ft

$11,000

$1,000

.59.206

$87^,911

4,100.541

8222.740

6. 392. .516

$159,800

720,000

$208,000

4,127.162

$«.470

8141. (HO

$4,921,144

28,096

83.57,308

167.552

82,066,422

43,812

888,5.003

40.499

$1,518,464

•96,643

$668,672

$1,250

$28,397

$668,400

$600,141

$18,084,384

$2,038,652

16, 101

$99,773

13,356

$193,799

97,590

$1,190, .530

1.222,445

$56,887

$8,866

$26

$699

$8,626
$3,109

$292,794

$153,994

$2,500

$292

7,092

$148,962

20,000

$1,500

$1,817

$117, «22
$2,000
$6,422

$123,487
K2Z8

$1,838,562
•117,490

$18,287
$1,57,768
$68,068

$6,864,724

$120
$730

$10,981

$111, 664

H346

$3, 676. 260

$1,886,326

$Z76

$11,617

$3,416

$254,196

•1
98

$1,271,410

$176,569

31.648

$176,569

$1,804,090
$81,880

$20,960

27,684

$414,211

3,082,046

$86,741

2.869
$64,500

123,236

$1,474,011

12,890,260

$666,533

6,081, 134

$259,588

46,i47

$627,944

1,377,291

$72,248

17,094,707

$414,665

6,261

•102.690

180,000

•10,800

ion

101

107

108

104

187,004

$69,608

2,515,575

$41,516

$397,645

$970,568

12,756

$132,990

106

662,673
$10,650
$16,680

$30,129

6,478,443
$187,196
$711,783

$170,363

$410

107

108

$364,906

$118,182

232

$2,900

8371,468

$122,820

4,100

$42,640

$760

n,8oo

•4,000
•924, 4W

109

$39,500

2.600

$25,000

$2,826,377

$20,960

$174,801

3,096

$67,190

UO
lit

112

i88,i6.5

82,168.969

10,000

$160,000

18,000

$500,000

600
$8,800

28,724
$617,082

6,426
$122,079

6,984
$207,697

iin

114

7,700

$154,000

11,754

$460,845

23
$4,761

115

116

111
$8,679

20
$820

117

118

135
812,160

119

i?n

fl4,600

$115,282

$17,408
1,869,116

$77,609
1,480,000

839,600

$21,460

$169,133

$93,952

$80,180
852,200
$34,233

$222. 7i8

$1,800

$112,350

r7,691

121

17?

123

18,266,415
$216,754

$12,518

46,211.951
8593,070

829.000
814.300

76,43i,89S
$1,068,683

$178,102
$175, 147

7.236

82.047

2,003.004

$301,069

8129

2,848.326

$1,183,095

41.902

$34,600

27.732

$6.57,810

11,079,029

$461,259

$2,302

l?4

l?5

894,400

$227,400
$3,600

2,210.000
$.572,400

2.822,566
$470,490

$243,000

$14,000

178

$300,000

I'?7

60.000
$18,020

24,099

$3,813

96,024

$14,408

178

129

700,000
$120,700

518,822
$86,862

130

13?

116,010

$32,226

504,196

$319, .553

3,396

$43,266

2,8.31,120

$119,063

l.ft56,088

$431,064

2.207,230

81,762.812

11,285

$250,211

2.310,6.53

8103.390

8632

170,960
$18,677
^160
$7,460

11M

184

29,652
$86,973

90,000
$67,500

3,000
$4,000

118

1T7

15,000
$1,200
$1,200

152,600

$10,800

$6,031

30
$450

16,000
i960
$369

139

140

141

252
$2,268

390
$8,000

717
X.SOO

1,528

$17,699

14,758

r279.588

2,727

$56,321

1,782
$62,887

147

143

$2,012

120

$1,411

$1,600

$10,258

144

145

1.779
$955

148

147

66
$12,972

148

.. ..

149

$gi2

$21,196

$340,612
$1,102,481

$3,500

150

$193,266

151

513,302
$36,547

167

153

2,929,808
$29,970

786,6.50
$22,678

230,000
$2,800

164

166

•

158

167

36,000
$5,400

$262,636

674,680
$80,968
144.000
$6,600
1,.500,000
$38,000

680.950
$7,239

$21,137

158

$400

$3,881

$230,598

$6,000

•2,000

160

161

107

130,000
i400

24,360

$160

■ 58.276

$286

67,467
$1,668
10,755
$4,&&«

"iSg

188

184

8,127
$3,846

166

188

167

168

io,'666

•2,000

169

170

8,907
$3,907

171

172

Mncludea extabllahmenta diitributed a8 (oUowe: Arizona. 1; Colorado.
North Carolina. 2: Tenneaee, 1; Vermont. 2: Virginia. 1; West VirKinia. 1.

IK'laware. 1: District of Colnmbla, 1: Kenttickjr, I: Nebraska, 1: New HamiMhire, 1:

128

Table 7.— CHEMICALS: SUMMARY

173
174

175
176
177

178

179
180

ISl
182

183
184
185

186
187
188

189
190
ISl
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204

205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220

221
222
223
224

225
226
227

228
229
230

231
232

23S
2W
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242

248
244
245

246
247
248
249

250
251
252
253
254
255

Products — Continued.

Aggregiite value— Continued.

Paints, colors, and varnishes — Continued.
Total value— Continued.

Varnishes and japansi — Continued.

Alcohol varnishes, gallons

Value

Pyroxyline varnishes, gallons

Value

Liquid dryers, japans and lacquers

All other varnishes, and japans ^

Explosive.' —

Guncotton, or pyroxyline, pounds

Value

Plastics—

Pvroxyline plasties

All other plastics

Essential oils —

Natural, pounds

Value

Artificial

Compres.sed and liquified gases-
Anhydrous ammonia

Carbon dioxide

Compressed and liquified gases, not otherwise enumerated

Fine chemicals —

Total value

Alkaloids, ounces

Value

Gold salts, ounces

Value

Silver salts, ounces

Value

Platinum salts, ounces

Value

Chloroform, pounds

Value

Ether, pounds

Value

Acetone, pounds

Value

All other fine chemicals

Chemicals, not otherwise specified —

Total value

Glycerine, pounds

Value

Cream of tartar, pounds

Value

Epsom salts, pounds

Value

Blue vitriol, poiinds

Value .,

Copperas, pounds

Value

Phosphates of soda, pounds

Value

Tin salts, pounds

Value . i

Value of all other products

Products consumed:
Acid.s —

Sulphuric, tons

Nitric, pounds

Mixed, pounds

Charcoal, bushels

Ether, pounds

Pyroxyline, pounds

All other products consumed, pounds

Comparison of products:

Number of establishments reporting for both years

Value for census year

Value for preceding business year

Power:

Number of establishments reporting

Total horsepower

Owned —

Engines-
Steam, number

Horsepower

Gas or gasoline, number

Horsepow er

Water wheels, number

Horsepower

Electric motors, number

Horsepower

Other power, number

Horsepower

Rented—

Electric, horsepower

Other kind, horsepower

Furnished to other e.stablishments, horsepower

Establishments classified by number of persons employed, not including
proprietors and firm members:

Total number of establishments

No employees

Under 6

5 to 20

21 to 50

.51 to 100

101 to2.T0

251 to 500

601 to 1,000

Over 1,000

United States.

13,401

$37,840
43,942

8.58, 186

8&44

$287, 589

98,405
J39,962

81,970,387
8129, 013

725
8464

82,410

8448, 157

8696,164

870,690

84, 220, 339

3,387.522

81,743,264

8,594

$90, 145

1,252,604

8499. 345

7, 312

8'>4,600

3%. 540

$98, 070

263,2.3.M

$129, 876

1,638,715

$178. 666

$1,426,373

$5,148,646

15, 383, 798

82, 012, 886

10,620,000

82,081,500

6, 072, 309

$45. 966

7, .500, 000

$375, 000

14. 097. 905

$.tS. .V*1

3, 478. 350

8104, .5.54

4,677.471

8470, 1.59

812, 799, 405

925,7%

16,9.53,659

8,902,371

1,656.790

560

662, 884

484, 925, 323

394
858,786,318
849, 462, 554

341
92,381

1.091

69,560

361

1,915

2,032

18,231
252
106

4.59

178

105

California.

820,488
824,000

$326,000

1.610.000
$326,000

$243,815
1,415

1, 659, 503

19
81,697,235
81,429,458

18
984

982

Connecticut.

83, 478

1,210
B70, 139

Illinois.

8100

810

$180,350
$100,060

8100,060

$169. 695
1,403. .506
8169, 695

Indiana.

$490

3
8290,320
$241,880

1
25

$701,133

6,594
155,484

1, 317, 031

23
$2,061,551
81,762.034

19
1,606

1,298

5
145

$34,381

10,190

6, 198. 996

148,671

5
$911,482
$928, 123

6
782

562

11
226

Maine.

81,530

4
822,007
815,300

1,411

1,400
1
5

129

BY STATES, 1900— Continued.

Marrliuid.

Maattchu-
Mtta.

MIohtfan.

Mlanorl.

Mavada.

New Jeney.

New York.

Ohio.

Praoajrl-
vanla.

Rbod«
UUnd.

Wlaconaia.

AlloUWT
•UUa.1

130

$V»

43,»42

$58,186

10,900
$31,600

2,771
$6,820

ITS

\Mi

>••■>• >

$»44

$8,000

177

$8,881

$164,140

98,406
$39,962

$1,858,746
$3,750

$106,678

K600

ITU

I7t

$111,641
$119,868

Iffl

$6,895

«9e

$S64

$2,40G

iffi

18,976

$79,742
$62,844

$92,375
$69,225

$47,906

$126,885
$112,828

$77,786
$8,000

$eoo

$13,200
$9,390

$173,962
$62,490

$475,498

$79,486

187

$5,000
$1,660

fl2»000

$284,056

$406,854

288,672

$98,213

803

$9,917

173,000

$63,890

932

r,922

334,000

86<;.800

6*3,000

$1S,6.50

63,593

$6,359

$135, 103

$1,120,977

$2,930,831

8,096,860

$1,645,051

2,500

$26,000

650,907

$277,632

$60,000

i$*

191

5,226
$53,448
103,576
$37,719

6,380
$46,678

$780

32.5. 121

$120,104

191t

. . ..

194

I9A

11T

62,540
$31,270
74,500
W5.700
1,4.'»,S<)5
J1.58, 712
$118,932

$2,133,275

8,000,000

$1,120,000

4.800,000

$960,000

20,000

$1,000

ltd

149

116.360
$66,211

16,188

$t,sis

119,267
$13,596
$969,238

$491,873

700

?in

Trn

$12,000
$116,215

$9,390
$30,191

$46,666
$2,654

$1,650

$726,211
5.607.874
$691,536

$60,000

?04

$31,6.56
372,418
$81,666

■m

4,210,000
$796,500

•m

1,421500
$14,215

4,630,809
$30,751

7,500,000
$375,000

3,000,000
$18,000

710

711

71?

713

871,902
$5,231

67,403
$675

10,158.600
$34,675

714

716

3.400,000
$102,000

78,380
$2,554

71(1

717

i79,687
$30,191
$388,771

U.7o6

856,500

8,784,700

3,130,578

$320,246

$3. 470, SM

33,878

5,402,401

19 000

257,329

$51,600

$1,626,073

20,165
2,469,6)e

1.109,977

$68,122

$2,226,425

822,975
339,961

718

"■■$7»i,'4M'
3,7S0

719

$1,292,024
10,205

$879,123

744
8,074

$914,764

2.314
963.422

$82,000

$440

$143,856
600

7?0

771

•n

't^

267,825

2»t,000

939,500
560

156.466

7'?4

775

239,842
5,216,478

17
$2,010,830
$1,492,996

12
2,169

28
2,144

423,042
18,152,321

$11,008,452

$9,193,671

48
8.362

174
8,028

1
7
1
6
4
215
1
5

7?«

65,817,010

47
$5,063,708
$3,967,657

15
21,999

130
21,987

306,676

389,476,640

80
$15,699,331
$13,529,828

82
34,690

324
15,596
2
127
24
114
31
740

1.463.060

28
$3,(JS7,317
$3,032,065

20
1,280

80
1.280

8.648.466

90
$12,762,467
$10,802,657

91
13,112

226
11,903

10
148

88
886

20
670

2,440,500

14
$1,336,552
$1,019,610

4,777

4,830

7'r7

J477,927
$342,366

5
460

17
445

6
$1,404,687
$1,238,897

8
344

10
817

3
$20,960
$20,400

2
60

1
2

4
$292,794
$272,369

1
126

4
12s

2
$189,706
$173,443

3
206

4
206

228
229
230

231
232

28S
284

fin

738

7*7

738

1
6

6
32

740

4
26

120
2

741

74?

17
10

18,0m
20
60

102
10

SI
3
11
18
14
6
7
' 2

744

■P4ft

51
3
29

7
5
2
2

35
2
12
15
6

100

246

747

S
8

1
1
4

10
43
23
8
6
2

•

49
80
«
S
1
1
1

2
10

1
1

?4tl

2
2

719

2
1
2
1

7fin

251

2
1

•fVt

*fM

■M

Mnclndes establishments distributed as follows: Arlxona, 1: Colorado, 2: Delaware, 1; District of Columbia. 1; Kentucky, 1: Nebraska, 1: New Hampshire.!:
North Carolina. 2; Tennessee. I; Vermont, 2; Virginia. I: We^it Virginia. 1.

No. 210 9

130

Table 8 — BONE, IVORY, AND LAMPBLACK: SUMMARY BY STATES, 1900.

United
States.1

United
States.!

Number of establishmenta

Character of organization:

Individual

Firm and limited partnerslup

Incorporated company

Capital:

Total

Land

Buildings

Machinery, tools, and implements

Casli and sundries

Proprietors and firm members

Salaried officials, clerics, etc.:

Total number

Total salaries

Officers of corporations —

Number

Salaries

General superintendents, managers, clerics, etc.—

Total number

Total salaries

Men-
Number

Salaries

Women —

Number

Salaries

Wage-earners, including pieeeworlcers, and total wages:

Greatest number employed at any one time during the year
Least number employed at any one time during the year —

Average number

Wages

Men, 16 years and over-
Average number

Wages

Miscellaneous expenses:

Total

Rent of worlcs

2
8
5

8782,247
8149, 103
8196,422
8300,571
8136. 151
17

21
823,660

6
86,360

817,290

16
816,990

846,107

85
846, 107

876, 678
86,625

Miscellaneous expenses — Continued.
Total— Continued.

Taxes, not including internal revenue ,

Rent of offices, insurance, interest, and all sundry expenses

not hitherto included

Contract worlj

Materials used:

Total cost ,

Components of products ,

Fjiel

Mill supplies

All other materials

Freight

Products:

Total value

Pigments —

Lamp and other blocks, pounds

Value ,

Comparison of products:

Number of establishments reporting for both years

Value for census year ,

Value for preceding business year ,

Power:

Number of establishments reporting ,

Total horsepower

Owned—
Engines-
Steam, number

Horsepower ,

Gas or gasoline, number ,

Horsepower ,

Establishments cla.ssified by number of persons employed, not in-
cluding proprietors and firm members:

Total number of establishments

Under 6

6 to 20

21 to 60 ".

82,260

866,902

8108, 712
866,776
82,663
81,771
832, 126
82,376

8359, 787

6, 454, ;?45
8369, 787

15
8369, 787
$280,816

365

18
345

1
20

15
7
7
1

'Includes establishments distributed as follows: Pennsylvania, 12; Connecticut, 1; New York, 1; Ohio, 1.
Table 9.— CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES, 1900.

establishments: number, and char-
acter OF organization.

CAPITAL.

STATES AND TERK1T0KIK8.

Total
number.

Individ-
ual.

Firm
and lim-
ited part-
nership.

Incorpo-
rated
com-
pany.

Total.

Land.

Buildings.

Machinery,

tools, and

Implements.

Cash and
sundries.

United States

1,740

516

405

820

8238,629,641

822,947,444

835,270,880

846,116,461

8134,194.896

19
,53
4
31
16

8
10
46
88
42

8
5
18
10
18

63
83
97

8
4

160

285

137

306

22
14
7
5

64
9

12
6

2
16

8
30

4
16

2
6
22
64
20

3
3
13

8
6

24
37
28
5
3

1,514,791
6,807,440
392,865
3,2.54,506
2, 139, 856

111,606

778,319

6,764,918

10,24.5,146

2,527,306

621,171

291,278

740,484

1,439,1.53

1, 107, 261

9,148,474

7,887,796

10,684,794

371,083

372, 797

6,256.327

945,517

53,075

34,307,300

46,913,165

2,878,088

13,083,173

176,332

48,964,862

1,166,566

10,606,043

1,258,373

50, .550

316, 422

8,158,747
313,29?
817,341
166,426

20,118
590,618

15,700
128,772

95,100

22,000
95, 164
141,762
1,369 232
161,985

38,442
24,000
,50,522
70,394

71,585

1,282,011

467,046

1,286,685

7,829

20,322

496,359

70,500

5,000

3,350,787

4, 931, 861

110,269

1,392,119

6,000

4,602,488

68,700

109,441

108,947

700

8,200

1,706,496

27,060

18,000

6,844

239,060
1,609,294

81,200
429,881
238,467

11,800

139, 186

1,049,304

1,141,727

480,112

103,150
74,450
82,976

313,956
76,594

1,241,469
979.209

2,048,160
37,085
50,000

742,024

882,319

2,050

6,016,423

6,274.907

411,432

1,810.967

6,500

6,979,963

178,583

1.642,600

366,619

5,000

34,685

973,308

48,900

8,500

70,112

212,824
1,236,298
148,650
790,778
223,814

29,585

136,298

672, 634

1,715,112

663, 238

84,018
67,648
98,846
215,419
528,459

1,702,628

1,149,955

3,565,983

50,374

87,362

948,877

111,576

. 7,625

5,838,209

8,986,573

228,823

2,213,887

21,247

11.928,088

162,911

487, 117
177,114
26,226
82. 132

1,242,299

74,049

208,769

31,822

1,042,799
3,471,233

California . . . . .

Connecticut ...

4
4
13
15
14

2
2
3

6
1

1 905 075

Delaware

1,582,475

48,221

Florida

407 672

4,901,218

Illinois

6, 029, 075

1,231,971

Iowa

395, .566

135, ISO

Kentucky

2
2
2

21
21
14
2

508,441

8,39.384

Maine

430. 623

4, 922, 366

Ma.s.sachU8etts

6, 291,. 586

3, 783, 966

Minnesota

276, 795

245,113

Missouri .

4, 069. 067

381,122

4
30
56

102

1
3
3

38,.=i00

41
104

2
34

2
89
,6

2
3
2
2

20
2
3

89
125

115

8
2
3

I
4

20, 102, 881

New York

26, 720, 124

2,127,564

Ohio

7, 666, .500

Oregon

143,685

20,464,333

765, 371

Rhode Island

South Carolina

8,26,5,886

615, 793

18,625

Vermont

191 , 405

Virginia

22
2
4

4, 2a'.. 644

West Virginia

163, 293

,582, 0.H2

All other states '

66,948

1 Includes establishments distributed as follows: Arizona, chemicals, 1; New Hampshire, chemicals, 1, Washington, fertilizer, 1: paints, 3

131

Tablb 9.— CHEMICAI-S ANn ALLIED PRODUCTH: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TEKRITORIE8.

1900— Ck)ntinued.

BTATm AND TKRRITOKII

rnttwi suu*.

Alabama

California . . .

Colorado

Connecticut .
Delawart'

Disirictof Columbia.

Florida

Georgia

llUnoin

Indiana

Iowa

Kansaii....
Kentucky .
Louisiana .
Maine

Maryland

Matnachusetts.

Michigan

Minnesota

Mi»-i»dppi

MlsBonri

Nebraska. . .

Nevada

New Jersey.
New York . .

North Carolina.

Ohio

Oregon

Pennsylvania ..
Rhode Island...

South Carolina .

Tenneaiee

Texan

Vermont

Virginia

Wert Virginia...

Wisconrin

All other states. .

Proprle-

toitknd

Arm

ban,
number.

I.IW

106
113

21
112

200

(ALIIIED omaALI, CLU», (TC.

Total.

Number. Salaries.

8,605

74
199

18
108

88
126

184

280

422

431

334

1,226

1,619

820

1,260

85
6"
2
15

153
10
83

tll,340,S8A

69,640
269,283

20,520
164,481

60,194

5,433

81,031

l.")6, 188

912,841

168,768

28,980
9,940
61., 564
66.969
28, .533

330.116
526, ,540
558,934
31 878
20,714

412,916

62,156

600

1, .599, 059

2,411,586

65,838
1,086,692

15,080
1,606,571

72,941

164,716
84,243
3,900

8,468

182,861
9,830
78,691

Offlcenof
corporatlona.

Number.

1,263

149

201

128

173

Salaries.

tS, 160, 458

24,984
67,700
8,800
68,200
32,450

2,500
9,166
44,025

227,378
45,272

2,400
3,640
20,350
36,460
16,200

129,622

160,463

128,910

10,258

fi, 1,50

107,682
9,000

432,682
620,554

29,823

293, 570

4,800

457,626

17,000

3.5,976
45,800

1,600

64.586
6,680

10,656
3,000

GenenU anperlntendents, manacen, clerks, etc.

ToUl.

Ntunber.

7,842

87
187
10
79
27

26
109
690

S3
6
50
80
IS

225
869
376
25
12

284
41

1
1,077
1,418

40
692

8
1,087

76
49
2
11

124
5

71
5

Salaries.

18, 179, 927

44,656
211,, 588
12,220
96,281
27,744

2,938
21,866
112,163
685,468
118,491

26,580
6,800
41,214
SO, .509
12,333

200,494

876,077

435,024

21,620

14, .564

305,234
.53, 1.56
600
166,377
791,082

36,015

743,122

10,280

1,148,945

56,941

128,740
38,443
3,900

6,808

118,275

3,150

68,085

3,695

Men.

Number.

6,637

.55
144

71
26

8
22
107
511
104

■ 27
5
42
29
12

213
823
322
21
12

1
1,286

609

987

75
47
2
4

121

Halarles.

r,841,4<0

43.886
203,093
11,800
98,686
27,264

2,983
20, ,566
111,208
645,6,56
116,611

24,880
6,800
38,860
29,729
9,733

19,5,678

856,610

418,788

20,160

14,564

294,682

50,120

600

1,126.193

1,727,171

36,016

701,410

9,800

1,098,246

51,277

128,500

37,483

3,900

4,360

117,825
3,150
62,020
8,076

Women.

Mnmber.

706

78
132

100

1
2

8alanc*.

•sa8,4>;

aoo

7,810
730

2,aM
480

1,800

960

89,812

1,880

1,700

2,864

780

2,600

4,821

ao.4C7

21,286
1,460

10, .552
8,036

40,184
63,861

41,712

480

,50,700

4,664

240
960

2, ,508
950

6,015
620

132

Table 9.— CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

STATES AND TERBIT0BIE8.

United States.

Alabama

California

Colorado

Connecticut ,

Delaware

District ot Columbia

Florida

Georgia

Illinois

Indiana

Iowa

Kansas

Kentuclcy

Louisiana

Maine

Maryland

Massachusetts

Michigan

Minnesota

Mi.<«issippi

Mis.souri ,

Nebraslca

Nevada

New Jersey

New Yorlt

North Carolina

Ohio

Oregon

Pennsylvania

Rhode Island

South Carolina

Tennessee

Texas

Vermont

Virginia

West Virginia

Wisconsin

All other states

WAGE-EAKNEBS, INCLUDING PIECEWORKERS.

Total.

Greatest
number
employed
at any one
time dur-
ing the
year.

Least
number
employed

at any
one time

during
the year.

61,568

887

1,973

869

665

283

2,159

2,294

891

183
318
286
4.56
187

2,699

1,669

4,386

176

1,316

199

7,211

11,180

805

3,035

8,713

3,066

922

121

3,452
111
232
69

37,939

289

1,259

525

304

32
85

651
1,602

630

137
136
129
200
73

1,281

1,101

2,966

991

137

5,069

7,667

256

1,837

7,287

218

754

310

103

190

Average
number.

46,765

460

1,547

662

403

144

1,149

1,880

651

160
197
190
800
108

1,613

1,337

3,626

1,143

174

6,091

8,940

441

2,218

7,814

258

1,772

594

2,154
87
165
44

Wages.

$21, 799, 251

99,782
982, 378

31,430
356,532
186,005

11,298
49, 161
304,731
987,870
317,968

71,451
95,644
83,324
97,827
38,810

754,907

117, 043

1,451,730

27,466

35,200

.513,293

100,686

8,670

3,09.5,868

4,691,897

113,860

1,112,593

26,136

3,883,218

132, 205

479,449
143, 619

18,376
28,809

626, 1.59
33,469
65,440
24,947

Men, 16 years and over.

Average
number.

44,635

456
1,511
63
630
399

141

1,140

1,679

614

1.52
197
184
279
105

1,587

1,2.57

3,469

1,018

163

5,674

8,615

440

2,085

7,459

242

1,772

582

2,114
87
140
43

Wages.

$21,214,066

99,334
967,922

30,200
347,583
185,391

11,298
48,711
302,591
927,622
311, 717

70,022
95,644
81,824
93,655
37, 710

748,166

693,670

1,421,425

24,717

35,200

485,588

97,256

8,180

2,963,539

4,599,067

113,785

1,069,151

24, 876

3, 787, 584

129, 697

479, 449
142,019
18,376
22, 271

620,809
33,469
59,751
24, 797

Women, 16 years and
over.

Average
number.

1,952

1
180
36

19
75
145
10

407

313

130

331

Wages.

$554,423

448
14,456
1,230
8,949

138

600
56,563
6,146

1,229

1,600
4,172
1,100

5,741
22,531
28,571

2,749

17,915

3,430

490

130,419

90, 4.55

43,a53
1,260

91,443
2,508

600

"6,'538'

4,3.'J0

'5,689
150

Children, under 16
years.

Average
number.

178

Wages.

$30,762

450
1,540
3,686

106

200

1,000

842

1,734

9,790

1,910
2,375

75
389

1,000

133

Table 9.-CHEMICAL8 AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TEKRIT<^)RIE8,

1900— C'ontinawl.

ATKRiiOE NUHBCm OF

WAOa-ajkRMKM, INCLUDIIta

niCBWORKEU.

fITATBII AND TBRaiTORlM.

Men, 16 yean and nvisr.

January.

Febni-
ary.

March.

April.

May.

Jane.

July.

Ancnat.

"T"-

October.

NoTan-
ber.

DeMm-
bcr.

United StftteH

45,847

47,271

48,974

46.878

48,698

42,630

40,620

42, 2n

48,880

48,844

46,086

46,884

AlftbAiuft

744
1.469
56
520
290

182

1,863

1,648

542

142
192
144
344

.58

1,395

1,258

8,435

176

962

164

6,537

8,644

557

1,883

7,282

234

2,876
675
32
72

2.036
85
164
45

786
1,453
6fi
570
804

220

1,987

1,692

566

203
199
160
410

1,407

1,297

3,460

176

981

144

5,528

8,821

629

1,946

7,315

236

2,993
772
29
62

2,375
83
160
45

T73

1.422

617

851

212

1.947

1.761

573

140

181
195
420
86

1,525

1,339

8,559

161

1,011

133

5,907

9,097

692

2,116

7,518

239

2,98.5
868
38
76

2,600
84
170
81

687
1.649
68
659
416

142

1,1T7

1,758

649

139

161
200
33.5
171

1,677

1,387

3,777

109

1,009

1.57

6,000

9,218

619

2, 191

7,648
211

1,637

656

2,186
83
178
39

861
1,887

700
407

86
126
630
1,806
636

141

149
182
267
172

1,597

1,210

3,668

1,086
141

14
.5,764
9,069

406

2,108

7,664

234

806

464

1,958
87
174
36

267
1,402
62
676
866

119

496

1,683

611

IM
143
194
247
119

1,466

1,189

8,767

1,068

164

5,701

8,971

283

2,028

7,427

281

776
444

47
80

1,982
88
136
81

116

1,628

666

896

115

510

1,600

716

149
175
175
119

1,826

1,130

8.236

1.086

168

5.479

7.995

282

2.039

7.329

201

744

881

1.993
88
119
40

184

1,569

649

521

29
105
.527
1,691
718

156

184

204

174

1,828

1,229

3,286

1,066

174

5,711

8,076

257

2.307

7,408

261

741

520
81
38

2,000
86
120
41

268
1,486
68
683
694

100

662

1,769

686

163
224
244
234
114

2,199

1,246

3,382

1,071

185

5,723

8,258

292

2,374

7,685

263

787

887

1.930
87
124
'16

810

1,686

642

489

24
»4

928
1,688

571

160

246
207
221
86

1,631

1,258

8,280

1.026

185

6.878

8.866

416

2.049

7,636

261

1,443

614

1,964
85
97
40

407

1,C78

109

1,409

1,606

647

148
282
163
268
108

1,423

1,309

8,283

111

990

174

8,578

8,895

486

1,968

7,897

247

2,766

868

2,278
104
U6
64

800

OUifomia

1,618
67

Colorado

846

289

128

Florida ..--

1,863

1,667

881

Illinois

Xndiaua .

Iowa

141

KanmH

289

146

289

Maine

Man'land

1,407

1,286

8.564

Mk'hiKun

)flin1fi>lrpl

199

Hinouri

913

178

.5. .564
8,502

417

North Carolina

2,011
43

Pen [isy 1 vania

7,501
254

RhtKle Island

Bouth Carolina

2,824
884

Texas

2,149
83

123

All other Btatee

134

Table 9 — CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

AVERAGE NUMBER OF WAGE-EARNERS,

INCLUDING PIECEWORKERS— Continued.

STATES AND TERRITORIES.

Women, 16 years and over.

•

Janu-
ary. •

Febru-
ary.

March.

April.

May.

June.

July.

August.

Septem-

Octo-
ber.

Novem-
ber.

Decem-
ber.

1,911

2,000

2,066

2,063

2,052

1,986

1,823

1,830

1,876

1,945

1,944

1,927

2
36

4
27

2
36

4
29

2
36

4
32

3
37

4
34

3
37

4
36

4
37

4
27

4
37

4
30

5
37

4
31

6
37

4
37

7
36

4
37

7
36

4
36

California

Colorado

Connecticut

Delaware ...

Tlistrint nf Cnlntn Wa

Florida

Georgia

3
185
29

2
193
29

2
197
33

199

188
41

1
180
43

1
155
44

155

1
157
41

1
169
40

1
176
30

192

Indiana

Kansas

6
24
2

169

6
32
6

19
64
175
11

173

19
74
176
11

20
74
151
11

18
2

24
71
125
11

5
18
2

113

5
15
2

20
79
103

8
15
2

20
85
106

8
15
6

137

8
14
6

16
79
152
11

Louisiana

Maryland

Michigan

165

Mississippi

Missouri

73
11

808

404

320

392

336

369

350

410

354

441

323

420

294

428

291

435

303

423

298

417

300

395

North Carolina

Ohio

122

346

131

340

153

350

174

346

157

344

129

338

313

105

306

110

308

135

314

117

332

117

338
27

Rhode Island

South Carolina

Texas

28
30

27
30

33
35

12
31

17
31

18
36

20
30

21
35

19
30

23
35

28
35

Virginia

West Virginia

26
2

AH other states

136

Tablk 9.— chemicals AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DCTAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continue*!.

ATUAOB NUMBBR OP WAOa-BABHCM, IKCLODIIIO PtBCBWOBBBBa— CoDtlniMd.

STATn AMD TKftRrrOKIBa.

CbUdran, nndcr 16 jrean.

J«na-

UJ.

Febni-

Much.

April.

M.y.

Jim*.

Joir.

Anrnt

TT-

Octo-
b«.

Noram-
Iwr.

Dae«B-
bw.

177

180

191

188

174

188

180

rAlffiimfa.

9
18
IS

8
IS
18

10
13

2
18
20

2
8
21

1
3
27
2

1
8

13
19

IlltnoiB

Maine

Maryland

7
8
12

7
S
»

7
4
IS

7
7
12

7
8
15

7
C
15

7
5
14

7
6
18

7
7
18

4
8

7
4

M ichiflran

Minnesota

Mlastaslppi

MtMouri

Nebraska

Nevada .

9
11

11
18

U
14

1
6

11
12

1
4

9
12

1
4

9
11

9
U

New York

South Carolina

Tenneflse6

136

Table 9.— CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

MATERIALS

rsED.

Aggregate
cost.

Purchased in raw state.

Total cost.

Fish.

Gums.

Kainit.

Ijimestone.

Phosphate rock.

Pyrites.

Thousands.

Cost.

Tons.

Cost.

Tons.

Cost.

Tons.

Cost.

Tons.

Cost.

United States

$124,043,837

$15,702,216

4,589,632

$183,542

$3,817,112

64,700

$520,833

790,466

$717,910

816,290

$3,620,262

633,837

$3,101,07!

1,428,452
5,502,254

158, 716
1,615,099

738.041

55,060

341,681

2, 462, 109

7,981,328

1,513,769

519,376
521,979
659,350
700,380
214, 666

4,726,232

4,996,442

5,362,671

235,787

349,689

5, 496, 347

572,898

9,500

16,297,390

24,756,424

1,087,430
8,006,959

163,143
18,230,605

631,859

3,107,710

1,054,022

64,524

320,287

3,055,220

205,200

862,991

68,257

438,888
100,360

15.597
680,308

63,556

1,552
62,290
735,084
542, 974
197,661

13,048

132,172

23,940
1,486

244,216
16,362

9,520
6,331
4,800
2,597

62,600
34,658
12,000
13 685

22,714

3,597

109,668

1,600

8,000

17,660
200,000

25,189
40,000

200
1,461

164

723

10,205

7,500
18,235

1,652

8,640

98,181

17
2,062

143
7,569

2,106

762

8,040
120.931
10,480

32,177

417,037

60,320

3,177
37,879
4,337

18,867

17,473
213,466

25,965
108,789

6,400

455,359
48,872

Illinois

9,280

1,330

79,-506
95.158
20,000

908,867

663,863

714,839

2,337

85,800

30,848

49,102

640

12,000

3,204
232,861
222,950

2,337

8,625
15,180

17,804
64,015

1,858
160

6,895

17,416
1,500

68,547

2,467
1,000

55,182
34,894
5,238

13 03J

5,000
12,000

1,500
16,600

5,009
247,999

126,757

18,722
3,465

582,626
131,734
16,807

38
315,690

133
274,161

147, 479

Michigan

31,791

3,284
40

36,800
400

9,000
630

22,000
1,819

4,000

28,009

28,629

■

1,733,693
2,942,580

287,849

568,408

5,480

2,462,198

118,105

1,026,097

284,770

9,261

1,200

803,360

106,900

225

12,912

14, 118

9,765

698,672
1,344,871

486
1,263

967
2,530

4,382
15,076

9,687
21,360

86,630
22,104

38,858
28,515

409,998
156,401

160,654
114, 172

85,782
54,379

16,684
42,421

390,645
227,458

New York

324,919

1,815
176

316,745

2,400
1,160

North Carolina

4,21.5,500
700

18,668
2,800

88,818

234,901

6,480

317,180

5,480

194,025

1,265

11,479

62,429
168

74,109
728

33,491

200,710

97,579
4,183

83,272
20,668

600,777

25,470
399. 019

9,114

71,226

141,464

36,431

656,861

118,067

Tennessee

185,428

15,000

9,169

Vermont

Virginia

104,754

57,461

12,000

1,107

10,781

72,245

38,S48

82,482

290,778

35,988

147, 312

West Virginia

225

6,000

2,500

2,602

10, 412

187

Table 9.— CHEMICALS AND ALUED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

HATiMALs tTUD— Contlnncd.

ParchaMd In raw itate— CoDtinned.

Purcbaaed In partially mannfactured (orm.

BTATKS AND TSKRI-
TORIBB.

Wood.

Total cost.

Adda.

Acid phosphate.

A rgols.

For alcohol.

For extracts.

galphuric.

Nitric.

Mixed.

Oordi.

CMt.

Tom.

Cost.

Tons.

Cost.

Ponnds.

Cost.

Pounds.

Cost.

Tons.

Cost.

Unttea States'

496,078

11,265, 794

261,884

12, 486. 688

•87,828,162

280,028

tl,M6,T42

8,I81,8»4

1164,144

60,686,011 n,660,US 287,147

ia,i82,na i2.20<,8ao

702,484
4,288,886
110,743
659,230
826,778

47,665

234,591

1,334,190

6,883,225

1,082.731

406,239
444,986
514,155
.522,265
160,946

3,088,179

8,753,550

2,994,372

208,681

201,564

4,393,443

487,039

7,806

12,198,674

17,479,648

605,982

6,409,486

137,533

12,198,066

421,950

1,699,892
487,503
46,139
300,792

1,378,984

66,062

723,801

34,664

600
2,961

6,000
66,418

433,266
12,498,600

11,844
161,904

58,386
1,560

169,820
27,000

Callfonila

8,i72

18,«2«

319,987

13,869

246,000

18,801

624,223

23i
1,972

1,736
11,824

8,226
21,262

1,550
5,547
30,306
6,866
1,106

28,248
154,292

14,600
48,447
276,188
48,862
12,180

DUtrlrt of C^liimbiA ..

8,800

4,000

300
24,202
16,077
2,570

1,800
133,207
147,993
44,616

Illinois

28,000

i,666

16,000

40,000

8,020,000

86,449

3,000
4,314

34,440
32,187

760

1,910

17,419

330

29,671
6,563

7,110

20,700

164,027

4,600

287,641
62,868

600

12,600

Maine ....

Maryland

28,119
4,138
3,869

164,668
54,108

47,921

880
82,094

6,480
124,830

4,477
16,460

45,186
44,000

774,980

81,416

Michigan

6,094,964

189,276

Minnesota

Utwlalppi

500
1,054

5,000
9,714

7,892
176

67.178
1,748

Ulwouri

6,966,091

251,600

Nebnuika

Nevada

3,208
108,885

3,134

12,364
271,681

7,822

i2,826
84,734

207,867
611,349

75,317
21,064

3,402
21,576

436,626
172,641

19,051
147,333

1,692,610
16,400

97,496
656

21,526.726
2,183,744

380,970
39,966

i2,55i
18,127

10,256
8,774

119,061
156,137

87,276
82,610

1,044,800

NewYork

916,000

Ohio

26,000

802

6 «n ifs

164,207

280,872

791,417

74,899
8,277

566,826
86,457

42,836
554

4,459
310
92

283,697
2,853

24,632

2,412

576

193,600

6,641

9,«6.537
100,000

249,464
7,000

is, 795
200

12,702
1,200

141,167
1,696

121,141
9,000

TenneM6e

6,433

11,276

Vermont

400

1,200

Virginia

48,216
85,700

246,680
106,900

16,498
113

104,936
1,470

34,000
50,367

1,640

14,646

130,526

West Virginia

1.234

1 nofi nm

27,443

[

All other states

138

Table 9.— CHEMrCALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

MATEHiALS USED— Continued.

Purchased in partially manufactured form— Continued.

STATES AND TERRITORIES.

Ammonia.

Alcohol.

Bones, tank-
age, and
offal.

Comm

Aqua.

Sulphate.

Grain.

Wood.

Pounds.

Cost.

Pounds.

Cost.

Gallons.

Cost.

Gallons.

Cost.

Tons.

Cost.

417, 488, 626

$1,137,307

16,986,013

8657,726

331,207

$510,375

3,692,803

$1,751,345

$10,313,661

42,189

$142,398

340,611
232,955

California

89,1.58,596
90,000

12,542
4,050

2,502,000

64,959

8,652

185

10,100

19,500

416

24,070

2,773
185
690

3,766

162

1,400

464
120

1,639
360

328
1,127,729

11
28,193

88,514
51,708

24,123
96,926
634,781
603,783
123,705

1,000

296,496

66,059

215,218
5,580

1,160,985
402,020
415, 154

1,492,360
3,268,864

60,277
2,444

District of Columbia

Florida

500,000

30,000

1, 130, 268

15,000

900

36,056

5,068

3,048

Georgia

100

Illinois

3,310
601

6,483
1,396

100,916
591

84,170
691

19,120
10,494

127,703

3,788

Kansas

Louisiana

103

140

560

Maine

1,965

2,161

Maryland

478,521
200,000

13,939

5,500

190
1,580
1,462

950

1,227,436
29,431,188

73,646
490,162

1,095
9,434

2,641
21,698

66,071
200

45,320
200

2,382
6,014

Michigan

Mississippi

93,046

64,815
15,770

41,049,931

116,638

1,133,931

136,661

36,937

82,086

14,149

9,812

509

2,124

Nebraska

99,289,132
180,000

56,140
9,000

6,025,724
580,377

50,000
19,549

138,578
164,504

1,500
579

160,624
52,426

127,156
122,964

311,229
3,111,592

204,668
1,330,284

1,104,361
596,733

354,015

344,183

1,893

1,086,766

204.401

1,061,977
141,676
25,875

6,547
13,713

28,677
38,361

New York*.

North Carolina

Ohio

43,017,000

25,810

6,745

30O

38,336

2,400

15,314

696

80,328

6,500

12,360

217

75,766

1,600

16,403

184

47,369

2,800

5,234

13,180

Oregon

105,440,790

200,337

1,062,458
2,414,128

29,468
1,078

4,060

18,168

Rhode Island

South Carolina

1,964,640

2,400

360

536,620
1,224,000

64,851
16,300

730,000

21,900

558,642

West Virginia

Wisconsin

2,500

2,075

AH other states

189

Tablk 9.— chemicals AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

MATEBiALs iniD— Continoed.

Purohaaed In partlallr manutaotured fonn— Continued.

■TATn AND TKHBITOUn.

Cotton

seed and

meal.

Dry col-
ors.

Glycerine.

Lead.

Lime.

Unseed oil.

Nitrate of pot-
ash.

Nitrate of soda.

Onat.

Cost.

Pounds.

Cost.

Tons.

Coat.

Bushels.

Cost

Oallons.

Cost.

Tons.

Cost.

Tons.

coat

United State*

•1«7,410

19,476,888

84. CSS, 822

13,419,406

104,401

88.618,097

7.428,886

8442,262

16,157,117

f7.4S6,l<6

6,084

1800,199

147,020

•4,flW,822

bam»

80.218

88.867
28,666
11.096

246

63,119
6.766,997

8.068
681.840

410

28,912

180

2,677
2,616

16
289

1,888
8,172
8,967

4,716

1.468

8,669
6,187
2,208

U,2M

aa.oti

Oaltfnmlft

1,908

162,660

3,609
1,818

700
224

206,784
76,042
71,496
10,400

800

118,088
87,621
34,968
4,660

600

•,800

91,098

7, ceo

1,190

1,213
203

78,8a

078

Florida

9,8U

78,i92

48,943

49, .%i

2,121,711

142,264

182,866
3,600

268,626
66,604
30,168

112,876
489,339
913,022
164, 619

29,997
936,511
59,816

73,947
1,400
120,857
33,802
15,729

64,943
219,896
417,099

80,169
8,600

626,632

102,773

1,080

399,681

1,970,468

800
909,189

48,218
993,028

16,182

woa»

108,444

IlHnoia

1,772,23"

617.196

57.642
167,946

11,866

991,012

4.469
18.432

646
3,090

267

19,826

71,819 1.407.669

818,198

160,101

4,600

84,170

446

106,826

26,338

Kentucky

1,864

816
160

9,000

1,702

37,061

6,000

44,700
182,460

88,474

190.000
27,283
134,266

22,000
10,706
22,462

Maaaachusetta

784,389

431, 0>«

75,449

3,500

684,637

8,641

327,718

492

88,611

182,976

Michigan

1,162,601

142,878

76,342

Minnesota

Miogtisippi 1

6.000

1,201,716

213,779

1,800

Rid All

160
2,6(0

5,400
90,288

Missouri

1,787,811

199,741

15,447 ' i.a.'a.oss

50,474

8,096

92,610

2,901

242,666

Nevada

New Jersey

488,219

3,866,604
10,073,676

434, 101
839,197

3,000
29,389

275,500
2,162,933

98,664
5,805,537

15 467

28 1 2,780
633 ^ ^'•It

si,276
7,663

746
14,585

1,026,282
264,274

28,609
486.686

New York

2,262,264

255, 271 4 lis' iil

North Carolina

1,180
911,6*4

37,271
847,617

61, 812

750

1,806,071

95,452

2 «« «10

7,849.186

624,274

9,831

817,418

27,979

4,418

8»1

31,342

Oregon

1,914.237

268,607

26,418

i .iJA rK7

1,015,814
6,085

94,299

3,318

116,407

16,699
229

2,169
2,650

667.481

Rhode Island

1,826 ' 34 son

7 584

Sonth Carolina

82,689
88,098

Tennesaee

47,902
11,434

6,378

46,649

48,098
11,822

24,047
6,8U

Texas

Vermont

3,426

367
612

1,086

62
122

Virginia

27,737

13,868

877

31,880

1,786

6B,MS

West Virginia

138,438

15,228

256,949
11.279

493,575
28,568

236,945
9,097

8S7
144

28,290
71908

All other states

:::::::;:::;:::;::::::

140

Table 9.— CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

MATERIALS csED— Continued.

Purchased in partially manufactured form — Continued.

Fuel.

Rent of

power and

heat.

Mill sup-
plies.

All other
materials.

STATES AND TERRITORIES.

Potash
salts.

Sulphur.

Tallow
and fats.

Wood ashes.

All other
components
of products.

Freight.

Cost.

Tons.

Cost.

Bushels.

Cost.

United States

$3,891,818

83,530

«1,724,8.'>7

$380,517

801,047

839,507

$23,906,991

$6,615,636

$297,568

$779,814

$11,281,479

$3, 143, 972

31,270
106,984

827
10,199

18,690
23.5,383

17,687

1,191,206

28,343

294,236

50,341

1,335

8,427

36,197

1,419,544

184,066

83,763

9,977

167,211

15,084

23,406

481, 639

1,211,334

635, 780

58,073

8,280

1,448,228
33,320

6,726
4,726,743
5,600,216

8,185
1,389,691

60,371
3,960,779

92,142

99,455

4.5,680

1,443

293,306

133,473
6,266

197,888
4,265

20,284
275,557
5,980
95,996
13,364

2,066
9,749

63, 186
200,325

65, .666

22,652
21,643

8,647
20,072
4,468

153,866

150,780

863,430

3,726

3,375

81,316

22,414

5.35

587,230

1,355,502

23,703

184,879

820

826,449

29,692

88,786

34,279

1,822

3,632

252,736
9,528
11,136
6,558

1,032

9,302

780

160

262

260
360
460
11,306
51

10,886
63,481
960
60,667
4,854

255

2,488

11,706

22,814

4,296

1,652
3,767
2,3a6
4,017
3,368

67,366
21,262
27,785
596
.6,160

10.915

2,0^6

130

89,474

146,813

13,683

46,368

260

116,856

2,428

5,909

4,975

355

1,425

13,848

1,702

3,803

280

136,102
484,502
12,802
80,751
87,978

2,379

23,866

200,007

718,979

133,908

58,292
38,083
43,543
66,846
27,048

377,230
426,916
544,326
14,808
34,200

366,864

48, .372

1,030

1,. 378, 462

2,509,999

89,827

661,345

11,790

1,868,441

41,786

223,276

118,248

6,600

12,622

316,673

20,401

116,179

8,110

118,826
285,666

California

11,864

Connecticut . .

27,725
62,906

3,530
54,300
136,905
81,075

1,628

1,997
616

43,487
10,937

38,098

42,249
993

District of Columbia . .

Florida

8,337
127, 477

Georgia .

380

2,588

198

694
281

8,750

.63,401

6,773

13,198
9,218

Illinois

101,70')

Indiana

25,200

1,280

29,557

30,641

17,647
5,400

15,644
4,769

568,019

235,613

67,905

13,600

1,101

1,056

350
4,938

813
1,020

10,09&
2,008

7,781

2,627
260

7,214

3,358

,61,527
5,000

162, 681

63,010

1,002

21,960

2,044

130,374
75,144

217,407
4,619
16,600

7,160

584,617

29,440

Mississippi

18,660
6,740

Missouri

1,003

22,021

5,801

13,018

Nevada

New Jersey

781,154
337,931

105,866
61,682

1,900
617,046

9,950

310,118
114,224

17,010
14,986

311,326
307,681

4,553
228,897

600
1,917

820
2,758

965

306,814
93,086

35,786

New York

9,700

Ohio

3,816

81,875

274,314

169,270

6,743

144,566

6,460

771,848

16,933

63,760

124,247

1,375

616

Pennsvlvania

13,966
937

282,929
18,186

96,500

Rhode Island . . ...

South Carolina

419

12,164

T**xafl

Virginia

205,327

1,423

578

289,206

Wisconsin

142

3,694
2, 125

7,847
3,313

2,420

141

Table 0.— CHP:MICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DKTAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

pRODccn oomtmcD.

BTATn AND T1RBITOBIB8.

Add*.

Acid
phos-
phate
(tons).

Charcoal
(bushels).

Ether
(pounda).

Lead
oxides

(pounds).

Nitrate
of am-
monia
(pounds).

Nitroglyc-
erine

(pounds).

Pyroxy-

line
(pounda).

White

lead

(pounda).

All other
producu
consumed
(pounds).

Sulpharic
(tons).

Nitric
(pounda).

Mixed

(pounda).

United States

1,B67,1M

82,128,221

20,902,871

88,964

1,719,675

1,193,264

874,061

168,807

81,661,806

1,964,345 24.i>22.«47

M6,m,0>7

22,030

27,158

600

1,210

18.5,324
10,8«5,80S

18,230,612

i^oiifftmiA

8,600,000

12,000,000

799,579

182,000

S, 874, 876

570,139

16,798
29,200

21,000

2,647,281

7,065

78,6.%

6,rm

13,795

880,000

1.5.5,484
8,185,736

1,817,081

148,671

81,116

2,254,788

4,310

428,729

1,426,207

■ :

17,718

3,025

^^laine

98,240
45,806
10,205

.6,828,200

855,500
586,105

8,734,700

239,842

5, 215, 478

267,825

77,192

2,547,820

56,817,010

9,666
•744

9,000

Mlasouri

8,074

8,906,248

306,676

7,251,300

62,775
»t,123

33,047
10,314

13,787,691
2,469,682

19,000

17,527

393,125

8,877,764
182,000

1,720,193

21,079,070

New York

294,000
155,400

399,834,890

North Carolina

5,545
13,060

1,003,283

Ohio

963,422

106,350

1,463,080

Oregon

835,157

951.388

35,746

939,500

660

374,061

2,756,709

17,509,347

24,312,375

Rhode' Island

138,978
35,495

Tennessee

5,071

16,887

40 600

Vermont

Vinfinift

68,946

2,400.000

West Virginia

Wisconsin

All other states

142

Table 9.— CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

MISCELLANEOUS EXPENSES.

PB0DUCT8.

Total.

Rent Of
works.

Taxes.

Rent of

offices,

interest,

etc.

Con-
tract
work.

Aggregate
value.

Group 1.— Acids.

STATES AND TERRITORIES.

Total
value.

Sulphuric.

60° Baum^.

66° Baum^.

Tons.

Value.

Tons.

Value.

Tons.

Value.

814,826,112

(626,891

«973,685

812,963,054

8262,582

8202,582,3%

2, 123, 102
8,279,243
299,964
2,544,714
1,366,416

88,137

.533,789

3, ,549, 632

12,422,227

2,686,427

6%, 022

73.3,818

1,0.54.008

1,049,653

389,631

7,2e»,580

8, 088, 698

9,757,084

403, 101

505, 972

7,588,090

954,840

27,226

26,763,866

40, 998, 911

1,623,030

13,307,431

239,369

32, 164, 223

1,127,329

4,882,506

1,917,985

125, 170

408,737

5,059.465
334,003

1,230,838
117,190

812,757,012

187,879

81,016,861

18,217

8266,567

416,017

86,641,823

97,677
386,899

28,649
175,944
112,986

3,521

34,890

416,841

743,906

155,204

49, 311
59,144
29,676
123,352
17,431

483,898

649, 776

1,015,881

64,660

40,866

374, 174

74,315

2,382

1,604,323

2,992,743

109,043

1,166,268

8,313

2,309,431

104,869

675,689

143,653

4,089

39,591

421,586

15,990

84,891

4,671

1,100

10, 770

1,370

6,160

2.50

1,660
1,545
6,981
68,636
5,636

280

4,180

265

500

45,030
37,658
8,979
7,415

22,969
21,846

3,749
10.439

4,678

138
2,397
37,534
43,353
11,662

3,402
2,644
4,894
1,961
3,229

44,884
51,604
46,059
843
6,647

34,711

2,845

176

107,606

203,297

17,810

70, 327

794

106,215

6,116

53,200

3,942

215

200

37,871

870

3,117

441

72,860
354,166

23,530
1.59,945
108,058

1,823

30,948

372,201

640,0%

134,606

46,889
56,220
20,602
121, 126
13,7C2

893,984
656,614
952,853
54,192
34,219

304,662

70,990

2,110

1,415,215

2,583,408

91,180

993,412

4,579

2,007,662

83,636

621,339

138,715

2,334

39,126

369, 579
14,562
70, 374
3,767

758
117

26,000
667,440

74,800
279,804

2,934
3,537

26,000
44,091

2,369

33,460

6,071
3,000
9,126

116, 124

60,000

400

162, 815

Florida

833

6,436

407,268

574,962

856

623
6,436

125
1,820
3,600

Illinois

12,450
19,419

224,180

231,487

Kansas

26, 910
17,642

294,754
900,968

149
1,034

5,960
14,328

208

8,736

Maine

402

51,555
37,396

3,214

294,754
36,110

Maryland

Massachusetts .

5,000
7,990
2,200

27,634

414,211

Minnesota

30,149

480

48,320

197,888

39
40,027

2,940
72,249

8,319

1,060
996

1,540
266

12,325
410

11,100
463

4,652

81,830

2,869

64,500

Nebraska

33,282
8,150

14
61,502

3,452,871
1,740,102

9,123
1,426

60,664
16,050

123,236
60,871

1,474,011
896 514

1,488

North Carolina

Ohio

1,386,326

40, 147

527,944

Oregon

123,316

7,788

2, 389, 861
163,994

225,698

39,188
28

41,036

303,122
2,600

225,698

13,356
20

193,799
292

101,643
7,092

1,279,709
148 962

Rhode* Island . .

Tennessee

Texas

Vit^inia

1,811
158

8,929

309

1,699

1,205

7,230

West Virginia

Wisconsin

All other states

42,690

2,251

42,690

143

Tabl» 9.— chemicals AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

PBODtrcn—oon tinned.

STATES AND TBRRITO-

Oronp I.— Acids— Continued,

Group 11.— 6oda«.

Kin.

Nitric.

Mixed.

Tartaric.

Acetic.

Other.

Total
-value.

Sal soda.

Rodaaab.

Pounds.

Vdtie.

Frmnds.

Value.

Pounda

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Tons,

Value.

Tons.

Valne.

United sut««...

SO, 061, Ml

n, 454, 909

86,468,819

n. Ill, 158

997,004

1294,608

16,856,680^

1876,520

12,604,581

lU, 688, 061

68,249 1779,448 888,161 |«4,768,888

8. 880, 840
180,000

i,Ma,»o

1S8,298
10,800
79,871

90,000

27,000

288,472

4,000

518

666,025
8,800
7,038

8,870

68,870

1,120

17,160

1,466,044

86,600

Florida

210

IlUnots

U8,768
491, 4M

86,666
18,344

867,920

11,120

136,413
84,621

808,771
299,463

5,061
3,487

67,489
34,874

6,434,418

240,510

11,214

840

Maine

89,905

118,182

2,826,877

2,500
232

25,000
2,900

8,082.046

86,741

. 864,906

Michliran

i88,i6&

2,158,909

Minnesota

MUelwlppi

MifBOUii . .

652,573

10,650

16,680

80,129

Nebraska

20,960

170,640

4,921,144

600

8,800

14,286,680
4,100,541

684,773
222,740

5,081,134
6,392,516

259,583
159,800

6,478,443
4,127,162

187,196
95,470

786,744
141,040

52
28,095

687
357,303

New York

720,000

208,000

167,552 ■ 2.066.422

Ohio

1,877,291

72,248

17,094,707

414,665

371,468

122,820

4,100

42,640

1,972,111
20,000

83,999
1,500

187,004

59,603

4,230,582

72,084

397,545

750

1,010,167
1,800

12,756

1!t9 OQO

Texas

Vermont

Virginia

920,999

28.724

517,082

Weet Virginia

174,801

8,096

57,190

All other states

144

Table 9.— CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

PBODUCTS — continued.

Group II.— Sodas— Continued.

Group III.— Pot-
ashes.

Group IV.— Alums.

Group v.— Coal-tar products.

STATES AND TBREITO-

RIES.

Bicarbonate of
soda.

Caustic soda.

Borax.

Other soda
products.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Total
value.

Coal-tar
distillery
products.

Chemi-
cals
made
from

coal-tar
distil-
lery
prod-
ucts.

Tons.

Value.

Tons.

Value.

Tons.

Value.

United States...

68,185

SI, 324, 848

78,779

$2,917,955

5,637

$602,480

$1,344,947

3,764,806

$174,476

179,465,871

$2,446,576

$1,338,810

$826,546

$512,264

225

9,000

125

5,602

490,330

91,040
3,500
7,038

30,6.S2

11,415

19 217

Connecticut

Dtstrict of Columbia . .

Florida

Georgia

Illinois

2,458

221,325

14,957
264,589

820,000
135,200

63,349
6,350

10,130,000

95,600

Indiana

Iowa

Kentucky

Louisiana

840

Maine

88,290

2,935

Maryland

14,905

116,282

17,408

Massachusetta

19,766,415
1,480,000

306,754
39,500

27,513

10,000

150,000

18,000

566,666

1,869,116

77,609

Minnesota

Mississippi

Missouri

111

8,679

21,460

394,400

94,400

300,000

135

12,150

20
40,499

820
1,518,464

169,133
93,952

231,000
44,016

227,400
29,716

3,600
14,300

New York

43,812

885,003

46,211,951

593,070

North Carolina

Ohio

80,180

852,200

34,233

243,000

Oregon

Pennsylvania

7,700

154,000

11,754

460,845

262,332
1,800

101,877,605

1,411,652

3&4,249

179, 102

175, 147

Rhode Island

South Carolina

Tennessee

14,000

Texas

Vermont

Virginia

6,42.5

122,079

5,934

207,697

74,191

West Virginia

Wisconsin

4,761

112,350

All other states

146

Tabi-r «) — CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DKTAILKD STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

piu>Dt;cTs— continued.

Oroup VI.— Cyanides.

OioDp VII.— Wood distillation.

■TATES AND TERRI-
T0RIE8.

Total
value.

Polasdum cyanide.

Yellow prutniate
ol potash.

Other

eya-

nldea.

Total
value.

Wood alcohol.

AceUle of lime.

Crude.

Reflned.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Oalloni.

Valne.

Gallons.

Value.

Tona.

Value.

United SUtH...

n.sM,6a6

2,817,280

(601,362

6,165,406

(994,014

tl29

J5, 675, 616

<,i9i,s;s

•1,660,061

8,088,218

•2,297,008

48.418

•981, 288

Alabftmft

California

Colorado

Conneodcut

Delaware

District of Columbia. .

Florida

Georgia

IlUnoU

Indiana

125,000

100,000

65,000

1,000

30,000

Iowa

Kentucky

Louisiana •....

Maine

120,700
18,020

700,000

120,700

Maryland

60,000

13,020

MasdacluLsetts

38,607
514, 106

29,6.52
501,196

35,973
319,553

Michigan

116,010

32,225

3,396

43,265

Minnesota

Misfis-flppi

18,216

24,099

3,813

96,024

14,403

Mi-'^souri

Nebraska

Nevada

i, 063,472

2,235,945

582,482

2,847,556

470,990

New Jersey

83,331
2,548,109

22,437
4,000

90,000
2,207,230

62,238
3,000

67,500
1,762,812

7,570
4,000

1,066,063
170,960

431,064
13,677

11,285

250,211

North Carolina

86,852

518,822

86,a52

Ohio

Oregon

303,245

7,236

2,047

2,003,004

301,069

129

Penncylvanla

2,339,066

2,848,326

1,183,095

41,902

31,600

27,732

657,810

Rhode Island

South Carolina

Tennessee

Texns

Vermont

960

Virginia

West Virginto

Wisconsin

All other state*

...

No. 210 10

146

Table 9.-CHEMICAL8 AND Al.LIED PRODUCTS : DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

PRODUCTS — continued.

Group VII— Continued.

Group VIII—

Fertilizers.

BTATES AND TERRITORIES.

Charcoal.

Another

products

in this

group.

Total value.

Superphosphates.

Complete.

All

From minerals,
bones, etc.

Ammoniated.

other.

Bushels.

Value.

Tons.

Value.

Tons.

Value.

Tons.

Value.

Tons.

Value.

17,155,440

$726,809

il0,452

$40,914,685

925,008

$8,492,360

142,898

$2,349,888

1,454,389

$25,796,148

299,910

$4,276,794

1,942,708
6.S6, 687

38,246

369,587

2,000

86,000

92,253
19,670

1,483,356
591,187

6,670
2,561

104,766
45,600

California

313, 610
634,213

71,480

496,642

3,240,304

1,754,905

235,836

3,075

549,943

29-5,520

866,201

27,902

6, 188, 926
2,060,576

353,608
7,285

492,772

139,395
68,914

1,000

23,000

7,325
17,180

3,160
15, 435

205,931
283,878

64,800
.177.R.1R

2,752
30,377

449

1,315

26,605

25,333

5,431

155
4,636

2,385

28,250

322,090

6,680
25,167
371 799

District of Columbia

9,394

131,503

26, 108

865

93,940

1,076,581

313,850

10,006

Geor^a

14,603

4,150

229,271

68,100

600

101,219 1-66.'!. 65.1

Illinois

43,483
5,750

836,835
116,280

647,620

760,000

30,000

109,050

3,075
63,700

Iowa

8,978

160,498

6,858

126,745

10,000

17,315

22,842

828

184,095
76.671
14,753

200,000

295,620

j67,181

21,602

2,985,015

1,940,605

279,588

Kentucky

29,244

263,821

13,037

221,699

300
1,000

27,734
4,280
2,767
1,471

3 600

Ualne

6,300

334,872

107,160

56,321

7,285

124,696
1,282
1,828

1,178,367
12, 820
17,699

48,608

690,671

Massachusetts

15,000
2,831,120

1,200
119,063

1,434

Minnesota

7,200
2,766

60,400
44, 248

80,604

2,774
4,532

442,372

39,039
58,914

Missouri

2,354

66,108

Nevada

New Jersey

152,500
2,310,653

1,138

10,800
103,390

137

6,031
632

1,053

3, 704, 162
2,445,375

1, 48,, 338

1,562,518

6,500

2,712,767

105,755

4,666,808

1,464,788

69,800

105,165
9,810

48,820
24,728

887,470
105,645

397,397
285,698

7,283
10,300

3,400
23,805

59,580
338,400

61,000
380,936

126,839

87,862

63,628
43,351

2,629,511
1,628,638

841,682
700,606

8,039
45,814

14,346
11,918
120
11,272
2,938

7,497
20,400
4,036

127,601
877,692

197,304
195,278
6,600
170,889
47,309

106,824

304,000

68,520

New York . .

North Carolina

Ohio

Oregon

Pennsylvania. . .

11,079,029

461,269

2,302

22,975

310, 273

2,846
681

63,271
10,215

120,715
2,097

207,860

36,695

2,178,384
48,231

3,146,915

704,220

500

Rhode Island

South Carolina

173,183

85,959

1,404,569

456,668

780

Tennessee

Vermont

16,000

960

3,324,979
6,400

120,633

1,024,893

4,300

72,100

106,828

1,820,771

26,692
350

407,215
5,400

West Virginia

Wisconsin

All other states

8,01.0

400

8,000

I ■ '

147

Table 0.—CH?:MICAL8 AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

leOO— Contiiiaed.

PRODFCTs— con tinned.

Qnmp tX.— Bleacbing materials.

Electro-
chemical
producu.

' Oroup XI.— Djrestnfls.

CTATn AND TERKITORira.

Total
value.

Hypochlorites.

Other bleach-
ing agents.

Total TRlne.

Natural.

ArtiflcUl.

Tons.

Value.

Valne.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Poonds.

Valne.

United States

•4n,06«

2,148

•116,608

1876,478

•1,806,368

Hn4,88<

49,019,074

(2,668,008

u,ue,ao8

•2,266,678

AlAbama

Colorado ,.,,

86,825

808,176

36,826

Delaware

Florida

5,650

69,825

S,6S6

UlinoU

38,648

297

88,649

18,804

U,200

18,894

Kentucky

Maine

9,631

80,000

4,412

30,000

912
£2,887

912

1,191,660

4,046,302

320,347

2,123,816

871,211

Mirhigan

1,782

62,387

198,266

Minnesota

Mississippi

Missouri

21,196

Nevada

12,972
840,612

12,972

668,068
1,897,884

6,160,000
9,728,797

206,240
1,104,868

3,846,908
2,497,162

461,808

340,612

1,102,481

792,976

Olilo

3, SCO

3,500

Pennsylvania

U,858

1,600

10,268

889,213
168,468

23,831,150
4,391,326

816,136
168,463

1,162,450

73,078

Rhode Island

South Carolina

Tennessee

Texas

•

Vermont

2,800

280,000

2,300

Vir(finia

West Virginia

11,889

1,292,360

11,889

All other states

148

Table 9.— CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

PRODUCTS— con tin ued .

Group XII.— Tanning materials.

■

STATES AND TERRIT0EIE8.

Total value.

Natural .

Artificial.

Ground or chipped.

Extracts.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

United States

$1,790,118

49,002,037

$465,956

62,012,788

81,259,007

2,454,084

$66,165

CRlifrtrnift

31,500

300,000

1,600

1,050,000

30,000

. ...

District of Columbia

20,000

1,060,900

20,000

Illinois

2,500

12,500

2,500

21,000

1.344,000

21,000

16,000
100,684

376,470

16,000

Michigan ....

8,444,600

100, 6S4

Nebraska

New Jersey

181,800
300,756

13,872,000

98,600

719,228
7,024,440

46,684
295,366

i, 460, 664
36,000

36,516

New York . - ..

6,400

North Carolii:'^

Ohio

Oregon

Pennsylvania

364. 701

416,117

7,783

19,108,020

349,679

580,950

7,239

Rhode Island

48,589

2,776,500

48,589

Texas

470,223
232,365

25,145,920
7,926,000

180,168
166,915

17,936,725
3,,S89,875

290,065
76,450

West Virginia

Wisconsin

All other states

149

Table 9.— CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODrCTS: DETAILED .'5TATEMf:NT BY STATES AND TEKRIT0KIE8,

1900— Continued.

raoDUCT*— Gontloucd.

Group XII

.— Palnta, colon, and varnlahea.

■TATU AND TKRRlTORin.

Anngate
Tklue.

A.— Plgmenla.

Total value.

White lead.

Oxide* of lead.

Lamp and other blacks.

Pine colon.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Tnited States

•67,918,638

$13,824,773

116,102,316

t4, 211, 181

60,769,623

t2, 550,840

' 7,519,846

•420,097

4,080,902

•I,lk28.754

. w^-^.

ft. Hf Am in.

969,779
188,600
679,334
82,873

2,!i00

278,825

4,800,000

287,180

600,000

26,895

7,840
200

224,000

7,840

1,000

200

182,279

8,129,967

403,327

385,367
4,875
673,063
140,102
U7,991

460,862
2,439,254
3,891,773

895,816
18,200

4,388,644

838,151

8,875

5,984,881

18,762,564

2,468

6,702,884

186,981

10,725,879

181,818

880,868
18,260

96,316

11,037,476

631,962

201,000

32,000

366,000

18,280

250,000

24,750

KRTifnK

Maine

68,947
594,482
40,737

80,000
110,496

4,000
5,525

3,725,279

197,440

700,000

42,000

345,000

35,000

Minouri

509,864
61,889

4,942,814

248,681

3,581,604
1,125,262

183, 189
61,889

Nevada

1,540,921
4,812,435

14,471,171
39,109,000

717,047
547,440

1,135,284
1,937,116

190,893

New York

12,426,000

663,176

15,000

2,650

734,713

Ohio

619,377

8,822,814

383,475

1,608,000

79,792

550,000

40,000

254,000

19,900

4,1U,190

eoo

82,478,546

1,516,121

27,893,478

1,338,959

6,665,345

309,397

207,502

16,048

147,790
39,830
401,077

201,972

30,640

Virginia

146,499

WG*!t Vinrinia

881,717
57,600

6,043

All other states

150

Table 9.— CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PEODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

PRODUCTS— continued.

Group XIII.- Paints,

colors, and varnishes — Continued.

STATES AND TERRITORIES.

A.— Pigments— Continued.

B.— Paints.

Iron oxides and other
earth colors.

Dry colors.

Pulp colors

sold moist.

Total
value.

Paints in oil, in paste.

Paints already mixed
for use.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Gallons.

Value.

United States

33,772,256

S324,902

167,734,241

H 428, 028

20,060,935

8861,531

832,473,812

306,477,865

817,603,127

16,900,350

814,870,685

2, 100, 000

15,750

557, 149
160,000
99,385
21,876

2,500

2, 411, 622

83,330

1,428,868

....215,846

207, 797

10,000

68,009

8,496

355,837
153,325
34,020
16,725

1,000

349, 3.52

150,000

31,376

13,3S0

2,500

149, 779

4,629,569

153,215

209,051

4,875

353,135

132,102

60,406

293,259
1,103,380
1,659,034

357,816
13,200

3,878,173

773,66-2

3,375

1,132,641

6,918,338

2,377
4,118,491

135,731
4,562,2512

104,604

870,683

45,021,424

1,734,600

1,405,000

56,065

2,634,159

121,136

74,150

91,394

2,594,474

34,612

181,485
6,500

387, 575
94,017
13,000

232,544
479,011
847,205
298,661
12,000

1,542,268

221,712

2,700

622,542

2,922,134

93. 714

Illinois

1,183,565

14,617

9,853,710

300,789

10,000

1,000

1,995,410

32. 079

3,042,000

71,566

134, 901

4,875

1,022,640
189,834
822,600

1,101,227

10,402,389

9,761,345

796,282

70,610
50,686
47,133

87,519
635,551
684,716
100,084

282, 525

81.416

13,273

130,000
2,278,000

400
28,435

1,533,509

3,445,701

417,418

33,505

218,607

40,737

558,300
739, 312

31,042
67,425

205,740

Massachuaettfl —

467,829
974.318

257, 732

13,200

1,295,249
219,712

8,455,000

82,494

45,796,923
8,850,306

2,282,924
863,950

3,375

New Jersey

500,000
15,602,000

25,000
127,134

4,764,207
42,933,177

445,425
2,156,799

8,156,948
12,941,596

162, 556
580,623

8,672,911
68,999,820

2,803

30,595,%7

30,576

59,138,990

629,800

552,452
4,009,897

2,377
1,752,553

7,644

3,082,644

70,775

580,189

2,908,441

Ohio

80,000

1,200

1,441,781

95,010

2,578,218

114,991

2,174,014

35,554

2,385,938

128, 087

1,509,608

33, 829

6,318,691
20,000

96,976
500

63,817,766

820,847

594,379

12,842

7,660,000

30,610

117, 150
39,530
170,207

142,000
241,429
108,660

28,400
15,600
8,300

116, 073

26,200

232,059

Texas . .

23,930
164.907

Virginia

25,929,972

146,499

West Virginia

Wisconsin

60,400

6,043

800,050
57,500

6,000,000

412,500

430,000
48,500

387,550
57,500

161

Table O.-CHEMICALS AND ALURD PRODUCTS: DOTAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

PBoo(;crs— continued.

Group XIII.— PalnU, colors, and vamlsbes-Contlnued.

Group XlV.-ExpkMir**.

STATR8 AND TERRITORISS.

C— Varnishes and japans.

All other
products in
this group.

Total
value.

Ooopo

Total
value.

OH and turpentine
varnishes.

Alcohol var-
nishes.

I'yroxyllne var-
nishes.

Liquid dry-
ers, japans,
and lac-
quers.

wder.

Gallons.

Value.

Gallons.

Value.

Gallons.

Value.

Potuidt.

Vklne.

United States

|18,602,7W

14,286,768

114,387,461

568,212

(948,069

204,068

1237,012

18,086,264

13,017,162

n7, 066, 897

12S,814,10S

16, no, 861

64,140

4,274,558

247,625
600,000

8,611

180,806

28,800

890,092

2,200

128,670
80,000
187,679

120,892

28,500

807,462

2,670

5,300

6,113

8,000

80,000

175
600

4(M
1,200

28,810

36,012

46,214
1,000

82,6i7
8,597

812,400
443,971

7,282,760
8,794,779

812,400

443,971

Florida . ..

.. .

Geonrla

7,600

2,186,496

221,372

7,600
296,804
21,949

26,000

488,634

10,490

30,000

Illinois '!!"!Ii!!"i"'

1,617,068
263,624

i,e2i,i54

196,260

148,943
1,210

203,638
8,669

16,000
383

16,000
694

289,736
970,944

358,315
179,000

6,868,260
4,926,000

12,618,400
4,477,675

270,974

214,324

353. 31 .S

179,000

816,978
8,000
46,000

44,646

698,853

1,668,549

28,000

464,660
8,810
60,000

55,800

486,532

1,632,963

27,754

814,608
7,904
46,000

23,825

442,600

1,629,437

28,000

100

146

1,230
96

8,960

11,686

54,000

148,089

28,453

10,000

170,000

4,000,000

170,000

20,821

189,393

80,661

4,400
8,675

11,360
8,451

171,062
891,766

1,227,775

147,330

Hlasinlppl

MisDOuri

227,468

110,169

127,640

2,106

3,277

6,600

16,000

80,551

23,639

2,600

600

484,928

760,036

992,842

2,826,391
6,271,765

91
1,739,808

61,200
1,779,960

11,250

1,668,752
4,928,208

2,258,228
4,665,714

67,673
281,205

124,743
432,928

49,308
102,777

69,181
99,000

874,239
1,074,118

91
512,299

8,493,197
867,998

5,477,900
5,939,200

240,027

263,694

Ohio

1,245,566

32,000

1,406,656

1,177,397

51,200

1,286,672

43,304 1 60,107

225,213

1,330,489

21,627,675

927,096

Pennsylvania

47,901 1 K5.47S

291

226

469,580

272,187
65,464

2,571,368

34,961,649

1,607,807

Rhode Island.. .

6,950

11,260

220,318

2,600,000

100.000

300

Vermont

280,870

1,400

8,500
62,099
92,000

Virginia

65,473

66,478

West Virginia

17,624

2,600

3,324

14,800

68,000

2,376,626

92,000

All other states

152

Table 9.— CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

PBODUCTS— continued. •

Group XIV.— Explosives— Continued.

Group XV.— Plastics.

STATES AND TERRITORIES.

Nitroglycerine.

Gun cotton, or
pyroxyline.

Dynamite.

Smolieless powder.

Another
explo-
sives.

Total
value.

Pyroxyline

plastics.

All other

products

in this

group.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

United States

3,618,692

$783,299

369,499

8189,623

85,846,456

»8,247,223

2,973,126

Jl, 655, 948

$860,463

$2,099,400

$1,970,387

$129, 013

496,801
27,055,910

46,429
2,896,703

California

60,000

30,800

1,361,000

816,600

452,260

Connecticut

District of Columbia

Florida

Georgia

18,761

Indiana

676,000

118,750

6,456,041

614,934

68,938

22,936

Kansas

Louisiana

Maryland

Massachusetts

23,732
37,692

231,509

111,641

119,868

4,000

2,000

6,643,976

652,174

Minnesota

Missouri

10,464,235

992,842

Nevada

New Jersey

14,199

2,191

284,499
35,000

124,623
35,000

25 550 543 9 ItW -'!«R

1,477,633

766,991

175,000

1,862,496

1,868,746

3,750

New York"

671,215

69,404

North Carolina

Ohio

1,455,113

351,970

61,556

49,021

2,400

1,163,918

256,289

8,507.676

790,372

i6,966

6,395

5,395

South Carolina

Tennessee

120,318

Texas

Vermont

4,000

1,400

Virginia

3,500

West Virginia

306,462

52,099

All other states

ir)3

Tahi.k O.— chemicals AND ALUED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERBITOKIES,

1900— Continued.

piioDocm— oontlniNd.

Group XVI.— Esaentlal oils.

Group XVII.— Compreaed and
llqaefled gaaea.

Group y VIII.— Fine cbmnlcal*.

<iTATE8 AND TERRIT0RI18.

Total
value.

Natural.

Witch-hazel.

Artlfl-
clal.

Total
value.

Anhy-
drous
ammo-
nU.

Carbon
dlozlde.

Com-

preswd

and

'&
gasea
not
other-
wise
enu-
mer-
ated.

Total
value.

Alkaloids.

Gold salts.

Pounds.

Value.

Qallons.

Value.

Ounces.

Value.

Onncea.

Value.

United Statcfl

IS46,«a6

882,664

1737,496

110,280

S64,S49

(64,460

(1,215,011

1448,167

1696.164

•70,690

14,229,431

3,887,522

•1,748,264

8,694 Ml,145

r'jkiifnmitt

2,490

3,330

2,490

44,488

20,488

24,000

46,530

300

480

91,000

45,060

7T,786

77,786

500

400

500

Illinois

110
14,180

82
17,683

100
14,180

180,3.50

180,350

100.060

•

Maine

•

12,000
9,390

4,395
202,258

2,930
218,453

4,396
202,258

13,700
2,976

600

18,200

MiohiiF&n

2,976

Mississippi

Missonri

142,686

79,742

62,844

234,056

5,226

53,448

Nebraska

Nevada

151,600
226,452

92,375

69,225
173,962

■52,'496"

406,864
484,590

288,672

98,213

803
66

9,917

New York

533,400
500

517,402
500

469,351
.■iOO

19,260

9,699

64,450

780

Ohio

52,905

47,905

6,000

1,6.50

Pennsylvania

2,696

1,993

2,595

239,713

126,885

112,828

2,930,831
60,000

3,098,860

1,645,061 i 2,500

26,000

Rhode Island

Sonth Carolina

Texas

3,000

Virginia

87,772

U7,721

37,772

West Virginia

Wisconsin

2,876

1,750

2,876

79,465

79,466

All other state*

154

Table 9.— CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

PBODDCT»— continued .

Group XVIII.— Fine chemicals— Continued.

Silver salts.

Platinum salts.

Chloroform.

Ether.

Acetone.

All other.

Ounces.

Value.

Ounces.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

1,262,6M

$499,345

7,312

$54,600

396 540

»98,070

263,238

$129,876

1,638,715

8178,666

$1,435,465

California

Florida 1

Illinois 1

100,060

Louisiana

Maryland

12,000

Massachusetts

9,390

Michigan

Mississippi

103,576

37,719

6,380

46,678

116,350

56,211

40,000

Nebraska

New Jersey

173,000
325, 121

63,890
120,104

932

7,922

334,000
62,540

66,800
31,270

56,000
74,500

. 18,650
45,700

63,593
1,455,865

6,359
158,712

135, 103
128 024

New York ,

North Carolina

Ohio

1 650

Pennsylvania

650,907

277,632

16,388

9,315

119,257

13,595

959,238
50,000

Rhode Island

South Carolina

Texas

Virginia

West Virginia

Wisconsin

1 1

;

155

Table 9.— CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMFINT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

PBODDCTS— continued.

Oronp XIX.— CbemlcftU not othenrlie •peclfled.

VTATBB AXD TBRRITOBin.

Total
value.

Qijeetia.

Cream of tartar.

Epaom salt*.

Blue vitriol.

Coppenui. '""'"JES:**"'"

Pounds.

Valoe.

Value.

Pound*.

Value.

Pounds.

Value.

Pounds. Value., Pounds.

Value.

United States

I5.1W.9U

15,883,798

12,012,886

10,620.000

12.061,600

7,669,809

167,966

7,600.000

1376.000

19,884,806

187,927 '8.478,880

tlM.&54

82t,000

1,610,000

826,000

Diatript nf Columbia

Florida

182,891

1,403,606

169.695

2.086,400

12,696

2f aine

116,215
80,191

1,421,600

14,215

8,400,000

102,000

Hicblgan

HiffilMlppI ' -

Hiasonrl

2,K4
81,656

78,350

2,564

372,418 31,655

1,120,977
2,133,275

4,2i6,666

4,800,000

795,500
960,000

871,662
67,403

5,231
675

8,000,000 1,120,000

20,000

1,000

Ohio

726,211

5,607.874 691,536

10,158,600

34,675

520,523

6,118,309

42,751

7,566,666

375,000

6,700,000

31,660

South C&rolina

Texafl

Vinfinia

West Virginia

Wisconsin

All other states

(

166

Table 9.— CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TERRITORIES,

1900— Continued.

PRODtJCTS— continued.

COUPAKISOIf OF PRODtJCTS.

POWER.

GroupXIX.— Chem-
icals not other-
wise specified —
Continued.

All other.

Num-
ber of
estab-
lish-
ments
report-
ing for
both
years.

Census year
1900.

Preceding
business year

Num-
ber of
estab-
lish-
ments
report-
ing.

Total
horse-
power.

Owned.

STATES AND TERRITORIES,

Engines.

Water

Tin salts.

Steam.

Gasorgasoline.

Pounds.

Value.

Num-
ber.

Horse-
power.

Num-
ber.

Horse-
power.

Num-
ber.

Horse-
power.

4,677,471

S470, 169

S19,003,538

1,473

8180,675,706

$166,604,049

1,364

198,338

2,682

158,646

1,669

9,273

Alabama

100,454
629,649
33,154
970, 673
167,573

14,157
10,164
121,613
869,683
56,365

4,265

13
48
4
26
13

7
10
23
74
36

8
4

15
9

- 5

131

246

116

277

7
13
5
3

47
7
9
6

1,817,640
7,863,041
299,954
2,486,964
1,077,926

85,637

533,789

1,516,461

10,886,616

2,546,039

696.022
728,943
963,730
1,036,4,63
366,000

4,921,377

8,027,083

9,362,568

377,031

605,972

7,026,687

964,840

27, 225

23,823,809

38,930,4.55

1,162,111

12,414,903

239.359

30.791,652

1,127,329

866,429

1,577,587

39,830

404,337

3,756,967

303,503

1,074,347

77,190

1,662,913
6,981,138
190,952
2, 313, 213
1,098,490

83,855

469,492

1,409,770

9,567,420

2,270,170

566,051
554, .593
829,686
808,938
374,600

4,513,513

6,526,099

7,664,301

310, .500

441,000

6,868,038

841,6.50

2.5,900

20,281,702

35,058.082

1,084,357
10,501,736

1.58, 794
26.081.791

999, .561

792,863
971,818
28,060
267,368

3, 129, 320

267,168

694,3.S3

74,764

. 21

7
36
66
34

7
4
15

8
8

47
60
52
6
3

120

224

103

272

67
8

11
4

1,630
3,653
199
2,692
2,602

527
3,913
6,726
2, 441

763

1,105

969

927

2,644

4,487
6,190

23,774
271
416

2,805

380

17,817

49,974

1,292

10,017

30,86.5

730

3,940

2,106

180

380

9,782
550

1.090
280

34
66
6
38
30

10
56
76
49

22
6

17
12
10

179

321

638

156

659

36
23
6
6

127
8
11

1,515
2,653
167
1,731
1,360

615

3,856

6,086

2,008

753
730
902
835
196

4,056

4,890

23,494

201

415

2,599

360

16,293

28,784

1,163

7,657

27,372

647

3,940

1,838

175

380

9,292
500

1,087
130

200

33
40

911

1,082

Florida

11 linois

8
3

139
73

Indiana .

Iowa

1
1

5
10
36

64,425
26,600
13,630

1,027,229

616, 106

1,300,784

Maine

2
6
6

2,420
44

87
10

. 179,587

30,191

160

Minnesota ;

Mississippi .

Missouri

1,192,242

26,120

2,400

4,185,535

2,657,133

10, 292
1,050,044

45,928

3,371,440

465,509

Nevada

1
3
10

47
228

56
267

New Jersey

3,130,678
257,329

320,246
51,600

2
67

Ohio

1,109,977

68,122

598

102
2

1,582
60

Rhode Island

Tennessee .

22,600
16,540

250

Texas

Virginia

91,091

32,750

490

9,000

246

West Virginia

All other states

157

Tadlb O CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS: DETAILED STATEMENT BY STATES AND TEKKIT()RIh>4,

1900— Continued.

rowia— continued.

FAOTOBtH.

Owned— Continued.

Rented.

Fnr-
niabedto

other

establlsh-

menbi.

Total
num-
ber of
eMab-
liiih-
ments.

No em-
ployee!.

Under

5to
20.

21 to
60.

61 to
100.

101 to
2W.

auto
soo.

SOI to
1,000.

STATU AKD TIBKITOUK.

Electrir motors.

Other power.

Orer
1,00a

Num-
ber.

Hone-
power.

Num-
ber.

Horse-
power.

Electric,
horse-
power.

Other
kind,
horse-
power.

Horse-
power.

I'nlted States

899

6,S4V

642

19,446

1,914

876

1,740

418

<S6

SIS

14S

122

1
S7

26
670

173

60
65
2

19
63
4
81
15

8
10
46
88
42

8
5
18
10
13

63
83

97
8

39
5
4

160
285

137

306

22
14

7
5

64
9
12

1
12

8
28

2
18
10

4
1

18
81
22

6
9

1
4

4
4
1
8

3
4

2
3
1

15
26

Colilieiticllt

2
6

8
140

9
1

1
3
19
9

.......

20
20

Florida

12
30
23
23

10
2

1
1

4
S

6
S
2

28
159
837

1
1

lllinoU

304

161

300

6
4

23
87
19
6

13
2
2
66
106

126

3
5
3
3

20
4

4
3

8
2
3

17
10
10
2
2

27
56

3
22

1
66

1
3

2
8

8
26
15

31
19

210
W5
U5

Maine

Mftrvland

90
95
10

8
2
6

2
2
1

5
70

140

HiiBlsslppi

■ ■ ■

2
8

Minonri

123
20

Nebraska

Nevada

[

3
6

36
67

33
1

70
4

2
1
3
1

15
4
3
2

New JemeT

74
63

1,171
989

20
18,435

83
57
30
28

201
337

10
14«

18
14

3
6

New York

North Carolina

Ohio

1,376

208

Or<^on

893
15

80
8

1.56
15

17
8

2
2

Rhode Island

8
2

Vermont

1
8

Virginia

27
15

40
10

175
26

West Vl^nla

All other states

ISO

APPENDIX

(159)

CONTENTS.

DIGEST OF UNITED STATES PATENTS RELATING TO THE CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.
(Products and processes.)

Gbopp I.— acids. Page.

Sulphuric 163

Nitric 164

Mixeti 165

Hydrochloric 165

Phosphoric 165

Other inorganic 166

Acetic 166

Lactic 167

Tartaric 167

Citric 167

Salicylic 167

Tannic 167

Other organic 167

tiRoup II.— SODAS.

Caustic soda 168

Sodium carbonates 169

Borates 171

Recovery processes 171

Packing processes 172

Group III.— POTASH.

Carbonates 173

Group IV. -ALUMS.

Ammonia alum 173

Potash alum 173

Swla alum 173

Concentrated alum 173

Alum cake 174

Other alums 174

Group V.— COAL-TAR PRODUCTS
See group XVIII, Fine chemicals.

Group VI.— CYANOGEN COMPOUNDS.

Cyanides 175

Ferrocyanides 176

Other cyanides 176

Group VII.— WOOD DISTILLATION.

Wood distillation 176

Resins and turpentine 177

Group VIII.— FERTILIZERS.

Products 178

Processes 182

No. 210 — u

Group IX.— BLEACHING MATERIALS AND Page.
BLEACHING PROCESSES.

Chlorine 187

Hypochlorites:

Materials 188

Proceiwes 189

Sulphur dioxide 190

Hydrogen dioxide and ozone 190

Other metallic dioxides 190

Metallic jjermangajiates 190

Other bleaching agents:

Materials 190

Processes 191

Group X.— CHEMICAL SUBSTANCES PRODUCED
BY THE AID OF ELECTRICITY.
Products:

Inorganic 191

Organic —

Carbides 192

Other organic 192

Processes 192

Apparatus 201

Group XL— DYESTUFFS AND EXTRACTS.

Natural :

Inorganic 205

Organic 205

Artificial:

Inorganic 206

Organic 207

Processes 237

Mordants 240

Group XIL— TANNING.

Natural 242

Artificial, inorganic 243

Group XIII.— PAINTS, COLORS, AND VARNISHES.

Pigments 244

Paint.'' 245

_A'aniishes 245

Group XIV.— EXPLOSIVES.

Gunpowder, including blasting powder 245

Nitroglycerine 248

Cellulose nitrates and other organic nitrates 248

Dynamites 250

Smokeless powder 252

Nitro-sobstitution comiwunds 253

(161)

162

CONTENTS.

Page.

Fulminates, priming rompositions, and fuses 254

Pyrotechnic compusitions 255

Match compositions 256

Group XV.— PLASTICS.

Pyroxyline plastics 257

Viscose - 262

Rubber and rubber substitutes 262

Caseine plastics 264

Other plastics 268

Processes 277

Group XVI.— E-SENTIAL OILS.

Essential oils, perfumes, and flavors 280

Artificial musk 280

Group XVIL— COMPRESSED AND LIQUEFIED GASES.

Hydrogen 280

Chlorine 280

Oxygen 280

Nitrogen 281

Nitrous oxide 281

Sulphur dioxide 281

Carbon dioxide 281

Apparatus 281

Group XVIIL— FINE CHEMICALS.
Inorganic:

Bromine and iodine 282

Sodium and potassium 282

Selenium 282

Rare earths 282

Platinum metals 283

Carbon compounds:

Hydrocartons 283

Haloid compounds —

Chlorides 283

Bromides 284

Iodides 284

Fluorides 284

Alcohols and phenols 284

Aldehydes and their products —

Aldehydes 285

Vanillin 285

Page.
Carbon compounds — Continued.

Ethers 286

Acids 286

Esters or salts 286

Ketones 289

Sulphur compounds 289

Nitrogen compounds —

Nitrosubstitution compounds 290

Substituted ammonias 290

Purins and derivatives —

Purins 291

Xanthins 292

Pyrazoles 292

Chinolines or quinolines 292

Chinaldines 293

Isatins 293

Alkaloids 293

Pyrazines and piperazines 293

Proteids 294

Group XIX.— CHEMICALS NOT OTHERWISE
ENUMERATED.

Inorganic:

Sulphur 294

Phosphorus 294

Carbon 294

Haloid compounds 294

Oxides 295

Sulphides 297

Basic hydroxides —

Ammonia 297

Other hydroxides 299

Chlorates 299

Nitrites and nitrates .300

Sulphites and sulphates .300

Phosphates 302

Carbonates 303

Silicates 304

Aluminates 304

Manganates and permanganates 304

Processes and apparatus 304

Organic:

Processes and apjiaratus 306

DIGEST OF UNITED STATES PATENTS.

PrepartMl by 8tory B. Ladd. under the <1lreotlnn of Cbables E. MrNRoK.

GROUP I.— ACIDS.

SULPHURIC ACID.

S,SOS—Au(jiuit te, ISSl. E. L. SEYMOUR. Impnivcincnl in proceaa of reducing
ores by zinc rompoundf.

ahnnms piui from tho calcination of sulphiiret ores wiih air and steam la
throiiKli (clilspathie nwk, maKnesian limestone, siilphuretB of metals or
e, convcrtin)! the same lnt«i their Kulphatcs, and the surplus gas Is con-
verti-d into dlluie sulphuric add. The (tases reniaiuinK or cvolvod are combined
with crude or niw ammonia or other alkaline substance producinft fertilizers;
or tlic sulphurou.'i leases of the first operatl<»n are passed into water in the pres-
ence of meiallic zinc, forming .sulphate of zinc, which is converted into white
oxide of zinc.

UM7— February te, ISHU. J. SMITH AKD J. B. SAVAGE. Improvement in the

manufatinre. of «utphnric acid.

Sulphuric acid is heated for concentration by steam coils In leaden pans and
(till.

UI,SS&—May SI, ISSi. I,. CHANDOR. Imprmxment in the manufaciure oj sul-
phuric add.
Columns of stoneware or clay Qasks arc used In lieu of lead chambers, and

the sulphurous acid Is passed through masses of porous bodies, such as coke or

pumice stone.

U.lS7—June /.'.. imi. R. G. LOFTUS. Improvtd procem of recovering the acid

Vied in refining ^iCtroieum.

The spent acid is, first, diluted with ."iO per cent of water, mibjected to agita-
tion ana then repose in a leaden-lined tank, and the oily matters subsequently
drawn oil; second, the diluicd acid is cunccntratcd by evaporation to from l.iiW
to 1.700 and subjected to further diluti<m and repose; third, the clear liquid is
mphoned off from the heavier impurities and again concentrated to from 1.0,50
to 1.700; and, fourth, it is concentrated in glass, porcelain, or other suitable
vessels to a specific gravity of'1.816.

U.Oao— January 16. imfi. A. H. TAIT AND J. \V. AVIS. Improved apparatm /or

desulphurizing ores.

Air heated to from 260° to 315° C. is forced through sulphuret ore in a closed
chaml>er un<ler n pri^ssure of 20 to 40 pounds. The admission of a small quan-
tity of nitric oxide gas is advantageous.

et,919— March 19. 1867. D. ASHWORTH AND R. B. EATON. Impromment in con-
centrating sulphuric acid.
A series of glass retorts is use<l in combination with a heating apparatus.

7S,»M—llay tS, lass. D. ASHWORTH AND R. B. EATON. Improved apparatus

for eoneenlmting sulphuric acid.

The hot concentrated acid is cooled and the fresh acid heated by fiowing the
latter through an encasing jacket of a vessel of the former. It also relates to
structural details.

SS.SSl— February 9, 1869. A. H, TAIT. Improvement in ttie manufaciure of sul-
phuric acid.

Sulphurous acid Is freed from nitrogen by liquefying the sulphurous acid and
allowing the nitn>gen gas to escape. Arsenic is removed by refrigerating the
sulphurous-acid vapor*. Sulphurous-acid gas is exposed to the action of nitric
oxide, air, and steam under pressure, formiag sulphuric acid, which is concen-
trated by injecting hot air.

»7,1S*— iVoremter 15, 1869. L. S. FALES. Improved mode of recovering the spent

acid from oil refineries.

To effect the separation of the tarry matter from the spent acid of oil refineries,
etc., the spent acid, either with or without the addition of sulphate of pota.sh or
of ammonia, and diluted with water, is subjectetl to the action of ammoniacal
vapors from gas liquor, and then allowed to stand, when the tarry matter is
removed, leaving a clear solution, wliich is then concentrated by evaporation,
sulphate of S(Xla being first added.

it7,SM>—}ttty 18, 187i. J. HUGHES. Improvement in the manufaciure of acids and

paints from the materials used to pttrify gas.

.Satnrateii or si)ent gas-purifying materials are used as a base for the manufac-
ture of arlds. The resultant oxide, in the case of iron materials, is available as
a base for paints.

Itt9,i0!t — July 16, 187i. \V. ARCHDEACON. Improvement in preparing wooden

vessels for holding acids.

The interior of the vessel is impregnated with a composition of glue 1 part
and beeswax 3 parts, applied under pressure,

1S7.691— April a, 1873. J. KIRCHER. Improvement in obtaining sulphur, sut-
phuric acid, and sulphurets of sodium and pf/tassinmfrum gas time, etc.
Saturated gas-purifying material — lime or iron— is heated with superheated

steam to evolve sulphureted hydrogen for the manufacture of sulphuric^ acid.

Flowers of sulphur is produced by mixing gas lime with loam and sublimating

the excess of sulphur; lac sulphur by mixing .the gas lime with water and acid;

sulphuret of sodium or potassium by subjectiug the gas lime to the action of

caustic soda or other alkali or salt.

liS,t(»—Scptember tS, 1S7S. E.THOMSON AND W.H. GREENE. Improvement

in the mannfactnre of sulphuric acid.

It relates to details of structure and arrangement, including subjecting the
nitrous gases evolved from the reaction of sulphurous acid and nitric acid to the
action of cold water and air currenis in a chamber with porous packing, to form
nitric add.

lU,9!li—Sovember te, WS. J. SAUNDERS. Improvement <n the manMfaetmt e^

sulphuric acitl.

Hollow glass lulls with one or more openings are used for filling sulphuric-acid
condensing towers.

im,t>95— April il, 187i. H. Sl'RENGEL. Improvement in the mant{faeture ijf sul-
phuric aciit.
Very line spray or mist of water or apidifle<l aqueous solQtknu are used In

place of steam. Sulphuric acid Is sprayed to absorb the nitrous ftmies in the

gases from the sulphuric-acid chambers, and the acid containing the absorbed

fumes is sprayed in the leaden chambers.

175,731,— April i, 1876. W.H.NICHOLS. Improvement in sulphuric-acid packages.
They are made of sheet iron, with the surfaces and edges coated with lead and
united by melted lead.

IOi,lU—iluy IS, 1878. A. PtNlSSAT. Improvement in processes for recovering

waste sulphuric acid.

Sulphuric acid la recoverc<l from the refu.se in the treatment of coal oil by
washing the acid from the tar, evaporating down to about 60° Baum^, and then
vaporizing, condensing, and producing the white sulphuric acid and concen-
trating,

!06,SC»—July 13, 1878. F. F. FARRAR AND F. P. GILL. ImprovemerU in proc-
esses and ajtparatus for recovering waste sulphuric acid.

Acid Is reclaimed from the residuum tar of refineries by mixing the tar with
hot water and steeping with heat, then allowing it to cool and settle, when the
acid and tar are drawn off from below. The acid water is then heated and the
purer liquor withdrawn from the bottom and the water evaporated.

StS,S71— January 13, 1880. J. A. W. WOLTERS. Xanufacture of nnhydroiu sul-
phuric acid.

Anhydrous sulphuric acid is obtained bv the distillation of a mixture of anhy-
drous bisulphate of soda (or pota.sh) and anhydrous .sulphate of magnesia, or
compounds of the other so-called vitriols and alkaline earths.

130,171— JiUy SO, 1880. H. BOWER. Process of and apparatus for treating residuum

from petrolfnim refineries.

Sulphuric acid is recovered by washing the sludge acid with water in covered
tanks, mechanically .separating the sulphurie-acid solution and carbonaceous
matters from the oily ingredients, as by centrifugal machines (for re<iLslilla-
tion), separating the acid .solution from the carbonaceous matters by heating
in a series of concentrators, and finally concentrating and distilling the sepa-
rated sulphuric-acid solution.

131,683— September 18, 1880.
acid.

E. CLARK. Recovering sulphuric acitl from sludge

In the recovery of sulphuric acid from the sludge acid of oil refineries, the
offensive vajwrs are eop.aucted ofl byan exhaust produced by an induced steam
blast while the sludge is being agitated by steam.

133,680— October 16, 1880. E. C. E. AND L. L. LABOIS. ,W(init(acfure of carbon
bisulphitie and sulphuric acid from pyrites, and apparatus therefor.
A limited proportion of sulphur is first extracted from a determined quantity

of pyrites and combined with carbon in a separate retort, while the hot pyritic

residue is conducted to a separate furnace for the manufacture of sulpnuric

acid.

11,0,11.8— April 19, 1881. J. GRIDLEY. Process (tf and apparatus for concentrating

stUphuric acid.

A strong heat is applied to the under surface of a thin body of dilute acid, and
at the same time a blast of superheated steam or hot air is applied to the upper
surface, and the vapors removed as they rise.

tie,396—Aumist 30, 1881. C. KOLBE AND T. UNDFORS. Apparatus for concen-
trating sulphuric acid.
A series of platinum retorts is arranged on a plane and connected by pipes

from the bottom of one to a higher point of the next, giving an equilibrium of

level in all the retorts.

160,1,16— December 6, 1881. F. BENKER AND H. LA8NE. Manufacture of sul-
phuric acid.
Nitrous compounds are economized, in the manufacture of sulphuric acid, by

mixing sulphurous-acid gas with the gases which enter the Oay-Lussac tower.

151,187— J anuarii 10, ISSi. H. WURTZ. Process of treating mineral pyrites and
sulphides for Oie manufacture of sulphurous and sulphuric acids.
A new product for use in the manufacture of sulphuric ai'id is made by gran-
ulating sulphurets and mixing same with comminuted metallic iron ana form-
ing into cakes or lump. The iron in the lumps is oxidized by moistening vritb
a saline solution. Asbeatus or mica may be incorporated as a binder.

163.I,H5— October 3, 1883. J. GRIDLEY. Process qf and apparatus for concentrat-
ing sulphuric acid.

A small stream of dilute acid from the evaporating pan. of about 60° Baum£,
Is continuously introduced into a large quantity of acid of tJ6° Baumi in a con-
centrating iHiii and kciit at the boiling point, with a proportionate constant
discbarge therefrom. The pan of cast iron has its walls above the weak acid
line protected.

167,581— Xovcmber H, 1881. R. N, R. PHELPS AND W. A. CLARK, Jr. Prvcen

of treating the tvastc pickle liquor if iroMcitrks.

Ferric oxide, sulphuric acid, and other products are recovered from pickle
liquor by evaporating the liquor, dr)-ing and pulverizing the crj'stals of sulphate
of Iron, heating them in a retort, say to 710° C, with air in retrulaled quan-
tities, and condensing the sulphuric and sulphurous acid vapors.

(163)

164

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

£68,79$— December 12, 1882. E, HAWORTH. Manufacture of sulphuric acid.

Sulphurous-acid gajs — as from lead smelters — is first passed through water,
which dissolves the gas and condenses any metallic fumes. The water is then
passed to a heating tank and the sulphurous-acid gas there evolved conveyed to
a leaden chamber while the water is returned to the dissolving chamber.

991,821— January 8, 18SU. M. A. WALSH. Process of concentrating sulphuric add.
Monohydrated sulphuric acid is produced by first concentrating up to 93 per
cent of monohydrated acid in the usual way and then transferring it, while hot,
to an iron or steel vessel and therein completing the concentration.

S0e,897— October 21, 188U. R. M. BREINIG. Processoftlie treatment of sludge acid.
A soap compound adapted to unite with the sludge tar is mixed with the
sludge, and the free acid is then readily separated from the tarrj- mass.

S10,U7— December SO, 188!,. A. B. NOBEL AND G. FEHRENBACH. Manufac-
ture of anhydrous sulphuric acid.

Sulphuric anhvdride is produced by subjecting sulphuric acid to the dehydrat-
ing influence of hydnvted phosphoric acid.

3U,5iS— March H, 1885. G. THOMSON AND W. KEMP. Purifying sulphuric

acid.

Sulphuric acid is purified by treating with ammonium sulphide, filtering, and
finally concentrating by heat.

SSS,58S — August U, 1885. E. D. KENDALL. Process of recovering sulphuric

anhydride.

Sulphuric anhydride is recovered from a compound containing an excess of
fuming sulphuric acid by heating the compound in a partial vacuum and con-
densing the volatilized sulphuric anhydride.

SS5.362 — September 1, 1885. J. McNAB. Process of manufacturing sulphuric acid.

Sick or pale acid chambers are restored by injecting thereinto mitrous vapors.
339.552- April 6, 1886. J. HUGHES. Apparatus for concentrating acids.

An evaporating pan is made of porcelain with a transparent glass cover.
Sld,785—June 1, 1886. U. CUMMINGS. Manufacture of sulphuric acid.

Sulphuric acid is produced by calcining a mixture of clay and sulphate of
lime, the proportions being such as will give hydraulic cement as a by-product.

Slt5,lU0~-July 6, 18S6. J. HUGHES. Process of making sulphuric acid.

Hot sulphur and nitric fumes from a sulphur furnace are projected through a
spray of water, in an intermediate chamber, and then passed into a condensing
cnarhber.

357,107— February 1, 1887. H. J. P. SPRENGEL. Obtaining sulphuric acid by the

aid of waste steam.

The exhaust steam from the engine is employed for the leaden chambers.
The engine boiler pressure may be raised — say 10 pounds— for the leaden cham-
bers, and the engine exhaust provided with a corresponding back pressure.

357 ,5Z8— February 8. 1887. J. B. F. HERRESHOFF. Process of concentrating ml-

ph uric acid.

Sulphuric acid is first concentrated to about 86 per cent, then concentrated
in a separate vessel to about 95 per cent, and this is evaporated in another ves-
sel to produce a residual strong acid of 98 per cent and a condensed pure acid of
93.5 per cent.

37 8,77 U— February 28, 1888. H. DE GROUSILLIERS. Process of treating sludge

acid.

Sulphuric acid is recovered from sludge acid by first removing the petroleum
or tarry impurities by floating them, then adding to the waste sulphate of soda
or potash and preci pi tilting the bisulphate formed by boiling and evaporation,
then depriving the precipitate of its aqueous substance by heating to a moderate
red heat, and finally vaporizing and condensing the sulphuric acid.

S8!,,8U~Junr 19, 1888. E. HANISOH AND M. SCHROEDER. Process of produc-
ing sulphuric anhydride.

Sulphuric anhydride is produced by reducing the volume of a gaseous mixture
of sulphurous acid and oxygen (air 75 per cent, SOo 25 percent) by compression
and subjecting the mixture under pressure to the converting action of a suita-
ble contact surface, as a platinized substance, at red heat.

IS9,h59— February S3, 1892. R. S. PENNIMAN. Ap})aratU9 for the final concentra-
tion of oil of vitriol.
A continuous- process apparatus ha.s a series of coupled glass retorts with the

contents agitated by injected air or otherwise.

U75,586—May -ZL, 1892. P. MAUKO, Process of solidifying lUjuid acids.

Liquid acids arc solidified by .adding thereto a soluble salt adapted to crystal-
lize with the water, as sulphate of sodiimi or of calcium for sulphuric acid, or
chloride of calcium or of magnesium for hydrochloric acid. The mixture is
preferably heated and agitated, and then cooled.

i8lf,5U6— October 13, 1892. E. J. BARBIER. Process of treating bisulphate ofi^oda.
Neutral sulphate of soda and sulphuric acid are obtained from bisulphate of
soda (35° to 45° BaumO) by refrigerating the bisulphate to about 10° C. until
decomposition takes place, separating the er^'stalized neutral sulphate from the
sulphuric acid and concentrating the same.

509,66U— November 2S, 189S. H. HOWARD. Method of and apparatus for concen-
trating sulphuric acid.

The fiow of sulphuric acid to the still is governed by an automatic valve con-
trolled by the specific gravity of the distillate.

51l*,983— February 20, 189L W. WOLTERS. Process of concentrating sulphuric acid.
Sulphate of lead is added to the acid during concentration to prevent corrosion
of the leaden vessels..

SSo, 882— March 19, 1805. E. J. BARBIER. Process of and apjKiratus for making

sulphuric acid.

The vapor of sulphurous acid circulates through a series of towers in succeasion
wherein it is .subjected to the action of a divided stream of sulpho-nitric, or
diluted nitric acid, in the upper part of each tower, and to the action of nitrous
and afjueoUH vapors in the lower part.

$1,1,01*1— June 11, 1895. F. J. FALDING. Process of and apparatus for making

concentrated sulphuric acid.

The hot sulphurous gases are conducted through a concentrating tower, and
a denitrating tower to the lend chambers, and the acid there formed is returned
in downward flow through the denitrating tower and the concentrating tower
and from thence to storage tanks, whereby the deuitrated acid is exposed to
the action of the hot sulphurous gases.

5U1,597—June 25, 1895. J. D. DARLING. Method of and apparatus for manufac'
turing sulphuric acid and by-products.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

51S, 596— September 17, 1895. N. P. PRATT. Process of and apparatus for making

sulphuric acid.

In the manufacture of .sulphuric acid the gases in the acid chamber are com-
mingled and agitated by withdrawing a i>ortion of the gases at one point and
reintroducing them at another.

590,826— September 28, 1897. J. D. DARLING. Porous diaphragm for electrolytic

apparatus.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
691,730— October U, 1897. W. BAIN. Process of and apparatus for electrolyzing.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
598,351— February 1, 1898. A. STAUB. Apparatus for making sulphuric acid.

The towers are filled with acid-resisting bodies, each having an inverted cup
or open depression on the under side.

636.921,— November U, 1899. M. SCHROEDER. Process of combining gases by con-
tact process.

Sulphuric acid or sulphuric anhydride is recovered from gases containing SOj
and O by passing said gases through a mass comprising a catalytic agent ana
soluble salts. When the efficiency of the mass has become impaired by the
action of the impurities the soluble carried salts are dissolved out. The cata-
lytic mass is formed by evaporating a mixture of a liquid, a platinum salt, and
a suitable soluble salt, and then reducing the platinum salt to the metallic
state.

636,925— November U, 1899. M. SCHROEDER. Oatalytic material.

It consists of a catalytic substance, as platinum, distributed through a mass
of one or more soluble salt**, which, serving as a carrier therefor, are stable in
the presence of hot sulphuric anhydride. An alkali salt is dissolved in water,
mixed with a platinum salt solution, evaporated, and the resulting salt crusts
dried and granulated. (See 636,924.)

6 W, 037— December 26, 1899. J. V. SKOGLUND. Apparatus for making acids.

A tower or chamber for acid vapors is coated on the inside with an acid-resist-
ing material and silicate of potash or soda, and treated with an acid to remove
from the silica any alkaline material.

61,1.276 — Januanj 16, 1900. J. D. DARLING. Porous diaphragm for cells employing
fused electrolytes.
See Group X. Electro-chemistry,

61,2,390— January 30, 1900. F. P. VANDENBERGH. Process of making sidphuric
acid.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

6I,3.57S—F€brua)"y 15, 1900. W. WARING AND J. E. BRECKENRIDGE. Process

of purifying sludge aci<l8.

About -4 per cent of sodium nitrate is mixed with sludge acid, at a tempera-
ture between 60° and 180° F.. to purify it and permit the recovery of the sul-
phuric acid. One per cent of sodium nitrate snffices to remove offensive odors.

652,119~June 19, 1900. R. KNIETSCH. Method of making sulphuric anhydride.

A gas containing sulphur dioxide and oxygen is passed through a contact
substance, as platinized asbestus, while maintaining therein a temperature, at
the hottest part, between the composing and decomposing temperature of sul-
phuric anhydride. The inflowing gas is heated by contact with the catalytic
chamber and the latter cooled, and the temperature is regulated by adjust-
ments of the gas and air currents, without external heating, except in special
cases.

NITRIC ACID.

9U,969— September 21, 1869. G. W. MOWBRAY. Purifying nitric acid.

Warm air is passed through nitric acid to purify it of th^ red fumes of nitrous
acid.

125,635- A jyril 9, 1872. C. W. VOLNEY. Improvem-ent in apparatus for the treat-
ment of liquid. t wUh nitric add.
Liquids, as alcoholic substances, to be treated with nitric acid are repeatedly

withdrawn from the vessel where nitric acid is added, cooled, and returned.

176,813— May 2, 1876. R. E. ROGERS. Improvement if methods qf recovering

nitric acid used in se]mrating gold and silver.

Nitric acid is recovered from nitrate of silver solutions by precipitating the
silver with hydrochloric acid in liquid or gaseous form.

198,776 — January 1, 1878. B. C. MOLLOY. Improvement in recovery of waste nitrous

gases.

A hot-water spray is used in towers or other suitable apparatus to absorb per-
oxide of nitrogen and recover nitric acid from its lower oxides.

1,77,375— June 21, 1892. J. LANG. Process of making nitric acid.

The mixed vapors of nitric acid, nitrous acid, and impurities arc passed from
the generator into a receiver and subjected to a heat high enough to keep the
impurities vaporized, but not so high as to keep the pure nitric acid vaporized
(for concentrated nitric acid the temperature should l>e at least H0° C), and the
vaporized impurities with any nitric-acid vapor arc then passed into a cooler
kept at a temperature low enough to condense the nitric-acid vapors (40° to 60°
C. ), which flow back into the receiver, while the vaporized impurities pass off
un condensed.

1,91,IS1— February 7, 1893. O. GUTTMANN. Process (if making nitric acid.

An air bla.st is introduced into the tube between the distilling chamber and
the condenser, to act upon the gaseous nitric acid and convert the low oxides
before condensation.

500,786— JiUy U, 1895. C. O. VOLZ. Process qf making nitric acid.

Pure and highly concentrated nitric acid is produeed by placing the raw
materials, as saltpeter and sulphuric acid, in an air-ti^'ht receptacle, estubhsh-
ing a vaciuim, and condensing the vapor. Action is accelerated by heating the
retort to S5° C.

511„12!,— February 6, 1891,.
alkali.

G. LUNGE. Process of making nitric acid and caitstic

An alkaline nitrate is mixed with crude ferric oxide in sufficient quantity to
maintain the porosity of the mass, as two parts of ferric oxide to one of sodi'iun
nitrate, and the heated mass is subjected to the action of heated air and steam
at a temperature sufficient to convert the whole of the alkaline base into an

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

165

nikalino (errlte, with the evolution ot nitrous fumiiioiiiivcrtlble Intonllrleiiclil.
The alkaline forrito Is ileoomixwed with hoi water to recover the eauotle alkult
anil ferrlf oxlile.

617.001— .Varch tO. ISVi. J. I). DARUNO. Jtode i)f produeing nitric acid and

»irlaU/rmn nitrttieg.

See Or«up X, Eleetro-chemUtry.
sr.ODH—Miireh m, I89i. H. A. FRASCH. Pructst qf maktnff concentraUd nitrtr

arid.

Nltrle-acld vapors art" exposed to the action of sulphuric add, or other dehy-
drating nsent, and hot air at a tompvraluro above the condensation point of the
nitric add to he obtained.

HS,ll(t—>^1>trmlKria,lS»l,. M. rRESTICE. Procet* qf making nilrk acid.

A mixture formed by dlsnolvlnR sodium nllrntc In sulphuric acid by heat Is
successively passed through a scries ot heated comjiartmenta and the vapors
collected and conden8e<l. whereby nitric ud<l Is continuously produced. The
lliiuld matter under distillation seals the passages between the series of cham-
bers.

M7. 7 IS— October It, 1891,. M. PRENTICE. Still for Maiming nitric add. etc.
Still for process No. 526.116.

177, Stli- February tS, 1887. Q. J. ANDER8SON AND J. C. DITTRICH. Proeet* qf
mantt/arturing ozone and bf/-proiiucUi.
See Group X, Elcctro-chemLstry.

IDO.liS— .September H, 1897. W. GARROWAY. Proceti of mating ollcatineMicata

and nitru' acid.

See Group If, Sodium Compounds, Silicates.
l<)1.0.'i7—Ocl'iher.'i.lS97. J. V. SKCX3HJNI). Process of mamifacturlng nitric acid.

Nitric-«ci<l vajsirs arc conveyed Into a cliumber packed with i)ieces of acld-
nrix>f material, the temperature of the chamber being maintained equal to or
higher than the boiling fKjint of the nitric acid and at a point that the watery
materials will be condensed: the vapors are conden8e<l and the nitric acid is
allowed to run In thin lilms over the pieces of acid-proof material, being exposed
to oxidizing action of air.
699,71,3— itaicti 1, 1893. E. A. STARKE. Compound nitrate and method o/ making

same.

A new product, a fused compound consisting of an alkaline-earth-metal
nitrate with an alkaline-metal nitrate, and suitable for the manufacture of
nitric acid and explosives, is formed by converting an alkaline-carth-metal salt
into a nitrate, as by contact with waste nitric acid and vapors of various manu-
facturing processes, and then dehydrating the nitrate by fusing with an alkaline-
metal nitrate.

eO),5(»—May a, 1S98. E. HART. Apparatus for distiUing acids.

The still haa a series of small distillation tubes, closed at bottom, depending
from the receiver and presenting an extended heated surface. They may be of
glass.

M1.S9I,— September 5, 1899.
nitrates.

H. K. BAYNES. I'rocess of decomposing alkali

A pulverulent mixture of alkali nitrate and ferric oxide is fumaced at about
6W C. in a revolving inclined cylinder retort, which is subjected to intermit-
tent jarring and has longitudinal ribs to lift and shower the charge, the nitrous
fumes being led off; whereby. In a continuous operation, the material is sub-
jected in streams <)r lilms to repeated contact with heated surfaces and thesolid
firnducts are carried out of the path of the uudecomposed particles. The alka-
Ine ferrite is sul>sequently converted into ferric oxide and caustic alkali.

6i8,Stt— April Si, 1900. J. F. WHITE. Process of making nitric acid.

In the manufacture of nitric acid from .sodium nitrate and sulphuric acid, the
weak nitric acid Ls converted into strong nitric acid by adding it to the succeed-
ing charge of scsiium nitrate and sulphuric acid, preferably by mixing it with
the sulphuric acid.

MIXED ACIDS.

16i,t60—June 8, 1875. P. CASTELLAXOS. Improvement in the manufacture of

niirosuiphuric add for 7najmfacturing nitroglycerine.

A mixture of nitric acid and sulphuric acid is produced by condensing vapor-
ized nitric acid In liquid sulphuric acid.

lei.tei — June 8, 1875. P. CASTELLANOS. Improvement in recovering acids from

residuum of niiroghjcerine manufacture.

The dilute residuum, dropped in small quantities throtigh a heated column
filled with obstructions, is treated with sulphurous-acid gas, the resulting nitric
acid collected, and the sulphuric acid drawn oil.

iei,!Sl—June 8, 1875. P. CASTELLANOS. Improvement in apparatus for recover-
ing acids from the residuum of nitroglycerine manttfaciure.
Apparatus for process No. 164,261.

tSl,9SS— January S, 18Si. F. V. POOL. Process of removing floceulent matter from

spent acids.

Floceulent matter, in spent acid used in the treatment of soluble fiber, is
removed by Intnxlucing powdered barium sulphate — 30 pounds per 650 gallons of
solution— and permitting it to stand from thirty-six to seventy nouts.

t8!,,7 a— September 11, 18SS. F. JENSSEN. Separatimi of nitric acid from a mijcture

of nitric and sulphuric acid.

A continuous stream of the mixed acids is passed through a connected series
of retorts to which are given separate degrees of heat, and the nitric a<'id Is
distilled over from each retort into .separate receivers, the acid In each of the
receivers being of a ditlereiit strength.

S0e,5l9— October li, 1881,. F. V. POOL. Manufacture of soluble nilrocettulote.

See Group XIV, Explosives.
SSe.Sti-nin-iuiry 23, 1886. F. V. POOL. Art of manufacturing nitrocellulose.

Sec Group XIV, Explosives.
SiS.Sia-June 15. 1886. F. V. POOL. Art of making nUroceUalose.

See Group XIV, Explosives.

350,1,97— October It, 1886. G.M.MOWBRAY. Manufacture of pynavltne.
See Group XIV, Explosives.

SS0.UI8— October It, 1886. G. M. MOWBRAY. Manufacture qf pyrozyliM.
See Group XIV, Explosives.

1.79,988— August t, tS9t. H. MAXIM. Method qf restoring nitrating aeldt.

See Group XtV, Explosives.
5te,7St—Orlolier t, 1891,. R. C. SCHOPPHACS. Proeem of ntlraling etUuUne.

See Group XIV, Exploolves.

HYDROCHLORIC ACID.

SUI.196— April It, last. E. 80LVAY. Preparation of hydroehlnrir aciil.

Hydrochloric add Is obtained In a dry state by absurblng It, or the vapon
thereof, in asolution of caldum chloride, and then vaporlilog the acid whlcli
is alone evolved.

199,8.10 — tunes. 1881,. L, MOND. Process of obtaining hydrochloric acid from the

rrtfidu/.s of ammonia-softa monufneture.

The lli|Uors obtaint-d In the manufaiUure of soda by the ammonia procen are
eva|ioratiil, and after separating therefrom the chloride of s<silum. which salu
out. the remaining pr<Kluct Is treated with sulphuric acid yielding hydro<;hloric-
acid gas, which is condensed or utilized, and, as a secondary product, sulpliate
of ammonia.

50S,511—November U, 188L L. MOND. Process qf making hydrochloric aetd.

Chloride of ammonium Is treated with an excesa of sulphuric acid— aay with
double the quantity nece.«»<iry to form the neutral .sulphate— and the mixture
heated until all of the hydrochloric acid is disengaged.

516,300— April 11, 1885. E. SOLVAY. Manufacture of hydrnrhlorie acid.

For the manufacture of hydnxihioric acid a composition is uaed of chloride ot
calcium, slilcioua clays, and the residuum from the manufacture of hydrochloric
acid by a previous operation.

Sei.Ote— April IS, 18S7. O. RUMPF. Process of (ibtaining muriatic acid.

For the priHiuction of hydrochloric aei<l metallic oxides are chlorldizcd by
passing vapors of ammonic chloride through them in a heated state, and then
subjecting the metallic chlorides to a mixed current of air and steam. When
the metallic chlorides are decomposed the operation is re[>eat«d.

.i79,un— March 13, ISSS. L. MOND. Obtaining ammonia and hydrocUorle add.

See Group XIX, Ammonia and Ammonium Salts.
1,5.1,986— June 9, 1891. E. SOLVAY. Process of dlsliUing hydrochloric add.

A current of dehydrating material — as sulphuric acid — is caused to flow in a
continuous circuit through a distilling apparatus and an cvajiorator, the soln-
titm of iiydrochloric acid being fwl Into the dehydrating solution within the
still, whereby hydrochloric acid is liberated and after passing off is condensed.

503..-i.W—Au()ust 15, 1893. E. SOLVAY. Apparatus for the distillation of hydro-
chloric actd.
Apparatus for process No. 453,986.

WI,,S39—Maj/ 10, 1891. W. WALKER. Process of and apparatus for making sili-
cates and hydrochloric acid.

Hydrochloric acid is obtained as a by-product in the production of pure sili-
cates for gla.ss making by mixing chlorine of sodium and lime with pulverized
sand, and heating the ma.ss in the presence of moisture to drive off the hydro-
chloric acid, which Is collected, and form a silicate of soda and lime.

605,369— June 7, 1898. J. R. WYLDE AND J. W. KYNASTON. Procets of making

hydrochloric acid.

Hydrochloric acid free from arsenic Is made from gases, wherein hydrochloric-
acid gas is present contaminated with arsenic, by cooling the gases and then
pa.ssing them in the presence of chlorine through or in contact with coke in a
"dry tower." in which the arseni<* is retained, and thence to a wet tower, in
which the hydrochloric acid is condensed.

61i.m;t— October 11, 1898. G. B. B ALDO. Process of and apparatus for etectrolyzing

sen water.

Sec Group X, Electro-chemistry.

18,773— January 31, 1899. H. S.
nates.
Sec Group XIX, Alumlnates.

618,77i— January 31, 1899. H. S. BLACKMORE. Process of making alkali aluml-
nates.

PHOSPHORIC ACID.

ll,,7ti—Apriin, 1866. E. N. HORSFORD. Improcement in preparing phosphoric
acid as a substitute for other solid acids.

'■ Pulverulent phosphoric acid " is produced by treating burned bones with
dlluteti sulphuric acid for several days, then leaching the pasty ma.ss and con-
centrating the extract to 2.5° Baurn^. and adding perfeeth- wnite l>one ashes and
concentrating to one-half its original bulk. P'lour or farinaceous material is
then added, and the material is passed through a sieve and dried.

156,1M— October m, 1871,. J. E. SIEBEL. Improvement in recovering phosphoric

acid and purifying ajnmmiia.

A solution of phosphate of lime, obtaine<l in the treatment of Imnea, is satu-
rated with ammonia, forming a solution of phosphate of ammonia, whicls is
evaporated, heate<l in a retort, and the ammonia recovered as well as the pkioa-
phoric acid. Crude ammonia thus repeatedly used is purified;

191,,050—Aiigust 14, 1*77. N. B. RICE. Improvement in processes qf recovering

pttosphoric acid used in manufacture of gelatine.

In obtaining gelatine from bone, etc., by means of phoaphoric acid, the acid
phosphate of Time is treated to recover the phosphoric acid by subjecting each
lot to tlie action of sulphuric acid and then leocbing a part or the whole of the
next lot through the sediment.

tt9,70S—July 6, 1880. E. N. HORSFORD. Pulverulent preparation qf phosphoric
add.

Pulverulent phosphoric add Is formed by treating the acid liquor tn bring it
into the condition of free pha*<phoric acid, concentrating it, mixing it with
starch as a neutral suljstance. drying, and pulverizing. It is then mixed with a
dry alkaline carbonate to form a baking powder.

tSO.Sn— August 10, 18S0. E. N. HORSFORD. Pulverulent preparation qf phos-

ptwricacid.

The liquor resulting from the acti<m of sulphuric acid upon bone-ash is taken
directly from the leach, boiled down and mixed with starch, dried, and pulver-
ized; forming a pulverulent product of free phosphoric acid and monocaldc
phosphate direct from the liquid, it is mixed with a dry alkaline carbonate to
form a baking powder.

166

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

239,59U~March S9, 18S1. H. S. MAXIM. Process of and apparatus /or vianu/oc-

Uiring phosphoric anhydride.

Phosphoric anhydride is jjroduced by bringing together a jet of vapor of
phosphorous and a blast of air of sufficient volume to oxidize the phosphorous
to its highest equivalency.

S53M3—May 23, 1883. W. H. HUGHES AND P. O'RIELLY. ProceifS of pre^mr-

ing plwsphoric acid from bones.

Liquid acid phosphates are treated with chlorate of potassa and the compound
subjected to a high degree of heat to eradicate organic impurities. The process
as a whole involves washing, calcining, leaching with sulphuric acid, filtering,
treating with hot air or steam and then with chlorate of potassa and beat, and
dissolving in water, with successive flltrations at different stages.

306,e6U— October IK. 1881*. S. G. THOMAS AND T. TWYNAM. Pt^ocess of obtain-
ing phosphoric acid from metallurgical slugs.
The slag is dissolved in dilute hydrochloric acid, a lime salt added in just

sufficient quantity to precipitate the iron as ferric phosphate, and the solution

of free phosphoric acid separated.

S12.90U— February ZU, 1885. C. SCHEIBLER. Process of treating phosphatic slag.
The fluid slag is allowed to cool very slowly, whereby a concentration of the
phosphoric acid takes place on the one part and of the iron and manganese on
the other, so as to permit of their being separately removed.

S9S,lS8~~Nov€mber27,1888, W. B. GILES AND A. SHEARER. Manufacture of

phospJioric acid.

Phosphoric acid is separated from impurities by distilling impure phosphoric
acid at a high temperature — say a red heat— in the presence of a current of air,
steam, or hydrochloric acid, and condensing the distillate in a partial vacuum.

l^9,575~~Sepiember 15, 1891. C. GLASER. Process of making phosphoric acid.

Sulphuric acid is first diluted with phosphoric acid (instead of water), and
then successive charges of jjhosphatic material are treated with sulphuric acid
diluted with phosphoric acid of increasing degrees, using the phosphoric acid
derived from each charge as a diluent to the sulphuric acid used in treating the
succeeding charge.

527,670— Octo&er 16, 1891,. G. DESCAMPS. PhospJioric acid with an absorbent.

Phosphoric acid in a dry form is provided by charging a vegetable cellulose,
as sawdust or cane bagasse, with phosphoric acid and drying, the operation
being repeated to increase the percentage of phosphoric acid in the absorbing
material.

5W. nU—May £8, 1895. J. VAN RU YMBEKE. Process of inaking phosphoric acid.
A mixture of natural phosphate and clay is submitted to the action of heat in
the presence of a reducing agent, as by fusing with coke, and the phosjjhorus
vapors, produced and earned off with the products of combustion, are subjected
to the action of air in sufficient quantity to oxidize the vapors into phosphorus
pentoxide, which is collected in water, and concentrated to the desired density.

OTHER INORGANIC ACIDS.

76,678~April U, 1868. D. P. WEBSTER. Improvement in bottles far holding hydro-
fluoric acid.
They are made of wood, papier-mac hC, or like material, coated inside with

asphalt and outside with a compound of india rubber and gum shellac. A

bottle may be made of two sections fitted together,

137, 07£~March 25, 1873. F. GUTZKOW. Improvement in the manufacture of bo-

racic acid.

Boracie acid is separated from borate of lime by distillation with superheated
steam.

160,761— March 16, 1875. F. FORMHALS. Improvement in processes of obtaining

boracie acid from borate of lime.

Sulphurous acid is passed through borate of lime while the latter is in a state
of suspension in water.

27 /,,660— March 27, 1883. W. B. ROBERTSON, Jr. Process of and apparatus

for obtaining boracie acid from borates.

Nitrous and sulphurous vapors are formed aud introduced, together with air,
into a borate solution, or borate in suspension in wat«r, forming boracie acid.

239.836— December 11, 1883. J. B. HOBSON. Process of and apparatus for obtain-
ing boracie acidfrmn native borate of lime.
Borate of lime is boiled with water and sulphuric acid gradually added, not,

however, in excess. The solution is allowed to settle and the liquor is drawn

off, filtered, cooled, and the boracie acid crystallized out and pressed to remove

the remaining mother liquor and expel its impurities.

650,187— May 22, 1900. C. C. MOORE. Process of making boracie acid and chlo-
rates.

Powdered crude borate is suspended in water, or the mother liquor of a pre-
vious operation— say three pounds to the gallon — chlorine is i»assed there-
through with agitation, and the boracie acid precipitated by refrigerating to 15°
to 20° C.

322,011— July lU, 1885. W. A. ROWELL. Manufacture of chromic acid.

Chromic acid is produced by first producing in a solution of a chromate a pre-
cipitate of chromate of strontium, then completing the precipitation of the chro-
mate solution by means of barium; afterwards decomposing the chromate of
barium with excess of sulphuric acid and finally applying the same acid to
decompose the chromate of strontium.

630,612— August 8, 1899. M. Le BLANC AND H. REISENEGGER. Process of
producing chromic aci-i by electrolysis.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

S9l,,S87~D€ce))iber 11, 1888. E. W. PARNELL AND J. SIMPSON. Obtaining

hydrogen sulphide.

Ammonium sulphide is first treated with dilute carbonic acid and the evolved
gases permitted to escape; then the ammonium sulphide is given a second treat-
ment with carbonic acid, yielding pure hydrogen sulphide.

l^3,2U9—May U, 1839. A. M. AND J. F. CHANCE. Obtaining hydrogen sulphide

from alkali waste.

Gases containing carbonic acid are passed through alkali waste and the result-
ant gases, containing hydrogen sulphide, are then passed through fresh alkali
waste so that the hydrogen sulphide unites therewith. The waste so enriched
is then treated with gases containing carbonic acid, yielding a gas rich in hydro-
gen sulphide, which is collected.

h61, 665— October SO. 1S91. T. W. CAPPON. Process of producing hydrofiuosilicic

acid.

Hydrofiuosilicic acid is produced by passing fluoride of silicon into an aque-
ous solution containing free hydrofluoric acid — from 10 per cent to 20 per cent
or more — during the presence of which free acid the silica is dissolved.

IS5,607— December 22, 1391. M. W. BEYLIKGY. Manufacture of hydrofiuosilicic

acid.

Hydrofiuosilicic acid is produced by heating a mixture of sulphate of iron
and an equivalent proportion of finely powdered fluorspar to incipient redness
in a closed vessel, passing steam over it to produce tiuohydrie acid charged
with vapor of water, and finally passing the said acid condensed with water
through silica.

626, 5 11— June 6, 1399. E. TEISLER. Process of obtaining silicic and hydrofiuosili-
cic acids.

An aqueous .solution of fluorine compounds, resulting from the purification of
graphite, is heated to evolve a mixture of steam and gasiform fluosilicate, and
the mixture is then cooled so as to cause the fluosilicate to decompose into
silicic acid and hydrofiuosilicic acid, and the two compounds are separated.

/^,633~-January 10,
acid.

139S. F. GRUESSNER. Process of recovering metastannic

Metastannic acid combined with arsenic is recovered by dissolving the com-
I>ound in concentrated hot sulphuric acid, then adding an oxidizing agent, us
nitric acid, and then diluting until free metastannic acid is precipitated.

529,100— November IS, 1891,. LA. F. BANG AND M. C. A. RUFFIN. Manufacture

of anhydrous stannic add.

A solution of an alkaline bicarbonate is added to a solution of an alkaline
stannate to precipitate metastannic acid, which precipitate is mixed with sul-
phuric acid, dried and calcined at a red-white heat.

575,2hO~January 12, 1897. A. K. HUNTINGTON. Process of making hydrocyanic

acid.

A mixture of acetylene and nitric oxide is ignited and rapidly burned in a
closed chamber — as "in a gas engine. The products, hydrogen and hydrocyanic-
acid gases, are passed through solutions of substances which combine with
hydrocyanic acid — as soda or potash — producing cyanides. The carbonic oxide
and hydrogen may be used for combustion.

101,011— March 22, ISiO. M. HATSCHEK. Improved apparatus for producing sul-

phurous acid.

A solution of sulphurous acid is ])roduced by spraying water through the
ascending fumes of sulphur.

123.7 IS^Febi'uary IS, 1873. P. MARCELIX. Improvement in the manufacture of

sulphurous acid.

Pure sulphurous acid is produced by the decomposition of sulphate of iron
with sulphur in a retort at a brig^it cherry-red heat.

268,530— December 5, 1832. R. P. PICTET. Pi-oductvm and dehydration of sul-
phurous oxide and apparatus therefor.

Sulphurousacid gas is passed through a refrigerator in which pure anhydrous
sulphurous acid is undergoing vaporization, whereby at the low temperature
(at least —10° C.) the hydrate of the .sulphurous acid crystallizes out.

308,289— November 18. 188U. T. TERRELL. Making ferric oxide and sulphurous

acid from ferric sulphate.

The ferric sulphate is decomposed by heat; free sulphur (about 10 per cent)
being mixed therewith to assist the decomposition.

311,595 — Februarys, 1885. I. S. McDOUGALL. Production of sulphurous acid.

In the production of sulphurous acid air is forced under pressure into a closed
vessel containing ignited sulphur or sulphur-bearing material, the vessel being
water jacketed or cooled to maintain a temperature below that of volatilization
of sulphur; the sulphurous gases are conducted from said retort into and below
the surface of an absorbing liquid.

363,1,57— May 21,, 1887. H. B. FORD. Apparatus for and process of the manufac-
ture of sulphurous oxide.
In the manufacture of sulphurous oxide in liquid form all moisture is removed

from the air before it is supplied to the sulphur furnace.

378,673— February 28, 1383. C. E. GETCHELL. Apparatus for making sulphurous

acid.

A combining chamber has thin sinuous or zigzag passages for the acid fumes,
with water inlet at the upper part, thus affording an intimate contact with one
another.

197.57/, — November 27, 1ST7. C. R. STUNTZ. ImprovemeiU in compositions for pro-
ducing suiphureted hydrogen.

A powder consisting of an intimate mixture of coal tar and sulphur, the lat-
ter being equivalent to or in excess of the hydrogen of the coal tar. If the gas
is prepared in fragile vessels, the powder is diluted with sand to make the coke
friable.

22U,li26— February 10, 1830. W. E. A. HARTMANN. Manufacture of hydrogen

sulphide.

Hydrogen sulphide is produced by bringing together at a red heat, in a con-
verter, sulphurous acid (or the vapor of sulphur or of sulphuric acid), carbon
(coke) , and steam.

ACETIC ACID.

93,817— August 17, 1369. L. D. GALE AND I. M. GATTMAN. Improvanent in the

manufacture of sugar of lead and acetic acid.

Lead is corroded by vapors of vinegar mixed with atmospheric air, the vine-
gar concentrated by means of chloride of sodium and the sugar-of-lead solution
bleached with suiphureted hydrogen. Acetic acid, free from pyroligneous
odor and color, is obtained by the distillation of acetate of lime with sulphuric
acid.

121,536 — December 5, 1871. J. F. CAVARLY. Improvement in purifying acetic
acid.
. Acetic acid is deodorized and purified by mixing therewith a small quantity
of any of the alcohols included in the formula C.„H2 (sn+l) Og.

118,788— September 12, 1871. C. J. T. BURCEY. Improvement in Vw manufacture

of acetic CLCid.

Acetate of lime and concentrated sulphuric acid are introduced into a boiler
while under direct agitation, and the vapors condensed.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TU CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

i<;7

aOa.tia—Novfmbrr l», ISTS. A. I'IRZ. Improivmeiil in the mannfaclun iff aetlie

aeU.

A solution ot nerraunirnnati' o( iKitanli Ik nrtiU'd to Impure acetic aclil and the
product illntillod to remove Impurities (1 |iound of permanganate to 100 inniiidii
ot acid).

tmSUa—Sitremlirr 19. IS7H. A. I'IRZ. [mprorrmivil In thf mam{ftuittre qf acrtic

actfi.

Acetic acid in extmcted Inim acetate of lime by leaching with sulphuric acid
In itraduiilly weakciu'd MilutlonH, usInR the weak acetic acid as a diluent for
the sulpluirlc acid,

iOl.lKt—Aiiril :s. tsuy. I. A. F. BANG AND M. C. A. RUFFIN. I'rnoK> i^ puri-
fying nfriic aritt.

Crude acetic add In the Uqtild state is piirifled from pyrollRneous matter by
brliijtliiK into Intlmiite contact with a carlxHi c iimiH)und. such as a hydnwarlKiii
ol the benzene series, wherebv the Impurities are dissolved, and the acid then
aeparated from the purifylnif agent. Air Is tirat blown through the crude acid
to oxidize the tarry matters.

llLnT—XomnlKT r,. I.ssy. I. A. F. BANG AMD M. C. A. RUFFIN. ProCfm n/

piiri/yiutf tifftic arid.

In the purilicatlon of cnide acetic acid a small quantity of an oxidizing agent,
suclii as blniixide of manganese, is introiltiecd as well as a heavy hydrocarlxm,
the former to oxidize the impurities insoluble in hvdnK'arbons and not alTccted
by the air. The add is heated to ebullition and the vapors caiLsed t<> pass
through the hydrix'arbon purifying agent to the air, and the condensed particles
to fallback through the purifying agent.

Ull.tiS—Jull/ 1, 1S90. F. C. ALKIER. Obtaining acetic acid and methyl aleohol.

Wood-pulp lyes are concentrated by repeated use: the concentrated solution
neutralized bv an alkali: the methyl alcohol recovered by distillation; the
residuary liquor evaporated to dryness; and the acetate distilled with an acid
to obtain the acetic acid.

ISt.ate—JuIji Si. isao. I. a. F. bang and M. C. a. RUFFIN. I'nmm oj mo*-

tfij? fief tic acid.

In the manufacture of acetic acid a hot solution of acetate of lime is acted
upon by hot sulphuric acid and the auueous acetic acid drawn o(T from the
crystaHlue priwitict. A concentrated solution of acetic acid is formed by dis-
solving the acetate of lime in a weak solution of acetic acid and decomposing
the resulting solution while hot by means of hot sulphuric acid.

M5,4«i— .Vmf'i'xT '. ii^Z- F. I'. DF.WEY. Process of obtaining alumina and

acetic acid.

A solution of acetate of alumina, which may be formed from sulphate of alu-
mina ami acetate of lime, is subjected to destructive distillation; the acetic-
acid vapor is collected in a condenser, and the precipitated alumina recovered.

S95,7S7— December SI, 1.197. A. SCHMIDT. Puriflcationnf crude acetic acid.

Acetic acid is filtered in a tinely divided state thrnujth coal or coke, pure
oxygen gas being forced up through the coal In an opposite direction.

eSi.tri— Octobers, 1S99. H. PLATER-iSYBERG. Process of extracting acetic acid
front atkatine acetates.
Sec Group X, Electro-chemistry.

LACTIC ACID.

HS,St7—Jul!i ,•:, 18S1. C.E.AVERY. Mamifactme of lactates.

Lactic acid and lactates are produced by the fermentation of a sugar of vege-
table origin with a lactic ferment in the presence of nitrogenous matters, chiefly
of vegetable origin, and of a substance suitable to gradually neutralize the acid
as formed.

tao.SHS— December 18, 1883. G. A. MARSH, ifanufacture of lactates and lactic acid.
In the manufacture of lactic acid and the lactates by the fermentation of dex-
trine or like gums with an active lactic ferment and an acid neutralizing sub-
stance, agitation is prevented during fermentation to avoid butyric and other
destructive fermentations.

t90,t.'ii—l>ecetnher IS. lasi. O. A. MAR.SH. ilanufactureof lactates for the prorhic-

tion of tactic acid.

Lactic acid an .he lactates are produced by the fermentation of any amyla-
ceous substance, as com meal, in its original form, in water, with an active
lactic ferment charged with an acid neutralizing substance, as carbonate of
lime.

«W JU— December 18, 188$. C. O. THOMPSON, ifanufacture of lactic acid and

lactates.

Neutral calcium-lactate crystals are obtained by digesting amylaceous matter,
converting a portion into glucose, and adding to' the glucose lliiuor, still mixed
with the nitrogenous matters and residues, pure white gluccwe, fermenting
with lactic fcmicnl and neutralizing the acid as it fonns with carbonate of lime.
Acid crystals are obtained from the nontm! cryst-ais by digesting same in hot
water, filtering, treating with sulphuric acid, again liltering, concentrating, and
crystallizing.

Stl,9SS—July 7, 18SS. C. N. WAITE. Process ofdistHling lactic acid.

It Is dlstllle<l and purified by the aid of free steam; the steam takes up the
pure lactic acid and is then condensed.

SM.8IS—.\orember 17. 1S8S. C.E.AVERY. Manufacture nf ladates.

A lactic ferment is purified and preserved by adding it to a medium specially
favorable to its growth and less favorable to the growth of other fennents. A
pure reagent is prepared by successive impregnations of a series of culture baths
with lactic ferment, the impregnation of each solution from the nreceding one
being elTected at the point of full height of fermentation, as eviuenced by the
evolution of carbonic acid gas at its tirst maximum. A culture bath is formed
by adding 1.000 part-s of starch sugar, dextrine, glucose, or milk sugar to 6,000
parts of water, then -TOO part.s of cartxmate ot lime, and tinallv 100 parts of vege-
table nitrogenous matter, the mixture being kept at a heat of 35° to 45° C.

S65.655—June S.% 1887. C. N. WAITE. Manufacture of lactic acid.

In the lactic fermentation of a fermentable sugar with lactic ferment and a
neutralizer, glue is added to supply soluble nitrogenous matter.

ses.OSt— August 9, 1887. C. N. WAITE. Process of lactic fermentation.

A pure lactate of lime is produced by the fermentation of sugar, glucose, or
pure starch with a minute quantity of nitrogen in the form of ammonia, and a
minute quantity of phosphoric acid, and lactic ferment in a closed vessel in the
absence of air.

ii.;.ii7H—June So.tmi. <'. X. WAITE. Process nf manufncturlng Inelle neUI .

i)rude salts, such as zinc lactate, arc dlsnolved in boiling water, an exceM of
milk of lime is added to the s<ilutloti, the precipitate rvinnviM by flllnition, and
sulphuric add added to the nitrate, which is then again flltert.<l to rt^raore the
sulphate of lime.

mi„707—./Hne l.y I8B7. V. RtJOHEN. Prorr; ,^ makinfi lactic acid.

Carbohydrates are heated with milk of lime In a cinaed vemel at not lem than
lao" C, by which the carbohydrates are hydrolyznl lu lactic aeld.

TARTARIC ACID.

199,0S»— January S, 1878. F. DIETRICH. Improremenl in the mnnufaeiure ef tar-
taric acid.

Argols and residues r>f wine making are expowd In a dry slate Ui a tempera-
ture ot 140° to 170° C, to taollltate the purifying of the taruric aeld salts.

tSt.l97—Noremher U, 1S19. H. GOLDENBERO. Improremeni in the manufacture

qf tartaric acid.

In the mantifacture of tartaric acid, potaasinm hydrate Is recovered by mix-
ing neutralized tartrattr of pot^iHsiuni. :f2(> parts, and water H times as much,
with quick time, 112 parts, slacke^i in 1(1 times the quautitv ot water, and pour-
ing into the mixture while stirring a solution of tartrate of polaMiam.

iBS,7ga—July 14, 1891. R. W. 8CHEDLER. Manufacture of tartaric add.

Sulphuric acid, from 5 to 15 per cent, Is added to solutions of tartaric acid
eoneentmted to the point of crystallization to Increase the quantity of crjrital-
llzed tartaric acid. The mother liquor Is u.sed to treat tartrate of lime.

CITRIC ACID.
SlS.OSa—Febmary to, I89i. C. WEHM ER. Process qf making citric aeld.

A sugar solution of from 10 to 20 per cent, acidulate<l with from 2 to 6
per cent of citriir acid, is exposed to the air until a fungtms growth foniu
thereon, when the spores of fungi are cultivated in a sterilized sugar aolatlon,
and the jmrc culture thus obtained is introduced into other sugar solutions
and allowed to stand eight to fourteen days until citric add is Uinn*-*\. The
acid is (Hinvcrted into a lime salt with carbonate of lime from which citric acid
is prepared.

SALICYLIC ACID.

150,887— May IS, lg!i. H. KOLBE. Improvement in the procemet of preparing

salicylic and other acids.

.Salicylic acid, as well as the isomeric and homologons acids, is produced by
the action of carbonic acid on carbolic acid, or cressolic acids, or on a mixture
of them. In presence of alkalies or alkaline earths.

166,868— Augui.1 17, 1875. W. E. GRAF. Improrement in processes of producing

saliculic acid.

Salicylic acid is produced by conducting carbonic acid from a generator
into a closed, heated still, containing carbolic acid and alkali. (Apparatus No.

166,862.)

196. S.fi— October 16, 1877. E. SCHERING. Improvement in purifying talicylie

acid by dialysis.

Saiieyllc acid is purified by filtering it through animal membrane.
)Si,S90—.ranuary IS, 1886. R. SCHMITT. Manufacture of salicylic acid.

Salicylic acid and its homologues are produced by subjecting the phenolates
of the alkalies and earthy alkalies to the action of dry carbonic add under
pres,siire at low temperatures, to produce phenyl carlwnic alkaline and earthy
alkaline salts, and tnen converting the.se .salts into salicylates and their homo-
logues by heating in hermetically closed vessels at from 120° to 140° C.

S65.875— January 11, 188:7. T. KEMPF. ManufactureofsalicyticacidandsubsUtutet

thereof.

Salicylic acid, or the substitutes and homologues thereof, is produced in one
operation by subjecting the phenolates of the alkalis and earthy alkalis, and
the substituted phenolates of said alkalis and earthy alkalis, to the action of
carbonic acid under pressure at from 120° to 145° C.

iie.SlS— December 5, 1889. H. BAUM. Dithiosalicylic acid.

A new product, having the general formula Ci^HioSjOg, and which melts a.s
a resin. It Is formed by heating protochloride of sulphur (or the bromide or
Iodide) with salicylic acid.

M9,l8!—>!member IS, 1891,. S. MARAS8E. Proeessof making salicylic acid.

A dry mixture of phenol and potas-sium carbonate in excess Is treated at a
gradually increasing temperature with carbonic-acid gas under pressure until
the reaction is completed and potassium salicylate is obtained. Salicylic acid
is then produced from the potassium salicylate in the well-known way.

611.011,— September SO. 1898. L. LIMPACH. ProccM of making saticylo-aceticaeid.
Monochloracetates are caused to act on salts of salicylamid, and the prodnct
is stiponified.

61,!,.077— February S7. 1900. F.HOFFMANN. Acetyl salicylic acid.

A new product, soluble in benzene, alcohol, and glacial acetic acid, M. P. 136°
C, is obtained by heating salicylic acid with acetic anhydride.

TANNIC ACID.

S3i,U89— August SU, 1880. J. HOLTZ. (Maining tannic acid.

Tannin or tannic acid is produ<'ed in adcularform by passiiig the ioq>laBated
tannin extract through a fine sieve and breaking up the dried threads.

S6S.7!n— .September 5, 188S. A. MITSCHERLICH. Manufacture qf tannic aeid.

W(K)d is first subj«*te<l to the action of steam under pressure, and then to the
action of an aqut^ous s^tliition of liisulpbite of Iim«' at a temiR.rature alxjve the
iKiiliug point; and the t*innlc acid solution and a solution of bisulphite of iimo
are siinultancously produced by exposing small pieces of carbonate of time to
the joint action of a spray ot water from above and the fumes of the aforesaid
Ablution from Ik-'Iow.

OTHER ORGANIC ACIDS.

t7e,888-Xay 1, 188S. C. RCDOLPH. .Vaniifadnrcofeinnamicacid.

Benzylldeacetone is heated with bromine di!i«olve<l in soda lye and dilnted
sulphuric acid added when the bromoform generated has separated from the'
aqueous solution. The cinnamlc acid is ourified by recryslallixation with alco-
hol or water.

168

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

Ui.set— September 11, 1883. M. H. LACKERSTEEN. Process oj treating fats and
oils.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

363,566— Xox'ember 30, 1SS6. M. H. LACKERSTEEN. Process of manufacturing

soap and glycerine.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
W! ,906— July SO, 1889. B. R. SEIFERT. Process of making paraoxybenzoic acid.

In the manufacture of this acid the heating of potassium jihenate and dry
carbonic acid is done in a closed vessel under a superatmospheric pressure to
180° C. or more.

i70,9SO— March 16, 189S. B. R. SEIFERT. Process of making oxymethoxybemoic

acids.

Guaiacol acid and etigetinie acid are produced by evaporating an aqueous
solution of guaiacol or eugenol and an alkali or earthy alkali, aiid saturating
the dry salt with carbon dioxide under pressure and heating to over 100° C.

138,190— December SO, 189i. B. R. SEIFERT. Process of making oxyuritic acid.

Alkaline or earthy alkaline salts of eresol are subjected to the action of car-
bonic acid at a temperature of from l&P to 220° C. The product is dissolved in
water and alpha oxyuvitic acid is precipitated by mean.s of hydrochloric acid.
It has a M. P. of 290° C. It may be purified from any cresotinic acid by partial
precipitation of the solution of a salt of the acid.

Sll.iSO— December se, 189S. A. A. NOYES AND A. A. CLEMENT. Process for
the manufacture of paraamidophenol sulphonieacid.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

61^7,611 — October 8, 1895. L. LEDERER. Process of making aromatic oxycarbon

acids.

The homologous phenoxacetic acids are melted with caustic alkalis; as
ortho-oresoxacetic acid one part and caustic soda two part*, and heated to 270°
C. with the addition of a little water. The aqueous solution of the melt is
decomposed by dilute sulphuric acid.

656,711— March S, 1896. B. R. SEIFERT. Citricphenetidin acid and process of

obtaining it.

New products, having the form of white crystalline powders, of acid reaction,
soluble in water, in alcohol, and in soda solutions, are produced by heating
para-amido-phenetol with citric acid or its derivatives; treating the product
with hot water or with solutions of soda or caustic soda, and of a mineral acid
successively, and crystallizing.

657,ltlO — March 31, 1896. W. MAJERT. Pyrocotechin mmio-acetic acid and process

of making same.

A new compound, M. P. 131° C, is produced by subjecting one molecule of
pyrocatechin to the action of one molecule of chloracetic acid in the presence
of an alkali or alkali carbonate.

663,076— June SO, 1896. B. R. SEIFERT. Paraphenetidin succinic acid and process

qf making same.

New products, derived from the dicarbon acids of the fattv series and para-
phenetidin, soluble in water, M. P. 163° to 195° C, are produced by heating
paraphenetidin with one of the dicarbon acids of the fatty series, boiling the
product with soda solution and adding a mineral acid, and purifying by crys-
tallization.

698,790— February 8, 1898. A. KREPTING. Process of treating seaweed [tang
acid).

The lime is extracted by means of dilute sulphuric acid before the seaweed
Is otherwise chemically treated, the liquid filtered, and the nonnitrogenous
and pure tang acid precipitated.

6!,lf,S31— Februarys?, 1900. E. SAPPER. Process of making phthalic acid.

A substance whose formula contains that of the naphthalene nucleus la heated
with sulphuric acid in the presence of mercuric sulphate.

335,963— February 9, 1886. E. SCH A AL. Converting petroleum and similar hydro-
carbons into acitis.

Petroleum and other hydrocarbons of the series C„Ha,-f2 are converted into
organic acids by subjecting them in the presence of alkaline substances — caus-
tic alkalis, alkaline earths or their carbonates — to the action of an oxidizing
agent, separating out the alkaline salts produced and decomposing them with
a mineral acid, and finally separating the organic acids into liquid acids and
solid acids by distillation.

GROUP II.— SODAS.

CAUSTIC SODA.

16,111— November S6, 1866. C. BICKELL. Process of treating feldspar for manure.
Pota.sh or soda is obtained either in the caustic or carbonated state.
See Group VIII, Fertilizers, Processes.

U,SSa— February 8, 1869. H. PEMBERTON. Improvement in the process of manu-
facturing caustic soda and otiwr caustic alkalis.

The solution of caustic soda or other caustic alkalies is separated from the
carbonate of lime or other precipitate by filtration through fire brick or other
porous substance capable of resisting the caustic action of the alkaline liquors.

16l,8U6—July 7. 1871,. C. AND J. JURON AND A. AND L. IMBERT. Improve-
ment in the production of caustic alkalis from carbonates.
Superheated steam is passed through the mass of alkaline carbonates to be

converted.

169,800— November 9,1876. H. GASKELL, JK. Improvement in processes of manu-
facturing caustic soda.
A heated revolving furnace is first charged with salt cake, or with cake and

coal slack, and when the salt cake has become fluxed or softened the chalk or

lime is added and the balance of the slack.

301,018— March 6, 1878. C. LOWIG. Improvement in manufacture of caustic alka-
lis and preparations of alumina.

Carbonate of soda or potassa is heated to a red heat with so much alumina, or
alumina ore, or oxide of iron, as to present one equivalent of alkali to one
equivalent of alumina. By subsequent lixiviation aluminate of soda is obtained
free of cartx)nate of alkali. The product is decomposed bv the addition of a
paste of hydrate of lime, of hydrate of strontia, or of hydrate' of magnesia, form-

ing the aluminates of said earths as precipitates, the caustic alkali remaining
in solution. Gelatinous hydrate of alumina is produced by the formation of
chloride of alimiinium from the aluminates of the earths prepared according to
this process, and the decomposition of the same by means of the earths, or their
carbonic-acid salts, or the aluminates.

103,761 — May ii, 1878. E. W. PARNELL. Improvement in the manufacture of

caustic alkalis.

Carbonates of soda and potassa of a greater specific gravity than 1,200° are
heated with caustic lime in a closed vessel under pressure.

11,1,383— May 10, 1881. G. T. LEWIS. Perfumed caustic soda.
An essential oil is added to granulated or pulverized caustic soda while in ec
' dry state.

16i,91S— March U, 1881. E. CAREY, H. GASKELL, Jr., AND F. HURTER. Puri-
fication of alkaline solutions.
Alumina in solution is added to alkaline solutions containing an excess of

silica to precipitate the same.

158,850— May 30, 1881. E. CAREY, H. GASKELL, Jr., AND F. HURTER. Purifi-
cation of alkaline solutions obtained in the manufacture of soda.
The sulphur compounds are oxidized with the aid of manganese oxide or

sodium nitrate, and the liquor is then heated to at least 176° C. to cause the

double decomposition of the oxidized sulphur compounds and the cyanogen

compounds. Ammonia is recovered.

ni,117— February IS, 1883. C. B. DUDLEY. Method of making soda-lime.

Sal soda is mixed with caustic lime — without extraneous heat — in such pro-
portions that the water of crystallization will be taken up by the caustic lime.

17i,619— March 17, 1883. C. LOWIG. Process of manufacturing caustic alkalis.

A mixture of carbonate of soda — or of potash — and oxide of iron is fumaced,
and subsequently lixiviated.

361,677— May 10, 1887. E. SOLVAY. Manufacture of causHc soda.

Sodium bicarbonate obtained by the ammonia-soda process is mixed directly
with oxide of iron, heated in a closed apparatus and then transferred to another
furnace and heated to the temperature necessary to drive out the remaining
carbonic acid so as to obtain caustic soda.

1,01,116— April SO, 1889. J. A. BRADBURN. Process of manufacturing caustic soda.
Sodium chloride, or potassium chloride, is treated with nitric acid and perox-
ide of manganese in a still. The spent liquor is treated with caiLstic soda or
potash, the precipitated manganese oxidized and removed, and the nitrate solu-
tion evaporated, mixed with ferric oxide, fumaced, and the mass then lixivi-
ated.

IM,3SU: lM,39e; tM,59l,— December 9, 1890. 1. L. ROBERTS. Electrolytic appa-
ratus.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

1,50,103— April 7, 1891. E. A. LE SUEUR. Electrolytic apparatus.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

t,6t,,136— June 16, 1891. A. KAYSER. Manufacture of caustic alkali, etc.

A mixture of an alkaline chloride with a clay containing silica— in the pro-
portions of U pounds of silica to 1 pound of alumina— is heated to a white heat
in a converter by the direct action of highly heated gas containing steam; then
melted with an alkali, leached, and the residue ground to release the alkali.
The gaseous products from one converter, combined with additional highly
heated gases, are applied to a second mixture of the chloride with clay.

!„^S,56S— September 1, 1891. F. ELLERSHAUSEN. Process of making caustic
alkali.

In the manufacture of caustic soda and potash from solutions of their respec-
tive sulphides, the solutions are filtered through granulated ferrate of sodium or
potassium.

1^9,688— September 16, 1891. 6. H. GRAY. Process of making soda with strontium

Halts.

Sodium, or potassium, hydrate is produced by treatment of sodium sulphate
with strontium hydrate, followed by treatment of the strontium sulphate thus
produced with magnesium carbonate and sodium, or potassium, salts, thus
producing strontium carbonate to be afterwards converted into strontium
hydrate.

l,63,S66—Novcmbcr S, 1891. J.SIMPSON. Process of making caustic soda.

Calcic phosphate is treated with hydrochloric acid, sulphate of soda is added,
the liquor is drawn off and concentrated, and the concentrated mass is sub-
jected to a red heat, fused, and the fused mass dissolved. The phosphate of
soda and sodium chloride contained in the .solution are separated, the former
treated with caustic lime, and the resulting phosphate of lime and caustic soda
separated.

1S1,I,07— August IS, 1891. F. M. LYTE. Production of cattstie alkalis and chloriTte.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
tSI,,990— October 16, 1891. H. BLACKMAN. Electrolytic process and apparatus.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

1,91,700— February lU, 1893. E. B. CUTTEN. Method of elcctrolytically producing

soda and cldorine.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
1,98,769— June 6, 1893. T. CRANEY. Method of electrolynng salts.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

601,111— July 11, 1893. C. N. WAITE. Art of manufacturing clUorine or caustic
alkali by electrolysis.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

601,783— July 18, 1893. E. HERMITE AND A. DUBOSC. Method of and appa-
ratus for electrolyzing solutions.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

60i,70S— September 11, 1893. A. BREUER. Electrolytic diaphragm.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

508,80/,— November U, 1893. H. S. BLACKMORE. Process of and apparatus for
dissociating salts of alkalis by electrolysis.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

169

StO.979— December 19. JS9.1. O. LUNQE ANDC. II. M. LYTK. Procfut 11/ makinu
• bnitir Irmt gtUU aiid ctiu^ir tilkatl.

Cruili- pig lend is oxlclizwl iinil the oxirto dliwilvcd In nitric acid; the lead
nllnilv dwoiniio.ifil by wkIu ciirlKinnte unci rnimtli' Midn to form bniilo lead car-
bomito anil pure whIIi' nitmti', Nllrlo mid, for um' over iiKiiln. nnil fcrrltc of
KcMln In llicn funniil by dniiblr iliriimiKMlilon iif ihc .•uKlicnltruli' with ferric
oxide, and the (errlle of soda Is deionuHuivd Into ferrle oxide and eaiixtle »oda,
Silver, If any. Is precipitated from tlio lead nitrate with finely divided lead.

Sli.It.1—I->hr<mrj, fi, lani. K. M. LY'IK AND O. HTNOE. J'rofetii -if making

rttitMic alkali and lead chturidr.

An alkaline nitntte l.s flnit formed by the double deeompoaltlon of nitrate of
lead and an alkaline chkiride. and the alkaline chloride i« then deoomjHwe*!,
while In admixinre with ferric oxide In sutHclent projiortlon to maintain the
I>or<wlty of the mass, by the action of heatecl air and nteam at a temperature
suthelent to convert the whole of the Imso of the alkaline iiitratv Into a ferrlte
of the alkali with the evolution of nltroua fumeji, which are converted Into
nitric acid.

il».06^— April 10, ISBi. C. HOEPFNER. EtectrolyUc apparalui.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
iiajas— April 10, Ili9i. H. Y. CA.STNER. Electrolytic apparcOut.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

StS.710— April tU89L H. CARMICHAEL. Method 0/ and apparatia /or electro-
chemical decompotitioti.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
iti.eiU—Julu 10, lS9i. I. L. ROBERTS. Eleetroli/tic diaphragm.
See Group X, ElcctroKihemlstry.

itt,il6-^nUy to, 189i. I. L, ROBERTS. Method qf electrolytic decomposUion qf

laOt.

See Gmnp X, Electro-chemistry.
6tS,0t6-Jttly 17, 189i. C. N. WAITE. Diaphragm for ekdrolyUc cell$.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

ItS.Stt— October SO. lS9i. H, Y. CASTNER. I^ocese 0/ and apparatus/or electro-
lytic decwnjumtion of alkaline mlts.
See (Jroup X, Electro-chemistry.

Ul.tas-December l.S, 189i. C. T. J. VAUTIN, ProeeM of and apparatus for the
production ttf ,-awttic alkali.

See Group X. Electro-chemistry.

SSi.03S— February It, 189S. T. CRANEY. Apparatus for manvfaduring caustic

soda.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
ll.l,l!A—June ;s, lS9i. H. BL.\CKMAX. Electrolytic process and apparatus.

Sec Group X, Electro-chemistry.

5l,l.S97—June U. isg.'i. J. D. DARLING. Method of and apparalm for manufac-
turing sulphuric acid and by-products.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

6i8,StS—Seplember 17. 1895.^ C. HOEPFNER. Anode for electrolytic apparatus.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

See.OiS— March 10, 1896. M. H. WILSON. Electrolytic apparatus.
Sec Group X, Eleetro-chcmi-stry.

ees,tSl—Seplemher it, lS9e. H. BLACKMAN. Electrolytic anode and apparatus.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

S7t.i7!— December 1, isae. H. Y. CASTNER. Anode for electrolytic processes.
Sec Group X, Elcctro-chemlietry.

678,1.67— March 9. 1897. C. KELLNER. Process of and apparatus for simuUane-
ously producing ammonia, sodium hydroxide, and chlorine.
Sec Group X, Electro-chemistrj-.

SSS.3.iO—.Vay i6, 1897. E. A. LE SUEUR. Process qf electrolysis.

See Group X, Electro-chemlstr)-.
686,387— June i9, 1897. C. KELLNER. EUdrotytic diaphragm.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

586,06— July IS, 18S7. L. P. HCUN. JVoCM* 0/ electrolytie decomposition qf solu-
tions.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

5S6.7t9—July to, l«/7. C. KELLNER. Mdhotl of and apparatus for effecting
cledrolysis.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

BS7,8SO— August 10, 1897. L. P. HULIN. Process qf and apparatus for manufac-
turing metallic peroxide and cattstic alkalis.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

CSS,t76— August 17, 18S7. C. KELLNER. Electrolytic process and apparatus there-
for.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

S90,6iS—Septembertl,ls»7. C. KELLNER. Processqf producing hydrates or other
salts qf alkaline metals.
See Grotip X, Electro-chemistry.

690JitS—Sn>lember t8, 1897. J. D. DAKLIMO. Porous diaphragm for electro-
lytic apparatus.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
691.730— October It, 18S7. W. BEIN. Procets qfand apparatus for ekdrolyzing.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
59t.SOt—Xorember t, 1S97. N. MARCHAL.' Eledrie diaphragm.

See Group X, Electro-chemi.stry.

606,931— July 6. 1898. W. S. ROMME. Process of and apparatus/or decomposing
stUid fubftunces.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

609,7 iS— August IS, 1898. W. (i. LUXTOS. Diaphragm for electrolytic purpose*.
Sec Group X, Electro-chemistry.

611,009— October It, IS98. G. B. BALD<>. Process qf and apportitut fur flertn^yf
ing tea water.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

6tS,69S—Apmu, 1889. C. E. ACKER. Procrss of and appariiim for making caustic

alkedts.

A fnMcd alloy, containing an alkali metal, lssuhmttlp<1 to thed!r< ,..i - ,,f

steam from lielow the surface, by meaUM of a convi-rt*T havlntf an :i

with steam Inlet, whereby the steam Is decomiswifl and hydr' d

an alkaline hydrate are forme<l, the hydrate tjelnK immediately iiriM</>c-t as
formed.

6tS,9l8— April ti. 1899. W. LANG, C. PI8T0R, A>'D .M. f)TTO. Process of puri-
fying caustic alkalis.
The dllTiulvenew of a solution of the lyes, mixed with other nolutiona of a

similar dlffuslvenem, Is Increnjied by Increusinic the deKree of concentration, and

the Ivcs are then separated from the mixture by dllTuslon Into water through a

diapnra^m.

631.168— A ugust tt, IS99. C. K ELLN ER. Methoel qf and apparatus for producing
alkali salts.
Sec Group X, ElectrcM^hemistry.

636,tSi — yovember 7, 1899. E. BAKER. Process of and apparatus /or electro-
lytic decomposition of mline solutions.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

eS7.U0—XofeTnbtT 11, 1899. G. H. POND. Process of and apparatus for disso-
ciating subi'tancee by cledrolysis.
See Gn>np X, Electro-chemistry.

eU.S'O— January 16, 1900. J. D. DARLING. Porous diaphragm for ceOs employ-
ing fused electrolytes.
See Group X, Electro-chemlstrj'.

01,9.666— May 16, 1900. C. E. ACKER. Process of manufadurlng alkali and
ludogen gas.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

66S.611— June 16, 1900. J. HARGREAVES. Combined diaphragm and electrode.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
66t,7Sl—Jidy S, 1900. J. B. ENTZ. EUdrolytic producUoH qf cauttie soda, etc.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

SODIUM CARBONATES.

l,191-Junetl,.1839. H. G. DY'ER AND J. HEMMING. Improvement in the manu-

fadure of carbonate of soda .

Carbonate or bicarbonate of ammonia is used In convertine common salt Into a
carbonate of soda, with recovery of the ammonia for use in sumequent operations.

9,S!S—Orto>)er 19, 1S6S. H. PEMBERTON. Imprmement in making soda-ash and

carbonates of soda.

A mixture of sulphate of soda and carbonaceous matter is melted, without
the addition of lime or other matter. An aqueous solution of the product is
treated with carbonic acid and evai>orated to dryness and again treated in the
dry state by carbonic acid to form bicarbonate of soda.

59.tl5 — July 11,, 1863. L. CHANDOR. Tmprt/vement in the mant^facture of alkaline

carbonates.

Pota.ssium and sodium sulphurets in solution are transformed into carbonates
by the action of cream of lime and a current of carbonic acid. By the reaction
01 solutions of sulphuret of barium and sulphate of soda, siilphiiret of sodium
Is obtained and sulphate of t>ary ta. To free the sulphohydric acid from carlxjuie
add it is passed through a solution of sulphuret of barium, producing carbonate
of baryta.

l,H,697— August 13, 1866. T. MACFARLANE. Improved process qf preparing
cbiorine, bleaching powder, carttonatc of soda, and other products.
Chlorine is produced by heating a mixture of calcined green vitriol, common
salt, and peroxide of iron in a current of air, and the residue used for the man-
ufacture of cartxjnate of soda and soda ash. A mixture of burnt lime and slag
is used for the furnace hearths. In the manufacture of carbonate of soda and
soda ash the deep green alkaline solution is decolorized by the application of
heat and the pas.sage of the fiame and carljonic acid produced by combustion
over the solution, the ga.ses being absorbed. The artificial sulphuret of Iron is
converted into the sulphate by tne action of the air and moisture, the sulphate
being washed out with hot water and the solution concentrated.

65,600 — June 19, 1866. H.M.BAKER. Improvement in tlie manufadure qf carbon-
ate of soda, dc.

Bicarbonate of magnesia, produced by charging carbonate of magnesia with
carbonic acid under neat and pressure. Is mixed with one equivalent propor-
tion of sodium chloride, giving bicartionate of soda and magnesium chlonde.
The latter is de<'omposed by heat, yielding muriatic acid, which is distilled out,
and magnesia, which latter is bicartx)nated and again used.

6l,.S86—.t.pril SO, 1867. A. P. VON pOhRNHOFF. Improved process in the manu-
fadure of bicarbonate of soda.
Hydrate of soda is treated with carbonic gas and steam.

90,IMh-May 18, 1869. I. WALZ AND J. M. PENDLETON. Improvement in the

manufadure of carbonate ofsoita and other chemicals.

A mixture of carbonate of lime and sodium nitrate in chemical proportions
Is heated in a retort with admission of steam to regenerate nitric acid. The
product is available for caustic soda solutions.

116.66i—July i, 1871. W. H. BALMAIN. Improvement in the tllan^faeture qf

bicarbonate of Sfteta.

Bicarlxmatc of sisla. being insoluble in a saturated solution of salt or of sul-
phate of soda. Is washed and purified by allowing water to Biter through It.

ISO. 171, — August 6, 187i. .I.YOUNG. Improvement in proeetsa and apparatus for

the manufadure //carbonate of soda.

Bicarbonate <tf so<la mixed with comjKtunds of ammonia is boiled to reduce
t<t carbonate of ammonia by tlriving off a |K>rtion of the carbonic acid and the
residual compounds of ammonia, which are recovcre<i.

170

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

lie.l^S— March J,, lg!S. E. SOLVAY. Improrenient in processes and apparatus for

the vianitfqetiire of carbonate of soda.

Carbonic iicid gas is forced into tlie bottom of a high column of a solution of
salt and ammonia, the liquor being fed into the column midway of its height.
The ammonia is regenerated with magnesia or basic magnesium chloride, the
residue being boiled down with steam and the chlorine condensed.

liS.7S5— October tl, WS. H. DE GROUSILLIERS. Improvement in the mami-

factnre of alkaline carbonates.

Thev are produced from their haloid salts by treating same with carbonate of
ammonia dissolved in strong alcohol or wood spirit.

191,11^— September 11, 1877. J. MACTEAR. Improvanent in manufacture of gran-

xUated crystalline carbonate of soda.

The "vat," or "red," or similar liquor is first cartjonated and then concen-
trated, and cooled under agitation. The residuary liquor is boiled down to
dryness and the salts decomposed in a furnace, as practiced with fresh soda-
sulphate.
198.S9S— December IS, 1877. F. GUTZKOW. Improremenl in the mamifacture of

soda from its sulphate.

Sulphate of lime is dissolved in water with the aid of sulphurous acid and
sulphate of soda added, and the precipitated sulphate of lime removed. The
solution of bisulphite of soda is then heated and converted into a neutral sul-
phite solution and treated with quicklime to form caustic soda and sulphite of
lime. The caustic soda is exposed to the action of carbonic acid to convert it
into a carbonate.

S0S,S56— April 16, 1S78. G. T. LEWIS AND W. J. MEXZIES. Improvement in

manvfacture of bicarbonate of soda.

Bicarbonate of soda is produced by passing carbonic-acid gas tiirough a mix-
ture of sal soda and carbonate of soda by the ammonia process.
eiS,15i— December S, 1879. C. V. PETRAEUS. Improvcmmt in processes for maitr

vfacturing alumina and carbonate of soda.

Hydrated alumina and carbonate of soda arc manufactured from cryolite and
bauxite, by roasting together crushed cryolite and caustic lime, adding crushed
bauxite, and boiling the mixture in water and treating the solution with car-
bonic-acid gas.

tiS.US— December 2, 18:79. C. V. PETRAEUS. Improvement in processes for man-
ufacturing alumina and carbonate of soda.

A roasted mixture of cryolite and caustic lime is treated with water, the solu-
tion sepamted from the sediment, the liquor boiled with bauxite, and the
liquor last formed separated from the sediment and treated with carbonic-acid
gas, producing hydrated alumina precipitate and carbonate of soda in solution.

ISS.lSi — December 2, 1S79. C. V. PETRAEUS. Improvememt in processes for man-
ufacturing alumina and carbwtate of soda.

A mixture of bauxite and cryolite is boiled with milk of lime, the solution
separated, and the clear liquor treated with carbonic-acid gas to form a precipi-
tate of alumina and solution of carbonate of soda.

tSi.SiO— February 3, 1830. A. STEARNS. Manufacture of carbonates and bicar-

bonates.

The substance to be charged with gas is molded into perforated blocks and
then exposed to the gas.

tS7,0SS— April -37, 1S80. W. J. MENZIES. Manufacture of bicarbonate of soda.

Soda ash of commerce is dissolved in water; any free soda is neutralized with
carbonic acid or bicarbonate of soda; chloride of lime is added to oxidize any
sulphur compounds, and the solution is linally treated with carbonic acid.

iS7,561—May 11, 1880. W. J. MENZIES. Manufacture of bicarbonate of soda.

Bicarbonate of .soda is puritied of ammon ia and organic coloring matter by pa.ss-
ing a current of carl)omc acid over or through dry bicarbonate of soda while
under heat and pressure.

tW,090—June a, 1880. H. BURGESS. Concentrating alkaline solutions.

The liquid tricklas downward throtigh a tower in the presence of hot air or
products of combustion which are induced to take the same downward course.

tl,3,991—Julii S, 1881. E. SOLVAY. Manufacture of soda.

About .50 per cent of soda, already decomposed or calcined, ia mixed with
bicarbonate of soda previous to introduction of same into the decomposing
apparatus, to prevent incrustation.

t61,9iii— January S, 188i. E. SOLVAY. Manufacture of soda.

Waters obtained from the distillation of ammonia in the manufacture of
ammonia .soda are heated in a vessel which is heated to a higher temperature
in its upper tlian in its lower portion, the salt being precipitated in the cooler
portion and driven into a nonheated portion of the apparatus and separated
out. The concentrated solution of calcium chloride is decanted from the
remaining water and from the salt.

S5i,919— March Ik. 1881. E, CAREY, H. GASKELL, Jr., AND F, HURTER. Puri-
fication of alkaline solutionis.

The solutions are submitted to the action of sulphur or sulphur compounds
added to or produced in the alkaline .solution, and of carlH)nic acid, the solution
thus treated being then subjected to an elevated temperature to separate con-
tained iron.

US,821— September 6, lasS. E. SOLVAY'. Manufacture of soda.

Bicarbonate of soda is calcined under violent agitation so as to maintain it
as a cloud of dust and secure contact of every particle with the heated walls.

tes,981— September 5, 1881. E, SOLVAY, Mamifacture of soda by the ammonia

process.

A continuous supply of both brine and ammonia is fed to the saturating ves-
sel, from which the overflow is conducted to a vessel in which precipitation of
the sludge takes place before carbonating and during the contliiuous flow of
the ammoniacal brine.

tei.OAi—September .5, i«»2. J. McCRODDEN. Soda block.

A block of soda has its surface grooved or furrowed to give a large surface for
the action of heat and impregnating gases.

ee5,367— October 3, 18SS. B. T. B.^BBITT. Manufacture of bicarbonate of soda.

.Soda ash is blown against an abutment by a blast of carbonic-acid gas induced
by a jet of superheated steam.

165,368— October 3, 1S82. B. T. BABBITT. Manufacture qf bicarbomUe of soda.
Soda ash is treated with carbonic-acid gas under a super-atmospheric pressure.

ST0.668— January 16. 1883. E. N. HORSFORD AND C. A. CATLIN. Prepanng

alkaline bicarbonates.

Alkaline bicarbonates are moistened with solutions of salts of magnesium or
with solutions of other .salts which by double decomposition with the bicarbon-
ates will fonn a superficial inert or less active carbonate— as by moistening with
a solution of sulphate of maguesium— and theu dried.

271,366— .lanuary SO. 18S3. E. H. RUSSELL. Process of purifying soda ash.

Sodium carbonate is puritled of sodium sulphide by dissolving in water con-
taining hyposulphite of soda or potash and adding sulphate of copper.

Z76,0S0— April 17, 1883. H. GASKELL, JB., AND F. HURTER. Manufacture of
bicarbonate of soda.
Anhydrous carbonate of soda is subjected to the action of aqueous vapor and

carbonic-acid gas, the aqueous vapor being so proportioned as to produce a dry

bicarbonate.

276.990— May 1, 1SS5. E. CAREY, H. GASKELL, JR„ AND F. HURTER. Manu-
facture of bicarbonate of so<ia.
Salts, obtained bv the evaporation of solutions of carbonate of soda, are

mechanically agitated and treated with carbonic-acid gas, the excess being

removed, and moisture removed or added as required.

285,608— August SI, 188S. E. W. PARNELL. Manufacture qf alkalis.

Crude alkaline solutions obtained by the i^e Blanc process are purified of sul-
phurets by adding zinc or zinc oxide dissolved in a caustic alkali solution.

287,561— October SO, 188S. . C, KNAB. Process of snaking sodium carbonate.

A mixture of chloride of lead and caustic soda or potash is produced by the
decomposition of chloride of sodium or potassium by the oxide of lead in
water, and the caustic alkali is then dissolved out with alcohol, the alcoholic
solution treated with carbonic acid, and the lead recovered in the moist way by
precipitating with white cast-iron and subsequent oxidation.

298,356— May 6, lS8i. J. TOWNSEND. Process of obtaining soda.

A mixture of kainit and silica, or silica and alumina, is heated to from 540°
to 81,5° C. then air or steam is passed through or over it. whereby chlorine or
hydrochloric acid is evolved. The sulphates in the residue are then mixed with
carbonaceous material, heated and reduced to sulphides, and the latter treated
with carbonic acid to form carbonates of soda and potash.

S0S,512—Xovember 25, 1881,. L. MOND AND G. JARM.\Y. Manufacture of so-
dium bicarbonate.

The crude soda is dissolved under pressure in water heated to near the decom-
posing point of sodium bicarbonate at that pressure; the insoluble matters sepa-
rated; the solution cooled below 6.5° C; the pressure removed; the solution
cooled by passing through pans; and the pure sodium bicartwuate separated.
The mother liquor is used for dissolving fresh crude salt.

320,256 — June 16, 1885. A. KAYSER. Process of maldng sodium carbonate.

Sodium sulphate is heated to a low red heat below the smelting point of the
sulphate and a current of carbonic-acid gas and carbon monoxide — one equiva-
lent of each— is pa.ssed through the heated sulphate, forming cartK)nate of soda
and sulpiiurous acid. Tiie sulphurous-acid gas is employed for the conversion
of sodium chloride into sodium sulphate,

326,1,23— September 16, 1885. H, GASKELL, Jb. Process of purifying ammonia

soda.

Bicarbonate of soda contaminated with ammonia is heated in an atmospliere
of carbonic acid, to volatilize the ammonia without decomposing the bicarbon-
ate, the gases withdrawn, and the ammonia condensed.

31,3.673— June 15, 1886. E. W. PARNELL AND J. SIMPSON. Ammonia-soda

process.

The ammonium chloride obtained in the ammonia-alkali process is mixed with
the alkali waste of the Le Blanc process, and the sulphide of ammonium so
produced is employed for admixture with the .sodium-chloride solution in the
ammonia-alkali process, the hydrogen sulphide produced being collected and
utilized,

357,821,— Felmiary 15, 18S7. J. HAWLICZEK. Mamifacture of bicarbonate of soda.
A solution of a chloride or sulphate of sodium or other alkali metal is mixed
with ii crude carbonate or sulpiiide of sodium solution, and then treated with
carbonic-acid gas in two stages, the impurities deposited in the first stage being
separated, and bicarbonate of soda deposited in the second stage.

361,366 — April 19, 1887. H. FRASCH. Manufacture of sodaby the ammoniaprocess.
The ammoniacal solution is passed through a succession of ves.sels, and treated
with mixed live steam and exhaust steam. The ammoniacal vapors of the suc-
cessive distillations are taken oil separately. A large body of brine is main-
tained in the absorbing apparatus, and the ammonia is brought in contact with
a part only of the same. The salt strength of tlie ammoniated brine is restored
by passage through a vessel in which a body of salt is suspended near the upper
part.

381,622— April 19, 1887. H. FRASCH. Process of and apparatus for the manvfac-
ture of soda by ammonia.

Limekiln gases are washed with a solution of soda, potash, or ammonia, or a
carbonate thereof — such as the decomposed ammonium-chloride solution from
which sodium carbonate lias been separated — to remove sooty matters without
absorption of carbonic acid, and then forced directly into the ammoniated brine.
The brine is given a preliminary cart>onatioh. then cooled, and then again car-
bonated to precipitate .'iodium bicarbonate. Ammoniated brine and an ammo-
niura-chlonde solution are introduced into the precipitating apparatus, so that
in the early stages the formation of sodium bicarbonate in a liquid containing
a considerable proportion of ammonium chloride is insured. Clogging of open-
ings is prevented by artificially heating the walls of the openings.

363,962 — MaySl, 18S7. H. FRASCH. Process of and apparatus for making Sodium

carbonate by ammonia.

The brine is treated witli magnesium carbonate to precipitate calcium, then
with sodium carbonate to precipitate the magnesium, and afterwards with
ammonia and carbonic acid. Tlie brine, under a continuous flow, is beaten
into a spray in one or more tubes containing an atmosphere of ammonia. After
saturation with ammonia the brine flows or percolates through a mass of .solid
salt to regenerate the solution. The brine is super-ammoniated, and its strength
theu reduced by addition of other brine. Revolving brackets carry compressed
carbonic acid from above a body of ammoniated brine down into it and there
discharge it. Ammoniated brine is treated with the gases obtained from burn-
ing lime with hydrocarbon oil or similar clear fluid fuel. A continuous Alter
employs a moving filter cloth.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

171

SOi.Mt—^uiK 7, JSW. K. 80LVAY. Ih-uceu i{f atiil apparatuifnr maklnu todium

bicarbtniair.

(;ruili' liliiirbonnic In decouipoiwd liv lieni, tho cBrlKinic-nclcl rbh cvolvwl 1"
COoli-<l niid lixiviKleil, the mmIh wiliitioii <lt'cnnte<l Hnd cooled, iiiid then treated
with thu purified giui niid tliu reaiiltiiiK curboiiate tillered and dried.

SlS.WH—Januanj to. Itk-iti. A. KAYSEH. frix-et* of making atkalim tUleatn and

ct\rhttmitr».

Chloride n( wxilnm (or potaasluml 1h mixed with olny, nii<l the mixture hented
111 II eoiiverter directly liy |iiiN<hiK hiKhly-hcuti'il g«j<e* coiiutliiiiiK »le«in throiiKh
tho converter. coiivertiiiK the chlorlile into oxide uiid KeiierntliiK inurlntic-Hcld
KKs. The converted iiiutcriiil i» Miulled with nil ulkuU iiiid tlic MHllum, or
potaaaliiiu. ooiubliiiitloii.H extracted by lixivlallon.

Sta.SSl— May K. IStiS. K. W. I'ARNKLL AND J.SIMPSON. Makinti mdlum car-

boHotfif hy ttutphiilf* <\fthe alkuUne fttrth*,

A inixtiire o( ground milphiitc of lime or baryta and cnrhoiiaceoun matter la
roa.«te<i In a iionoxidiziiiK atinoNphcre; the suliihuret pro<iiiccd to mixed with
chloride of ammonium and heBti'<l. and the .siilphiirct of ammonium evolved,
toKethcr with carbonie-ocld Ka.s, is conducted Into a solution of Mxjlum chloride.

SSi.sSi—Jitne 19, IfiSS. M. R. WOOD. Maim/nctiirc o/biatrlxmatr of Kiida.

Crude bicarbonate mixed witli water to a cream-like consistency is heated to
(IS°to91l°C while subjecte<l to iires.siire hy forcinK air into and thniuKh it to
expel the exces8 of ammoniacal impiiritiex. Carbonii* acid is afterwards foiecd
through it to replace any carbonic acid ttiat may have been driven oS by the
air.
SS7,e}S—Augiut 7, I8SS. L. F. J. WRINKLE. Proeeia of treating native eoda.

A Mtiuated solution of the crude sotla in hot water is cleared by settling,
■trained while hot, partially cooknl and crystallized, and run otl into other ves-
sels and ftirther cooled and crystallized.

39».r:5— March S. 11139. J. I. WATTS AND W. A. RICHARDS. SaU of fodium.
Anew prtMluct.asalt, ".sesquicurlxniatcof soda." coiitiiininxoneequivttlentof
bicarljonale of soda, one equivalent of monocarbonate^if soda, and two equiva-
lent.'! of water, in chemical combination (NaHCOaNa-iCOa'JHjO), produced by
process No. 399.170.

S»9.l7H—Mareh5.ISil!). J.I. WATTS AND W.A.RICHARDS. Procemuf making a

tKKlium saU.

Sodium sesquicarbonate ia produced by crystallizinK at above 3.5° C. an aque-
ous .solution containing not less than 3 equivalents ofsoda (NojO) to 4 equiva-
lent-s of carbonic acid (COj) .

U>l.i>'J9— April le. 1389. F. H. GOSSAGE. Ptoccm of making mda.

In the manufacture of sulphide of sodium or potassium, to prevent destruc-
tion of the furnace lining. *< parLs by weight of sodium chloride is added to the
mixture for every 20 part-s of the sulphate.

US.IUr—Hmember i9,lSSa. O. KERNER AND J. MARX. Procew of electrolyzing
mlU of the alkaUt.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

UO.TSi—June ««. ttl90. F. W. A. FRERICHS. I^ocem of making alkaline cartm-

itatcif and acetone.

The acetate of an alkaline earth, a.? acetate of lime, is treated with Ihesulphate
of the desired alkali to make an acetate of the same, which is then subjected to
distillation, together with the anhydride of acetic acid.

459.MO— OrtofxT ?ii. tSSH). L. A. STAUB. Procesn of and apparatus for decompoe-

in;/ birarl)4tnat€ of »oita.

The bicarbonate is mixed with water at about 60° C. and treated with steam
and ammonia in a closed chamber: carbonic acid is drawn oft at the top and
the momx^rbonate, as a semiiiquid mud, at the 1x)ttom.

UjS,!S7—ya>nuxry 10. lS9t. B. PEITZSCH. I'roceM of treating .^a^furt taUt.

Potassic raw .salts are treated with sulphuric acid, the sulphates thus obtained
mixed with milk of lime, the gypsum thus formed and the magnesia being
separated by filtering from the resulting solution of the alkaline sulphate, ana
the latter mixed with sulphide of barium and converted into a solution of sul-
phide of alkali and treated in a concentrated condition with carlxinic acid.
Sepamtion of the bicurtjonates of potassium and sodium is effected by their dif-
ferent degrees of solubility in water, and potash is obtained from its bicarbonate
by roasting, and soda by calcination.

1^,567— November S, 1S91. F. M. LYTE. Process of making alkaline carbonate and

chlorine.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
i9i,'Jl9— March 7, 1S9S. K. J. SUNDSTROM. Manufacture ofsoda.

Bicarbonate mud is first treated with a solvent of the ammonia combinations,
such as concentrated .salt brine, and then water in fine spray is passed through
the mud to remove the sodium chloride.

61i,ms— March 6. lS9i. H. R. BROWNE. Process of making soda crystals.

Bicarbonate of soda obtained by the ammonia-soda process is heated until it
is converted into a mixture of monocarbonate and bicarbonate of soda and the
ammonia has been driven off; and the mixture thus obtained is then dissolved
in caustic-soda liquor obtained by the electrolysis of t^rine, aud the monocar-
bonate of soda crystallized out.

S5l,89S—JaHuari/ 14, lS9e. T. CRANEY. Proctm qf and apparattu for making
carbanales of soda.
See Group X, Electro-chemistrj-.

5Sl.9Si— January li. is»e. T. CRANEY. Process Qf and apparatiu/ormanitfacture
of sodium bicarbonate.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

6m,-'lS—May 19, isae. J. MEVRUEIS. Trealmait of sodium chloride.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

S79.317— March S3. 1897. E. J. CONST AJI AND A. VON HANSEN. Process of
manufacturing percartfonatts.
Sec Gniup X, Electro-chemistry.

eSii.U.i—Xmvmber7, 1399. W. D. PATTEN. Process of making cakes of Inearbonate

of stuia.

Moist carbonate of soda is formed into small cakci, and then treated with
carbonic-acid gas, converting them into bicarbonate of suda and making them
rigid.

BORATES,

IM.oei— March ti, ttai. N. M. HKLL. Art of manufacturing tinraj..

Borate of llmels boiled with a cnrtHinnleof mmU stiliitlon iiri'i"' r"—""- "i'h
constant agitation or circulation, and then nin Into setllcr
In the manufacture, the material is sortisl into oarw and <

fairtlcles are first etiarged Into the solution of the full streiig,., ;■-,..,. „ ,ue
nil charge of borates, and the finer particles added ilurlng the builiog.

i76,l!ft—June7, ism. J. AHCOroH. I'rocess of making tiorat.

The (rorap<inent part*— crystal swlliim carlMMiale 71 ixitinds and Ntmcic acid
r>'2 pounds — are ptuce<l In a suitable vcKsel with a small quantity of water, in the
sha|>e of steam, and subjecte<l to heat to drive off the superfluoiu moisture, then
agitated iu other vensels during process of cooling.

RECOVERY PROCESSES.

SS,9SS— December 17, imsi. H. LOWE. Imprmemml in processes of rero'irimj soda

used in the manufacture of }Mper stork.

The spent .solution of cau-stic soda is chargefl with carbonic-acid gas to pre-
cipitate the organic matter.

lS,tU,—February7 , 1885. M. L. KEEN AND H. BURGEiSS ( Reisme: 7,iSS-Januart
SO. /S77). Improvement in processes and apparatus for evapijratlng and calcining
alkaline soltUwns.

The solution is evaporated to dryness and calcined, bt-lng continDoiisly sub-
jected to flame and hot gases, whereby the vegetable matter is consamed.

63,839— April 10. 1866. T. F. LEUMANN. Improved method of recovering tauU

alkali used in tlte manufacture of pai>er.

The unspent caustic alkali of alkaline solutions is converted into • carbooale
by carbonic-acid gas.

5J,,093— April ti, 1866. U, M. BAKER. Improved process for recovering mule

alkali.

The waste liquor is evaporated to dryness and the residue subjected to
destructive distillation.

83,733— November 3, 1868. C. D. J. SEITZ. Improvement in recovering waste

cUkcdiesfrom paper stock and other fibers.

The waste liquor is evaporated down to from one-half to one-fourth: soda is
added (caustic soda or soda ash) and the hot solution run over quicklime,
which disposes of the remaining water; and the mixture fumaced.

101.003— March tt, 1870. W. GOODAIRE AND G. STEAD. Improrement in

restoring ivaste alkali used in oit refineries.

Spent alkali liquor is evaporated to a paste, and then calcined to consume
the oleaginous portions, leading black asn, which is leached, and the hot fil-
trated liquid treated with hydrated lime.

13i,i5i— October Hi, 18711. C. M. TESSlfe DU MOTAY. Improrement in recover-
ing waste alkalis used in treating paper pulp.

The hot liquor is treated with carbonic-acid gas and sulphuret of sodium, or
a bicarbonate, after which it is twiled aud then recanstined and the precipi-
tated matter removed,

156,1*83 — Sovember 3, 187U. D. HANNA. Improvement in processes for restoring

and purifying caustic alkali.

The spent litjuor is agitated, filtered, heated to boiling with agitation, and
tlien treated with quicklime, with or without ammonia.

167,919— December tH, ISIU.
alkalis.

A. S. LY^MAN. Improrement in restoring spent

Spent alkali is exposed to air currents for evaporation by means of revolving
disks. The gases from the incinerating furnace pass through a filter stack that
is kept moistene<l with dilute alkali.

181, W6 — August it, 1876. S. BROWN. Improvement in the process qf saving caus-
tic alkali in the manufacture of paper pulp.
Straw is boiled in a weak solution of lime, crushed and reduced in a rag-
engine to " half-stuS," and then subjected under steam pressure to the action
of caustic alkali.

191,759— June li, 1877. W. W. HARDING. Improvement in restoring and recov-
ering alkaline wastes.
To recover alkali from the waste liquor used in disintegrating paper stock,
it is first reduced to a dry, porous, or flocculent substance, by exposing the liquid
in thin layers to the action of heated cylinders or plates and removing the
dried material by scrapers or brushes as fast as formed, aud then incinerating
the porous mass ip the hearth of a reverberatory furnace.

19l„ll,l— August li, 1877. H. H. FURBISH. Improrenu-nt in processes for rteov-
1 ering alkalis used for the reduction of wood to paper pulp.
The spent lees are washed from the cooked mass in water heated by steam
from the digester, evaporated, the ash recovered in a recover}* furnace and
boiled and rendered caustic by lime, and the same evaporated and reduced
to proper strength.

li9,M—.Iune 29. 1880. C. C. MARKLE AND J. JORDAN. Recovering soda from

spent liquors after treating vegetable fiber.

In incinerating the residue of the waste liquor, air-slaked lime Is added to
and burned with the residue to render the lime again caustic.

366,966— July 19, 1887. P. HOGAN. Process (^ and apparatus for recovering

alkali.

Dry peat is saturated with spent liqaor from the manufacture of wood pulp
and otncr materials and heated iu a slowly revolving cylinder, the vap<ir being
conveyed off and force<l into a convoluted condensing flue by a fan blower.

S91.i59— October tS, 1888. J.W.DIXON. Process qf concentrating lu/uids.

The liquor is heated m vacuo by interior heating coils while [Hissing through
a cylinder, a vaiK>r space Ixdng preserved above the liquor with constant ex-
haust of the vapors, and also continuous withdrawal of the liquor by suction.

U>3.869—Maygl, I.'i8». V. U. BH)EDK. Kecovering spent atkili.

Spent alkaline lyes are fint saturated with phosphoric acid to precipitate the
fatty and coloring matters; then decanted or Hltereil. any residuary color being
destroyed with chlorine; and the daritltsi liquor is then treated with lime,
barium, or like compound caimble M forming an in.soluble combination with
the phosphoric acid aud liberating the soda or potash in an available form.

172

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

03,870— May 21, 1889. V. G. BLOEDE. Recovering alkali.

Spent ftlkaline lyes are saturated with sulphurous acid, effecting a separation
of the impurities, and the sulphites or bisulphites of the alkali are then con-
yerted into hydrates or carbonates by the action of caustic or carbonate of
lime, barium or equivalent compounds.

i4)5,75!,—Jiirte 25, 1889. S. "WOLF. Recovering soda.

In the sulphate cellulose process there is added to the brown lye of the pro-
cess acid sulphate of soda which has previously been treated with the lime
mud of the said process, transforming the latter into g-ypsum, a well-known
manure, the unwashed alkalis being recovered out of the calcareous mud.

U18,f65~D€C€niber SI, 18S9. E. N. ATWOOD. Process of recovering soda.

Spent soda liquor of wood-pulp mills is atomized and burnt as fuel under
pressure. The products of combustion pass through water to catch floating
particles of alkali.

U1S,Z7/,— December SI, 1889. F. A. CLOUDMAN. Process of recovering Koda.

Chemicals, such as soda of spent soda liquors, are recovered by sprajing liquor
containing the chemical by means of steam and oil into a combustion chamber
and burning the mixture as fuel.

U2!*,7 56— April 1, 1890. H. BLACKMAN. Process of recovering soda.

The liquor is atomized by a gaseous bla.st, subsequently superheated, and the
mixture is then injected into a furnace.

lt78,981—JiUy 19, 1892. H. BLACKMAN. Apparatmfor and process of recovering

alkali.

The concentrated liquor is introduced in a bath on the calcining hearth and
subjected to the heat of gases of combustion, the material being moved from
saia bath along the ealcinin|r hearth until its combustible constituents are cal-
cined out, and the material is finally fused and allowed to flow off.

l^SO. 109— August 2, 1892. G. LUNGE AND J. DEWAR. Process of recovering

sulphur, carbonate of soda, and iron oxide.

The residue obtained by decomposing sodium sulphide with a ferrite is acted
on, in a moist condition, with a suitable mixture of^ carbonic acid and oxygen.

658,970— April 28, 1896. O. LUGO AND H. T. JACKSON. Method qf electrolytic

treatment of stxip-lyes.

See Group X — Electro-chemistry.
620,751— March 7, 1899. L. J. DOREXFELDT. Process of utilizing siUphite lyes.

The concentrated waste liquors of sulphite wood pulp mills are utilized as
fuel by heating to liquidize, tillering under pressure, and then spraying into the
combustion chamber.

620,755— March 7, 1899. V. DREWSEN AND U J. DORENFELDT. Process oj

utilizing sulphite lyes.

The waste liquor is neutralized with sodium carbonate; evaporated with ad-
dition of calcium carbonate: the residuum burned: the sodium carbonate in the
product leached out, and the insoluble calcium sulphide treated with carbonic
acid, producing calcium carbonate and hydrogen sulphide, which latter is con-
verted into sulphurous acid or sulphur.

PACKING PROCESSES.

15,957— October 21, 1856. G. THOMPSON. {Reissue: 651, — Febnianf 1, 1859;

2,569— April 16, 1867; 5,886— May 26, lS7i,.) Improvevient in the manitfacture of

caustic alkali.
■ A block of caustic alkali is inclosed in resin, beeswax, or other similar sajwui-
fiable material.

18, 21U— September 15, 1857. G. THOMPSON. Improvement in boxts for preserving

alkalis.

A metallic box has the top and bottom united to the cylinder side with an in-
fusible cement made of fire clay moistened with Unseed" oil.

52, U65— February 6, 1866. T. C. TAYLOR. Improvement in jnitting up caustic
alkali.

Metal cylinders are stood on end in sand, nearly filled with molten alkali,
the top sealed with cement, then reversed and the bottom sealed with cement.

52,U66— February 6, 1866. T. C. TAYLOR. Improvement tn putting up and pre-
serving caustic potassa and soda.
To prevent melting the solder a small quantity of alkali is poured into a case

and allowed to partially cool, and the case is then filled by installments.

52,910— February 27, 1S66. T. C. TAYLOR. Improved method of putting up caustic

alkali.

Blocks of alkali are packed in a case, and oil, grease, or like material poured
in to fill the interstices.

86, S19— January 26, 1869. J. REAKIRT. Improvement in patting up caustic

alkalis.

They are packed in glazed stone jars haviug a shoulder to receive a disk, the
whole sealed with cement.

S9,70U— May U, 1869. T.C.TAYLOR. Improved mode of putting up caustic soda

for the manufacture of soap.

Caustic alkali is comminuted, then mixed with oil or grease and packed in
barrels or vessels. It can be cut out as required for use.

110,189— December SO, 1870. W. H. BALMAIN. Improvement in packing caustic
alkalis.

They are granulated or pulverized and packed in cases without the admixture
of other materials. When in p<^>wdered form a corrosive liquid is not formed,
but the moisture is absorbed until a protective coating of carbonate forms on
each particle.

12S,5Uf—Fcbrunry 6, 1S72. J. H. SEIBERT. Improvement in packages for cau^ic
alkalis, acids, and salts.

They arc made of a plastic compound, as plaster of paris. with one-tenth flour
or marble dust, cast in a protecting wrapper. The heads are cast on to combine
and form a solid casing.

12l„859— .March 19, 1872. J. H. SEIBERT. Improvetnent in packages for alkalis,

acids, etc.

The package is formed by casting a plastic substance, as a mixture of glyce-
rine, wax, and paper pulp between an inside and an outside protecting wrapper.

128,176— June 18. 1S72. J. H. SEIBERT. Improvement in packages for putting up

caustic alkalis, acids, etc.

It is cast of a plastic composition and coated with a resinous or protective
coating. The alkali is congealed to conform to the package and then placed
therein.

W,1S7— March 25, 1873.
alkali.

G. W. HUMPHREY. Improvement in incasing caustic

Improvement in processes

Improvement in compositions for

It is put up in india-rubber envelopes or coverings.

139,955 — June 17, 187S. H. B. HALL. Improvement in packages for caustic soda

or alkali.

The alkali is packed in a spun or stamped metal cup with a cover of resin
poured in in a liquid state.

150,508— May 5, 187L B. T. BABBlTT. Improvement in caustic-alkali packages.

A block of caustic alkali hermetically sealed and protected from atmospheric
influence by a coating or envelope of turpentine.

150.509— May 5, ISs it. B. T. BABBITT. Improvement in the processes for coating

caustic alkalis.

Balls or blocks of caustic alkali are submerged in melted turpentine in a ves-
sel in which a vacuum is produced.

158,091,— December 22, 187 i,. A. K. LEE. Improvement inputting up caustic alkalis.
Paper and wood as a carrier for caustic alkalis, etc., is first coated with a
cement formed of white lead ground in oil, sulphur, and black oxide of manga-
nese: then with a composition of asphaltum, paraffin, black oxide of man-
ganese,and soapstone: the lusphaltum. paraftin. and black oxide of manganese
being reduced to a fluid by a product obtained from crvide turpentine distilled
at not exceeding 225° and from which the pyroligneous-acid water has been
separated while the turpentine is in vapor.

16lt,k05—June Ifi. 1875. T. C. TAYLOR. Improvement in compositions for coating
blocks f if caustic alkali.
It consists of a mixture of a flne earth and oil.

18!„925— November 28, 1876. T. C. TAYLOR. Improvement in methods nf packing

caustic alkali.

It is inclosed in a solid molded form in a can, with a surrounding envelope of
any mineral powder which will absorb the lye.

193.SS0—Jtdy 2lt, 1877. H. B. HALL AND E. HINE.
and apparatus for putting up cauMic alkali.
Dry granulated caustic alkali is comprtjssed into air-tight packages.

206.S91—Augut>t IS. 1878. A. MENDLESON.

coating txlkali balls.

It consists of Burgundy pitch 16 parts, plaster of paris 2 to 4 parts, and oil
one-half pari.

229,161— June 22, 1880. A. MENDLESON. Coated caustic-alkali ball.

A coated alkali ball has a sealing-boss formed of the coating over the sprue-
spot.

2S8,06U— February 22, ISSl. M. M. SMITH. Mamifacture of alkali balls.
A series of alkali balls is cast on a common wire and coated.

21^,939— July 5, 1881. W. .1. MENZIES. {Reissue: May 9. 1882. Xo. 10.108 for the
process; S'o. 10,109 for the prodnrt.) Grinding and sieving cnui^tic alkali.
Caustic alkali is ground and sieved while hot or in a temperature sufficiently

high to prevent deiiquesence.

256,095— April U, 1882. B. T. BABBITT. Method of puUing up caustic alkali.

The molten alkali is run into cans with soldered heads, which are set in water
or otherwise cooled during the process of filling.

260.27-2— June 27 . 1882. B. T. BABBITT. Method of ptdting up caustic alkali.

Cans formed of a cylindrical body and a head with an outwardly turned
flange inserted into the body are filled with the molten alkali, and the heads
are then inserted while the alkali is still molten, and pressed down upon the
alkali, and finally, after the alkali has hardened, soldered to the can.

261,228— July 18. 1882. C. HEMJE AND T. C. BRECHT. Process of and appOr

ratus for comp residing pkif tic and other materials.

Compressed cakes of plastic or other material, as bicarbonate of soda, have a
cemented crust or film of the same material formed thereon, as by subjecting
them to a bath of steam. The steam may be impregnated with gum arabic.

270.997— ./an nary 23, 1883. T. C. TAYLOR. Packing cau/^tic alkali.

Pulverized alkali is mixed with resinous or fatty matter— about 20 percent —
and compressed into balls or blocks, and finally given a suitable coating to
prevent deliquescence.

270,998— January 23, 1883. T. C. TAYLOR. Packing caustic alkali.

A fatty or resinous matter is added to caustic alkali during the process of
grinding or preparation to prevent the giving off of caustic dust.

275.1S8— April 10, 1883. E. KIRK. Treatment of caustic soda.

A new composition, consisting of a mixture of powdered caustic soda and
powdered sand.

282,633— August 7, 18H3. T. S. HARRISON. Process of producing a perfumed soap

alkali.

A package of soap-making alkali contains a soluble or fusible capsule of per-
fume.

286,132— October S, 1883. F. P. HARNED. Process of grinding caustic soda.

One or 2 per cent of carbonate of soda or soda ash is added to caustic alkali,
and it is then ground and bolted without deliquescence.

287,128— October 23, 188S. C. HEMJE. Method of compressing pxdverized material.
In the formation of compressed cakes of pulverized material, as of bicarbonate
of soda, the molds are suujected to a iet of steam prior to filling, which con-
denses on the sides of the mold, and tne cakes formed have a glazed exterior
shell composed of the same material as the body of the cake.

51S,0ltU—May 19, 1885. C. SEMPER. Proems of grinding caustic soda.

Ground salt cake or dried sulphate of soda — say 4 percent — is added to caustic
soda, and the mixture ground and bolted.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RKLATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

173

SS.1.!>tt,— March sn, Ifm. J. W. CARSON AND F. I". HARNEP. Mamtfaeture qf

bl'tckM of bi(^trb4matt; qf wtda.

It Is comprewied iiitoblix knimmtHllnlelyon rcmovlnR It fmm the carbonatltiK
chambers or the waxhliiK tHbUw, imil iK'fiiri' dryliiR or Kriiiding.

ttU.9'!3—itay H, lii9<J. H. I'KECIIT. PrDfrim nf jiaekimi cautllr atkntlff.

Thp nuistic nlkall Is cast In blm-knanil (mckiHl In iiinks. with an nlkallnc car-
bonate packed In between tbe eaiistlcalkali lilocks and the walla of the eagk.

GROUP III.— POTASH.

POTASHES, CARBONATES.
ttS—June 10, ISSi. G. CLEM KNT. Improvanrid in Uu proceu <if teaching athet.
In Hettlnx up the leach a small quantity of hot unslaked lime and hot aahea Is
placed In the middle of the ashes.

1,691— Jiih/ ts. 111,0. J. OSBORN. Impmrcment in the mrxleof eitracting the alkali

/rvm a«he9 in the vianufactnrc ofpolagh,

A mile alum with lime and salt la added to the leaching solution.
3.iS3—Sri>leml>er 7, 13U. E. CHAMBERLIN. Improvement in the manufacture

The volatile products of the combustion of anthracite coal, purified only of
dust in connection with steam, are employed for the conversion of pearlash.

m.sei—Marrh S«. 1S7S. M. B. MANWARINO AND R. I)E WITT BIRCH.

Impnurmrnl in thr manttjacture qf pf>tash anit ph/mpbntt' oflimti.

Potash Is extracted from the ashes of cotlon-secd hulls by boiling in water
and adding lime.

I.io.fil.i-Aiinuri to, 1S!I. W. WENTWORTH AND G. W. CLEAVELAND.

Jiiiprot'rmfnt in the mant^factnrc of pearlaalieg.

Ground Iwrk, preferably s|>ent tan hark, is mixed with the lye, the liquor
eviiporaled, and the residuum incinerated.

tl6.t,S»—June 10, isrg. J. AND R. H. WOODRUM. Improvement in teparoHng

pt>tiuh fi-t»n uithes.

Water at Imlling heat is percolated through the ashes heated to a red heat.
t5i,€,iS — Janiinnj Si, 1SS2. C. R. ENOEL. Mnnufmiurc of carbonate of potanttium.

A double cartjonate of magnesium and potassium is first formed by treating
a mixture of carbonate of magnesium, or free magnesia, and an aqueous solu-
tion of a i»otassium salt with carbonic-acid gas. Carbonate of potassium i« then '
separated out of the double carbonate by boiling or heating in a dry state.

S78.S66 — January 10, 1888. F. BRL^XJES. Procens of obtaining potaesium cartn)-

nate.

A mixture of potassium chloride and ammonia-magnesium carlK>nate is dLs-
jKtlved in water and the precipitate which forms is removed and digested in
water to separate the pota-ssium chloride which goes into solution, the other I
carbonates oeing less soluble. I

iSi.931— October S5, IS9i. P. ROSIER. Prncem of making potaseium carhrmaie.

A mixture of equal molecules of pota.ssium sulphate and p<»t»tssium bichro-
mate in aqueous solution is converted by means ol calcium hydrate or barium
or strontium hydrate into potassium chroniate, the .solution saturated with car-
bonic acid, the precipitated potassium biclircunatc separated from the iHita.-ssium
bicarlMMUite pnHiuceti, the pot*i.ssium bichromate remaining in solution is sep-
arated, and lastly a potassium carbonate containing chromium is obtained from
the lye by further evaporation.

GROUP IV.— ALUMS.
AMMONIA ALUM.
MS,S1S— December t.lSSL W. J. MESZIE.S. Manufacture of burnt alum.

Concentrated solutions of sulphate of ammonia and sulphate of alumina are
mixed in the nroportion of 1 part of the former to 4 parts of the latter and
evaporated to do'ucss.

POTASH ALUM.

StS,i77— October to, 18SS. H. C. FREIST. Man iif act ure qf crystal cUum.

Crystal alum free from Iron is produced by treating a solution of sulphate of
alumina cuntHining iron with chlorate of potash or like oxidizing agent to con-
vert the ferrous oxide into ferric oxide, and adding, either before or after the
impurities have been removed, sulphate of potash, sulphate of ammonia, or sul-
phate of soda, and crystallizing the alum.

Dll,71l—June I'J, lS9i. J. HEIBLING. /Vocars of making potmh alum and
alumina.

A mixture of clay, sulphate of potash, and sulphate of ammonia (in the pro-
portion of the alumina of the clay and sulphate of potash each 1 part, sul-
phate of ammonia 3 parts) molded into bricks is heated to from 27.i° to 300° C,
until the ammonia is driven off, when it is dlasolved, the Iron eliminated, and
the ammonia previously removed is added, whereby the alumnia is precipi-
tated and the sulphate of ammonia and sulphate of potash are regenerated.

SODA ALUM.

ter.eiO—yovember n, last. p. & F. M. SPENCE, Manufacture of alum.

In tbe manufacture of soda alum, cold saturated solutions are mixed with
stronger solution."— as of sp. gr. I.5.T— of a higher temperature, to prevent solidi-
fication with crystallization, or, if solidified, to change into the crystalline form.

iiO.iSS— February H. tS90. E. AUGfe. Procett nf making mda alum.

A .solution of sodium sulphate combined with a solution of aluminum sul-
phate is condensed by evaporating in vacuo at a temperature not exceeding &SP
C., C(K»le<I and crystallized,

iS5,li9—Auguft X, 1890. E. AUGt. Process of crystallizing soda alum.

A stdution of sulohate of alumina and sulphate of soda is concentrated to
between 1.32 ami 1.42 sp. gr., cooled to a pasty form, and then exposed in layers
uiKjn inclined surfaces at a temperature of 15° to 20° C. till the mother liquors
are separated.

i.'ii.l'ii'—June le. 1891. F. M. & D. D. SPENCE AND A. ESILMAN. Proctuqf

linking soda alum,

i-ufficient sulphate of soda is diasolvcd In a boiling concentrated solution of
sulplintc of^ilumiTia. or aluniino-ferric sulphate, of a sp. gr. not exceeding 1.3, to
form with the sulphate of alumina w»du alum; the impurities settled in a closed
ves.sel; the s»>lntion eva|Kirated to a so. gr. of from 1.42.') to 1.4.T0. then agitated and
■cooled until a magma is formed, which is stirred and turned over from time to
time until it is converted Into crystals of soda alum and mother liquor.

IM.nir—July tl, IH9I. r. if. it D. D. APENCR. Mannfadure nf soda alum.

To« liolllng concentrate^! solution of soda alum, prep«re<l from sulphate of
alumina and stilphate of Msla, or from alumhuHferrlc and sulphate of iuii\n. of
a sp. gr. of l.l.'iO, there Is added a snudl <iuantlty of a cold Hnturate<t iwiliitiori
of soda alum suttlclent to yield on cisillng of the mixture a magma not loo sIIH
to l>e freely stirred and tumc<l over until transformed Into crystal* of loda alum
and mother liquor.

m,HO—May U, 189S. T, 8. HARRISON AND C. SEMPER. Aluminous cm-

pound.

A compound of sulphate of alumina and double sulphate nf alumina and
soila; a hard, dry compound, readily ground, but highly soluble; tbe product oi
process No. 4»7,57L

m.ill—May M, 189S. T. 8. HARRISON AND C. SEMPER. ProeesM of mnting

aluminous compounds.

An aluminous solution Is hardened by adding powdered sulphate of soda, aay
20 per cent, to tbe concentrated aluminous solution ready to run off.

CONCENTRATED ALUM.

l,9iS— January tS, ISil. -M. J. FUNCKE. Improrement in the manner or proceu

qf manufacturing sulphate of alumina.

The clay is prepared by desiccation, reduced to a powder, and treated with
sulphuric add, dried, then treated with water to dUMOIve the salt, settled, and
any free acid neutralized with lime water. The clear liquor Is drawn off and
the iron precipitated with prusslate of potash, the exact quantity required
being ascertained by a test sample.

60,780— January I, ISgr. H. PEMBERTON. Improrement in the manufacture of

sulphate of alumina, alttm, and other aluminous compouwts.

In place of sulphuric acid, the acid solution obtained from the tarry acid re-
siduum resulting from the refining of petroleum, etc. (impure sulphuric add). Is
used.

t9t,]60-Maytl, 1877. C. LENNIG. Improvement in processes of manufadvirtng

aluminic sulphate and alum.

The alumina in clay or kaolin la dissolved by sulphuric add under pressure
In a closed vessel.

196,01,3— October 9, 1877. (i. P. ROCKWELL. Improvement in manufacture of
alum.

Aluminic sulphate and alum are manufactured by the decompooltion of the
mineral indianaite, a practically pure silicate of alumina, by means of sulphuric
acid, and the elimination of the separated silica. For alum the equivalent of
alkali is added prior to crystallization.

t08,615— October 1, WS. F. LAUR. (Reissue: 8,8Sg— September t, lgt9: Mi*—
Augu^ 10, 1880.) Improrement in manufacture qf sulphate of alumina.
In the process of manufacturing sulphates of alumina a neutral solution is
made and then pieces of zinc ore introduced to convert the iron into a color-
less compound of iron prior to concentration.

Sll,7S7—Xovember 18. 1879. A. A, CROLL. Improvement in the manufacture of

sulphate of alumina.

The saturating vessel is jacketed to prevent the escape of heat and maintain
the fluidity of the mass, and the charge is drawn off successively from different
levels, producing batches of different grades.

tm.loe—July to. 1880. W., T., & J. CHADWICK AND J. W. KYNASTON.

Process of making and purifying sulphate of alumina or alum.

In the manufacture of alumina, alum cake, or alum, the Iron Is precipitated
out ol the solution by treating with arsenious acid and neutralizing with
carbonate of lime. The remaining arsenic is then precipitated by hydrogen
sulphide.

IS!. 816— February IS. 1881. W., T., & J. CHADWICK AND J. W. KYNASTON.

Purifying sulphate of alumina.

Iron is removed from the aluminous .solution by the addition of fenocyanide
of calcium, and the arsenic then precipitated by a soltible sulphide, as hydrogen
sulphide, by this means carrying down the suspended ferrocyanide. A small
quantity of sulphate of copper or sulphate of zinc is used when arsenic is not
employed to remove the suspended ferrocyanide.

SS9,0S9— March SI, 1881. J. H. EASTWICK. Manufacture ofsulpliate of alumina.
Halloysite (Indianaite) is ground and bolted— roasting lieing dispensed with—
mixed -with sulphuric acid, and then treated with hydrate of alumina, produc-
ing spontaneous ebullition and decomposition of the halloysite.

SiS,9i9—July 5, ISSl. B. E. R. NEWLANDS. Manufacture of sulphate of alumina.
Sulphate of alumina is purifie<l of sulphuric acid and iron by evaporating a
solution of impure salt to the point of crystallization on cooling, or by adding
sufficient water to the salt to obtain the impurities in solution and leave the
sulphate pure, and then separating the mother liquor containing the impurities
by pressure or centrifugal action.

US,710— August 16, 1881. C. SEMPER. Manufacture qf sulphate qf alumina.

A solution of ferruginous sulphate of alumina is treated in a finely divided
state or in spray with sulphurous acid or hydrogen sulphide to decolorize it.

t67,M7—May 9, 188S. C. FAHLBERG AND C. SEMPER. JWAod of removing

iron from ferruginous satinc solutions.

The ferruginoas solution is treated with plumbic dioxide either by adding
aame to the solution or by converting a neutral monobasic or polyboaic salt cu
lead, or an oxide of lead into plumbic dioxide In said solution. Ferrous oxides
are firet converted into ferric oxides.

K7.K8—May 9, 18SS. C. FAHLBERG AND C. SEMPER. Recovery qf plumbic
dioxide fri/m ferruginous solntiims.

The waste plumbic dioxide and ferric plumbate is treated with nitric acid, or
other add or add salt, to recover the iri>n.

tei,.77S— September 19, ISSt. C. SEMPER. Removing iron from ferruginous sotit-
lions.

The solution is treated with manganese dioxide or manganic sesquloxide.
Ferrous oxide when present should lirst be converted into ferric oxide and the
solution should be basic or neutral. The spent manganic dioxide is revived by
treatment with dilute sulphuric acid.

S6i,77!,—.'^ei>lrmbrrl9,lSSt. C. SEMPER. Processqf removing ironandmang^ineae
from certain solutions.

Iron and manganese are both removed by a single operation from ferruginous
solutions (of such salts as are not decomptwed in the operation of the process)
containing manganous salts by treatment with a permanganate and heat.

174

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

We.m— October Si, ISSl. R. A. FISHER. Sizinp for paper makers.

An aluminous comixjund containing sodium or zinc, a new product of a viscid
or creamy consistency is produced bv neutralizing a portion of the acid of an
acid solution of aluminum sulphate by means of sodic or zincic oxide or zmc,
evaporating the solution .o about 37° Baumi5, and then cooling under agitation.

tee.iSS— October Si, 1883. n.. A. FISHER. Sizing /or paper makers' me.

Sulphate of alumina of a rtscous or creamy consistency, a new product, is
made by cooling under agitation a solution of sulphate of alumina evaporated
to about 37° Baum6 when boiling.
tSOfiSS— June S6, 188S. C. SEMPER. Manufacture of mdplmte of cdumina.

A neutral porous alumina sulphate containing magnesia sulphate is produced
bv treating a hot solution of alumina sulphate of such degree of concentration
that it will harden when cold, with carbonate or bicarbonate of magnesia.

tSO,0S9—J«nete, 1885. C. SEMPER. Manufacture of sulphate of alumina.

A neutral or basic alumino-magnesiaii compound is formed by treating a hot
acid solution of sulphate of alumina with magnesic carbonate, bicarbonate, or
oxide.
180,090— June $6, 18SS. 0. SEMPER. Mamifaclure of sulphate of alumina.

Porous alumina sulphate containing zinc is produced by adding zinc sulphite
to a hot solution of alumina sulphate from which silica has been removed, and
which is of such degree of concentration as to harden when cold.

SSl,09S—June 50, 1885. R. A. FISHER. Xcutral sizing material for pajier makers'

use.

A solution of sulphate of alumina free from iron is made neutral or slightly
basic with oxide of zmc, or other suitable neutralizing material; insoluble
matter, if any, is removed: the clear solution concentrated toabout 66° Baum6;
bicarbonate of soda added to the hot viscid mass to produce a poroas or vesicu-
lar structure, and the mass cooled and broken into lumps.
SSl.OQS— June SO, 188.5. R.A.FISHER. Neutral sizing tnaterial for paper makers'

use.

For the production of a white sizing material from ferruginous aluminous
sulphate a solution of sulphate of alumina containing iron is prepared, the
ferric sulphate reduced to ferrous sulphate, and the solution made neutral, etc.,
as per No. 321,092.

Sgl,09!r-,Tune SO, 1885. R. A. FISHER. Mamifactureof an aluminous sizing mate-
rial for paper makers' use.

For the production from any ferniginous .sulphate of alumina solution of a
porous sizing material free from iron, nearly all of the iron is flrst converted
into insoluble Prussian blue by means of a slight excess of yellow prussiate of
potash, the incidentlv formed soluble prussian blue removed and the excess
of yellow prussiate of potash by means of oxide of zinc; when the solution of
sulphate of ammonia is freed from prussian blue and other insoluble matter by
subsidence, filtration, or othenvlse, and concentrated to about 65° Baum^, etc.,
as in No. 821,092.

521,095— June SO, 1885. R. A. FISHER. Manufacture of a sizing material for paper
makers' use.

For the manufacture of a porous sulphate of alumina containing magnesia,
but free from iron and excess of alumina and acid, artificial hydrate of alumina
free from iron is dissolved in sulphuric acid and water: then magnesia or car-
bonate of magnesia is added to the hot fluid, which is then cooled until it
begins to thicken, when bicarbonate of soda is added to produce a porous or
vesicular structure.

521.096— June 30, 1SS5. R. A. FISHER. Sizing material to be usedln the mamifac-
tureof paper.

For the manufacture of a sizing material containing both zinc and iron, but
free from an objectionable bnfl color, hot sulphuric acid is mixed into any ferru-
ginous alum clay, water being added from time to time to prevent overflow;
the liquor is then drawn off, settled, decanted, and treated with zinc and bicar-
bonate of soda.

521,097— June 50, 1885. R. A. FISHER. Manufacture of sizing for paper mxikers'

use.

For the manufacture of a porous sizing material free from iron direct from
ferruginous aluminous mineral, hot sulphuric acid is mixed with finely ground
ferruginous alum chiy: all or nearly all of the iron is removed by means of a
plumbic oxide, manganese dioxide or sesquioxide, or potassium permanganate
or other precipitate of iron from aluminous solutions, and the solution is cleared
and concentrated and bicarbonate of soda added.

521,098— June SO, 1885. R. A. FISHER. Manufacture of sizing material for paper

makers' use.

In the production of a porous sizing material direct from ferruginous alumi-
nous minerals, hot sulphuric acid is mixed with ferruginous alum clay, the
ferric oxide reduced to ferrous oxide by the addition of zinc, and the clear
liquor decanted, concentrated, and treated with bicarbonate of soda.

533,680— January 5, 1886. C. SEMPER. Manufacture of sizing compounds for paper

makers' use.

Plumbic oxide, or other substance which will precipitate iron, is added to a
neutral ferruginous solution of s\ilphate of alumina, which is then filtered, and
either before or after treatment with plumbic oxide, oxide of zinc is added to
make the solution sufficiently basic not to act upon ultramarine blue. Bicarbon-
ate of soda is finally added to make the product porous.

SiS,60i—JiUy 13, 1886. C. SEMPER. Process of imiking porous alum.

A ferruginous solution of sulphate of alumina is treated with plumbic dioxide
or other precipitant of iron from aluminous solutions, the insoluble matter is
removed, and bicarbonate of soda is added to the solution in a sufficiently cool
and concentrated condition, and the vesicular mass ia crushed or broken into
lamps.

Si5,605—July IS, 1886. C. SEMPER. Process of making porous alum.

A ferruginous solution of sulphate of alumina is treated with zinc to reduce
ferric oxide to ferr()us oxide, the insoluble impurities removed, and the clear
liquor in a sufficiently cool and concentrated condition treated with bicarbon-
ate of soda, and finally the mass is crushed into lumps.

551,210— October 19, 1886. C. SEMPER. .Sizing material for paper makers' use.

A solution of sulphate of alumina free from iron is treated with oxide of zinc,
either before or after the removal of any insoluble matter, and then, when suffi-
ciently concentrated and cooled, bicarbonate of soda is added.

551.211— October 19,1886. C. SEMPER. Sizing material for paper makers' use.

.K solution of sulphate of alumina containing iron is treated with a reducing
agent to convert ferric sulphate into ferrous sulphate, and it is then treated
with oxide of zinc to render it neutral or basic; any insoluble matter is removed,
and. when sufficiently concentrated and cooled, bicarbonate of soda is ad<^ed.

505,901— August 22, 1893. W. E. CASE. Process of making aluminum compounds.

An insoluble aluminum compound, free from iron, is obtained by treating an
aqueous solution of crude aluminum sulphate with nitnc and sulphuric aeids,
adding calcium fluoride, then adding asolution of an alkali carbonate assodium
carbonate, to precipitate iron, and mechanically separating the liquid from the
solid products of the reaction. The solution is then treated with a further quan-
tity of the alkali carbonate to precipitate the aluminum compound.
520,1,16— May 29, 189!,. 3. ENEQUIST. Process of making porous sidphate of

alumina.

A hot concentrated solution of sulphate of alumina is run oH and solidified
on a zinc or aluminum surface, whereby the hydrogen given off makes the
material porous.

ALUM CAKE.

209,1,88— October 39, 1878. G. T. LEWIS. Improvement in manufacture of alum cake

and sidphate of alumina.

The aluminous materials are ground and mixed with sulphuric acid in one
operation, and the mixture afterwards heated from 82° to 126° C.
217,1,60— July 15, 1S79. T. S. HARRISON. Improvement in manufacture of alumi-
nous cake.

Fibrous aluminous cake, a new article of manufacture, has fibrous silicate of
magnesia, or fibrous sulphate of lime or equivalent material, substituted for the
silica of alum cake.
220 720— October 21, 1879. F. LADR. Improvement in the manufacture of alumitious

cake.

Zinc is introduced into an acidulated ferruginous solution of sulphate of
alumina to neutralize the free acid and convert the iron into a colorless iron
compound prior to concentration.
225,300— .March 9, 1880. C. V. PETRAEUS. Manufacture of aluminous cake.

White aluminous cake is made from ferruginous aluminous sulphate by treat-
ing the aluminous sulphate in solution mth alkaline sulphides, sulphides of
alkaline earths, or metallic sulphides, such as finely ground zinc blende or
galena.
225 301— March 9, 1880. C. V. PETR.\EUS. Manufacture of aluminous cake.

The peroxide of iron in ferruginous aluminous sulphate is reduced to the
protoxide and decolorized by the addition of powdered or spongy lead, and then
boiling or agitating the solution.
2S3,916—A'ovember 2, ISSO. O. F. BIHN AND R. HEERLEIN. Manufacture of

aluminous cake.

Aluminous sulphate in a semifluid condition is treated with sulphites, bisul-
phites or hyposulphites of the alkalis, alkaline earths, or the metallic bases to
decolorize the iron and produce a white cake.
2SU,70I,— November 23, 1880. G. F. BIHN. Manufacture of white aluminous cake.

A pulverized mixture of halloysite and bauxite is treated with sulphuric acid
and the mass decolorized as in No. 233,916.
238.613— March 8, 1881. C. SEMPER. Manufcu-ture of aluminous cake.

A ferruginous aluminous sulphate is treated with oxalic acid, or oxalates of
the alkalis, of the alkaline earths, or of the metallic bases to produce a color-
less aluminous cake containing the iron salts.
2U0,597—AprU 26, 1881. G. T. LEWIS AND C. V. PETRAEUS. Manufacture of

aluminous cake.

The last traces of prussian blue are removed from an aluminous-cake solution,
to which vellow prussiate of potash has been previously added, by treating the
liquor with metallic zinc, oxide of zinc, or zinc ore.
21.3,635— June 28, 1881. C. SEMPER. Manufacture of aluminous Cake.

Ferruginous aluminous sulphate is decolorized by treating It in a semifused
condition with zinc or zmc dust.
253,377— February 7, 1882. T. S. HARRISON. Manufacture of aluminous cake.

A blue aluminous cake containing ferrocyanide of iron is produced by precipi-
tating the iron as prussiate of iron in a ferruginous aluminous sulphate solution
and then concentrating the solution without removing the prussiate of iron.

ni,S71— January 30, 1SS3. C. SEMPER. Manufacture of aluminous cake.

The aluminous sulphate in a semifused condition is treated with sulphites,
bisulphites, or hyposulphites of the alkalis, alkaline earths, or the metallic
bases.
51,2,599— May 25, 1886. F. P. EARNED. Process of making neutral aluminous

compounds.

In the manufacture of sulphate of alumina pulverized caustic soda or alumi-
nate of soda is mechanicallv mixed with the product during the grinding to
neutralize the free acid, the quantity required for the neutralization being
ascertained by a test of the aluminous cake.
3U,ll,0—June 22, 1SS6. C. SEMPER. Process of making a sulphate of alumina

compound.

A basic compound containing basic sulphate of alumina and sulphate of
magnesia and water is produced by treating a neutral or slightly basic solution
of sulphate of alumina with the oxide, carbonate, or bicarbonate of magnesia.

!,!,3,e8.'>— December SO, 1890. H. W. SHEPARD. Process of making alum cake.

Sutficient sulphuric acid is added to bauxite or other aluminous material to
form basic sulphate of alumina, when an alkaline or alkaline earthy sulphide,
as impure calcium sulphide, is added to the hot pasty mass and mixed there-
with in quantity sufficient to reduce the soluble iron to the ferrous state. The
mass is then diluted with water and the dissolved sulphate separated from the
insoluble impurities and concentrated.

526,205— September 18, 1891,. J. V. SKOGLUND. Aluminous cake and process qf

making same.

An aluminous cake free from ferric iron and consisting of sulphate of alumina,
ferrous iron, an excess of a stannous compound, and a stannic compound, is
produced by reducing the greater portion of the iron in a ferruginous sulphate
of alumina solution by means of a weaker reducing agent, such as sulphurous
acid or a sulphite, and then finishing the reduction with any stannous com-
pound as stannic oxide.

OTHER ALUMS.

222,162— December 2, 1879. C. V. PETRAEUS. Improvement in processes for man-
ufacturing alumina and carbonate of soda.
See Group II, Sodium Compounds. •

223,1,1,2— January 13, 1880. R. A. FISHER. Preparing a sizing material used by

paper makers.

A neutral compound consisting essentially of sulphate of alumina and zinc is
made by treating a solution of sulphate of alumina with oxide of zinc.

I)I(;p:st of patents relating to chemical industries.

176

tt.^.Ui—Jnmmni IS. ism. R. A. FISHER. Mnnu/aetHn qfa whtte compound /or
paper makrrn' iiiv,

A wliitloii iif Mil|ilinte ot nlimilnn, oliiiilncd fMm nlumlnoun earth* conMln-
liiK Iron. I» tmiii'il with a rwliu'liix ukuiii to convert ferric Into (crrou* mlla.and
v*ien with oxlile o( ilnc to noutrallxe the free acid.

ttg.mj—JuHf IS. IfiSO. \V., T., A J. CHADWICK AND J. W. KYNA8TON.

Proern/ur Ihr piirf/lnillon i\fat»mina, baujctte, rtc.

The iron in alnnilnous ninteriiiln, swh «» bauxite or clay. Is converted Into a
soluble oxniiile hv trentinK with n Holiition of oxalic acid, and the oxalate In
then removed liy nitration and decantation.

W».M7— ^aniinry I, 188S. C. V. PETRABC8. JIanMfadurt of ponu tiiKifcrmu
alHm.

Poms zinclfen>ua alum i« produced by adding carbonate ot dnc to molten
■ulphate of alumina.

t(lt.S7»-Aiit)ii>t 7, ISSa. K. OARDAIR AND T. OLADY8Z. .Vnn<i/aelure <tf
anhiftirouii tUuminn,

Crystal." of chlorhydr»to of aluminum are preparcil by the reaction of chlor-
hydric acid upon • aolution of aluminum tulpnate, and then decomposed by
heat.

»0I.I7U-July 1. ISSi. A. E. SPENCER. Desiccniing alum.

It is melted and drie<i in a revolving cylinder by heat externally applied, the
altim flowing evenly over the Interior surface of the cylinder.

Slt,S9i— February U, tSSS. C. V. PETRAEU8. Man u/aeture qf alumina bjf paper-
mill sludge.

A product fn-e fr<im Iron is produced from ferruginous aluminous material by
mixing same with the sj^ent soda-liquor from wood-pulp manufacture, evapo-
rating down, nnd burning.

GROUP v.— COAL-TAR PRODUCTS. See Group XVIII.

GROUP VI.— CYANOGEN COMPOUNDS.

CYANIDES.

tet.aot—Dtccmber 19, ISSt. L. MOND. .Vami/arture of cyanogen compound* and
ammonia.

In the manufacture of barium cyanide and ammonia, briquettes are formed of
•n Intimate mixt\ire of carbon. cnrl)onate or oxide of l>ariiim. and a refractory
basic absorbent— such h.s mafincsin— nnd hcate<l in a reducing flame before
exposure to nitrogen, or the niixlure is heated in ma.ss, cooled, and broken up.
The nitrogenous gii.«es arc passc<l through the hot liarium salts, thereby cooling
them, and then tli rough fresli layers of barium salts and cartwn at the "tempera-
ture require<l to form cyanogen compounds.

V7.8Sl—May 1.1. 18SS. A. T. SCHUESSLEE. Proeea qf treating tpeni Umefiom nag

trorin/or eyanidei.

The soluble substances are extracted by lenihing: the liquor treated with car-
bonic-acid gB-s and the hydrogen sulphide utilized; while the residuum of the
first process is decomposed by the addition of commercial salt of sulphate ot
potash, the precipitate removed, and the liquor evaporated to form salt for the
manufacture ot ferrocyanides.

18LS79— October IS, 189S. G. T. BEILBY. ProceM of mating ci/anides.

Ammonia is passed through a liquid-fused mixture of nnhvdrous alkali
cyanide, and carbon. The gases may be led through secondary retorts contain-
ing alkalized charcoal at a suitable temperature for the formation of cyanide.

t07, 7iS— October SI, 189S. D. J. PLAYFAIR. Prncei-f nj making ojanidet.

A sulphocyanate (suiphocyauide or thiocyniiate) is heated to from S00° to
1,000° F. with a metal fusible at the said temperature, of the class comprising
lead and zinc, producing u sulphide insoluble in the evanide. The cyanide is
■eparated by settling or lixlviation.

SOifiSr—Deermber S, 1S9S. W. SIEPERMAXN. Proce»» of and apparalut for
mating cyanides. '

Ammonia is passed into a mixture of alkaline carbonates and powdered char-
coal, heated to a dark-red heat, and the heat is subsequently raised to a bright
red. Cyanide of potassium is separated from Its aqueous solution by gradudly
Increasing the percentage ot carbonate ot potash or caustic potash.

ft«S9t— September tS. 189i. C. T. J. VAUTIN. Procen of making cyanides u/alka-

In the^manufactnrc ot cvanides of the alkaline metals from fcrrocvanides by
the substitution of an alkaline metal for the iron. Instead ot potassiuiri or sodiuin
an alloy of the alkaline metal with lead is used, and the resulting fused evanide
is separated from the residue of iron and lead.

5S9.S7»—itay U, ms. W. McD. M ACKEV. Process qf making potassium cyanide.
A carbonaceous and potassium mixture Is treated in a vertical furnace having
two setsot tuyeres at different levels and an intermediate outlet tor the cyanide
Taporfi.

Sil.oee—June 18, 189S. H. Y. CASTNER. Process of making cyanides.

PrcTlonaly or separately made alkaline metal Is treated with nascent nltnxren
and carbon. ^

SiS.as—Jaly SO, 1895. H. Y. CASTNER. Process of and apparatus for maUna
alkali cyanides. •■•■ j ~v

A molten alkali metal, as sodium, at a temperature of 300° to 400° C. is Intro-
ducwl into an ntmosphcreof anhydrous ammonia in the proportionsof 23 pounds
of alkali metal for each IT pounds of ammonia gas. The amid produced is
withdrawn and passed through carb<m heated to redness.

Sie,3t3— September 17. 1S9S. C. HOEPFNER. Anode for electrolytic apparatus.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
Si8,068—OeUiber u, 189S. B. HUNT. Proeets qf recovering cyanides.

A solution of zinc sulphate containing some free sulphuric acid Is added to
spent cyanide liquor, the supernatant liquor is drawn ofl, more than sulllcient
sulphuric acid is added to the precipitate to decomi>ose the zinc evanide. the
mixture is distilled, and the distillate washed and passed through two caustic
alkali sciltitions, the first containing sufficient alkali to combine with a part only
of the hydrocyanic acid, and the other on excess ot alkali lor absorbing the
remainder. "

Se7.5Sl— Septembers, iS9e. J. RA8CHEN. Process of maHnp cyanides.

A sulphocyanide, as of sodium or calcium, mixed with water, is heated in the
presence ot an oxidizing agent, as nitric acid, and the evolved gases pn^-cd

through a solution of caustic alkali or alkaline earth, whereby the hydroryanle
ai>d Is alwnrbed. The unabwirlied nitric-oxide gas Is reeunvcrted lnu> nitric
•old with air and steam.

Se7.Mt-Sr,,lemherH,l8»a. J. RA>*CHRN. Proccf qf making cyanides.

Referring to No. fi«7,.Wl. the evolved oxidized gosra ar.- |Kiwd through a
heated-water si'rubber. where the nitrons fumes are r<'talne<l. then lntubi«-
qiient obtalnmcnt of eyanide. then through or In contact with lime water U>
obtain cyanide, the escaping nitric oxide being reconverted Inbi nitric acid.

S»9.10!^nclober «, IS9«. J. A. KENDALL. Process qf ami mparatiufor making
cyanides.

The heating Teasel, which may be made ot nickel or sheet cobalt, with a
platinum dls<'1iarge flue, is inclosed in an outer roswl wltb bydrotcn gu clrcti-
lating through the intervening space.

669.Stli— October IS, 1806. P. DANCKWARDT. Process of and apparatus for i/ro-
ducing cyanides.

SccOninp X, Electro-chemistry.
S7e,tgl,— February t, 1897. 3. D. (ilLMOITR. Process of making eyanide*.

A mixture of carbonaceous material and an alkali at a high temperatnre la
treated with atmospheric nitrogen, forming a cyanide, which is lixiviated, and
cartsin dioxide and nitrogen, obtained from comliustlon of cartxin in atmoa-
pherlc air, is paased through the .solution while ut a high temiierature, forming
hydrocyanic acid and a CHrlxinate of the ba.se of the evanide. The said acid
and carNmate are separated, and the carljonate dried and mixed with carbona-
ceous material in a fresh operaticm.and the nitrogen, frce<i from the wid carbon
dioxide, is passed therethrough while maintained at a high temperature.

S77.SS7— March t, 1897. H. Y. CASTNER. Process of making cyanide.

Molten alkali metal is iiercolated through carbon heated to redness in the
presence of a current of free nilrog(;n. The molten alkali metal enters the
retort and the cyanide Is conducted out through trapjied pipes.

S79,6S9— March SO. 1897. H. W. CROWTHER, E. C. ROfWlTER, O. S. ALBRIGHT,
AND J. J. H(X>D. Process of and apparatus for making cyanide*.
In the manufacture of ferrocyanides the iron is cleaned bv treating it with an
alkaline or alkaline-earth sulphide. It Is then mixed with a sulphocyanide
and the mixture dried in the presence of an inert gas, as limekiln gases, to pre-
vent oxidation.

.'^79.988— Aprils, 1897. C. KELLNER. Process of producing melaate cyanides.
See Group X, Electrochemistry.

190,217— September SI, 1897. A. FRANK AND N. CARO. Process of making

cyanides.

(;arl)idcs of a suitable metal— as a mttal of the alkalis— are heated to a red
heat and subjected to the action of nitrogen saturated with steam. A caustic
alkali or an alkali carbonate may be mixed with the carbide.

59I..'i7.'i— October IS, 1S97. J. R. MOISE. Process of making cyanides.

Boride of nitrogen is pro<liiced by calcining a mixture of biborate of soditun
100 pounds, and hydrocnoride of ammonium l.iO pounds, lixiviating with boil-
ing water acidified with hydrochloric acid, and filtering. A mixture of the
boride of nitrogen thus obtained with carbonate of potassium and carbon is
heated to a dark red, forming cyanides and imrates, which are separated by
crystallization. Fcrrocyanide is produced direct by adding iron filings to the
mixture.

591,7SO— October It, 1897. W. BAIN. Process qf and apparatus for eteOrotyxing.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

B96,6l,l— January i, 1898. H. R. VIDAL. ProceM of making cyanides.

Cyanogen compounds are produced by heating phospham (PN.H) with a
carbonate, e. g.. phospham, 6 parts, potassium carbonate. 19 parts. The addition
of coal carbon pnxliiees a cyanide instead of a cvanate, and iron a ferr<K-yanide.
Sulphocyanides are obtaineil in the presence o^ sulphur, and ga.seous cyanogen
by heating a mixture of phosjiham and dry natural potafwium oxalate.

605.69!,— .hinc li. 1S98. H. .?. BLACKMORE. Process of making cyanides.

Metallic sulphides, as potassium sulphide, are converted intocvanidee, sulpho-
cyanides and ferrocyanides by introducing a metallic carbide, as granular iron
carbide, into the molten sulphide and passing nitrogen gas therethrough.

e07,S<r7—JiUy 19, 1898. P. DANCKWARDT. Process of and apparatus for maUtui
ferrocyanides.

A mixture of an alkali sulphocyanide, as that of sodium, with lime, ehareoal,
and a carbide or carbides, preferably calcium carbide and iron carbide, is
heated, leached with water, and the ferrocyanide separated.

607.881— July 36. 1898. H. REICHARDT AND J. BUEB. Process of making cua-

nidetifrom molasses lyes.

Cyanide of ammonium is produced direct from molasses or molasses lyes by
distilling with exclusion of air and maintaining the gases at about 1,100° C.
until cyonide of ammonium is formed, by passing them through highly heated
fire-brick flues. The cyanogen is separated as terrocvanide by leading the
gases through an iron-salt solution.

eiS.709—AprU IS, 1899. A. FRANK AND N. CARO. Process of nuMng cyanide*.
A carbide, as an alkaline metal carbide, is mixed with an oxide ot a metal
only, and heated in the presence ot nitrogen, free or ixiund. It is heated to a
temperature below the melting jxiint of the cyanide until absorption of nitro-
gen ceases, and then the temperature Is raised to the melting point.

Sft5,964— -Vav SO, 1899. J. BC EB. Process of adraeting cyanogen from coat go*.

The gas, before going to the ammonia scrubbers, is passed throtigh a <x>neen-
trated 8«>lutioii of a metalli<t salt— as chloride or sulphate ot iron— thereby pre-
cipitating all of the cyanogen and part ot the ammonia, and leaving the greater
part of the ammonia with the gas.

eU.671— January 16, 1900. W. WITTER. Proeets qf producing solution qf cyano-
gen haliile.

A solution of cyanogen halide— such as chloride or bromide— Is produced by
clectrolyzing. without a iliaphragni and with inert electnxies. a .solution con-
taining an alkali eyanide. an alkali halide, such a.s chloride or brximide. and the
salt ot a metal— OS magnesium— which torma an insoluble hydroxide.

6U.78t— February e, 1900. J. Bl'EB. Procet* qf making hydrocyanic add.

Gases resulting from the destructive distillation of organic matters, eiwled and
treed of ammonia, are sulijccii^d to contact with alcohol, as in an alcohol tower,
and the alcoholic solution of bydn)ryanicaeid is subjectwl to fractional distilla-
tion. The hydrocyanic-acid gas is separated from the alcohol by reaction with
ilcoholic caustic alkali.

176

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

651.SiS—Jttne U.1900. A. DZIUK. Process of making cyanides.

Cyanidesand ferrocyanldes of the alkaline earth metals, including magnesium,
are "produced bv subjecting carbides of thesaidmetalsinthenaseent state to the
action of a superheated current of pure nitrogen, as by passing heated nitrogen
over the carbide while in a fluid state in an electric furnace.

FERROCYANIDES.

Ul— October 2S. 1837. H. STEPHENS. (,Beisstw: S—AprU 21. 1S5S.) Imprmed

manufacture of coloring m<Uter.

Prus.siate of potash or soda is produced by passing the gases evolved from the
distillation of animal matters, or other matters that yield nitrogen and hydro-
carbons, direct into a mass of alkali in a state of fusion, and then into a solution
of alkali conUiined in separate vessels. Prussian blue of commerce is digested
In strong acid to render it more soluble in oxalic acid, and then dissolved m
oxalic acid as a final process.
6,U9—Januarv iS. 18US. M. KALBFLEISCH. Improved mode of treating anlrml

matters prevloM to calcination for the manufacture ofprussiales nf potash or soda.

Animal matter of any kind is dissolved in caustic potash or soda and dried
before calcining.
til. 51.7— December 9, 18:9. J. TCHERNIAC AND U. GUNZBURG. Improvement

in processes of and apparatus for making ferrocyanldes.

Carbon di-sulphide and an ammoniacal solution are mixed under heat, and the
resultant sulphocvanidc of ammonium is mixed with lime under heat; a solii-
ble carbonate or" sulphate, as of potassium, is added to the solution; and
finally the resultant sulphocyanide is mixed with lime. carb»n, and iron, and
heated to a red heat.
giS. 661— August 16, 1881. T. RICHTERS. Manufacture of potassium ferroeyardde.

Nitrogenous material is moistened with a solution of carbonate of potassiuin,
dried without combustion while in contact with carbonic acid, then heated in
a retort to drive off the volatile ingredients, and the residuum lixiviated with
iron; the prussiate of potash being then separated from the liquor, which can
be used for moistening fresh material.
159,802— June 20, 1882. H. BOWER AND W. L. ROWLAND. Process of obtaining

ferrocyanldes from gas liquor.

The ammoniacal liquor is treated with iron or a ferric salt, and then with
lime (and the ammonia distilled off), and the ferrocyanldes ar« extracted from
the sediment by the addixion of an alkaline salt, such as potas.sium or sodium
carbonate.
t59,908-June 20, 1882. C. C. PARSONS AND E. F. CRUSE. Process of obtaining

cyanides.

Iron in the form of a salt or in the insoUible form of hydrate, carbonate, oxide,
or sulphide, or of metallic iron, is added to ammoniacal gas liquor in the absence
of acia and without neutralizing the ammonia, and before the ammonia is
removed, to convert thccvanidesof ammonium into ferrocyanldes of ammonia.
Lime is then added, the ammonia distilled off, and the ferrocyanldes of calcium
converted into prussian blue by the addition of acid and a salt of iron.

t91,16S— January 1. 1831,. C. DE VIGNE. Manufacture of ferrocyanides.

Coal gas containing cyanogen or hydrocyanic acid is cooled and deprived of
tarry products and then passed through a mixture of iron and an alkaline salt, a«
iron" filings and crystallized carbonate of .soda, the mixture being subsequently
washed and the solution evaporated to obtain the ferrocyanide.

S03,l.S7—August 12. 1881,. H. KUNHEIM AND H. ZIMMERMANN. Process of

making ferrocyanides.

Ferrocvanide of calcium potassium is produced by precipitating ferrocyanide
of calcium from its solution by means of chloride of potassium. Spent materials
used in gas purification may be used.

ill.21,8— February 17, 1885. H. BOWER. Manufacture of ferrocyanide of potas-
sium.
A mixture of nitrogenous animal matters, potassium carbonate, and iron is

heated and the resultant cake or melt treated with water and carbon dioxide.

962.236— May S. ISSi. J. VAN RUYMBEKE. Obtaining cyanide and ferrocyanide
from tank water.

A solution of alkali, as soda or potash, holding finely divided barytii in sus-
pension, is added to tank water which has been prepared from animal substances
bv the action of steam at a high heat and under pressure, and the resulting .solu-
tion evaporated to about 20 i)er cent of the moisnire, when the residue is sub-
jected todestructive distillation at red heat and the ammonia generated is forced
to pass downward through the porous mixture of red-hot alkali, carbon, and
cyanides already formed.

i65,600— December 22. 1891. W. L. ROWLAND. Process of recovering cyanides

from coal gas.

A soluble salt of iron is added to the water used for extracting the ammonia
from the gas passing through the scrubbers, in proportion to remove cyanides,
but insiimcient to remove sulphides, thus forming soluble ferrocyanide of
ammonia along with the ammonia compounds. The ammonia is boiled off and
the residue treated with lime to give ferrocyanide of calcium, which is treated
wilhaii alkaline chloride or sulphate, and the resulting double salt decomposed
with an alkaline carbonate to form an alkaline ferrocyanide.

556.130— March 10, 1896. H. BOWER. Procem of making prussiates.

Prussiate of pota.sh or soda is produced from sulphocyanide of iron by forming '■
cyanide of pota.s«ium, adding to this the sulphocyanide during fusion, and then
cooling, lixiviating, and crystallizing.

B60.Hi—Uay 26, 1896. H. BOWER. Process of recovering cyanogen compounds

from gas liquors.

An acidified solution of a copper salt is added to gas liquor containing soluble
ferrocvanide and sulphocvanidc and freed of ammonia, to form insoluble ferro-
cyanide and sulphocyanide of copper, and metallic iron is then added to decom-
ji'ose the precipitate and form a .sohition of sulphocyanide of iron. If the last
step is conducted with heat and pressure, there is produced sulphide of copper
ana ferrocyanide of iron.

«2I,,SSS—May I, 1899. W. SCHRODER. Process of making yellow prussiate of

potash.

The gaseous productsof the destructive distillation of coal are passed through
an aqueous solution of protochloride of iron, and the solution is then distilled
with milk of lime to precipitate calcium ferrocyanide. The excess of lime in
the residual sf)lution is first precipitated: then ferric chloride is added to precip-
itate the remaining calcium ferrocyanide, and the entire nrecipitiite is treated
with a solution of potassium carbonate t*) precipitate calcium carbonate and
ferric hydrate, when the solution is concentrated to crystallize out the yellow
prussiate of potash.

OTHER CYANIDES.

570, ISO— November S, 1896. J. J. HOOD AND A. C. SALAMON. Manufacture of

cyanogen compounds.

Carbon bisulphide, ammonia, and a fixed base or bases, as peroxide of man-
ganese and lime, are heated together in such proportions that the products of
the reactions of the carbon bisulphide and ammonia combine with the hxed
base or bases, forming sulphocyanide and sulphide of the base or bases, the
whole of the ammonia being utilized in the production of sulphocyanic acid.
578,908— March 16, 1897. G.J.ATKINS. Chlorocyanid salts and process of making

same.

A new series of compounds, chlorocyanide salts, efficient agents for leaching
ores consist of an alkali and a compound of cyanogen ftised together, at as low
a temperature as possible, with one or more bases; as, for example, potassium
ferrocyanide 1 part and sodium chloride 2 parts.

GROUP VII.— WOOD DISTILLATION.

Sa.mi-March SI, 1863. M. A. LE BRUN-VIRLOY. Improvement in drying and

carl}onizing wood, peat, and other fuel.

First the material is introduced at one side or end of a furnace and with-
drawn from the other side or end in a state suitable for use as fuel; second, the
doors or openings are hermetically closed; third, regulated taps, valves, and
registers control the admission and exit of air, gas, and other volatile products;
fourth a portion of the volatile products is collected and removed after the
whole or part of it-s caloric has been utilized; fifth, the material and d<5bris of
little value and the combustible gases are utilized; and, sixth, the material to
be treated is subjected first to a low temperature and then to a gradually
increasing temperature.
1,9,21,7— August 8, 1865. A. H. EMERY. Improvement in the manufacture of pyro-

ligneous acid.

In the distillation of wood in the manufacture of pyroligneous acid, steam is
admitted in large quantities, while the heat is not raised sutticiently to char
the wood until the wood is thoroughly dried and a large portion of the spirits
of turpentine and resin taken out, when the heat is raised to commence rapid
charrnig, the steam being nearly or quite shut off.

62,097— February 12, 1867. P. H. VANDER WEYDE. Improvement in the manu-
facture of white lead.

For use in the manufacture of white lead, acetic acid is produced from the
distillation of wood, and at the end of the operation the remaining charcoal is
transformed into carbonic acid by blowing air into the bottom of the still. The
precipitate is treated with a hot alkaline solution of quicklime, or its equiva-
lent, and the filters washed out with lime water.

93,817— August 17, 1869. L. D. GALE AND I. M. CATTMAN. Improvement in
ihe moMiufacture of sugar of lead and acetic acid.
See Group I, Acetic Acid.

118,7 S7— September 12, 1S71. C. J. T. BURCEY. Improvement in the manufacture

of acetate of lime.

Superheated vapors of pyroligneous acid and dry slaked lime are agitated
together. The empyreumatic vapors are condensed, the gaseous products of
condensation being "utilized for combustion in the furnace.

lSl,312—September 10, 1872. J. D. STANLEY. Improvement in 2>rocesses and

apparatus for producing oils, etc.

Vapor from the distillation of pine wood is passed into condensing water, the
uncondensed vapor passes off as an inflammable gas, the floating oil is separated,
and the condensing water and acids flow off as waste.

18i,898—^'ovember 28, 1876. H. M. PIERCE. Apparatus and process for treating

wood for charcoal and other purposes.

To make concentrated pyroligneous acid the hot volatile products are ex-
hausted from a charcoal kiln and compressed until the acid vapors are lique-
fied, the temperature being maintained at such height that the diluting water
will be separated and permitted to escape in a vaporized condition.

1S5, lU— December 6, 1876. E. R. SQUIBB. Manufacture of acetic acixl.

Wood in a retort is subjected to the action of heat in an oven, whereby, the
temperature being even and controllable, an acid practically free from tar is
obtained.

300,381,— June 17 , 1881,. J. A. M.4.THIEU. instillation, of wood.

The vapcrs resulting from the carbonization of the upper portion of a mass of
material in a retort are partially condensed by passing the vapors downward
through the uncarboniied portion of the material.

353,998— Decanbcr 7, 1886. T. W. WHBELER. Process of and apparatus fur dis-

iiXing uood.

Wood is first subjected to distillation with steam under low pressure and tem-
perature, thereby softening the wood and driving off the turpentine vapors,
which are passed into a bath of limewater, warmed and agitated by a current
of steam; when the wood is softened the steam valve and turpentine-vaporvalve
are closed, the oil valve opened, and the temperature raised to nearly 400° F.,
thereby quit;kly running off the creosote oil and pyroligneous acid, which are
separated until they run off of the same gravity, when the tar valve is opened
and the temperature gradually lowered until the tar and gas are run off.

i«5,7rr — July.lO, 1388. G, RUMPF, Manufacture of acetone.

See Group XVIII, Ketones.
388,529— August 28, 1883. F. S. CLARK. Process of obtaining creosote, etc.

The process consists in mingling a cau.stic-soda solution containing creosote or
analogous phenoloid bodies with pyroligneous acid, thereby ot-casioning a
reaction between the mingled bodies, and depositing creosote, and forming
acetate of sixia by the union of the soda solution and the acetit acid of the
pyroligneous-acid solution.

393,079— November 20, 1388. G. RUMPF. Manufacture of acetone.
See Group XVIII, Ketones.

1,07,1,1,2— July 23, 1839. E. MEYER. Process of obtaining methyl alcohol from
wooitpulp lyes.
See Group XVIII, Alcohols.

1,90,1,97— January 21,, 1893. F. H. & R. H. PICKLES. Process <tf purifying

pyrolignites.

Pyrolignites in a liquid state arc purified of tarry matters by treatment with
the carbonaceous residue olHained in the manufacture of j)russiate of potash.or
alkaline carbonaceous matter prepared by carbonizing animal matter with
carbonates or hydrates of tlie alkalis.

{

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

177

iOLMl—AHgutfU. tau. F. J. BEKUMANN. UrlluHl i\f dMmiHH uixxl mute.

The method of mnnufnrtiirlnK woo<l vlnegnr fnini wcmkI wantc, «iirh a* naw-
(luiit or ohi{>M, coiiHiHtJ* In rniivi-rliiiK Ihe Kainv Into bI(M-krt l>y i>rfKsiiru up to
Hliout three hnndred ntnioKphiTen, oxpremlnK wnter eoiitAlniMl in ttio wood,
then carbonliInK the bUK'ki in retorta, an<l prei'lpitatlng the viw«» Kenurated.

MS,Mt— March It. IS9S. O. POR8CH. /VoorM tf/ ttiakiug aedone.

8«e Uroup XVIII, Ketono.
tn,)M—Ffbrunr\illl.l><S7. K. H^E^t.. Tcrpcne alcohol.

8e« Group XVIII, Alcohols.

Mf.Wi— .WnrrA M, 1«>9. F. W. J. F. SCHMIDT. Xetkod q/ preparing wood /or

dry diMttlation.

The wood i» cut croaawlae of the Kmin Into thin lamlnn, and then dlatiUed.
ti8.SS9—May t. 1900. H. O. CHl'Tr. Prucett iij making aedone.

8m Group XVIII, Ketonea.

RESINS AND TURPENTINE.

ItMt— March K, ISIS. N. U. CHAFEE. Improvement in the man^fac^ure o/roHn

and tpiriti of turpentine.

In the manufacture of white rcain and white npirita of turpentine from the
pim of pines, iiteam la conducted in and mixed with the irum (n a still and then
pawed through a metal heater.

t,OI>t— March IS, 1IH7. K.L.MARTIN. Improvement in re/tulng (urpaiUne.

Splrlta of tur|>entine are refined by the u.ie of alkali and water. u.slng a strong
aolutlon i)f potiishwi and water, not leiw than 12 t^nnd.s to the gallon, and 1
gill t>f alkali to a gallon of splrlta of turpentine.

T.ita—JtUy SO, ISSO. C. J. MEINICKE. Improivment in didiUing tpiriU o/ tur-
pentine.
Crude turpentine Is mixed with grease and soda solution and heated, forming

a aoap, n solutliiu of common salt Is added and the spirits of turpentine distilled,

leaving the resin saponilied ready for soap making.

8,iSS — yuvember i, ISSI. L. S. ROBBINS. Improvement in tanners' oil from rosin.
The product obtained bv distilling a mixture of oil, which has t>een distilled
from resin at about 600° F.. and slacked lime, say about .5 per cent, with the
addition of steam, followed by a second distillation with caustic lime, and fur-
ther treatment of the product with steam.

«,W»— AoivrnVr i, 1851. L. 8. ROBBINS. Improvement in lubricating oil from

rotin.

The product obtained by dLstilllng n mixture of oil. which has been distilled
from resin at nl>out .^60° F., and slacked lime, say about 5 per cent, with the
addition of steam, followed by ii second distillation with caustic lime, and fur-
ther treatment of the product with steam.

8,U)0—Xoiemt>er i. 1811. L. S. ROBBINS. Improrement in distilling acid and

naphtha from rosin.

Resin is melted and heated up to 325° F., or thereabouts, and maintained
l>etween 300° F. and 325° F. until the acid and water arc driven off, when steam
Ls injected and the temperature maintained at 325° F. to throw off the naptitha.

«,49I— .Voeemfcer i. 1811. L. S. ROBBINS. ImprovemaU in paint oil from rosin.

The product obtained by the double redistillation with steam of oil which
baa been distilled from resin at about 660° F. and further treatment of the
product with steam.

9,680— April 19, 18tS. S. L. DANA. Improi-ement in purifying rosin oil.

Realn oil is deodorlxed by combining the fluid formed by the first distillation
of realn or realn oil with .slacked lime or other alkaline, earthy or equivalent
metallic base, and distilling the compound.

9,75i—May ii. ISSS. M. PAGE. Improvement in processes of distUling rosin oil.

Steam is introduced into the head of the goose-neck so that the vaporized oils
will pass through and be commingled therewith.

W,8i»—Mtty t, laSi. H. HALVOR.SON. Improvement in processes for distilling

rotin oU.

Clay la mixed with resin— 5 parts of clay to 1 part of rosin— and the mixture
distilled: no pitch residuum being left in the retort.

n.eti— March S7, 1860. D. FEHRMAN. Improvementin the manufacture of resin.
Resin is purified by treatment and distillation in a vacuum pan with a small
quantity of water and steam at low temperature, rising from 150° F. to 180° F.

t7,6iS— March 17 , 1860. H.NAPIER. Imprmement in the manufacture of resin.

The crude turpentine is heated in a still until it attains a temperature rather
exceeding that of steam at a pressure of 10 pounds, then steam at said pressure
is caused to permeate and pa.sa through the mass without condensation, until
all the oil of iuri)entine ha-s pa.ssed over, when the heat is raised to 5.t0° to 600° F.
with the continued blowing of steam through the mass at the same pressure.

t8,663—June It, 1860. S. FRAZER. Improvement in distiUalion of oils from resin.
Crude resin la distilled and certain specified quantities of product arc suceea-
alvely drawn off from the receiver of the condenser, the temperature of the
product being successively raised from 74° F. for the first drawing to 132° F. for
the fourth drawing, and then lowered to 106° F. for the fifth drawing.

U,Sllr— September to, 186i. D. HULL. Improvement in extracting rosin and other

substances from pine wood.

Resin is produced direct from pine wood by heating aamc with heated air or
■nperheated steam, the outgoing blast being conveyed to a condenser, where the
spirits of turpentine is collected.

U.UI3— September t!, 1881. O. R. H. LEFFLER. Improvement in distilling turpen-
tine from wood.

Turpentine is distilled direct from wood saturated or thoroughly moistened
with steam or water.

ie.09t— January SI, 186S. A.H.EMERY. Imprm<emcnt in obtaining spirits qf tur-
pentine, oil, resin, and other products from pine wood.

A current of ordinary steam Is passed over and through the wood int*) a con-
denser, the retort being externally heati-d enough to prevent condensation of
steam, the pressure In the i>oiler Ijelng suffliient to give the requisite heat.
When the aplrits of turpentine have i>a.'«ed over, the temperature is increased
tor the remaining products.

•
U,i06—June 17, 186S. D. HULL. Improvement in extracting turpentine and other
products from resinous woods.

Pine or other resinous wood Is distilled under leas than atmospheric preanire.
No. 210 12

l^,tia—Autu0t I, IMS. A. H. EMERY. Improvement in the manufatture of pitch.
Pitch la made from pine wood by one distillation, by beating the bottom ol
the retort lo the requisite degree.

U»,tia—Auguit 8.18ns. A. H. EMERY. Improremenl in the maitu/aeture q/

turpentine, etc.

Wood is distilled under more than atmospheric pmsora, mj, np to 2 or 3
atmospheres, without the application of ateam or raperhealM Heam, to secure
an Incraued production of oil of turpentine and resin bclora dtrtmctlTe dlstUU-
tlonbeRins.

eo,lS*— September t», laei. J. JOHNSON. Improvement in the manufacture of

spirits lif turpentine.

Water, steam, air or gases, and solvents are caused to circalate among the
wood In suitable reoopucies at a temperature sufflctently low to sacnra the
extractive tereblntblnates and resins free from empyreonutlc odofs. The wood
Is placed orera strattun of water which condeiues the volatile prodncts ol Ibe
wood and fixes the resin. Two boiierri are succeadrely oaed to eootumlxe the
heat and save waste of tereblnthine products. Suitable soluble salts are added
to raise the boiling point and increase the temperature for extraction. Wood Is
compressed after aleaming to eliminate oleo-rmiu.

51,081— April 17, 1866. J. A. PASTORELLI. Improvedmethodof extracting turpen-
tine from wood.

In the distillation of resinous woods for the extraction of essence of tarpen-
tine, etc., the wood la placed in a boiler over a fire together with water to form
steam to prevent the burning of turpentine formed.

89,i9S—Aprill7,lsea. 3. MERRILL. Improvement in the manufacture of rosin oil.
Resin oil is deodorized by gradually raising the temperature and distilling off
the odorous naphthaly oil until the oil coming over n-achea from 18° U> 14°
Baum4's hydrometer, when the distillation is stopped, the remaining oil being
vlrtualiy free from odor.

100,958— March IS, 1870. J. TREAT. Improvement in the manufacture of rotin oil.

Resin oil is refined and bleached by adding from 2 to 4 ounces of caustic soda

per gallon of oil and a small (|uantlty of gum benzoin, and distilling. Steam

IS introduced into the worm to commingle with the vapor before condeijsatlon.

130,198— August to, 187t. J. D. STANLEY. Improvement in distilling and purify-
ing turpentine from wood.

The vapor from the distillation of pine wood U introduced into a rerelTer con-
taining the vapor generated from water or other liquid impregnated or satu-
rated with lime, which vapors combine and condense.

lS9,!,Ot—May n, 1878. A. K. LEE. Improvement in bleaching resins.

Resin is reduced to a powder or small lumps and bleached by the direct action
of steam and heat while the mass is under agitation.

HS.lSl-December i, 1S7S. S.L.COLE. Improvement In the production of turpen-
tine from sawdust.
Spirits of turpentine Is produced from sawdust by destructive distillation by

the application of fire direct to a retort containing the same.

179.960— July IS, 1878. A. ROCK. Improvement in production and treatment qf

resin.

In the distillation of scrap turpentine and the production of resin therefrom
the condensable vapors are eliminated while under treatment in a retort during
distinct and separate meltings, or exposures to a melting heat, followed in each
instance by an exposure to a cooler temperature, and the vapors are condensed,
whereby colopholk' acid is prevented from being unduly developed in the resin:
the vapors are eliminated by means of currents of air sweeping over the tur-
pentine or resin while successively melted and cooled.

180,ie7— August 1, 1S76. L. J. DUROUX. Improvement in purifying spirits qf

turpentine.

Powdered alum, or alum water. Is mixed with spirits of turpentine — 2 to S per
cent of powdered alum or a solution of ft to 10 per cent of alum In water eqiul
to the turpentine — and agitated, and the mixture allowed to settle, when the
purified spirit Ls drawn off.

19l,,701— August 28, 1877. A. MARTIN. Improvement in the manttfaeture qf

bretcer' s pitch.

Brewer's pitch is made direct from crude turpentine, using oil of resin Instead
of tallow^ or other oils, by first melting the turpentine and drawing off a portion,
reducing the remainder by extracting s|>lrlts and acids Iwfore adding the oil of
resin and ocher, and, when drawing off the mass through a strainer, adding
thereto a portion of turpentine first drawn off.

tO0,168— February IS, 1878. D. M. BUIE. (Seitsue: t0,SSa-^une S, ISSS.)
Process of manufacturing oils from organic substances.
See Group XVI, Essential Oils.

tit.OlS— May Ii, 1881. J. A. McCREARY. Process of and apparatus for distilling

turjteidine.

The crude material is diluted with a suitable mcnstrum. as spirits of turpen-
tine: an alkali added, the excess of the latter precipttattHl, filtered, and then
distilled: and pending the pnx^ess of distiUutiou the unoonden5e<l products are
conducted from the worm to the still and forced through the liquid contents of
the latter.

t76,981— May 1, 1888. L. PRADON. Method of and apparatus for the manufacture

of oil from resinous wood.

Pine oil, a mobile transparent liquid, CtMu- produced bv distilling realnons
wood at a temperature of about 400° C. It is mixed with petroleiun or coal oil
to form an illuminating oil.

e77.SOS—May 15, ISSS. H. M. PIERCE. Process of and apparatus for the recovery
of turpentine and other wood products, and for the manufacture of charcoal.
The vapors from wood distillation are subjected to the action of a spray of

water, whereby the oils and resinous matters are separated, and the supernatant

oily matter is then drawn <^ff.

V7,S06—May IS. ISSS. H.M.PIERCE. Proeeu of and apparatus for the mamtfae-
ture qf turpentine.

Wood Is subjected In a closed chamber to the action of heated gases and steam,
and the gases and vapors withdrawn and condensed.

t8i,S«7— .'September i, ISSS. L. BELLINGRATH. Process of mcamfaeturing rotbk

and spirits of turpentine.

Crude turpentine is melted and heated by steam heat to a temperature suffl-
dent lo volatilize the spirit which is driven off and condensed, tAe resin being
passed through sieves and retained heated and in a liquid state by steam heat
until all the water and vaporlzable Impurities are dispelled.

.178

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

Sa.srs-Attgust IS, ISSS. D. J. OGILVY. Eoiin oil.

As a new article of manufacture, resin oil of commerce treated with and
containing an alkaline salt of sodium or potassium sufficient to wholly or par-
tially neutralize the resinous acids, say from H to 2i per cent of commercial
caustic soda.

SSe.lSS—July 17, 188S. E.KOCH. Process oj disHUing pine wood for the produc-
tion of crude dry turpaitiiie and pine tar.

The pine oil is extracted by dry distillation; the distillate treated with milk
of lime and agitation; the mixture settled; the oil and lye or other impurities
combined therewith separated; the oil agitated with dilute sulphuric acid to
remove the last traces of alkali; and the oil finally distilled.

Sm.iSt— October 2. 18SS. F.S.CLARK. Pine-oil product.

An oily body, li^ht in color, sp. gr. heavier than water, not distilling over below
500° F., hot volatile at ordinary temperatures, not flashing when heated under
350° F., and becoming solid between zero and 32° F., is produced by the fractional
distillation and treatment of pine oil. (Process No. 390,454.)

Sm.USi— October t. iSSS. F. S. CI>ARK. Pine-oil product.

An oily body, sp. gr. at 68° F. of 0.856, completely volatilizing if soaked
in paper, boiling at 326° F.. produced from the distillation and treatment of
pine oil. (Process No. 390,454. )

SSO.iSi— October t, 1888. F. S. CLARK. Procest of refining pine oil.

The process consists in fractionally distilling pine oil and separating the frac-
tions at or about 540° F., and in separately treating said fractions by two or more
fractional distillations and treatments with caustic soda and one or more treat-
ments with sulphuric acid. (Products Nos. 390,451 and 390,452.)

195,91,1— December U, 1888. J. B. UNDERWOOD. Process of dittUUng turpentine.
A refined petroleum is mixed with crude turpentine and the mixture dis-
tilled, thereby obtaining an increased yield of spirit, and toughening the resin
left as a residuum.

S95,7S1— January 8, 1889. E. A. BEHRENS. Bleaching and refining resins and

other substances.

Resins are first dissolved in a volatile substance, having a low boiling point,
such as naphtha, the solution mixed with an alkali to separate the impurities,
the alkali and impurities removed, the solution mixed with a suitable bleach-
ing agent and the latter removed, and finally the resin separated by evapora-
tion of the solvent and the latter recovered. The movements of the solutions
are controlled by the compression and exhaustion of the air.

49*, Bki— April 18, 189S. G. COL. Process of treating crude resins and their resi-
dua.
The heated crude products are stirred, then run into settling tanks and

settled, and the upper liquid portion decanted and distilled until the volatile

matters have passed into a condenser.

e08,608— November Ik, 1893. K. L. ETHERIDGE. Mantifacture of rosin.

Bluing (indigo) is mixed with turpentine and distilled to produce a high-
grade resin, and eradicate the coloring matter imparted by mixing the "virgin "
and the "yearling" dips.

568,258— September 22, 1896. V. J. KUESS. Process of and apparatus for distiUing
fatty substances.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

eSl,7i9— August 21, 1899. A. MULLER-JACOBS. Manufacture of substances from

rosin oUs.

The invention consists in the products resulting from and in the process of
producing from resin oil an oil u-seful as a lubricant and gums or resinous sub-
stances useful as substitutes for shellac, by treating the resin oil with sulphuric
acid, converting the resulting sulpho-acids into water-soluble alkali salts,
removing the oil, and treating the remaining liquid with acid or with soluble
salt or salts of an alkaline earth or metal forming corresponding precipitates,
and washing and drying the matter precipitated.

eS6,t5t—Atiguat 11, 1900. ¥. G. KLEINSTEUBER. Compound for dissolving
resins.
See Group XV, Other Plastics.

GROUP VIII.— FERTILIZERS.

PRODUCTS.

e.tSlr-March 17, iai9. P. S. AND W. H. CHAPPELL. Improvement in artificial

manures.

The residuum from the manufacture of alum and the residuum from the man-
ufacture of epsom salts are mixed with sulphate of lime, the residuum from the
manufacture of prussiate of potash, bisulphate of soda, common salt, and a
composition resulting from the treatment of bones with gas liquor and sul-
phuric acid.

7,0.55 — JanxLary 29, 1850. R. HARE. Preparatimi of animetl and other manure.

Animal material or nitrogenous vegetable matter is treated with mineral
acids to produce a concentrated manure: wood tar, coal tar, or their equivalents
are also added.

I7,39f — May 16, 1857. L. S. ROBBINS. Improvement in fertilizing compounds.

Green sand, containing little or no carbonate of lime, is mixed with superphos-
phate of lime in the proportion of 2 parts of the former to 1 of the latter, and
ground. .

tf,5Ul4 — January II, 1859. D. BRUCE. Improvement in artificial manure.

Animal matter, decomposed to a pulpy mass by standing In closed vessels at a
temperature of 32° to 60° C, is disinfected by mixing therewith charred bitu-
minous shale or a roasted mixture of carbonaceous matter and clay, and then
dried.

tl,.98li— August 9, 1S59. E. BLANCHARD. Improvement in composts.

A mixture of lime, sodium chloride, wood ashes, charcoal, wheat bran, chim-
ney soot, and gypsum.

I6.18i— November 11, 1859. L. HARPER. Improvement in fertilizers.

Peat, muck, or lignite are mixed with sulphate of lime, soda, potash, and
magnesia, and, if desired, with green-sand marl, as a base for fertilizer compo-
sitions; phosphate and biphosphate of lime is added to the bnse, and the mix-
ture impregnated with ammonia, as by admixture of pulpy nitrogenous matter.
16.196— November 22, 1859. J. J. MAPES. Improvenwnt in fertilizers.

One hundred parts by weight of apatite or calcined bones or phosphate of
lime is saturated with sulphuric acid, and after the superphosphate of lime is
formed there is then added 86 parts of Peruvian guano and 20 parts of sulphate
of ammonia.

16,S07—December 10, 1859. J. J. MAPES. Improvement in fertilizers.

The fertilizer product of No. 26,196 is mixed and ground with equal quantities
by weight of dried blood.

26,985— January 31, 1860. L.HARPER. Improvement in fertilizers.

Green-sand marl, after atmo.spheric disintegration, is spread in a layer,
covered with a layer of fish or offal, and the latter covered with marl impreg-
nated with sulphate or nitrate of soda or potash. After decomposition is
advanced, marl mixed with bone du.st dissolved in an excess of sulphuric acid
is added, and sulphate of lime is sprinkled from time to time until decompasi-
tion is completed and no more ammonia is evolved; the mass being repeatedly
turned toward the end, and finally dried.

27,072 — February 7, 1860. A. ROLLAND. Improvaneid in fertilizers.

A mixture of alum, 7 parts; sulphate of iron, 29 parts; sulphate of soda, 36
parts; sulphate of lime, 25 parts; sulphuric acid, 3 parts; all by weight, to be
used direct as a fertilizer, or a solution of the same is sprinkled on manure.
18,516— May 29, 1860. L. STEPHENS. Improvement in fertilizers.

A mixture of decomposed animal matter, 1,200 pounds; animal charcoal, 150
to 200 pounds; sombrero guano, 200 pounds; Peruvian guano, 175 pounds;
ammonium sulphate, 25 pounds; common salt, 100 pounds; and solution of bone
in muriatic acid, 50 gallons.

SS,706 — Noivmber 12, 1861. J. B. HYDE. Improvement in manufacture of manure

from fish.

Dried peat, marl, clay, or plaster is mixed with fish pulp or pumice and the
mixture ground, whereby eliectual pulverizing is secured.

Slf,039— December 24, 1861. ST. J. O'DORIS. Improvement in fertilizers.

A mixture of coal ashes, 75 parts; animal manure, 15 parts; animal matter, 5
parts; and vegetable matter, 5 parts— all in bulk,

Slt,815— April 1,1861. J. M. GALLAGHER. Improved fertilizing composition.

A mixture of liquid animal matter, obtained by condensing the gases and
vapors from the charring or burning of bones, with animal charcoal and sul-
phuric acid.

S9.519— August 11, 1868. G. F. WILSON. Improved fertilizer or manure.

Bone sulphate of lime, the residue from the treatment of bone coal with sul-
phuric acia for the production of phosphate of lime, is mixed with the ammo-
niacal and other bodies condensed in the distillation of the bones.

il, SSI— January 19. 1861,. E. VON NORDHAUSEN. Improved artificial manure.
The residuum of petroleum, known as "still bottoms," is crushed and mixed
with slacked lime and a sulphate of lime produced, to which is added urine,
producing a sulphate or ammonia, and the mass dried.

iS,6Sg—July 26, 186i. W. H. H. GLOVER. Improved fertilizer.

Muck is dried and mixed with the refuse water, gurry, etc., from the manu-
facture of fish oil.

i6,8J,7— March U, 1865. W. D. HALL. Improved manure.
Lobster refuse is desiccated and pulverized.

i6,957— March 11. 1865. J. B. TRIBBLE. Improved composition for preventing dis-
ease in vegetables.

A mixture of wood ashes, 3 pecks; slacked lime, 2 peeks; sulphur, 1 peck; and
sodium chloride, 1 peck (per acre of land; a preventive of potato rot).

1,9,91,5— September 12, 1865. J. D. WHELPLEY. Improved fertilizer.

A mixture of finely pulverized feldspar, feldspathic granite, and other potash-
bearing rock, with gypsum and bone or phosphate of lime.

50,91,0— November U, 1865. O.LUGO. Improved fertilizer.

Leather treated with sulphuric or other acids, boiled, ground, and afterwards
treated with urate of ammonia.

52,8U,— February 27, 1866. J. GOULD. Improved fertilizer.

Mixtures of gas lime, lime, salt, and animal and vegetable or vegeto-animal
matter are fermented, whereby the carbolic acid and carbo-hydrogens of the
gas lime are intimately combined with the lime.

55,871- June 26, 1866. J. AND A. HURSH. Improved fertilizer.
Ocher, either in a raw or burnt' state, is used as a fertilizer.

61,870— Febrxmry 5, 1867. F. C. RENNER. Improved fertilizer.

A mixture of rich earth, 1,600 pounds; saltpeter, 100 pounds; sulphate of
ammonia, 200 pounds; and flour of raw bone, 100 pounds; the mixture being
allowed to "sweat" in a heap.

61,,602—May 7, 1867. W. VERMILYA. Improved composition for invigorating fruU
and forest trees. •

A mixture of sulphate of copper, 3pounds; sulphur, 1 pound; saltpeter, 1 ounce;
and iron filings, half a pound. A hole is bored near the root of the tree, and
after inserting some of the mixture the hole is plugged.

66,S57—July 2, 1867. P. G. KENNY. Improved manure.

Sulphate of iron is mixed with manure, and dis.solved by urine passed through
the mass. Aluminous earth may be spread on the pile above a sprinkling of
iron sulphate.

66,650— July 9,1867. J.A.THOMPSON. Improved compositim of matter for disin-
fecting and preparing fertilizers.

Charcoal charged with sulphurous acid or other disinfecting or other gas
is mixed with ground gypsum, as a disinfectant and deodorizer. It is mixed
with animal and vegetable substances to form a fertilizer with or without the
addition of common salt, wood ashes, bone dust, or other material.

67,SS5—Jidy SO, 1867. J.K.MOORE. Improved fertUixer.

Powdered clam or oyster shells (not burnt) treated with add.
67,1,50— August 6, 1867. H. E. POND. Improved artificial fertiliser.

Meadow muck is partially dried, then treated with sulphuric acid; lime is
then added and mixed therewith, then a solution of potash, salt, and nitrate of
soda, and finally superphosphate of lime, and the mass dried.

70,608— November 5, 1867. H. E. POND. Improved fertiliser.

Meadow muck is partially dried, then treated with sulphuric acid; sulphate
of lime or gypsum is then mixed therewith, then a snhition of nitrate of potash,
salt, and nitrate of soda, and finally superphosphate or^iphosphate of lime.

71,711,— December S, 1867. L. S. FALES. Improved fertilizing compound.
A mixture of sea sand, sulphate of ammonia, charcoal, bones, and dried blood.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

179

71,7ti—Dftrmber.1,m7. L. 8. FALE8. Improrrd firlttlUT.

A inlxtiirt- or iiIkIiI mil trcHte<1 with wutv iirWI (torn petroleum rpflnrrlen.
ChBrciml— prrtirolily lliiil niHili- from |>eut— •ulphalr o( ammonln, pulvorlicU
botii'!*, (Iritil liltKMl, (tiiil Ntltpi'tcr.

Tt.om—lirraHhtrlO, Ifer. W. O. ORIMEH. ImproKdftrUUter.

ElRlit l>ui<holii ot irniiiiKl tionp niwl W |m>iiiicIii of iiilphatc of Hmmonla are dl»-
■olvi'<l in lM)poundiior oil otvllriol. hikI 40galloiM of urine and to bushels of
rich onrth ndtltHl. nnd the mixture dried.

74,r»9— ^Hrimrf/M. ISrW. J.COMMINS. Imprvml modKiftnatingmintyalphot-
phaUt/or the mantiftvtnrr nf/crtilUrr/i,
PhonphHtic minerals or earths are heated to a re<l or white heat and aaturatod

with H solution of sodium ehlorlde while hot, to convert the insoluble pho«phale«

into soluble mineral.

te.OSl— April tl.ims. W. li. BL'SEY. Impnmd/ertilizer.

Six hundnnl pounds of Peruvian Kuano and 100 potuids of sodium ehlortde
are mixed together and then mixed with 1.300 pounds o^ soluble superphos-
phate of lime, formed by treating carbonized biinc with sulphuric acid.

T7,6t!7— any. ■•, ises. A.SMITH. Impromnmt inJertlHtcrt.

Cnu'lclings reduced to jiowder are I'ombined with phosphates.
7t,8iO—May I!, ISeS. J. S. RAMSBt'RO. Improved JcrlUUxr.

One hundrMl pounds of ealclnod Upuc Is mixtHl with i") pounds of sulphate of
ammonia and :i iriillons of hut water or barnynrd H'tnor. and 25 pounds of sul-
phurie Held adrteil to form an ammoninled sii|»eritluwphate of lime, which
while hot \-* mixed with 60 pound.s of Hul|>lmte of soda. V2h iKjunds of sulphate
of lime, and hV) ixiunds of slaelicd ashes or muck.

77.860— .Vail i:. J.siW. J. ALTHOUSE. Improved fcrtUUfr.

Seven hundri-d pounds of air-slacked lime is mlxe<l with 180 pounds of ground
bone and 100 ixiunds of wood ashes, covered with a layer of ground plaster and
wet with 3a) louiids of urine, and allowed to stand for eight to twelve weeks,
when It Is mixed with 400 pounds ot wheat br»n and 300 |x)unds of hen dung.

79.160—June t3. l.^H. I). A. TKR HOEVEN. {Reltme: i05S and WBS—Junc 18,

1870.) Improvement in JtrtUizers.

A fertiliier composed of horns, hoofs, or like animal matter; produced by
steaming, drying, and crushing or grinding.

as,S7lr-PfbrMary t, 1869. O. A. MOSES. Improved prepared phosphate.

South Carolina phosphates and marls are ground under water and separated
according to their specific gravity and dried, thereby producing, as the finer
material, nearly i)ure fertilizing phosphates.

SS.IM— March 50, 1869. S. A. BURKHOLDER and G. \V. WILSON. Improvement

in/ertUixer».

A mixture of bone dust, 600 pounds; oil of vitriol, 200 pounds; sulphate, lOO
pounds; sodium nitrate, 10 pounds; sodium chloride, 50 pounds; groimd plaster
or sulphate of lime, 300 pounds; wood ashes, 80 pounds; and 7 bushels of earth
or sand.

8S.i66—Xarch SO, 1869. L. 8. FALES. Improved JertUiier.

A mixture of bones, leather scrap, and bloixi in sulphuric acid and water is
subjectwl to the steam and ammoniacAl vapors from a mixture of sulphate of
ammonia, gas liquor, and slacked lime, the solid portion of the product drained
and mixctl with dry peat.

»0,057— Jfay 11, 1889. D. STEWART. Improved photphaie fertilixbig compound.
Manures are produced from soluble sillcRtes and phosphates by composting
them with caustic alkalis, as by forming alternate layers of in.«oluble phos-
phates previously moistened with a saturated solution of crude pota.sh and
quicklime, and allowing the successive layers to slack as strata alter strata is
added. After cutting down and mixing, a handful of ground gj-psum is added
to each shovel of the compost.

»l,6e7—June tt, 1869. F. C. RENNER. Improved /ertitixr.

One thousand and fifty pounds of rich earth is mixed with 100 pounds of sul-
phate of ammonia and 60 pounds of saltpeter, and then incorporated with 300
pounds of bone du^t. 100 poundsof salt cake, 200 pounds of Peruvian guano and
200 potmds of plaster.

91.077— June t». 1869. E. N. McKIUH AND H. W. BENDER. Improved ferlUiz-

ing compound.
■ .K mixture of earth, 1,000 pounds: sulphate of ammonia. 100 pounds; sodium
chloride, 100 iK]iiiid»; [learlash and sulphate of wxla. each 2.i pounds; together
with ground bone. 400 [lounds; Peruviau guano. 100 pounds; and ground plaster
ISU pounds. '

9t,810— July to, 1869. R.FISH. Improved fertUtier.

A mixture of night soil, marl, peatashes, charcoal, copperas, salt, tobacco
gypsum, tincture of almonds, tincture of coffee, and coffee grounds. '

97,169— XovenOjer !3, 1869. B. R. CROASDALE. Improved bags /or guano pltot-
phaUt, and other JertUiiert. '

They are coated inside with tar, pitch, or gum, and then inside and outside
with a thin coat of crude petroleum or other oil.

97 .9S9— December U, 1869. O. LUGO. {Seitsue: S,SU>—Fa>ruary IS, 1870.) /m-

proved JertUizcr or guano.

An antiseptic fertilizer from flsh or other animal matter, prepared by passing
hot air downward through the material until about 90 per cent of the water 5
extracted, and then introducing, by means ot a current of air. hydrocarbon
and phenol (carljonic acid) vapors. tollowc<l by a blaj-t ot hot air to expel the
remaining isirtion of water and hydrocarbon. The oils and fatty matters in
solution with the hydrocarbon and surplus phenol are condensed.

99,S5t— January M, 1870. I. W. SPEYER. Improvement in/ertHixrt.

The minerals obtained from the mines of Sta-ssfurt, Prussia, chiefiy sulphates
and muriates ot potash and magnesia, arc pulverized, dissolved in boiling
water, and crystallized out by cooling, for use as a manuring compound.

90,sau— February I, 1870. J.COMMINS. Improvement ia/rrlUizert.

A mixture of 1 part, by measure, of gas-liquor and 3 parts of blood, is coagu-
lated with one nve-bundredth part of sulphuric acid, dried, and reduced to a
powder.

99.U)S—f\Anuiry 1, 1870. O.LUGO. Improvement in /ertUixen or JUhi/mam.

Fish are dried (withont scorching or roasting) before deoompiMltlon sets in,
so as to secure a highly nitiogcnized product, pulverized and mixed with phos-
phates, etc.

99.978— Mminry IS, 1870. A. VAN HAAOKN AND W. ADAMilON. Imprinrtt

JrrttltSfrfrtmi glue rrirlduum.

(Hue ri-siduum is Niiled in an alkaline nolHtlon. common salt added, the
soap priHliict removed, and charcoal or |ilast«r of p«rls or other fertilizing ab-
sorbent mixefl with the masa,

10O.t6H—h>liruary tt, 1870. O. LL'OO. tmprovemetU in the manttfaeture 'tf/er-

tUisrrn /nnn animal tabntance*.

An antiseptic fertilizer, nrcparcd from animal matter by treating it with car-
bolic acid or phenol. In snlutlcm with sullable hyr|rocarl>oiia or preferably in a
state oi vapors, with or without a current of hot sir or |

100,«t»— March 8, 1870. H. A. HWIKL. Imprtwement in treating hlood Jor Oe

preparation of /ertiUxert, and /or other purponrn.

Coagulated blood, prepared by the action of steam, drained and pressed.
10O,7t9— March IS, 1870. 3. COMMINS. Improvement infertUiier:

A fertilizer formed of gas-liquor, blood, and sulphuric acid, with dry groand
phosphate of lime, mixed and evaporated to dryness.

101,181— March tt, 1870. H. A. HOOEL. Improvement inferliUur:

The fat of dead animals Is extracted with steam, and the flesh Is subjected to
heavy pressure, dried, and pulverized.

lOt.UH—AprU 16, 1870. W. I. SAPP. Improvement in the matutfaeture of/erUl-
izerg.

A fertilizer made from silicated phosphates, produced by treating phosphatic
guano or like material with soluble dliclc acid or water glass, to render the
phosphates soluble.

101,610— May S, 1870. E. P. BAUOH. Improvement In drying guano.

Rock phosphate, or other material, is banked over grated flues for hot gases.
so that tliey can penetrate the mass.

10«,S1S— August 16, 1870. G. BOURGADE. Improvement in compound /or /ertiliser.
A mixture ot blood and lime, formed by mixing slacked lime with the blood,
adding water and heating at a low heat and subjecting the coagulated mass to
pressure to expel the albumen.

106,616— August tS, 1870. T. SIM. ImprovanetU in the manufacture o/ /erldixert.
Cottonseed residuum, or other matter, divested of oil by chemical means (as
by bisulphide of carbon), is mixed with phosphate of lime.

107,878— October i, 1870. J. COMMINS. Improvement in the manufacture of /er-
tUizert.

Black salt-marsh graas ISpartina gtabin), is chopped, macerated, and reduced
to a pulpy mass, for use with phosphates or animal matter; it contains a large
amount of nitrogen, 10 per cent of potash, and 8 per cent of soda.

108,869— October 18, 1870. J. M. LOEWENSTEIS. ImprovemeiU in /rrtUizing

comjtoinuis.

Night soil is mixed with double the quantity of pulverized unslaked lime,
subjected to pressure to express superfluous liquid, and is then treated with
dilute sulphuric acid.

lll,Sl7—JanuarySl,1871. J. M. LOWENSTEIN. Improvement in /ertili:ing com-
pounds.

A composition formed of night soil, sulphuric acid, bones or bone dust, and
unslacked lime.

ni.ess— March U, Igil. T. TAYLOR. Improvement in/ertUiiers.

A mixture of night soil with peat, clay, soluble silicates, a persalt of iron, and
tincture of quassia.

lU,13S—Aprai5.1S71. W.B.HAMILTON. Improvement in /ertUising compounds.
A mixture of night soil, cotton-seed ineal, salt, gypsum, and bone phospliate.

llJ,.798—May 16, 1871. L. C. GIFFORD. Improvement in compounds /or preserving
/ruit trees.

A mixture of 2 parts of calomel and 1 part of carbonate of soda, by weight,
mixed dry.

118,987— September It, 1871. U. S. TREAT. Improvement in /eriUixrs /rom sea-
weed.
Seaweed is reduced to a pulp by the action of steam under pressure and

mixed in a mill with finely powdered quicklime.

119,99i—0ctt)her 17. 1871. D. W. PRESCOTT. Improvement in the manufacture of
solubk phosphates /or /erUtizers.

A mixture of 1.600 pounds of b<me dust and 300 pounds of soda ash is mois-
tened thoroughly with water and allowed to remain in a heap for two weeks and
then dried.

ltU.tSl,—March S, 1871. B. R. CROASDALE. Improvement in bags /or phosphates,

itc.

It is made of a textile fabric, as burlap, coated witli roofing paper, which may
be saturated with an acid-proof or waterproof substance.

lli.ilS—.Varch 6, 1873. J. R. WESTOVER. Improvement in compounds /or /ruit

trees, etc.

A mixture of kerosene oil, 1 quart; flsh oil, 1 pint; flour of sulphur, one-half

ound; pulverized saltpeter, one-foui'' "

destroyer and fertilizing compound.

It5,9t7— April 13, lS7t. J. R. BLACK. Improvement in /ertUiiers.

A mixture of stable manure and muck in eoual parts is formed: and also a
mixture of saltpeter 60 pounds, common salt 3 barrels, lime 3 Iwrrels. and ashes
5 barrels; and a compost formed ot alternate layers of the two mixtures, the
latter mixture being one-fourth of the former.

lts,9S9— April tS.mt. J. M. DEERINO. Improvement in /ertiUttng compounds.
Fish or lobster chum Is mixed with material charged with carbolic acid, i.s
tar water, ammoniacal water, or spent lime, spread and covered with drv earth,
peat, or brick dust, then with air-slacked lime, then wet seaweed, then 'groimd
gypsum, and then drv' earth or peat. The layers may be repeated, and the pUe
Is allowed to slowly decompose.

lt6,U8—May 7, 1871. T. 8EWELL. Improvement in compositions /or deodorixing

as>d preparing /erUUxers.

Giotind peat charcoal is saturated with equal parts of carbolic add and pei^
chloride oi manganese, and used in combination with clay, eartli, or soiL

lt8,S78— July t, 1871. W. 8.A1UES. Improvement in artl/lciatmimura.

Carbon and sulphate of iron are mixed In the proportions of from 1 to 6 parts
of carbon to I part of sulphate of iron.

pound; pulverized saltpeter, one-fourth poimd, and 1 pint of water, as an insect
desf "■ ' — "'"-' — ^

180

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

ISH.SJiS— October 119, J87t. C.F.SMITH. Improvement in compositions for renovat-

ing and invigorating apple trees.

A mixture of pulverized blue vitriol, 4 parts: white chalk, 1 part, and iron
scales, 1 part, all in bulk; applied by bonng a hole to the center of the tree
near the roots and filling it with the mixture.

138. US— April 19, 1S73. J. WHITEHILL. Improvement in fertilizers.

For agricultural purposes cau.stic lime is ground to the state of sand.
liS.SlS—Septeniber SS. ISiS. J. B. WILSON. Improvement in fertilizing soils.

Pulverized anthracite coal, cither with or without manure ingredients, is
used as a fertilizer; it maintaining the soil in a moist condition.

11^,310— September SO, 1ST3. J. J. STORER. Improvement in fertilizers from offal.
A fertilizer consisting of offal, tank-stuff, blood, etc., treated with burning
ga.ses directly in contact so as to impregnate the mass with soot and free car-
bon, and give a dark brown or almost black color to the product.

Ii7. 035— Februarys. i87L R. BIRDSALL. Improvement in fertilizing compounds to

be used to protect trees, etc.

A mixture of 8 bushels of topsoil, 1 bushel of gas lime, 4 quarts of common
salt, 'i quarts spirits of turpentine, 2 pounds of saltpeter, and 2 quarts of crude
coal oil, with sufficient water to work into a homogeneous mass; afterwards
dried.

li9,SiS— March 31, ISO,. C. PERRY. Improvement in fertilizers.

Malt, or grain, with the germinating principle destroyed, isasedas a fertilizer
or as an ingredient for a fertilizer and plant food.

li9,!SU—Marcli 31, lS7i. G. J. POPPLEIN. {Reissue: 7,t96— September 5, IS! 6.)

Improvement in fertilizers.

A fertilizer containing tripoli, or consisting of tripoli and phosphate of lime,
pulverized and intimately mixed.

ll^.Ui— April 7, 1S7U. J. H. GREEN. Improvement in waterproofing compounds

for guano bags, hales, etc.

A composition for waterproofing bagging consists of rubber cement, linseed
oil. benzine, zinc or white lead, magnesia, umber, flour bran orsawdust, litharge,
and sulphur.

15i.7S!>—Jtdy 7, mi.. R. A. CHESEBROUGH. Improvement in antiseptic ferti-
lizers.
A mixture of boneblack and hydrocarbon oil, say in the proportions of 70 per

cent and 30 per cent. It should be mixed with an equal amount of earth.

15S,9ll—July U, lS7li. S. D. SHEPARD. Improvement in fertilizing compounds.

A composition of peat, 120 pounds; fish oil, 15 gallons; and fish liver, from
which the oil has been removed, 30 gallons.

133.1,77— July 2S, lS7i. B. R. CRO ASD ALE. Improvement in bags for phosphates,

guano, etc.

Bags of a textile fabric are saturated with hydrate of lime, dried, and then
Immersed in oil or oil and paraffine.

15i,017— August 11, 1871,. B. G. CARTER. Improvement in fertilizing compounds.
A mixture of Peruvian guano, 600 pounds; archilla guano. 300 pounds; dis-
solved bone, 200 pounds; wood ashes, 300 pounds; soda, 50 pounds; and ground
plaster, 630 pounds.

153. 3U1— September 2S, 187i. G. E. E. SPARHAWK AND M. A. BALLARD.

Improvement in fertilizers.

A mixture of 25 bushels each of air-slacked lime, wood ashes, hen guano, and
soil; 1 bushel of salt, 200 pounds of gypsum, and 10 pounds of bone dust.

160.191— February S3, 1875. C. H. HOFFMANN. Improvement in fertilizing com-
pounds.

A fertilizing liquid for germinating seeds, etc., produced by boiling a mixture
of 3 gallons of liquid manure, 3 ounces of salt, and 2 ounces of saltpeter; dis-
solving therein three-quarters of a pound of unslacked lime; straining, and then
adding one-half ounce each of crude petroleum and sulphur balsam.

171,857— January i, 187S. ST. J. RAVENEL. Improvement in fertilizers.

Pulverized iron pyrites is mixed with ground phosphatic material.
173,611— February 15, 1876. X. G. GRIFFITH. Improvement in fertilizers.

One hundred pounds of horse manure is mixed with 80 to 100 pounds of sul-
phuric acid, and then 100 pounds each of bone dust and of archilla, curacoa or
Mexican guano are mixed therewith.

17U,568— March 7, 1876. G. J. POPPLEIN. {.Reissue: 8,187— April 16, 1878.) Im-
provement in fertilizers.
An intimate mixture of tripoli or infusorial earth and potash or .soda.

175,81,6— April 11, 1876. J. B, WILSON. Improvement in composts.
A pile is formed of layers of mud, muck or marl, manure or guano, and salt,

with a dilute solution of sulphuric acid poured thereover, then a layer of lime.

and a covering of sand or earth; the mass standing for thirty days or so, when it

Is thoroughly decomposed.

178,19!,— May 30, 1876. A. W. ROWLAND. Improvement infertUizers.

A compound of wood ashes, cottonseed, earth, manure, sulphates of magnesia
of soda, and of ammonia, sodium chloride, .sodium nitrate, dissolved bone, and
ground plaster.

191.1,76- .May 29, 1877. H. SELIGM AN. Improvement in deodorizing, disinfecting,

and fertilizing compounds.

A compound of mineral potash salt, as carnaillit, 70 parts; gypsum or other
calcareous substance, 23 parts; and sulphuric acid, 5 parts.

193,890— August?, 1877. C. F. PANKNIN. Improvement in fertilizers.

A fertilizing compound consisting of a comminuted mixture of 95 parts of
phosphate of lime and ft parts of sulphur.

iOS,67U — May lU, 1878. B. J. TIMBY. Improvement in compositions for protecting
trees.

A compound of 20 pounds of sulphur, 2 pounds of soot, and 900 balm-of-Gilead
buds.

toe,077—July 16, 1878. T. J. BOYKIN AND J. W. CARMER. Improvement in

fertilizers.

A compound consisting of a mixture of dissolved bone, 3 bushels; ground
plaster, 3 bushels; sodium nitrate and sodium sulphate, each 40-pounds; and
ammonium sulphate, 33 pounds; to be incorporated with a suitable base, as dry
peat or muck.

loa.SU-.'SeptemberU, 1878. A. F. CROWELL. Improvement infertUizers.

A fertilizer consisting of the waste nitrogenous and gelatinous fluid obtained
in the process of extracting oil from fish, combined with the soluble porti ns of
a superphosphate, the solution being concentrated or evaporated to dryness.

aw,540— October 1, 1878. C. RICHARDSON. Improvement in fertilizers.

A fertilizer composed of hair or bristles in the form of fine powder, produced
by treating them with live steam at, say, 90 pounds pressure, drying, and grind-
ing.

i09,9ao— November 19, 1878. A. PIRZ. Improvement infertUizers.

A fertilizer composed of bone and artificial sulphate of lime {a waste product
from the manufacture of acetic acid) in equal parts. The constituents are
mixed with water and allowed to lie until the mass has become solid.

Sll,£38— January 7, 1879. J. INGMANSON. Improvement in fertilizers.

A fertilizer composed of ground bone. 90 pounds: caustic lime, 10 pounds;
mixed together with 6 pounds of oil of vitriol diluted with 5 gallons of water.

il6.S90-June 10, 1879. E. OSGOOD. Improvement in compounds for preventing

the destruction or rotting of bags, etc.

A compound of beeswax and tallow, to which tar may be added, is applied
to fertilizer bags.

S3t,756— September 28, 1880. H. M. POLLARD. FcrtUizer.

A mixture of night soil and calcined plaster, in e<jual quantities, with umber
in the proportion of 1 in 200 by weight, and .sulphuric acid 1 in 25.

233,875— Xovember S, ISSO. J. C. PERKINS. Mixed pho»phaiic manure.

A mixture of sulphuric acid, water, animal charcoal, bones, marl, coprolite,
sugar scum, night soil, fish or flsli refuse, hard-wood charcoal, castor pomace,
hydrochloric acid, sulphate of lime, ashes from calcined leather, tobacco ashes,
sodium nitrate, and ammonium sulphate.
231,,783— November 23, ISSO. B. JOHNSON AND W. P. GIDDINGS. Fertilizer.

A mixture of ground and unburned oyster shells, 100 pounds: common pot-
ash, 2 pounds: and carbonate of soda. 1 pound.

21,0,015— April 12. 1881. W. H. HUBBELL. Fertilizer.

A mixture of guano, 200 pounds; bone dust, 400 pounds; plaster, 800 pounds;
and German potash, 200 pounds.

21,2,193— May 31, ISSl. W. FIELDS. Fertilizer.

A composition of limestone, 500 pounds; feldspar, 1,000 pounds; oyster shells,
300 pounds, all unburned and ground fine: cast-iron scrapings and moldings
from foundry, 200 pounds; water, 9 gallons; sulphuric acid, 2 gallons; and nitric
acid, 1 pint.

2m,121— August 23, 1881. L. GRAF. Artificial manure.

Produced by mixing an alkaline solution of leather scrap with lime or lime
salts — such as sulphate or carbonate of lime — and with phosphate of lime, and
then treating the mixture with sulphuric acid.

21S,2l,2— August 23, 1881. B. TERNE. Treatment of tank waters of slaughterhouses,

etc.

Concentrated tank water is combined with sulphuric acid and used as a sol-
vent for phosphatic substances in the manufacture of manures.

250,706— December IS, 1881. H. S. BRADLJ:Y. Oimpost.

A mixture of 1,000 pounds each of stable manure and of swamp muck, 1 bushel
of slacked lime, 8 pounds each of sulphate of ammonia and of sulphuric acid, and
1 pound of alum.

2Bl,S6i— December 27, 1S81. E. J. HOUSER. Fertilizing compound.

A mixture of cottonseed meal, 4 parts; dissolved bone, 3 parts; and German
potash salts, 3 parts; by weight.

251,628— December 27, 1S81. G. B, OAKES. Manufacture offish guano.

A pulverized fertilizer composed of boiled fish refuse with 5 per cent of sul-
phuric acid, pulverized charcoal, finely ground gypsum or mineral phosphates,
and salt to prevent fermentation.

253,971— February 21, 1882. I. BROWN. Fertilizer.

As a manure or an ingredient therefor, a solid mixture of sulphuric acid and
gypsum, or peat or equivalent medium, denominated a " supersulphate."

253,991— February 21, 18S2. I. ELSASSER. Fertilizer.

A mixture of bat guano, cottonseed meal, bone dust, and the shell known as
Gnathadon cuneata, pulverized.

258,521,— May 23, 18S2. R. K. ZELL. Fertilizer bag.

A bag made acid proof by treatment with an aqueous solution formed of rosin
soap, 100 parts by weight; alum, 5 parts; asbestos, 4 parts; and gelatine, 1 part.

263,907— September 5, 1882. W. H. HORNEE AND F. HYDE. Bag for holding

phosphates, etc.

Fertilizer bags are made acid proof by treatment with a composition of rosin,
paraffine, or mineral oil, and soap or saponified grease.

2eS,31!,—November 28, 1882. W. D. STYRON. Fertilizer compound.

A compound known as the " Norfolk Fertilizer and Insecticide " is a mixture
of sulphur, 2ft pounds: saltpeter, 40 pounds; salt, 200 pounds; kainit, 200 pounds;
bone phosphate, 40 pounds; and lime, 1,49ft pounds.

269,701,— December 26, 1882. D. E. PAYNTER. Fertilizing compound.

A compound of calcined gypsum, water, and mineral coal dust is burned, the
ashes mixed with acidulatecl urine, and dried.

277,023— May 8, 1883. J. GOULD. Fertilizer.

A mixture of salicylic acid, gas lime from gas works using oyster-shell lime,
animal matter (night soil or blood), vegetable matter (sumac, seaweed, or
leaves), with salt, alum, and carbolic acid.

278,383— May 29, 1883. J. R. YOUNG, Jr. Fertilizer.

A mixture of night soil, bone phosphate of lime, and sulphuric acid is evap-
orated to dryness after the resulting chemical action is complete.

27S,3S/,—May 29, 18SS. J. R. YOUNG, Jr. FertUlzer.

A mixture of night soil, 1,000 pounds; dry fish scrap, 400 pounds; and sul-
phuric acid, 175 pounds; dried.

27S.l,S0—May 29, 1883. J. R. YOUNG, jR. Fertilizer.

A mixture of night soil, 100 gallons; phosphatic guano, 400 pounds; and sul-
phuric acid, 7ft pounds: evaporated to dryness after chemical action is complete.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

181

tSI.SiO—Juty ti. ISSt. \V. J. COURTS. Frrlitiser.

A mixture of dliwolvcil raw iKinp, fulphati'o of nluininnm, of ammonitun. of
Iron, of innKmslinn. iind of jHiUish. sodium iiltruti'. kalnit, mill hiimus or rii'li
dirt. In oerUiln spt'cilied |iroponlons.

ISS.SOS—Aiiijuiil li, tSSi. T. WELLS. FcrtUizer.

\ mixture of cnrbonate of ummonla, 8 pounds; carbonate of soda. VI pounds;
Nilt. H) ponnda; wood aabes, S bushels; and suble manure, 20 bushels.

tsr',fS.'i—.Sri)lembrrtS,lS8S. J. B. BECK. FrrtUixcr.

A mixture of bitter salt, limestone plaster, sodium sulphate, ammonium sul-
phate, and ixitash.

»0,8.M— AlcmfxT JS, JS«3. A.EDWARDS. t^crtU iicr /or Uibacro crops.

A comminuted mixture of fresh horse manure, 1 ton, blood, 100 pounds or
more; and iKitash, 100 pounds.

tSO.lltg—Ikeembfr S.I, ISSS. W.R.WILKINSON, fcrlitizer.

A mixture of bone ash, W i>er cent; gypsum, 10 per cent; sulphate of iron, Ji
per cent; sulphate of potash, •iH per cent; and dried blood, lit per cent.

tStMO—Junuary S», ISSi. D. R. CASTLEMAN. Ferlitizer.

A mixture of pulverized tobacco stems and prepared phosphate, in equal pro-
portions.
t9S,aS9—ifa!i to, ISSi. B. C. BRIGGS. Fertilizer.

A mixture of 1 barrel each of bone meal and plaster; 2 barrels each of ashes,
hen manure or guano, muck, and urine, and 1 bushel of salt.

S07,718—XovcmlHr i, ISSi. L. HAAS. Fertilizer.

A mixture of furnace slag and sulphate of ammonia composed of liquid
ammonia and sulphuric acid, to which is added limestone or oyster shells and
grimiul bone, sodium nitrate, sodium chloride, sodium sulphate, and potash,
with piaster.
S0S,S97—Xoreml>er 15, ISSi. J. R. YOUNG, Jr. Fertilizer.

A mixture of night soil, phosphate of lime, sulphuric acid, nitrogen compound
(as ammonia), and potash.
an, 010— May 5, ISSS. W. S. PIERCE. Phoephaie fertilizer.

A fertilizer is made from the insoluble phosphates of alumina, iron, lime, and
other bases, by drying and pulverizing the raw material, mixing with it a cer-
tain quantity "of sulphate of ammonia— sufficient to prevent the fertilizer from
absorbing moisture — treating the mixture with strong sulphuric acid, and
drying.

SlS,S71—May 19, ISSS. L. HAAS. Fertilizer.

A compound of furnace slag, oyster shells, charcoal, tan-bark waste, tobacco
stems, broom-corn seed meal; sodium nitrate, sulphate, and chloride; diluted
sulphuric acid or ammonia, plaster, ashes, phosphatic iron ores, phosphatic
rocTi, ground slag, and kainit.

SS7,:56— September 19, ISSS. L. HAAS. Fertiliser.

A fertilizer and insect preventive, consisting of furnace slag, 70 per cent; salt,
10 per cent; ashes, 10 per cent; charcoal, 10 per cent; and water, with 5 per cent
of acid.

330,075— November 10, 18S5. A. E. WEMPLE. FertUizer.

A mixture of bone flour, 60 per cent; sulphate of ammonia, 15 percent; sodium
nitrate, 15 per cent; potas.sium chloride, 5 per cent; magnesium sulphate, 6 per
cent; and nitrogenous matter, as dried blood, 10 per cent.

3il,9e»—3Iay 18, 18S6. J. VAN RUVMBEKE. Fertilizer.

A nonviscid and nondeliquescent fertilizer, consisting of concentrated and
partially decomposed tank wastes, containing carbolic acid and other phenols
without the addition or artificial mixture of said phenols; the product of No.
342,238.

31,5,507 — Julyl5,18S6. W. W. HICKS. Treatment o/ humus and miick.

A mixture of calcined humus and muck, which has been changed and
sweetened by the heat and gases of the said calcining.

3i6,0ti—July 10, ISSe. H. H. COLQUITT. Fertilizer.

A mixture of the raw kernels of cottonseed with phosphoric rock or phosphate
of lime.

SU),tSii— September U, 1886. P. VINSON. Combined JertUizer and inoedicide.

A mixture of cattle dung, horse dung, sheep dung, fowl dung, blue vitriol,
saltpeter, slacked lime, leached ashes, cayenne pepper, black pepper, ginger,
mustard seed, and garlic.

353,110— Xovember 13, 1SS6. D. W. DUDLEY. Fertilizer.

Equal quantities of bone meal and wood ashes are mixed and saturated with
water ana allowed to stand for about three weeks, then lime is slacked in brine
and added to the mixture, and gypsum and salt in equal quantities arc added
to the mass.
367,731— August 1, 1887. J. VAN RUYMBEKE. FertUizer.

Nitrogenous fertilizing material, consisting of the undecomposed coagulated
albuminoids of concentrated tank waters freed from undue deliquescence and
viscidity produced by rendering the gelatinous substances insoluble, as by the
addition of sulphate of iron.

371,630— October IS, ISS!. P. B. ROSE. Tank-uiante fertilizer.

A fertilizer in a dry form consisting of tank waste incorporated with cellulose
or lignine vegetable material, or paunch material taken from slaughtered
animals.

3;3.0S7—October 15, 1887. J. REESE. Phosphatic ferlUizer.

A fertilizer composed essentially of pulverized calcareous phosphatic basic
slag; pulverized to an impalpable powder.

377,0Si— January 31, 1888. G.H.MURRAY. Fertilizing composition.

A compound of one-half pulverized tan bark, one-quarter distillery slop or
animal excrement, and one-quarter common salt, slacked lime, and potash.

378.688— February IS, 18SS. P. C. JENSEN. Fertilizer.

Tankage or tank-water residue is dried at a low temperature, broken up and
mixeil with unslacked lime, and the mixture thoroughly pulverized.

S82,60i—.Vay 8, ISSS. S. L. GOODALE. Fertilizer.

Crude mineral containing hydrated aluminic and ferric phosphates is pulver-
ized and mixed with carbonaceous matter wet with sulphuric acid, and the
mixture heated to a degree sufficient to expel the constituent water contained
in the hydrated phosphate.

ne.rH— January 15, 11II9- U. ENDEMANN. FertUizer.
A fertilizer produced from tobnceo, and having certain tpeclfled character!*-

tics; product of process No. 404, *IH.

397,056— .lanuary 19, Ism. P. HoGAN. Feriillzer.

Composed of disaolvol lignine from vegetable sutwlances, and alkaline salts
from the digesters in the manufacture of chemical fltjer or similar works. In
combination with peat, clay, lime, earth, or other aloorbent matter.

m,ty>—July 16, 18S9. N. B. POWTER. PlutsjihaHc fertilizer.

A dry granular compound cf)mposed (»f phosphatic rock or earth containing
over 10 per cent of alumina or Iron. 1.000 wmnds; sulphuric a<.id (Ol^j.MO
pounds; and tank water containing about 20 per cent of animal matter, 750
IK)Unds.

Ui7,lil—July 16, 18S9. N. B. POWTER. PhotphaUc fertUtzer.

.\ dry fertilizing composition comiKwed of Cayman Islands phosphatic rfjck,
800 fsmnds; (iOO [>ouuds of animal matter combined with not more than the
same amount of water; .550 pounds of sulphuric add (Ml°),and60 pounds of car-
bonate of lime.

m8,Ull— August 6, 1889. J. A. LIGHTHALL. Fertiliser.
Tobacco stems reduced to dry, granular charcoal.

!,ls.2i,6—Xovcmber 19, 1889. J.J. HANSEL.MAN. Liquid manure.

It consists of water, sulphurous acid, soap. salt, lime. Isinglass, spirits of am-
monia, and the soluble parts of cow dung and guano.

USt.OVl—July 15, 1890. J. D. SIMMONS. Phosphatic fertilizer.

A mixture of wood ashes, 6 parts; phosphate of lime, 9 parts; muriate of pot-
ash, 2 parts; pulverized sulphur, 2 parts; and sodium nitrate, 1 part; all by weight.

i3J,.li3— August 11, 1890. L. J. CARLILE AND G. B. RUMPH. Combined ferti-
lizer and insecticide.
A composition of refuse tobacco, bran, cottonseed meal, parts green, powdered

hellebore, arsenious oxide, and India berries (cocculus indicus) .

iS8,8S9— October 11, 1890. 3. PATTEIUiON. FertUizer.

A mixture of caustic lime— unslacked when Introduced— gypnun, rotten rock,
common bog, sulphate of iron, salt, and water.

U8,088— February 10, 1891. J. VAN RUYMBEKE. yUrogenous fertilizer.

A fertilizing material consisting of "stick " and asoluble salt of iron or alumina
made basic by the addition of lime thereto.

U,8,SS7— March 17, 1891. J. VAN RUYMBEKE. Nitrogenous fertilizer.

A dry pulverulent and practically nondeliquescent material consisting of a
mixture of liquid stick, 1 ton, and ground, dried animal matter, 600 to 800
pounds, subjected to a heat not exceeding 380° F.

iB0,15S— April li, 1891. J.REESE. Ammoniated phosphate.

A fertilizer composed essentially of pulverized, calcareous, phosphatic, basic
slag and salts of ammonia, such as sulpnate of ammonia.

i50,15i— April li, 1891. J. REESE. PhosphxUic fertilizer.

A fertilizer composed essentially of pulverized, calcareous, phosphatic. basic
slag and potasslc material such as kainit, sulphate of potash, or muriate of
potash.

i50,155— April li, 1891. J. REESE. Phosphatic fertilizer.

A mixture of pulverized, calcareous, phosphatic, basic slag, potash, and am-
monia (such as the sulphate).

iS0,5Sl—April li, 1891. J. REESE. Phosphatic fertilizer.

A mixture of muriate of potash and pulverized, calcareous, phosphatic, basic
slag.

i6S,7W—June 9, 1891. 1. VAN RUYMBEKE. Phosphatic fertilizer.

A fertilizer consisting of a metapbosphate prepared by submitting acidified
rock to the action of a high degree of heat (No. 446.087), and stick loaded with
about 15 per cent of carbonate of lime, mixed and allowed to stand until granu-
lated.

i53.7SO—June 9. 1891. J. VAN RUYMBEKE. Phosphatic fertilizer.

A mixture of iron or alumina acid phosphates and stick, subjected to the
action of heat at or above 212° F. until it assumes a black color, when it will
granulate.

i61,i76— November 3, 1891.

C. W. DOUGHTY. FertUizer.

A compound of ground and unbumt but dried carbonate of lime and human
feces in equal proportions, and dried but unbumt gypsum In the proportion of
10 per cent of the carbonate of lime.

iSi,631— October 18, 1891. J. J. DUNNE. NUrogenous fertUizer and process of

making the same.

A fertilizing material, consisting of a bulky, fiocculent, pnl venilent, impalpable
precipitate composed of coagulated nitrogenous albuminoids of tank waters
combined with ph()sphatic material insoluble in water, but soluble in citrate of
ammonia; produce<i by heating tank waters with phosphates and an acid, then
treating with a neutralizing agent, separating tne precipitated matter, and
drying.

i8i,679— October 18, 1891. J. D. SIMMONS. FertUizing composition.

A mixture of sulphuret of iron, 2 parts; sulphate of riotash, 2 parts; wood
ashes, 6 parts; and pnospbate of lime, 10 parts, all by weight.

308,110— November 7, 1893. C. J. GREENSTREET. Nitrogenous fertUizer and proc-
ess of making same.
A soluble salt of manganese — as black oxide of manganese — with or without

the addition of basic ferric sulphate, is mixed with "stick " and evaporated to

dryness.

517,i86— April 3, 189i. 3. B. SCHENCK. Fertilizer.

A fertilizer produced by boiling skins or their products or other like nitrog-
enous materials in sulphuric acid, to produce a jelly-like mass, aud adding
night soil, boneblack, and ground tobacco.

517,661— AprU 3, 189i. N. B. POWTER. Phosphatic fertUizer.

A dry, odorless fertilizing compound, consisting of substantially pure phos-
phate of alumina containing insoluble phosphoric acid mixed with slaughter-
house or other refuse, without the addition of acid; the product of No. 517,682.

611,561— July 3, 189i. E. GULICK. Mineral fertUizer.
A mixture of aluminous shale, 80 per cent, and wood charcoal, 20 per cent

182

MANUFACTURINa INDUSTRIES.

5g5,tli£— August gS, ISM. J. VAN RUYMBEKE. Coagulant.

A coagulant, formed by adding a boiling solution of an alkaline bichromate
to a mixture of copperas and sulphuric actd.
BS6.2SS— March S6. 1S95. J. W. HICKMAN. Fertilizer.

Composed of muriate of potash, black hellebore, sodium nitrate, paris green,
superphosphate of lime, hydrocyanic acid, and ground bone.
S37,S22— April SS, 1S9S. C. J. GREENSTREET. Fertilizer and process of making

same.

A nitrogenous fertilizer composed of solids of tank water combined with a
soluble silicate, produced by adding an agent capable of neutralizing the silicate
and retaining iree ammonia (such as sulphuric acid), then adding a soluble
silicate of an alkali and expelling the surplus water, and drying.
659.71,7— May SI, 1S95. J. M. McCAND LESS AND J. F. ALLISON. Fertilizer com-

pound.

A mixture of an acid phosphate, 1,200 pounds; dried blood, 100 pounds; cotton-
seed meal, 250 pounds; muriate of potash, 50 pounds; and ground graphitic
schist, 400 pounds.
550,61,5— November is, 1895. C. H. THOMPSON. Fertilizing material and process

of making same.

Peat moss, or like fibrous or spongy material, is boiled in a weak solution of
phosphoric acid together with a fertilizing composition— as soot, bone meal, and
gypsum— and then strained and partially fermented.

67S,8IS—Febriuxry 9, 1897. P. HUFF. Fertilizer.

A composition, for protecting and fertilizing corn, of coal tar, brimstone, soft
soap, saltpeter, lime, and plaster.

589,197— August SI, 1897. J. E. STEAD. Phosphate and method of making same.

A silico-phosphate, readilv soluble in solvents existing in the soil, of the for-
mula: (CaO)4 I'o Os + CaO. SiOo = Caj P, SiOiz; capableof isolation in character-
istic crystals in the form of a double salt; produced by melting normally insoluble
phosphates with silicious and calcareous matter in proportion to yield com-
pounds containing the ratio of 310 of tribasic phosphate of lime to between 58
and 116 of monosilicate of lime.

699,066— February 15, 1898. V. DOANE. Insecticide

A composition of kainite, potassium nitrate, and white arsenic, the kainite
being in excess; for destroying cranberry insects.

601,089— March n, 1898. J. G. WIBORGH. Phosphate and method of making same.
A tetra-calcium-sodium (or potassium) phosphate, readily soluble in citrate
of ammonia; produced by heating apatite to a red or yellow heat with matter
containing sodium (or potas.sium) in proportion to yield a compound contain-
ing the ratio of about 426 of phosphoric acid to 660 of oxide of calcium, and
from about 124 to 188 of oxide of sodium (or potassium).

619,6SS— February Ih, 1899. C. H. THOMPSON. Fertilizer and method of making

same.

A fermented fertilized material (which will serve as a substitute for earth),
produced bv dissolving phosphoric acid, potassium carbonate, and sodium
nitrate in water; adding thereto a mixture of soot, gypsum, and bone meal
with water; boiling therein a spongy or fibrous material as peat moss; strain-
ing; adding yeast and sugar or saccharine matter, and fermenting the product.

635,6!ie— October 24, 1899. W. WARING AND J. E. BRECKENRIDGE. Acid-

proof bag for fertilizers.

The bags are treated with an acetate, preferably acetate of lime.
eS9, 806— December S6, 1899. J. H. BREWER. Fertilizing compound.

A solution of water, saltpeter, sal soda, bluestone, nitrate of ammonia, and
potash, is sprinkled on stable manure, and then wood ashes, salt, lime, phos-
phate, cottonseed meats, and kainit is mixed therewith.

6i9,9l,l—May «2, 1900. H. MEHNER. Artificial fertUizer.

A fertilizer containing as an essential ingredient silicon nitrides, which form
ammonia with the acid reagents in the soil.

PROCESSES.

S,lS9—June li, 181,3. C. BAER AND J. GOULIART. Improvement in making

manure.

Vegetable matter is formed into heaps, without previous immersion in lye
(as according to the Jauflret method), and subsequently the lye is poured
onto it.

U,1,S0— March 6, 1865. R. C. DEMOLON AND G. A. C. THURNEYSSEN. Im-
provement in treating fishfor manure and oil.

It is reduced to a dry powder, by steaming, expressing the oil, grating, desic-
cating, and pulverizing.

16,111— November i5, 1856. C, BICKELL. Process of treating feldspar for a

manure.

Feldspar, either potash or soda feldspar, is decomposed by heating it with
lime and phosphate of lime, to obtain potash or soda, either in the caustic or
carbonated state, or for the purpose of obtaining a fertilizer.

16,882— March 2A, 1857. L. REID. Improvement in processes for preparing ferti-

lizers.

The liquid matter obtained from the treatment of animal matter with high
pressure steam, after separation of the fat and pulpy matter, is treated with
sulphuric acid, and neutralized with bone dust; then the solid matter properly
gniund is mixed therewith together with pulverized bones and dried clay, and
the mass dried and ground.

i7,257 — May 5, 1867. O. STEARW6. Improved process of preparing green-sand

marl as a fertUizer of lands.

The sand is washed with agitation to separate useless earthy matters, then
disintegrated, with or without the admixture of animal matter, and then
ammonia is added, in the form of ammonia sulphate or otherwise.

t5,772— October 11, 1859. D. STEWART. Improved method of preparing bones for

fertilizing purposes.

Bones are stratified in a heap along with animal, vegetable, and mineral mat-
ter, to effect decomposition, the order of stratification being old plaster; stable
manure, etc; bones, blood, etc.; stable manure, etc.; old plaster.

te.SiS— December to, 1869. W. D. HALL. Improvement in fertilizers.

Fish is boiled in fresh water, drained, sprinkled with from 1 to 3 per cent of
sulphuric acid, mixed, and dried.

S6,l,17—May 37, 1862. L.HARPER. Improvement in fertilizers.

Phosphatic guano, which is deficient in soluble matter, is spread in moist-
ened layers together with layers of nitrogenous matter and layers of sulphate
of lime, sprinkled with sulphuric acid, and exposed to the sun, with turnings
of the material.
38,01,0— March SI, 1863. L. D. GALE. Improvement in treating phosphatic guanos.

Animal matter is treated with acid, or its equivalent, to separate the nitrog-
enous matter from the oil; and a concentrated manure is formed by mixing
animal matter so treated with pulverized gypsum and then with guano.

1,1,1^8— February 2, 1861,. L. HARPER. Improvement in restoring phosphatic

guano.

A portion of the phosphatic guano is nitrogenizeu by saturating it with ani-
mal broth or juice or unne, and dried; another portion is treated with sulphuric
acid; and nitrogenous animal matter is treated with alkaline salts, sulphate of
iron, and magnesium chloride; the three masses are then mixed in a heap and
subjected to fermenting and heating for a month.

1,1,663— February 16, 1861,. A. A. HAYES. Improvement in restoring deammoniated

guano.

Common salt is mixed with the phosphate or guano and oil of vitriol diluted
with water, animal secretion, or ammonia water. After the moist mixture
begins to stiffen it is placed in a heap and mixed with animal matter sufficient
to supply the required amount of ammonia and allowed to ferment until putre-
faction ceases.
ia,006— March 2S, 186U. G. A. LIEBIG. Improvement in treating and preparing

Navassa guano.

The larger particles, available for fertilizers, are separated out, and the finer
material containing peroxide of iron, organic and indeflned material, is used
for paint and other uses.
l,S,l,66—July 13, 1861,. W. AD AMSON. Improved process of treating hair.

Hair of hogs and other animals is dried and deodorized by subjecting it to the
direct action of the products of combustion of coal or other fuel.

1,5,961— January 17, 1866. G. A. LIEBIG AND E. K. COOPER. Improved proc-
ess for manufacturing fertilizing phosphates.

Navassa guano or other substances containing phosphate of iron or of alumina
are made available for agricultural purposes by, first, treating with caustic lime
or carbonate or sulphate of lime, giving a phosphate of lime convertible into
superphosphate with sulphuric acid; second, treating with caustic or carbonate
or sulphate of soda or potash; third, treating with silicic acid.

1,6,318— February lU, 1865. W. ADAMSON. (Iteissues: 2,111,— November 28, 1865;
Div. A 8,71,1 (process); Div. B 8,7ia {product), June 10, 1879.) Improved method
of treating offal.

Animal offal is drained and dried by subjecting it to the direct action of the
products of combustion, in a chamber, at one operation.
1,6,700— March 7, 1865. R. B. POTTS. Improved process for treating Navassa

guano.

Superphosphate of lime is made from Navassa guano or all guano containing
more than 6 per cent of iron and alumina, by sprinkling it with the requisite
quantity of sulphuric acid while the mass is continually agitated.

1,7,610— May 9, 1866. E. P. BAUGH. Improved mode of manufacturing superphos-
phate of lime.

Bones and other offal or guano are fed into a closed or nearly closed tank,
along with a stream of sulphuric acid, and therein thoroughly mixed; the prod-
uct being continuou-sly discharged from the bottom.

1,7 ,611— May 9, 1866. E. P. BAUGH. Improved method of treating manure.
Sewage, guano, etc., is dried by passing the products of combustion from a

furnace through the material; the same being fed by traveling aprons across the

current of hot gases.

a, 91,1— May SO, 1866. R. B. FITTS. Improved process for treating and compound-
ing marl.
Marl is treated with night soil in combination with sulphuric acid, and to the

product there is added salt cake, gas lime, and animal charcoal.

1,3,831 — September 5, 1865. G. A. LIEBIG. Improvement in the manvjacture of

superphosphates.

Sulphurous acid, or muriatic acid, or sodium chloride is used as a substitute
for sulphuric acid in the production of a superphosphate from Navassa guano
or other phosphatic compound.

l,9,S91—September 12, 1866. F. KLETT. Improvement in the manufacture of fer-
tilizers.

A mixture of feldspar, carbonate or hydrate of lime, fluoride of calcium, and
phosphate of lime or iron is calcined at a red heat for about five hours, using
2 parts of the carbonate or hydrate of lime and 1 part of the phosphate of
lime or iron for every 1 part of the feldspar and 2 parts of fluoride of calcium
for every 1 part of alkali contained in the mineral.

52,863— February 27, 1866. A. AND E. LISTER. Improvement in deodorizing offal
Hot air and gases are forced into closed offal-drying cliambers, and at the same
time the gases, vapors, and exhalations are withdrawn therefrom and passed
into the furnace.

61,,636—May 8, 1866. J. WISTER. Improved mode of grinding bmiesformunure,ete.
Hard plaster is mixed with bones in grinding to facilitate the process and
prevent gumming of the mill.

69,978— November 27, 1866. A. DE FIGANlilRE. Improvement in the manufacture

of super-phosphates of lime.

The powdered guano is brought into contact with a surface wet with sul-
phuric acid, as the surface of a revolving cylinder.

60,91,8— January 1, 1867. A. SMITH. Improved fertilizer.

Boiled animal matter is subjected to pressure, as in a hydraulic press, to pre-
serve the fleshy matter from decoinposition.

62,760— March 12, 1867. G. A. LEINAU. Improvement in preparing fertilizers.

Sod is banked up with quicklime, and after standing for some time blood,
urine, domestic guano, and land plaster are successively applied or spread on
the bank, and then spent charcoal is worked into the mass.

70,e71—Nove7nber 6, 1867. W. DE ZENG. Improvement in tlie preparation of fer-
tilizers.

Finely pulverized slags of reducing and smelting furnaces are used in com-
bination with acids and alkalis, as the waste acids of dyeworks, and also with
urine, farm-house manure and otlier iimnioniaciil compounds.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

183

Tl,l>a»—Da«litberS,Jat7. J. W. BITNKR. Improvemtnt in/eriUiiert.
Manure til damp-rotted, thun dried utid pulverized.

7IS,ltS—i[arrh 10, ises. O. F. WILSON. Improvanent in the manttfadure nfphot-

phatlc ferlUisert.

A mixture of bones, bono ash or bone coal, and hot vl.scld niter or Halt cake Is
treated In a revolving cylinder with hot water and steam under prewure.

73,StS—.\lareh 10, 1863. O.F.WILSON'. Improvfment in the preparation of bones

for the mitnu/actun 0/phmphoric acid and photphates.

To remove the cvanides, sulphides, and other organic compounds from bones
which have been distilled according to No. 75,329. The bone-black material Is
heated In a rauttle furnace and the material turned over from time to time
until It assumes a uniform gray tint.

7S,»t7— March 10, 1S6S. Q. F. WILSON. Improvement in the manitfacture qfphoa-

phatei/or agricultural purpotet.

Bones are treated with water and oil of vitriol In a vat having a steam heating
coll until the whole mass is reduced nearly or quite to dryness.

78,061— Mail 19, 1S6S. J. COMMINS. Improved mode of treating mineral phot-

phates/or the mamifacture of fertilizers.

Mineral or earthy or natural phosphates are heated and plunged into gas
liquor, combined with sulphuric acid or other acid or salt. The phosphates may
be first treated with a solution of sodium chloride.

78,7SO—Jutu' », IS6S. L. 8. FALE.S. Impriirement in the manufacture of fertilizers.
Bones, blood, and highly nitrogenous material are treated witli the waste a<ud
from oil rellneries and the vapors from waste ammouiacal water of gas works,
and the mass reduced to a pasty consistency and cooled to a powder. This Is
mixed with blood digested with sulphuric acid and peat.

79,160— June tS, 186B. D. A. TER HOEVEN. (Reissue: t,,05S and l,,05S— June IS,

1870). Improvement in ttte manufacture of fertilizers.

Honu, hoofs, or other animal matter of au equivalent character are steamed,
dried, and crushed or ground.

8S,tfS—.Varch IS, 1S69. A. SMITH. Improved fertilizer.

Refuse leather is steamed at about 75 pounds pressure for four to eight hours,
dried and pulverized without the use of chemical agents. It may then be
mlxetl with a phosphate.

90,Sta—ila!/ 18, 1869. G. F. WILSON. Improved process of treating offal-gelaline

and scrap for Die manufacture of fertilizers.

Offal-gelatine and scrap is treated with acid phosphate of lime concentrated
and dried, and mixed with bone sulphate of lime, dried peat, gypsum, clay, etc.

90,S67—May i5, 1869. W. LALOR. Improved feHllizer.

The refuse acid of petroleum-oil rellneries is used instead of sulphuric acid In
the conversion of bone into superphosphates.

9t,7IA— July SO, 1869. J. G. NICKERSON. Improved fertilizer frmt seaweed.

Seaweed is cut into small pieces, dried, mixed with any of the fertilizing in-
gredients, and ground.

99,9114— February 15, 1810. O. LUGO. Improvement in the manufacture of ferti-
lizers and in extracting oils and fats.
Fish, oflal, blood, and other animal matter is treated with sulphurous acid or

with nitrous fumes and sulphurous acid, separate or in connection with hot

air, steam, or gases of combustion.

10O,i57— March 1, 1870. C. U. SHEPARD, JB. Improvement in preparing am-

moniated sulphuric acid for the mamtfadure of fertilizers.

Phosphatic material is treated with ammoniated sulphuric acid for the pro-
duction of an ammoniated superphosphate, said acid being produced by treat-
ing ammoniaeal water with lime or other liberating material, or by the
liberation of ammonia from boneblack or other ammoniaeal matter, and the
absorption of the vapor by sulphuric acid in such proportions as to leave a part
of the sulphuric acid uncombined.

10t,6S9—May S, 1870. O. LUGO. ImprovemeiU in the manufacture of fertilizers

and oil from Jith.

Fish is boiled, steamed, or cooked In acid or acid-salt solution to retain and
bind the nitrogenous substances.

t0i,St7 — June 24, 1870. O. LUGO. Improvement in manufacture of fertilizers from

fish, etc.

Fish liquor is treated with sulphuric acid, acid sulphates, hydrochloric acid,
or pyroli^neous acid, and may then be concentrated, either to dryness, form-
ing a highly nitrogenized product, or partially concentrated and mixed with
flsn scrap or pomace previous to desiccation.

10S,t8S—JiUy 11, 1870. E.WHITLEY. ImprovemerU in the manufacture <if fertili-
zers.
Vegetable matter is burned under a covering of earth, so that the latter is

impregnated with the gaseous products of combustion, and the earth and ashes

are then mixed.

105,319— July IS, 1870. A. DUVALL. Improvement in treating vitriolized phos-
phates.

Pulverized crude phosphate mixed with sulphuric acid, in a .semlliquid state,
is run into a large bin, the heat generated in the mass keeping it in a state of
ebullition and thoroughly mixing it. It also effects the evaporation of the
water. The side of the bin is afterwards removed and the mass broken up.

10S.909—Suvember 1, WO. C.P.HOUGHTON. Improvement in the manufacture

of fertilizers.

Pulverized crude marl is treated with a solution of soda-ash niter, and salt to
correct its caustic qualities, and may be mixed with bones and Peruvian guano.

111,751,— February Ik. 1871. L. S. FALES. Improvement in treating blood for the

manufacture of fertilizers.

Blood is treated with lime, soda, or potash, and acids and afterwards subjected
to heal and agitation to evaporate its water.

111,851— February li, 1871. W. B. JOHNS. Improvement in treating bones, horns,

hoofs, etc., for manufacture of fertilizers.

They are desiccated and rendered friable by treating with steam in contact
therewith, at the commencement of the operation, and then subjected to heat
evolved from steam not in contact; in one continuous operation and in one
vessel or apparatus.

111.910— Frhnmry 11, 1871. J.J.CRAVEN. Improvement in treating blood for Vie

manufacture of fertilizers and ammoniaeal satis.

Dried salt cake — either the bisulphate or binltrate of soda — Is mixed with
blood and submitted to heat sutllcient to dls.solve the salt.

113,116— April i, 1871. D. FORBies AND A. P. PRICE. Improvement in the treat-
ment ofsewige and the mantifnrtnrr of fertilizers.

Natural phosphates of aluiiiiini arc treated with the sulphuric acid or hydro-
chloric add. or mixtures of the siiine. cither with or without a baao such a*
lime, and sewage Is then treated with the product.

m.ma—May 9, mi. O. T. lewis, improvement in grinding photphale tub-

stances.

Mineral phosphates arc ground with water, Instead of grinding dry, to reduce
them to extremely fine powder.

119,000— SititemlKr 19, 1871. W. AOAMSON AND C. F. A. SIMONIN. (Reittue:
mv. A. 5610; IHv. B, 5611: Div. C, S61t— October tl, 1H7S.) Improvement in treat-
ing nfal, flesh, entrails, etc., for preservation of manure, etc.
Animal oils and fats are extracted by means of hydrocarbon vapors in a

closed vessel: the residue, deprived of its fatty constituents and retaining the

ammonia, constitutes a fertilizer.

lit,ns— December 16, 1871. W. H. McNEILL. Improvement in deodorizing the

gases from lard boiling, etc.

The vapors are subjected to the action of a disinfectant preTlotu to passing
to the condenser.

111,77^— January 18, 1871. J. A. MANNING. Improvanent in proeettet for manu-
facturing fertilizers.

The contents of vaults and cess pits is treated with 5 per cent of sulphuric
acid, and then evaporated In tanks. Products of combu.stlon passing over or in
contact with the material are then forced, with the vaiwrs. into a condenser;
the carbureted hydrogen passing to a purifier and thence to a gas holder; the
weak solution of ammonia treated for the manulacture of sulpliate of ammonia;
and the dry product for a fertilizer.

ltS,7U,— February IS, 1873. B. TANNER. Improvement in the manufacture of

superphosphateit of lime.

Slowly soluble superphosphate of lime; produced by heating a mixture of
sulphate of lime and phosphate of .soda or of ix>tash. with or without water; or
by treating lime or sulphate of lime with any of the forms of j>hosphate of soda
or of potash; or with phosphoric acid and sodium or potassium chloride, or
equivalent agents. Soda or potash in a caustic condition, or in combination
with an acid, are produced as by-products.

11I,,0I,1— February 17, 1871. J. E. DOTCH. Improvement in deodorizing and fer-
tilizing materials.
Pulverized clay, argillaceous earth, and clay marl is treated with sulpho-

muriatic acid and then mixed with night soil, etc. Clay thus treated may be

mixed with coal ashes, coke, or gas-house silt, as a disinfecting substitute for dry

earth.

lll.,901— March 16, 1871. J. M. LOEWENSTEIN. Improvement in deodorizing and

fertilizing compounds.

Dilute sulphuric acid is neutralized with caustic or carbonate of lime, and
then equal quantities of peat, charcoal, sand, carbolic acid, clay, common salt,
and river sediment are added; the composition to be used in a dry state to de-
odorize night soil.

lli,9ei— March 16, 1871. M. B. MANWAKING AND R. DE WITT BIRCH. Im-
provement in the manufacture of potash and phosphate of Hme.
See Group III, Potash.

115,017— March 16, 1871. S. BROWN. Improvement in preparing fertilizing male-
rials from earth, etc.
A fertilizer composed of burnt earth and wood ashes, prepared by charging

and burning a kiln with alternate lasers of wood and earth.

115,07!,— March 16, 1871. H. H. PARISH. Improvement in treating sewage for

fertilizers, etc.

A mixture of retorted charcoal (the product of pyroligneous-acid works), 1
part, and slacked lime, 2 parts. Is mixed .with sewage to deodorize and con-
vert into manure.

115,111— March 16, 1871. M. J. STEIN. Improvement in rendering animal matters

and drying and pulverizing the same.

A fertilizer derived from the treatment of animal matters in a confined condi-
tion, the material notcomingincontact with Iheairat any stage of the process.

115,3iS— April 1,1871. A.SMITH. Improvementinapparatusfor pulverizing ani-
mal matters for fertilizers.
Animal matter is desiccated and pulverized by triturating the same in a hot

chamber in a revolving cylinder, mixed with hard substances, as pieces of iron

or stones.

115,613— April 9, 1871. N. A. PRATT. Improvement in treating phosphates of lime

for the manufacture of fertilizers.

Crude phosphates treated with sulphuric acid are at once subjected to
hydraulic or other pressure to extract the soluble phosphates. The liquor, and
a thin smooth paste of lime, are heated to about 180° F. and one poured into
the other in such proportions as to neutralize, and boiled and stirred until the
phosphate of lime is precipitated, when it is compressed into cakes.

116,90!,— May 11. 1871. N. A. PRATT AND G. T. LEWIS. Improvement in the

treatment of phosj>liate»for the manufadure of fertilizers, etc.

Crude phosphate is ground with acid and water, and the product pressed in
bags, to obtain the phosphoric extract, which extract is then ground with lime,
magnesia, or other base, or their salts to produce an artificial phosphate.

117.670— June i, 1811. M. J. STEIN. Improvment in drying and deodorizing aiU-

mal matters, oils, etc.

The vapors and gases are exhausted from the heating chamber or veasel as
fast as generated.

118,1,5!,— July 1, 1871. H. C. BABCOCK. Improvement in baling manures.
It Is formed and pressed into bales, either with or without embedded handles.

119,517— July 16, 1811. E. P. AND D. BAUGH. Improvement in the treatment of

horns, hoofs, and other organic matter.

Exhaust steam is pas,sed through a mass of horns, hoofs, bones, or other organic
offal preparatory to grinding (steam, under pressure, having a tendency to force
in the glutinotis con.stituents and obstruct the trituration).

118,751— July 9. 1871. N. A. PRATT AND G. T. LEWIS. Improvement in treating

phofphaiic rock, etc.

The phosphatic extract of No. 126,904 is evaporated to dryness, alone or
mixed with salts of .soda, potash, magnesia, or ammonia: or such mixtures are
calcine<i to produce compound phosphates of lime and of the alkalis. It may
be mixed with other fertilizing components.

184

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

180,610 — August SO, 1S72. H. C. BABCOCK. Improrcmcnt in preparing manure

for transportation, storage, or market.

The straw is eliminated and tlie residuum is compressed into a bale, and may
be covered with a coating of clay, cement, or the like.

ISl.lSl— September S, 1872. J. J. STORER. (Reimui: e,70.?— December SS. 1S7S.)
Improvement in processes and apparatus for deodorising and destroying the gases
from offal-treating establishments.
The gases are deodorized by passing them through an independently heated

furnace, flue, or other heat-radiating chamber; also by contact with burning

coke, charcoal, or coal, or a blast of tine pulverized fuel.

133,i98— October SI, 1S7S. J. J. STORER. Improvement in treating offal so as to

produce fertilisers and destroy offensive gases and vapors.

Animal refuse is treated in a reverberatory furnace, the steam being drawn
ofl through hot-wall ilues and passed through burning fuel, or into the fire-
place or stack.

lSS,l,Olf— November S6, lS7i. L. W. BOYNTON. Improvement in preparing

manure)) for transportation.

Peat is mixed with manure and compressed to concentrate and exclude the
atmosphere, and may then receive a waterproofing coat of soft clay.

1S5,SSS— January 2S, 1S7S. J. J. STORER. Improvement in treating offal and

manufacturing fertilizers.

OSsd and blood are dried in a cylinder by passing the flame of pulverized fuel
and other products of combustion through the cylinder directly over or In con-
tact with toe material.

lS5,99i— February IS, 1S73. J. McDOUGALL. Improvement in fertilisers.

Ammonia gases or vapors arising from the destructive distillation of carbona-
ceous or aramoniacal substances or from gas liquor are caused to be absorbed
bv an acid phosphate of lime, the latter being made porous, if need be, by an
admixture of sawdust or porous material. Sulphuric acid may be added to the
product to render the phosphate again soluble.

lSe,0S6— February 18, 187S. W. D. CRAVEN. Improvement in preparing bloodfor

fertilizers.

Blood is injected or introduced directly upon the heated walls of a vessel or
chamber, whereby immediate dehydration is produced.

1S7 ,969— April 16, 1873. E. C. C. STANFORD. Improvement in deodorizing animal

matters for fertilizers, etc.

Solid or liquid matter, as excreta, is deodorized by subjecting the same to the
action of granulated charcoal {preferably seaweed charcoal), alone or mixed
with earthy matter; the charcoal being recovered and revivified.

1S8,SS0— April 29, 1873. F. HILLE. Improvenienl in the treatment of sewage.

Sewage is treated with lime, chloride of zinc, and the chloride of magnesium,
and the solid and liquid constituents separated by deposition and filtration. The
precipitate Is mixed with the spent filtering materials (charcoal) and dried for
fertilizer.

lU),S91—July 1, 1873. J. TURNER. (Reissue: 58lt5— April il, 1871,.) Improvement
in treating offal and manufacturing gas.
The gases are separated from the moisture and carbureted.

lU>.S59—July 1. 1873. B. TANNER. Improvement in the manufacture of super-
phosphate of lime.

A chemical examination is made of a calcic phosphate solution, and if the
phosphoric acid and lime or calcium are present in the proportion of 71 parts of
phosphoric acid for 28 parts of lime or 20 parts of calcium, it is evaporated to
dryness and the heat maintained until the final decomposition is complete. If
the lime or calcium is in excess the solution is treated with sulphuric or oxalic
acid in a specified manner, or phosphoric acid is added to balance the lime; if
phosphoric acid is in excess, lime in proper proportion is added.

lUUatS— August 19, 1873. A. F. ANDREWS. Improvement in fertilizers.

Tank stuff or animal matter is mixed with about one-third the quantity of
unslacked lime, either with or without the addition of sodium chloride or
calcium chloride, and subjected to agitation m a mixer, which is externally
heated, and reduced to a dry condition.

l!tl,85S — August 19, 1873. C. C. COLE. Improvement in drying and disintegrating

animal matters.

Blood and animal matter is mixed with from 5 to 10 per cent of dry quicklime
and partially dried, and then from 2 to b per cent of sulphuric acid is added
and the drying finished.

1U,S77— November te, 1873. H. STEVENS. Improvement in the manufacture of

fertilizers.

After the rendition of fatty matter from animal matter, the remaining liquor
is evaporated to a sirup, and then mixed with the solid animal matter and
plaster of paris, forming a friable mass.

l!,B,Ba5~,Ianuary 6, 1871,. B. F. SHAW. Improvement in treating waste liquors of

slaughterhouses to produce fertilizers.

The washings, scrubbings, and waste liquors are defecated by cooling to a
point at which blood will not coagulate, adding a quantity of blood and
thoroughly mixing and boiling for a few minutes, with or without the prior
addition of charcoal or the addition of chemical reagents.

liS.OSS— March 31, 1871,. A. HERBERT. Improvement in methods of analyzing

soils.

Ten experimental plats of homogeneous land are planted in like manner,
using a fertilizer formed from nine Ingredients of plant food, one plat with the
complete manure, and each of the others with the complete manure less one of
the ingredients, whereby the fertilizer required in that soil for perfect plant
growth is aacertained.

161,905— June 9, 1861,. G. E. NOYES. Improvement in the manufacture of ferti-
lizers from night soil.
Night soil is mixed with hydraulic cement or calcined plaster, and sprinkled

with sulphuric acid, to form solid bricks or lumps.

15S,S8B—June IS, 1871,. H. A. P. LISSAGARAY. Improvement in fertilizers.

Blood is converted into an imputrescible fertilizer by treatment with an alka-
line sulphite or Its equivalent, and then adding sulphuric acid in constant and
regulated quantities. The apparatus is also claimed.

Uh.oat— August 11, 1871,. H. Y. D. SCOTT. Improvement in the manufacture of

fertilizers from sewage.

Process of deodorizing excreta and urinous liquors by separating the solids
from the liquids by the use of charcoal, dried earth, sawdust, or like material,
and then extracting the phosphoric acid and nitrogen from the liquids by lime
or hydrated phosphate of magnesia.

15l,,09S— August 11, 1871,. H. Y. D. SCOTT. Improvement in treating sewage.

Quicklime is added to sewage water, in any of the modes usually practiced,
and the precipitate calcined to obtain useful and marketable products.

lS.i„^17— September g9, 1871,. E. H. HUGH. Improvement in treating blood.

Blood is treated with pulverized unslacked lime, and the gelatinous mass
dried. It may be mixed with boneblack and used as a manure, or with flour
or other farinaceous substance as an article of food.

158,771— January 19, 1875. B. ACKERMAN. Improvement in the preparation of

fertilizers.

Excrementary matter and straw or litter is baled in rectangular form, the
lines of band compression, when the bales are corded up, forming ventilating
grooves.
iei,8S7—April6, 187S. S. SEITZ. Improvement in fertilizers.

Ovster shells, as a base fertilizer, are scorched and dried, so as to render
them friable, without decomposing the nitrogenous matter connected with
them, and then ground.

163,099— May 11, 1875. T. MYERSON. Improvement in processes of treating blood

for the manufacture of manures.

Blood is treated with a salt of alumina— as the sulphate or double sulphate of
alumina and ammonia — to retain the ammonia.

165,172— July 6, 1875. C. H. NORTH. Improvement infertilizers.

The soup obtained from rendering offal, after the water is nearly all evapora-
ted, is treated to a heat of about 300° F. for about four hours, forming a brittle
and soluble fertilizer product without deliquescence.

165,31,5— July 6, 1875. O. LUGO. Improvement infertilizers.

Coagulated, granular, pulverulent blood combined with antiseptics, is prepared
by breaking it up with agitation, coagulating with heat, and removing the free
water by centrifugal action. The antiseptic is preferably added after the dis-
integration of the clots (though it may be incorporated before) or to the finished
product.

172,590 — January 25, 1876. L. STOCKBRIDGE. Improvementinprocessesofmanw-

facturing fertilizers.

Salts containing nitrogen, potash, and phosphoric acid are compounded — and
these elements with lime and magnesia for cotton and tobacco — in the propor-
tions in which they are taken up by the crop, as shown by an analysis of the
plants, and in amounts requisite to produce any desired amount of crop within
certain limits.

183,21,2 — October 10, 1876. R. R. ZELL. Improvement in processes and apparatus

for manufaeturing fertilizers from night soil.

The night soil is separated into watery and semifluid bodies, and the ammo-
nia vapor distilled from the watery constituent and incorporated with the .semi-
fluid mass or base of the fertilizing compound after the treatment of the latter
with sulphuric acid, for the purpose of fixing the ammonia.

186,201,— January 16, 1877. S. L. GOODALE. Improvement iti processes of treating

fish scrap.

Fish or fish scrap is washed subsequent to its being cooked (preferably after
cooking, draining, and once pressing) , and before it is finally pressed; whereby
gelatine is removed, the yield of oil increased, and the subsequent drying of
the scrap facilitated.

196,881— Noveniber 6, 1877. P. G. L. G. DESIGNOLLE. Improvement in treatment

of mineral phosphates.

Poor mineral phosphates are enriched, carbonate of lime eliminated, and
also tribasic phosphate of lime transformed into monobasic phosphate in solu-
tion by the use of sulphurous acid, either in closed or open vessels. The mono-
basic phosphate of lime so obtained is concentrated to <ib° to 50° Baum»5 and
mixed with sufiEicient planter of paris to absorb excess of water and solidify the
mass.

206,158— July 16, 1878. H. WIESINGER AND L. RISSMCLLER. Improvement

in treating rags for obtaining paper stock and fertilizers.

Woolen and half-woolen rags, hair, etc., are subjected to the action of hot lime-
water to disintegrate the animal fiber, and then dried. The nitrogenous powder
is then separated from the unchanged cellulose, for use in the manufacture of
fertilizers.

209,U5— October 29, 1878. E. P. BAUGH. Improvement in the treatment of offal

for fertilizers.

The residuum of fat-rendering tanks is agitated and exposed to heat during
agitation, after leaving the main rendering tank and before it is subjected to
pressure.

216,816 — June 2i, 1879. W. ADAMSON. Improvement in methods of treating bones

for glue stock.

Bones are first subjected to the action of hydrocarbons, liquid or vapor, to
extract fat and oily matter, and then to the usual acid treatment.

221,232 — November U, 1879. J. M. HIRSH. Jmprovemeniinprocesses and apparatus

for deodorizing and disinfecting.

The noxious gases are converted into salts by contact with a liquid composed
of metallic salts in solution mixed with a solution of organic salts — as the
nitrates of iron and the salts of the phenyl, xylol, cresyl, etc., series. The
apparatus is claimed.

228,387—June 1, 1880. W. PLUMER. Process and apparatus for the manufacture

of fertilizers.

Night soil is heated to desiccate it and expel its noxious vapors; antiseptic
vapor, as carbolic acid, is mingled with the desiccated material, and the tree
ammonia is fixed as crude sulphate of ammonia and mixed with the disin-
fected desiccated material to complete the fertilizer.

228,955— June 15, 1880. B. TERNE. Treatment of sewerage.

A solution for disinfecting and precipitating tank and sewage waters, consist-
ing of water containing superphosphate of lime and tannic or gallic acid.

229,965— July W, 1880. J. H. CHAMBERS. Manufacture of an improved fertilizer

from stable manure.

Stable manure is rotted by subjecting it to a moderate heat in a closed cham-
ber with moistening at intervals. The chamber is provided with a steam coil
and a steam inlet pipe.

236,763— January 18, 1881. F. J. BOLTON AND J. A. WANKLYN. Process of

manufacturing artificial manures.

Urine is evaporated at about 212° F., with a small proportion of charcoal,
soot, burned bones, or other charred absorbent material, and the solid constit-
uents obtained in a condition suitable for manure.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

185

fiS.JM— ft6r««ry«, I8S1. O.T.LEWIS. Mannfadun nf /ertaUen.

l'nlverlior J*everul months.

ISS.tiO— March I. IStit. J. M. & J. LIl'PINCOTT. Fertlllier.

SIhk or scoriH from blast turniicos for the manufacture of pto Iron from Iron
ore!>— preferably the nonvltreinis or gray slag— 1» pulverized and used aa a b««e
In the manufueture of fertlUzem.

Ul.iSS—Mav 10, ISHl. R. WERDEKMANN.
bUxHt.

Manu/neture nj fertUUeri /nm

A rich nitrogenous product Is produced bv adding lime to fresh blood, agitat-
ing the mixture, precipitating the lime by nettling, and flnall; drying the coag-
ulate<l bl(KKl.
m.aeS—Mayti.lSSt. O. a, LIEBIG. Treating phofphatm /or /ertiibers.

A calcined mineral phosphate, produced by nilxinR phosphates or phosphor-
ites with coal or charcoal and subjecting It to a grent heiit, the phosphoric acid
formed, though insoluble in water, being available for plant food.

•21,1.777— June U. JSSl. A. J. HUET. Treatment of animal and vegetable tubstanca

/or the manii/actitre o/ /ertilizerg, ete.

A solution of magma of lavii resulting from treating lava with acid, alunite
calcined with chloride of potassium, and lime mixed with oxidized oil of tar, to
preserve and disinfect ana destroy germs.

ti7.57»~Sepiembert7. 18S1. W. PLUMER. ProceMo/and apparatus /or maimfa/:-

luring and (lesieeating animal and vegetable mbttaneet.

The material is suNlivlded and passed through heate<I retorts into rccepte-
cles. the gases and vapors generated being carried off by a blast of air throiigh
a pipe connected with the retorts, but wltnout actual contact with the material
treated, the material being cooled and aerated by another blast of air after
leaving the retorts.
tM.0S9— January 10, ISSi. J. F. GIBBONS AND G. A. LIEBIG. Treating phot-

phatet/or/ertilizert.

A phosphatic fertilizing compound consisting of superphosphates combined
with add salts of alkalis and lime; produce<l by mixing crude ferruginous or
aluminous phosphates with salts of soda, potash, or magnesia, and carbon-
aceous matter, bumingor calcining, and then mixing the product with an acid.

tliS.7S7—May SO, 18SS. C. L. FLEISCHMANN. Treatment o/ prairie foil to obtain

uK/ut producte ther^rom.

Rich prairie soils are exposed to the heat of combustion and sublimation, and
the products treated by purification and lixiviation to extract the alkaline, car-
bonaceous, and nitrogenous matter.
t59,liO—June 6. ISSS. F. L. H.\RRIS. Manii/aclure o/ /ertilizing material.

Two or more charges of bone, horns, or hoofs are successively boiled in the
same water in a closed vessel under pressure, removed and dried, then a suit-
able quantity of the material thus treated Is soaked in the liquor to absorb the
gelatine contained therein, and it is tinally dried and pulverized.

iSy.SOi—June S, 1S83. F. PETRI. Method o/ and mean»/or treating teicage.

The solid substances are eliminated; the liquid passed through an absorbent
filtering and antiseptic material, then again filtered, then acidulated or a
chloride Is mixed therewith; the acid or chloride is then eliminated or neutral-
ized, and finally the neutralizing agent is eliminated by filtration.

teo.ieS—June 17, 1S8S. H. COLLET. Treatment o/ excreta /or the production o/

/ertilizing gubstance^.

Solid and liauid constituents of excreta are separated and the .solid ingre-
dients collcctea as a s<um by the applicatiou of " nitriolic powder;" the latter
formed bv treating sulphate of iron with nitric acid and sulphuric acid, and
the sulphate of sesquioxide of Iron thus formed is mixed with clay or argillaceous
earth.

S61. OSS— July 11, ISS!. A. F. POULLAIN-DUMESNIL. Special /ertUizer /or

plants.

A fibrous absorbent material, such as moss, is wetted with an adhesive fluid
(as milk) Impregnated with a fertilizing substtlnce in the state of an impalpable
powder (as the phosphates and nitrogenous substances), and then dried.

ies.sei— August i9. 18S1. a. F. CROWELL. Manu/acture o//ertilizers.

Fish and superphosphate — sa>' in the proportion of C of the former to 1
of the latter bv weiglit— are cooked together, and then subjected to pressure;
the oil being separated and the gelatinous, nitrogenous, and phosphatic liquid
used as a fertilizing material.

!69,I,S7— December 19. 18S1. B. TERNE. Utilising tank waters o/ slaughterhouses.
Tank waters are concentratfd, mixed with animal charcoal, and dried.

t7e. lis— April 17, ISSS. J. J. KNIGHT. Preparation and production o/ mineral

phosphates.

Mineral phosphates containing alumina and oxides of iron are subjected to
the action of strong sulphuric acid of 1.70 specific gravity, equal to 140° Twaddle,
or upward, in excess; by means of which the sulphates of alumina and iron pro-
duced are rendered insoluble, while the phosphoric acid is rendered soluble,
and can be separated out.

ng.lM—June It, 1S8S. C. SCHEIBLER. Obtaining phosphatic /erlUizers /ram

basic iron stag.

Slags obtained in the dephosphorization of Iron are powdered, roasted by an
oxidizing flame, treated with muriatic acid, the quantity being sufficient only
for (lis.solviiig causth" lime and magnesia, together with the silicates and the
phosphates thereof, while its dilution is such as Is attained by adding at least
9 jiarts of water to 1 part of the acid of commerce of 21° Baumi?. and the phos-
phate of lime or magnesia finally precipitated by adding to the liquor, sep-
arated from the residue, caustic lime or magnesia (or the carbonates may be
used).

tSO.Stt^-June 16. ISSS. C. J. F. R. DE JANNEL MENARD AND H. J. E. HEN-

NEBUTTE. Manufacture o/ /ertilizers.

Sewage is agitated or mixed with chloride or sulphate of zinc and subse-
quently with a salt of alumina (preferably impure sulphate), filtered, and the
residue dried.

tSl,6SS-^ul!i 17. ISSS. A. H. KOEFOED AND T. B. STILLMAS. Method o/ treat-
ing phtisphatts o/ iron and alumina.
Insoluble phosphates are (lowdered and mixed with powdered dolomite or

limestone, the mixture calcined, then pulverized and treated with a mlntiral

acid.

tsa.ue— August tt, ism. E. a. HCRIBNKK. process n/ manufaeluHng arUJIeiat

/ertitizers.

A small percentage of sulphur Is mixed with phosphates of iron and alnmina
and the mixture roosted.
tllS,ia7— August tl, 188S. E. A. 8CRIBXER. Process n/ manu/arturing artijldal

/ertUlzers.

Mineral phosphates are ground and roasted, and the vapor of sulphur r mil-
phurouB anhydride Is forced through the mineral while roantlng.

mit.e^l,— September 11, ISSS. O. ROCOITR, Process q/ treating phosphatic slags /or

manure, etc.

The phosphate of Iron In phosphatic slag Is reduced by roasting Into a phos-
phide, and the latter Is then converted Into a soluble alkaline phosphate by
oxidation with a sulphate of sodium or [lotassliim, carbon, and sulphur or Iron
pyrites.

SS5.l87—Srptrmber IS, ISSS. T. G. WALKER. Offal drier.

The iilTal Is forced by a current of steam, and In the presence of a current of
air, through a heated coll; the process being continuous.

S01,tl,S—July 1, ISSi. G. A. LIEBIG AND J. F. GIBBONS. Treating phosphates

qf alumina and iron.

Mineral phosphates containing Iron or alumina are treated with dilute acid
of a strength between 32° and 47°, according to the amount of water contained
in the phosphorite.

SOl.ioe—JuJy 1, ISSl,. S.G.THOMAS. Manu/acture o/ alkaline phosphates.

Phosphate of soda or potash la obtained by treating their chlorides in a basic
Siemens furnace or Be.s.semer converter in the presence of oxygen and super-
heated steam, or other hydrogen-supplying substance, with molten phosphoric
iron and atmospheric oxygen or oxide of iron.

SOl.m—July 1, ISSh. S.G.THOMAS. Manu/acture o/ alkaline phosphates.

Soluble alkaline phosphates are manufactured from phosphoric nonsilicioiu
molten pig Iron in a basic-lined .Siemens furnace or Bes.semer converter, by
pouring the molten metal upon alkaline carbonate (covered with an iron casing
or plate, or with limestone ftr oxide of iron to prevent t<K) rapid volatilization of
the carbonate before the acid has decomposed it), turning on the blitst, and with
the blast intrwlucing a further quantity of the carbonate, the alkali rising
through the bath, and combining with the nascent phosphoric and silicic aci(6
and forming a slag of phosphate and silicate of soda and potash; ninning off
the slag; lixiviating It ; and evaporating or precipitating with milk of lime.

SOi.im—July If, ISSi. a. A. LIEBIG AND J. F. GIBBONS. Treating phosphates

/or/ertUizers.

Mineral phosphates containing iron or alumina are treated with dilute acid
of 32° to 47°, and then salts of ammonia or potash. Preferably the sulphates are
added, producing a fertilizer consisting of soluble and available phosphate of
iron, soluble and available phosphate of alumina, and alum.

S0S,S71— August n, ISSi. F. L. HARRIS. Manu/acture o//ertilizing materials.

Phosphates, mineral and phosphatic guanos, marine and oyster shells, lime-
bearing and other substances are placed in a closed vessel with enriched liquor
from animal substances, and heated to 250° to 320° F., or higher, after which
the material is dried and broken up.

S05,ti9— September 16. ISSi. T. B. STILLMAN AND A. H. KOEFOED. Method

o/ treating phosphates /or /ertUizers.

Insoluble phosphates are broken into pieces (not powdered as in No. 281,635),
and mixed with dolomite or limestone, also broken into pieces, roasted, pulver-
ized, and treated with a mineral acid.

SlS.S16—May f6, ISSS. W. G. STRYPE. Process o/ preparing dried blood.

A solution of sulphate of alumina or alum is added to blood~^ay 1 part In
60— and the blood finally dried.

Sti,10S— August 11, 1SS5. C. GIBSON. Process o/ making a /ertUizer /ram tank

waters.

Acid sulphate of an alkali, aluminous cake, or sulphate of alumina is added
to the tank waters (say in quantity equal to one-fourth of the contained solids),
the excess of water evaporated, and a carbonate, oxide, or hydrate of an alkali
or alkaline earth added to the residue (say 10 per cent of the original contained
solids), and the mass cooled and ground.

Sit,lSS—May IS, 18Se. J. VAN RUYMBEKE. Procets o/ making a /eriUizer/rom

tank wades.

The wastes are evaporated to about 20 per cent of moisture and then distilled
at aliout 460° F., producing a nonviscid and nondellquescent product. (No.
341,963.)

Sii,il7—May tS, 1SS6. E. A. BECKER. Process o/ making a /ertUizer from tank

waste.

Wet or pressed tankage is mixed with sulphuric acid In quantities propor-
tioned to the contained phosphates; then tank water or tank liquor is added,
and the mixturedried.

Si5.6SS—July IS, 1SS6. J.J.DUNNE. Process qf making phosphates.

Fertilizers are made from phosphates, natural or manufactured, containing
insoluble phosphate by mixing therewith alkalis or alkaline salts, sulphate ox
soda, and sulpnate of 'potash. In the proportion of from about one-half to an
equal part oi alkaline salt to the quantity of phosphate, and furnaclng the
mixture at a high temperature in conjunction with carbon.

S5S.Sf5— December 7. 1SS6. C. SCHEIBLER. Manu/actureo/phosphates/romslags.

Process No. 279,44.i Is modified by using acids which arc less diluted than
with 9 parts of water to 1 of acid, the slag being first roasted In an oxidizing
flarae and pulverized, thereby dissolving the main portion of the silica and
alkaline-earth phosphates and a part of llie oxides of iron and manganese, and
then fractionally precipitating the elements of the solution with successive
quantities of milk of lime or magnesia, whereby there are separatelv obtained
tiie phosphates of iron and nuinganese. and then the alkaline-earth phosphates,
with or without the silica; the phosphorus is separated from the iron and man-
ganese bv oxidation, dls.solved and precipitatea, whereby there is obtained an
additional amount of alkaline-earth phosphates and an amount of metallic
oxides.
SSi.9SS— December SS, ISSe. J. T. JULLIES. Manu/acture q/ /ertaizers.

A combined fertilizer and antiphylloxeric formed by dissolving sulphur in
liquid sewage and adding sulphide of carbon.

S61,6B6— April 19, 18S7. T. TWYNAM. Process a/ producing soluble alkaline

plxosphaies.

The fused alkaline slag produced in a l>aslc furnace or converter receives such
additional quantity of an alkaline salt, as carbonate of soda, as will form, w^lth

186

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

the alkali already present, at least three equivalents of base for each equivalent
of phosphoric acid, or trisodic or tripotassie phosphate. Soluble alkaline phos-
phates are produced by adding to phosphoric pig iron (during its conversion
into iron or steel in a basic or neutral lined converter or furnace) trisodic or
tripotassie phosphate.

SSI, lOU— July SI, 1888. D. E. PAYNTER. Process of drying offal and garbage.

The mass is subjected to the action of heated air and the vapors passed through
sulphate of lime before escaping, forming carbonate of lime and sulphate of
ammonia, and destroying offensive odors.

S9S,6Si— January 1, 1889. W. J. WILLIAMS. Pho^hatic fertilizer.

Nitrogenous matter, as wool waste, hair, blood, tankage, etc., is treated with
sulphuric acid, and at the same time calcined phosphate of alumina or iron, or
a mixture of the two, is mixed with water, and the two mixtures are then
thoroughly incorporated, and the mass dried at a heat not exceeding 18U° F.

Wl„SI,»—May 2S, ias9. H. ENDEMANN. Process of making fertilizers.

Tobacco is moistened, crushed, subjected to the action of mineral acid, washed
witti water, and the extract added to basic material, such as ground bones.
(Product No. 396,274.)

U)9,BS0— August SO, 1889. C. C. PECK. Process of making fertilizers.

Tank water is evaporated to a semiliquid condition, mixed with infusorial
eeirth, and dried.

US.ISS— October 22, 1889. T. R. HOUSEMAN AND C. B, M. SPROWLES. Process

of desiccation.

Garbage, brewer's grain, etc., is desiccated by subjecting to pressure and at
the same time heating it by a dry heat throughout its mass.

laS.SSO— March 11, 1890. E. R. HODGKINS. Process of making phosphatic ferti-
lizers.
Finely pulverized phosphatic material and calcic oxide are combined, as by

spreading them in alternate layers, the calcic oxide slacked by the addition of

water, and the ingredients mixed.

iSl,,977— August 2fi, 1890. C. CLIFFORD. Process of preparing fertilizers.

Refuse leather is dampened and placed in a heap to undergo a natural sweat-
ing: when the sweating subsides the heap is opened and turned over to expose
to the air, again closed up and again sweated, the operation being repeated as
long as fermentation lasts; the resulting product is then ground.

iS8,6W— October 21, 1890. P.B.ROSE. Manufacture of fertilizers.

An insoluble compound of iron, as ferrous or ferric oxide, is added to "stick"
or other albuminoid, either with or without an alkaline earth or its salt, or an
alkali or a salt of the same, and the mass evaporated to dryness. A soluble iron
salt may be added, and then precipitated by an alkaline earth or an alkali, or
their salts.

t,S9,8Sa— November i, 1890. J. A. LIGHTHALL. Process of making bags acid-proof .
Sufficient dry pulverulent acid-proof material is introduced into fertilizer
bags to cover the interior surface, and they are then passed between rollers.

ii2.i90— December 9, 1890. C.G.MOOR. Process of making fertilizer from sewage

sludge.

Sewage sludge, obtained by the use of sulpiiate of magnesia as a precipitant,
is compressed; fed in successive charges to a furnace having a forced draft; a
part of the sludge removed from time to time when carbonized (for use with
precipitating aj;ent and filter bed); the remainder calcined; the ash removed
from time to time; and finally mixed with sulphate of ammonia to form a
manure.

US, SS9— December 30, 1890. H. T. YARYAN. Process of making fertilizer from

tank water.

Tank water is evaporated to about 25° Baumfi and then passed through a
dialyser, by which such salts as produce deliquescence (the potash and other
alkaline salts) are removed, and the material is then evaporated to a dry
product.

iiS,OSS— January 20, 1891. R. GIEBERMANN. Process of separating gluten from

da7tghierhouse ivashitigs.

The temperature of the washings is gradually raised to about 200° F.; an
alumina compound is then introduced to precipitate the gluten, and the wash-
ings are passed through a filter.

U5,355 — January 27, 1891. W. B. SEAL. Process of making fertilizers.

Raw phosphatic material is subjected to the action of sulphuric acid, and then
powdered coal is added while the chemical changes are taking place, with or
without the subsequent addition of nitrogenous material.

Ue,087— February 10, 1891. J. VAN RUYMBEKE. Phosphate and process of mak-
ing the same.

An iron and alumina metaphosphate mixed with an iron and alumina sul-
phate; produced by treating an iron and alumina acid phosphate with sulphuric
acid and then heating it at a temperature of from 400° to 800° F., until the acid
phophate contained therein is converted into metaphosphate, usuallv indicated
by the product assuming a gray color.

iie,998— February 2i, 1891. J. VAN RUYMBEKE. Making phosphatic fertUizers.
Iron and alumina phosphate is pulverized, mixed with muriate of potash or
preferably low-grade sulpnate of potash, treated with sulphuric acid, and then
subjected to heat until the contained acid phosphate is converted into meta-
phosphate.

iBS.SOO—June 2, 1891. C. 6LASER. Process of separating alumina from phos-
phates.

Phosphate of alumina is dissolved out of phosphatic material by a hot solu-
tion of a carbonate of an alkali, as sodium carbonate; the phosphate of alumina
separated as a precipitate from the solution on cooling; and the solution again
used as a solvent for repeating the operation.

Ji58,7U— September 1, 1891. E.WATSON. Manttfacture of fertilizers.

Tank water, or stick, is converted into a practically drv nondeliquescent fer-
tilizer by adding thereto a portion of other animal matter practically nondeli-
quescent, and an alkali, and drying the product.

ISl.lK— October IS, 1891. J. VAN RUYMBEKE. Process of making fertilizer
from stick.

"Stick," a substance produced by concentrating tank water, is first treated
with sulphates in any usual way, as with basic persulphate of iron, to cure the
vlcidity and deliquescence of the substance, then dissolved in sulphuric acid,
and then there is mixed therewith tribasic phosphate of lime and the ma.ss
allowed to lie until apparently dry.

i71,S06— March 22, 1892. J. VAN RUYMBEKE. Process of making nitrogenous

fertilizers.

A solution of soluble salt of iron or alumina is formed with slacked lime added
in about the proportions of 10 per cent, in weight, of dry slacked lime, and boiled,
and the solution is then mixed with stick, preferably hot (in proportions deter-
mined by the condition of the stick) and the product dried.

lf7li,U19 — May 10, 1892. T. M. SMITH. Process of making fertilizers

Animal substances are placed within a suitable vessel with a definite amount
of water (sufficient only to reduce the material to a soft and pasty mass w^hile
hot), the vessel closed and subjected to heat until the texture of the material has
been destroyed; though soft whfle hot it becomes brittle and pulverable when
cold without further desiccation.

1^9,010— -Tanuary S, 189S. O. T. JOSLIN. Process of making fertilizer from tank

water.

The water is evaporated to a sirupy condition, heated to 140° to 200° F.,
when a small percentage of sulphuric acid is added, and then from 5 to 20 per
cent of sulphate of magnesium may be added and an absorbent of the superna-
tant liquid, and the product dried by subjecting it to a temperature of 300° to
400° F. while in motion, for fifteen minutes to an hour.

l^i,9S9— April 4, 1S9S. L. RISSMULLER AND H. VOLLBRECHT. Mamifacture

of superphosphates from kettle residue.

The kettle residue of glue factories is mixed mth warm sulphuric acid of 60°
Baumg, heated at about 200° F., and allowed to stand until the nitrogenous
substances have entered into solution with the acid, the gypsum has been pre-
cipitated, and the fat risen to the surface, when the solution is .separated and
powdered phosphate is added thereto in sufficient quantity to take up all the
sulphuric acid present, thus rendering soluble the phosphoric acid of the added
phosphate and yielding a comparatively dry fertilizer product.

iai„9l,0— April 4, 189S. L. RISSMULLER AND H. VOLLBRECHT. Mamifacture

of superphosphates.

The process of No. 494,939 is applied to offal, bones, and other animal matter,
the fat and fat acids being skimmed off and separately collected as fast as they
rise to the surface.

1,96,0!^— AprU 11, 189S. O. T. JOSLIN. Process of making fertilizer from tank '

water.

Tank water is first decomposed by the addition of sulphuric acid, then 5 to 13
per cent of a concentrated solution formed by dissolving waste fuller's earth in
sulphuric acid is added, and the product is then dried at a temperature of from
300° to 360° F.

l,9S,0liS— April 11, 189S. O. T. JOSLIN. Process of making fertilizer from tank

water.

From 6 to 10 per cent of an acid phosphate of calcium is added to tank waters;
then from 5 to 13 per cent of a concentrated solution formed by dissolving waste
fuller's earth in sulphuric acid; then an absorbent, as pressed, cooked blood, may
be added, and the product dried.

1,96,687— May 2, 189S. P.C.HOFFMANN. Process of treating phosphates.

Florida inland phosphates are pulverized, mixed with a theoretical amount
of sulphuric acid, and heat is supplied to the ingredients, independent of the
heat of chemical reaction, sufficient to retain the mass (until the free phos-
phoric acid has had its ciTect upon the in.soluble phosphoric acid) at a temper-
ature above the normal temperature occasioned by the chemical reaction of the
mixture, which is ordinarily about 50° C and yet not exceeding the tempera-
ture at which pyro-phosphates are formed, or about 200° C.

500,100— June 20, 1S9S. M. A. GOLOSEIEFF. Fertilizer.

The gelatine refuse from tallow manufactories is evaporated to the consist
ency of 27° to 28° Baumc; unslacked lime is then combined therewith in the
proportion of 600 pounds of lime to 1,000 pounds of the partially evaporated
broth ; the mass is then allowed to expand and dry, and is reduced to a powdered
state.

501,037— July U, 1S9S. H. B. ARNOLD, p-occss of disposing of city garbage.

The material is cooked in a closed vessel from 4 to 8 hours, with condensation
of the vapors that pass off; the solid matter or tankage is separated from the
water or grease; and the tankage pressed and dried in a closed drier with con-
densation of the vapors. ^

506.363— October 10, 1893. N. DOWLING. Process of and apparatus for treating

garbage.

The solid and liquid matter is disinfected in transit: the solid separated from
the liquid, squeezed, pulped, compressed, and dried; conveyed to a furnace and
incinerated; the separated liquid matter being continuously agitated and disin-
fected. The apparatus is claimed.

51l,,0l,2— February 6, 1891,. J. J. SELDNER. Process of conrerting hair into ferti-
lizers.
Hair or other substance is heated with a weak solution of mineral acid in a

closed vessel to a temperature that will produce a pressure and disintegrate the

hair; sufficient pulverized alkaline matter is then added to neutralize the

free acid; and the mass is dried.

511,,0i$— February 6, 189/,. J. J. SELDNER. Process of making fertilizers.
A mixture of hair or like material and an acid phosphate is subjected to heat

in a closed vessel until the material becomes disintegrated and dissolved.

515,708— February 27 , 1891,. J. GREGORY. Processof making phosphaticfertllizers.
Boneblack, which has been previously used as a filtering material for oil,
either by itself or mixed with bones or offal, is mixed with sulphuric acid, and
the mixture boiled to cause the greasy .substance to rise and filter through the
boneblack, the residue being separated from the greasy material for fertilizer.

517,662— April 3, 1891,. N. B. POWTER. Process of making fertilizers.

From 6 to 50 per cent of substantially pure phosphate of alumina containing
insoluble phosphoric acid is mixed with slaughterhouse refuse and similar
waste, in quantity sufficient to take up all soluble and volatile ingredients.

52l,.81S— August 21, 189!,. C. WEIGELT. Process of making fertilizers.

Fish and meat refuse is comminuted and mixed with potassium salts (as
potassium chloride or potassium sulphate) and allowed to stand, say from three
to five days, until a lye is formed, which is then drawn off; the fatty matter
contained in the remaining mass is extracted; and the material dried and
ground.

BN .810— October 23, 1891,. E. RECORDS. Process of making fertilizers.

The solid parts of tankage are disintegrated, without pulverizing, by the
admixture or powdered marl. A mixture of pulverized calcareous marl and
blood, tankage, or offal is dried, and then more blood, tankage, or offal is added
to the mixture and again dried. The ultimate addition of sulphuric acid eon-
verts the ammonia into a stable compound.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

187

130. tte— December i, 189i. N. B. POWTER. /"iwcm q/ utUbing garbai/e and timi-

iar waMe products.

Garbage Is reduced to a condition o( sludge by steaming or boUinif In the
presence of sulphuric acid; the grease is removed, a proper amount of insoluble
alumina phosphate Is adde<i; and the mass subjected to simultaneous stirring
and evaporation In vacuum until it Is converted Into a dry, granular niiuss.

63.1.076— .Uurch 5, 1S9S. A. R. C. PIEPER. I'rocens of making citrate loluble jiIwh-

phates.

Pulverized phosphate of Iron or alumina is mixed with a hot pulp, obtained
by slacking caustic Umo In a soda or potash lye In such proportions that there
will bo about two equivalents of oxide of lime for oath oiiulvalent of phos-
phoric acid in the com|iound. The bunit lime Ls slacked in from .5 to tO per
cent of an alkali lye. A nitrate, as saltpeter, Is preferably added to the final
product.

SSS.tOi—ifarcli S. 1S9S. H. M. HOWE AND J. E. STEAD. Procest o/ making

telrabaaie photphata.

In the dephosphorlzatlon of Iron, phosphoric acid is rendered soluble by add-
ing phosphates to the slag thereby produced, with or without the addition of a
base, such as an alkaline earth, oxide of iron, oxide of manganese, or alumina,
or their equivalent. The product, when finely ground, may be utUUetl direct
as a fertilizer.

SUS.OSO—July 2, 1S9S. D.T.DAY. Procem 0/ making photphates soluble in dilute

citric acid.

A mlxtureof phosphate rock contalnlngasultable percentage of silica, oradded
silica, and a calcareous base Is heated to a temperature at which carbonate of
lime gives up lis carbonic acid, and the temperature maintained well below
partial fusion to .secure a inaxiinuni of citric-acid-solublc phosphate. A pota.s-
sium salt, such as sulphate or muriate, may be added, wiiereby the temperature
can be reduced to between 535° and (>50° C.

SUI.716—Septnnber Si. 1S95. W. A. SHEPARD. Method of and apparatus for

preparing fertiltzcrs.

Superheated steam Is pasiied through excrement in an air-tight chamber; the
ammonlacal and other ga-ses condensed in water; and the dehydrated and
cooked solid matter mixed with lime.

Si8,Sit— October tl, 1S9S. J. WODISKA. Process of treating garbage.

The liquid is expressed, the garbage heated to further expel moisture, and it
Is then subjected to destructive distillation in a retort.

550,011,— yorember 19, 1S95. E. MEYER. Process of disintegrating Thomas slag.

The disintegration of Thomas .<!lag is facilitated by introducing, while in a fluid
state, a small tjuantity of an alkaline disintegrating agent, such as alkaline car-
bonate, or alkaline .silicate, either with or without a reducing powder, such as
coke powder or a metallic sulphide.

578.51l—i[arch 9, 1897. H. A. HOGEL. Process of and apparatus for making fer-
tilizers.

Garbage is digested with hot water and steam under pressure and reduced to
a sludge; filtered by forced filtration while well heated; hot water Is forced
throujjh the mas.".; the grease is separated from the rest of the filtered liquids;
and tiie solid matter dried, mixed with phosphatic fertilizing ingredients and
converted into a finely powdered condition.

580. Sik- April 6, 1897. W. S. RICHARDSON. Method of making fertilizers.

Hair, fleshings, or similar refuse of skin dressers is converted into a fertilizing
component by dry distillation, by subjection to a dry heat in a closed oven at
a temperature to make available the nitrogenous matter thereof and the fixing
of the same, as ammonlates, in the resulting product, say from 160° to 160° C •
the by-products being driven ofl and condensed, and the residual product
reduced to a comminuted state.

SSS.tee— August 17, 1S9T. G. DE CHALMOT. Treatment of phosphates.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

596,008— December SI, 1S97. L. RISSMClLER. Process of treating garbage.

Garbage is boiled with acid in adigester and reduced to a sludge; the evolved
gases are led to a furnace, heated and mixed with producer gas by pa.ssing
therethrough and utilized as fuel; the digested waste is subjected to centrifugal
action to remove the grease; and the residue is dried.

eOS.SeS— April ll, ms. W. E. Rowlands. P,-occss of making fertaizers.

Waste leat]ier is fermented, mixed with crude phosphate, and the mass agitated
with the addition of sufllcient sulphuric acid to decompose the phosphate.

603.e6a-.yay 10, 1898. J. B. TAYLOR AND H. V. WALKER. Process of and
apparatus for recovermg ammonia and waste products from garbage.
Thegarbago is divided into sections for successive treatment; one section dried
and burned ma thick layer, tlie products led off, the ammonia separated from
the combustible gases, and the latter burned in the presence of the next suc-
cessive section, for drying the same; the cycle being repeated with further sec-
tions successively.

609,797— August 30, 1898. H. DUDEN. ITocess of making fertUizers.

Concentrated tank water is mixed with albuminous substance, as concentrated
blood serum and the like, and the mixture (acidified if ne<es.sary ) simultaneouslv
subjected to the action of steam and eiectricitv— sav a current of 75 to 120 volts—
whereby it is vigorously oxidized. It is finally dried and ground.

61l.r,»)-Seplember V. 1898. L. RISSMOLLER. Process of treating garbage and
fertilizers obtained therefrom. "^

A grease-freed fertilizer, having available ammonia, is produced by boiling
garbage and converting it into a uniform fluid mass and then separating the
ingredient-s by centrifugal action, according to their respective speeiflc gravi-

619.0.K-Februar<j 7, 1899. B. TERNE. Process of making fertUizers from garbage.

The pressed and dric-d solid matter obtained from garbage is subjected to

destructive dl.stlllation, and the phosphated charcoal obtained is mixed with

concentrated tank liquors, expressed from the garbage, and the mixture dried.

6S0,U3— February S8, 1899. W. L. GOLDSMITH. Process of making fertilizers.

Phosphate rock and lignite or bituminous coal arc crushed and pulverized
together, whereby they are intimately mixed, and the powder is then treated

*?wf«torf "' *' '***' ^' ^' ^^*^^'^^- -Pi-o"**' of treating sewage for obtaining

A mixture of aluminic sulphate and ferric sulphate is added to sewage and
sulBcient sulphuric acid to complete the neutralization of the alkalinity of the
sewage; the precipitated putrescible and fattv matters are sei>araled from the
liquid, pressed, dried, and treated with a solvent to di.isolve out the fat or fatly

acid; the solid fertilizing portion neparstcd; and the tat or fstty add wpsratcd
from the aolrent.

631,181— August 15, 1899. O. SCHCLER. Process qf making luperphotphate:

To produce a double siiperjihOBphatc, a lye of mineral niporpho«phate of a
siiecillc- gravity of at least ^.■2\ is forniiHl, thereby precipitating gypsum, the pre-
liiiitaleseiiarated from the n-inninlng product, which is a mixture of mono-
calcium uhoHphate and phosplioric lutlrl, comminuted phonphate a<lde<l to the
said product, and the mixture heated Ui aljout 110° C.

eSi.UtS— October 3, 1899. D. CAMERON, F. J. COMMIN, AND A. J. MARTIN.

I\oceM of and apparatus fitr treating sewage.

.Sewage Is 8nbjecte<l under exclusion of air, of light, and of agitation to the
action of anaerobic bacteria until the whole mas* of solid contained organic
matter becomes liquefied, and the liquid effluent 1» then aubjected to air and
light.

61,6^559— Aprils, 1900. L. RISSMULLER. Process nf maHng fertilizers from refute
liquids.

Nitrogenous substances are extracted from nitrogenous refuse lianlds (In a
heated condition! by adding sulphite residue of the celluloae Industry— the
water from the sulphite liquor may be more or less evaporated— then filtering
and drying tile resulting product.

61,6,716— Aprils, 1900. B. TERNE. Process of making fcHilizers.

In the manufacture of fertilizers from animal excreta, the nrine is collected,
the liquid is separated from the solid excrements by pres-sure, mixed with the
collected urine, and allowed to putrefy, when it is distilUsl Ui obtain the con-
tained ammonia in the form of its salts, which are then mixed with the solid
matter.

GROUP IX.— BLEACHING MATERIALS.

CHLORINE.

i9,597— August gl, 1866. T. MACFARLANE. Process of preparing chlorine, bleach-
ing powder, carbonate of soda, and other products.
See Group II, Carbonate of Soda.

85,370— December i9, 1868. H. DEACON. Improvement in the manttfaeture of

chlorine.

For the continuous production of chlorine a current of hydrochloric-acid gas
and atmospheric air, heated preferably from 200° to 450° C, is passed over heated
material impregnated or mixed with oxides of copper and manganese, or
the like.

118.S11— August n, 1871. H. DEACON. Improvement in apparatus for producing

chlorine.

It is cleansed of dust or deposit of foreign matter by means of powerful blasts

of air, reversible at pleasure.

13A. 190— December U, 1S!S. h. E. A0BERTIN. Improvement in producing chlo-
rine.

A mixture of air and gaseous or liquid hydrochloric acid is passed over sesqul-
oxide of chrome, heated by preference to about 315° C.

11,1,533— July gg, 1873. H. DEACON. Improvement in the manufacture qf chlorine.
In Deacon's process for the manufacture of chlorine, there is employed a mix-
ture of an inactive but accelerating substance such as sulphate of soda, with au
active substance such as sulphate of copper.

166,801— July 20,1875. H. DEACON. Improvement in the manufaelure of chlorine.
In the manufocture of chlorine by the Deacon process, the Impure hydro-
cliloric-acid gas is submitted to the action of aqueous hvdrochloric acid, or of
chlorides such as sodium chloride, at an elevated temperature, to absorb the
sulphuric acid contained in the gas.

165,802— July 20, 1875. H. DEACON. Improvement in the manufacture of chlorine.
In the manufacture of chlorine, substances consisting mainlyor essentially of
sesquioxide of iron are employed as the porous material. Salts or compounds
of magnesia are used in coni unction with salts or compounds of copper or other
active chemical agents, and the same may be natural magnesian minerals or
products impregnated with salts of copper, etc.

316,195— April21, 1886. E. SOLVAY. Manufacture of clilorine.

In the manufacture of chlorine, a composition is used consisting of calcium
chloride, silica, alumina, and the residuum remaining after treatment of the
composition in a previous operation, the latter being infusible at the tempera-
tures required to produce reaction.

5ha,sua— August 31, 1886. G. RUMPF. Process qf producing chlorine.

Sal-ammoniac vapors are passed over an oxide of manganese at a temperature
below the red-hot state. Atmospheric air is then passed over the resulting
chloride of manganese producing free chlorine and regenerating the manganese
oxide.

357.669— February 16, 1887. D. G. FITZ-GERALD. Obtaining chlorine by electrol-
ysis.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

389,781— September 18, 1888. W. WEBSTER, Jr. Process of electroli/sing seuage

and sea water.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
390,895— Octcber 9, 1888. A. R. PECHINEY. Manufacture of chlorine.

In the manufacture of chlorine and hydrochloric acid by heating magnesium
or manganese chlorides in the presence of oxygen or steam with exclusion of
products of combustionj the chlorine-yielding material is charged into chambers
which have been previously internally heated by hot gases, a series of regen-
erators being used.

391,159— October 16, 188S. J. A. JUST. Process of making chlorine.

Nitric acid, hydrochloric acid, and manganese dioxide are heated in a gener-
ator—the nitric acid and manganese dioxide being in equivalent excess of the
hydrochloric acid— until all of the chlorine gas Is evolved. The residual man-
ganous nitrate liquor is then decomposed by heat, forming manganous dioxide
and nitrous vapors, which latter arc recovered as nitric acid.

il6,0S8—Xovember 28, 1889. L. MOND AND G. ESCHELLMANN. Process of

obtaining chlorine.

An intimate mixture of magnesia and a chloride of a fixc<l alkali is briquetted
and treated at from 400° to 600° C. with the vapor of hydrochloric acid or of
chloride of ammonium, and then with hot dry air or oxygen.

i20,8S7— February i, 1S90. E. SOLVAY. Process of making chlorine.

Chlorides are decomposed in the dry state by charging a mixture of a chlo-
ride and calcined silicious clay into the shaft of a decomposing apparatiLs. Intro-

188

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

dncing gas or combustible dust midway of the shaft and producing combustion
therein, and then introducing an air current into the bottom of the shaft.

l^S.ses—March IS, 1S90. C. HORNBOSTEL. Production of citlorine gae.

A continuous current of air is forced into and through the chlorine-generating
materials in the generating vessel, and conducted, charged with the gas, to the
point of application.

l^M7—May 6, 1890. R. DORMER. Obtaining chlorine.

An aqueous mixture of sulphuric acid, hydrochloric acid, and manganese
dioxide is formed and the chlorine evolved is collected. The aqueous residue
is neutralized, and calcium chloride added in excess, thereby throwing down
calcium sulphate, which is separated, and the remaining solution of manganese
chloride and calcium chloride treated with lime to form manganese dioxide.
l,6S!,567—Nover>iber 3, 1S91. F. M. LYTE. Process of making alkaline carbonate and

chlorine.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

ies,767— November 24, 1891. P. DE WILDE AND A. REYCHLER. Process of

making chlorine.

In the manufacture of chlorine bv the alternate passage of hydrochloric-acid
gas and heated air through a body of material which disengages chlorine at a
red heat, a mixture of sulphate of magnesium and manganite of magnesia is
used, formed bv calcining equivalent quantities of sulphate of magnesium,
chloride of magnesium, and chloride of manganese, all three being hydrated.

ia5,IS2— April 11, 1S9S. J. A. JUST. Process of making chlorine.

Hydrochloric acid with a slight excess of doul^le the equivalent of manm-
nese elioxide is decomposed by heat and nitric acid added to decompose the
resulting manganous chloride and the residual manganese dioxide. The resid-
ual manganous nitrate liquor is then neutralized with manganese protoxide,
hydroxide or carbonate, settled, evaporated, calcined, and the gases condensed.

50S,lii9—Augtut 15. 1893. F. M. & C. H. M. LYTE. Process of producing chlorine

and purifying lead.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
610,376— December 5. 1893. F. M. LYTE, Process of elect rilytically decomposing

fused metallic chlorides.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
SlS,t,l,S— April 11, lS9i. \V. DONALD. Process of making chlorin.

Dry and cool hydrochloric acid gas is subjected to a mixture of strong nitric
and "sulphuric acids at a low temperature— about 0° C— and the resulting
chlorine and nitrogen-oxide gases are subjected to dilute nitric acid, and
finally to strong sulphuric acid.

oU.US— April n, 1S9!,. W. DONALD. Process of making chlorin.

As a modifieation of the process of No. 518,445. additional hydrochloric-acid
gas or hvdrochloric-acid gas and air is introduced into the body of resulting
chlorine' and nitrogen-oxide gases prior to subjecting them to the action of
dilute nitric acid.

531,629— June 19, 1891,. P. J. WORSLEY, W. WINDUS, AND B. BRACEY. Pro-
cess of and apparatus for absorbing chlorin gas.

Chlorine gas is dehydrated, whereby it can be handled by pumps and pipes,
and then the dry product is pumped into vessels containing the absorbing
liquid.
529,130— November IS, 189!,. L. MOND, Process of obtaining chlorin.

Ammonium chloride is vaporized in a retort lined with antimony and con-
taining fused chloride of zinc— preferably by introducing it in small quantities
and dropping it into the molten zinc chloride— and the vapors passed through a
mass of^balTs or fragments formed of magnesia, clay, lime, and potassium
chloride heated to 360° C. by the prior passage of hot inert gases therethrough,
until the balls have absorbed their charge of chlorine, the ammonia given off
being collected. A current of inert gas of 500° to 5.50° C. is then passed through
the balls and the ammonia and afterwards the hydrochloric acid given oS
are collected. Hot dry air of 800° to 1,000° C. is then pa.ssed through, liberating
the chlorine previously absorbed. The temperature of the balls is then lowered
with a current of cold air or inert gas to 350° C. and the cycle is recommenced.
Air which is only weaklv charged with chlorine, near the end of the process, is
passed through another body of chloridlzed salts to save the diluted chlorine
and enrich a subsequent operation.

537,508— April 16, 1895, H. W. WALLIS. Process of making cUorin.

Chlorine is manufactured from aqueous acids by decomposing aqua regia in the
presence of sulphuric acid and passing the gaseous products through sulphuric
acid.
B70,6iU—Nmember 3,1896. W.DONALD. Process of making chlorin.

A mixture of an alkaline chloride and manganic oxide — as the peroxide — with
nitric acid and water is heated to produce chlorine, and the residual product
evaporated and roasted; the evolved oxides of nitrogen being oxidized and
converted into nitric acid, while the residue is dissolved in water, the man-
ganese peroxidized by the blowing in of air, and the caustic alkali separated.

618,575— January 31, 1899. F. M. LYTE. Method of and apparatus fir producing
chlorin, zinc, or other metals from mixed ores.
Sec Group X, Electro-chemistry,

6S3,U7— April IS, 1899. A. VOGT AND A. R. SCOTT. Process of obtaining
chh/rin. .

To produce chlorine, hydrochloric acid, sulphuric acid and nitric acid flow in
substantially horizontal and continuous streams in the same direction, in con-
tact with each other, subject to suitable heat.

ll,7,m-
lime.

■ HYPOCHLORITES, MATERIALS.
-February 17, 187/,. M. L. BUSH. Improvement in putting up chloride of

Chloride of lime is packed in a wrapper of impervious noncorrosive fabric, as
paper saturated with an oleaginous or resinous solution.

110,173— November i6, 1S7S. T. SIMON, COMTE DE DIENHEIM-BROCHOCKI.

Improvement in the manufacture of bleaching liquids.

Chlorozonc, an oxygenated and eh lorous decolorizing agent, having for a base a
soluble alkali or alkaline earth, is formed by saturating an alkaline solution by
a current of hypwhlorous-acid gas, produced by the decomposition in the cold
of hypochlorites or of chlorates by an acid and a current of air.

113,890— March 4, 1879. T. DE DIENHEIM-BROCHOCKI. Improvement in

bleaching compounds.

A solid bleaching compound produced by saturating a solution of sodium pro-
toxide with chlorine gas, and adding to the hypochlorite thus produced 20 to 40
per cent of desiccated carbonate of soda.
171,906- February 6, 1883. A. L. NOLF. Process vf and apparatus for obtaining

chlorine and sodium.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
309,970— December 30, ISSi. A. McKAY. Bleaching solution.

It consist* of a solution of chloride of lime to which has been added a mix-
ture of fuller's earth and decoction of Iceland or Irish mo.ss.
315,68!,— September S, 1885. G. LUNGE. Application of chlorideof lime to bleaching

purposes.

The action of chloride of lime is increased and hastened by the use of acetic
or formic acid added to or used in conjunction with the chloride of lime.

U15,6!.lc— November 19, 1889. G. KERNER AND J. MARX. Process of electrolyzing

salts of the alkalies.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
1,17,287— December 17, 1889. E. SOLVAY. Process of making bleaching powder.

A mixture of chlorine and carbon dioxide is passed through a dilute solution
of chloride of lime with the separation of the carbonic acid; then the liquid
chloride of lime is decomposed by the chlorhydric acid produced, and finally
solid chloride is formed by means of the rich chlorine gas obtained.

44Z,»34; 442,396.- 1,1,3,59!,— December 9, 1890. I. L. ROBERTS. Electrolytic appa-
ratus.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

!,S0,103— April 7, 1891. E, A. LE SUEUR. Electrolytic apparatus.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

1,80,55!.— August 9, 1891. W. B. BRITTINGHAM. Bleaching compound.
A bleaching compound consisting of the tungstate of an alkali, as tungstate

of soda, combined with a hypochlorite.

lSl,!,07—Augtist 23, 1892. F. M. LYTE. Production of caustic alkalies and chlor-
ine.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

1,SJ,,990— October 25, 1892. H. BLACKMAN. Electrolytic process and apparatus.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

iai,700—Februart/ U, 1893. E. B. CUTTEN. Method of electrolytically producing
soda and chlorine.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

501,121— Jidy 11, 1893. C. N. WAITE. Art of manufacturing chlorine or caustic
alkali by electrolysis.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

533,263— July 17, 189!,. G. A. CANNOT. Process of manufacturing hypochloroue

acid.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
543,146— June IS, 1895. H. BLACKMAN.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

51,1,598— June 15, 1895. 3. D, DARLING.

acid sulfates.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
51,6,318— September 17, 1895. C. HOEPFNER.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
556,038— March 10, 1896. M. H. WILSON. Electrolytic apparatus.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
558,31,0— April 1!,, 1896. C. N. WAITE. Method of utilizing saline solutions.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
558,11,1- April 11,, 1896. C.N. WAITE. Method of utilizing salin£ solutions.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
559,1,5!,- May 5, 1896. C. KELLNER. Process of and means for producing bleaching

agents.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry,
560,518— May 19, 1896. J. MEYRUEIS. Treatment of sodium chtorid.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
565,953— August IS, 1896. E. ANDREOLI. Apparatus for indirect electrolysis.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
568,119— September 13, 1896. H. BLACKMAN. Electrode.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry,

568,130— September 11, 1896. H. BLACKMAN. Electrode for electrolytic decomposi-
tion.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

668,2S1—September 21, 1896. H. BLACKMAN.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

573,1,71— December 1, 1896. H, Y. CASTNER.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

57S,il7— March 9, 1897. C. KELLNER. Process of and apparatus for simultane-
ously producing ammonia, sodium hydroxid, and chlorine.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry,

583,330— May 15, 1897. E. A. LE SUEUR. Process of electrolysis.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

583,513— June 1, 1897. W. SPILKER.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

L. P. HULIN.

Electrolytic process and apparatus.
Process of utilizing niter-cake or other

Anode for electrolytic apparatus.

Electrolytic anode and apparatus.
Anode for electrolytic processes.

586,136— July IS, 1897
lions.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

Electrolysis of watery salt solutions.
Process of electrolytic decomposition qfsolu-

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

189

Mt.TlO—Oelobfr It, isa:. \V. BEIN. I'n>rr»t nf nmt apparatuijor tUarotytinfi.
t^varoop X. Klpi'tnichenil»tr>'.

tMMI—July J, lf»s. W. 8. KOM M E. Pnxrt$ iif and apimraliu for decomposlni/
kIM tuMimim.

See Group X, Elcctro-chomlntry.
«09,;m— .lu(/n»(f.t, 1,19.1. W. U. LUXTON. IHaphrafim fur eteetrotylU purpotet.
Bw Group X, ElootriwhiMnistry.

«;,«)»— .tfnrr/i ts. 119!). H. H. DOW. I^>rim» (llaitliragm /or dtctroiytlc ceOt and
metJiott tif prwhtrinff tnme.
Bee Group X, Eleetro-ch«miiitry.

6S},t,10—.\(iranlifrtl,ll>99. O. H. POND. Proem nf iwd appnratut /or tliuoet-
atiny tuhtiatifr* ffj/ rledrttlytii.
See Group X, KU-i'tro-chemlstry.

est.«ll—Junc te. lUOO, J. HARGREAVES. Combined dtaphragm auci electrode.
See Grtmp X, Electro-chemistry.

HYPOCHLORITES, PROCESSES.

ei,OS&—Marth 19, IS67. T. GRAY. Improvement in the manufacture qf bleaching

jMtMter.

In the manufacture uf bleaching powder, free add is neutralized or eliminated
bv paaninir the chlorine gas throngn a solution of caustic soda or by mixing the
alkali with the llmv.

«f.7(»— Sf7)(<TOt>f r ). ims. A. v. VIOL AND C. 1'. DUFLO. Improvement inUeach-

inff and dyeing Jeatftert.

Black, gray, brown, or otherwise tawny-colorcd feathers arc first bleached
(either by the action of chlorine in the ga.'teous form or in solution, or by means
of chlorine salta. or by the action of sulphurous acid In a ga.Mcou.s form or In solu-
tion, or by sulphites, or bj- cliromatcs, bichromates, or oxygen salts and acids,
or. in some cases by alkalis, separately, or in succession or even simultaneously)
and then dyed.

100,071— f'ebrvary tt, 1870. E. T. RICE. Improved process o/ bleaching and clean-
ing vegetable /Sert.

The flbersor fabric arc first steeped in a weak acid solution, and then steeped,
waabed, or scrubt>ed in a weak alKallne solution or ordinary soapsuds at above
100° and U'low 21'J° K. It Is then treated with chlorine or otner bleaching
agent, followed by an acid solution, and washing In a weak alkaline solution.

lia.StO—Augutl tt, 1S71. H. DEACON. Improvement in the manti/acture o/
bleaching powdert.

The sections of the apparatus or shelves arc arranged in series, each l)€comIng
the Hrat of the scries in rotation, the freshly tilled lime section being always at
the gaa exit end of the series, so that the strongest chlorine gas acts tlrston lime
that haa abaorbed the most chlorine, and the most diluted chlorine passes over
the freshest lime.

ltt.S9i— December S, 1371. H. DEACO\. Improvement in the manu/acture o/

bleaching imwders, entphatee, etc.

The ap|>aratus has a series of oppositely inclined shelves with narrow inter-
spaces and a controlled discharge at the bottom; the chemical gas passing
upward and acting on the solid material during its passage downwara, over
and along the inclined shelves.

lte.SS0—May7, lS!t. F. M. IRONMONGER. Improvement in bleaching peanuts.
They arc washed in a weak aqueous solution ot sal soda, and then treated
with a dilute aqueous solution of chloride of lime and sulphuric acid; then
washed and dried.

M9.2J»— .Uiij/ ?", 1S7S. H. DEACON. Improvement in the manu/acture o/Meaching
liquorg.

Carbonate ot lime— such as lumps of limestone or of chalk, or that obtained
by cau.stlcizlng solutions of the carbonates of soda and of potash by means of
lime— is used to replace, wholly or in i>art. the caustic lime usually employe<l
in the manufacture of bleaching liquors. Carbonates 3f lime are u.sed to absorb
chlorine when the same is mixed with carbonic-acid gas, or is otherwise diluted.

lU.Sie— December t3. isrs. J. B. RICKARDS. Improvement inbleachtng damaged
cotton.

Vegetable fibers are first treated in a bath of permanganate of pota.s.sium and
chloride of lime, and then In a bath of carbonate of potassium and chloride of
lime, with or without the addition of glycerine in either bath.

lH,t»t—Aiigutt 18,1871^ J.L.SSEED ANDJ.S.MOl'NT. Imprmementinbleach-
tnghemp.

It is soaked first in hot water and then In a solution ot chloride of lime, after
which it is dried and hackled.

18i,S77—!fovembertl.l87e. J. BESt. {ReiMue: 7,810— AnguMtl, 1877.) Improve-
ment in refining and bleaching Itair.

Hair is reHned and bleached by treatment in a bath composed of acids and
chlorate of potash: the color is then fixed or set by treatment in a bath of warm
water, muriate of tin, bisulphite of sisia. and muriatic acid; and Hnally the hair
is washe<l in water and ammonia to cleanse and remove all impurities, pro-
ducing hair of fine texture from coarse hair,

19«.tS8— October le, 1817. E. SOLVA V. Improvement in manttfaeture o/ hypochlo-

ritet o/lime and maffiie»ia/rom the silicate* and aluminates.

The compound silicate resulting from the manufacture of chlorine or hydro-
chloric acid is treated with chlorine gas. The hypochlorite formed is separated
from the silicate and aluminate by lixivlation.

t6S,S6S— August t9, 188t. C. TOPPAN. Bleaching /abries.

Cotton or linen fabrics are boiled in a solution of water and "sinapetroline"
No. -i (patent No. 186,640-vlaniuiry 23. 1877). then treated with a solution of
chloride of lime and water, aired, and finally washed in a solution ot hot water
and "sinapetroline" No. 2.

tao,09l,—June 16. 1883. F. SUTER. Process o/ producing open-u-ork /abries.

Vegetable fibers are embroidered on a ground of animal fiber, and the latter
Is then dissolved in a solution of chloride of lime.

SSO, lil—June te, 1883 L. A. DELABOVE. Bleaching threads and /(Aries,

Fibers or fabrics of flax or hemp are first treated with a solution ot calcium
hypochlorite, and afterwards with a solution of aluminum sulphate saturated
with aluminum hydrate.

ta).S7(l-Fiitrwtry It. fM4. J. B. THOMPHON. Prneess o/ niut apparatus for
bleaching.

Vegetable flb«T« nnri fabrics arc IhiIIpiI in a solution of ryanldr of [.otaMtam
orMwlluin. then »uhjc<ii<l toaliiTiintc bnlh<i of a Milutloii of chlorld. of lim«
and of carlxinlcachl gas In a cli)v<l veoiKl. and lastly [Muse'l through a Kolution
of triolhjrlranllnc and oxalic acid, with suitable wajihlnipi.

t9l,,«t»— March i, ISSi. E. IIEKMITK. Blenching •/ iHiprr pulp or Mtr lbnu» or
tejtUe materials or /abries.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
t97,Sl»—AprU tt, 1881. }. C. VANI.OHE. HUnrhIng rau- cUfm.

The cotton in a compressed stale, as in a Ijale. is sulijiitol to the action of
bleaching liquids, then rinsed, then toni apart or loosened and dried.

)0)0«»— August S, fM4. J. A. 80UTHMAYD. Proceu qf UeaeMot rngtUMe

The material is first treated with permanganate of potash to dcMroy the col-
oring matter; then treated with oxalic acid, sulphite of sodium, and chlorine
to neutralize and bleach; and finally washe<l to remove the chlorine and di*^
charging agents. As a preparatory step the material may »>e boiled with potash
under preasure.

883,875— January 5, 1886. W.MATHER. Process q/ bleaching.

Cotton yams and fabrics are first treated with a Ijoiling solution of caustic
soda, then steamed In a closed vessel with occasional introductions of the soda
liquor while subject to the steaming, and then washed— the steps mar be re-
peated—and then subjected to the action of chlorine liquor, washed, and finallr
scoured.

3S9,ia3— April «, IMS. E. SOLVA V. Mani^/acture o/ bleaching powder.

The chlorine gas is drawn or forced In a downward direction through the lime
and the porous or pulverulent beds.

3St,li»— May 1, 1888. E. HERMITE. Process o/ bleaehing.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
389,898— September !S, 1883. R. M. PERRINE. Process o/ bleaehing vox.

The combined vapor of bleaching solution of steam and gases, resulting from
decomijosed chloride of lime, is passed through the melted wax in divided Jets
and t iially pure .steam Is passed through the body ot wax to cleanse and remove
the bleaching solution.

396,551— January tt, 1889. F. E. BROWN. Process o/bteaehing cotton.

Cotton fabric, spread out wide. Is pas-sed through a boiling solution of caustic
soda, then passed over perforated steam pij^s and subjected to the action ot
steam, cooled by [)a,ssing into a cold solution of c«u.stic soda, boiled In a solu-
tion of soda-ash and washed, subjected to the action of chljrine liquor, steamed
scoured, and finally washed.
1,15.608— November 19, 1889. I. Q. BRIN. Process of bleaehing.

The material is tr°ated with a chlorous bleaching solution, and free ozygen Is
introduced into the mass, during the action, in regulated quantities.

Ul,Wl—JtUy 15, 1890. A. & B. GRATZ. {Keissue: n,S05— December 1, 1891.) Pro-
cess 0/ making jute bagging.

A solution of sodium chloride is applied to fabric made from Jute butts and It
Is then stored away in mass while damp, to allow the bleaching action to Uke
place.

1,7 1.IM- March St, 189i. A.E.WOOLF. {Relstue: ll,tU.—June7 , 18at.) Process of

and apparatus/or bleaching by electrolysis.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
iauii— August t3, lS9t. J. A. M YRICK. Proa^ of bleaehing.

Cotton-chain warp or like fiber Is subjected to the action of a solution ot
chloride of lime, then to hot water, then to a solution of sulphurous acid, and
finally rinsed.

1,99,181,— June 6, 1893. C. J. DELESCLCSE. Process o/ bleaching coUon.

Cotton is bleached in a t)ath consisting ot a chloride solution to which has
been added a viscous acid solution comixwed. say, ot 20 parts of water by weight
and 1 part of a mixture of grape sugar, 90 per cent, and sulphuric acid, 10 per
cent. '^

51,1,U7— June 18, 1885. H. BLACKMAN. Process qf and apparatus /or bleachiug.
See Group X, Electro-chemlstrj-.

560.ill—Maul9, 1896. C. KELLNER. Process <tf and apparatus /or bleaehing
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

565,706— August 11,1896. B. S. SUMMERS AND CO. BORING. ElectmltHe seua-

ration of vegetable fibers.

Sec Group X, Electro-chemLstry.

569.680— October SO. 1896. B. S. AND L. L. SUMMERS. Electrolytic process of
bleaching and refining.
Sec Group X, Electro-chemistry.

588,081,- August 10, 1897. O. H. POND. Processqf and apparatus /or eleelnxhemi-
cat treatment q/ straw or other fibrous materials.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

538,085— August 10. 1897. G. H. POND. Method qf and apparatus/or Oettnxhemi-
cal treatment qf fibrous material.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

eiOMS— September 6, JSas. V. C. DRIFFIELD, A. CAREV, AND F. W. WRIGHT

Process qf and a;>paraf us /or making bleaching powder.

The gas issuing from one compartment is dried to remove the vapor of water
evolved in that or preceding coin|>artments, and also cooled before It enters a
succeeding compartment.

818,139— December SO, 1898. G. H. POND. Method qf dectrolytleaUy treating straw
or other fibrous material.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

618.988-^anuanj 3. 1899. B. S. SUMMERS. Method qf r^ing regeUMe fiber.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

tU,t3»-Auffust 7. 1900. T. JESPERSEN. Process of bleaehing by electrotyOe
chlnrin water.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

190

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

SULPHUR DIOXIDE.

121,561,— December 5, 1871. 3. WATTEAD. Improrcment in bleaching wool.

Wool is bleached by means of a suitable bleaching gas forced through the wool
by the atmospheric pressure produced by an exhausting or condensing fan or
centrifugal machine.

lS5,!,69—April9, 187S. P. MARCELIN. Improvement in bleachinff and disinfecting
A sulphurous-ncid solution is used as a bleaching and disinfecting agent.

119,819— July IS, 1S7S. E. C. HASERICK. Improvement in bleaching wools, yarns,

etc.

Wool and woolen fabrics are bleached by treating in a water bath of a com-
pound of sulphurous acid and an alkali or a sulphite, then rinsing, and then
treating in an acid bath to decompose the sulphite and set the sulphurous acid
free.

U7,8S7— February SI,, lS!i. J. B. FRfiZON. Improvement in treating mixed fab-
rics previotts to' dyeing.

Woolen and silk fabric containing vegetable matter or impurities is exposed
to a heated acid bath containing a mordant, to simultaneously destroy the veg-
etable matter and prepare the fabric for dyeing or bleaching.

187 ,88t— February S7, 1877. W. MAYNARD. Improvement in processes of soften-
ing, decolorizing, and cleansing animal and vegetable fiber.
The fiber is subjected to the action of hydrated sulphurous acid and a solution

of an alkali mixed in neutralizing proportions.

511,695— February 3, 1885. I. S. McDOUGALL. Production of sulphurous acid.

Air is forced under pressure into a retort containing ignited sulphur-bearing
material and in which a low temperature is maintained by a cooling jacket, the
sulphurous gases being conducted off and passed into and below the surface of
an absorbing liquid in a vessel or series of vessels before it escapes.

HYDROGEN DIOXIDE AND OZONE.

81,155—F^)mary iS, 1869. W. ELMER. Ctimozonator.

An ozonized atmosphere for dwellings is produced by means of a thermo-
electric battery operated by the differences in temperature of the warmed and
cool air currents.

107,071 — September 6, 1870. O. LOEW. Improvement in process of bblaininij ozone

or ozonized air.

Atmospheric air is passed transversely through a flame, preferably that of a
Bunsen burner, and the ozone collected.

109,601— November 29, 1870. C. F. DUNDERDALE. Impi'ovemeni in apparatus

for the manvfacture of ozone.

Atmospheric air or oxygen is passed through finely divided streams or cur-
rents of electricity to convert the oxygen into ozone.

118,976— September J2, 1871. P. A. ROYCE. Improvement in generating ozone.

It is produced from phosphorous acted on by water and air, under hydraulic
and atmospheric pressure.

lSS.SS7—June i5, 1871. T. A. HOFFMANN. Improvement in the generation of

ozone, and in treating liquids with the same.

Atmospheric air is forced into a mixture of potassium permanganate or hyper-
manganate and sulphuric acid, producing ozone, and then through a washer.
It is applied to fermenting and fermented saccharine liquids and the production
thereof.

185,01,0— December 5, 1876. H. MILSOM. {Reissue: 9,976— December SO, 1881.) Ozone

inachine.

The process consists in the generation, purification, and emission of ozone by
the slow oxidation of phosphorous in a chamber having porous earthenware
walls, whereby tlie separation and retention of the acid fumes and the egress
of ozone are effected.

161,270— Jtdy IS, 1882. J. STEIN. Process of bleaehing hair.

Hair is bleached by first saturating it in a mixture of a solution of peroxide of
hydrogen and ammonia with a solution of peroxide of hydrogen and cream of
ta"rtar, and then passing it through a solution of blue aniline and alcohol. A
composition of peroxide of hydrogen and cream of tartar is claimed, the latter
substance preserving the softness of the hair and preventing it from becoming
stiff and breaking.

273,569 — March 6, 188S. C. MARCH AND. Manufacture of hydrogen peroxide.

In the manufacture of hydrogen peroxide, the acid solution is given a contin-
uous movement of rotation in vertical as well as in horizontal planes in a cooled
vessel, while adding the binoxide.

S02,800— July S9, 1881,. M. TRAUBE. Manufacture of hydrogen dioxide.

Hydrogen dioxide is produced by bringing a flame of carbonic oxide or other
gas in contact with water; as, for example, by spraying water through the flame.

S61,9iS— April 26, 1SS7. A. & L. Q. BRIN. Ozone apparatus.

Oxygen or air is passed between layers or masses of granular conducting
material connected, respectively, with the poles of an electric generator.

592,710— November 15, 1888. J. E. P. MEYER. Composition for developing ozonized

oxygen.

A mixture of barium permanganate. 25 parts, with the acid salts of sulphuric
acid, as anhydrous sodium bisulphate, 16 parts, in powdered form, generates
ozonized oxygen when mixed with water.

1,20,501.— January 28, 1890. C. F. W. STELZER. Process of making ozone water.
A small quantity of hydrochloric acid or hydrochloric acid with a chloride Is
added to ozone water to make it retain all of its properties.

U,0,793— November IS, 1890. W. ERWIN. Process of making hydrogen peroxide.
A powdered metallic oxide {protoxide or peroxide), as of lead, chromium, or
manganese, is suspended in water maintained in gentle agitation or circulation,
and under generated ^as pressure or of air forced in, and decomiK)sed by such
an acid, as hydrofluoric acid, as is ordinarily used in making hydrogen perox-
ide. An intermediate substance, as fluorspar, may be added, wh'ich upon treat-
ment by an acid, as .sulphuric acid, will liberate the acid required for the
decomposition of the oxide.

lM,iOi—AprU li, 1891. J. C. DITTRICH. Preparing ozone water.

A small quantity of a phosphite or hypophosphite is added to ozone water,
before or after charging, to cause it to retain its properties.

509,165— November 21, 1895. N. HELMER. Process of liberating ozone.

For the purpose of quickly liberating ozone from peroxide of hydrogen, the
latter is added to a solution of an alkali, such as refined carbonate of potash.

511,530— December 26, 1895. E. FAHRIG. Process of and apparatus for manufac-
turing ozone gas.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

61S,825~^anuary 30, 189!,. C. R. POULSEN. Process of and apparatusfor making

ozone.

Ozone is produced by the action of oxygen, or the oxygen of the air, upon
phosphorous moistened with a diluted solution of sulphuric add and perman-
ganate of potash.
527,326— October 9, 1891,. J. T. DONOVAN AND H. L. GARDNER. Process of

producing ozone.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

565,288— July 7, 1896. W. LOBACH. Electrical production of chemical reactions.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

577,625— February 23, 1897. G. J. ANDERSSON AND J. C. DITTRICH. Process of

manufacturing ozone and by-products.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
598,936— January i, 1S9S. F. K. IRVING. Process of producing ozone.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

6S2,096—August 29, 1899. G. T. BRUCKMANN. Composition of matter.
Hydrogen peroxide is charged with carbonic acid to preser,ve it.

OTHER METALLIC DIOXIDES.

109,025— November 8, 1870. J. LAMBERT, Jr. Improvement in removing dyes

made from analine, etc., from portions of fabrics.

Aniline dyed fabrics are decolorized, according to design, by the application
of powdered metals or soluble cyanides.

225,1,63— January IS, 1830. P. T. ADSTEN. Method of preparing an aqueous bleach-
ing sohdion of soda or potassa.
A bleaching solution of silicate of sodium or potassium, barium peroxide, and

the hydrate of sodium, potassium, or ammonium.

251,106— August 10, 1880. C. M. SARTWELL. Preparing moss for upholstery.

It is treated with a solution of protoxide of calcium, to remove the bark or
exterior coating.

277, 05!,- May S, 18SS. 1. OHNSTEIN. Art of treating jute, butts, atid animal hair.
The jute is torn into fine fibers, then the animal hair is macerated in a solu-
tion of lime and washed in boiling water, then the several materials are steeped
in a solution of potash and dyestuS, dried, mixed, and moistened with castor oil
and alcohol, and batted.

i8S,l,77— September 15, 1892. C. J. E. DE HAEN. Process of bleaching.

The goods are treated in a bath of peroxide of sodium and magnesium salts,
such as magnesium chloride — a salt containing an oxide capable of being pre-
cipitated by sodium.

1,86,188— November 16, 1892. H. Y'. CASTNER. Bleaching compound.

A bleaching compound composed of sodium peroxideand one or more neutral
salts of the alkaline-earth metals.

650,023— May 22, 1900. H. OPPERMANN. Process of making magwsiumsuperoxid.

See Group XIX, Oxides.
650,618— May 29, 1900. C. SAVIGN Y. Process of miking dioxid of barium.

See Group XIX, Oxides.

METALLIC PERMANGANATES.

266,660— October 51, 1882. P.THOMAS. Bleaching fiber.

The material is first boiled with caustic soda, then treated in a bath of potas-
sium permanganate, and lastly in a solution of borax in hydrated sulphurous
acid.

1,75,551 — May 21,, 1892. C. GIRARD. Process of ungumming and decorticating

textile material.

Textile plants are treated with a basic salt of a polyatomic acid, as manga-
nateof potash, to dissolve the gummy substance of the plant; then the fiber is
washed; and then passed into a bath of sulphurous acid to remove the gum and
oxides, and washed,

53l,,h60— February 19, 1895. 1. CLAPHAM, J. PICARD, C. VILLEDIEl', AND

W. \V. L. LISHMAN. Process of bleaching.

Fibers are treated in a bath containing a sulphonated or soluble oil, such as
oleinoil; then in a bath containing a mangauate or permanganate salt; then
in a bath of acidulated water; then in a bath having a bleaching action; then
washed; and to make the fiber easy to work up it may be further treated in a
bath containing oiein or soluble soap as an emulsion.

OTHER BLEACHING AGENTS, MATERIALS.

11,786— October 10, 1851,. E. N. HORSFORD. Improved mode of removing chlorine
from substances and fabrics.

" Antichloride of lime," a neutral sulphite of lime, CaO,S02, is employed as a
neutralizing agent tor chlorine.

110,800— January 5, 1871. G. W. SYLVESTER. Improvement in apparatus and

processes of cleaning cotton waste.

Cotton or woolen waste is cleaned by washing with a hydrocarbon, such as
kerosene or paralfine oil. The recovered heavy oil is purified from waste by
macerating or filtering with boneblack.

llS,668—September 5, 1871. W. ADAMSON. Improvement in apparatus and proc-
esses for treating animal and vegetable fibers.
Animal and vegetable fibers and fiber- bearing vegetable substances are treated

with hydrocarbon or hydrocarbon vapor, or both, under heat and determined

pressure, to cleanse and extract oily, fatty, and resinous matters. The solvent

IS caused to circulate through the material.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

191

lU.m—Smltmber 19, 1X71. C. F. A. RIMONIN. tmprmtmeni tn prot*$ta for

trrattng textlU/abrif$ ivUh AydroeorfiofM.

Textile tabrica are nibjected to hydrocarbon T*poni to prepare for bleaohlng
or (lycInK, or to oloaiun and renovate.

iojjfS— .Vow li, t87S. W. E. OEER. /iiifirot<nn«)i( In pntttiet /or the matm/ac-

turc t}/ oakum.

New flber i>r flax, hemp, or the like In mliimted In a anlmlon of t*r, nal nodn.
or nlmllar alknll. nml wnler. niiil the l\l«er iiftcrwanls <'leHiiM>d <if "rxlft by treat-
ment In a dilute iiqiieoiiH solution iif uiurlatie or Klinllar a<'td.

tU,Ui—Marthl,lSIIO. J. \V. W. MARTIN. I'nxtt mid material Jor faUiitg and

Kouriag.

The material or article Is dampened and then a soap compound In a jiowdcred
form Is applied by sifting or sprinkling.

tU.17U—Jul!/ It), liisi. J. J. 8A('H.«. Prrparing and blrachiag }ule.

Vegetable IUht, alter euttliiK Into lengths and blearhing. Is treated In a solu-
tion o( caustic siKia or potash (or other liquid to cause the liber to contract or
curl), then neutrallicd, and the liquid expressed,

n8,U»—Xay tS, ISSS. J. «.. E. I".. & V. W. DAVIS. Waihing compound.

A dcteritent composed of water. 1 gallon: white tock notash, 1 pound:
borax, one-quarter of a pound: kerosene oil, 4 ounces; and oendne, one-half
otince.
SSS.SM— JfdrcA SO. 188S. C. TOI'PAN. Proeett Qftcouring voool.

Wool Is immersed In a warm solution of expressed oil of mustard seed, petro-
leum products (panlRnc oil and vacuum oil) and alkali.

i)0,tl»—(kiobeT S, tSSe. C. TOPPAN. Bleaching aimpomid.

A bleaching compound consisting of expressed oil of mustard seed, parafRne,
caustic soda, tallow soap, sulphate of soda, and water.

SH,tt»—ItrermhrT Ik. lane. H. R. RANDALL. TmUment i]/ tilk filxr.

Silk lll>er, raw silk, and cocoons, before removal of the gum, are subjected to
the action of an aqueous solution of acetic acid (one ounce of acid to a gallon
of water) at a lemuorature below the boiling point; a small proportion of
sulphuric acid may oe added.

Xl.7i»— April le, tss;. F. M. IRONMONGER. Priifrrtof btraching edible ntUs.
They are subjected to a bath of a solution of protochloride of tin (" tin salt"
or "tin crystals") dissolved in muriatic acid and diluted 10 parts of water to
1 of salt.

ast,Ui— April 17, ISSS. C. TOPPAN. Scouring compoHtion /or fibers and/abrict.

It consists of benzine, mustard-seed oil, and an alkali, as caustic soda.
3K,*0I—Jnly n,lS8S. F. M. IRONMONGER. Skm-hing edible nul».

Thev are subjected to a bath of a mixture of tartaric and oxalic acids, and
then dried.

S76,S60—fVI>ruarp9.1SS7. G. A. LANAL'X. Procem o/ bleaching rice.
A compound for cleaning and bleaching rice, consisting of ultramarine blue-

ng, soaiietone, and pet—' -" '■ — "—' ' •' '-■ -•'' " — — " —

bruahea and polished.

fOS.»it—AHetut U.ISU. C. TOPPAN.
etable/^.

PnteM 1^ trjiaralinff and nbdlridtiig t^q-

lug, soaiietone, and {letrol oil, is applied to the rice grains, and they are then
' ^ea ai '

OTHER BLEACHING AGENTS, PROCESSES.

lS,9es— December U, 1856. W. M. WELLING. T.mpTOvemenl in the method af

bleaching ivory plalet. .

The plates are sustained on their edges, in a suitable case, and placed in a
north and south position for exposure to the sun.

U^9Si— October tS. 1SS«. J. PHYFE. Proceit qf bleaching ivory.

Ivory Is exposed to the rays of the sun on a glass table with a reflector be-
low It.

16,100— Xovember 18, 18M. J. A. ROTH. Mode or procem qf UeaeMng vegetable

fbert.

Atmospheric air is forced Into the bleaching liquor, thereby creating a rapid
action of the bleaching agents.

18,t0lr-Sej>temberli,18S7. J. A. JILL80N AND H. WHINFIELD. Method of treat-
ing various materials or tubtlaneet <n a permanent vacuum for washing, bleaching,
and analagous purposes.

The operations are performed in a vacuum either with or without heat.

U.fHe— March 8. 186L O. W. BILLINGS. (Reissue: 1.781— Seplember IS, ISSU)
Improvement in cleaning nnd iteparating the fibers o/finx. hemp. tic.
The vegetable fiber is subjected to a retting or fermenting operation after the

stalk or other woody portions have been removed in whole or part; the fiber is

washed in alternate directions for its cleansing while contained in a closed

vessel.

SS.87S— January It, 1869. D. K. TUTTLE. Improvement in bleaeMng ivory, bone,
etc.

Ivory and bone are bleached by exposure to light in a bath of spirits of tur-
pentine or other liquid.

190.991— May tt, 1S77. H. T. YARYAN. Improvement in processes for bleaching
beeswax.

It Is dissolved in a solvent, such aa any of the volatile products of petroleum,
and exposed to sunlight In glaaa vessels or in shallow vessels under glass.

19i,799—Seplember i, 1S77. H. T. YARYAN. Improvement in processes qf bleach-
ing beeswax.

Any material which will act asa body, such as cotton cloth, Is passed through
melted wax. and saturated or coated with a thin layer, whicn is then exposed
to the action of sunlight until the color of the wax Is discharged, when the
bleache<l wax Is removed, either by heat and pressure, or by dissolving in a vola-
tile solvent, and then the solvent Is rcmove<l by heat.

tOt.OVS— April t, 1878. A. VIOL AND C. P. DUFLOT. Improrement in processes
Jor bleaching feaUien.

They are immersed In a resinous bath, such as turpentine, of regulated tem-
perature (89° to 90° r.), and at the same time exposed to both light and air.

tSl,790—July «, ISSS. J. MILLER. Method qfand apparatus for bleaching ivory.
Ivory Is placed In a hermetically-closed, gla-ss-covered vessel and exposed to
the action of the rays of the sun, at a low temperature.

The milnous and glutinous sulMlances are dissolved and removed bjr bolllnr
vegetable flbera In a anlutlon of "slnapetrollne" No. 2 (a prodiietof •zprcsaen
mustard-seed oil, petroleum products, and alkali: Patent No. IM,MO, /annarr
2a, 1H77).

SOi.088— August M, ISSi. J. A. ENGELKR. I'mrrss nj hleaching cotton /nhriet.

Cotton fabrics are exposed to vapors of chloroform under l>re«s<ire, and then
dechloriiilted by exposure to a mixture of hylrogen, carbonic acid, and sul-
phuric ether.

»07.a0I—lfovembeTll,188i. A. L. RICE. Mode qf separating cmbmlderles.

The goods are ruled on the ■epantlng line with a dHntetrratlns acid, whereby
the fabric on the line Is partUlly destroyed, and further chemical effect is then
arrested.

SSS,9Sa—Famuiry 9, 1386. H. R. RANDALL. Proeess of separating the fiber of

cocoons.

Cocoons arc subjected to the action of a solution of hydnx^hloric add
(an ounce of add to a gallon of water), at about 150° F.,to prepare them for sepa-
ration of the flbers.

S5i.ltt— December U, 1886. H. R. RANDALL. TmUmaU qf tassalnilk cocoons.
'■ Wild tnssah cocoons" or other silk fiber, or vegetable flber also, are washed,
then sprinklcil with a saponiflabic oil, then subjected to the action of a heated
solution of sod hint stannatc( oral umlnatc, plumbate, sllleat«.'.f>r bfirateof sndliim
orpota'isiuni.or an alkaline solution of zinc oxide), then waithed and dried.

SS7.579— August 7, ISSS. N. CONLON. Treating crude animal hair.

The hair Is washed; cooked in a solution of water, quicklime, sal soda, and
sulphuric acid; rubbed, tcascil. and washed to coniplctf* the <'lcan«lng: again
cooked In a solution of water, sulphuric acid, and black oxide of manganese to
further deodorize and render moth proof, thereby preparing It for dyeing, curl-
ing, and drying in one continuous process.

SS9,9U— September tS, ISSS. J. SMITH AND P. W. NICOLLE. Proeess qf bUaeh-

ing fiber.

Vegetable material Is treated in a bath containing one or more alkaline sul-
phates, as sulphate of potash, and the solution Is then removed, to effect the
separation of the gums, resin, and coloring matter from the flbers.

S96.sk— JanxMry 15, 1SS9. A. & L. Q. BRIN. Method of bleaching fibrous
substances.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

1,11.080— October 1, 1889. E. J. FISCHER. Procets qf cleaning animal-hair.

To remove the oily matter from the tubular cavities, hair or wool Is given a
long-continued soaking in clear water until it becomes soft, then soaked In a
saponiflable solution to extract said oUv matter, washed in clear water, and
dried.

lM,t97— December 9, 1890. F. G. WISELOGEI,. Process of bleaching hair.

It is flrst thoroughly washed In cold water, then^treated in a bath of hot water
to which has been added a small quantity of lime. It is then dried by forcing
a strong current of dry, sulphureted air through it.

iS9,919— January 17, ISSS. B. BEYER. Process qf treating raw Mt.

Silk wa.ste or fabric thereof is subjected to the successive action of oil soap,
cold water, and salt steam baths and drying, oft repeated, and then to the action
of running water. The manufactured fabric is washed In a bath containing
permanganate of potash.

i96,mi— April tS, 189S. H. THIES AND E. BERZIG. Process of bleaching.

The material is immersed in a solution containing hydrofluoric acid, then
washed in a bath containing an alkaline earth compound, the air adhering to
the material is removed, ana it is then treated with boiling caustic alkaline lye,
which is kept concentrated by a constant discharge of steam.

575,6U5— January 19, 1897. E. HERMITE. Apparatus for purifying or dis-
infecting.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

8S5,«4S— Ortoteri;, IS99. H. HADFIELD. Process of bteacking.

Fabrics are continuously bleached and washed by passing them thiotigh a
hot wash, then through a chemicking bath, then subjecting them to the tdmul-
taneous action of acetic acid and steam, and then washing.

eit.S87— January SO, 1900. T. TEMPIED AND G. DUMARTIN. Process of pre-
paring peat for surgical use.
Natural peat is macerated for .'<everal days, then beaten and washed in pure

water to cleanse thoroughly, then treated with an ammoniacal t>ath to restore

its color, and sterilized.

GROUP X.— CHEMICAL SUBSTANCES PRODUCED BY
THE AID OF ELECTRICITY.

INORGANIC PRODUCTS.

tll,mo— December 17, 1878. E. WESTON, Improvement in manufacture qf metallie

nickel.

A malleable ductile electro-deposit of nickel: obtained by the addition of
borate of nickel (or other compounds of boron) to a nickel-depositing solution.

589,161— August SI. 1S97. F. CH APLET. Hard body for rifiing chromated sleeL

A new hard compound —a carbo titanlde of sllicium— is produced by the reduc-
tion of an intimatemixtureof titanic acid, silicic acid, and carbon in an electric
furnace. It is capable of scratching chrome steel and cutting and shaping bard
stones.

5S9.U&— September 7. 1897. G. DE CHALMOT. Silicon alloy.

An alloy of silicon with a metallic silicide.anew product, is produced by smelt-
ing material containing a metal— such as a metallic oxide— and silicon (silica)
with carlxmacctms mailer in an electric furnace with a direct cunvnt, until the
carbonaceous matter is eliminated. At the end ol the operation the cathode 1:^
covered with the product. Crystalline silicon is produced b y treating said alloy '
with a solvent of the sUlclde.

192

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

60S.»75—Apra S6, 1S9S. G. DE CHALMOT. Silicid of iron.

New ferrosilicldes, containing appproximately 25 per cent of silica or upwardi
and consistinK either of Si.Fej or a mixture of SkVe, and Si.Fe. The lower
(trade silicides are molten m a common furnace, readily cast, mating exact
castings— they talse a fine polish and do not tarnish in the air— from white (as
silver) to gray in color.
656,353— August SI, 1900. C. B. JACOBS. AlkoZine-earth gilicid.

A new chemical compound: the silicide of an all£aline-earth metal, viz, cal-
cium, barium, or strontium silicide, of the formula R Sij, wherein R represents
the alkaline-earth metal. They are white or bluish-white substances of metal-
lie appearance, having a crystalline fracture, oxidizing slowly in the air to
silicon oxide and an alkaline earth-metal oxide, and decomposing with water
evolving large volumes of hvdrogen, together with silica and the alkaline eartli-
metal hvdrate. They are produced bv the reduction of an intimately mixed
charge of an alkaline earth, silica, and carbon in an electric furnace, as, tor
example, lime 60 parts, sand 130 parts, and coke 70 parts.

ORGANIC PRODUCTS— CARBIDES.

191,767— February 28. 1893. E.G. ACHESON. {Reissue: 11,1.73— Febrvary 16, 1895.)

Production of artificial crystalline carbonaceous malerials.

A new product: silicide of carbon. Si C (carborundum), characterized by
great hardness, refractability, and infusibility; produced by subjecting mate-
rials containing carbon and silica, free or combined, to the action of an electric
current. The current is passed through a conducting heating core embedded
In the charge.
5U,138—June 18, 1S95. T. L. WILLSON. Product existing inform of crystalline

calcium carbide.

A new product: crystalline calcium carbide existing as masses of aggregated
crystals; produced by the reduction of intimately commingled coke and lime
in' an electric furnace.
55S,796—MarchS, 1896. C. WHITEHEAD. Compound of magnesium, calcium, aiid

carbid.

A new compound: the double carbide of magnesium and calcium: produced
by the treatment of intimately commingled carbon and the double oxide of
calcium and magnesium in an electric furnace. Calcined dolomite supplies
the double oxide.
615,816— December IS, 1898. J. A. DEUTHER. Process of treating calcium carbids.

Metallic carbide is crushed and mixed with an inert binding material, such
as resin, and formed into tablets, which represent, by decomposition, a definite
amount of gas.
637,681- November n, 1899. T. G. TURNER. Carbid cartridge.

A package, for use in making gas, consisting of a hollow body of fragile material
filled with calcium carbide, hermetically sealed.
6iS,3i8— April a, 1900. C. E. YVOSNEAU. Metliod of treating carbid of calcium.

Calcium carbide is saturated with oil and then crushed for formation into
tablets, cartridges, etc., while so protected from decomposition.

61,8,31,9— April iU. 1900. C, E. YVONNEAU. Process of preparing calcium carbfd.
Calcium carbide is crushed and heated and about 80 parts introduced into
a heated mixture of 16 parts of glucose and 4 parts of an oilv substance, and
molded into shape; it mav then be coated with a protective medium impervious
to nioisture and which will dissolve slowly in water.

61,8,350— April U. 1900. C. E. YVONNEAU. Prepared calcium carbid.

A gas-producing bodv formed of calcium carbide crushed In oil, combined
with an agglomerating mixture, molded and provided with a protecting coating
(No. 648,349).
650,i35—i[ay n, 1900. F. A. J. FITZGERALD. Carborundum article.

A dense coherent recrvstallized body of carborundum, the product of the proc-
ess of No. 650,234.

650,747— 3/aj/ 29, 1900. J. BILBIE AND H. DRIVET. Process of treating carbid

of calcium.

Broken or granulated calcium carbide is treated with an essential oil, such as
citronella, mirbane. or eucalyptus, to kill the natural odor of the carbide, then
coated with petroleum, and again treated with an essential oil.

656,238— August 21, 1900. C. H. WORSNOP. Composition of matter for making gos.

Calcium carbide is immersed in a hot liquid mixture of parathne wax, grease,
(as cocoa butter), and sugar.
659, UK— October 9, 1900. M. P. E. LfiTANG. Preparation of carbid of calcium.

Calcium carbide Is given a protective coating of glucose, or its equivalent,
capable of dissolving or liquifying the lime when produced from the decompo-
.sition of the carbide; an inert powder, such as carbonate of lime, is also com-
bined therewith and petroleum, and small particles of, or powdered, carbide are
formed into a mass.

For the production of acetylene, see Group XVII, Hydrocarbons.

OTHER ORGANIC PRODUCTS.

618,167— January Si, 1899. A.CLASSEN. Sodium salt of iodin compound.

A new product: the sodium salt of an iodine compound containing the iodine in
the benzene nuclei of phenolphthalein; a nearly odorless and tasteless dark-blue
amorphous powder: .soluble m water, glycerine, and alcohol. It is produced by
the electrolysis of an aqueous solution of phenolphthalein and sodium hydrate
with potassium iodide.

618,168~Jan-uaryU, 1899. A. CLASSEN. Iodin derivatives qfphenolt and bimiuth

salts thereof.

New products: as a bismuth salt of an iodine compound containing the iodine
in the benzene nuclei of phenolphthalein, a nearly odorless and tasteless reddish-
brown powder, insoluble in water and acids, and with difficulty soluble in
alcohol. They are produced by reacting with agents containing iodine on an
alkaline solution of phenolphthalein, with the aid of electrolysis.

PROCESSES.

7,811— December 10, 1850. G. MATHIOT. Process of preventing the adhesion of the

deposit to the recipient in the electrotype process.

The plate is exposed to the action of a halogen element or compound, as
iodine, bromine, or chlorine, and then further exposed to the action of a strong
light for several hours before introducing it into the electrotyping apparatus.

59,910— November 20, 1866. A. T. HAY. Improvement in preventing incrustation of

sugar or other boilers.

The formation of scale or incrustation in evaporating pans or kettles is pre-
vented by passing around the pan an electric current.
gr, 193— February 23, 1869. C. C. PARSONS. Improvement in purifying pyrolig-

neotis or acetic acid.

The vapors from the still are passed through carbonaceous or purifying
material The terminals of a galvanic battery are connected respectively with
the condensing worm and the water of the condensing tub.
98,110— December 21, 1869. S. RUST, JE. Improvement in dectro-platingwith brass

and other alloys.

The depositing bath is formed by dissolving the brass or other alloy directly
by the electro-process in a solution of potassium cyanide and sulphuret of
carbon. The process of electroplating with brass or other alloy is claimed, and
articles' coated by the process.
2/,? 331- April h. 1811. R- O'NEIL. Improvement in ornamenting the surface of

vietals by electro-depositions from solutions.

The surface of the metal is painted with a salt or a solution of a salt of the
metal to be deposited by means of a pencil in connection with a galvanic bat-
tery, the metaloperated upon being in connection with the other pole of the
battery.
116,579— July It, 1871. M. G. FARMER. Improvement in nickel plating.

The double sulphate of nickel and ammonia is formed by the electrolysis of a
solution of sulphate of ammonia, using a nickel anode.
116,858— July U, 1871. I. ADAMS, jR. Improvement in nickel-plating.

Heat is applied to the solution of sulphate of ammonia— about 150° F.— in form-
ing the double sulphate of nickel and ammonia by the electrolytic process.
130,362— August 13, 1872. E. E. DE LOBSTEIN. Improvement in iilaiing and coat-
ing metals.

The article to be coated is subjected to a weak cold solution of the required
coating metal and to the action of a galvanic battery and is subsequently sub-
jected to the heat required to melt the coating.
179,658— July 11, 1876. N. S. KEITH. Improvement in apparatus for removing tin

from scraps, etc., by electricity.

Scrap tin plate, separated and extended on an endless chain conveyor, is pro-
gressively treated in a heated electrolyzing bath.

229,51,2— July 6, 1880. J. L. M.^RTIN. Process and apparatus for aging liquors.

Liquors are subjected to the combined action of a current of electricity and
a catalytic agent acting upon the liquor through the medium of a porous dia-
phragm or cell.
256,330— April 11, 1882. E. D. KENDALL. Process of treating certain derivatives

of coal-tar colors.

Nitrobenzene, or a mixture of nitro-benzene and nitro-toluene (e.g., nitro-
benzene or the mixture 1 part, sulphuric acid 2 parts, and water 80 parts), is
eloctrolyzed in the negative compartment of a cell, with acidulated water in
the positive compartment, producing the corresponding amldo compounds
(analine or toluidine). The negative electrode should be gently agitated. The
color-yielding products are obtained, at the same time, by placing analine or
toluid'ine in contact with the electrode in the acidulated water of the positive
compartment.

26I,,92S— September 26, 1882. H. R. CASSEL. Processofand apparatus for separat-
ing metals.

The cathode of an electrolytic cell is provided with a protective covering of a
dense, porous, nonconductive material— such as leather, parchment, or can-
vas—which admits the passage of the current and prevents deposition upon the
cathode.

Sn,g06—F€bruai-y 6, 1883. A. L. NOLF. Process of and apparatus for obtaining
ehiorine and sodium.

A concentrated solution of sodium chloride is electrolyzed in a closed tank in
the presence of mercury, which covers the bottom and constitutes the negative
electrode.
272,lS7—Febnmi-y IS. 1883. C. E. BALL. Electric gas generator.

Hydrocarbons or other oleflant liquids are sprayed or injected into or upon an
electric arc, whereby the liquid is not only volatilized but converted into a
fixed gas.

277,977— May 22, 1883. E. BAUER. Process of and composition for the manufacture
of substitutes for leather, horn, tortoise shell, etc.
See Group XV, Rubber and Rubber Substitutes.

282.961,— August li, 1883. J. L. DELAPLAINE, J. G. HENDRICKSON, AND F. J.

CLAMER. Removing tin from tin scrap by electricity.

Scrap metal is placed directly in an electric circuit, in an insulated chamber,
and the coating metal melted by the heat generated within the mass, by incan-
de.scence.

281,,862— September 11, 1883. M. H. LACKERSTEEN. Process of treating fats and

oils.

Fat acids and glycerine are produced by passing a current of electricity
through an emulsion of the fat, or oil and water.

286,208— October 9, 1883. L. lAtRANGE. Process of and apparatus for reducing
zinc ores.

Sulphuret and carbonate ores of zinc are simultaneously roasted in the same
or communicating chambers and converted into soluble sulphates, which are
leached and the solution electrolyzed. Zinc is deposited on metal cathode
plates, and sulphuric acid is led off as fast as formed.
291,i63— January 1, 188/,. C. E. BALL AND C. S. BRADFORD, Jr. Electric gas

generator.

A mixed or combined hydrocarbon-hydrogen gas is produced by generating
hydrocarbon gas according to No. 272,187. and in like manner generating hydro-
gen gas in another electric generator, and mingling the gases.

292,119— January IS, 1881,. J. K. KESSLER. Process of making white lead.

An acetate of an alkali is electrolyzed, using lead for both anode and cathode,
with the formation of acetate of an oxide of lead at the positive pole and a caus-
tic solution of the alkali at the negative pole, the products formed being kept
separated in the cell and subsequently mixed; whereby hydrated oxide of lead

DIGEST OF PATKNTS RKLATING TO CIIKMICAL INDUSTRIES.

193

U prFclpltnUHl mill tho orlKlnnI Miliitiun n( tlip KPi'tiite rcKeni'ralvil. <'Hrlx>iiU'
iK'iil Kox I" llilnxlucoil liilii (hv Miliilioii with lliv prM'liilUitv In auapcnaloii, cnn-
vrrtliiK the pixvlpluiv Into whito lead.

t»t,:.yt—Jii«uiiri/tv,ln.%. J. K. KKSHI.KR. Procffo/makino $pongelea<t.

A wiUhIdii "f the iii'ctiitv cif nil niknit iji UHOcl o» thcclwtrolyli'. with 1i'h(I v.er-
tr<ul<'<<. Ih<' Wad of llii- cliitriHU'ii bvinx rcplenbhed «■ It lii lunmiiniil. Thu
<p<>iiKi--1lki' iniiKi of K'liil iU'|Mwli('(l uiMiii tho aurfHCo of th» cathodu Is from timu
to tlini* rvmovod for conversion Into whlt« load and rod lead.

tl>i.n:i Frl>riinnit«,imii. J. K. KE8SLER. Fmerm v/ mnUng enpper iKxUt by Die

ai'l

Bm- ; lopjicr Is produciHl by first elorlrolyzlng a solution of chloride

of so-i la^sUim, usliitc a coppor anode, kccplnjr the products sofiarutu.

and tluti iii;.\iuK thcni. whcrchy hydral»'d suboxIniMiI copiHT Is nrcciplliitcd;
and. si'ciiml, nilxhiK the hydriited suboxide of rop(MT, wiu-lied imii dried, with
neutral iieetate of eopiier (In the proiiortlons of 711:198), molstenlUK thu mixture
with water, an<l exposing it to the air,

t9i.>il»—Miircli i, ISSi. K. HER.MITE. Bttnching q/ paper jmtp or other ftbrout or

trjtilf muteriaU or fnbric$.

Chlorides of i*<Kla or i>ottish are deeomp<ise<l by an electric current under con-
ditions producing an alkali and a metallc chloride, a-s chloride of lead (lead
catht^les being uscilV The metallic chloride. tUluted or acidified, is then clec-
trolytieally decomposo<l. In the presence of the materials to Ik' bleached ( fabrics
or jNiiHT piilp), an<f the metal n'covered. A rag engine with sultiible eleetnsles
Is used.

t96,M'—AprUS,lsai. A.J.ROGERS. Procea of and apparatm for reducing metaU

by etrctrolijgi*.

Fu»*'d sodium chloride or potassium chloride Is fed Into a separate electrolytic
cell andelecirolyrtKl.and tnechlorine and vapor of sodium, orpota.'islum,le<iofl
Into !K*|tanitc receptacles, that for the latter containing coal oil; the passage
which eonducta the stxilum, or potassium, vapor into the receptacle being sup-

^lliHl with hydrogen or other suitable gas to prevent contact of oxygen with
he vapor.

S19.7ss—June 9, 18SS. E. H. & A. H. C0WLE8. Procett <4 mneUing ore$ by the

elect ric current.

Ores or luetalliferous compounils are subjected to the action of heat generated
by passing an electric current through a granular body of conductive but resist-
ant material fonnlng a continuous part of the circuit, and mixed or otherwise
In contact with the material to be treated.

atJ.iiV)— Juf// M, 13SS. T. KEMPF. Manufacture of iodoform, bromqform, and

ehtiiroform.

They are produced by the electrolysis of a solution of the corresponding halo-
gen combinations of the alkalis and alkaline earths In the presence of alcohol,
aldehyde, or acetone, with the application of heat, and In the case of Iodoform,
with the introduction of carbonic add.

St3,il!,—Augu>i i, ISSi. \V. MAJERT. Manufacture of methylene-blue by eteclrol-

ys/s.

Methv'lene-blue and other homologous colors containing sulphur are pro-
duced from paramldo derivatives of primary, secondary, and tertiary amines
(e. g., paraiuldo-diniethylaniline), and from the hydrazo comix>unds of the
latter, by electroly.«Ls in an aeidulate<l solution and in the presence of such sul-
phurous substances (c. g., hydrogen sulphide) as, under the action of the elec-
tric current, .separate out sulphur on the jiositive pole.

Stl^SSS—Auguet IS, ISSS. E. H. A: .V. H. COWLES. Electric proceat of smelting ore
for the production qf alloys, bronzeg, and metallic compounds.
Pieces of base metal, or ore thereof, are mixed with the charge of process No.
S19.798, to produce an alloy of the metals present.

ati,et9—Augutt 18. 1885. E. H. & A. H. COWLES AND C. F. MABERY.

frocett of electric melting for obtaining aluminium.

A mixture of aluminium compound, carbon, and an alloying metal is reduced
In an electric furnace, and then the alloyed metals are separated by amalgama-
tion or lixivlatlon.

St6,e.i7—Septembertt,188S. T. KE>rPP. Procett of manufacturing permanganatee.
Permanganic-acid .salts are obUtined, and free metallic hydroxides, by elec-
trolytienlly treating the solutions of the manganic-acid salts: using a double
cell with a diaphragm, the ncirative electrmle being susiiended in water and
the positive electrode In the solution of the manganic-acia salt.

SiS,l,a»—Fa>ruaruS, ISSS. C. S. BRADLEY AND F. B. CROCKER. Procea of

heating and reducing ores by electricity.

An electric current U passed through the conducting walls of a retort, the
same being In contact with a mixture of conducting material and material to
be heated, so that electric heat is generated both in the walls of the retort and
In the mixture.

3t9,7iT—Apra IS, 1886. E. C. ATKINS. Art of manufacturing soap.

A current of electricity passed through the ingredients in the mixing vat
hastens the chemical reactions and the soap formation.

asi.M6—yovember SO. ISSS. M. H. LACKERSTEEN. Process of manufacturing

soap and glycerine.

An emulsion of a saturated saline solution— such as sodium chloride— and the
melted fats and oils is eleetrolyzed In a two-compartment diaphragm tank.

SS6.<>U>— January !5, 1887. A. S. HICKLEY. Process of manufacturing amalgams
by electrolysis.

A metal-producing solution— as sodium chloride— is continuously circulated
In a current between an anode of carb<m and a cathode of mercurv, thereby
depositing the reduced metal upon the mercury and forming an amalgam.

SS7,e.'i9—Prbruary 15, 1887. D. O. FITZ-GERALD. Obtaining chlorine by electrol-

ysit.

An anode of peroxide of lead in the form of dense, highly conductive layers,
plates, or masnes is employed in conjunction with a suiuble cathode and an elec-
trolyte capable of evolving chlorine.

SSt.l.'i»-.Vay 1. 1883. E. HERMITE. Process of bleaching.

An eleetrolyzc<J solution of chloride of magnesium Is used. The bleaching is
continuous without regeneration of solution so long as the electric current acts
on the solution In presence of coloring matter.

S89,T8I— .planter 18, 1888. W. WEBSTER, Ja. Procernqfelectrolytingtewaoeand
tea water.

For producing ammonia, chlorine, or other products irom sewage, sea water,
and other liquids, two bodies of one and the same liquid are subjected to the
No. 210 13

eleeirolvllc action of posltiro and negnllvi' elecirorlea In the comistrtnienM of a
porous illaphngmed cell: one of the bodlni being re[ie*tedly renewed while tlie
other Is retained and the uleelmlytlc action ihcrpon conllniied.

39.1,17.1— \orrmhrr TT. f-cw. ' h. I'AfJKT. Proituclkm of tine ehtortde, etc.

Zlneehlorl! d as a bypro'luel In a voltaic r-omhlnallon In which

clectro-inoll^- on. A gas. as ihlorlrie. Isfltut gencrati-d by the union

of sulphuric <i HliltiL' iHiwil.r' •'ii)i<)iiiri' of lime beltii/ i.rr.iiM.-<-<i as a

bypn«lu<'t. ling

cali'ium carl" > uu't

with lheele< !: __ ._. . j.,. -reby

Klnc chloride (or Iron chlurlUu> is prtMlueed.

Soe.StS— January IS, 1889. A. di L. Q. ERIN. XeUmd of bleaehing fBrrmt nb-

stances.

Fibrous material for use In pajicr making Is treatcl with a mixture of oxygen
and chlorine gases (e. g., 90 p<'r cent oxygen and 10 per cent chlorine) which
has been subjected to the action of an electric current

»98,l0l— February 19. 1.189. W. WEBSTER. Jr. Process of purifying sewage by
electricity.

Sewage and other Impure water I* passed in contact with electrically excited
positive and negative electrodes of Iron, resulting In the formation of a floccu-
lent precipitate of ferrous hydrated oxide, which effects the precipitation of the
solid matter and the purlHcatlon of the Impurities held In solution.

Ui,9SS—\orcmber 12, 1889. T. D. BOTTOM E. Manufacture of whiU lead.

Lead anodes are electrolytlcally dissolved In an alkaline aqueous solution
saturated with free carbon dioxide.

Ut6,eu,—Soi!€mber 19. 1889. O. KERNER AND J. MARX. Proixss qfeketro^tbtg

salts of the alkalis.

In the electrolysis of the alkalis, or alkaline and other earths, chemical action
is carried on concurrent with electric action, to remove the product resulting
from electrolysis before or on reaching the limit at which electrolytic action la
arrested, the undecomp<Kse<l [Mirtion of the salt in the solution being further
treated. This is effected by pu.ising into the cell a chemical agent to precipitate
the fiortion ol the product formed, or by circulating the electrolyte through an
outer precipitating chamber, an enriching cistern, end back Into the electrolTtlc
cell.

U7. 91,3— December U, ISS9. J. B. READMAN. Process of obtaining phosphorus.

Materials containing phosphoriLs are reduced by heat generated within a fur-
nace chamber and directly applied to the material, as in an electric furnace,
without Introducing oxidizing, reducing, or other gases.

iti,e00— March 4, 1890. H. Y. CASTNER. Process of purifying aluminium chlo-
ride.

The anhydrous double chloride compounds of aluminium containing Iron are
purified and the iron removed by electrolyzing the compounds in a fused con-
dition and in motion.

i£7,7Ur-May IS, 1890. T. F. COLIN. Process of obtaining chlorine compounds

from natural gas.

The chlorides of marsh gas (chlormethane, dlchlormethane, and chloroform)
are formed by the mutual combustion of chlorine and natural gas or methane,
mixed In suitable proportions within a chamber or rcUjrt. The gases are
ignited and the reaction maintained by an electric spark of proper tension, the
chamber being inaintaine<l at a proper temperature. The hydrogen chloride is
absorbed from the resultant gas and the methyl chlorides liquefied.

UlS.Ml—May iO, 1890.
metals.

E. A. COLBY. Process of melting, refining, and catting

The mass of the substance in a retaining vessel is melted by Inductively
establishing electric currents in the substance or the receptacle.

iSO.ViS—June 17, 1890, T. L. WILLSON. Process of melting or reducing metals

by electricity,

Metals or ores are fused In an electric arc formed between an upper electrode
and the metal or ore beneath, and a reducing gas Is Injected Into the crater to
protect the incandescent surface of the electrode.

1^,661— December IS, 1890. T. D. BOTTOME. Process qf desilverizing lead by

electrolysis.

Argentiferous lead anodes are used In the electrolysis of a solution of ammo-
nium salts (for example, ammonium nitrate and ammonlate carbonate, each
one-fourth pound in I gallon of water) saturated with free carbon dioxide,
whereby lead carbonate precipitates and silver deposits upon the cathodes.

US,Sl.l— March 17, 1891, T. PARKER AND A. E. ROBINSON. Process of making

iodine by electrolysis.

An acid solution of an Iodide, such as Iodide of sodium or potassium, is elee-
trolyzed In contact with the positive electrode, and an alkaline solution (caustic)
in contact with the negative electrode, the two solutions being separated by a
porous diaphragm. The Iodine is then drained off and washed.

Ut,OSO—May IS, 1891, H. Y'. CASTNER. Process of mani{factuHng sodium and

potassium.

Caustic alkali is maintained at a temperature of not more than 20^ C. above
its melting point and electrolysed. A gauze or screen Is Interposed between the
electr^Mles and a superposed vessel or dome for collecting the separated metal.

i59,tse— September 8, 1891. C. G. COLLINS. Process qf purifying brine.

Brine Is subjected to a ciurrent of electricity having an electro-motlTe force
not exceeding 2( volts to decompose the impurities, but below the intensity
necessary to decompose the sodium chloride, whereby the Impurities are ren-
dered Insoluble by aecompoeitlon. Simultaneously the impurities ore removed
by filtration.

U9,9ie—Srptember tt, 1891. D. V. KYTE. Manufacture of wMU lead.

Lead anodes are electrolytlcally dissolved in an acid electrolyte to form oxy-
gen-bearing salts, the silver, if any, is removed from the electiolytic soluUon by
electro-deposition, the remaining solution is rendered neutnl, or nearly so, and
it is then treated with carbon dioxide.

i60,t77— .'September t9, 1891. J. B. GARDNER. Method qf obtaining fluids for
primary batteries.

The method of recoveriogelements employed with galranio batteries com-
prises the following steps: Treating a salt — ascbromateof lead or other chro-
mate — with an acid so as to separate it into two parts, one of which contains
the depolarizing element, using the depolarizing element thus obtained alone or
In combination with an acid or acid salt In a oattery fluid: treating the spent

194

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

depolarizing fluid so as to recover the metal employed or the oxide of that
metal; and combining the remainder of the spent depolarizing fluid with the
unused part of the salt obtained in the first step to recover the original salt
emploj'ra. ,

IS2,667— November S, 1891. F. M. LYTE. Process o/makinfi alkaline carbonate and

chlorine.

Sodic or potassic carbonate and chlorine are continuously produced by heat-
ing sodic or pfjtassic nitrate with calcic carbonate(in the proportions of two to
two and one-fourth), lixiviating out the sodic carbonate and converting the
nitrous fumes evolved into aqueous nitric acid, dissolving plumbic oxide in the
nitric acid, precipitating plumbic chloride by means of sodic or potassic chlo-
ride, fusing the plumbic chloride, and decomposing it electrically to form chlo-
rine and lead for use over again.

ie2,69i—Xovember 10, 1S91. A. FOELSING. Process o/puri/i/ing tannin solutions

}yy electrolysis.

Ooze is clarified and decolored by electrolyzing a tannic solution mixed with
oxalic acid and sodium chlorides.
i6l,,097— December 1, 1891. L. GRABAU. Process of obtaining metallii sodium.

Sodium chloride is combined with another chloride of the metals of the
allcalis— as pota.ssium chloride — and with a chloride or chlorides of the metals
of the aliialine earths— as strontium chloride— in the proportion of one molecule
of the latter to three molecules of the chlorides of the metals of the alkalis,
forming a trisalt combination the melting point of which is lower than that of
sodium chloride. The trisalt is melted and the sodium separated by electrolysis.
Potassium may be eliminated therefrom by oxidizing fusion.

i66,J,60— January 6, 189i. T. A. EDISON. Art of electrolytic decomposition.

Substances not readily decomposable at low temperatures— such as chloride of
aluminum— are decomposed by subjecting them to the action of an electric cur-
rent at a high temperature and under pressure. They are confined in a suitable
vessel, heated sufliciently to vaporize material in the vessel and produce pres-
sure and raise the temperature above the boiling point, and then electrolyzed.

166,7110— January 5, 1892. S. C. C. CURRIE. Process of obtaining insoluble chlo-
rides by electrolysis.
The metal— as, for example, silver, lead, or mercury- to be converted into a

chloride is made the anode in an electrolytic cell containing a neutral metallic

chloride solution, such as chloride of zinc, and electrolytically converted into

an insoluble chloride.

1,70,181— March B, 1S9S. C.G.COLLINS. PuriflaUion of brine.

As an improvement on the process of No. 459,236, oxygen is independently
supplied to the brine whereby ozone is formed without decomposing the
chloride of sodium. The nascent oxygen generated in the brine combines with
the dissolved oxygen, producing a maximum amount of ozone.
i71,iSl,—Marchl!l.l89S. A. E. WOOLF. (Peinsue: ll.t!A—June7,189i.) P-ocessof

and apparatus for bleaching by electrolysis.

Sea water, or a like saline solution, is electrolyzed in the vat containing the
material to be bleached, atmospheric air being forced in between the electrodes,
thereby generating ozone and chlorine as the bleaching agents.

1,7 S.SSO— April 5, 189S. J. H. SCHARLING. Process of decorating glass.

Metal is applied to articles having nonconducting surfaces by repeatedly
pouring a solution of metallic salts over the article until it is completely covered,
slowly turning it or moving it during the process, and finally subjecting it to
the action of an electroplating bath.

477,735 — June ZS, 1891. J.BLAIR. Process of making white pigment*.

A charge of sulphuric acid, an alkaline nitrate and water, with metallic lead,
forming the anode of an electric circuit, is heated by injected steam, and the
lead corroded. The reduced lead, sulphate, and nitrate, is then washed in a
solution of an alkaline hydrate. The process without the electrolytic action is
also claimed.

1,78,01,8— June 18, lS9i. C. G. COLLINS. Process of purifying water.

The process of No. 470.181 is applied to water purification. Free oxygen is
independently supplied to water while it is under the decomposing action of
an electric current.

1,79,781—August 1, 189i. C. W. BRUNSON. Process of purifying liquid.

Liquids, including spirituous liquors, and those of an oily nature, are purified
by the application or electrolysis at a temperature approximating to its freezing
point. Tne impurities rise to the surface and are removed by skimming or other-
wise.

l,SO,iaii~AuffUSt 9, 1893. E. B. CUTTEN. Method of electrolytically producing
potassium chlorate.
Magnesium chloride (e. g., 15 to 20 per cent solution) is eloctrolyzed in the

Presence of potassium chloride and slacked lime, the electrolyte being agitated
uring electrolysis.

For the production of magnesia and potassium chlorate, a solution of magne-
sium chloride is electrolyzed in the cathode compartment, and potassium chlo-
ride, magnesium chloride, and slacked lime in the anode compartment of a cell
having a porous partition, whereby potassium chlorate is produced at the anode
and magnesia at the cathode.

iSO.UiS— August 9, 189S. E. B. CUTTEN. Method of electrolyticaUy producing

potassium chlorate.

Magnesium chloride is electrolyzed in the presence of potassium chloride
and magnesium oxide; the electrolyte should be agitated pending electrolysis.

m.i,ar— August ss,

chlorine.

F. M. LYTE. Production of caustic alkalis and

Caustic alkali and chlorine are conjointly and continuously produced by
decomposing an alkaline nitrate by heating it with ferric oxide to evolve nitrous
fumes, decomposing the residue by boiling with water into caustic alkali and a
precipitate of ferric hydrate, converting tne nitrous fumes into aqueous nitric
acid, dissolving plumbic oxide therein, precipitating plumbic chloride, fusing
it, and decomposing it electrolytically into chlorine and lead, and finally eon-
verting this (or other) lead into plumbic oxide and the ferric hydrate into
ferric oxide for recommencing the cycle.

l,8i,»90— October U, 1S9S. H. BLACKMAN. Electrolytic process and apparatus.

A centrifugal electrolytic cell is employed, whereby the products resolve
themselves into distinct layers, and the process becomes continuous, witli a
constant inflow of brine and discharge of chlorine and caustic so<la, or other
material and products, as the case may be. Under the centrifugal action the
gas products are thrown inwardly, and the caustic soda outwardlv, and both
separated from the electrolyte and discharged through separate conduits.

ISe,57&— November 22, 1892. T. L. WILLSON. Process of electrically reducing

refractory compounds.

A pulverized metallic compound— as alumina— is first saturated with a reduc-
ing agent in a liquid condition— as coal tar— and the impregnated compound is
then reduced by electric heat.
ksa.esi— January 10, 1893. F. GRUESSNER. Process of regenerating solutions.

Electrolytic solutions used for refining purposes, and which have become
charged with arsenic and like impurities, are regenerated by mixing there-
with metastannic acid and boiling until the impurities are precipitated.

iai.39/,— February 7, 189S. T. L. WILLSON. Process of electrically reducing alu-
minum and forming alloys thereof.

Refractory metallic oxides, as alumina, are subjected, in the presence of com-
minuted carbon as a reducing agent, to the heat of an electric arc passing
between a molten metallic bath and a carbon electrode above. A bath of base
metal produces an alloy, and the comminuted carbon protects the electrode
from oxidation.

l,gi,700— February lU, 1893. E. B. CUTTEN. Method of electrolytically producing
soda and chlorine.

The electrolysis of a saline solution takes place in a cell having a closed anode
compartment with means for exhausting the atmosphere, whereby the chlorine
is withdrawn from the body of the solution, and access of the same to the treed
sodium is prevented, and substantially all of the soda gravitates to the bottom.

1,91,701— February U, 1893. E. B. CUTTEN. Method of electrolytically producing

potassium chlorate.

A solution of magnesium chloride, to which potassium chloride is added, is
electrolyzed bv means of a slowly alternating current, the potassium chlorate
being constantly removed and potassium chloride added.

t,9g.003— February n, 1893. H. GALL AND A. DeVILLARDY De MONTLAUR.

Mamifacture of chlorates of the alkaline metals and metals of the alkaline earths.

An aqueous solution of the chloride corresponding to the required chlorate is
electrolyzed in a cell having a porous partition and a heating coil, and the con-
tents of the negative compartment is continuously conveyed into the positive
compartment where the chlorate is formed.

1,92,377 — February 21, 1893. T, L, WILLSON. Electric reduction of refractory

meiaUic compounds.

Refractory compounds are commingled with subdivided carbon in sufficient
proportion "to prevent the formation of a bath of the fused compound, and
reduced by an electric arc maintained close above the material, whereby fluc-
tuations in the resistance of the arc due to the ebullition of a bath are avoided.

1,93,023— March 7, 1893. W. T. GIBBS AND S. P. FRANCHOT. Process of obtain-
ing chlorates of the alkalis or of the alkaline earth metals by electrolysis.
A solution of chloride of pota.8sium is electrolyzed in a cell having a cathode
composed of an oxide (copper oxide) which readily yields up its oxygen in the
presence of nascent hydrogen, until about one-half of the potassium chloride is
converted into potassium chlorate, when the solution is drawn off, cooled, and
the potassium chlorate allowed to crystallize. The cathode is removed, washed,
dried, reoxydized at a dull red heat, and replaced. The liquor is regenerated
and returned to the cell and the process repeated.

lSe,109— April 35, 1893. A. B. BROWNE. Process of manufacturing white lead.

A body of metallic lead constitutes the anode in an electrolytic solution of a
nitrate of an alkaline base— as nitrate of soda — whereby a lead is precipitated.
The solution and product is drawn off, the lead hydrate settled, the solution
drawn off therefrom, and the lead hydrate dried in the air or an atmosphere
containing carbonic acid gas.

1,98.769— June 6, 1893. T. CRANEY. Method of electrolysing salts.

In an apparatus for the manufacture of sodic hydrate, a series of covered
electrolytic diaphragm cells is arranged on descending levels with inlet and out-
let connections between the successive chambers of the series. Fresh solution
is supplied to the anode compartment in quantity to maintain the solution in
concentration; a limited amount of the solution is supplied to the cathode
chamber, and the supply is regulated to produce a discharge of the product in
a uniform state of concentration.

B01,121—July 11.1893. C. N. WAITE. Art of manufacturing chlorine or caustic

alkali by electrolysis.

Prior to electrolyzing a saline solution, the brine, or so much thereof as is to be
used on the anode side of the cell, is treated with an alkaline chloride — as barium
chloride — to convert all trace of sulphuric acid into an insoluble precipitate.

601,578— July 18, 1893. H. PFANNE. Method of manufacturing varnish, and appa-
ratus therefor.
Purified linseed oil is thoroughly mixed and agitated with sulphuric acid and

water and subjected to the passage of an electric current for two or three hours;

the oxygen produced in the nascent state converts the oil into varnish.

601,732— July 18,
water.

1893. H. ROESKE. Method of and apparatus for purifying

The water is filtered through a stratum or body of comminuted iron which is
simultaneously agitated and subjected to the action of an electric current.

501,783— Jidy 18, 1893. E. HERMITE AND A. DUBOSC. Method of and appa-
ratus for electrolyzing solulions.

In the electrolysis of an alkaline solution a thin sheet of mercury flowing over
inclined electrodes forms an amalgam of the metal of the base: which amalgam,
received in a trough, is separated from the saline solution by a layer of liquid —
as sulphuret of carbon— lighter than the amalgam and heavier than the saline
solution. The mercury separates from the amalgam by gravity, and the latter
discharges into a water tank and gives up its sodium, or base, to form the caustic
soda or like product.

502,1,31— August 1, 1893. H. H. FAMES. Process of desulphurizing metallic ores.

Impurities and foreign substances, as sulphur and phosphorous, are elimi-
nated from metallic ores or obtained from minerals by subjecting the ore, in a
closed veasel, to the action of heat (sufficient to liquify sulphur but insufficient
to fuse the ore) and an electric current.

503,1,29— Augxist 16, 1893. F. M. &. C. H. M. LYTE. Process of producing chlorine

and purifying lead.

A soluble chloride — calcic chloride or magnesic chloride — is decomposed with
lead nitrate, forming lead chloride and a nitrate; then, on the one hand, the
lead chloride in a fused state is electrolytically decomposed to produce
chlorine and lead; and, on the other hand, tlie nitrate is decomposed to obtain
nitric acid, which is used over again for the production of more nitrate of lead

DIGKST OF PATKNTS liKLATING TO CHKMICAL INDUSTRIKS.

196

by oxldlnliur loM<l (freed from sine), »iiil itlMiolvlng the load oxldo In Iho nllrlf
aeld. preclpllAtliiK aiiyiillver from Che nlimtu uilettd wihitlon to form pure
iiitmte of loud with which to ooiiliiiiU' the cycle of opemtloiiK.

tM.liie--0(luhrT.1,im.1. V. DkI\ RICKETT8. PritretiKif Himnillng milattie nIeM.
Nickel Ik »ct>iirale<l from i>lhcr iiicIiiIm, xnltii of iiicUiIh, hikI impiirltic* com-
blncKl thcri'nllh In iilckcllfcnuis iHKlicn liv piirlfyiiiK niifl coiiccntnitliijf when
nw^CJwiiry. formiiiKthc iiuritkMl mn^ luKt plnlcNor Hhtipcj*. iniiiicntlnK theptnten
In Kiilphurlc bcIiI, mldiiiK thereto «tih>hiiit«i of iillcnlinc Inimn nr other "inillnr
reimenL'i 111 Ktuh itu»<>>l<l>'s »m not to liitcrU're with the wid reiiellon; thereby
forinlUK H bnth of mucIi e<in)|Mtsltioii hm to dl.sHolve the copper itiid nickel una
rt'tuin the former in Nohiiion, nnd form with the latter insoluble siiltH; then
catiaiiiK nil electric current to tni verse the Iwth from the nickcllfernus body an
ancMlc to H sultublu cnthmle pluccd therein, whcn-by the copper la deponted
upon the cHthude: nnd, llnally, la aeparallug the precipitated altt and subject-
InK them to further treatment.

toejiS—Ortuber 10. ta»S. O.Ol'PERMANN. PraffMo/and apparahu/orputify-
iny umier.

It Is RucccnlTely electrolyxcd, ngftAted, and heated.

SOS.mi—XomiUierU.lsas. H.S. BL.\rKMORE. Pneem qf and appamtut/or dtt-
9QCiatitig KtUt qfaUutlU by rttrtrMysif,

The ckH'trolytlc cell Is composed of three comnartmenta, the end compart-
ments, which are charfred with water and contain the electrodes, being con-
nected with the middle comiiartment by siphons. A uniform and constant level
of the bath iind of the liquln of the electrode compartments Is maintained, nnd
the satunite<l (lorlluns of the liquid of the electro<lc compartments are from time
to time drawn off.

tlOMO—Drermber S, 189S. F. M. LYTE. Pritcem iff eteelroljiticaUy decompming

fused metnUic chiiiridm.

In an appnrutus for the eloctrolyslsof fused metallic chlorides, the mouth of a
bell chamber Is sealed aKninst the escape of chlorine by dipping into a liath of
molten metal corresponding to the base of the chloride treated, and resulting, in
part, from the decomposition of the chloride.

SlO.SSi—DrKnOxr 1!, ;S95. H. S. BLACKMORE. Proeeiu) »/ and apparattu /or

dissocUtting aolubie salts hit fUctrolytiig.

The procem conslatii in providing a bath of the electrolyte and two independ-
ent bodies of liquid, establishing a dialytic communication between the bath
and each of the independent bodies of Ilnuid. maintaining the latter at n higher
level than the level of the bath, and passing a current of electricity through the
independent bodies of liquid and throi:gh the bath. The solutions of the ions
from the Independent bodies of liquid are withdrawn while the current is main-
tained.

Stl.SM— December 16, tS93. E. FAHRIG. Procett oS and apparatus for manufae-
turing ozone gag.

Oxygen Is absorbed from the air by a suitable absorbent, ns manganate of soda
and lime in a heated retort, and is then liberated by steam, the temperature of
the composition l>elnK raised from 1.500° to 1.800° F. The steam is then elim-
inated from the gas by cooling and condensing, and the oxygen is dried and
pa-sscd through an ozonizing apparatus.

511.i.v>— December te,lSSS, A. A. N0YE8 AND A. A. CLEMENT. Proeem/orlJie

manufacture of para-amldo-phenol-sulpbonic acid.

A strong sulphuric-acid solution of nitro-benzol Is electrolyzed: the product is
diluted and filtered; the solid wa.shed and treated with caustic soda, or other
alkali, which dissolves out the para-amido-phenol-sulphonic acid a.s a sodium
salt, the sulphoulc acid being precipitated by neutralizing with hydrochloric
acid.

Hl,.t76— February «, 1894. P. D«P. RICKETTS. Procem <if etedrolytie lepara-

timi of nickel frorm copper.

A division of No. 506,846: the nickclHerou« body in this ca.sc being first dis-
solved In any suitable acid, and then, if necessary, concentrated in solution,
the acid reaction being maintained, and the separation effected by the subse-
quent addition of the desired reagents in cfjnncction with the electric current.

ilS.76S—.Varch e, lS»i. C. VON GRABOWSKI. Procets of and apparatus for

purifying mlfate lyet.

Sulphate lyes or liquor* containing free sulphtiric acid, and. in addition to
metallic sulphates, containing also arsenic and antimony, are purified by evap-
orating to a 8. g. of 62° Baumi^ and allowing the sulphates' to crvstalize out. The
liquor is then electrolyzed with a current of high strength using lead or copper
electrodes, and the arsenic and antimony are deposited.

«17,(»J— .VarcA 10. ISH!,. J. D. DARLING. Mode of producing nitric aeid and
mclaltfrom nilratet.

Nitrate of soda or potash l.s electrolyzed in a state of fusion in a closed vessel,
the nitrogen rwroxlde being led off and converted into nitric acid, and the
metallic ba.«c being drawn off as formed. By preference the temperature is lim-
ited to an extent to prevent the breaking down of the nitrate and the liberation
of oxygen. Some of the oxygen may be driven off by preheating at a high tem-
perature.

S1S.710— April ti, lS9i. H. CARMICH AEL. Ifethod of and appanUut /or Oeclro-

cbcmical decomposition.

The process, applicable to the electrolysis of any available solution as well as
sodium chloride, consists in maintaining within the electrolytic cell a zone of
undecompoaed solution of sodium chloride interposed hetween the sodium
hydrate and chlorine at their respective electrodes, by supplying to such zone
fiesh quantities of sodium chloride solution so as to displace the sodium hvdrate
toward its appropriate electrode, and by withdrawing from the cell the sodium
hydrate thus displaced; the supply of sodium chloride solution and the with-
drawal of sodium hy<tratc being ina«le to prm-eed at such a rale as to maintain
the zone of undccomposed sodium chloride between the ions substantially con-
stant In volume.

.^IS.400— Afay «, 3S»4. U. BLUMENBERG, Jr. Electrotyrit.

An electrolyte containing a haloid salt— bromide or chloride— Is electrolysed,
and the liberated gas is transferred from the positive to the negative electrode,
forming a chlorate or bromate. The liquid electrolyte is then drawn off, teu
tied, and the liquor resaturated and returned to the cell.

in.me—JtUy lO. imt,. I. L. Roberts. Mctlml o/ electrolytic dccompoMion of
talU.

The salt crystals axe continnnusly fed Into the anode compartment. Instead
of into the cathode, and maintained in contact with the anode and up to the
level of the solution, whereby no impoverishment of the solution In anv part
can occur.

M3,tM—Jttly 17, Ifttt. a, A. CANNOT, yvonw tff manu/acturing hyiK^hlnmiu
acid.

Oxygen and chlorine ga«e« are thoroughly drie<l and mixed and electric
ijmrks nm \tiumd through the mixture to convert the gane* Into chlorine mon-
oxide. The giuieti are e(M>le<l while subjected to the electric sparks, during their
piuwoge through nil ozonizing tube, and the resultant yawooa products are con-
veyed into a suitable solvent.

Stt.m—Scptembtr IS, tsei. T. A. EDISON. Art qf plattng one maUrial wUH

another.

The biKly to be plated Is supportwl In nn exhausted chamber looether with an
elwtrxHle (or electrodes) of the material lo Ik- deiKidltcd, and the material Is
elcctrleallv vajwrizcd In the chaintjcr, the IhhIv lieing moved to bring different
portions of it successively into proximity to the electrode. An alloy deposit Is
formed by means of eliitrodcs of ditTerent conducting material and malntalninar
an are between them. Metallic foil Is made by depoaltlnjf on a stUlable body
and subsequently stripping off the deposited metal.

St7, ate— October 9, 1891,. 3. T. DONOVAN AND H. L. GARDNER. Proeeu of
producimj ttzrrne.

Ozone Is produced by the electrolysis of a solution of a pemumgrnnste of a solid
metallic base, such as potassium permanganate. In water.

5ts..lK— October SO, ISDi. H. Y. CA8TNER. Procem o/ and apparahu/or electro-
lytic decompotUitm o/aUadine tatt».

A moving Ixsly of mercury, or other liquid metal or alloy, occoples the bot-
tom, and eiiminnnicHting passage, of the compartments of a decompoaing cell,
separating the solutions therein, and the electric current passes from the elec-
trode and liquid of one compartment into and through the mercury to the
Liquid and electrode of the other comiwrtment; whereby, while the alkaline
metal is being deposited and amalgamated with tlie mercury in one compart-
ment, a like amount of the alkaline metal Is being set free in the other com-
partment, reducing the counter electromotive force.

Ml.tSS— December IS, 1891,. C. T. J. VAUTIN. Procem qf and apparatus for the

I production qf eausUe alkali.

A fused salt of sodium, or potassium, in an open hearth or a closed chamber,
is electrolyzed upon n molten bath of lead, which constitutes the cathode, and
with which the sodium alloys. In a se<ond heated chamber connected with
the molten cathode by an open conduit, the sodium of the allov, the same being
a part of the cathode in situ, is subjected to steam and converted into a caustic

t alkali which is drawn off. The feed Is continuous and the chlorine is collected.

I 6S5.80S— March IS, 1891. O. LUGO. Process of purifying water.

It is electrolyzed, using aluminum anodes (which form insoluble altuninnm

oxyhydrate), and the water flows in a continuous course through the tank con-
I talning the electrodes. The coagulated matter is then removed by flltration or

otherwise.

S36,8i8— April t, ISSS. H. BLUMENBERG, .Ik. ElectrUygis.

An electrolyte containing a haloid salt— bromide or chloride— is electrolyzed

in acell having a closed positive compartment, and the gas generated, under its

own pressure, pas.se.s therefrom toaholder. The base produce is conveyed to a

tank, the gas from the holder passed into said tank, and the product— bromates

; or chlorates — therein formed.

j 1)37,179— April 9, 1S9B. H. BLUMENBERG, JB. Electrolytis.

An electrolyte containing a haloid salt— bromide or chloride— Is electrolyzed
in a cell having a clo.scrt positive compartment, and the gas generated, under
iwown pressure, passes therefrom to a holder. Additional fluid pressure Is then
applied to said gas; the base product is conveyed to a tank, the gas paired into
the tank, and the product — bromates or chlorates — therein form&d.

5S7.U)S—AprU9,18Si. G. D. BURTON. Art o/extracting grease/rotn icool.

The greasy, fibrous substance is immersed In an electrolyzed solution, as of
bichromate of jKitash, the current causing a dielectric polarization and move-
ment of the fibrous substance; the electrodes may be of lead. For 30 gallons of
> solution of a gravity of 1.05 an electric current of 220 volLs and 65 amperes may
be used, the current to be reduced to 20 amperes as soon as the temperature of
the bath rises to about 155° F.

5SS,99I<—May r, 1S95. A. B. BROWNE AND E. D. CHAPLIN. Procem o/manu-

/acturing chromate o/ lead.

Chrome hydrate, precipitated from a solution of chrome alum. Is mixed with
an excess of caustic alkali and redlssolved, and the resulting solution is mixed
with a solution of chloride of sodium, and the joint solution electrolvzed to
decompo.se the alkaline solution and produce a mixture of bichromate and
chromate of potash. The combined chromates are then mixed with a solution
of a soluble salt of lead (as the nitrate, acetate, or chloride) to precipitate lead
chromate, which is filtered, washed, reflltered, and dried.

Bil,137— June 18, 1895. T. L.W1LLS0N. (Reissue: 11,511— Oct.lt, 1895.) Oxteium-

carbide process.

Pulverulent and thoroughly commlugled carbon and lime is fed into the inter-
8i>ace between two electric poles by means of an alternating current of elec-
tricity (the action not occurring to the same extent when a direct cuirent is
used) and is converted into calcium carbide by the electric arc formed between
said poles.

Sil, 11.6— June 18, 1S9S. H. BLACKMAN. Eleetrolytle procem and apparatus.

The electrolyte is cooled, to prevent excessive heating, by continuallv draw-
ing It off from the cell, passing it through a cwiler. and returning it to the cell,
at the same time maintaining it cool in the cell by cooling pipes.

61,1,11,7— June 18, 1895. H. BLACKMAN. Procem qfand apparatus/or bleaching.
The hypochlorite electrolyte of an electrolyzed bleaching solution of a chlo-
ride of an alkali or alkaline earth Is heated and employed for bleaching at an
elevated temperature, then drawn off. <iK)le<l. and again electrolyzed nt a low
temperature, to again generate the hypochlorite and reconstitute it as a bleach-
ing agent.

Bil.SSi— June 18.1895. C. SALZBEROER. Procem qfand apparatus /or disft^feet-

ing and purifying itater.

The water is mixed with lime paste, then charged with carbon dioxide to
form bicarbonate of lime, and then electrolyzed to set free caximnate of lime
and carbon dioxide.

5U,i6S—June 15, 1895. C. T. J. VAUTIN. EtectrolyUcal procem and apparatus.

Alloys of lead, tin, and alkaline metals are produced by supplying lead and
(or) tin intermittently to an electrolytic furnace together with a fused alkaline
salt superposed thereon, discharging intermittently alloys of lead and tin with

196

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

volatile metals when formed eleotrolytieally, treating said alloys by distillation
while still molten, condensing the pure distilled volatile metals, and returning
the nonvolatile metal to the reducing furnace.
51,1.597— June 15, 1895. J. D. DARLING. Method of and apparatus for manvjadur-

ing eulfuric acid and by-productn.

A fused nitrate, as nitrate of soda, is electrolytically decomposed in a closed
cell, ind the di.tengaged gases directly conducted to a Glover tower for use in
the sulphuric-acid chambers. The basic residuum— mainly sodium monoxide if
nitraie of sodium has been used— is drawn oiT after each run.
Bil.598—June 15, 1896. J. D. DARLING. Process «/ utUning niter eakc or other

acid sulfates.

A solution of acid sulphates— niter cake— is clectrolyzed in the negative com-
partment of a double cell having a porous diaphragm, the positive compartment
being charged with a base-supplving electrolyte— as a saturated solution of
sodium chloride— wherebv the base" is transferred to the sulphate by electrolytic
travel, producing a neutral sulphate. The chlorine gas is collected.
5iS.057—Jut!/i, 1S95. L. P. Hl'LIS. Elertmlytic process and apparatus.

An alloy of an alliali metal or an alkaline earth metal with a heavy metal (or
metals) is formed by employing as an electrolyte the fused salts of the metal of
one ingredient of the proposed alloy and an anode consisting of a carbon mem-
ber and a metal member (or members) composed of the other ingredient (or
ingredients) of the proposed alloy. The distribution of the positive current
through the anodes governs the composition of the alloy. With metals difficult
to obtain in the metallic state an anode formed of an intimate mixture of an
oxide of the metal and carbon can be used. For metals fusible at the tempera-
ture of the electroly.sis a dish-shaped anode-metal container is employed,
551,1.61— December 17, 1895. W. C. CLARKE. Art of producing carbide of calcium.

In an electric furnace having horizontal electrodes embedded in a mass of
pulverized and intimately commingled lime and carbon of such extent that a
material [lortion will remain undecomposed, the current is started and the
electrodes are gradually separated, as the material between them is reduced, so
as to produce between the electrodes a budy of calciimi carbide surrounded by
an undecomposed mass of the mixture.
552,890— January U. 1896. W, 0. CLARKE. Mamifacture of carbide of calcium.

The furnace wall is built up as the formation of carbide progresses— fresh
charges of material being added from time to time— the lower end of the upper
electrode lieing at all times kept near the upper edge of the furnace wall.
55t,89o— January lU. 1896. T, CRANEY, I'rocess of and apparatus for making

carbonates of soda.

In the electrolysis of a sodium chloride .solution, the cathode solution, con-
tinuouslv circulating through a .series of electrolytic cells, is passed through an
outer vessel in circuit, where the warm solution is charged with carbonic-acid
gas, then into a cooler to precipitate the increment of carbonate, and then back
into the cathode compartments.
551,955 — January U. 1896. T. CRANEY. Process of and apparatus for manvjac-

ture of sodium Incarbonate.

In the electrolysis of a sodium-chloride solution the cathode solution,, contin-
uously circulating through a series of electrolytic cells, is passed in circuit
through an outer ves.scl, where it is treated with carbonic-acid gas, and the
bicarbonate of soda precipitate deposited. The aqueous solution of bicarbonate
of .soda is then returned to the cathode compartments and reconverted into
monocarbonate by the additional supply of caustic soda.

B5i, 960— January lU, 1896. C. HOEPFNER. Process of producing cuprous oxides.
Cupriferous material is leached with a eupric-ehloride solution containing
calcium chloride, whereby a solution containing cuprous chloride is obtained.
The cuprous chloride in a portion of the solution is converted into cupric chlo-
ride t)V means of an acid— as sulphurous acid in the presence of oxygen— and
employed for leaching a fresh batch of cnide material, and the other portion of
the solution is freed from metals other than copper by a suitable precipitant,
and the cuprous chloride therein is converted into cuprous oxide by a suitable
reagent, as caustic lime.

S5S,69S— January 38, 1896. M. OTTO AND A. VERLEY, Manufacture of vanil-
lin.

A solution of iso-eugenate of soda is clectrolyzed, converting it into vanillate
of soda, and the solution is then treated with an acid — oxalic acid or sulphuric
acid— to set free the vanillin.

I5l„718— February 18, 1896. R. McKENZIE. Process of producing lakes or coloring

compounds by electrolysis.

A solution or mixture of the fundamental bases of coloring matters— such as
chromic acid, alizarin* or cochineal— in a suitable liquid, is clectrolyzed, using
an anode of oxidizable metal, or alloys of metals, according to the color desired.
The lakes or pigments are then separated from the menstrum, dried and pow-
dered.

BSS.tSl-February !5. 1896. A. B. BROWNE AND E. D. CHAPLIN. Process of

manufacturing uMte lead by electrolysis.

A solution of sodium nitrate is flowed through the anode compartments of a
plurality of electrolytic cells having lead anodes, whereby a quantity of lead
nitrate forms in each of the cells and is held in solution, thus making a mixture
of sodium nitrate and lead nitrate. A portion of said mixed nitrates is mixed
with sutlicient aiKliuni hydrate (from tne cathode compartments) in a separate
vessel to precipitate lead hydrate, which is tiltered, carl>onated, and washed.
A portion of the mixed nitrates of soda and lead is mixed with fresh .sodium
nitrate and returned into the electrolyte to maintain a uniform electrical
resistance.

657 ,057— March Si, 1896, E. N. DICKERSON. Process of and apparatus for pro-
ducing metallic compounds by electricity.

A finely divided mixture of calcic oxide and carbon is fed into an electric
furnace and the carbon monoxide produced Is utilized to preheat the charge,
bv burning the same with added air. The furnace comprises an interior cham-
ber throngli which the charge is fed, a surrounding heating chamber, and a
furnace chamber and electrodes at the foot of the said interior chamber, with a
connecting feed flue.

667 ,SiU— March SI, 1896. G. D. BURTON. Art qf electric dyeing.

The fibrous substance to be dyed is immersed in the dye liquor, and an electric
current of forty or more volLs and of sufllcien t volume to warm it is passed through
the liquor where the substance is intermingled, whereby the fibers are forced
apart and exposed to the action of the dye liquor.

657,S26— March SI, 1896. G. D. BURTON. Art of and apparatus for eleclrodyeing.
To prevent contamination of the dye liquor by dissolved metals and injury
to the color, carbon electrodes are used in the process of No. 557.324.

S,'i8,21,0— April lit, 1896. C. N. WAITE. Method of utilizing saline solutions.

A saline solution is electrolvzed, producing chlorine and hydrate; the hydrate
solution is digested with wo'od fiber, the fiber separated from the liquor, the
latter evaporated, and the residuum roasted, producing black ash, which is dis-
solved and enough quicklime added to causlicise the carbonate of soda. This
solution is then used in the cathode compartment of an electrolytic cell, and
the operation repealed.
558,Sil— April lU, 1896. C, N. WAITE. Method of utilizing saline solutions.

In the practice of the process of No. 568,240, the black ash is lixiviated with a
limited amount of water to remove a portion of the carbonate, and the resid-
uum is then dissolved and treated with quicklime, etc., according to the said
process.

558,717— April 21, 1896. H. L. BREVOORT. Process of electrically treating fabrics
for uvterproofing or other purposes.

The fabric, moistened with water, is placed between and in contact with an
anode of an oxidizable metal and a suitable cathode, and a curtent of elec-
tricity pas-sed through the moistened fabric, oxidizing the anode and depositing
the oxide on or in the fabric. •
558,718— April gl, 1896. H. L. BREVOORT. Art affixing dyes in fabrics.

The natural dye in a suitable solvent is applied to the fabric, the fabric pres.sed
between an anode of an oxidizable metal and a suitable cathode, and a current
of electricity passed therethrough , oxidizing the anode and combining the oxide
with the natural dye to form a lake.

558,970— April 28, 1896. O. LUGO AND H. T. JACKSON. Method of electrolytic
treatment of soap lyes.

Caustic alkali is extracted and recovered from crude glycerine and spent
soap lyes or saponification liquors by electrolyzing the liquor in a porous parti-
tion cell, using an anode of zinc in contact with the liquor, and a cathode of
metal not attacked by caustic alkali. The precipitates formed are filtered, and
the filtrate distilled or condensed,

559,i5i—May 5, 1896. C. KELLNER. Process of and means for producing bleach-
ing agents.

The chlorine liberated at the anode, and the alkaline hydrate formed at the
cathode, of an electrolytic cell, in the electrolysis of an alkaline chloride solu-
tion, are combined as a bleaching agent, in a separate vessel, by spraying the
alkaline hydrate down through an ascending column of the chlorine gas.

560,i91~May 19, 1896. E. G. ACHESON. Electrical furnace.

suicide of carbon is produced by interposing between the electrodes of an
electric circuit a core of granulated refractory material of comparatively low
resistance (coke), forming a conducting path for the electric current, and sur-
rounding this core with the mass to be treated— comprising silicious and carbon-
aceous material— of relatively high resistance. The mass to be treated, for the
production of silicide of carbon, comprises a carbonaceous material, as anthra-
cite coal, 20 parts; a silicious material, as .sand, 29 parts; and a fibrous material,
as sawdust. 29 parts; with or without a flux, as common salt, 5 parts.

B60,Ul—May 19, 1896. C. KELLNER. Process of and apparatus for bleaching

regetable fibers.

The material to be bleached is first subjected to the chloiine solution pro-
duced by the electrolysis of an alkali metal cliloride, whereby the coloring matter
in the material is converted into combinations that are soluble in water, and
into combinations that are insoluble in water, and it is then subjected to the
action of the alkali solution, which removes the insoluble coloring matter.
The solutions are then mixed and returned to the electrolytic cell. The appa-
ratus permits of the alternate flow of the chlorine and alkali solutions through
the .same bleaching vat and the suspension and movement of the material
while under treatment.

560,518— May 19, 1896. J. MEYRUEIS. Treatment of sodium chlorid.

For the manufacture of chlorine, white lead, and bicarbonate of, soda, on
acidulated solution of sodium chloride is clectrolyzed in a cell having a porous
diaphragm. Chlorine gas is drawn off from the po.sitive compartment. The
negative solution is drawn off, litharge is dissolved therein, and white lead
precipitated therefrom by carbonic-acid gas. The alkaline liquor remaining
IS again treated with carbonic acid and bicarbonate of soda obtained on evapo-
ration.

56S,IM—June a, 1896. W.'R. KING AND F. WYATT. Process of firming cal-
cium carbid.

A mound is formed of mixed coke and lime around a vertical core of con-
ducting material — such as a small carbon rod supmjrted between two superpased
electrodes — or the core is forced down through the center of the heap. A cur-
rent is pas.sed until a nugget of calcium carbide is formed in the center of the
mound, the upper electrode descending freely as the supporting mixture is
fused and reduced. The nugget is removed with tongs, a new core inserted,
the material thrown up around it, and the process repeated.

568,288— July 7, 1896. W, LOBACH, Electrical production of chemical reactions.

The substance to be acted upon — a nongaseous substance for reaction with
oxygen or other gas, as oil to be bleached — is pa.syed between electrodes by sprink-
ling or scattering, an electric "silent" discharge being produced between the
electrodes. Oxygen, or an oxygen product, is also passed between the electrodes
to produce oxygen in the nascent state, with which the substance (oil) is tlius
brought into intimate contact at the moment of formatioq. and combination
takes place.

56S,SS7—July7, 1896. T. L. WILLSON. Process of producing calcium Compounds.
Mingled lime and carbonaceous deoxidizing agent, such as coke, is subjected
to the heat of an electric arc in an electric lurnace, the carbonaceous matter
being in excess of that required to combine with the freed oxygen — say 65 per
cent of lime and 35 per cent of carbon. The carbon may be supplied by saturat-
ing lime with a liqmd hydrocarbon and drying it before "feeding to the furnace.

565,528— July 7, 1896. T. L. WILLSON. l^ocess of manufacturing hydrocarimn gas.

Calcium carbide is produced from a lime and carbon mixture subjected to the
heat of an electric arc in an electric furnace, the carbon being in excess of that
required to combine with the freed oxygen, and then decomposed with water
to generate a hydrocarbon gas (acetylene).
66S,55$— July 7, 1896. A. B. BROWNE AND E. D. CHAPLIN. Process of manu-

faetunng white lead.

A solution, electrolytically separable into a solvent of lead and an alkaline
hydrate, is clectrolyzed in a cell having two diaphragms and an intermediate
compartment between the anode and cathode to separate the electrolyte into a
-jolvent of lead and an alkaline hydrate, and the same are maintainea separate

DIGEST OF PATENTS UKLATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

197

on ihc o\itpr «l<lcii of ihc rtikpliniitTn*. hy prrpon<U'ninro o( proiwiire of the olcc-

lr"ly'<' '" '*>>' Intoriiioilliil imimrlnu'iit.cin thu liiniT »liU'» nt th« illiiphr«Km».

Mctnliic li'Bil Is illM'«>lvi'<t In tlu> li'nd wilvcnt In llio HiiiKli'ivuniiiirlnnntiuiil nn
oxIillxlUKHUfnl— nlirli'iii'M— li>('€intlnii(Hiiil)inlil<'<lllii'rit<ilo|>ri'Vi'iilllK' (urnin-
ttun ol Innilnblo IohiI wUk. Ttio iuiihIc un>l •nthixlt' Mjlutlona aro wllhdmwn
RUd mlxvtl itntl hydrHU' of leHd foruu'tl iind rnrlM>nHte(l.

M3,tii—Jiilu7. IfaiK. A. B. BRoWNK AND E. I). CHAl'UN. I'roctMoJ mnnufnc-

turing rnuh itf leml.

Mvullk' K'liil, nn nn nnodv, Ik cicctrirall)- dlmolvcd In an nlkallnc hYdrnlr
formed hv thu prior i'l«'tr<ilyllc wiwmllon of nn nlknllnc Iwm- Into nn nlknllnc
hvdralc n'nil n miitnillzInK nKi'nl, miih nn nitric ncld. The oxide of leml iiro-
diired h dlswilved In theulknilne hydrnte to form n pluinluile of nn ulkullne
Imse, nod the solnllon In nentmllied by the nforewild neutmllzInK agent to prc-
einitHte the desired lend oxide. The remainlntc solution 1» nstaln uiied nn the
alVallne hnM* eleelnilyte.

l»3,tSi—July 7 , ISim. A.B.BROWNE. Mnntifnrturr of while lead.

A tolutlon, clectrolylk-ally wparablo Into a wdvcnt of lead and an alkaline
hydmle. In lntrodnee<l Iwlweon two ni'rvlons dionhragma Interposed between
the nn(Hle and enihode of n eell. nn<l eleetrolyieil, and tlie licinid withdrawn
from iH'lween the ilinpliruKm!) ns It lK"e<imes iilknllne: to whieh liquid mny be
added nlknline hvdrnte withdrnHii from the enthode depnrtment. Metallic
lead Is eleelrolylieHllv diswilved In the lend Holvent. The ri>sultlnK wilution Ih
withdrawn niiu mixiKl with the withdrawn nlknline liquid, forming a hydrate
of i«ad.

Sei.9ia—JiUy tS, ISge. Q. B. sellers. Method <tJ puri/ylnymtter.

Pieces of Iron In direct contact with pieces of another metal (copper, tin,
lead) with whieh the Iron can form u Kalvanic couple, arv ngltnted in wnler.
Alrlsforee<l through the water to form a eoagnlent and precipitate the Irun
■alts and impurities.

tSi.StU—Augvtl U. lim. H. BLl'MENBERG, Jr. KUcii-olytU.

A chloride .wlution l.s caused to flow through the closed positive compartment
of an electrt)lylic cell (a series of cells, into and from the bottom of each), and
a separate electrolyte through the ncgnlivc com|«irtment in an op(K)site direc-
tion, Hnmpnrtment being nlso conveyed to the ttottom of the siime tank, where the
chlorate is forme<i. Retort cnrlion, for an electnxle, is snturnted with a hydro-
carbon wliich has Ijeen charged with chlorine gas, and then coked.

iei,7m—Au</ml 11. 1X96. B. S. SUMMERS AND C. O. BORING. Electrotylic
aep<iratioH o/ vef;etable Jiberf.

The gum or cementing material of vegetable libers (ramie, etc.) Is removed
by electrolyiing the fibers in a bath containing a fluoride of the alkaline metals
(as socllum fluoride) In the positive compartment of an electrolytic cell.
leS.tSS—Sejriemberit.ISoe. V. J. Kl'ESS. Procett of and apparatus for dietilliHi/

fatty evbilancef.

Fats or resinous sulwtances In liquid condition are distilled by passing there-
through nn electric current and simultaneously Injecting steam, whereby the
steam Is decomposed and acts as an electric conductor through the mass.

ses.StS— September t9, lS9e. E. G.ACHESOX. Manufacture i}f graphite.

A carbide is subjected to a temperature sufficiently high to drive <ifr and vol-
atilize the noncarljon constituents and separate the combined carbon ns graph-
ite. A mixture of carbon and one or nifire oxides is converted Into a carbide In
an electric furnace and the heating continued, as above, until graphite is formed.

tea.St.'i— October 13, IHne. P. DANCKWARDT. Pmeeit r^f and apparatus /or pro-
ducing eyanidf.

A molten bath of the chloride of an alkali or nl kali-earth metal is formed and
eIectroIyze<I while In contact with carbon and nitn)gen, which are introduced
Into the bath, the cyanide formed being continuously removed from the action
of the electric current. Coal and ammonia gas may be used to supply the car-
bon and nitrogen.

li6D,6S0— October to, ISSe. B. S. i L. L. SUMMERS. KlectrotitUc proeem of bleach-
ing and r^ning.

The material (ramie) Is bleached In the positive compartment of an electro-
lytic cell, in a bath containing n fluoride nud a material yielding a hydrate
(sodium hydrate) bleaching ngent. The tluoride prevents the impairment of the
liber. It may subsequently be electnilyzed in a fluoride bnth.

Sri.OSi—Xorember 10. 1896. H. ELDRIDGE. D. J. CLARK. AND M. W. WAM-
BAUGH. Compotiiion of matter for manufacturing caicium carbide.
Calcium sodic carbide Is produced by subjecting a mixture of quicklime,

K parts by measure; carbon, 40 parts: HO<la. 4 parts; and bornx. one-eighth part,

to the fusing heat of an electric furnace. The water of erystalllzalioh of soda

and borax Is expelled by heat before mixing.

iri.SSl—Xoremher 17. 1896. R. LANGHANS. Proceaof producing coatingi com-
posed of earthy oxids.

For the formation of incandescent mantles, basic earth salts are prepared by
dissolving hydrnted oxides of enrth metals in solutions of neutral earth salts, to
lorm an electrolyte, and the hydroxides of the enrth metals are separated by
Hu electric current of high density, they being de|>oslte<I on electric-conductive
foundations. The deposited hydroxides arcdipped In an aqiunms solution of an
acid capable of converting the hydi-oxiiles Into salts v*-hich are indissoluble in
the solution and which are reduced to oxides by heat, nml tliendricd and cal-
cined; or nT) alknloid salt is comltined with the solution containing ba-sic earth
aalts, theretiy dcjMwiting in an intimate union hydroxides of earth metals
nud thcalkalold n|jon the foundation, which isdried and calcined to destroy the
organic sutjstancc and convert the hydroxides Into oxides.

Kl.HSt—Soitmbir 17,1896. R. LANGHANS. Process iif pruducini, cuatingt ctm-

poted of earthy oxid*.

Porous coalings of Incandescent mantles are formed by electrolyzlng a dilute
aqueous solution of a melahydroxide of nn enrth or alknli-enrth melnl by an
electric current of low density. dep<jsiting thereby uj>on an electro-conductive
foundation, as the cat iKKle, a coating of hvdroxidc.'anddrvlnganci cnlcinlngthc
defaisit. An organic base may lie nduiKi to the wilmlon of a nieta-earthy
hydroxide, whk'li orKniilclmst'lsdeposlti'ilnlong with the earthy hydroxldeand
Is destroyed by the calcining process, leaving a porous coating ol earthy oxide.

S7I.SSS—Xovniiber 17. 1S96. R. LANGH.\NS. Electrolytic pniceM of comtrting
hydroxida tif earth and earth-alkali metals into inditsoixMc organic or iuorgantc
talts. etc.

The process of electrolyflcally transforming into salt the hydroxide of earth
meial de|a>8ltcd up<m electro-conduclive foundations cousi>is in placing such
co«ti-<l loundatlon ns an an<Mle in nn ele<-trolyte; which consists of an aqueous
solution of seleuiuus acid, or lis destribed equivalent, and subjecting the elee-

trtiljrto to the action of a rurrvnt of low density. The nail la ■ftcrwBnla minced
to oxide by calcination.

i7t.Ht— Deermbrr H, 1896. H. ALBERT. Proet—of manMfaetming pho»phale> i\l

iilkali*.

An anode luilh of nhosphfiric acid and a catlifsle liath of on<or more of the
soluble salts of the alkali metals. seiHtrated by a porous diaphragm, am elw'tro-
Ivzed. whereliy a inono-.dl*. or tri- Uislc phfwfihate of the alkali employed l"» i»rf»-
diiced at the lathiKle. The alkaline phosphate may be dlre<'tly converte<l Into
caustic alkali with lime.

S?t,8)6—J)ecembcr 8, I'm. ./. E. HEWES. Krrtric/nrruuy..

The carbide and associated halflormol pnsliict of an electric furnace Is dl»-
charjied liint a closed chamlxrr. the dust drawn ofT by suctlf>n, the material
scrtH'niHl, and the cIcbiimkI carbide removf<l. The furnace has an Inclined
hearth; one movable electrode Is |>arallel and clow to the hearth, up the slope,
and the other ele<^trode — constituting a trapdoor— Is stationary at the foot of the
hearth, and stands at an angle thereto. Feed Is provided for the material and
for the movable electrode.

j 57S,tao— December IS. 1896. M. PRIDHAM. Process iff purifying and decotm^lng
iniccharine or other liquids.

As a modltlcatton of the process of No. (73,281), the ozone Is puMd through
subsequent to electric action.

j S75,«Ui—Janimril 19.1897. E. HERMITE. ApparatusfvrpHrifglngordlsinfertlng.
I A disinfecting solution Is made by electrolyzlng a solution containing chlo-
ride of magnesium, or chloride of magnesium and chloride of sodium (wa
\ water or mother liquor from sail works).

676.788 — fanuary 116, 1897. T. L. WILLSON. Electric smelting.

Pulverized material to be smelted, as alumina. Is fed Into the neighborhood
of an electric arc of nn alternating current of a freuiiency adapted to set the
ma.ss of material Into vibration, whereby the arc pulsations draw the material
within its influence. A pool of molten material may form the lower electrode
and the same may be of a base-alloying metal.

677,St9— February 16, 1887. N. 8LAWIANOFF. Electric casting nf metals.

An electric arc Is formed between a ro<I of the casting metal and the mold, or
the fused metal in the mold, and the mold fliled from the fusing of the metal
electrode, the arc Ijcing continuously regulated.

677.613— February 1.1. 1897. G. J. ANDERSSON AND J.C. DITTRI<;H. Process of

manufacturing ozone and by-products.

Air Is first freed from carbon dioxide and dried, then jpas."ed through an ozon-
izing apparatus, forming ozone and nitrous oxides by the simultaneous oxidiz-
ing of the nitrogen, and the nitrous oxides are then separated frtmi the ozone by-
absorbing them in suitable liquids, as water forming nitric acid, or a solution
of caustic alkali forming nitrite or nitrate of the alkali.

, 677 .aot— February IS, 1897. G. M. WESTMAN. Procemnf and apparatus for treat-
ing nrfenic ores.
The ore Is melted in a closed electric furnace with a leail bath for the Isittom

eleiurode beneath the ore, with which the precious metals alloy, the arsenical

vapors being led off and condensed.

578,1,67— March 9. 1897. C. KELLNER. ProceMofandapparatusforsimultaneousty

producing ammonia, sodium hydroxid, and clUorin.

Sodium chloride — or other alkali metal chloride — is eleclpolytically decom-
posed In n closed cell having a mercury cathtxie in the form of a thin layer in
continuous iiiolioii in a helical direction towanl a central jKiint where it flows
off. The chlorine ^>nxluct Is drawn off and the alkali metal nmnlgam pa.sses to
a close<i decoin[M^)Sing vessel an.! flows over a conductive surface beneath a hot
solution of sotlium nitrate (or nitrate of other alkali metnl)nnd nn eIe<-trofle.
thereby forming ammonia and sodium hydroxide nnd deveUipiiig electrical
energy which mny be utilized. The mercury then passes through a cooler nnd
Is returne<I to the electrolytic cell.

678,686— March 9,1897.
CiUcium carbid.

K. R.WHITNEY, l^rocess of and apparatus for producing

Mechnnically compacted columns of fragmentary charcoal are moved longitu-
dinally townrtl each other, and constitute the electrodes of an arc furnace, into
and through which arc a mixture of pulverized lime and charcoal Is fed. A
number ol separate electric arcs proceeding Iroin charcoal electrodes and
crossing each other arc used.

679,S17—March SS, 1897. E. J. CONSTAM AND A. VON HANSEN. Proeen qf

manufacturing percarbt/natcs.

Percarbonatcs of the alkali metals nnd ammonium, as new chemical com-
pounds which are readily wiluble in water and possess strong oxidizing prop-
erties, are pro<iuced by electrolyzlng n satunite<l solution of their carbonates at
temiwratures below zero centigrade.

680.919— AprU to, 1897. A. E. WOOLK. Method iff and apparatus for disinfect-
ing and demlorizing.
Infeitcd wnter or sewage (running strenms. sources of supply for cities, etc. ) is

disinfected nnd deodorized by discharging or injecting thereinto an electrolyzed

solution of salt water.

68S.l.il—.Vatit.\ 1897. H. G. STIEBEL, Jk. Apparatus for and method iif i*era-

iziitg liquids.

The liquid is caused to drop through nn atmosphere of ozone produced by a
series of disruptive electric dis<'harges, and in the path of such discharges, be-
tween the electrodes but out of contact therewith.

S8S,SS0— May t6. 1897. E. A. LE SUEUR. Process iif eleftroti^.

In the eUH'trolysIs of saline solutions, the solution in the anode compartment
is mainlaiiuHl in the chemical condition In which It exists at the Ci>nimence-
ment by addiiik! hydriHhloric acid to combine with the hydrate that leaks i r
diffuses througn tlie diaphragm.

«SS,«as— ./iiiic I, /W7. J. T. MOREHEAD. .Vanufaeture qf eruWd of eateium.

The funiace wall is built up as the formation of carbide progremcs. fresh
charges of material being added from time to time. (Same as No. 58c2,880.>

6S6.t36—Juty IS, 1897. L. P. HULIN. I'rocrts of electrolytic decomposition of

stjtutiints.

The electrolyte Is confined between two permeable ele<'trodes, and the ions
are fllteml therethrough, whereby an immediate st'iMration of the Ions from
the electrolyte Is eflci'teil at the point and instant where and when they are
generalt'd.

198

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

SSe.TlS—Jiily so. 1S97. C. KELLNER. Method oj and apparatus for effecting

electrotyHs.

In an apparatus tor the electrolytic decomposition of salts of metals capable
of combining with mercury, a mercury cathode flows uninterruptedly from a
higher to a lower level, and flows alternately and repeatedly out of contact
with the salt solution and into contact with a decomposing agent for the
amalgam.

5S7 .ISS—Jiilj/ 27, 1S97. I. L. ROBERTS. Process of and apparatus /or mami/ac-

turing metallic carbids.

A conducting path of material to be heated to incandescence is established
between electrodes within a mixture of pulverized ore or oxide (as calcium
oxide) and carbon, and iis the heat thereof converts the adjacent portions of
the mixture into a conductive body the electrodes are gradually withdrawn
and the mixture is gradually moved transversely to the line of the current,
whereby succes-sive portions of the mixture are brought into the heating field,
and a slab of carbide is formed. The floor of the furnace chamber is a slowly
moving horizontal conveyor, and the electrodes, entering at one end of the
chamber in the same horizontal plane, are angularly adjustable so that they
can take a parallel position.

BST.SiS— Augusts. JS97. G. S. STRONG. Sectric furnace.

The electrodes are formed of a mass of material, including a binder, which is
agglomerated, formed, and fed forward to the are by pressure, and exposed in
the guides to a high temperature before actually entering the furnace. One or
more or all of the materials used in the smelting operation may constitute the
said mass of material; the electrodes constituting the smelting charge.

587.1,37— August S. 1897. F. HURTER. Apparatus for manufacturing chlorate of

potash by electrol7/sis.

The cathode consists of a metallic vessel having a porous protective lining,
essentially of cement.

dS7.509— August 3. 1897. I. L. ROBERTS. Process of and apparatus for making

vietaUic carbids.

A mixture of the metallic compound and carbon is pas.sed beneath a hori-
zontal electric arc and in direct contact therewith in the nonoxidizing atmos-
phere of a closed chamber. The arc is deflected downward by means of an
electro-magnet, and the carbide formed is continuously removed. The mate-
rial, fed in through a double hopper, is carried by a horizontal endless belt
under the arc, and the unchanged material, the carbide being scraped off, is
carried tiack and again fed onto the bell.

687,830— AuguM 10, 1897. h. P. HULIN. Process of tmd apparatusfor manufacturing

metallic peroxids and caustic alkalies.

The higher peroxides of heavy metals, such as lead, antimony, bismuth,
chromium, and manganese, are formed by alloying said metals with an alkali
metal or alkali-earth metal (fu.«ed by an electric current), and subjecting the
alloy to the action of heat — a dull red — and atmospheric air to form the desired
peroxide in combination with the anhydrous alkaline oxide formed conjointly
therewith; continuously withdrawing the peroxide and alkaline oxide from the
presence of the alloy under treatment, and decomposing the salt of the metallic
acid thus formed to separate the peroxide.

688.013- August 10, 1897. I.L.ROBERTS. Process of and apparatus for making

metallic carbids.

The process and apparatus of No. BS7,.509 is supplemented by a reflecting dome
placed above the arc, whereby the reflected hea^ a.ssists in the formation of the
carbide.

688,08!,— August 10, 1897. G. H. POND. Process of and apparatusfor electro-chem-
ical treatment of straw or other fibrous materials.

The straw packed in a tank, with an open anode cell at the .side thereof, is
subjected to the action of a solution of sodium chloride, which is circulated
throughout the mass of straw while a current of electricity is passing through
the s<jlution. The solution is caused tocirculatequicklyat the beginning of the
operation and then the speed of circulation is decreased.

688.085- August 10, 1897. G. H. POND. Method of and apparatus for electro-chem-

ical treatment of fibrous material.

Straw or other fiber is packed in an electrolytic tank having removable par-
titions and containing a chloride of sodium solution, so as to form anode and
cathode compartments on opposite sides of the mass; and, during the electro-
lytic action, the solution is caused to circulate throughout the straw, first from
the cathode side to disintegrate it, and then from the anode side to bleach it.

588,166— August 17. 1897. G. DE CHALMOT.' Treatment of phosphates.

Natural phosphate rock containing silica, alumina, or iron oxide, is fused in
an electric furnace — whereby the proportion of soluble phosphoric acid is in-
creased—and immediately removed from the furnace and brought into contact
or mixed with silica, and then dropped into water while hot, which cracks it
so that it is easily pulverized; it is then available as a fertilizer.

688,276— August 17, 1897. C. KELLNER. Electrolytic process and apparatus

therefor.

In the electrolysis of compounds whose electropositive constituent will com-
bine with mercury, the mercury is moved continuously out of and back into
the field of action of the electric currents to succes.sive points where the amal-
gam acts as an anode, and is decomposed successively at such points by a de-
composing a^ent in presence of a cathode; the successive electrodes beiiig con-
nected in series, whereby an independent current of electricity is generated of
higher potential than the electrolyzing current.

588,883— August U. 1897. P. G. SALOM. Process qf making litharge or protoxid of

lead from lead ore.

Pulverized lead ore— galena— is subjected to the action of nascent hydrogen
electrolytically developed, as in the cathode compartment of a cell, producing
thereby a spongy mass, which is then heated in the oi>en air, first at a tempera-
ture below the melting point of lead and afterwards at a higher temperature.

689,itS—feiitembp-7, 1897. J. BOELSTERLI. Process nf and apparatus for elec-
trolyzing fused salts.

A fu.«ed alkali-metal salt is eleetrolyzed and the alkali metal liberated exclu-
sively at the surface of the electrolyte. The cathodes, just dipping below the
surface of the electrolyte, and the anodes, each provided with an in.sulated
gas-conducting sheath, depend from supporting rods and have means for verti-
cally and horizontallyadjusting the cathodes.

5S9.59t— September 7, 1897. S. BLUM. Composition of matter for manufacturinq
calcium carbid.

A mixture of air-slaked lime, 22 parts by measure; carbon, 8 parts; plumbago
containing iron, 4 parts; anil potash, one-half part; is used for the manufacture
of calcium carbide in an electric furnace. The fluxing quality of certain of the
ingredients hastens the ojieration. •

589,801— September 7, 1897. H. C. WOLTERECK. Process of manufacturing while

lead.

A lead anode is dissolved in an alkaline electrolyte consisting of a solution of
a salt of an alkali in combination with any acid which will produce a soluble
lead salt and of a bicarbonate of an alkali (4 parts of acetate, nitrate, or other
salt of soda, potash, or ammonia, and 1 part of bicarbonate), causing the forma-
tion of a soluble compound of lead, which is transformed into the hydrated car-
bonate by the simultaneous generation of free carbonic acid at the anode and
by the presence of caustic alkali generated at said cathode, a current of car-
bonic-acid gas being passed through the electrolyte to regenerate the spent alka-
line bicarbonate.

589.967— September U, 1S97. R. F. S. HEATH. Composition for manufacturing

calcium carbids.

A mixture of quicklime, 9 parts; carlwn, 4 parts; and sodium or potassium
chloride, one-qiiarter ounce to the pound of mixture is used for the manufac-
ture of a carbide of calcium in an electric furnace.

590.6U— September il, 1897. A. H. COVVLES. Process of producing metallic car-
bides.
Same as No. 551,461.

590,5U8— September ei, 1897. C. KELLNER. Process of proitucing hydrates or other

salts of alkaline metals.

An amalgam is formed by the electrolysis of a solution of a suitable salt with
a mercurv cathode and simultaneously an equivalent quantity of the alkaline
metal of the amalgam is oxidized by riiaking the amalgam the anode of a gal-
vanic cell containing a liqiiid reagent and a cathode electro-negative to the
amalgam and short circuited therewith. . The mercury in a narrow compartment
forms a partition between the electrolytic and the galvanic cells.

690,673— September S8, 1897. F. H. SODEN. Process of ajid apparatus for electrically

treating ores.

Ores are purified, preparatory to smelting, by heating in a closed chamber by-
contact with unbroken electric resistance conductors embedded in the ore, and
by the resistance of the ore to the current shunted therethrough, and by intro-
ducing into the ore at the same time, first, super-heated air, and then a purifying
gas, such as hydrogen.

591,355— October 6, 1897. H. MOISSAN. Process of obtaining Cast titanium.

Cast metallic titanium combined with carbon is obtained by subjecting an
oxide of salt of titanium in presence of carbon to an electric arc produced by a
current of from 1,000 to 2,000 amperes and 60 to 70 volts.

591,730— October 11, 1897. W. BEIN. Process of and apparatus for electrolyzing.

The electrolytic cell has a series of vertical partitions which permit the pas-
sage of the electrolyte above or below them; horizontally disposed electrodes
arranged in dMerent vertical planes; a feed pipe for fresh solution; and outlet
pipes for the decomposed layers. The process, resulting from the cell structure,
permits of the feeding in of fresh solution and withdrawal of the decomposed
anodic and cathodic solutions, and the maintenance, in predetermined posi-
tions, of the layers of decomposed products outside of the influence of the cur-
rent. It is applicable to the electrolysis of brine and the production of acids, as
nitric acid by electrolyzing saltpeter, sulphuric acid from sulphates, etc.

59l,,7U>— November 30, 1897. H. L. HARTENSTEIN. Process of and apparatus

for carbureting calcium.

Limestone is calcined, and while still hot carbonaceous material — as pulver-
ized coke — is forced into the mass by the aid of a combustible gas under pressure,
the mass being simultaneously subjected to the action of an electric current.

The apparatus comprises a calcining chamber above a removable electric fur-
nace chamber, mounted on a track; mechanism and connections being provided
for forcing gas and with it coke dust into the furnace chamber.

696,701.— January i, 1898. H. L. HARTENSTEIN. Process of and apparatus for

utiliziiig waste products of blastfurnaces.

As a modification of the process of No. 596,749, the gas injected is a reducing
gas.

The apparatus comprises a converter having a slag-receiving portion, a mix-
ing portion with tuyers, and an electric-treatment portion having electrodes,
by which the several steps of the process are successively performed in the
converter.

596,705— January i. 1898. H. L. HARTENSTEIN.
uets of blast furnaces.

Process of utilising waste prod-

The process of No. 596,749 is applied to solidified slag, which is reduced to a
molten state and then treated.

596,71a— January I,, 1898. H, L. HARTENSTEIN. Process of utilizing VMste prod-
ucts of blastfurnaces.

Carbonaceous material is diffused through molten slag in suitable propor-
tions—as 1 part coke to 3 parts slag— by blowing it in with gas pressure; the
mixture is then agitated to enhance the impregnation, and then subjected
to the fusing action of an electric current, producing a carbide of calcium,
aluminium, and silicon,

596,936— January i, 1898. F.K.IRVING. Proeessof producing ozone.

Ozone is produced by the electrolysis of a metallic salt— as .sulphate of copper—
the base of which is reducible, and thereby serves to dispose of the hydrogen by
secondary action during electrolysis; the' freed ozone being conveyed into a
suitable menstruum, as glycerine and distilled water.

596,999— January 11, 1S98. J. E. HEWES. Process of making calcium carbids.

A carbide of calcium mixture is fused in an electric furnace with a flux con-
sisting of manganese oxide and calcium carbonate. Carbon and lime may be
introduced into a fused bath containing manganese and calcium and oxygen,
and a continuous electric current passed therethrough to effect chemical
combination.

598,5ta— February 8, 1898. H. H. WING. Process of manufacturing graphite.

Graphite is produced by passing an electric current through powdered car-
ixmaceous material— as coke — in an electric furnace, wherebv the heat converts
part of the carbon into graphite, and then separating the urconverted carbon
from the graphite. The material is continuously fed into the furnace; and the
product is continously withdrawn at the bottom, which is water-jacketed to cool
the product before discharge.

€,01,061,- March Si. 1898. I.L.ROBERTS. Process of preserving carbids.

The interspaces of the carbide in a vessel are filled with dehvdratcd wheat
chaff, and the vessel is then charged with a gas— as acetylene gas— which will
not form an explosive mixture with acetylene generated in the vessel, and it is
then hermetically sealed.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

199

«fOI,.«!«-.Vrtir» f», ISM. C. L. WIIJ«)N. C. MUMA, J. W. ITNUER. H.

!<CHNKCKI.f>TH, A. P. BROSII'S. AND .1. r. KUCHEL. Method iff niul

apiHirttttm/itr iirtnliirittff enlciiim rnrtiut.

The (uniH<-(' |>ot i>r ohninl>er Ik In Ih> llnvd with graDulalwl r«lp|tim carbldo.
Cnrnpreioml Mi:k» nt piilrvrio'd llnic hihI i-nrl<<>n, conncctiHl together, are fed
loto the arc of a fiirnnro harinx thi' rutlil linlnic.

*).' - ■ -rt, isus. J. W. KICHAKDS AM) I'. W. ROEl'PKR. Pneeu qf

I /Jini/ c<tmiMH»d« by rlfi'irtUii/iiii.

.\\: n\s curriMit 1m (uinkMl throiiKh olootroflofl of ntmllar compoffltlon

imuuT>vU 111 all I'UM'trtilylo.oiu' or iiiori'uf wluw*- rnnMiiltu'iit^ fornix iillfmiit4,'ly
at CBi'h I'liTlriHli', liy clortrolylic iillark thrrinn. a (ciin|H)iiiicl partially iluriviil
from tho ronf*uniptlnnof thai inile, which Is hisoIiil>Ii' liifUlnTtlu'i'lfrlnilytc or
the priwlurts fornuMl at the npiMHtitt' |»oli' for (he tiiiu' Ik'Iiik; iik. for rxaniple,
with clortrofU's of mi'talllc nulmluni, In n 10 [nr iiMit nolnlloii of mhIIiim) liy|K)-
niilphlli', an ItiKohiblf KiilphiiU- of (wlniiuin l.i forinvil. whlih In illwnKaKol
from the mi'lal polo by the mechanical action of the bubbles of hydrogen and
fallH to the Imtlom.

eoi.l!,:— April 19, IHSS. C. K. HARDINO. Pn>tr$» n/ nmitUng jihmiilmmt.

A iihosptiorir oxUle siibKlantlally free from lime Is llrst made from a phos-
phntlr ImM'. and roasted in the presence of carbon nntll the conibUHlllile Imiiiirl-
ties have U'en consumed and substantially "J jiarts of the oxygen has iieen
dmelted out. The phosphoric itxide remaiiiliiK Is mixed with carljon and sub-
jei'ttMl to tlu' action of an electric arc dev*'loped within theniaHsof the nml«riftl,
and lietwci'ii a ncKatlve electrislc anil the nialerial. In an ntmosnhere of hydro-

fen. A part of the rarlxiu for the reaction is siipplli^d In a lluUI form, aa iciiho-
Ine, f..!c.d in throUKh a hollow nexatlve electrode.

II iimterial. as pliosphatie rock, Is treated with sulphuric acid to
elii miially all of the lime, and then nia.stcd with carbon to ellml-
nat' : j.art of the sulphur and smelt out a iMirt of the oxygen.

tOt.STS— April «, 1S93. J. W. RICHARDS AND O. W. ROEPPER. Proeets n{
rlfctrf)l!/fimUy manufacturing nwtnUii' fulfids.
The metal or metals whose sulphide is desire<l — for example, cadmium sul-

E hide— is employed as an anode in the ele<*trolysis of a soluliou containing a
yposulphlte salt — iwsotlitnn hyposulphite — the sulphide .sought being formed
from the anode and precipitated.

eot.»7&— April se, J.SW. O. DE CHALMOT. Procem of producing tiUHdt n/iron
Thefemxsillcidesof No. 6trj,975 are produced by subjecting a silicon compound
with iron and carboiiaceou.s matter (coke)— the silicon comiMnind being in
excess — to the heat of an electric furnace until the carbonaceous matter is
eliminated and the silicon is reduced.

eOCSSa—Junr 7, ISgS. H. S. BLACKMORE. I'rocem iif producing aiumtnum mtlfld
and rtduHiig Mtmf Oi nietallic ittatr.

Aluminum suli>hide is pro<luced bv exposing aluminum oxide to the action of
thlo carb*>nate-i>f-alkali bases in a heated state. The electrolysis of a molten
bath of .sfKlium and piitaa-Jum sulphides, iLsiiig carlKui hiuhIcs, produces thlo-
earbonates (sulphocarbonates I. .Vlumina. convcrtetl by the bath into aluminum
sulphiile, is electndytically de<'omiKwe<l and aluminum deposited.

t06.9St—Jidy 5. 1398. W. S. ROM ME. Proam of and apparatut for decompoting

solid m&sfancrit.

Solid substances, as the chlorides of sodium and potassium, arc clectrolytic-
ally decompoeed by continuously supplying the mass, placed between elec-
trodefl, In a solid, granular state, with such quantity of solvent as will be
retained by the mass by capillarity without submerging the body.

607. tie— July 19. IS9S. P. MARINO. Electrolytic bath.

The process of electrolytic production of metals consists in adding to a solu-
tion oi^a salt of the metal to be deposited alkali metal salts of the same acid
and an alkali-eHrth-melal .sail of another acid in sucli f|uaiitity as to give, by an
Incomplete double <lecomiMjsitinn, an Insoluble precipitate and a mixed solu-
tion of different soluble salt* of the metal to be deiwjsited, an<l electrolyzing
the mixed solution; an organic acid and an acid such as chlorhydric or sul-
phuric acid, capable of attacking the mineral, is added to the elet^trolvte, to
facilitate the decomiM>sition, and maintain a constant density in the balii; the
mineral itself is u»e<i as the soluble anode. For example, a solution containing
one equivalent of sulphate of magnesium is mixed with a solution containing
less than one equivalent of chloride of barium, giving an in.soluble precipitate
of sulphate of barium in a solution of sulphate and of chloride of majrnesium;
the liquid forming an electrolyte for depositing magnesium.

>07.9ia—July «, 1S98. H. MEHNER. ifethod of producimj ammonia.

A mixture of coal and alkali or an alkaline earthmeuil carbonate is heated
In an electric funiace while air is causeti to pass thnaigh the .same, and the cya-
nide vafiors priKlucc*! escape at the z*>ne of the electnKies intoa receiverand are
therein conaens*Hl ufKUi a Uxly of coal. .Steam is then admitte<l to the receiver,
decomposing the condensed cyanide into ammonia and alkali carlionate; the
ammonia is led off and the alkatinized coal returne<l to the electric furna<!e and
the operation continued. The receiver is above the furnace, so that the residual
mixture of coal and alkali can fall into the furnace on opening a slide door.

«09.S«i— .^ mjiitl SO. J**S. M. P. WOOD. Procctt of and apparatui fur producing

calcium carbide.

The pulverize<l mineral and carbon with a suitable binder having been formed
into cartridges, a numl>er of the cartridges are subjected to the highest beat of
a combustion furnace, an electric current being at the same time paased through
each of the cartridges successively until it is melted down, when it Is replaced
with a new one. The cartridges are held in a vertical position and the initial
contact and fusion occurs at the top of the cartridge.

611.009— October It, 1S9S. G. B. BALDO. Procestqf and apparatm for electrolyzing
sen icatrr.

Two LmhIIcs of sea watt^r are decomposed. In a three-compartment cell, at the
aiusle and cathode, respectively, in presence of a body of fresh water im the
opposite side of the cathode to the .sea water, precipitating miignesium and
calcium hydrates at the cathode and caustic so.la In the fresh-water compart-
ment. Chlorine gas is evolved at the anode, and sul>sequently the liquid of
the anode Cfiropartment containing sulphuric achi is vaporized to one-fourth of
lis bulk, distilled, and the vapor collected as hydrochloric acid.

««.«»4— Octofter 18. 1898. . H. A8CHERMANN. Proceiu iff timultaneoutly produc-
ing cttrbid* and metalt or attoyf.

A mixture of carbon with an oxygen compound and a sulphide of metals
having different affinities for carbon Is electrically heated. If nonvolatile, the
uncombineil metal sinks to the Ixittom of the mass: if volatile, its vaporscan be
.collected. For example, a mixture ol iron pyrites and lime and carbon treated
In an electric furnace gives calcium carbide and metallic iiuu, with a greatly
reduced consumption of current.

6U.9t7—Xonml»T t». mm. O. I). BtfRTOM Pmif— nf and apparatiu for aqM>

rating metnU and by-productM from or.- ' ■ • ■ •'

Ore, under exclusion of air. is »ii heat below the fiminr

point of the metals, tn drive r.fT fli. i i-hiir, ,\ gu- ctilalniTig

oxygen Is then aM]
eomblnisl heat fif '
IMilnt of the metjti

the tcm|>emture Is lir-f rni-"-'! nii-l iiutih'
alKtve the fusing isilnt of one and bd-.w r
low fusing metal, and the 'temperature i« , ,

met4tl. The furnace has a hollow iK'rlnraicd c|ectrlc-<iinduitlng "halt and
spiral wings admitting air or gas to the charge.

6ti.9t»—Xi)vember t», 1898. O. D. BURTO.N. pruccm of tanning tilda or ttint nf
animal*. ,

The hides are electrolyced in a tanning solution: rolorinK matter is then
added to the solution: and It Is again electrolyzed.

6ll,.9)0—.Vinember t9, 1898. 0. D. BURTON. /Vjcwh of and apparatiu for tepartO-

ing metaUfrom ore* by electricity.

The ore Is simultaneimsly subjected to pressure and the pamiage of a heating
electric current, the pressure following the diminishing mas* of ore. The fur-

imce has perforated electrode plates, one of them movable. Ui cUmp the ore
mass between them: and a chamlwr below reci'ives the iiKilten metal.

6l6,l3'J—l>ecemhrrS0, 1H98. U. II. POND. Mctlmd nf drctrnlylimtly treaUng ftrnw

or other Jtbrou* material.

Straw or like fibrous material for the manufacture of paper pulp Is dlatnte-
grated In a heated solution formed by electrolyzing a solution of sodlura chlo-
ride In the presence of calcium hvdrate. allotvlng it to sittle and drawing oS
the solution. After use, the soliitfoii is returned to tlic^ electrolyzing tank, reen-
forced with fresh sodium chloride, and the operation repeated.

S16.988— January S. 1899. B. S. StIMMER.S. Mellioil of refining vtgeUMe fOter.

The material (ramie) is degummed and reflneil by subjecting the flbera to the
action of a chemical bath couiaining a hydrate of an alkutl metal, and then to
the electro-chemical action of a bath containing a hydrate of an alkali metal
and a soluble fluoride with a current of electricity passing therethrough.

617. sua— January 17, 1899. E. G. ACHESON. Method iff manufaeturtng graphite
article*.

Articles containing a greater or less percentage of graphite, as brushes for
electric motors, crayons, st^tve polish, crucibles, etc.. are pro<iuced by forming
the articles from a mixture of carlxjn and a metallic salt having a base capable
of being reduced by and combining with carbon, and then subjecting them to
a temperature sulllciently high to form and then d*com|)Oiie a carbide, thereby
converting the carbon Into graphite. The articles to be graphitlzed are em-
bedded in the heating core of fine carlion of an electric furnace.

818,675— January 31. 1899. F. M. LY'TE. Melhud of and apparatut for producing

chlorine, zinc, or other metaUfrom mixed ore*.

Complex sulphide ores of zinc, usually carrying lead and silver, arc ground
and calcined at a low' red heat U> convert the zinc sulphide into zinc siiTphate:
the latter is extracted by lixivlatiou and converted InU) zinc chloride by treat-
ing with an alkaline chloride and refrigerating; the zinc chloride is concen-
trated and rendered anhydrous by heating it In the presence of metallic zinc,
assisting the action of the zinc by electrolysis, in order to decompose the water
of hydration, subsequently decomposing, first the zinc oxide and then the zinc
chloride by eiectroly.sis with a carbon anode and a cathode of fused metallic
zinc for the production of chlorine and zinc; the lead and silver are recovered
by smelting.

610.6S3— March 7, 1399. T. A. UEHLING. Procet* of and apparatut for reducing

and oxidizing taltt.

An electrolytic diaphragm of palladium, or a suitably supported layer or film
of palladium, is tised. Substances are electrolytically oxiolzed and reduced by
the transferring of hydrogen from one compartment of an electrolytic cell to
the other through a diaphragm, like palladium, that Is nonporous, e'le<-trically
conducting, and capable of absorbing and transmitting hydrogen, but not other
elements, under the influence of the electric current.

6t3.691— April 15. 1899. C. E. ACKER. Procet* of and apparatut for manufactur-
ing alkali metalt.

The fused sail of an alkali metal is electrolyzed with a molten metal cathode
(lead) with which the liberated metal will alloy, and a forced circulation is
imparted to the moiteu metal to conduct the alloy as formed toaseparate cham-
ber, where it stratifies and then volatilizes — in an inert atmosphere in said
chamber — the alkali metal out of contact with the electrolyte: the volatilized
metal is then collected. The same body of inert gas circulating through the
chamber assists in carrying o9 the volatilized metal.

etS.69l— April 15. 1899. C. E. ACKER.

ing metallic alloyt.

Following the process of No. 623,691, an alloy of the alkali metal with the
heavy metal (as lead, tin. zinc, etc.) is made by flowing off the llgbter portion
from "the surface of the metal in the separate chamlier after it stratlnes, the
heavier portion circulating Imck into the ele<'trolytic compartment.

etl,.0U—.Vay t. 1899. C. B. JACOBS. Proee— of manvfaeltwting totuble barium

compound*.

Barium oxide is pro<iuced by heating In an electric furnace a mixture of
barium sulphate and sufficient carUui to extract part only of the oxygen of the
sulphate— for example, sulphate '2U parts and carbon I part — until sulphur dioxide
ceases to escape.

eti.918—May 30, 1899. E. BAILEY, O. R. COX AND W. T. HEY. Procen qfand

apparatut for producing white lead.

An electric arc is formed at the surface of a l>ody of molten lead, and the nec-
essary gases or fumes— <'ommlngled steam. earb<mlc-acid gas. and acetlc-add
fumes — are introduced through the upper electrode into the arc, the products
conveyed away and the white lead caught.

616,330— Junes, tS99. C. Ll'CKOW. Proce** of producing peroiid rf lead.

Lead aiuKles are used in an electrolyte containing from 0 :i to :1 m-r cent of
the sodium, pota.'^ium, or ammonium salts of sulphuric acid In mixture with
the sodium, potassium, or ammonium salts of chloricaeid: the mixture should
be about Vfl.h percent of the sulphuric-acid salt, and about 0.5 per cent of the
chloric-acid salt. The process is continuous, air being blown in to facilitate the
reaction and keep the electrolyte in motion.

etS,33t—June g. 1899. C. LUCKOW. iYoKM qf prwfwfiw ncHfraf dmmaU qf

lead.

Neutral chromate of lead is produced by using a lead anode In the elertrolyrii
of an aqueous solution containing from 0.3 to 3 per cent of the sodium, pott*-

Proce** of and apparatu*for manufactur-

200

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

f ium, or ammonium ealtsof chloric acid in mixture with the sodium, potassium,
or ammonium salts of chromic acid. The bath is maintained constant by the
iiddition of water and chromic acid. The mixture should be about 80 per cent
of the chloric-acid salt and 20 per cent of the chromic-acid salt.

e26.5U7— June 6,1899. C. LUCKOW. Process of prodming arid 0/ copper.

Oxide of copper is produced by using an anode of copper in the electrolysis of
an aqueous solution containing from 0.3 per cent to 3 per cent of the sodium,
j>otassiura, or ammonium salts of boric acid in mixture with the sodium, potas-
sium, or ammonium salts of chloric acid. The mixture should be about 95 per
cent of the boric-acid salt and 5 per cent of the chloric-acid salt.

616.635— June 6, 1899. G. SCHWAHN. Process oj reducing aluminium from its

compounds.

An aluminium compound is vaporized and the vapor subjected to the action
of a hot carbon-gas deoxidizer in the presence of incandescent carbon for an
appreciable length of time— not less than fifteen seconds— air being excluded.
The mixed vapor and gas, which may contain fluorine as an admixture, may
be passed through a carbon mass made incandescent by an electric current.

627 .000— June IS, 1899. P. IMHOFF. Process oj making oxyhalogen salts.

Oxvhalogen salts of the alltaJi metals arc produced by electrolyzing (without
a diaphragm) a solution of an alkali-metal chloride in which is suspended a
metallic oxide, such as aluminic oxide or boron trioxide, which can act both a.s
a basic and acid radical, tnereby forming chlorine and an alkali-metal com-
jKiund wherein said metallic oxide acts as the acid radical, and causing the
chlorine to react upon such compound to form oxyhalogen salts of the alkali
metal. The bath is regenerated with the metallic oxide.

en.OOt—June IS, 1S99. C. LUCKOW. Process of producing whitelead by means of

electrolysis.

White lead is produced by using lead anodes in the electrolysis of an aqueous
solution containing from 0.3 to 3 per cent of sodium, potassium, or ammonium
saltsof chloric acid in mixture with the sodium, potassium, or ammonium salts
of carbonic acid. The bath is maintained constant by the addition of carbon
dioxide and water. The mixture should be about 80 per cent of the chloric-acid
salt and 20 per cent of the carbonic-acid salt.

6f7, 06.1— June IS, 1899. P. IMHOFF. Manufacture of oxyhalogen salts.

Oxyhalogen salts of the alkaline chlorides, or other chlorides, are produced
by electrolyzing— without a diaphragm— a neutral or alkaline solution of the
chloride to which has been added an inorganic oxidizing salt of the oxj'gen
acid— such as potassium chromatc in the electrolysis of potassium chloride —
thereby effecting a diminution in the reduction brought about by nascent
hydrogen and a diminution of the decomposition of water.

617, S66—June SO, 1899. C. LUCKOW. Process of producing acid chromate of

lead.

Acid chromate of lead is produced by using lead anodes in the electrolj-sis of
an aqueous solution containing from 0.3 to 3 per cent of the sodium, potassium,
or ammonium salts of chloric acid in mixture with the sodium, potassium, or
ammonium salts of chromic acid. The bath is maintained constant by the
addition of water and chromic acid. The mixture should be about 80 per cent
of one of the salts of chloric acid, and about 20 per cent of one of the salts of
chromic acid.

6t7. S67— June 20, 1899. C. LUCKOW. Process of producing basic phosphate of cop-
per by means of electrolysis.

Basic phosphate of copper is produced by using copper anodes in- the electro-
lysis of an aqueous solution conta-ining from three-tenths to 3 per cent of the
sodium, potassium, or ammonium salts of chloric acid in mixture with the
sodium, potassium, or ammonium salts of phosphoric acid. The bath is main-
tained constant by the addition of water and phosphoric acid and air. The
mixture should be about 80 per cent of the salts of chloric acid and 20 per cent
of one of the salts of phosphoric acid.

618,806— July U, 1899. W.S.HORRY. Method of producing carbid of calcium.

Electrodes of opposite polarity are arranged in a vertical position and adja-
cent to eacti other: the charge fed around the electrodes, and an electric current
caused to flow between the electrodes, thereby forming an initial pool of carbide,
the charge being kept around the electrodes of such depth as to retain a consid-
erable portion of the heat generated and thereby maintain the pool of carbide
in a melted condition until it spreads laterally be.vond the field of reduction;
the carbide and charge being shifted vertically with respect to the electrodes to
bring successive portions of the charge into the field of reduction.

6t9.S9U — July IS, 1899. I. L. ROBERTS. Process of reducing metallic compounds
and producing metallic carbids.

The mixture of the metallic compound and carbon is supported upon an
incandescent conductor or conductors, which support the charge and fuse the
material, the fused metal or carbides passing the conductor. The conductors
form a grate (or an incandescent pan Is used for volatile metals), the chamber
below being closed in.

6S0,612— Augusts, 1899. M. Le BLANC AND H. REISENEGGER. Process qf pro-
ducing chromic acid by electrolysis.

A solution of a chromium-oxide salt in an aqueous solution of the correspond-
ing acid— as chromium sulphate in sulphuric acid— is placed in the anode and
cathode compartments of a vessel coated with lead, provided with a diaphragm,
and having lead electrodes, and electrolyzed. The chromic acid produced and
the residual solution are removed from the anode compartment, and the solu-
tion previously in the cathode compartment is transferred to the anode com-
partment. The residual solution from the anode compartment is recharged
with chromium sulphate and replaced in the cathode compartment, and the
electrical operation begun again.

6S0.690— August 8, 1S99. H. L. H ARTEN8TEIN. Process of manufaeluring metalltc

carbids.

As a modification of the process of No. 696.749, finely powdered limestone is,
along with the carbonaceous matter, dilTused through the molten slag.

631,^53— August 16, 1899. F. A. GOOCH. Process uf reducing aluminium.

A bath Is formed by fusing together fluorides of aluminium and of an alkaline
metal, as sodium; adding to the bath in suitable quantity carbon disulphide
together with alumina, and elee'rolyzlng with a current of suitably low voltage.

631,IS8— August fS, 1899. C, KELLNER. Method of and apparatus for producing

alkali salts.

A solution of a suitable substance is electrolyzed in a cell having a mercury
cathode forming an amalgam, the amalgam being then transferred to a second
cell, where it is decomposed by means of a suitable solvent while passing there-
through the electrolyzing current and the secondary current produced by
metallically connecting the electrodi^ of the said second cell.

6S1,8S9— August S9, 1899. H. C. WOLTERECK. Process of manufacturing white
lead or other pigments by electrolysis.
White lead is produced by using lead anodes in tlie electrolysis of a solution

the mixed electrolyte and precipitate, and removing the white lead therefrom
by filtration. The 'filtrate Is regenerated with carbon dioxide and returned to
tfie vat. For metallic pigments or lakes (zinc white, copper greens, etc.), a
suitable anode is used and an electrolyte capable of dissolving said anode and
containing a reagent suitable to produce the precipitate.

633,17^— September 19, 1899. T.PARKER. Process of manufacturing chlorates by

electrolysis.

An aqueous solution of an alkali-metal cliloride is electrolyzed in a cell with-
out a diaphragm, with a current density of about 20 amperes per square foot;
the solution being covered with a layer of buoyant nonconducting material, as
pumice stone or cork, to scrub the disengaged gases.

esi,,g71— October 3, 1899. H. PLATER-SYBERG. Process of extracting acetic acid

from alkaline acetates.

For producing the alkaline acetates, wood and mosses, rich in carbohydrates,
may be boiled in a highly concentrated alkaline lye, air being injected into the
mass, the temperature not going above 130° C. The process consists in first
separating the acetic acid from the alkaline acetate by electrolysis cold in a
trough provided with a positive electrode of iron or other equivalent metal,
and a porous diaphragm, (the anode may be broken cast iron or iron shavings,
and the anode compartment is lined with insulating material; the diaphragm
being formed of two perforated sheet-iron plates, with the interspace packed
with amianthus fiber); then in transforming the ferrous acetate into a ferric
acetate by oxidizing with air; next, in acting under the influence of heat upon
this ferric acetate with neutral acetate of potash; and finally in decomposing
by heat the biacetate thus obtained into acetic acid and neutral acetate of
potash, which serves to decompose fresh quantities of ferric acetate.

ese.iSt, — Nm<ember 7. 1899. E. BAKER. Process of and apparatus for electrolytic

decomposition of saline solutions.

A film of mercury flows continuously from a higher to a lower level beneath
a column of the saline solution, in the electrolytic cell, thereby forming an
amalgam, which, in its outflow, passes out of the cell and up in a substantially
vertical direction until its column counterbalances the fluid head of the saline
solution.

637 ,U10—yovember SI, 1899. G. H. POND. Process of and apparatus for dissociat-
ing substances by electrolysis.

A soluble salt is packed between two vertical electrodes, and a saturated
solution of the same salt is continuously fed by capillary attraction to the inner
face of each electrode, and the electric current passed tlirough the electrodes,
the descending films of saturated solution, and the packed material.

6il,S5S— January 16, 1900. M. RUTHENBURG. Process of agglomerating com-

minuled ores or concentrates.

Finely comminuted ores or concentrates are partially fused by the pa.ssage of
an electric current through the mass until the contiguous corners of the parti-
cles cohere, producing a coherent body of open porous structure.

6i!,0i3— January £3, 1900. G.N. VIS. Process of purifying brine.

Brine is purified by passing therethrough an electric current not sufliciont to
decompose the calcium and magnesium salts present, but sufficient only to pro-
duce sodium hydroxide by decomposing part of the .sodium chloride, allowing
the sodium hydroxide to decompose the calcium and magnesium salts; and then
removing the redissolved portion of calcium hydroxide by means of carbonic
acid.

eiS.OSl-January 30, 1900. G. D. BURTON. Process of unhairing animal hides or

skins.

They are electrolyzed in an unhairing solution, the current entering the solu-
tion and passing out away from the hides, and of sufficient volume to raise the
hair and permit circulation through it.

6ta,390— .January 30, 1900. F. P. VAN DENBERGH. Process of maUng sulphuric

acid.

Calcium sulphate or gypsum, or other sulphur-bearing material, with or with-
out a flux, is subjected to heat and electrolysis produced by an electric current
in an electric furnace and applied directly to the material while in a molten state,
and in the presence of an excess of oxygen, thereby forming sulphur oxides
which are subsequently hydrated.

eu,,050— February 27, 1900. H. BECKMANN. Manufacture of lead perotid and Us

application to electrical storage batteries.

The production of lead peroxide, particularly as a coating for the electrodes
of storage batteries, by introducing metallic lead into a solution of sulphurous
acid, or of a salt that in conjunction with an acid will generate sulphur dioxid,
and adding a suitable acid, and subjecting the lead as a positive electrode to
the action of an electric current.

6U,510— February 27, 1900. E. F. FROST. Process of electrical reduction.

Chemicals or nonconducting ores are reduced by passing them int<5 an elec-
tric arc formed between an electrode and an aqueous electrolyte, as acidulated
water. For carbide of calcium the aqueous electrolyte floats on a substance
that has no chemical affinity for the carbide and is not a solvent of water, as
bisulphide of carbon, heavy oils, or coal tar.

61,1,,77S— March 6, 1900. ,T. W. RICHARDS iND C. W. ROEPPER. Process of

manufacturing metallic carbonates by electrolysis.

An anode of the metal whose carbonate is to be formed— for example lead, in
the manufacture of white lead of commerce— is used in the electrolysis of a salt
of an organic acid— as acetate of sodium— either with or without an oxidizing
reagent— such as sodium sulphite— whereby carbonic acid is generated at the
anode, forming therewith a carbonate, while the oxygen evolved from the oxi-
dizing reagent, if used, forms with the anode metal a nydrated oxid, intermin-
gled with the carbonate.

61,6,181,— March IS, 1900. E. G. ACHESON. Method of electrically treating jnatcrials.
The working faces of a pair of electrodes are arranged within the slope of a
pile of material to be treated; fresh material is continuously supplied to the apex
of the pile and the treated material delivered from the bottcmi

eiS.lSB— March IS, 1900. E. G. ACHESON. Method of manufacturing graphite.

Anthracite coal, or other noncoking coal, is heated to a high temperature by
passing electricity through the coal and generating the heiit electri<'ally
within the same, until it has been progressively converted into graphite. The

l)I(4ES'r OF PATENTS RELATING TO CIIEiMICAL INDUSTRIES.

201

colli I" nwlp ihn hrattitK poiv o( an olcrlrir fnmiMv. The piwcM 1« uppllrnble

to ' ,;-' ! "rr, thi>|ilt%wor piirt' -' ' *• 'h-h ronuiliilnhen-nt imptir-

Iti' k' OHrbldtK, but h> ' llinii I'liniiKh u iivirt

til' I tl VI' piece! into Ni. uml iiiitumlly (UstriUnti'il

wlin -"I"-''!'"'"' ut"riiiityln the plcoi'.iui'i m hk n <'uii bv hvattnl to tii'ImrrliiK
ti-ni|>i'mtiir<' without tlvatruylng the relaUvu pualUuiu u( the curboii and iiucn
HSKociattil iiupiirlticfi.

tUI.IIU—AprUti. ItOO. K. VIELBOMME. Pnxxw itf manuJartuHng rich /cm-

chromium.

Chmmlte Is subjected to the heat of an electilc furnace In the prewncc of a
flux and pulverized coke, the tcmjicrature bclnK nulBclcnt (or the reduction
and the voUutllliatlon uf moHt of the Iron, pnxlucing a rich chrome Iron.

eiS.tia»—May 1, laoo. A. J. KOS8I. Pnxen qf prodiKing oUoyt q/ iron ami Ula-

nium.

A bath t» formed of n molten rednclng metal, the hent of the formation of
whom' oxide U at a Klven tenipi>mtiire greater than that of titanic add. a^ for
exatnolc aluminum. Iritn 1h Hdde<l (hcret*' and melted, and titanic acid is sup-
portecmture iK'ltiK dcvel«>i>ed in the charxe »ufllclently lilKh
to In.tun* the reaction tM-tween the reducliiK metal and the oxygen of the titanic
acid, and the alloying of the titanium with the iron.

em.iSi—May 1. 1900. K. 1. KNAUR. H. W. BUCK. AND C. B. JACOBS. I'roe-

eu ufabftrtuUng eiliconfrom gUicious mahriaU.

BiUclous material Is heated to Incandeacencc In an electric furnace and water
gmatsthea forced thereihrouKh. thcFdilicon hydrld tieiuK le<l off as a gaa. Ahnul-
niun Plicate ao treated leaves as a residue an aluminous product (Alj SiUt.) of .
value ■■ an abradent.

Ua.Sti— May ti, 1900. C. E. ACKER. Pnxttxif manuSacturingeauMeaUuiliand

hatogenga*.

A molten salt of an alkali metal Ls elc<'trolytlcalIy decomposed in contact with
a molten lead cathoie. formiiiK an alloy of lead and the alkali metal, and the
molten <'athode is caused toclRMilate in continuous flow past an anode, or series
of anodes, out of the furnace com{Mirlinent and into a second coinparlincnt —
Rteam iH'iuK force<l into the molten b<xly below its surface to elTect the clrcnla
tion — and hack into the furnace conii^irtnient. where it apiin takes up alkali
metal. Iti the sei'ond coiniMirtment hydro^'cu and molten iilkiili separate from
the lead or alloy and are sevenUly reinoved from circulation. The feed of fresh
salt is melted by bumlnK the resulting hydrogen, and hent energy is also con-
aerred by the heat of combination of the alkali metal with the oxygen of injected
■team.

MO.OUa—May it, 1900. E. W. ENQELS. i^i'rc and acid prooj material and procete

o/ making »amc.

A brick or slab of refractory material Is covered with carbortmdtun and then
subjected to electric heat sutscient to make an intimate fusion uf the coating
with the material of the brick.

sm,tSU—ilay tt. 1900. F. A. J. FITZGERALD. Proceet of making carborundum

articUa.

Carborundum l.i compressed in the desired form and then recrystallizcd by
heating in an electric furnace to or about the temperature required for the for-
mation of silicon carbide. An adhesive niaterial, as a glue solution, may be
mixed with the carborundum, and if the article is to be au electriual conductor
graphite la mixed therewith.

eso.SSe—May t9, 1900. a. hough. Procem of manufacturing mbttance* retem-

bting mannite.

An aqueous solution of glucose is electrolyzcil in the negative compartment
of a double cell having a porous partition, in conjunction witli water in the
positive compartment, and subsequently evaporated down to obtain the solid
material, having the formula of CdHhOs.

611.167— June i. 1900. J. E. HE\VE,S. Mant^/ac(urc oj carbid of calcium.

Horizontal and pamllcl electrodes, caimble of being longitudinally adjusted,
are used l>cnealh a mass of the niw material, together with an armature — a
block of carbon — to start the current. After the formati(»n (»f product i.s started
by mean.s of the armature, the latter is removed and the circuit completed
through the fused material, the electrodes being longitudinally adjusted as
requited, and the solidilled product withdrawn from wueath the masa and
away from the ends of the electrodes.

esl.S9e—Junc Jf, 1900. E. a. G. street. Production of chromium (aid.

A solution of an alkali metjil chromate or bichromate is electrolvzed at a
temperature of alx>ut 70° C. using a mercury cathode, resulting In the precipi-
tation of the whole of the cbromium as hydroxid.

651.71S—June II, 1900. H. LELEUX. MiUuxl uj electrically treating oreto/nicket,
etc.

For the electric smelting of nickel, cobalt, silver, lead, and copper ores with-
out preliminary roasting or fusion, a fnniacc is used having electrodes of a
metal whose heats of combination with the nonmetallic constituents of the ftrc
containing the metal to be libcrate<l are higher thati the heats of the said metal
to be liberated. The electrisies are in contact with the ore, ami the electric cur-
retit brings the ore to such a temi)cmture as to cause the suitably chosen metal
of one of the electro<les to unite, by exothermic reaction, with the metals that
are a'««>i'lated with the lurticular metal to be liln-rated. Thus, for the smelt-
ing of a nickel ore, the hearth electnKle Is of cast steel, water c^siletl below,
and faced with nickel. For argentiferous galena or a complex ore of cop[>er,
nickel, or analogous metals combined with sulphur, arsenic, or antimony, the
electrodes are of iron.

esi,761—July a. 1900. J. B. ENTZ. £leetrolyt{e produtiion <tf cauMIe toda, ete.

The mercury cathode of an ele<'trolytic cell Is subjei'tot to the Influence of a
magnetic Held to cause it to circulate and tmnsfer the amalgam or deposited
substance out of the cle<Ttr<ilytic cell and Into a depositing compartuient.-

6St.8ie—July S, 1900.. J. HARGREAVES. Proetn of purifying and ttrmglhening

brine jor use in electrolytic cell*.

The weakened brine withdrawn from the electrolytic cell is caused to circu-
late, by means ot a steam jet. upward through a mass of Impure salt in a sealed
vessel, and then back to the cell.

6S3,li77—July 3. 19(J0. R. C. BAKER. Procem of obtaining hardening or toughen-
ing compoundg/or alloying with iron or gteel.

The boride of a metal capable of use as a hardening or toughening agent for
steel and other metals (ferro-lstroti. nickel-boron, chromiuin-lstnai. or Inng^ten-
bon>n ) Is obtainerl simultane-iaisiy with <'alclum carbide by subjeeting a mixture
of calcium borate. earlKin. ami a material containing such metal to heat sulB-
cient to effect the reaction, as In an electric furtmce. The boride c<miis>utid is
obtained in a fused mass, and may be run uQ, with the calcium carbide above it.

«M,7I«—July 17, IfOO. i. T. VAN OCRTEL. Profrtt o/ tmtrrjmnflnff fahrin

For the pnrpoaeuf settinx lliedye or ri'udering thefai.r
ric Is lmprt*gnated. In a bain, with a Mtluljle metallle mi -
Insoluble oxide upon electrolyl- iitkI the wet (abrle i

iioiioxldlzable eleirtrtxles and It nrrent laumed tin n tlirniitli In in

Ing a dye. the metallic salts lu iihthedye In the gisKls uiidir the

influence of theeleclriccurreiii ting asaiiiordant. orafabrlralreailjr

dyed may be treated a* for waterprooil tig.

6Ba,73»-Julyt7,UC0. W. M. JEWRM.. PrnrtiM of purifyim, mirr

An insoluble coactilent is continuously formeil br clcctrr>-

lytl(»lly decompoetngawluUon of a suitable salt in which

isimmeraedan anodecompoaedof a subsUiiiie (ii.i niblne with

one or more of the conatltnenta s<-p«raled by the tliiirolyilial <lecompoaltl<m,
which coagtilent as formed la Introduced into the water to be piirlfled, and the
water Altered.

»tt,*ait-Augft$i7,V)00. T.JESPERSEN. Procai qf Neaehing by eleetrolylic chloHn

water.

It consists In electrolyzlng a dilute aolution of hydrochloric add, using an
immersed anode and a surface cathode, bleaching in the same tank with the
resulting chlorine waterand thereby restoring hydrochloric acid to the solution;
and again electrolyzlng as before, all being slmultaneoiia and oonilnnoui.

ie«,U«—Augwit li, 1900. W. 8. BORRY. itethod qf i>roducing carbid qf eateium,
etc.

The zone of reduction Is formed between the ends of vertically depending
electrodes, the charge being maintained around and above the electrodes to a
depth suOlcient to oppose the upward passage of evolved gases, which escape
laterally by the path of least resistance. The product maiw is automatlcailf
lowere<l, as formed, to bring succeasive portions of the charge into the zone of
reduction.

8ie,l99—Atigutttl, 1900. R. DOOLITTLE. Procem of manufacturing corbid:

A mixture of the carbide materials Is showered down a cloeed vertical shaft
through a flame formed by gas or oil burners near the top, and then through a
zone of increased t«m|ierature formed by a number of soperimpoeed electric
arcs, the gaaes being drawn oil below Uie electric furnace.

6S6,»ai—Auguttt8, 1900. E. D. KENDALL. EkctrolytieaUy treating terap tin.

An aqueous solution of a nitrate of an alkali metal or nitrate of an alkaline
earth metal is electrolyzed, using scrap tin plate as the anode, and the nitrate
transfonued into a nitrite; sodium or other nitrate is added as required, and
Anally the strong solution is evaporated and the nitrite salt recovered therefmro,
which may be \jsed for the preparation of fertilizem. The stannic oxide and
any metallic tin is utilized for the production of sodium stannate or otherwise.

See Group XVIII for other methods and proceaees for the production of such
bodies as are also produced eleclrolytically.

APPARATUS.

lOt.ira—May 10, wo. I. ADAMS, JR. Improvement in the electro-depotition of
nickel.

A nickel anode combined with carbon is used to prevent the formation upon
the anode of peroxide of nickel.

S10,SSi— January 6, 1885. B. M0EBIU8. Apparatut /or Uu: eleetrolvticat tepant-
tion and deposition of metnl*.

Adjustable brushes or scrapers arc provided with means for moving them
along the surface of the electrodes, together with other structural details speci-
ally applicable to the electrolysis of metals.

Slt,S03— February Si, 1S8S. C. S. BRADLEY. Electrical conducting material.
See Group XV. Rubber and Rubber Substitutes.

Sn,81l^Febraary ti. 1S8S. H. R. CASSEL. ^pparofiM for treating metaU by

meant of electrolyfUs.

It includes an anode cell constructed in part of porous material and in
part — as the bottom — of nonporous material, for containing material to be sub-
jected to electrolytic action; besides features specially applicable to the elec-
trolysis of metals.

S19,9ii—June 9, 1895. E. H. & A. H. COWLES. Electric fmelting furnace.

An elongated horizontal chamber has oppositely located electrodes in con-
ductive relaiion to the charge but otherwise insulated from one another. The
lining Ls of granular nunheat-conducting material of less conductivity than the
charge.

135,058— January t6, 1886. A. H. COWLES. £fcc<ric furnace and method of

opcraliny tlie same.

The electrodes are Introduced into the charge in proximity to each other, and
caused gradually to recede — to obtain a uniform action of the electric current —
until the massot the charge Is contained between them, the same remaining in
contact with both electrodes.

$35,069— Jannary t6.1886. £. H. A A. H. COWLES. Electrle /umaee for metal-

lurgic operationt.

The lining for an electric ^lmaee consists of finely divided charcoal mixed
with finely divided refractory material of low conductivity, as lime.

360,1IA— March 19, 1887. E. H. & A. H. COWLES. Electric furnace.

An incandescent electric furnace has charge-feeding me<'hanlsm automatical! v
controlled by the electric resistance of the charge. The feed to and discbaige
from the zone of fusion is through tubular electrodes.

ast.isa— May 1, 1888. J. OMHOLT. Apparatut for producing tnetalt tf mtaiu qf
tiectrolytu.

A rcverberatory furnace has half-retorts supported a short distance above Its
floor, an elei'lrode In each half-retort, and a tube establishing communication
between each half-retort and a chamlM'r tM'Uiw. The bottom edges ojf the half-
retorts being immer8e<l in the molten halogen combinations are thereby sealed,
and the light metals collecting on the up^HT surface of the molten mass pass
Into the bottom chamber in a fluid slate or as a gas and are collected.

59I.0S4— Ortoftcr 16, 1888. H. H. EAMES. Devier for refining metallic oret.

Retorts have electrodes extending their entire length to electrolyze the charge
when heated.

i03.7St—May tt, 1889. J. C. HOBBS. JTefAod qf operating electric fumaeet.

The charge of an incandescent electric furnace Is enveloped or covered with
sawdust, the furnace chamber being lined therewith.

202

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

l,10,97«— September 10, 1SS9. G, KERNER AND J. MARX. Diaphragm/or ekaro-

lyiic apparatus.

It consists of a liquid inclosed between two or more partitions having perfo-
rations of considerable size, too largre to act osmotieally by themselves. The
liquid must not be in the same state as the osmotical and endosmotical liqmds,
and it is constantly or at intervals renewed.

1^8,378— May 20, 1890. E. A. COLBY. Eketric furnace for melting metaU.

The material is heated by inductively established electric currents in metal
of a refractory mass. (Process No. 428,5.52.)

U!8.S79—May SO, 1890. E. A. COLBY. Ekctric inductimi device.

A refractory conducting receptacle constituting a closed secondary ciicuit is
heated by induced currents from a primary circuit. ( Process No. 428,552.)

iiS.SO^— December 9, 1890. I. L. ROBERTS. Separating-diaphragm for electrolytic

ceUi'.

A nonporous diaphragm of a relatively high electrolytic resistance; preferably
composed of a gelatinous substance, as a gelatinized solution of silicate of soda
and water of about 18° Baumfi, held by supporting walls.
Ul,Wi— December 9, 1890. I. L. ROBERTS. Diaphragm for electrolytic cells.

It is formed of asbestos freed from soluble constituents. Asbestos board and
asbestos cloth are sewed together within a cloth case, treated with muriatic
acid, rolled, kneaded, washed, and pressed.

US,SSS— December 9, 1S90. I. L. ROBERTS. Electrolytic apparattu.

A nonporous diaphragm or partition is used, composed wholly or in part of a
bodv capableof acting as an electrolyte: it permitting such decompositions and
recombinations to take place as are essential to the electrolytic action. Prefer-
ably a cup, plate or sheet of earthenware is soaked in an aqueous solution of
alum, then immersed in an alkali solution, such as caust'c soda, until the pores
are filled with a gelatinous mass.
U1,SSS— December 9, 1890. I. L. ROBERTS. Apparatus for use in electrolysis.

Two or more electrolytic partitions of nonporous material (No. 442,332) are
employed, forming compartment" for the electrodes, with one or more bodies
of electrolytic or conducting paste interposed between the partitions.

iiS.SSI,; iI^,S96; Ui,59i— December 9, 1890. I. L. ROBERTS. Electrolytic appa-
ratus.

In apparatus for the electrolysis of saline solutions and the manufacture of
caustic alkali, encasing jackets for the anodes, or porous partitions, are used
formed of anthracite coal or coke in the condition of impalpable powder, which
is a barrier to the mechanical transfusion of fluid, but permits of the transfer-
ence of the acid radical to the anode.

1,50,103— April 7, 1891. E. A. LE SUEUR. Electrolytic apparatus.

A vegetable parchment diaphragm is employed in an electrolytic cell, for
saline solutions; placed below the positive electrode whereby it is preserved
from contact with the gases formed at said electrode.

i5S,l,Sl—July 7, 1891. E. A. LE SUEUR. Diaphragm for electrolytic cells.

The diaphragm, specially adapted for the electrolysis of alkaline chlorides,
consists ot a laver, sheet, or film of albumen which has been dried and coagu-
lated by heat. " It may be combined with a sheet of paper or other supporting
material.

i6i,09e— December 1, 1891. L. GRABAU. Apparatus for obtaining metals of the

alkalis from moUen chloride.

A bell-shaped pole-cell is constructed with double walls, with the inclosed
chamber open at the top, so that conductivity can talce place through the wall.s
thereof.
1,66,369— December 15, 1891. L. GRABAU. Production of insulating coatings or

linings in electrolytic apparatus.

A bell-shaped pole-cell having double walls encompasses one of the electrodes
of a fused bath, the pole-cell having means for causing a cooling agent to circu-
late therethrough, whereby the fused mass in contact with the pole-cell is con-
gealed and forms a protective crust thereon.
1,69, Ui8— February 2$, 189i. C. N. WAITE. Diaphragm for electrical cells.

The diaphragm, specially adapted for the electrolysis of highly corrosive
liquids, consists of a dense and compact layer, sheet, or film of a metallic albu-
mmale. A sheet of albumen is formed, dried so as not to coagulate the albumen,
and dipped in a solution of metallic or earthy salt, such as tartrate of antimony,
chloride of tin, or sulphate of alumina, forming an insoluble albuminate of the
metal.
h7S,in— April 19, 1893. P. Hi;ROlJLT. Electrode for use in electro-metallurgical

processes.

It consists of a plurality of carbon strips securea together in a-sin^le block and
a metal combined therewith and extending substantially the entire length of
the electrode. The metal is adapted to lower the electrical resistance of the
electrode, and it should be the same as one of the normal constituents of the use-
ful products of the desired operation.

l,7S,$9S—Apra 19, 1891. P. L. T. HEROULT. Electrode.

It Is built up of carbon blocks or slabs fitted together and secured by pins or
clamps to a metal plate or plates extending the entire length of the electrode.
The metal should be such as can enter into the product.

mi.sai— September IS, 1892. T. PARKER. Electric furnace.

Relates to details of auxiliary electrodes to heat the charge between fixed
electrodes and start the furnace.

1,89.551— .Fanuary 10, 1893. C. N. WAITE. Electrical diaphragm.

It consists of a sheet or layer of asbestos or other acid-resisting fibrous material
and bichroraatized gelatine. Bichromate of potash dissolved in a glue solution
may be mixed with asbestos fiber and a sheet formed thereof, which is dried and
exposed to sunlight, or treated in a bath of hyposulphite of soda.

l,9!,,eS5— April 4, 1893. W. MITCHELL. Means for electrically heating crucibles.

A crucible has opposite sections of electrically conducting material with an
intermediate insulating strip, made, for example, by cutting a pi umbago crucible
on the line of its axis and interposing a strip of asbestos. It is grasped by a
holder which establishes electrical connection with its oppo.site conducting
sides.

iBI,.5Se—AprU 1„189S. W. MITCHELL. Apparatus for electncally heating crucibles.
A receptacle for crucibles is formed of conducting end sections of electrically
high resistance, an interposed U-shaped insulating strip, and a filling of pulver-
ized conducting material. An inclosed crucible may be attached to and remov-
able with the said strip.

i95,600— April 18, 1893. G. O. RENNERFELT. Ekctrolytic apparatus.

A bell-shaped cathode, having an exterior of nonconducting material, is
emploved with a suction pipe connected with the interior of the cathode,
whereby, in the electrol.vsis of a fused bath, the metal set free at the cathode
can be removed by suction.
603,1,51- August 15, 1893. W. E. CASE. Apparatus for electrolysis of fused salts.

A containing vessel for the electrolysis of fused salts has an inner wall of elec-
trically nonconducting material, and an outer surrounding envelope therefor
and a "bottom both of electrically conducting material, with the envelope and
bottom insulated from one another. The lining or inner wall and insulation
is formed of fused or solidified salt. •

S0i,282— August 29, 1S93. S. SHAW. Apparatus for melting iron.

It relates to special details, particularly of feed mechanism for electrodes for
a cupola furnace.
60U,S08-Augmt 29, 1893. S. SHAW. Apparatus for melting iron or iron ore.

A cupola furnace has a concave base and electrodes introduced at the lower
end of the vertical side walls, said furnace chamber having a central narrowed
pa'isage opening into a receiving chamber below, the latter chamber having
discharge openings at different elevations, and hinged bottom doors or traps.

60l,,703— September 12, 1893. A. BREUER. Electrolytic diaphragm.

A porous diaphragm capable of resisting the action of caustic bodies, formed
of a cement that will set at normal temperatures when combined with a suit-
able liquid in due proportions, and of a porous substance capable of resisting
the reaction of an electrolyte, as comminuted pumice stone, combined with and
mixed throughout the body of cement.

607,371,— October 21., 1893. F. M. LYTE. Electrode.

A hollow carbon electrode, closed at the bottom, has a core of metal or alloy
(to reduce the electrical resistance), which is fusible at or below the working
temperature ot the fused bath.

608,081,— November 7, 1893. A. BREUER. Diaphragm used in eleetrolytical proc-
esses.

It is formed of a cement adapted to harden orset when combined with water,
and of a substance or body soluble or destructible in a liquid which can be
removed after the cement has set, leaving the diaphragm porous.

612.602— .January 9, 188!,. C. L. COFFIN. Furnace for heating or working metals

electrically.

It relates to details of an electric forge. A pipe coil in the bed or hearth con-
ducts hot air or gas into the arc.

513,270— January 23, 1891,. A. F. W. KREIN8EN. Process of and apparatus for

melting metals by means of electricity.

Relates to details of a cap or cover for a crucible, which cover carries a carbon
electrode and an electrode of the metal to be melted.

613,602— January SO, 189!,. E. THOMSON. Ekctric furnace.

It consists of carbon bars or slabs, in an electric circuit, packed in powdered
carbon in a chamber of nonheat-conducting material, with a receptacle for
the material to be heated set in the powdered carbon.

513,661— JanvMry 30, 189!,. C. T. J. VAUTIN. Electrolytic cell.

A mercury electrode is supported by a nonconducting reticular mesh or
sieve or perforated plate.

618,065— April 10, 189!,. C. HOEPFNER. Eleetrolytical appiratus.

The diaphragm is constructed ot a nitrated organic substance, which may be
strengthened with one or more auxiliary diaphragms. Paper, textiles, or the
like mav be treated with nitric acid or nitrating gases, or a coating of nitro-
cellulose is applied, or paper-pulp or asbestos, etc., may be combined with
nitro-cellulose and diaphragms formed thereof.

618,135— Ajiril 10, 1891,. H. Y. CASTNER. Ekctrolytic apparatus.

In an electrolytic cell or apparatus where a certain portion of the substance
circulates between communicating compartments, as mercury and sodium
amalgam, tor the relinquishment of its sodium in the reduction of a solution
of sodium chloride, the cell is periodically rocked to cause the mercury to flow
from one compartment to another and back again.

621,611,— July 10, 189!,. I. L. ROBERTS. Ekctrolytic diaphragm.

It is composed of an insoluble nonconducting pulverized substance mixed
with a gelatinizable silicate. A paste formed of powdered anthracite coal and
a solution of silicate of soda or potash is molded into the desired shape, tem-
porarily supported, and gelatinized by electrolytic action.

523,026— July 17, 1891,. C. N. WAITE. Diaphragm for electrolytic cells.

It consists of a film, sheet, or fabric of asbestos or like indestructible material
with a layer of sand or like comminuted material overlying it.

523,262— July n, 189!,. G. A. CANNOT. Apparatus for the manufacture of chlorin
monoxid.
Apparatus for the carrying out of process No. 523,263.

530,019— Xovcmber 27, 1891,. C. L. COFFIN. Box. of furnace for ekctric heating

apparatus.

Relates to structural details of a furnace box or chamber.
530, !,7 9— December 4, 189!,. G. A. GOODSON. Apparatus for casting molten material.

The metal is kept fluid in transmission through a pipe connecting the casting
pot and the mold by an electric current sent through the pipe and its metal
contents.

531,11,3— December 18, 189!,. .1. W. WOODFOLK AND J. C. WHARTON. Appa-
ratus for electric heating, smelting, and separating.
Relates to minor details of a furnace having a ciretilation of acidified water.

633,,i96— February 5. 1895. H. A. HOUSE. Apparatus for refining metals by elec-
trolysis.

A rotary segmental cathode is partially immersed in the electrolyte, and a
scraper removes the film of metal from the cathode above the solution, the
segment of the cathode in engagement with the scraper being insulated.

537,009— April 9, 1895. G. D. BURTON AND E. E. ANGELL. MHhod of and apjia-

ratusfor electric metal-heeding.

An electric forge having electrodes adapted to receive and support a connect-
ing bar of iron and heat it by its electric resistance.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

208

SSt.VI—A/ir^iao. tskl. H.U.O'NKILL. KleHrlciillg awl ehemUnltii healrri rrueible.
A mixiiirc ol climnmiimiiis rarlh nnd rarhoiMrcoiin mmtTliil in lined m the
hcMiliiK IhmI.v ■>( nn Inrnnilt'wciit cliMlrlr (iimiuf!. Th« rccrplHolv hiua raliil'
ntit-v woiiiKl ariiiind It iih nn HiixlllHry heutcT.

I'.i.lM—Auiliii'li!. ISIi.': W. DOKCIIKKS. \rn»rl/or Hidrolijlif u-jtnmtinn.

A v«»el (oimstltmliiK Ihi' nitluKlci (or tlu' eliTtiDlyllc Iniitiiicnl of mctnl* —
u the lorniiition ol Itiul mhIIuiii iilloy in llu> cli-i'lrolyalii of fiiHiHl cliloriilo of
WKl'.iim— liti.<; iinnivroiiH MniKTinipoM-il Kroovi'M nn its interior fiici' iiiitl u bottom
diw'luirgr opriiiMit, \vi»rri't>y tin' inaliTiiil i'Xim»ow»
dowDwiinlly Iroui oiu* KriH>vi> to Another.

He.ttS—Stittimliei- 17. l.«M. C. HOEHFNER. AntKle/Driieiiroli/lie iiiiparntM.

An Hiiodc. with ft niirfHcc of n compound of Aiiicinni and anolht'r <'ondiirtive
niftiil In Miich itroiKtrtion.t (im mtninnt IOi»or i-t-iit Niii<'iuin) tis Ut t)o proof HKiiinst
tlu* ti<-tioii nf li<iui<lM or KU'*eH. (Mrllcnlurly rlilorino. It in nintti' wlioDy or In
part ol li'triv-villeium; If of carbon, It may be loiitcd or plated with fcrro-
iilltciiim.

44S..*M.— .''rpfoBlifr IT.ISSS. D. T0MMA8I. Apiiamlu»/or ejtirnelino, Kparallug,

iitut rfUmrift mttnh t>y rlrrtnttf/niii,

I'ohiri/jiilon it preveniol liy uslnit n rotallnx catlimlf ilNk com posed of a mix-
ture of carbon and oxide of copiivr, partially JmaienH.-d In the electrolyte. The
dink Ia formed of removable neirmcnlal wclions

JtVt.fi'-fVW"!- I", 1S9S. 1. HAROREAVES AND T. BIRD. Cambliinl dta-
■' 'f,
n>de. as wire f;aiizeor perforated metal, hasdirectly secured
(hi.. . - - :'roua material and an Insoluble binding agent, superposed

on w tiieh there may Iw a layer of porous stone-llfce material, such as cement.

«i,fll4— /VroMjxT /O. tsas. J. A. VINCENT. Elcclrlr amddnij furnace.

The material Is forcetl by a positive horizontal feed throngh a horizontal
chiinnel way and (>ctwecn electrodes, forming In part the walls of the channel.
Into n discharging pii.

lift.3U—Dectmber SI, IS9S. J. A. VINCENT ANDJ. E. HEWE.S. EUctric tmeUing
Jamact.

It has a removable electrode bottom to the hearth with an adjustable upper
electrode and feeding devices for the material.

«.«,(<.«— -l/nirA 10. ISm. M. H. WILSON. Elcctrolylic apimrntm.

To avoid the rapid destruction of electrodes, u.s by caustic soda and chlorine
In the electrolysis of a saline solution, the electrode is formed of a relatively
small slream or column of water which serves as a conducting medium through
which the electric current enters or leaves the solution.

iie.6;e— March n. I«W. a. C. GIRARD and E. a. G. STRKET. Electric furnace.
A healing chamber has a longitudinal passage extending through it, a tubu-
lar cylinder for containing the material to be healed, with means for feeding
the cylinder through said passage, an electrode projecting into the heating
chamber, and connecdons to establish an arc between the electrode and the
taia cylinder.

tiS,Si7— April lU. tsse. M. R. CONLEY. Electrical furnace.

A melting pot or vessel made of a carbon composition electrically heated by
Its resistance has integral arms or opposite sides to which the electii<»l con-
nections are made. *

KS.WO—Jiine SS. ISse. \V. R. KING AND F. WYATT. Electric funuUx.

An arc furnace with a hollow vertical upper electrode bos a feed tube extend-
ing down within the said electrode.

eef.iOS—JuHttS. 1398. W. R. king and F. WYATT. Electric furnace.

.\ppliaiices for carrying out the process of No. ii(>3.402 and handling: the car-
bide nugget

Il6t,i0!,—Junel3 189e. W.R.KING. Electric furnace.

A plurality of iipiwr electrodes, preferably arranged in a ring, each adjustable
and all carrieil by n roinmon uiljustablu frame, form a pluralitv of arcs with a
common hearth electrode. There is a central feed and a dellector to throw the
material into the tield of the several arcs.

lM.9ii—Au<jutt Ifl. ISae. E. ANDREOLI. Apparatus for indirect electrolpiris.

For the Indirect electrolysis of solutions the cell has three compartments
formed by two porous iliaphragnis: the middle section to contain the solution
to be treated (e. g. .sodium bisulphite), and also a series of perforated plates
and the end .sections positive and negative electriKles and suitable somtlons
(e. g. caustic potash and sodium chloride. resi>ectively).

667. 699— September IS. I.i96. J. A. VINCENT. Electric smeUing furnace.

An upright furnace chamber open at top and Ixittom has a vertically movable
floor, positive down fee<l for material, and side electrixles with automatic feed
The material is forced down between the electrodes aud the smelted product
feeds down with the floor.

II6S. 177— tkplemlyer ti, 1896. N. TESLA. Apparaltu for producing nzone.

Apparatus lor the production of ozone by the action of high-tenaioD electri-
cal discharges, involving the combination with a circuit of direct currents of
a controller for making and breaking the same, a motor included in or con-
nccte<l with said ciicuft so as to increase its self-induction and driving the
said controller, a condenser in a circuit around the controller, and a trans-
former through the primary of which the condenser discharges.

SSS.:»9— September tt. 1896. H. BLACKMAN. Electrode.

An anode for use in electrolytic decomposition, consisting of a dense Impei^
meable mass of combined electroconductive IriJii oxicle and a flux, as, for
example, the residue from pig-irou furnaces known as •• black slag."

Ma,tS0—Septnid)ertt,lS96. H. BLACKMAN. Elect rode for eleetrolutie deeomno-
titUm.

An anode consisting of a casting of ilmenite, with a small proportion of
fluxing maierial.

ses.iM—.'feplember SZ. 1896. H. BLACKMAN. Ekclrolytic anode and apparatus.
An an'xie for electrolytic decomposition, consisting of electro-conductive
oxide of iron In a dense Impermeable mass, as, for example, magnetite.

169.113— October 6. 1896. A. A. NAVILLE AND I>. A. & C. E. GUYE. Electrical
aat-readion apparalut.

The apparatus for the treatment of ga-ses comprises a series of independent
Insulated tubes interposed in line between two electrodes of an electric circuU,
with gas conduits communicating with the inside and outside of the several

tubular electrodes. It !■ applicable to ths pnidiirtloa of nitric acid by mcansof
molat air circulating In an ap|Mn>lu» with the •■iM'trralpa mnd4' of roal, and lh«
production of acetylene gas by means of hydniven In such an ap|iaratiis.

sm.ltt—nrtntier 18, 1896. R. O. fi. MoLDENKE. Appnrnlutfrir melting mrtnU.

A regenerative or other crucible furnace has a sloping platform for the charge
anil an electric arc at the (.ml of the sIoim- to supplement the heating. An elec-
tro-magnet deHct'U the arc onto the charge.

S70,I,U— October t7, 1896. W.Dk C.MAY. Apparatus for eUetrotyllr drpmrlUm.

Thenpparaius, f •' ' - ' ' • iiicni nf materlnl In a flii'
division, eompri- I p>iii>, the Uillom of eii> t

down into Ihe in .mid each with nn ov. i

electrolyte Intii in.' iir.xt |mn m series. Each pan contains a layer ol (be

material to }>v treated. aii<l the electrolyte Is returned from the bottom to the
top |ian 111 continuous flow.

«7i,««.'S— .VmrmAer 17. 1896. A. C. OIRARD AND E. A. O. STREET. Eleeirle

furnace.

All electric furnace has a carlxm tube or casing for the material, said tube
l>elng Interposefl. as a common electnsle. Ix-twei-n «ine or more electrode* to
produce arcs outside of the tulx.'. The hearth i« U-low the tube.

S7t,3lt— December 1, 1896. E. F. PRICE. Electric furnace.

It has an Inclined electric hearth with means for adjusting the Inclination,
and a range of perrwiidicular adjustable electrode*, witn the material fed down
around them. Ca.siiigs around the electrodes — there being intervening feed
spaces — have flues for escaping gases.

S7t.l,7t—Deeeviberl,1896. H. Y. CASTNER. Anode for elcctrolylic proresses.

A graphltlzcd carbon cIcctro<lc; prodiicc<I by submitting a shaped electrode of
gasreiort or like carbon to the Intense heat prfcluced by pawing an electric
current, therethrough while it is protected from Ihe air The disintegration of
the carbon In a hatn by the combined action of oxygen, chlorine, and water is
materially reduced as the carbon approaches the graphitic variety.

57S.OU—I)ecember IS, 1896. M. SOHINDLER. Electric fumncr.

Relates to details of a cooled holder for a furnace elei.*trode.
57S,St6— January 16, 1897. J. A. DEUTHER. Electric furnace.

The upper suspended electrode of an arc furnace is vibrated, and the material
Is fed onto the bottom electrode and within the arc path as the upper electrode
swings to and fro.

S7S.8t9— January te, 1897. J. JOYCE AND J. A. DECTHER. EleHric furnace.

The bottom electrode is laterally displaced, at intervals, to expose part of its
surface, but not to break the arc, and the material is automatically fed onto the
exposed surface of the electrode.

S77,3I7—Pebniurti 16, 1897. F. J. PATTEN. Electric furnace.

A plurality of Incandescent carbon pencils are successively thrown into cir-
cuit in rotation — to give a diOusion of neat— by means of a liquid commutator;
a rotating switch operates In an acidulated water bath.

S77, 370— February 16, 1897. F. .1. PATTEN. Electric furnace.

The material Is passed between electrodes, and the arc Is reciprocated trans-
verse to the path of material by a magnetic field, the current of the magnetic
field or of the electrodes being alternated.

B77.U>S— February es, 1897. F. J. PATTEN. EUctric furnace.

The furnace has a central vertical carbon core, and numerous lateral carbon
pencils radiating from It, throngh the charge mixture, to the walls and to Inde-
pendent leads. The current Is sent in succesion or in groups through the pen-
cils.

378,073— .March t, 1897. H. BLUMENBERG. JE. Porous diaphragm.

Asbestos, formed into the desired shape, is treated with acid to remove the
metallic salts and toughen it. A binding material is then forced Into the pores
of the ast)estos under high pressure, and it is then baked at a high temperature,
which changes it from a fibrous to crystalline state.

S79.3gU— March tS, 1897. W. S. HADAWAY, jR. Electric furnace.

Relates to details of a mufHe electrically heated by Incandescent outer pack-
ing, with a hydrocarbon gas injected therethrough, which gas is decompoaed,
and the hydrogen gas burnt in the outer shell of the muffle.

S8t.7Sl—May 18, 1897. J. A. DEUTHER. Electrode.

Relates to structural details.
S8S,9t3—Xay 18, 1897. A. E. HUNT. Electrolytic aj^mratus.

To protect workmen attending the several pots or vessels connected in series
of an electrolytic apparatus, a metal platform is provided for each pot or vessel
in electrical connecuon therewith and maintained at the same electrical poten-
tial as the pot

St>3.Si9—May!S, 1SS7. A. H.COWLES. Electric furnace and method qf operating

same.

The material is heated by internally generated heat, and a gas, or gas and air,'
Is periodically passed therethrough in opposite directions.

SS3,t50—SraylS, 1897. A. H. COWLES. Electric furnace.

A furnace chamber has gas-pipe connections and valves, and bodies of
bniken carlwn through which the gas posses on entering and leaving the fur-
nace chamber. (See No. 583,219.)

SSS.B13-^une 1, 1997. W. SPfLKER. Electrolysis of U'atery sail solutions.

A membrane, servliig as a foundation. Is luied in the electrolysis of an alka-
line cathode solution irom an anode solution consisting of a mixture of the
chlorides of the alkali metals and calcium holding the corresponiling oxyhy-
drate — caustic lime— in .solution, which causes a .solid porous e,.ating to be
attached to the foundation membrane on the side of the anisle space.

S8S.6l8—June 1. 1897. H. ELDRIDGE, O. H. WRIGHT, AND D. J. CLARK.

Vacuwn electric-arc furnace.

The furnace has a cylindrical pot cathode and a hollow cylindrical anode
adjustably sup|Kirted within an arcing distance; also means for sealing the
chamber and other details.

.•i8.1.936—June 8. 1897. E.F.PRICE. Electric furnace.

The furnace has an inclined hearth electrode with an adjusting screw for
one end, a range of upper electrodes with a surrounding water-cooled hopper,
stirrers for loosening the charge below the hopper, and other structural details.

204

MANU^^ACTURING INDUSTRIES.

S8i.0tiO—Jim<: ??, 1S97. C. G. P. DE LAVAL. Method of melUng iron by means of

electricity.

The melting chamber has a transverse bridge with pole pieces at the bottom
of the pockets on each side of the bridge, and outlets for molten metal in the
sides above the bottoms of the pockets. The path for the current is through
the material over the bridge.

SS5.SS7—June S9, 1S97. C. KELLNER. Ekctrolytical diaphraffm.

It is composed of a slab of soap, which may have a reenforcing backing.
686.686— July SO. 1897. R. F. S. HEATH. Electric furnace.

It has a stationary upper electrode offset with respect to the axis of the fur-
nace, and a rotary pot electrode, together with structural details.

5S6.6S7—July 20. 1897. R. F. S. HEATH. Electric funtace.

Means are provided for rotating vertically and laterally adjustable carbons
around the axis of the furnace, the hearth constituting the other electrode.

,'iS6.8n—July SO, 1897. F. J. PATTEN. Electric furna^.

The furnace ha.s electrodes and passages for conveying material through the
arcing space between the electrodes, such as a lower carbon-slab electrode
and an upper tubular electrode: and means for rotating the arc about the axis
of the upper carbon, as, for example, a magnetizable ring surrounding the
arcing space with means for creating a rotating magnetic held in said ring.

SSe.Sti—July SO, 1897. F. J. PATTEN. Electricfumace.

A homogeneous mass of material of low and uniform conductivity is heated
by passing an electric current through the mass and establishing around it a
rotating magnetic field transverse to the current flow in the mass. The lines
of current now are deflected by the magnetic field and the rotation of the
deflected lines of flow widens the body of heated material.

587. 18S— July 27, 1897. G. DE CHALMOT. Electric furnace.

The hearth is given a horizontal reciprocatory movement to facilitate the
feeding of granular materi&l into the arc. The carbon holder, of special con-
struction, has separable lining plates to receive the wear of any contact arc and
protect the holder.

588,m7— August 17, 1897. G. DE CHALMOT. Electricfumace.

The furnace discharges its overflow product upon a sand-sprinkled revolving
cylinder. The overflow wall, formed of the furnace product, is renewed by
increasing tlie heat and partially fu.sing it down, then supplying additional
material and reducing the heat until suiiicient has congealed against the wall
to build it up.

588.866— August Si, 1897. J. W. KENEVEL. Means for manufacturing carbide.

The furnace employs rotatable electrodes arranged in a horizontal plane (like
a pair of rollers) with mechanism for rotating the same, and means for feeding
the prepared material between the electrodes.

590,sse— September S8, 1897. J. D. DARLING. Porous diaphragm for electrolytic

apparatus.

It consists of a support having a granular filling of a vitrified oxide or oxid es
substantially resistant to combination or fluxing by a fused hydroxide under the
conditions of electrolysis. Magnesia or other earthy oxides, as those of calcium
or barium, may be fused in an electric furnace, crushed, and granulated to pass
a twenty-mesh sieve.

59S. 803— November S, 1897. N. MAKCHAL. Electric diaphragm.

It consists of a plate cut from limestone, or is formed of equivalent integral
natural alkaline-earth carbonate, as of a paste of pulverized limestone and
burned magnesia, compressed.

595,713— December SI, 1897. J. E. HEWES. Electric furnace.

The furnace has an upper suspended electrode, a regulator for the same, and
means for imparting thereto a longitudinally reciprocating motion whereby the
furnace becomes self-stoking and the agitation prevents crystallization of the
carbide.

597, as— January 18, 1898. T. L. WILLSON. Electric fwriace.

A feed flue delivers material against the side of an upright movable carbon
pencil. A removable crucible hearth having an outer flange, has a circuit-
connecting clamp of special form engaging with said flange.

597 ,880— January 25, 1898. W. S. HORRY. Electric furnace.

A bottomless hopper has inclined electrodes supported on the walls of the
hopper, and a rotatable receptacle (a spool-like structure) arranged below said
hopper with plates removably applied to the periphery of the receptacle (spool)
and forming the outer wall of the hearth.

597 ,91,5— January 25, 1898. C. S. BRADLEY. Electricfumace.

The furnace is carried by a wheel turning on a horizontal axis, giving a con-
tinuous downward movement of the charge relative to the electrode, by a move- .
ment of rotation. Removable rim sections form the rei'eptaele for the charge,
which is continuously fed in on one side of the periphery, and the product
removed on the other.

598,318— February 1, 1898. J. E. HEWES. Electric furnace.

The material is laterally fed from a supply chamber into the field of the
electrodes by a reciprocating rammer, the latter being controlled by fluctu-
ations in the current.

601,i67~March S9, 1898. C. L. WILSON, C. MCMA, J. W. UNGER, H. SCHNEC-
KLOTH, A. P. BROSIUS, andJ.C. KUCHEL. Ekdric furnace for manufac-
turing calcium carbid.

The furnace has a ba.sc electrode and an upper vertically movable electrode
liaving a number of longitudinal flues extending therethrough with a like
ai>ertured blo<:k of insulating material suix.'rpo.sed. The charge, in the form of
sticks of compressed lime and carbon, is fed into tile flues of the upper elec-
trode, the sticks resting on the base electrode.

60S,815— April 19, 1898. G.G.CLARK. Electric furnace.

Relates to details of construction, including a revoluble pot electrode and a
scraper for feeding the material inward toward the arc.

60S.05S— April se, 1898. H. ELDRIDGE, D. J. CLARK, and S. BLUM, Electrical
retteri.

Relates to .structural details of an apparatus for making hydrogen from wattr
by heat of an arc and electrolytic action.

B09,7i5— August S3, 1898. W. G. LUXTON. Diaphragm for electrolytic purposes.

It is made of a composition of cement, sand, and a porous material, such as
gypsiun, lime, coke, etc., mixed with water and allowed to set; the diaphragm

having pores through the substance of the porous material and interstices
between the cement and the other constituent particles due to the contraction
of the cement in drying or setting.

611.1U2—Sieptember 20. 1S9S. R. PIGNOTTE, F. LORI, g. REGNOLI, M. BESSO,
AND M. PANTALEONI Electric furnace.

It relates to the structural details of a furnace involving, with other details, a
carbon-bottom electrode having an opening closed with a lever-operated carbon
plug, a suspended electrode, feeding mechanism, and a gas-heated chamber for
preheating the material.
612.91,3— Octolier 25. 1898. L. BRESSON. Electric furnace.

A crucible having axial openings for electrodes and carrying a feed hopper
can be tilted to discharge its load. Inwardly projecting electrodes are coupled
by levers which permit of a parallel vertical movement of their extremities and
maintenance of the arc as the charge rises in the crucible.

616,906— January 3, 1899. J. A. DEUTHER. Electric furnace.

Relates to special details, including a fan to supply the material to the arc and
telescopic wall sections.

eiS,391—January 31, 1899. H. BOVY. Electric furnace.

The furnace has an inclined floor formed of a series of carbon block electrodes
with intermediate filling of carbon powder. These electrodes are made incan-
descent by the flow of the current through to upper electrodes and the charge.

6S1,908— March 28, 1899. H. H. DOW. Porous diaphragm for electrolytic cells and

method of producing same.

The diaphragm is composed of two layers; that on the cathode side composed
of a chemical substance that will consume halogens by chemical action, and
the laver on the anode side composed of a different chemical substance that will
not be" consumed by free halogen and containing a substance with which any
soluble alkali dififusing from the cathode side will readily combine chemically
(e. g., iron hydrate on the anode side and calcium and magnesium hydrates on
the cathode side). Two part diaphragmSj incellsfor the electrolytic production
of chlorine, are formed wholly by the action of electrolysis on the cell contents,
by electrolyzing a solution containing sodium, magnesium, and calcium chlo-
rides, and introducing into the neighborhood of the anode a soluble iron salt,
whereby the hydrates of iron, calcium, and magnesium are precipitated to form
in place a coherent porous diaphragm.

6S5,S5S-May 16, 1899. H. ELDRIDGE, D. J. CLARK, AND S. BLUM. Electric

furnace.

Relates to structural details, including a fume-collecting hood.
628,782— July 11. 1899. J. J. FAULKNER. Electric furnace.

It relates to structural details, including a normally stationary electrode and
a series of opposing electrodes with specific means for automatically adjusting
each of the latter, including spring-actuated plungers. A. tilting hearth is
mounted beneath the electrodes.

529,008— July 18, 1899. O. FRGLICH.
substances.

Apparatus for distilling metals or similar

An electric crucible furnace has a tubular electrode and a condensing
chamber carried by and above the same. The material surrounds the tubular
electrode and condensing chamber which receives the distilled metals, the
molten products being tapped oflt below.

6S0.S83— August 1, 1899. \V. BORCHERS. Method of and apparatus for utilizing

waste gases and heat from electric furnaces.

The furnace, or a series of electric furnaces, are incased in a steam generator,
each furnace having a dust filter for the gases generated.

650,966— August 15, 1899. L. K. BOHM. Carbid furnace.

It relates to details of the furnace pot or carbide tank, whicli has bottom
grooves in which fit ribs of a supporting plate, to facilitate the withdrawal of
the pot.

636,956— Xorember U, 1S99. F. G. CURTIS. Process of making battery cups.

Clay is mixed with a solution of water and hydnite of potassium and an
electric current passed through the mixture, reducing tlic clay from a granular
state to a powder paste by reason of the hydrogen being set free. It is then
molded into cupsaiid baked.

61,1,276— January 16, 1900. J. D. DARLING. Porous diaphragm for cells employ-
ing fused electrolytes.

It consists of a suitable support and a filling of Portland cement and a pow-
dered oxide substantially resistant to combination or fluxing by the fused elec-
trolyte, as ground-burned magnesite.

61,1,1,38— January 16, 1900. J. D. DARLING. Electrolytic apparatus.

In an electrolytic apparatus using a porous diaphragm with a metallic wall,
a small percentage of the current— say 5 per cent— is shunted through the
wall of the diapnragm, by connecting it with the positive pole, to prevent
destructive electrolytic action.

61,1,976— January 23, 1900. R. H. LAIRD. Doim-draft electrical furnace.

A water-jacketed furnace stack has a series of spirally arranged, downwardly
inclined electrodes.

6!,S,25l,—Fcbruary 13, 1900. A. J. PETERSSON. Electric furnace.

The electrodes are at the ends of a flat hearth and covered by the reduced
material so that the heat is developed by the resistance of tlie reduced material,
and the unreduced material is reduced solely by contact therewith. The
hearth chamber may be movable, and an upper chamber has flues within the
charge which receive and burn the generated gases.

6i7, 611,— April 17, 1900. M. RUTHENBURG. Electric furnace.

A quadrilateral bosh, open at top and bottom, laterally incloses the opposed
electrodes; and a crucible directly beneath the bosh has an overflow outlet at its
top.

651.916— June 19, 1900. J. ZIMMERMAN AND I. S. PRENNER. Fui-nace for pro-
ducing calcium carbid.

The charge, supported by a strip ( stiiT paper) that is projected coincident with
the feed of the material, is continuously fed into the horizontal arc of an electric
furnace. Compressing and feed mechanism is provided for the mixed lime and
carbon and feed for the traveling flexible support.

6rr3,61l—Junc 26. 1900. J. HARGREAVES. Qiuibined diaphragm and electrode.

A stratified diaphragm-electrode, dense as to one side and porous as to the other,
i< formed by covering wire cloth or perforated plate with a thin laver of clav or
equivalent muteriai adapted temporarily to perform a retentive function and

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTKIES.

200

ulttmHtcly to be (llwolvtwl or wiinIunI hwav. then applylnfcn rontliiK of Portland
cenicnl or like hurtl or (loiiKMiiiittTlAl to imt* farv, hik'I rtivtTlriK ihi> liitior with
ajib4<i(t(Mi i'lotli or iMiulvali^iit mift or (lorotia iiuitoriAl.

«J.;iM— .'"'V?',. 1900. H. LKLKi;X. KtrHrir/iirHnf

I'- - hillH of till' iittHchmnit of th(* vertlrnl uleotnnlo to i\* hariKor, the

el< ' (ornuMl of rori'M of i-arlHUi of liUh i><iiiductlvUy nurrt^iiiidiMl by

•jlK ; iirlHiii of lower coiiiliu'tlvlty.

MLier—JHln tl,, 1900. J. MACTEAR. Purnaee /or heaUng and Irtaling gateout

mljrtnrrt.

The appnrrttU!" linjt a rlmmlH>r with a n'movabh* cover and bottom, and ffaa
Inlei and outlet tint's, u catulytU' Niilwtniu'e eontaiiie^l In the chaiiilH'r. and ro-
fraetory tubes de|H'iidliiK fnim the eover with elcetrlcal ri'slotaiieeji within the
tube*.

gM,779—AiiiiH$l n, 1900. W. a. HORRV. (Ymtrol r^ Hertrle fumaet*.

An eleetrleally <'ontnillwl motor aetUMt<yi the nmvable member of the furnace*
AD the niovHble reeeptaele, and an eleetro-meehanleal device under the control
of the furnace circuit controls the motor to keep the ampereflconatant, a switch
bclnK provided for controlllnK the motor by liaud aud for cutting In and out
the said electro-mechanical devices.

«tl,7S0~Auffiul U, 1900. W, S. HORKY. ElectHc/umair.

Relati'B to mechanism for contnjlUnR the movable element In response to pre-
determined varlati<ma in the furnace circuit, and keeplUK the furnace current
approximately coiulant.

9SS,<KX^~AHffiitttl,UO0. R. DOOLITTLE. Maitu/nrmanu/aetuHngcarbld*.

A amelttng furi^e for the process of No. (156,599.
U«.9ao—Augiui t8. 1900. W. BORCHERS. FJedrie Jumace.

The furnace has an inclined water-jacketed column for the product below the
hearth, a supporting roller for the carbide core, and a chisel for breaking up the
carbiiU'.

«r,;5«— .'Jcp/fmicr It, 1900. W. S. HORRV. JClfrlric /urnaee.

A carbide furnace having a vertically movable bottom to support theprodnct
and <"haDfe. and means for clamping and temporarily lioldint? the column of
Unisbed product to allow for the removal of the IxHtom iM>rtlon thercfif and the
running up of the furnace bottom; thus permitting a continuous downward
feed and delivery.

»S7.911—Se]>leml>er IS, 1900. Q. D. BURTON. Apparatta for leparating mtlalt

from QTf^ bit rlectricUy.

The re<lucing chamber hasa cylindrical bodyof electro-conductive resistance
material resting on a Hat electrode which forms the bottom of the chamber and
from which it can be lifted to deliver the charge, the other electrode clamping
the chamber under a projecting flange.

iM.SlS— September IS. 1900. A. H. COWLES. Etfctric furnace.

The electric furnace chamber Is flanked by two fuel chambers and means Is
provided for causing a reversing flow of gas through hot-blast stoves, the fuel
chambers, and the electric furnace.

GROUP XI.— DYESTUFFS AND EXTRACTS.
NATURAL, INORGANIC.

K}.»U— March SI, J.S9S. G. D. BURTON. AH of and aitparatmforelatro^yetng.

Sec Group X. Electro-chemtatry.

ti'.ati— March SI. 1896. G. D. BURTON. Art uf electric dyeing.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

NATURAL, ORGANIC.

9SI— September t!, IgSS. L. KENT. Improvement in the mode of eitraeling color

fromdyewood.

The ground wood is leached with steam, the liquor being drawn od Into a
boiler, the 8team therefrom returned Into the wood, and the coloring matter
dried.

I,.19t— September IS, ISU. F. PFANNER. Improvement in preparation qfdyeMuff

from tpent madder.

DyestulT or caraaene Is obtained from spent madder by the chemical action of
water, sulphuric acid, and an alkali.

eo.l^S— October n , 1S6S. O. H. REED. Improred preparation and intmufacture of
dyrf and colore.

Liquid dyes from vegetableor mineral coloring mattere, so mixed and prepared
with concentrated mordanta as to endure heat and cold and keep without
change, and to dye silk or wool at one application.

7i,9SS— February tS, 186S. A. PARAF. Improved proceu of teparating coloring

matter from madder and </ther ptanttt.

The coloring matter is liberated from the ligneous matter by the solution of
the cellulose, as by steeping the madder root in aqueous ammonia in the
presence of metallic copper, and the separation of the coloring matter from the
Insoluble compounds formed. The sugary matter Is first removed by successive
washings.

7e.l07—.Varchai, ISM. C. .SEIDEL. Improved vegetable coloring matter.

An indelible vegetable fluid consisting of the pigment of the cashew nut In a
menstrum solvent, as oil of turpentine.

Sl,991~.icplember S, ises. C. E. & M. E. FOX. Improved dyeMuff,

The extract of manzanlta, a red coloring matter, obtained by crushing and
boiling the roots.

SS.lSi— October to. I86S. J. LIGHTFOOT. {Reitme: S,ei7—September ts, lse».)

Improvement in printing certain textile fabrict and yamt.

The Indigo preparation is modified, by employing much leas tin. whether as
oxide or In the state of salt, in the proces.s of dissolving the Indigo; and. in
connection with such mrslifle<l prejiamllon. carbonate of |M>ta.sh. alkaline sili-
cates, or the chemical equivalents of them are uw*! in simultaneously fixing
Indigo blue or green, or both, in Juxtaposition with ordinary madder mordanta.

X,Oa— January 19, 1889. T. WEBER. Improved indigo dye.

A dyeing compound obtained by dissolving the hydrated oxide of tin and
common Indigo in caustic lye.

m,a»—Frhrwiru in, tm9. A. PAKAP. ImpimMI prtteim t^ etineUng Ih* enloring
matter of matuler.

The coloring matu-r ia ezlroctml from madiler runt bjr irMtmant with water
at a high temperature— IM° C— ami it Is then precipitated (ran the liquid.

9.1,900— Augutt 17, imo. A. PARAP. Improved malertal/or dyeing imd pHrUIng,

itbtninrii from maiUter.

Tinclorinv. the coloring matter of raailder mot. combined with tattxor raln-
oiis matleni, and free of peetlc a<ild or il« comixiunda. pr»<luc«<l aoconUos lo

No. w.Kiy.

gii.OS'.i—.'irplember tl, IM9, A. PARAF. Improved atrart nf madder for dfetnt

and printing.

A compound extract of madder (as tlncu>rlnc. No. es.lXW), with ' ...
boae and a volatile acid, such as the acelati' of |miUu>1i or acetate of
will deoompoae after printing and permit the alkaline ban to 'i
color.

97,1,97— December 7, 1M9. J. GEE. Improved proetu nf dyeing hlaet.

The fabric Is first run thn>ugh a mixture of extract of logwo<id and sulphate
of copper, and is then treatisi with the sizing mattirlal mixed with bichromate
of potash. For fabrics which have to be rAzvtl twice, the logwfiod aud sul-
phate of copper la mixed with sizing.

m.UtO—Frbruary 1. injo. O.W.TALBOT. tmprmementirtdyetfttrenlorino^tooL
A dye for coloring is proflucefl by combining extracts made from domestic
barks, woods, or i)lantj* with the foreign dytw. such as fustU-. madder, nutgalla,
logwood, etc.. pnsluclng a dye having less stringent (Miwer than the domestic
extracts alone and more permanence than the foreign dyes.

tOO.iSS—Xavember tt, WO. 8. BORDE.N. Improvement in the preparaUon qfgar-

ancine.

The coloring matter contained in garanclne la eliminated by the combined
or separate action of hard soap and chlorate of potash.

I tO,99U— January 17, 1871. A. PARAF. Improvement in material called "OU-

izerine," for dyeing and printing.

A new compound of the coloring matter of madderwith oilv matter, prepared
by treating garanclne with petroleum in which iMiraflliic has htn-n dissolved. A
catutic-.s4Kla solution is added to canst' tlie ctdonng matter to .separate from the
hydrocarbon solvent, and it is precipitated with an acid.

I10,99.'i — .January 17,1871. .V. PARAF. Imprin'ement in proceMta of extracting the
coloring matter of madder.

The coloring matter of madder la extracted by meana of a liquid hydro-
carbon.

113,918— April 18, 1871. A. PARAF. Improrement in prodncte from madder.

" Oil-izarlne," produced by treating garanclne with a hydrocarbon, such as
kerosene, and con-slstlng of a solution of the coloring matter of madder within
insoluble matter.

117 ,etO— August 1, 1871. F. ORAUPNER. Improvement in compound) for dyeing.
A combination of sulphate of copper, muriatic acid, and zinc. Added to a
dye of logwood and catechu, it dyes cotton black.

ltO,S9t— October SI, 1871. A. PARAF. Improvement in compotitiomqf madder for

dyeing.

Allzaride, a compound of the coloring matter of madder with a neutral alkali
and with ammonia.

lStt,69lt — January 7. 187S. G. MOLT. Improvement in indigoblue vats for coloring

wool and &>iton.

Indigo is dissolved in a composition formed by mixing a solution composed of
lime and soda ash, with a solution composed of muriate-of-tln crystals and soda
ash.

tSi,87e— January It,, 187S. L. G. FELLN ER. Improvement in the extract of yurra.
The yucca root is ground, steeped in water, and prened, and the solution
evaporated to dryness in molds, or melted In forms. Yuccatln cleanses sUna,
hair, and wool without destroying their softness.

lS9,0Se—May m, 187S. F. A. GATTY. Improvementin dyeing madder colort.

Cotton fabrics or yams are treated with neutral soap or emulalona of fatty
acids, or of oils or tats, either saponified or In their natural state, in lieu of
dunging.

lS9,l>7S—June S, 187S. F. O. GRAUPNER. Imprtnynment in dyeing fabriet.

bue

Oxyduloxvd of Iron, or anvil dust. Is combined with muriatic acid as a '

for dye. It Is combined with quercitron and logwood to form a black, slate, or
drab dye.

167,360— Auguet 31. 1875. 3. 8. 8ELIX)N AND R. PINKNEY'. Improvement in

dyeing and printing.

A dyeing or printing compound, consisting of the salts or compounds of
vanadium and animal dyeing or printing materials, such as cochineal.

169.377—Xovember t, 1875. W. H. SEAMAN. Improvement in proeene* for teMng

the purity of dye in black silt thread or fabriet.

A fixed quantity of the black silk thread or fabric Is treated in a chemical
liquid, of which oxalic acid is the base to ascertain the purity of the dye.

n5,Si»—Aiiril It. 1876. V,'. H. FI.SH. Imirrorrment in dyes.

An indigo-dye aqueous solution, composed of Indigo and zinc dust, together
with bisulphite of soda and caustic soda.

179,»S9—July 18, 1876. G. MOLT. Improvement in blue ilyrt.

It is composed of Indigo. 1 pound; caustic potash, 2 pounds: and water enough
to dissolve; heated to boiling point, with 'H pounds of outlere, 5 pounds of
liquid ammonia, and 2 pounds of sal ammoniac.

tlO,t90-November SS. 1878. E. * H. WELLS. A. E. RICHARDSON. AND W. J.

VAN PATTEN. Improvement in refining and packimj catechu.

Refined and concentrated catechu. Incased In a tight integument. Is made by
liauefylng with water and heat, introducing steam of a high temperature,
skimming, straining, and settling, and drawing off. while still liquid, into boxes,
preferably of paper.

tto.ess— October U, 1879. G. MOLT. Improvement in compound dye*.

An indigo dye, consisting of Indigo (XX),SOpoiuds: caustic soda, K poundK
tin crystals, 6 pounds: ana a simp made by tioiltng hops, madder, bran, and
molasses in water.

206

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

SU>.ie7— April 19, 1S81. G. SCHWAKZWALD. CompogUion for printing textile

fabricg.

It consists ol powdered almond shells, water, hydrochloric acid, coloring
matter, gelatine, oxidized metal powder, and bichromate of potassa.

m,i99— February iO, ISSS. H. W. VAUGHAN. Method of preparing dyestuffs

for application to fibrous materials.

The coloring matter, with or without a mordant, is ground with an oleagi-
nous constituent, as paraffine oil, and a pulverulent material is then incorpo-
rated therewith, to enable the mass to be worked in a finely powdered condition.

e76,mi—AprU 17, 188S. A. M. MEINCKE. Dyeing compound.

It consists of corn meal, highly concentrated cudbear, indigotine, acid
magenta, wool orange, and imported cudbear.

llSi,971— August li, 18SS. C. D. EKMAN. Method of obtaining coloring matters.
The raw vegetable material is boiled under pressure In a solution containing
sulphturous acid and a base or alkali, as soda.

Sm.USl,— October 14, 188!,. M. E. SAVIGNY. Process of making extracts for dye-
ing, etc.
Tannic woods or plants colored yellow are crushed and boiled with an oil or

fatty body saponified with an alkaline solution or with a soap solution, the

clear liquor being drawn ofl and evaporated.

506,iSS— October U, 1881,. M. E. SAVIGNY. Dyeing extract.

A soap extract from yellow-colored tannin woods or plants of a yellowish-
brown color and brittle texture: the product of process No. 306,434.

.'!08,70e— December 2, 1881,. M. E. SAVIGNY. Dyeing extract.

.\n acid extract produced from so-called "red-colored tannic woods and
plants" by disintegration and fermentation or oxidation with acids. A soap
extract is secured from the residue, or in conjunction with the fermentation, or
acid oxidation in one operation.

320,526— June ts, 1885. C. E. AVERY. Process of preparing logwood extract.

Logwood liquors, or extracts of the same, after their extraction from the wood
and before they are mingled with the necessary mordants, are oxidized by the
formation of hiematein from heematoxylin by the action of oxidants, such as
solution of bleaching powder, hypochlorous acid, chloric acid, chlorates or
nitrates of the alkalis, and alkaline earths.

SSS.iSl-March 23, 1886. A. MORAND. Art of clarifying extracts.

An alkaline solution of easeine is mingled with the acidulous tannin or like
extract in sufficient proportions to neutralize the free acid, and the precipitate
separated from the clarified e-xlract.

S56,se8— January 18, 1SS7. J. A. MATHIED. Manufacture of dyestuffs.

In the manufacture and purification of lac dyes, the material is treated with
turpentine or other solvent: the residuum treated with water and an alkali:
neutralized with an acid: the precipitation completed by the addition of acetate
of lead: and the precipitate treated with dilute sulphuric acid.

S86,9SS—July 31, 1888. F. E. SCHMUCKERT. Process of preparing a solution of

indigo for dyeing purposes.

A woad-bath for dyeing with Indigo is prepared by mixing guano salts with
water, adding zinc dust and indigo, or other bodies having an affinity for
oxygen, and then heating the mixture.

U17 .lj)2— December 17, 1889. W. W. MACFARLANE. Process nf preparing logwood
extracts.

Logwood extract Is treated with free chlorine, as a gas or in solution, to
increase its dyeing power.

U37, 638— September SO, 1890. A. AINSWORTH. Indigo solution.

A solution for reducing indigo for dyeing purposes is prepared by saturating
a solution of sodium bisulphite with metal fllmgs, separating the liquor, adding
sodium sulphide till the formation of precipitate ceases, filtering, and adding
caustic soda.

US, 026— December 16, 1890. F. C. WEISS. Dye.

The material is steeped In dilute anacardin extract, then pressed as hard as
possible, then treated to a hot bath of bichromate of potassium, then washed in
cold water, and then subjected to the ordinary indigo-dyeing process.

1,66,773— July 28, 1891. T.B.OSBORNE. Process of extracting %ein.

The nitrogenous remainder, after the manufacture of cornstarch from Indian
com, is treated with a solvent of zein, as alcohol partially diluted with water.
The solution is then evaporated to a sirupy consistency and poured into water.

U)l,972— February U, 1893. P. T. AUSTEN. Coloring matter from logwood and
mode of preparing same.

An alkaline nitrite is added to logwood extract in the presence of water,
ca\ising a reaction between the nitrite and the extract, and the product is
evaporated to dryness. It is characterized by being a friable solid, soluble In
cold and rapidly soluble in hot water.

1,92,568— February 21, isas. P.T.AUSTEN. Solid coloring matter from fxistic and

process of preparing same.

An alkaline nitrite is added to fustic extract in the presence of water, caus-
ing a reaction between the nitrite and the extract, and the product Is evapo-
rated to dryness. It is characterized by being a friable solid, soluble in hot or
cold water.

i»i,tS7— March es, 1S93. P. T. AUSTEN. Process of curing logwood chips.

The chips are moistened by sprinkling with an aqueous solution of nitrite of
soda, or potash, oj other suitable nitrite, well mixed and dried.

508,592- Sovember lU, 1893. P.T. AUSTEN. Obtaining friable coloring nMtter from
dyewood extracts.

A solid friable extract of logwood, produced by adding ammonium carbonate
to a slightly warmed logwood solution, say 7 per cent, allowing the reaction
to take place, and evaporating to dryness.

5!a,U>3—July 9, 1895. P. T. AUSTEN. Process of making coloring matter from

logwood.

A small proportion of borax, say 2 per cent, is dissolved in hot dilute logwood
extract, wnich is then cooled sufficiently to cause a precipitation of coloring
matter, which is then separated and dried.

509,703— November 28, 1893.
wood tree.

A. TAYLOR. Process of making extracts from the red-

The bark and wood of the redwood [Sequoia sempervirens) is comminuted
steeped In water and a caustic alkali or a carbonate of an alkali, the alkali
neutralized, and the solid matters obtained.

Art affixing dyes in fabrics.

558,718— April 21, 1896. H. L. BREVOORT.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

610,282— September 6, 1898. W. T. SCHEELE. Process of making coloring extracts.
Ketones having their boiling point between 80° and 227° C, as ethylmethyl,
diethyl, dipropyl, butyl, etc., are used as solvents for the extraction of the col-
oring principle from vegetable substances.

637 ,707— November 21, 1899. F. E. BUCHER. Process of treating logwood extracts.
Vapors of peroxide of nitrogen, preferably diluted with air, are passed through
logwood liquors or extracts containing haematoxylln, whereby the haematoxylin
is converted into hsematein.

6U),061— December 26, 1899. E. S. WILSON. Dye from cottonseed oil.

Cottonseed oil is heated with an alkaline solution, the solution separated from
the oil and treated to remove the impurities, and then the coloring matter is
precipitated from the solution by an acid.

ARTIFICIAL, INORGANIC.

Ul— October 28, 1837. H.STEPHENS. (S£issue3—April21, 18S8.\ Improved manu-
facture ofcoloinng matter.
See Group VI, Ferrocyauides.

2,060— ApriljSl,, 181,1. J. D. PRINCE. Improved mode of producing a black color
in the operation of dyeing.
Arsenious acid is used in combination with sulphate of Iron, as a mordant.

3,068 — May 2, 181,3. H. HIBBARD. Improved mode of preparing and using com-
pounds in dyeing, etc.

Mordants are used In conjunction with logwood liquor:
No. 1. Sulphate of iron, muriate of soda, and hydrate of lime, 1 pound each.
No. 2. Sulphate of iron, 1 pound: sulphate of copper, muriate of soda, 8 ounces

each.
No. 3. Sulphate of iron, sulphate of copper, 1 pound each: nitrate of potash,

muriate of ammonia, 8 ounces each.
No. 4. Sulphate of zinc, 2 pounds: muriate of soda, 4 ounces: and sulphate of

iron, sufficient to sadden.
No. 5. Sulphate of iron and of aluminium, 1 pouno each.
No. 6. Bar or yellow soap, 2 pounds: litharge, 1 pound: and water, 2 quarts,

boiled fifteen minutes.

9,890- July 26,1853. F. G. VETTERCKE. Compound to produce a liquor for color-
ing kali blue.

Four pounds of prussiate of potash in 3 gallons of boil ing water is prepared in a
receiver, and 6 pounds of manganese and 4 pounds of common salt in a retort,
to which is added a mixture of vitriol and water previously prepared, and the
retort connected with the receiver and allowed to stand for six hours, when
the retort is heated for six hours. The receiver is then disconnected and sealed
up ready for use, the contents of the same constituting the " kali compound."

72,817— December 31, 1867. J. H. DILKS. Improved process of making soluble blu-
ing for use in laundries and bleaching.
A mixture of ferrocyanide of potassium, 100 pounds, and sulphuric acid, 40

pounds, in water, is added to a solution of 10 pounds of iron in 40 pounds of

nitric acid, and boiled until a violent action takes place, then washed free from

acid, pressed, and dried.

73,756— Jatmary 28, 1868. J. REYNOLDS. Preparation of dyes.

Yellow prussiate of potash, dissolved in hot water, is treated with chlorine
gas, but not more than will prevent precipitation.

87,270— February 23, 1869.
colors.

A. LEYKAUF. Improvement in the manufacture of

A violet color is produced by heating a compound of manganese with phos-
phoric acid and ammonia: the addition of iron gives a light blue color.

88,291— March 30. 1869. E. HARRSCH. Improvement in the manufacture of colors
and pigments.

Colors or dyes are extracted from franklinlte ores— their residues or ores con-
taining oxide of zinc,mangan&se and iron— by treating with dilute sulphuric
acid and then precipitating with various reagents.

88,793— April IS, 1869. J. LOKY. Improved hair dye.

A compound of nitrate ol silver, ammonia liquor, and lac-sulphur in distilled
water.

95,01,0— September 21, 1869. A. PARAF. Improved process of printing colors on
textile materials.

The textile material is printed with the coloring material, then a compound
of an alkali and volatile acid is applied— as acetate of lime, potash, or soda—
and it is then steamed to liberate the alkali.

110,277— December 20, WO. A. PARAF. Improvement in the manufacture of colors

and their application to fabrics.

Colors are applied to fibrous and textile articles by means of coloring matter
and a coloring liberating salt of a class possessing certain characteristics, viz.:
They are mineral salts: do not contain lime; alkaline or neutral, not acid; do
not produce a chemical compound with the coloring matter; the acid of the salt
makes an insoluble compound with the base of the mordant; and thev liberate
the coloring matter from the other vegetable matter.

192,m—June26, 1877. H. D. DUPEE. Improvement in mordanting textUe fabrics.
Coloring matters upon textile fabrics are mordanted by means of gelatine
combined with chromic acid, and subjected to the action of steam.

202,822- AprUSS, 1878. R. HOFFMAN. Improvement in manufacture of ultra-
marine colors.

The blue or (so-called) white ultramarine, or mixtures of the same, while
heated to 120° to 200° C, is exposed to the action of the vapors of acids derived
from the halogen group of elements— as hydrochloric acid— and the soluble
salts afterwards washed out. Blue is first converted into violet, and by contin-
uauon of the treatment Into red ultramarine.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

207

tOf.otS—AuffUtt IS, WS. J. ZELTNER. Improremfnl In mamtfarlHrt o/ red uUm-

marine.

Kf<l ullramnrlnc Ik pnxlneed by the kcttOD of nttrio acid upon violet ultra-
mnrlDi' or ullramariiiu hydrate.

tOT.S.IK—Sffili-mber to, WS. J. ZELTNER. Improvement In manufarlvre i{f xiokt

uitntmarttir.

Vliilct iiliniiniirinc, or iiltramBrine hydrate. 1> produced by tho reaction upon
blue or inx'en ullrHmnrinv, or mixture thereof, of an oxidlilng reagent, aa
chlorine, nml water.

fli,IS»—.Vareh II, 1879. L. ORAF. Imjmtvtmenl la Ihe manii/niiurr nj jyrumlun

Nne.

A solution of leather serapa In cauatlc alkali l» evaporatc<l to dryneas, mixed
with Iron nilUKx. the mixture fu«e<I, the fuaed mam woahed, and the lye treated
with HC'Ul and penulphate of Iron.

tiO.U7— April 19, IS»I. a. SCHWARZWALD. VompHnUion Jor printing tritilr

fabriet.

A eompoditlon for Impartlnit a brlRht fllk or aatln like appearance to cotton
giMxIs. impcr. lie. consi.'.IInK of [niwrtered almond sheIN, water, hydnwhloric
■elil. colorlnK niulier. gelatine, oxldlicd metal powder, and bichromate of
pot«i«a in Kpei'illol proportions.

tif,OW— Jf<i|/ n. LvsJ. n. W. VAl'GHAN. Dyeing fl>rou» maUrial.

A dvestulT and n mordant In conjunction are mechanically Incorporated with
the tUiroUJf material during the proee:«()f nmuufjiclure. by tne ai<l of infusorial
earth, or other vehicle for the «ame. and an t>lcaginou.H con.'^tituent, and the
dvesimIT anil monlani are then chemically comliiueil by heating or steaming
the innierial: or an infusorial earth charged with a mordant Is no combined
with the material, and it is subsequently immersed in a dye bath to combine
cbemleally with the mordant uud make a fast dye.

ARTIFICIAL, ORGANIC.

$1.966— JiUu SO, 1861. G. E. C. DELAIRE. /mproecmcnf in aniline colors.

Blue and violet of aniline are produced by the reaction of aniline red upon
pure aniline at a suitable temperature. A mixture of aniline red and pure
aniline is boiled for several hours at 16.'>° C. The violet coloring matter is
mixeil with water and hydrochloric acid and boiled, yielding the vittlet residue.
This Is successively boiled with hydrochloric acid and washed in boiling water,
pro<lnclng a blue precipitate.

S8.6S9—May 19. 1865. J. UOHTFOOT. (Reiteue: l,,7i6; Ua—Feltruary 8. 1872.)
Improvement in dyeing and printing textile fabrics and yarnti with aniline black.
The use of a salt or salts of aniline is claimed for producing or developing a
black in textile fabrics. To prepare the solution 4 ounces of chlorate of potash
Is dissttlve<l in a gallon of water: H ounces of aniline combined with 8 ounces
of hydrochloric add at 3'i° Twaddell is added: then 1 pint of acetic acid and
8 ounces of perchloride of copper at 88° Twaddell; and finally 4 oiuicea of sal
ammoniac.

is 066— June 7, 188L A. W. HOFMANN. Improvement in preparing coloring

matter»/or dyeing and printing.

Coloring substances, of a violet-blue, violet, or re<l-violet tint, are produced
by the action of the Iodides and bromides of alcohol radicals on rosaniline,
heated to 100° C. in a closed vessel under pressure. There may be taken 1 part
of rosaniline, 2 porta of iodide of etliyl, and 2 parts of strong methylated spirit
or alcohol.

i9.95»—SepUmber It. 1S6S. A. 8. L. LEONHAKDT. Improved method qf preparing

aniline colors/or dyeing and printing.

The blue and violet colors of commerce obtained from magenta, and insoluble
In water, are rendered in a fine state of subdivision by disiiolving them in alco-
hol or aniline or sulphuric acid and allowing the solutions, under brisk and
constant agitation, to drop into cold water. or into cold water containing in
solution neutral salts. cau.stic. or carbonated alkalies: or. when aniline is used,
into cold water containing hydrochloric acid; or, when sulphuric acid is used,
into cold water containing alkali in amount equivalent to the acid. The solvent
is recovered.

eo.SSS— October 10, 1865. C. CLEMM. Improvement in Die manttfacture qf aniline

red.

.\niline red is produoeil by the reaction of .salts of aniline and its homologues
with the arscniates of the alkalis, ns by fusing at '210° ('. a mixture of nrseuiate
of soda and the sulphate of aniline, equal parts; the latter prepared by mixing
sulphuric acid of 66° BaumC and water, e<iual (tarts, and stirring in twoand one-
half parts of aniline. The sulphate of soda of the drv ma.ss is washed out and
the residue dissolved in muriatic acid, neutralized and recrystalllzcd.

fl.l/)!,— December t, 1865. J. HOLLIDAY. Improvement in the manufacture (if

coloring matter.

Cotton-violet dye of commerce, 1 part, is treated with 6 parts of a very weak
alkali and the precipitate washed and dried. The color is p\irifled by dissolving
1 part in » parts or more of methyl-alcohol and adding one-half part of acid.
This may be repeated several times, rendering the color each time bluer and
clearer.

*».?4I— JfarcA IS. 1868. P. CHEVALIER. Improvement in the manitfcuiure o/

cnloring mattcrt/rom aniline.

Coloring matters, red and violet, are produced by transforming commercial
aniline into a salt, as aneniale; adding a nitrite: as nitrite of pota.sh, and heat-
ing the mixture to the temperature at which the aniline is raised to the tmiling
f)oint— which should not be exceeded— until it turns bhie In the presence of an
acid. The mixture at the boiling point is treated with alkalinized water, which
dissolves the red and leaves the violet insoluble. The red is precipitated by a
neutral salt, as sodiiun sulphate.

5!,.957—\ltty n, 1366. O. H. REED. Improvement In the manufacture qfdyes and

rolttrt.

Coloring matters and their mordants, one having an affinity for woolen and
one ft)r silk, and neither neutralizing the other, in quantities each suited to the
Quantity of the other, are boiled together in water with frequent stirring, and
alaBolve<l ami concentrated until the liquid has absorbed all It will take up,
when the proper quantity of glycerine and alcohol or wood naphtha is added
to prevent change.

76.0S1— March «, 1868. E. ZINSSMANX. Improved compound of anUine eolort.

A soluble compound la produced by treating an aniline color (insoluble in
water) with glue or equivalent material dissolved in acetic acid, glycerine, or
like material.

79.9U-July 11, lau. B. BLOCH. (Krlmte: S.103-Heplrmber I, im».) Improved

iinitine ffye.

A grav dye. prepared by mixing and tK.llIng anillii. -nlc acid In

liquid form and afxait 711° strength The mixture I' , iKilllng wllh

muriatic add. filtering, washing, drying, and then dl»- « ,,, alcohol with

20 per cent of sulphuric acid. IsHling, and filtering.

M.ltU—.Siplrmlirr 15. L-HIM. J, LAMHKRT, Ja. Improved nnUlne dye.

Saffranine red Is pnxlured by dissolving 1 |>art of vlolet-harmallne paste in
2 parts of acetic ado. of H° Baum<'', and 100 (mrts of water, heating and adding 1
part of t>inoxide of lead, boiling, and Hiially ueutralixing with plenty of caustic
sfKhi. The salfranlnered solution Is filtered and bullea with a little carbonate
of lime to remove any remaining violet.

»6,iM—Urlober 5. 18*9. C. GRAKBR AND C. LIRBERMANN. (KelUHe. UtO,
i.9tl — April U, IgTl. ) Imprr/vett prttceu of preparing alizarine.
BIbromanthraklnon, or bichloranthraklnim. Is first prciiarcd by the action of
bromine or chlorine on antlirakinon (oxaiithrHcetio. ann then converted Into
alizarine by heating in a .solution r>f caustic [Mitashor sisla to IW^ to 200° C. until
the mass has a deep blue color: then dissolving In water and filtering the violet
solution, from which the alizarine is precipitated by an organic or inorganic
acid.

ye.lU— October te, 1869. 0. LAIJTH. Improved eoUnine material /or dyeing and
printing.

Vegetable fiben are mordanted In a concentrated solution of a salt of man-
ganeses and after desiccation the fiber is passed through an alkaline solution to
eliminate the oxide of manganese. The oxide is transformed into a sesnul or
binoxidc, by exposure to the atmosphere, or by passing it through chloride of
lime. The libers are washed and placed in an acid solution of aniline and in-
stantaneously dyed black. Animal fibera are mordanted with manganatesand
permanganates.

»1.SV7— December 7, 1869. J. BRONNER AND H. OIJTZKOW. {Reitnu: i.St8—
September 19. 1871.) Imprrrranntt in preimring roliiring mattert Jntm anthracene.
The product obtained from anthracene by oxidation ioxanthracene) Is

nitrated. The product thus obtained is treated with a concentrated sr^lution of

caustic alkali up to 220° C, dissolved in water, and the coloring matter— ollio-

rine— precipitated by an acid.

111.651,— yebruary 7, 2S7J. J. LIGHTFOOT. Improvement in dyeing and printing

texiilf fabrics.

A black dye or color la produced by printing or staining with a salt of aniline
mixed with certain oxidizing agents. Crystallized carbonate of soda or sesciul
carbonate of ammonia is added to an aqueous solution of tartaric acid, and a
solution of chlorate of potash is mixed therewith, pnxlucing chlorate of .soda or
ammonia and cream of tariar (abv-product). For printing, the filtrate is thick-
ened with gum or starch, heated, and aniline and hydriK-hloric acid mixed
therewith. Ju.st before using the color a suitable copper salt, as sulphate of
copper or sulphide of copper paste. Is added. For dyeing, in lieu of the thick-
ening, acetic acid and sugar is added and leas of the copper salt.

07.06— June i. 187t. W. H. PERKIN. Improvement in the manufacture qf color-
ing matters from anthracene.

Chlorinated or brominated anthracene, 1 part. Is treated with sulphuric acid,
5 parts, and the product oxidized by means of any suitable oxidizing agent, as
manganese blnoxide. The solution is further treated with caustic alKatl.

lSi.076— December 17, 187t. F. LAMY, JB. Improvement in dyeing fabrics with

naphthglamine colors.

Naphthylamlne Is dissolved in a mixture of nitric or hydrochloric acid and
acetic acid, and treated with chloric and chromic acid. After printing the
color is fixed by passing Into a bath of bichromate of potash with acid, and a
puce-garnet shade is developed by passing into chlorine or into ammonia: a
violet shade is obtained by passing Into a bath of nitrate of Iron and agua regia,
ln.stcad of ammonia or chlorine; and a reddish violet bysubstituting chloritte of
iron and a salt of copper.

15S.5S6—JulytS. JS74. H. CARO, C. GRAEBE, AND C. LIEBERMANN. Improve-
ment in Ihe preparation of coloring matters from anthracene.
Sulphuric add is substituted for bromine or chlorine in the process of No. 9A.465.

15U.l.'>S—Auguii 18. 1871,. C. RUMPFF, F. BAYER, F. WESKOTT. AND A. SII^
LER. Improvement in treating anthracene and the manufacture of dyes.
Anthracene, 1 part, is mixed with from 1 to ft parts of powdered peroxide of

manganese and heated in a retort to 200° C, whereby anthrakinon is produced

by a dry and direct process.

18l.tSi— September li, 1876. R. SIMPSON, A. BROOKE, AND T. ROY'LE. Im-
provement in preparation of alizarine, etc.. made from anthracene.
Alizarine and other analogrtus coloring matter made from anthracene is pro-
duced in the form of a dry powder by mixing the coloring matter with a paste
of hydrate of lime and water, drying, and r>iw*nc thiougn a deve.

186.081— January 9. 1877. H. CARO. Improvement in obtaining coloring mattert

suitable for dyeing and printing.

Alizarine-orange la obtained by treating dry. powdered alizarine with nitrons
fumes or by dissolving it in a solvent, such as concentrated sulphuric acid, and
treating the solution with nitrous, hyponitrie, or nitric acids. A coloring
matter pos.sessing the properties of purpiirlne is produced by subsequently heat-
ing the alizarine-orange solution to aoout 150° C, until the evoiution'of gas

186,I,S&— January tS, 1877. L. LEIOH. /mprovemoif in preparing aniline dyer.

A block or cake composed of soap, gelatine, and an aniline dye, tbe whole
soluble In water.

188.061— March 6, 1877. F. Dk LALNDE. Improvement in process of obtaining

artificial purpurinefrom alizarine.

A mixture of alizarine. 10 parts, antimonic add, !> to 10 parts, and sulphuric
acid. B6° Baum*. 80 to 100 parts, Is heated to from 892° to 428° F., with c<instant
stirring, until with dilute caustic so<la it produces a currant-red color when
water is added, twenty to thirty times the volume of the moss, and it is t>oile<l.
cooled, and filtered.

188.117— March 6. 1877. J. WOLFF AND R. BETLEY. Improvement in processes

qf making dytsfrom naphthaline.

Dyes frtmi naphthaline and Its derivatives. In which one atom of hydrogen
therein is substituted by one molecule of benzole, its homologues or their deriv-
atives, are produced by submitting the some to an oxidizing process, and the
products to a second oxidizing procets, and tliully to the action of an alkali.

208

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

189,MS— April 10. 1S!7. J. WOLFF AND R. BETLEY. Imprmemait in production

of coloring maUeriifrom aniiine,

A dye. or series of dyes, of blue shades is produced from aniline, toluidine,
or mixtures of the same, either with or without xylidine, together with nitro-
benzole or nltro-toluol. or mixtures of the same, in conjunction with metallic
salts, a-s protochloride of tin. Coloring matters are produced from aniline in
conjtmction with nitro-benzole by the employment of hydrochloric acid or
other suitable hydrogen acids. If coloring matters are produced from arsenic
acid, or other metallic oxygen acids, such arsenic acid is employed in such pro-
portions as to saturate one-half to two-thirds of the aniline.

19S,US—July n, WT. W. J. S. GRAWITZ. Improvement in dyeing yams and

fabries in aniline-black.

The process consists in the slow concurrent progressive reaction on the fiber
of aniline salts and metiiUic oxidizing salts or acids without exposure to the
air, and with a subsequent peroxidation by means of chloric or chromic acid.
A complex base, containing both an aniline and a metal, and which redissolves
in acids, is obtained by precipitating certain metallic salts by means of aniline
oil; or, a bath is formed containing the elements of a double salt of aniline and
of a metal, as perchloride of iron and hydrochlorate of aniline: or, a bath is
formed containing the elements of an aniline salt combined with the metal.
All have the property of enabling the aniline to gradually oxidize with the
greatest facility, producing black or shades bordering on black.

SOS.lltO — April 50, 1878. h. GRAF. Improvement in dyestuffs or coloring jnaifer.

X brown dye or coloring matter prepared from leather scraps, as, for example,
by digesting same with caustic soda or potash in a closed boiler under pressure,
and precipitating the liquid leather with dilute acid.

iOUJSe—June 11, 1878. H. CARD. Improvement in the production of dyestuffs

from methyl-anUine.

"Methylene-blue:" produced from tertiary monamines, particularly from
dimethyl-aniline; by, first, producing nitroso-dimethyl-aniline, by treating a
cold solution of dimethyl-aniline in concentrated muriatic acid and water with
pure nitrite of soda; second, reduction to amido-dimethyl-aniline, with the aid
of hydrogen sulphide: third, treatment with an oxidizing agent, as perchloride
of iron. The blue coloring matter is separated by saturating with sodium
chloride, and adding an aqueous solution of zinc chloride. It is soluble in water
and forms insoluble blue compounds with metallic tannates.

2QU,797 — June 11, 1S7S. H. CARO. Improvement in methyl-aniline violet cotora.

Coloring matter produced by converting methyl violet (comprising methyl
purples, Paris violets, and Hoffman's violets) into its .sulpho-acid compound
(which is capable of being employed in the presence of acid or acid mordants),
by drying at 110° C, and treating at that temperature, little by little, with fuming
sulphuric acid under constant agitation, until a sample supersaturated with an
alkali gives a clear yellowish solution without a percipitate. The thick fluid
mass is dissolved in water and treated with milk of lime, filtered, and treated
with a solution of soda forming a salt of soda which is evaporated to dryness.
For commercial purposes, on account of deliquescence, the salt is transformed
into an acid sodium salt.

S0i.79S — June 11, 1878. H. CARO. Improvement in ethyl-romniline dyestuffs.

A dyestuff or coloring matter yielding purple or violet shades is produced by
the reaction of ethyl iodide on the sulpho-acid of rosanline or fuchsine; as by
heating a mixture of the soda-salt of the sulpho-acid of the fuchsine, water,
alcohol, soda lye, and ethyl iodide. The iodine is recovered aa subiodide of
copper.

20i,799—June 11. 1878. H. CARO. (Eeissue: 9,1U— April 6, 1880.) Dye stuff or

coloring matter.

Sulpho-acid of beta-oxyazo-naphthaline. a red coloring matter; obtained from
the reaction of the diazo compound of the sulpho-acid of naphthylamine and
beta-naphthol; is prepared by converting naphthylamine into its diazo com-
pound and causing equal molecules of the same and of naphthol or naphthylic
alcohol to react, in an alkaline solution. Beta-oxyazo-naphthaline, so obtained,
is then converted into its suipho-acids, as by heating with fuming sulphuric
acid, the excess of sulphuric acid being removed.

110,051, — November 19, 1878. F. Z. R0US8IN. Improvement in coloring matters
fMaintd by the reaction of the diazoic derivative of sulphanitic acid upon the
amines, the amides, and the phenols.
Coloring matters, orange, red, and yellow: produced by the reaction of the

diazo derivatives of sulphanilic acid upon the amides, amines, and phenols.

The azo derivative of sulphanilic acid is produced by adding dilute sulphuric

acid to a mixture of an alkaline sulphanilate and an alkaline nitrite, while

briskly agitating.

2M,iSS—J\'ovemberS6, 1878. H. BAUM. {Reissue: 9,988; 9,987— December n, 1831.)
Coloring matter or dye stuff.

Red-scarlet coloring matter (9.986) is produced by the action of the sodium
salt of bisulpho-beta-naphtholic acid, insoluble in alcohol, on the diazo deriva-
tive of xylidine.

Yellowish-red scarlet coloring matter (9.987) is produced by the action of the
sodium salt of bisulpho-beta-naphtholic acid, soluble in alcohol, on the diazo
derivative of xylidine.

The two isomeric bisulpho-beta-naphtholic acids are produced by mixing
beta-naphthol, 1 part, witli sulphuric acid of 1.848 s.g., 3 parts, and heating for
twelve nours at 100° to 110° C. and the acids separated by digesting the soda
salts thereof with alcohol.

SU, ISO— January 7, 1879. A. F. POIRRIER, A. ROSENSTIEHL, AND Z. ROUSSIN.

Improvement in colors from, crude naphthylamine.

A series of coloring matters, as an intense red (adapted to replace " orseille " ),
is produced by the action of the sulpho-eonjugated diazo derivatives of phtala-
mine upon the phenols and amines. By the action of heat, particularly with
the concurrence of water and an alkali or an alkaline salt, new and different
coloring matters are obtained.

111,525— January il, 1879. Z. ROUSSIN AND A. F. POIRRIER. Improvement in
colors derived ftom nitraniline.

New coloring matters are produced by the reaction of the diazo derivatives of
nitraniline upon the amines, amides, and phenols.

tll,B7 1— January 28, 1879. Z. ROUSSIN AND A. F. POIRRIER. Imprmement in

colors derived from toluidine and xylidine.

New coloring matters are produced by the reaction of the diazo derivatives of
the toluidines and xylidines upon the amines, the amides, and the phenols.

113.565— ifarch 15, 1S79. J. P. GRIESS. Improvement in coloring matters.

" Anisol-crimson;" produced by the action of the diazo-anisol upon an alka-
line solution of disulpho-acid of beta-naphthol. A hydrochlorate of anisidine

is prepared from anisidine — the amido compound of anisol— by treatment with

nitrous acid combined with an alkaline solution of disulpho-acid of betji-naph-

thol.

lis.seu— March 35, 1879. J. P. GRIESS. Improvement in coloring matters.

A red coloring matter produced by the action of the diazo-anisol upon an
alkaline solution of the monosulpho-acid of beta-naphthol (using the mono in
lieu of the disulpho-acid of No. 213,563).

121,11!,— October 28, 1879. J. H. STEBBINS, Jr. Improvement in colors from diaso-

benzole nitrate and pyrogaUol.

"fyrogallidine:" produced by the reaction of diazo-benzole nitrate on an
alkaline solution of pyrogaUol. Silk is dyed a yellow brown, and wool, with a
tannic-acid mordant, the same.

121,115— Octobei- 18. 1879. J. H. STEBBINS, Jr. Improvement in colors from

picric acid.

' ' Picridine: ' ' produced by the reaction of an aqueous solution of diazo-benzole
nitrate and picric acid dis.solved in alcohol. Silk is dyed an orange yellow
without mordants; wool a light yellow when mordanted with tannic acid.

121,116— October 28, 1879. J. H. STEBBINS, Je. Improvement in coloring matters
obtained from diamido-neiphthaline and diazo-naphihaline nitrate.
" Naphthaline-brown; " produced by the reaction of diamido-naphthaline on

diazo-naphthaline nitrate. Silk unmordanted is dyed a brown; mordanted ivith

acetic acid a deeper brown; with iron chloride an almost black color; and with

tin cUoride a fine purple.

121,117 — October 18, 1879. J. H. STEBBINS, Jr. Improvement in coloring matters

(Stained from cresol.

" Cresolidine; " produced by the reaction of an aqueous solution of diazo-
benzole nitrate on an alkaline solution of cresol. Wool is dyed yellow, with or
without mordants: silk, mordanted with muriate of tin, dyes orange.

211,118— October 28. 1879. J. H. STEBBINS, Jr. Improvement in coloring matters

(Stained from salicylic acid,

" Salicylidine; " produced by the reaction of an aqueous solution of diazo-
benzole nitrate on salicylic acid dissolved in alcohol. Silk, unmordanted, is
dyed an orange red; mordanted with muriate of tin, it is dyed red; wool is
dyed a salmon color with a tannic-acid mordant.

121,119— October 28, 1879. J. H. STEBBINS, Jr. Improvement in coloring matters

obtained from naphthylamine and diazo-benzole nitrate.

"Naphthylamidine:" produced by the reaction of an alcoholic solution of
naphthylamine and an aqueous solution of diazo-benzole nitrate, with the
addition of strong hydrochloric acid and gentle heat. In glacial acetic acid it
dyes silk a dark brown, cotton a crimson, and wool a fine red.

121,120— October 18, 1879. J. H. STEBBINS, Jr. Improvement in cc^ming matters

derived from toluol.

"Toluol-orange;" produced by the action of an aqueous 1-per-cent solution
of diazo-benzole nitrate on a 10-per-cent solution of toluylendiamine in strong
alcohol. It dyes animal fiber with or without mordants, and for dyeing cotton
it forms insoluble compounds with some metallic salts, as oleate of lead or
aluminate of zinc.

12i,257—Decemher 1, 1879. O. G. DOEBNER. Improvement in green coloring

matters.

"Malachite-green;" produced by the reaction of benzo-trichloride, 2 parts,
on dimethyl-aniline, 3 parts, in the presence of metallic chlorides, such as zinc
chloride, I5 parts.

22l,,927— February 21,, 1880. F. KOHLER, Djestiiff or coloring matter .

A bluish-red coloring matter produced by the action of the sulpho-acid of
diazo-azo benzole upon an alkaline solution of a bisulpho-acid of beta-naphthol.

22l,,92S— February lU, 1880. F. kOhLER. Dyestuff or coloring matter.

A red coloring matter produced by the action of the sulpho-acid of diazo-azo
benzole upon an alkaline solution of beta-naphthol.

215,108— March 2, 1880. H. CARO. Coloring matter obtained from alphOrnapUhol.
The sulpho-acid of dinitro-alpha-naphthol; produced by the action of nitric
acid upon certain alpha-naphthol-sulpho acids. Alpha-naphthol is dissolved in
and heated with sulphuric acid until the aono-sulpho-acids produced in the
first stage of the process are changed into those suipho-acids which mav be acted
upon by nitric acid without lasing their sulpho groups entirely, and then treated
with nitric acid. The yellow coloring matter dyes and prints with other dye-
stuffs of similar acid properties.

225,908— March 23, ISSO. Z. ROUSSIN. Artificial coloring matter.

Coloring matters, varying from yellow to red produced bv causing the diazo
derivative of naphthionic acid to react upon the amines, the amides, and the
phenols, They consist of the suipho-acids or sulnho-salts of oxv-diazo pairs of
aromatic radicals, one being the naphthyl derived from naphthionic acid, and
the other from the amine, amide, or phenol employed.

227,1,70— May 11, 1880. A. BAEYER. Manufacture of artificial indigo.

"Artificial indigo: " produced by the action of an alkali and a deoxidizing
agent, as glucose, upon ortho-nitro-phenyl-propiolic acid, its homologues and
substituted compounds.

228,300— June 1, 1880. A. BAEYER. Manufacture of artificial indigo-blue.

It is developed in or upon fiber by impregnating yarn, fiber, or cloth with a
mixture of ortho-nitro-phenyl-propiolic acid, an alkali, and a deoxidizing agent,
as glucose, and then submitting the material to heat.

233,1,68— Oct. 19. 1880. A. BAEYER. Mamifaclure of artifleial indigo.

The dibrominated compound of ortho-nitro-cinnamic acid: produced by the
action of bromine on ortho-nitro-cinnamic acid, at an ordinary or an elevated
temperature. It is used in the manufacture of artificial indigo.

233,1,59— Oct. 19,1880. A. BAEYER, Process for producing artificial indigo.

prtho-nitro-phenyl-oxyacryllc acid: produced bv exposing ortho-nitro-cinna-
mic acid to the action of hypochlorous or hyprobromous acid, and then treating
the product with alcoholic potash. It is used in the manufacture of artificial
indigo.

233,ISO-October 19, 1880. A. BAEYER. Process for the production of artificial
indigo.

Ortho-nitro-phenyl-propiolic acid: produced by treating the dibrominated com-
pound of ortho-nitro-cinnamic acid with alcoholic potash and heat. It is used
for the manufacture of artificial indigo.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO OTIEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

209

ta.W'—Odnhfr 19. (AW. H. BAI'M. I:

rrtxlut't'<l by Mibji'ctinK thf «Iiuzo <
to till' nc'tlim ill .llmiliiliy-lxHii-napbtli'
Inwiliibic In nlcohul).

'■' mnttrr.

rivril from itmirlmaii-lwnHile
i-liiK the one that In practically

!fS.li>.i—lkivmhrr7,iam. A. BAEYER. ManuSacturt f^ artificial inillgo.

A ilvi.-tufi or icilorliiK mutter prn<lin'c<l by the kciIoii ot n roliiiliiK nr ilooxl-
tlliini; iiKiiit, Kiich iw fi-rrmiM Hulphiitc. upon iv new ilcrlvatlve of ortho iiltro-
phciiylproplollc ncld. ri«iiltliiK fnmi tn-atlntj the aulil uclil with milphurlc iicl<l
In the colli. It in in h KreHt purl MiliibU- In anillnv at ordinary temperature,
nnd itJNo In an aqueouft .solution of itulphurlc arid,

tSi.!.ss—DrcTmb(r li. ISSO. A. BAKYER. Haiiufdiiiirr tif diKttuff or coloHng

mtittrr.

A new product, of a dull-Wnc crystalline appearance: producwl by repeated
treatment of the artltlelal Indigo of No. 231S,IS3, with acold and aqueoiu aolutlou
ot Bulphuroii!) iicid, followed by a mineral acid.

tU).SVJ—Ai>ril IS. 1D8I. A, BAEYER AND H, CARO. .Vanu/aclure qf artiftrlal

indii/t}.

A ilviwtun, dlstlnKnlahed by the pre«(nce of free Milphiir, produced by the
deoxiilUliiK action of an alkaline xanlhale upon an alkaline compound of
ortho-nltr<>phenyl-proplollcoeld.

tU.S^t—Ajiril W.tDHI. A. BAEYER AND H. CARO. Dj/eing /abria with arti-

ficutl iuftiifo Uue.

Bluedve'i are ileveloped in or upon textile liber, etc, by impreitnatlng the
mme with a MiUiiion of u mixture of ortbo-tiilro-plicnyl -propiolfc ni'id and
alkali and a deoxidizing .sulphur compound lietonKiUK lo the clns.s of sulpho-
oarbonates. such a.« xantnales of soda, and then submitting the material to a
drying: or aiiring procen.
tiO,l«l~AprU 19, ISSl. A, BAEYER. Manufatiurt of artifletal indigo.

A blue dye.stu(T or coloring matter obtained from the artificial indigo of No.
'235,193, bv repeated treatineut ot the same withu cold and uijucous solution
o( Kulphuroos acid, and subsequent precipitation with sotlium chloride.

tW,S4/— Jf<i.v S. ISSl. A. BAEYER, 31anuf(tcturf «/ nrtifieial intiigo.

A blue dyestuff or coloring matter produced by exposing iRatine-chloridc to
the action of glacial acetic acid and zinc dust, or other reducing agents.

tU).9ia~Mny S. ISSl. A. BAEYER AND A. EMMERLING. ilanwjacture of arti-

firliU imtit;v.

A blue dyesiulT or coloring matter produced by the action ot a mixture of
phosphorus-trichloride and acetyl-cbloride with yellow phosphorus on Isatine.
at from 70° to >W C,

ti].73.i— .Vail 17. ISSl. Z. H. SKRAUP. Manufacture qf artificial chiaoUlte.

See Group XVIll, Fine Chemicals,
iU.707—June 7. tSSl. J. H. STEBBINS, JB, Azo color.

A dye-stuti or coloring matter pnxiuced by the reaction of monosulnho-acid of
beta-i'iuphthol on a mixtun' ot aiazo-beuzolcand dinzo-naphtlmliue nydrochlo-
rates. It dyes silk or wool in an acid bntli a light scarlet similar tt» cochineal.

tU,SSS—Junt li, IS8I. N, C, AKMAND AND J. E. BERTON. Dyeing fabrUf wUh

aniline colors.

Aniline colors are rendered soluble in benzine.s and essences, by combining
them with a solvent or Intennoiiary agent, such as a composition of oil or fat.
•n add (a< acetic acid), ether, and alkalis.
tU,7S7—July f«, ISSl. E. LABHARDT. Coloring matter from tetranitro-naphlhol.

" Hellochrysine," a sodium salt of tetranitro-naphthol: produced by the
energetic nitrillcatlon of monobromnaphthalinc: a yellow coloring matter,
prominent by its brilliancy and fastneiis, and easy application on silk and wool.

tW.ai—Auguet^.lSSl. J. SCHUNCKE. Azo color.

"Archil red:" produced by the action ot the diazo compound of amldoazo-
xylole upon an alkaline solution of beta-naphthol bisulpbo-acid. It dyes wool,
allk, and cotton with garnet shades similar to archil.

lU.eit—Auguit ti, ISSl. H. BAUM. Aw coloring matter.

A red coloring matter or dyestuff produced by the reaction of beta-naphthol
monosulphonate of sodium and the diazo compound of amidoazo-benzoie sul-

fhonate of sodium. It is freely soluble in water and In dilute mineral acids.
t dyes a fiery red on cotton mordanted with alum and in a continuous bath,

2U,Sn—Augmi 90, 1S81. C, A, MARTIU8, Mrthyl-blue color.

A blue coloring matter produced by the reduction of methyl-orange, III,
C|«H]<N3S0iNa, by the action of an excess of suiphohydrate of ammonia at
from 106° to 110° C„ followed by oxidation by the action of perchloride of Iron.
It dyes silk and wool without a mordant; vegetable Hber with a mordant,

iiH.lSS— October 11, ISSl. O, FISCHER, Process qf preparing leuco iMte qf aniline

tttue.

Process consists In dissolTing pare-nitrobenzaldehyde In alcohol and muriatic
acid, adding dnc powder and distilling off the alcohol, mixing the product with
diphenylamlne and metbyldiphcnylamine and zinc chloride, and beating to
120° to 140° C, and Hnally se|>aratlng the Icuco base,

tiS.lK— October 11, ISSl. O.FISCHER. Process qf preparing coloring matter.

The leuc^oba-se of rosaniline Is produced by substituting chlorhydrate of
aniline (ora mixture of aniline with toluidine) lor diphenylamlne and methyl-
diphenylamine In the process of No. 248,153.

tiS,ti»— October 11, ISSl. O.N.WITT. Coloring matter.

A violet dye. a substitute for madder violet, produced by the action of
niirosodimethylanillne on meta-pbenylendiamine. It gives dark-violet abodes
on cotton, wool, and silk,

U9,13»—\(»Tmber 1, ISSl. O.N.WITT, Production of coloring matter.

A dark-red dye formed by the action of nitroso-dimetbylaniline on meta-
toluylenediomine.

U9J)t&—Sovember tt. ISSl. 1. H. H. O. oOrKE. Coloring matter.

A bluish scarlet dyestuff or coloring matter produced by the action of the
disuipho-lK'ta-naiihtholic so<llum salt insoluble in alcohol on the diazo deriva-
tive of i>ura-anii(li>-cinnamic acid methylic ether.

iSO,OS&—Xomnbertt, ISSl. A. BAEYER. Manufacture of artijieial indigo.

Indogcnic acid is produced by first producing indogenic ether by treating an
ether compound of ortho-nitro-pbeuylpropioiic acid with a reducing agent, such
No. 210 14

aii'l
lii.l.
aeld. II IS

I'l a cold
licrlnt/)
muriatic

convened inio ariincim iim

tm.tm—ti'orembertt, tSHt. A. BAEYKI: n oj arttfiriat Indigo.

"Intlogen** Is i>nMlnced by the action «.if hcul ujKin Indfiirenic acid fJJo.

2.'i0,03.'i). either in » dry ntnte or In a solvent. II Is rapidly converted Into artl-
llclal IndiKU by the acciw of air.

tSO,OSi*—,\i>rrmhrrtt, ISSl. H. BAI'.M. .Vanufnrlurr of rrlm/mn rnlorinfi mailer.

A crimson coloring matter produced by the action of dtsulpho-lieta-naphthollc
sodium salt Inaolublc In alcohol, on the dlozo dcrlTatlve of amldo-pon-cmol-
racthyllc ether.

tSO.tni—XorembertO, ISSl. H. CARO. Sulphonaled compound q/romnllinr.

Trisulpho ttcid of rosaniline, a re<l i-oloriiig matter: 'produced by the action
of anhydrous sulphuric acid on fuehslne, at from 120° to 170° C, with constant
agitation. It dyes wool In a boiling dye bath with mineral acids or add
mordants.

t.w.!!,7—KoremtieriO, ISSl. J. HOLLIDAY. Manujarturr of rosaniline colors.

The suipho-coniugated compound ot rosaniline, capable of being u«e<l with
acids or acid mordants. Is produced by the action ot fuming sulphuric odd on
nnianiline, or its sails, preferably on anhydrous chloride ot rosanillDe

S.'il.lBt— December m, tssi. H. BAUM, Dyestuff or robirlng mnller.

A yellow-orange coloring matter produced by the reaction of the disulpho-
betaiiuphtboUc sodium salt, soluble In alcohol, upon the diazo derivative of
aniline,

UI.IB*— December to, ISSl. H. BACM. Dyestuff or coloring matter.

A deep red scarlet dyi«tuff or coloring matter produced by the reaction of
the disulpho-beta-naphtholic sodium salt, insoluble in alcohol, on the dlozo
compound derived from theamido-ethylxylol.

sr:l,16!,—Drcimhrrto. ISSl. H. BAUM. Dyestuff or coloring matter.

.\ claret-red dyestuff or coloring matter. pnKluceti by the reaction of a mix-
ture of the two isomeric dlsulpho-bcta-naphthoIic sodium salts upon the dlozo
derivative of naphthylamlne.

ir,l,U>9— December in, ISSl. A. BAEYER, Manufacture qf artifieiaHndigo.

Ortho-nitro-acetcnyl benzene, used in the manufacture of an artificial indigo,
is produced bv the distillation ot ortho-nltro-phenylpropiolic acid with steam.

I51.,'m>— December S7, ISSl. A. BAEYER. Manufatiure of artificial indigo.

Dii.satogen, a red crystalline solid, is produccil by mixing ortho-<linitro-acet-
enylphenyl with concentrated sulphuric acid and treating with fuming sul-
phuric acid, and pre<'ipltating by means of alcohol or water. It Is converted
into an artificial indigo blue by the action ot reducing or deoxidizing agents.

SSl.Sni—Dccnnber t7. ISSl. .A. BAEYER. .Vannfacture of soluble derivatires qf

indigo blue.

An alkaline salt of indigo-white sulphonic acid, convertoble into indigo blue
upon treatment with acid and oxidizing agents, is produced by the action upon
Indigo of alkaline pyrosulphates and reducing agents, such as ferrous sulphates
and alkalies.

tsi, 671— December zr, ISSl. A. BAEYER. Preparation of new material for the

manufacture of artificial indigo.

Ortho-diuitro-diacctenylphciiyl. a yellow crystalline solid, m. p. 212° C, is
produced by forming a copper compound of ortho-nitro-acetenyl benzene by
treating an ali'oholic solution of the latter with an ammonlacal solution of
cuprous chloride, then treating same with pru.<<siate of potash and caustic
pota.sh, washing and drying the precipitate digesting with chloroform, and dis-
tilling off the solvent. It dissiolves in concentrated sulphuric acid upon the
addition of fuming sulphuric acid, with an intensely red color and with the pro-
duction of dUsatogcn.

toS.SX— January 10, 1SS3. O. FISCHER. Rnsaniline-red coloring mailer.

A rosaniline red obtained from paranitrobenzaldehyde and a salt of com-
mercial aniline oil. Nitroleuco ba.ses are first formed from the said moteriols in
the presence of dehydrating agents, and the rosaniline red is produced either
direct from the bases or after transformation into leucoenillne.

tM,WS— January 10, ISSl. O. FISCHER. I'reparniian of rosaniline-blue adoring

matter.

A blue coloring matter produced by first forming nitroleuco bases from pora-
nitro benzaldehyde and (liphenylamlne in the presence of dehydrating agents,
and then forming the aniline blue direct thereurom or after transforming them
into amidoleuco bases.

t5t,t7S—June 10, ISSt. J. H. .STEBBINS. Je. PurfUe dyestuff or coloring matter.
A dark-violet coloring matter produced by the action of an acid solution of
the soda salt of bela-naphthol-monosulpho acid upon nltroso-dimetbj'l-anillne
hydrochlorate. at from 110° to 121° C. It dyes wool mordanted with an iron or
alum mordant a dark purple color.

t5t,nii— January 10, ISSt. 3. H. STEBBINS, Jr. Manufacture of blue coloring

matter.

A coloring matter or ilyestuff produced by the action of an alkaline solution
of the soda salt of alpha-naphthol-monosulpho add on para-amido dimethyl-
aniline hydrochlorate. It dyes wixil with a chrome mordant an indigo color,
with an alum mordant and tannin added to the dye bath it dyes wool a dork
blue-green.

tSl.sn— January 17, ISSt. T. HOLLIDAY. Producing azo colors upon vegetable

fiber.

Process con-sists in subjecting the fiber to the action of oil followed by an
alkali, to oxidize the oil on the fiber: subsequently to the action of a nophthol
or phenolic bodv, and then the azo color is produced upon the liber by ireating
with a diazo compound, whereby the color is fastened upou the liber in con-
junction with the oil.

tst,7St— January tt,, ISSt. A. LIEBMANN. Manufacture qf the higher homokymn

qf phenol, uaphthol, and resorcin.

See Group XVIII, Fine Chemicals.
tS3,U9— February 7, ISSt. J. H. STEBBINS, JB. (btoring matter or dyest^.

A blue dyestuff prodncol by the action of chloride of lime upon on alkoline
mixture of dimethyl-pani-phenylendiamine hydrochloride and orthocresol. It
dyes wool with alum or chrome mordants at ahout 150° F. a Prussian blue.

210

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

i5S hkU—Febnmry 7, ISSS. J. H. STEBBINS, Jr. Coloring matO:r or dyestuff.

A blue dyestuff produoed by the action of dimethyl-para-phenylendiamine
hvdrocbloride upon an alkaline solution of orthocresol in presence of an oxi-
dizinK aBent; tbe coloring matter is developed with acetic acid It dyes wool
with alum or chrome mordants at about 160° F. an mdigo extract blue color.

aeS.iiS— February 7, 1883. J. H. STEBBINS, Jr. Coloring matter or dyeftiiff.

A blue dvestufl produced by the action of para-amido-dlmethyl-aniline
hydrochloride upon an alkaline solution of phenol in the presence of chloride
of lime. It dyes wool mordanted with alum or chrome mordants at about 180°
F. a deep indigo blue.
253,598— February Ik, ISSt. F. GKAESSLER. Manufacture of yellow coloring

matters.

The sulpho-acid of amidoazo-benzole; obtained by producing the amidoazo-
benzole and then transforming it into the sulpho-acid compound thereof; or by
transforming a sulpho-acid compound of aniline— a sulphanilic acid— into the
amidoazo-benzole sulpho-acid; or by commencing with a sulgho-acid compouna
of aniline and transforming this into the corresponding amidoazo-sulpho acid.
They afford fast coloring matters.
gSS,7Sl— February li, 1S8S. H. KOECHLIN. Manufacture of colors or dyestuffs.

Violet coloring matters produced by the action of nitroso derivatives of the
tertiary amines on tannin, or on principles analogous to tannin, as by heating
a solution of nitroso-dimethyl-aniline and gallic acid.

i5h,mi,—Fcbnmry SI, ISSt. J. H. STEBBINS, JR. Dyestuff or coloring matter.

A blue dyestuff produced by tbe action of diethyl-para-phenylendiamine
chloride upon an alkaline solution of the soda salt of alphanaphthol mono-
suloho-acid in presence of an oxidizing agent. Wool is dyed at 160° F, in a neu-
tral bath without mordants or acids; also with alum or chrome mordants.

t5l„065— February il, 1882. J. H. STEBBINS, Jr. Dyestuff or coloring matter.

A blue dvestuff produced by the action of diethyl-para-phenylendiamine
chloride upon an alkaline solution of alpha-naphthol in the presence of an
oxidizing agent. The color on wool is developed by an oxidizing agent, as
bichromate of potash, into a bright indigo blue.

25l,,m8— February gl, 1883. W. PICKHARDT. Manufacture of cMnoline.

See Group XVIII, Fine Chemicals.
tt5l,.550— March 7, 1883. T. & R. HOLLIDAY. Process of dyeing colors or textile
fabrics.

Azo colors are produced direct in or upon cotton or other textile fibers by
impregnating the same with a solution of naphthol or naphthols and with a
solution of a diazo-azo compound.
S55,SIS— March 31, 1883. J. H. STEBBINS, Jr. Dyeing blue colors upon textile

fabrics.

A blue color is developed within or upon textile fiber, etc., by the reaction
in or upon the fiber of nitroso-diethyl-aniline chloride and the soda salt of
alpha-nanhthol in the presence of an oxidizing agent.
355,350— March 31, 1882. J. H. STEBBINS, jR. Manufacture of blue coloring

Tnatter.

A blue dyestuff produced by the action of diethyl-para-phenylendiamine
chloride upon an alkaline solution oi phenol in the presence of an oxidizing
agent. It dyes wool with or without alum or chrome mordants at 160° F. a
deep blue. '

356,330— April 11, 1883. E. D. KENDALL. Process of treating certain derivatives

of coal-tar colors.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
316,375— April 11, 1883. C. RDMPFF. Dyestuff or coloring matter.

The product resulting from the reaction of diazo-azo-toluol-monosulphonie
acid with the sodium salt of the alpha-monosulphonic acid of beta-naphthol.

gS6,S76— April 11, 1883. C. RUMPFF. Manufacture of dyestuff or coloring matter.

The product resulting from the reaction of diazo-alpha-naphthaline-monosul-
phonie acid with a solution of the sodium salt of the alpha-monosulphonic acid
of beta-naphthol.
356,377— April 11, 1883. C. RUMPFF. Manufacture of dyestuff Or coloring matter.

Product resulting from the reaction of diazo-beta-naphthaline-monosulphonic
acid with the sodium salt of the alpha-monosulphonic acid of beta-naphthol.

356,378— April 11, 1883. C. RUMPFF. Manufacture of dyestuff or coloring inatter.
Product resulting from the reaction of diazoazo-xylol-monosulphonio acid
with the sodium salt of the alpha-monOsulphonic acid of beta-naphthol.

358,379— April 11, 1883. C. RUMPFF, Manvfacture of dyestuff or coloring matter.
A yellow dyestuff resulting from the reaction of the nitro-alpha-monosul-
phonic acid with carbonate of potash.

356,380— April 11, 1883. C. RDMPFF. Manufacture of dyestuff or coloring matter.
A scarlet dyestuff resulting from the reaction of diazoazo-benzole with alpha-
monosulphonic acid of beta-naphthol.

356,381— April 11, 1883. C. RUMPFF. Manvfacture of a new coloring-producing

acid.

The alpha-monosulphonic acid of beta-naphthol is produced by treating beta-
naphthol, 100 kilograms, with commercial sulphuric acid (66 per cent), 200 kilo-
grams, the temperature not exceeding 60° to 60° C. Also the soda salt of the
same, a new product. It gives coloring matters, with diazo compounds, fast
against soap and light.

i56,U)0— April 11, ISSt. J. H. STEBBINS, Jr. Production qfnapUhyl-eulphateeoda

sou.

The soda salt of naphthyl-sulphate: produced by treating beta-naphthol viith
sulphuric acid at not to exceed 20° C. It is separated out by the action of hot
alcohol.

t56,Wl— April 11, 1883. J. H. STEBBINS, Jr. Dyestuff or coloring matter.

The dyestuff or coloring matter produced by the action of diazoazo-benzole-
monosulpho-acid upon the soda salt of naphthyl-sulphate. It dyes wool, in a
bath acidulated with sulphuric acid, a pure scarlet red.

tSS,696— April 18, 1883. P. REID AND J. EASTWOOD. Ink for dyeing purposes.
It is composed essentially of pyroxyline, a coloring agent, camphor, and a
suitable meastruum, such as alcouol, wood-oaphtlia, etc.

356,599— April IS, 1883. C. H. RUDOLPH. Production of coloring matter.
A yellow coloring matter obtained from a mixture of acetanilide and hjdro-

chlorateof aniline by heating the same with chloride of zinc or other dehy-
drating agent The methylated, ethylated, etc., derivativesare obtained by the

action of Chloride, bromide, or iodide of methyl, ethyl, etc., on the same or on

the base contained therein.

K7,31ii— Mays, 1883. C. RUMPFF. Manufacture of broum dyestuff.
A brown coloring matter formed by the reaction of nitrous acid upon the

salts of the alpha-naphthylamine-sulphonic acid in neutral or very slightly acid

solution. Distinguished by immense dyeing power.

357,310— May 3, 1883. C. RUMPFF. Manufacture of broum dyestuff.
A brown coloring matter formed by the reaction of nitrous acid upon the

salts of the beta-naphthylamine-sulphonic acid m neutral or very slightly acid

solution. Distinguished by immense dyeing power.

257,1,98— May 9, 1882. H. KOECHLIN. Manufacture of coloring matter.
The leuco bases and leuco products or reduction products of the bodies

obtained bv the action of nitroso derivatives upon tannin, or on principles

analogous to tannin, the same being obtained by the reaction of said bodies, or

directly as by the heating of a solution of gallate of soda and chlorhydrate of

nitro-sodi-methylaniline.

357,717— May 9, 1883. E. JACOBSEN. Mamifacture of red coloring matter.
The process of manufacturing a red or violet coloring matter consists in heat

ing a mixture of equal parts of chinoline or pyridine and benzotrichloride, and

subsequently treating with water and an alkali. It dyes cotton mordanted

with tannin. It shows an intense yellow fluorescence visible on wool and silk.

257,812— May 9, 1883. A. BAEYER AND V. B. DREWSEN. Preparation of mate-
rial for manufacture of artificial indigo.
The process of producing ortho-nitro-cinnamylformic acid consists in treating

ortho-nitro-benzoldehyde with pyroracemic (pyruvic) acid in the presence of

hydrochloric acid.

257,813— May 9, 1883. A. BAEYER AND V. B. DREWSEN. Preparation of male-
rial used in the manufacture of artificial indigo.
Ortho-nitro-cinnamvlformic acid— product of No. 2.57,812— a yellowish-white

crystalline solid, characterized by the facility with which its alkaline solutions

containing an excess of the base are decomposed with production of artificial

indigo.

357,8U—May 9, 1882. A. BAEYER AND V. B. DREWSEN. Manufacture of arli-
Jicial indigo.
The process consists in treating ortho-nitro-benzaldehyde with acetone in the

presence of a diluted solution of an alkali, such as caustic soda.

357,815— May 9, 1882. A. BAEYER AND V. B. DREWSEN. Artificial indigo.

The product of No. 2,57,814: distinguished from vegetable and from the artificial
indigo of No. 227,470 by it« pure blue color and absence of any coloring matter
soluble in alcohol with a red or purple color.
258,530— May 23, 1883. H. BRUNCK. Manvfacture of anthracene blue.

"Anthracene blue:" produced from alizarine orange— No. 186,032— by heat-
ing same with glycerine and sulphuric acid at not to exceed 110° C, and subse-
quently treating the product with bisulphite of soda. It is not decomposed in
aqueous solution by acetic or tartaric acid, or the lime, magnesian, or chromic
salts of these organic acids.
358.531— May 23, 1883. H. BRUNCK. The production of blue colors upon textile

fabrics.

The fiber or fabric is impregnated with an aqueous solution of the anthracene
blue— No. 258,530— and then exposed to heat of from 70° to 100° C. The mate-
rial may first be impregnated with a solution of acetic acid or tartaric acid, or
of the lime, magnesian, or chromic salts of said acids.

259,260— June 6, 1883. A. BAEYER. Process of manvfacture of indigo blue.

An ether compound of ortho-nitro-phenylpropiolic acid is first produced, such
as its ethvlic ether; then the same is converted into indogenic ether, which is
converted into indogenic acid by treatment with caustic alkalis, followed by
muriatic acid, and the product finally exposed to an oxidizing action.

259,361— June 6, 1883. A. BAEYER. Process of manvfacture of indigo blue.

Process the same as No. 259, 260, except the indogenic acid is transformed into
indogen by the action of heat, and the indogen is then exposed to an oxidizing
action.
259,639— June IS, 1883. A. BAEYER. Manufacture of artificial indigo.

Produced by starting from toluene, successively through benzyl chloride,
benzyl cyanide, phenylacetic acid, oxindol, nitroso-oxindol, amido-oxindol,
artificial isatine, and isatine-chloride to artificial indigo. It contains "indi-
rubin," and colors alcohol purple on boiling; on combustion it leaves an ash
containing zinc.

360,3i2—June 27, 1883. C. RUMPFF. Manufacture of coloring matter from

naphthylamine.

A brown dyestuff or coloring matter produced by the action of diazoazo-
benzol-sulphonate of soda upon naphthylamine in an acid solution. It dyes wool
and silk a dark reddish brown in an acidulated bath, fast to soap and light.

261,175— Jidy 18, 1882. C. RUMPFF. Manufacture of coloring matter from naph-
thylamine.
A brown dyestuff or coloring matter produced by the action of diazo-

naphthalene-sulphonate of soda upon naphthylamine in an acid solution. It

dyes silk and wool in an acidulated bath.

261,518— July 18, 1882. H. KOECHLIN AND O. N. WITT. Manufacture of blue and

molet coloring matters.

Produced by the reaction upon a phenol of a nitroso amine or phenol or a
chloroquinonimide In the presence of a reducing agent, or a paramido body m
the presence of an oxidant.

261,600— Jtdy 36, 1882. J. H. H. O. GURKE. Production of soliCble aliiarine-blue

color.

A dark yellow coloring matter produced by the reaction of sulphite of
ammonia upon commercial "alizarine blue" (C17H8NO4) at from 30° to 40° C.

261,766— Jtdy 25, 1882. C. RUMPFF. Manufacture of broum dyestuff.

Produced by adding to a solution of amldoazoxylolsulphonate of soda, first,
muriatic acid, then a solution of sodium nitrite, and then naphthylamine in
acid solution. It dyes wool and silk a dark reddish brown in an acidtUatea
bath.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

211

t61,:e7—Julu ill, ISItl. C. RUMPKK. .Vnnt{fnfturfii/t>rnu-niliii-ituff.

Produced by addiiiK to n milmlnii i>( nmUliiiiiiiloliiolimlplioimte (i( Koln, tint,
muriatic iicid, then ii anlutlon of wxlliiin nitrite, mid then nti iield mhitlon of
iMphdiylaiulne. It ilycii wool niid silk a dark reddliib browu In an acidulated
Uih.
Ut.eiO—Augutt I.'', Iti'ii. C. Kl'MfFF. Manufneturt rif dyrituff.

A brown dyestud or coloring matter prcMlueeil by combining dlanMUobenisol-
iulphonic acid with a nolutlon of na|>hthylHmln>\ilphonatc of ooda. It dycH
wool and itllk a dark reddish bivwD In an acidulated bath.

ttt.MO—Auffuii 15, ISSt. F.MANN. llant{!arturt nf rotaniliM eclor.

A red dveslud or oolorlng matter pro<lHceared.

iii.mi—Augvtt 15, iSS*. C. RUDOLPH. Mannfadurf of artificial iniUgo.

Pnxluccd frtim bonialdchvdc by flret converting the same Into monobcnzyl-
IdeUBcetime. then inverting the latter into U.h orlhonitro sulwtltution deriva-
tive, sepaniling this orlhimitropriMluct from iw)Mur> liv (ryHtallizatiou, lUtrution,
and distlllatlou, and flnally illge.«tiiig in a weak alkaline lye.

t6S.su— AwjuM t9. isxt. H. KEOOHLIN AND O. N. WITT. Manufacture of blue

cUoring mattert calUd " indophntoU.**

Soluble liidophenols: pnKliii'ed by the reaction between nitrous derivatives of
amines or chloriMiuinmiiinides. a-i nitros<><limethyl«nilinc. and phenols, as
alphanaphthol. bv heating, without the pre.iome of alkali or a reilucing agent.
The lnd<j)henol ig"obtalned in tlie »hai>e of leuco compound, and rendcreil solu-
ble In alkaline lyes by excess of the phenol, and in water by the addition of
alkali. Insoluble Indophenols may be treate<l with phenols or their alkaline
derivatives, Id the formation of the former or when already formed.

teS.itO—AuguM t9, MM. R. MELDOLA. Man^racture of blue coloring mattert.
PriKluced bv the reduction of the diazo colors formed from the various nmido-
naphihaline-sulphonic adds in conjunction with dimelhylaniliiie and othe'
tertlarv monnmfncs by means of a sulphide, with or without the addition of
line il'ust. the pro<lucls Iwlng oxidized by means of ferric chloride or other
suitable oxidant. II dyes w(X)l and silk from a neutral or ammoniacal bath,
and cotton with or without a mordant, according to the shades required.

tiS,96tt—Sc]>lcmberS, ISSt. H. ROSE. Manttfacture of dyettuff from alizarine-blue.
Produced by mixing an alkaline salt of alizarine blue, as the natrium salt In
paste, with an alkaline bisulphite and a mordant, whereby the salt of the
alttarlne blue dlsst)lves quite easily.

«M,9«5— .Sfj)(f mfxT 5, lJi«. H. RUSE. Manufacture of alizarine-blue coU>r.

A brownish-red coloring compound produced by flrst combining alizarine blue,
ChH^'Oi, with alkalis, and then treating the alkaline salt thus obtained with
the bisulphites of the alkalis.

tm.ait-r-Octobcr St, ISSt. J. H. STEBBINS, JB. Coloring matter or dyettuff.

A green dyestufl produced by the action of benzoyl chloride upon methyl-
dlphenylamine In the presence of zinc chloride, at about 100° C.

tes.US—XovemberlS.tSSt. C. MARTIUS. l,Reii!»ue: 10,S53—July 10, 18SS.) Proc-

«* qf producing a basic coloring matter from xylidine.

Process of producing erystallizeil eumidliic, a base for the manufacture of azo
colors: consists In treating hydrochlorate of xylidine with methyl alcohol in a
digester to 280° C, converting the crude hydrochlorate of cumldine into a
nitrate, separating the nitrate from the mother liquors, washing it, and subse-
quently converting It into the base and subJecUug it to fractional distillation
between 22S° and 24&° C. and crystallization.

tes,S05— December 5, ISSt. C. F. L. LIMPACH. Xanufacture of coloring matter.

A bluish-red coloring matter produced by the action of the sulphonic acid of
amidoazo-benzole upon an alkaline solution of betanaphthol trlsulphonic acid.

tS8,5(»— December 5, 1S8S. C. F. L. LIMPACH. ifami/acture of coloring matter.

A red coloring matter produced by the reaction, with sodium salt, of the
betanaphthol trUulphonlc acid upon the diazo compound derived from alpha-
naphthylamine sulphonic acid.

I«S,S07— December 5, ISSt. • C. F. L. LIM PACH. Xanufacture of coloring matter.

A bluish-red coloring matter produced by the action of the diazo compound
of the amldoazo-benzole upon an alkaline solution of betanaphthol trlsulphonic
acid.

t6S,5iS— December 5, ISSt. C. RUDOLPH. Production of methylquinoline.

Produce<I by treating ortho-nltro-benzylldenacetonc with reducing agents, as
tin chloride and muriatic add, and purifying by distillation In a current of
steam. It bolls at 210° C. and Is used for the production of azo coloring matters.

te9,S59— December 19, ISSt. O. WALLACH. Xanttfacturc ofcohring matter.

A brown coloring matter produced by combining diazotized aniline and
resorcin, dissolving the product In caustic soda, and then combiulngagain with
diozo-sulphanillc acid. It dyes wool and silk In reddlsb-brown shades.

t70,Sll— January 9, ISSS. E. HEPP. Manufacture of blue dyettuff or coloring

matter.

Produced from nitroso derivatives of tertiary aromatic monamines such as
dlmethylaniline, by dissolving same in concentrated .sulphuric acid and then
But>jeetlng to the action of a reducing agent, as a melallle sulphide.

t71,SS6— February 6, 1S8S. T. HOLLIDAY. Production <\f azo colon on cotton

fabrici.

They are produced direct by the action of a neutralized bath (e. g., neutral-
ized bv carboiukte of lime) of the diazo compounds upon fiber previously treated
with tne naphthols or phenols.

trii.mt— March IS, ISSS. H. BRUNCK. Xan\tfaeture qf anthracene-blue.

In the monufacture of anthracene blue. No. 2S8,.580, the time is shortened by
the use of a solvent. Alizarine blue is exi>ose<I to the action of a solution of
bisulphite of soda or other alkali, an alkaline earth, or a metal, such as zinc,
chromium, or iron. In the presence of a suitable solvent, such as alcohol, acetic
acid, or acetic ether.

n5,77i— April 10, ISSS. H. KOECHUN AND O. N. WITT. TreatnuiU of indo-

phenoU.

" Leueo-lndophenol " is produced fromindophenolby the reaction of alkaline
or acid reducing agents upon the latter. The indophenol Is ground to a paste
and malntalnea alkaline or acid during the reaction, according to the reducing
tgeui used.

ne,7t6—Mav I, ISSS. a. FISCHKR. Prrparatlim nf niyhydro^methyl rhlnotlnt.
floe Oroup XVIII, Fine Chemicaln.

t7S,SliH—May I, ISSS. O.RUDOLPH. Manufadurc of cinnamle aeU.
See Group I, Aclda, Other Organic.

t7«,SHIt—May I, ISSS. C. RUDOLPH. Material fur the manufacture qf metnmethyl

iwUgo.

ortho-nltro-meta-mcthyl-benzaldehydc Is pmdnce<l by dlanolvlng tolujrlalde-
hyde In conccntratiKl sulpburlo acid, thereafter slowly oildlng a cold mixture
of nitric and c"n<entnilc<l sulphuric adds. iMiurinK Into Ice water tosepsrat"'
the nltroaldehyde In the form of an oil, which iseoiiseeullvely washed in water
and a dilute carbonate of soda solution.

VS.sao—May I, ISSS. C.RUDOLPH. Manufacture of metamethyHndiiio.

Producefl by dissolving ortho-nitro-meta-methyl-httnzaldehyde In a double
quantity of acetone or ethylaldehyde, ami adding a Mi'liiim lye. As contrasted
with natural Indlgu the methyl indigo is easily lujhible in aloobol.

m.lSt—May S, ISSS. J. WOLFF. Production qf coloring mnttertfrom dUuoamtio

cumpoundu.

A scarlet coloring matter produced by the reaction of a solution of dlazoxylol-
amido-benzol sulpBonatc oi ammonia with a solution of sodium betanaphthol
disulphonatc.

m,mi,—Xau 15, ISSS. H. ENOEMANN. Production qf mlpho<uM compound qf

betanaphthol.

A new compound produced by treating betanaphthol with fuming sulphuric
acid at 116° to 126° C. for two hours, when the temperature is reduced to 100° to
110° C. an<l more fuming sulphuric acid la added from time to time. It Is used
in the manufacture of coloring matters.

t7S,9t6—June 5, ISSS. E. FISC^HER. Production of paranUrobemylUiene ehlorUie.
Process consists of treating paranltrotoluol with a current of chlorine gas at a
high temperature, rising from 130° to 160° C, and washing the resulting mass
successively with water, a solution of sodium carbonate, and flnally with water,
and crystallizing from alcohol. It Is used In the manufacture of coloriof;
matters.

iSO,sn—June te, ISSS. L. LIMPACH. Manufacture of coloring matter.

A betanaphthol trlsulpho acid compound which produces brilliant colon
when treated with diazo compounds, produced by reacting upon betanaphthol
with sulphuric anhydride (or single oleum) at 160° C. for five to ten minutes,
and neutralizing the acid solution, when the reaction is complete, with caustic
soda or a salt thereof, ao as to form a salt of the .said trlsulpho acid.

tSi.S.IS—Augwin, ISSS. A. BERNTHSEN. Manufacture qf materialt tuilable for

dycftiitffit.

Thiodiphenylamine, a yellowish-white crystalline solid, is produced by heat-
ing a mixture of diphenylamlne and sulphur at from 260° to 930° C.

l!S2,8S6—Augutt7,lSSS. A. BERNTHSEN. Manufacture of coloring matter.

A purple dyestulT or coloring matter obtained from thiodiphenylamine (No.
282,835) by converting the same Into a nitro com[K)und, then acting thereon
with reducing agents, as tin and hydrochloric acid, and oxidizing the product
It dyes cotton previoiLsly mordanted with tannin, and becomes fixed on the
fiber without the aid of a mordant.

!SS, 165— August Ii, ISSS. N. McCALLUM. Compofitton to be used at a paint or

dye.

" Echurine," a yellow dye, consists of nitric acid, picric acid, and flavine,
boiled and evaporated to dryness.

tSS,766—Augutt ts, 188S. E. FISCHER. Manufacture of the »itro4euco bate qf

ronanitine.

Produced by the reaction of para-nitro-benzylldene chloride disaolved in a
medium, such as ligrolne, benzine, or alcohol, on aniline, at the temperature of
a water bath, followed by distillation of the solvent, extraction of the residue
with water, and precipitation of the base by an alkali. It varies in color from
yellow to red and melts under boiling water to a wax-like mass.

2S5, 5.15— September IS, ISSS. J. WOLFF. Manitfacture of cardinal-red coloring

matter.

Produced by the reaction of a solution of diazo-naphthalene-amldo-benzole
sulphonate of ammonia and a cold solution of one e<|uivalent of betanaphthol
disulphonatc of sodium in 10 to 12 parts of its own weight of water. It is dis-
tinguished by containing besides the diazo compound of naphthalene, the
ainido-benzole sulphonate compound with the beta-naphthol sulphonate.

S86,r,se— October 9, ISSS. A. BERNTHSEN. Sulphureled derivative of diphenyla-

mine as a ixisisfor the production of coloring mattert.

Thiodiphenylamine produced by heating dlphenyiamlne with sulphur at
from 250° to 300° C. The product Is purified by distillation.

tss,5t7— October 9, ISSS. A. BERNTHSEN. Proceti of obtaining coloring matter or

dyettuff from thiodiphenylamine.

Thiodiphenylamine is treated with nitric acid, the nltro compound obtained
Is re<luc(Kl, and the resulting colorless compound oxidlzeil. It is a purple
coloring matter, dyeing cotton which has been mordanted with tannin, and It
becomes fixed on animal fiber without the aid of a mordant.

tS9,StS— December!,, ISSS. I.LEVINSTEIN. Manufacture of yellow coloring matter.
Coloring matter produced by the action of nitric acid upon the mono and
dlsulpho acids of nitroso-alpha-naphthol, or a mixture of the same.

SS9,6I5— December i, ISHS. O. BREDT. Manufacture of red coloring matter.

I'roduced by diazotizlng naphthylaniine sulphonic acid, ami then treating It
with naphthol. Thealpha form of naphthylamiue sulphonic acid yields bluuh-
retl and the beta form, yellowish- red shades.

i90,5SS— December 18, ISSS. E. J ACOBSEN. Production qf yeOout coloring matter.
I^roduced by heating ehlnaldlne with phthalie anhydride and zinc chloride
to from 190° to 210° C. The melt is boiled out with muriatic odd. As obtained,
it Is soluble only In spirit. It lsmadest>lubleln water by healing with sulphuric
add, monm'hlorhydriue, or fuming sulphuric acid.

!00,856— December S5, ISSS. H. CARO AND A. KERX. Xantifadure tf dyettuff.
The process for manufacturing crystallized methyl-violet by th<' reaction of
oxychloride of carbon (phosgene) uptin a mixture of dinie'thylaniline and
anhydrous chloride of aliunlulum and then separating the coloring matter.

212

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

S90,S91— December U, 18SS. A. KERN. Manufacture oj dyestuff or coloring
matter.

Crystallized methyl-Tlolet, the product of process No. 290,892. It is marlied
by its uniformity of composition. It dyes textile fiber a bluish-purple shade
similar to "methyl-violet 5B."
390, 89i— December 16, 1S8S. A. KERN. Mamtfacture ofpurpk dycstvff.

Process consists in converting dimethvl-aniline into tetra-methyl-diamido-
benzophenone; treating the same with reducing or hydrogenizing agents;
combining tetra-methvl-diamido-benzhydroll, the hydrogenized product, with
dimethyl-aniline; subraitting the new product to an oxidizing process; and
finally crystallizing the dyestuff from its solution in suitable solvents.
t90,S9S— December ^5, 18S3. A. KERN. Manufacture of dyestuff or coloring matter.

"Ethv!-purple6B:" produced by converting diethylaniline into tetraethyl-
diamldo-benzophenone, treating the same with reducing or hydrogenizing
agents, combining the hydrogenized product with diethylaniline, and then
oxidizing, and separating out the dyestuff or coloring matter.
g9S,815—Marcli 25, ISSi. Z. H. SKRAUP. Manufacture of paraehinisol.

See Group XVIIl, Fine Chemicals, Nitro-substitution compounds.
i97,!,li—Apragi, ISSI,. A.KERN. Manufacture of ethyl-blue coloring matter.

•'Victoria blue BB: " produced bv the condensation of alpha-phenyl-naphthyl-
amine with tetra-ethyl-diamido-benzophenone, in the presence of phosphorus
oxychloride.
g97,iU— April Si, ISSU. A. KERN. Meltiyl-U^w. coloring matter.

" Victoria blue B: " produced by the condensation of alpba-phenyl-naphthyl-
amine with tetra-methyl-dlamido-benzophenone, In the presence of phosphorus
oxychloride.
i97, US— April iS.lSSk. A.KERN. Methyl-blue coloring malter.

"Benz'yl-violetB:" produced by the condensation of tetra-methyl-diamido-
benzophenone with dibenzyl-aniline, in the presence of phosphorus oxychlo-
ride.
t97 ,1,16— April gB, ISSi. A. KERN. Ethyl-blue coloring matter.

"Benzyl-violet BB:" produced by the condensation of tetra-ethyl-diamido-
benzophenone with dibenzyl-aniline, in the presence of phosphorus oxychlo-
ride.
i»r, SO— April 29, mi,. A. r. POIRRIER and D. a. ROSENSTIEHL. Sulpho-

conjugated violets of Paris.

A new product having the free acid neutralized, readily soluble, and with the
coloring matter unaltered; produced by treating the crude coloring matter with
potash, soda, ammonia, zinc, magnesia, or other suitable base, to transform the
excess of acid into soluble sulphate.

g97,85£— April », ISSi. Z. ROUSSIN AND D. A. ROSENSTIEHL. Manufacture

ofyetloiv and orange coloring matters.

Azo coloring matters, varying from yellow to orange and even red, having
the radical of carbonic acid substituted for that of sulphuric acid, are produced
by substituting the amido-carboxylated acids, such as amidobenzoic acid, for
the corresponding sulpho acids in the manufacture, in the state of free acid.
They are insoluble in water, but their alkaline salts are sufiiciently soluble.

g98,99S—May W, 1881,. P. MONNET. Obtaining brown dyes from the aromatic

diamines.

Process consists in saturating the material in a bath composed of chlorhydrate
of paraphenylene diamine, or paratoluylene diamine, sulphuric acid and water,
then wringing, and then treating the material to an oxidizing bath to develop
the color.
S00,87tr-June U, ISSI,. F. KRDGER, G. TOBIAS, AND E. KEGEL. Production

of coloring matters from dinitro-phenol.

Dinitro-phenol-sulpho acid and its salts are produced by nitrating phenol-
sulpho acid, or mono-nitro-phenol-sulpho acid, or their salts. The commercial
product is the dinitro-phenol-sulphonate of potash, a red product, ground, mixed
with spirit of ammonia, and evaporated to dryness.
S01,802—July 8, ISSi. H. CARD AND A. KERN. Manufacture of yellmii coloring

vtatter.

"Auramine:" produced by fusingamixture of tetra-methyl-diamldo-benzophe-
none, ammonia hydrochlorate, and zinc chloride, and washing out and crj-stal-
lizing the product. When di-ssolved in alcohol and treated first with sodium
amalgam, and then with acetic acid and heat, it is decomposed into tetra-
methyl-diamido-benzhydrol and ammonia.

SOS,no—July i.5, 1881,. J. H. STEBBINS, Jr. Manufacture of bromn coloring

matter.

"Phenanthrol brown:" produced b^ the action of diazoazobenzole-parasulpho-
acid upon beta-phenanthrol in alkaline solution. When treated with reducing
agents, as tin and hydrochloric acid, It splits up into beta-amido-phenanthrene,
aniline, and sulpha'nilic acid.

S0«,790— t/uiy 29, 1881,. A. SPIEGEL. Aso coloring matter.

Produced from ortho-amido-dichlorphenol by diazotizing and then combining
with a molecular quantity of beta-naphthol, producing the azo coloring matter
dichlorphenol-azo-beta-naphthol, which is then treated with spirits of wine
along with a concentrated solution of the bisulphite of an alkali and heat. It
is distinguished by solubility in water with a yellow color, and when an alkali
is added to the solution, or when boiled with a nitrite, the bisulphite compound
is decomposed and a bluish-violet paste is precipitated.

301,791— July 19, 1881,. A. SPIEGEL. Fastening azo colors on yam or textile

fabrics.

Azo colors arc developed in or upon textile fiber, etc., by impregnating the
fiber with the bisulphite compounds of azo coloring matters farmed from diazo
compounds, combined with aromatic hydroxylated bodies or phenols, together
with salts of alumina; iron, or chromium, and then exposing to heat, preferably
steam, or to an alkaline agent, or a hot solution of a nitrite.

S0S,SS5— August IS, 1881,. A. SPIEGEL. Azo coloring malter.

The bisulphite compound of dichlorphenol-azo-ethyl-beta-naphthol (soluble
in water): produced by treating the scarlet azo coloring matter dichlorphenol-
azo-ethyl-beta-naphthol (in.soluble in water) with a concentrated solution of
the bisulphite of an alkali along with spirits of wine.

S0e,5lS— October II,, 1881,. A. SPIEGEL. Manufacture of biniiphite compounds of

azo coloring matters.

Azo coloriug matters soluble in spirit — i. e., not sulphonic acids — are converted
into compounds soluble In water oy combining such azo coloring matters, in
the presence of a solvent, with the bisulphite of an alkali.

806,989— October 21, ISSi. A. SPIEGEL. Preparation of pheneto-mlpho-diazo-beta-

napldhol with bisulphite compound.

A coloring matter soluble in water is produced from phenetol-sulphon-diazo-
beta-naphthol— insoluble in water— by treating same with a concentrated solu-
tion of the bisulphite of an alkali, along with spirits of wme.

S07,W1— October 28, ISSi. C. I-OWE. Coloi-ing matter derived from aurin.

Process of manufacturing "roso-phenoline," a basic red coloring inatter con-
sists in heating aurin with a mixture of ammonia and an organic acid either in
aqueous ethylic, phenylic, or other alcohoUc solution, at trom 212° to 400° F.

308,71,8— December B, 1831,
coloring matter.

F. MACHENHAUER. Manufacture of rosaniline

H. CARO AND A. KERN. Manufacture of purple-blue

l,AJI mil HtLM*C(.

" Victoria blue 4 R:" produced by the condensation of tetramethyl-diamido-
benzophenone with mothyl-phenyl-alpha-naphthylamine, m the presence of
phosphorus oxychloride.

308,912— December 9, 1881,

derivatives.

Yellow coloring matters produced from " azuline," of commerce— a blue col-
oring matter— and the sulphonic acids thereof, by treating the same with nitric
or nitrous acids or their salts.

309,882— December SO, 188!,. Z. ROUSSIN AND D. A. ROSENSTIEHL. Manu-
facture of bromated aso coloring matters.
Yellow and orange bromiuized azo coloring matters are produced by iutro-

duclug bromine directly into the coloring matter after the latter has been

formed. They are more readily fixed on vegetable fiber than substances not

bromated.

310,128— December SO, 1881,. E. ERLENMEY'ER. Production of rosaniline color-
ing matters.

Process of manufacturing coloring matters of the rosaniline series of different
composition by the oxidation of various combinations or mixtures of methyl-
ated amines or anilines or rosanilines with primary, secondary, or tertiary aro-
matic amines in such a way that the methyls of the former compounds are
applied under the Influence of oxidizing media— a methan carbon— in order to
combine therewith always three aromatic molecules of the latter compounds.

310,165— Deceniber SO, 1881,. L. VIGNON. Sulpho-alpha-jiaphthol coloring com-

2X)und.

Produced by the reaction of a sodium sulpho-alpha-naphthol rendered
slightly alkaline by sodium carbonate or ammonia hydrate upon diazo-benzole.

313,118— March 3, 1885. J. H. STEBBINS, JE. Red coloring matter.

Benzole-azo-sulphonate of soda-azo-diethylaniline: produced by treating a
solution of amidoazo-benzole-sulphonate of soda with sodium nitrite, and then
adding the diazo compound to a solution of diethylaniline in methyl alcohol.
It is split by reducing agents into para-phenylendiamine, sulphanillio acid, and
para-amido-diethylaniline. If dyes a brownish red.

31!,,9S8— March SI, 1885. M. HOFFMANN. Coloring matter from beta-naphtlwl.

A red coloring matter, producing on wool and silk a blue shade: produced by
mixing the diazo compound of the difficultly soluble alpha-naphthylamine
sulphonic acid with au alkaline solution of beta-naphthol gamma disulphonic
acid.

SH,,9S9— March SI, 1885. M. HOFFMANN. Red coloring matter from gamma

disulphonic acid of heta-naphthol.

Produced by the action of the diazo compound of amidoazobenzole upon an
alkaline solution of gamma disulphonic acid of beta-naphthol. It dyes wool,
silk, and mordanted cotton a brilliant scarlet.

S16,932—April U, 188S. R. GNEHM. Production of chlorinated derivatives of

bcnzaldehycte.

Benzaldehyde is treated with iodine and pentachloride of antimony under
heat, and the chlorinated substitution products of benzaldehyde are tlien sep-
arated by known methods. They are employed in the manufacture of coloring
matters.

316,036— April 21, 1885. O. HOFFMANN. Coloring matter derived from naphOuA,.
Naphthol-green: produced from the reaction of nltroso-naphtho-sulphonic acids
or their salts upon iron or its salts, or by the reaction of nitrous acid upon
naphthol-sulphonic acids treated with iron or its salts.

316,1,71— April 28, 1885. C. LOWE; Manufacture of derivatives of aurin.

"Roso-phenoline," the product of process No. 307,401.
318,ISI,—May 26, 1885. 0. LOWE. Manufacture of the derivatives of aurin.

Roso-phenoline sulphonic acid, a conjugated acid red coloring matter: pro-
duced by heating aurin at a low temperature with sulphuric acid and heating
the product, after removing excess of acid, with ammonia in aqueous, ethylic,
phenylic, or other alcoholic solution. It combines with alkali to form solid or
pasty salts, insoluble in benzole but soluble in alcohol or water.

319,61,6— June 9, 1885. L. VIGNON. Process of obtaining coloring matter from

amidoazo-benzole and homologues.

A solution of chlorhydrate of amidoazo-benzole, hydrochloric acid and water,
is heated to trom 140° to 176° F.,and a solution of .sodium sulphide is then added
until the reduction is complete, when the liquid is filtered and oxidized.

322,368— July U, 1885. R. GNEHM. Production qf chloroplithalic acid.

Tetrachlorophthalic acid (or its anhydride): produced by the action of chlo-
rine upon a mixture of annvdrous phthalic acid and antimony pentachloride,
heated to about 200° C.

322,91,0— July 28, 1886. T. KEMPF. Manufacture of iodoform bromoform, and
chloroform.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

323,611,— August I,, 1886. W. MAJERT. Manufacture of meOiytene-Uue by elec-
trolysis.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

32U,615— August 18, 1885. L. VIGNON. Manufacture of coloring matter from alplia-

naphthol and dinitro-naphltiol.

The process of producing a yellow coloring matter consists in treating alpha-
naphthol with sulphuric acid at 66° Baumt^; cooling and diluting with ice; add-
ing nitric acid at 40° Baumt5; maintaining the temperature under 30° C; then
heating to near 40° C; cooling to 12° or 1,^° C; and finally filtering, rodissolvxng
the precipitate, and precipitating with carbonate of potash in solution.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

213

ttt,tSlh-AuguM IS. Iims. H. ZIEOt.ER. (Uorlnti nuiller /mm pheni/lhiiilrmlnr.

A yellow dycuHilT or cnlnriiiK mntlrr prtMhii'iMl by the arlton of bloxylarurip
uolil (i-HrlKixytMrtninlc mid) uikhi tlic Hiil|ihi> ncid o( nhi'iiylhyclnii'.liif. It la
wlublo 111 wiitur; itlinUHt iiisolulik' in utroiiK iili'oliol aim glacial acetic acid.

aU^gn—Sfplrviber », tSM. F.FISCHER, itnnitfarturt (if I'iiilft di/tiituffr.
Procciis roii!>liiti< In tn<atinK ilielhyl-niillinc by jierchlonnothyl-morcaptan.

SU.aiS—Seplrmbrr s. ISSH. F. FIS<;I1EK. VioUt methyl dyaluff-
Product of proccsM No. 32A.827.

it7.»M— October «. JSS5. A. KEKN AND C. L. mOlLER. Production i\f blue

dytMtiff*.

Triiiicthyltrlphcnyl nminlllne 1» produced by the reaction of oxychloridc of
rttrlMin ( phosirciic ) »i>oti mcthyl-dlphenylBniliie, followed by digestion oi the
warm nmw whh line chloride and carbon oxychloridc, separation of the bane
fnnii resiilual inntteRt, and purification.

Sia.H.'^—Ortiihtrt?. ISIIS. A. T. Br)IIME. Priiriia nf makimj colirrina matter.

(>tn!«l!«tK In boiling glucfiMldcs dcrlvcil from <iucrcitriii, honte-cheRtniit, Bra-
zilian woikI. or the like, in water mixed with nitric or hydnn'hloric ttcid to
prcclplliilc llic n'dln, removing the briizillne, or the like, treating with iKjloiwInm
perumnKHiiatc, llllerlng. lixiviating the precipitate, and treating with add,
cooling and neutniliiing.

«9,««— A'oivmlKT a. ISSS. C. DUISBERO. Coloring matter cMainedJrom telraxo-

ditntiH.

Protluced by the action of tetrazo-dilolyl upon the alpha-naphthylamlne
sulpbti-acldt*. It dycii unmordanted cotton alizarine-red.

Sia.au—XoKinber i, 18SS. C. DUISBKRG. Coloring matteriMaincd from tetrazo-

dUotyl.

Producc<l by the action of tetrazo-ditolyl upon the beta-naphthylamine
sulplio-aciils. It Is isomeric to No. 329,632, dyeing an alizarine rea, although a
little yellower.

ie»,631t—}>'uremb<r 3. ISM. E. ELSAESSER. Red d\jf stuff or coloring matter.

Obtained by the reaction of the diazo derivative of the monosulpho acid of
beta-naphthylamine, and the monosulpho-acids of alpha-naphthol derived
from naphthlonic acid and sulpho-naphtliyladamic acid.

U9,6SS—Xovcml)er S. IS.'iS. F. FISCH ER. Production of iieio violet dyeelufft.

Process consists in treating dimethyl-aniline with perchlor-methylmercaptan,
which is the product of the reaction of chlorine upon carbon bisulphide. Its
morlatc forms bronze-like needle crystals.

at»,M7—N0Kmber S, 188S. F.FISCHER. Violet coUning matter.

Product of procees No. 329,636.
at9,ea8—Xovember S, ISSS. E. FRANK. Yellow coloring matter.

Product of process No. 329,639. Unmordanted cotton is dyed a sulphur yellow
In a boiling soap bath.

i29.SS9, Xorember S, 1SS5. E. FRANK. Production of new yellow coloring matter.
Process consist.^ in azotizing Ijenzidine sulphate by means of sodium nitrite,
forming tetrazo-dlphenyl, and treating it with oxibenzolc acids — salicylic
acid — and Anally separating and purifying the product.

S30,n&—Xotrmber 10. 18SS. M. E. WALD8TEIN AND A. mCLLER. CompoMim

i\f matter to be u»ed in dyeing.

A composition containing a sulpho compound of the fatty acids, such as
stilphoricinoleic acid or sulpholeic acid, aniline or its homologucs, and a
neutralizing alkali.

SS1.0S9—XoKmber ti, 18SS. M. HOFFMANN. Manitfaeture <tf beia-naphthol sul-
phonic acid.

The gamma dlsnlphonlc acid of beta-naphthollsproduced by first sulphona ting

the alpba-monosulphonic acid of bcta-naphthof or Ix'ta-naphtol itself, am
Anally purifying the acid. - • •
aromatic diazo compounds.

Anally purifying the acid. Coloring matters are formed by combiuation with
tic " ■

331,961.— December S, 1S8S. H. HASSENCAMP. Manufacture of benzylateil methyl

vit}let.

The pnxluct of No. 331.966, a benzylate<l methyl violet which has been sul-
phonaled and oxidated. It Is principally used for dyeing wool when sulphuric
acid is used as a mordant.

SS1.S6S— December 8, 1S8B. H. HASSENCAMP. ManMfacture of benzylated acid
viotH.

prtK'ess consists in reducing the methyl violet of commerce to its leueo base,
bcnzvlating the leuco base, transforming into its leuco-sulpho acid, and Anally
obtaining the sulpho-acid of the dyestuff by oxidation.

S»t.3S(y— December IS. ISSS. E. OSTERMEYER A.ND M. DITTMAR. Producing
ehloriodinc double eomhinalionti frttm pyridine and chlnoline bages.
The process of producing double coinbinations of chlorlodine with pyridine,

chlnoline, tetrahydrochiiioline or clilnoline mcthylate, from which coloring

matters may be obtained: coosists In treating these bases with cblorold-bydro-

chloric acid.

3.12.5t8— December IS, ISSS. M. HOFFMANN. Dyentuff madefrom diaio-naphtha-
line.

Profluccd by the reaction of diazo-naphthaline with the gamma-disulphonic
odd of beto-napfathol in alkaline solution. It dyes wool, si'k, and other mate-
rials a bloiah-red shade, and is characterized by its great tendency to crystallize.

S3i.st»— December !t, tSSS. H. PHINZ. Manufacture of hcta-naphthylamine mlptiit-
acid.

The tieta-naphthylamine siilpho-acid obtained by treating the beta-naphthol
monosiilpho-acid dcscril)cd by Schiifer with ammonia nl from 180° to 20tP C, by
which a reaction cxclinnge of the hydroxyl group with the amido group takes
place. It is difficultly soluble in water and forms almost insoluble salts of highly
crystallizing properties.

SSt.S30— December It, ISSS. H. PRlNZ. Red coloring matter from beta naphl/tyla-

mine futpho-acid

Produced by combining hcta-naphthol disulpho acid with the diazo com-
binations of t>cta-naphthylaminc sulpho-acid (No. 3;!2,*29). It dissolves In
concentrated .«ulphurie acid with a cherrv-r«<l color, and when treated with tin
and inuriiiilc mid, it forms tjcta-naphthylamlnc suipho^tcid and the diaulpho-
acids uf omidu bcla-uaphlhul.

333.03^ Dfttmbrr it. ISXS. H, VOLLBRECHT AND C. MENCSUINCi. .Von*

fncture o/ ctUnr-protluring arldn.

A new naiihlholdlmilohonlc acid, prodiicwl by cnnvertlDK Into the diazo
comiKiiind the iiaphthylamlne siilphonlc ncid whixe WKlliim salt I* not eulhr
soltinlc in wnlcr, and then treating the diazo compound with sulphuric acia.
When >rcate<l with nitric acid it forma a yellow dycstulT, and It forms dyolufh
with diazo compounds.

333,033— December tt, imi. II. VOI,l,BRECHT AND C. MEN8CH1N0. Cblnrtno
matter derived from alpha naphthui dlMutphonle acid.
Produced by the reaction of diazo-xylol with the wda alt of alpha-naphthol-

dlsulphonic acid (No. 1«:),0»4).

33.1,03«— December tt, ISMS. H. VOLLBRECHT AND C. MBN8CHINO. XUro-

naplithiit»ulphonic acid.

A yellow dycstufl, naphtbolmononltromonosulphonlcacld: priMluced by the
reaction of a nitro com|H)utid of alphaiiaphtholdlsnlphonlc acid (No. 333.0S4)
with carbonate of potash.

333,037— December tt, ISSS. H. VOLLBRECHT AND C. MENSCHINO. Manu-
facture nf dyentufi from naphlhol.

Producc<l by the reaction of diazoazolnnizol with a solution of the sodium salt
of alphanaphthol dlsulphonlc acid (No. 333,031).

333.0.1.1— December tt. ISSS. H. VOLLBRECHT AND C. MEN8CHING. Manu-
facture nf ilyeftufffrom naphthftt.

Produced by the reaction of diazotoluol with a' solution of the aodiiun salt of
alpbanaphtholdisulphonic acid (No. 333,034).

333.039— December tt, ISHS. H. VOLLBRECHT AND C. MEN8CH1N0. Coloring
matter derived from diazobertzol and lUptinnnptitholdofulphonic acid.
Produced by the reaction of dIa/olK'nzol with a solution of the sodium salt of

alpha-iiaphthol-disulphonicacid (No. 333.034).

333,0iO— December tt, ISSS. H. VOLLBRECHT AND C. MENSCHING. A^>ha-
naphtholeulphonic acid.

Produced by converting into the diazo compound the naphthylamincsnlphonlc
acid whose sodium salt is easily soluble In water, and treating the same in boil-
ing water with a .small quantity of sulphuric acid. It produces, with diazobenzol,
a bright scarlet dye.

S33.oa— December tt, ISSS. H. VOLLBRECHT AND C. MENSCHING. Color-
ing matter derived from diazobenzol and <ilphanaphthol.
A bright scarlet dye: produced from the reaction of diazotienzol withasoln-

tion of the sodium salt of the new naphthol-monosulphonic acid (No. 8^,040).

333.010— December tt, ISSS. H. VOLLBRECHT AND C. MENSCHING. Color-
ing matter derived front alphanapttthot and diazotolttol.
Produced by the reaction of diazotoluol-sulphonic acid with the sodium salt

of the new naphtholmonosulphonic acid (No. 333,040). It dyes scarlet with a

bluish shade.

333. ei.9— January .1, tSSe. C. LOWE. Manufacture of derivatives of aurin.

The process of manufacturing " rosophenolinesulphonic acid," a conjugated
acid red coloring matter, consists in heating aurin, I part, with sulphuric acid.
f> parts at from 38° to 100° C. separating the excess of sulphuric acid, and heat-
ing the product with an aqueous or alcoholic solution of ammonia.

333,8ei—Jantiary S, ISSe. A. KERN. Manufacture of soluble methyl-blue from

rosaniline.

"Methyl-blue S:" produced by the sulphonization of trimethyl triphenyl
rosaniline, which results from the action of carl>on oxychloride (phosgene)
upon methyl diphcnylamine.

S3i,lU>— January It. 1886. J. A. VAN WINKLE. Compound for toftening and

dyeing brottm com.

It consists of water, alum, saltpeter, cider vinegar, and diamond dye (green).
S3l,,lS7— January It, 1S86. C. A. M ARTIUS. Manufacture of archU-red azo colon.

Process consists in the combination of beta-naphthylamine — monosulplio
acid (No. 332,829), with [>ara-diazonitro — benzole.

S.'J.99l—May 18, 1886. F. BENDER. Production of yeUow azo coloring matter.

Produced by the action of.diazotizcd metanitroaniline or its sulpho-acids
up(>n phenylene diamine. It is hardly soluble in cold water, somewhat more
so in hot water, but soluble in alcohol, sulphuric and nitric acid.

3!,t.S07—May 18, 1886. A. MULLER^ACOBS. Coloring compound.

.\ coloring composition, insoluble in water or alcohol and soluble in benzine
and similar solvents, formed by compounding the resinatc of a metal or alka-
line earth and coloring matter r»r dye soluble in water ur alcohol. The rcsinate
is formed by dissolving and inlxingat Isiiling heat lolophoiiy or other resins
with caustic alkali, and saturating same with sulphate of ziiic, aluminum, or
other salt of a metal or alkaline earth, and wa.sliiiig out the precipitate, whlcti
has the property of uniting with any coloring matter soluble in water or alco-
hol.

3l,S.IJi—May SS, ISSS. C. DUISBERG. Rlue coloring matter from nitrophenetol.

Produced by azotizing the diamido-dlphenoidiethylester lether) (diphene-
tidin) obtained from nitro-phcnolaelhylestcr (ether) (nitrophenetol) bv alka-
line reduction, and the transformation of the lorraeil hydrazo-diphenol-
diacthylestor (ether) by means of acids with so<lium nilnte, forming the tetraxo-
dlpbenoldiaelhylester (ether) and heating it lu an organic acid solution with
beta naphthylamine-monosulpho acid.

3U.793— June IS. 1886. O. BIELSCHOWSKL Dyeing coUon fber.

Cotton or other textile libers or fabrics are dyed by steeping in a solution of
alpha-naphthylamine. and then slowly adding to said solution an oxidizing
aqucfjus solution of iHitassium bichromate and sulphuric acid to develop the
color on the fiber. Printing Is done first with a paste of alpha-naphthylamlne,
and then witli a mucilaginous solution of potassium bichromate.

»«.075— </i/nf i;, WW. F. BENDER. Production of yeUow coloring matter.

Produced by combining diazotized nttro-amldo-benzoic acid with meta-
phenylen-diamine. converting the same Into a sodium salt and crystallizing.

3U.97I— Julys, ISSe. C. A. MARTIUS. Producing nwred axo color*.

Process consists In combining one molecule of a salt of tetraio-dlphenyl or
tetrazo-ditolyl wllb one molecule of an aromatic amIdo tximponnd, and com-
bining iho prixtiici with one molecule of a dlflerent aromatic amido compound,
or of a pheuol compound.

214

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

Si5.901-July SO, im. M. HOFFMAN AND A. WEINBERG {Beimie: 11,598-Aprll

t7, 1897). Naphthol-Uack color compound.

Produced by diazotizing sodium naphthylamine disulphonate, then treating
with alpha-naphthvlumine chlorhydrate, and converting the product into the
diazo-azo compound, which latter is allowed to act upon an alkaline solution
of sodium beta-naphthol-alpha-disulphonate (salt R). It produces on the fiber
in an acidulated bath dark-blue shades.
ShB.Oli—JulyiO, 1836. H. BULL AND C. L. MCLLER. Sulphmated purpU dyc-

siuff from bemyldiphenylamine.

Produced bv the sulphonization of the basic derivative resulting from the
condensation "of tctramethyldiamidobenzophenone vnth benzyldiphenylamme.
SiS,/iSS-August SI, 1886. H. VON PERGER. ProdtictUm of phenyl-mdhyl oxy

quinciiie.

See Group XXIII, Fine Chemicals, Esters.
SiS.eiS— September 7, 1886. R. BOHN. Manufacture qf yeUow colonng-matter or

dyestufffrom gallic acid.

"Galloflavine." produced by the oxidizing action of atmospheric air, or
oxygen, upon alkaline solutions o£ gallic acid, at not exceeding 10° C. It com-
bines with metallic oxides, forming yellow lakes or pigment colors from a
greenish to an orange yellow.
$1,8,818— .September 7, 1886. H. M. BAKER. Kesorcin blue compound.

Produced by making a solution of resorcin in a solution of caustic ammoriia,
adding cuprous ammonio-carbonate or other ammoniacal copper .salt, agitating
the mixture by a copper plate dipping or moving therein, immersing meta-
lic zinc to precipitate the copper, treating with dilute sulphuric acid, boil-
ing, and filtering. It combines with bases to form lakes, and has the lormula
CsHi.NsOe.
$50, gW— October S, 1886. F. BENDER. Yclloio coloring matter.

Produced by treating the soda salt of a paranitro toluol sulpho acid with
caustic soda lye, reducing the red product of condensation into a hardly soluble
amido-sulpho acid, diazotizing the latter, and combining the diazo product
with a mixture of phenol and its carbon acids, or only with the one or the other
component of said mixture in an alkaline solution. It is fixed on unmordanted
ootton with a brilliant yellow shade.
im,-Z3a— October B, 1886. F. BENDER. Red coloring matter.

Produced by treating the soda salt of paranitrotoluol mono-sulpho acid by
caustic soda lye, reducing the red product of conden.sation into a hardly soluble
amido-sulpho acid, diazotizing the latter, and combining the diazo product
with a mixture of hydrochloric salt of beta-naphthylamineand a .sodium salt of
beta-naphthvlamine sulpho acid, or only with the one or the other component
of said mixture. It is flxable on cotton without a mordant, giving a purple-like
color.

S50,i68— October 5, 1886. R. SCHMITT AND C. KOLBE. Manvfa£lme qf napthotr
carbonic alkaline salts.
See Group XVIII, Fine Chemicals, Esters.
S51.0S6— October 19, 1886. F. KROGER. Pr(xludim of betanaphthol-disulpho
acids.

Process consists in introducing betanaphthol, 1 part, into concentrated
sulphuric acid, 4 parts, heated to 125° to 138° C, with temperature maintained
at 125° to 14.5° C. during four to five hours, when the thus olitained beta-
naphthol-disulpho acid is .separated by treatiug its acid or ueutral soda or lime
salts in aqueous solution witn common salt.

SSl,561— November 9, 18S6. C. SCHRAUBE. Production of acetine-blue colors.
Produced by mixing induline with or dissolving it in acetine.

S5S,26I,— November 25, 1886. C. L. MDLLER. Manufacture of siilplimated purple

dyestuffsfrom basic rosaniline.

Produced from the basic ro.saniline derivative resulting from the condensation
of tetraethyl-diamido-beuzopheuone with methyl-diphenylamine, by sulphoni-
zation of the same.

353,265— Nmrmber 23, 1886. C. L. MtJLLER. Manufacture of sulphonaled purple

dyestuffsfrom basic rosaniline.

Produced from the ba.sic rosaniline derivative resulting from the coudensatJon
of tetraethyl-diamido-benzophenone with benzyl-diphenyl-amine, by sulphoni-
zation of the same.

353,266— November 23, 1886. C. L. MtJLLER. Manufacture of sulplionated purple

dyestuffsfrom tMsic rosaniline.

Produced from the ba,sic rosaniline derivative resulting from the condensa-
tion of diethyl-amido-benzoie acid with methyi-diphenyl-amine, by sulphoni-
zation of the same.

S5/„7 II,— December 21, 1886. C. LOHMANN. Process of dyeing wool aiodiphenyl-

blue.

Wool and other animal fibrous materials are boiled in an aqueous solution of
azodiphenyl blue, extract of logwood, blue vitriol, green vitriol, an alkali bisul-
phate, and oxalic acid.

35l,,71,6— December 21, 1886. L.SCHAD. Production qf coloring matter.

A bluish black coloring matter produced by the combination of thedisulpho-
acid of diazo-azo-beiizol with i)ara-tolyl-beta-naphthylamine.

355,935— January 11, 1887. T. HOLLIDAY. NapMhol-dyed fabric.

The product of process No. 355,933, being the combination of cotton or otiier
fiber with oxide or soap of lead and alpha or beta napbthol, or coloring matter
formed with them.

S66,67t—January 25, 1887. H. VOLLBRECHT AND C. MENSCHING. Red color-
ing matter from alpha diazo heta-naplilhylaminc sulphonic acid.
" Brilliant red: " produced from the reaction of beta-naphthol with alpha

diazonaphthylaline monosulphonic acid.

357,273— February S, 1887. C. DUISBERG. Blue coloring matter from tetrazodi-

phenyl.

Produced by the action of tetrazo-diphcnol-dimethylestcr (ether) upon the
alpha naphthol alpha monosulpho acid. It dyes cotton not mordanted in a
boiling bath containing alkali, and develops with phosphate of soda or car-
bonate of iH>tjish into a deep blue, fast to mineral aciffs.

367,271,- February 8. 18S7. C. DUISBERG. Red coloring matter for dyeing by the

action of tetrazo dyes with beta-naptUhylamine sulpho acid.

Produced by azotizin^ llie diamido-diphenol-dimethylester (ether) (dianisi-
din) obtained by alkaline reduction of the nitro-phenol-methylester (ether)

(nitroanisol) and transforming the formed hydrazo-diphenol-dimcthylester
(ether) (hvdrazoanisol) bv means of acids, with sodium nitrite, forming the
tetrazo-diphenol-dimethvlester (ether) and heating it in an organic acid m\u-
tion with beta-naphthylamine-monosulpho acid. The aqueous solution dyes
dark blue by the action of strong acids. It dyes unmordanted cotton a bluish
red in an alkaline bath containing phosphate of soda or carbonate of potash.

358,865— March 8, 1887. C. A. MARTIUS. Prodttction of mixed azo coloring mutter.
Mixed azo colors are formed by combining the intermediate product formed
first bv one molecule of telrazodiphenyl, or tetrazoditolyl, or tetrazodixyhi and
one molecule of an amine, amido-sulpho-acid, ammocarbo-acid, phenol,
nhenol-sulplioacid, or phenol-carbo-acid. The reaction of salts of tetrazodi-
ohenvl or tetrazoditolvl upon amines, phenols, sulpho-acids, or carbo-acids at
first causes one molecuie of the tetrazo compound to combine with one molecule
of the amine phenol, sulpho-acid or carbo-acid. The first product containing
.still one free 'diazo group is able to be combined again with the same or another
amine, phenol, sulpho-acid or carbo-acid, forming a new azo color.

359,576— March 15, 1SS7. A. ROMER. Manufacture of red coloring matter.

Produced by first converting alpha-naphthalene-diamine (a reduction com-
pound of alpha-dinitro-naphthalene, fusing at 216° C.) into its tetrazo compound,
and afterwards combining one molecule of the tetrazo compound with two
molecules of naphthionic acid. It dyes unmordanted vegetable fiber a full and
bright red.
360,553— April 5, 1887. F. BENDER. Production of disulpho-acid of diamido-

ftilbene.

Produced by treating the soda salt of para-nitro-toluol-sulpho acid with caustic
Ive and reducing the red product of condensation with zinc dust in alkaline
sblution or with protochloride of tin in an acid solution. It is a yellowish
powder, hardly soluble in water or spirit, but dissolves easily in alkaline fluids.

360,792^ April 5, 1887. F. BENDER AND G. 8CHULTZ. Obtaining diazo colon

by means of diamido-stUbene and amido-fiuorene.

The process for producing azo colors, which dye cotton direct from a soap
bath by combining one molecule of the tetrazo compounds of stilbene or
fluor'ene (obtained from diamido-stilbene or diamido-fluorene) with two equal
or different molecules of an amine or a phenol, or of a sulphonic or carbonic
acid of an amine or a phenol.

361,mi,— April 19, 1887. P. FRIEDLAENDER. Combination of telrazodiphenyl

chloride with resorcin.

The red azo dyestuff produced by subjecting an alkaline solution of resorcin
to the action of tetrazo-diphenyl-chloride or tetrazo-ditolyl-chloride. It is
flxable without mordants.

362,560— May 10, 1887. A. WEINBERG AND H. SEIBERT. Production of a new

napthylamine-monosulphonic acid.

A color-producing acid which is a derivative of the new naphthol-monosul-
phonic acid, obtained bv heating sodium alpha-naphthalene-disulphonate with
i-ttustic soila to about 200° C. until dioxynaphthalene is formed, when it is
treated with an ammonium salt.

562,592— May 10, 1887. E. ULLRICH. Trimethyleihylthionin-blue coloring matter.
Produced bv joint oxidation of para-amido-dimethyl-aniline and ethyl-
methyl-aniline in presence of a hyposulphite. It is fixed on fiber by tannin and
emetic tartar.

362,813— .Way 10, 18S7. F. BAYER. Yellmv-red dyestuff from tetrazo-diphenyl.

A vellowish-red coloring matter produced by the action of the tetrazo com-
pound of benzidine upon beta naphthylamine deltamonosulphonic acid. It
ayes unmordanted cotton in an alkaline bath, and Is distinguished by being
easily soluble in hot water.

36-2,835— May 10, 18S7. T. HOLLIDAY. Process of dyeing.

Wool or other animal fiber is dyed by impregnating it with metallic mor-
dants and then immersing in a bath containing one or more nitroso compounds
of naphthols. The product is also claimed.

363,503— May 2h, 1SS7. F. BAYER. Manufacture of dyestuffs and coloring matter.
A bluish-red coloring matter produced by the action of the tetrazo compound
of toluidine on beta-naphthj-lamine deltamonosulphonic acid. It dyes cotton a
bluish red in a boiling alkaline or soap bath; color not altered by acetic acid.

S6l„320—June 7, 1SS7. E. ULLRICH. Nitrosophcnyl-bluc dyestuff.

Prepared bv the action of paranitroso-phenyltolylamine upon phenols or
oxvcarbonic acids. The paranitroso-phenyltolylamine is prepared from phe-
nyholvl-nitrosoamine by treatment with alcoholic hydrochloric acid. It is
fixed on the liber by chrome or iron mordants under addition of acetate of lime.
It dyes a greenish-blue shade.

365,1,09— Jwie 2S, 1887. J. ROHNER. Production of new coloring matter.

Brown, reddish-brown, and brownish-violet coloring matters: produced by
the action of metaphenylenediamine and metatoluylenediamine upon aniirtoazo-
benzole or amidoazo-toluol, or amidoazo-xylol, or amidoazo-anisol. They dye
directly unmordanted cotton.

365,666— June 28, 1SS7. P. BOTTIGER. Manufacture of new red dyestuffs or

coloring matters.

Process consists in combining the salts of tetrazodiphenyl with alpha or beta-
naphthylamines, and then treating the thus-formed dyestuffs with concentrated
sulphuric acid, anhydrous sulphuric acid, or mono chlorhydriiie, whereby the
mono or disulpho acids of said dyestuils, or the salts of said acids, are obtained.

365.667— June 28, 1887. V. BOTTIGER. Combiimtion qf the satis of tetrazo-
diphenyl and the naphtliytamincs.

A red dyestuff or coloring matter which rqsnlts from the sulphonated combi-
nation of the sails of tetrazo-diphenyl and the naphthylamines.

366,078— July 5, 18S7. C. DUISBERG. Maniifadure of dyestuffs or coloring matters.
A blue azo coloring matter iiroduce<l by the action of tctrazo-ditolyl upon the
monosulpho-acid of the alpnanaidithdl which is obtained by siilphonizing
alpha-naphthol, or by the decomposition of the alpha-diazo-naphthylamine
sulpho-acid (diazotized naphthionic acid) by boiling.

366,356— Jidy 12, 1887. E. ULLRICH. Blue coloring matter formed by the action
of paranitroso-dijihenylamines on phenols or oxycarbonic odds.
A blue coloring matter or dye.stuff produced by the action of paranitroso-

diphenylamine on phenols or oxycarbonic acid. In dyeing and in printing it

is fixed on the fiber by chrome or iron mordants, with the addition of acetate

of lime.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RKLATINO TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

215

aee.Ssr—jMll/ I!. '.W. E. ULI.KICH. Iltur nUnrina matter /nnint /nm jMranl-

trfMo-mrthytiltiihcnytamine tm phrwit* or ttryciirlKmic <irUt».

A blue coUirlirK iniiltor ur Myi-MtiifT prcfMirvfl by thu Action of imninltruM)'
iiu'thvlillphciiylnmine on plienoN nr oxycnrbonic Kciil. In dyeinic and In
(irlnlinK It In tlxeU uu tlbcr uy duumv or Iron inonlauu, with the ttdUittun n(
Hoelntc of llmu.

See.av—liiliJ ll. litST. E. ULLRICH. Prmliirllim i\J MmtthvldiflhyUhUmin-titue.
I'rtHlui'cil by Joint oxldiitlon of luirumldiMllmi'thyliinlllncand dluthylnnlUne
In |in>»i'ni'o of n liviM>siil|ihllu, or of paruntldodlvthylHtilUnu iind dImcthyUnI'
line In iiri'seni'i- oi hypOHnlphtto. The coloring matter la lUcd on the (ItJer by
UK'ttnii of Iiinnin nnd cinellc tartar.

»;iS,i!i.ii—Ji(liiI-. tssr. K.ULLRICH. Pnxluclimntiticlhi/lmethi/ttliinnlnhluc.

I'riMliH't'd by Joint oxidation of poninil'l<wllotbyiiinlllno nnd monomcthyl-
aniiino In pn-wnco of a hyiKtsulphitc.

KS.OH—Auj/uHtii, ism. R, BOHN. Manu/acUirr of mluble naphHuuarln.

"Solublo naphthazurln " (dioxynnphthannlnone): produced by dlKCKtlni; n
mixture (>f naiihtliazarin in h .loiution of K)diuni bisulphite In a cloaca vcascl at
from ."HI'' to7(t°('. for about ciRht days. It Is suiiubio In water and cbaroctcrlzt^l
by cxtrciuf i't4ibllity In the ]>rcscncc of ncid.s.

)I>S.7 16— August M, ISSf. E. GRKPPIN. Prorem /or Ihc production of btite color-
ing matter.

Blue coloring matters of unsymmetrieol sirurture. produced by the oxidation
of a mixture of pammidodimcthylanlllne or the derivatives of diethvlaniline,
dlmethylanillnc. dlmcthyl-orthotoluidine. mcthylethyl^)rthotoluldlne, and
parHphenylcndiamlncorparatoluylendiamlne (paradlamldotoluol) In the pres-
ence of hydroKeu sulphide In acid solution.

SSS.rsV- ."*i>'fin*»T U, ISS7. J. ANNAHEIM. Manufacture <>/ blue coloring mailer.
Products for the manufacture of coloring matters are produced by treating a
mixture of bioxvnaphthalene and ftnillnc, or one of tne bomttlogues of the
latter, witli a eoniliiising agent, ami freeing the pro<iuct of condensallon. Color-
ing nuillen* are obtained by treating .such productnof condensation directly with
nitroso conibinalions of the tertiary aromatic amines, or by reducing the nltroso
combinations and oxidizing the resulting diamine and the pioauct of con-
densation.

S:i^S»— December e.issr. A. LIEBMANN. ilonomlpho-actd qf alpha-naphthol.

Produced by mixing alpho-naphthol, 1 part, with 4 parLs of concentrated
aulphurlc acid. 170° to 185° C, and heating for about an hour at 130° C. The
mixture of sulpho-acids Is converte<l into their barium salts, treated with gase-
ous hydrochloric acid, nnd the barium .'■alt crystallized out. The new sulpho-
acid does not, on nitration, lose its sulpho group; but vieids, with nitric acid,
dlnltro-sulpho-alpha-naphthol. It forms dyestutis with diazo compounds.

S7i.SUi-^anuary S, ISSS. A. WEINBERG AND H. SEIBERT. MamiTacture of
(lyestufft.

A coloring matter produced by the action oJ tetrazo-dltolyl upon the naph-
thylamlne sulphonlc add of No. 362,660. It dyes unmordantcd cotton a bluish
red similar to safTranine.

S7S.D30— January S, 1888. P. FRIEDLAENDER AND B. PRIEBS. Produclion of

orange azo dyeatuffs.

Produced by adding a solution of metatoluylenediamlne sulpho-acid to a
solution of tetrazo-dilolylehloridc prepared from tolidinc sulphate, and after-
wards adding a solulion of .salicylic acid. It has a striking affinity for raw cot-
ton liber, dyeing without a mordant.

S:6,ag»— January 10, 1SS8. A. MYLINS. Production qf a new red azo color.

Process coniiista in mixing nitro-aniline with water acidulated with sulphuric
Bcid; dlazotlzlng by adding sodium nitrate; mixing therewith, with agitation,
•iphanaphthylaminedisulphonateof sodium; flltering, and saturating with so-
dium carbonate, and drying.

g;7,H»— January 31,1888. M.CERESOLE. Production qf new red cotoring mailer.
Tetrameihyl-rhodamlne: produced by the condensation of one molecule of
plithalio aniiydrlde or Its halogen substitution products, with two molecules of
dimethyl-meta-amidophcnol or of its alkyl derivatives; dyes in pure tints from
pink to crimson.

S77.3iO— January )1,1SS8. M.CERESOLE. Production qf new red coloring mailer.
Tetmcthyl-rhodamlne: produced by the condensation of one molecule of
phthaiic anhydride, or of its halogen substitution products, with two molecules
of diethyl-meia-amidophcnol, or of its alkyl derivatives. It dves In pure tints
from pink ti) crimson.

379.110— .Varch 6, 1888. R. BOHN. Dyeing animal leUile /abrict wifA naphllia-
zarin.

Chrome lakes of naphthazarin are produced within or upon textile fibers by
expotilng said Hbers to the action of chromium mordants and naphthazarin in
dyeing. The shades vary from a black to a delicate gray or slate color.

3SO.oe7— March *?, ISSS. A. WEINBERG. Produclion n/ neu} diamido rompovmdi

ami qf ato colore produced Uiere/rom.

Prooese consists in combining the ethers of the tctrazo-oxy-<liphenyl and of
the tetrazo-oxy-phenyl-tolyl with two equal or different molecules of an amine
or of a phenol, or of a sulphonlc or carbonic acid of an amine or of a phenol.

asu.n9ii—Marcht7,188S. T. DIEHL. Coloring malter from Uie tuipho^icidt qf ethul
or diphenylamine combined Willi lelrazo-diphenyl or Ictrazoditolyf.
Substantive cotton coloring matters, produced by the action of one molecule
of tetrazo salt upon two molecules of the suiphfHacids of monoethylanlllne or
diphenylamine. They may be subsequently combined with phenols, salicylic
acids, phenolBulpho-aclds, the sulpho-acidsof alpha and beta naphthol. of of
alpha and beta naphthyiaminc.

SSO.Wt— April ), 1SS8. L.PAUL. Production qf diMulpho and dicarbu a<M» of Uu
duimidmivH)enzidinet.

It eonslsu In the processes for producingmonoand diamidoazo-licnzldlnes
ttanslorniation of tlicm Into tetrazo coinp<.und.s. and their eombinalion with
amines and phenols, or thesulpho-acids of theselxKlio. and in the colors pnHlueed
therefrom. Coloring matters are produetHl by the coinbiiiution of (ai tetraziv
dlpbenyl, tetnizo-ditolyl. tetrnzonlfxylyl; (b) tetrazo-diplieiiyi-diearlxmacldand
Us ethers; (c) tctrazo comp.iunds of the ethers of diamiilo-diphcnol; (d) tetrazo-
fluorene. tetrazo-stUbcne, or the sulpho-acids of these bodies, with two molecules
of aniline, toluidine, xylidlne, and cumidine, or their sulpho acids.

»». Ua-April i. lim. L. PAUL. Production qfdtttUplio and dtearho aeidtofthe
diamidoaztt-hmzidinrg.

It conalsbi In tetraiotlzlng benzidine, tolldlne, and dlnmldodlxylyl, and ih«
combination of the thus obtained letrazo com pound* with one .>r two molecules
of meta or (Hira amido lH>nz»l su!ph»-acld, or orlbo, roela, or parmainldo-t>cnio4c
add, or the nulphonciils of ortho or pars toluldloe or xylidlne In alcoboUe
solution, and the t>rislucts thereof.

S80,MT—AprU 10, 1888, A. P. POIRRIER AND D. A. ROSEN8TIKBL. Prodite-
liim qf azo colon.

I*ro<lueed by rtnludng in an alkaline me<llum nitroaromatir amines, Mrtlcu-
larly metnnltranillne, the isomeric nitrotoiuidlncs fusible at 107° f:. nnattPC,
and nitn>-xylidlne fusible at 12:!° C. onri loniblnlng thepoiynzodcrivatlreaof
thc«<^ rciluction pnHlucts with the phcnolH. the oxyphenols, the naphthola, the
oxynaphthols, the primary, si-condiiry. anil terllnry amines, the diamines, and
also the alkyl, sulpho, and earboxyl 'lerivallves of all these txjdies.

880,9*8— April 10, teas. A. F. POIRRIER AND Z. R0US8IN. Production i4

diazoic coloring maUer$.

Produceil by the reaction o( the nitrodlazo benzols, toluols, xylols, etc., with
the Isomers and homologues of alpha-napbthylamlne sulpho, especially the
naphthlonic add of Witt.

881,01,5— AprU 10, 1888. O. N. WITT. Manufacture of purpU-blaek azo dyetiuff.

Produced by transforming assymmetrical binitro-anillne (m. p. 180° C.) Into
lis diazo derivative, and treating same with sodium beta-napntbyUmine mono-
sulphate (Brenner's modification) andsodic acetate.

asi.OW— ylpr« to, 188.1. O. N. WITT. Purple azo dyeituff.

Produced by transforming assymmetrical binltro-anlllne (m. p. 180" C.) Into
ita diazo derivative, and treating same with s<x11um beta-naphthylamine dlsul-
phonate, such as may be obtained by heating betanaphthol dlsulphonate acid
( R) with caustic ammonia under pressure, and sodic acetate.

SSI. 1st— April 17, 1S8S, E. HASSENKAMP. Prntluetinn of Uuf-red azo dyeiiuff
by Iheaaion of letrazo-ditolyl tall* on bela-uniMhytamine mommiliiho acid.
Produced by the action of tetrazo-dltolyl salts of the alkylate<l ilcrlvatives of

beta-naphthylamine monosulpho-acid. It dyes unmordantcd cotton bluish red,

fast to diluted acids.

381.1,71- AprU 17,1888. E. HASSENKAMP. Proccnqf producing Uue-red coloring
mailer.

It consists in combining salts of the tetrazo compound of paradiamines or their
sulphonlc or carbonic acids with the alky-naphthylamine sulphonlc adds.

S8t,8at—Uay IB, 18SS. C. RUDOLPH. Production of yellow coloring matter.

" Benzoflavine;" produced from benzaldehyde and toluyien or phenyl-diamine
by first condensing benzakleliyde with tlie said diamines, heating the tetra-
amines thus formed with IXKlie.-* capable of separating ammonia, and then
oxidizing the products (the hydro-phenylacridines).

38I,,S15— July U, 1888. M. HERZBERG. Manufacture of dyeMufft.

Brown dyestufis are produced by combining the salts of diazo compounds of
aniline, toluidine, xylidine, cumidine. and the nitro^erlvatives of the same,
amidOHzo-benzoI, amidoazo-toluol, amidoazo-xylol, alpha and beta naphthyia-
minc, or their sulpho and carbo acids, and tetrazo compounds of benzidine,
benzidinc-sulpho, toluidine, diamido-stllbene, or their sulpnoorcarboaclda, with
Bismarck brown (trlamidoazo-benzol or triamidoazo-toluol). Insoluble colors
are rendered soluble by sulphonatlon.

3Si,31»— June It, 1888, M. HERZBERG. Man^facture qf dyetluffi.

A brown coloring matter, produced by the action of diazo compound of naph-
thyiaminc sulpho-ocid on Bismarck brown (triamidoazo-beuzol or triamidoazo-
toluol).

SSi,Sia—June IS, 1888. R. G. WILLIAMS. Xew coloring matter obtained by the

acUon qftetrazo-diamido benzole on phenoU.

Produced by the action of tctrazo-diamldo benzole (hydrochlorate) or its
homologues on resorcin, the phenols, Ijcnzoic, the oxybenzoic acids, and alpha-
naphthol, or their substitution products, on aniline and its homologues, beta-
naphthol and the naphthylamines, or ttelr sutwtitutlon products, and on the
sulpho-acids of the above amines, amides, and phenols, or tlieir substitution
products.

S8l,,iS0-^UHe H, 1888. E. ULLRICH. Production of blue coloring matter.

Process of producing methylene-blue by subjecting a solution containing
paramido-dimetbylaniTlne, hydrochlorate of dimethylanlline, and sodium hypo-
.suiphlte to the action of an oxidizing agent, as bichromate, with heat.

SSS,19t^/uly 17, 1888. S. FDREL. Obtaining ozyazoic coloring matter from tetrazo

diphenyl and dilolyl.

Produced by the action of tetrazo-dltolyl on phenol, or of tetrazo-diphenyl
and tetrazo-dltolyl on phenol and orthocresylol In alkaline solution. It yields
a bright yellow on vegetable fiber in an alkali or soap bath.

386.709— Jidy K, iSSS. W. K ELBE. Production of coloring lubttaneet by Uu reac-
tion of aromatic hydrazin gulphonic acids mi retenchinon.

A red coloring matter, characterized by great fastness: produced by the con-
densation of an aromatic hydrazin sulphonlc acid with retenchinon.

387,097— July SI, 1888. P. MOXNET. Dyeing colon by the simultaneous oxidation

qf diamines a»cf monamines.

Colors or tinl.'i — as blacks, more or less brown or blue— are produced directly
upon the materials by the oxi<lation of a mixture of a .salt of a simple diamine —
as the chlorobydrate of paraphenyiene-dlamiue — and the salt of a simple
monamlne, as the chlorobydrate of aniline.

388,185— August tl, 1888. C. DUISBERG. Rlue azo coloring maUer.

Produced by the action of tetrazo-diphenoldicthyi ether U|x>n the alpha-
naphthyl alpha-monosulpho acid, whicn Is obiained by suiphonlzing alpha,
naphthol or by the decomposition of the alphadiazonaphthylamlne sujpho-acld
by boiling. It dyes unmordantcd cotton In a boiling alkaline bath a mat deep
blue, more red than the homologous product of No. 357.273.

S83,lt7— September 4, ;8S8. H. WOLFF. Production of uew azo colors.

Produced by dlazotlzlng nilrodiamidotriphenyl-methane or its sulpho-conju-
gallons, and combining with an aromatic amido or diamido compound, phenols,
or their sulpho-conjugatlons.

390Me— October 9, 1888. B. F. CRE8SON. Dyeing aniline Nad.

An aniline-black coloring solution is formed by dinolvlng and mixing In
water, chlorate of potash, sal ammoniac, sulphate of copper, nitrate of lion and

216

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

tragacanth gum. and forming another liquor of aniline oil, muriatic aeia, tar-
taric acid and water, and then mixing the liquors.

SsejeS— November IS, 18SS. E. ELSAESSER. Blue coloring maUer obtained from

paraplienylen-diamin£, etc.

Derived from paraphenylene-diamine and hydrochlorate of amidoazo-benzole
or its equivalents (hydrochlorate of phenyl-amidoazo-benzole, amidoazo-ben-
zole-monosulpho-acid, or phenyl-amidoazo-benzol-monosulpho acid). It is sol-
uble in cold and hot water.

S9J,,ii5— December 11. 1888. R. G. WILLIAMS, Action of salts of teirazo-ditolyl or

diphenyl on dihydroxides of toluene or their mdpho-acids.

Red coloring matters, dyeing unmordanted cotton in an alkaline bath: formed
bv the action of a salt of tetrazo-diphenyl or tetrazo-ditolyl, or the sulpho-acids
o{ a salt of tetrazo-diphenyl or tetrazo-ditolyl on the dihydroxides of toluene, or
the sulpho-acids of the same.
S9i.Sl,l—I)ecevrber IS, 18S8. C. DUISBERG. Manufacturing of coloring maUers.

A yellow coloring matter produced by the action of tetrazo compound of ben-
zidine, tolidine or diamidodiphenolether upon cresol carbonic acid.

S9S, 080— December So, 18SS. C. RUDOLPH. Coloring matter.

An amidobenzoflavine dvestuff produced from amidoditolylphenylmethan,
bv transforming the nitrotetraamidoditolylphenylmethan into pentaamidoditol-
ylphenylmethan, then into hydrotriamidodimethylphenylacridine, and finally
into the amidobenzoflavine. Cotton mordanted with tannic acid is dyed a
greenish yellow.

395,115 — December 36, 188S. F. BENDER, rroductioii of coloring matter.

A fast vellow coloring matter obtained from paranitrotoluol-sulpho-acid by
treating t"he unstable yellow dyestuff of No. 3.50,229 with chlorinating, bromi-
nating, nitrating, or alkylating agents. When treated with soda-lye it is not
changed in color to red.

S95,SO0— December 25, 1888. A. WEINBERG. Blue coloring matter from nitroso

derivatives upon phenylene-diamines.

A class of blue coloring matters produced by the action of paranitroso deriv-
atives of .secondary and tertiary amines upon diphenylmetaphenylendiamine,
ditolylmetaphenyl'endiamine, or dixylylmetaphenylendiamine.

390,1,71,— January 1, 1SS9. F. BAYER, llannfacture ofdyestuffs or coloring matters.
Process of producing red azo colors consists in combining betanaphthyl-
aniinedeltasufpho acid with the group of tetrazo compounds of paradiamines,
such as tetrazodiphenyl, tetrazoditolyl, tetrazodiphenylether, tetrazostilbeu, or
their sulphonic acids.

395,631,— January 1, 1889. C. RUDOLPH AND B. PRIEBS. Orange aco dyestuff.
Produced from tolidin by diazotation and subsequent heating with cresotin
acid and toluylendiaminesulpho-acid. It ea-sily dissolves in hot water, and the
solution in concentrated sulphuric acid is vioiet red.

396,i93—July IS, 1889. C. RUDOLPH. Tetrazo dyestuff.

Blue-black tetrazo dyestuff produced from the sulpho-acids of the amido
cresols by their combination with naphthylamine, the diazotation of the com-
pound thus formed, and its combination with naphtholdisulpho acid.

S96,-29l,— January 15, 1889. C. RUDOLPH AND B. PRIEB.S. Yellmv coloring matter.
Produced by the action of tetrazodiphenyl or ditolyl chloride upon one mole-
cule of beta cresotinic acid and the subsequent treatment of the intermediate
body with salicylate of soda.

S9e,l,n— January a, 1889. S. M. NEVILLE. Dye.

A coloring composition, insoluble in water and alcohol and soluble in benzine,
turpentine, and similar solvents: consisting, essentially, of common soap dis-
solved in water, coloring matter — as aniline colors such as will dissolve in liquid
soap — and sulphate of zinc.

396,517— January gt, 1889. F. BENDER. Production of coloring matter.

Prodaced by the action of caustic alkalis upon paranitrotoluol sulpho acid in
presence of water, alcohol, or glycerine with an oxidable substance, of mineral
or organic nature. It dyes unmordanted cotton in fast shades, depending upon
the nature of the oxidable agent employed.

$96,571, — January SS, 1889. A. KERN. FormxUion of purple coloring matter.

A purple coloring matter, CioHi4N20.-,HCl, obtained from the methylic ether of
gallic acid and hydrochloric nitroso-dimethylaniline.

396,693— January Si, 1889. G. GRUN. Printing of indidine dyestuffs.

Process consists in mixing the induline paste with the formylethers of glvcer-
ine (obtained by heating oxalic acid with glycerine to 110° C. until the develop-
ment of carbonic acid begins).

398,990— March 5, 1889, J. WALTER. Process of making a yellow dye.

Sulphuric acid is added to an aqueous solution of sodium. salt of thiopara-
toluidine sulphonic acid, the precipitate cooled with ice, a solution of sodium
nitrate gradually added, the diazo solution poured into an alkaline solution of
salicylic acid containing enough caustic soda to saturate the acids, and the
mixture boiled and the color precipitated with salt.

1,01,02/,— April 9, 1889. E. FRANK. Vellow dye.

Produced by the action of tetrazo-ditolyl upon salicylic acid. It dyes cotton
a more reddish yellow than the homologous product (No. 329,638) of benzidine.

M)l,l,83— April 16, 1889. T. DIEHL. Crimson dye.

Process consists in first combining one molecule of beta-phenylnaphthylamine
monosulpho acid with one molecule of a tetrazo salt. The obtained product is
afterwards subjected to the action of phenols, amines, or other sulpho or carbon
acids. Unmordanted cotton is dyed direct.

Wl,63i— April 16, 1889. R. BOHN. AlizarirK-blue great.

Produced by the successive action of sulphuric anhydride and of alkalis or
mineral acids upon alizarine blue.

1,01,631,— April 16, 1889. R. BOHN. Ckirhazol-yeUow.

Produced by the combination of one molecule of tetrazo-carbazol with two
molecules of salicylic acid. It dyes cotton without mordants, and dyes animal
fiber in a neutral or acidified bath.

U)1,6S5— April 16, 1889. R. BOHN. Alizarine-green sulpho-acid.

Produced by the action of moderately-strong fuming sulphuric acid at 130° to
136? C. upon alizarine green. It corresponds in chemical constitution and
behavior to a true and staple sulphonated derivative of alizarine green. It
dyes chrome-moManted wool green sbEules.

U>!1,1,38— April 30, 1889. R. GNEHM. Red carbon color.

Obtained from succinic acid and diethylmetaamidophenol. It dyes wool,
silk, and mordanted cotton a brilliant red with yellow fluorescence.

1,03,980— May 7, 1889. J. SCHMID. Aso dye.

Azo bodies produced by the combination of alphadiazouaphthaline with
metaamidophenol or its dialkylized derivatives. They possess the same proper-
ties as the azo bodies obtained from metaamidophenol.
t,01,,097—May 38, 1889. A. LIEBMANN. Production of yellow coloring matter.

Produced bv treating a diazo compound of primuline (polychromineate) with
an alkaline solution of beta-naphthol, producing an insoluble compound, which
is rendered soluble by treating with bisulphite of soda.
iOi.lOS—May 38. 1889. J. HAHN. Process of dissolving aniline Colors.

Aniline is directly united with vegetable oil by dissolving aniline in hot
water adding part of the solution to oil, boiling the mixture, adding the re-
mainder to the boiling oil, and stirring the mixture until the water has
evaporated.
l,0i,S09—May 38, 1889. J. SCHMID. Blue azo dye.

Obtained by subjecting the dialkylized azonaphthalene-metaamido-phenol to
the action of a reducing ag'int and subsequent treatment with an oxidizing
agent.
Uti.SSl-May 28, 1889. R. GREVILLE- WILLIAMS. Compound orcine dye.

Produced by combining one molecule of tetrazo-diphenyl or tetrazo-ditolyl or
their sulpho-acids with first one molecule of naphthylamine. or its known sul-
pho-acids; and then combining this intermediate product with one molecule of
orcine or sulpho-acids of the same. The colors are faster against light than No.
394,425.
1,05,938— June 25, 1SS9. M. ANDRESSEN. Naphihot-disulphonic acid.

A newlalpha-naphthol-disulphonic acid obtained by first forming naphthalene-
disulphonic acid by treating naphthalene with sulphuric acid and monochle-
hydrin, or with fuming sulphuric acid, then treating with nitric acid, reducing
the alpha-nitro-naphthalene-disulphonic acid to alpha-amido-naphthalene-
disulphonic acid, and separating and converting into the corresponding alpha-
naphthol-disulphonic acid. It acts upon the diazo compounds of diphenyl,
ditolyl, stilbene, etc.

1,06,669— July 9, 1889. T. SANDMEYER. Red color.

Red to violet colors produced by boiling ortho-toluidine with caustic soda and
gradually adding nitro-benzene, reducing with zinc powder, treating with con-
centrated muriatic acid, boiling, diluting, and filtering, when Glauber's salt Is
added to precipitate the sulphate, and the paste is mixed with muriatic acid,
cooled and diazotized, and the product is treated with a solution of soda and
naphthionate of sodium, heated, and the color precipitated.

We.eno— July 9,1889. T. SANDMEYER. YeUoio color.

Produced by boiling ortho-toluidine with caustic soda and gradually adding
nitro-benzene, reducing with powdered zinc, treating with muriatic acid, boil-
ing, diluting, and filtering, when Glauber's salt is added, the product is diazo-
tized. poured into a solution of caustic soda, soda, and salicylic acid, heated,
and the color precipitated. It dyes unmordanted cotton.

1,06,952— Jidy 16, 1889. W. PFlTZIfJGER. Thioparatoluidine.

A new thioparatoluidine: produced by melting paratoluidine and sulphur to
180° to 220° C. and then to 25C° C, and purifying the product. It is infusible at
220° C, nearly insoluble in boiling alcohol and concentrated hydrocholoric
acid, and combines with fuming sulphuric acid to form a new sulphonic acid,
the soda salt of which dyes unmordanted cotton yellow in an alkaline bath.

1,07 ,906— July 30, 1889. B. R. SEIFERT. Process of making paraoxybeiizoic acid.

See Group I, Acids, Other Organic.
1,09,381,— August iO, 1889. C. S. BEDFORD. Compound dye.

A coloring matter consisting of the active principle of fustic dyewood with
a diazo compound, produced by treating an aqueous extract of fustic dyewood
with a slightly acid solution of a salt of diazo-benzene, diazo-toluene. diazo-
xylene or diazo-naphthalene, adding the requisite quantity of alkali, and sep-
arating the coloring matter.

1,09,832— AuguMt 37, 1889. J. BRACEWELL. Aniline black.

Formed of ferrocyanide of soda, chlorate of potash, and aniline salts prepared
so as to be free of hydrochloric acid; that is to say, with the ferrocyanide in
amount sufficient to take up the aniline and the chlorate in quantity not less
than 35 per cent of that of the aniline, and thereby prevent tne formation of
chlorate of aniline in injurious quantity in the color.

1,10,057— Augwit 27, 1889. R. GREVILLE-WILLIAMS. Process cf making orcine

dye.

It consists in combining one molecule of any alkalized orcine — as the mono,
di, or tri methyl, ethyl, amyl, or acetyl orcines — or one molecule of a sulpho-
acid of an alkalized orcine with the intermediate product formed by combining
one molecule of tetrazo-diphenyl. or one molecule of any of the other tetrazo
compounds of dixylyl, stilbene] fluorine of naphthalene or their sulpho acids,
with one molecule of one of the sulpho-acids of naphthylamine. They dye
unmordanted cotton in an alkaline or soap bath.

1,10,058— August 27, 1889. R. GREVILLE-WILLIAMS. Process of making orcine
dyes.

It consists in combining one molecule of a compound formed by combining
orcine with- sodium chloride, with the intermediate product formed by combin-
ing one molecule of a tetrazo compound of diphenyl, ditolyl, dixylyl, stilbene,
fluorene, or naphthalene or their sulpho acids, with one molecule ot one of the
sulpho-acids of naphthylamine.

1,10,295— September 3, 1889. R. SCHMITT. Process of making heta-napMhol carbon

acid.

Beta-naphthol carbon acid of a m. p. 216° C. is produced by the reaction of car-
bonic acid upon the alkaline salts of the beta-naphthol under pressure and at
200° to 250° C.

l,10,73S—September 10, 1889. R. GEIGY. Process of making a violet dye.

Twenty kilos of gallamide is heated with 30 kilos of the chlorhydrate of
nitroso-dimethylaniline in a solution of acetic acid.

1,10,739— Heptemher 10, 1889. T. SANDMEYER. Process of making aurin deriva-
tives.

Salicylic acid, 2 parts, dissolved in concentrated sulphuric acid, 15 parts,
and methyl alcohol, 4 parts, is heated to 70° C, after which IJ parts of sodium
nitrate is added, and then poured into water by which the product is precipi-

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUS Till ES.

217

t«Co<l. It I* Ihpn wn«ho<l, mtiirntpd with nn nlkHll. anit <lrlpcl. Il illniolvri In
(wuiitin MHin with bniwn, nnci In amnionin with rvd culur. Oxiilv* of inctali
(orm lakiw: chmniliip Inkv n( n rvA violet tint.

Ul.lUf—SriitrmUr 17, JXfw. I). E. Ht'lU'ENIN. Rlueiiyc.
A compouuil dyv ronsIatliiK n( ln<llK<> nnil Indophcnnl.

lUjia—Orliibtr 1, Ii>ii9. H. lilSKVIl, I. K WILLIAMS. Prneea rif mating dyt:

It c<iti»li<t« liicombliiltr !I-ninil(totrK»i<ll|ihcnyl

mul Us hoinnl(iKUr*<, t. iIh'Iu-. tt'lmwhllnoreno,

tolm/.iwIiiilK'iiiil I'lhiT, !■ I iiinli.([iuii. ti'trnzoiixydl-

phiMivl. mill tlu-alkYllr.t'il r<>uiiK»iii<lN or tin- Milph^ur iarl»i iicUliiof Ihi' naiiii')
with two inohTiiKwiif all alkylin-<l luiil of iho iinlillla llchi'iiii (ir lial<i|{i.'ii <ir
inilph<>rinii|Kminl» ol thu tumc. They dyi' uiiiiiordaiitiil cotton In an alkaline
or wmp tiatli.

l,lt.lUt—(idnt>erl.l8aa. R. GREVILLE-WILLIAMS. Proeett ctf makino ilyri.

MIxihI roloring niattciK iinxluced by Hist enmblnlnir one molecule of a tetrazo
coniiHuind ( No. 41'.'.l-f») with one inoU'eiile ot one ii( the amines or plu'nol* (the
«,,i,.[,.. ,,. i.|» ,,( the naphthylamlnes, the naphtliols. monoethylnniline.diphcnyl-
I lieacidl. and then eombintnff this interniodlnto product with one

1 iTi alkyllxed acid of tbc orchllla lichen or halogen or aulpho com-

|n...,,., ... .„< same.

ili.UO—Orloker S. 1SS9. A. WEINBERO. Am colnrinn mntlrr.

Pnxl 1 >'^ 'i>" ai'tion of dlawi derivatives of comtHiumls obtained from

naplu' '1 diazo-sulphitnie acids upon alpha or beta naphlhylamiiie.

It gi\' shades in an aciduiatetl oath, and dilTers from naphthol-

black- :. . . ..Li-by the presence of the amide group, and tiy Its greater
Intenaii) and rtsiatancc to washing and millinK.

Un.61S—<Kititirr S. ISSa. A. HERRMANN, (Rcitnue: ll.on—May tO, isao.) Color-

imj HiattiT.

A blue-green «>loring matter, llic sulphonic acid of melAoxytetralkvldiamido-
triphenyl carblnol, produced by dissolving mcta-amido-tetmlkyldiamidotri-

Slienyl 'methane In a mineral acid, dia/otizmg by a nitrous acid or a nitrite,
eeomposing by boiling with water, prwlpitaliiig with sofIa or sulphate, and
lioiliiiK the nsiililug oxy leiico ba.se with water until It becomes neutral, snl-
phoiiuting In- heating with concentrated or fuming sulphonic acid, and oxidizing
witli pemxide of lead or similar agent. It is characterized by great resistance to
the action of alkalis.

Ut.eii— October 8, SS89. A.HERRMANN, [ReUtue: ll.ms—May to, 1890.) Cblor-

ing mattrr.

,\ blue-green coloring matter, the sulphonic acid oi meta-amidotelralkyldiam-
Idotrlphenyl carbini»l, prtslure<l by dis-solving nu'l*i-aniid(>letralkyldirtniidotri-
phenyl methane in fuming sulphuric acid, heating until a sample gives a clear
Bolnti'on with cold ammonia, converting the prttduet iut^i the calcium f>r scxlium
gall, oxidizing the leuco sulphonic compound thus obtained with peroxide of
lead or maiigaiie.se and dilute sulphuric acid, filtering and evaporating to dryness.

Ut.eiS— October 8, 1889. A.HERRMANN. Cohrmg matter.

A fast green-blue coloring matter obtained from the etherized compounds of
metaoxytetralkyldiamidotriphenyl methane or metamethyoxy or metaethjrozy
tetralkyldlamldotriphenyl carblnol,

ill, ms— October 15, 1889. J. ROSENHEK. Production o/peUow dyeitufft.

"Thioflavlne T," obtained by introducing alcohol radicals into the primary
thiunated bases from paratoluldinc and xylidine, and which as chlorhydrate i.s
soluble In water, alcohol, and diluted acid. It dyes mordanted cotton a bright
yellow.

Ui. 979— October 15. 1889. J. ROSENHEK. Production of yellow coloring matter.

Obtained by solphonating thio bases from paratoluidine and xylidine.
US,OiS— October m. 1889. R. GNEHM AND J. SCHMID. Viold coloring maUnr.

Monophenylmeta-amldopheuolphthaleine, pnxluced by melting two mole-
cules of metaoxydiphenylaiiilne with one molecule of phtbalic-acid anhydride
in the presence of a condensing agent, as zinc chloride, at 160° to 170° C.

ili.Oia—Oetdber IS, 1889. R. GNEHM .\ND J. SCUMID. Slue coloring matter.

Pbenylmeta-amidopheiioldi<*hlorrihthalclne, produced by the reaction of
dichliirophthalic acid on metaoxydiphcnylamine in the presence of a conden.s-
ing agent, as zinc chloride, at 170^ to 200° C.

tlS.OKt-October 15, 1889. R. GNEHM AND J. SCHMID. (fray coloring matter.

Phenylmeta-amidophenoltetrachlorphthaleine, a dark green powder, pro-
duced by the reaction of tetrachlorophthalic aeid on metaoxydiphenylamlne
in the presence of a condensing agent, a.s zinc chloride, at 180° to 210° C.

Ui..vS2— October iZ, 1889. .4. SARAl'W. Production oj aso roloring matter.

The process consists In reacting with a salt of the nitroso derivatives of the
tertiary amines, more especially nllroflo-dlmetbyl-anlllne, upon a bioxynaph-
thallne whose boiling point is above 186° C. in the presence of heat and a suit-
able solvent. The coloring matter ranges from violet-blue to blue.

US.rti— October S9, 1889. H.D.KENDALL. Broumdye.

A fast-brown coloring matter produced by treating dlritroso-resordn (Alsace
green) or Its bomologues with a hydrosulphite.

U5.0S»— November IS, 1889. R. BOHN. Trioxybmtophmone.

Produced by the condensation of equal molecules of pyrogallol and benzoic
acid. It combines with metallic mordants; gives fast yellow shades with alum-
ina, and brown shades with iron and chrome mordants. M. p. 137° to 138° C.

4J,5,2«7— iVoirmfier 19, 1889. M. ULRICH. Proeett oS making dioxynaphthalene

monotuipho-acid. ,

The process consists In melting the beta-naphthol alpha disulpbo acid (the
so-called " R" salt) or the beta-naphthol beta or gamma disnlpho acid (the so-
called '• Q" acid) with caustic alkali at above WfP C.

ilS.tHS—yorember 19. 1889. M. I'LRICH. .izobhir color.

Produce<l by the action of tetrazo.<llphenol ether upon the diox)'naphthalene
monosulpho acid gained by melting beta-naphtbol beta or gamma disiilpho
add with caustic alkali.

USM»— November 19. 1889. E. ELfiAESSER. Proeett of maUng panUotutdine nU-

pho-acid.

The process of producing yellow dycstufis from paratoluldinc consists In
extracting the soluble parts or crude dlthloparatoluidine with alcohol. Altering
and converting the residuum Into a 8ulpb<vacld by agitating it with ftuning
sulphuric acid containing sulphuric anhydride.

dlnieihylnnllinc, siibmllliiiK Ibis dlninlne. In ml^

f>hlt«>, (o nn oxidizliiu ngent to traiisrorm ti In!-'
hloMutplurnic acid, liicii prorlucing

il9,0M—.\omnher M, IS89. <>. DXKLIKRR AND 11. A. BEKNTHHKN. ^f'lnu-
farlure of IninUtinr btur.

PhmIiici-*! by conv«Ttlng (lltncdiylaniline intinirnlfk>>

'ilainlne, in ml.\' hyfxjual-

:ur,lllne-
' nn
nxidi/ing agent a Krecn indarninc (r. -iiU

Into loliildorie lilue by healing it with / ,x|.

dlzing agent. It Is a redder tint than mctliyknc blue.

kin.llJi—SorrmlicrtS. 1889. K. GKEVII.I.K-WILLIAMK. i Kriiuiie: 11.178— Julytl,

ISUI. ) t'ritrcM of tn*tking itzo dyrn.

I'rodu<i'il by combining one molecule ol a tctrazn compound (tctrazn-
dipbenyl and Its bomologues. tetrBzi>-napbtbnlene, Ietrn7x»-stllli«-iii' ii-trny^f.
fluorine, tetnizo-<liphen'iletlicr, telrnzo-tM-iizol,? aiKl its boinologti \y.

diphenyl as well as (be alkyllz«.-d (■oniisMinds, or (In* rnrls) or of

the same t with one niole<'uie of iiapbtlialeiH'-tu/»-naphthylHniln j^ho

comiHiiinds. and afterwanls acting on the lntemiedlat<; Ixsly thiw loriucl with
one molecule of one of the napbthylarolnes or sulpho-actds of the same. The
prw'ess may be reversed.

l,17,t<rr—Dceemlier 10, 1889. R. GREVILLE-WILLIAMS, iKeittm: 11.179— July ti'

1891 ) Procent of making azo dycK.

Red siilistanlive azo coloring matters produce*! by combining one molecnlo
of a lelmzo body (No. 416, H.")) with one molc<ule of an amine (Ihe amines and
phenols are, first, aniline and its bomologues, the naphthylamlncs, dipbenyla-
inlne and Its bomologues: set^ond, (be alkyllztrd pHslncts of these amines;
third, sulphivacids of one and two; fourth, carljollc acid and lb) homolognes:
fifth, rewircin and lis bomologues; and sixth, siilpho-iulds of four and live),
then combining a molecule of an azotized amine with Xhc thus prodnctffi Inter-
mediate priKluct, an<l afterwards reacting on the resulting secondary interme-
diate Willi one molecule of one of the amines or phenols.

il7,t91.— December 11, 1889. M. ULRICH, Aso dye.

Produced by the action of tctrazo-dlphenol ether upon the dioxynaphthalene
moiiosulpho-acid obtained by meltinx "alpha-naphthol alpha^^llsulpho-acid
S" with caustic alkali. It dyes unmordante*! cotton in a boiling so«ip bath a
clear greenish blue,

W.19S— December 17, 1889. M. ULRICH. Azo dye.

Pnxluced by the action of tetrazo-dlphenyl salts from benzidine upon the
dioxynapbthaleue monosulpho-acid ouialne<l by melting "alpha-naphthol
alphn-disulpho acid .S" with cau-stic alkali. It dyes unmordanted cotton In a
soap bath a fast re<ldish blue.

1,17, t96— December 17. 1889. M. ULRICH. Am dye.

I*roduced by the action of orthotetrazoditolyl .salts upon the dioxynapthalene
mono-sulpho-acid obtained by melting "alpha-naphthol alpha-<lisulpbo-acld S"
with caustic alkali. It dyes unmordanted cotton in an alkaline bath a fast,
clear blue.

U8,15S— December 31, 18S9. F.BAYER. Proeett of fixing coo dyei.

Goods of animal or vegetable fibers which have been dyed or printed in the
usual way with the substantive cotton coloring matters, are lx»ilcd with a solu-
tion of a metallic salt, and the metals fixed by the coloring matters in the form
of a fixed lac.

1,18.657— December SI, 1889. O. 8CHULTZ. Production qf orange and red dye-

ttuffg.

The process consists in heating certain amido compounds, such as cumidine
or xylidine, with sulphur, treating the sulphide as formed with sulphuric acid,
converting the sulphonic so formed Into the corresponding diazo compound,
and combining it with a phenol, naphthol, orcin. resoreln, amIdo compound, or
naphthylamine, or their carbonic or sulphonlir acids.

I,18,»ie— January 7, 1890. B. HOMOLKA. Blue dye.

A blue-violet coloring matter formed from aniline, hydrochlorides of aniline,
and amido-azo-benzole, of the formula C^iHigN^, and capable of forming stable
acetate. The hydrochloride, CmHisNiHCI, is easily soluble In hot water.

JitO.iei— January iS, 1890. J. MOHLER. Blue dye.

Produced from the hydrochloride of nitroso-<llmethylaniline and the crystal-
lized condensation product tntva tannin with aniline. It is rendered soluble in
water by treatment with bisulphite of soda and alcohol.

m.Sll— January t8, 1890. A. F. POIRRIER. Nitrotodye.

Brown to gray coloring matters: produced by beating in a suitable metlinm,
as water, a salt of a nitroso derivative of secondary or tertiary amines, as
nitroso-dlmethylanillne hydrochlorate, and precipitating the coloring matter
by a mineral salt

IM,37t— January t8, 1890. O. N. WITT. Blue dye.

Pr(xluce<l by the combination of betii-naphthylamine l>ela-naphlhionic add
(Bnienner's) with one molecule of bela-naphthohydnKniiiioiio: di.stlnguished
by producing colored lakes with metallic mtirdants similar to alizarine and
allied coloring matters.

iSO.SIS— January 28, 1890. O. N. WITT. Ammonium taU qf betemapMtohfdro-

(luinone-beta-tulphonic acid.

Produced by submitting amldo-beta-napbthol-beta-sulphlonlc acid to the suc-
cessive action of oxidizing and reducing agents.

IM,X7I,— January tS, 1890. O.N.WITT. Dark-btue dye.

Produced by the combination of one mole<'ul&of Dahl'salphanaphthylamine-
dlsiilphonic acid with one molecule of be(a-naphtbohyaroqulnone-oeta-«ul-
phonic add. It dyes w<x^l dark blue with a chrome mordant and blulsh-porple
shades with alumina mordants.

Ul,0i9—HbrtMry 11, 1890. E. D. KENDALL, .fulplionating rotaniline.

Process conslstsln mingling dry bisulphateof soda, or of potash and roaaniline,
and heating the same dry until the desired degree of sulphonation is obtained.
Any siilnhate wholly or in part compoaed ot a bigher sulphate than blsolpiule
Is included.

4«I,«W— /Vl)r«ar!( 18, 1890. A. WEINBERO. Blue aa> dye.

Process consists in first combining diazo compounds with the oTyethera of
alpha-naphthylamliie or their sulpbo-adds, forming the - " " ' :- of com-
pounds of the general formula Kl-^■ = NC,„H^^oRl^■H; {■ stands
tor the aniiiiatic ainiilo com^iouud, R for tlie alkyl gi' > norwards
tliazotlzlng these basic compounds and reacting with the diaziKazo derivatlTM
upon amines or phenols.

i218

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

lasms— February 25, 1S90. A.HERRMANN. (.Reimie: 11.116— October U, 1S90.)

Blue-green dye.

Metao.xytetralkyldiamidotriphenylmethan of unsymmetric constitution is
derived from metaoxytetralkvldiamidotriphenylmethan, two different tertiary
aromatic bases being condensed witli metanitrobenzaldehyde. It is converted
into the sulphonic acid by treatment witli fuming sulphuric acid and tlie acid
oxidated to coloring matter.

li23,Sl,l— March 11, 1S90. A. F. POIRRIER. Green dye.

Produced by condensing with tetramethyldiamidobenzhydrol, in a hydro-
chloric or sulpiiuric medium, paratoluidine, alpha-metaxylidine. pseudocumi-
aine amidotrimethvlbenzol, or mesidine, and subjecting the leuco bases thus
formed to oxidation,' or oxidation in conjunction with the formation of liydrcxyl,
methyl, ethyl, benzyl, and sulpho-conjugated benzyl derivatives of said leuco
compounds.
iiS,660— March 18, 1890. C. DUISBEKG. Process of making blue dyes.

The tetrazo compound of benzidine disulphono-disulpho-acid is combined
with alpha or beta naphthylamine, or their alkyl derivatives. It dyes cotton
in an unmordanted bath and wool in a neutral bath.

JiSS,569— March IS, 1890. P. OTT. Azo dye.

Process consists in obtaining substantive dyestufis from intermediate products
not dyestuffs by combining the tetrazo compounds of diamidoditoluylene oxide
with one molecule of an amine, or a phenol or their sulpho or carbo or sulpho-
carbo acids, and combining the product of the reaction with another molecule
of an amine, or a phenol or their sulpho or carbo or sulpho-carbo acids.

m,019— March SS, 1890. R. NIETZKI. Brown carbon dye.

A vellowish-brown coloring matter of the formula CnHsn-8(N02)N2CnH2n-9
(OH'XCOOH), produced by condensing a nitrodiazo body with an ortho-oxy-
carbonic acid; characterized by great fastness on chrome and nickel mordants.

ms.BM— April 15, 1890. R. GNEHM. Red dye.

Produced by the action of succinic acid upon dimethyl-meta-amidophenol,
heated together with chloride of zinc up to 190° C, the temperature not to
exceed 210°. It dyes a brilliant red with yellow fluorescence on wool, silk, and
mordanted cotton.
ia5,5!l5— April 25, 1890. J. SCHMID. OrthonUroparadiamido-diphenyl.

Produced by nitrating a sulphuric acid solution of benzidine sulphate and
separating the nltro product. It is available for the production of a series of
new coloring matters.
liS5,8S5— April 15, 1890. M. KAHN. Process of making azo dyes.

Process of producing violet to blue-black azo dyes for wool consists in com-
bining the diazo compounds of the sulpho-acids of aniline or its specified equiv-
alents with alpha-naphthylamine, again diazotizing the amidoazo compounds
thus obtained and combining therewith phenyl alpha-naphthylamine or a
homologue thereof.
m,Si,5— April it, 1890. A. WEINBERG. Red dye.

Produced by combining benzidine with beta-naphthol gamma disulpho-acid
(No. 331,059) .the reaction taking place only between one equivalent of the tetrazo
compound and one equivalent of the sulpho acid. It dyes unmordanted cotton
a flery red and wool and silk in an acidulated bath bright scarlet shades.

1^7,561,— May IS, 1890. R. GNEHM AND J. SCHMID. Carbonk-acid compound

of meta-amidophcnol.

Obtained by treating meta-amidophenol in presence of alkalis or alkaline
earths with carlxinic acid at a high temperature; and used for the production
of coloring matters.

i27,565 — May 13, 1890. R. GNEHM AND J. SCHMID. Carbonic-acid compound

of dimethyl m^ta-amidophenol.

Obtained by treating dimethyl meta-amidophenolate of soda with compressed
dry carbonic anhydride at 120° to 140° C. It crystallizes in colorless needles, m.
p. 145° C., under decomposition, and is used for the production of coloring mat-
ters. >

1,28,530— May SO, 1890. C. SCHRAUBE. MosindiUine monosulplia-actd.

A red cryslaline powder, CwHigNaSOsH, obtained by sulphouation of rosindu-
line. It is purified by .suspending in water, neutralizing with cold dilute caustic
alkali, boiling and adding additional caustic alkali, and converting the precipi-
tate by a mineral acid into the pure monosulpho acid.

U!8,6i9—May 27, 1890. W. PFITZINGER. Substantive yellow dye.

Process consists in combining the diazo compounds of the thio derivatives, or
the sulpho-acids of the thio derivatives, of paratoluidine, metaxylidine, and
pseudo cumidine with the thio derivatives of paratolixidine, metaxylidine, and
pseudo cumidine, or their sulpho-acids.

ii9,S50— June S, 1890. G. KOERNER. Bed dye.

Produced by the combination of two molecules of napthlonic acid with one
molecule of the tetrazo derivative obtained by the action of nitrous acid on
orthometa-toluidiue. It dyes unmordanted cotton a bright red.

1M,6SS— June 17, 1890. C. L. MULLER. Process of preparing disazo dyes.

Certain amidoazo compounds are coupled by twos by means of intermediaries,
such a-s phosgene, and thio phosgene, or carbon bisulphide, in the presence of
alkalis and alcohol; the said amidoazo bodies being paramido-benzene-azo
bodies of the formula NH2.C0H4: N; N.R, in which the second element (the resi-
due of which is denoted by R) is a phenol, phenol-carboxylic acid, or phenol-
sulphonic acid, or an araido-sulphonic acid of the aromatic series, capable of
combining with diazo compounds and forming azo bodies.

1,30,531,— June 17, 1890. C. L. MUlLER. lied to brown dye.

A pink to orange-brown substantive dyestuif, a diazo derivative of symmetri-
cal diamldo-diphenyl-urea. obtained by coupling together two molecules of
paramido-benzene azo-naphthionic acid by the aid of one molecule of phosgene.

lM,5S5-^une 17, 1890. C. L. MULLER. YeUow dye.

A yellow substantive dyestuff, a diazo derivative of symmetrical diamido-
diphenylurea, obtained by coupling together two molecules of paramido-benzene
ealicylic acid by the aid of phosgene.

1,30,975— June U, 1890. C. SCHRAUBE. Red dye.

Disulpho-acid of rosinduline, of the formula C28Hi7N3(S03H)2, produced by the ■
action of fuming sulphuric acid or similar body, as monochlorhydrine sulphuric
acid, on rosinduline, or upon its monosulpho acid. It dyes animal fiber in an
acid bath a crimson tint.

m,i97—July 1, 1890. 1. WALTER. Azo color

The process consists in adding sodium nitrite to a heated aqueous solution of
aniline and muriatic acid, pouring the resulting solution into an alkaline solu-
tion of salicylic acid, precipitating with acid, and flltenng,;dissolving the dried
product in sulphuric acid, and then slowly adding a mixture of nitnc acid and
sulphuric acid, pouring into water, and filtering; producing yellow to brown
colors.
iSl.Wi—July 1, 1890. C. SCHRAUBE. Rosinduline sulpho-acid.

Produced by increasing the action of fuming sulphuric acid, or similar body,
upon the 'disulpho-acid of rosinduline. No. 430,97o, or upon the mono-sulpho
acid, or oti rosinduline Itself. It dyes animal fiber in the acid bath a bright red
color.

m,5l,l—Jidy 1, 1890. T. REISSIG. Blue dye.

Produced by the condensation of alpha-naphthylamine with the mononitroso
compound of diethyl-meta-amidophone.

iSi,989—July 29, 1890. C. DUISBERG. Bhi.e dye.

Produced by the action of the tetrazo compound of the benzidine sulphone
disulpho-acid— which is manufactured by the sulphuration of benzidine sulphate
with fuming sulphuric acid— upon phenyl-beta-naphthylamine. It dyes unmor-
danted cotton in an alliallne bath, and wool and silk in a neutral bath, indigo
blue.

iai,,l,93— August 19, 1890. A. WEINBERG. Blue dye.

A disulphonated tertiary dibenzyl derivative of thionine, produced from the
methyl and ethyl benzyl-paraphenylene-diamine-sulphonic acids. It dyes ani-
mal fiber in an acid bath a greenish blue.

1,37^939— October 7, 1390. A. HERRMANN. Greeni^hMue dye.

The sulphonic acid of methylated and ethylated meta-amidotetralkyldiami-
dotriphenyl carbinol, easily soluble in water. The methylated and ethylated
leuco bases corresponding to the sulphonated color are obtained by treatment of
meta-amidotetralkyldiamidotriphenyl methane with methyl or ethyl halogens.

1,38,053— October 7, 1890. H. BOEDEKER. Viokt dye.

Produced by the action of sulphuric acid upon ortho or para ditolyl-meta-
amido-phenolphthaloine (ditolylrhodamine). which is obtained by the action
of fluoresceine-chloride upon ortho or para toluidine.

l,S8,ia8— October lU, 1890. R. LAUCH AND C. KREKELER. Manufacture of dye-
stuffs.
Produced by the combination of the diazo compound of amidosalicylic acid

with alpha-naphthylamine, again diazotizing the amidoazo compound obtained

and recombinlng the diazo compound obtained with alpha-naphthol-sulpho-acid.

It prints cotton violet and dyes wool blue black in a neutral or weak acid bath,

dyeing a blue tilack with chromium mordants.

l,iO,Z81— November 11, 1890. C. RIS. Yellow dye.

Produced by treating the diazo compound of polychromine (sulpho-acid of
thioparatoluidine, also called "primuline") with ammonia. It dyes cotton
without a mordant and can be diazotized.

U,0,2S8— November 11, 1890. J. WALTER. Brown dye.

Produced by combination of metadiamines with two diazo compounds, of
which one is diazotized polychromine (the sulpho-acid of thioparatoluidine),
and the other, one of the diazo compounds of naphthylamine or amidoazoben-
zole or amidoazo-toluol sulpho-acid.

1,1,0,359— November 11, 1890. C. A. MAYER. Blue dye.

Derived from nitroso-dimethylanlUne and gallonaphthylamide. Violet col-
oring mutters are produced by the action of nitroso derivatives of the tertiary
amines on the products of condensation of tjinnin or catechine with the primary
amines. Further products are obtained by reduction with alkaline bisulpliites.

1,1,0,536— November 11, 1890. K. BOHN. Blue dye.

Produced by the action of nitraso derivatives of tertiary aromatic bases on a
symmetrical dihydroxybenzoie acid C0H3COOOH. OH. OH. (1.3.5) which is ob-
tained by melting metadisulpho-benzoic acid with an excess of caustic potash.
Its alcoholic solution is most characteristic, being reddish-violet and marked
by a striking reddish fluorescence.

U0,6S9— November 18, 1890. R. LAUCH AND M. KAHN. Blue-black azo dye.

Violet to blue-black dyestuffs produced by combining a tetrazo compound
(those of benzidene, toluidine, diamido-diphenol ether, diamido-stilbene, naph-
thylene-diamine, their sulphones and their sulphouic acids, with the exception
of benzidine and toluidine disulphonic acids) with one or two molecules of
alpha-naphthylamine (except the benzidine and toluidine disulphonic acids,
which combine with two molecules of alpha-naphthylamine), diazotizing the
resulting mono and diamido tetrazo compounds, and combining the new tetrazo
compounds with naphthols (dioxynaphthalines) and tlieir sulplionic acids,

U0,95S— November IS, 1890. W. MAJERT. Bhit dye.

A new dioxynaphthaline, m. p. between 248° and 252° C, prepared by melt-
ing alpha-naphthyldisulpho-acid or alpha-naphthaline alpha-sulpho-acid with
caustic soda or potash, dissolving the molten mass in water, and .separating the
dioxynaphthaline by means of acid. Mono or bisulpho acids of dioxynaplitha-
line are obtained by treating the same with concentrated sulphuric acid, fam-
ing sulphuric acid, or sulphuric chlorhydrin. A blue coloring matter is obtained
by treating a tetrazo compound, as tetrazo-diphenvl chlorine, in the presence
of sodium carbonate with the said dioxy-naphtlialine, or its mono or bisulpho
acids.

Ul,9i5— December 2, 1890. C. DREYFUS. Red dye.

Produced by combining diazotized dehydro-thio-paratoluidine sulphonic
acid with beta-naphthol and then converting the combination into an ammonia
salt.

tiig,se9— December 9, 1890. L. GAN8. Blue-black dye.

Produced by the action of amidonaphtholmonosulphonic acid upon tetrazo-
diphenyl or homologous compounds.

m, 680— December 16, 1890. M. HOFFMANN AND A. WEINBERG. Blue dye.

Produced by the action of the secondary bases of the series of fat bodies, as
dimethylamine, diethylamine, upon the coloring matters belonging to the class
of the oxazines (dimethyle or diethyle amidonaplitophenoxuzine chloride)
forming new bases which'are oxidized into greenish-blue coloring matters.

lM,m— December US, 1890. M. V. NENCKI. Gallacetophenane.
See Group XVIII, Fine Chemicals, Ketones.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL IMDUSTRIES.

219

iU.toa—DetOHber ta, laso. C.SCHRArBE. VrUoto-fttl ilnt.

r 1 ' >'V trcatlDK nMlndiilliiu aiilpho-aolil (No. 4S1,'<M} with <llliit« nil-
I'l : rn>in l7A<>tolHU<>('. Thoiiclil liidllutodaoutobollat tbedenlriHl

Ui.nv—Jani'nri/ «, IHOI. U. M. DONOVAN. Chmimiiml /or enlitrlng bniom com.

CoiifilHtJi of griH'n nnllini>, burnt Ahim. wAtor, and iiulphiirl<^ arid,
IM,M»— January t». Intl. J. MOHLEK AND C. A. MAYER. IUm dyr.

PHxliiowl by iniIph<M-onJUKi>UiiK tbi' now proiliicln ivsultiiiit from the action
of the primary rtmiimllc anilm-s, at fnini 100° In aoo" C, on tho dyc! obtalnt?d by
the lu'tlon of llio nllro.>4<>ili'rivalivt'H of the torllary aniiuatle umlniw on tho con-
(l(.>n.'«ivtion pnxluctM of tinillnt< and itN bonioIoKiU'it.

Wi.679—Janunry IS, JSSf. M. I'LRICII. Dioxymiphlluxline-mono-»utplu>nie actd.
Tho dtnxvnnpbthallne-mono-milpbonic add S. obtained by meltinK alpha-
nanhtho|.nliihU'ill!<iilphonlr acid S (No. 3:«.(Ot) with chukUc alkali. The acid
or lt.M.«taltM Kiv<-?<, with •lla/ohrM/cne. an azo dyciitulT similar In nhado to acid
magenlu. ami vvllh ortho-tclmzinlltolyl or letr»Z(^dlphenyl cthen', direct dye-
ing cotorInK niatlcr^ of briKht blue iiha<ltft«.

UJi.nsi.— t'tbruaryi.lsai. F. BENDER. Pink dye.

I*n>duced by treatlnft dlmclbyl or diethyl mcta-amldo-phcnol with formalde-
hyde In ortlor lo prinluce tetniincthyl or "tctracthyl (liiiiiiidcKlloxydiphenylme-
thane. trcHtinfc the laller with dehydrating ajfcnlN to oro^lnce tetramethyl or
tetraethyl dlaniido«liphenylmetliane oxide, and oxidlziitK the latter.

US,00»—Prbruarv W, 1S9I. W. PFITZINOER. Vrllmr tlye.

Produced by treallne tho diazo compound of thioparatoluldlne nulpho-acld
with the milpho-Bcid of the aame thlo derivative of the panitoluidinc.

US.am—Frbruary «1, 1891. R. E. SCHMIDT. Albarim: drrimlive.

"Allmrine cyanine" (pentaoxyanthraqulnone) I« produced by oxidizing all-
marine bonleaiix (tetraoxyanthniquinone) In sulphuric acid stilution with oxi-
diziuK agentii, such as manffane.se or arsenic acid, ooillng, filtering, and washing,
dlMwlvIng the precipitate In hot diluted alkali, filtering and precipitating with
acid.

UH-iaS—yrbnianiti, 1891. R. E. SCHMIDT. Alizarine derimtiiv.

"Alazarine bordeaux" (tctraoxyanthraqulnone), la produced by oxidizinic
alizarine with large quantities of fuming sulphuric acid of a high precentagc of
anhydride at a Tow temperature. It crystallizes from glacial acetic acid or
nitro-bcnzolc in gamct-roa needles which do not melt at 280° C; composition
ChHjO,.

U7.tS»—fH)ruary «, 1S91. P. JULICS. Red dye.

A snhdtantivc red dyestufl, the sodium salt of diamido-diphcnylene ketoxlme
diazo-nnphthlonlc acid, produced from a new ketoxlme base resulting from tho
action of hvdroxylamlnc or hydroxylamlne sulpho-aclds upon the diamldodl-
phenylenc ketone.

U7,S0t— March 5, 1891. 0. DUISBERG. Viotel dye.

A direct-dyeing coloring matter derived from the action of one molecule of
terttHzodlphenyldialkyl ether, first, on one molecule of alpha-naphthylamine
mono-sulpho acid, and then, on one molecule of alpha-naphthol monosulpho
acid,

U7.S0»— March S,tS91. C. DUISBERG. Orange dye.

A sutwlaiitive re<ldlsh-orangc coloring matter of the formula CsHuNsSOoNas,
pn>du(tHi by combining one molecule of tetrazo-diphenyl with one molecule
of salicylic acid, and combining the intermediate product with one molecule
of naphthylaraine monosulpho-acid.

U9..''»>—.Warch )1, 1891. M. CERESOLE. Bemo-rhmlamine.

A red dycstulT resulting from the condensation of one molecule of benzo-
trlchloride with two moleculesof alkylizcd meta-amidophenol. It dyes In gen-
eral similarly to the tetramethyl and ethyl rhodamlnes.

t,t^.^f•l— March SI. 1.191. E. MENTHA. DihudrnTirmtpMhnlene.

"2.3-dihydroxyTiaphthalenc." m. p. 160° to 161° C. yielding an intensely blue
coloration with ferric i-hloridc .solution, may be produced bv melting dihydroxy-
napthalene monosulpho acid R with twice its weight of a cau.stic alkali at 300°
to 320° C. or by treating the stiid monosulpho acid with a liiliite mineral acid.
It is readily soluble In hot water, alcoh<il, ether, and fusel oil, slightly soluble
In cold water, benzene, and petroleum ether.

U9.Ki9— March SI. 1891. J. SCHMID. Black dye.

Derived from monoalkvllzol derivatives of l)eta-naphthylainlne and a diazo
comiK>»nd of the fonnnin r,,".-. lSO,Nii)j,(ni^N-N-CioH, N=NCI (o). It dyes
wool and silk a brilliiint black which in light shades presents a bluish gray.

UO.fOT—Apra 7, 1S91. H. REISENEOGER. Black dye.
A quinollne compound, soluble in soda lye with violet-red color, produced
amidoflavopurpurlne or amidoanthrapurpurlne by treatment with glycer-
iilphuric acid, and an oxydlzing agent.

m.rM—May 5, 1891. .f. MOHLER AND C. A. MAYER. BIm dye.

A Rulpho acid derived from tannin, aniline, and nltroso-dimethylanlline: pro-
duced by combining the coloring matter of No. 420.164 with ordinary sulphuric
a<'id (contjiining 90 to 95 per cent of monohydrated acid, but no anhvdrous aul-
phnri(^ acid) atSO°C. It combines with alkalLs, forming salts r^dily soluble
in warm or cold water.

ift.l97—May If, 1891. J. SCHMID. Orange-yeOow dye.

Produced by combining a diazo compound of salicylic acid, or its homolognes,
with rcsorcin. The tints obtained on chrome mordantii are orange yellow, on
Inm moMants brown.

I^K.tia—May li, 1891. R. BOHN. Procesi of dyeing with gallacrlnphmone.

Ilallacetophenone Imparts fast colors to animal and vcgetjible fiber when
combine<l with metallic oxides or mordants within or upon the librous material.
UiS.i77~Jiinc i. 1891. A. HERRMANN. Blue-green dye.

The sul phonic acid of mcta chlortetralkyldiamidotrlphcnylcarbinol, produced
by converting mctadiazotetralkyldlamidotrlphenylmcthanchlorlde Into thecor-
responding nulachlor leuco Imsc In treiiliiiinl with copper or cuprous chloride,
sulphonatioii of the chlnr Icuco I)il><c. and oxidalion of the leuco-.sulphonic acid
thus obtained by means of [wroxide of lead.

Ui.MS— June tS, 1891. A. COBENZL. Oray dye.

Produced by the action of nitroso-diethylantllne hydrochlorate upon the beta-
naphthnlsulphonlc acid of Schiiner. Suited for printing and dyeing woolen
fabrics in blue-gray shades.

from amldofiavoi
inc

iU.tU—Jime tS, Ml. L. OANH. AmUa-napUhiJ-mononlphimle aeOl.

()ainma-amld»'napliii ' • Mng ih«

bela-naplilhylamlni- k' :kall at

2I0°('. A»i coloring I" ^•vallvea

of aniinatic monamines or 'ihtjnuii-'. \kuu iiit- Hiiii(io-nnphtnoi-monaj«ulphonlc
acid.

UU,8U)— June so, 1891. <). B<»R(;MANN. itrange dye.

Pnxluce<l by alkalizing the orange-yellow dyestiills obtained by the combina-
tion of a tctraiisUphenyl or letmz<slitoiyl with iM^ta-naphthylamine dlsulpho-
ncld R and phenol, by treating the mme with a halogen alkyl. It viUutaiidii
thcai'tlon of alkalis.

IM,U!—Jiily 7, M»I. J. BCHMID. llelndeUa-amlilnnaphlh/4.

Obtained by melting the sodium salt of bctii-naphthylamlne-<lelta-monoinilpbo
acid with caucUo alkalia at from 260° to 300° <;. It Is soluble in water, more so
In benzene, easily soluble In ether and alcohol, m. p. 200° C: use<l for the pro-
duction of coloring matters.

IM,»M—July a, 1891. C. Rl.S. Brmm dyeduff.

Produced by condensation of paranitro-toluol sulpho-scid with paraphenyl-
endiamine or paratoluylendiamlne In a solution of caustic alkalis: soluble in
water and alcohol.

Ue,081—July 111, 1891. M. CERESOLE. lUd dyeMuff.

A dye base, symmetrical diethyl-rhodamlne: produced by the condensation of
one molecule of phthallc anhydride with two molecules of monoethylmeta-
nmldophenol.
iB6,«t7—Jidy t8, 1891. C. A. MARTIUS. I'rocam o/ making azo dyei.

An alpha-naphthol dlsulphonic acid Is, first, forme<l bv treating naphthalene
diaulphonic acid with nitric acid, reducing the alpha-nilro naphthalene dlsul-
phonic adds so formed to alphii-amido nuphthnlenc dNuIphonlc acid and con-
verting it into tho cnrresi>oiuiing compound alpha-napbthnl dl?4tiIi)honic acid;
and, second, the dlsulphonic acid "o fomicil is addt-rl to a diazo derivatire of an
amido compound, such as xylldine, cnmldine, alpha-naphthylamlne, etc. It
forms red, brown, violet, or blulsh-vlolet coloring matters.

iSe,et8-Jttly t8, 1891. C. A. MARTIUS. Procea of making am dyes.

An alpha-naphthol dlsulphonic acid, formed as in No. 436,027, Is added to a
solntion of a tetrazo derivative of an amido compound, such asdlamldo-stllbene,
benzidine, etc.. In proportions to form a coni[K)und of one molecule of the tetrazo
comiKiund combined with one of the al|>hii'iiiiphthol dlsulphonic acid; then to
this comjiound there is added a portion of naphthol or naphtbol-sulphonlc acid,
and flnally the dyestuB Is precipitated from the solution. It forma violet or
blulsh-vlolet coloring matters.

iie,Sg7—JtUy IS, 1891. C. A. MARTIUS. A:-i dye.

Process consists in adding to the alphn-naphthol dlsulphonic acid formed as
per No. 456,627, a tetrazo derivative of dipheiiitldlne in proportions to form •
compound of one molecule of tclrazo-aiphenitidine with one of the alpha-
naphthol dlsulphonic acid, then ndrliiiR to ibiscom[)oiinfl another j)ortion of the
alpha-naphthol dlsulphonic acid, and finally precipitating the dvestuff. There
arc formed red, brown, violet, blue, and bliiisn-black coloring matters.

1.68.181. AugwttS, 1891. B. HOMOLKA. Indxtline dye.

A blue coloring matter of the induline series, a zinc chloride double salt, pro-
duced by heating a mixture of soluble InduUnes together with paraphenylene-
diamlne and hydrochlorate of paraphenyldlamlne to 150° to IMP C, and after
filtering precipitating with common salt and zinc chloride.

UiS,18S—Aaguat,1, 1891. H. KU^EL. (Xeitmie: ll.tSt— April S, 189t.) Azodye.
A brown powder adapted for dyeing wool in greatly dllTering shades, ranging
from bluish red to deep black, dependinK uism the use of acids and metallic
mordants, derived from a new dioxynaphtlmlene dlsulphonic acid (the subject
of a companion application) and diazo bodies.

45S,3Si— /iujia* IB. 1891. H. KUZEL. Azo dye.

Produced by the action of diazo bodies upon naphthol trLsulphonic acid-
monamide (which is formed by adding a solution oi caustic ammonia to the
naphthosulphon dlsulphonic acid obtained from napthalene trisulphonic acid,
prepared by sulphonutinii of napthalene, by nitration and re<luction, by treat-
ment of the novel naphthyltiniine trisulphohicacid with nitrous acid, and subse-
quent boiling with acidulated water). It dyes wool a pronounced bluish-red
shade.

i5S.i8S— August tS, 1891. H. KU2EL. AmIdo-napUhot vumondphtmic arid.

Produced by melting the salts of beta-naphth>'lamlne dlsulphonic acid with
caustic alkalis. A crystalline powder of difflcult solubility in water and
alcohol. Combined with diazo or tetrazo compounds it furnishes. In alkaline
or acetic solution, azo coloring matters.

iSS.tse—Aiigurt 15, 1891. R. KU2EL. Amido-oxynaphthaline dindphmie add.

Produce<l by heating alpha-naphthylamine trisulphonic acid with caustic
alkalis, and crystallizing in long pearly needles. It is ea-silv converted by
nitrous acid into a diazo compound of light yellow color, and combines with
diazo and tetrazo compounds. In alkaline or acetic so'utions, to form azo color-
ing matters.

SSi.UU—yovember S, 1891. C.RUDOLPH. Brotcndye.

A brown basic dyestufi derived from |>aradiazoacetanllld chloride, meta-
phenylene-diamine, and concentrate<l muriatic acid; ^utly soluble in water;
especially suited for dyeing jute and leather.

iSt.illi—Xorembcr S, 1891. C. RUDOLPH. Blue4>tack azo dye.

Produced by combining tetrazo diphenyl or ditolvl chloride with one mole-
cule of amid(»-oxy-alpha-nrtphthalcue di.sulphoacid and with one molecule of
alpha or Iwta naphthalene. It is wtluble in water with a reil-violet color and
dissolves in concentrated sulphuric acid with a blue color.

l£t,8tl^Sorember 10, 1891. O. SCHULTZ. Blue azo dye.

Blue dircct-dyeing dyestuffs. producol by combining one molecule of.a te-
trazo salt, toluidiiie. or nni.sidlne. with one molecule of alpha-naphthylamine,
again diazotiziiig the compound, and combining the product with two mole-
cules of an alpha-naphthol dlsulpho acid.

m,89a—Sovember tU, 1891. A.HERRMANN. Blue dye.

Produced by oxidizing the sulphonie acids of metaoxy, meta-omido, or alky-
llzed meta-amldo tetralkyl-dianudotripbenyl carbinola with mlta of iron or
chromic add.

ieU,iai— December I, IS91. M. HOFFMANN. Blue dye.

Produced by mixing solutions of amldonaphthol-dlsulpho«cld R (formed by
heating dlomldo-napnthalene-alpha-dlsulpho-add with diluted mineral acida)

220

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

and of the letrazo derivatives of paradiamines and sufficient allcali to lieep tlie
solution alkaline. Its blue aqueous solution is not changed by addition of car-
bonate of soda, and it dyes unmordanted cotton.

i6i,5S8— December 8, 1S91. A. WEINBERG. Violet dye.

Tetralkyldisulphobenzvldiamidotriphcnylcarbinol: produced by mixing solu-
tions of the substituted diamidodiphenylmethanes with solutions of aromatic
monamines and oxidizing substances, to give simultaneous oxidation.

ISU.See—Dccanber S, 1891. M. HOFFMANN. Violet dye.

" Naphthalene-violet:" produced by the action of tetrazonaphthalene beta-
disulphonic acid upon alpha-naphthylamine having the constitution C10H4
(S03Na)o= [N = N-CiaHoNH2(a)J«. It is transformed by nitrous acid into a
tetrazo compound which reacts upon phenols or amines, forming fast colors.

i6i.77S— December S, 1891. R. LAUGH AND C. KREKELER. Blue-green azo

dye.

Produced by combining one molecular proportion of the diazo compound of
amidonaphthalene azo-salicylic acid with one molecular proportion of dihy-
droxynaphthalenemonosulphonic acid in the presence of sodium acetate.

ies.lie— December IS, 1891. C. RUDOLPH. Brmm azo dye.

Produced by first combining diazotized toluylenediamlne sulpho-acid 1: 2: 4; 6
(CH3 : NHn ; SO3H: NH«) and two molecules of metaphenylencdiamine, and then
treating this intermediate compound with diazotized alpha or beta naphthyla-
mine sulpho-acid.

i66.sm— December 19, 1891. M. ULRICH. Black azo dye.

Produced by combining the diazo compound of sulphanilic acid with alpha-
naphthylamine, further diazotizing the amidoazo product thus obtained, and
causing the diazo derivative to act upon the sodium salt of the dihydroxynaph-
thalene monosulphonic acid S of No. 444,679. It dyes unmordanted wool fast
bluish black to black, and forms lakes with chromium salts.

me,826— January IS, 1S92. E. HEPP. Blue-red dye.

Trisulpho-acid of "phenyl-rosiuduline," CjgH]oN3(S03H)3, obtained by treat-
ing phenyl-rosinduline with fuming sulphuric acid.

IS6,SU1— January 12, 1891. M. ULRICH. Bed azo dye.

Produced by combining molecular proportions of toluidine sulpho-acid after
diazotation, and of the dihydroxynaphthalene monosulphonic acid of No.
444,679. It dyes wool in acid baths bluish-red shades.

IS6, 852— January IS. 1S9S. E. HEPP.

Disulpho-acid of pfienyl-rostnduline.
Iby
Its potas-

Beta-disiilpho-acid of phenyl-rosinduline, CmH,;N3(S0}No), obtained by treat-
ing phenyl-rosinduline with concentrated sulphuric acid at 170° C. ^* '""

slum and sodium salts dye wool red-bluish shades.
l467,ieg— January 19,1892. C. DUISBERG. Tetrazo dye.

produced by combining with one molecular proportion of dianisidine after its
diazotation one molecular proportion of beta-naphthol disulpho-acid R, and
then one molecular proportion of alpha-naphthol alpha-mouosulpho acid
(Neville-Winther). It dyes unmordanted cotton in greenish-blue shades.

ies.OlS— February t, 1892. C. RUDOLPH. Azo dye.

Produced by treating tctrazodiphenyl or ditolyl with one molecule of ami-
dooxyalphanaphthalenedisulpho acid and with one molecule of metaoxydiplie-
nyiamine or metaoxytolylphenylamine. It dyes unmordanted cotton blackish
violet.

lSS,lia— February 2, 1892. M. ULRICH. Blue-red azo dye.

Produced by acting with the diazo compound of paramido-benzol-sulphonic
acid on the dihydrooxynaphthalene-mono-sulpho-acid of No. 444,679. It dyes
unmordanted wool in sulphuric acid batlis clear red shades; wool mordanted
with chromium salts, dull violet.

IS8,539— February 9, 1892. 0. BORGMANN. Bed dye.

Produced by combining a diazo compound of tolidine with betanaphthylamine
disulpho acid R, adding to the resulting intermediate body naphthionate of
soda, allowing the mixture to stand until the reaction is complete, neutralizing
with an alkali, and salting out the dyestuif.

1,69,529— February 23, 1892. A. WEINBERG. Blue dye.

Produced by forming the hydrochlorate of paranitrosomonomethyltoluidine,
from the nitrosomine of monomethyl (oretliyl) orthotoluidine. then reducing
with zinc dust, neutralizing, adding sodium thiosulphate and pota.ssium bichro-
mate, treating with monomethylorthotoluidine hydrochlorate, and oxidizing.

1,7 1,6S8— March 29, 1892. B. HOMOLKA. Process 0/ making roaanUine dyes.

Diamidodiphenylmethan bodies are treated with oxidizing agents in the pres-
ence of hydrochlorates of aromatic amines.

1,71,659— March 29, 1892. E. VONGERICHTEN. Process 0/ making diamidodi-
phenylmethan baJtes.
Hydrochlorates of aromatic amines are caused to act upon the anhydro-

formaldebyde compounds of aromatic amines.

1,72,121— Apra 6, 1892. M. HOFFMANN. (ReUssue: 11,267— .September 6, 1892.)

Manufacture of yellow dyes.

A derivatlveof thediamido beta-naphthalene disulpho-acid, which is prepared
by double nitration and reduction of the naphthalene beta-disulpho-acid, P No.
464,566, and obtained from the said diamido acid by combining its tetrazo deriv-
ative with phenol or cresol, and treating the product with alljyiated halogens.

1,73,1,5s— AprU 26, 1892. M. Ein^ING. Bed dye.

Produced by sulphonizalion of triamido-triortho-tolyl carbinol, in the form of
Its sodium salt: a green mass having metallic luster, of easy solubility in water,
but insoluble in absolute alcohol.

1,75,1,67— April 26, 1892.
acid.

H. KUZEL. Process qf maki-ng naphihosutfondisviphonic

Produced by nitrating a specified naphthalintri.sulphonic acid (German patent
No. 38,281), reducing the nitro comjwund. converting the naphthylaminetrisul-
phonic acid thus formed into the diazo compound, and boiling with acidulated
water until the development of nitrogen ceases. The neutral disodium salt crys-
tallizes in colorless needles. I

1,75,616— JUay 21,, 1892. R. SENGER. IndiUine dye.

Trioleate of induline, an intensely black liquid of the consistency of castor
oil at ordinary temperature: produced by mixing one molecule of induline with
three molecules of oleic acid (or stearic or palmitic acid ) and heating to 100°
to 120° C. It is insoluble in water, but easily soluble in alcohol and in benzene.

1,76,355— June 7, 1892. M. ULRICH. {Bei^s^ue: 11,308— February 21, 189S.) Violet

azo dye.

Produced by combining the diazo compound of paramido-phenol with the
sodium salt of dihydroxynaphthalene monosulpho-acid S of No. 444,679; soluble
in water. It dyes wool in acid baths a clear violet.

i76,3S6—June 7, 1892. M. ULRICH. Black azo dye.

A coloring matter, dyeing unmordanted wool a greenish-black; produced by
combining diazotized beta-naphthylamine monosulpho-acid with alplia-naph-
thvlamine, diazotizing the formed amido-naphthalene azonaphthalenc sulpho-
acid, and coupling the obtained diazo compound with the sodium salt of the
dihydroxynaphthalene monosulpho-acid S.

1,76,357— June 7, 1892. M. ULRICH AND R. LAUCH. Blue dye.

A direct-dyeing coloring matter: produced by combining molecular propor-
tions of tetrazo-diphenol-dimethyletner and alpha-naphthylamine, diazotizing
and combining the resulting tetrazochloride with two molecular proportions of
the .sodium .salt of the dihydroxynaphthalene monosulpho acid S.

1,76,571— June 7. 1892. C. DUISBERG. Tetrazo blue dye.

A directKiyeing tetrazo dyestufi: produced by combining one molecular pro-
portion of the tetrazo compound of dianisidine with one molecular proportion
of beta-naphtholdisulpho acid R and then with one molecular proportion of
alphanaphtholalphamonosulpho acid (Clove's).

1,76,595— June 7, 1892. R. LAUCH. Dyestuff.

A coloring matter, dyeing unmordanted cotton in neutral or alkaline baths a
greenish-black or dark-gray: produced by combining molecular proportions of
tetrazo-diphcnyl, salicylic acid, and alphniinphthylaraine, sulphonating the
product, (fiazotizing, and then further combining with one molecular propor-
tion of the sodium salt of alpha-naphthol-alpba-monosulphonic acid.

1,76,1,15— June 7, 1892. F. KUNKEL. Triphenyimethane dye.

Produced by combining, in the presence of concentrated snlj^huric acid,
equimolecular proportions of tetramethyldiamidobenzhydrni and alplia-hydro-
xvnaphthionic acid, removing the uncombined alpha-hydroxyiuiplithionic
acid, and then further oxidizing the resulting leuco compound; yielding shades
of pure blue.

1,76,1,18— June 7, 1892. R. E. SCHMIDT. Alizarine derivative.

A coloring matter, dyeing wool mordanted with chromium salts in greenish-
blue shades; produced by oxidizing the alizarine bordeaux of No. 446,893 with
manganese in concentrated sulphuric-acid .solution, at not exceeding25° C, and
combining the resulting diquinone with salicylic acid, likewise in sulphuric-
acid solution.

1,76,1,19— June 7, 1892. R. E. SCHMIDT. Alizarine dye.

An alizarine dye, dyeing wool mordanted with alumina .salts clear and pure
blue shades, with chromium salts greenish-blue shades: produced by the action
of ammonia upon the anthraquinone formed by oxidizing alizarine bordeaux
in sulphuric-acid solution with manganese at low temperatures.

1,76.1,20— June 7, 1892. R. E. SCHMIDT. Alizarine derivative.

An alizarine dyestuff containing nitrogen, dyeing wool mordanted with
chromium salts similar to alizarine blue: produced by treating alizarine bor-
deaux witii ammonia and precipitating the color with acids.

t,76,m—June 7, 1892. R. E. SCHMIDT. Alizarine dye.

An alizarine dye, giving a clear bluish green on wool mordanted with
chromium salts: produced by oxidizing alizarine bordeaux in sulphuric-acid
solution with manganese, treating the resulting anthraquinone with salicylic
acid, and then with ammonia.

1,78,005— June 28, 1892. R. GNEHM AND J. SCHMID. Violet dye.

A greenish glittering crystalline powder of an intense metallic luster, dyeing
mordanted wool and cotton violet to blue shades; produced by treating a mix-
ture of tetra alkylized diamido-benzo-pbenone, sulphuric acid, and pyrogallol
with a condensing agent, diluting with water, neutralizing with soda^lt, dis-
solving in dilute acetic acid, and precipitating with common salt.

1,79,515— July 26, 1892. R. LAUCH. Olive dye.

A grayish-black powder, dyeing unmordanted cotton olive in alkaline-soap
baths: produced by reacting with one molecule of tetrazo-diphenyl upon one
molecule of salicylic acid and one molecule of alpha-naptliylamine, treating said
product with fuming sulphuric acid, diazotizing, combining the so-formed diazo
compound with one molecular proportion of the sodium salt of dihydroxy-
naphthalene monosulpho acid, and treating the dyestuff thus obtained with
fuming sulphuric acid.

m,526~August9,lS92. M.HOFFMANN. Disazo dye.

Produced by introducing onemolecule of amido-naphtholdisulpho acid H into
the solution of one molecule of a diazo body in presence of a mineral acid; mak-
ing the solution alkaline; adding a second molecule of a diazo body; and sep-
arating the dyestuff with common salt.' It dyes animal fiber an intense and fast
greenish blue black.

iSl,591—Augmt 30, 1893. H. N. F. SCHAEFFER. Process of dyeing with alizarin.
The cloth or fiber is first treated with a soluble modification of alizarine, con-
sisting of a soluble salt of iMracic acid and alizarine, and then with a mordant.

m,95t,— September 6, 1892.
same.

C. DUISBERG. Bed dye a7id process of making the

A substantive tetrazo dyestuff produced by combining one molecular propor-
tion of the tetrazo compound of dianisidine with molecular proportions of alpha-
naphthylamine alpha-monosulphonic acid (naphthionic acid).

m.loe-September 6, 1892. M. ULRICH AND J. BAMMANN. Azo coloring
matter.

A blue direct-dyeing coloring matter: produced by combining one molecular
proportion of tetrazo-diphenyl chloride with one molecular proportion of alpha-
naphtliylaminc; diazotizing tlie product, and combining the thus obtained hex-
azo compound witli two nitilecular proportions of the sodium salt of a specified
l.S amido-naplithol bcta-di.sulpho-acid.

iS5,S6S—Sei>tember 27, 1892. D. A. ROSENSTIEHL. Pivcess of making uzo colors.
A nitramine is coupled with a phenol amine, or the specified derivative
thereof, and the product subjected to the action of a reducing agent in an alka-
line medium.

iSi,S21— October 18, 1892. H. KUZEL. Yellow dyestuff.

Produced by the action of diazotized diamido sulpbones upon oxycarbonic
acids.

DIGP:ST of patents RKLATING to CIIKMICAL INDUSTIIIES.

221

tM.ll97—Otli>btr IS, I^IM. R. BOHS. Btut dge.

I'nxliuiMl liy fombliiliiK t<'iriuilk.vlillniiililobonzophpnnnp with rtlhvclnixy-
linphllmU'iiv by tin- niil "( n i-iiii(li'ii«liii; iiki'IiI kih'Ii ii» |>liiw|>bi.rii.«iixycliliirlilr.
It ivCTmilnml or vcti'tnblL' IIIrt, wllU i» woullk mortliint. greenish lu violfl
shuiU-)! <>( bliii'.

iSS,i.10—l>mmb,:r so. I'^'.'J. U. USEHM AND J.8CHMID. Batie yfllow di/e.
I'riKlvKHil bv trt'iitiiifiU of n new bnne — (lltuethyUllaiiililiwIlnrlho tolyl-

inothiiiie— uliniiltiiiieously with iiiilphiir and aniimmlii. U ilycn eolloi )r-

iliuiiwl with iniiiilH and tarliir cniclle yellow »hiidc» of a (llgblly KreeuUb

{^•a.'-.a—Jnnuani 10. ISVX F. BENDER AND M. KAMMERER. YOtow-red dye.
BhilNhreil dyeihifTit nbmlniKl fn>m dlalkylmeliianildiiphenota («ueh m the
rhixlainlnes of nliilkvlineta-niiildunhenol. elo.) or their eorrcapoiiilInK leiu-o
eompoiiiiils arc transfomicd Into eolorliiK nintterx of a more yellowlnhred tint
by trealliiK same with au oxidliliig agent such an |Mjtai«lum permaugatiale.

laO.m—Jamuinj tU. tsas. A. HERRMANN. Imiigo-hlur rtjic.

An oxidation pnKluet o( the Niilphonie aeids of nieta sulwtitutc<l tetralkyldl-
amldo-triphenyicarbinols. pnHliiciii by oxidizing the snlobonie acids of meta-
oxy-.nietn-amido-.oralkylliedincta-amldolctralkyldiamldo-trlpbenylcarblnola
with saltn of Iron or chromic add.

m.SlS—rt1yrvarv 7, ISM. J. SCHMID AND J. MOHLER. Viofct-Nue indiMnt

di/c.

Pn>duce<l by melting a mixture of para-phenylcne-diamlne. hydrochloratc of
Mta-pbenvlene-dlamlnc. and alpha-niuo-naphthylamlnc at from 160° to 190° C,
dtaolvlng'lhc melt in dilute muriatic acid, and precipitating with common salt.

t9l.ilO~F>1ynmry7, I.S9S. T. DIEHL. lllueblack azo di/t.

IhTivisl from tli<' tctrH7.o eoniixmnd of pnni-ttmido-bcnzene-azoumido-nlpha
naphtliiiUne mid gumma amido-naphtholmouosulplio-acld. bctanaphthol-alpha
monosulpho-acid, or naphthioulc acid.

iai.Ut—februnry:. tiVS. R. GNEHM AND J. SCHMID. Ummidye.

A soluble dyestuH obtained by converting the Insoluble product of met* or
para-dlazo-benzoic acid with Bismarck brown, with the aid of potash or 80dB.

iaS.m— March 1!,. 1S9S. H. BOEDEKER. Pink dye.

The alkali .salt of n sulphonic acid, of the formula C»HsO,N^O. alk', derived
bom fluorescein chloride and mesidinc.

U5,ii5— J/an-A 14, 1»9$. B. R. SEIFERT. Dye/rom alpha oxynvitic acid.

Pnxcss consists in iremblning alpha oxynvltle acid with diazo compounds by
the Slime manipulations as are used In the manufacture of the ortho and para
azo coloring mutters.
l9S.set— March li.lS93. J.SCHMID ANDR. PAGANINI. Monosulpho-dloxynaph-

ihuic acid.

Produced bv heating the »o<lium salt of dl-snlpho-beta-oxynaphthoic acid
witli canslic alkalis at from 'MOf to 260° C. and precipitating the dissolved melt
with hydrochloric acidorsulphurlc acid.

iaS..'>63— March U, tS9S. J. SCHMID. Blackisli-blue azo dye.

Produced bv combining one molecular proportion of diazotized dianisldln
with one molecular proportion of the sixlium salt of mono-sulpho-dloxy-naph-
thoic acid, coinbiniiig the intcrme<liiile prixluct with an alkaline solution of one
molecular proportion of U.4) alpha imphthol-alpha-suiphonic acid of Nevlle &
Winthcr, and precipitating with common salt.

i93,S«i— March li, was. J. SCHMID. Gray-black fetrazo dye.

Produced by combining one molecular proportion of tetrazo-diphenyl or
ditolvl with two molecular proportionsof the sodium salt of mono-sulpho-dioxy-
uaphlholc acid. It dyes cotton direct from gray to vlole^black shades by the
aid of sulphate of soda or common salt and soap.

liM.iSS—Mcmh II,, 1893. R. ONEUM AND J. SCHMID. Reddye.

Produced by combining molecular pro|x>rtions of diazotized mono-nitro-ben-
ildlne, »alloy^lclu•i<l.llndalpha•lmphtnol-alpha-mono-sulphoacid(Nevile<S:Wln-
ttaer), and preciiiittiting with common sail. Dark red shades are obtained on
wool mordantitl with chromium salts.

iai,,SSS— April k. ISia. F. BENDER. Blue dye.

A greenish blue coloring matter produced by the reaction of dlmethyl-mcta-
amido-cresol (prepared by diazotizlng metaamidodimethyl orthotoluidine and
decomposing the diazo-compound with water) with salts of paranitroso deriva-
tives ol aromatic amines.

iae.lSH—AinHtS, W9S. R. E. SCHMIDT AND P. TUST. Alizarin dye.

Produced by oxidizing beta nltroanthrBpurpiirlne in sulphuric acid solution
with manganese dioxide, and boiling the intermediate product with water,
acids, sulphites, or bisulphites. It dyes wool mor<lanted with alumina salts
dull violet, mordanted with chromium salts, greenish-blue shades.

iae.S9!—MayS, 1S93. J. BAMMANN AND M. ULRICH. Tetrazodye.
Produced by combining one molecular proportion of tetrazomono-ethoxydl-

Shcnyl chloride with two molecular proportionsof the 1.8-amidonapbthol-b«ta-
Lsuliiho acid or its saltx in alkaline Holulion. It dyes unmordanted cotton in
alkaline soap bath greenish-blue, fast to alkalis.

U7,cat—May 9, 1S9S. C. RUDOLPH. Orange azo dye.

Produced by the reaction of diazotized toluylendlamin-solpho acid with beta-
naphthylamlnc. It dyes cotton directly.

t»7. 1 li—May 9, 1893. 1 . BRACK. Blue dye.

ProduciHl by heating an amine of the fatty series with a gallo-cyanlne; triors
varying from violet to greenish blue on chrome mordanted fiber.

i9S.MS—.Vay 50, IS9S. E. VON PORTHEIM. Glycine dye.

Pnxluccd by combining one molecule of a tctrazo compound of a diamine
with one molecule of naphthylglycinc. and combining the product with one
molecule of a suitable body, as an amine', direct dyeing; generally soluble in
water, and not readily afTected by alkalis.

W»,404— Jfuy SO, laus. P. OTT. GreettUhblue dye.

Produce*! by combining in equal moieculnr proportions diazotized aniline and
Clove's alphunaphthylaiuinc beta monosulpho acid, diazotizlng the formed ben-
lenc azo alpha iniphthyiaininc beta moncisulpho acid, and »>upling the dIazo
compound with piinitolyl alphanKphthylaminc monosiilphoacid obtained from
alpna naphthylamlnc monosulpho acid (1:8) and paraluluidiue.

U«,W5— Jf<TJ/ .«. lOM. V. fYTT. I>lrn-n 'Uf.

PpmIu' .rt|i)n» of dlatotlMd anIlliM

and <M< \ . jicld beta or delta, rrdlaKi-

(IzliiKlh illlngdtaX'>coinli^>nn'1 with

one m.iii'. uliir priii«'.rliiiii oi pli, nj lul(,lmmii.hai)iamlne alpl- fho

acid. riMalnitbIt' from alpha na|>hlhylitiiiln*<'inrino<«ulplKi add ' I tie.

Itdye«w<«il, with or without miirdnnts, blue •hndi's with a rinlili

U)i,l,7l—MnySn,l»9S. H. HA8SBNCAMP. TriphmylmeOtane dye.

I'nKlnced by rumbiiilng eiiul-molet'ular pro|>ortloii» of tctra-methjrldlamldn-
iHMizhydrol nn ' nilln dlsiilpho iirlil, >ir wILh ilicreiil, and then oxidiz-
ing the result it iMHind. It 'lyf<« vviMil ill a ••ulphurlc-add IfUth.eaalljr
fixed on liber, ti r similar to iiicthylviolii .) H.

Um.TliS—JuHr a, ISUS. 1. BAMMANN AND M. fl-RICH. Blue nuljManllre dye.

Prodiii'cd by combining one molecular proportion of tetrazo ortho ditnljrl Mil
with one molecular proiMirtton of l:H-ain{donaphthol licta dlnulpho add, or an
alkaline salt thereof, and with one molc-cuiar proportion of dlhydroxynaph-
thalcne.
U)S.S7.i—June e, IHM. J. BAMMANN AND M. ULRICH. Blue Iclrazo dye.

Produced by combining eonl-molecular proportions of a tetrazo orthodlloljrl
salt with l:H-aml<lonaphthol Ijeta-dlsiilpho acid and alpba-napblbol alpha
mono-sulpho acid; dyeing unmordaiiteil cotton.

l.»s.X7i— Junes, 1893. J. BAMMANN AND M. ULRICH. Blue letrm/j dye.

l'ro«luced by combining one molecular projKirtlon of the tetrazo chloride of
orthixtlphenof ether with two molecular propfjrtions of the l:»-amldonaphthol-
bctadisulpho-ocld or Its salts In alkaline solution; ilycing unmonlanted cotton
In alkaline soap bath greenish-blue shades, fast to alkalis.

U)S,.i)St—June 6, lii9S. M. HOFFMANN. Xaphlhylcne-<iiamineditulpho-aeid.

l..Vdiamidoiiaphthalene-3.7-<lisulphonic acid, a light yellow Insoluble tetrazo
comiKiund: produced by treating the naphthalene-beta-dlsulphoadd with nitric
acid, and acting on the dinitrti compound with reducing agents. It combines
with phenols or amines, forming azo coloring matters.

ias.ass—june 6. 1893. C. KREKELEK AND P. KRAIS, Reddye.

PnidiK^cd bv combining equal molecular proportionsof aipha-naphthol-alnha-
monosulpho add (OH: SOsH^Lb) , or Its alkallue salts, and diazotized amldoben-
zolc add.
1,99,198— June IS, 1893. J. BAMMANN AND M. ULRICH. Blue tetrazo dye.

Pnxiuced by combining cqul-molccular proportions of a tetrazodidlphenyl salt
with 1 .S-amidonaphlhol Iwta disulphoacio and alphauaphthol alpbamonosulpbo
acid, by preference in alkaline solution.

i99,Sl&—JuHe IS, 1893. C. DUISBEItG. Blue tetrazi) dye.

Produced by combining one molecular proportion of a tetrazo salt of benzi-
dine sulphone dlsulpbo acid with two molecular proportions of monoethylbe-
tanapntnylamlne; dyeing unmordanted cotton, wool, or silk reddish blue.

i9<j,il,5—June IS, 1S9S. E.MEYER. Blue dye.

Produced by acting with equal molecular proportions of tetra-alkyldiamido-
benzhydrol on the products (new blue R) derived from nitroso<iialkylanilines
and beta iiapbtbol; dyeing blue shades on cotton prepared with tannic acid or
the like.
1,99,927— June 10, 1893. P. MONNET. Anitoliu, and process o/ mating it.

A coloring matter, ordye, having an alcoholic radical substituted for the metal
of a rhodamin salt: proiluccd by heating under pressure and above 100° C, a
mixture of an alcoholic haloid salt, a rhodamin salt, and au alcohol — as ethyl
alcohol, a iiotassium rhodamin salt, and a simple or compound alcoholic chlor-
ide—then diluting, distilling, adding hydrochloric acid, and precipitating with
sea salt. It has a strong athnily for tiber. and dyes unmordanted cotton.

300,781— July i, 1893. A. 0. GREEN AND T. A. LAWSON. Bed azo dye.

Para-azoxy-ortho-toluidin is prepared by treating a boiling solution of para-
iiitro-ortho-toluidin with a cold solution of sodium stannitc. Substantive azo
coloring matters of various shades of yellow, orange, and red are produced by
converting para-azoxy-ortho-toluidin into its tetrazo compound, and comoining
the same with a phenol or amine, or their sulphonic or carboxylic adds, such as
the para-sulphOQlc add of alpba-uaphthol, corresponding to Plria's naphthoic
acid.
S00,76t—July i, 1893. A. G. GEORGE AND T. A. LAWSON. Red azo dye.

Produced by treating azoxytoluidin of m. p. 168° C. with nitrous acid, com-
bining the tetrazo comi>ound thus obtained with one molecule of alpha-naph-
thol-iiarasiilphoiiic aciil and one molecule of beta-naphthol-disulpnonic acid
R, and precipitating the coloring matter.

300.917— July i, 1893. I. LIFSCHCTZ. Vtotet-red dye.

I'roduced by treating ortho-nitro-anthraqulnone with concentrated sulphuric
add and heating to about 200° C, and subsequently treating with a caustic
potash solution. It shows a characteristic absorption spectrum.

101,069— July 11, 1893. H. HASSENCAMP. Violet dye.

A trlphenyimethttne dycstutT iiroduced by combining eqoi-molecular propor-
tions of tetramcthyldiamidobeuzhydrol and ethylbenzylanllln dlsulpbo add,
or tt salt thereof, oxidizing the resulting leuco compound, and converting It
Into the sodium salt. It dyes wool in an add bath violet with a bluish tinge,
fast to lime and ammonia.

SOl.lOi-July 11, 1893. F. RUNKEL. Triphcnylmdhane dye.

Produced by combining equi-molecular proportions of tetramcthyldlamldo-
benzhydrol and benzole acid in the presence of concentrated sulphurto add.
and oxidizing the resulting Icuco compound. It gives green shades, fast against
fulling.
301,118— July 11, 1893. M. ULRICH AND R. LAUGH. Blae-blaek tetrazo dye.

Produced by combining one molecular proportion of tetrazo-orthoKlltolyl salt
with one molecular proixjrtion of alpbanaphthylamine. further diazotizlng the
pniduct, and coupling '"e tetrazo comiMiiind thus obtainiKl with two molecular
proportions of l.iMlihviln>xynaphthttlenc alphamonosulpho acid or an alkaline
salt thereof. It dyes unmordanted cotton In a neutral or alkaline soap bath
from greenlsh-bluc to bluish-black shades.

SOl.ieo— July 11, 1893. W. PFITZINGER. Process (^dyemgbtaek.

It consists, first. In dveing cotton by a coloring matter such as is obtained bjr
combining one molecule of tetrazo dlpbenyl, or analogous compounds thereof,
with two molecules of aiuido naphthol monosulpho acid O; second, In diazotiz-
lng on the fiber; and, third, combining the resolting diaio compound with
phenol.

222

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

e01,tS5-~J\dy 11, 1S9S. B. K. SEIFERT. Creosote compound.

See Group XXIII. Fine Chemicals, Alcohols, and Phenols.
S01,iSi—July 11, 1S93. C. MULLER. Violet dije.

A sulphonated derivative of ortho-alkyl-oxy-para-rosaniline: produced hy
exposing the alkyl-ethers of meta-hydroxy-phenyl-para-tolylamine, meta-hy-
droxy-phenyl-ortho-tolylamine, or rueta-hydroxy-phenyl-meta-xylyamine to
the action o'f a condensing agent, such as phosphorus oxychloride or phosgene,
in the presence of a diluent, such as toluene, and then sulphonating the basic
coloring matter.

501,500— JiUy 18, 189S. L. GANS AND M. HOFFMANN. Black dye.

Bluish-black coloring matters derived from tetrazo compounds of paradia-
mines, such as benzidine or analogous bodies, one molecule of gamma-
amidonaphthol-sulpho acid, and one molecule of amidonaphtholdisulpho acid
H. They produce blue to black shades on unmonlanted cttttou; can be diazo-
tized, and secondary derivatives produced in substance or on the fiber.

SOi,SGS— August 1, 1S9S. R. LAUCH AND C. KREKELER. Ulack a:o dye.

A greenish-black powder with metallic luster: produced by combining one
molecular proportion of the diazo-compound of amidosalicylic acid with one
molecular proportion of l:8-dihydroxy-uaphthalene. It dyes wool mordanted
with chromium salts deep black, and produces the same shade on cotton when
printed with chrome mordants.

501,369— Augufl 1. 1895. R. LAUCH AND C. KREKELER. Reddish-blue azo dye.
A greenish-black powder with metallic luster: produced by combining equal
molecular proportions of beta naptholcarbonic acid (ra.p. 216°C.)and the diazo
compound of amidosalicylic acid. It pro<1uces reddish-blue shades, fastagainst
soap when printed with chromium mordants.

SOl.mfl—Augtift 1, 1893. R. BOHN. Green-blue edizarin dye.

A dark-colored powder, soluble in alcohol, practically insoluble in ether and
benzene, slightly soluble in cold water. Derived by the successive treatment of
di-nitro-anthra-quinone. first with fuming and afterwards with concentrated
sulphuric acid. It yields pure green-blue shades with chrome mordanted
sheep's wool fiber.

S0g,765— August 8, 1S9S. R. E. SCHMIDT. Blue alizarin dye.

A dark-colored paste produced by treating the hexaoxyanthraquinone (ali-
zarinhexacyanin of No. SOC.Seij) with ammonia preferably in the presence of
oxygen or atmospheric air. It prodtices on wool mordanted with alumina salts
bliie shades, and on wool mordanted with chromium salts greenish-blue shades.

B02.9n— August S, 189S. A. F. POIRRIER AND D. A. ROSENSTIEHL. Black

azo dye.

A secondary diazo of alkalized meta-diamine. produced by combining the
diazo derivatives of the mono and disulphonic acids of aniline, of toluidins. of
xylidins. and of isomeric naphthylamine. with naphthylamine, again diazotiz-
irig the compound obtained, and combining it with an" alkalized secondary or
tertiary meta-diamine (such as meta-phenylenediamine). It i.s but slightly sol-
uble in water, characterized by great coloring power and dyeing wool in deep
colors.

503,066— August 8, 189S. H. THOMS. Salicylate oj para-tolytdimethylpyramUm.

See Group XVIII, Fine Chemicals, Ketones.
505,11,8— August 15, 1893. R. LAUCH. Substantive broum dye.

A grayish-black powder, soluble in ammonia with brown color, produced by
combining one molecular proportion of tetrazodiphenylchloride with one mole-
cular proportion of salycilic acid and with one molecular yiroportion of alpha-
naphthvlaminc, sulphonating the tetrazo compound obtained and coupling one
molecular proportion of the diazo derivative of thissulpho product with one
molecular proiMirtiou of alphanaphlhylamine. It dyes unmordanted cotton in
neutral or alkaline baths.

505,196— August 15, 1893. R.E.SCHMIDT. HexaoxyanthraquinoTie, and process of

making it.

A new hexaoxyanthraquinone, which crystallizes out of nitro-benzene or
glacial acetic acid in dark needles of metallic luster: produced by oxidizing
with a body containing SO3, alizarin, quinizarin, anthrachrysone or svmmet-
rical dihydroxybenzoic acid, alizarin bordeaux, purpurin, purpuroxanthin
or purpuro bordeaux, which latter product results when purpurin or purpurox-
anthan is treated with fuming sulphuric acid. It dyes wool mordanted with
alumina, violet, and mordante<l witn chromium salts, blue shades.

603,305— August 15, 1895. F. BENDER. Orange dye.

A basic orange coloring matter derived from acridin, which dissolves in
water or spirit, and may be produced by eliminating ammonia from certain
tetramido derivatives, which can be manufactured by condensing aldehydes
(such as formaldehyde or benzaldehyde) with aromatic substituted metadla-
mins (such asmeta-amidodimethylanUin).

606,165— October 10, 1893. R. E. SCHMIDT. Alixarinhexocyanin.

An alizarin dyestuff moderately soluble in alcohol and glacial acetic acid
and crystallizing therefrom in dark brilliant crystals, produced by oxidizing
aliz-arin pentacyanin or alizarin bordeaux. It produces violet shades with
aluminum mordants and blue shades with chrome mordants.

606.1SI,— October 10, 1893. M. ULRICH AND J. BAMMANN. Blue eolormg mai-
ler, and process oJ making same.

A coloring matter giving on unmordanted cotton from blue to greenish-blue
shades (fast to the action of alkali and acid), pr«luced bv the reaction of one
molecular proportion of the tetrazo comp<jund of tolidin or dianisidin with two
molecular proportions of l:8-amidonaphthol-alpha-mono-sulpho acid (NHo:S03
H:OH=l:4:«) in an alkaline solution. It is further diazotlzable when fixeS on
the fiber.

506.918— October 17, 1893. R. KOTHE, F. REINGRUBER. AND H. HASSEN-

CAMP. Blue coloring matter.

Blue triphenyl-mcthane dyestuils. dark powders with bronze luster, produced
by combining equi-molecular proportions of tetramethvl (or ethyl) diamido-
benzhydrol and aloha naphthylamin sulpho acid (SHo:S03H = I :2), sulphonat-
ing the resulting leuco compound and oxidizing the "thus obtained new leuco
sulpho acid (or Us salts).

S09,6S.3—Xovcmbrr S8, !8:i3. R, LAUCH. Broum dye.

A dark brown paste, produced by combining one molecular proportion of a
diazolized amido nydroxy carbonic acid of the aromatic series wuh one molec-
ularproportionof resorcinol or orcinol. and acting on the intermediate bod v thus
obtained with nitrous acid. It dyes unmordanted wool brown, and produces
brown shades on fibers mordanted with metallic mordants, either in dyeing or
printing.

509,635— November iS, 1893. M. ULRICH AND J. BAMMANN. Brown dye.

A brown substantive coloring matter, which can be diazotized when fixed on
the fiber, produced by the action of one molecular proportion of tetrazodiphe-
nvl salt upon one molecular proportion of tne amido-naphthol-disulpho acid
(NH»:S03H:S03H: = 1:3:6:8), or an alkaline salt thereof, and one molecular pro-
portion of the so-called Bismarck brown (which results from the action of nitrous
acid on meta phenylene diamine).

509,939— December 5, 1895. M. MOELLER. Blue azo dye.

Blue azo dyes derived from l:8-amidonaphtholmonosulphonic acid and tetra-
zoditolyl or tetrazodiphenolether, and which may be prepared by melting with
alkali the alphanaphthylaminedisulpho acid mentioned in No. 333,934.

511, 5Si— December i6, 1893. R. KOTHE, M. ULRICH, AND O. DRESSEL. Blue
dye.

Bluish-black powder: produced by acting with one molecular proportion of a
tetrazo compound of the paradiamines on two molecular proportions of the
sodium salt of amidonaphtholdisulpho acid (NHo: SO3 H: So, H: OH = l:2:4:8)
in an alkaline .solution. It produces on unmordanted cotton greenish-blue
shades, fast against alkalies.

511,653— December g6, 1893. G. SCHULTZ. Blue dye.

Blue basic dyes, produced by the joint oxidation of alkalized derivations of
para-phenylencdiamin containing one free amido group with di-para-tolvlme-
taphenylenediamin in a suitable solvent by means of chromates; a violet-black
powder easily soluble in water or alcohol, insoluble in ether.

511,708— December 36, 1893. M. MOELLER. Production of amido naphthol disul-
phonic acid.

A new amido-naphthol-disulphonic acid (a disulphonic acid of l:8-amido
naphthol), .soluble in water, yielding no diazo compound when treated with
nitrite, turning dark green on the addition of ferric-chloride; produced by con-
verting the alphanaphthylaminedisulphonic acid (of German patent No. 40.571)
by furthersulphonation ihtoalphanapnthylaminetrisulphonic acid, and melting
the salts of the latter with caustic alkalis in an open or closed vessel.

511,898— January i, 1891,. H. KU2EL. Naphthol trisulfonic-acid monamid.

The salts of naphtholtrisulphonic-acid monamid, which are soluble in water
and precipitated by alcohol and acids, the latter precipitating moss like. They
are produced by treating the naphthosulphton-disulphonic acid {described in
German patent No. 56,058) Ivith ammonia.

611,901— January i, 1891,. H. LAUBMANN. Tetraniiro-anllirachrj/sone.

A yellow powder produced by submitting anthrachrysone to the action of
nitric acid; easily soluble in the usual solvents except benzene, ligrone. and
chloroform; from its pure glacial acid solution precipitated by chloroform in
the form of small crystals, which decompose with detonation at 280° to 300° C;
forming with potassium, sodium, and ammonium, salts insoluble in alcohol,
detonating on being heated.

512,116— January 3,189!,. R. KIRCHHOFF. Crimson azo dye.

A red-brown powder produced by combining pariuliazobenzene-sulpho acid
with ortho anisidin. further diazotizing the amidoazo compound thus obtained,
and combining the rediazotized product witli beta naphthol alpha monosulpho
acid.

513,lin— January 3, 1891,. T. DIEHL. Mae-black dye.

An amorphous black-brown powder, derived from the diazo compound of
para-amido-benzene-azoamido-alphanaphthalin and paraamidonapht hoi mono-
sulpho acid, .soluble in water, sparingly soluble in alcohol. Thealpha-naphthol-
alpna-monosulpho acid or the naphthlonic acid may be substituted lor the
para-araidonapntholmonosulpho acid.

512,W3— January 9, 1891,. M. ULRICH AND J. BAMMANN. Blue dye.

Blue substantive dyestuffs, easily soluble in water, produced by combining
one molecular proportion of a paradiamin, such as dianisidin, with one mol-
ecular proportion of the alkaline salt of amidonaphtlioldi.sulpho acid (NH,:
S03H;S03H: 011 = 1:3:6:8), and coupling the so-formed intermediate product
with one molecular proportion of beta naphthol or alpha naphthol monosulpho
acid (OH:S03H=l:5).

51L599— February 13, 1891,. M. HOFFMANN AND C. F. DAIMLER. Diazo dark-
green dye.

A dark-green powder, easily soluble in water with a bluish or greenish color,
produced by treating one molecule of the amidonaphtholdisulphonic acid H
witn a solution of one molecule of a diazo body in presence of free acid, mak-
ing the solution alkaline, and adding one molecule of a tetrazo body; the solu-
tion which now contains the intermediate product is mixed with the solution
of a phenol, or of an amine, and the dyestuff is precipitated with common
salt.

515,100— February SO, 1891,. A. WEINBERG. Basie yellow dye.

New dyes, as a yellow powder, Jerived from diazobenzvl-dialkvlamin and
resorcin. HCL. (alk.) jN — CH,— CcH, — N = N — C6H3(OH)o. are produced by
combining diazobenzylalkylamins with phenols or amms.

515,559— February 37, 1891,. A. ISRAEL AND K. PATHE. Oray dye.

A gray powder, soluble in cold water with difficulty, easily soluble in hot
water with a grayish-black color: produced by combining one molecular pro-
portion of diazotized dehydrothiotoluidinsulpho acid with one molecular pro-
portion of alpha naphthylamin, further diazotizing the intermediate product
and coupling the diazo product with one molecular proportion of dihydroxy-
naphthalene monosulpho acid S, or a salt thereof. On unmordante<l cotton it
produces from bluish-gray to grayish-black shades, the latter fast against alkali
and acid.

515,581— February 37, 189i. M. ULRICH, J. BAMMANN, AND M. HERZBERG.
Brown dye.

A brown substantive coloring matter produced by treating tetrazo-diphenyl
chloride with one molecular proportion of amidonaphtholdi-sulpho acid,
(NH2:S03H :SO3H.0H-! :3:6;8), adding to the product one molecular propor-
tion of metaphenylene diamine, and acting on the dyestuff thus produced (an
intermediate product) with one molecular proportion of diazoalpha-naphtha-
lene chloride. When fixed on cotton fiber it can be diazotized and directly
coupled with any dyestuff component.

515,897— March 6, 1891,. J. J. BRACK. Folyazo dye.

Yellow polyazo coloring matters: produced by combining a molecule of dioxy-
diphenylmethane with two molecules of diazo-eompounds, of which one at least
is the intermediate product resulting from the union of a molecule of salicylic
acid and a niolecuie of the tetrazo derivative of a paradiamido base, such, for
example, as bcnzidin, tolidin, and formaldeliyde-tolidin.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

223,

SW.iOS-Mnrrh IS. tsai.. M. HOFFMANN AND C. KROHN. Oray am dye.

, i...,..i ;.i. ...... ,1,.. 1 1 > ■ 'vimhlnlnK Ictrmio hodlpn with two

II I II, l<riiUKlit liiKi'thcr Willi iiltrltu

l> ' tliii-iiililiiliieil un> liitnidiicMl Into

II" ' '•■' (■", ii..i.^oi iiiiiiiii... Ill |iiv.-viii'c'u< nlkiiUa. It Uyvii uuuurdautL-d

eiiiion 11 fiiKt Kray.

tm.sm- March IS, imi.. C. RVDOLPH. ttrovnasnayr.

A lilackliili [KiwdiT, rtylUK I'ottoii In an alkaline Imtli In ycllow-lirown i)ha<loa:
jini<liiw<l liy wnrtlnit nn (llaiotlzixl toluylnndlainlniiulplui acid (CH, :NIli:
S>iiH : NII'-l : :i : -1 : 6) with nirtn-phcnylcnuiainluv and M'parulInK tlie dyi-.

il«.3Sl—ilnreh (.1. tISiL V. RI'DOLPH. AfxUie Jntm iimidiiphmnUnlfiMirUl.

A urepnl.Hh-blark powder, with a sllKht mi't"'"^- ■"■ .i-.-irv '"Mnordanted

cotton in a rorinth slmilf: pnNluee*! by addiii. '-'Hnaquc-
OUN wilntlon of a wkIIuiu mil ^>r amidntihenol- next add-
ing to the tnteniitsliato prtMluet a s<ilution oi ,. ,,< .-.,.... .... lo fonii an

Intemiedlnle dyentiilT, trusting mid dye-ilull witli dia/jniaphihionii' aeifl in an
aqueoux euuMun, livatlug the mam, ttuU precipilttUug Ibe dvciitiia with u>m-
men «Mlt.

HS,ie)i-Hanh IS, lg8i. J. J. BRACK. VeUow letrato dye.

Yellow tctnuo eolorlng niattem, m a eomponnd derived from snllpyllc add
and thccondensiiilon ^>n»liict of formaldehyde with a pnmdlaniin and a hydro-
chlorate of Kaid I'Hradiaiiitii, whieh in a dry Ninle is brownish rmwder rendily
aoliil.h. ill \%-iii.T ,i\ .'iiii' iinniordantoil cotton, in an alkaline batJi. are pro<hiccd
t^ :i Uwo by the condensation of forinaldeliyde with a

1"! ilomteof said paradianiln. iliiizotizinK'. and tlieiimlx-

11 1; — ..... .....i. with a solutiou of a carboxylic acid ill au alkali.

llt).S77— March IS, IS9i. E. SCHLEICHER. Bailc yellow dye.

A (fold-yellow or nrange dye, a diamldo-phenyl-acridin, carhoxylalkyleatcr,
•olublc In alcohol and In water, giving red yellow sta'.ilc Koltitions posdesalng a
itronjf vellowlsli-Kreen lliiorescenco. may be priKUui<l bv submitting a body —
C»i His Xj CV— to esieriflcation,a.s by heating with an alco'hol.iu the presence of
faydrochlorfc acid, Miilphuric add, and the like; aaid body being obtatoed by
(liltably treutlng lluorescein with ammonia.

tte,SSi— March IS, ISSi. H. A. UKRNTH.SEN. Keddtje.

A dye, dlalkyl-rhodamln-ftikyl-t-ster, derived from dlalkvl-rhodamin; as a
baae aoluble In benzene, ether, and warm water, and in tlie commercial form
of hydrochlorio-acid mlt, a bronze-Uke crysmlliiic jiowder s<iluble in water, giv-
ing ascarlct-rwl solution, poaseesingagreenish-yelluw liiiorescence. The intro-
duction of the alkyl-group into the symmetrical diakvl-rh<idamln3 can be
effected by the action of alcohols, especially methyl or etiiyl, iu presence of a
mineral add, muriatic or sulphuric.

*J«,«*— JforcA IS. IS9!,. H. A. BERNTHSEN. Red rlindamin dye.

A dye, a dlalkyl-homo-rhodamin-alkyl-ester, readily soluble in water, giving
red and strongly fliiore«ccnt solutions: prtMluced by preimring a mono-alkyl-
ortho-toluidln-sulpho-acid by aulphonation of mon'o-iilkyl-orlho-toluidin. and
converting this sulpho acid into mono-alkyl mcta-nniido-crcsol bv melting with
a cau.«tic alkali, then obtiiining therefrom diukvl-liomorlKKiamin by heating
with phthallc anhydrid and zinc chloride, and finally alkylating the dialkvl
bomo-rhodomin by treatment with alcohol and either hydrochloric or sulphuric
add.

em,B8S— March IS, imi.. M. CERESOLE. Khodamin dye.

Coloring matters, produced by heating tetraalkylatcd rhodamin to partially
dealkylate the same. The dyestufi obtained by partiallv dealkvlating the tetra-
cthyl-rho<lamin of the phthallc-acid series, in the form of its 'hydrocloricacid
nit i.s a dark-colore<l crystalline powder with a bronze-like sheen, soluble in
water and in alcohol, dyeing more yellowish shades of red than the tetia-ethyl-
rhodamin from which it can l>e obtained.

tie,SS»— March IS. tssi,. M. CERESOLE, RhmUmin dye.

A dyestufi, partially dealkylatcd tctra-methyl-rhodamin of the succinic-acid
•cries, In the lomi of its hydrochloric-acid salt, api>caring as a dark-colored crys-
talline powder soluble in water and In alcohol, but practically Insoluble in
ether or benzine.

llS.Mi^March 1.1, isat,. R. KIRCHHOFF. Black dye.

A black dyisiutr. readily soluble in water, sparingly soluble in alcohol, insolu-
ble In ether: prcMiuced by combining one molecular proportion of tetrazoortho-
dltolyl salt with one inolecular proportion of the amidfwixvnaphthalendisul-
phonic add of No. 4.W,2n;, further diazfitlzing the interme<iiate prcKlvui. and
coupling the tetmzo compound thus olilained with two molecular iiroiKirtions
of meta-toluylendiamiu. It dyes unmordaated cotton In a salt or alkaline bath
a deep black.

l]S,7Si— March SO, imti. J. J. BRACK. Diamido bate.

I'nsymmelric diamiilo-lw.ses. suitable for the production of .substantltive cot-
ton dves, as the base derived from formaldehyde, tolidin, and orthoamidophenol,
a yellow-brown ma-ss forming salts, the aqueous-acid solutions of whlcii have a
pronounced green tliiori'scence, are produced by the reaction under heat of one
molecule of formaldehyde on a mixture of one molecule of a paradiamin and
one molecule of the hydrochlorate of an aromatic monoamido-compouud.
H6,75S— March tO, ISSi. 3. J. BRACK. Diamido box.

Diamido-bases, applicable to the manufacture of sulMtantlre cotton dyes, as
the base derived from formaldehyde, tolodln. and ineUiphenvlendiamln, » hich,
In a diy state. Is a liglit brown iiowder, are prcKluceil bv condensing, with the
oj beat, one molecule of formaldehyde with a mixture of one molecule of a
paradiamin and one molecule of the chlohydrate of an aromatic diamin.
eie.ru— March to, 1S9L }. J. BRACK. Diamido bate.

Diamido-bases, applicable to the manufacture of substantive cotton dyes, are
produced by condensing, viilh the aid of heat, one molecule of formaldehyde
with a mixture of one molecule of dianisidin and one mok-cule of the banlc
hydrochlorate of an aromatic diamln. The base derived from hydrochlorate of
metaphenylendiamin is a brown powder, insoluble in water, soluble in hvdro-
cblorlc acid, and forms salts readily soluble in water.

He,76S— March to, 1S91,. J. J. BRACK. Diamido box.

A <liainido-ba«c, applicable to the manufacture of mibctantlvc cotton dyes, is
produced by the reaction, under heat, of one molecule of formaldehyde on a
mixture of one molecule of dianisidin and one molecule of the chlorhydrate of
an aromatic monoamldo-comjKiimd. The biusederivwl from the livdroclilorato
of aniline Is a resinous mass, fusing at 75° to 8tF C, and loniueallH u'ud u tetraio-
denvative soluble in water.

tie.756— March to, ts»i. J. 1. BRACK. Jfeef Utram dye.

Tetrazo coloring mattera arc prodnced by combining two molecules of a
naphthylamlUHsulplio acid with one molecule of the tetraio-derlvatlvc of the

unmrmtnptricnl dlamldn-haao mnltlnc from th<> rnndi>D«at)ftn nf on« fnnt(»^|«

of formnldi'i'i'i" »''h one inoliNMile of the h--*---'-' — •■- ■'' -• ^ ^......i,^

com|«iun'l /•■ coloring innltcr >lirl\ I

anil an nil . dinnildo ImwoliliiilMd i

hyde witii i :... ...,4 the hydnnhlorale of ■> i, ; 1-..111., -•]■

brown powder, readily tolublo Id water, dycliur uumurtlautwl cotton • red
tint.

IHII,7>7— March to, IHVi. J. J. MRAi:K. Hltir Irtrasn dye.

Tetriizo coloring niBtt«Tii are pnxluccd by combining two molomlea nf a naph-
tliolsiilpho, 1.1,1 «fiii iiiiM molecule of the telraziwlerlvative f>f ((,<•■■•■—■"■■•<•(.
ricaldlain: ililiig (r<iin the condeiiFwiion of rquivnlern (

fonnulibli in, and the livilnKhlnrate of a nKinoniiiM I.

luiof aniliii . iiiidophenol. The tetrozo coloring inatterdii.... mi

unsymmetrlcMl dlaiiildu-baMt In a dry state Is a brown powder poii —Ing a
metallic luster, and dyes unmonlanled cotton a blue tint.

S1S,718— March to, IStl,. J. I. BRACK. Hlw tnrnzi>dyc.

Tetrazo coloring matters are pn^lui-cd by imnbining two molwnlM of alpha-
naphthol-alpha-sulpho-add with one inoleculi'of the te(nizo-4leriv',tiv.. ..1 fhn
diamido-lmse resulting fr^im the condensation f>f equivalent qiur r-

maldeliyde, tolidin, and the hydrtsliiorateof an aromailcdinmlii t'

matt«'r derived from aliihanaphlholalpha-momniilpho-acld and u. !■>-

base fnmi the comlensatlon of foniialdeh.vde. loliilln, and Ihe hyilroeliloraie of
metaphenvlciiediuraln is a brown jiowiler with a metallic liisf.-r, soluble In
water, and dyes unmordanted cotton in an alkaline bath a blue tint.

IH6,76»— March tO. 1891,. J. J. BRACK. Itrd letrato dye.

Tetrazo coloring matters are priMliiceil by combining two molecnlc« of a napb-
thylamln-sulphonic acid with one molecule of the trlnv of the

diamido-biijH.' resulting from the condensHtion of cqitivahi - of for-

maldehyde, a [nirailiamin and the liydnM'hlorute of an aron Ti. The

coloring matter derived from alpha' naphthionlc acid and ilie diamido-baie
from the condensation of foniialdchydc with tolirlin and hydnn-hlorate of meta-
pheuyiendiainin is a red powder and dyes unmordanted cotttjn a red tint.

61i,7»-Mareh to, 189i. J.J. BRACK. Bfiie tetrao) dye.

Tetrazo coloring matters are produced by combining two molecnloi of alpha-
iiaphthoi-sulphonic acid with one nioleiule of the tetrazo-derivalive of the
diamido-liiuse resulting from the condensation of equivalent •luanlitles of for-
maldeliydc. dianisidin, and the hydriK'hlorateof an aromatic diamin. The col-
oring matter derived from alpha-naphthol-alpha-raono-sulpho acid and the
diamido base from condenstition of formaldehyde with ilianisiilln and Ihe hvdro-
chlorate of an aromatic diamin Is u btowu iiowder, dyeing uuuorlanted cotton
a blue tint.

617,5Sa— April S, 1891,. A. WEINBERG. Procett of dyeing by the aid i^paramido-
diphenylfimin.

Fast colors are produced on fiber dyed with a diazotlzabic dyestull, by treat-
ing such dyeings in a first bath with free nitrous add, and developing the color
In a second bath containing paramldodtphenylamln.

Slfl,l,BH— April 17, 1891.. K. KREKELER AND P. KRAJS. Blue dye.

A blue coloring matter is produced by the reaction of nltrowxliethvlaniline
hydrix!hlorate and gallamic acid in the presence of solvents, as alcohol or acetic
acid. It is soluble in hot water and ayes wool and cotton, mortlanted with
chromium salts, from blue to bluish violet.

518,989— May 1, 1S9U. H. A. FRASCH. Petroleum tu{fo-acid.

Sulpho acids are obtained by siilphonating the aromatic series of hydrocar-
bons contained in petroleum or the distillates or residuiims thereof: leaching
the sulphonated product with cold water;subjecting the remainder to the action
of hot water: sciianiting the matter soluble in hot water, adding a t>a«e, such as
lime, to the hot-water solution; separating the soluble and Insoluble sulpho
salts thereby obtained: and liticrating from the solution of the soluble salt an
acid by the addition of a reagent, such a.s hvdrochioric add. The new sulpho
acid is unaffected by concentrated hydrochloric acid, decomposes into sulphur
dioxide and agreeni.sh-black oil at a red heat, is of a greenLsh-black color when
solid, capable of dyeing silk and wool, without mordant, a yellowlsb color, and
Its alkaline salts dye wool and silk a bright yellow,

618,990— May 1, 1891,. H. A. FRASCH. PttriiU-um m(f,>-aeid.

A sulpho add. whose aulclum salt Is Insoluble In water. Is obtained from
petroleum, its derivatives or distillates, by sulphonating the material: removing
the free sulphuric add; seiiarating the soluble and the insoluble and oilv mat-
ters fnim the remainder; convening the soluble matter into a soluble and an
Insoluble salt by. for example, the addition of carbonate of lime; se|>araling the
In.soluble salt, and remlering it soluble by a suitable reagent, such ax carbonate
of so<lium. caustic soda, or other substance that will displace the baae con-
tained in the insoluble salt, and precipitating from such solution the sulpho
add by hydrochloric or equivalent acid. It is of greenish-black color, soluble
in water, fluorescent in solution, and dyes wool or silk a brownish color without
a mortlant.

Sis,991—May 1, 1891,. H. A. FRASCH. Brovm petroleum nttro dye.

A nitro body. In the form of a reddish-brown powder, is produced by nitration
of petroleum, or the residuum of the distillation, or refining thereof, with nltro-
siifphuric acid; washing the resulting product with water, heating with water,
settling; removing the solution from the sediment and treating it with a base,
such OS lime, and thereby forming a soluble and an iasoluble salt; and precipi-
tating from the soluble salt solution the dycslulT by a reagent, such as sodium
chloride. It Is soluble In water, glycerine, and acetone, capable of dyeing wool
or silk, without a mordant, a reddish brown, and its calcium salt is soluble in
water.

S18,9ae—.Vny 1, 1891,. H. A. FRASCH. }<ttrok«m dye.

A yellow dyestull. a sulpho body of the petroleum .series of hydrocarbons. Is
produced by siibjectinjf natural mineral oil. the distillates or residuiims thereof,
to siilphonation; washing the pnxluctsof sulphonation with water, treating the
pnxliicts soluble In hot water with a ba.se. such as lime; and Isolating from the
sulpho salts thereby obtained the dyi'slulT by treatment with an alkali and then
witii a precipitant, such as sodium chloride. It Ls soluble In water, glvcerine,
and acetone, fluorescent lu solution, and dyea wool or silk, without a moitlant, in
acidulate<l solution, a canary yellow.

119,036— .May I, Ltsi. H. A. FRASCH. Hnncn petroleum dye.

A brown dyestiiH Ls obUiinc<l from (ictroleum, or the distillates or reaiduuma
thereof, by nitrating the material, washing with water, dissolving the nItro

firoducts In hoi water, decanting the 8<iiution from the remain. icr iind treating
t with a liasc, such as linic; se|iarating the insoluble salt fornicl and nndering
It soluble by the addition of an alkali, such aswxiium carlMUiale; dissolving It
In water and precipitating the dyi-stuff from the solution by ihe addition .1 a
reagent, In whose solution the dyestull is insoluble, such as sodium chloride.

224

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

It is soluble in water, acetone, and glycerine, dyes cotton without a mordant,
and its calcium salt is insoluble in water.

B19,62i—May 8, ISH. J. J. BRACK. Pi>lyam yellow dye.

A polyazo coloring matter is produced by combining one molecule of dioxydi-
phenylmethane with two molecules of diazo-compounds, one of said com-
pounds constituting the intermediate product resultnig from the union of one
molecule of sulphaiiiiic acid with one molecule of the tctrazo-derivative of a
paradianiin, such for instjmce as benzidin. It is a brown powder soluble in
water, and st>luble in sulphuric acid with a reddish-violet coloration, and dyes
unmordanted cotton in an alkaline bath yellow.

619,MS—May 8, 189i. J. .T. BRACK. Polyazo yeUmrisli dye.

Polyazo coloring matters, varying from red to orange, are produced by
combining one molecule of dioxydiphenylmethane with two molecules of
diazo-compounds, of which compounds one at least is the intermediate product
resulting from the union of one molecule of naphthionic acid and one molecule
of the tetrazo-derivative of a paradiainido ba.se, such as benzidin, tolidin,
tolidiu-formaldehyde,dianisidin, ordianisidin-formaldehyde. A brown pOAvder
is produced from dioxydiphenylmethane, telrazoditolyl, and naphthionic acid,
which dyes unmordanted cotton a yellowish-red color in an alkaline bath, is
Boluble in water, and in concentrated sulphuric acid with a blue coloration.

619,971— May IS, 1891,. J. SCHMID AND J. BACHELUT. Blue dye.

A blue acid coloring matter is produced by heating mixtures of equal molecu-
lar proportions of dialkylized aniline, alkylized ortho-toluidin, and meta oxv-
benzaldehyde in presence of condensing agents, then sulphonating, and finally
oxidizing the thus obtained new leoco-sulpho acid. It is a dark powder with
metallic luster, soluble in water with blue coloration, soluble in alcohol, but
insoluble in ether and benzene.

SSl,09S-June 5, 1891,. H. A. BERNTHSEN AND P. JULIUS. Substantive blue

dye.

A coloring matter which can be derived from tetrazo-ditolyl, the 2.4'.2-amido-
napbthoLsulpho acid and 1.4-naphthol-sulpho acid. It is readily soluble in
water, giving red-violet .solutions; soluble in sulphuric acid, giving a blue solu-
tion and on diazotizing on the fiber, as.sumes a blue color.

621,096— June B, 189i. H. A. BERNTHSEN AND P. JULIUS. Substantive violet

dye.

A dark powder which can be derived from tetrazo-diphenyl and the 2.4'. 2'-
amidonaphthol-sulpho acid. It is readily soluble in water, giving claret-red
solutions: soluble in sulphuric acid, giving a blue solution; and on diazotizing
on the liber, assumes a grayish-green color.

611,985— June 36, 189i. M. MOELLER. Blue. dye.

A blue dyestuff derived from 1.8-amidonaphtholdisulpho acid (No. 511,708)
and the tetrazo compound of ortho-tolidin. It is easily .soluble in water, nearly
insoluble in alcohol, dissolving with indigo-blue color in strong sulphuric acid.

Bil,986—June 26, 189i. M. MOELLER. Blue dye.

A blue dyestuff derived from 1.8-amidonaphtholdisulpho acid and the tetrazo
compound of diamidodiphenol ether. It is easily soluble in water, nearly in-
soluble in alcohol, and soluble in strong sulphuric acid, with indigo-blue color.

612,01,2— June 26, 189i. A. BLANCHON AND A. ALLEGRET. Process of print-
ing indigo.

Textile fabrics or yams are printed with a mixture of refined or crude indigo
and a solution of a thickening substance in water, then passed through a re-
ducing bath, as of hyposulphite of lime, to reduce the indigo deposited on the
fabric or yam, and the indigo is then reoxidized in the usual manner.

622,897— July 10, 1891.. W. HERZBERG AND O. WEBER. Blue dye.

Blue coloring matters are obtained by the condensation of orthoquinones or
their sulpho acids with alkyl-para-phenylendiaminsor their sulpho acids, when
heated with sulphur and fuming sulphuric acid; capable of forming with me-
tallic mordants, lakes, which dye with fast blue tints; specially suited fordyeing
and printing wool and cotton, previously mordanted with chromium.

62S,1SS— July 17, 1891,. R. VIDAL. (Reissue: 11,659— April B, 189S. Black dye and
process o/uhaking same.

Greenish-black, bluish-black, and black dyestuflfs, capable of dyeing without
mordants, are produced by heating ortho or para-dioxybenzene, such as qui-
none, hydroquinone. toluquinone, or paracatechin in the presence of sulphur
and of ammonia, or substances which will generate ammonia during the reac-
tion. They are soluble in alkalis and alkaline sulphites.

BtU,069— August 7, 1891,. C. O. MULLER. Blue tetrazo dye.

4 newdioxy-naphthalene mono-sulpho acid is produced by melting alpha
oxy-naphthoic acid (OH.COOH.SOsH.S03H=1.2.4.7) with caustic alkali at &0°
to 290° C.

Tetrazo coloring matters are produced by the combination of one molecule of
the tetrazo derivative of an aromatic para-diamido compound (such as tetrazo-
diphenyl and its homologues, tetruzo-oxydiphenyl-nlkvl ethers, tetrazo-stilbene
and tetrazo-azobenzene and its homologues) with one molecule of the dioxy-
naphthalene mono-sulpho acid (OH.OH.S03H=1.7.4.); and the subsequent com-
bination of the intermefiiate product with a sulpho derivative of a naphthol
compound, such as the mono-sulpho and disulpho acids of alpha and beta naph-
thols, of oxy-naphthols, of amido-naphthols, and the sulpho-acids of carboxylic
oxy-naphthols.

The coloring matter derived from dianisidin, dioxv-naphthalene mono-sulpho
acid, and disulpho acid of beta-naphthalene, dyes unmordanted cotton, in an
alkaline bath, a fast greenish blue; and, in a drv state, is a brown powder with a
metallic luster, readily soluble in water and concentrated sulphuric acids with
a blue coloration.

62/,,070— August 7, 189/,. C. O. MULLER. Slue tetroio dye.

A new dioxy-naphthoic-mono-sulpho acid is produced bv fusing alpha-oxy-
nophthoi^disulpho acid (OH.COOH.S03H.S03H=1.2.4.7) with caustic alkali at

Coloring matters arc produced by substituting this sulpho acid for the dioxv-
naphthalene mono-sulpho acid of No. 524,069.

i2l,,2S0- August 7, 1891,. C. SCHRAUBE. Substantive blue dye.

A substantive blue dyestulT is produced by combining the tetrazo-compound
of diamido-diphenyl-dicarlxixylic acid with l.l'-benzoyl-amido-naphthol-sulpho
acid. It is slightly soluble in (»ld water, more so in hot water, and insoluble
in absolute alcohol, ether, and benzene.

52U.tn— August 7. 1891,. C. SCHRAUBE AND E. ROMIG. Phenylrosindulinsu^o-

A monosulpho acid of phenyl-rosindulin— isomeric with No. 428,539— is ob-
tained by the reaction of ortho-amido-dlphenylamiu-para-sulpho acid and beta-

hydroxy-naphthoquinone anil. It is almost in.soluble in woter, yields alkaline
salts, soluble in hot and cold water, and is converted by sulphonation into a
disulpho acid which is a violet-red dye for animal liber.

BSI,,2S2— August?. 1391,. C. SCHRAUBE AND E. ROMIG. Violet-red dye.

A disulpho acid of phenyi-rosindulin is produced by heating together ortho-
amido-diphenylamine-para-sulpho acid and beta-hydroxy-naphtholquinone-
anil with water and alcohol, and .subsequently introducing the second sulpho
groups into the monosulpho acid obtained by treatment with concentrated
sulphuric acid. It is a violet powder, and, in the form of its alkaline salts, is
soluble in water, and dyes animal fiber from an acid bath.

S2i,iS5— August 7, 1891,. O. BALLY. Blue dye.

A coloring matter— in the dry form a coppery-lustered powder- produced by
heating gallic acid and the dialkyl-anilins (diethyl and dimethyl-anilin) in the
presence of a condensing reagent, such as phosphorus oxychloride. and after-
wards zinc chloride. It is slightly soluble in cold water, more soluble on boiling;
gives a violet solution in alcohol, and a reddish-yellow solutionin concentrated
sulphuric acid.

521,,251— August 7, 1891,. P. JULIUS. Soluble safranin aio naphthol.

Saffranin-azo-alpha-naphthol, containing a saffranin proper, and soluble in
water, may be prepared from a solution of satTariii proper and alpha or beta
naphthol. When dry it is a dark powder with a slight metallic sheen, insoluble
in alkalis, soluble in alcohol, and gives in sulphuric acid a blackish yellow-
brown solution.

5Sti,252— August 7, 189!,. P. JULIUS. Dimethyl sa/ranin azo naphthol.

Dimethyl-safEranin-azo-beta naphthol, soluble in water, may be prepared from
a solution of dimethyl-saffrauin and alpha or beta naphthol. It gives in sul-
phuric acid a blackish-green solution.

52l,,25S— August 7, 1891,. P. JULIUS. SaJ'arin azoiMpMhol dye.

Dimethyl-sftffranin-azo-alpha naphthol, soluble in water, may be prepared
from dimethyl saffranin and alpha or beta naphthol. It gives iu sulphui-ic acid
a blackish-yellow solution.

B2t,,25!,— August 7 , 1891,. P.JULIUS. Safranin azo naphthol lake.

A soluble saffranin-azo-naphthol body, obtained by treating a saflranin-azo-
naphthol with an acid. A coloring-matter lake resembling indigo in color is
obtained by combining a soluble saffranin-azo-naphthol body with a tanno-
metallic mordant.

62i,256— August 7, 1891,. R. KNIETSCH. Blue dye.

A blue dyestuff, soluble in water and in alcohol, is produced by dissolving
phenyl-glycocoll in strongly fuming sulphuric acid, then diluting by adding
sulphuric acid containing water, then passing a current of air through'the solu-
tion, and finally isolating the coloring matter formed.

B2U.261— August 7. 189/,. C. L. MULLER. Orange disazo dye.

A diazo dye, which can be derived from meta-phenyleno-diamin-disulpho
acid and the diazo-compounds from primulin and anilin sulpho acid, occurring
as a brown powder, soluble in water, giving an orange-colored solution, and a
brilliant red solution in coucentrated sulphuric acid.

B21,,2e2— August 7, 189/,. C. L. MULLER. Orange dye.

An orange-yellow dye, produced by first preparing a disnlpho acid of meta-
phenylene-diamin by treating meta-phenylene-diamin with fuming sulphuric
acid (vnth at least two molecular proportions of free sulphuric anhydride ]>r<'s-
ent for one molecular proportion of meta-phenylene-diamin), and then combin-
ing this disulpho acid with diazo-primulin. It is a brown powder soluble in
water, giving an orange-yellow solution; same in sulphuric acid.

52U,S2S— August U, 189/,. B. HEYMANN. Blue dye.

Blue coloring matters, dyeing cotton and wool with the aid of mordants:
produced by the action of the nitroso compounds of alkylated benzylanilin
sulpho acids on beta naphthoquinone sulpho acid (1:2:4) in the presence of
sodium thiosulphate.

B2/,,665— August U, 189/,. C. BULOW. Black disazo dye.

Black dyes, the diazo compounds of 1.8 amido-naphthol-monosulpho acid,
can be obtained by the combination of two molecular proportions of a diazo
compound with one molecular proportion of the aforesaid sulpho acid. They
are soluble in hot water, giving blackish-blue .solutions, whidi are changed to a
pure blue to violet on the addition of a caustic alkali. The specific black dye
obtained from a diazo compound of sulphanilic acid, aniline, and the aforesaid
sulpho acid yields a green solution in sulphuric acid.

52U,677— August 1/,, 189/,. E. ELSAESSER. Blue dye.
A blue coloring matter produced by treating the beta-dinaphthyl-meta-

Sbenylendiamin disulphonic acid in a dilute acetic solution with nitroso-
imethylaniline. It easily dissolves in water and dyes wool and silk in an acid
bath.

625,656— September U, 189/,. P. JULIUS. Azo dye.

An azo dye which can be derived from meta-dinitro-aniline and dialkyl-meta-
sulphanilic acid, occurring as a crystalline powder readily soluble in hot water,
giving a scarlet solution, turning red on the addition of liydrochloric acid, and
a bluish-red solution in concentrated sulphuric acid.

Bl5,667—Septembcr /,, 189/,. P.JULIUS. Azo dye.

An azo dye which can be derived from para-nitraniline and diakyl-meta-
sulphamhc acid, occurring as a crystalline powder, soluble in water and alcohol,
and gives a red to reddish-yellow solution m concentrated sulphuric acid.

B51,l/S— December 18, 189/,. J. BIERER AND C. DE LA HARPE. Blue dye.

Blue coloring matters are produced by o.xidizing the product of condensation
of the beta-naphthol sulphonic acid of Schaeffcr and a gallocyanin dve result-
ing from the condensation of hydrochlorate of nitrosodialkylaniline, or"of hvdro-
chlorate of dialkylamidoazobenzene and gallic acid or its derivatives. It'dves
woo! mordanted with chrome mordants, in an acid bath, a blue tint, and is
soluble in alkalis with a violet-blue coloration.

5S1,1/S—Dcectnber 18, 189/,. J. J. BRACK. Substantive red dye.

A hexazo-coloriug matter produced by combining three molecules of a naph-
tliylaminsulpho-acid with one molecule of the hexazo-derivatlve of the triani-
Kio-base derived from the condensation of formaldehyde with tolidin; for-
maldehyde is heated with tolidin in the presence of an excess of hydrochloric
acid in dilute aqueous solution. It Is a brick-red powder which dyes unmor-
danted cotton red, readily soluble in hot water, slightly .soluble in alcohol, and
soluble lu coucentrateii sulphuric acid with a blue-violet coloration.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

225

UI,STS—Januar\i I,

ms. C. BCHRAl'BE AND C. SCHMIDT. .VUrnmmin

Tho iiUnwHiiilmt (if tin- priiiinr>-nnilnfi nn' priMliiceil liy Iriiitlng ciTliilii illiizo
roniixiiiiuN. mch im dlHuviiltn) aiillliic, with a cniwtlc hIIciiII. An wxlliiiii juiUn
till')- lire wiliilili' III wiiliT. wiih winu'wtiiit itlkiilliif mnlloii. niiil priMlucu no

»i<Mlyc III III.' |.i.«. h ( UliiimiiluliiiliitodfwKllmniiiHl iilkiiM. hut im Irciil-

niciit Willi III! I \c'.'» 111 mill nri' cunviTtwl liitu tlii' mrn-MHUiilInK iHhzomiiii-
pomxl which yifl<l» cdlorlUK niiittur on iHimblhiilion with boliina|ihlhol«to of
Mxiliini. l'nrH-niin>-phuii)'l-nltro<ttimln ociMiin i« u yullowlsh i>ii»t« or powder.

SM.v7i—J:i,iimr!i. I. J.w. c. 8CHRAUBE AND V. .SCHMIDT. MInmimin
ctnHjitntN'l.

A iilimMiinin derived from the tctnworomiiound of benztdin, both In the free
•tale Mini 111 n wli. In tho fomi of n KiKllnm dtiit <H-cnrrln(f lu n yi-llowlKh now-
di-r: "oliililf In wmcr, yii'IillnK n hrownlKhviohl color when hnHight on the
HIkt with «oiHuiu beta-imphlholiite and sulv^eqnently cxiHweil to the air.

Ul.glS-Jimitary I, tWt. C. SCHRAUBE AND C. SCHMIDT. Xitrommin cm-

Alii 'lived from the dliizocomiKiiinil of i>nrii-illchloranlllne. both In

the fi I ;i« 11 Mill. «-« a siKliiim siilt occiirrlnif an ii vellowUh jMiW'der;

femlii I niiter; nnd yielding iin orange color whi-n liniught on the

fllH>r nith lielii iiiiphlholute und HiiliHtK]iientl]r exp<«e<l to the iilr. On treat-
ment with a molecular proportion of an acid It Hwumcn the free state.

SJtXS—Januarii 1. isas. C. SCHRAfBK AND C. SCHMIDT. yUromimincom-

A nttrommln derived from diazo-naphthalene; a yellowl.ih powder and In the
form of widlnm salt soluble In water; yielding red nhndes when brought on the
tlher together with KOdlumbeta-ntiphtholateHnd!iub!(eqiientlyexpo!ied to the air.

t3l.uT:-Jau,uiry I. 1S»S. C. SCHRAUBE AND C. .SCHMIDT. Xitrommin com-
pound.

A nitrommin, which in tho form of sodium salt can lie derived from tctrazo-
dlanl.'ildln: ix-eurring as a yellowLsh powder: aolulile In water; and yielding a
blue color when bniught together with sodium beta-naphtholate on the Hber and
■ulMeilUently exjiotH'd to the air.

SM,lii— January S, ;sM. A. WEINBERG. Blue dimzo dye.

A dark blue or black powder, produced by treating the dlazo-derivatiTO of
amldonHphtholdi.iuliih.i acid H (Pat. No. 464,18.1) with cuprous chloride, and
combining ihc lluw obtained pcrchlornaphtholdiaulpho acid with tetrazo bodies
in an alkHlinc solution. It is readily .soluble in water with violet-blue color
insoluble in alcohol, soluble In coneentrate<l sulphuric add with greenish-blue
color, and dyes unmordantcd cotton a blue shade in alkaline or neutral baths.
e3t.U»— January IS, isss. K. I'ATHE AND O. DRESSEL. Red dye.

Red substantive dycstufls pnxlueed by the combination of one molecular
proportion of diazotized dehydrothio-para-toiuidln base with one molecular pro-
portion of the amidonaphtholdisulpho aeld (NH.:OH:SOaH:803H=2-5-7-l) in
an alkaline solution. Red shades are produced oii unmordanted cotton, fast to
the action of alkali and add.

Mi.iSlr-^unuary 15, 1S95. A. F. POIRRIE^. Sutfar dye.

Coloring matters dyeing flbcr direct in black or blackish shades arc produced
by heating with sulphur or sulphur compounds the doubly substituted deriva-
tives of beiizme. such as llie dihydroxyl derivatives or the dianiid derivatives
the lirst class IncludiiiK the dioxvuBphilinlenes and Ilie naphthoquinones and

' ' "I'lKs embracing the dianiins of the benzene and naphthalene series

iiinces callable of prfidudng them. They are very soluble in water'
tions and alkaline suiphids, insoluble in add, and changeable on
c-v, --..,., . ,...iir.

5Si.K»--January 15, 1S9S. R. VIDAL AND A. F. POIRRIER. Suffardye.

IWess of producing coloring matters dyeing nonmordanted fibers: consists in
beating with sulphur or a sulphur compound the joint amin and phenol deriva-
tives, or bodies capable of producing them by reduction.

MJ,W.J— /Vfrrmir;/ 5. Htua. M. HOFFMANN. Slack azo dye.

New black azo dyestuffs arc prodiictsl by combining the diaio compound of
alpha 1 alpha 2 naphthylenedlamin-beta-sulpho add with a diazotizable amin
diazotlzing again, combining with gamma-amldonaphthol-sulpho acid and

oAponi I yl DfT-

SSS,SOS—Fibruanj .'.. I.iS.t. M. LXRICH AND J. BAM.MANN. Blue dye.

Blue sul^Uintive dyeatufls: produced by combining one molecular proportion
ol,tetrazotizcd dlamins, as benzidin, tolidln, dlanlsidin, with one molecular nro-
portlon of amidonapbiboldisulpho acid (XII..:SO.,I1:.«03H:OH = 1:3:B-.h| and one
molecular pni[sirtlon of aiiiidonaphtholmimosiili.bo add (NHs:SO,H'OH=l'4-8)
A dark powder with melallic luster, ca.sily soluble in water with a blue color
diazotizable. when fixed on the fiber, and giving with developers, especiallv
beta-naphthol. deep black shades. '

CM,Si»—yfl,ru(w;/ .':. isas. C. SCHRAUBE. Ked Ixuic dye.

A re<l basic coloring matter, l>eta-alkyI-eurho<lln, produced by heating to-
gether alpha-naohthylamin hydrochiorate and an azo dye derived from mouo-
alkyl-para-toluldlii, diazo sulpiianlllc acid, and phenol. It dyes bright scarlet
shades on cotton mordanted with tannin and on silk. ' •»

MI..S73— February I'j. isyo. R. PAGANINI. Blue dimzo dye.

A dlMizo (lyestull prodiiccii by exposing an alkaline solution of alpba-oxy-
ai-'iii'iii'iiiiphthoicacid totheactionofa tetrazo derivative, such as the tetrazo
'' loluldin, and subsequently combining the resulting Intermediate

1 Mlpha-naphthol-mono-siilphonate of soda. A dark-brown powder

", 'luster, soluble In waU-r with a blue-Tiolct. in concentrated sui-

pliunc IK ai with a pure bine, and in solution of caustic soda with a carmine-
red coloration. v».™iu<;

6SiM»— February i6, 1895. J. BIERER. Blue dye.

8ulphonated gallocyanln dyes are pmdnced by heating a dialkyUunidoazo
benzencsulpho acid, having a sulpho troup In the second benzene nucleus-
thai Is. Ill the benzene nucleus which forms a dlamido derivative on the spllt-
img of the amidoazo compound by rediiclion— with a gallic comtHnind in a
BUItalile solvent. It Is soluble in water, in.soluble In alcohol, di.ssolving in a
solution of MKlliim acetate with blue oolor. In caustic alkalis with violet-blue
color in ordinary and diluteil hydnx'blorie acid with re<l color, and in concen-
trated sulphuric acid with a bliiLsh to vloIet-rcd color; dyeing wool and silk
mrcetly in an acid imth and presenting great aainlty for metalUc mordants.
«A5,0Ai— .tfuroA 5, IS9S. A. WEINBERG. Brmm dye.

Bn.wn dlsazodyestuBs are pnxlueed by combining the tetrazo derivativea of
paradiamlns. such as benzidin, with one molecule of phenyl-gamma-amldo-
No, 'J10 15

naphtholmlphoarid and one mobsnlc of nn otvcnrl-
acid. The (lyMitult derived from
soluble III hot water and ali'ohi.l
add with a violet sliiule, and li ii
In alkaline or neutral battis.

lie ncld. Rllrb

■ nllcyllc
I'-r easily
"ulpburli'

5X,0S!—ilnrrh 5, IKSir,. A. WKINBEIKi.
A risl C'iliirliig iiiiiitcr |>ro<lucc'l \,\ l.r
pcn'hloniuphilnililisulplio Ill-ill unli '
such as ilcliydriithlo|siriiioliiji|in. i|.
ac-lds. A dark Imiwn i«)Wilcr la-llv ~'
wllhred color. In concentrHii'd Milpiuirii

fthtfith-rrt! nsn dyr.

• •, of

■Is.

-.]'ho

'<■'■!■ Ill colli Huttr uitd in hot »plrit

Id with violet color; and dye* nn-

mordaiittfl cotUm a bright blul-li ml shad

HM.UI—Mareh l«, ISgl. M. KAHN AND F. RINKEL. Black dye.

fi„^""«'T*f""*'.*i'''ro *"",',''','■■ rf™'"''"' by combining on. ni..l,cular nrots.r.
tlonof u-tnizotlzeddlaiiil.l..: ; uln sulphoa. i : " ,r

pn.|sirtionol aniiilonai.liii Ki, Inann I

Ing Ihc rwiltliig iiiicniii.l, , and flnall-, ,^

tetrazo comisiund with two mmii iiinr proiKjrtlons of a mtta '1 «

meta phelylendlamln or mcUi loluvlcndiamin, in an acetic aci T

brownish black (siwder easily soluble In water. Insoluble in ale.'i r>,„Z

soda lye, soluble In eoncentraleil sulphuric add, with a blnlsb-bhick color.
Me,itlt-Mareh!g, 1895. W. HERZBERO. Amidotria^n.

f-r;l5'''""^''^"K""'P„'""""i' '-> ,"'L' nction of aIdchy.l«.of the aromatic or
fatserie« ii|s.nchrysoldiii»-the coloring inaii, rs f..rmed by tho action of dlaa*.
tlzed amins or telrazotlzed paradiamlns or tli.ir sulpho or carbo adds on the
mctadlamins-and the sulplio derivatives of thf)se of the said suhatanees whhh
contain no sulpho or curbonyl groui«<, produced by the action of sulphonaUng
ft?^l '\?"i"'Tv'^"';".''/."".'."';'A' l'"»'"fr, more or lem soluble In water
Insoluble In alcohol, soluble in alkallni- liquors, and possessing a stron> swSt
taste. They inay tx; dlazotlze.1 and coiiibin«l with phenols, amlns. the nUo^
and carbo adds of phenols and omiiis to form azo coloring matters.
5M,et6— April S, 1$95. R. HIRSCH. Blue dye.

. J.T S?"''^,r',''^oP ™»"<L™' J*'"" ?■"* ?™/ ^'°'e'. "« produced by oxidizing
amldo-dlmethylaniUne with chromic acid in the presence of one molecule o1
hydrochloric add to one molecule of amido-dlmethylanillnc; the blue coloring
matter being ea.slly soluble, the gray violet less .s<ilublein water, but perfedlv
solub e in acidulated water. The blue dves ctlou a dark blue when mSrdanted
with tannin, and black when mordanletl with iron; the gray violet dves cotton
mordantLsl with tannin, and will work on unmordanted cotton. v.i»,u

5Se.S7a— April g, 189S. R. KIRCHUOFF. Black dye.

A tetrazo dye is produee<l by reacting with one molecule of tetmzotlzed oaia-
amidobenzene-azo-amido-para-cresolethor upon one molecule of sallcTlic add
and combining the iiiteriiicdiate pnxiuct with one molecule of gamma-amldo^
iiaphtholmonosulphoadd Inalkaline solution. It is soluble in cold more read-
ily n hot water, with dark violet color; in concentrated suliihuric acid with
dark blue color, produces on unmordanted cotton black shades and after fixa-
tion on Hber canlw rediazotized ond combined with amins and phenols.
SX,Sa»—AprU 1, 1S95. R. KIRCHHOFF. Blue-black dye.

A dye produced by reacting with one molecule of tetrazotized pora-amldo-
benzenc-azo-amido-para-eresoTether upon one molecule of alpha.^Dhthvlal
minc-betarmonosulphoacid (Cldvo's beta acid) and combining the internie<llate
prixluct with one molecule of gamma-amldonaphtholmonosulnho acid In alka-
line solution. It is soluble in cold, more readilv in hot water with a vlolet-bbw
color; in concentrated sulphuric acid, with a dark indigo-blue color- and nn>
duces on unmordantcd cotum bluish-black shades, and after fixation on the
fiber, can be re<liazotued and combined with amins and phenols.

5Se,SB0—Apra !. lg»5. R. KIRCHHOFF. Blue dye.

A dye prixlucea by reacting with two molecules of gamma-amldo-naphthol-
monosulpho acid in wettkl,v add solution ui«in one molecule of tetrazotized
pani-Hmfdobenzene-azo-amido-para-cresolether. It is soluble in col.l more raS-
ilvln hot water, ivith violet-blue color; in concentrated sulphuricacld with blue-
black color; and produces on unmor<lanted cotton, fast blue shades.

557,511— April 16. 1S9S. A. WEINBERG. PhenylamidonnplMiAiiuffo acid.
■ ^ n«*''.<'"°>I^'!>V'. CwHiSOsH.OH.NH.-CHj, colorless small needles, form-
ing dyestuffs with diazo or tetrazo compounds, is produced by heatlnir
gamma-amido-naphtholsulpho acids with aromatic amlns in presence of SmS
of condensaUon, such as hydrochiorate of aniline. >=«=">.•« ui means

5S7,7t3— April 16, 1895. J. 8CHMID AND K. JEDUCKA. Oraitpe dye.

Orange coloring matters, similar to pHosphine, produced by exposing a vellow
aeridiu ilywtuiT to the at-tion of an alcohol in the presenoe of aniliierai add
Accxirding to the degree of alkalizatlon, orange-yellow t^i red-orange tints are
produced, suitable for dyeing leather and cotton mordanted with tannin.
538.183— April iS, 1895. J. SCHMID AND J, MOHLER. Blue dye.

A poly-oxythlonin coloring matter produced by condensation of 7 oxv 1 1
naphtlKKiuiiionc 4. monosulpho acid with thlosulphonic acid of para-amid^
alkylbenzylanllln-sulphonate of sixla; forming a dark violet powder which
dissolves with a blue-violet coloration in concentrated sulphuric acid hot
water, or in a dilute ammonia solution.

53S.!15—AprU 2S, 1895. T. RANDMEYER. Blue dye.

A blue dyestult the s<>dium salt of the symmetrical trisnlpho acid of triphe-
nylrosanlliu: produced by tho condensaUon of two moleciJes of monosufoho
acid of diphcny amin with one molcj'ulp of formaldehyde in add solution to
the disiiliiho ac d of diphenyldlamldodlphcnylmothan, and the oxidation of
tlio said dcnvative in comWnation with n further molreule of dlphenylamln-
monosulpho acid. It dUsolves in . i—cujiimjuii

brown shade, in cold water, with u ;
in concentrated alkall-lye and amm

539.699— Hay tl, 1S9S. M. MOELLER. Blue dye.

Blue coloring matters are produced by acting with one molecular pronortlon
of a tetrazo compound of a iwradlamln on two molecular ,,

sodium saltof amidonaphtholdisulpho add (.NII.:!«OjlI-,S(i ,,

an alkaline solution. The dyi.stutl .lerived fni'm 1 s nniiu
acid and the tetrazo compound of h,.iizi,lln Is easily. soluble in «.iur di.vsolv'iuir
with Indigo-blue color in strong sulphuric add: ami thcv dve unmoi^anted
cotton, in an alkaline or neutral bath containing common salt'orGlauber'SKiltl

539,738— Hay tl, 1895. W. HERZBERG AND O. WEBER. Blue dye.

Blue dyes are produced by heating with sulphur and fuming sulphuric add
the cotK^cnsation pro. ucts obtalneil from an alpha,.lx.ta,.lmldS«nai,h"hol
derivative and a para-nltnwo derivative of an .Ukylated amin. The dve n cue

- dlphenylamin-

sulphuric aeld, with a reddish-
'le; ilstrisulphoadddlsaolTlnir
brown shade.

226

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

alphai-beta,-ami(lonaphthol-beta,rnionofUlpho acid and para-nitroso-dimethyl-
anilin be used, is moderatelv soluble in cold, more readily in hot water with a
violet-blue color, dissolves in concentrated sulphuric acid, with a green color,
and yields by reduction a leuco compound readily reoxidizable. They form
lakes' with metiillic mordants which dye fast-blue tints.

SiO,Ui—Juiu: 4, 1S96. M. DLRICH AND J. BAMMANN. AmidonaphtholdieiU-

pho acid.

An alpha-amido-alpha-naphthol-beta-disulpho acid is produced by melting
with caustic alkalis, most practically at from 180° to 190° C, the alpha-naphthy-
lamine-trisulpho acid, which is derived from the naphthalenetrisulpho acid
obtained at first by Gurke and Kudolph by sulphonating naphthalene or its
mono or disulpho acid, prepared first by Koch by nitrating the .said naphtha-
lenetrisulpho acid and reducing the alpha-nitronaphthalene-trisulpho acid
thus formed. It crystallizes in .small, thin, white needles, showing in aqueous
solution a weak reddish-violet fluorescence; by combining with the salts of
diazobenzene or analagous diazo compounds, red colors with a strong bluish
tinge result, while the tetrazo dyestuffs obtained produce, in geucral, blue
shades.

5U),o6h—Jime I,, 1B95. L. WACKER. BhiC acid dye.

An acid coloring matter is produced by first heating together amido-phthalic
acid and monochlor-acetic acid, preferably in an alkaline solution; next heating
the phenvl-glvcocol-dicarboxvlic acid so obtained in a caustic alkaline melt
and treating the resulting leiico compound with oxidizing agents; and Anally
sulphonating the resulting carboxylated product by treating with fuming sul-
phuric acid. It is soluble in water,giving green-blue solutions; yellow, in alka-
line solutions, and green in concentrated sulphuric acid. The carboxylated
compound (free and in combination) viclds a blue solution of the alkali salts,
and on reduction yields a leuco compound from wljlcU the dye can be regener-
ated by oxidation.

SUiA^i— August 27, 1S9S. H. A. BERNTHSEN AND P. JULIUS. Azo orangedye.
A dark reddish-brown powder which can be obtained by the combination of
the tetrazo compound of benzidin-disulpho acid with a nitro diamin, such as
nitro-meta-phenvlene-diamin; soluble in water, precipitated from its aqueous
solution bv .soda solution, and yielding a deep orange precipitate from its
aqueous solution on the addition of dilute sulphuric acid; in couceutrated sul-
phuric acid giving a yellow-red solution.

5iB,SS0— August 27, lS9o. R. BOHN. Black dye.

Black coloring matter obtained by treating dinitro-naphthalene with sodium
sulphide, yielding fast-black shades on vegetable fiber on dyeing from a bath
rendered strongly alkaline with soda. The speciflc coloring matter obtained as
ab<.>ve and subsequently treated with hydrochloric acid is almost insoluble in
caustic soda and in concentrated sulphuric acid.

5iB.SS7— August -27, 1S9S. R. BOHN. Black dye.

Black coloring matter obtained by treating dinitro-naphthalene with sodium
sulphide and subsequently with acetic acid; soluble in soda solution giving a
violet coloration.

SlSfiOk— September 17, 1S96. J. THIELE. Amido-tetrazotic acid and process of

riiaking same.

A new white crystalline product, soluble in water, and precipitated from its
solution by copper salts, is produced by treating a solution of diazo-guanidin
with sfMiium acetate, concentrating by evaporation, and crystallizing.

61,7, 17S— October 1, 1895. C. A. MAYER AND C. DE LA HARPE. I^euco com-
pound and process of making it.

A leuco body, suitable for printing on textures, is produced by the condensa-
tion of a phenol, as resorcin, with a gnllocyanin dye obtained by the action of
hydrochlorateof nitrosodialkylanilin or of hydrochlorale of dialkylamidoazo-
benzene on gallic acid or its derivatives. The leuco body, produced from resor-
cin, colors textures a blue tint when printed thereon and oxidized on the fiber.

6!S.SU>— October Si, 1895. A. ASH\yoRTH AND J, BURGER. Brown dye.

A coloring matter; produced by adding alpha amido beta naphthol to a solution
of tannin in a condensing agent, .such as sulphuric acid, and heating the mix-
ture; little soluble in cold water, easier soluble in hot water, soluble in caustic
soda with violet color, changing into brown on agitation and with admixture
of air; soluble in concentrated sulphuric acid with a crimsom red color; produc-
ing on chrome mordants brown shades,

SiS,SiS— October », 1895. A. ASHWORTH AND J. BURGER. Brown dye.

Coloring malters: produced by adding ortho oxy beta nitroso naphthalene to
a solution of tannin m a condensing agent, such as sulphuric acid, and heating
the mixture; a dark, nearly black j>owder slightly soluble in cold water, more
soluble in boiling water, soluble in cold dilute caustic soda with a brown color,
in concentrated sulphuric acid with a deep purplish brown coloration; produc-
ing on chrome mordants brown shades.

6iS.Si6— October 22. 1895. A. ASHWORTH AND J. BURGEE. NUrosonaphOiol

dye undprocess of making same.

Nitrosobetanaphthol is treated with bisulphites at a temperature of 40° to 50° C.
The dye consists of grayish to white crystals, easilv soluble in water, which
solution grows darker on st^inding. It is decomposed on addition of caustic
alkalis, producing green shades with iron mordants and brown shades with
chrome mordants.

6i8,t,16— October SI, 1895. A. ASHWORTH AND J. BURGER. Brown dye.

Coloring matters produced by combining diazo compounds with the condensa-
tion product of alpha-nitroso-Dcta-naphtnol and sodium bisulphite, consisting
of a brownish powder ca.sily soluble in water, soluble in caustic soda, carbonate
of soda, and in alcohol with yellowish-brown color, dyeing on uninordaiUcd
wool from an acid bath brown shades and dyeing and printing with chrome
mordants brown shades.

ei8,i60— October ^, 1893. C. RI8. Brouni dye and process of making same.

Tetraoxyazobenzenc, a brown coloring matter produced by suojecting the
diazo compound of para-amido-phenol or its sulpho acids to the action of pyro-
gallic acid in an alkaline solution; soluble in alkalis with an intensely brown
color, and forming with concentrated sulphuric acid an orange-colored solution.

Bia.ose— October i9, 1895, R. VIDAL,

aromatic series with sulJUcs.

Soluble dyestuffs and coloring matters, characterized bv solubility in water
and in acids, are produced by treating with alkaline sulpliiles and bisulphites
the coloring matters obtained by the action of sulphur upon bodies of the aro-
matic series, as the substituted amines of the bcniseue series.

Process of treating sulphur compounds of

555,959— Ttbnmry I.'!, 1896. H. A. BERNTHSEN AND P. JULIUS. Red dye and

process of making same.

A red substantive diazo body produced by converting a benzidin salt into a
tetrazo compound and combining one molecular proportion of the same with one
molecular proportion of .salicylic acid and subsequently with one molecular
proportion of 2. 4'.2' amido-naphthol-sulpho-acid in alkaline solution, boiling
and precipitating with common salt; readily soluble in hot and cold water giving
red solutions, in sulphuric acid giving a violet-blue solution, and with nitrous
acid yielding a gray to black diazo compound capable of uniting with beta-
naphthol to yield a dark shade of color.

555,658— March 3, 1896. R, NIETZKI. Yellow coloring matter.

A yellow dyestuif produced by combining the monosulphonic acids of heta-
diazo-naphthalene with salicylic acid; forming a yellow-brown powder, diflS-
cultlv soluble in cold water, petroleum, and benzene, readily soluble in hot
water- dissolving in concentrated sulphuric acid with a dark orange-red color;
and producing pure yellow shades with alum mordant and olive-yellow shades
with chroniinm mordant.

550,90!,— March S, 1896. H. LAUBMANN. Dye from dinitro-anthrachrysone- disulfo

acid.

A green dyestuff produced by treating dinitro-anthrachrysone-di.sulphonic
acid with soilium sulphide in alkaline solution; forming a black cry.stalline
powder, soluble in hot water with red-blue color, in dilute alkali with red-violet
color in concentrated sulphuric acid with blue-red color; ditlicultly soluble in
glacial acetic acid \yith red color; completly absorbed by wool from an acid
bath, the colored stuff giving green tints on treatment with chromium fluoride.

556,16!,— March 10, JS9S. C. RIS AND C. SIMON, Oray dye and process of mak-
ing same.

A gray coloring matter produced by subjecting the alkyl derivative of beta-
amido-alphaj-napbthol-beta.rsulplio acid to the action of a tetrazo compound,
as tetrazodiphenyl or tctrazoditolyl; soluble in water with a bluish-gray color, in
concentrated sulphuric acid with a blue color; and producing on unmordanted
cotton bluish-gray to black shades of considerable fa.stness.

656,298— March 10, 1896. J. BAMMANN AND M. ULRICH. Blue dye.

Violet-blue to greenish-blue mixed substantive dyestuffs produced by com-
bining equi-molecular proportions of any of the known tetrazo bodies, as tetrazo-
ditolyl, with 1.8 amidonaphtholdisulpho acid and any of the hydroxy deriva-
tives of naphthalene, as dihydroxynaphthalene; dyeing unmordanted cotton
violet-blue to greenish-blue shades which can be rediazotized on the fiber and
converted into deeper blue or bluish-black shades by means of developers: they
form grayish-black powders soluble in water, insoluble in diluted hydrochloric
or sulphuric acid, but dissolve in concentrated sulphuric acid with olue color.

557,002— March 2i, 1896. R. REYHEB. Azine dye.

Red azine dyes produced by condensing salts of nitroso derivativesof second-
ary aromatic amins with phe'nylmetatoluylendiamin, forming a brown powder
with metallic luster, easily soluble in water and alcohol, with a red color; insol-
uble in soda lye; soluble in concentrated sulphuric acid, with a green color, and
producing on cotton mordanted with tannin brilliant red shades fast to alkali
and light.

557,1,35— March SI, 1896. J. SCHMID. Blue dye.

Blue polyazo dyes are obtained by coupling together two molecules of tetrazo
bodies derived from benzidine and the analogous bodies — such as tolidin, diami-
dostilbene, diamidodiphenol ethers, diamidoethoxydiphenyl — with one mole-
cular proportion of 1.8 amidonaphthol, 3.6 disulphonate of soda, or 1.8 dioxy-
naphthalene, 3.6 disulphonate of soda; forming black powders with a metallic
luster, soluble in water with a blue and in concentrated sulphuric acid with a
green-blue coloration; dyeing unmordanted cotton blue tints of a pure shade.

557.ISe— March 31, 1896. J. SCHMID. Blue dye.

Dark violet-blue to blue polyazo dyestuffs are produced by the action of 1.4
naphtholmonosulphonate of soda upon the products of No. 557,43-5; forming black
powders of metallic luster, soluble in water with a violet, in concentrated sul-
phuric with a blue coloration; dyeing unmordanted cotton iu a neutral or alka-
line bath violet to pure blue shades.

557,l,S7—MarchSl, 1896. J. SCHMID. Black trisozo dye.

Black triazo coloring matters are produced by subjecting the diazo dyes of
No. 525,626 to further diazolation and combination with amins and plieuols, ashy
diazotizingand treating the rediazotized compound with n cold solution of meta-
phenylenediamin; or metatoluylenediamin or mclaainidopheiioi: or resorcin
kept alkaline by an excess of carbonate of scKla; (orniiiig black powders with a
metallic luster, soluble in hot water, with a blue-black coloration and dyeing
deep black shades on unmordanted cotton.

557,1,38- March 51,1896. J. SCHMID. Blue dye.

Triazo dyestuffs obtained by the combination of 1.8 amidonaphthol, 3.6 disul-
phonate of soda with the rediazotized Intermediate prwiiicts resulting by the
action of one molecular proportion of a tetrazo compound, such as the tetrazo
compound of benzidine upon one molecule of metaamidoparacresol ether;
easily soluble in water with a dark-blue coloration, in concentrated sulphuric
acid with a green-blue coloration; and producing indigo-blue tints on unmor-
danted cotton, which may be rediazotized and developed on the fiber to blue
black with amins and phenols.

557,1,39— March 31, 1896. J. SCHMID. Polyazo Uack dye.

A blue-black polyazo dye obtained by the reaction of two molecular propor-
tions of amidonaphtholmonosulpho acid and one molecular proportion of the
intermediate product, resulting by the action of two molecular proportions of
tetrazo-diphenyl with one molecular proportion of 1.8 amidoijxynaphthalene
3.6 disulpho acid; a black powder with a bronze-like luster, soluble in water
with a black vii>Iet — in concenlrated sulphuric acid with a pure blue color-
ation; and dyeing unmordanted cotton blue-black shades in an alkaline bath
which may be developed on the fiber to a deep black.

557,1,1,0— March SI. 1896. J. SCHMID. Blue-black disazo dye.

Asymmetrical coloring matters derived from one molecular proportion of
naphthalene-diamine-disiilpho acid 1.8.3.6, one molecule of naranitrodiazo-
benzene and one molecule of another diazo body; forming black [lowders of a
bronze luster, easily soluble in water with a dark violet to dark blue coloration,
in concenlrated sulphuric acid with a dark-green coloration; and producing
deep blue-black to black tints of great fastness on wool in an acid bath or on
a mordant of a cliroine salt.

.'i58,3IA— April U, 1896. H. A. BERNTHSEN AND P. JULIUS. Blue dye.

A substantive coloring matter, a mixed disazo dye: derived from tetrazo-dia-
nisidin, 1.5.7 amido-naphtholsulpho acid combined in alkaline solution and
alphanaphtholaulpho acid (1.4; 1.5), which in the form of sodium salt is soluble

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

227

In w»ler. »n(1 on trcalmfnt with nitrouii hpUI on the (Ibor yU-Itl* k more violet
•liiuo compound which i-iimblnw with Ixita-niphthol uml ijlvi'n iIivimt nnd
more violet nhadex thnn tho orlxlnnl hinr.
MS.tll— April tl. im*!. ('. Kl'DOM'II. /Imim (Uii >/i/.

A lirowti Hio <Iyt'."lii(t priKliii'eil liy Unit romhli
dittniln tmlpho-ft4'ld with onr mnU-rule i>( l>et«-fi
n melndinniln and ii(trrwHrdi<nctlnK iii>om the thii

il mftiiti'liiylcn-

olir liHiitiiih? of
■■Hill.' iirodlict

with ono nidU'riilo of dliuo-naphlhlonli- iicid; it dvi-n iiiiiii.inl«nli'<l loitona

vcllow Imiwn. luiil form* h dwp diirk brown iiowdi'rsoluhli' In roniTiitmlcd

iulphurle acid to it dirty violet aolution, and lu water to a yillowtuh-hnmn

■oliiUun.

SSH.HIf— April !l. lioe. C. RUDOLl'H. OzyqulnoHn too dyf.

A nflhliio tclraio dvosliifl pn«lnpcd hy lomhlnlnR ilinnlsMIn with thu
•odinm Mill of nlphn, nlphii. iimiilooxvn«|ihlhiili'iic-l*Iit,lH'ta, .llxiilpho-npld
and afturwHnU i-oml)lnlnK wllh this IntcriiufllHli' prcKliict nil iilknllnf solution
of iwrnoxyiiuinolln; u (triviiish limwn |powdcr of a ini'talllc luntt-r. noluble In
watiT to n blue and In mnuiK »ul|ihiiric iwld to a pure greeii-bluc soluttun, and
dyeluK unmordunti'd cotloii riHlulflh blue.

MSAll,— April tt.txm. C.RUDOLPH. lSr<tiim am dye.

A liniwii oolvii/ii chistulT. dvelne uninordnntiKl cotton: prwliiccd by flnit
, - iif HWmnrckbnmn sulpho-ncid ivltli one molecule of

,1 iiphihalciu' di.stiliilioni'ld and afterwards combining

V. (iinjiound two molecules of dinzo-naphthionh! add; a

blaek brown puwUur, dUaolving In concentrated sulphuric add to n violet-
brown solution.

iSa.OSt— April «S, Ifm. R. REYHKR. Azin ttyc atiil jiTOcru* »/ mnki»g il.

Axin dyes produced by eoudensinjf salts of nitro**omtinoalkylorthotoluldln
wllh paratoluymetaloluylcnediamin and then se[>aralluK llie dye by flltratlon;
tornilng a brown powder with nietallie luster: soluble in water and alcohol
with a red color, in concentrated sulphuric acid « ith a itrcen color, insoluble
ill sixla-lve: ami dvcius cotton mordantc<l with tannin brilliant reil shades, fast
to alkall'and light*.
fMt.ff—Ai'ril sn, l/m. R. REYHER. Azin dyf and procnt qf making il.

' ■ iinxliieed by condensluK salts of uitrusiHllulkyliuiilin with para-

! ylcnediamin and then separatinR the dye by lillration: forniin);a

^i . ic iMiwder with inetallie lu.ster. soluble in water with a vlolet-rwl

color, in ulioliol with a blulsh-n'd color, in concentrnted sulphuric ftcid with a
green color: insoluble in soda-lye, and dyeing cotton mordanted with tannin
violet-red shades, fast Ut alkali and light.

e60.U»—.Va!i 19. /S9«. A. WEINBERG. Illaek ar« dyf.

Aai dyes of the general formula: Amidonaphlholsulfo-acid I-omidonaphthol-
iulphoacid ll-metadiainin imradiamin-metadiamin, are pro<iuecd by treating
the iiiteriuediHtecouii«jund of the KeuemI constitution piiradiamlnamidonaph-
tholsiilpho-aeiil I amidonaplitholsulpho-aeld II with nitrous acid and combin-
ing the thus productHi letrazo comiKiunds with two molecules of a metadiamin:
forming u black iKiwder soluble in hot water and in concentrated sulphuric
acid with a bluish-black color: Insoluble in alcohol, ether, or benzene, and
dyeing unmor<lanted cotton a deep black, fast to alkalis.

ieo.U9—}tay 19, 1896. A. WEINBERG. Blnci dye.

Aaj lives produced by treating the intermediate compounds formed from one
moleciife of a tetraxo body and one molecule of an aniid<maplithotsu1pho acid
with nitrons acid, as by mixing one molecule of diazotize<l Hcetparaphenylene-
dianiin with one molecule oi an amidtniaphtholsulpho rt<'id. heating with
caustic alkalis to remove the acetyl group and treating the diamidoazo body
with nilRius acid, and combining the thus prtMluccd tetrazoazo compound with
one molecule of an amidonaphtholsulpho add and one molecule of a metadia-
min. forming a black iKjwder soluble in hot water with bluish-black color, in
concentrated sulphuric acid with a dark-blue color, and dyeing unmordantcd
cotton a deep black.

6eo.79r>—Xay te, 1896. B. HEYMANN. Blue dye.

Blue coloring matters produced by the action of nitrosomcthylbenzylanilin-
sulpho-acid with U'ta-naphth*KiuinoiieMilpho-acid (1:2:6 or 1:2:7) in the presence
of siKlium thiosulnhale, OP with the nitrosonaphtholsulpho-acld (l:2:(i or 1:2:7)
which furnishes tiic corresponding lieta-naphtn(Xiuinone.sulpho-acid by reduc-
tion anil subscfpient oxidation in the presence of sodium thiosnlphate: a dark
powder with metAllic luster, soluble in water with a blue color, in concentrated
sulphuric acid with a green color, and dyeing w<k)I and cotton mordanted with
chromium salts.

Seo.rae—itay ?«, tfm. M. Hoffmann. niaeki»h-Uuc a:o dye.

Aio dye-stuffs produced by combining the diazo compound of alphai-alphoj-
■mldoacetnaphthalid-betasulpho acid with a diazotizabic amin, diazotiElng
again, combining with a hydroxylated naphthalenesulpho-acid and saponifying
the product; a black powder soluble in water with a dark-blue color, in' sul-
phuric acid with a bluish-black sliade, insoluble in alcohol, and dyeing wool
and cotton a blackish blue.

ieo.S90~May te, 1896. E. BROEMME. Proeeu o/ producing lako.

DyestuH-lakes arc obtained, for example, from acid tar dyes, by the precipita-
tion of soluble dyestuffs by the addition of a soluble strontium salt to a solution
of the dyestuff and s<xlium carUuiatc or sodium sulphate.

S61.!7e—Junel,lS»;. A. F. It)IRRIER. Htilfurctrd dxjr.

" Thiocatechins;" coloring matters which dye unmordanted cotton In tints
var\ing from yellow i/a brown and red brown, are pro<luced by heating to pre-
gcri\>e»r temperatures — 200*' to 300° C. — with sulphur or sulpnur compounds,
RCetylated paradlamins, and acting on the product with so^Iium sulphite.

561,S77— June t, 1896. A, F. POIRRIER. SiU/ttreted dye.

Yellow, brown, and yellowish-brown coloring matters, dyeing vegetable fibers
without mordant, are produced by the action of sulphur upon the substituted
aromatic amins or the acctylated aromatic diamins at between 200° and 250° C.

5fl.ilt.1—June9,1896. F. Rl'NKEL. Redazodyr.

A red azo coloring-matter produced by combining mi>lecular proportions of
the diazotized ethylparamidobenzoate with Ihedioxynaphihalene mimosulpho-
acid (OH:SO,H:OH=I..|.8) of No. 4M.679: forming a brown powder with
a green luster, soluble in hot water and alcohol witn a red color. In concen-
trates! sulphuric acid with a liluish-black color, and producing on wool clear
red shades fast against alkalis.

561.69!,— June 9. 1896. A. BLANK, A. ISRAEL, AND M. HERZBERQ. Black aso

dye and process ftj making same.

A substantive black azo dye produced hy combining one molecular propor-
tion of telmzoUzcd tUanisldin or tolidin, first, with one molecular proportion of

amidonaphthni dl>ulpho4cld f!«n,:fK)|II:'<^>H:OH-l:A:<:A) or an alkalina
salt ttiereof- ihrti with one mr>lmi1ar firoiiortlon of n mcdwllNniiii '•ii<'h a*
melnphcii ■! or mctAlolnylcii- ' ■■'»-

formed iti itT with one mob. -yl

(■nraplH'ii) ; n. n iilack iwiwfler ■ "k

color, In uuiivvulrated siilphiirii: acid with a blulali-bUvk color.

m,709— Junes. Igen. M. IIKRZBKRO, A. BLANK.AKDA. IflRACL. Blaekiuo

dye.

Riilniantlve black aio dye*. priKlucnl by comblninc one noleeater proportion

of tctrazotlKsl iiaradiamlns "•• i-ii»i m,i, iir.i win, .inemolaetitor pmportlonol
amidonaphthol disulpho-n), or an alkslina

salt thereof, then with oie ,f « mcliulUmln. such aa

inetaphenytene<Ilainlii. and :.: , „ inrmed mlxe*! azo dye«ttilh

with one molecular proiPortiiMi of diazotizeil neetylintrmphenjrtenediamln: black
liowders soluble In waUT with a tdack color. In conccntrateil sulphuric acid
with a blulflh-black color.

liei,toa— June 16, 1806. J.8CHMID AND K. JKDLIC'KA. Vark-green dye.

A new dye Is produce<l by heating the unsymmetrlc dlaxo coloring mailer of
No. .Vi7,+I0 with water in the presence of a suitable condensing agirnt: dyeing
with mure blue or mure green shades than the original coloring matter.

56S,S8t—July7, 1896. F. KRECKE AND I. ROSENBER<i. AmIdmmphlholdUul-

ptuhoeitl K.

The I.D.4.e-amldonaphtholdlsulpho acid K. pro<Iuce<I by sulphonatlng l.b-
naphthalenedlsulpho a<'ld with l^iimlng sulphuric add at temperaluro not
above that of a wati'r bath, transforming the so-pnsliiceiI 1.3.'VnaphthnIene-
trisiilpho aciti by nitration and reduction into the 1.4.t).8-naphthylamintrl-
BUlphoiilc acid, the diazo derivative of which can not t>e precipitated from ita
aqueous sf>liitions by common salt; heating this naphthylainintristilpho-acld
with caustic-.soda lye, and nre<'ipitatlng it as add so<Iiuin salt from the alkaline
Ili|Uld thus obtained, by actdulatlon with muriatic acid. It Is readily soluble in
water and gives azo colors more reddish in shade than those prepared with the
H add.

563,883— July 7, 1896. F. KRECKE AND I. ROSENBERG, Azo dye.

Azo dyostuBs prepannl by combining the "K" add of No. 663.382 with tb«
molecular proportion of a diazo txidy; with diazo benzene there Is formed a
crystalline bronzy powder easily soluble in water, and dyeing wool a bright
re<I from an acid bath,

663,SSI,-July7,1896. F. KRECKE AND I. ROSENBERG. IHazodyr.

Diazo dyestuffs produced by combining one molecule of add "K" of No.
663,3S2 with one molecule of a diazo twidy In acid solution an<l acting upon the
so-formed intermediate azo prmluct with another molecule of a diazo Usly; a
crystalline iiowder of reddisn-broiizc color, dying wool a dark greenish blue in
an acid bath.

563.383— July 7, 1896. F. KRECKE AND I. ROSENBERG. Sue letrato dye.

Tetrnzo dvestuffs produced by combining one molecule of a tetrazo body with
twouiolcciiicsof add "K" of No. 663,382 in alkaline solution; a crystalline yel-
low-bninze [x^wder, dyeing unmordante<I cotton a bright violet blue of great
depth.

563,386— July 7, 1896. F. KRECKE AMD I. ROSENBERG. OreenM-btue tetrazo

dye.

Tetrazo dyestuffs produced by combining one molecule of add " K " of No.
.'163,382 with one molecule of a tetrazo body, and acting on the so-formed Inter-
mc-<liate diazo azo body with an aromatic amin or phenol, or sulpho or carbo
add thereof; forming bronzy crystalline powder, dyeing unmordanted cotton a
bright greenish blue.

567 ,!tl3— September 8, 1896. C. RIS. Brown diazo dye and method of making tame.
A brown coloring matter, obtained by combining the tetrazo eomponnd of
benzldin with salicylic acid and with alkylated beta,-alpha^-amldo-naphthol-
betaa-sulpho-acid: a dark br<")wn powder soluble in water, with a dark brown
color, in concenlrttte<l sulphuric acid with a violet-blue color, and producing
fast and intense brown shade on unmordanted cotton.

567,1,73— September 8, 1896. W. HERZBERG AND H. HEIMANN. Red dye ol

rosinduhn series.

The disoda salt of phenylrosindulintrisulphonlc acid, derived from alpha-
nnphthylamin and ortnoamidodlphenylamln-sulphonic acid by joint oxidation,
subsequent phenylation and sulphonatlon by means of fuming sulphuric acid;
of the fonnula C»H|«N|S0iH(S0jNa)3; producing on wool dear red shades of a
bluish tint.

,v,7 .567 , Srplember a. 1896. A.HERRMANN. Blue coloring matter.

Fa.st-bluc coloring matter produced by condensing monobenzylaniUn or ita
homologues. incluoing the sulphonlc acids, with metaoxybenzaldehyde: sul-
ptiouatiuK the metaoxyleuco tm-ses obtained thereby: and then oxidizing the
resulting leuco-sulph<*nic add with a suitable reagent, such as lead peroxide.

567,615— September 15. 1896. F. Rl'NKEL. Blue aa> dye.

The azo coloring matter produced by combining one molecular proportion of
the diazo comjiound of dimethyl-paraphenyleuedlamln. NHi.C.I! ' "". ,,
with one molecular prop<*rtion of the wKlium salt of dlhydrtix :ie

sulpho-acid: a dark powder with bronze-like luster, soluble in ;; ;n

hot water with a blue color, in (xtneentrate<! sulphuric acid with a Moiet coior,
and dyeing wool in add bath.

568,311,— September t9, 1S96. A. GANSWINDT. Mordanting UxtSe fabrics.

Cotton or other vegetable textile flbets are mordanted with lactate of sine and
subseiinently dyed.

568.5U>—S>-i)teml>er t9, 1896. C. RUDOLPH AND E. VOCES. IWtoic dye.

A yellow tetrazo dvestulT obtained by the combination of dfazotized tolnylen-
diaminsulpho-ncid ■(CHj.NHj.S<>,n.NH;^1.2.4.6) with nitro-meta-phenylene-
dlamln; a light-brown jKiwder dissolving in water to a yellow s«ilutlon. from
which a gelatinous precipitate Is obiiiliie<l by the addition of an odd; dyeing
unmordante<t cotton a pure yellow fnmi an alkaline soap bath.
569.395— Oelobrr 13, 1896. E. ULLRICH AND M. VON OALLOIS. Procem <tf dye-
ing phctKiidin red.

A bluish-re<I color is pnwiuceil by combining on the flberorthonltroparaphene-
tldin with bela-iiaphthol to an azo compound, and fixing the color by turkey-
red oil and a metallic compound, ns alumlnate of soda.

569,iOl,— October 13, 1896. R. BRASCH. Alizarin dye and melMid i^ mating same.

Alizarin coloring matters— alpha-amido-flavo and anthra purptuln— dyeing

mordanted wool and cotton acarlet-rcd shades: are produced by heating the

alizarin of commerce with benxoyl-cbloride, nitrating the product al ordinary

228

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

tempcretiire with nitrosulphuric acid, separating the benzoylized aipha-nitro-
allzarin by pouring it into water, saponifying by means of soda-lye flnd reduc-
ing to theamido compound by means oj reducing agents, such as zinc.

Se9,l,05—0clobcr 13. 1896. R. BRASCH, Green alisarin dije and method of making

same.

Green coloring matters are produced from alpha-amido and alpha-nitro com-
pounds of alizarin by mixing with glycerin and sulphuric acid, gradually
heating to a temperature of 110° to 120° C and separating the quinolized
product by pouring into water. Easily soluble compounds are obtained by
heating the quinoline compounds with concentrated solutions of alkaline-
bisulphites, such as sodium bisulphite. The alpha-^juinolin compound of
alizarin is nearly insoluble in water, difficultly soluble in the ordinary organic
solvents, soluble in sulphuric acid, in alkaline-sulphite compounds with a
carmine color, and dyes mordanted wool and cotton in green shades.

eS9,US— October IS, 1896. H. LAUBMANN. Blue dye and method of making

same.

Blue coloring matter, produced by treating an acid solution of dinitroan-
thrachrysone-disulphonic acid— No. 569,419— with reducing agents, such as iron,
zinc, etc., and suKsequently boiling with alkalis; a red crystalline powder
dissolving in hot water with a beautiful red, in diluted alkalis with blue, in
concentrated sulphuric acid with bluish-red color, taken up by wool in an acid
bath, the fibers assuming shades ranging from blue to violet, with metallic
mordants.

569. U19— October IS, 1896. H. LAUBMANN. DinUroanthrachrysone-dimdphonlc

acid and method of making same.

Anthrachrysone is sulphonized and the product nitrated. The acid is easily
soluble in water and alcohol, ether, benzene, chloroform, and glacial acetic
acid, decomposing at above 230° C, soluble in alkalis with red color, its
sodium salts crvstallizing from water in gold-yellow leaflets with formula of
Cj4H,06(N02)2(S03Na);H.O; available a.s coloring matter and for the production
01 other coloring matters'.

57 1,9SS— November iU, 1896. C. RIS. Black triazo dye.

A black triazo coloring matter produced by diazotizing a mixed diazo dye-
stuff obtained from benzidin, an alkylated beta, aIpha4-amidonaphthol-beta3,
sulpho acid and a nonalkylated beta,-alpha4-amidonaphthol-beta3-sulpho acid;
and combining the diazo compound thus obtained with resorcin; a black pow-
der soluble in water with bluish-black color, in concentrated sulphuric acid
with a grayish-blue color, and dyeing unmordanted cotton in gray to deep-black
shades.

571,725— December 8, 1896. C. RUDOLPH. Trisazo dye.

Triazo dyestuffs obtained by first forming intermediate products by com-
bining the paradiamins, as, for instance, benzidin, with a metaamidooxysulpho
acid of the benzene series which contains the OH group and the NHg group in
theso-called "meta" position; then combining these intermediate products with
metaphenylendiamin or resorcin; and finally causing diazonaphthionic acid to
act upon the thus resulting intermediate dyestulTs; a black powder soluble in
water with brown to brown-red .solutions, iii concentrated sulphuric acid with
violet to blue solutions, and dying unmordanted cotton from an alkaline bath
brown red to corinth.

57S,399— December 15, 1896. T. SANDMEYER. Eed dye.

A red dyestuff produced by condensing benzaldehydeorthosulpho acid with
an alkylated metaamido phenol, such as diethylmetaiimidophenol, remov-
ing one molecule of water from the thus obtained dihydroxylated tetraethyl-
diamidotriphenylmethanmonosulpho acid, as by treating with concentrated
sulphuric acid, and oxidizing the thus-formed derivative of triphenylmethan
oxide; a greenish crystalline powder, easily soluble in alcohol and acetic acid
with a bluish-red .shade showing a yellowish-red fluorescence, in hydrochloric
acid and diluted sulphuric acid with a yellowish-red shade turning to bluish
red by addition of water, and producing on wool and silk pure red shades fast
against alkalis.

575,eS8— January IS, 1897. M. VON GALLOIS. Stable diazo compound.

Stable, soluble, nonexplosive, diazo compounds of paranitranilin and dianisi-
din in the form of a piuste or powder, produced by concentrating or evapora-
ting to dryness solutions of paranitranilin and dianisidin at a low temperature,
below 45° C, in presence of an excess of a mineral acid and in presence of an
acid mineral salt. The paranitro diazo benzol sulphate is a light-yellow powder.

575.901,— January S6, 1897. C. RIS. Black azo dye.

Black azo colors produced by combining the tetrazo compound of a paradia-
min. such as paradiamidoditolylamin, with betai-alphai-amidonaphtholbetaa-
sulpho acid and with a metadiamin; a black powder, soluble in water with a
bluish-black color, in concentrated sulphuric acid with blue color, dyeing
unmordanted cotton, or mixed goods, deep bluish-black shadesof great fastness.

576,2-2i— February «, 1897. C. O. MULLER. Rhodamin dye.

Unsyrametrical dlmethyldiethyl rhwlamin dyestuff; produced by the conden-
sation of one molecule of a dialkylaraidooxybenzoylbenzoic acid derived from
one molecule of anhydrous ph thalicacid and'one mo'lecule of dialkvlmetaiimido-
phenol, with one molecule of an alkyl derivative of metaiimidophenol; consti-
tuting green crystals, dyeing wool, silk, and cotton a line red, soluble in water,
and dissolving in concentrated sulphuric acid and in hydrochloric acid with
yellow coloration which turns red on adding water.

576,233— February 1, 1897. C. O. MULLER. Khodamin dye.

Rhodamin dyes, consisting of an alkylester of the un.symmetrical coloring
matter of No. 576,222, produced by boiling same with alcohol and hydrochloric
acid; a green powder with metallic luster, dyeing cotton, silt, and wool a blue
led.

676.511— February t, 1.997. G. STEINIKE AND F. SCHMIDT. Blue trisazo dye.

Mixed triazo coloring matters produced by combining one molecule of
dioxynaphthalenemonosulphonic acid S, of No. 444,679, with one molecule of a
diazo compound and coupling the monoazo coloring matter thus formed with
one molecule of a tetrazo compound, and then coupling the resulting interme-
diate product With a further molecule of a phenol, naphthol, or their carbonic
or.sulphonic acld.s; a gray-black powder, dis.solving In water with violet-blue
color, soluble in sulphuric acid with blue color, and dyeing cotton blue tints.

B7S,09S— March I, 1897. A. COBENZL. Blue dye.

A blue basic dyestuff, obtained by heating diethylsaffranin, obtained from
dlethylparaphenylenediamin and anilin, with paraphenylenedlamln under pres-
sure and in presence of an indifferent solvent.

e78,iSS— March 9, 1897. M. ULRICH AND J. BAMMANN. Dark-blue azo dye.

Dark-blue substantive dyestuffs produced by combining one molecular propor-
tion 01 a tetrazoUzed diamiu with one molecular propgrtiou of amidonaphthol-

disulpho acid (NH,:SO.,H;S03H;OH=2;3;6:8) and one molecular proportion of
amidonaphtholmonosulpho acid (NH2:S03H:OH = 1;4:8), or alkftllne salts
thereof: a dark powder soluble in water with a bluish-black color; diazotlzable
when fixed on the fiber.

578,578— March 9, 1897. C. O. MULLER. Rhodamin dye.

Rhodamin dves produced by the condensation of one molecule of the dialky-
lamidooxybenzoyl-benzoic acid, obtained by the action ot one molecule of anhy-
drous phthalic acid on one molecule of dialkylmetaamidophenol, with one mole-
cule of a metaamidopheuol,asmetaiimidocresol (CH3;NH2: OH =1:2:4). and the
subsequent conversion of the product of condensation into salt by heating it
with an acid. The unsymmetrical dimethyl-methyl-rhodamin dye derived
'rom dimethylamidodxybenzoylbenzoic acid and metaamidocresol dyes with
tannin and ta'rtar emetic mordanted cotton vividly red tints.

578,580— March 9, 1897. F. PETERSEN. Substantive cotlon dye.

Substantive cotton dyestuffs produced by combining one molecule of the
tetrazo derivative of the Griess benzidinsulpho acids with two molecules of
gammaamldonaphtholsulpho-acid, diazotizing the dyestuff thus obtained, and
subsequently combining the diazotized dyestuff with two molecules of aromatic
amido compounds, as an aromatic metadiamin; a black powder, dyeing cotton
an intense blue black.

579,773— March SO, 1897. C.RUDOLPH. Red-blue disazo dye.

Red-blue diazo dyestuffs produced by combining tetrazo-ditolyl, or tetrazo-
diphenyl, with one molecule of alpha]-alpha4-amidooxynaphthalene-beta2-
betas-disulpho acid in an alkaline solution, and then combining the interme-
diate compound thus obtained with one molecule of 2.3-dioxynaphthalenc; a
dark blackish-brown powder with a feeble metallic luster, dyeing uumordaut«d
cotton pure red blue.

580,186— April 6, 1897. A. HERRMANN. Blue dye.

The monosulphonic acid of tetraiilkylmonobenzyltriamidodiphenyl-orthoto-
lylcarbinol, a copper-colored powder of metallic luster: produced by condensing
tetraiilkyldiamiaobenzhydrol with monobenzyl-orthotoluidin monosulphonic
acid, and then oxidizing the thus-obtained sulphonic acid of tetraalkylbenzyl-
triamidodiphenyl-orthotolylmethan. It dyes wool and silk an even and fast
blue in an acid bath.

580.187— April 6, 1897. A.HERRMANN. Fast Muc dye.

The monosulphonic acid of pentaalkyltriamidodiphenyl-orthotolylcarbinol. a
copper-red powder of metallic luster: produced by condensing tetraalkyldiami-
dobenzhydrol with mouoalkyl-orlhotoluidin sulphonicacid, and then oxidizing
the thus-obtained sulphonic acid of pentaiilkyltriamidodiphenyl-orthotolylme-
thane. It dyes wool and silk an even and fast blue in an acid bath

580,188— April 6, 1897. A.HERRMANN. Blue acid dye.

The disulphonic acid of monobenzyl-tetraiilkyltriamidodiphenyl-orthotolyl-
carbinol, a copper-red powder of nietallic luster: produced by condensing
tefrajilkyldiamidobenzhydrol with monobenzyl-orthotoluidin disulphonic acid,
and then oxidizing the thus-obtained sulphoiiic acid of monobenzvltetraiilkyl-
triamidodiphenyl-orthotolyimethane.

58^.853— May 18, 1897. A. FEER. .stable diazo compound.

Compounds for dyeing and printing: produced by combining one molecule of
a sulpho acid of an aromatic hydrocarbon, as a disulpho-acid of naphthalene,
with one molecule of the diazo derivative of an aromatic amido compound, as
of paranitranilin. The disulphonaphthalate of paranitrodiazobenzene is a vel-
low crystallized stable salt which can be preserved in adry .state. Fabrics, etc.,
are dyed and printed by first padding with an alkaline solution of beta-naph-
thol and then applying a solution of the salt,

582,958— May IS, 1897. F. SCHMIDT AND O. ERNST. Trisazo dye.

A bluish black triazo dyestuff: produced by combining one molecule of
diazonaphthalenesulphonic acid with one molecule of dioxynaphthalenemono-
sulphonic acid 1.8.4, subjecting the monoazo dyestuff thus formed to the action
of one molecule of tetrazotized benzidin until an intermediary product is
obtained; and lastly, treating this intermediary product with metaphenvldiamin;
a grayish-brown powder, soluble in water with a blue-violet color, in concen-
trated sulphuric acid with a blue color: the direct-dyeing color of 4 per cent on
unmordanted cotton being bluish bla^k.

582,959— May 18, 1897, F. SCHMIDT AND O. ERNST. Tmazo dye.

The intermediary product of No. 582, 9&S is treated with naphthvlamin (instead
of metaphenylendiamin), producing a violet-brown powder of metallic luster,
but dyeing bhiish black.

583,267— May 25, 1897. J. SCHMID AND H. WEIL. Blue-green dye.

Coloring matters are produced from henzaldehyde dlsulpho acids (COH:SOa
H:S03H=1:2:5 and 1:2:4) and nonsulphonated benzylanllin derivatives, by first
forming leuco compounds by the conden.sation of one molecule of henzaldehyde
disulpho acid with two molecules of anilin derivatives, one of which at least
Is one of the following nonsulphonated benzylanllin derivatives: benzvlethy-
lanilin, benzylmethylanilin, dibenzylanilin, monobenzylorthotoluidin, or their
products of substitution, which contain a methyl, or nitro group, or chlorin in
the radical of benzyl; and subsequently treating these leuco compounds by
means of oxidizing agents, as peroxids or chromic acid; dyeing animal fiber in
an acid bath a blue-green to green-blue tint, fast against altalis and dilute
acids.

583,1,39— May 25, 1897. W. HERZBERG AND O. HANSMANN. Black azo dye.

A dark-brown powder of metallic luster, obtained by rediazotizing the com-
pound produced by the action of diazotized pieramic acid on alpha,-naphthvl-
amin-beta3-monosulphonic acid, and by combining the diazo compound thus
obtained with beta-naphthol. It produces on wool blackish-violet tints, wliich
by treatment with chromium sivlts are converted into fast, deep black shades.

583,631,— June 1,1897. J. SCHMID AND K.JEDLICKA. Black trisazo dye.

Black triazo dyestuffs: produced by combining one molecule of the tetrazo
derivative of a paradiamido ba.se of the series of diphenyl with one molecule
of a monoazo coloring matter derived from one molecule of an amidonaphthol-
disulphonic acid and one molecule of an aromatic diazoaldehyde, and one
molecule of an aromatic amidocompound,.snch, for example, as metatoluvlene-
diamin, metaphenylenediamin. naphthylamins, naphthylamin-sulphonic'acids,
amidonaphthols, andamidonaphthol-sulphonicacids; a dark powder of a light-
bronze luster, soluble in water with violet-black to blue-black coloration and
dyeing cotton violet black to green black.

583,635— June 1, 1897. J. SCHMID AND K. JEDLICKA. Blue trisazo dye.

Blue triazo dyestuffs: produced by combining one molecule of the tetrazo
derivative of a paradiamido ba.se of the series of diphenyl with one molecule
of a monoazo coloring matter derived from one molecule of an amidonaphthol-
disulphonic acid and one molecule of a diazo-benzolc-acid compound, and one

DIGEST OF PATENTS DELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

229

.h lu nnphthnlii, nmMonaphtluiln, oxr-
' IMiwdtT ()( liniii/o lUHttT, Mitiihle (ii
inii, nnd ilyi'tnK iinDiortlttiitiHl cx)tton

t...i.i....i

1 fli-rivwl

r«niMtl-

n wiitur

ilow tint,

ni*'l<H'»iU' of II iiMp' ^'i " ■ ■^-\'

nnphthoN, iinM '

wiilvr with a da;

dark-bhio to Km-m-n t-nu' utvi nn

i»i.n»-Juuell. Iiat:. C. O. MI'LLEK. Klw<l)iminiti/e.

Til. "•■■• •' - ' •' - ■- - ■'■■' -

fn.i

IIIIK

and an-i ml II huh ii riil tiiii. ni ciiin i-nttiiliii .mii|iiiiii n

■nd d.vclUK (iillon, silk, and wool In ivd llnt».

S&i.:>i<l—Jnii<- ::. ISV?. M. BONIOKK. muntyr.

Blue ifllorinu niiitti'r: pnxlncod by combining one molwulc o[ the Iflmzo
mniiuiind of diiinlnlilin In an alkallnowKlii Miluilon wUh one midinilf of

1. naidithid S.tl.s trtmilphonli- adit ' ' ■■■■ ' •• iTiUTnu'dlale pnxluol

thU9 lonmid with one uioleeulc • ; • i>o»der »olnble in

water with a pure blue nhade; In ill a Krvenlab-blue;

ilyelnR inunonlanted eutton In a Uim.iih -••>• i>>'<'< i .-^iU bath.

M3,/04— Jiin<-fi, JS»7. K.JEDLICKA. Orrrn tritcn ilye.

(ir ' '•■' '' •-•'•i'^' •■••<wluee<! by oouiblniiu; one molecule of the tolrazo

der Im-e of the series of diphenyl with one nioleeule

of 11 I !■ derivwl from one niole<'Ule of an aniidonnptithol-

dbiii., iiikHMtle of a diazobenzole-aeitl eoni[Kiun(l ami one

molet-uic iiound. a.s j)henol, eri'Mil. resortin, and crcsotlnic

acid; a !>: 'le In water with a Rrecn eolomtion. au<l dyeing

unmonluii:. . i .; ; dark-preen to yellowlsh-greun tints.

5IU.M4— JWy «, l.'i97. C. 1>E La UAKPE. Dlwi dye.

Blue coloring matter: prctdm-cd Xroiu the leueiilxHly obtained by the condensa-
tion of re^iorein with aKallo<.'yanin dye (No. .>17,17a) by suljilionaling the i^iid
bo<1v with sulphuric arid, then subjeeliuK «n alkaline solution <»f the .sulpho
derivative to roiiuict with the air. prucipilating the product of o.xidatlou with
ftntllelent acid to neutralize the alkali employed, and finally forming the pro-
duct of oxidatieni into an alkaline salt; dyes nonmordanted wool ana chromed
wool and mordanted vegetable flbcr«.

St7.7S;~AHgiu4 10. tS»7. I. ROSENBERG AND F. KRECKE. IfaplUkylenediamin-

evifo add, and |>rocc«t <{^ making if.

A new naphthylencliamin, chanu'tcrize<l by containine two amldo ennips in
meia or 1.3 pofiition, pro<iucible by heatinj? 1.3.6 uaplitbol or naphthylamln-
dlMtdph(wiei<] wiUi an excew of ammonia m an auUx'lave at terapera'tiireiH of
160° to iyo° C. (omiins easily soluble alkali salts, and combining with diazo
and tetraxo compounds to form vaiuable cotton dyes.

ta^lSO—Aagutt 17. 1S97. I. ROSENBKEG. JiluiKh-m-arM dye.

Azo dyestuffs produced by combining molecular proportions of dlazotized
monamins with 1..3 uapbthylcncdiamin-sulpho-acids, lus dinzotized dehydrothio
paratoluidin monosulpho 'acid with 1.3.ti-uaphtliyieuedlnmiu-mono-.sulpho
acid; a brownish-red bronzy p^iwder soluble in hot water, in concentrateloration, dyeing unmopdantetl cotton a bright bluish
acarlet.

MS.tSt—Auguit 27, 1897. I. ROSENBERG. ReddUh-mokt dye.

Tetrazo dyestuffs: pro<luced by combining molecular projiortions of letra-
uitized dlamlns, employed in the manufacture of tetrazo dyestuffs, with
bimolccular proportions of 1.3 naphthyleuediamin-sulpho-acids; black bronzy
powders, aolubte in hot water, dyeinig unmoidanted cotton bright reddish
violet

«S8, ISi-AnguM 17, 1897. I. ROSENBERG. Mixed sulmlanllfe dye.

I'roduced by combining molecular proportions of any of the tetrazo bodies
usually employed tor the manufacture of substantive dvestuffs with molecular
pronortlonsof an aminor phenol or a sulpho or carbo acid thereof, and reacting
with the so-c»ntained Intermediate bodies on molecular proportions of a 1.3
naphthylenediamin mono or di sulpho acid (No. 587,757).

tSa.iaS-Aagutl 17, 1SS7. I. ROSENBERG, ifrou-n ruMajUivr dye.

SabMantive dyestufis: produced by combining the rediazotized primary or
mixed tetrazo dyestuffs. characterized by containing a 1.3 naphthylenediamin
Milpbo-acid as component part, with an amin.

SSajSS—Augiut 17, 18»7. V. G. BLiOEDE. Proceu i\f dyeing anUin-black.

The fiber or fabric is imprcKnated with anllin, its honiolognes, or analogues,
or a salt of thcsp combined with a suitable oxidizer, and then subjected to the
fumes or vapors of a mineral acid capable of liberating the oxidizer.

188,397— Avguti 17, 1897. A. OOBENZL. Gruy dye.

A gray dyestufT produced by condensing alkylsaffranin with fofmaldehvdc in
a strong mineral-acid solution; a black powder ca-sily soluble in water, diffi-
cultly soluble in alcohol. in.soluble in ether, l>enzene, ligroin, etc., and soluble
in concentratefi sulphuric acid with a green color.

189,768— Sepletuber 7, 1S97. J. VILLE. Bed dye.

Red coloring matters formed by heating aromatic hydrazinH,as phenylhydra-
xln, with rosolic acid in the presence of alcohol, the vaiK»rs evolved being con-
densed, and the proportions varied in accordance with the depth of color
desired.

tS0.088-Sepleml)er Ii, 1897. C. BULOW. Black dit.-ao dye.

Black diazo dyes derived from the oxynaphthylamin-snlphi>acld (NH..OH.
8O3H — 1..S.-1) by eontbining one molecular proportion of this acid witli two
molecular proportions of one and the same diazo comiMiund or one molecular
proportion each of two different diazo comtM)un<ls. as of uiazo-beiizene-snlpfaonic
BCia and diaxo compound of alpha-naphthylamin.

591.309— Octobers, 1S97. J. VILLE, lied dye.

Red <!oloring mailers prtKluced by heating a fatly hydrazin with rosolic acid;
soluble in alcohol and acetic acid, forming red solutions, and In hydrochloric
and sulphuric acid forming yellowish solutions.

S9I.616— October U, 1897. M. BOnIGER. Trimno dye.

Substantive triazo coluriMK matters produced by combining one molecule of
the tetrazo comj" radlamin, such as benzidin, with one molecule of

IMiraxylldin. rcii i- intermeiliale products and combining the thua

produci-d i.ini/ - with two molecules of amidonaphthol-dlsulphonic

acid H; t- - of slaty to purplish-brown color: soluble In water and

melhylic ;. ng tunuordanted cotton from a hiiih containing common

salt in inti .n.les niuging between indigo and dHrk-Kreenlsh blue;

prmluiiui; whiii dliizotized on the tlber by combination with t>cta-naphthol
a deep black, wlih mcupheuylene-diamin a greenish-black, and with rcsorclii
a dark green.

Wf.MS— (lc/./»^ -•• ■-• II. IIKY>fANN AND R. RKYIIER. Rfdaslndyr.

Attn dyin 1 'ixlili/lng llr»l one moh'cular proportion of the hydro-

chlorateof I'll 'iMntlkyt orthiit'iltildin with iinc molenilar propiortlnn

of iiionoalkyi iirtliii (iiliildin, and •<■. .
cotii|Hiund with any primary aitdti nt
ble In water with a splendid red m:.

phnric add with a gr^'en color; profludng I'lear faxt refl shades on mord»ut<-(l
and unmortlante<l cotton.

.. IHU7. r. BENDER. If/A-f dltnzo dye.
d from 'J amldo .'> naplithol 7 aulpho-at'ld— No. ti21,(M— and

.1."/J..J4: ■

DIh/ III irom J ammo .'> napiithoi 7 auipno-at'ia— No. «a,OH>— ana

fomiiii ilers of metallic luster, soluble in water with a red to violet

color, dying euitun without mordaiil, yielding re<l to violet shades, and th«
solution in eoncvntrate<l sulphuric acid liavlng a grifnlsb to bluish shade.

693.790—Sorrmber 16,1897. M. I'LRICil ANIU. HAMMANN. BltitMMkdiKaQ

dye.

A wool-dyeing diazo coloring matter prtslnced by combining one molecular
proportion of iMirndlazobeuzencHulpho add with one molecular jir- '
alpha,, amidivalfihai naphtbo]-ali>tia« sulpho ucld. or salt<« thcreiff,
nilncALl-acid solution and combining the ititerme<liate prrMlnct tli'i !

with one molc<Milar proixjrtionof alpha-^llazoiiaphthalene in alkaline sululloti.

Mi.l06—Novr«iber 13, 1897. H. R. VIDAL. Sut/urdye.

Coloring mailers are produce<l by reacting with sulphur upon speciBed
derivatives <if iH'nzenc (reM^>rclu, metajimidophenol, sultinaminol, (-hrysolflinj,
the substances iK-ing heated together In the presence of an alkaline sulphide;
dyeing cotton fillers a black or brown black.

5!)i,lU6—yumnbcr!S,li<»7. H. K. VIDAL. Mixed mlphur dye.

A coloring matter produced by hcHling t»araphenylenedlamin and hydro*
<iuinone in eoual parts in pre-sciK-e of sulphur; coustltut*|<l in part by a body
oireclly soluble in achls and dyeing animal lit>ers an intense black, and in
part by a body soluble In alkalis and dyeing vegetable libera dull blue.

S9i,I07—Xortmbert3, 1897. H. R. VIDAL. Thiazlndye.

Paradloxythiazinisproduce<1 by heating with sulphur a mixture of paramldo-
phenol au<l liydrnquinouc: paramldoiJxytlila/.in by heating sulphur, paramido-
plienol. paTOpheuylene<llamln. and hydriKiuinoue.

59J,,lt3—Xoi<erHber t3, 1897. C. H. RUDOLPH AND J. HERBABNV. Blue-red

tetrcuM dye.

Blnish-red tetrazo dye: produced by combining tetrazo-dichlordlphenyl,
derived from diorthochlorbenzidin, with two molecules c)f Ijeta-naphthylamin-
bela-disulpho-acid, the so-called "amido K acid;" dyeing cotton without mor*
dantaa fast and brilliant bluish red.

5Si,99e-^ccmber 7. 1897. M. KAHN AND F. RUNKEL. Blaekazodye.

Black azo dye produced by combining e<iuimolecular proportions of tetrazo-
tized paradiamiaodiplienylamin.sulphonic acid with aiphauaphthylumintx>ta'
sulphonlcacid 1.6 or 1. 7, coupling the i!ilerme<liatepnKliict thus obtained with
one molecular proportion of amidonaphtholsulphotnc acid (», rediazotizing the
diazo compound tnus obtained and finally combining with twt> molecular pro-
portions 01 a nietadiamin, such as metaphenyleneiliamin or melatoluylenedl-
amiu: a brownish-black powder, soluble in hot water, with a violet-black color,
yielding an unmordontcd cotton deep blui-sh-biack shades, fast to alkalis, acidi,
and light.

syS.OHl— December 7, 1897. M. KAHN AND F. RUNKEL. Black azodye. s

A substantive black dyestufl produced by combining one molecular propor-
tion of tclraztitize<l puradiainidcKliphenylamlnsuiphonic acid with two molecu-
lar proportions of amidiiuHphthiilmonosuliihonic acid G in an alkaline s<jlution,
rediazotizing the diazo dye-stuff thus oblainetl and further combining the 50-
formed tetmzo compound thereof with two mote<*ular proportions of a metadi-
amin, such as metaphenylenedlamin or metatoluyleuedlamin,

595,31,9— December 1!,, 1897. R.E.SCHMIDT. AtUhrarvfindye.

A blue-alizarin dyestuff, the disulpho-acid of paradiamidoanthraruSn, pro-
duced by treating parudinitroanthrarunn-disulpho acid with reducing agents
such OS stannous chloride and hydrochloric acid; dyeing nnmordanted wool In
acid baths pure and even blue shades, with chromium mordants greenisb-blue
shades.

591,350— December M, f«97. R. E. SCH.MIDT. Blue dye from ehrytazin.

A blue alizarin dyestufl, a disulpho acid of the paradiamidocbrysazin: pro-
duced by sulphonaiing chrysazin and then subjecting the thus obuined disul-
pho adil of cnrvsjizin to agents of nitration, and finally reducing the disulpho
acid of dinitnu'lirysazin to the disulpho acid of diamidochrysazin: a dark-violet
powder with a copper-like luster, dyeing wool in acid baths fast blue shades
and yielding on enrome-mordantc>d fibers greenish-blue .shades.

596,333— December 28, 1897. C. O. MULLER. Xhodoldye.

Dyestuffs of the phthaleln series are produced by condensing the dialkyl-
amldooxybenzoylbenzoic adds with resorcinol, and the dyestuffs thus obtained
may be converted Into derivatives soluble in water by treating them with an
alcohol and an add. The dyestuff formed by the hydrochloride of an alkyl ether
of dimethyl rhodol dyes wool, silk, ond tannin-mordanted cotton in yellow-red
tints.

596,559— .ianuary i, 1898. A. WEINBERG. Brovni tulpurcled dye,

A brown coloring matter produced by heating one part of dinitrooresol with
4 to 6 fiarts of an alkali sulphide and 1 to 3 pans, all by weight, of sulphur:
soluble in water in presence of sulphides or strong alkalis; dyeing unmor-
dantcd cotton brown.

597.983— January ts, 1898. M. H. ISLER. Biaek mbtlanUre cotton dyetluf.

Black coloring matter produced by energetically treating the anthraquinone
derivatives, .sudi as dinUroanthraiiuinoncs, the 'corn-sisinding amidoanlhra-
quluones, the iulermcd late reduction comisiunds.alizuriii.authrapurpuriu. Ha vo-
purpurin, anthraquinone-monusuipho-acid, antliraMUinoiie alpha and beta dl-
sulpho-acids. Willi alkaline sulphides or polysulphldes until a water-soluble

Erodnct results, free from unchanged Initial material; giving greenish to violet-
lue solutions.

598.113— February 1, '898. II. SCH.MID. Procrn qf diadmrgixg ml.

Paranilranilln red is discharged by printing Ihercun a dbK>harging color con-
taining a tin .salt and acetln, anew pnxiucl. having a dtwilvlng action up<m
the red, and then allowing the discharge to act in the usual manner by steaming.

i9»,iii— February K, ISDS. R. E. SCH M I DT. B/iir W.ict itlizurin dye.

Aliiarin dyestuffs produced by first condensing pnrpniin with a primary amin,
as anllin, which proce» may be carried out under the addition of rondensinr

230

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

agents, such as boric acid, and, secondly, treating the intermediate condensa-
tion product thus obtained with sulphonating agents, such ay concentrated
Bulphuric acid.

B99,it36~FebnuiryS3, 1898. R. E. SCHMIDT. Green dye derived from anthraquinnnr.
Anlhraquinone dyestuffs, being monosulpho acids of condensation products
obtainable from one molecule of quinizarin and two molecules of certain pri-
mary aromatic amins, as paratoluidin: produced by treating the said condensa-
tion products with agents of sulphonation, such' as sulphuric monohydrate,
containing 99.7 per cent HoSO^, until a test portion is clearly soluble in a large
quantity of water, introducing the reat^tion mixture into cold water and pre-
cipitating the dyestuft; dyeing wool in acid baths fast green shades.

599,1,27— Febntary 22, 1S9S. R. E. SCHMIDT. Greai dye derived from quinizarin.
Anthraquinone dyestuffs, being disulpho acids of the condensation products,
as per No. 599,426, are obtained by sulphonating with weakly fuming sulphuric
acid, containing 5 per cent of SOs, in lieu of the sulphuric monohydrate of said
prior patent.

699,5S2— February 22. 1398. C. RIS. Bkick trisazo dye.

A black triazo color produced by combining the tetrazo compound of para-
phenylenediaminazobeta] alpha4 araidonaphthol betas sulpho-acidj first, in acid
solution with one molecule of a mctadiamin (such as metaphonylenediamin),
and then in alkaline solution witli one molecule of V>etfli alpha4"amidonapthol
betas sulpho-acid: dyeing luimordautcd cotton in deep black shades.

€01,033— Marc?i 22, 1S9S. M. BONIGER. Blue-black mijced trisazo dye.

Mixed triazo coloring mattere produced by combining in an alkaline solu-
tion one molecule of the simple azo color obtained in acid solution from diazo-
tized betai alphas amidonaphthol betas beta3 disulphonic acid and alpha-
naphthylamin with one molecule of tetrazo-diphenyl, and further combining
this intermediate product with one molecule of an amidonaphtholsulphonic
acid.

601,065— March 22, 1898. C. RIS. Benzidin-orange.

An orange coloring matter produced by condensing a paradiamin, such as
benzidin, with paranitrotoluolsulpho acid in a solution of a caustic alkali; a
brownish powder soluble in water with a deep orange color, in concentrated
sulphuric acid with a red-violet color.

601,363— March 29, 1S9S. H. R. VIDAL. Thiazin dye.

Coloring matters derived from thiazin compounds; produced by reaction of
sulphur on one or more para substitution products of thiazin derivatives; or
mixtures for yielding the same, and consequent condensation of the thiazin
molecules to tetraphenetrithiazin products, one or more of said thiazin deriva-
tives having amidogen in the para ]K)sition in one nucleus and one of specified
hydrogen-containing groups in the para position in tiie other nucleus, and the
resulting tetraphenetrithiazins having one of the hydrogen-containing groups
in the para position in each of the nuclei at the ends of the chain of four
nuclei.

601, 361,— March 29, 1898. H. R. VIDAL. Process of obtaining dyes from svJfanUic

acid.

An amidophenol is heated with paraaulphanilic acid, yielding a blue coloring
matter, dyeing cotton directly in an alkaline bath.

601,365— March 29, 1898. H. R. VIDAL. Black dye.

Black coloring matters: produced by heating the condensation products of
parasulphanilic acid and paraamidophenol in presence of sulphur, the mass
being dissolved in a solution of caustic soda and then evaporated; dyeing
unmordanted cotton in shades of very deep black.

601,859— April 5, 1898. C. RUDOLPH. Blue azo dye.

Blue tetrazo dyestuff: produced by combining tetrazo diphenyl or ditolyl first
with one molecule of araidooxy-alpha-naphthalene-disulpho-acid in an alkaline
solution, and then with one molecule of dioxynaphthalene 2.6 dissolved in
alkali; a black-violet powder with a metallic luster, soluble in water witla a blue-
violet and in sulphuric acid with a greenish-blue color.

602, 5lt(h~ April 19, 1893. M. KAHN. Violet dye.

Tetrazo dyestuff; produced by combining one molecule of tetrazotized dianisi-
din with one molecule of 2.3.6 naphtholdisulpho acid, and further coupling the
intermediate product th\is obtained with one molecule of paraxylidin; a
brownish-black powder with a bronze-like luster, soluble in water with a
browish-violet color, in concentrated sulphuric acid with a blue color, dyeing
unmordanted cotton violet shades.

602,5U— April 19, 1398. P. OTT AND T. KROEBER. Blue azin dye.

Azin dyestuffs: produced by condensing sulpho acids of sj-mmetrically di-
substituted 1.3 naphthylenediarains having the sulpho group in position 8 with
certain disubstituled amid oazo- benzene sulpho acids; dissolving in water yield-
ing blue solutions, in concentrated sulphuric acid with a green color; dyeing
unmordanted wool in acid baths fast blue shades.

602,657— April 19, 1393. E. KONIG. Bassic red disazo dye.

Scarlet-red dyestuff obtained from diazotized meta-trimethyl ammonium
phenyl-azo-meta-toluidin and beta-naphthol; a brown-red powder, soluble in
water with a blue-red color, and dyeing tanned and untanned cotton, as well as
half wool, scarlet red in an acid solution.

602,638— Apra 19, 1898. E. KONIG. Basic yellow disazo dye.

Yellow dyestuff obtained from diazotized meta-trimethyl ammonium phenyl-
azo-meta-toluidin and 1 phenyls methyls pyrazolon; an orange-yellow pow-
der, soluble in water, alcohol, ether, and benzene; dyeing tanned and untanned
cotton, as well as half wool, in an acid bath, yellow.

60S,639—Apra 19, 1898. E. KONIG. Coppery-brawn dye.

Brown dyestuff obtained from diazotized meta-trimethyl ammonium phenyl-
azo-met*i-toluidin and chrysoidin; a black-green powder, soluble in water, with
a reddlsh-yellowish-brown color, and dyeing tanned and untanned cotton, as
well as half wool, a coppery brown.

60S,6l/>~AprU 19, 1898. E. KONIG. Redviolet basic disazo dye.

Reddish-violet dyestuff obtained from diazotized meta-trimethyl ammonium
phenylazo-meta-amidi>-i>ara-cresol ether and beta-naphthol; a brown powder
soluble in water with a cherry-red cohir, and dveing thinned and untanned cot-
ton, as well as half wool, a reddish violet in an acid bath.

60t,6l,l— April 19, 1898. E. KONIG. {Reissw: 11,7U— January 31, 1899.) Basic
dieaao dye.

Brown diazo and p«>lyazo dyestuffs: produced by diazotizingthe amidoazo dve-
stuffs from diazotized aromatic amido-ammoniuni bases and primary alphyl-
amins, and then combining them with phenols, alphylamins, oxy, or ainido azo

dyestuffs; yielding, when chrysoidin is used, a blackish-brown powder, easily
soluble in water with abrown color, in concentrated sulphuric acid with an
olive-green color, and dyeing tanned and untanned cotton, as well as half wool,
brown in an acid bath. '

602,855~April 26, 1898. K. KREKELER AND A. BLANK. Blue-b'iock trisazo dye
Triazo dyestuffs: produced by first combining in an alkaline solution one
molecule of a tetrazotized paradiamin, such as benzidin, tolidin, dianisidin,
with one molecule of amidonaphtholsulpho acid G; secondly, rediazotizing the
resulting intermediate product; and, finally, coupling the intermediate product
with two molecules of alphai. alpha^, dioxynaphthalene alphao, monosnipho
acid; dark powders dissolving in water with a blue color, dyeing unmordanted
cotton blue shades which change into blackish blue with chromium and copper
salts.

602,S56—AprU 26, 1398. K. KREKELER AND A. ISRAEL. Black trisazo dye.
Triazo dyestuffs; produced by first combining one molecule of a tetrazotized

Earadiamin, such as benzidin, tolidin. or dianisidin, with one molecule of a
etamonosulpho acid of alpha-naphthylamin, such as 1.6 and 1.7; secondly, dia-
zotizing the resulting intermediate product; and, finally, combining the tetrazo
compound thus produced with two molecules of l.S dioxynaphthalene, 4 sulpho
acid; dyeing unmordanted cotton blue, changing to black when treated with
solutions of chromium and copper salts.

G02,857—AprU 26, 1898. K. KREKELER, A. ISRAEL, AND A. BLANK. Black

trisazo dye.

Triazo dyestuffs: produced by combining one molecule of a tetrazotized para-
diamin, such as benzidin, tolidin, or dianisidin, with one molecule of abeta-
monosulpho acid of alpha-uaphthylamin, such as 1.6 and 1.7; secondly, dia-
zotizing the resulting intermediate product; thirdly, coupling the tetrazo com-
pound thus obtained with one molecule, of 1.8 dioxynaphthalene, 4 mono-
sulphoacid; and, finally, combining the body thus produced, which contains
still one free diazu group, withametadiamin of the benzene series, such as meta-

Ehenylenediamin; dark powders soluble in water with violet-gray to violet-
lack color and yielding violet-black shades on unmordanted cotton, changing
to fast black with solutions of chromium and copper salts.

602,858— April 26, 1898. K. KREKELER AND E. MARTZ. Brown trisazo dye.

Triazo dyestuffs: produced by combining the diazo derivatives of certain
diazo compounds (such as the combination of one molecule of tetrazodi phenyl
with one molecule of salicylic acid and oue molecule of Clove's naphthylamin-
sulpho acid ) with one molecule of an orthooxycarbonic acid of the benzene series;
dark powders soluble in water, dyeing unmordanted cotton yellowir^h brown to
brown, becoming fast and more reddish brown on treatment with solutions of
chromium and copper salts, and dyeing wool in acid baths similar shades.

60S,008~April 26, 189S. M. KAHN. Viokt azo dye.

Coloring matter: produced by combining in acid solution one molecule of a tet-
razodiphenyl salt and two molecules of 1.8 amidonaphthol and 4 monosulpho
acid; a black powder of a bronze-like luster soluble in water with a violet color
and dyeing unmordanted cotton violet shades which chan§-e to fast black when
treated with solutions of diazotized paranitranilin and sodium acetate.

603,009— April 26, 1898. M. KAHN AND F. RUNKEL. Bluish-red dye.

Tetrazo coloring matter: produced by combining one molecule of the tetrazo
derivative of a certain diamidodiphenylaminsulpho acid with two molecules of
metaphenylenediamin; dark-brown powder soluble in water yielding a red
solution, yielding on unmordanted cotton intense bluish-red shades which
change to'fast brown on treatment with a solution of diazotized paranitranilin
and sodium acetate.

603,015— April 26, 1398. P. OTT AND T. KROEBER. Blue azin dye.

Azin dyestuffs: produced by condensing sulpho acids of symmetrically-disub-
stituted 1.3 naphtnylenediamins, such as 8 mono, 6.8 disulpho-acid with the sul-
pho-acids of paranitroso derivatives of secondary and tertiary aromatic amins;
dark powders dissolving in water with a blue color, dyeing immordanted wool
in acid baths bright blue shades.

603,016— April 26, 1898. A. STEINER. Triphcnylmethane-blue dye.

Violet to blue dyestuffs: produced by first combining the alkylated derivativea
of phenyl-beta-naphthylamin with tetraiilkylated diamido-benzophenone, next
adding phosphorus oxychloride and keeping an elevated temperature, and finally
sulphonating the so-obtained compounds; dissolving easily in concentrated sul-
phuric acid with a red-brown shade, and in water and in ethyl alcohol with a
violet shade.

603,090— April 26, 1898. K. KREKELER AND E. MARTZ. Brmvn trisazo dye.

Triazo dyestuffs: produced by combining one molecule of the diazo deriva-
tives outlined in No. 602,858 with one molecule of a metiidiamin of the benzene
series, such as metaphenylenediamin, metatoluylcnediamin or a sulpho-acid
thereof; dyeing cotton from reddish-brown to dark-brown shades whicn. when
treated with solutions of chromium and copper salts, become more yellowish
brown and fast.

605,093— AprU 26, 1893. G. STEINIKE AND F. SCHMIDT. Black disazo wool dye.
Black diazo dyestuffs: produced by the action of one molecule of a diazotized
naphthylaminsulphonic acid and one molecule of a diazotized amin of the ben-
zene or naphthalene series upon oue molecule of dioxynuphthaJenemonosul-
phonic acio Sof No. 444,679; dark powders of bronze- like luster, soluble in water
with a violet color, and dyeing wool in an acid bath.

603,300— May 5, 1898. H. R. VIDAL. Process of making carboxylated products of

triphenylmcthane.

Mono and di carboxylated products are derived from phenolic and amidated
compounds of triphenylmcthane by heating a mixture of phenol and the com-
pound of triphenylmcthane in presence of condensing agents, such as oxalic and
suli)huric acid. They constitute light-yellow products in an acid state, and as
salts they are a bright scarlet red.

G0S,6h5—May 10. 1393. K. KREKELER AND E. MARTZ. Green trisazo dye.

Triazo dyestuffs: produced by combining the diazo derivatives of the diazo
compounds of the general formula

p.,^N=N-R

^<^N=N-C,
in which P represents a radical of the benzidin series, such as diphenyl, ditolyl,
diphenol ether, or the like; R, the radical of an orthooxycarbonic acid of the ben-
zene series, such as salicylic acid or cresotinic acid; and C, the radical of
"Cleve's" alpha-naphthylarain-beta-sulphonic acid (1.6 or 1.7), with one mole-
cule of a mono or di .sulpho acid of l.S amidonaphthol; forming black powders
soluble in water with green color, dyeing unmordanted cotton green shades.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

231

W.1.SM— .1/111/ /(), lim. K. KREKELER. E. MARTZ, AND A. ISRAEL, dray

trimzo dy<.

Trlaio ilycsituffii: produowl by oorahlnln«r the dtam (lerlvatlvt-" of the ilUzn
CHiiipouiKlK ()( the RCiirmI tonimla R-N-N-P-N-N-C (M per No. OUa.ftl'>)
wUhonemcilcciiliMif l.'lorl.5nnplitlioliiionn!iiil|>ho-acld; forming cUrk powden
dycliiK unmonlanttfd cotton (fn'^nWi-gray iihadcii.

eoa.na—May 10, (SSe. K. KREKELER. E. MAKTZ, and a. ISRAEL. Onxn

trimio itijr.

Trliino (lycstufTs. produced by combining tho dinio dcrlvatlvcj of the dinio
comiMKiiuls of the Kctioml formulii UN -N -P-N-N-C (an per No. fiOS.fttt)
with one molecule of a 1.8 dloxyuiiiihlluileiie mono or dl iiulpho acid: forming
black iwwdcrs dyeing unmordantc<l i-ottou green shadeii.

«03,6r,S—.Vaii 111. ims. K. KREKELER. E. MARTZ, AND A. ISRAEL. Brown

trimuo ftyr.

Trlaio d vestulTs: formed by combining the diazo derivatives of the dlaio com-
pounds of ibu gcnoml formula R-N^-N-P-N-N-C (a.i per No. 008.645) with
one molecule of alpha-naphthylaraln. or of a monosulpho acid thereof; dyeing
unmordanted cotton dark-brown shades, and wool similar shades In acid hatha.

SOS,tl»—}lay 10, IS9S. R. E. SCHMIDT. Vark-pm-n alizarin derivatire.

Allurin drestufiB: obtainable by sulphonatlou of the condensation products
from one molecule of alliarln pentacyanln and two molcculesof a primary aro-
matic amln, as paratoluldin; forming dark powders, dyeing nnmordanted and
chrome-mordanted wool green shades, yielding on chrome-mordanted cotton
fast green shades.

eOSJlS—Maij 10. ISas. R. DEMUTH. Broum itUphur dye.

Coloring matter: produced by subjecting cre.sols and sulphur in a strong alka-
line solution to a heal above 200° C: forming, in the case of its alkaline salts, a
black maw, soluble in water, with a greenish-black or bluelsh-biack color, dyeing
cotton a fast brown.

90S,1(»—June 7, ISSS. M. KAHN AND K. HEIDENREICH. Black ditazo dye

and procem qf making fame.

DIazo dve.><tulTs: produced by first combining one molecule of the diazo deriv-
ative of amidodlpnenvlaminsulpho-acid. having the formula CtHi.NH.C«Il(.
NHs(I),SO;|H (3), with one molecule of alphannphth.vlamtn: secondly, dittzotlz-
ing the resulting amidoazo compound: and Mnally, coupling the dlazoazocom-
pounii tiuis olitHinod with an aiphn-naphtholalpha-mnnosulpho-ttcid, such as
l.-l naphtholsulpho-acid, 1.5 naphtholsulpho-acid; forming dark powders, solu-
ble in water, with a bluish-black color, dyeing wool in acid bath fast black
shades.

eoa.IlB—Juner. 1S9S. O. NASTVOGEL. IHphenytnaphlhytmelhane dye.

A diphenvlnaphthylmcthane dye: produced by first condensing tetraalkyl-
diamiaohetizhvdroi with certain alpha-naphthylamlnsulpho adds: secondly,
dlazcilizing the resulting leuco compound: thirdly, transforming the diazo group
of tho bfKiv Ihu.s obtained into the sulphinic group: and finally, changing the
so-produce<l leuco s\ilphinlc-sulphonic acid into the corresponding dyestuff,
anlphonic acid, by means of oxidizing agents; forming a brown powder, dyeing
wool in acid bath grecnish-bluc shades fast to alkalis.

60.1,563— June ti. 1898. R. E. SCHMIDT. Anlhrofiuinone dye.

Paradlamidoanthranifin-monosulpho acid: produced by sulphonating paradi-
amidoanthrarufin by means of fuming sulphuric add with the addition of
boric acid: forming a blackish powder dyeing unmonlanted wool in acid baths
blue shades fast to light, and yielding on chrome mordanted wool fast greenish-
blue shades.

60S,9tl— June tl, 1898. R. E. SCHMIDT AND P. TITST. Blue anthraquitume dye.
Paradiamidochrvsazin-monosulpho acid: produced by sulphonating paradl-
amldochrysazin by means of fuming sulphuric acid with the addition of boric
acid: a blackish powder, dyeing unmordanted wool in acid baths blue shades
but to light, yielding on chrome mordanted wool greenish-blue shades.

(S0e,181--June 18, 1898. J. BAMMANN. Blue tetrazn dye and pnxxm qf making

same.

Tetrazo dyestuBs: produced by combining one molecule of a tetrazotized
■ paradiamin with two molecules of 1.8 amidonaphthoi 4.6 disulpho-acid; form-
ing dark powders soluble in water with from reddish-blue to blue color, dyeing
unmordanted cotton fast violetblue to blue shades.

606,193— June t8, 1898. R. DEMUTH. i'elloui-broum cotton dye.

A yellowish-brown cotton dye: produced by subjecting dinitrotoluenesulpho-
acid (CHjNOjNOfSOjH 1:2:4:6), or salts thereof, to the action of an alkaline-
sulphid-carrying compound at elevated temperatures, up to 250° C.

60«,tlt— June t8, 1898. B. HEYMANN. Blur, dye ani procem of making tame.

DyestufT produced by the reaction of paraamidodimethylanilinthiosulpho
acid an<i nitroso 2.7 ozynaphthoxyacetlc acid; dyeing chrome-mordanted wool
fast bright-blue shades.

eoe.teu-June is, 1898. J. BAMMANN. Dark-Hue tetrazo dye and proce— o/

making same.

Tetrazo dvestnlTs: produced by combining one molecule of tetrazotized para-
diamin, such a.s Ijenzidin, toildin, or dianisidin, with one molecule of the 1.8
amidonaphthoi, 4.6 disulpho-acid (German patent No. 80,741); and further com-
bining the resulting intermediate prtMiuet with one molecule of amidonaph-
thoi luonosulpho-acid G: being soluble in water, rediazotizable In solution or on
fiber, and dyeing unmordauted cotton from blacki.ih-bluc to blue shades.

eort.Wa—Junr JS. 1S98. P. OTT AND T. KBOEBER. Blue axin dye and proceu

oj rmtkinij samt:

Azin dycstulTs: produced by acting with oxidizing agents such as bichromate
of sodium on a mixture of equimolccular proportions of paraamtdodiphenyl-
aminorthosulphu acid and of a sulpho acid of a symmetrlcally-dlsubstituted 1.3
naphthylene dlomin; forming a dark powder dyeing wool brilliant-blue fast
shades.

606,107— June t8, 1898. F. BENDER. Amidonaphtholdisulpho acid and process qf

making same.

Acid "B," 1.8 amidonaphthoi 3.5 disulpho-acid: produced by sulphonating
1.8 amidonaphthoi Smonosuiphoacid: soluble in hot water, with difficulty in
cold water; the diazo compound being soluble in water with an Intensely yellow
color; the add. when boiled with dilute sulphonic acid at 140° C yielding 1.8
amidonaphthoi 3 sulpho-acid, and when heated with dilute caustic-soda lye up
to 2:i0° C, yielding 1.8 dioxynaphthoUue 3.5 (4.6) disulpho acid, and adapted to
loim au add sodium salL

6m,lM—June *a. IKtS. P. BENDER. Blur-hlaekdyr.

Diazo dyes derived trom one moleeulnr pro|>ortlon of acid " B." No. MM,4t7,
and two molecular pni[M>rllonM of a diazo romfMMind. «uch an dlaz«>-heiu«tl«;
soluble in water with n greenish U< reddish-blue color, and dyeing wool in all
acid bath In greenish to bhdsh-black shades.

eno.uii—jHne Pt. IftS-i. F. BENDER, ilnen ditmo dye.

A coloring matter, dyeing nnmordniiicd cotton In green shades; prepared by
sulphonating 1.8 amiilonaphthol :i monmulphaaclil (acid "B,"No. 1106,4X7),
beiizidin-azv-anllcylio acid, or analogous compounds.

Hor.WS—Jiily It. 1898. E. ELSAESSER. Blue dye/or wool.

Blue dyestnfl for w<sil: finslured by oxidizing a mixture .j' ■ ;.hthyl-

metaphenylenediamin-dlsulplKmlr' add and dlni<-thvlpari' uimin-

thiosulphoiilcacid liian ttqncousNolution. and then ls>ilingtl.< ;.rofIurt

with s(Kla; a dark-bronze shining powder, readily soluble In whkt. withdlffl-
culty In alcohol.

e08,0tl,— July 16, 1898. M. BONIGER. Bmwn aso dye.

Sulistan live brown polyazo coloring matters: pro<lucefl by combining, first, one
molecule of theazocohir betat azo alpha^ nnpbthol bctaj beta-i disuiphonic
acid metaiihcnylen or metatoluylen diamin with one moU-'Cule of a dlaz/i com-
pound antl combining the dl^'uzo color thus r/btalned with one moiecule of the
Intermediate product obtained by combination of one molecule of tetrnzo-
dlphenyl or tctrazo-ditolyl with one molecule of salicylic acid; dyeing unmor-
danted cotton In yellow-brown to blue-br<jwn tints.

doe.tas— August t. 1898. K. THUN. Green alizarin dye.

Alizarin dyeatuHs; produced by sulphonating the condensation products
obtainable from one molecule of alizarin bonleaux and two molecules of a pri-
mary aromatic amln. as paratoliildin: forming dark powders, dyeing unmor-
danted and ehrome-mtiriluiited wool green shades and yielding on chrome-
mordanted cotton green shades fast to light.

60S,Klr— August t, 1898. H. R. VIDAL. Proeett of making violet dyes.

Violet coloring matters are produced by heating parasulphanillc acid with
diamins, one to four, of l>enzene and naphthalene.

608,)SS— August t, 1898. H. R. VIDAL. Broum-Uack suljsir dye.

Coloring matters: produced by heating with .«nlphur a conden.<iatlon product
of the amldobenzene sulphonic acids with a derivative of phenol or a diamin.
such as the condensation product of the parasulphanillc acid and orthoamido-
phenol; soluble in alkalis. Insoluble in acid and directly dyeing unmordanted
cotton a brown black.

608.999— August 16, 1898. J. BAMMANN AND M. ULRICH. Blue-blaek azo dye.
A colonng matter: produced by combining equimolecuiar proportions of a
tctrazo-diphenyl salt with 1.8 amido-naphtholbeta-disuipho acid and alpha-
naphthylamin: soluble in water and alcohol with reddish-violet color. In
ammonia with bright, reddi.sh violet, dyeing iinmordanlcd cotton in an alkaline
bath violet-black shades, changing to black on treatment with nitrous acid and
an alkaline solution of beta-naphthol.

609,sn— August 16, 1898. R. BOHN. Blue-Mack dye and process of maJeing same.
A violet-blue to blue-black dyestulT: produced by submitting a dinltronaph-
thalene to the action of a reducing agent— such as sodium sulphide, grape sugar,
sodium .stannate, zinc dust, or the liKe — in alkaline solutions of the sulphite or
the bisulphites of the alkalies or the alkaline earths.

609,SSt— August 16, 1898. P. JULIUS. Blue dye.

A blue coloring matter: produced by condensing the nitrosodiethylmetaami-
dophenol with alpha-naphthylominmonosuipbo acid, yielding last Indigo-llke
shades.

609,598— August tS, 1898. H. R. VIDAL. Bed dye and process qf making same.

Coloring matters: produced by heating hydrazlns with a carbozylated carblnol
compound, such as dicarboxylated trioxyphenylcarblnol, forming a vivid red-
blue mass, soluble In alkalis, directly dyeing animal and mordanted cotton
fibers.

809,599— August ti, 1898. H. R. VIDAL. Process of obtaining triphenylmethane

derivatives.

Tricarboxylated derivatives of phenolic or aminated compounds of triphenyl-
methane are produced by heating .«aid compounds In presence of a eonaen.sing
agent, such as oxalic and sulphuric acid. (See No. 603,300.) They form
orange-colored masses, soluble in alkalis and concentrated acids, little soluble
in water.

609,997-AuguetSO, 1898. J. SCHMID AND H. REY. Red-riolet phUtatein dye.

In the manufacture of dyestuffs of the phthaleln series, equal molecular parts
of phthalic anhydrid and raetaoxyphenylorlhotolylamin are melted until the
molten ma.ss thickens, and then the pro<luct of condensation Is extracted. One
molecule of this product is condensed with one molecule of a meta-subetituted
phenol, such as resorcinol, monoeihylmetaiimidocresoi. dlmethylmeta&mldo-

fihenol. etc.. and the monoorthotolylphthalein dye thus obtained converted
nto a sulpho acid, and then into an alkaline salt. It dyes wool and silk In
acid bath in red-violet tints.

609,998— Augutl SO, 1898. J. SCHMID AND H. REY. Suffonated monaUnxyl-

pUhalein dye.

The alkaline sulphonate of a monobenzylated-phthalcin dye is produced by
condensing one molecule of the product, resulting fn>m the condensation o(
equivalent ciuantities of phthalic anhydrid and of a iH^nzylalkylmeta^mido-
pnenol, with <me molecule of a meta-substltuted phenol; then converting the
monobcnzylateil'phthalein dye into a. sulpho acid, and then into an alkaline
salt. It dyes textile tibers in fiery-red tints.

eiO,SU— September 6, 1898. B. DEICKE. Red-add dye and pmceu qf making it

Azo dyestuffs: produced by diazotlztngamidobeiuylamin and Its alkyl deriva-
tives, the salts of which are expressed by the general formula NH-.C^H4.CH« —
NR»E (In which R represents hydrogen or an alkyl and xan acid nidiC4U).ahd
combining with a primary aromatic amln. then rediazotiztng and combining
with an aromatic amin, phenol (pyrazolon), amido or oxyazo dyestuff; soluble
in water and alcohol, with a red color, and dyeing hall wool red lu an acid
bath.

6IO,Si»—Septeiid)er 6, 1898. 0. ERNST. Violet axo dye and process qf mtMng it

A monoazo dyestuff: produced by combining dioxotlied 1.8.4 amidonaphthoi-
monosulphonlc acid with alpha-naphthylamln; a gtven-black powder o( metallla
luster, dyeing wool violet in an acid bath and producing by treatment witli
chromatvs or chromic acid a lost brown color.

232

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

6J0.S6T—Sei>tember 6, 189S. A. PHILIPS. Basic diazo dye.

Basic diazo dyestnffs of the general formula, alphyl No alphyl N2 alphyl,
OHNR3CI., (in which alphyl means an aromatic radical aiid R ah alkyl): pro-
duced by diazotizing araidoazo compounds and allowing them to act upon
phenol-ammonium bases: the product obtained by diazotizing amidoazo-beuzene
and treating it with 2.7 naphtholtrimethyl-ammonium being a red powder, dye-
ing wool and cotton cherry red in an acid bath.

eiOMI—fieptanber IS, 1898. G. KALISCHER. Black dye and process of making

same.

A black coloring matter produced by heating oxydinitrodiphenylamin with
sulphides of alkalis and .sulphur in aqueous solution; soluble in water with a
blue-black color and dyeing unmordantcd cotton directly in an alkaline bath
a deep blue-black.

611,111—Seplember 20, 1898. K. ELSAESSER. Brown dye andproccss 0/ making it.
A brown diazo dyestuff: produced by combining the sodium-bisulphite ''om-
pound of nitroso-beta-naphthol in an "acetic-acid solution with a tetrazo com-
pound, such as tetrazo-diphenyl and tetrazo-ditolyl, and then combining the
intermediate product thus formed with an alkaline solution of betai amido
alphat naphthol betas sulphonic acid; dyeing unmordanted cotton in a neutral
or alkaline bath dark brown.

eil.m— September SO, 1898. E. ELSAESSER. Bhu-black dye andproccss of making

same.

A direct-dyeing blue-black cotton dyestuff produced by the action of sodium
sulphide upon alphai alpha4 dinilronaphthalene alphas monosulphonic acid.

611,697— October U. 1898. J. BAMMANK. Green-blue tetrazo dye.

Tetrazo dyestuffs produced by combining one molecule of a tetrazotized
paradiamin of the benzidin series (such as benzidin, tolidin, dianisidin) with
one molecule of 1.8 amidonaphthol 4.6 disulpho acid and coupling the inter-
mediate product with one molecule of any of the known azo dyestuff compo-
nents, such as 1.8 amidonaphthol 3.6 disulpho acid, 1.4 naphtholsulpho acid,
alphanaphthylamin, or the like; dark powders, soluble in water, rediazotizable
in solution or on the fiber, dyeing unmordanted cotton from violet to blue and
greenish-blue shades.

611,610— October i, 189S. R. DEMUTH. Broum cotton dye.

A reddish-brown cotton dye produced by subjecting 1 naphthol 4.8 dLsulpho
acid to the action of an alkaline-sulphide carrying compound at temperatures
of 260° to 270° C.

611,611— October !,, 1898. R. DEMUTH. Jndigo-blue cotton dye.

An indigo-blue cotton dye produced by subjectmg 1.8 amidonaphthol to the
action of an alkaline sulphide and sulphur at 240° C, repeatedly extracting the
resulting melt when cola with small quantities of hot water until the blue dye
is wholly dissolved out, and finally isolating from the joint filtrates the dye by

Srecipitation with a metallic chloride, such as zinc chloride; dyeing uiimor-
anted cotton in alkaline bath, and in bath containing suitable reducing agents,
fast indigo-blue shades.

611,628— October 4, 1898. H. HASSENCAMP. Yiolel dye and process of making

same.

A triphenylmethane dyestuff produced by combining in equimolecular pro-
portions tetramethyldiamidobenzhydrol and methylbenzylanilindisulpho acid,
oxidizing the resulting leuco compound and converting the oxidation product
into an alkaline salt; dyeing unmordanted wool in acid baths fast bluisn-violet
shades.

611,665— October 4, 1898. M. ULRICH. Orange dye and process of making same.

Orange dyestuffs, dyeing unmordanted cotton: produced by combining one
molecule of a diazotized paraamidoazo sulpho acid of the benzene series — such
as amidoazo-benzene sulpho acid, amidoazo-toluene sulpho acid, or the like —
with one molecule of a nilrometadiamin of the benzene series, such as nitro-
metaphenylenediamin; fast to acids, alkalis, and light.

611,661,— October i, 1898. M. ULRICH. Blue dye and process qf making same.

Monoazo dyestuffs produced by combining one molecule of a diazotized peri-
amidonaphtholsulpho acid, such as 1.8 amidonaphthol 3.6 disulpho acid, with
one molecule of a monosubstituted 1.8 naphthylaminsulpho acid of the general
formula CioHo. NHR (1). SO3H (8), in which R represents an aromatic radicle
such as phenyl; dyeing unmordanted wool in acid bath from reddish blue to
fast blue shades.

61S,llS—0cttA>er SS, 1898. 1. J. BRACK. Rhodol derivaiive and process of making

same.

DyestufTs of the phthalein series produced by condensing an alkyl ether of
a dialkylrhodol with formic aldehyde: a brilliant greenish powder, dyeing tan-
nin-mordanted cotton a yellowish red, and on printing with potassium fer-
rocyanide and zinc oxide it yields a lake of the same color, not changed by
steaming.

61S.B78— November 1, 1898. C. DE LA HARPE AND C. VAUCHER. Bltie dye

from gaUocyanin and process of making same.

A coloring matter: produced by treating the gallocyanin dye of No. 518,458,
with sulphurous acid in a free state or as a sulphite or bisulphite; dyeing and
printing bluer tints than the original gallocyanin.

61S,6S8— November 1, 1898. K. ELBEL AND I. ROSENBERG. Primary disazo

bltie-black dye.

A primary diazo coloring matter, dyeing wool a blue black: produced by com-
bining the 1.8.4.6 amidonaphtholdisulpho-acid (K) with one molecule of alpha-
diazonaphthalene in presence of free mineral acid and then acting upon the
so-formed monoazo color with one molecule of diazo-benzene in an acid combi-
nation liquid.

eiS,6S9— November 1. 1898. K. ELBEL AND I. ROSENBERG. Primary disazo

blue-Mack dye.

A primary diazo coloring matter: produced by combining the 1.8.4.6 amido-
naphtholdisulpho-acid (K) with one molecule of parauitrodiazobenzene in pres-
ence of free mineral acid and then acting upon the so-formed monoazo color
with one molecule of diazo-benzene in an acin combination liquid; dyeing wool
from an acid bath blue to deep blue-black shades.

61S,6m— November 1, 1808. I. ROSENBERG AND K. ELBEL. Greenish-bhie poly-
azo dye.

A polyazo dyestuff produced by combining one molecule of alpha-diazo-
naphthalcne with one molecule of 1.8.4.6 amidonaphtholdisulpho-acid (K) in
presence of free mineral acid to a monoazo color, acting upon same in presence
of free acetic acid with one molecule of tetrazo-diphenyl and uniting the
so-formed inu-rmediate product with 2.8.6 amidonaphtholsulpho-acid (G) in
presence of alkali; dyeing unmordanted cotton a deep grceuish blue.

eis,6l,l— November 1, 189S. I. ROSENBERG AND F. KRECKE. Greenisli-blue

mired disazo dye.

.\ dyestuff obtained by combining the intermediate product from one mole-
cule of tetrazo-diphenvl and one molecule of 1.8.4.6 amidonaphthoklisulpho
acid (K) with one molecule of 2.8.6 amidonaphtholsulpho-acid (G), effected in
alkaline solution, characterized by giving with concentrated sulphuric acid a
cornflower-colored solution; dyeing unmordanted cotton greenish-blue to
greenish-black shades.

613.eiS— November 1, 1898. I. ROSENBERG. Deep-blue dye and process of making

sa7ne.

A mixed substantive dyestuff produced by combining the tetrazo compound
of benzidin first with one molecular proportion of 1.8.4.6 amidonnphtholdisul-
pho-acid (K), to form an intermediate product which i ther pu intc reaction
with one molecular proportion o* 1,3 naphthylenediaminsulphi acid dyeing
unmordanted cotton deep-blue iiidigo-likf shade frou; a weakly alkaline or
salt bath.

613,6iS— November 1. 1898. I. ROSENBERG AND B. HELMERT. Orange-brown

polyazo dye.

Polyazo dyestuffs produced by combining monoazo colors containing the 1.3.6
naphthalenediaminsulpho acid (No. 587,757), as component part with the inter-
mediate products obtained from one molecule of one of the usually employed
paradiamins and one molecule of an oxycarbonic acid: dyeing unmordanted
cotton a fast orange-brown shade from an alkaline or salt bath, and dyeing
mixed goods from a neutral bath.

61S,6U— November 1, 1898. I. ROSENBERG AND B. HELMERT. Reddish-brown

polyazo dye.

A polyazo dyestuff produced according to No. 613,643, using the diazo com-
pound of alpha-naphthylamin; dying unmordanted cotton reddish-brown shades
from alkaline or salt baths; dyeiiig wool same shades from a neutral bath; and
especially suited for dyeing mixed goods.

61S,6iS— November 1, 1898. I.ROSENBERG. Black polyazo dye.

A polyazo dyestuff produced by reducing in alkaline solution the nitrogroup
of the monoazo color obtained from one molecule of paranitrodiazo-benzene and
one molecule of 1.8.4.6 amidonaphtholdisulpho acid (K) in acid solution, com-
bining the reduced product with one molecule of tetrazo-diphenyl to form an
intermediate body and acting upon this with one molecule of 1.3.6 naphthalene-
diaminsulpho acid; a black powder soluble in water with black, in concen-
trated sulphuric acid with indigo-bhie color, dyeing unmordanted cotton black,
which can be rediazotized and combined with developers,

61S.6i6— November 1. 1898. I. ROSENBERG AND P. KRECKE. ftubstantive

disazo dye.

A mixed substantive diazo dyestuff produced by combining the tetrazo com-
pound of tolidine, first with one molecular proportion of 2.S.6 amidonaphthol-
sulpho-acid (G) and then reacting on the same with one molecular proportion of
1.3.6 naphthylenediaminsulpho-acid; dyeing unmordanted cotton bluish-violn'
shades: diazotizable on the fiber, and combining with the usual developers;
yielding, for instance, with beta-naphthol indigo-blue shades fast to light and
washing.

61S,911— November 8, 1898. C. RIS. Yellow dye and procesi of making same.

An orange-yellow powder, dyeing unmordanted cotton, wool, and silk in fast
greenish-yellow shades, and produced by condensation of paradinitrodibenzyl-
disulpho acid with a base of the aniline series in presence of caustic-alkali lye
and tnen further oxidizing the product.

615, 9i0— November 8, 1898. H. GUTZKOW. Green-blue soluble dye and process of

snaking same.

Greenish-blue dyestuffs soluble in water, produced by causing the diazo com-
pounds of asymmetric dialkylsaffranin to act upon naphthylamin.

61S,9i6— November 8, 1898. C. HOFFMANN. Red rhodamin dye and process of
making same.

Rhodamindialkylamids, red dyestuffs, are produced by treating rhodamin'
with oxychloride of phosphorous and then with dialkylainins.

61l,,S9l— November 15. 1898. A. ISRAEL AND R. KOTHE. Disazo dye andproc-
css of making same.

Diazo dyestuffs: obtainable from acidyl 1,4 naphtylenediamins, Cleve's
alphanaphtylaminebetamonosulpho acid and naphtotsurphonic acids: forming
dark powders, dyeing unmordanted cotton from reddish blue to gravish-blue
shades, which can be further diazotized on fiber and coupled with amins or
phenols.

61i,BS8— November n, 1898. R. DEMUTH. Indigoblue dye and process of making
it.

Dyes giving blue shades on unmordanted cotton in alkaline baths, or in baths
containing suitable reducing agents: produced by subjecting sulpho-acid com-
pounds of 1.8 amidonaphthol, such as their free acids, or salts thereof, to the
action of an alkaline sulphide-carrying compound at elevated temperatures,
repeatedly extracting the resulting melt when cold with small quantities of
hot water until the blue dye is wholly dissolved out, and finally isolating the
dye by precipitation with metallic salts, as zinc chloride.

61B,m— December 6, 1898. E. BOURCAET. Green dye and process of making
same.

A green dye-stuff produced by treating the sulphonic acids of alkylated
metaoxydiamidotriphonylmethane or their homologues at a low temperature
with concentrated nitric acid, and then oxidizing the leuco compounds thus
obtained; dyeing wool and silk green in an acid bath.

615, ISO— December 6,
same.

1898. C. HOFFMANN. Green dye and process of making

Green to blue-green dyestuffs: produced by condensing metaillkyl-oxvsul-
phonie acids with tetraalKyl-paradiamidobenzhydrols, sulphonating with fum-
ing sulphuric acid, and then oxidizing the leucosulphonic acids thus obtained
with peroxide of lead.

SIB.W-Decembcr 6, 1898. C. RIS AND C. SIMON. Black triaazo dye and process
of making same.

A black triazo color produced by combining the tetrazo compound of para-
phenylenediaminazo beta| alpha, amidonaphthol beta.; sulpho acid first in acid
solution with a metadiamin, and then with resorciu; dveing unmordanted cot-
ton, wool, and silk deep-black shades.

615,791— December 13, 1898. H. BOEDEKER. Process of makino sulfonic acids of
asymmetric rhodamins.

Asymmetric rhodamin dyestuffs are obtained bv first .substituting in the
fluorescein chloride one chlorine atom by the rest of a primary or secondary

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

233

bnno of tho fat or Bromntlc norlcK, nnd then acllnR on the IntcrmwlUtc prodnrt
thu» obUlnwl with Riiothcr priiimrv nr itcoomlnry b«»o of tho fiit or aromatic
wrlt'i ami tmniittirinliit! iIk- (Ivc^iuIT itmi <itil«lnf<I Into the unlphonlc Hi'lrt by
trirtimi-nl with lomcninitol wilphiirlc iicld. Wool In dyed n hrlRht rpd In an
iti'id bath.

tli:.ltS-iy<rrmbmi). I.«W. I. LEVINHTKIN AND 0. MEN9CHIN0. Prottao/

mniing ul)ih\iUtmiitiiiMphlhulfulfiiHlr arid:

Thfv an- pn"lucf<l bv hi-ntlnit iM'tn, alpha, dloxynophthalcnc-bi'IiVjimlphonlc
nclil «-|lh ammutif anilns ill the pri-wiiif of nu-ana of i-oiidonsallon. Mii'h a» lh«
bvdrwhlorldi'S of the aioouiUo anilnB, im anilln and anilln hydr<H'hlorlde at
In.m 120° to Wf C. D^estulli are obtained by treatment with dlaa) or telrawj
b<«lies.

et«.ett~l>ffrmt»r tl, JS«S. C. DE LA HARPE. Btue dye /rom gaUocyantn and

prorrM nf iiuikinff Mme.

A leiu-ii IkmIv suitable for dvelnit and prlntlnR on textile tabrlen: pnKliiced bv
bolllnu (be pr'(»lini nf inndensatlon of rew)n'lnol and a jralliHyanln dye, with
an a<ine.i«-i wiliitloii of nn alkali while iiul i.t conuiel with the air; (ormInK a

f;ree'il»h-(>lack pt>wder wlileh eolom llberx whim appllwl and oxidized thereon.
11 redilerlilue tlntji than the nald pr<Klnet of condeiiHatlon.

ei;.i. 10. lam. p. Jl'UrS AND O. K. DAKIER. Phmphin dye and

pi„> I their ttlkvl substitnlion prodnrts (substitution In the ainldo

Broupi'ariMil.taliuHl liv eon'den?iitiB paraJimldolH'nyjililvhyde, or Itswibstllnlinn
prmlneta, with the alphvldirivaliven of the mi'tatoUiylciie<llaniln; the dvestiijt
obtained bv eondenjiinK dinieihvl -paniuinldobinzaldeliyde with phcnyl-
inetatoluvlehcdlaniln, dliwolvinK in hot water with a reddish-yellow color,
becoming light yellow by the addition of dilute mineral acids.

et7.liU—Ja»uani UK IS99. F. SCIIOI-L. VrUnw batie ditaxo diir and ;»roir»« ii)

makiufj Kiimr.

Aio <lvestii(T»: prodnrcd bvdiajtotlzing amidoazo dyestuffa obtained from dia-
xoilied iinmialie amidoamiiioniiim ba-sc!" ami primary alphylamins and then
aelinK with the .same uixiii aeetiv-aeetanllid; fnrnilntj oranKeyillow [Hiwdcrs,
dyeing cotton, as well a-s wool aiicl half-wool, light yellow in an acid bath.

917, sn— January 10, 1899. O. BALLY. Proeett nf makimj green dyes.

A green mordant-dyeing coloring matter Is producetl by melting together
brom-fluoresceIu8 and concentrated sulphuric acid and then addiiig boracic
acid.

«I7.«»-J<ii»i«ir!/ JO. IS99. H. A. BERNTHSEN AND O. J. JAUBERT. liltu

dye and proeem of maHnij mme.

A blue mordantdvelng dyestuff l.s produced by treating an oxynaphthlndo-
pheiiolthlosulphonle substance with a concentrated mineral acid.

617. SSI— January in. I*9». L. GIFFORD. ADMINISTRATOR OF K. HEUMANN,

DECEASED. Blue dye and proeem uf making mme.

DyestulT: produced by melting ethyl-phenyl-glycocol with alkali, and subse-
quentlv oxiaizing. as by an air blast. It dyes both from the vat and in the form
of sulpno acid greenish shades of blue.

617. est— January 10. 1899. L. GIFFORD. ADMINISTRATOR OF K. HEDMANN,

DECEA.SED. I^vcem i/ fnaking indigo eiiluring matters.

In the manufacture of indigo coloring matters from glycocol derivatives,
quicklime is addc<l to the caustic alkaline melt, in which the glycocol deriva-
tives are treated, giving a higher yield of the leueo compound.

617.6S'>— January 10. ISy9. M. H. ISLER. Blue dye and procenf of making same.
BlueeoU>ring matters: prijduced by treating dlnitro-anthraquinones with fum-
ing sulphuric aeid containing atxnit 30 to 40 per cent SO, and boracic acid in
presence of sulphur at 120° to 130° C. for two to two and a half hours.

617.7oa-Janttary 10, 1S99. \V. HERZBERU AND H. HEIMANN. Blue aajranin

dye.

A bluesaffranin dye: prepared from neutral blue by first treating the latter with
■ulphltes and subsequently reacting on the sulpho acid thus formed with
dlmethylparaphenylenc<liamln, and forming a dark-brown powder and pro-
ducing on mordanted cotton blue shades.

«l7.y6S-January 17, 1S99. R. KIRCHHOFF. Ked dye.

A dye: produced by combining one molecule of diazotized mctaiimldopara-
cresolHether with one molecule of a salt of naphtholsulphamldosulpiionic
acid: dyeing wool clear red shades of bluish tint.

617.981— January 17, 1899. O. BALLY. Anthraquinone deritatiK and proeeti oj

making same.

Coloring matters; produced bv condensing the sulphuric acid esters of a
polyoxyanthraquinone sulpho acid, which can be obtained by the treatment of
a riitrcj-anthrnouinone or rcduelion pnKiuct thereof, with fuming sulphuric
acid and a re<iucing agent, such as sulphur, with a phenolic ImhIv {inciu<ling
the hydrt)Xvcarboxylir and sulphotiic acids): dyeing unmonianted wo<il violet
to blue shades which become greenish-blue to blue on treatment with chrome.

618.000-January 17, I8S!(. O. BALLV. YelUtw dye ami process of making same.

Yellow mordant-dyeing coloring matterx: produced by oxidizing an aromatic
hydroxycarlx>xyllc acid in sulphurlc-acld solution, as by the action of a per-
sulphate.

etS.lSi—January i!,. 1899. Hi R. VIDAL. Iltark siUphur dye.

Black dyestulls are produeeil by causing sulphur to react upon a trisufaetitu-
tcd derivative of benzene, such us diamlnophenol.

618.6SS— January SI, 1899. E. KON'IG AND F. SCHOLL. AromatU: amIeUxm-

monium and process of making same.

Aromatic amido-ammonium bases (valuable for the production of azo dye-
stuffs), of the general formula (aniraatic radical) NH;N(alk.vl)»r In the form
of their salts (z representing chlorine or the equivalent radical of an acid), are
produced by rc<lucing aromatic nltro-ammonltim oases with metals, such as
zinc or Iron, In an acid or neutral solution.

618.963- FIrbruary 7, 1899. R. TAGOESELL. Blue^ilack azo dye and proeem qf

mating tame.

Azn dyestuffs; produced by combining one molecule of the diazo derivative of
a nionosulpho-acid of the i>cnzene scries — sulphanilie aeid. metanille acid, or
toluidiii-inonostilpho-acid — witli one molecule of alphaiuiphthylaniiii. re<liaz<>
tlzlng the iuterntediute product, and combining it with aiiildonaphtholilisulpho-
acld ( H ) or lis equivalent; dyeing wool in an acid bath blulsh-blaek shades of
great fastness.

619.111,— Ktiruary 7, Mtt. O. BALLY. Orten-blact dye and proet— of maU»g

tame.

Coloring matters: produced by healing l.Vdinllro-naphthalene with snlphnrlc
add to obtain tlic well-known nnphthazarin intrrmiMlate prolnct. and adding
to the sulphurlc-acld wlutlon of this ImhIv a phenolic boay: givlog with colli
anilln a I'olor within the range of violet lo blue.

6l9,ltS—l-'rhruary7, lulls. O. BALLY. Bluish dye and pmeest of making tame.

A cohiring matter obtained by heating I .Vdlnllrr^naphthalene with sul-
phuric acid to obtain the iiaphthazarln interaicdlatc firoduct. and adding
alpha-naphlhol lo the sulphuric-acid solutluii of this body, giving a blulsb-
green color In anilln.

619.181— Frliruary 7. 1899. M. H. ISLER. I^odnrt from dinilro-napMhnlene ai»d

process of making tame.

New iHMlles: prMliiced by submitting 1.8 or l..^ dinltro'naphlhalene lo the
action of weak ftinilngsulptiurlc acid containing not more than 23 iwrwnt «Oi;
bv Ireatmenl with fuming sulphuric acid, or by heating with caustic soda. It
yields a Imiwu dyi'sluT suited for dyeing wool: with dilute caustic soda and a
little zini' dust a red color.

619,191.— tnrunry 7, 1899. I. LEVINSTEIN AND R. HERZ. SaphlhyleiK-iliamin-

siUphonie arid and process of making same.

Alphai alpha-j iiaphthylencillamlu liclai siilphonlc acid Is nrodiieeil by reduc-
ing the azo coloring matters obtained by the lomliinallon of diazo lio<lie«, with
alphai imphthvlainin beta, sulphonle aeid. It forms a sodium salt soluble io
water and oxidizes in a neutral or an alkaline solution by the oxygen of the
air lo a yellowish erystalllne sutwtanee. the aqiiefius solution of which shows
a greenish-yellow fluorescence like that of fluorescein.

6t9.S0S— February U. 1899. 0. RIS. Black Iritazo dye and process of making same.
Black colors: produec<1 by dlazolatlon of the Intermcllary compounds from
one mokvuleof aparadlamiii aii<l one molecule of iM-la, alpha, amidonaphthol
bela-isulpbo-aeid, an<l then combination of the formed lelrazo lx»<ly wilhone
molecule of a derivative of a melailiamin and one molecule of a metadlamio:
dyeing unmordantcd cotton in deep black shades.

619.S18— February 14. 1899. M. I'LRICH. Yellow dye and pmeeti of making smnc.
Tetrazo dvestnda: producwl by combining one molecule of a letrazoderivative
of diamldixiibenzylaisulpho acid » itii two molecules of a nltrometadiamin of
the benzene series, such as nitrometaphenylene<Ilamin: dyeing unmordanted
cotton bright fast yellow shades.

619.S77— February I/,, 1899. P. JULIUS AND A. TKATSCH. Process of making

yellow phosphin dye.

Alkalatcd paraamldo-benzaldchydc and an alphyl-meta-toluylcne-dlamln
arc heated together In alcoholic solution and In the presence of ferric chloride.

619,67 i— February H, 1899. M. 11. ISLER. XanUwpurjmrin.

A sulpho-acld of xantho-purpurin obuincd by dlazotlzlng and siibsequentlj
heating 1.3 diamido-anlhra-quinone in fuming sulphuric acid solution: dyeing
uninoraanted wool dull yellow shades.

619.88.1— February 11. 1899. L. GIFFORD, ADMINISTRATOR OF KARL HEU-
MANN, DF;(:EA.SED. DinuUiyl indigo and process of making it.
A blue dvestulT of the formula C,« Hi, N, Oj: produced by melting ortho-tolyl-
glveiwol with alkali and then oxidizing, as by an air blast: giving greener
shade.' on cotton when dyed from the vat than ordinary indigo, and redder
shades on wool than the ordinary indigo sulpho acids when dyed from Its solu-
ble sulpho acids.

BJS.WS-ffbruary tl. 1899. L. GIFFORD, ADMINISTRATOR OF KARL HEU-
MANN, DECEASED. Blue dye and process (if making same.
Coloring matters of the indigo series: product^ by heating ethyl-para-tolyl-

glvcocol with a caustic alkali, and oxidizing the leuco compound so produced.

When sulphonated it is soluble in water and dyes directly.

610.1168— February tS, 1899. J. SCHMID. Blue letraio dye and proeem of wmkbig

Sfinie.

Blue coloring matters: produced by combining the Intermediate product
obtained from one molecule of a naphthacetoidisulpho acid and one molecule
of the Ictrazoderivotlveof a paracliamin of llic series of diphenyl with one
molecule of a naphtholic compound, as uaphtholsulpho-acid.s, naphthols. and
oxynaphthols; dyeing unmordanted cotton pure reddish to greenish-blue tints.

6a).«!9— /l*ruar]/ 18, 1899. 1. SCHMID. Blue tetraio dye and proeea qf making

same.

Blue substantive coloring matters: obtained by first combining molecuUrpro-
portionsof a naphthacctoldisulpho-acid and the tetrazo derivative of a para-
diamin of the series of diphenyl, and then combining one molecule of the
intermediate product with one molecule of an omidonaphtboLsuipho acid.

eiO.iaS—F^ruary t8. 1899. R. DEMUTH. Blue eoUon dye.

Blue substantive cotton dyea: produced by subjecting sulpho«cida of 1.8
chloronaphthol to the action of an alkaline sulphide and sulphur at elevated
temperatures (to 240° C). repi-atcdly extracting the resultliig melt when cold
with small quantities of hot water, until the blue dye Is dissolved out. and
flnnlly isolating the dye from the joint filtrates by precipitation with zinc
i'hloride.

6t0.ua— f>:bruary tS, 1899. L. GIFFORD, ADMINISTRATOR OF K. HEUMANN.

DECEASED. Blue glycocol dye.

Coloring matters of the indigo series: produced by heating ethyl-orlho-tolyl-
glveocol with caustic alkali, and oxidizing the leueo eoropouiul so produced;
uiisulphoiiate<i. the hues are greener on colton than ordinary indigo; when
sulphonated. it Is soluble In water and dyes directly.
etO.set— March 7, 1899. R. BLANK. Amtdo matonic eUer and procet of making

same. •

Amidomalonic add esters having the formula A-NH-CH = (CO^-H,)^ where
A-N Uj represents an aromatic amin. one H of which Is substituted by the ma-
louic acid ester r(K>t. are produced by allowing aromatic amins to react upon
halogen malonie add esters. They lend themselves to thi? formation of indox-
yllc compounds, readily converted into pom|H>unds of the indigo series.

eiO.S7k— March 7, 1899. K. ELBER AND J. OPPERMANN. Black trisaxo dye.

Triazo dyestulls: priKluced by dlazotlzlng the intermediate products foimed
by combination of tetnizotlzed dlamldodiphenylamincarbonlc acid with one
molecular pro|>ortion of an amin suitable for further diaiotliatlon as amido-
naphtholsiilpho acid n. and combining the so-obtained nnsymmetrlcal tetraio
compound with nietuiiiamlns of the benzene series, as meta-toluylendlamln:
dyeing dark blue U) black shades on immotdanted colton or mixed good« trom
neutral or weakly alkaline baths.

234

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

eil,S9S—Xarchll, 1S99. H. R. VIDAL. Triphenylmethane dye and process of mak-
ing same.
Violet and blue coloring matters: produced by condensation of tetralyl hydrols

with aromatic hydrazins at from &P to 80° C, the action being prolonged until

the leuco base, appearing in the first phase, becomes transformed into coloring

matter.

6il. 652— March SI. 1899. L. GIFFORD, ADMINISTRATOR OF K. HEUMANN,

DECEASED. Blue dye.

Blue dycstud. derived from ortho-tolyl-glycocol by heating tolyl-glycocol and
caustic alkali at elevated temperatures, up to 340° C; dyeing wool from a boil-
ing acid bath, yielding redder shades than indigo-carmine.

■ 631.679— March SI, 1899. M. H. ISLER. Oxyanlhraquinone sulfa acid and process

of makinff savie.

Sulpho-acid of o.ty-anthra-quinone: produced by diazotizing amido-anthra-
quinone in fuming sulphuric acid and subsequently heating. The sulpho-acid
of anthra-rufin, obtained by diazotizing and subsequently heating 1.5-diamido-
anthra-quinone in fuming sulphuric acid solution, dyes unmordanted wool
yellow snades, and is an initial material for the production of dyestuffs

eSi.lS9— March 28. 1899. h. GIFFORD, ADMINISTRATOR OF K. HEUMANN,
DECEASED. Blue coloring matter and process of manufacturinp same.
Blue dyestufif produced by melting a phenyl-glycocol body with alkali, and

subsequently oxidizing, as by a blast of air; in its sulphonated form it is soluble

In water.

it2,S99— April i, 1899. H. R. VIDAL. Black dye and process of making same.

Coloring matters, varying from brown black to deep black, are produced by
heating a nitro-cellulose substance, as gun cotton, with sulphur and sodium sul-
phide; soluble in the raw state in water and capable of directly dyeing cotton
without oxidation.

6tf. 961— April 11. 1899. I. LEVINSTEIN AND C. MENSCHING. Bromi tetrazo

dye and process of viaking same.

Direct cotton dyes are produced by acting with one molecular proportion of
a tretrazo compound of a paradiamin on one molecular proportion of an ortho-
oxycarbonic acid of the benzene series, combining the intennediate product
with one molecular proportion of a rediazotizable primary aromatic monamin
of the benzene series (a combination, for example, of tetrazodiphenyl with
salicylic acid and aniline ), to form a mixed tretrazo coloring matter: rediazotizing
this mixed tretrazo coloring matter; and combining the resulting diazo com-
pound with known dyestuff components, as naphthol sulphonic acid gamma.

6iS,069 — April 11, 1899. R. BOHN. Vellow dye and process of making same.

A yellow coloring matter produced by treating benzoin with an aromatic
oxy-carbonic acid, as gallic acid, in the presence of sulphuric acid; giving a
cherry-red to yellowish-red color with caustic soda solution, and with sulphuric
acid a red to yellow color with a brown to green fluorescence.

613,119— April 18, 1899. K. E. SCHMIDT. Chrysazin dye and process of making

same.

An anthraquinone dyestuff, being an acid salt of a disulpho acid of paradihy-
droxylamincnrysazin, is produced by reducing one molecule of dinitrochrysazin
disulpho acid with such quantities of reducing agents as correspond to eight
atoms of hydrogen, thereby transforming the nitro groups into hydroxylamin
groups; in the form of its acid ammonium salt, soluble m water with a violet
color, dyeing wool in acid baths blue shades; and bluish-green on chromium
mordants.

613,210— April 18, 1899.. R. E. SCHMIDT. Anthrarufin dye and process of making

same.

An anthraquinone dyestuff, being an acid saltof paradihydroxylamin anthra-
rufin, is produced by reducing one molecule of dinitro anthrarufindisulpho acid
with sucn quantities of reducing agents as correspond to eight atoms of hydro-
gen, for which purpose stannous chloride with muriatic acid may be used; dye-
ing wool in acid baths reddish-blue shades; bluish-green on cnromium mor-
dants.

613,51,6 — April 18, 1899. H. WEIL. Green wool-dpe and process of making same.

Coloring matters are produced from paranitrobenzaldehyde-orthosulphonic
acid by first forming a disulpho-leuco compound of the general formula
C(|Ha(N02)-(S03Na)-C. H. R.R', wherein R designates alkylbenzylanilineand
R' monosulphonated alkylbenzylaniline, and then treating this disulpho-leuco
compound with an oxidizing agent. They dye wool in an acid bath a green
shade.

623,638— April 26, 1899. K. THUN. Gray-black anihraquirume dye and process of

making same.

Nitro compounds of the anthraquinone series are produced by mixing a con-
centrated sulphuric acid solution of sulphonic acids of certain bodies, like
purpurindianilid, with boric acid, adding nitric acid to this mixture and stir-
ring for an hour at from 10° to 20° C, and then pouring into water and separat-
ing the precipitated dyestuff; yielding on chrome-mordanted wool from gray to
black fast shades.

621,,256—May 2, 1899. K. SCHIRMACHER. Red-brmm monoazo dye and process

of making same.

Monoazo dyestuffs produced by combining diazotlzed picramic acid with
alkylated araidoiiaphthnlsulphnnio acids, such as 2:5:7 ethylamidonaphthol,
2:5:7 methylamidonapluliiilsulphonlc acids; dyeing wool in red-brown shades'
which become deep black on subsequent treatment with chromates.

6«,877— Jfay 9, 1899. 3. SCHMID AND H. REY. Red Sulfo-acid dye.

Red sulpho-acid dyes, produced by condensing one molecule of a benzalde-
hyde compound with two molecules of a monobenzylated metamidophenol,
heating the product of condensation with a reagent, as concentrated sulphuric
acid, whereby dehydration, sulphonation, and partial oxidation are effected,
and finally completing the oxidation with an agent such as ferric chloride at a
moderate heat; dyeing wool and silk in fast red tints.

625,171,— May 16, 1899. I. LEVINSTEIN AND H. PFEIFFER. Substantive red

tetrazo dye and process of viaking same.

Tetrazo coloring matters produced by chlorinating diacetbenzidin melting at
317° C, saponifying the nrofluct, tetrazotizing the dichlorbenzidin thusformed,
and combining the resulting tetrazodichlorbcnzidin with a naphtbylnmin sul-
phonic acid; dyeing unmordanted cotton bright-red to bluish-red shades fast to
organic acids.

625,288— May 16, 1899. R. KNIETSCH AND P. SEIDEL. Process of making indigo-
red.

A phenylglycocol body is melted with caustic alkali in the presence of a
limited quantity of air, and the isatinic body so obtained is then acted upon
with an indoxyl body.

625,556—May 25, 1899. J. J. BRACK. Rhodol derivative.

A dyestuff of the phthalein series obtained by condensing the methyl ether of
dimethylrhodol with formic aldehyde; a vermilion powder; dyeing tannin-
mordanted cotton a yellowish red, and on printing with ferrocyanide of potas-
sium and zinc oxide yielding a lake of same color.

625,657— May S5, 1899. H. A. BERNTHSEN. Oxynaphtindophawlthiosulfonicacid

and process of making same.

An oxy-naphtindophenol-thio-sulphonic body produced by the oxidation of a
mixture of unsvmmetrical dialkyl-para-phenylene-diamln-thio-sulphonic acid
and 1.2-amido-iiaphthol-sulpho-acid, especially suited for printing on cotton
goods with a chromium mordant.

625,61,1— May 23, 1899. H. CARO. Rhodamin dye and j/rocess of making same.

An alkvlated rhodamin dye is produced by treating chloral hydrate with
alkylated-meta-amido-phenol, without the addition of heat. This condensation
product is then acted upon with one molecular proportion of a dialkylated-
meta-amido-phenol. the same as used in the production of the product of con-
densation, bv grinding them together and gradually heating from 40° to 70° C.
in twelve hours, when the resulting leuco base is oxidized into its blue coloring
matter and then converted into its red rhodamin dye.

625,717— May 25, 1899. M. BOEHLER. Process of dyeing dark blue.

Dyeings produced witn the dyestuffs "immedial blacks" {No. 610,541), and
which are derived by heating oxydinitrodiphenylamin with sodium sulphide
and sulphur, are treated with hydrogen dio.xJde, and the shades changed to a
dark blue.

626,231— June 6, 1899. B. HEYMANN. Process of making indigo.

Diacetyl-indoxyl is saponified with caustic alkaline lyes, the product oxidized,
and the indigo separated by filtration.

626,897— June IS, 1899. F. FUCHS AND H. GUS8MANN. Black sulphur dye and

process of making same.

Black direct-dyeing cotton dyestuffs produced by heating dinitranilin 1.2. 4
with sulphur and alkaline sulphides at elevated temperatures; dyeing unmor-
danted cotton even in the cold.

626,915— June IS, 1899. E. KONIG. Brown-yellow azo dye and process of making

same.

Basic azo dyestuffs soluble in water produced by diazotizing aromatic amido-
ammonium bases, as amidophenyltrimethylamnionium, and treating the re-
sulting compound with substances adapted to unite with diazo bodies to form
dyes, as resorcinol; dyeing cotton and leather mordanted with tannin brown-
yellow.

626,955— June IS, 1899. F. SCHOLL AND A. HESS. Disazo dye and process of

making same.

Diazo dyestuffs produced by diazotizing amidobenzylpyridinchloride and
combining it first with a primary aromatic aniin. as nietatoluidin. then further
diazotizing and combining it with an azo component, as beta-naphthol; dyeing
mordanted cotton or mixed goods with a bluish-red color.

637,679— June 27. 1899. M. BONIGER AND J. LAGUTT. Green trisazo dye and

process of making same.

Green triazo dyestuffs produced by combining in an alkaline solution one
molecule of a tetrazotized paradiamin with one molecule of the monoazo dve
resulting from the combination in an acid solution of one molecule of diazodi-
chlorbenzene with one molecule 1.8 amidonaphthol 3.6 disulphonic acid, and
then coupliug the intermediate product thus obtained in an alkaline solution
with one molecule of a phenolic compound of the benzene series; dyeing
unmordanted cotton green shades.

627,690— June 27, 1899. J. HERB.A.BNY'. Yellow wool-dye and process of making

same.

Yellow dyestuff produced by first forming para-nitro-phenyl-pyrazolone-
carboxylic acid by the action of one molecule of para-nitro-phenvl-hydrazin
upon one molecule of oxalo-acetic ether, and then combining it with one mole-
cule of diazo-sulphanilic acid; dyeing wool in greenish-yellow tints fast to
milling.

627,785— June 27, 1899. K. SCHIRMACHER. Black azo dye and process of making

same.

Monoazo dyestuff produced by treating diazotlzed picramic acid with naph-
tholsulphonic acids containing amido groups, such as 1:8:3: 6-amidonaphthol-
disulphonic acid "H;" dyeing wool in an acid bath in blue-black shades,
which become deep green on treatment with bichromate.

627,896-^une27, 1899. R. BOHN. Blue dye.

Blue coloring matter obtained by treating with sulphuric acid the leuco com-
pound of blue naphthazarin, intermediate product, which latter is produced by
treatiug l.l'-dinitro-naphthalene with sulphuric acid in the presence of a reduc-
ing agent, such as zinc or sulphur. This new dye can be applied directly or in
the form of its leuco compound.

628,025— July h, 1899. C. OELSCHLAEGEL. Blue-black wool-dye and process of
making same.

A diazo dyestuff produced by diazotizing the para-amidophenyl-beta-naph-
thylaininsulpho acid (derived from para-nitro chlorbenzene-ortho-sulpho acid),
combining the diazo compound produced with one molecular proportion of
alpha-naphthylnniin, rediazotizing tlie amidoazo compound thus obtained, and
combining the diazoazo compound with a naphtholmonosulpho acid.
628,233— July U, 1899. C. SIMON. Green trisa:o dye and process of making same.

Green coloring matters produced by combining one molecule of the monoazo
color obtained from diazotlzed orthochloro-paranitranilin and ali)ha|-alpha4-
amidonaphthol-beta.,-beta2-disulpho with one molecule of a tetrazo compound,
as tetrazodiphenyl, and one molecule of a phenol compound, as salicvlic acid;
dyeing unmordanted cotton in green shades.

628,St,S—July i, 1899. A. HERRMANN. Green acid dye.

Green acid dyestuffs of the diphenylnaphthylmethane series: produced by treat-
ing the monosulphonic acids of tetralkyldiamidodiphenylnaphthylmethanes
with fuming sulphuric acid and oxidizing the leucopolysulphouic acids to dye-
stuffs; dyeing wool and silk in an acid bath an even green.

6S8,607-July 11, 1899. B. PRIEBS AND O. KALTWASSER. Black dye.

Black dye i)roduced by heating the sodium salt of oxynitrodiphenylamin-
sulphonic acid with sulphur and alkali sulphides; dyeing unmordanted cotton
in alkaline bath fast and intense black shades.

628,608— July 11, 1899. B. PRIEBS AND O. KALTWASSER. Black dye.

Black dye produced by heating the sodium salt of dinitrooxydiphenylamin-
carbonic acid with sulphur and alkali sulphides.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

236

gfv-,. ■ ' ■•. ISSI9. B. I'RIKBS AND O. KALTWASSER. IttuUh-black dvr.

II lye pnKliiool by hcnIliiR the wMlliim unltof oxydlnllnKllplienyl-

aiiini r iicl<l with milphiir nnd ulknll nulplildi'a.

etS,7tt—JHty II, tsaa. <'.;0. MULLEK. Blarblackdye nnUfirocrMii/mnklnffrntiir.
Coloring mfttters produced by couplinR tlio ti'trazo derlvallvu of pttnipbeiiyj-
vncdlamln on llu' oiu- hniul witli iiii ortnwarboxyllwKl phenol of Ihc benzene
M>ries,nndon llie other hiin<l with the 1.8.4 dloxyniiphthelenoulphonlc nrld;
dyeing ehn)med ivool In blue-black tlntJt.

eta.sti—Jitii/ n. iss-j. r. juur.s. iimuii ozo aye.

Brown nionoazo ilyentuB obtalne<l by the eomhlinitlon o( diaxo ooDipoandii of
nllro-amldo pheiioldiilpho neUls with meta-pheiiylene-dlamln; dyeing wool
from an aeid Imth In deen brown ibAdei, darkened to deep brown or black-
brown on Iroatment wlih eliromateii.

tt9,ttl-^uty IS, IK)9. H. R. VIDAL. Cretol-mVur dye and pnceu nj making

lame.

Coloring umii<rs produei-d hv subjecting benzcne-axo-cre«ol, obtained from
ineUior iiiihoerex)!. to the action of Kulphur in the presence of »xla; dyeing
animal and vcKeinble liber direct without oxidation, and Imparting to cotton
In the dyeing bath a black color from the outlet.

«f»,«<»-JWv U, ISSB. C. DE LA RARPE AND C. VAUCHER. OaUaeyanin-

Irueo drriraliit and pmeetn i\f making wnne.

A leueo-gallocyanln produced bv treating a gallocyanin, in asultable medium,
with a reducing agent, as xlnc dust; It contains no sulphur, la more ready solu-
ble In water, and gives In printing more Intense and bluer tints than the origi-
nal gallix-yanln.

eta,7iS-^uly ts, 1899. I. LEVINSTEIN AND R. HERZ. Blue-Uack diaio color

and i>rinvt(i o/ making same.

A new product, alphai alpha* naphthylcncdlamin beta, (betai) sulphonlc
Bcld, readily soluble In soda solution and almost insoluble In water or dilute
acid. The new coloring niatlera are [iroiluced by combining Cleve's odd with
a suitable dlazo bmly, reducing. «n<l treatiuK with iiii acetylating agent, dlazo-
tlzlng. and combinliig with a rediazotizable aromatic amiu, redlazotlzlng, com-
bliilng with an aromatic color comiwnent, and tlnally saponifying.

830,199— Augutt 1. 1899. C. DREHER. Lactie^cid dye.

Basic artificial dyestnSs are dissolved In lactic add, forming new dyeing sub-
stances.
UO.tSi—.iugwt I, 1899. A.HERRMANN. Qreen dye and proce»»tif making tame.

Green dvestuffs of the dlphenvlimphlhylmethanc series produced by combin-
ing tetralkyldiamidobcnzhydnjls with uaphthalenedisulphonlc acids In pres-
ence of condensing agents to leucodlsulphonie acids and then oxidizing the
latter Into dyestufls; dyeing wool In an acid bath.

e30,9St—Aug>ut U, 1899, H. R. VIDAL. Substantive mifur dye and procem of

making tame.

A dihydroxvlated azo body, such as those resulting from the copulation of
one or two molecules of dlazo benzene with resorcin. Is heated with sulphur In
the presence of an alkaline sulphide; dyeing unmordauted cotton in dark
shades.
631,089— Atiguil IS, 1899. C. O. MULLER. Sed dye and proeett o/ making same.

Coloring matters produced by coupling one molecule of the dlazo derivative
of para-amldo-benzcneazosallcylic acid with one molecule of a sulphonlc acid
of a naphthollc compound; dyeing chromed wool In red tints.

631.601 — Atiguit tt, 1899. O. BALLY. Oreen dye and process of making same.

Green coloring matters of the anthracene series pnxluced by healing at a
high temperature the halogen derivatives of No. 631,606 with primary aromatic
amins.

631,606— August tt, 1899. O. BALLY. Halogen derivative qf anthraquiiume and

process qf making same.

Halogen derivatives of alphylated diamldoanthraquinones are obtained by
treating them with bromine or chlorine In the presence of a solvent; they are
soluble In benzene and are converted into green coloring matters on heating
with aniline.
63l,eoii— August tt, 1899. O. BALLY. Dibrom anthraquinone deriraiive and

process qf making same.

A dlbrom-1.5-diamldo-anthraqulnone is produced by treating 1.5-dlamldo-
anthraqninone in a solvent, such as glacial acetic acid, at ordinary temperature
with bromine; valuable for the production of coloring matters of the anthra-
cene series.

631,608- August tt, 1899. O. BALlLY'. ./inMra^fnone derivative and process qf

making same.

Tri-brom-1.5-dlamldo-anthraqulnone is obtained by energetically treating
Lb-dlamldoanthraqulnonc with bromine, at a high temperature, in a solvent;
It is valuable for the production of coloring matters of the anthracene seiles.

631,610— August St, 1899. H. A. BEKNTHSEN AND P. JULIUS. Orangedyeand

process qf making same.

Substantive orange coloring matter obtained by the combination of the
tclnizo com pound olttdiamido base— Iwnzidin or tolldln — withnict*i-phenylene-
diumin-disnlpho acid and then with nit ro-meta-phenylene-diami nor nitro-meta-
toluylene-diamln; when treated with nitro-diazo-benzetie after dyeing on
cotton goods It Is slightly changed In color to brown orange.

631.611— August tt. 1899. H. A. BERNTHSEN AND P. JULIUS. Disaio orange

dye and process of making same.

Orange coloring matter obtained by the combination of a tetrazo compound
of benzKlin. Iln4t, with amido-R acid — that is. beta-naphlhylamlu-3.3'illsulpho
aeld — or with amido-F acid— that l-s, beta-naphthylamln-3.2'-dU<ulpho acid— and
then combining the resulting intermediate compound with a nltro-meta-
dlamln.

631,613— August tt,l899. R. BOHN. Black dye and process of making same.

Black coloring matters produced by reacting with uaphthazarin upon an
aromatic amln, with or without the use of a condensing agent; dyeing cnrome-
mordantc<l wool.

631,611,— August tt, 1899. R. BOHN. Naphthazarin iniermediale dye and process

of making same.

A coloring matter produced by subjecting the uaphthazarin intermediate
product, obtained In the manufacture of naphthazarin by healing 1.5-dinltto-
iiaphthalenc with fuming sulphuric acid to the action of a reducing agent. It
can be u.se<l directly or in the form of Its bisulphite compound, dyeing greener
than naphthazarin.

«3t,l70— August to, 1899. R. BOHN. Blur dye and process qf maUnff s

Blue f'olorlfiK tnalt<>r prndure<l from the Cfjlorlng matl«ni of No. ttHptil
(which are obtnlned from l.H-dlnltro-nntihthah'iin by the rediR'Ing actkin of an
alkaline bli<ul|ihlle on Ihi-one hand an>l ot aodluiii KUlphlde. grftix; sugar, rlc.
on the other) bv nuMleralely beating the same with wHllum sulphide, with <ir
without the adilltlon of sulphur; dyeing cotton a blue shade directly in a cold
Imth.

e3!,gtl—.Srjtlrmber f, 1899. O. BALLY. Bnmanalrtt dye.

Coloring mutters obtained fr<»m Iri-brominali'l rhraqulnone, of No.

631,flOH. by heating Mime with an unimatlc nmin ' Imul the addition

of a diluent or Holvent. The Nulpbonattrd conii" '>nible, and dye uu-

mordantod and chrome-mordanted wool blue to gni n blue shades.

eXI.tiS—lieplanber 19, t»99. L. P. .M ARCHLEWHKI. Proetss qf making dyes.

The flwculont precipitate of cottun-scc<l oil Is converted into ■ dye by oxldix-
ing the mnie with air In the i>resence of free alkali.

633,883— iieptember te, 1899, C. O. MULLER. yellow basic dye.

Yellow basic coloring matter produced from the by-product obtained In beat-
ing together phthallc anhydride and a mono-alkylatra meta-amldo-phenol by
submitting said by-product to eateriflcatlon, as by treatment with salpouric acid
and an alcohol.

633,910— September te, 1899. R. BOHN. Qreen^Aue dye and proeasqf making same.
A coloring matter obtained by oxidizing the naphthazarin intennedlate prod-
uct (obtained In the manufacture of naphthazarin by heating l.&-dinitro-napb-
Ihalene with fuming sulphuric acid). It dyes on chrome-mordanu fast abaae*
greener than those obtaiue<l from naphthazarin.

63i,009— October 3. 1899. I. LEVINSTEIN AND R. HERZ. Blue-bUiek tetrazo dye

and process qf making same.

Deep black tetrazo coloring matters produced from the alphai alplui naph-
thylcncdlamin beta] sulphonlc ncid by diazoilzing the same, combining th«
resulting sulphonlc acid with beta, nnphlhol betOt hetOj dlsnlphonlc acid,
redlazotlzlng the thus-produced bluish-violet amldoazo-colorlng matter, and
finally ooml>inlng the resulting <liazo coniiK)und with aromatic dyestulT compo-
nents, as betanaphthol; dyeing animal and chrome mordanted libers dark-blue
to blue-black shades.

eSS.ies-October n, 1899. R. KIRCBHOFF AND E. HADS8MANM. Black suffur

dye.

Black dve obtained by heating eqnlmolecular proportions of dinltroozydi-
phenylamin and para-amidophenol with sulphur and alkali sulphides; dyeing
unmordauted cotton in an alkaline bath Intense and fast black shades.

635,169— October 17, 1899. R. KIRCHHOFF AND E. HAUSSMANN. Blaeksuffur

dye.

Black dye produced by heating equimolecular proportions of dinltroSxydl-
phenylamin and meta-phenylenediamin with sulphur and alkali sulphides;
dyeing unmordauted cotton in an alkaline bath Intense and fast black shades.

636,065— October 31, 1899. C. RIS. Stilbene azo dye.

Coloring matters derived from stilbene by the reaction of two molecules of
paranitrotoliienesulpho-acid and one molecule of a para compound containing
at least one amido group, with caustic-alkali lye; dyeing unmordauted cotton
in gold-yellow to orange shades.

636,066— October 31, 1899. C. Rte. Black cotton dye.

Black (lyestiifT obtained by melting a paraamldophenol compound, such as
paraamidophenol paraiimidixresol (CH3:OH:NHs=l:2:5), with acetyl com-
pounds and sulphur at from 200° to 300° C.

637,t83—Sorember U, 1899. H. TERRISSE AND G. DARIER. Velloui basic dye.
A new yellow basic coloring matter, obtained from dlamldo-toluyl-alcohol,
beta-nniihthylamin, and beta-naphthylamin-hydrochlorale, which is soluble
in water and gives a dark-brown-eolored dlazo compound on treatment with
nitrous acid, and which is nrecipilated fn>m lis a<iUeous solution by common
salt, and yields a yellow solution in alcohol possessing a green fluoreacence.

638,lt7—November t8, 1899. G. KOERNER. Black azo dye.

Coloring matters derived from amido-naphthol-monosulpho-acid (1.8.4; i.8.5.)
and a teirazo residue containing one or more basic groups attached to the part
of the ttmido-napluhol-sulpho-acid residue which contains the amido group,
and a tetrazo residue containing ^me or more hydroxyl groups attached to the
part of theamido-naphthol-sulphoacid residue which contains the hydroxyl;
characterized by dyeing unmordantcd cotton black shades.

638,576— December 5, 1899. C. DE LA HARPE AND C. V.4UCHER. Onirin dye.
Coloring matter derived from the oxazln dye resulting from the action of hy-
drochlorate of nltrosodlmethylanilln or of hydrochlorateof dlmethylamldoazo-
iK'Uzene upon gallamie acid, by heating the said oxazin dye with sulphurous
acid in a free state or as a sulphite or bisulphite In a closed vessel at 90° to 100^
C: dyeing bluer tints than the original oxazln dye.

6S9,0i0— December It, 1899. J. HERBABNY. Oreen-btue tetrazo dye.

A greenish-blue tetrazo substantive dyestuff obtained by the combination of
the tetraiimido disazo com|>ound derlve<l from a tolnyleiuHliaminsulpho-acid
and para-ultrodiazobcnzeue with amldonaphthol-disulpho-aeid H.

639,0il— December IS, 1899. J. HERBABNY. Black tetrazo dye.

A. black substantive coloring matter obtained by combining the tetimomido
diazo-dyestuff derived from a metadiamln of the benzene series and pora-nltro
dlazo benezenc chloride with amidonaphlholsulpho-acid G.

639, Oia— December 13, 1399. J. HERBABNY. Claret-red tetrazo dye. •

Direct claret-red coloritig matters resulting from the action ot a tetrazotized
paradlamln, as tetrozodltolyl, upon amido pyrazolone carbonic acid.

639.806— December to, 1899. W. H. CLAUS, A. REE, AND L. MARCHLEWSKt.

Biaek suffur dye.

DinitroOrthohydroxydiphenylamln is heated with sulphur and an alkaline
sulphide, producing a black coloring matter dyeing cotton fit>er direct.

639,976— December te, 1899. A.HERRMANN. Oreen dye.

A dyesluS obtained by condensing tetialkyldiomidobetuhydrol with 2.6 naph-
tbalene<lisulphonlc acid, and ozldlnng the resulting leuco compound.

639,977— December tS. 1899. A. HERRMANN. Oreen dye.

A dyeotuS obtained by couileusingietralkyldiamidobenihydnil with 2.7 naph-
tluklenedisulphonlc acid, and oxidizing the resulting leuco compound.

236

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

6iO,010— December S6, 1S99. C. O. MULLER. Blue-black dye.

A dycstuff which contains the tetrazo derivative of paraphenylene-dlatnin,
coupled on the one hand with an orthocarboxylized phenol of the benzene
series, as salicylic acid, and on the other hand with the 1.8.3.6 dioxynaphthal-
enedisulphonic acid.

6lM,6i9—JamMry f , 1900. O. HANSMANN. Broum siU/iir dye.

A brown dye produced by heating with sulphur and sulphides of alkalis
the condensation product obtained by the action of paranitrochlorobenzene-
ortho-monosulphonic acid upon meta-toluylenediamiu: dyeing unmordanted
cotton dark-brown shades, which are turned to bronze by treatment with a
mixture of copper sulphate and potassium bichromate

6i0.986— January 9, 1900. O. BALLY. Green dye.

Green coloring matter obtained by condensing chlor-substituted diamido-
anthraquinonc (obtained by treating diamido-anthraquinone with chlorine in
the presence of a diluent such as glacial acetic acid) with an aromatic amin and
sulpnonating the product.

6i0,989— January 9, 1900. M. BONIGER. Bluish-red a:x> dye.

Azo dyes derived from one molecule of a diazotized aromatic amido com-
pound and one molecule of an 1.8 idphylsulphamidonaphthodisulphonlc acid.

eUJSlr-January 9, 1900. H, BOEDEKER. Rhndnmin dye.

A dyestuff resulting from the simultaneous action of phosphor-oxychloride
and monomethylanilin or other aromatic secondary or tertiary base (as mono-
ethylamin, dimethyl- and diethyl-anilin, chinolin, raonethyl-orthotoluidin or
dibenzylanilin) upon symmetric diethylrhodamin; dyeing cotton a fiery pink.

6U,587— January 16. 1900. A. G. GREEN AND A. MEYENBERG. I^ocess of

making black mlfur dye.

A para-diamin together with a base of the benzene series are jointly oxidized
in the presence of thiosulphuric acid in aqueous .solution, producing a direct
dyeing coloring matter, containing sulphur under the influence of the thiosul-
phuric acid.

6!.1,B8S— January 16, 1900. A.G.GREEN. Black sulfur dye.

Coloring-matter produced by conjoint oxidation of paraphenylene diamin
with an amin of the benzene series containing a free para position to the amido
group, such as anilin, orthotoluidin, or paraxylidin, in presence of thiosulphu-
ric acid; dyeing uumordanted cotton a deep black from a bath containing
sodium sulphide.

6hl,589— January le, 1900. A. G. GREEN AND A. MEYENBERG. Black suffur

dye.

Coloring matter produced bv conjoint oxidation of paratolylenediamin
CsHs (CH.,) (NHo)o (1:2:5) ivith" an amin of the benzene series containing a
free para position to the amido group, in presence of thiosulphuric acid.

651,953— January 23, 1900. A. G. GREEN AND A. MEYENBERG. Process iif mak-
ing fast brnum dyes.
A polyamin of the benzene series (containing at least two amido groups in

para or ortho position to each other) is oxidized in the presence of thiosulphuric

acid in aqueous solution.

61,1.951,— January S3, 1900. A. G. GREEN AND A. MEYENBERG. Fast broum

dye.

A fast brown coloring matter produced by the oxidation of jjaratolylenediamin
C6H3(CH3)(NHo)o (1:2:5) in the presence of thiosulphuric acid in aqueous solu-
tion; dyemg unmordanted cotton from an alkaline sulphide bath.

6ii,ilS6— January SO, 1900. B. PRIEBS AND O. KALTWASSEB. Blue sulfur dye.
Blue dye produced by treating with hot alcohol the sulphur dyes derived by
means of sulphur and "alkali sulphides from dinitro-oxydiphenylamin deriva-
tives, then removing the alcohol by filtration and drying^ the residue: dyeing
unmordanted cotton in an alkaline bath intense and fast indigo-blue shades.

6!a,S93— February 6. 1900. H. BOEDEKER AND C. HOFFMANN. Alkylated rho-

damin stdfonic acid.

The sulphonic acids of alkyl derivatives of the metaamidophenol phthaleins
(the tetraalkylated rhodamins excepted) are obtained by treating the meta-
amidophenolphthnliens with fuming sulphuric acid at a low temperature, so
that they are transformed into sulphonic acids and are easily soluble in alkalis
and suitable for dyeing purposes. They are completely absorbed bv wool in an
acid bath and dye with the tint of alkylated metaamidophenolphthaleins with
a vivid fluorescence.

6i3,165— February 13, 1900. C. E. GASSM'ANN. Solution ofphthalein in phenol.

For use in printing or dyeing fabrics a phthalein, as a rhodamin and especially
a dialky! rhwlamin, is dissolved in a volatile phenol, as cresylic acid.

61,3,338— February 13, 1900. A. STEINER. Bhw dye from gaUocyanin.

A blue coloring matter obtained by substituting a hydrogen atom in one of
the hydroxylic groups of the gallocyanin or it.s derivatives by an acid radical,
■ especially anal pnylsiilphon radical XSOo, where X stands for a benzene, toluene,
or xylene gro\ip. ' This esterification can be performed by treating the gallo-
cyanin or its derivatives in alkaline solution with aromatic sulphoc'hlorides.

61,3,371— February 13, 1900. J. J. BRACK. Bed rhodamin dye.

Dyestuff obtained by condensing one molecule of formic aldehyde with two
molecules of the alkyl ether of the unsymmetrical dimethyl-metnylrhodamin
of No. 584,119. and which is derived from dimethylamidooxybenzoylbenzoic acid
and metaii'midoparacres<^>l (CH3:NH2:OH=l:2:4); dyeing tannin-m'ordanted cot-
ton in fiery-red tints bluer than those obtained from the said ether.

6iS,/,Sl— February 13, 1900. O. BALLY. Xitroamidoanthraquinonc suffo-acid.

Coloring matters obtained by treating diamido-anthraquinone sulpho-aeids
with nitric acid; dyeing chrome-mordanted wool blue-violet to brown-violet
shades.

6iS,60t— February 13. 1900. A. H.S.HOLT. Process of manufacturing indigo-
teuco compounds.

Indigo-leuco compounds profluced by melting together a polyhydroxy com-
pound of the fatty series, such as glycerine, with an anthranilic-acid b<KIy and
an alkali; as, for example, potassium .salt of anthrauilic acid and i)Otassinm
glyceratc.

6iS,669—Fd>ruary IS, 1900. F. ULLMANN. Yettow aeridintum dye.

A dye derived from the o^ridin series, obtained as a methyl-sulphuric salt bv
treating an a<rirtin dyestuff a.s amidotolnnaphtbacridin, with dimethyl sul-
phate; dyeing tannin-mordanted cotton orange-yellow shades.

6U„$S3— February i', 1900. P.JULIUS. Black disazo dye.

Disazo coloring matters derived from ortho-nitro-ortho-amido-phenol-sulpho-
acid, and which on suitable reduction with ammonium sulphide in ammoni-
acal solution exhibit a step-by-step reduction, reproducing the nitro-amido-
phenol-sulpho-acid.

6U,.2SI,— February S7, 1900. P. JULIUS. Black dye.

A coloring matter derived from ortho-nitro-ortho-amido-phenol-sulpho-acid
and having alpha-naphthylamin as both middle and end component.

6l,i,!IS6— February sr, 1900. P. JULIUS. Black disazo dye.

Disazo coloring matter derived from ortho-nitro-para-amido-phenol-ortbo-
sulphoaeid and having Cleve'salpha-naphthylamin-sulpho-acid as middle com-
ponent, and alpha-naphthol-alpha-sulpho-acid (1.4-1.5) as end component.

eU.SSS-February i7. 1900. P. JULIUS. Black disazo dye.

Disazo coloring matter derived from para-nitro-ortho-amido-phenol-ortho-
sulpho-acid and having alpha-naphthylamin as middle component, and alpha-
naphthol-alpha-sulpho-acid (1.4 or 1.5) as end component.

ei,l„iS7— February «', 1900. V. JULIUS. Black dye.

Coloring matter derived from ortho-nitro-ortho-amido-phenol-sulpho-acid,
alpha-naphthylamin, and betanaphthol.

eij,,t38— February 27, 1900. P. JULIUS. Disazo dye from chloramidopheiwl.

Disazo coloring matter obtained from para-chloro-ortho-amido-phenol and
having Cleve's alpha-uaphthylamin-sulpho-acid as middle component, and
alpha-naphthylamin as end component.

6lU,,iS9— February S7. 1900. P. JULIUS. Black disazo dye.

Disazo coloring matter obtained from ortho-chlor-ortho-amido-phcnol-para-
sulpho-acid and having alpha-naphthylamin as middle component, and beta-
naphthol-3.6-disulpho-acid (R salt) as end component.

6U,SU>—February'f7, 1900. H. A. BERNTHSEN AND P. JULIUS. Black disazo

dye.

Disazo coloring matter obtained from ortho-amido-f ara-nitro-phenol, alpha-
naphthylamin, and 1.8-dio.xynaphthalene-4-sulpho-acid; dyeing wool from an
acid bath blue-black shades, turning to green-black on treatment with
chromates.

6U,g91— February 37, 1900. J. HEBBABNY. Black trisazo dye.

Polyazo coloring matters obtained by the combination of one molecule of a
paradiamin first with one molecule of a monoazo coloring matter from 2:8-
amido-naphthol-sulphonic acid and toluylene-diamin-sulphonic acid, then with
one molecule of an amido-naphthol-sulphonic acid: dyeing cotton without
mordants.

6l,l,.i9S— February 37, 1900. J. HERBABNY. Black polyazo dye.

Polyazo dyestuffs obtained by the combination of one molecular proportion
of a paradiamin with two molecular proportions of a monoazo dye as obtained
by combining diazotized 2:8-amido-naphthol-sulphonic acid and toluylene-
diamin-sulphonic acid; dyeing cotton without mordants.

eU.SU—Februari/ 27, 1900. P. JULIUS AND W. REESS. Process of making yellow

basic dyes.

Diamido-toluyl alcohol is treated with beta-naphthol and an oxidizing agent,
such as ferric chloride.

6U,SS6—Februaru 37, 1900. R. KNIETSCH AND H. S. A. HOLT. Process of mak-
ing indigo products.
An aromatic glycocoll-carboxy-di-alkyl-ester is heated to al)ove 200° C„ and so

converted into a piperazine derivative, which intermediate product is then

melted with a fixed caustic alkali and lime.

eu.SSS— February 37, 1900. C. SCHRAUBE. Yellow dye.

Dyestuffs obtained by the treatment of phenanthrene quinone either with
peri-hydroxy-ortho-diamido-naphthalene and subsequent treatment with sul-
phuric acid "or with sulpho-acids of peri-hydroxy-ortho-diamido-UHphthalene;
dyeing fast yellow shades on wool and silk.

6I,!,,SSU— February il, 1900. C. SCHRAUBE AND E. SCHLEICHER. Black trimzo

dye.

Black triazo dye, obtained from oxy-naphthylamin-sulpho acid (NHo. OH.
SO3H — 1.8.4), by combining one molecular proportion of the .same with one
molecular proportion of diazo-sulphanilic acid in acid solution, and one mole-
cular proportion of diazo-azo-benzene in alkaline solution.

6l,t,,J,et— February 27, 1900. C. RIS. Disazo dye from stiWene.

Diazo coloring matters derived from stilbcne by diazotizing the product of
condensation of two molecules of paranitrotoluene-siilpho acid with one mole-
cule of paraphcnylenediamin,and combining the diazo compound with a suit-
able compound to form an azo dye; dyeing unmordanted cotton orange to
brown shades.

6U,,9B9— March 6, 1900. J. ABEL. Green-black dye.

Coloring matter obtained bv treating ortho-hydroxy-dinitro-diphenyl-amin-
sulpho-acid with sodium sulphide and sulphur: dyeing unmordanted cotton
green-black shades not altered by treatment with chromates and copper salts.

61,5.738— March 30, 1900. C. RIS. Black sulfur dye.

Black coloring matters obtained by melting a paraiimidophenol together with
an oxyazo compound, as oxyazobenzene, and with sulphur, to which mixture
glycerine may be added, at about 200° C. and then diss<;)lving the mass in an
alkali and evaporating to dryness; dyeing unmordanted cotton bluish-black
shades which are fixed by oxidation into fast deep black.

61,5,781— March 30, 1900. H. A. BERNTHSEN. Bluish-red dye and process of mak-
ing same.

A coloring matter of the rhodamin series produced by treating the mono-ben-
zylated-di-aikyhitcd rhodamin (obtained by condensation of molecular pro-
portions of dimethyl ordiethyl-para-amido-ortho-oxy-benzoyl-bciizoic«cid with
benzyl-meta-amido-phenol) with fuming sulphuric acid; dyemgwool from an
acid bath.

61,6,711— April 3, 1900. O. SOHST. Black azo dye and process of making same.

MoiKtazo-dyestuffs, produced by combining diazotized picramic acid with
acetylamidoiiaphtholsulphonic acids: dyeing wtK>l black and developing to
dark olive green on treatment with chrome.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

287

tU.TM— April S. IDon. II. A. BKKNTtlSEN. ArUI rlindamin dyr nnd procnu iff

mnkiiHi rnimr.

All ni'iil ilyv III the rhiMlniiiiii nTliw In prculiu'tKl by trcalliiK * rhoflamin liiild
with funiliiKdUlpliiirlo uulil: It dym aniiiiul IIIrt (mm a bath iiiiltalilt' (oruold
dyei«, riMl (ihadeii.

tut.^af— April S. taoi). R. BUHN. SaphthoKuin mlfo-aeiit and profra <^ maUnii

miHt,

A iml|ih<>*ni'iil <•( iinphthnanrin In firodiirod by IrentinK a milnhnnAtiMl Iciico
tiiinpoiiiiil of tlu> iiiiptithHy.iirin liitoriiiiiltato pnKliit't with hvilriK'hUiric aclil,
hi miutHiUM Miliitliiii; ilywiiiK iiiimnnhiiitifl wimiI fnnii an aclil bath brYiwn-reil
HhadM, whioli tiini blu'ok on trt'alnunit with a bichromate.

';ifi,r!W — .Ijiri/.?. two, R. BOHN. tirtrn ttyf nn(t prtM^'gf q/ makiui; Mmr.

Green i'oUiriiiK inattiT of the iinphthiilene derU's. proiliicei! Iiy lietitiiiR a buI-
phonaled leiioo eom|>ouiid of the imphthnzarlii Inlemicdlnte pnKliiit with
aiiiliiieHnd Hiilllne hydrochloride and tben tiulphimutliig: dyeing unuuinlanted
wool (rniii nil acid bath.

SU!..%1— April 3. 1900. H. KXIET8CH. A. H. S. HOLT AND E. OBERREIT.

I'nxxM qf matbtf) aromalic Imlin riim/Mundx.

An laatin body of the aromatic wrliii l« produced by the direct energetic oxi-
dation (OS by a man((anle oxidizer) of the corre.siionding Indoxyl compound.

SiB.ltTt— April 3, 1900. A. F. POIRRIER. frixTm (if nuiking tuljur <(;/<•"•

Siilphiireled eolorlnff matten are pnnliiced by irealliig a simple aromatic sub-
slaiicc. rt-i phenol, with sulphur chloride, then' hoalinjr to a suitable tempera-
ture, adding a cmnple.x animaticiiibstance a.i piiraplit'iiyleiiediamin. increasing
the temperature of themawiand maintaining the iiicrca.se(l temperature for a
suitable iiurlod. and Anally melting in Mxlium sulphide and drying.

6UT.Ue—ApraiO, lyoo. K. i5CHIRMA(^HER. llrmm dye and procem qf making

mmr.

Brtiwn dye-stufls produce*! by the action of diazotlzed nitro and solphonic
derivatives of ortho-amidophcnol acid— such as 1:2:3:.5 and 1:2:5:3 nitroamldo-
phenolsulphonic acids, picramic acid, or amidophenolsulphonic acid — upon
metaphenylencdiamin or meta-toluylenediamin or their sulphonic acids.

eVJUO— April 10, taoo, A. HAUSDORFER AND F. REINORl'BER. Ulue di-

phtnylnaphthytmtihan*- dye,

Diphenylnaiihthylinctliane dyestufTs produced by first acting with fuming
snlphiiric acid on Wsic dyestuns of the general formula HO.C.(C,H,NR«)j.C,o
HsNtIR' (R meaning an alkyl mdleal Much as methyl, ethyl, etc.. R' meaning
an alkyl radical such as methyl, ethyl, phenyl, paratolyl, etc.) and secondly
Isolating the dyestuS sulphonic adds thus produced in the form of their alka-
line salts: they dye wool In acid baths blue shades.

gU,t79— April 10, 1900, T. SAN DM EVER. Pnteens o/ maHnij imtin,

Chlor&lhydrate and aniline are causeil to react In the presence of chlor-
hydrateof hydroxylamin: the thu.s obtained isonitrosocthenyldiphenylamidln
Is condea.«ed by means of concentrated sulphuric acid to alpha-isatinanllid, and
the latter is decomposed by diluted mineral acld.i to anilln and Isatin.

t!,:,!m— April 10, 1900, T. SANDMEYER. Proeea oj producing Indigo,

Indigo pure and mixed with indlgo-red la prodnced by forming a solution of
alpha-isatin-anilid ( So. (>i7,281 ) , and reducing the same by means of ammonium
sulphide.

6i7,tSl-AprU 10, 1900. T. SANDMEYER. Alpha-isaHn attUid.

.\lpha-aiillld of Isatin is obtained by prndiicing a reaction of basic carbonate
of ieail ii)Kiii tbiocartiaiiilid in ilie presence of an alkalicyanid, treating the
thus-obtained hydrocyancarbixlipheiiylimid with a solution of yellow ammo-
nium sulphide, and then transforming the thioamld by hot sulphuric acid:
fonning dark needles melting at 126° C.

ei7.S70— April 10, 1900, R. BOHN. (irern dye.

Grei'n coloring nialters obtained by treating the naphthazarin intermediate
product with an aromatic amin: readily sulphoimte<l to soluble sulpho acids.

6l,7.U)3~ April 17, 1900. E. HOLKEN. I'roeegK oj mordanting.

G<KXls dyed black by sulphur suljstantive dyes are iiumersc<l in a wanned bath
containing zinc sulphate, chromate of pottLsh.and chromic add; then the tem-
perature of ihe bath is raised to the Ixiiling point, and linally the excess of zinc
ehloriiie i» wa.ilied out: white combinations being formed with the sulphur by
the metallic salts which do not ilLscolor the wool.

6i7. KilU— April 17. 1900,
Mu£<lye.

\V, HERZBERG AND O. 8CHARFENBERG. Great-

A green-blue dve of the triphenylmethane series, being a salt of the mono-
snlpno acid, produced by subjecting orihotoluidin to condensation with tetra-
elhyldlanildobenzhyilrol in the presence of strong sulphuric acid (instead of
diluted aciii I, diazotizing the leiico biuse lhii.1 produced and transforming the
o.xyleuco jtroducl by sulphonailon and oxidation.

6i7,8i»— April 17. 1900, R.KmcHHOFFANDE. HAUSSMANN. Blact >ul/ur dye.
A black dye produced by melting with sulphur and sulphides of alkali metals
an eouimolcciilar mixture of dlnltrooxvdiphenylamin and dinitrophenol;
directly dyeing onmordanted cotton dee|>-blaek shades.

ei7,Si7— April 17. 1900, R. KIRCHHOFF AND E. HAUS.SMANN. Black ml fur dye.
A black dye produced by melting together with sulphur and sulphides of
alkali meuils an eiiulmolecular mixture of picramic acid and dlnitrooxvdiphe-
nylarain; dyeing unmordanted cotton from a both contaiaing common salt
dee|f-black shades.

eiS.^l— April «. 1900, H. LAITBMANN. Oxyanthraqulnme ditulfonie acid
and procetti oj making samt.

New pentaoxyanthraquinonedisulphonlc acids produced by treatlog the
tetrttoxyanthraquinoncdlsulphonic adds dissolved In strong sulphuric acid,
with the calculated quantity of an oxidizing agent for the IntrfKluction of a
hydroxyl griiuii: dyeing wool, in an acid tjalh. red. the dye yielding, on subee-
tjuenl treatment with chromium fluoride pure-blue lints.

SiS.Ml— April u, 1900. O. BALLY. Blue aiUhratinin'/ne dye.
'''■"'■'■■ "latter obtained by treating a halogen derivative of alphylido-
ne (OS No. i>31,606i with sulphuric acid and boradc acia and
: Kiilphonating: ilyeing unmordanteil wool blue shades and chromc-
u..MM.,i.i<^.i wool green-blue shades.

eiS.ait—AprU «, 1900. O. BALLY. ITotef anthraquinone dye.

Coloring matter obtained by treating halogen derivatives of diamldo anthra-
quinone (Nob. 631.fl(l7-!i) with boradc add and stilphuric acid and siibM-quently
aulphonating; giving violel-blue shades on cluomc-mordanlcd wool.

«U,5»7— JToy i, ;«M. A. P. miRRIKR. Proee- qf making iiV»r dyet,

RiitMUnllve coloring mnitcm prixliicwl br Ihe reaction of nilphiirand xxlinm
sulphide on a mixture of iianinildoiihenolatid alphaiiaphthol; dyeing culUiii
clear black In an alkaline Imili.

tU.ntS—ilay I, 1900. A. I.4RAEL AND R. KOTIIK. Iltue Irltam dye.

Trlazo dywrtufTs produced by flr^t cfimtilnlng a dlnr*t dcrlvatlrc nt tnonri-

acidyl-para-phenyiendiamln will' lin-

iK'ta-ufphonlc acid (1.6 or 1.7): i' m-

IKiiuiil thus obtained with a <h-( . ,iri

diazoil/iiig: coupling tlicdiazo pr<.'iii' Ii.Ii.hiIc

add; and linally treating the roiiliiiu' Iknila to

split olT the acldy! groitn; dying iiniiiMr " grayUb-

biue ahadea, which can be further diaz< ' :iimt.

ilVl,7liS—May 1. Itno. c, Ji:i,li;s. /Uu. ,h,e.

A bluebliick . iiter. directly 'Ij' ing 'imnrmlantol cotton, obtained

from dinltro-t! \y-illphenyl mcta-phinvlendlamin-di-carlioxyllc

acid by treating' ■iilphur and sodium sulphide.

ei8,7llf,— May 1, 1900. f. J I' LUX (frrm-blark tul/ur dyr,

A green-black coloring matter, dyeing nnmordanted cotton, obtained (rom
dlnltro-dipam-hydroxy-<llphenyl-meta-pnenylcndlamln.<]lialpl>o acid by treat-
ing same with sulphur and siMlliiin sulphide.

84S,?«*— .»/«!/ t, 19on, V, JL'LIUH. Black lulfur dye,

A deep-black dycstiill, dyeing iinmonlnnted cotton, pnxlucod from dlnltro-dl-
para-hydroxy-dlphenyl-meta-phenylendiamln by treating same with sulphur
and sodium sulphide.

ei».llS—May 8. 1900. C. SCHLEU8SNER. Proceu of making black napkOtatarin
Kulfur dye.

A dycitulT produced from the naphthazarin Intermediate product by treallnc
some with sulphides of alkali metals: dyeing cotton directly in blue shade*,
becoming blacK when subsequently treated with sulphate of copper.

6ia.7H—itav IS, 1900. J. BAMMANN ANDW. V0R8TER. DinapltthyUimln faUo
derlralive and procett of making name.

A new beta-dloxydlnaphthylamin dlsnlphonlc add produced by flnt dlmolv-
Ing a mixture of bctai-amldo-alpharnaphthol-bela^-monaHulphonic acid and
water In caustic alkaline lye, heating this solution with a so<Ilum-blsulphite
solution, and finally is<ilatfng the resulting dinuphthylamin derivative; It Is
capable of combining with one and also with two molecules of diazo compounds.

ei9,71S—Xay IB, 1900. B. BOEDEKER. Sulfmaied dicUordietAylrliodamin and

process of making tame.

A blue-red dyeing rhodamlndyestuff, obtained from dichlordietbyl-rbodamln
by treating same with monoethylamin and anhydrous sulphuric acid.

eJi9,7)n—3fay 15, 1900. B. HOMOLKA. Blue Ixuic dye and procau of making
same.

Blue basic saffranin dyestufis, soluble in water, produced by allowing one
molecule of beta-naphthol to act upon two molecules of a diazotlzed asymmetric
dialkyl-safTranln.

Si9.7iS—ilay IS, 1900. B. HOMOLKA. Blue ba^ic dye and procett of making mme.
Blue basic dyestuOs, soluble in water, produced by combining one molecule
of beta-naphtol with two molecules of a nlazotized salTranin.

eS0,i9t—May K, 1900. 3. ABEL AND F. KALKOW. Broi™ sulfur dye.

A brown dyestulT, directly dyeing cotton, produced by treating para-hydroxy-
tri-nitro-dlpnenylamln-meta-sulpho acid with sulphur and sodium sulphide.

650.t9S—May It. 1900. J. ABEL AND F. KALKOW. Black mlfur dye.

A black coloring matter, with a green ca.st. directly dyeing cotton, produced
by heatingwith sulphuraiid an alkaline sulphide cerijiin diphcnylamin deriv-
atives, which can be obtained by heating one molecular proportion of p«rm-
hydroxy-ortho-para-dinttro-diphenylamin body with one molecular proportion
of mcta-dinitro-chlorbenzene.

650,SS6—.Vay tS, 1900. P. JULIUS AND F. REl'BOLD. Broicn^hlack tulfur dye.

A brown-black coloring matter, directly dyaing unmordanted cotton, obtained
from dinitro-ortho-para-<lihydroxy-<liphenyl-meta-phenyleudiamin by treating
same with sulphur and sodium sulphide.

6S0,St7—May tt, 19O0. P. JL'LIUS AND F. REUBOLD. Black tulfur dye.

A deep-black coloring matter, directly dyeing unmordanted cotton, obtained
from dinitro-amido-iiara-oxy-diphcnylamin by treating same with sulphur and

sodium sulphide.

eS0,7S«—Hay t9, 1900, M. H. I8LER. Mordant-dyeing red color and proeoi (/

making tame.

A mordant-dyeing coloring matter proiliiced from the .soluble sulphoacld-like
coloring matter which can be obtain e<i from a dinitro-anthraiiulnone by heat-
ing with sulphur, bonuie acid, and fuming sulphuric add. as per No. 617,6t<6.
by heating same with concentrated sulphuric acid until it is converted into a
comparatively insoluble coloring matter. It dyes alumlna-mordauled cotton
red shades.

eS0,757—May t9, 19O0. P. JULIl'S. Azodyr for laker.

A mono-azo coloring matter obtained bydlazotizing 2-naphthyl-amin-l-eaIpbo
acid and combining the diazo com|x>nna with beta-naphthol. In the form of
lt« calcium, barium, lead, and alumina aalts it is practically insoluble in boiling
water.

PROCESSES.

70t—Apriltl, 1SS8. F. FASSARD. Improrrd procett of dyeing vool.

An acid s<ilution of the ferro-cyanlde or ferro^eaquicyanide of potaaalum or
sodium Is used in cimjunctlon with an acid solution of one of the salts of Ihe
black oxide, or of the sesqiiloxide. or protoxide of iron, which yields a blue
precipitate by the Interchange of their elements.

70S— April tl. ISXH. P. MAGENNIS. Imijnirmumi in Ihe art of dyeing.

The coloring matter and mordants are applied in a ivncentrated state to the
dry cloth or other material to be dye<l. which is then immeiliately passed between
rollers, whereby the coloring matter is forced Into the material.

lis— May a, ISSS. H. HIBBARD. Impromnenl in the procett qf coloring knit,

fart. etc.

A mordant Is used of nitric and acetic acids, saturated with copper and tinned
Iron, and a fixed alkali is added to the dye.

238

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

58,591- October 9, 1S66. A. C. BRUSH AND G. C. WHITE. Imprm<emcnt in dye-
ing hat bodies.
The dye or coloring matter is applied to the hat bodies after the sizing has

been commenced and before it is completed.

J09,SU— November IS, 1870. A. PARAF. Improvement in the manwfacture and
application of cc^rs for printing and dyeing.
Colore for printing and dyeing are mixed with soap and so applied.

ieO,S9S— October SI, 1871. A. PARAF. Improvement in dyeing and printing mad-
der colors.
The madder color is applied to the article in solution with a neutral salt of a

fixed alkali and with ammonia; and, second, the coloring matter is precipitated

in yie article by the mordant adapted to the peculiar color required and the

consequent liberation of the ammonia.

W ,010— February S, 187 U. A. KELLER. Improvement in processes of dyeing cotton.
Cotton is dyed a fast Turkey red, the process involving a series of ten or more
steps with a great variety of materials, soda compounds, cows' dung, alum,
madder, l)lood, fish oil, tin salts, etc.

11,7,881— February 21,, 187 L J. B. FREZON. Improvement in treatirig mixed fabrics

previous to dyeing.

Woolen and silken fabrics containing vegetable matter or impurities are
exposed to a heated acid bath containing a mordant, to simultaneously destroy
the vegetable matter and prepare for dyeing or bleaching.

160,1,27— May 5, 1871,. G. MOLT. Improvement in dyeing with indigo.

An extract or decoction of hops is added to the indigo solution, to prevent
precipitation of the indigo and keep the fabric soft.

ies.5Sl—May 18. 1875. J. B. C. H. PETITDIDIER. Improvement in processes of

dyeing silk fabries.

The dye solution is in alcohol or similar solvent combined with a fatty and
resinous mordant, and the dyed fabric is subsequently passed through a bath of
benzine to dissolve the said fatty and resinous mordant.

170,6S6 — November 50, 1875. J. HARLEY. Improvement in dyeing and printing

textile fabrics.

A fabric is dyed in madder and garancine styles in combination with aniline
purples and violets, bv first fixing the latter upon the cloth with mordants, and
then passing the cloth through the dye bath, whereby it is then dyed up in
madder ana indigo styles. A fabric having an aniline purple in combination
with one or more madder colors is claimed; also the combination of aniline
greens and purples upon cloth vnth mordants suitable for dyeing up in madder
colors.

17 l„S91— March 31, 1878. 8. BARLOW. Improvement in processes of manvfacturing

omammtal te^tUe fabrics.

A figured fabric is produced by weaving the portions to be stained or printed
of vegetable fibers and the portions to be left unstained or unprinted of animal
fibers, then printing with aniline-black, suitable for developing in cotton
fabrics, and cleansing.

180,638— August 1, 1876. W. PARSONS. Improvement in processes of ornamenting
hosiery and otfier knit fabrics.

Hosiery and other knit goods are ornamented by dyeing the ornamentation
thereon.

19l,,S9S— August 31. 1877. J. WILLIAMS. Improvement in dyeing and coloring

feathers, laces, and otha' fabrics.

The material is immersed in a bath consisting of gasoline or naphtha and a
mineral pigment ground in oil.

303,910— April 3S, 1878. J. WILKINS. Improvement in treatment of waste from the

separation of animal from, vegetable fibers.

The vegetable wa.ste from the separation of animal from vegetable fiber
{obtained by treating mixed rags with dilute acid) is converted into dextrine
by heating the said material with sulphuric acid, neutralizing with chalk,
decanting the solution, decolorizing, if necessary, and evaporating.

3tS,019— December SO, 1879. H. W. VAUGHAN. Improvement in methods of color-
ing fibrous material.

A dry powder, as infusorial earth, or other suitable vehicle, charged with
coloring matter and with an oleaginous constituent, is mechanically incorpo-
rated into the fiber in the manufacture of the yarn.

3SO,7SS— August S, 18S0. C. P. CULLMANN AND C. A. LORENZ. Fabriealion

of onyx from agate.

One side of the .stone is immersed in a bath of dilute nitric acid and iron, and
the other side in a bath of potassium cartmnate and water; the stones are then
dried and burned to fix the color.

336,170— December 7, 1880. G. M. & A. L. RICE. Art of separating vegetable

fibers from animal fibers.

Chemical dLsintegrating agents are rendered temporarily inactive during dis-
triI)Ution by being ahsorbed with a suitable comminuted or finely granulated
substance, and distributed in a dry or mealy condition through the mixed
fibrous material, and the mass is then subjected to heat.

3il,661—May 17, 1S81. T. & R. HOLLIDAY. Dyeing colors on cotton or textile

fabrics.

Azo colors are developed in or upon textile fiber, etc., by impregnating the
same with a solution of a phenol or phenols, and with a solution of a dlazo com-
pound of an aromatic amine or phenol.

3ia,081—May SI,, 1881. H. W. VAUGHAN. Process of dyeing.

Dvcs of coloring matters in fibrous material which has been superficially col-
ored by impregnation with a dry r«wder charged with color and an oleaginous
constituent (No: 223,019), are fixed by steaming.

S5S,3S0—F^ruary7, 1883. A. SANSONE. Application of coloring mcdter to fabrics.
Spotted or stippled effects arc produced by scattering upon the mordanted
wet fabric a dry insoluble granulous or powdered substance, such as sand,
coated or covered with an aniline or other suitable color substance.

363,791— August IS, 1883. M. LANDENBERGER, Jr. Manufacture of dyed

fabrics.

In the manufacture of mixed cotton and wool fabrics, the cotton is dyed In the
yam with a dye not aflected by the dye for the wool, and after weaving, the
fabric is dyed with the wool dye.

366,835— October SI, 1883. A. M. JACOBS. Preparing fabrics for dyeing turkey red.
Preparatory to dyeing turkey red or aUzarine the fabric is treated in a solution
of ammonium-aluminum tartrate, whereby the oiling and alumlng of the fabric
are done in one operation.

373,i9S— February 30, 188S. H. W. VAUGHAN. Method of applying dyestuffs to

fibrous materials.

The fiber is sprayed with oleaginous matter, and the coloring matter, combined
with a pulverulent vehicle and a mordant, is blown upon the fiber.

383,500— August 31, 188S. J. C. MAGUIRE. Dyeing and finishing plush fabrics.

A paste or cementing substance is applied to the nap or face side of the fabric
in connection with the dye or color; it is then steamed, and the fabric dried, and
finally washed to remove the paste or gum from the nap.

S01,SU — July 1, 1881,. A. N. DUBOIS. Process of dyeing horse-hair and bristles.

They are immersed in a boiling bath of water containing salts of lead and
salts of soda, boiled for one and a half hours, then washed in cold water, and
subsequently in tepid water containing sodium carbonate.

S01,i75—July 8, 188!,. J. BRACEWELL. Process of printing indigo colors.

The fabric is saturated with a solution of grape sugar or glucose and dried,
and the saccharine crystals over the surface are then broken down, as by pass-
ing it through a steam box for a very short time, when the prepared fabric is
printed with a mixture of alkali and indigo.

S05,057— September 16, 1881,. C. ALBERT CONTI DE BARBARAN. Process of

dyeing hair.

Human hair or the hair or fur of animals is treated first with an ammoniacal
solution of nickel and then with pyrogallic acid.

S38,lSS—0ctobei- 30, 1886. M.CONRAD. Process of printing textile fabrics.

Knit or woven fabrics are first printed with a color prepared with laevulinic
acid, oil emulsion, acetic acid, and starch, and a solution of dry tannic acid in
tragacanth water, and the fabric is afterwards submitted to the action of steam.

SS1,777— December 8, 1885. A.N.DUBOIS. Dyeing aniline black.

The fabric is prepared for dyeing by soaking in a bath of soluble castor oil,
then for about three hours in a bath composed of water, aniline oil, hydrochloric
acid, nitrate of iron, and bichromate of potash, after which it is finished in a
bath of soap.

31,1.1,09— May U, 1886. H. F. DIETZ. Dyeing hat bodies.

Hat bodies are dyed while upon the cone or former.
SK,335— December U, 1886. H.R.RANDALL. Treatment of sillc fiber.

The process consists in treating silk fiber, waste and raw silk and cocoons,
before removing the gum, to the action of a solution of acetic acid in water, 1 to
3 ounces in a gallon of water, or a watery solution of acetic acid and sulphuric
acid.

355,933 — January 11, 1887. T. HOLLIDAY. Process of naptldJiol dyeing.

The fiber is passed through a solution of a salt of lead to which an alkali has
been added, and then through a soap solution, when the fiber, having on it
oxide of lead or lead soap, is impregnated with alpha or beta naphthol, or color-
ing matter formed with them.

555,931,— January 11, 1887. T. HOLLIDAY. Dyeing textile animal fibers.

Animal fibers are dyed with the product of oxidation of alpha-naphthol by
chromic acid, by actingon the alpha-naphthol with chromic acid in the presence
of the fiber.

557,381— Februarys, 1887. E. HOLLIDAY AND E. RAU. Dyeing toithbasic aniline.
The material is dyed in a bath composed of the fatty salts of the basic coal-
tar colors in a solution of benzine, or other suitable hydrocarbon or like solvent;
the surplus color is removed by washing in benzine, and the color is then fixed
in a steam box.

363,855— May 10, 1887. T. HOLLIDAY. Process of dyeing.

Wool or other animal fiber is impregnated with metallic mordants and im-
mersed in a bath containing one or more nitroso compounds of naphthols.

568,880— August 33, 1887. T. H. DOST. Dyeing brush stock.

Vegetable fiber for brushes is dyed in bulk in extract of logwood or other dye
producing a black color, then dried, and finally subjected to the fumes of sul-
phur to fasten the color and also make it lighter.

S7l,,330— December 6, 1887. E. RAU. Process of dyeing.

A bath is formed by dissolving the color in water, treating with caustic soda
and oleic acid, and then adding oil. The fabric is passed through the dye bath,
the surplus color is pressed out. it is dried and steamed, and then washed with
hydrocarbons to remove the oil and leave the color only in the fabric.

379,150— March 6, 1888. R. BOHN. Dyeing animaltextile fabricsieithnaphlhazarin.
Chrome lakes of napthazarin are produced within or upon textile fibers by
exposing said fibers to the action of chromium mordants and naphthazarin in
dyeing.

385,1,36— July 3, 1888. J. C. PENNINGTON. Dyeing.

Silks, wools, and mixed fabrics are dyed with aniline colors by impregnating
them with a solution of the alkaloidal bases of such colors in ether or other
equivalent liquids, and afterwards submitting them to the action of steam con-
taining suitable acid to reconstitute the color and to volatilize the residual
solvent.

S8e,3i7—July 17, 1888. T. HOLLIDAY. Process of dyeing.

Cotton or other vegetable fiber is dyed by the formation thereon of the colored
products of the combination of the nitroso compounds of alpha or beta naphthol
with metallic mordants.

388,705— August 38, 1888. P. P. F. MICHEA. Treating plants containing indican.
In the manufacture of Indigo ammonia is introduced into the indigo liquor
and atmospheric and ozonized air, with agitation to increase the yield.

390,810— October 9, 1888. B. F. CRESSON. Dyeing aniline-black.

An aniline-black coloring solution is forme<l by dissolving and mixing together
water, chlorate potiish, sal-ammoniac, sulphate of copper, nitrate of iron, and
tragacanth gum, then forming another liquor of aniline-oil, muriatic acid, tar-
taric acid, and water, and finally mixing the two liquors.

39l,,ue— December 11,1888. V. G. BLOEDE. Process of tinting fabrics.

Yarn and fabrics are tinted with insoluble coloring matter by subdividing the
color until it is fine enough to permeate the interstices of the yarn and attach

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

239

ltJK>1( to thp Inillvidtinl llbon thcrritt. thrn minpcndlnK thi' rolnr In nn aqiieotu
bath, whifh may i-oiiuiln a Kummy or vIm<ouii luatUtr, anil piuiiinR iho ymm or
hbrir thmiDth (he twth.

»4,U7— /v<-nnArr n, »«W. V. O. BLOEDE. Proet— <it dyeimg.

Till' fHln-lr l» llmt liiiprvKnnlfil with, or th«r« l» Applkvl thereto, a mlxlnre of
nolutik' fiilty iniill.T, Kiiili «» |HitiiKh inMip. ami colcirlnn miilli^r, which may be
Ini-oriHirat.Hl with u'lni, or iitarch, or glue, ami tli« (atty matter Ih then remliTefl
Inaoluble by truktlns the (abrlc with ehloridc of calcium or other e<|Ulvalent
compound.
t»i,U»—l)f<rmbrr 11, tUSH. V. G, BIXJEDE. Tinting nr finithing mttun Jnbrin.

The intenitlce!! of the fabric arc flilert with ntan-h and coloring matter
Ihoroiiithly Incorporated toeothcr, and the pa»lo In then removed from the
exiKwed mirface of the thread* by aerapInK,

4a',sJi>— .lii;/M»(K, JSS». J. BRACEWELL, Pigmrnt-rrtlat.

The pn-M'cw con.**!!*!* In printing the resist eomponndeil of a pigment color and
alkali on the cloth In a |>altern and ilrying It; afterwiinln printing, imddliig, or
blotching liver the name the steam Hnilineblack color, and laxlly (Kvcliiping
and fixing the aniline-black and plgmcnt-re»iRt color* by oteam under prcmure.

ktS.iM— January lU. isao. .><, UOIKiSON. Proertt of tcoaring imd dyeing.

In dveing, mrouring. or waxlilng. the staple In Intermittently fed to thcoperatlng
liquid', and tho liquid and the auple are subjected to intermittent forward
lmpuliM.-8.

Ii!9,lil—Jun( S, ISaO. J.J.HART. I'ronMi i^ printing mlleo.
The fabric containing the lake or lixc<l color is pa.«»ed through a bath of a

solution of a 'I' •'•' ^' maintaineoint

necesffttirv to . 1 reaction between the lake or llxed color and

the ileveloplu- iilycohl). and then tlic fabric Ls exposed to heat

to elTe<'t the cIk ui,. <., ,.<,. ,.,,. ^I'ween the lake and tlxed color and developing
reagent.

tMJUO—AuguMl. 1S90. T.INGHAM. Process rff dyeing.

Fabrics of mixe<l vegetable and animal fibers are submitte<l to a bath of the
require<l coloring matter or solution without any mordant, then drie<l, and the
coloring matter IS then oxidized on the dried fabric by paaaing the material
through a solution that will fix the colors upon both the vegetable and animal
fibers at one and the same time.

tJ9.ft5,«— .VoirmAcr 4. 1X90. R. HOLLIDAY. Process o/ producing aso colors on

cfttton or other lYgttable Jibrr.

The fiber is first subjected to a mixture composed of oil, a phenolic body, and
an alkali, dried, and then subjected to an azo compouml.

UO,Ui—^'ol■ember 11, 1S90. F. ZEMAN. Process o/ dyeing.

Method of dyeing silk consists in first washing the same, mibiccting to a dye-
^ing bath, drying, steaming, subjecting to vaporized acetic acid for setting the
color, then subjecting to a heated batn of silicate of soda, and washing.

U9.W4— JfarcA*/, JS9I. V. G. BLOEDE. Process of coloring and /Inithing/cinies.

Btarched fabrics or yarn are treated with a solution of caustic lime or other

equivalent compound'which has the property of rendering the starch Insoluble.

lS7,iSS— August II, 1S91. A. FISCUESSER ANDJ. rOKORNY. Procets of dyeing.
In the direct prfxluction of insoluble azo colorin]f matters upon fabrics, either
by dyeing or printing, the fabric Is alteniately impregnated or coated with
diazotlzed amido substance and with beta-oxvnaphthoic acid, the melting
point of which is 216° C.

i'l.te?— April B, lS9t. E. MlCHAfiLIS AND C. HENNING. Process qf dyeing.
Textile material is immerseil In a bath consisting of an acid solution formed
by ircatin^c zinc with sixlium bisulphite mixed with caustic .soda and indigo,
aiid then immerse<l in oxygenated water to oxidize the Indigo, to which a per-
centage of ammonia may be added.

iSi.OSt^Odijber 11, lS9t. E. ZILLESSEN. Process o/dyetng.

Silk goods arc dyed In contrasting colors, by treating jmrt of the threads to
be woven with a mordant before weaving, then weaving In combination with
silk not so prepared, to form tbedesinMl pattern, and finally dyeing In the piece
the fabric tnus formed.

U>l.e7S— February H, 1S93. W. BROWNING. Process of printing colors with ani-
line-Mack.

.\ mordant formeil bv an astringent solution and a metallic salt is first applied
to the material; second, the material is padded with an aniline mixture suit-
atile for pnwlucing aniline black; third, a resist for aniline black mixed with
coloring mattt-r. which will enter into chemical cimibinalion with such mor-
dant. Is printeii upon the material in any desired design: and. tinally, the mate-
rial so mordanted, padded, and printed, is steamed or aged to develop and fix the
colors.

UI3.SS6— March li, 1S9S. C. F. X. NOROY. Process oj dyeing Nack.

The goods (of animal or vegetable fiber or skins) are first submitted to a bath
composed of water, logwikod. and a copper salt, and then immersed in a fixing
bath <omp<i.sed of water, metallic sulj>nates, bichromate of potash, and neutral-
ized nltrate<l starch, the solution being rendered slightly alkaline by the addi-
tion of soda potash or ammonia.

^99,6ia—June 1),189S. V. G. BLOEDE. Process of dyeing and printing.

The goods arc first Immersed in a solution composed of a dye and mordant
suiUible to fix it and a free acid which will hold them both in solution, and the
saturated g(M)ds are then subjected to the action of a bath of alkaline vapor
that will neutralize the acid and allow the mordant and <lyestutT to combine.

i»9,6Sl^—Junc 13, 1S9S. \V. T. WHITEHEAD. Aniline-black retist.

The pattern Is printe<I upon the cloth in a resist containing a zinc compound
as its essential or active element, with or without a color; It is then suitably
dried, and thereafter the cloth is treated with a solution of analinc black by
blotching. sloj>-padding. or dyeing.

iait,«91-^une IS, 189S. W. T. WHITEHEAD. Anaine-blttek discharge.

The cloth Is first tr«ite<l with a solution of aniline black, dried sufficiently to
keep the color from running, and the pattern is then printed in a discbarge
containing zinc as Its essential or active element ( with or without a color), Iwforc
oxi<latlon of the aniline-black color, thereby pro<lueing the |>at(vm on an
anlllne-black ground.

U9,i9»—Junc li, 1SS3. W. T. WHITEHEAD. Anaine-btark rrfitt.

The pattern Is first printed upon the cloth In a resist containing zinc aa Ita
essentialoractlve element (with or without a color), and thereafter the cloth

is trcatctl with » mlutlon of aniline black by blotchlnv, alnp-paddlnc, or dyrlnf
producing tho pattern on an anillnn-black gnnind.

I00,ill»—July k, l/aS. J. BKACKWKI.L. Printing anUlne^ilaeJt.

Tho fabric or fiber Is flmt padded or mveretl with an anllln»-bUck mtxtnre;
it la then printed with a lolormlxtureconslsiingof an anillnn-black dtacharge,
a coal-tjir color, and an alumina hydrate as mordant for the color, and then
Rteanusl or ageil Ui such a degree ttint the analinc black and thi* color nattcm
arc simultaneously devclo|H-d and (Ixi^l. The said color mixture la claimed,
the Insoluble salts f>f which have an affinity for tK»th color and cotton fiber,
whereby heat and moisture will cauw the mixture to dlscharfe the aniline
bla<'k on the fiber and de|Mislt the liMjIuble double salt of thoaluinlosuHlooior.

HOI, 160— July 1 1, lues. W. PKITZI .VU ER. Proceu qf dyeing blaek.

Cotton Is flrat dyed br a coloring matter, such as Is obtained br the comMn*-
tion of one molecule of tetnu4> diph«>nyl. or analogous com pounds thereof, with
two molecules of aroldo napbthol nuuiosulpho a4-ld G; second, tbe djreatuff on
the fiber which contains one or two fre<^ amido groopa U dlawHiMd; and UUld,
the Ffsulttng dtazo compound Is combined with phenol.

WW.fXW!— OrWwr 17, 1/m. C. BA8WITZ. .tWAwf of removhtg toffper fmrn texOe

parchments {fabrics).

Copper Is removefl from textile fabrics and the same rendered nnlnflammAble
by di|iplng them In a solution of vegetable tiarchment In ammoniacal oxide of
eoppi'r. then evaporating the ammonia, and finally treating with a mixtare of
sulphate of ammonia and acetate of alumina to remove the copper.

.1t»,i!l>)—Korrmhtrsn,lH9l,. F. V. KALLAB. Ityeing aniline-black.

Aniline black Is produced on wool, hair, and other animal substances or
mixed textile (altricH by first oxidizing the gocxls, second padding or printing
with a mixture suitable for pro<luclng steam-aniline black on cotton, ana
finally developing the black by steaming.

■'i29.l.»9—.\orrmlier!0,imt,. F. V. KALLAB. i'rrHluring figures on aniline-black.

White or colored figures are pro<lueed on aniline black on fabrics of wool,
hair, or other itnimal substances or mixe<l fabrics eontAlning such sii)Mr.ini>>-s hv
subjecting the gfxxls to such feeble oxidatirm Ihtit the whibr of tl ;t

little affected, then {laddlng or printing with mixtures suitJible ; :if

steam-aniline black on cotum and for producing discharging wli.: — ra.

and finally steaming to develop the blaek and fix tbe discharge colura.

6!a,(»2—July I, ises. E. LAUBER AND L. CABERTI. Process qf dyeing.

Fabrics are first treated With beta napbthol and antlmoniooaoxlde In alkaline
solution, and sulM«iiuently treated witn diazo compounds.

SiS,iao—Augttst n, lll»5. F. BAM FORD. Procets of dyeing pile fabrics.

The pile fabric is embossed to lay flat iiortions of the pile; then a mordant,
resist, or dye is applied to the erect portions of the pile, and. after steaming and
washing, the pile la raised. Two or more colors are proiluced by applying a dye
to the erect portions of the embossed fabric and subsequently, after ralsuig the
pile, dyeing the piece.

M7.S!i— March SI, 1896. G. D. BURTON. Art qf electric dyeing.

See Group X, Elcctto-chcmistry.
BliS,1 IB— April tl, lS$e. H. L. BREVOORT. Art qf fixing dye* infabriet.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
M9, J«5— /Iprif tS, 1899. E. CABIATI. Process qf dyeing with indigo.

A fine network In aniline black Is printed on tbe fabric before or after treat-
ment in the indigo bath, to economize indigo.

.'ieg.SX— October IS, lS9e. F. 8T0RCK. Process qf producing azo eolort onfiiet.

The filler to be dyed or printed is impregnated with a sodiam salt of phenol
and subse<|Ucntly submitted to the action of mixtures of dlazo componnda of
aromatic bases with cupric chloride.

570.11S— October tr, 1896. V. G. BLOEDE. Process of rapor-dyelng.

Fibers or fabrics are subjected to the action of the vapors of volatile coloring
matters or color-producing compounds.

570,117— October n, inm. V. G. BLOEDE. Process of dyeing anOltte-blaek.

The fiber is first saturated with a salt of aniline or its homologues (combined
in the iLsualmanncrwithchloratesormetalliosalts). then dried, and then, with-
out previous aging, it is brought in contact with an oxidizer, applicfl in such
quantity that tno fiber or fabric will not become supercharged with moisture
until the color developed has become insoluble.

S7i,Wl— January B, 18117. C. A P. DCPOULLY'. Process qf erinUing silk.

Silk thread or fabric is subjected to the action of an acid of a density snffl-
dent to contract the silk fibers.

B77, 195— February IS, 1S97. W. J. S. GRAWITZ. Procets of dyeing.

Vegetable fibers, prepared wool, or silk arc dyed or printed by first treating
the fibers with a mixture of a salt of aniline and a soluble cyanate. such as
sulpho-cyanate of barium, <'apable <)f forming the sulpho-cyanate of aniline by
double decomposition, anil then developing the color by oxidizing the chlorate
In presence of a salt of vanadium.

BS0,SS1— April 8. 1897— J. WEIDMANN. Procem of dyeing tOk.

Unmanufactured silk in tiio condition of sonple Is subJo<-ted b> a bath of
bichloride of tin of from 20^ to30°Buumc for an hour, more or less, then washed,
then for an added w eight of 50 to 300 pi^r cent iiassed one to five times through
the tin bath, then subjected to a solution of phoitphatc of soda, again washed,
Iiassed back and forth in a bath of silicate of soda, again subjected to the tin
bath for an hour, and then ilye<l black, after grounding if desired.

MS,86B—JulyiO. 1S97. E. VON PORTHEIM. Process i\f dyeing black.

The dyestufi is formed on the fiber by mordanting the same first with beta-
napthol sixlium and then applying thereto a dlazo combination of an amldo-
ehrysoidin basi' — formisl by diazotizlng a base of an amidochrysoidin— adding
to the diazoiiztsl li<iuor ucetic-stan'h [loste, oxalic acid, and acetate of sodium.

188,103— .iugiist 17. 1.^97. A. WEINBERG. I'rocess i]f ilrrrloping azo cotors.

Dyeings produccil by means of those direct-ilyelug cotton dyestuHs which
contain freepriniar)- amido gniiips are developed by treating the goods In a bath
containing diazo compounds. The prtK'em appears to be an inversion of the
well-known niethiKl of diazotizing amidizcd direct-dyeing coloring matters upon
tbe fiber.
588,387- Auyutt 17,18117. V, G. BLOEDE. Proce—qf dyeing.

The fiber or fabric isflnttreated with acompoaltlon of aniline, its homologues
or analogues, and then subjected to the action of on oxidizer In gawoos form.

240

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

592.0^?— October 19. 1S97. H. X. F. SCHAEFFER. {Reissue: 11,61,7— February 1.

1898. ) Process of dyeing mixed goods.

Mixed goods composed of wool and cotton are first dyed with a black dye
which dyes the woof only and which is unaffected by aniline-black; the cotton
is then dyed bv padding'the goods with an aniline-black liquor, and the black
developed in tlie cotton after it has been padded.

593,192— November 9, 1807. V. G. BLOEDE. Pi'oeess of dyeing.

Colors are developed or modified by diazotization by subjecting the fiber or
fabric treated with such colors or color- producing compounds to the action of
nitrous acid in gaseous form.

595. S91,— December 31, 1397. H. SEYBERTH AND M. VON GALLOIS. Process

of producing diazonaphihalene on fiber.

Process of producing diazonaphihalene for the production of a claret-red
color on the fiber consists in applying to the fiber a pasty aqueous solution of
pulverized alpha-naphthylamin sulphate, and then diazotizing the same.

601. A20~ March 29. 1898. H. ZUBLIN AND A.ZINGG. Process of discharge lyrinting.
In the art of producing white and color discharge of finished dyed parani-
tranilin red and similar azo coloring matters, produced directly upon the fiber,
the coloring matters are reduced by means of an alkaline solution and of glucose
in the presence of a body of the hydroxyl group, as glycerine.

606,776— July 5, 1S9S. S. F. CARTER. Piocess of producing white effects on fabrics.
The fabric is first subjected to the action of a sulphocarbonate of cellulose,
such as viscose, the design is then printed upon the fabric with a suitable pig-
ment, as tungstate of barium, and it is then subjected to heat to decompose the
viscose. The design may be first printed with a mixture of viscose and tung-
state of soda, and the fabric then heated and afterwards passed througli a bath
of barium chloride to form upon the fabric tungstate of barium in the form of
the design.

606,777— July 5, 1898. S. F CARTER. Process of proditcing white effects on fabrics.
The design is printed upon the fabric with tungstate of barium and albumen,
or like binding agent, and then heated to coagulate the albumen, thereby bind-
ing the pigment to the fabric.

612,27/,— October 11. 1898. J. T. REID AND H. THORP. Dyeing textile fibers,

yarns, and fabric;.

Vegetable fibers are dyed " khaki *' shades by passing the material through a
bath of olein-oil, drying, impregnating with a mixed solution of alizarin-blue
S (or like product of anthracene) . chromium and iron salts, then drying, steam-
ing and developing the color by treatment with an alkali.

61li,2S7— November 15, 1898. H. N. F. SCHAEFFER. Process of printing on mixed

goods.

Printed effects are produced on mixed woven goods of animal and vegetable
fibers, by dyeing with a substantive color or colors, rendering the substantive
color fast on the vegetable fiber by a substantially colorless compt^und metallic
mordant (as salts of zinc, magnesia, and alumina), and a fixing agent not suf-
ficiently alkaline to affect the animal fiber, and printing in design on both
fibers a discharge reagent which reacts on both the animal and vegetable sub-
s*anlive color and produces a colored design on both of said fibers.

615,252— December 6. 1898. H. ALT AND E. CULMANN. Process of dyeing with

quinonojcim colors.

Process of producing and at the same time fixing nitrosophenols on textile
fiber consists in impregnating the goods with a mixture consisting of a phenol,
a suitable acid or acid salt, and a mordant adapted for the fixation of nilro-
flophenols, and subsequently passing the fabric through a hot nitrite solution.

617,772— January 17, 1899. F. RETTIG. Process of making colored designs on woven

fabrics.

Embroidery-like woven material having a raised and colored portion is pro-
duced by weaving such fabric with a raised design on its face, protecting the
back by applying a resist thereto, applying a color on the other side, fixing said
color on the raised pattern, and subsequently removing the resist and unfixed
color. A color may be incorporated with the resist.

620,57 S— March?, 1S99. J. W. FRIES. Process of dyeing.

The dyeing compound consists of starch and caustic soda in semifluid condi-
tion, acetic acid, a substance such as acetate of lime capable of precipitating the
basic dyes, and a basic dye, the whole forming a viscous material capable of
producing insoluble precipitates of the dyes upon the fabric and stiffening of
the tetxile material treated on application of heat.

625,697— April 25, 1899. M. BECKE AND A. BEIL. Process of dyeing unions.

The wool and cotton in half-woolen goods is simultaneously subjected in one
acidulated bath to the action of basic polyazo dyestuffs and saffraninazo dye-
stuSs.

625,193— May 16,1899. A. PHILIPS AND M. VON GALLOIS. Process of dyeing

on fiber.

Azo colors, insoluble in water, are produced on the fiber, from violet-black to
black, by grounding the goods with naphthol and combining therewith the
tetrazo compounds of diamidodimethylcarbazol by way of printing or dyeing.

630,507— August 8, 1899. F. I. HORROCKS. Process of dt;eing.

Products made of vegetable fibers are impregnated with a solution of a salt of
copner and iron, and the same is precipitated upon the fibers in the form of
oxiaes by a suitable reagent, as a solution of a suitable salt of an alkali metal.
Figures or patterns are produced by removing the excess of solution to a greater
extent from some portions of the fabric than from othera prior to precipitation.

631,806- August 29, 1S99. J. T. REID AND H. THORP. Process of dyeing khaki.
The fibrous material is impregnated with a mixed solution of alizarin-blue S,
chromium and iron salts, dried, steamed, and the color developed by treatment
with an alkali. (The preparatory steps of No. 612,274 are omitted.)

652,505— September 5, 1899. A. PHILIPS. Process of dyeing.

Brown to brown-black colors are produced on the fiber by treating the naph-
thol-grounded fabric with the tetrazo solutions of the diam'idocarbazols

633,1,38— September 19, 1899. F. ERBAN. Process of dyeing.

To dye with alizarin the fiber is first treated with a soluble modification of
alizarin— a solution of the coloring matter mixed with an alkaline medium-
then the alizarin color is fixed on the fiber by drying, the fiber is treated with
a mordant, and finally steamed.

69A,82l,— October 10, 1899. P. JULIUS AND R. LAIBLIN. Dyeing wool fast black.

The wool is dyed from an acid bath with the secondary diazo dyes from

ortfao-amido-phenol-para-sulpho-acid (those having alphanuphthylamin as mid-

dle component and a naphthol or dioxynaphthalene or sulpho-acids thereof as
end components), and the dyeings treated with a chrome salt.

61,6,379— March 27, 1900. G. TAGLIANI. Process of dyeing fabrics.

To deepen the shade of color upon one side of fabrics of vegetable fiber a
concentrated alkaline solution— as a concentrated caustic solution containing
metallic salts— is applied only to the side that is to take the deeper color, then
the fabric is dyed, and finally subjected to the washing action of an acid,

6U7, 268— April 10, 1900. F. JUST. Process of dyeing.

Colors developed by chromium compounds are produced on wool fiber by
dyeing the fiber with an azo dyestuff, oxidizing with chromic acid, and subject-
iri^r the dyestuff simultaneously to the action of a reducing agent, such as lactic
acid, tartaric acid, etc.

61,9,227 — May S, 1900. E. ULLRICH. Process of dyeing quinonimid dyes.

The tannin-antimony compounds of the quinonimid dyestuffs are produced
from their components on the fiber by printing or padding the fiber with a color
containing H nitroso compound of aromatic bases, a phenol-like body (as beta-
naphthol). an acid, a thickening agent, and tannin, then drying, steaming, and
passing the fiber through an antimony bath, and washing and soaping.

61,9,228— May 8, 1900. E. ULLRICH. Process of fixing quinonimid dyes.

The chromium compounds of the quinonimid dyestuffs are produced on the
fiber from their components by printing or padding the fiber with a color con-
taining a nitroso compound of aromatic bases, a phenol-like body (such as beta-
naphthol). an acid, a thickening agent, and a suitable metallic salt to fix the
dyestuff, then drying, steaming, washing, and soaping.

61,9,1,86— May 15, 1900. R. E. SCHMIDT, Process of dyeing.

Unmordanted wool is dyed with water-soluble amidooxyanthraquinone
sulphonic acids by means of an acid bath, which at the same time contains a
sulphurous-acid compound as a reducing agent.

650,752^May 29, 1900. W. ELBERS. Gray cloth and process of dyeing same.

A gray-indigo coloring matter is produced on the fiber by printing with a
paste of finely divided indigo, a suitable thickening and a quantity of oil on
the fiber, and steaming, then freeing from thickening by washing and treating
with malt, drying, and again steaming.

MORDANTS.

8,035— April 15, 1851. C. A. BROQUETTE. Improvement in material for tranter-

ring colors in calico printing.

Extract of fibrine is used to form a mastic to thicken and retain on fibers archil
color and such other colors as are incorporated with the mastic. The process is
described of preparing and purifying the extract of caseine for use as a mordaht.

15,915— December 11, 1855. R. PRINCE AND A. LOVIS. Improvement in processes

for calico printing.

A compound of silicates of soda or potash with neutral or alkaline salts is used,
in lieu ot dung, in dunging operations with carbonate of soda and neutral salts.

3!„8It0— April 1, 1862. N. LLOYD AND J. G. DALE. Improvement in dyeing and

printing wUh aniline colors.

Tannin and tartarized or other soluble salt of antimony capable of dilution
with water, or a soluble salt of lead, mercury, or chromium, are used to fix colors
derived from aniline or analogous substances on textile fabrics.

SS,686—May 26, 1863. G. H. LEWIS. Improvement in printing and ornamenting

India rubber.

Printing or engraved matter is impressed or transferred upon vulcanizable
India rubber or allied gums, and then fixed by vulcanizing, as by pressure be-
tween heated metal plates.

1,1,066— January 5, 1861*. R. H. GRATIX. Improvement in dyeing and jtrinting

ivUh aniline colors.

A compound of tannin with the aniline color, formed either before or during
the process of printing or dyeing, is used in combination with salts of tin or
other suitable mordant.

1,6,200— January 31, 1865. T. CROSSLY. Improvement in the dyeing, prijifing, aiid

manufacture of waterproof fiockud cloth.

Before dyeing or printing, the cloth is submitted to a steam heat of 105° to
143° C, then to a bath of muriate of tin of 4° to 12° Twaddle, then to a neutral-
izing bath of aqua ammonia and salsoda, then to a solution of sulpliuric acid
and chloride of lime to oxidize the tin deposit, and afterwards to a dilute solu-
tion of sulphuric acid to remove the lime. The cloth then dyes and prints in
uniform shades.

5l,,205— April 2L 1866. E. F. PRENTISS. Improved mordant.

A triple sulphate of iron, 740 parts: copper, 254 parts; and zinc, 110 parts. It is
used for black and any desired shades of mulberry.

60,51,6— December 18, 1866. A. PARAF. Improvement in dyeing and printing textile

fabrics a7id yarns.

Chromic acid is developed in dyeing and printing by the application to the
fabric of an insoluble salt of chromium and the subsequent action of a moist
atmosphere, or by aging or steaming.

63,081, — March 19, 1867. A. PARAF. Improvement in dyeing and printing textile

fabrics, and in compounds Uicrefor.

The arsenite of glycerine, for fixing aniline colors; also the combination of
the same with coal-tar colorsand acetate of alumina, magnesia, or other metal-
lic oxide.

69,121— September 2k, 1867. A. PARAF. Improved, mode of producing black in

dyeing and prijiting.

Asphaltum is used and the black coloring matter precipitated in the article
to be dyed or printed by means of albtimen.

9U,581 — September 7, 1869. F. S. DUMONT. Improved compound to be used as a

mordant in dyeing and printing.

A mordant made from the serum of blood, produced by adding arsenic acid,
borax, sulphate of zinc, and essence of terebinthine.

99,105— January 25, 1870. A. PARAF. Improved method of fixing pigments to

fibrous and textile materials.

The coloring matters are fixed by means of albuminous material, as lactarine,
and a salt of lime, such as the saccharateof lime or the suchrate of lime.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

241

tOe..',}!>—Auuu»l 16, lino. K. URAUPNEK. Improtrmnil IncomftooUtim lobe hmciI
ill (lyrtHy.

A i"olorliiKin|iU!<IIIim. »( llio naliiri'of a munlHiit. inn.HlnIlnKdf n wiliulon n(
•ulplmic of JKXlii, ••iilpliurlc iiclil, «ml oxnllc aclil In wiilfr, (i> which l»iirl<lc<l n
mlxtiiriMil uiiirlutlu add iiiiU nitrlu ucld Milunilcd wlih tin iiikI thi'ii (llliiicd
wllh water.

1I.\.S.>1—Jhhc lA, lint. E. A. t). OITICHARD. liupmrmumt In pmmH-ii i,/ prinl-

iiill /abrief.

Till" colors arc mixed with a compound of oil varnlnh, dsrenc© of tiirpi-ntlne.
while or yellow wax, and realn and printed direct, without previous preparation
of iho fabric.

liS.ltUt—Drlotirr 7. IS7S. 0. A. HAOEMANN. tmprmminU inmor<lnnl»/or tlj/rinii.
t'uUlnrd luid pulveriied acetate of soda and sulphate of nluuihm are mixed
hi due proi>()rtlon.H reiuly to be dlsnolved for the prixluetlou of the mordant
acetate of alumina.

liiMi—yomiiber !S. IS7i. R. O. BURGESS AND 8. LA RHETT. rmjiroremmt
in m<mlauln/ur ilijeiny.
A com|H)nnd of sodium chloride and binoxalale of potash.

IMMOH—Julii 14. 1,S74. A. GENDER AND W. THILJI ANY. ImprvKimiil in treat-

i»tj t'Xfilt /(ibriCH lit prcrtnt mildew and ditvtf.

Textile fabrics are treated with sulphate of copper an<l chloride of barium, the
Balt.1 forming a union with the fabric.

J7(,!«S7— -tfai/ SO. lS7e. F. J. BIRD. Improremenl in monlanlt.

A composition of gallnuLs tannin, alum, tin, and soda, ax a mordant for
woolen and cotton or other union goods.

ISB.etO—Jaituarii iS, 1SJ7. J. RAU. Impruvemenl in prvtcsfrn/or dyeing silkf.

Silks and half silks are dyed, without water or steam, by first soaking in a
baih of benzine with aniline dissolved therein, and afterwards In a bath of pure
beiirine.

19i,m—Junt :e. IS77. H. D. DUPEE. Improvement injrrintedtexUleJabric».

A textile fabric has coloring matters fixed thereon by means of gelatine com-
bined with chromic acid.

t»S,S!6—0elnber t, 1S77. J. KOKESCH. Improcaneid in IrcalmaU of mil skint.

The skins are first sheared to the proper length of hair, then subjected to a
proois'iof fulling, then mordanted, and finally immersed a number of times in
a dve. brn.sliing after each immersion. The mordant consists of quicklime,
beech ashes, sumac, and water: and the dye of gallnuts, green copperas, cop-
per scales, litharge, sal ammoniac, verdigris, catechu, rotten stone, cinnabar,
'and water.

SOL 190— .Mail A'*, 1.178. S. CA BOT. Jr. Impnmmenl in compogiliimn lu be used as

montants and dye stiifftf.

It consists of gallic acid, s<h11c or potas.sic hyposulphite, liydposodlcor hydro-
potassic sulphate, and nutgalls, ground and mixed.

Sil.S9S—.\tay 10. ISSl. S. MELLOR. ilimlmd.

It consists essentially of stibio-fluorine salts, or any combination of fluorine
and antimony by themselves, or in conjunction with any other metal or
metalloid.

ii3.ll,l—Juneil, 18S1. J. J. LEI.OIR. Dyeing miied fabrics.

A mordant for mixed fabrics composed of water, murlotlc acid, and sulphuric
or nitric acid, with zinc or tin, together with bichromate of potash and a sul-
phate of iron, or of copper.

US,S!S—Junc IS, ISSl. A. M. JACOBS. Turkey-red mordant

Process of preparing a mordant con.si»Ls in uniting 220 parts of oil or fat and
80 parts of sulphuric acid, the mixture being stirred for three hours until 37° to
56° f. is reached and then .settled for twelve hours, then a watery solution of
crystallized so«la isadded and settled for twenty-four hours, when the neutral-
ize<l oil is drawn ofl and 26 parts of aqua ammonia is added.

SUi,6S3—Auguit U, 1881. A.M.JACOBS. Procem of maniifaclur::<j uUaginous

mordants.

To produce an oxyoleic alkali mordant, for turkey-red dyeing, vcgetuble and
animal oils, fats or oleic acid are treated with sulphuric acid, then double the
quantity of cold water added, whereby sulpholeic acid is formed which Is
settle<l. 'separated, and boiled with three to six times the quantity of distilled
water until the fatly acids and the sulphuric acid have separated and the
former Boats on the' watery fluid; it is then poured olT and the fatty acid Is
repeatedly boile<l with fresh water, separated from the solid parts and mixed
with cold water, and alkali added to neutralize or make slightly alkaline.

tiS.701— August 16, ISSl. J. BURTON. Thickener for mordants and colors.

Glucose is added to either the mordant or color, or both.
tSi,71S—.Varch7. 1883. T.SIMPSON. Chroming fabrics.

The fabric Is pa.ssefl through a chroming solution, then heated without drying,
and then passed, before drying, through a water bath.

tU.-tiS— .March SH, ISSl. T. SIMPSON. Process of and apparidiui for aging fabrics.
The suspended fabrics, properly prepared, are subjected to the action of cur-
rents of moist air directed downward.

teS.OiO— August IS, ISSl. T. U. GIBSON. ifordaiiL

A combination of acetate of lead and stannate of soda each one part and
alum two parts.

t6.1.3m— August it), 1S8S. C. TOPPAN. Process qf finishing colored or printed
texitle fabrics.
The goods are passed into or through a solution of warm water and slne-

Et^iroline No. 2 (No. 186,640), with or without starch, and then calendered upon
ot rolls.

t70.S6,'i— .January IS, 1S3S. F. B. WILKINS. Finishing miren cotton fabrics.

Ginghams and other cotton fabrics are wrappwl in heavy wo<»len blankets
and subjected >> the action of steam under pressure, to render them pliable and
improve the texture

tsr.lll— October li, 1883. A. N. DUBOI.S. .VordaiUfor aniline-black.

' A compound of water, hydrochloric add. sulphate of soda, and bichnimate

of potash.

No. 210 16

tfCtgi—Pteember IB, ttttt. C. N. WAITE. Mordant.

A mixture of lactic sold, 4 inuIs, with oxalic acid, I |«rt. It Is •tiprlaliy
Intended for aniiual libers.

SOD.nm—Drreniber !), Is.ti. O. WITZ. I'roerss qfpaUrm iti/eing.

To produce flgnres of the same color as the ground, but of a different shadr,
the fabric, of vegetable filHT, in dlp|ieil in a arilullon of |Kitaj«iiiim bichromate,
and dried, then printe<l wllii a Miiution of starch at about W C, In which la
diSNilved oxalic acid (whiTcby the celluloae is ronvertcd into oxfcellnloM)
and drle<l, and then wash'-d and dycil.

Hm.KtO—Jnur'tS, IHHIi. R. HILBERHEKG. Prortn of dyeing.

Cotton fabric Is first linmenw^l In lH>ilinK water, then In a solution of oxalate
of chromium and a solution r>f caustic soda, and then washed and dyed with an
aniline dye in the usual manner.

.ttO,8tl—Junet3,18SS. R. HILBERBERG. Mordant.

A mordant for aniline dyes consisting of a mixture of a aolatioo of oxalalo of
chromium and a solution of caustic soda.

MO.'MH—June SO. 1886. O. PRINZ. Morilnrd.

Process of pro<luclng soluble antimony compounds consists In dccom|KXilng
sugar or equivalent carbfin liydrates by alkaline iKxlles, with or without the
assistance of oxidizing agents such as a current of air and metallic fix Ides, either
or both, acidulating the solution, and then treating the same with un antimony
compound.

StS,i6i,— October tO, 188S. M. CONRAD. Mordant.

A compound of laevulinic ac^id ( beta-acetyl-proplonic acidi. oil emulsion, a
thickening— such as starch and acetic acid— and a solution of tannic acid.

SS9,778— April IS, 1886. C. IIUGGENBERG. Process of treating silk fiber.

Silk threads are subjected to the action of a solution of asuitable Un salt, and
then to a solution of tungstate of sfida.

Slil.iSi—.Vay i, I8S6. C. N. WAITE. Mordant.

An antimonlous oxide di.ssolvol in lactic acid, wholly or partially neutralized
by an alkali, for use on cotton fabrics.

S'J.SIS— August 17,1886. V.G.BIX)EDE. Processofimprorinff the JlniMh ami dura-
bility of fabrics for window shades, etc.
Fabrics sized with starch, or a mixture of starch, c'lay. and pigment*, are

impregnated, after sizing and coloring, with a solution of waxy or reslnoiui

matter in a volatile hydrocarbon.

Slt,iS6—Xore«^r 9, issa. B. FINKELSTEIN. Process it/ nuinlanting.

Vegetable fibers and fabrics Impregnated or printed with tannin are mor-
danted with antimony by treating same with antimony oxalate suspended in
water.

' S7 1, i98— October 11, 1887. L. GRAISSOT. Dressing sUk.

The effect of shrinkage is produced on fabrics containing silk by subjecting
them to the action of a bath of chloride of zinc and drying in a tepid chamber.
They mav be then subjected to the action ot a solution of carbonate of potash
and niially boiled with soap.

S9t,K9—yoveinber 13, 18.88. C. T. BAZIN. .Vordant for dyeing.

For indigo dyeing a preliminary bath is use<t consisting of earbonaceoiu
material, as 25 pounds of lampblack or charcoal suspended in a saccharine
sirup, as 2 gallons of molasses.

S98,S6l,— February 16, 1889. W. J. WILLIAMS. Mordant.

Fibers and fabrics are subjected to the action of trisodium phosphate to fix
colors and prevent rust and crocking.

JM..1I9— August S7, 18S9. J. BRACEWELL. Aniline-black discharge.

The cloth is treated with the solution of the aniline-black color, dried to a
moist state by steam or atmospheric heat above 32° C, the drying completed at
a temperature tielow 32° C, and an alkaline discharge printed in patterns be-
fore the oxidation of the aniline color.

1,18.US— December 31, 1889. F. BAYER. Process of fixing azo dyes.

Goods of animal or vegetable fiber, dyed or printed in the usual way with the
sul).stantive cotton coloring matters, are fixed by boiling with a solution of a
metallic salt.

lai.sa— February IS, 1890. C. WACHENDOBFF. Jfordaiif.

Chromium fluoride is used as a fixing agent In dyeing and printing fabrics and
fibers.

i37,296— September SO, 1890. E. O. FANKIIAUSER. Mordant.

A mixture of castor oil, sulphuric acid. S4xla lye. ammonia, white soap, and
extract of sumac, as a mordant for cotton or mixed yams or fabrics.

109,687— June IS, 1893. W. T. WHITEHEAD. Retirl-monlant.

The pattern or figure is printe<l in a resist-mordant containing a zinc com-
pound as the essential or active element, with or without a color, and thereafter
the cloth is dyed a plain color, thereby pro<luclug a pattern contrasting »;ith
the ground.
Sll,i6!,— January 9, 189i. 0. P. AMEND. Process of inonianting fabrics.

The fiber is first treated with a cold solution of free chromic aclil in the pres-
ence of another nonoxidizlug acid (such as acetic or hydn>chloric acid), and
the prepared fiber is then treated with a solution containing one or more reduc-
ing agents, such as sodium sulplilte, when the fiber is ready for the color.

S30,!01— December i. 1891,. R. H. PICKLES. Mordant.

A mordant consisting of a solution of a salt of aluminum derived from sugar
hydrated lime and a sulphate of alumina, the sugar and the metal being com-
bined in almost equal proportions, and having the formula t-*i;H-.On.\l-j(OH)«.
Process of preparing a metallic sucrate (iif aluminum, irtin. or chrtimiura » con-
sists in adding a sulphate of the metal to a solution of sucrate of an alkaline
earth metal, thereby precipitating a sulphate of the alkaline earth metal, and
separating the solution of the metallic sucrate.

5i9,tS7—Xoi-emb(r.'i, isas. C. RIS-KUMMER. Process of treating raunWt.

Raw silk having an in.soluble sericin ctwting; pnMluced by treating the raw
silk with an aldehyde of the fatty series, such as formaldehyde, citherln gaseous
form or in solution.

SS8.3il,—.'kpleviber t9. 1896. A. GANSWINDT. MordaiMng leztUefaltriet.

Cotton or other vegetable textile Hben are mordanted with lactate of sino
and subsequently dyed.

242

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

B8S.t9&-MaytS,lS97. V. G. BLOEDE. Process qf dyeing.

The yarn or fabric is treated with a starch containing a salt or salts, the
base of wliich possesses the power of rendering the starch insoluble when the
acid of combination is withdrawn (salts of lime, barium, iron, lead, etc.), then
treating with an alkali or otherwise to extract part or all of the acid of com-
bination and make the starch insoluble.

5SS.725— June 1. 1897. A. BIERMANN. Process of weighting sUks.

The material is first treated in a stannic-chloride bath of 25° to 30° Baum^, the
superfluous chloride of tin being removed: then with a soluble phosphate such
as sodium phosphate dissolved in a warm bath and again washed: then treated
in a warm bath of aluminum sulphate: then pa.ssed through a warm bath con-
taining a solution (3° to 5° Baum^) of a silicate, such us sodium silicate, and
finally washed and dried.

SS6,750—JiUy to. 7597. J. WEISS. Printing and mercerising cotton.

Crt^pe-like patterns or effects are produced on vegetable fibers or fabrics by
impregnating the .same with a caustic-alkali solution and then printing with a
neutralizing substance, such as acetic acid, with or without dyestufis, before the
caustic alkali has commenced to act.

59e,!S>,— December ts, 1S97. C. TUBBE. Process of mercerizing.

Vegetable tissues are padded with a mixture of alkaline lyes »nd collodial
agents (such as British gum, sodium aluminate. etc.), then subjected to pres-
sure, then rolled up to exclude tlie air, and lastly washed.

697,107— January 11, 1898. C. DREHLER. Process of mordanting.

A mordant of antimony oxide combined with acid lactate of calcium, produced
by forming a bath of antimony oxide and acid calcium lactate, with which fibers
treated with tannin substances are mordanted.

697,1,01— January 18, 1898. C. DREH ER. Process of mordanting wool.

Wool and other animal fibers are treated in a lye comprising lactic acid,
bichromate of potash, and sulphuric acid, in about the proportions of 2.6.5 kilos
lactic acid, 1.35 kilos bichromate of potash, and 0.9 kilo sulphuric acid, yielding
a complete reduction of the potassium bichromate.

600.SS8—.\farcli 16, 1898. R. THOMAS AND E. PREVOST. Process of mercerizing

under tettsioii.

Vegetable fiber is stretched, then subjected to the action of a mercerizing
fluid until it assumes a parchment-like appearance, next subjected to a greater
tension while under the action of the mercerizing fluid until a peculiar silky
luster appears, and maintained under tension while washing or otherwise
removing the mercerizing fluid.

600,8t7— March 15, 1898. R. THOMAS AND E. I'REVOST. Process of mercerizing

under tension.

The fiber is subjected to the action of a mercerizing fluid without ten.sion,
and then during the mercerizing action, after the fiber is wetted and before the
removal or neutralization of the fluid, the material is subjected to a stretching
action sufficient to produce a silky luster and prevent shrinkage. Vegetable
fibers mixed with animal libers are mercerized at a low temperature, about zero
centigrade, in like manner, the fluid being of such a degree of dilution as to be
without mercerizing effect on vegetable fiber at ordinary temperature and with-
out deleterious action upon the animal fiber.

601,675— April S, 1898. F. .T. OAKES. Process of mordanting.

Fiber or fabric is first subjected to a solution of tannic acid and afterwards to
a bichromate or chromic-acid bath, thus fitting it for dyeing with any desired
color.

608,251— August S, 1898. H. SEfDEL. Mordant from suljite-ccllulose lyes.

It consists of a solution of a salt of a metal of the alkalis or alkaline earths,
with or without a mineral acid, and a sulpho-derivative of lignin- or sulphite-
cellulose lye which contains said derivative can be added, either decolored and
freed from calcium compounds or otherwise.

609.151— August 16, 1898. G. WENDLER. Mordant.

A composition of commercial sulphuric acid, 60 parts: calcined alkaline sul-
phate, such as sodium sulphate, 100 parts: and boracic acid, 15 parts.

616,01,5— A'ovember 29, 1898. E. PREVOST. Process of mercerizing.

Vegetable fibers and fabrics are mercerized, and during the process simul-
taneously subjected to tension and compression.

621,1,77— March 21, 1899. J.SCHNEIDER. Process of mercerizing.

The material is first treated with benzine to dissolve the oily matters, then
with a strong (30 per cent) alkaline solution, then stretched, and washed while
stretched.

629,780— August 1, 1899. P. DOSNE. Process of mercerizing.

Moirfi effects are produced on striped fabrics of vegetable fiber bv printing
the fabric with a resist in stripes, distorting or pulling the fabric alteniately
from right to left and left to right during the resist printing, and then mercer-
izing the fabric.

61,3,925— February 20, 1900. E. UNGNAD. Process of treating fibers, etc., to imitate

silk.

Vegetable fibers and fabrics after they have been soaked in an alkaline solu-
tion of silk are subjected to the action of carbonic acid, which combines with
the alkali of the silk solution, forming an alkaline carbonate, and deposits the
silk on the fiber.

61,6,760— Aprils, 1900. A. F. POIRRIER. Process of mordanting.

Colors obtained from substantive .sulphur coloring matters are fixed bv sub-
jecting the dyed material to the action of a bath of chloride of copper, with or
without bichromate of potash.

GROUP XII.— TANNING.

NATURAL.

836— July 12, 1858. A. A. HAYES. Improvemenl in the }>rocess for extracting tan-
nin from bark.

Bark in water is treated with a solution of alkaline salts of either ammonia
potash, soda, or lithia, with strong agitation, the quantitv being suflicient to
neutralize tour-fifths of the acid naturally contained in the' bark.

i,007— April 22, 181,6. G. C. CLOSE AND E. FIELD. Improvement in separating

tannin and coloring matter in quercitron bark.

A decoction of quercitron bark is partially evaporated, the coloring matter
settled, and the astringent liquor drawn off and used for tanning or evaporated
to an extract.

12,139— January 2, 1856. O. RICH. Improvemaitinprocessesforextracting tannin

from leather.

Leather, washed and chopped into small pieces, is digested in a caustic alkali
of ammonia, potash, or soda to extract the tannin, then subjected to pressure
and the liquor acidulated with sulphuric, muriatic, or acetic acid, and used ior
tanning. The scraps are washed, digested in dilute acid to remove coloring
matter, the acid neutralized, and are then converted into glue and manure.

Sl„S!5—April8, 1862. J. BRAINERD AND W. H. BUREIDGE. (Reissue: 2,623—
March. 19, 1867.) Improved process of extracting the strength of bark for tanning
and other purposes.

The material is introduced, in successive charges, into the bottom of a leach-
ing column and the exhausted material is discharged at the top, the water or
liquid being introduced at the top and filtering downward: applicable also to
filter material.

1,1,782— March 1, 186/,. S. W. PINGREE. (Reissue: 1,922— March 28, 1865.) 7m-

proi'emeni in extracting tan bark.

The bark is first swelled with water or weak tan liquor and heated with
steam, and afterwards steeped with cold wateror weak tan liquor.

6U,321— April SO, 1867. B. IRVING. Improved process of concentrating the extract

of bark for tanning and other purposes.

The bark .solution is concentrated by continuous distillation in vacuo, using a
flat worm or evaporating tables.

6t,,S23— April 50, 1867. B. IRVING. Improved process for obtaining the extract of

bark for tanning and other purposes.

The bark fiber is disintegrated by means of heated pressure rollers and water
baths, acting alternately, in a continuous operation, m lieu of grinding.

68,SS5-September 5, 1867. A. APPLEBY. Improved mode of preparing tan hark

for use.

Bark is prepared for transportation by first steaming it to make it pliable, and
then flattening it and removing the ross by nuining it through a planing
machine.

75,608— March 17, 1868. G. WARREN. Improvement in extracting tannin from

bark.

The bark is subjected to the successive steps of steaming, soaking, and press-
ing between rolls, the series of steps being repeated several times, and tile
pressings kept separate from each other.

81,687— September 1, 1868. G. BOSSliRE. Improvement in decolurizimi tannin-
liquid.
Tannin juices are decolorized by the addition of a glue made from refuse

clippings or scraps, or by all-gelatine glues dissolved in from fifteen to twenty

parts of water. Acetate of lead dissolved in acidulated water and also kaolin

aecolorize colored tannin.

82,121— Stptanbcr 15, 1868. T. W. JOHNSON. Improvement in extracting tan bark.
The bark is softened in chips, passed through rollers into a saturating tank
where it is exposed to the action of beaters, then elevated and passed through
a series of leaches and repeatedly washed.

96,51,6— November 2, 1869. J. PICKLES. Improved solid or dry extract of bark fur
tanning, etc.

Dry or powdered tannin extract, the product resulting from concentrating
the liquid extract and reducing it to a dry state.

96,se.5—Kovember 2, 1889. B. C. TILGHMAN. Improvement in making tanning

and dyeing extracts.

The vegetable material, bark, roots, wood, etc., is digested with a solution of
sulphurous acid, in water, with or without the addition of sulphites, as of lime,
and cither in closed vessels with high temperatures and pressure or in open
vessels with temperature not exceeding 100° C.

117,1,65— July 25, 1871. N. C. PLATT. Improvement in processes of separating tan-
I ninfrom solutions.

Tannic acid is obtained by treating a bark infusion or .solution with a solution
of common salt or other saline crystalline substance.

171,,110—Febnuiry 29, 1876. E. BRADLEY. Improvement in Ueachino extract of
hemlock ttark.

Hemlock-bark liquor is bleached by bringing same in intimate contact with
sulphurous acid, as by forcing it up through the liquor.

178,919 — Tune 20, 1S76. J. FOLEY'. Improvement in processes for treating tannin
juices.

Tannin juices, aqueous solutions of tannin, and concentrated tannin extracts
are bleached and prevented from souring by incorporating therewith sulphites
bisulphites, and double sulphites of sodium, calcium, potassium, aluminum and
ammonium, in the form of solid salts or as solutions.

182.965— October 5, 1876. J. SHERMAN, jR. Improvemetit in preparing tan bark
for transportation.

The bark is dried, ground, and compressed sufficiently to crush the ceils, and
also to form it into bricks.

181,,eSS— November 21, 1876. R. LOERCHER. Improvanent in preparino tan bark
for transportation.

A block of compressed ground tan bark coated with a solution of tan bark.
WS.M — Tuly 21,, 1877. J. FOLEY. Improvement in tanning solutions.

Ground bark is leached with water having bisulphite of lime in soluticm.
198,1,78— December 26, 1877. I.WELLS. Improvement inextracts for tanninglealher.

May-weed (Athcmis eotula) is cut up, ground, and pressed: then steamed and
again pressed: the ma.ss is then subjected to air suction, treated witli diluted
sulphuric acid, and the ma.ss removed from the liquid, which latter is subjected
to air exposure to remove trace of acid, and the three liquid products are then
mingled.

250,598- July 27, 1880. E. BRADLEY. Purifying extracts of bark.
1 The leached extract is condensed by evaporation to about 10° Baumfi rapidly
cooled, and then flowed through a series of tanks overflowing into one another,
wherein the matter .set free by the action of cooling is precipitated.

251.1,89— August 2i. 1880. J. HOLTZ. Obtaining tannic acid.
See Group 1, Acids. Tannic.

DIGEST OF PATENI^S RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

243

tSS.iSS—Prermber ts, JS.10. II. U WILCOX. Thmitng rxtrnrt.

AKolld tilix-kof ilu- "(annlii plant"— the Mi/fumum amphlhliim — ronrintlnnrof
A mixtiirt' — .say nf ')0 imiuiuIn — at (lit' frvHhly Krottiul pliint and a concciitriitt^l
extract fn>ui 2,fM) ixiuniNdf (hv xame plant.

Ug,S7S— .Villi SO. JSSf. P. OONDOLC). I'nicrft 11/ mannfiuiuring Innnin rjiradt.
The voK«labU' matter U nm<-oniti'4l In a Hlightly arldiilatpd Ixith, n (-(WKnlant
or atHtorbent, such ii.>« MikkI. W ndrU-d. thru an n'ikall or an alkaline salt and a
further qviandtv of eoaKnlaiit or al>w>rl>enl, kikI (inully theeimKiilant or absorb-
ent with the culorliig matter and alkaline salta la precipitated by means of sul-
phuric acid.

«A9,«74— JAi(/ 50. fSM. P. GONDOLO. Proceu qf and apyiaratu* for the manxifac-

turf i^tniiHiH extraeis.

The tannin material Is flrat macerated in a bath containing u salt of sulphnr-
otisaeld; sulphuric aold ia then added to the resulting wilntUm. and it iselarlUed
with blood or other ccagnlant

tss.xm—Aunuft ts, lias. P.aottVOlO. Pneemqfctarifuing tannin eitratm.

BUmkI. or ftltmraen. is addc<l to the tannin extract at a temperatnre Ih'Iow that
at wiiicli It eooKnlfttes; the coaKulant i.s <ll(Tused tltroiiKl) tbce,\lrnct at such
temiK-'mture, and then Iho temiH'ratureof the mixture is rtti.se<l and the coloring
matter and ults are caught by and precipitated with the coagulant.

fiUSS—Septmbtr II, 1.1S3. B. HOLBKOOK. Prrimring Ian bark.

The dry bark is crushed and then passed between rolls under heavy pressure,
reducing it to thin flakes.

SOI,10/>—July IS, ISSi. E. L. r. & G. C. COEz. ProecM <tf making tanning cx-

tractt.

Tannin extracts are decolorized by first adding oxalic acid, 1 gram to every
hundred liters of juice, then introducing alumina in the jiroporlion of about 'iM)
grams per hundreil liters of juice and per <iegrce of intensity, witii violent
agitation and flltration. To produce tannic acid the proportion of alumina is
quadrupled.

Sia,l'!'—-VarehS,lSS5. T.F.COLIN. Manitfaelure qf tanning extract.

Bark liquor is evaporated by passing carlnmic-acid and sulphurou.s-acid gases
and steam Ihro'igh theliciuorin a vacuum imn, then sliutliiiK off the steam, and
luriiing It on only at intervals when the liquor l)ec<imes too thick to permit the
gases 10 pass freely through it.

*5J,«W— Ortofcfr ge, :sm. E. TAVERNIER. Procea of extraeting tannin from

uwhL

The heavier and lighter portiona of a tannin extract arc separated by centrlf-
ngal action.

S!'7,li9—tV)ruary 1. 1SS7. A. MORAND. Mamtfaeture qf tannin extract from

iroorf.

The wood is cut into thin slices across the grain, broken into granules by a
pneumatic bla.st in a conduit, and leached by percolation. Weaker solutions at
successive higher temperatures are used as the woo<i becomes spent.

SeS.OST—June ti, 1SS7. A. MOHAND. Procem of and apparatm for clarifying

extractt.

Crude tannin extracts have mingled therewith a purifying agent or color
absorbent, as ca-selne, and heated, and then pumped, with the substance in
suspension, through a dense filtering fabric.

S7e.SiB— January 10, 188S. U. M. RAU. Manufacture of tannin extractt.

Tannin liquors are clarified and decolorized by treating with hydrosulphurous
acid— which may be produced by the addition of zinc dust and a concentrated
solution of bisulphite of soda with agitation in a closed vessel — and filtering.

U)U,IM—Jun€ i, 1SS9. L. SAARBACH. Procem of purifying tannic extraetg.

The extract, heated to about 60° C, is mixed with acetate of leaa without
the addition of any acid— 12.'> grams per 100 liters of juice and per degree of
density— the precipitate separated, and the solution then treated with acids,

fireferably oxalic acid, 10 grams per 100 liters per degree BaumC-, therctiy obtain-
ng a further precipitate.

iO»,l!76—AuffuMl7, 18S9. E.F.SMITH. Process qf leaching tan bark.

Ground Ijark Is delivered lnl« a tank of fluid and intermixed, the intermixed
bark and fluid conveyed into and through a steam box, and thence to the top
of the leach.

i6l,69t,—Sovember 10, 1891. A. FOELSIXG. Proeett qf purifying tannin solutiont

by etectrotyfis.

See Group X, ElectnMshemistry.
180,376— August 9. ISat. W. C. TIFFANY. Process qf mating tannin extracts.

Canalgre root, Rumex hymenosepalum torr, is comminuted or macerated, sub-
jected to a bath of water at 60° C. or less, and the extract evaporated.

iSS.lil— September t7, lS9t. G. DELVAL'X. Process qf purifying tannic extracU.
Tannic extracts are decolored and clarified by the addition of a compound of
strontium, as 6 kilograms of crystalline hydrate of strontium to 1,000 liters of
tanning liquor marking above 2.5° Baum£.

iSS. 76.1— April IS. lS9i. P. T. A USTEX. Process of making solid extract qf sumac,

henilwk, and other tanning agetits

A brittle solid extract of sumac, produced by adding an alkaline nitrite to a
liquid extract of sumacs, heated to atwut S0° C— say 6 |>cr cent of sodium
nitrite — allowing the reaction to take place, and evaporating to dryness.

SlO.lSt— December S, ISBS. O. C. HAGEMANN. Process of separating tannin

from other Indies.

Tannin is separated from other bodies by the use 01 amyl alcohol as a solvent,
the tannin tieing subseiiiiently separated from the solvent by the addition of
benzine or an equivalent body.

517 ,SS6— April S. Ifl9l.. B. REINUS. Procejis qf purifying tannic acid.

A solution of tannic acid Is trt-ated with acetate of lead to precipitate the
Impurities, the precipitate separated by flltration. the filtered solution again
treated with acetate of lead in excess to precipitate tannatc of lead, and then
the lannate of lead is subjected to the action of oxalic acid which forms an
insoluble compound with lead, and the pure and concentrated tannic acid is
filtered off.

Ml, 7St— January 1, 1896. H. SCHWEITZER. Process qf extracting tannin.

Raw material containing tannin is treated with acetate of amyl, and the
tannin then precipitated from the solvent by the action of benzine or other
organic solvent.

l7l,tSS— November 17, 1896. J. H. ADRIAMCB. Procus iff dteolorlstng tannin

extract.

A s<ilution of basic aeetatc of lead— «<wlale of lead, lilharge. and water— tii
added to liiiuid extracts to precipitate the coloring matter and the clear liquid
is ilrawn on after settling, ami evaporated.

i7S.SSI,— March 0, 1X97. M. IlO.S'Kl. Making Innnln rxtrarU.

Tannin is extracted frorii sulphite cellulose lyes by nctitmliz!n:-
clarlfying. concentrating to from bv to U>'-' Haiiiii^', c^iiivertliiK ib<
insoluble compound by means of sulphuric ocid, eliminating lrt>m ::... ..,_ :..•.
free volatile acids by heat, filtering, and concentrating the itltrat* iu frum of
to 30° Baumi;>.

601,170— March tt, IHUH. H. M. RAti. Primts qf extmrllug tannic luriil.

Tannic acid, with other iiigredienls, Is extracted from sumatr leaves hy acetone
at low temperatures, tliat Is, below the Ixilllng point of acetone; then the
acetone solution ia evaiioratol, the extract secured In a dry mass, and the pure
tannic acid extracted tncrefnim by water.

eti.Dtg—Xorember t9, 1898. (i. D. BL'RTON. Process qf tunning Mdes or Mns <4

animfUs.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
«ltl,88t— January S, 1899. J. BLAIR. Process of making tannin extracts.

Leaves of coniferous trees are steamed in a weak solution of potoffiinm per-
manganate and an alkali, the rcsuUing solution Is clarified bya weak acidulated
solution precipitating the resinous matters, and then evaporated.

liSe.lOO—May SO. 1809. 1". O. SANFORD. Mtihutl i,f miikinii tanning extracts.

To clarify, bleach, or decolorize tanning liiiiiids, albuminous matter Is Miit-
jceted to the action of alkaline fluoride and diaiyze<l; the tanning liquid is then
subjected to the action of this product and dlaJyzed, and the albiuaen finally
coagulated.

6iS,08l— January 30, 1900. O. D. BURTON. Process of unhairing animal hides or
skins.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

ARTIFICIAL, INORGANIC.

tW.eS7— September 16. 1879. C. 8. GORMAN. Improvement in the manufacture of

chromaies of potash and soda.

Chrome ore mixed with lime and carbonate of fxitash Is calcined, the charge
coole<l and a further quantity added, say from 10 to 20 per cent of larbonatc of
potash, or iUs equivalent alkHlliie carbonate, and the mass reheatoi at from 42S°
to 650° C.

Ui,ll,S— November 9, 1880. H. PEMBERTON. Manufacture qfUehnmaUs.

Carbonic acid gas is passed into a calcined mixture of chrome ore. ba-se«. and
salts to convert the Insoluble compoundsof chromic acid into soluble chromuKs.

i79.iSl—June It, 1883. E. P. POTTER AND W. H. HIOGIX. Manufacture qf

bichromate of soda.

A mixture of sulphate of soda, chrome ore, and lime, in proper proportions, is
fumaced, lixiviated, and the monocliromate of soda w>luilon formed treute<l
witli hydrochloric acid in exactly sutlicient quantity to change the chromate
into a bichromate. The sodic sulphate present is separaleti by precipitating
with calcic or baric chloride, the solution evaporated to a pa.stymH.s8, the sodic
chloride crystjils removed and washed, adding the resulting liquor to the
original mass, and finally drying the ma-ss at a temperature a little above that
of Tailing water. The monoehromate of soda solution may be treated with
sulphuric acid and the sodic sulphate formed converted into chloride by the
addition of chloride of calcium, strontium, or barium. The removed sodic
chloride crystals are decomposed with sulphuric acid in a salt-cake furnace
and the product used fur the decomposition of the chrome ore in plaice of
sodium sulphate.

307,99i— November 11, l.'iSi. W. .SIMON. .Vantifaeture of bichromate of soda.

A solution of neutral chromate of soda is evaporated to dryness, decoiiiposed
in this condition by a mineral acid, as sulphuric acid, and the concentrated
solution of bichromate of soda is then mechanically separated from the
anhydrous lye product in a centrifugal machine.

S19,1S,S— October t7, 1S8S. W. J. CHRYSTAL. Manttfacture qf chromates and

bichromates.

Chromates and bichromates of potash and ammonia arc produced from the
chromate or bichromate of soda by decomposition with the sulphate of potash
or the sulphate of ammonia, respectively.

3ia,S7»— May ts, 1888. W. J. CHRYSTAL. Manufacture of bichromate qf soda.

Chrome ore Is furnaced with lime and a soda .salt, the mass lixiviated with
an acid solution o( a soda salt and wa.shcd with water, and the solution and
washings treated with an add to convert the neutral or monwhromate into
bichromate of soda. The solution is then concentrated to 180° to 1«0° Twaddle
to eliminate the sulphate of soda, which is separated, and the concentration
continued and the pure bichromate obtained.

3it,6i6—.Vay SS, 1886. W. SIMON. Manufacture qf bichromate qf potash.

Bichromate of sodium is decomposed by chloride of potassium, or chromate
of sodium by chloride of potassium and hydrochloric acid.

3iS,6i7—May tS, I88S. W. SIMON. Process of manufacturing ammonium bichro-
mate.
Sodium bichromate is converted into ammonium-stxilum chromate by the

addition of ammonia to a solution of the same, and this salt is decomposed into

sodium chloride and ammonium bichromate by the addition of hydrochloric

acid.

366,036— July S, ixgr. W.SIMON. Process qf making potassium bichromate.

Bichromate of sodium is decom^ioscd by sulphate of potassium.
Ua.ioa— December 9, 1890. W. J. A. DONALD. Process of making chromates.

The insoluble residue resulting from the ordinary manufacture of chromates
Is calcined, pulverized, and mixed with chrome ore, lime, and an aqueous
solution of the salt to l>c produced, oxidized in a furnace, and lixiviated to
extract the soluble chromates, and the residue again used as before.

iBSMl— November ti. 1S91. J. MASSlONON AND E. WATEL. Mannfarture qf

chromates and bichromates.

A mixture of pulverized chrome mineral with carbonate of lime and chloride
of calcium is heate<i to convert the carls)nate of lime into caustic lime, ami tlie
mineral oxidized at a low temperature. This oxidated mixture can serve for

244

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

the manufacture of chroraates and biehromatea, and of chromic and chloro-
chromic acids. To make ehromate of lead the chloride of calcium is first
washed out and subsequently the ehromate of lime, which latter is precipitated
by a lead salt.

Bin .565— October 16, lS9i. E. A. STARKE. Process of ttiakinff ammonium bichro-
mate.
See Group XIV. Explosives, Nitro-substitution ("ompounds.

M9,0i9—May U, 1895. M. \V. BEYLIKGY. Proce-is of making alkaline bicliromates.
A double ehromate of lime and the alkali formed by calcining a mixture of
chrome ore, lime, and an oxygenated compound of the alkali metal, is lixivi-
ated and the liquor pa.ssed through a filter saturate<l with an insoluble fatty acid,
such as oleic acid, to remove the lime and leave the alkaline bicarbonate in
solution. The lime is removed from the filter by dilute hydrochloric acid.

nU.Syi— January 5, !SS7. G. H. Cl^AMER. Process of makinrj bichromates.

To make alkaline chromates, powdered chrome ore and an alkaline nitrate
are fused together, cooled and powdered, then mixed with a caustic alkali and
sufficient alkali nitrate to complete the oxidation of the ore, the caustic alkali
and alkali nitrate being first fused together, and the powdered ore and nitrate
gradually added to the fused mass with stirring.

599.197— February 15, 1S9S. S. P. SADTLER. Process of making chromates.

Bichromates or chromates are regenerated from waste liquors— as those of
primary batteries— bv neutralizing the free acid with milk of lime and oxidizing
with bleaching powder. The solution may then be filtered, concentrated, and
crystallized.
etO,935— March Ik, 1S99. H. J. KREBS. Method of recovering chrmnates from tan

liqilor.

The dissolved impurities are first precipitated, as by caustic lime, and re-
moved, and the chromic acid is then precipitated as a ehromate of lead or
barium. The dis.solved lime may be precipitated as a sulphate, oxalate, or car-
bonate prior to filtration or decantation.

GROUP XIII— PAINTS, COLORS, AND VARNISHES,

PIGMENTS.

1,910— January W, IM.1 R. A. TILGHMAN. Improvement in milking chromic

yettov:

Carbonate of lead is mixed or ground in a solution of ehromate or bichromate
of potassa, or other soluble ehromate or bichromate, the solution being in
excess.

e,327— April 17, 18i9. T. SCHWARTZ. Improvement in the manufacture of pans

green.

A hot saturated solution isformed of white arsenic, and sodium carbonate, and
blue vitriol is dis.solved therein, the compound solution being then cooled with
constant stirring in a shallow vat, and reduced to a homogeneous arsenite of
copper. Strong vinegar is then added and the liquor cooled to 37^ C, water
being added to keep the sulphate of soda in solution. After successive settlings
and stirrings the product is collected and dried. The vitriol may be dis.solved
with the arsenic instead of the soda.

6S,097— February 11,1867. P, H. VANDER WEYDE. Improvement in tlic manu-
facture of white lead.
See Group VII, Wood Distillation.

7B,S61 — March S/t, 1868. W. W, CHIPMAN. Improvement in Vie manufacture of
whiting and paris-ivhite.
Limestone is burned, slacked, and recarbonized with carbonic-acid gas.

87,170 — February S3, 1869. A. LEYKAUF. Improvement in the maniffaeture of
colors.
See Group XI, Dycslufls, Artificial, Inorganic.

88,291 — March SO, 1869. E. HARRSCH. Imprnirmt'nt in the manufacture of colors

and pigments.

See Group XI, Dyestuffs, Artificial, Inorganic.
90,359— May 25, 1869. E. H.VRRSCH. Improvement in the manufacture of colors.

Ores of zinc arc dissolved in nitric, nitro-muriatic, or muriatic acids, and the
solution mixed with soluble salts of baryta, or carbonate of baryta, or the same
of strontia, or lime, or equivalents. Colors are then precipitated with various
reagents.

9S..117— August 17, 1860. h. D. GALE AND I. M. CATTMAN. Improvement in the
manufacture of sugar of lead and acetic acid.

See Group VII, Wood Distillation.
13i,e>S5—May 6, 1,'<73. F. OSGOOD. Improvement in treating :ine dross and skim-
mings for the manufacture of pigments.

Oxide of zinc or other pigments are produced from galvanizing dross or skim-
mings, by roasting at a nonfiuxing heat, mixing with coal and subjecting to
heat with a blast of air.

291,119— .lanuary 15, ISSi. J. K. KESSLER. I'rocessof making white lead.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

192,753— January 29, 1881,. J. K. KESSLER. Process of making sponge-lead.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
305,389— .September 16, 1881,. C. E. HORE. Process of making clirome red.

Chrome red is produced by boiling a mixture of sublimed lead, ,'iOO pounds, a
solution of 90 pounds of bichromate of potash, and an alkali, such as soda ash,
38 pounds. A deeper red is produced by doubling the quantity of bichromate
arid alkali.

305.390— September 16, 1881,. C. E. HORE. Process of making lemon chrome.

Lemon chrome is produced by mixing sublimed lead with an acid, such as
nitric acid, then adding bichromate or a neutral ehromate of potash,

303,391 — Septemlxr 16, 188!,. C. E. HORE. Process of making chrome yellow.

Sublimed lead is mixed with a solution of bichromate of potash, boiled, and
the insoluble coloring matter separated from the soluble pnMlucts.

Ui,9S5— November 12. 18S9. T. D. BOTTOME. Manufacture of white lead.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

iSl.oae-July 1, 1890. M. ALSBERG. Process of manufacturing red lead.

Lead nitrate is incorporated into the oxide or carbonate of lead and the mix-
ture heated sufliciently high to drive off any contained water and then decom-
pose the lead nitrate and produce minium.

ua.661— December 16, 1890. T. D. BOTTOME. Process of desilverizing lead by
electrolysis.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

I,51,i87—May 5, 1891. J. C. JESSUP. Process of making paris green.

A solution of sulphate of copper is first prepared by subjecting copper residue,
or other crude material containing copper, to the action of sulphuric acid, and
the proper quantities of arsenite of soda and acetic acid are then introduced
directly into the solution.

1,57,028— August i, 1891. F, W. IHNE. Process of making chrome yellow.

Pulverized galena is dissolved with nitric acid, the sulphur removed, and a
solution of bichromate of potassa, neutral ehromate of potassa or ehromate of
soda added, whereby chrome yellow is precipitated and a saltpeter-lye is
formed, which is drawn off and condensed to form nitrate of potassium or
saltpeter.

l,S9,9U6— September 21, 1891. D. V. KY'TE. Manufacture of while lead.

Sec Group X, Electro-chemistry.
1,77,733— Jmie 28,1802. J.BLAIR. Process of making lohile pigments.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

1,96,109— April p, 1893. A. B. BROWNE. Process of manufacturing white lead.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

50S.l,29—Augmt 1,5, 1893. F. M. & C. H. M. LYTE. Process of producing chlorine
and purifying lead.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry. .

51l„',70— August U, 1891,. F. L. SLOCUM. Process of making green oxid (if chro-
mium.

A powdered ehromate is moistened with hydrochloric acid and then 10 per
cent of powdered carbon is mixed therewith and the mass again wet with
hydrochloric acid and brought to a paste (an explosive mixture results if mixed
drv), subjected to heat without air, and then lurther moistened with hydro-
chloric acid. The resultant chloride and any remaining ehromate is dissolvetl
out with boiling water.

538,998— May 7, 1895. A. B. BROWNE AND E. D. CHAPLIN. Process of manu-
facturing ehromate of lead.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry. .

55!,,7 18- February 18, 1896. R. McKENZIE. Process uf producing lakes or coloring
compounds by electrolysis.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

555,232— February 15, 1896. A. B. BROWNE AND E. D. CHAPLIN. Process of

manufacturing white lead by electrolysis.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
560,518— May 19, 1896. J. METRUEIS. Treatment of sodium chloride.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

563,553— July 7, 1896. A. B. BROWNE AND E. D. CHAPLIN. Process of manu-
facturing white lead.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

563,5Bi—July 7, 1S96. A. B. BROWNE AND E. D. CHAPLIN. Process of manu-
facturing oxids of lead.
See Group X, Electro-chcmLstry.

563,555— July 7, 1896. A.B.BROWNE. Manufacture of while lead.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

588,883— August li, 1897. P, G, 8AL0M. Process of making litliarge or jirotoxid of
lead from lead ore.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

589,S01—September 7, 1897. H. C. WOLTERECK. Process of manufacturing while
lead.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

602,871— AprU 16, 1898. J. W. RICHARDS AND C. W. ROEPPER. Process of
producing chemical compounds by electrolysis.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

602,873— April 16, 1898. J. W, RICHARDS AND C. W. ROEPPER. Process eif
ei£etr(tlytically manufacturing metallic sidfids.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

625,918— May 30, 1899. E. BAILEY, G. R. COX, AND W. T. HEY. Process of and

apparatus for producing white lead.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
626,3S1—June6,1899. C. LUCKOW. Process of producing neutral ehromate of lead.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

617,001— June IS, 1899. C. LUCKOW. Process of prodv cing white lead by means of

electrolysis.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
627,166—June20, 1899. C. LUCKOW. Process of producing add chromoJte of lead.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

6S 1,939— August 19, 1899. H. C. WOLTERECK. Process of manufacturing white
lead or other pigments by electrolysis.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

6l,l,.779— March 6, 1900. J. W. RICHARDS AND C. W. ROEPPER. Process of

manufacturing inetailic carbimates by electrolysis.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
651,306— .June 12, 1900. E. A. G. STREET. I'roductimi qf chromium oad.

Sec Group X. Electro-chemistry.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

24r>

PAINTS.

l,m—Jul]l 10. K40. F. O. SPILSBfRY, M. F. 0. D. CORBAITX, AND A. 8.

" )f appltiiHiididrmiMr coUirn having albumen

niUr Ihf mm€ more ilurahte, and pteKTvtng

BYRNE. ImprtfermetU in the mtMie rtfappttfinii ititlemper eoUirn having albumen

<■'■ '7' !-ttine for their vehicle, iHf rtf to rrmtrr II
:iiii- u-nen ntd truttlnl/or immrdiaU ttee.

~ iKIi' vohU'loH. iLSKi'liillnrcir nllmmvn, un- lined (or pnlnui. which vchlclcn,
by nil after Hppliratlon nf chi'inicul itKcniH, hh uhim. are rendorcd iriKnliiltle in
water. S4ilut>Ie Mkltjt of 7.iiic, iiiitnK»ne?te. Hiitl lend ttre eoiiihiiuMl with Kelatlne
to prew'rve ft. IMuineiit..! maybe hrepnre*! witli rt^^'inoiiN miitlep* or wax <lli»-
•olveil In nil Hlkiiliiie lye or Miliitloii of iKinix. VeKelabIc iiro<liiet,i. H» tlnur,
may form the linse niixisl with plKineiits Ihe |ialiit to h« flxca after application
witn a fi^>luiloii of itilieate of |H>tiuw» or of nimIu.

t,tS3— September It, ISit. J. KAND. Improvement in prenerving palnlji and uther

fluid«.

They are eontinrcl In closed metallic vemeln constructed to collapse with slight
prCKSiire and forc(> out Iho material. '

10.711.— April SO, tssa. A. KI8SEL. Jlanlentng rcfint.
SecCiroiip XV, Rubber and Rubber Substitutes.

J«,4.*»— .Vmyinfc^r «), IS77. J. F. WALTER. Jr. Improvement in putting up calei-

mining innltriaU.

The li>iuld malerial, In a bottle, Is placed within and mirroundcd by the pul-
vcrin-d pigment or Ixjdy material.

tOO.ttS—Pdiruary It, WS. O.I.STEVENS. Imprmtment in dittempcr paints.

The base, glue, and coloring pigment are ground together with as little water
as poMlble, comprused into a cake, and dried: ready for me by the addition of
water.

tSl^Dtt—Sovember 18,1879. W. H. P. WEBB. Improvement itipainl /or /IUi»0 the
teamt nf renelt.

tU,JS8—July m. ISSl. L. BECKERS. Treating fooalchoue with hydrocarbmi oHk.
See (imup XV, Rubber and Rubber Substitutes.

A eomiK>uiul consisting of a quick.drying liquid-gum vehicle composed of
resin and naphtha, combined with an eartny Iwse, as red oxide of iron, and a
hydraulic cement.

f*),Sftf— .VoirmtKT *9, ISSl. H. R. TOYE. Procese oj preparing eolorf /or unm-

menting /nbric».

Colors in the form of powders, for ornamenting fabrics, are produced by form-
ing a pasty mixture of pulverized starch, powdered talc, and acid, adding
colors to form the tint desired, drying by a moderate heat, and sifting or
pulverzlng.
Syi.9t7— October SO, tSSS. J. A. TITZEL. Rubber compound or mixlure.

See Uroup XV, Rubber and Rubber Substitutes.

VARNISHES.

lie,.fS7— January IS, lS7t,. P. FINDLEY. Improvement in the iircpnration and
treatment o/ india-rubl)er vami*h.
See Group XV, Rubber and Rubber Substitutes.

lOl.SiS—July IS. IS9S. H. PFANNE. Method o/ maxm/aiAarlng vami»h and
apparatus there/or.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

GROUP XIV— EXPLOSIVES.

GUNPOWDER, INCLUDING BLASTING POWDER.

ee»— April t, 18SS. R. I. L. WITTY. Improvemeid in the manitfaeture ttf gun-
powder.
Bituminous coal is used in the place of charcoal, with sulphur and niter.

S,7Si — February 17, ISSi. E. CALLOW. Improvement in eiplotire compounds.
The compound consists of 6 parts of chlorate or oxvmuriate of potash. 2 parts

of orpiment or red sulphuret of arsenic, and 1 part of ferrocyanuret or pnissiate

of potash.

10,t60—Xovember li, ISiS. W. SILVER, Jr. Improirmad in Uiuiting powder.

Unglazed powder, composed of charcoal, niter, and sulphur, is treated with
potassium chlorate, as by moistening the granulate<l powder with a saturated
solution and drying.

16,t57—July 1, 1S56. W. SILVER, Jr. Improvement in blasting powder.

The explosive compound consists of rags or paper saturated and co«te<l with
a mixture of gunpowder, potassium chlorate, ana powdered calcined cork.

lifiSl— August 19, ISiS. L. BUCHUOLTZ. Improved blasting compound.

A composition of saltpeter, 45 to 80 parts: charcoal, '20 to 10 parts: lycopodlum,
20 to 5 parts: and white sugar, 15 to 5 parts.

16.580— February 10, 1867. E. B. DOBSON. Improved gunpowder.

Anthracite coal or coke, to prepare it for use in the manufacture of gunpowder.
Is ground to fine dust and exposed to the air, in a dry place, for twelve months.

n.SBl-.Vay li, tSS7. A. MURTINEDDU. Improved lilantino jmuHler.

A composition of sulphur, 100 parts; saltpeter, 100 parts: sawdust. 60 parts;
bot«e dung, 60 parts; and sodium chloride, 10 parts. .Molasses, 4 |>arts, is added
as a binder.

V,S!l—May IS, 1SS7. L. DU PONT. Improvement in gunpowder.

So<lium nitrate is used in the manufacture of gunpowder, which is glazed to
prevent deliquescence, by rolling it in a barrel with black lead.

te.euS-Decembcr 17. lSi9. V. L. MAXWELL. Imprmemenl in the manu/actnre qf
gunpotcder.

Alcohol Is employed, in the place of water, as the vehicle for uniting the
particles.

3t,01«-Apra9,lSgl. W, R. THOMAS AND M. EMANUEL, Jr. ImpnmmenHH

eompotittont/or blasting powder.

A composition of sodium nitrate, 3J pounds: flower of sulphur, 11 pounds:
ground bark, 4| pounds; and water, 3 quarts. The composition is well dried.

•["«>»— /I »!»"• »«'. •<"'■ '• n. nnwn.-". ImptovtmoU ln prtparatioH '/ granu-
i laled mmpnwder to serve as eliargrs /or firtarnu.

A charge Is made by combining and pressing (rains of gnnpowder irlih an
' adhesive s4ilutlon Into a solid form.

»l,»5»-./nnimn/ ts. imt. T. K. ANDERWIN.
slow-matrh /or igtiiting poirtler itniter irttter.

Improved eompnsOlim /or /use or

A compound consisting of niter. H iwrts; charcoil, 10 (Mrts; sulphur, 2 parts:
and aoilliim chloride, 1 part.

SLSSi-Marrh II, iset. W. R. THOMAH AND M. EMANUEL, J«. Impromt

blasting powder.

Potassium chlorate (2 pounds) is added to the composillon of No. 82.01S.

Si.7n— March LI. last. K. O. DOREMU8 AND B. L. BUDD. Imprtnrment in

treating gunpowder to/orm rnrtridgrs.

Grainilaled gimpowder Is compresseil dry Into solid shapes suitable for use as
cartridges in molds. A cHrtridge of (xiwder In stmln of dlfTtrent degrees of
combUMllliility is tormeil by IntriKlncing the isiwdcir Into the mold In <<>ii'ces<ive
portions, and successively applying a illnilnishtHl amount of pressure.

SS,S9»—f>etobir7.l8et. H. BIEBUYCK. Improml Nnsting powder.

Barium nitrate Is employed In the manufacture of blasting powder, with or
without {Kitas.ilum nitrate.

S7. 117— December «. ISSt. W. R. THOMAS AND M. EMANUEL, J«. Improved

eomjMHiition/or blasting powder.

A composition of sodium nitrate, sulphur, potassium chlorate, starch, and
ground bark, or other absorbent carbonaceous material.

S7,t96— January 6. IS«,S. H. LEIBERT. Improved eominsitiim /or gunpowder.

A mixture of pnissiate of potash. 2 pounds: chlorate of potash. 1 pound;
sodium nitrate or its equivalent, 10 [lounds: sawdust or charcoal, 4 pounds: sul-
phate of soda, 1 pound; and sulphur, 4 {lOunds.

U),070— .September ii, 186S. O. B. WIE.STLINO. Improved gun and btaMing
powder.

A composition of charcoal, sulphur, sodium nitrate, and poiassliun chlorate,
either with or without potassium nitrate.

1,1,67s— February 9, isei. E. HARRISON. Improved composUiou /or gunpmeder,
etc.

A mixture of ordinary gunpowder, I2i parts, and amorphous phosphorus,
1 part.

1,1,578— Filtruary 9, ISSi. E. HARRISON. Improved ejrplijsire composition.

A comp<>und of polassinm chlorate, charcoal, prussiate of potash, and flour
starch, with or without cyanuret of zinc.

1,3.037 — March iS, ISSi. H. HOCH.STATTER. Improved gunpowder, mining
powder, etc.

A composition of charcoal, potassium chlorate, half-calcined sea grass, stone
coal, niul sawdust, or certain named substitutes. Is formed in boiling waterand
dried: or mixtures of wheat flour and [s^tasslum chlorate, and stone coal and
charcoal, arc made in mortars, intermixed in water, pressed into blocks, rubbed
through ft sieve and dried.

it.OSS— March ii, 186i. C. M. WETHERILL. Improvement in guniMwder, etc.

A mixture of a suiUible oxygen coni|»ound of chlorine with carbonaceous
material is to be u.sed in the proportion of 8 to Ki |>arts by weight of the former
to 6 parts of the latter, t<t form either carbonic oxi<le or carbonic acid or a mix-
ture of the said gases. Dextrine or other gum is to be added to form a grained
powder. Peroxide of manganese facilitates the liberation of oxygen from the
chlorates, and oil of vitriol is designed to act on the chlorine compound, by
appropriate means, to effect the explosion of the powder in shells as on striking
an object.

iS.S69—May li. tSSi. M.NOWAK. Improved blasting compound.

A composition of manganese binoxide. 23 grams (or carbon 15 grams Instead);
potassium chlorate. 62 grams; potassium nitrate. :^1 grams; and potassium
lerrocyauide. 15 grams: applied to any vegetable material, as paper, cotton
waste, or sawdust.

il.9IS—May iU, 1S6U. F. A. JAECKEL. Improved blasting powder.

It consists of potassium nitrate, sodium nitrate, sulphur, charcoal, mineral
coal, and potasslo-tartrate of soda.

i.\Oil—June 7, lS6i. H. H.\LVOR.>iON. Impmveit ej-plmire compound.

An organic sulphide and a cyanide or ferrocyanlde is combined with an
organic deflagrating ammonlacal salt and a chloric or i>crchloric salts of potassa
and ammonia.
l,i,S69—September IS. ISSi. H. E. DRAYSON. Improvement In the mani{facture <»•

gnnjuftrder.

The saltpeter is treated to the direct and quick action of a heavy volume of
steam until it is dissolved, when the sulphur and charcoal are added and thor-
oughly mlxe<l, when It is ready for the incorporating mill. The mill cake, atu-r
manipulation in the incorfsirating mill, is imlss^.*! through sieves before It
becomes dry. set. or hard, and then dried and glazed.

1,6.275— FihruaruJ. 1865. W. G. BATE.S AND C. S. SMITH, EXECUTORS OF J. 8.

SMITH, DECEASED. Improvement in drying and glazing grtnjM/wder.

Heat is applied to the drum or cylinder during the process of glazing to glaze
and dry at one operation.

iS.SOS—Jhur 10.1SS5. F.G.MURRAY. Improvement in the manu/actnre nf gntt-

powtler.

A compound of potassium chlorate. 45 parts: saltpeter, 15 parts; ground bark,
30 parts: charcoal, 8 i>arts: and lampblack, 2 parts; mixed in boiling water,
evaporated, and drie<l.

SO.lOlr-Xrptember :6, 1865. L. DU PONT. Imprvrement in plntei for i.fMinii onn-

powder.

The plates are made of bard or Imlnraled robber.
SO.SIS — October S. 1865. J. G.ALE. Jr. Improved mixle r/ keeping gunptni'deT.

Gunpowder is mixed with a fine. drj'. inexplofdve powder, finer than the
grains of the gunpowder. It is separated from the gunpowder, for use. by sift-
ing or winnowing.

M.-^ea— October !i. ISSS. L. DU POST. Improvement in presses /or pressing sma-
jtowder.
Powder dust is <«mpressed into cakes by horiionlally applied piwure.

246

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

S5.795-^une 19. ISSfi. L. H. G. EHRHARDT. Improved gunpowder.

A safety powder formed of mineral carlxin. mixed with cutch, tannin, or
eambier to be mixed mtli a mixture of potassium chlorate and nitrate for use,
fn the proportion of five parts of the cutch mixture to three parts of the potas-
sium mixture.

58.567— October 9. 186$. F. S. ALLEN. Improvement in tlie manufacture of gun-
pou-der.

Paper or other tibrous material is saturate<l with an explosive compound, as a
mixture of manganese binoxide, potassium chlorate, potassium nitrate, and
potassium ferrocyanide. by boiling them together in a solution and evaporating
the liquid wholly or partially.
68,656— October 9. 1866. H. S. LUCAS. Improved Uasling cartridge.

A cartridge of solidly compressed gunpowder, with a central perforation
extending partially or wholly through, for interior ignition.
61,659— January 39. 1867. W. & E. FEHLEISEN. Improved blasting powder.

it is composed of sawdust or other tocly divided cellulose material, 9 parts:
potassium nitrate. 4b parts; charcoal or carbon, 8 parts; and postassium ferro-
cyanide, 1 part.

61,957— February Ig, 1867. C. SEIDEL. Improved chemical eompoHilion for blasting
rocks.

A powder and fluid to be combined when used; the powder consi.stine of
sulphuret of antimony, 1 part, and pota-ssium chlorate, 2 parts; the fluid of
phosphorus, 1 part, dis-solved in bisulphuret of carbon, 4 part,s. It is exploded b>
friction or a fuse.

66.578-^nlyt, 1867. G. A. NEUMEYER. Improved powder for firearms and for
blasting.

Blasting powder is made of saltpeter, flower of sulphur and charcoal (from
freshlv cut wood), gunpowder of saltpeter, flower of sulphur and brown coal.
The mixing is made with the addition of water, and the mass is subsequently
dried.
10 359— October 29. 1887. A. T. HAND. Improved compound for blasting powder.

It consists of sodium nitrate, 60 parts, and charcoal, 40 parts.
71,00i— November 19. 1867. E. E. HENDRICK. Improved mttliotl of drying gun-
powder.

Gunpowder is dried by exposing it in vacuo.
73,786— January 28, 1868. L. H. G, EHRHARDT. Improvement in gunpowder.

A finelypulverized mixture of pota-ssium chlorate, 1 part: potassium nitrate, 2
to 4 parts: and mineral coal, 3 to 5 parts.

76.1Si— March 31, 1868. E. H. ASHCROFT. Improved compound for use in safes
and powder magazines.

Bicarbonate of soda, carbonates of ammonia, or other volatile salts, with or
without a liquid acid, are placed in the inner compartments of safesand around
the chambers of powder magazines, to develop incombustible gases, in ease of
undue heating.
79,010— rune 16. 1868. E. M. RU8CHHAUPT. Improved explosive pmoder.

A mixture of chlorate of potas.sa, say 75 parts, and naphthalene 25 parts.
79,229— June iS, 1.168. W. H. JACKSON. Improvement in the manufacture of gun
powder.

A solution of pota.ssium nitrate, or equivalent thereof, is mixed with a soluble
vegetable extract, as of logwood or other soluble vegetable matter, and evapo-
rated to drsness, with or without the addition of sulphur or pulverized charcoal.

80,00/,— July 111. 1S68. P. A. OLIVER. Improved powder for blasting and other

purpose.'^.

A powder made from peat, instead of charcoal, with saltpeter, sulphur, and
chlorate of potash.

81,670— August 25. 1868. G. A. NEUMEYER. Improvement in the manufacture of

gunpowder and blasting powder.

A mixture of saltpeter, flowers of sulphur, and brown coal, or brown coal and
charcoal, is made in the dry stjite, then ground in water tor one and a half to
two and a half hours, and grained and drietl.

81,891,— September S. 186S. J. HAFENEGGER, Improvement in explosive com-
pounds.

The powder may consist of mixtures of potassium chlorate, sulphur, and light
charcoal: or potassium chlorate, white sugar, and potassium ferrocyanide; or
pota.>wium chlorate, powdered charcoal, sulphur or sugar, and pota.ssium ferro-
cyanide: <pr p(>tas.viuni chlorate, sugar, charcoal, and sulphur. A self-igniting
fl'uirt therefor consists of 1 to 2 parts of phosphorus dissolved in 2 parts of bisul-
phuret of carbon, its effect being more or less instantaneous according to the
degree of saturation.
85,1,82— December 29, 1868. W. SCHMITZ. Improvement in explosive cartridges.

A waterprofif cartridge of special construction chargefl with a mixture of
amorphoiLs phosphorus, 1 part; potassium chlorate, 2 parts; gum arable, 3 parts;
and water, 1 part; which assumes a solidified form. The comiKiund may be used
for percussion caps.

86,576 — January 6,1869. L, H. G. EHRHARDT. Improvement in the manufacture

of gunpowder.

A finely pulverized mixture of potassium chlorate with a vegetable extract,
such as cutch, gambier, log^vood, or of tannin.

86,980— February 16, 1869. E. GOMEZ. Improved erplosivc compound.

A solution of sugar of lead is added to a solution of prussiate of jiotash, and
the ferrocyanide deposited: also a nitrate of iron is prepared with 2 pounds of
nitric acid and 1 pound of iron in 1 gallon of water. The substances are mixed
in the proportion of 1 pound of nitrate of iron to 3 pounds of ferrocyanide of
potassium and the precipitate washed and dried and mixed with equal propor-
tions of pota.Hsium chlorate.

8r,S82— March I. 1869. P. H. VANDER WEYDE, Improved application of Ora-

hamite in the manufacture of gunpowder and lampblacK.

Orahamite is used as an ingredient in the manufacture of gunpowder: also
for the production of lampblack, chlorine gas being introduced into the furnace.

88,171— March 25. 1869. W.H.JACKSON, Itnproved pmvder for blasting and other

purposes.

Vegetable fiber, as tan bark, saturated with a niter salt or a chlorine salt in
water, is combined with gunpowder or other explosive comixmnds.

97,566— December 19, 1869. T. TAYLOR. Improved explosive compound for use in

firearms, blasting, etc.

A mixture of potas.siiini chlorate and the yellow prus,siate of potash with
parafline, say, in equal parts of the potash compounds with one thirty-second
part by weight of paraffine.
97,567— December 7, 1869. T. TAYLOR. Improved gunpowder.

Paraffine is mixed with ordinary gunpowder in all proportions.
110,355— December 20, 1S70. J. HAFENEGGER. Improvement in explosive com-

pounds.

Fatty or oily substances, as Venice turpentine, are mixed with explosive com-
pounds to prevent spontaneous explosion.

111,60— FOyruary 7, 1871. J. HAFENEGGER. Improvement in explosive cam-
pounds.

A mineral oxide, as an oxide of lead or manganese, and oily, fatty, or resinous
substances are mixed with explosive compounds.
118,0U)— August 15, 1S71. A. MOLFINO. Improvement in gunpowders.

It is composed of potassium chlorate, 772 parts; wheat starch, 228 parts, and
charcoal, 150 parts.
120,862—Xovember U, ISll. C. W. CURTIS. Improvement in the manufacture .of

gunpowder.

The grains of "pellet" powder, for heavy ordnance, are split into halves, and
afterwards stoved and glazed, thereby presenting one rough face.
122.2io—Drcemt>rr i6, 1871. E. GOMEZ. Improvement in explosive compounds.

Acetate of lead is mixed with prus.siate of potash and the ferrocyanide deposit
in a dry state is mixed with chlorate of potash; mucilage or other adhesive
material may be added.
130,123— August 6, 1872. C. P. FUCHS AND A. CLEMENT. Improvement in gun

and blasting powders.

A compound of pota.ssium chlorate and ground tortoise or turtle shell, in ad-
dition to saltpeter, sulphur, and charcoal.
1SS,52S— December 3, 1S7S. h. & E. DU PONT. Improvement in the manufacture

of gunpowder.

Dampened powder is compressed In sheets between ribbed plates, to form in-
dented lines, by which the cake is broken into uniform shapes or sizes.

11,5.11,9— December 2, 1S7S. F. BURNEY. (Reissue: .'i,77S— February 21,, 1S7L)
Improvement in the manufacture of gunpowder.
Gunpowder is molded into pebbles or grains of large size by pressure between

plates having cellular surfaces.

11,8,536— March 10, 1871,. B. WEINER. Improvement in the manufacture of gun-
powder.
Gunpowder, after mixture of the ingredients, in a dry state, is subjected to a

sufficiently high temperature to liquefy the sulphur and agglutinate the mass.

150,51,3— May 5, 187L J. H. DOLDE. Improvetnent in explosive compounds.

A mixture of prussiate of potash, white sugar, lime or soapstone, chlorate of
potash, and tannin,

160,05S— February 2S, 1875. E. GREENE. Improvement in the manufacture of gun-
pmvder.

The saltpeter or sodium nitrate is dissolved in hot water, and the other ingre-
dients mixed with the heated solution, the heat being maintained during the
mixing operation in a complete or partial vacuum.

161,S26— March 30, 1875. R. CAHUC. [Seissue: 6.601— August 17. 1875.) Improve-
ment in- explosive compounds.

A mining powder, incombustible at low temperature and nonexplosive except
when under pressure, produced by heating i>otas.siuni nitrate, carbon, and sul-
phur, in the presence of sawdust or tanning bark and a solution of sulphate of
iron, till a homogeneous liquid mass is produced, then cooling and drying.

172,61,7— January 18, 1876. C. FELHOEN. Improvement in explosive compimnds.
It consists of sodium nitrate, 36 parts; potassium carbonate. 3 parts: potassium
nitrate, crude, 24 parts, and refined, 9 parts; sulphur, 15 parts; and charcoal, 13
parts; combined in a dry powder with granulation.

177,818— May 23, 1876. J. H. DOLDE. Improvement in explosive compounds.

.\ sporting powder consi.sting of potassium chlorate, 9 ounces; gall, 3 ounces:
and yellow priis.siate of potash, one-half ounce.

177,819— May 2.1. 1876. J. H, DOLDE. Improvement in blasting powder.

A compound of silica, potassium nitrate, potassium chlorate, sodium nitrate,
water, sawdust, sugar, and tannin.

182,1,11— September 19. 1876. L. DE SOUL.A.GES AND R. CAHUC. Improvement

in explosive compositions.

Same as No. 161,325.
iai,,020— November 7, 1876. J. P. R. POCH. Improvement in explosive compounds.

A blasting compound of spent tan, wood sawdust, sodium nitrate, barium
nitrate, charcoal, sulphur, and saltpeter.

186,211— January 16, 1877. A. E. MILTIMORE AND C. A. L. TOTTEN. Improve-
ment in comiiensating powder.
The grains are made up of concentric layers of different explosive substances

of varying force and expansive intensity.

188,121,— .March B, 1877. J. GOETZ. Improvement in explosive compounds.

A dry gas-producing or explosive base is mixed with glucase, uncrystalllzable
sugar, or sirupy solution to prevent premature or accidental discharge.

199,723— January 29, 1878. T. T. S. LAIDLEY. Improvement in powder for

cannons.

Gunpowder is formed in cubical grains with rounded angles and perforated
centrally through two opposite sides.
200,272— February 12, 1878. S. J. FOWLER. Improvement in explosive compounds.

It consists of the combination of nitrate of ammonia and sulphate of soda with
an explosive.
201,520— March 19, 1878. W, GRAHAM AND E. WARD. Improvement inblasting

powder.

A mixture of yellow prussiate of pota.sh, pota-ssium chlorate, white sugar, and
red lead.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATIN(} TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

247

fW.iy:—yi<miUH-rte. tgrs. v. M. OALLAHKR.W.I.LOYD.ANDO.S. WALKER.

tmprtnTntriit in Mcl'f/fif/ poii^r-r,

A coinhlimiioii of nltrntoof MMlnnr potnuh, milphiir, charooal, ground bark,
Aiitt milphutc of Iron and Niilphato of <><ii>p<>r,

fli,7iti — hlirnnrif i^i.lfCU. W. MILLKK. Improi^mrntin fTptn»UT nnnjmnnth.

A blBstlnif i«>wi1<'rcoinp<>«c<l of complcmiMilary mlxliiiVH of mdliun nllratc,
3& parlK; poliiiwiiim nitrate, iTiidi'. 'Ht part*, anil rullnrd. 10 iNirM: and atanrh,
2 partu: I'onHtltiilInK one nilxtiirr: and (Hitamiiini biehromatv. 3 [wrtu; aulphur,
13 partu: and clmriiwl, 12 parm, ciiiistitutliiK the other mlxtiire.

tlS.ltSi—Auiiutt 19, ms. A. MONNIER. [KriiaHr: B,I7)—Ai>ril t7. ISSO.) Ex-

ptimiir rimip*iuud.

Coal tar or other tarry matter In inlxc<l with cxplmdve compounds containing
(lOtAMjihini I'hlorate to nuiliion and wKreKate the imrllcleii of chlorate. The
uota.ssiutn chli.mte and other soluble in«riHlk'nl.s are dln-iolveil in water, the
In.>4>liible iUKredientii which Ht>sorb the soluble Hutjutunei^ are adde<l, the din-
solved Kiilts crvstalllzed by evaporation and agitation, the masa ground, and
the coal tar added with heating and kneading.

iiO.Mi:,— (yclnlirr 7, iS79. J. I'ATTISON. ImprinemriU in cxploiivf. cnmpmmdt.

.\n oleaginous flour or meal Ih oomblneil with an explofllve compound having
for lt« Iwwe chlorate of potiwh to prevent prematura and spontaneoun explosion.

ftM,.M4— Ortoiurr J4. W». O. B. HARDY, /mprotwneii* in bliuting jmwder.

II Ik compo»e<l of crude nitrate of .soda, TS pounds : sulphur, 20 pounds : char-
coal. 20 pounds', common salt, 10 pounds; sugar, .t pounds; and paramne, 3
pounds.

tii.lB9—t)ntvnbeT i, 1879, E. J. WILLIAMS. ImproiTmenI in explotim com-

poumif.

It consists of potosgium chlorate, 8 pounds: prussiate of potash, 1 pound ;
bichromate of potash, 2 ounces; nutgalls, 5 ounces; cannel coal, 2 ounces;
stanch, 6 ounces; and crude coal oil, 6 ounces.

tU,IRS—ilay 10, ISSl, T. P. SLEEPER. Blotting powder.

It consists of pota«sliun chlorate, 8 parts ; sugar, 7 parts; and charcoal, 1 part.
tes.SlS— December S, ISSS, C. F. MOHRIO. Explmive compound.

It con.sists of |K>tHssium chlorate. .W to 70 [uirts ; sugar. 12 to 15 parts ; charcoal.
& parts ; black oxide of manganese, h parts ; metallic zinc, 10 to 20 parts ; water
and wax. 10 parts.

!7.f. 309— February S7, ISSi. N. WIARD. Xanx^facture of gunpowder

It is formed in perforated pellets or grains with tapering perforations, the
exterior surface being of greater density than its Interior surface.

tSl,S6S—July 17, ISSS. M. E. SANLAVILLE AND R. LALIGANT. Mami/acture

I)/ explotim compoundt.

A composition consisting of carbonaceous matter, alkaline chlorate and
nitrate, aJkalinc bisulpbate, and glycerine.

tS9.756— December 4, 18SS. S. R. DIVINE. Explotive: compound

It consisLs of a solid ingredient, a-s potassium chlorate, about 7J parts, and a
liquid Ingredient, lus the heavy oil of coal tar (dead oil), 1 part: mechanically
united.

tS9.760— December 4, 188S. S. R. DIVINE. Explosive compound.

It consists of potassium chlorate, about 8) parts and turpentine, 1 part;
mechanically mixed.

tS9,76i—Deeemberi,188S. 8. R. DIVINE. ExpUmve compound.

From 1 to S per cent of sulphur Is combined with the moist mass of No. 289,756
(potasdtun chlorate and dead oil).

tS9 7«i— December 4. ISSS. S. R. DIVIKE. Composition Jar preparing explosive
compounds.

A fluid mixture constituting the liquid ingredient of an explosive consists of
the liquid ingredient of the explosive — as dead oil— and a volatile fluid, such as

bisulphide of ' ' ' '^

fluid.

S7i.7U>— December IS, lam. L. O, KEl'tWHR.V. KrpUislrf mmpoitnd.

It consists of coal oil and glycerine, together with pMarflnin or sodlnm
nitrate, sulpbal« of Iron and sulpnuric acid, carlxmaceooa mailer siMl inlphur.

bisulphide of carbon having finely divided sulphur dissolved in the volatile

Slt.010— February 10, 1S85. R. 8. PENNIMAX. ProUaed nitrate of ammonia for
use in explosive compounds.

Granulated or linely divided nitrate of ammonia is protected against deli-
quescence by a coating of petroleum or Its soft and viscous products.

Sli.^l^Uarch 31, 1885. A. GACON. Blasting powder.

A mixture of nitrate of potash (or soda), 69 parts; flowers of sulphur, 19 parts;
ashes, 12 parts; and tannin, 2 parts; all by weight.

StO.JiSS—June 2S, ISSB. R. S. PENNIMAX. Explosive compound.

A high explosive consisting of nitrate of ammonia coated with petroleum or
its si>ft products— No. 312,010 — combined with potassium chlorate asa detonator.

S3S,lSi— December ». 1885. R. S. PENNIMAX. Explosive compound.

It is composed of protected grains of nitrate of ammonia— No. 312,010— and
grains of potassium chlorate mixed with a dry powdered material— a.<i carbonate
Of magnesia— to prevent the latter from caking.

S.W,eil— November 16, 1886. E. DU PONT. Explosive compound.

It consists of a nitrate and sulphur combined with charcoal retaining Its
flbrous structure (baked wood).

S8t,899—May 10, 1887. T. NORDENFELT AND V. A. MEURLING. iran^rac■
lure qf gunpowder.

Sulphur is incorporated with carbonaceous matter, by dissolving the sulphur
in bisulphide of carbon. Impregnating the carbonaceous matter with the solu-
tion, and evaporating the bisulphide. It is then impregnated with saltpeter or
equivalent salt In solution, and the solvent evaporated. Cotton or other vege-
table fiber is treated with hydrochloric acid (gaseous or liquid) to obtain
carbonaceous matter.

363,887— May 31, 1887. E. DU PONT. Explosive compound.

A compound of a nitrate, sulphur, charcoal retaining its fibrous structure, and
a carbohydrate, as sugar.

370,0t5— September IS, 1887. K. J. 8UND8TROM. Blasting powder.

A mixture of sodium nitrate, say 370 parts; wood tar, 70 parts; resin, 38 parts;
and sulphur. .W parts; produced by moistening the nitrate with a solution of
the wood tar and resin, and then mixing with the coated nitrate a solution of
the sulphur In a volatile solvent, as bisulphide of carbon.

S76JU9— January U, laia. (;. K. BICHEL. ttnnufaiiurt. i^ a^aitt§.

Sulphur and a hydrocarbon arc distilled in the presence of ona anolher. and
IwtasHiiim nitrate, or equivalent oxygen-bearing anbutaoce, la added Xo the
resultant body.

SSl,sm— April 17. 1888. C. J. 0LD8. Gunpowder.

It consists of carbonized peas, combined with sallpeler, snlphur, and char-
coal from willow or other tree*.

S9S,6Sl—\orrmbeT t7, 1888. A. FA VI KR. Kxplmlve and method of making same.
An explosive consisting of a highly corapresscl Intermixture of a nitrate and
a hvdrtM'arbon, produced by mixing a pulverized nitrate, as ammonium nltiale,
and a waterproof hydrocarbon fusible at a low temperature, and agglomerat'
Ing the mixture under high pressure.

SSf!,095— January S9, 1889. R. SJOBERO. Blasting compound.

It conslslji of ammonium oxalate, a nonnltrated hydrocarbon, as luphthaleoe,
and i>otaxsium chlorate, with or without a liquid nonvolatile hydrocarbon, as
astral oil.

US.6SS— December St, 1889. A.F.WOODS. Ounpowdcr.

A mixture of potassium chlorate. 4 parts; yellow pruaslate of polaab, 1 part;
and a carbohydrate, such aa sugar, 1 part.

UB,Sei— March 17, 1891. R. S. PENNI-VAN. iVociua of manufacturing nitrate of

ammonia.

Protected nitrate of ammonia Ls produced by mixing the protecting medium
with the nitrate while in a melted condition, cooling, and graining by agita-
tion. Nitric flcld is mixed with ammonlacal liquor, scttlcil. and concentrated
by cvatiorating the main portion of the water, dehydrated, and then mixed,
while in Its initially melted condition, with the grain-protecting medliun.

m.S^g—May 10, 189t. F. ROLLER. .Wannfacture of explosives.

A compound consisting of nitrate grains coated with colophony, with or
without a solid, fatty substance, such as spermaceti, and an oil In which the
colophony Is diaaolved, such as cottonseed oil.

tas.lts— September fl, 1891. F. AUCHMAN. Blasting-powder.

It consists of malt germs or cooma, ammonium nitrate, and potasslimi chlo-
rate.

51i,0l4i— January 1, 18»i. H. MAXIM. Process qf making chlorate blasftng-

powder.

Potassium chlorate and sodium, or potassium nitrate, are combined in a state
of fusion and reduced to a fine state of division prior to the admixture of com-
bustible elements. The oxygen-bearing salt is first fused and the potassium
chlorate then added.

6ia,7f!S—July 16, 1895. F. G. A. BROBERG. Blasting-powder.

A free running powder consisting of particles of nitrate of soda coated with a
mixture of resin and sulphur; produced by addingdry pulverized nitrate of soda
to melted sulphur and resin and agitating the mixture.

SIS,56i~Septemba- 17, 1895. B. C. PETTINGELL. Blasttng-powder.

Process of manufacture consists In first immersing the powdered carbon singly
and alone in an aqueous solution of niter, and afterwards adding and mechan-
ically mixing the other ingredients, as sulphur and woodpalp.

565,593— August 11, 1896. M. BIELEPELDT. Se^fely explosive.

Formed of from 90 to 92 parts of ammonium nitrate, 5 parts of resin, and from
3 to 5 parts of a chromium compound, such as chromous hydroxid.

593,568— November 16, 1897. H. R. VON DAHMEN. Blasting powder.

It is composed of ammonium nitrate, phenanthrene. and potasalum bichro-
mate; produces a low explosion temperature.

698,096— February 1, 1898. T. lEVLEY. Explosive.

A compound consisting of potassium chlorate: a metallic oxid or oxides, as
sesquloxid of iron and oxid of manganese; petroleum, and turpentine; with
or without a moderator, such as an oil of the latly-acid series, as oil of almonds.

608,316— August 2, 1898. (i. fiENEK£. Explosive and method of making same.

A compound of ammonium nitrate, resin, and an alkaline carbonate, with
or without an oxidizing material such as alkaline chromate; produced by
incorporating the alkaline carbonate (and the oxidizing material i with the
resin when the tatter is in a liquid state, cooling and pulverizing, and then
incorporating with the ammonium nitrate.

84r,«0«— ^pra 17, 1900. R. S. PENNIMAN AND J. C. 8CHRADER. Resinous dope

and method of making same.

Vulcanized resin, adapted for use in explosive-compound dopes, produced by
mixing resin and sulphur, highly beating for vulcanizing the resin, then cool-
ing, breaking up, ana pulverizing.

eSO,ttS—May it, 1900. M. BIELEFELDT. Explosive.

A compressed mixture of sodium nitrate, potaaslom nitrate, sulphur, coal tar,
and potassium bichromate, the proportion of sodium nitrate bemg greatertban
the aggregate of the other ingredients.

6iS,SSt— August 24, 1900. J. ROSS AND W. D. CAIRNEY. Blasting potsder.

A mixture of potassium chlorate. 75 per cent: black oxide of manganeae, 6 per
cent; charcoal, b per cent; wax, 9 per cent; and vaseline, 4 per cent. Process of
manufacture consists in granulating the potassium chlorate, mixing therewith
the granulated charcoal and black oxide of manganese, then mixing in the
wax, and heating until moist with the melted wax. then adding the vaseline
to fill all crevices and supplement the coating.

6S8,0i»— August 14. 1900. J. ROSS AND W. D. CAIRNEY*. Exploslte md process

v/ making same.

A mixture of potassium chlorate, 87 per cent; charcoal, 3 per cent; wax, 7 per
cent; and vaseline, 3 per cent; the proceaa being the aame aa No. 6B6,8S2.

656,678— August 28, 1900. J. A. STRANSKY*. Smotdess pouider.

A compound of potasaiiun chlorate, 20 oancee; sugar, 16 onncea; alum, 1 dram;
sulphur, 1 dram; and alcohol.

248

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

N ITROGLYCERIN E.

50,617— October U. 1S65. A. NOBEL. (ReiesiKs: Div. A, 3,S77—Apra 13, 1889; i,815,

March 19, lS7i; B.etl, October il, ISTS; 6,798, March 17, Wi. Div. B, 5,>78—Apra

IS, 1S69; J,.816, March 19, IS72; 5,6«0, October SI. 187S; 6,800, March 17. ISIU. Div.

C, S,S79— April IS, 1869: t,,817, March 19, 1872. Div. D, 3,S80— April IS, 1869; l,,818,

March 19,1872.) Improved substitute for gunpowder.

Nitroglycerine is exploded, throughout its entire mass, by confining same
and subjecting it to excessive pressure, or to an impulse of explosion, as by
means of an auxiliary explosive, an electric spark or heat, or other means.

It is placed either within or around an exploding charge or igniter.

In the manufacture of nitroglycerine streams of acids and of glycerine are
poured together into a mixing tube and discharged into water maintained at a
low temperature.

67,176-AuffUst li, 1866. A.NOBEL. [Reissues: A e,6S7— April S. 1867, product:
Ji 2.638— April e, 1867, process; B, Div. 1, 3,381- April IS, 1869, process: B, Div. 2,
3,S8S— April IS, 1869, apparatus.) Improved explosive compound.
Nitrine or crystallizing nitroglycerine, produced by the admixture of

glycerine, sulphuric acid, and nitnc acid, free, or nearly free, from hj-ponitrio

acid.

60,673— December 18, 1866. T. P. SHAFFNER. Dnprovement in methods of blast-
ing xvith nitrolcum.

The nitroglycerine may be mixed with sand, for blasting; or the charge is
poured into the hole, tamped with water, and fired with a tamping charge near
the top; or the water tamping may be omitted and the firing canister suspended
near the top of the hole, with the blasting charge in the bottom, ana space
between, there being sand tamping above the former.

76,i99— April 7, 1868. G. M. MOWBRAY. Improvement in the manufacture of

nllroglycerine.

Compressed air, dried and cooled, is Introduced during the process of manu-
facture, to preserve a low temperature, and convert any hyponitrous acid pro-
duced.

86, 906 -January 19, 1869. S. CHESTER AND O. BURSTENBINDER. Improved

method of preparing nitroglycerine.

The ingredients are mixed under an atmosphere which will not support com-
bustion, as carbonic-acid gas. The mixture is cooled 'by the ebullition of cool
compressed carbonic-acid gas through it and caused to rotate by means of jets
of escaping gas.

86,707 — February 9, 1869. T. P. SHAFFNER. Improvement in preserving nitro-
glycerine, etc.
Wat«r is placed in a vessel containing nitroglycerine for transportation or

storage.

93,766— August 17, 1869. T. P. SHAJ'FNER. Improvemad in the manufacture of
nitro-glycerine.
A cold water jacketed tank is used, having curved agitating arms.

98,1^6— December S8, 1869. T. P. SHAFFNER. Improvement in the manufacture

of nitro-glycerine.

It is washed and agitated by forcing water and air into it by means of a per-
forated pipe at the bottom of a tank.

98,U26 — December 28, 1869. T. P. SHAFFNER. Improved process of preserving

nitrolcum and oilier explosive liquids.

Sponge, or like elastic porous substance, is used to hold nitroglycerine in
suspension for storage or transportation. It is released by immersing charged
sponge in warm water — say 60° F.

112,81,8— March 21, 1871. E. A. L. ROBERTS. Improvemait in the manufacture of

nitro-glycerine.

The amount of sulphuric acid in the acid bath is gradually increased simul-
taneou.sly with the i>ouring in of the glycerine. The proportionate amount of
sulphuric acid used in the first instance is reduced.

112,8/49 — March 21, 1871. E. A. L. ROBERTS. Improvement in the manufacture of

nitro-glycerine.

The glycerine is introduced in a bath of mixed acids in which a rapid circula-
tion of the fluid contents of the bath is maintained.

121,898— December 12, 1871. E. A. L. ROBERTS. Improvement in the manufacture

of nitro-glycerine.

The acids and glycerine are mixed in a water-cooled tube so constructed as to
produce the tumbling or cascading of the liquids within.

137,UU0 — April 1, 1873. A. HAMAR. Impovenwnt in the manufacture of nitro-
glycerine.

The acid and glycerine flow through a trough and discharge upon a cooling-
coil, into a solution of sodium chloride.

16l„t60—June 8, 1876. P. CASTELLANOS. Impratmnent in the manufacture of
nitro-sulphuric acid for manufacturing nitro-glycerine.
See Group I, Mixed Acids.

16U,261—June 8, 1875. P. CASTELLANOS. Improvement in recovering acids from

residuum of nitro-glycerine manufacture.

See Group I, Mixed Acids.
226,867- April 27, 1880. F. MANN. Process of manufacturing nitro-glycerine.

Nitroglycerine is separated from its acid mother liquor bv freezing the mixed
acids and nitroglycerine and then separating the crystallized nitroglycerine
by a centrifugal machine.

21,0,616— April 26, 1881. L. HINCKLEY. Melltod of handling nitro-glycerine.

Nitroglycerine is confined in closed vessels, tubes, cartridges, or shells under
pressure, to render it nonexplosive by ordinary shocks or jars. It can be thus
fired from a gun with ordinary gunpowder.

21,1,91,1— May li, 1881. G. S. DEAN. Method of preparing nitro-glycerine com-
pounds.
Nitroglycerine is mixed with a pulverulent nitro-compound and water (say

2 to 3 per cent of water) to increase the safety in handling and transportation.

262.769— August 16, 1882. W. N. HILL. Process of and apparatus for the produetion

of nitro-glycerine.

Glycerine is mixed with a portion only of the acid, the reaction taking place
with agitation by air or otherwise, then the partiallv converted mixture is passed
into another and larger vessel, and the nece&sary quantity of acid added to
complete the conversion.

1,13,070— October 16, 1889. E. LIEBERT. Manttfacturc of explosives.

Isoamvl nitrate is added to nitroglycerine, or a mixture of glycerine with
isoamyrnitrate or isoamyl alcohol is nitrated, to lower the freezing point and
make the nitroglycerine less sensitive to shocks.

1,32,336— July IS, 1890. S. D. SMOLIANINOFF. Explosive compound.

Amixtureof nitroglycerine and an alcohol, as methyl alcohol, with or without
an absorbent and a fulminate.

1,1,9,687— April 7, 1891. H. S. MAXIM. Process of and apparatus fur making

explosives.

The glycerine and the nitrating agent are separately atomized and then inter-
mingled as spray, and the mixture quenched with water. Also claims for the
apparatus.

1,67,002 — August I,, 1891. E. K. MITTING. Process of making nitro-glycerine.

A charge of glycerine is nitrated, the spent acid drawn off and the product
treated anew with a fresh charge of nitrating acid in exce-ss, and finally the
nitroglycerine separated from the fresh excess charge of acid, which is used to
nitrate a second charge of glycerine, repeating the operation in the same
nitrating vessel.

1,82,372 — September 13, 189^. J. LAWRENCE. Process of recovering nitro-glycerine

from waste acids.

The glycerine is nitrated and the nitroglycerine separated from the waste
acids, then sulphuric acid may be added to the waste acids, and they are cooled
to a temperature below the freezing point of nitroglycerine and above the
freezing jioint of the acids, and the remaining nitroglycerine recovered.

CELLULOSE NITRATES AND OTHER ORGANIC NITRATES.

I„871r— December 6, 181,6. C. F. SCHSnBEIN. Improvement in preparation of
cotton-wool and other substances as substitutes for gunpowder.
Vegetable fibrous substances are treated with a mixture of nitric acid and
sulphuric acid, or with pure nitric acid of greatest specific gravity. The ex-
plosive cotton may be impregnated with potassium nitrate or other chemical
substitutes.

1,3,166 — June U, ISei. W. LENK. Improved gun-cotton.

Gun-cotton is produced by a process involving a specific series of steps, in-
cluding, among others, the immersion of the gun-cotton in a solution of water-

1,7,316 — April 18,1866. J. P. McLEAX. Improvement in the manufacture of gun-
cotton and lint.

The fibers of the Asclepias syriaca, or milkweed, are used, either as fiber or in
the form of yarn or fabric made thereof.

60,082— September 19, 1S66. J. J. IlEVY. Improrement in the manufacture of gan-

cotton.

The process calls for a specified series of steps, the acid mixture being formed
of monhydrated nitric acid of a specific gravity not under l.b2 and mono-
hydrated sulphuric acid of a specific gravity not under 1.84. It is spun into a
lightly twisted yarn. The cotton yarn is boiled in a weak solution of water
gla-ss. The yarn is wound into the form of cartridges, or spun into ropes, woven
into cloth, and then made up into cartridges.

60,083— September 19, 1S86. 3. J. RifeVY. Improvemait in the manufacture of gun

cotton.

The cotton is prepared by washing in an alkaline solution. In treating with
acid, small and regular quantities are dipped in a considerable quantity of
acid, fresh acid being added after each dipping to compensate for that removed.
The acid is removed from the exterior of the fiber by saturating with water and
treating in a centrifugal machine, and from the interior of the fiber by placing
the fiber on perforated shelves and percolating water therethrough. Water
glass is applied by means of a centrifugal machine, the solution being applied
cool.

69,888— November 20, 1S86. F. A. ABEL. Improvement in lite manufacture of gun-
cotton,.

Gun-cotton is reduced to a pulp and consolidated, with or without pre-ssure,
into solid forms, with or without the admixture of binding materials. Soluble
and insoluble gun-cotton may be combined, pulp mixed with fibrous cotton,
and the compressed forms coated with soluble gun-cotton, or shellac.

60,671— December 18, 1866. T. P. SHAFFNER. Improvement in the manufacture of
gun-cotton. ■

Saturation and washing are performed under pressure, to compel the fluids
to thoroughly permeate the fiber.

93,767— August 17, 1869. T. P. SHAFFNER. Improved method of blasting with

gunpowder and other explosive substances.

Non or partially explosive materials are interposed between the fibers of gun-
cotton, grains of powder, or nitrated or explosive materials to spread the action
of the gases.

121,,610— March 12, 1872. R. PUNSHON. Improvement in explosive eompouvdt

from gun-cotton.

Sugar is mixed with gun-cotton; as by dissolving sugar equal to one-third of
the weight of the cotton in a minimum quantity of boiling water, thoroughly
mixing finely cut gun-cotton therewith, and drying.

128,1,60— June 26, 1872. J. B. MUSCHAMP. Improvement in explosive substances

and processes of manufacturing the same.

Comminuted cellulose woody fiber, purified of sap and mineral salts bv treat-
ment in strong caustic soda under pressure and washed, is treated with the acid
bath, washed, and steeped in an alkaline solution, washed, and dried; the first
dip producing the strongest explosive. A second quantity of fiber is treated in
the same bath (second dip) to produce a weaker explosive; and a third for a
still weaker explosive. To retard the rapidity of explosion it is steeped in a
solution of starch.

139,738— June 10, 1873. T. P. SHAFFNER. Improvement in explosive compounds.

Gun-cotton, or other nitrated fibrous substance, is combined with nitrated

water, or liquids, or paraffine, or beeswax, or any oleaginous or resinous matter.

Il,l,e61,—Augusl 12, 1873. S. .1. MACKIE. Improvement in tlie manufacture of
gun-cotton.

Gun-cotton is crushed to destroy its capillary structure and reduce it to an
impalpable mass, and then granulated. It is dried in vacuo.

DKJKST (^F PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMK^AL INDdSTRIEH.

249

»M.«M— OrtoN-r ;;, W7.r H. T. ANTHONY
cotton/or Ihf mannfrtcturf o/ niUodiun

lmpnn>rmrni in prrpariiin «*ilubU:

AftiT !>>•■ ortllnnrr iicid tri'ittmont and waahing, wiluble cotton U mhjetrlol
to volnlilliol iilknlf. h.i nmmonia, to rpmovc tracoa of »cld.

ilOfilt—Drnmbrr in, is:s. .1, W. HYATT. ImpmiriHfnt In appariUHt and proc-

r*9r»J*ir tJir inann/acturr tif nitrn-ctUtUote,

Holublo liber li iiittde <niin paper by anccoMlvr mepn of "dlnlnloKratlon " Into
minute lliikes; •convemloii '' In an acid bath (with eentrldiifal and centripetal
Kwlrlii); •■desiccation" by dry I ng In n centrifugal machine: and "ablution."
rialmii nro made for the apparatun.

;■.-!.. ... ISM. 3. A. ARKAHLT. J. AND C. SCHMERBER. ProccM for

■I uitTi>^irrittxthvii/rom cfuutoM, ftc.
N .1 ivcH are produced by trt'atlnu the cellulose, Btarch, glucose, etc.,

Willi lliu lumes of nitric acid or nitric acid In a gB«cou.« .itatc.

i3H.yie—.Varch 15, ISSI. F. 0. KEIL. Kxitinrier ntmpouiui.

It l« composed of nitroglueote (dexIro-KliK-ose made from starch) dissolved
In a volHtllc solvent, such iw alcohol, and mixed with potassium nitrate, potoa-
►lum chlorate, and prcparwl vegetable llbcr.

SU,S9S—Ju«f U, tSSl. G. 8. DEAN. Pronu <if making nUnniextrine.

Vegetable fiber Is trcatwl with dilute sulphuric acid, whereby its structure is
dc»tno'e<l and dcxlrinulion commenced, and afterwards It Is nitrated with con-
centrated nltro-iiulphurlc acid.

SU,ll7i—July 19. IS81. C. A. FAURE AND G. TRENCH. Explotivt blading

material.

It consists of inlimatcly mixed carbonaceous and oxidizing materials In gran-
ular form, with flnely divided nltro<>ellulosedistribiiIed around the granules.

SU>,i»0—\oiv)nhcr IS, tSSI. C. W. VOLNEY. KjrjiloKiiv compound.

A mixture of monoehlordlnitrin or chlorpro[>enyldlnltratc, and a nitrate of
potassium, sodium, tiarium, or other suitable alkaline metal, in equivalent
quantities to effect a mutual decomposition, with or without chlorates of the
said metals, vegetable fiber, or charcoal.

SSl.liS—Dece'nber so. ISSI. 0. VON PLANITZ. Kxplmive compound.

A b«.io tor explosives formed by the combination of nitric acid and resin, pro-
duce<l by spreading pulverized resin on a liath of nitric acid and water heated
to the boiling point, and skimming off the resulting soft foamy product.

!Bi,eoi>— January U, ISSt. C. DITTMAR. £rpfo»it« compound.

" Clilomitrosaccharose," or nitro-sugar, produced by dissolving sucrose in
chlorhydrin and then converting it into a nitro compound.

t7i.SSS— March SO, ISSS. J. \V. HYATT AND F. V. POOL. MannfaUurc oj

pyroryline.

The Hber is treated with acid; the residual acid is then freed from matter in
suspension by use of barium sulphate or otherwise, and the spent acid is analyzed
and Its strength restore*! accoraing to the original formula.

grs.SiS—ilay 1. ISSS. A. J. LANFREY. Manufacture, of fx]>lotire compounds.

An explosive compound consisting of nitrocellulose made from straw and
oxidating substances, such as riitroglvccrine, niter, or mixture of niter and
carbonaceous matter. The straw is disintegrated, triturated, washed, treated
Willi acid, washeii, and disacldulated. It is formed into sheets or leaves and
the paper converted into nitrocellulose.

g99,SS7^une S, ISSi. E. SCH BRING. Preparation of eoUodion.

Pure collodion cotton (free from acid) is dissolved in ether and alcohol, and
distilled, after filtration, to an extent to permit of the mass being cast into
forms. It is nonexplofdve.

S0U.sei— September t. ISSi. 1. 8CHULH0F. Jizplotiee preparation made from

gun-cotton.

Gun-cotton is Impregnated with fat, compressed, and coated with collodion.
)0t,CI9— October li, ISSi. F. V. POOL. Xanitfacture of-soluble nilro-ceUulose.

The strength of the spent acids is restored in bulk by introducing the proper
quantity of a nitrate.

S0»,7S7— December t», 18SI,. E. JTDSON. Ejcploeive compound.

A mixture of nitrocellulose or other equivalent detonating or fulminating
compound with a dope prepared l>y pulverizing, drying, and mixing sofiium
nitrate, 70 parts; and anthracite coal, 10 parts; and mixing same in a melted
mixture of sulphur, 15 parts; resin, 3 parts: and asphalt, 2 parts: stirring and
cooling the dope until the grains cease to adhere.

S1S.»57— April', JSSS. M. VON FORSTER. Coating gun-cotton.

Pure gun-cotton is compressed and then treated with a solvent as ethylic
acetate, which will dissolve part of the gun-cotton, and on drying leave a hard
lilm or coating of gun-cotton.

SSS,87t— January 5, 1SS6. M. F. LIXDSLEY'. EjcploHie compound.

A mixture of nitrocellulose, 50 pounds; saltpeter, 38 pounds; charcoal, 5
pounds: potaadum chlorate, S pounds; starch, 2 pounds: and potassium carbon-
ate, 2 pounds.

S36,Stt—f\tinvary tS, 1886. F. V. POOL. Art qf manufacturing nilro-ceUuU»e.

In the manufacture of nitroceiluioKc a spent bath is restored and purified by
introducing a suitable quantity of sulphuric acid and a nitrate, according to
' the requirements as shown by an analysis, and effecting the crystallization and
removal of the resulting by-product.

.Vfi.Vfi— April to, isse. M. BIELEFELDT. EzplonK compound.

It consists of nllroccUulosc. with or without nitroglycerine, with nitrate of
ammonia in water of ammonia.

S!,I,15S—May i, 1886. M. F. LINDSLEY'. Procrm of mating explotive compoundt:

A mixture of wood fiber, charcoal, bituminous coal, and starch is formed into

line powder and then into grains, treated with acids, the free acid removed,

and the grains then treated In a solution of potassium carbonate and saltpeter.

SiS.Sia—June IS, ISae. F. v. pool. Art of makintj nUro-cMulute.

Spent acids ate restored and purified by adding a suitable quantity of a nitrate,
which is decompoDcd, the liberated nitric acid strengthening the bath, while the
ba-sc forma, with sulphuric acid present, an insoluble comiMiund which acts as
a settling agent. Fresh sulphuric acid may be introduced with the nitrate or
afterwards.

S.W.un—fklnbrr It. IHIM. (!. Nf, MOWBRAY. M' '-■-'..,-

The spent acid is roton-fl In mn-ngth and I
analysis by fortifying and adding t/i the dralm 'I
tion a mixturo of ciincentrated sulphuric and nitrir fi<-i<i«.

II Atl'l

nllrs

,%M,WI—nfinber It. tSS«. «. M. MfiWBItAY

The use of •tocled nui
" Beaaemcr prooeai >te«l " for tanks:

Mannfnfiurr qf pyrorj/Hn^.

The use of •tocled nut-iron pots Is clalmol for holding the mlxe<l aclda, and

also Ntnictural details of apparatus.

M9,t8»— March IS, ISS7. E. HCHTLTZK. Ounpowdrr.

A composition of a nltro-hydr(K-«rbiiret (such as nitrr>-colophony, t«r, Carpen-
tlne, or turpcntlne-oll). pyroxyllne, nnd nitrates or mIi> furnishing oxygen In
combination with nitrogen: as colophony. 12 parts; pyroxyllne, Mlo to piutii:
barium nitrate, 60 to HO parts; and |Mitasslum nitrate, K to 10 parts.

SM,I97—May 17, ISS7. R. BERNSTEIN. Oranuiar nil co-rrUuliHr .

Prepared from the pulverized niit«, (riiibi, nr shi'llx i>( nuts of the PhylrJephat
maerocttrpa, or "vegetable Ivory" and kindred plants, and forming smooth
grains that pack without cohesion.

»M,tHl—July IS, ISIfJ. C. W. VOLNEY. Hxplonivr compound.

A solution of nitro-staroh in nitroglycerine: also the same witli oxidants, as
chlorates and nitrates.

S7I.S7»— October II, ISS7. H. SCHONKWEO. KrpU>iiire.

Consisting in nitrated carburets of hydrogen and nitrated cellDloie with an
oxalate or oxalic acid.

1.17, S77— December 17. 18S». J. F. A. MITMM. Krploftre compound.

A mixture of pota-sslum chlorate, 1 pound; antimony, A ounces; charcoal, 1
ounce; flowersof sulphur, 2 ounces; glycerine. 1 ounce: collisiiun. I iMince; sul-
phuric add, 4 drops: nitric acid, 2 dni{w; alcohol. 3 ounciw; and water, 2 to 3
ounces.

it0.iU—Pebruary U. ISBO. J. R. FRANCE. SolubU nltro-ceUulooe and proem t^

mant^facture.

Soluble nitrocellulose composed of pure mechanically comminuted cotton
fiber nitmted, produced by mechanically reducing cotton to a uniform and
homogeneous dust-like condition ami then treating with a bath of nitric and
sulphuric acids, in the proportions, say, of nitric acid, 42*^ Baumt^, « parts, and
sulphuric add, 60° Baum<;, 12 part".

ilO,U6— February i, 1890. J. R. FRANCE. Tmoluble nitrocOlulote and preparing

the same.

Insoluble nitrocellulose consisting of pure mechanically comminutd cotton
nitrateii. finKlneed tiy mechanically reducing cotton to a uniform homogeneous
dust-like condition, treating it in a bath of nitric and sulphuric acids in the
usual proportions and strength, at atx>ut "ih^ ¥., for about fifteen minuter,
and pressing out the superabundant acids, and washing.

iSO,l,77— February i, 1S90. J. R. FRANCE. VuttonjCber dual and preparing the

same.

Mechanically comminuted cotton-fiber dust for the manufacture of nitro-
cellulose, produced by forming the cotton into a card or lap and cutting or
otherwise reducing the fibers in their natural state to cotton dust by mccbanical
means.

iS0.11S—June 17, 1S90. H. 8. MAXIM. Recovering solvents from explosives.

In the manufacture of explosive material, the dissolved material is exposed in
receptacles in a drying cliamber and a constant drculation of air or gas main-
tained through the drying chamber and a communicating condensing cham-
ber, the air or gas being heated before entering the drying chamber.

/M,tS7— August It,
cellulose.

1S90. a. M. MOWBRAY. Process iff manufacturing nitro-

A continuous web of cellulose paper is moved tltrough an acid tiath, com-
pressed, then through a washing fluid, dried, and a solvent is tnen distributed
upon the continuously moving web, and it is formed into a roll to diffuse the
solvent.

U3.I0S— December tS,lS90. G.M.MOWBRAY'. .VeUwd rif pre]xiring nitrocettutotc.
Cellulose material, whether fibrous, felted, or textile, Is impregnated by crys-
tallizing a salt, preferably sodic nitrate, in the interstices of the material: the
dry saline-impregnated cellulose niateriul is then immersed in a bath of sul-
phuric and nitric acids, and then removed, washed, ond dried.

iSi. SSI— June 16, 1891. H.S.MAXIM. Method qf making gun-cotton.

Charges of cotton arc treated in a given order in each of a series of acid vats,
the excess of acid expressed from the cotton and returned to the vat from which
it was taken, and a.s the acid in said vats becomes spent the weakest acid of the
first vat of the series is replaced with fresh add and the order of immersion
changed in accordance with the relative strength of the acid in the several vats.

kSS.SUS— June SO. 1891. H. DE CHABDONXET. Manufacture t^ pyrozyUne.

Process consists in the successive steps of nitration, centrifugal extraction of
spent acids, washing of the pyroxyllne, and neutralization of the wash water by
an alkaline or t>adc nt '.erial to recover the residue of nitric acid left in the
pyroxyllne by the centrifugal action, and reuse of the watei with successive
quantities of pyroxyllne.

i6S,t80— December 15. ISSl. H.MAXIM. Method qf making nitrocettulose.

Pyroxyline of a high grade is produced by Immersing the cellulose for a shori
time in a bath of strong-acids mixture, then conveying said cellulose with con-
tained acids (amounting to. say, si.x or more limes the weight of cellulose) to a
second bath coittaiuing many times the weight of the cellulose of a weaker acids
mixture, and there completing the conversion by digesting for ■ coiuddenble
time.

474,778— Jfai/ 10, 189t. H. MAXIM. Process of malting nltrocettulose.

Cellulose is llrat converted into a lower nitro compound, such as dinitio-
cellulose. In a preliminary bath of suitable acMs. the excess of acid removed by
mechanical means and washing, then dried, and then Immersed in a stionjrer
bath of acids suitable to convert it into trinltroceliulose, or pyroxyllne. The
adhering strong adds arc washi^l therefrom Into the first bath by paiHtng the
weaker acids mixture through it and back Into the t>ath.

1,79,988— Augusts, lS9t. H.MAXIM. MetJad qf raloring nitrating acids.

A quantity of drv nitrate is added to the weakened mixture, the acid sul-
phate allowed U) crystallize, the liquor is removed from the crystals by a cen-
trifugal machine, and the crystals further washed by a portion of the weakened
mixture.

250

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

iS7,OSO—Xorembere9,lS9i. J. V. SKOGLOND. Explosive powder.

It consists of dried grains of nitrated cellulose gelatinized by means of a
solvent containing a fat or fatty acid, with or without saltpeter.

SU.SSO—Febniary 13, 1S9!,. R. C. SCHCPPHAUS. Xiiro compound and process

0/ making same.

A pyroxyline composition having urea incorporated therewith, to secure
stability.
516,S9&—Marcli }S, 189!,. H. M. CHAPMAN. Explosive.

The combination with a nltro-explosive as an agglomerating agent of formic
ether.
S16,9Si— March SO, 1891,. F. G. DU PONT. Process of drying nitrocellulose.

Wet nitrocellulose is placed in a hydrocarbon oil, as kerosene, and the oil
vaporized, thereby removing the water from the fiber.

5S6,7Si— October 2, 1891,. R. C. SCHiiPPHAUS. Process o/ nitrating cellulose.

The weakened acid bath is restored by adding sulphuric anhydrid and nitric
acid ; with oil of vitriol in certain cases.
S!,l.S99—Jul!/ 1, 1895. B. THIEME. Process of making nilropentaerythrU.

Nitropentaervthrit, suitable for use as a smokeless explosive, is produced by
treating pentaervthrit, which is produced by the condensation of acetyldehyde
and formaldehyde in the presence of lime, with concentrated nitric and sul-
phuric acids.
5l,J,,9Sl,— August go, 189S. H.MAXIM. High explosive.

An intimate mechanical mixture, in a fine state of division, of an explosive
colloid of gun-cotton and nitroglycerine and wet fibrous gun-cotton; the lat-
ter may hold in suspension In its pores a solution of an oxygen bearing salt,
such a-s nitrate of ammonia.
6U0.160— December S6, 1899. C. F. HENGST. Explosive compound.

Esparto grass is mechanically disintegrated, macerated in a sulphuric-acid
and nitric-acid bath, the liquor expressed and the pulp washed, boiled in an
aqueous solution of potassium bicarbonate, the product colored with liydrochlo-
ride of triamidoazobenzene, washed and strained, dried, groiuid with s»'<rch,
charcoal, and potassium nitrate, dried, sifted, molded, and the grains water-
proofed.

ea .I,i0— April 10, 1900. A.LUCK and C. F. cross. Process of increasing stability

oj nitrocellulose.

The nitrocellulose is freed from the nitrating acid, treated with a solution of
acetone and metallic salts and alcohol, and washed in successive washes to
remove the acetone.

667,719— February 12, 1901. D. BACHRACH. Nitrocellulose or similar stibstanee

and process o/ making same.

A nitnwellulose containing a sulphate, as .sulphate of lime, constituting 30
per cent or more bv weight of the solid constituents! of the compound, forming
a noncombuslible cellulose, may be formed by adding to the other constituents
thereof carbonate of lime and sulphuric acid in proper proportions.

DYNAMITES.

78,S17—May 26, ise.f. A. NOBEL. (Reissues: 5,619— October SI, 1S7S: 6,799— March
17, 187!,: and 10,S67— January 9, 1883.) Explosive compoujui.
A combination of nitroglycerine with infusorial earth.

95,7S2— August 17, 1869. T. P. SHAFFNER. Improved explosive compound/or use

in firearms, blasting, etc.

Nitroglycerine is mixed with granulated plaster of paris.
93,753 — August 17, 1869. T. P. SHAFFNER. Improved explosive Compound.

A mixture of nitroglycerine with comminuted sponge or other vegetable
fiber, with or without the admixture of plaster of pans.

93,75!.— August 17, 1869. T. P. SHAFFNER. Improved explosive compound.

Nitroglycerine is mixed with metallic powder, such as red lead, with or with-
out an admixture of plaster of paris or any alkaline substance.

98,382 — December 28, 1869. .T. HORSLEY. Improved nitro-glycerine compound

/or blasting.

From '.iO to 2■^ per cent of nitroglycerine is incorporated with a powdered
mixture of Aleppo or other foreign gallnuts and potassiiun chlorate: or with
galls, charcoal, and pota.ssium chlorate; or galls, cream of tartar, and potassium
chlorate; or galls, hard sugar, and potassium chlorate.

ys,!.37— December 28, 1869. T. P. SCHAFFNER. Improved explosive compound.

Gun cotton is treated with nitroglycerine.
98,85!, — January IS, 1870. C. DITTM.\R. Improvement in explosive compounds.

"Dualin," consisting of cellulose, nitrocellulose, nitro-starch, nitro-mannite,
and nitroglycerine, mixed in diiTerent combinations, according to the
strength desired.

99.069— January 25, 1870. C. DITTMAR. Improved explosive agent, called " xylog-

lodine."

It consists of glycerine-starch, or glycerine-cellulose, or glycerine-mannite,or
glycerine-benzole, or analogous substances, treated with a mixture of nitric
and sulphuric acids. It is a milky reddish or white fluid and may be mixed
with cellulose or other porous substances.

120,776 — November 7, 1S71. E. A. L. ROBERTS. Improvement in explosive com-
pounds.

Asbestos is combined with nitroglycerine, or other explosives, with or with-
out infusorial earth or silica.

138.81,1— Hay 13, 1873. T. S. BEACH. Improvement in explosive compounds.

A compound formed of an alkaline nitrate, nitroglycerine or equivalent
nitro-substitution product, wood-fiber or other material containing cellulose,
and parHlTine or equivalent wax-like material.

139,!S8—June 3, 1873. E. JUDSON. Improvement in explosive compounds, or giant

powder.

A mixture of nitroglycerine with infusorial earth, sodium nitrate, resin and
sulphur, or their equivalents.

139,71,6— June 10, 1S7S. T. VARNEY. Improvement in explosive compounds.

Dynamite is granulated while it is freezin^or when frozen, and can then be
used in its frozen state.

11,1,1,55— August 5, 1873. A. NOBEL. Improvement th explosive compounds.

A mixture of sodium nitrate and resin, or their equivalents, with or without
sulphur, with nitroglycerine.
11,1,585— August 5, 1873. J. H. NORRBIN AND J. OHLSSON. Improvement tn

explosive compounds.

Nitrate or nitrite of ammonia is combined with a fulminate, as nitroglycerine.

11,6,550— January 20, 187!,. W. N. HILL. Improvement in blasting compounds or

dynamites.

A mixture of nitroglycerine and a silicious powder, prepared by precipita-
tion from solutions of tlie silicates.
150,1,28- .Vay 5, 187!,. G. M. MOWBRAY. Improvement in blasting powders.

A mixture of nitroglycerine with finely divided mica.

153,086— Jtdy 1!,, 1871,. C. L. KALMBACH. Improvanent in explosive compounds

or dynamites.

A mixture of a coarselv-ground farinaceous substance, such as corn meal, and
nitroglycerine. Nitroglycerine is packed for shipment in nonmetallic vessels,
holding, with the nitroglycerine, an equal amount in bulk of atmospheric air;
when not in transit it is stored in perpendicular or flaring-sided nonmetallic
open vessels, covered only with a film of water.

157,05!,— Xavember 17, 1871,. J. W. WILLARD. Improvement in explosive com-
pound.-^.
It is composed of carbonate of magnesia, nitrate of potash, chlorate of potash,

sugar, and nitroglycerine.

161,,263—June 8, 1875. P. CASTELLANOS. Improvement in explosive compounds.
It consists of nitroglycerine, nitrobenzole, or benzine (to reduce the point of

congelation), fibrous material, and pulverized earth.

161,,261,—June 8, 1875. P. CASTELL.4N0S. Improvement in explosive compounds.
It consists of nitroglvcerinc, potassium, or sodium nitrate, picrate, sulphur,
carbon, and a salt insuiuble and incombustible in nitroglycerine, such as the
silicates of zinc, magnesia, and lime, carbonate of zinc, etc.

ie7.503—September 7, 1875. H. COURTEILLE. [Peissue: 7,068- April IS, 1876.)
Improvement in blasting powder.

A safety bla.sting powder containing the elements of common gunpowder and
alsotheimcombinedolcment-sof nitroglycerine; produced by treating the com-
ponents of ordinary gunpowder in the presence of oleaginous or tarry matters,
peat, and metallic sulphates.

173,961— February 22, 1S76. W, F. JOHNSTON. Improvement in explosive mix-
tures.

An explosive containing salts which contain nitric acid and ammonia (as a
mixture of sodium nitrate and ammonium sulphate), that by their decomposi-
tion at the time of the explosion will produce nitrate of ammonia; as a com-
pound of salts containing nitric acid and ammonia, and a small percentage of
gunpowder, nitroglycerine, or other common explosive, to produce a primary
combustion.

175,735 — April A, 1876. A. NOBEL. Improvemod in gelaiinated explosive com-
potmds.

Gelatinated nitroglycerine, produced by dissolving in nitroglycerine a sub-
stance capable of gelatinating it, such as nitrated cotton. The process is
applicable to other explosive fluids, such as the nitrates of methyl and ethyl.

175,929 — April 11, 1876. J. COAD. Improvement in blasting comj}ounds.

A mixture of nitroglycerine and decayed wood.
177 ,988— May SO, 1876. C. G. BJORKM.\X. Improvement in explosive compounds.

A mixture of potas,sium nitrate, 20 parts; potas-sium chlorate. 20 parts;
cellulosa, 10 parts; pea-meal, 10 part.s; sawdust, 10 parts; and nitroline, 30 parts.

183,761,— October 31, 1876. E. JUDSON. (Reissue: 7,IS1— January SO, 1877.) Im-
provement in explosive compositions.

A powder consisting of particles or grains of a gas-producing material, ren-
dered nonabsorbent bv a coating of varnish or cement, as by mixing and
stirring the sodium nitrate and the coal into a mixture of molten sulphur,
resin, ancl asphalt, the powder then being rendered explosive by the admix-
ture or incorporation of nitroglycerine.

18!,,762— November 28, 1876. C. DE LACY. Improvement in explosive compositions.
It consists of pyroxyline, sawdust, pota.ssium nitrate and chlorate, and
nitroleum. (Nitro'ieum is obtained by adding stearic oil mixed with honey, or
coarse glycerine, to a mixture of nitric and sulphuric acids; the oleic mixture
being removed, washed, and impregnated with s(xla.)

190,95!,— May 22, 1877. O. BURSTENBINDER. Improvement in explosive com-
pounds.
Vegetable .substances are inspissated with glycocole or chondrin and saltpeter,

then soaked in nitroglycerine, and granulated and dried.

S03,!,S2—May 7, 1878. E. MONAKAY. Improvement in explosive compounds.

An explosive compound containing nitroglycerine and a liquid hydrocarbon,
diluent, such €is kerosene oil.

227,601— May 11, 1880. R. W. WARREN. Explosive compound.

It is composed of gunpowder mixed with a powder made of nitroglycerine,
nitrocellulose, and trinitrocellulose, formed by first reducing nitrocellulose
and nitroglycerine to a coagulated mass, then adding trinitrocellulose until a
dry powder is produced, and finally combining therewith gunpowder.

2S!,,IS9— November 16, 1880. C. A. MORSE. Explosive compound.

Nitroglycerine and a resinous or equivalent substance in a .solid, granulated,
or pulverized mass; produced by dissolving nitroglycerine and resin in a com-
mon solvent, as methyl alcohol, and then evaporating the solvent. The ma.ss
may be stirred during distillation to break down the mass and discharge it in a
pulverized form.

2S5.871—December 28, 1880. W. HEICK. Explosive compound.

It is composed of honey and glycerine treated with nitric and sulphuric acid
and then mixed with chlorate of potash, prepared sawdust, ana prepared
chalk.

236,7 11,— January 18, 1881. C. A. MORSE. Manufacture of explosive compounds.

A compound composed of nitroglycerine, resinous substance, and oxidizing
agents, as niter, produced as in No. 234,489, with the addition of the oxidizing
agents to the solution.

DKJKST OF I'ATENTS RKLATING TO CHKMICAL INDUSTKIES.

251

tii.Tf/i—June H, ISSI. J.M.LEWIS. Krptifirr cimimiml.

"Forcllo." II iiliwtlo Koliitliilzi'il iillnwIyiiTliH! rmniKHind. roniprlnliiR nii
liu'xplorivi' Ki'l«tlnl7.lni{ miitiTliil. «i<li ii« ci-lluliino (miiiltniU-dl, mid an nxl-
dlilnir aalt, lu niter, (x>inblnod with nltruKl)'fcrliiu.

tU>,701—Xoi'etubfr IS, llVlt. T. VARNEY. Exptmirc ramponml.

An iibMirbi'nt for nitniit.ycerinr in prornred hy mlnKlIng with tho lino iMirtl-
.IriKilIhi' |K>\uliTiisnmll prdiKiriion of n fiisililc, fmliihlc. or |i«»t<' pr«Hluoln(r
miiterl il. iiml iiuisIiik ilio mmi- t(i iiicit, illswih o. or tifcomi' pimtf wlilli' In the
inlxture, s<iihiit i«ili imrtlcloof cnch miiUTliil tM,-(<m»'.» »n iidhcslve nnclcoua
In whiili the siirninnillnK pnrtleli-.i nlta<li themwlvcs. and are held In aggrega-
lliiMs wIku Imnleneil liy cikiHhk, drying, or ery»tnlllzlng.

:M.i!:0— January 10, ISDt. Vf. K. QUINAN. lUaMlng-iiou^ttr.

A high explnalvc componed of nitroglycerine, nltroccllulodc, and potamlimi
ohlomte (or nitrate).

iW.riiH—jMly 11, ISSi. W. R. QUINAN. Krplortrr pmcdrr.

A low explosive, lonsLitlng of an iiiitrUurBte<l nitrate— snoh aa sfxllum
nitr«te— In the fomi i>f .snmll niB,«ie» or grains of iletemilnale size, sulphur, pul-
verlied or grained, oarlxinaciMiu.s material, either pulverized or In small non-
luinnis grains of delenninnte size, the unpulverized iugredlcntH remaining a»
separate grains, and u small pmporlion of nitroglycerine whieh forms a eoatlng
in i-oniai-t with said small grains, wlurehy the surfuets of the Ingredlent-s arc
BO limited In extent to retain the small proportion of nitroglycerine suseeptible
to detonation by the onlinary blastlng-eap.
•.•v<,.'iJ6— .VoirmJxT M, ISSJ. 11. D. VAN CAMI'EX. Kxplogire nmjxmwl.

It consists of tan-bark, dextrine, cryolite, potassium, nitrate, ana nitro-
glycerine.
tS9.?li»—lkcember I, 1S8S. 8. R. DIVINE. Ejrplmiit compound.

It consists of a solid Ingredient— |H)ta.«siMm chlorate, 5 parts— and a liquid
ingredient, consisting of a mixture of deailoll and nitroglycerine (In the pro-
liortiOD of 'J to 1) 1 part, mechanlenlly mixe<l.

Soo.JSl—Junr 10, ISS.',. W. R. (jUINAX. Ej-ptmire compound.

.K low-explosive powder compo«e<l of a small proportion of nitroglycerine,
cartxinaceous material, pulverized or in nonporous grains, and an explosive
fait in the form of nonporous untriturated grains or crystals, the unpulverized
Ingredients remaining as sejiarate grains In the mixture.

**7..'<«f— -Voioiitfr 11, ISS!,. J. H. ROBERTSON. Jhjnamilr.

A compound of an anhydrous salt and nitroglycerine, produced by expelling
the water of crystallization from the salt, reducing it to a powdtr,and mixing
with it nilroglyecrine. whereby the latter takes the place of the water of crys-
tallizatittn and a granular compound is produced.

SOI .itSSt—Xocember 11, 18SI,. J.H.ROBERTSON. ExpUmre compound.
Anhydrous sodium sulphate is combined with nitroglycerine.

Sli. 010— February 10, ISSS. R. S. PENNIM.\N. I'rotecled nitrate o/ ammonia /or

u«e in ejrptositx compounds.

Nitrate of ammonia In a finely divided or granulated condition is protected
against deliquescence by a coating of petroleum or its soft and viscous educts or
prisluct.-!.

Sli.oss—July 2.9. ISSS. R. W. WARREN. Dynamite.

A compound of nitroglycerine, sodlam nitrate, and ground peat, withor with-
out calcic hydrate.

33.1.1U>—r)(cemberi9.1SSS. R.S.PENNIMAN AND J.C. SCHRADER. DynamUe.
.\n explosive compound containing finely comminuted solid matter charged
with nitroglycerine and protected grains of ammonium nitrate, the protecting
coating being petroleum or Its soft educts, as cosmoline, for which nitroglycerine
has no affinity.

aSS.lSO— December i9, ISSS. R. S. PENNIMAN AND J. C. SCHRADER. DynamUe.
An explosive compound composed of composite absorbent grains charged with
nitroglycerine, and jacketed grains of an explosive salt.

aa.lSl-December t9, ISSS. R. S. PENNIMAN AND J. C. SCHRADER. aelatt-

nated explosive.

Composed of gelatinated nitroglycerine and grains of protected nitrate of
ammonia.

SSS.SU— December t9, ISSS. J. C. SCHRADER. Explonive compound.

Porous-grained dope, embodying In each grain a cellular mass of sulphur
and combustible or noncombustible matter (such as vegetable or woody fiber,
coal, nsbestus, furnace slag, or nitrates), produced, for example, by mixing
wcxkI pulp and finely ground sulphur, beating the mass until the sulphur is
softened to an adhesive condition, cooling and graining.

SIL^.S!^)— December t9, ISSS. J. C. SCHRADER. I'rocett of making explottve com-
ptmndf.

A dry-grained, free-running, high-cxploslvc powder Is produced by mixing
with combustible ingrc<lients, as wood pulp, powdered sulphur sumclent to
adhesivelv control the mass when melted, heating, cooling, and graining Into
porous grains, and charging with the lic|Uid explosive not greater than their
capacity to receive and retain by capillary attraction.

aSS.Sie— December t9, ISSS. J. C. SCHRADER. DynamUc.

A dry-grained explosive containing nitroglycerine housed atid retained
within hard cellular grains. compostKl in whole or in part of a cellular man of
sulphur and fibrous vegetable matter capable of resisting the softening influ-
ence of the liquid explosive.

SSS,S1,7— December t9, ISSS. J. C. SCHRADER. Dynamite.

An explosive compound containing nitroglycerine housed and retained
within hard cellular grains composed in part of particles of solid carbonaceous
matter held by a jmrous structure of suphur; formed, say. by heating a mixture
ol pulverized bituminous coal, sulphur, and sodium nitrate until the sulphur
melts, cooling and graining.

SSS.SUi— December tn, 1S8S. J. C. SCHRADER. Dynamite and proeem of making

the fame.

A low-grade. dry-gralne<l, free-running iwwdcr composed of absorbent grains
chargeo with nitroglycerine and dry combustible uncharged grains.

SSS.OOe—Jantiary «, 1SS6. C. W. A. ZADEK. Exploeive compound.
A mixture of reainate of calcium or magneaium with trinitro-glycerioe.

U7,Ui—A>igutt n, ISM. M. EIHSI.KR. Dymimilt.

It comprises coaled nonaliMirlM'nt granule* of nitrate nail*, nllroeellnl'w:.
and nitroglycerine. Ant chemically ainalgamate<l, and rye flour aa a binding

agent.

.V./,..14,i— /M-rm/jrr tu, lime. T. PRICE. (•iimpmUUm Jiir neuiralMmg fumet <4 «-

lAotiivef.

It consists of carlxinatc of ammoiilM, urate of ammonia, lime, ami nilphaCeof
iron. In eqiwl pro|M>rtlons,

.Wf,.M(>— ,V.(iTOi*<T /, ISXJ. 8. I). SMOLIASINOrr. Dynamite.

A combination of asbestos, potassium nitrate and potassium chloride, and
nitroglycerine.

SSS.ttO—May 1. ISSS. J. W. ORA VDON. Erplotlvr charge.

It c(mslsts of a number of rounded pellets, each made of a small portion of
explosive Inclosed In a flexible envelo|ie Impervious to nitroglycerine.

SSS.UO— May t}, ISSS. C. W. VOI-NEV. Krptonlrr nmi^uiul.

A mixture of charcoal and an oxidant, as iMiflium nitrate, combln***! with
starch, ami forming an atisorbcut granular isiwrier. with nitroglycerine ab-
sorbed by the powder, the granules reiaining their granular form.

SSr.iSS—FtbruaryS.ISSD. O. E. K. ORCNE. Preparing dynamite.

Kleselgiihr (Infusorial earth! Is pressed Into the form of cartridges, carbon-
ized by heating t« a red heat, either with or without the admixture of vegetable
or animal carbcjn, and saturated with nitroglycerine. Water will not expel the
nitroglycerine.

S»S,SS9.-Fcbniary t«, 1SS9. J. WAFFEN. Dynamite.

It consists of 8o<IIum nitrate. 22..5 parts; decayed wood, 36 part*; picric add,
0.25 part: sulphur, 1 part ;and carbonate of soaa.0.2& part; comUlied with 40
per cent of nitroglycerine prepared with collodion.

4a),6««— /fbn/ari/ 4, ;,S90. E. JCD.SON. Dynamite.

A protecte<l powder crmslsting of a Im.se of nitrate or e<iuivalent gas-pro-
ducing material, with the grains coate<1 with a paste of barley meal combined
with nitroglycerine.

it7,e79—.Vay IS, lli90. P. GERMAIN. Dynamite.

Spongy cellular vegetable tissue, as pith, is compressed and used as an absorb-
ent for nitroglycerine or other liquid explosive: it may be cut into small pieces.

iS7,it)»—SeplnnberS0,18B0. D. MINDELEFF. Explotive compound.

A combination of nitro-glycerine. an alcohol, as methyl alcohol, and a soluble
explosive, as pyroxyllne.

m.Sie— October tl.isao. C. O. LUNDHOLM AND J. SAVERS. Mamtfaelure <^

explosivee.

Cellulose iiitro derivatives are mixed and Incorporated with nltrrjglycerfne
by susi>ending ordilTusing the ingredients in a liquid that is a nonsolvent. such
as water, agitating them together in the liquid, and then separating the liquid.

440,92/— AwCTrfxT IS, 1S90. D. MINDELEFF. F.xplosire.

A compound consisting of ethyl nitrate, methyl nitrate pyroxyllne, nitro-
glycerine, and a nonsensitizlng mixture, as nitro-bcnzene and methyl alcohoL

l.hS,OSS^Decembcr 16, ISSO. W. D. BORLAND. Dynamite.

Nitroglycerine and carbonized or charred cork.
1,68,900— January 12, 1S91. L. BROWN. Absorbent of nUro-plyeeHne.

A mixture of sodium nitrate, wood pulp, glue, and magnesia.
U'S.See—July S, lS9i. S. ROGERS. EriAosite compound.

A mixture of ammonium plcratc, 4 parts; ammonium nitrate, 6 parts; and
nitroglycerine, 6 parts.

t,78,SU,—J\dy 13, 1891. L. BROWN. Xiiro-glyccrine Uasting-powder.

A grading and coating mixture, consisting of .sodium nitrate. 73 parts; wood
pulp, 1 part; sulphur, 12 parts; resin, U parts; and paraffine, 3 parts; all by
weight.

S06,7SI,— October 17, 1S9S. A. KRANZ. Dynamite.

.V composition of nitroglycerine, camphor, and gun-cotton dissolved In ace-
tone and sulphuric ether, combined with a composition of linseed oil and oil of
turpentine treated with nitrate of ammonia and sulphuric ether.-

sn,S96— March 17, lS9i. W. Y. ROCHESTER AND J. McARTHUR. DynamlU

and process of making same.

A composition of nitroglycerine, whiting, c-osl, slacked lime, pulverixed cop-
peras, sodium nitrate, gum camphor, alcohol, carbonate of ammonia, and
water, in specified proportions. It produces no obnoxious gases.

Sll,,776— August SI. isai. G. J. BUECHERT. Krplosire compound.

A compound consisting of a protectively coated salt of ammonia, as the sul-
phate or chloride, and sodium nitrate, with wood pulp and nitroglycerine.

StS,lSS— August iS, 1S9I,. H.A.CALLAHAN. DynamUe.

A mixture of nitroglycerine an<i acetate of lime, with or without pulverised
coke.
SS6,906— September 11, lS»i. B. C. PETTIXGELL. Ezplotlte compound.

Composed of nitroglycerine combined with nitrated coal dost as an abaorbent
base.
SU!,7tlr-July 16, 1S9S. F. G. A. BROBERG. High expiotive.

It consists essentially of nitroglycerine, nitronaphthalenes, wood-palp, and
sodium nitrate, with or without sulphur or nitro-cellulose.
811,707— October IS. 189S. R.CROWE. Composition for preventing /»me» in miniruj

powders.

A mixture of unbolted wheat flour. 80 per cent: oommon salt, » per cent:
and bicarbonate of soda, 25 per cent: the salt and soda to be finely ground: to
be used contiguous to but not mixed with the high explosive.

6tS,SS0—.\fay es, 1899. E.S.CLARK. Tamping plug and process qf and apparattu

for making same.

A new ariicle of manufacture, a tamping plug, designed to neutraliie the
deleterious fumes of explosives and lessen the heat of the explosion, consist* of
a perforate<l cylinder <ii solid hydrated salt, as mono-carbonate of soda with a
small amount of ferric oxide and mono-sulphate of soda, formed by presaing
the salt into molds, tilling the Interstices with a hot saturated solution, coolinx
and then temfiorarily heating the mold to form a film of fused salt and admit
of the discharge of the block.

252

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

eu.iOS—Febniari/ 27. 1900. E. CALLENBERG. Explosive.

It is composed of turpentine oil, 4 parts : collodion cotton, 1 part; and nitro-
glycerine, 30 parts; heated together to form a gelatine, and mixed with 27 parts
ofEpsom salts, and 1 part of soda.

6U.607— April 17, 1900. R. S. PENNIMAN AND J. C. SCHRADER. High-explo-
sive compound.
A mixture of nitroglycerine and a dope containing vulcanized resin— No.

647,606 — (homogeneously united resin and sulphur in a pulverized condition).

ehS,2StS—Apra U, 1900. H. E. STURCKE. Explosive.

An explosive consisting of an explosive organic nitro compound, as nitro-
glycerine, an oxygen-consuming absorbent material, ammonium nitrate, and
an additional oxidizing material, as sodium nitrate, the oxidizing materials
being combined in such proportions that the ammoniun nitrate will furnish
from- 5 to 20 per cent of the available oxygen.

6i9,85^—May U, 1900. A. LUCK. ExpUsive.

An explosive containing an explosive organic nitrate, as nitroglycerine and
a nonexplosive ester of cellulose, as acetate of cellulose.

SMOKELESS POWDER.

SS,7S9—June 2, 1S6S. J. F. E. SCHULTZE. Improved gunpowder.

Wood grains, formed by punching or cutting veneers, are successively treated
to remove acids and easily soluble material, the proteinc, albumen, etc., and
bleached; then treated with nitric and sulphuric acid mixture, drained, and
washed; and finally saturated with a salt or salts containing oxygen and nitro-
gen, as potassium nitrate with or without barium nitrate. The dust produced
is made into a paste, formed into sheets, and then punched or cut into grains
and dried, and powder produced therefrom.

S9,910—May 11, 1S69. O. H. BANDISCH. Improved explosive cmnpound.

Schultzc gunpowder. No. 38,789, is treated to bath of pure alcohol and ether
(one of alcohol to five of ether), dried at 21° to 27° C, and then compressed.

11^,1,03— December 9. 1S7S. C. DITTMAR. Improvement in explosive compounds.
Vegetable fiber is prepared with a solution of sugar, or mannite, or amylum,
or inuline, or other described substances, and rendered explosive by nitric acid.
The fiber is reduced to a pulp, compressed in a sheet or other compact form, and
then reduced to a granulated or powdered condition and treated with acid to
render it explosive.

liS,l,OS—Decemher 9, 1S7S. C. DITTMAR. iBeissues: 6,759— February 10, Ifnh:
6,fil^— September Ik, 1876.) Improvement in explosive compounds.
Vegetable fiber is converted into a pulp, desiccated and reduced to powder,
grains or compact forms, and then treated with nitric or nitric and sulphuric
acids. The acid bath may be preceded by a soaking in a starchy or saccharine
solution and followed by an alkaline solution. Potassium nitrate or chlorate
or nitroglycerine may be added.

179,688— July 11, 1876. C. DITTMAR. Improvement in explosive compounds.

An explosive compound having its grains parchmented, whereby they are
smooth and nonadhesive, produced by forming grains of vegetable fiber, parch-
menting same by sulphuric acid, and then treating with nitric and sulphuric
acid bath.

187,166— February 6, 1877. S. J. MACKIE, C. A. FAURE, AND G. FRENCH. Im-

proveniait in explosive compounds.

It consists of a mixture of nitro cellulose, say 25 iiarts, reduced to an impal-
pable powder, nitrate of baryta 18J parts, and nitrate of potassium 6S parts.

267 ,108— November 7 , 1S8S. W. P. REID AND D. JOHNSON. Hardening explo-
sive granulated powders containing nitro-cellulose, etc.

The granulated powder is moistened with a spirit, which is then evaporated.
376,000— January S, 1888. D. JOHNSON. Process of preparing explosives.

Dinitro cellulose is incorporated with barium and potassium nitrates and
carbon, the mixture treated with a solution of camphor in a volatile liquid not
a solvent of dinitro cellulose — such as light petroleum or benzoliue— the solvent
evaporated at a low temperature, the camphorized material then subjected to a
temperature high enough to change the mechanical state of the dinitro cellu-
lose, and finally the camphor expelled.

Ii09,6i9— August 20, 1889. F. A. ABEL AND J. DEWAR. Nitro-gelatine explosive.
Blasting gelatine or compounds thereof is pressed through holes and formed
into wires, cut into lengths, and packed in cartridge cases.

1,11, 1S7 — September 17, 1889. H. MAXIM. Method of producing high explosives.

Gun-cotton or nitro cellulose is dissolved in a suitable solvent, such as acetone
or ethylic acetate, the solution added to nitroglycerine, and the solvent evapo-
rated from the mixture.

hSS,2S0— March 11, 1890. S. H. EMMENS. Explosive.

It consists of paper or paper stock converted into a nitro compound and impreg-
nated with ammonia and picric acid.

!,i6,eiS— April 16, 1890. F. A. ABEL AND J. DEWAR. Gelatinous explosive.

A gelatinous explosive consisting of nitroglycerine and nitrocellulose to
which tannin is added (from 10 to 20 per cent).

i29,SlS—Ju7u: 3, 1890. R. VON FREEDEN. Mami/actitrc of gunpowder.

Nitro eellulo.se, or a compound thereof with other substances, is gelatinized
and granulated by adding a solvent of the nitro cellulose, kneading until it has
become pla.stic and thoroughly gelatinized, and then introducing a liquid or
vapor chemically indifferent to the constituents of the mass, as water or steam,
and stirring until complete granulation.

iSO.SlZ — June 17, 1890. H.S.MAXIM. Mami/acture of explosives.

Gun-cotton is reduced to a pulp, washed and dried, confined in a receiver and
the air exhausted therefrom, when the vapor of acetone or its equivalent is
admitted to the -receiver, and the dissolved gun-cotton is then expelled by
pressure.

i3l,,0J,9— August IS, 1890. H. S. MAXIM. Explosive compo\md.

It consists essentially of gun-cotton or pyroxyline mixed with nitroglycerine
and an oil such as castor oil; produced by mixing and agitating the same with
a proportion of a solvent, such as acetone, insufficient to entirely dissolve the
gun-cotton, and subjecting the product in a partial vacuum to the action of
vaporized acetone, and then to pressure.

1,36,898— September 25, 1890. H.S.MAXIM. Manufacture of explosives.

Gun-cotton is reduced to pulp, dried, and subjected in a receiver to the action
of a vaporized solvent, as acetone, until it is partially dissolved, when it is com-
pressed by a high pressure— 20 to 40 tons per square inch— and the sheet cut into
pieces or grains.

1,66,608— July 21,1891. .\. NOBEL. Ccttuloid explosive and process of making the

same.

Hard, horny grains, containing nitro cellulose and nitroglycerine, .solid at
ordinary temperatures; produced by uniting nitro cellulose and nitroglycerine
bv means of a volatile solvent, as acetone, camphor, or the like— say in the
proportions of equal parts of nitro cellulose and nitroglycerine plus camphor-
removing the volatile solvent, passing between steam heated rolls, and cutting
the sheets into grains.

1,89,681,— January 10, 1893. C. E. MUNROE. Explosive powder and ])rocess of

making same.

It consists wholly of cellulose nitrate of high nitration in a colloidized and
indurated condition; produced by first extracting from gun-cotton the lower
products of nitration, then mixing and incorporating with it a liquid colloidiz-
ing agent capable of converting at ordinary temperatures the higher cellulose
nitrates into viscous form, as nitro-benzene, then forming the material into
strips or grains, and finally indurating it by the action of heated liquids or
vapors, as water or steam, or both.

60S,68S-August 22, 1893. F. G. & P. S. DU PONT. Process of making smokeless

explosives.

Nitro cellulose is suspended in a liquid, such as water, which is not a solvent
of the same, and in which may be dissolved a suitable salt; granulated by agi-
tating therewith in proper proportions a suitable solvent, as nitro-benzole, not
miscible in the suspending liquid, with or without the injection of steam; the
grains being hardened and rounded by rotation, and further solidified by rota-
tion in an atmosphere of steam.
503,686— August n, 1893. F. G. & P. S. DU PONT. Process of making smokeless

powder.

As a modification of process No. 603,583, the grains are solidified bysubjecting
them to a heat ranging from 49° to 82° C, to remove the water contained in the
grains, but not high enough to vaporize the solvent, and then to a heat suflicieut
to vaporize the solvent for removal of the excess of solvent.

60S,6S7— August 22, 1893. F. G. DU PONT. Process of making smokeless explosive.
Process No. 503,583 is modified by forming an emulsion of the solvent, nitro-
benzole, with water in proper proportions, and then adding it to the nitro-
cellulose suspended in water.

507,279— October 21,, 1893. M.E.LEONARD. Smokeless powder.

Composed of nitroglycerine, gun-cotton, lycopodium, and a neutralizer of
free acid, such as urea crystals or dinitrobenzol, with or without an oil, as
cottonseed oil.

613,7S7—January SO, 1891,. E.A.STARKE. Smokeless powder.

A combination of an ammonium chromate, potassium picrate, and ammonium
picrate.
619,702— May 16, 189!,. F. G. DU PONT. Manufacture of smokeless powder.

A volatile oil, and preferably a hvdrocarbon oil, as benzine, is mixed with the
solvent emulsion of processes No. 503,687 and 503,583. The excess of solvent and
the oil is removed from the grains by distillation, after hardening.

622,987—Jidy 17, 189i. F. G. DU PONT. Smokeless explosive.

Nitro cellulose is suspended in an oil, as hydro-carbon oil; granulated by agi-
tating therewith in suitable proportions a solvent which, though soluble in the
suspending oil, has a solvent action on the nitro cellulose, as acetone; the
grains hardened by rotation; the excess of solvent removed; and finally the oil
removed from the grains.

51,1.909— July 2, 1896. G. N. WHISTLER AND H. C. ASPINWALL. ifmnkeless

powder.

A mixture of nitroglycerine, gun-cotton, a nitrate such as barium nitrate,
petrolatum, and urea crystals.

61,1,910— July 2, 1896. G. N. WHISTLER AND H. C. ASPINWALL. .Smokeless

gunpowder.

Composed of nitroglycerine, trinitrocellulose, a nitrate and a neutralizer of
free acid, such as urea crystals, the proportion of nitrate to the trinitrocellulose
being about 46 to 100, so that the combustion of the gun cotton shall be substan-
tially similar to that of the nitroglycerine.

61,1,911— .my S, 1896. G. N. WHISTLER AND H. C. ASPINWALL. .Smokeless

powder.

A compound of nitroglycerine, gun-cotton, a nitrate as barium nitrate, a resin
and urea crystals. The fossilized or mineral gum kauri is claimed as a deter-
rent in a nitroglycerine, gun-cotton, and a nitrate mixture.

51,2,812— July 16, 1896. J. V. SKOGLUND. Method of making smokelesspowder.

The drying of grains of powder containing nitrated cellulose is insured by
combining with the solvent, water and a vehicle such as alcohol, and diasolving
the nitrated cellulose in the liquid, rendering the material porous by the pres-
ence of the water as the solvent evaporates.

6U,,617— August 13, 1896. W. C. PEYTON. Process and apparatus .fur making

gunpowder.

The plastic mass is forced through a die and formed into a tube, split, and
spread into a flat sheet; passed between grooved rollers and formed into strips
or rods connected by films, and then beneath a vertically reciprocating cutter,
whereby the strips are cut into grains.

660,1,72— November 26, 1895. J. B. BERNADOU AND G. A. CONVERSE. Process

of making nitrocellulose powders.

Two or more nitrocelluloses of known nitration strength are mixed in such
proportions as to give a product of desired nitration strength, an o.xidiziiig
a^ent and camphor are added, the mass is coUoided with a solvent capable of
dissolving the highest form of nitrocellulose present, and it is made into regular
forms of uniform least dimension.

652,919— January Ik, 1896. H. MAXIM. Cellular explosive charge.

An amorphous explosive charge having a multiplicity of interior cells, formed
by rolling a sheet of the colloid material, having regular cells or depre.s.sions,
into a cylinder form. The cells may be filled with granular powder, and the
charge exteriorly coated with celluloid or varnish diflieult of ignition with re-
spect to the interior of the mass.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RKLATING TO ClIKMICAL INDUSTRIES.

253

AV. - " 1. /ssw. M.VON F<JR8TICR. Prurru ,1/ mnkinu umiiltrlat powder.
I 'ii( tt ('orruKaUtl or wuvy HurfHri< Hn> |irtMlu(-til l)v foniiiuf a pute

01 ' iV'Ri'lutliiiti'd tiltnii't'lhiliiM.- Into tlilii baiulo, cii'ttiii); thCMbuidi

iiilii iliiki's, uiul rapidly dryliiK the flakes.

.WS.JXW— OrWwr «. l.'twj. K. A. HAIJJKY. Smiilulnii pomtcr.

A euiniMmnd u( iiln>iitliim nUmie, amnKmium plcrate, polanlum blchromaU"
niid iKjtuiffhim iwrmaiiKHimtv.

i70,;of—.\'iirmlKr 3, imm. K. A. HAIJtEY. SmokrlcM powder .

A (xiiniHMind of an ummonluu plvrati-, ixitamium bicliromatp, mid poUndum
peraiaiiKHiiale.

.t'SSen — /iiiiiiurv ftj, 11197. (). (J. ANDUfc. .VannOirliirr nf iiiiniiomUr.

A ^impound of dinltro and trinllm cclliiloac Is Kruiiiiliili'd nr rcilucod to pel-
letH In u wt't Mato, und tlioii siible<;te<l to thv Hctloii (if 11 miIvi'iu i-aimbU> of dlK-
^»lviii>; thi' dInltrocf'lluliMe only, wliori-by the trlnltroi'flliiloHc particles are
eoHtod with and coiiienled toKether by the'dl»<olved dinltrocelluloMe, and the
KruniileK are then hardened by removal ut the wlvent.

.'^TiS.Mt—FrbruarnB. tSI7. G. (i. ANDRE. Maiiu/aduTf i\f gunpomUr.

A biuse eoii^lsta of '2 partjt of trlnitrooellulo«e and 1 part of dinitrocellulotte;
the Nimc la combined with iiltrog;lycertne, fonning a tough, leathery, and
translneent explonlve.

ms.Sjst—JttHc I. tS97. H. KOLF. ProenuKtf making umiikrleM powder.

A carbohydrate is nitrated, then treated with an alkaline sulphide, then
flAtiimteil with an alkaline nitrate, then a iiitro nrotluct a.*) nitro-molanes (or
nitnt-sUKftr or nitni-glyceriiic) Is mixitl Iherowitn and the compound ia con-
verti'il into a gelatinous btnly by means o( a suitable solvent.

iSe.ise—Juli) to, i«97. J. B. BERNADOU. Smokelau powder and procew qf mak-

inif tante.

An cthcraloohol colloid of nltrocellulone of substantially uniform nitration,
or l'.'.4.'> per cent nitniKeu und corrcs[nindiii(f to the formula Q„ H„ ( SO., 1,.. 0»,
with which nitrates r>t metallic ba.scs and insoluble iiltPK-elluIose. efther or
both, may Ik' incori)orate<l. It may be in form of strips or grains. It i.s insolu-
ble in ethyl alcohol aloni'. s<iluble in 3 parts ethyl alcohol and 1 part ethyllc
ether, and is produced by immersing cellulose in a mixture of nitric and sul-
phuric acids und heating to between 42° and 46° €., freeing the product from
excess of acid by washing and pulping in water below 71° ('., dehydrating and
washing in excess of alcohol, and then collolding in a mixture ol"ethvli(> alco-
hol and ethyllc ether.

.^ao.u.^l-.-y-ptnnber H, I.'W. F. G. DV PONT. (Seiuue: n.eit—FOmuiry 16. 1898.)

PriM-fK^ v/ and apparatun/or making smokeicss ptywder.

Wet gun cotton is compressed until of equal porosity throughout, when the
water is disjilaccd with alcohol by percolation under preisiurc, the gun-cotton Is
compressed until only the alcohol desired to combine with a colToidlzing sol-
vent remains, which solvent, such as ether, is then mixed with the alcoholized
gun-cotton.

S9:.i8i— October se, :sa?. C. W. VOLNEY. ProceM 0/ making gunpowder.

Grains containing trinitrocellulose arc given a surface coating of dinitrocellu-
lose by reducing the trinitrocellulose upon such surface to dinitrocellulose by
reducing agents, as by the sulphites or hyposulphites of potassium, sodium, or
ammonium.

am,SSU—Dteeinberi8,1897. F. A. HALSEY. Smokeless powder.

A compound consisting of an alkaline-metal chromate. an alkaline earth
metal nitrate, ammonium plcrate, an alkaline-metal permanganate, and an
alkaline-metal silicate.

,»;,.i&5— Janimry ;«, J«9S. C. QUINAN. Protxis 0/ mating gun cotton.

An essentially ash-free hydroccllulose is produced by steeping fiber in a bath
of healed mineral acid capable of dissolving the mineral matter, washing out
the mineral matter with a weak acid bath, and finally heating the same to
complete the converalon. It is then pulverized and nitrated.

S99,5S»— February tt. 1898. J. E. BLOMEN. Prucens <if making explorivet.

Process consists in dissolving nitro, and nitrohydroxyl, hydrocarbon deriva-
tives, preferably nitronaphthalene, with a volatile organic solvent, such as
amyl acetate: then adding to the composite solvent thus obtained cellulose
nitrates and an oxidizing agent; and Anally drying and granulating the
compound.

617.766— January 17, 1S99. G.M.PETERS. JCxploDive and procensof making same.
A powder composed of pulvcrizcer cent; and brimstone, 8 per cent; produced by sepa-
rately reducing the ingredients to powder, nlimting, washing, and drying the
c-ellulose dust, mixing the ilust of the four ingredients, thoroughly incorporat-
ing the mass untij it is worked into a single substance, and granulating.

ett.777—AprU It, 1899. F. H. McGAHIE. Puuider-grain.

A multiperforated powder grain designed to have powder partitions of equal
thlckneteea; as a central peiioratlon and a surrounding concentric row of seg-
mental-shaped perforations.

etS.365—.Vay 23. 1.^99. E. A. G. STREET. /Yocmj 0/ making exptosive*.

Pitch or tar, with or without an azo or nitro derivative, is dissolved in oil,
while heating the latter, and chlorate powder added while maintaining the
solution fluid by heat.

ets.eat— May t3. 1899. F.W.JONES. Proeeti qf making ejcptoncet.

In the manufacture of a gelatinized smokeless powder of a nitrocellulose base
the grains are swelletl to regulate rate of combustion bv aiaing on them with
an aqueous solution of a nitrocellulose solvent, as a ketone; the same is satu-
rated with any ingredients of the grain soluble therein which would otherwise
dissolve out of the powder.

613.681,— .Wai/ S3, 1S99. J. KARSTAIRS. Explosive and meOiod 0/ making tame.

A compound, CH3N3OS, consisting of a crystalline body soluble in water, sp,
gr. 1.8, produced by slowly nitrating a mixture of urea and alcohol. It Is com-
bined with gum to form a protecting coating, and with nitrated celluloae.
SSS.SSS— May tJ, 1889. J. KARSTAIRS. Krplmin:

The combination of a chlorate with the crystalline body CH,N^ (No. 626,684),
the latter having a protective coating.

SM.Sfts— .1/(11/ .W, 1899. E. A. O. STREET. Erplotive and mctliod qf making same.
A compound of a chlorate powder mixed with a .solution of a nitric ether, as
nitroglycerine, an analogou.s combustible substance wherein the former is solu-
ble, as nltrunapbthaline, and an oil derived from organic substance, as castor

oil; priMliiciHl by forming at an elnvnlml lemtx-ratiire a aoluilonof thi< nllrovly.
cerlne, nllronaphlhnllne, and castor oil, and a<ldlng thereto (he chlorate ptmUer.
«*7.4.*i — lunrtu.ium). A. .MoFFATf. l-riir,., „f miik i

Nitrate of starch la produced by drying until pra( i ilmiire

ctxillng. nitrating In a bath at or Iwlow I"*;., dllutliH' ii water

suniclent to lower its sp. gr. to Inflow I.:*, washing, nciiiniililiig, and drying,
whereby the product eonalsis of unruptured granulea. and lu aUbillly la Insured.

««,«/l— ."ijrfOMftrr IB. 1899. K. O. dc F. I. DC I'<JNT. I'rnetm of maUua er-
ptoiirrt.

Alcohol la mixed with nilrocelluloM! (displacing the water o( wvt cotton br
pi-rcolatl(m). and a solution of nitroglycerine in ether la then mixed with the
alcoholized nitrocelliiloae.

«U),tl3-January t. 1900. H. MAXIM AND R. C. SCHITPHAUS. Proertt nt

making nmokeletM powtler.

Pyroxyllne. preferably of varying degree* of nitration, pulped or reduced to a
fine state of division, la lreate<l with a solvent, and before It h compleDdy freed
from the solvent It is trcate<l with a size, and then granulate<l and dried.

SM.IU—AprilSi, 1900. F. I. D(J WJNT. Proceui i,f mnklng fjuncotlnu.

Acid la removed from giin-cotlon by applying pressure, and then, while under
pressure, replacing the acid with water by percolation, which. In turn, may tie
replaced with an alkaline fluid by percolation.

65t.lM—June te. 1900. J. B. BERXAlKjr. ProccM 0/ making mokelem pmrder.
A colloid powder is formed by subjecting a<iluble nltrocelluloae and a col-
lolding agent, as ether. In a clewed vessel to a temperature cjual to or lielow
that of frc(aiiig water, mechanically agitating or kneading the cooled mixture,
and then forming it into shapes and drying,

est.503— June S6. 1900. J. B. BERNADOU. Smokdeu powder.

An ether colloid of cther-aleohol-soluble nitrocellulose of high nitration; pro-
duced by immersing etheralcohol-soluble nitnKelluloae in ethyl ether and
exposing to a temjierature of 0° C, or lower.

6Sl,.t,7l—July ti. 1900. a. 8. MAXIM. Powder-grain.

A nltro-compound explosive block or tablet (in part of a slow-burning and In
part of a quick-buming character), has concentric annular depreasioos In each
face, with tapered cavities In the walls, the cavities on opposite sidek breaking
Joint.

NITRO-SUBSTITUTION COMPOUNDS.

76,173— March 31, 18es. O. DESIGKOBLE AND J. C.\STHELAZ. iJHpniremenl
in expioeive-powdem.

The use of plcrate or carbazotate of potassa, as well as the salts formed from
picric or earbazotlc acid, the derivatives from such odd, and the acid Itself, is
claimed in the manufacture of powder; as M parts of carbazotate of potassa
with 45 parts of azotate of potassa, for the greatest effect.

96,tiS— October 16, 1869. W.MILLS. Improved explmlve compound.

The use of carbolic acid and aloes in explosive compounds- and on explosiTe
formed of carbolic acid, nitric acid, potassa, and aloes.

111,163— tT^ruaryta, 1871. W.MILLS. Improvement in exptotbie compound:

"Oxidized carbolic acid," a wax-like product, produced by treating carbolic
or cresylic acid with nitric acid, alone or combined with metal or metallic or
earthy oxides or their carbonates, also with sawdust or other ligneous substances
treated with niter. Combined with alcohol, spirits, or ether, and metal or
metallic oxides it forms an explosive varnish.

Iti.Syj- March 5, 187S. C. W. VOLNEY. Improvement in ezplotive compound:

A mixturi! of nitroglycerine and nitrotoluol or nitrobenznie, as by dissolTlng
3 parts of nitrotoluol in 7 parts of nitroglycerine.

178,177— June 6, 1816. A. DI ECKERHOFF. Improvement in erploHre eompoundt.
It Is composed of sawdust which has been saturate<l with a solution of picric
acid and potassium nitrate dissolved in boiling waterand then desdccated, mixed
with potassium nitrate, sodium nitrate, ana sulphur. It is gianolated while
damp or formed into sticks.

115,199— May 8, 1879. A. DIECKERHOFF. Improvement in expUudrecompoundt.
It consists of gunpowder, or the es.sential elements thereof— the charcoal not
being essential — mixed with a small proportion (not over 15 per cent) of a pre-
cipitated alkaline plcrate or picrates.

tl6.9i9— July 1, 1879. C. FELHOEN. Improvement in bUutiaj pouxler.

A composition of niter, sulphur, and charcoal. In the usual proportions of gun-
powder, mixed with nitronaphthallne; 10 per cent or more should be nsetl.

tSt,S81— September SI, 1880. .M. TSCHIRNER. £xplo«ive compound.

It consists of picric acid and pota.ssium chlorate, savin the proportion of 57
parts of the former to 43 of the latter. They are incorporated with the aid of 8
per cent of resin dissolved in a volatile solvent.

tt,3,iSS—June tS, 1881. S. R. DIVINE. Ezplotive compound.

It consists of a solid ingredient, such as potassium chlorate, 3 to 4} parts, and
a liquid ingredient, such as nitro-benzole, 1 part, mechanically united.

t6S,8ti— September S, I88t. E. TCRPIN. Explogive compound.

A compound of peroxide of nitrogen or hyponitric anhydride with sulphuret
of carbon, or its equivalent. If .slowly ignited it produces an intense light,
without explosion, and the flame instantly melts platinum.

189,755— December i, ISM. 8. R. DIVINE. Procett oj preparing exploeire nwH

poundt.

An explosive composed of two ingredients, one a solid— such as potassium
chlorate — und the other a liquid — such as nitro-benzole — is prepared by saturat-
ing the powdered potu**ium chlorate with a mixture of the nitn>-lx>nzoteand a
volatile tluid, such as carbon bisulphide, and then allowing the volatile fluid
to evapomte; the proportions being such as to give the proper pr^iportion of
nitro-benzole fur the maas.

tS9,757— December i, 1883. S. R. DIVINE. Exploria eompomtd.

From 1 to 3 ner cent of sulphur Is combined with the moist mass of No. 243.433
(potassium chlorate and nitro-benzene) .

t89,7tS— December i, 1883. .S. R. DIVINE. Erptotive eompouml.

It Is composed of a solid ingredient — I or 5 parts— such as potassium chlorate,
and a liquid Ingredient— 1 part — consisting of a mixture of nitro-beiuole and
dead-oil, the latter being mixed in about equal proportions.

254

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

fi'

g89.7es— December i, 1S8S. S. R. DIVINE. Explosive compound.

From 1 to 3 per cent of sulphur is combined with the moist mass of No. 289,758
(potassium chlorate with nitro-benzole and dead-oil).
S7i.9il— December 20. 1S87. G. ANTHEUNIS. Blafting powder.

It consists of mahoganv sawdust, 8 per cent; potassium nitrate, 50 per cent;
sodium nitrate. 16 per cent; charcoal, 1.5 per cent; sublimated sulphur, 18 per
cent; potassium ferrocyanide, :i per cent; and ammonivmi picratc, 3.5 per cent.
(Potassium nitrate is omitted in the claim.)

S7S.651— December 27. 1SS7. C. ROTH. Explosirc.

The combination of a chlomitro-hydrocarburet of the aromatic series, as
chlomitro-benzol, with an oxidant, such as ammonium nitrate.
sre.liS— January 10, 1S8S. S. H. EMMENS. Explosive derived /rom phenol.

A cr\-stalline acid compound is produced by the action of heated concentrated
or fuming nitric acid, of sp. gr. 1..52 or higher, upon picric acid in exces.s. and
the crystallization of the liquid. Explosivecompositionsor pastesare produced
by dis,solving 2 parts of the same in 1 part of concentrated nitric acid.

i03.7U)—Ma!i SI, 1889. J. A. HALBMAYR. ManuSaduring explosives.

In the manufacture of explosives from tar oils the oils are introduced in a
state of division below the surface of a body of nitrating acid, as by a perforated
ipe, and cold air under pressure Is introduced at the same point, to cool the
iquid.
1,17,1,29— December 17, 1889. W. E. LIAEDSt. Manvfacture of explosives.

In the manufacture of explosives containing picric acid and potassium nitrate,
or its equivalents, the picric acid is mixed with boiling-hot glycerine, potassnim
nitrate is added and the mixtiure cooled, ground wood is then added to the
cooled mass, boiling-hot potassium nitrate is added to the mixture, and hnally
flowers of sulphur.
iSl.eei—Februnrii IS, 1890. B. BRONCS. Explosive compound.

It is composed of a double salt combination of sodium picratc with other
picrates (No. 421,7.53). potassium nitrate, saccharine matter, a gummy or resmous
substance, and soot, with or without nitrated naphthaline.

m,7M— February 18, 1890. B. BRONCS, H. ORTH, ADM'R. Explosive compound.

A double picrate consisting of sodium picrate combined with barium or lead
picrate.
i£.',.i«— -Varcft 4, 1890. S. H. EMMENS. Manufacture of explosives.

A suitable hydrocarbon substitution derivative, as trinitrophenol, is fused; a
suitable alkaline nitrate, as sodium nitrate, is added thereto; and the heat
gently raised until actual liquefaction of the mixture is attained, when it is
allowed to cool.
!,2i.ra.T— March U, 1890. S. H. EMMENS. Manufacture of explosives.

The crystalline acid of No. 376, H5 is heated with an allied nitro-hydrocarbon,
as dinitrobenzene, which reduces the fusing point of the acid; a pulverized
oxidant is then mixed therewith, and the mixture is cooled.

l„1,i,l!,g— September S. 1890. C.LAMM. Mamifacturing explosive charges.

Pulverized partiallv-fusible explosive material is introduced into molds sur-
rounded by a heating chamber, then a heating medium is passed through said
chamber to melt the contents of the molds, then cold water is passed through
said chamber to solidify the explosive material, and finally the charges or cart-
ridges are ejected.
i5S,S17—June SO, 1891. C. LAMM. Explosive compound.

Composed of a nitrate salt, as ammonium nitrate, and dinitro-benzene or
dinitro-benzol.
1,78,819— July n, 189t. A. C. RAND. Explosive compound.

It consists of an oxidant, as chlorate of potash, in a powdered form, and man-
ganese peroxide in the form of coarse grains mixed with the oxidant, say equal
parts, and a fluid hydrocarbon, as nitre benzol, say 15 per cent by weight, incor-
porated therewith.

l,S8,5Si— December 17, 1S9S. J. F. ALEXANDER. Explosive.

A powder composed of naphthaline or a suitable solid hydrocarbon, sulphur, a
potassium salt or salts, and ammonium picrate, with or without ammonium
sulphate.
l,9J,0S9—Pebruar!/ 11, 1893. B. LEPSIUS. Preparing explosive compounds.

A mixture of picric acid and an enveloping explo.sive agent, such as tri-nitro-
toluol, is heated, in a mold, to a point above the fusing point of the latter
ingredient and below that of the former— to avoid fusing the crystals of the
acid— and then cooled, thus cementing the crystals together.

1,95,178— April 11, 1893. J. E. BLOMfeN. Method of making blasting compounds.

Picric acid and a hydrocarbon, as naphthalene, arc separately dis.soIved in
alcohol, the solutions mixed, and the resulting picrated hydrocarbon dissolved
In nitroglycerine.

SOe.OSt-October S, 189S. J. E. BLOMEN. Manufacture of blasting compounds.

A hydrocarbon is first treated with nitric acid; the product is then treated
with a mixture of nitric and sulphuric acids, and this second product is then
treated with strong nitric acid, and finally incorporated with an oxidizing
agent.
I06,03g— October S, 189S. J. E. BLOMfeN. Blasting compound.

The graiiules of an oxidizing agent have a coating composed o» a mixture of
a hydrocarbon and dinitro-phenol.
611, OiO— June, 'i. 189!,. W. EVELYN-LIARDfiT. Explosive and process of making

same.

A mixture of tar, picric acid, sawdust, the chloride and the perchlorate of an
alkali metal; prtKluced bv heating the tar to 120° C, adding the picric acid,
gradually adding the sawdust, heating the mixture to about 100° C. cooling and
passing tnrough a sieve, adding to the sifted product a suitable mixture of the
perchlorate and chloride of an alkali metal, at the same time heating the mass
until It assumes a black color, cooling and granulating.

6t7,S6i—0(iober 16, 1891,. E. A. STARKE. Process of making ammonium bichro-
mate.

A solution of ammonium picrate and a solution of potassium bichromate are
mixed, through which crystals of potassium picrate lorm, which are removed,
leaving an ammonium bichromate solution tnat is evaporated to dryness. An
explasive compound is formed by mixing the .solutions in proper proportions,
ammonium pi(rrate being in excess, and evap<irating the resultant mixture of
ammonium picrat«, amjnonium bichromate, and potassium picrate to dryness.

630,063— Xovember Z!, 189/,. J. E. BLOMEN. High-power explosives.

A mixture of nitro-niiphthalenes, an oxidizing agent, a mixture of nitro-
phenols, sulphur, and charcoal.

.51,0,11,1— May 28, 1895. F. G. A. BROBERG. Explosive compound.

A composition of nitro-resln, say, 6 to 10 per cent; nitro-naphthalenea, 5 to 10
percent; sulphur, 14 or 15 per cent; and an oxidizing agent, such as sodium
nitrate, 70 per cent.

61,0,61,7— June 11, 189S. S. R. DIVINE. Explosive compound.

It Is composed of nitmte of lead and a nitrated hydrocarbon of the ben»,ol
series which is of itself nonexplosive, such as dinitro-benzol; 1 part of the
latter is melted and 4 parts of the former Is mixed therewith.

667,656— September 8, 1896. E. DICKSON. Gunpowder.

It consists of a granulated mixture of barium nitrate, flour, potassium ferro-
cyanide, picric acid, ammonia, potassiuhi chlorate, and lampblack, coated with
refined petroleum which has been treated with nitric acid, sulphuric acid, aud
ammonia.
677,351— February 16, 1897. H. BOYD. Explosive.

A mixture of potassium nitrate, sulphur, barium nitrate, picric acid, wood-
dust, and a fume absorbent, such as dry pulverized bog ore or other hydrated
oxide of iron; characterized by firing without a detonator and absorbing the
noxious gases.

.■y9t„S68- November 13. 1897. F. MtJLLER, S. OBERLANDER, V. H. FUCHS,
AND S. GOMPERZ. Blasting powder andprocess of making same.
A compound composed of picrate combined with sulphur, nitrate of potas-
sium, and a carrier, such as nitrated cellulose, with or without a substance
yielding free oxygen, such as pyrolusite. The. process eonsiists in mixing sul-
phur and carbolic acid; also mixing nitrate of potassium and nitric acid, and
then combining the two mixtures and neutralizing with an alkali.

698,061,— January 16, 1898. W. P. FERGUSON. Blasting compound.

In a granular blasting compound in which the oxidizing agent is coated with
a film containing a nitrophenol and a hydrocarbon, lampblack is intermixed
with the elements of the film.

69^.618— February 8, 1S9S. E. A. G. STREET. ■ Explosive anil method of making

same.

The combustible agent, such as nitro orazo derivative, orcomblnation thereof.
Is mixed with an oil at an elevated temperature which Is not a solvent thereof
at ordinary temperature in such proportion that on cooling It as.sumes a pasty
or solid consistence, and the chlorate powder is mixed therewith, the fluidity
being maintained during maxilation. The combustible element is composed
of a solution in oil of a less soluble combustible body, such as picric acid, com-
bined with a more soluble body of the same class.

611,800— April 11, 1899. G. M. HATHAWAY. Detonating rmnpmnd.

It is composed of the ingredients of gunpowder with nitronaphthalene. nitro-
phenol, soaium nitrate, and pota.ssium chlorate, combined In such proportions
as to form a detonating compound of low grade.

611,990— April 11, 1899. H. BOYD. Blasting pmnlrr.

A fumeless explosive, consisting of sodium nitrate, sulj)hur, picrate of ammo-
nia, and pt)tji.s.sium bichromate, with or without commercial lime, cottonseed oil,
and peat dust, one or all of them.

616,1,99— May 13. 1899. F. A. HALSEY. Gunpowder.

It consists of picrate of ammonia, 47 per cent; potassium bichromate, i-i per
cent, and barium nitrate, 30 per cent.

61,9,913— .May 11, 1900. 8. 'CLARK. Explosive compound.

A mixture of sodium nitrate, 19 parts; antimony, 2i parts; sulphur, 3 parts;
charcoal or coke, 3i parts; picric acid, one-third part; nitric acid, one-third
part, and a reducer, such as resin, one-half part.

FULMINATES, PRIMING COMPOSITIONS, AND FUSES.

August 11. 18.%. S. GUTHRIE. Improvement in the mannfaetnre of percussion

powder.

Grains of powder are coated with shellac and before they are dry they arc
rolled in leaf metal, or any of the metallic powders, with bisulphuret of tin ()r
other metal or metallic compound. After coating they may be again coated
with a waterproof varnish.

18,016— August 18, 1867. M. KLING. Improvement in percussion powder.

A mixture of antimony, 1 ounce; and potassium chlorate, 1 ounce, with equal
proportions of glue dissolved in boiling water, and oxalic acid dissolved in
boiling water.

18,199— September 16, 1867. E. GOMEZ AND W. MILLS. Improvement in safety-
fuse compositions.
A mixture of equal parts of potassium chlorate and ferrocyanide of lead. It

is mixed with alcohol and applied as a paint to a strip of paper, and protected

by a winding of tape of fibrous material.

S5,i77— June 3, 1862. F. M. RUSCHHAUPT AND J. SCHULTE. Improved per-

eussion powder.

Tannin or pyrogallic acid, or analogous substances, are mixed in chemical
proportions with potassium chlorate, a varnish being added as a binder.

SB,l,ll,—May 6, 1863. L. SHORT. Improved composition for ftlling shells.

A mixture of saltpeter, 7 pounds; asphaltum, 0 pounds; antimony. 2 pounds;
sulphur, 7 pounds; and naphtha, 2 gallons, is allowed to stand and settle, and
the sediment is pressed into shells, forming combustible missiles to be used with
explosive projectiles. The liquid t-ombined with vegetable fiber is also packd
in explosive shells.

38,991, — June IS, 1863. I. P. TICE. Improvement in concussion fuse for sluiUi.

An admixture of fulminates with cotton, gun cotton, wool, sawdust, or othv:
soft material, prevents premature ignition, or the fulminate chamber is linec
with .soft material. Two fulminates are u.sed, one sensitive and easily igniter,
and the other burning slower and with a stronger flame. The percussion-fus<
plug Is of special construction.

1,1,169— January/ 11, 1861,. H. HOCHSTATTER. Improved composition for percii^

sion caps, etc.

Chloride of lead, 12 parts, is combined with potassium nitrate, 8 parts, and
gum amber. 3 parts.

DIGEST OF TATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTUIES.

255

afin—Mnn ». IXM. 1. S. BK^KKORD. trnpriiml/unr/or liltuHnp. tic.

A ('t'ntrnl xtrautl or corv of Ktin-cntton in luxxl In » fiue lu a aubiitltute (iir
gunpowder.

iS,iei>-Jatift7. IS6II. H. B. 8T0CKWELL. tmpmrt^ Jiilminating eompouml.

A mixture of fulmliintiiiK incmirv. 4 imrti: Haltpctcr, S piirU; liluck aulphiirvt
ol antimony, 2 parUi; and French chalk, 1 part.

ISMk—Auijuil If, lS6!i. H. IIULIiEN. ImiirDrrd torpedo.

A Khpct i<( AluuirU-nt pap«r mturntcd wholly or In part with ii Holutlon nl (ill-
mlnatc n* silver or of meri'ury.

f6,ie7—Julll 10, ;s««. ti. BOI.PT. tuiprntfil /utminalinff nimixmiliim.

Fltlecn imrw of fiilminHlliiK "liver formeil hy dliwolvlnit t part of mercury,
in weight. In 10 purtn of nitric ucld. then liulllnK with 12 partN of alcohol, rool-
InK anil drviiiit— is mixcil with U imrtK of »ulphurtln— formed by nieltlnK
loKCihcr 2 [viirln of siiliilmr and 3 pnrtti of tin— and 3 |)«rt» of flour and ] part of
powdere<l charcoal, with a little jfum water.

6:,7lJk—Augu»l IS, ISgr. H. BUCHNER AND F. EBERTZ. Improted /ulminating

IKiutlrr/ur Htedle-jfiiiu.

A mixture of polamlum chloride, sulphur, charcoal, saltpeter, potaaBium
chlorate, antimony, and gum. In about e<iual proportions.

6V,»)e~StplriiiUr Ji, 1X87. J. GOLD.M.VKK. Impmml fulminating eompuimil.

The siilphocvanite of a metal or other base, as the sulphot^yanlte of lead, is
U!>e<l In combination with potassium chlorate, cither with or without other .iul>-
stances.
Sl,0»—AHgHil tl. isas. C. H. F. THIEME. Improved priming /or needle-guM.

A composition haviuft hyposulphite of any metal as a base, as a mixture of
hyiKisulphitc of silver or lead, 1 part; sulphuruted antimony, 4 pnrux; potassium
ehloriilc. lu [lart."; milphtir, 3 parts; and white sugar one-fourth part.

S2,on~Augu4t II, 1S6S, B. BURTON, /mproronenf in the manufacture i^ wtUer-

proqf perctution caps, etc.

Shellac or other gtmi resin, mixed with alcohol or other readily evaporable
solvent. Is used in the compounding of fulminating matter,

93,1IS—Jali/ i7, ISSS. G. M. MOWBSAY. Improivd methixl nj erplodini/ nitro-

gtyeerine.

An electrical fuse la composed of a priming composition. Inclosing circuit
wires at their point of interruption. In combination wilii an intermediate priming
charge of fulminate of mercury, all inclosed in a cylinder.

iPS.W.*— .Voiemifr S. JStf». G. M. MOWBRAY. Improved compound /or priming

electric /u*t^.

A mixture of phosphorus, sulphur, silver, mercury', and potassium chlorate:
so as to form a mixture of subphosphide of silver with subsuJphide of silver and
potanlum chloride, to which is added sulphide of mercury.

m./i'J—Decembtr Ii, 1889. R. WHITE. Improcement in metallic cartridge!.

The fulminate powder is mixed with India rubber or slmilarelastic substance.
Thf structure of the cup is claimed.

IM.9SI—June 7, 1S70. W. H. ROGERS. Improved/uec composition.

A composition of powdered charcoal, 20 parts; powdered glu-w, 10 parts; potas-
sium chlorate, 10 parts: and dissolved India rubber, 30 parts; with sufficient
bi.sulphide of carbon to impart a tough and waxy character.

128.-4/ — June :R, 187S. G. M. MOWBRAY. Improvement in compounds /or prim-

inri electric /uea.

A mixture of mercuric sulphide, amorphous or crystalline— preferably the
crystalline — Sparta, and potassium chlorate, 1 part.

ia9,Ut—May to, ISIS. E. A. L. ROBERTS. Improvement in treating explmlve
compouna- to render them tqfe/or blcusting and other purposes.
Explosives, such as fulminates, are combined with water or other liquid, or
with a hygrometric salt, so as to form a paste. Moist compounds are exploded
by igniting near them or in contact a fulminating or detonating material. Moist
or wet compounds are combined in the same charge with dry powder capable
of being exploded by a spark or with percus.sion powder.

1st, 790— July 7. ISlh. C. A. & I. S. BROWNE. {Reimue: 6,B6i-July t!, 18IS.)

Improvement in explotive compounds.

An electrically explosive compound, consisting of pulverized fulminate of
mercury intermixed with particles of metal, as antimony, with or without anti-
monlc sulphide or other ingredients.

157, 8S6— December IS, 1S7L I. M. MILBANK. Improvement in ejcpUmve com-

pounds.

A fulminating compound of potassium chlorate, 80 parts; charcoal, 3S parts;
and red phosphorus. 4| parts.

IS7. 857— December 15, WU. I. M. MILBANK. Improvement in explotive com-
pounds.
A fulminating compound of potassium chlorate, 20 parts; pruaslate of potash,

10 parts; and red phosphorus, 1 part.

16I,i30— March 30, 1875. O. M. MOWBRAY. Improvement in primingt/or electric

/uses.

A composition of metallic antimony and fulminate of mercury, as a priming
for electric fuses.

16t,iSl— March SO, W5. G. M. MOWBRAY. Improvement in primings /or electric
fuses, etc.
A composition of bismuth and fulminate of mercury.

tens*— March SO, 1875. Q.M.MOWBRAY. Improvement in primingt/or electric

l>Uulingt, etc.

A composition of cadmitnn and fulminate of mercury: being a mixture of the
double-salt mercuric fulminate of cadmium, with an amalgam of mercury and
cadmium.

170.066— Sovember 16, 1S7S. H. J. DETWILLER. Improvement in explosive com-
pounds.

A detonating compound consisting of ground bark or sawdust, 6 partA; potas-
sium chlorate, 10 parts: and red phosphorus, 1 part. (Especially adapted for
railroad-torpedoes. )

179,oe7—June to, 1876. J. D. & W. C. SCHOOLEY. Improvmund in detonating

compounds.

A mixture of potassium chlorate, 3 parts; sulphur, 1 part; and broken glass,
1 part, (For railroad torpedoes. )

llH,0i.^—Km<emher7,ttns. W. A. LEONARD. ImprnrrmmUnemMnuamM/utr.
FomuMl of xylonite, coatwl with • match cnmpoalUon. (To b* tiaol from an

airtight case.)

tl7,5Slr-jHly 15, 11179. K. H. HI' NT. Imprnrement in pyrulrehntr eartridgu.

A star having a drop of (iilminate iie<-ure<l to Its base by shellac dissolved In
alcohol. The structure of the cartrldg<> is claimed.

tta,9S5-june IS, inm. J. A. Robinson ani> r. h. oimock, Dt/iagrotinu

aimptmnd.

Amorphous phosphonis combined with plumbic plumlMtc and polasalum
chlorate, pnaluced bv mixing the aniornhoiw phosphorus with sufllclenl h<ii
water to render the whole mixture of a tltiid consistency, adding plumtHc pin to w
ate 111 small ouantltles with stirring till ctTervem-ence ccaM-s. aixl then nddlntf
potassium chlorate In quantity equal t4> that of the amorphous phoophoni*,
and thoroughly mixing.

lSS,U)6-<)ctiibrr 19. 1880. C, A. FAURE AND O. TRENCH. Detonator.

A detonating compound of fulminate of mercury, 6 parts, and gun cotton and
potassium chlorate, each 1 [Mrt.

t6l,ti7—Juty 18, last. J. F. A. MUMM. Compnuml /nr ralluny-tli/n '

A compound com[Kmcd of potassium chlorate, gum tragacanth, n
mony, sulphur auratum antimonli, or golden sulpburct, sublimed '.I . ; ,-'.

French chalk, in the form of pellets or cakes, with packages of gravel Inter-
spcrsed,

169,769— December te. 1881. A. WOEBER. Fidmlnatr.

A mixture of potassium chlorate. 1 ixxind; washeil Dowers of sulphur, one-half
pound; amorphous phosphorus, 2 ounces: and 12 fluid ounces of olasolved gum
tragacanth.

S09.IJ,l— December 18, 1881. J. C. DE CASTRO. Erplotire compound.

Bran or other suitable form of cellulose — 7 jiarts— is mixol with tersulphidi'
of antimony, or natural sulphide of antimony— 1 part— to which is ad(l>"l n
saturated solution of potassium chlorate, and the whole forme<l Into i>ell<i.« or
grains.

U8,55t— December SI, 1889. P. BUTLER. Ounpowder.

A mixture of fulminate of mercury, pulverized soapstone, and a suitable
binding material, as black gunpowder.

iS9,761^anuary 10. 189S. S. RODGERS. Detonating compound.

It consistH of potassium picrate, 43 per cent; potassium chlorate, 43 per cent:
extract of logwood, 12 per cent; and a gallotannlc Ink, 2 per cent.

St9,SSi—yovember IS, 189i. U.MAXIM, t'ulminating compound.

A pliable, yielding, or elastic explosive, consisting of a fulminate with It*
particles agglutinated by a dissolved organic nitro compound, as pyroxyllne,
with or without nitroglycerine, or a deterring agent to lessen its sensltivenem
to detonation.

6SJ,,7 16— October 10, 1899. G. P. BICKF0RD-8MITH. OmpositUyn /or iletimatort.
A composition of sodium tungstate, 4 parts; precipitated copper, 2 parts; stron-
tium nitrate, 4 parts; antimony sulphide, 96 parts; precipitated silver, 108 parts;
potassium chlorate, 192 parts; and electrot)!* plumbago, 20 parts.

PYROTECHNIC COMPOSITIONS.

.K,7i6— .September 1, 186S. J. P. PERRY'. Improved composition /or expktsive shells.
A liqiiid shell-mixture formed of powdered sulphur, alcohol, and turpentine,
used alone or with cotton or other fibrous matter. (The shell has a separate
bursting charge.)

1,1.577— February 9. 18SI,. E. HARRISON. Improved infammabte compotltioa /or

filling projectiles.

A mixture of gunpowder, amorphous phosphorus, and bisulphide of carbon;
forming a thick paste or solid mass.

il,i58— April te, isei. A. BERNEY. Improvement in destroying /arts, etc., by

means qf inflammable liquids.

An Inflammable liquid Is to be projected by a hose and pump, the Jet being
ignite<l at the nozzle.

l,7,SS.i— April 18.1865. C. W. ROESUNG. Improved powder/or lighting cigars, etc.
A mixture of potash, 40 parts; burned alum, 30 parts; powdered charcoal. 20
parts; and rye flour, 10 parts, Is heate<l In a ciosed cylinder to a red heat, then
cooled and maintained dry. It Ignites by simply breathing on It.

i8,l87— June IS, 1865. H. W. LIBBEY. Improved incendiary compound.

Powdered potassium nitrate, U ounces, and spirits of turpentine, 1 ounce. ar«
added to a mixture of nitric acid. 2 ounces; banum sulphate, one-fourth ounce;
and sulphuric ether. 1) ounces. After standing, the oilv substance is treated
with alcohol; and hydrocarbon oil, I ounce, and tar, one-half ounce, are added:
and combustible flbrotis material is saturated with the compound.

65,76tt — June 11, 1867. C. NELSON. Improved toy torpedo and explotive compound.
The explosive composition consists of amorphous phosphorus, one-third:
potassium chlorate, one-third: sulphur, one-sixth: and pulverized chalk, one-
sixth.

lU.OSO— October tS, 1875. A. LAMARRE. Improvement in pyrotechnic lignaU.

Linseed-glue, produced by reducing linseed oil to one-half Its voliune. by
evaporation or burning, is mixed with the chlorates and other chemicals.

S09,9i8— December SO. lS8i. J. HERZOO. Ooloredrftre compound.

Sawdust dyed to the color the fire will produce Is mixed with the chemical
ingredients.

SS3,66S— August i. 18SS. C.GERHARD. Composition /or bengalUghl$.

A mixture of strontium nitrate and chlorate, polaasiiim cblonte, powdere<l
glass, and flour, with an alcoholic solution of a realnoos sabitance, such as
shellac or resin, or a mixture of the two.

SeS,tti—May 17. 1887. C. GERHARD. CompotOion /or bengal lighU.

A mixture of strontium nitrate or chlorate, 24 ponnds, and shellac, T pounds,
melted, mixed, and cooled, is pulverized, added to a solution of glue and gum,
and 4 pounds of potassium chlorate is added to the paste thus formed.

S8i,9t7—Jttne 19, 1888. H. O. PIFFARD. Photogenie pomler.

It consists of magnesium powder Intimately mixed with "wood powder"
(Dlttmar, No. 146,408), or similar nltro-llgnin equivalent.

256

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

U>7. 351— July 2S, 1SS9. A. HEMSLEY. Compound for producing flash-light.

It consists of powdered or granulated metallic magnesium, one or more
nitrates, and amorphous phosphorus.

ilt.TlU— September ?4, 18S9. A. DEL GRANDE. Preparing pyrotechnie compounds.
Picric acid i.s dissolved in hot water and magnesium carbonate added to form
a solution of magnesium picrate; then potassium nitrate is dis.solved in water
and the two solutions mingled, producing a precipitate of potassium picrate
(CoH»(>>02)30K), which is reduced to a granular condition and dried.

U5,i79—yttvemt)er 19, 18S9. J. G. STUTTZ. Colored fire.

A mixture of potassium chlorate, fum-.shellac, gum-camphor (pulverized),,
brass filings, and magnesia, with or without strontium nitrate.

Ji^OMi-- February i, 1S90. H. O. FRANK. Solidifying colored fire.

P.vrotechnie powders are converted into solid form by adding a small quantity
of alcohol to the powdered ingredients and mixing the whole in a water bath,
at about 93° C, and while still warm pressing the pasty mass into molds coated
with vaseline, and cooling.

!M,5S0—iIarch SI. 1891. C. GERHARD. Bengal-light compound.

It consJsts of copal, ether, alcohol, strontium nitrate, and potassium chlorate,
with or without a shellac solution or varnish.

iro,S97—May SI, 1891. C. SCHMIDT. Fireworks.

A composition for making star fireworks, consisting of steel chips, charcoal,
lead nitrate, shellac, and spirit*.
J476,!6!,—June 7, 189S. E. HACKH. Magnesium-light composition.

Fibrous material, as long carded unspun wool, is impregnated with vegetable
oil. 2 parts; benzine, 2 parts and Venice turpentine 1 part, and sprinkled with
magnesium powder.
613,611,— July 2U, 1891,. J. AGOSTINI. Pyrotechnic compound.

A composition produced by mixing powdered magnesium and charcoal with
starch, rendering the mixture adhesive, coating iron filings with a substance
impervious to moisture, and adding them to the mixture.

S3S,S15— October SO, 1891,. A. HEMSLEY. Flash-tight compound.

A mixture of aluminum, a nitrate or nitrates of the metals or alkaline earths,
and amorphous phosphorus.
SSJ,,5.n— February 19, 1895. C. GERHARD. Pyrotechnic compound.

A mixture produced by dissolving camphor in alcohol, mixing lampblack
therewith, adding gum tragacanth and glue, and mixing inU) these ingredients
magnesium, starch, and iron.

335,1,95— March IS, 1895. J. GRAHAM. Pyrotechnic compound.

A mixture of powdered zinc, 320 grains; powdered selenium, 80 grains; in one
gallon of carbon disulphide.

S90,3S1— September 11, 1897. E. LEDSMANN. Pyrotechnic compound.

A compound for Bengal lights, consisting of an alcoholic .solution of shellac,
a nitrate of a metal of the alkaline earths, pulverized aluminum, .sulphur, an
alkaline chlorate— as potassium chlorate— and a binding agent.

59l,,59U—Xovember SO, 1897. J. A. BOSTWICK. Flash-light ciimposition.

A sheet of collodion has combined therewith powdered flash-light material
to produce an actinic light of brief duration and large area. A layer of powder
may be applied between two collodion tilms.

eSS,671— September 16, 1899. Z. VALDEZ. Toy torpedo.

A ball of clay has a coating of gum-shellac; a coating composed of gum-
arabic, 4 parts; phosphorus, 4 parts; and potassium chlorate, 5 parts; and an
outer coating of shellac.

MATCH COMPOSITIONS.

l,il}— November 16, 18S9. J. H. STEVENS. Improvement in the compositimi of

vuitter for friction-matches.

A combination of litharge and the red oxide of lead, or either of them sepa-
rately, with carbonate of lead, phosphorus, and a glutinous or viscid material,
such as gum-arabic, or with black oxide of manganese, phosphorus, and the
glutinous material.

J, UlU— November 16, 1839. J. H. STEVENS. Improved frictiorirmalch for retaining

fire, entitled " Stevens' fusee cigar-light."

The match splint is saturated with a solution of saltpeter, dried, and the
phosphoric composition is then applied to the end, without the intervention of
brimstone.

t,i01— December IS, 181,1. N. T. WINANS, T. & T. HYATT. Improvement in the

composition of matter for the manufacture of friction-matches.

Phosphorus, alone or in connection with other inflammables, is combined
with glue or gum rendered damp-proof by being chemically united with shellac.

t,U)S— December IS, 181,1. N. T. WINANS, T. & T. HYATT. Improvement in tlie

composition of matter for the manufacture offriction-matclies.

Shellac, 3 parts, and borax, three-fourths of a part— or like alkali— is dissolved
in water, and three-fourths of a part of phosphorus is combined therewith.

*,4S4— -Varc/i 18, laiJS. S. BLAISDELL. Improvement in ignttible compounds for

friction-matches.

The matches are dipped into a compound of sulphur and phosphorus formed
into a paste with glue.

t,6S5—May 10, ISil. G. W. CARLETON. Improvement in friction-matches.

A paste formed of phosphorus, gum-arabic, or glue, and a fulminating com-
pound composed of subearbonate of potassa, 2 parts; nitrate of potassa, 3 parts;
and sulphur, 1 part.

S,77S— Octobers, 18U. E.SMITH. Improvement in frictmn-matches.

Pulverized dried vegetable material, as bark, or nutgalls, Is mixed with phos-
phorus, in place of mineral or earthy substances.

1,0,959 — October IS, 1863. J. W. HJERPE. Improx^ement in the manufacture (if fric-
tion-matches.

A safety match composition {not using phosphorus or other dangerous sub-
stance), igniting only on a prepared rubber composition, consisting preferably
of potassium chlorate, 4 i>ounds; potassium cliromate, 4 pounds: specular iron
or colcothar, 2 pounds; and gum, 2 pounds. Rubber compound therefor, sul-

phuret of antimony, 20 pounds; potassium chromate, 2 pounds; red iron oxide
or colcothar, G pounds: prntosulphate of iron, 3 pounds: and gum, 3 pounds.
Combined, the composition is friction lighting.

1,7,311- April 18, 1865. S. KRACKOWIZER. Impniremcnt in the manufacture of

friction-matches.

A metallic coating of sulphide of lead is formed around the phosphoric mass,
by impregnating the friction mass with hyperoxide of lead and nitrate of oxide
of lead, and exposing the tipped and moist matches to a stream of hydrothlonic
acid gas.

50,81,3— \ovember 7, 1865. H. REIMAN. Improvement in friction-matches fur light-
ing cigars, etc,
Pa.steboard or other stock for friction-matches is treated with a solution of

potassium chlorate and niter.

53.l,5i— March 17, 1866. L. LANSZWEERT. Improved match-compound.

A mixture of potas-sium chlorate, 35 parts; hyposulphate of lead, 1.5 parts; glass
or silex, 4 parts; bichromate of potash, 10 parts; and gum or cement, 4 parts.
The matches ignite only on a prepared surface containing black antimony and
phosphorus.

66, 101— June 15, 1867. L. O. P. MEYER. Improvement in the manufacture of safety-

matehes.

A match mixture of potassium chlorate, gelatine, and quartz or pumice stone,
in relative proportions, for example, of .% per cent, 20 per cent, and 24 per cent.
The igniting surface mav be formed of the red or the yellow prussiate of potash,
mixed with a binder and with powdered glass or aluminous earth (though it is
inferior to Hjerpe's igniting surface).

69,891— October 15, 1867. E. ANDREWS. Improvement in the manufacture of

matches.

Match splints are united in the form of a card by arranging them side by side
and dipping the nonigniting ends in glue.

95,730— October 11, 1869. W. H. ROGERS. Improvement in friction-matches.

An inflammable coating is applied to a friction match below the ignitible end.
The coating may be of potassium chlorate, 8 parts; powdered charcoal, 2 parts:
and dissolved rubber, 5 parts.

l!5,S7t,—AprU 18, 1871. F. ZAISS. Improvement in parlor-matches.

Phosphuret or phosphide of sulphur, white Russian glue, and white dextrine
or purified starch, with or without coloring material, is used to produce white or
colored matches; and benzoin, cascarilla, or cinnamon to give a perfume while
burning.

118,616— July t, 1871. J. HOWE. Improvement in matches for lighting cigars, etc.
A mixture of 1 pound each of benzoin, myrrh, and cascarilla bark; one-fourth
ounce each of nutmeg, oil of cloves, and oil of musk; and 2 pounds each of
charcoal and potassium nitrate; formed into a paste with a mucilage.

136,953— March IS, 1873. J. F. BABCOCK, W. A. LEONARD, AND E. B. CRANE.

Improvement in match compositions.

A fuse-strip is formed of pyroxyline, pure or mixed. It Is molded with serra-
tions and with friction-match composition on the whole or a part of its surface.

W.Sll,— April 7, 1871,. h. O. P. MEYER. Improvement in the manufacture of

safety-matches.

In the manufacture of safety matches— Nos. 66,101 and 111,075— the paste is
prepared with acetates of iron or of alcohol.

150,103— April IS. 1871,. C. B. STEPHENS. Improvement in matches or arrows for

use with toy pistols or toy guns.

A projectile for toy pistols consisting of an explosive coating on a body of
wood or other material not easily ignited, as a parlor match made with the
omission of coal-wax or like materialfrom the detonating compound and splint.

153,001,— July lU, 1871,. J.J. MACH ADO. Improvement in the manufacture of fric-
tion-matches.

A match dipped to some length into a slow-burning composition, not liable
to be extinguished by a draft of air, and having a head of rapidly combustible
composition, igniting only on a chemical-atliiiity surface. The heads are
waterproofed by dipping into a .solution of alcohol and tannic acid.

153,181— July 11, 1871,. G. C. J. SCHNEIDER. Improvement in compositions for

safety blazing fusees, etc.

A mixture of glue and starch in water, to which is added powdered glass,
potassium chlorate, pumice stone, sulphuret of golden antimony, saltpeter, cas-
carilla bark, and lampblack.

163,1,51— July 18, 1S7U. L. 0. P. MEY'ER. Improvement in surface compounds for

igniting safety-matches.

A compound of India rubber, or allied gum, sulphur, and gray sulphuret of
antimony; in the proportion, for example, of 2, 1, and 23 parts, respectively.

156,318— October 17, 187!,. W. S. BEECHER. Improvement in ammunition-viatches

for toy pistols.

The ends of splints have coatings of detonating material and silicate of sixla.
Either may be first applied.

157,873— Decetnber 15, 1871,. G. C. J. SCHNEIDER. Improvemeid in saftiy-match

compositions.

A mixture of brick dust, potassium chlorate, golden sulphuret of antimony,
flowers of sulphur, starch, and water.

169,539— Xovemtxrl, 1875. E. HAANEL. Improvement in safety-matches.

A match composition of potassium chlorate, 1.6 part; sulphide of antimony,
0.3 part: sesqnioxide of iron, 0.35 part; binoxide of manganese, 0.36 part; pota.s-
sium chromate, 0.05 part; and powdered glass, 0.05 part; formed into a paste with
a gelatine mucilage. The friction-tablet composition consists of amorphous
phasphorus, 1 part; sulphide of antimony, 0.02 part; and powdered glass, 0.2o
part; formed into a paint with the gelatine mucilage.

177 ,001— May 1, 1876. J. RADFORD. Improvement in compositions for lig/iting

cigars.

A mixture of pulverized charcoal, wheat flour, potassium chlorate, and
diluted vinegar or acetic acid.

177.1Sl,—May 9, 1876. VI. J. LITTLEFIELD. Improvement in compositions for
cigar-lighters.
A compound of lime, charcoal, cascarilla bark, gum, and water.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

267

J9«.0«f— Ortofcrr », /.W". H. U. WllITKMAN. ImitrmTmml in rigartiiiktrrii.

A •li!<k pnivlilol with n pli) or |>CK «n<l ImvInK iin innommnbU* Ixxly nnd •
Iiilmlnnli', tliv iiillnmniulilu IxMly fOiulatliiR of ii niixUin^ u( rhanoal, nlU-r. nul-
phur, Kum-nrublc. and flour.

tm.ite—Julj) iO. taso. C. F. BONHACK. >Virt(<Mi-jii<i/cA.

A mixture of niter. VcnotlHii turpontlni'. phnxphorua, glur, powdered glaia,
and cnicus nietallonim or other coloriUK mntter.

WO.'r.i— .HrifliiW S. I.ISO. (). HAYKi'. CamiHiunil /nr prrpartng thr urirlu or

vititehm ((/ Hlinrrn' liquib«.

A niixinre of oil, ono-half pint; iiulphur. Vi <>unci>»: camphor, K ounoot; and
red lead. 2 ouneen; boiled and thoroii{;hl>' mixed.

tU.TSO— .Villi n, liai. W. W. BATCHEU)P;K. OmlinHaun maleh.

All iKiiitinifpenrll.onehnlf formed of «ii iKnUlnuromposltliiiirlch InoxyKcn—
n.1 a mixture of jtotaHDlum chlorate and hluoxide of lead — tind the other lialf of
Inert material, with a cor«' of an Igiiitlhle comtHwitlon. no pliiwohonis, the
latter being separated from the Igniting compo«ltlun by u septum. It is ignited
by friction.

tJ.i.:i7—Jiiiu-7, lUSt. I). BLl'MENKRON. Manujarture (}f matrha.

A niatcli compounilstliiK of red oxide of lead, phosphortu, sulphuret of
antlmimv. and a Rummy vehicle.

A mati'li hnvliiK a stem of cotton strands .saturated and coated with a trans-
lucent Inllammalilc water and air proof solution, and a head waterprcH>fed with
an alcohol lac varnish.

tSI,)Sl—l>ecembrr tt, 1S81. L. WAGNER. Manufacture qZ/riclion-matehee.

A match oomponltion of hyposulphite of lead, peroxide of lead, potnssium
chlorate, crude or gray sulphide of antimony, pulverized charcoal, pulverized
glass, .laltpeter, sulphur, dextrine, suitable gelatinous binding substances, and
water.

tTS.€17— April 10, 1S8S. H. ENDEMANS. Man»faHure of malchcf.

A stick, atrip, or sheet of paper, pasteboard, or wood, saturated with oleic acid
and having a sultnble lighting composition held by a basic binding material,
such lut protoxide of lead, either incorporated with the igniting composition or
first Hpplicil to the stick.

t8i,6Sl—Srplember 11, ISSS. J. H. MITCHELL. Manufacture of friction-matchet.
An Impalpable dry powder, such as pumice stone or chalk. Is Injected upon
the freshly dipped heads to form a nonadhesive surface.

SOt,7V—Juliii9, 188i. W. B. ELTOXHEAD. Match.

A fusee liarlng a head of an Ignltable compound combined with a powder
made by grinding up discarded crucibles, cupels, and scoriflcrs.

SS.^.oe.'y— January «6, 18$6. F. W. FARNHAM. Match.

The head is componed of two separate compounds, one a safety composition,
and the other, or tip, an ordinary, frictionally ignitlble composition.

)iO,7i7— April tr, 1886. C. WEIBACH. FyroUchnic match.

A stick having its head coated with a friction-igniting compound and the
portion of the body adiolnlng the head coated with a pyrotechnic compound,
or a series of compounds to produce lights of diflercnt colors.

I,is,^02— December SI, 1SS9. J. LUTZ. Infiammabic componitimt/ttr matehen.

A soUitlon of sodium chlorate, ammonium sulphate, and a carbohydrate.
Matches light by frictlonal contact on a surface prepared with amorphous phos-
phonis and washed black trisulphide of antimony.

Ue.(e77— September tS, 1890. W. M. NIX. .Vatch.

A double-headed waterproof match having the spUnt previously soaked in a
bath of sodium phosphate, so that it will not carbonize, and heads composed of
glue or other gelatinous binder, i>araffine, |K>ta.ssium chlorate, peroxideof lead,
sulphide of antimony, and potassium bichromate.

ISS.IOS— October IS, t89t. J.KLEIN. Matchhciulinr) compoMion.

A compound of dextrine, water, phosphorus, minium, lampblack, and nitric
acid.

leS.ue—June ta.lSoe. C. R. a. G. SCHWIENINO. .Watch.

A compound of potassitun chlorate, red phoephonu, and calcium pltimbate,
Igniting on any frtctioiul surface.

S:9.9IS— March 30, 1897. H. ALLDAY. Matehntriking compontion.

A composition of phosphorus, gritty matter, and gum; tbua available for both
■afety and friction matches.

lK,tt7— October «S, lasfl. L. ARONSON. Match and eompotitirm /or tame.

A fnsce consisting of a stem and a frictlonlgnlllng head, with a waterproof,
persistently combustible compound, not Ignitlble by friction, etiveloping the
nead and portion of the stem adjacent thereto. The contiK>und consists essen-
tlallvof potassium chlorate, chromute of lead, amorphous plio«tphorus, sulphuret
of antimony, dextrine, charcoal, and one or more resinous gums.

69U.t:a—yovemberiS.18S7. O. FIKSCHING. Manufacture of matcliet.

In the manufacture of headless safety-matches the end or ends of the match-
splints (Ijoth ends may be made ignitlble), they having been assembled into
bundles, are dipped into a solution consisting of Wlium chlorate, gtim arable,
a fuliihute of a metal proper (as of copper or Iron), and water; then thoroughly
dried; and then dipped, to a greater depth, in a hydrocarbon waterjiroof solu-
tion, as of rosin, turpentine, oleic acid, and linseed oil.

i9k.e77—^'ocember SO, 1897. A. CHATELAN. CompotUion/or light inr; cigars.

A combustible composition of peroxide of manganese, poto-sslum iiermaganate.
potassium chlorate (with or without powdered coke and cinnamoti bark), and
an outer frlctional-ignlting head is applied to the end of a cigar or cigarette.
A waterpr<H)f cap may be added.

eOS.66r,—May 10, 1S98. A. TACHAUER AND L. BRALV. OompotUion for

making watcheg.

A mi.^ture of an adhesive substance and plum1>ate«of calcium and strontium.
metulli<- aluminum, and monosulphide of calcium, in suitable proportions,
with or without powdered glass, hyposulphite of lead, sodium chloride, and
potassium chlorate at defined temperature and proportion.

eiS.Otl— October ts. 1898. Y.SCHWARTZ. Flathlight compotttion.

A mixturt^ of a light material. a.s a quickly combustible magnesium mixture,
is combined with a cementing medium, such as a solution of pyroxyllnc In
ether and olcohal, and made Into the form of a foil.
No. 210 17

tll^BD^Sormtber It. IHtH. H. HfeVkNK AND K. I>. CAHKK. JTotdtt

fleM|ulsulphlde of phmphoriM la the oawnllal Ingredient. U bHnc mixed wllh
oxldlxlng iHxlles, Inert matter, and glue.

att.tOD— March W, lim. E. (i. W)HY. Match.

The match-paste contains a hypophonphlte, hm hjrpophflaphlte of Mklam. In
addition t<i the usual materials.

»tS,tB»—May It. lava. U. HACKKL. Mntch^pwiU cimpotUlM.

It conslstJi of potash, gum-arabic amorphous nhnaphonu, poUMilitm eMonte,
a mineral coloring matter, hypomilphlte of lean, and wal«r.ln epedfled prapor-

tlotis.

«t7,S».f— June to. 1899. W. G. CORDIS. Match cnmpntitUm.

A mixture of potomliim chlorate, ground glass, whiting, plaster (A pari*, glae,
and water, and amorphous red plioephorus. In specified proportions.

esS,Si9—July 10, 1900. W. p. JONJX AND H. M. BATRg. Match.

A nonpolsonous composition, comprialng potoaeiiun chlorate, sulphide of
antimony, a metallic thioaulpbate, oxide of manganeae, potaarium bichromate,
an inert substance, red pruseiate of potash, and adhesive material.

«.M.S«4— vlMjusfU, 1900. B. HEIMANN. Self lighting cigar.

The ends of the Independent leaves, t>efore U'lng roIle<l Into form, are setii'
rated with a composition including ixitasslum chlorate, lampblack, pentaml-
phlde of antimony, charcoal, and gelatine.

GROUP XV.— PLASTICS.

PYROXYLIN PLASTICS.

6S,t67—Maii 18, 1867. W. H. PIER80N. Improved ptatHc eompomut made from

vegetable flberg.

A plastic is formed of cotton, hemp, flax, grass, woofi, starch, sugar, or other
equivalent vegetable matter acted ufton by acids (nitric or a mixture of nitric
and sulphuric acids) to soften or render s<)lubleor j>artly soluble said vegetable
matter in other solvents than said acids, the vegetable matter nf>t l>elng neces-
sarily dls.solved. but softened or pulplfle<l; and articles of manufacture formed
therefrom. The plastic, wet with equal parts of alcohol and ether, is appliecl to
cotton hatting, or any eiiuivalent liber, or spread on any mold or surface. Fab-
rics are waterproofed therewith. The plastic with Ita solvents Is combined with
metals anrl various metallic, sillcious, or argillaceous mitaatanceii in the pulver-
ulent state. The plastic is mixed with dr>'ing oils for waterproofing ancl trans-
parencies. Ftir. pltish, or other short fiber is attached by means of the plastic
to give a fur-like surface. A com{iound for painting and coloring is formed by
admixture of plastic and solvents with paints, oils, ayestolls, etc.

77, sou- April t8, 1868. J. A. MCCLELLAND. {Seimue*: S,777, «.77a— Xtewmier
18, 1869.) Improved material for dental platet and for other purpotet.
Sheets of collodion and its compounds with resinous substances are commi-
nuted and formed into massive forms by treating with ether and alcohol or
other solvent, molding, pressing, and drying.

79,161— June tS, 1868. C. A. 8EELY. Improvement iiyuMdifed collodion.
Nltro-glucose Is combined with collodion to increase the flexibility and.

toughncis.

S8.!!i8— March iS, 1869. L. R. STREETER. Improved method of reneertng artiOet

with pgroxyline.

Plastic pyroxylin or xyloidin is veneered to a base, deutal plates or gums,
with or without cement, by compression, antl with heat, if need be.

88,i60— March tS,lS69. L.R. .STREETER. Improved eompotUion for dental pUUet.
Soluble pyroxylin, or xyloidin. or gun-cotton combined with substances that
will give the neees.sary quantities, is used for dental plates, e. g., a compound
formed of pyroxylin, 210 parts; wax, 60 parts; zinc white, 30 parts; and coloring
matter.

89,!5S— April », 1869. L. R. STREETER. Improved dental plate.

Dental plates and gums formed of pyroxylin, reduced to a dough and forced
or pressed into mold.s, brought under pressure, and the solvent evaporated.

SS.iSl.— April 20, 1869. L. R. STREETER. Improved proeett of treating purozle,
pijroTgliiu, and the tike subttance, for forming meful and ormamental ariula.
Pyroxvlin and its compounds are treated with suitable nonsolrents, as alco-
hol, .sulphide of carbon, or naphtha, with or without a cementlve agent, and
rendered dLstensible, compressible, and impressible.

89,182— May !,. 1869. J. W. HYATT. JR.. AND D. BLAKE. Improved compound

of ivory dagt and otiter materiatt.

Ivory du.st or other pulverized material is agglutinized by combining collodion
therewith and subjecting the composition to pressure during the evaporation of
the volatile elements by means of neat.

90,766— June 1, 1869. J. A. MCCLELLAND. Improved machine for treating col-
lodion and itn compoundt.
Collodion and Its compounds are mixed in a Tacuiun.

91..1il—Jnne 15, 1869. J. W. HY'ATT, Jr., AND I. 8. HYATT. Improved method

Iff making solid collodion.

Pyroxylin, with or without an admixture of ivory dust or other material, is
dissolved in a, small quantity of solvent, under great pressure, forming a hard
and solid product.

91,X77— June IS, 1869. D. SPILL. Improvement in compounds containing xyMdine.
Compounds are produced of xyloldlne in conjunction with oils, camphor,
parafline. and giuta-percha; one or more of the Ingredients, as camphor. Is dts
solved in the oil, the solution forming a nonvolatile solvent for xyloldlne, which
becomes a part of the resulting compound.

96,lSt^0etober 16, 1SS9. J. A. Mc<U<ELLAND. Improved mode qf producing use-
ful articles from collodion and its compounds.
A sheet of collodion and resinous matter Is heated until soft and plastic, and

then the article is stamped out lietween dies.

97,UI,— November 30, 1869. D. SPILL. ImprovementlndinoMngxgbMime/orate

in the arts.

Solvents are employed which are not necessarily In themselves KtlTcnta o(
xyloldlne, but become so by the addition of other bodies or eompoands. Eight
specified solvents Include as elements camphor or camphor oil, alcohol <ir
spirits of wine, hydrocarbons having a b. p. lOS" to 206° C, castor oil. bisulphide
of carbon, and aldehyde.

258

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIP:S.

101,176— Mareh H, WO. D. SPILL. Imprmemenl in the manufacture of xylotdine

and Us compound.

Cotton or other vegetable fiber or lignine is reduced to a finely divided state;
mixed with the aid of mechanical means in a vessel having revolving arms or
beating bars, with a suitable quantity of acid; the acid strained from the fiber;
the product pressed to remove excess of acid, and the pressed mass then opened
out, washed, drained, and dried. The xyloidine is bleached directly after the
removal of the acids and before removing it from the vat by means of any
bleaching solution, making use of alternate stirrings and rest. It is dyed after
draining and before pressing, by any fiber-dyeing process, either before or after
the solution of the same in suitable solvents. For spreading upon fabrics 1
part of xyloidine is dissolved in from 5 to 12 parts of solvent, strained through
a fine sieve under pressure, and spread on the fabric or surface in a semifluid
condition. To reduce it to a nearly dry condition the strained solution or paste
is treated in a closed mixing vessel connected with an exhaust apparatus, the
ves,sel being heated to about 100° C. The solvent vapors that pass off are con-
densed for re-use.

10S,m9—May 17, 1S70. J. LEWTHWAITE. Improvement in coating fabrics with

parkesine.

Parkesine or xylonite in a plastic state is spread upon the surface of the fab-
ric and Immediately subjected to pressure, which is continued for several days,
when the material is to be pliant or supple. If the surface is required to be
polished it is subjected to the action of rotating brushes after the parkesine has
become fixed.

105,338— July 12, 1S70. .1. W. HYATT, JH., AND I. S. HYATT. (Reissues: S,9IIS—
June SS, 1871,: 10,51,6— December SS, 188k.) Treating and molding pyroxyline.
Finely comminuted camphor gum is mixed with pyroxylin pulp and ren-
dered a solvent by the application of heavy pressure in a heated mold.

10S,8S3—Julu 26, 1870. J. A. McCLELLAND. Improved process for coating objects

with collodion and its compounds.

Collodion is molded upon the article to be coated, so as to obtain the coating
at one operation.

Il!,,2i2— April 25, 1871. R. H. WINSBOROUGH. Improvement in the preparailon

and application of pyroxyline for dental plat/^s.

Pyroxylin for dental purposes is bleached by the application of chlorine to
render it highly translucent. The camphor of dental plates formed by the intro-
duction of camphorated pyroxylin into plaster or porous moulds is expelled by
artificial heat or evaporation, or extracted by chemical means.

117,666— June!,, 1872. V.SMITH. Improvement in compounds for denial purposes.
A dental plate made of gun-cotton, prepared gum shellac, gum camphor, with
a compound formed of oxide of zinc, Chinese vermilion, and oxide of tin and
gold, together with sulphuric ether and alcohol.

133,229- November 19, 1872. I. S. & .1. W. HYATT. Improvement in process and

apparatus for manufacturing pyroxyline.

A mixture of pyroxylin and camphor gum is dried by compressing it into
cakes and subjecting them to pressure in a pile with interposed layers of absorb-
ent material. Pvroxylin is transformed by means of camphor gum by subject-
ing the material to pressure in the upper part of a cylinder, kept sufficiently
cool to prevent the melting of the solvent during the compression and expulsion
of the air, while the lower portion is heated suiflciently high tomelt the solvent
and transform the pyroxylin, which is forced through the same and out of a
discharge nozzle, as a rod, bar, or sheet.

133,969— December 17, 1872. L. DEITZ AND B. P. WAYNE. Improvement in the
manufacture of pyroxyline and articles therefrom.
Pyroxylin made from ramie, Boehjneria nivea.

U3,772— October 21, 1873. J. A. McCLELLAND. Improvement in collodion com-
pounds.

The converted material is dried by the alternate application of pressure and
exposure to the atmosphere. Absorbent pads of felt cloth or other material,
with paper interposed, are used while the material is under pressure.

11,3,866— October 21, 1873. H. T. ANTHONY. Improvement in preparing soluble

cotton for the manufacture of collodion.

Soluble cotton is subjected to the action of volatilized alkali, preferably am-
monia, after the ordinary acid treatment and washing, to remove traces of acid.

150,722— May 12, 1871,. D. D. SMITH. Improvement in artificial coral for jewelry.
A mixture of gun-cotton, 24 parts; gum copal, 5 parts; alcohol, 10 parts;
pcrchloride of tin, one-twentieth part; gum-.shellac, 1 part; ether, 20 parts;
perchloride of gold, one-fortieth part; magnesium oxide, 1 part; protochloride
of tin, one-twentieth part; and oxide of mercury, 1 part.

162,232— June 23, 1871,. I. S. & J. W. HYATT. Improvemetit in apparatus and
processes for moldinff celluloids and the compounds of pyroxyline.
Celluloid Is molded in a closed vessel supplied ynth steam, in a porous or

suitable mold. A safety valve regulates the pressure and temperature.

153,196— July 21, 1871,. R. FINLEY HUNT. Improvement in molding celluloids for
dentists and others.
Celluloid is softened and molded with dry heat.

166,352— October 27, 187k. I- 8. & J. W. HYATT. Improvement in manufacturing

solidified collodion.

Pyroxylin Is mixed with a latent solvent which becomes active only upon
theappl'icgtion of heat, e. g., pyroxylin mixed with I part of camphor and 8
parts of alcohol. •

166,353— October 27, 1871,. J. W. & I. S. HYATT. Improvement in the mMnufadure

df celluloid.

A solvent of camphor, such as alcohol, is added to the mixture of pyrgxylin
and camphor previous to mastication, heat, and i»re.ssure, using, say. 100 parts
of dry pyroxylin and 2,5 to 40 parts of gum camphor, with 20 to 40 per cent of
alcohol after the aforesaid ingredients are mixed and the aqueous moisture has
been expelled.

165,231,— July 6, 1875, J, W. & I. S. HYATT. Improvement in grindlng-wheels.
A grinding wheel made of emery or similar particles united by celluloid,
or pyroxylin, or their components.

nt,996— February 1, 1876. F. GREENING. Improvement in the manufacture of

Kdable gun-cotton and products therefrom.

A mixture of hydrochloric acid with sulphuric acid and nitric acid is used
for the conversion of cotton; as .sulphuric acid, 2M parts; hydrochloric acid, 35
parts; and nitric acid, 60 parts. Semitransparent products are obtained by the

addition of flnelv divided and levigated silica, or powdered glass or sulphate of
lime; insulating" :;om pounds by the use of creiJsotc with soluble gun cotton and
certain gums.

173,866 — February 22, 1876. C. REAGLES. ImprovemetU in compositions for dental

plates, etc,

A compound of pvroxylin, 40 parts, by weight; compound ethylated camphor
25 parts; flexible lac, 1.5 parts; caoutchouc shavings, 5 parts; and cera alba, 5
parts; with Canada baLsam and pigments.

18!„!Sl—November21,1876. P.SWEENEY. Improvemaitin lubricating compounds.
A lubricant consisting of plumbago and collodion, with paper pulp or equiv-
alent fibrous material.

200,939— March 5, 1878. R. H. & A. A. SANBORN AND C. 0. KANOUSE.

Improvement in collars and cuffs.

A fabric for collars and cuffs having outer sheets or layers of celluloid and an
interlining of textile or fibrous material.

20i,S27 — May 28, 1878. J. W. HY'ATT. Improvancnt in apparatus for eoverim
cores and forming tubes of celluloid and other plastic matenals.
The composition is fed in equal quantities to all sides of a core, which core is

withdrawn from the composition, leaving the tubular coating.

g09,S7(t—Xovember 5, 1878. J. W. HY'ATT. Improvement in varnishes.

The solid extract of logwood dissolved in either alcohol or methylic spirit, or
both, is combined with a resin soluble in alcoholic or methylic spirit or pyroxy-
line, and the tincture of the muriate of iron to produce an ebony varnish.

216,U7I,-June 10, 1879. V. TRIBOUILLET AND A. DE BESAUCfeLE. Improve-
ment in processes of manufacturing solid collodion.
Dried cellulose is treated with acids in closed glazed vessels followed by

pressing, washing, and drying; and the pyroxyle so prepared is treated with

.solvents, liquid or solid, as camphor, with or without the addition of coloring

or other materials.

217,232— Jidy 8, 1879. W. McCAINE. Improvement in processes for treating

pyroxyline.

Pyroxylin is reduced to a liquid by solvents without heat or pressure— as ny
dissolving it in a solution of camphor gum in sulphuric ether and then intro-
ducing spirits of turpentine — and then cast in porous molds. The product is
treated with alcohol to render it plastic, compressed in any desired form, and
hardened by immersion in olive oil.

220,502— October II,, 1879. J. S. SPENCER. Improvement in frames fur optical
instruments made of celluloid and other fibrous plastic compositions.
Frames for optical instruments are made from fibrous plastic composition by

cutting the frames from the material when in sheets and forming them upon a

mandrel. They are removed from the mandrel by introduction of heat into

the mandrel.

221,070 — October 28, 1879. J.W.HYATT. Improvement in processes of manufac-
turing, polishing, and seasoning sheets of celluloid and other plastic material.
Sheets of celluloid are subjected to pressure between a polished .surface and a

layer of absorbent material, to both dry and polish.

2S2,0S7—September7, 1880. J. W. HY'ATT. Manufacture of celluloid.

Veneers of celluloid or other plastic material are applied to moldings and
uneven surfaces by attaching a strip of the material so as to span the face of the
article, then inserting the two in an elastic tube and contracting the tube by
means of a vacuum pump or by external pressure.

233,668— October 19, 1880. J. & C. SCHMERBER. Process of treating pyroxyline

in the maniifacture of plastic compounds.

In the manufacture of plastic compounds from pyroxylin, danger of ignition
is avoided by treating the nitro-derivative of cellulose, dextrine, or glucose
while wet with a solvent, mixing gums, balsams, or pigments and reducing the
product to a semi-liquid form by heat, grinding and mixing the semi-liquid
mass, and finally drying the compound to a plastic consistency.

233,851— November 2, 1880, N. HART AND R. A. BACON. Decorating celluloid.

Celluloid surfaces are decorated and the color united with the celluloid, by
the use of aniline colors dissolved in carbolic acid and alcohol.

2Sl,,675— November 23, 18S0. C. M. JACOB. Composition for coating surfaces.

A composition of collodion, creosote from Norway-beech tar, boiled linseed
oil, black oxide of manganese, and resin, as a protective coating for materials
or for ornamentation. Pigments or mineral colors or bronze or other metal
powders may be combined therewith.

237,279- February 1, 1881. S. J. HOGGSON AND G. C. PETTIS. Metliod of produc-
ing and treating pyroxyline and the mamtfacture of articles therefrom.
The fiber is prepared in a sheet form, and treated to the acid bath; the pyroxy-
lin sheet is then applied to the surface to be covered and subjected to a
pyroxylin solvent until converted into a gelatinous condition, when it can be
rolled, or reembossed and finished.

239,1,23— March 29, 1881. L. S. BEALS. Treating pyroxyline.

A compound of mirbane, oil of lavender, benzole, and alcohol is employed as
a solvent for pyroxylin, and olibanum frankincense is added, with or without
paraffine or vegetable wax, to render it plastic without shrinking or warping,

239,1,31,— March 29, 1881. h. S. BEALS. Preparing pyroxyline.

Soluble pyroxyline is rendered permanently plastic under heat by mixing
therewith paraffine dissolved in mirbane and the essential oil of lavender.

239,IS5—March 29, 1881. L, 8. BEALS. Preparing pyroxyline.

Pyroxylin is treated with vegetable wax, either with or without the addition
of parafiine, and preferably by means of a solvent formed of mirbane, oil of lav-
ender, benzole, and alcohol.

239,791— April 6. 1881. J. W. HYATT. Process (tfand apparatus for molding cellu-
loid, hard rubber, bonsUate, and analogous plastic materials.
Molds or dies containing the material are immersed in liquid in a suitable vessel

and heat and pressure applied to the liquid.

21,1,006— May 3, 18S1, N. HART AND R. A. BACON. Decorating celluloid.

Surfaces composed wholly or in part of compounds of pyroxylin are deco-
rated by applying colors mixed wtn a solvent of pjToxylin; as aniline colors,
dissolved in alcohol and ether, with or without carbolic acid. ■

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

259

IU,9tt—jMly M, laril. (>. MOSROK. I'nnrtii iff Irrniini) ityroxyUnr tempt,

A hi>m<»Ki'niHmi* ityntxylln romiHUind Ih itrixliiroit fn>ni nrrnp !»y trcatlntr It
with n HolvonI, witn or without the ndditinri of ii colorliiK nKont, nnd then Kiib-
JeotltiK It lo IIr' HC'llon of ii mm'hiiiv which mlx«s it niiil romprewwa It hy torn-
liiK It throtiKh an oiitU't or iioejeIc.

tW.iWf— .lii(;r(«/ '.1, l.ss;. S, J. IKHXiSON AND (i. C. PETTIS. }faintfaelurr iif

jtlaslk' Ci»H)ymnittfntm pyritxijUHr.

Pyroxylin, nflcr waHhinic. Ik lrc<Mte<l In * bath containing in aolution hvdro-
chlomtcofiiininoDiii, nnirlntcofiinimonln, or nny of the amnionlar«iwill»t, where-
by It IsrchydroccniziMininI rciulcrcil IcKHcxpUwivc. .Kulpluitcof tilumiimornny
of the "04'Iohc<lrnn" (>r iw>iiiori>iu)Us jgilis un* rimihiiica with pyroxylin; nltiin
boltiK H nntuml Imim-, working hot orcohl<»r In any pn>porllonj<. with or witiuuit
the ndditlitn t>f Kiini!*, rcHitiH. imli.ain.H. olltt, pif^incntM, <lyc«. or coloring liiKrc-
dlcrn.". KloiirofMoiitllc is iiiIcImI. iictiiiK as It lubricant, when the material Ix
to b« proHioii in inoMH or dies.

ti6,ll9t—Srptcmbrr IS. I8SI. C. 8. LOCKWOOI). Treatment qfpyroi^Unf.

lUilorul Lh iiwd an a solvent of camphor In n pyroxylin compound containInK
camphor, my from h to 20 parts of chloral to 100 pert* of camphor; it lowers the
HquifyUiK temiierature.

ti'SS'.—S'iitrmticr K, ISSI. C. O. KANOVSK. }{ant{ftuiun: qf plastic mmpoirUitm

from fotuhir fiber.

Boluble flhor i« mixed and di9solvc<l In a volatile solvent In a heated state In
an open vessel, the evaporation accelerating the solvent action.

tt^.UlS—Oclnhrr 1.1, ISSI. I. W. DRUMMOND. Oampmind nf rrllutoid and lumi-

fiotis matrrial.

A solid luminous compotmd formed of celluloid and luminous or phosphor-
escent material, as sulphide of calcium.
Uf.StlO—S'ovembtr U, lasi. J. B. ED80N. Drying ttpparatiu /or irecSingpyrox]/-

linr, etr.

Pyn>xvlin and similar substaiice-s arc dried by the use of cold intensely dry
air.'maiiitained sliehtly above the frecziiiK fioint, introduced throuKb the ma-
terial while in H tlnely divided condition, and thence discharged from the
receiver.

tM.UO—DarvilMTt?, ISSt. W. B. CARPENTER. Waterproofing paper vHth cellu-
loid and other maieriaU.

A paper made of asbestos and pla.stic material such us celluloid, lignoid, coro-
line, shellac, resin, or gums. Tne paper may be put through a vapor bath of
alcoh(»l, when the substance used, as celluloid, is c»iml)le of being dLs.solved in
alcohol, or throtigh turpentine va^Kjr when resin or gums are used, and then
through heated rolls to thoroughly integrate the material.

tU.iSO— February il. ISSi. W. B. CARI'ESTKR. n'ntrrprno/ paper.

A paper made of paper-pulp and a pl»wtic waterproof material, such as cellu-
loid, lignoid, etc. It may hv put through a vapor bath of alcohol or rapidly
through a weak alcoholic bath and then through heated rolls (see No. 2.51.410).

t!ii.i-«—fihriiar!i IS, ISSt. F. VV. COTTKELL. .Vanu/acturc of material in form

artificial ivori/.

Fiber is rendered soluble in alcohol by immersion In a saturated solution of
nitn>us acid in sulphuric acid for a very short period, then slightly pressed and
allowed to stand twenty minutes loan hour to complete its conversion. It is
then washed, neutralized with a saline solution, afterwards adding strong solu-
tions of alum, carbonate of so<ia, and silicate of soda,

tH,7Sl— March 7, 18S3. L. WHITE AND K. WHITCOMB.

mining the nitration of cellular fiber.

It is determined by the deflection of a galvanometer, using a cathode and
anode on opiMw.it*' sides of a mixing vessel, the deflection being compared with
that of a standard quality,

ue.se!— April IS. ISSt. *P. REID and J. Eastwood, ifannfaelure of pyroxy-

line for u*e in topiced printing.

An ink or color for topical printing, or *• calico printing," composed of dis-
solved pyroxylin and a coloring agent.

tUt.tm— August I, ISSt. W. McCAINE. Pyrozyline compound.

The essential oil of cassia or cinnamon is used in the manufacture of com-
pounds of pyroxylin; combined with alcohol alone or in conjunction with
hydrocarbons, say in the proportion of 1 part to 8 of alcohol, it forms a latent
solvent,

tei.aST—.'ieptembcr le, ISSi. E, WESTON, Plantic compound from soluble eeUulotc.
Nonflbrous or amorphous cellulose; produced by reconverting or reoxidizing
celluloid in a l>ath of ammonium sulphide, protocnloride of iron, or equivalent
reducing agents.

teS,Si7— October S. ISSt. H. PARKES. Manufacture (if nitro^Uulo$e.

Nitrocellulose Is dyed prior to dissolving or softening and treatment with
solvent. Tetrachloride of carbon, together with camphor, is employed as a
solvent, or a solvent ci)mpos(.d of bisulphide of carbon together with camphor,
or sulphurous acid and camphor.

te9.3iO— December 19, ISSt. J. H, STEVENS, Mani{faeture qf compound* qf py-

riaxyHite or nItro-ceUulote.

In the manufacture of compounds of pyroxylin a new groupof active liquid
solvents or converting agents is used, comprising oil of spearmint, nitrate of
methyl, butyric ether, valerio ether, benzoic ether, formic ether properly dehy-
drated, salicylate of methyl, formate of amyl, aeetjite of amyl, butyrate of amyl,
valerianate of amyl,sebacylic ether, oxalic ether, amylic ether (amylic oxide),
oxidizt.fl wofwl alcohol, oil of ca,s.Nla, oil of cherry, laurel, iieavy cit)nam<in oil,
oil of melis..^ (balm), oil of birch tar (rectified), and oil of peniiyroyal.

!6V..UI—I>fmnb>r 19. ISSt. J. H. STEVENS.

roxyline or niiro-cellulosc.

In the manufacture of compounds of pyroxylin certain specified oils are lued
as latent liquid solvents, viz, oil of caraway seed, oil of hyssop, oil of sage, oil
of tansy, oil of cloves, or oil of wintergrcen, or mixtures of them.

tea.Sil—Drcciiiber 19, ISSt. J.H.STEVENS. Manufacture qf compond»qf pyraey-

line or nitro-ceUutote.

In the manufacture of pyroxylin compounds dinitro-benzine or conmarine
aie used as latent solid solvents.

t«9.3U— December 19, ISSt. J.H.STEVENS. Mamtfactureqf compound* e^pymiy-

line or nitro-celtulote.

In the manufacture of pyroxylin comfwnnds certain new men.strua are used
In conjunction with camphor, viz, acetone, a<'etate of ethyl, acetate of methyl,
fusel-oil (amylic alcohol i. oil of chamomile, oil of fennel-seed, oil of palmarosa,
and oil of worm-seed, or mixtures of any of them.

Apparatus for dtter-

Mannfacture qf compounds qf py-

tllf,SU—l)eretnhfr III. IHHS. J. H. HTRVRNH. Manufacture of mmpnumlt qf itynry-

line or nilro-ceUuti}$e.

fn Iho manufacture of pjrmxjriln compounds fnsel oil Is employed aa a aolmit

nr - iiri In conjunction with the oils of hyimnp, ■ave. tanay, worrowisyl,

' '■lf)ves, cinnamon, anlts-, sHNwfras. chnmoinlle. wlnt'^rirreen. carm-

V 'if dill, or with metal, nltntlu of amyl, or nitrite of amyl, or mlx-

luren iti liny of them.

tttaJiS—Pecemher 1(1. lust. J. H. KTEVEN8. Maimfaelureqfnmpamtl»qfrfrmr-

line or nitro-cellutttte

In Ihc manufacture nf pyroxylin compounds certain menstrua or mixtures of
the same arc employed In conjuni'lliin wilh ali'ohol (ethvllc or melhyllc

rix,

n rod.

-ecd,

.iinoD

acctal, nitrate of amyl. nitrite of amyl, oils of chamomll
s#i.vafrHs. anise, cinnninon, cumin, cyiifc ether, dill, »■!
wine fheavy), wormscci, myrtle, laurel, mftrjoram, i»ci',
leaves, palmaroaa, nisemary, and erigeron,

VI.U)!f—.ranuary.V>.lflS3. J. A. MrCLELLAND. PyroryUne fabrir.

A fabric composed of a sheet or sheets of pyroxylin •■nmpound with threads.
niaments,ornbenicmtHylde<I therein and all extending In the name direction.

t7 1, laU— January SO, lass. J, A, MiCLELLAND, Process tff muertng or ntrerlng

articles with pyroryiinc comi*oundt, tie.

A sheet or sheets of the plastic material is applied to the article and It is
inclosed or surrounded by mobile or yielding material, such as sand or potty,
and subjected to pressure.

n6.ilS— April S. 1.11.1. I. ». HYATT. Pmerss qf manufnetariwi ilUeU qf etOtloid
and ttlher plastic material.

A shcetofpolishe<l celluloid having a backing is produced bjr placing the
sheet on a polished surface, laying upon the same a tucking mnlatened or sat-
urated with a solvent of pyroxylin, placing upon the backing absorbent mate-
rial, and subjecting the wnole to pressure.

S7K.il,S— April 11,. ims. W. McCAINE. Process nf tretUing pyrozyUne eempounds.
A pyroxylin compound containing a latent solvent is reduced to a powder,
then thoroughly dried, and when dry subjected to heat and prevnire, whereby
tt dry product Is obtained free from air cells,

tS0,7U>—.Jidy S, ISSS. J. W. HYATT. Press or mold for coating articles with eeT

luloid, etc.

The article is placed between sheets of celluloid and the whole between dia-
phragms or sheets of flexible material, when fluid pressure is applied to the
upper or lower sides of the diaphragms, the fluid being flrst hot ana then cold.

tS.l.tt.t—Angiuit Ii. U1.t. J. B. EDSON. .Vnnufaeture of nrtificint trory.

Artificial ivory is forme<l by compressing a number of sheets of zylonite.
formed of material of different densities or different characteristics of compo-
sition, into one entire ma.ss. and then making sections across the several layers.

tie.tlt— October 9, ISSS. D.4 D. McCAINE. Process qf treating pyroiyttne, etc.

Pyroxylin Is dissolved in a suitable solvent, and it la then treated with ben-
zine or equivalent light mineral oil and resin, producing a homogeneous prod-
uct, free from air bubbles.

tS9,t,W— November 17, ISSS. J. B. EDSON. Apparatus for polishing sheets of zylo-
nite, etc.
The surface is slightly dissolved by any of the well-known solvents, and then

the sheet is subjected to pressure, with the slightly dissolved mrface In contact

with a highly polished surface, such as glass.

tsa.tiO—Xorember 17, W4J. J. B. EDSON, Forming and finishing surfaces mated

with zylonite.

A sheet of fabric coated on one or both sides with thin sheets of zylonite
through the medium of an interi>ose<l solvent; pnxluced by poflsing a thin sheet
of zylonite and a sheet of the material to be coated between rolls and intro-
ducing a solvent between the two sheets to slightly dij«oive the surface of the
zylonite, whereby the sheets are immediately compressed.

tm.tUl—Xovember 17, 1SS3. J. B. EDSON. Patent leather and a subsUtvte therrfm.
A ba,se-forming material, having attachetl to one of its surfa<-cs a thin sheet of
zylonite having a highly pilishi^i surface. It Is prepared by partially dissolving
one surface of the zylonite and uniting it to tne oase.and then partially dis-
solving the exterior surface of the sheet of zylonite and compnasing the par-
tially dissolved surface next to a highly polLshed surface.

189,338— .yoit-mher 17. 1S.1S. J. B. EDSON. Treating material inth zylonUe to

resemble pebttte. goat. French enlf. antl alligator leather.

A thin sheet of zylonite of a proper color is applicfl to a sheet of leather, such
as are te<'hnicttlly called "splits.' by imrtially dissolving one snrfaee of the
zylonite by a suitable st)l vent and applying the i>arilally dissolved surfat-e tn the
lta.se. tlien applying pn'ssure for a period of time sufficient to imitate the kind of
leatlierlfi be prlxiueefi and ti> expel thesurplus solvent and air. Then partially
dissolving the exterior surface of the sheet of zylonite and compressing it against
a higlily [Hjlishe<l surface.

t9t.SS7— March i. ISSi. W, V. WILSON. MaHufaeiureqf material for eieetrie insu-
lation.
Two huudre<l paris of wtsid or vegetable tar is comljine<1 with attout lOO parts

of nitro<'ellulosc— the nilralion of which has not been carrieeyond the jioint

which will effect its greatest soIui>ility — the latter being softened by one or

more of its solvents.

19l.,ettl— March i. ISSi. U. M. MOWBRAY. Plaslie eompmtHd from pymryUme
and mica.
Mica is combined with soluble pyroxylin.

196.967- April 15. I.l.li. J. W. HYATT, Art qf mannfactunng erUulnid and other

compounds of pynixyline.

Aqueous particles are remove<l from pyroxylin pulp by displacement, under
pressure, with an unobjectionable liquid, as alcohol, which may be utilized as
a Bolveni.

196.968— Aprd IS. IKSi. J, W, HYATT. W. H. WOOD, AND J. H. STEVENS.

Process qf awl apparatus for effectiug Ute desiceatitm qf pyn^yline pulp.

A pile is formed of layers of pyroxylin and bibulous material, as blotting
paper, and subjected to great pressure, the pyroxylin being subjected then to
further pressure between dry sheets.

196.969— .Inril 1,?, ISSI,. J. W. HYATT. J. H. STEVENS?. W. H. WOOD, AND J.

EVERi>IN(i. Mantifacture of pyrnxytine material.

Pyroxylin material is Inipregimttsi with liquid solvents by forming it into cakes
orplatcs, placing themln a suiialile ves.sel where they arc held apart, introducing

260

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

the liquid solvent, and agitating or rotating tne vessel, wheretjy tlie solvent
repeatedly passes over the surface of the cakes or plates.

S96,S70— April 15. ISSi. J. W. HYATT, J. H. STEVENS, AND W. H. WOOD.

Mamijaelure of celluloid and other compoitnds of nyroxyline.

Pyroxylin is formed into cakes and dried, and the cakes then softened with
the required amount of liquid solvent by being formed into a pile with the sol-
vent between the cakes, the material being afterwards mixed or masticated in
heated rolls.

i97,770— April S9, 1S31,. J. B. EDSON. Finishing and glossing the surfaces of fabrics

having a coating of some pyroxybne compound.

The zylonite sheet is pas.sed through a fluid acting as a solvent of the zylonite,
which upon evaporation leaves a glossy surface. By passing the sheet or coated
fabric around a roller in thesolvent, one side only isexposed to the action of the
solvent.

t97,9Si— April 29, ISSi. J. W. HYATT. Process of desiccating pyroxyline in com-

minutedfomi.

Nitrocellulose is ground in water and then agitated in contact with an ab-
sorbent, as bags of porous absorbent material in a closed revolving vessel.

!199.857—June S. 18)i.',. E. SCHERING. Preparation of collodion.

An elastic and transparent composition for the preparation of collodion,
becoming hard on drying, neither explosive on concussion nor spontaneously
combustible; formed by dissolving pure collodion cotton in ether and alcohol
and then freeing from its solvents, by distillation after filtration, sufficient to
admit of the mass being cast into forms.

300,158— June 10, 188!,. J. H. STEVENS. 3£anitfaclure of material to imitate ivory

from pyroxyline compounds.

Strips are cut of one or more thin pieces of material of varied color, treated
with a solvent and compacted on edge into a cake, welded together by heat and
pressure, and the block then reduced to sheets.

SOT, OSt— October n. 1881,. J. B. EDSON. Manufacture of artificial ivory frmn

zylonite, etc.

Two or more sheets of soluble pyroxylin having inert matters, and colored
or otherwise, are rolled into scroll form, or assembled in block form, and forced
through a nozzle or die. so that the several layers shall partially preserve their
parallelism; or the scrolls are molded or consolidated into a cake which is then
cut into sheets or sections.

S09,SS1— December SO, 1881,. J. B. EDSON. Manufacture of artificial ivory.

Imitation grain-ivory produced by combining two or more layers of a pyroxy-
lin base pigmentized in slightly varying proportions; as one group of layers of
transparent horn-colored pyroxylin with 7J per cent of oxide of zinc and one-
half of 1 per cent of yellow coloring matter, and another group of the same
with 15 per cent of oxide of zinc and one-quarter of 1 per cent ol yellow color-
ing matter.

311, SOS— January 27, 1885. I. V. REAQLES. Composition of matter for water-
proofing.
A compound of wood alcohol, 1 gallon; castor-oil, 1 pound; gum camphor, 1

pound; pyroxylin, 1 pound; and gum shellac, ont-fourth of a pound.

320,881, — Jane 23, 1885. G. M.MOWBRAY. Plastic-compound rcannbling ivory.

A pyroxylin product coinpo.sed of a series of sheets of pyroxylin and neutral
matter of uniform composition, with one or both surfaces ot the superposed
sheets colored or tinted, and the sections united together by heat and pressure
or solvents and pressure.

SS9,093— October S7, 1885. J. H. STEVENS AND W. H. WOOD. Utilizing celluloid,

etc., in tlie production of enameled goods or veneering.

A sheet of seasoned pyroxylin material is attached to a backing and at the
same time given a high polish by subjecting them to pressure accompanied by
a high degree of heat, the exposed surface of the pyroxylin being in contact
with a polished surface.

SS9,31S — October 27, 1885. J. G. JARVIS. Mamtfacture of pyroxyline compounds.
Gum dammar, gum guaiacum, and gum mastic, separately or in mixtures of
two or more of them, are used as solvents of pyroxylin with or without pig-
ments or other coloring matters, fixed or volatile oils.

331.31,1 — November 21,. 1885. J. W. HY'ATT. Method of combining pyrox^^Une and

its sfilvents in the manufacture of solid compounds.

Pvroxylin is reduced to a finely divided dry condition, as .soluble paper to
shreds, then moistened with vinous alcohol or its equivalent, when the pow-
dered camphor is added and the mixture subjected to masticating rolls, or to
heat and pressure.

331.2t,2 — November SU, 1885. .T. W. HYATT. Method of combining pyroxyline and

its solvents in the manufacture of solid compounds.

The solvent is sprayed against a moving stream of pyroxylin pulp, the
sprayed pulp falling into a closed receptacle and resting until the solvent is
cfiffiised, when it is masticated.

331.713— December 1. 1885. J. W. HYATT. Compounding pyroxylim- mth its

solvents in the manufacture of solid compounds.

Pyroxylin is formed into flock or pulp, and into thin sheets or films, and the
solvent then applied to the sheets by spraying or dipping; the sheets are then
massed in a closed receptacle and the conversion luiaily completed by means
of masticating rolls or heat and pressure.

Sl,t,t08—May 18, 18S6. J. G. JARVIS. Manufacture of zylonite and oilier pyroxy-
line compounds and articles made therefrom.

A seasoned, pulverized, and comminuted pyroxylin compound is treated
with a solution of camphor, the solvent of which is not a solvent of pyroxylin —
such as coal tar naphtha — and the solvent of camphor is then eliminated from
the mass. The mass may then be subjected to the action of heated alcoholic
vapor.

»4«,57« — July 27, ISse. M. C. LEFFERTS. Process of printing upon or decorating

the surface of celluloid.

The design Ls printed or applied in ink or color and the surface is then sub-
jected to the action of heat and pressure while in contact with a polished sur-
iace; to prevent displacement it may be confined in a mold or die.

3i8,ttt— August 31. 1886. M. C. LEFFERTS and J. W. HYATT. Printing on

pyroxyline compounds.

The pyroxylin compound is subjected to heat and pres.sure while in contact
with the cnsrravcd plates; the ink may contain orcoiisist of a solvent of pyroxy-
line and a pigment.

3i9,658.— September n, 1886. Q. M. MOWBRAY. Process of and apparatus far

washing, decoloring, and draining pyroxyline.

Pyroxylin is decolorized by the action of oxalic acid and hydrochloric acid;
it is then subjected to washing by the flow of water through the mass from one
side or end of a tank with overflow at the other.

Si9,659— September SI. 1886. G.M.MOWBRAY. Method of drying pyroxylirte.

Pyroxylin is desiccated by means of warmed air (not to exceed 38° C.) which
has been previously deprived of its moisture by chilling and passing over lime,
either or both.

360,811— April 5, 1887. J. A. MCCLELLAND. Method of treating and ornament-
ing pyroxyline compounds.

The surface of celluloid containing a pigment is treated, in proper design,
with an acid that will dissolve the pigment. The grain of ivory is imitated by
coating the surface with a resist, removing parts of the resist according to the
graining, or design, and then applyinft the pigment .solvent. Coloring matter
may be afterwards applied, with or without a new resist.

366,131— July K, 1881. J. A. MCCLELLAND. Plastic compound.

A non volatile gum or resin is used as a solvent for pyroxylin, as kauri gum,
with or without pigments, or fixed or volatile oils.

37 i, 100— October 15, 1887. O. P. AMEND. Compound for pyroxylitie or nitro-
cellulose.
Chloride of amyl in conjunction with camphor is used as a solvent for

pyroxylin.

38S,27S—May Si, 1888. A. BENSINGER. Process of ornamenting celluloid surfaces.
The design, printed on paper with a suitable ink, is transferred to the cellu-
loid surface, the latter being moistened with a solvent of the same and of the
ink, under pressure.

iOS.Sii—Atigust 6, 1889. F. GREENING. Substitute for ivory, etc.

A base is prepared by treating fibrous or cellulose substances, such as cotton
combings, rags, paper, etc., with a mixture of fuming nitric acid and sulphuric
acid, in the proportion of 30 i)er cent of the former and 70 per cent of the latter,
then washing, and submitting the product to a bath of sodium chloride and
ammonia alum, and then dis,solving the base in a solvent composed of a distil-
lation of acetate of lead, 2 parts, and anhydrous lime, 1 part, mixed witli fusel
oil; 2i gallons of the distillate to IJ gallons of fusel oil.

i09,3l,5— August SO, 1889. C. F. BRADY'. Process of printing pyroxyline com-
pounds.
Pyroxylin compounds are imprinted with indelible colors by applying the

coloring matter to the sheets by pressure and subsequently subjecting them to

the direct action of steam in a chamber.

l,17,7S7— December Si, 1889. J. G. JARVIS. Process of ornamenting articles having

a pyroxyline base.

The design is embossed upon the plastic material, then it la stained or col-
ored, and finally the article is submitted to heat and pressure to smooth the
embossed surface.

1,18,136— December Si, 1889. C. H. KOYL. Reflector or mirror.
A sheet of transparent celluloid silvered on the back.

UlS,S37—Decanber 31, 1889. R. C. 8CHUPPHAUS AND M. T. WHITE. Process

of manufacturing pyroxyline.

The body of cellulose is confined in a perforated cage while being treated in
a nitrating solution to secure it against disintegration or di-sarrangement.

m,S67— February 11, 1890. W. H. WOOD AND G. C. 'GILLMORE. (Reissue:
1 1, Vi— April 15, 1890. ) Process of embossing sheets of celluloid.
The material is embossed between a die and a "force" composed of celluloid
or like material, with heat suftlcient to cause them both to flow, the pressure
being continued until the material to be embossed is forced into the die, and
the die, "force," and material to be embossed retained in contact until
cooled.

1,28,651,— May 27, 1890.
nitro-ceUulose, etc.

E. N. TODD. Process of manufacturing thin sheets of

Glass plates are vertically suspended in a tank of a solution of collodion or
pyroxyline, and after standing until all bubbles have escaped, the solution is
drawn oil slowly from the bottom of the tank, causing a film of solution to
adhere to the plates, which, after drying, is removed as a thin, uniform trans-
parent slieet.

1,58, 167— August 25, 1891. F. ECKSTEIN. Cmnposition of matter for use us a sulh '

stitutefor glass.

A composition consisting of collodion-wool, a nonresinous oil, as castor oil,
and a balstim or soft resm, with or without magnesium chloride to lessen
infiammabilitv.

!S0,08e—September2S, 1891.
the same.

W. HARVEY'. Artificial homandmethodnf producing

Artificial horn, produced by coloring sheets of plastic material, as celluloid
or pyroxylin, in layers or strata, cutting the shetjts into conical figures or forms,
nesting or laminating and uniting them, and then rolling and turning off the
projecting edges of the series of nested and united cones to constitute a solid
laminated mass or rod.

1,65,781,— December ts, 1891.
line material.

W. SCHMIDT. Process of polishing sheets of pyroxy-

A sheet of pyroxylin material is subjected to the action of vapor of alcohol
and then pressed between polished surfaces.

1,70,1,51 — March8, 189S. A. SEHER. Manufacture of compounds of pyroxyline.

As direct solvents of pyroxylin or nitrocellulose, there is u.sed propion, buty-
ron, valeron, capron, methyl-ethyl-ketone (acctyl-ethyl), methyl-propyl-ketone,
methyl-butyl-ketone, methyl-valeral, etliyi-butyl-ketone, arid met'hyl-amyl-
ketone, singly or any mixtures thereof.

/,7i,81/,—May 17, 1S9S. A. A. C. DE COETLOGON. Process of preparing celluloid

and similar materials for printing.

Celluloid having a surface adapted to be printed upon and absorb the ink;
produced by forming on the surface a multitude of minute grains or pores, as
by a sand jet, then washing the surface, then varnishing, applying an impal-
pable powder — as sulphate of magnesia and sulphate of baryta — and then pro-
ducing a calender finish.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

261

W.lU-January I?. »■(«. B. B. Ci(>LI>8MITH. fmee— 14 pniducina uUn>-eeUu-
tote or crUulmit gur/nrfn.

Wood or iithir iilii«>rU'iit nmU-riiil Ik tlrKl Klveii n coat or ciwtn of vanilnh Pon-
tAlnIng iiyroxyllii i.r iiyrtixyllii >'oni|Mmii(l. tlit'ii Inycm of vnriilnh I'onulnInK
re«ln, with or without n HnlahliiK coiil of viinilah contnlnliiK pyMxylln.

tOS,ltl—MiirrmlKr 7, ima. H. I). Tl'ROAKK. l-mrrtt iif (leiiUrallim iifnitrtuxUn-
lote ami itn tinnjxmwtt.

NltroruUulosi' mid Us rompoiinds nro dciiltmtml by ImmvmlnK Iho materlnl
In a wihithiii of hy dro-aulphate of ammonia nnd a metallic lulphlde, ai milphlde
of silver.

Ml,//W— iVcrinfcrr in. /s»4. H. I)K CHARDON'NET. PriKrm uf mnniifnclurinn

Hydrated pyroxylin— dlflerlnfr from ordinary nvroxvlln by coiitiilnInK at
li'ftst Si iwr cent of water and of Kreater nolubllltv— In produicd by trcuiinn;
Iiyroxyllii while still moist with hydrulod ether; which hvdmteii j.vroxvllii
i»dls8olve<l to form collodlnn and spun Into threads liv disehnrKtiiK IhroiiKh
nozzles: eertnin sulMtiiiiees may lie aihled to lii(rea«' the niil<llly. The simn
eolloilioii is denitmt>-<l by imiiiersloii In u Uith formed bv mixliiK eiiliium
monosiilphlde. siilphule of ammonlu unil water, and reiuovliiK the precliiiliile;
the bath may be reKeneraled by iiddliitr sulphurieaeld, and then calcium mono-
sulphide and sefianitlntf the precipitate.

iU.Seo—SeplrmbcT 17. I8»S. J. H. STEVENS AND E. D. HARRISON. /Vorfiir-

tion qf imUtUimt ouffx/rvm ptfroxylin otrnpounds.

A rod or sheet of pyroxylin composition In Imitation of onyx, conslstinK of
two or more lisht tints, with streaks of a darker color breafelnif thmiiKh or
Interspersed with the lighter tlnti'; pr<Kluced by formliiK the llKht-tintcd parts
In solldllie<l strata, cuttinif throUKh these strata across the edKes, liis<'rting
coloriiiK matter or pyroxylin of a different color between the cut parts, and
then solidifying the whole into blocks or masses.

M9.i»t—Ma!i S, IS'je. F. LEHNER. Procnx nf makini, arliflrial fili.

Two solutions are formed: first, of silk wn.ste digesled with caustic alkali, era
solution of copper or a copper salt in ammonia. precipiUited from such solnti<m
and liiially nfssolved in concentrated acetic add: and, si'cond, of a substance
containing cellulose macerated with a .■iolution of <opper or a coppei salt in am-
monia, nitrated, and then partially dcnilratcd: which two solutions are mixed
and cau.sed to pa.ss through a congealing snlntion, as of oil of turpentine or other
hydrocarbon, to form a thread. The lliread is laid in a solution containing
soluble glass, whereby it Is rendered incombustible.

Sei.eie—Juue tS. isae. F. LEHNER. ah qfprepariiuj nrtiflcial fill.

Cellulose is gradually introduced into a nitrating bath and the temperature
of the bmh progressively raisiKl as the cellulose is added, wherebv a homo-
geneous mixture of tri and tctra nltro<!eiiuiase is obtained. The whole mix-
ture Is then maintained at the final temperature for several hours: the nitrating
liquid separated by centrifugal action; the acid-moist resultant mass immersed
In sulphuric acid: a vulcanized drying-oil then added; the mixture llnallv dis-
solved In a suitable solvent, such as acetone, an alcohol, or alcohol ether: then
the thread is drawn and the same immersi-.l in warm water, then dipped in a
HiUitlon of ammonium or other alkali hydrosulphide and a neutral iiiagnesium
saltat 40° ('. (keeping the same therein until the rainbow colors of cellulose are
visible under the microscope in polarized light), and finally washed, dried, and
finished.

S6!.7.1S—JujK g3. isae. F. LEHNER. I'rtxxst qf and aiijmmtm fur making arti-
flcial silk,

A ground solution Is passed into a bath free from oxygen— as of a hydrocar-
bon, such as oil of turpentine— and the thread drawn' from the bath. The
ground solution consists of resin, linseed oil. nitrocellulose, and an inorganic
salt to render the thread incombustible.

Se3.su- June SO, lasS. H. M. TDKK. Ompimlian qf matter Sor mauvjaetunna
artifdal tiVc. ^ -» -»

It consists of nitrocellulose, 96 parts; gelatin or lslngla.<is, 2 parts; and albu-
min, 2 ports: dissolved In 1,600 parts of glacial acetic acid.

iS7,097—July ♦?, 1S9T. A. L. KENNEDY.
theremth.

Omipimlion o/matler and article treated

A coating solution for the surface of leather and other similar materials con-
sisting of 1 gallon of omylacctate, 12 ounces of nitnicellulose, 10 ounces of lano-
lin, and 3 ounces of com oil, mixed and i-ombined with aniline or other coloring
matter. '

590.8it— September IS, 1897. A. L. KENNEDY. WaUrprtxtf doth and vrooemof
making game.

A fabric having its face iwrtions comp<isi>d of natural libers and Its inner p<ir-
tions comiswed of threads or strands impregnated with a salt of cellulow
whereby ordinary unglazcd or uncoated and nappv faces are prreented iiro^
duced by einw ining ordinary threads along with strands of undis.soived soluble
salt of cellulose to lonn a fabric, and then subjecting it to a .solvent of the sjilt
of cellulose to dissolve the extra strands and cause the di.s.s<ilved salt to Impreg-
nate the ordinary threads.

eoo.flii—.Varct U. 1S9S. J. H. STEVENS AND M. C. LEFFERTS. Procem of
manv/arturing pyroxylin gfieete.

A nonoxidizlng solution of a pyroxylin compound is caiLsed to flow in the form
of a moving, continuous, fluid sheet, as onto a revolving dram, the thickness of
the sheet being regulate<l by removing the surplus solution, and the volatile
ingredients are then evaporated.

60I.9S7—Apra S. ISgS. F. G. ANNISON. Enameled jmper and eamimuiid tued to
niamel same.

.\n enameled paper adapted to receive and retain printing and lithogniphlc
Impressions, the enamel consisting of a nitnicellulose compound containing oil
and pigment, the latter being larger than or in excess of the nitrocellulose.

6i)l.li»-Apnl It. 1898. E. D. HARRISON AND C. H. THURBER. Metlml of

producing pyrazyline imitationt nf mosaic.

Pyroxylin compounds are formed into sticks or rods; coated with a dyeing
subsunce; arranged aide by side; welded into a block; and sheets are then cut
therefrom.

eot.797— April 19. 1898. F. G. ANNISON Art qf coating /abriet or permeable
maieriaU with nilroceUuloie compound! and produet produced thereby.
A flexible permeable base Is first impregnated to the desired depth with a
llQUld solution of the compound, dried, and then one or more coats of a heavier
solution of the compound are applied, each dried in turn; the coat maybe
liually compacted by heat and pressure, with or without embossing.

»0»fiOI—AprUt», turn. W. H. W<MJl) AND 1. H. KTKVEvx nv./^r..,,... r,.i..,.

A WAterpnaif fabric having two or more «uc<*e«»h'
pyroxylin compound, the under eoallnx Ix-liig more 1:

c<int or contlnga, >s, for example, the Inner almluin tieliig m n<T in on iimn me
outer atratuin.

im.!.tll—Xny ». imi. J. R. KRAN<;E. Method f^ m<innfaelHrimg pi/ro.ryUn nm-
jHinndu in imltatimi <^ mnrbtr.

Pyroxylin compounds of dlHercnl ralon arc produced; (armed Into (rag-
ments; dipped Into a dye dhnrdvwl In a solvent of pyroxrlln, and tbedlnied
fragments calendcre<l together to form aheetlng; which may bv com prMsra Into

blocks and cut.

m8.7te—AHiiiut 9. 1898. ,1. II. STEVENK. I'yntryHn nrnpimnd.

A composition of pyroxylin, and a lead mil of a volatile monalomic fattj
acid, as lead acetate, callable of tranaparent efTecta.

a>8.7t7—AuguM 9. 1898. .1. II. .STEVENS. PyroTylln nmpound.

A coiniKisltlon of pyroxylin and laclamld. ca|>al»li- of tranaparent effeeia.
Otia.WS—AugMl ss. 1898. .1. H. STEVENS. I'yroxytin rompoiind.

A comrHwItlon coiudstlng of pyroxylin and a aalt of camphoric acid, aa aodlum
camph<irate.

eUKim—tieptember IS, 1898. J. H. STEVENS. Pyroxylin rompounil.

A composition consisting of pyroxylin and a manganese salt of the volatile
monaUimic aeries of fatty acids, aa acetate of tnanganeae.

r.m.el.'i—.'icjitember IS, 1898. J. II, STEVENS. Pyroxylin compound.

A composition of pyroxylin and a lactophosphate, aa lactophoaphate of
calcium.

ei0.9.'iS—fieptentbrT to. 1898. J. H. STEVENS. Pyriaylin rompouml.

A composition of pyroxylin and a salt of hypophosphoroiu acid, as aodium
hypophosphite; capable of tranaiiarent ellecta.

ell.oee—Odolier 11, 1898. J. H. .STEVENS, n'aterproof fabric.

A fabric coated or impregiiatcl with a pyroxylin compound eonulning a
nondrying oil, as castor oil, and a aalt eonlalnliig a halogen element, oa zinc
chloride.

eil,067— October II, 1898. J. H. STEVENS. WalerpriMif/ubrir.

A fabric waterproofed by a pyroxylin compound whh-h contains pyroxylin,
castor oil, and a salt which contains an aromatic aelil, as salicylate of soda.

e It. ,WI— October 18, 1898. J. H. STEVENS. Pyroxylin compound.

A composition of pyroxylin and a lithium salt of a volatile monatomic fatty
acid, OS lithium acetate; capable of transparent efTecta. •

eit.BSSr-October 18, 1898. J. H. .STEVENS. ilnliTpriMf/iibrir.

A fabric coated or impregnale<l with a pyroxylin compound eonsullng In
part of castor oil and a salt or compound containing the phenoylic radical
CeHtO, as sulphocarbonate of soda.

eiS.iOO— November 1. 1898. J. H, STEVENS. Pyroxylin compound.

A composition of pyroxylin and a salt of succinic acid lutvln; an Inorganic
hose, as potassium succinate.

SI4,.5f4— iVor«nJ<T tt, 1898. 3. H. STEVENS. Pyroxylin compound.

A composition of pyroxylin and an Inorganic salt of a halogen acid derived
from the volatile members of the monatomic aeries of fatty acids, a.s an inor-
ganic salt of chloracetic acid.

615.319— December 6, 1898. J. H. STEVENS. Waterproof/abrk.

A fabric waterproofed by a pyroxylin compound which contains pyroxylin
oil, camphor, and naphthol.

eiS.IM— December 6. 1898. B. B. OOLDSMITH. Finishing fibrous or abtorbetU
surfaces.

A coat or coats of an aqueous solution of casein or casein compound is first
applied, and then one or more coats of pyroxylin varnish, with or without
finishing coats of gloss varnish.

en.ViO— January 10, 1899. J. H. STEVENS. Pyroxylin compotaion.

A composition containing pyroxylin and a urea salt of an acid of the aromatic
series containing carboxyl (COOHi, as urea benzoate; capable of timnsparent
effects.

619.0S7— February 7. 1899. J. R. FRANCE. Pyroxylin imUation of numie and
method of mantifaciuring game.

A pyroxylin Imitation of mosaic, produced bv forming pieces of pyroxTlln
compounds of different colors, form, and size, dipping them in a dye dimofved
in a solvent of pyroxylin, pressing the dipped pieces into cakes, and cutttur
sheets therefrom. ^^

6tl,3SS— March tl, 1899. }. H. STEVENS. Pyruxyline compound.

A composition containing pyroxylin and a salt of an acid of the aromatic
series containing carboxyl (COOH), said aalt having an Inorganic h«ae as
sodium benzoate. capable of transparent effects.

esi.iS'^March 11, 1899. 3. H. STEVENS. Transparent pumiytiH plastie eomiKf
sUiun. "^

A solid transparent composition consisting of pyroxylin, camphor and a
preserving potassium salt of a volatile monatomic lativ acid, aa potassium ace-
tate, the said salt not exceeding 3 pi-r cent by weight of the pyroxylin.

ett.tm— April I,. 1809. 3. H. STEVENS. Transparrnt pyroxiilin plastie nimuu-
sition. ' '^

A solid transiiarent composition conalatlng of pyroxylin, camphor and a
preserving sodium salt of a volatile monatomic fattv acid, as sialium aretate
the said salt not exceeding 3 per cent by weight tif the pvnixvUn; the liest
effects being attainable with about 1 i>er cent.

ett.SOl— April L 1899. 3. H. STEVENS, Transparent pifmxyliH plastic compnsilinH.
A transparent solid composition consisting of pyrrixvlin. camphor and a
preserving calcium salt of a volatile monatomic fatty acid Udonging to the
group which consists of calcium propionate and calcium butyrale; the said eaJl
never more than 3 per cent and for proper prvpurtiona should not exceed 1
per cent.

filt.i9i~AprU 4, ;.«». J. H. STEVENS. TVaiuparrnr pvnixyliH composition of

matter. ^

Barium butyrale is mixed with pyroxylin, not to exi-.-e.l .'. («-r cenL

262

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

6S!,i9S— April i. 1S99. J. H.STEVENS. Trait f parent pi/mxtjUn plastic composilion.

It consists of pyroxylin, camplior, a liquid solvent, and an inorganic salt of

lactic acid, as the lactates of potassium, slronlium, cakiura, sodium, and barium,

the salt not to exceed 5 per cent of the pyroxylin ; preferably about 1 per cent.

eii,29l,— April i, 1S99. J. H. STEVENS. Trami)arciitpyrKcijli7i plastic compoaition.

A solid transparent composition consisting of pyroxylin, camphor, and a

preserving zinc salt of a volatile monatomic fatty acid, as zinc formate, zinc

acetate, zinc propionate, etc., the salt not exceeding 5 per cent of the pyroxylin.

SiS.yv— April 11, 1S99. J. H. STEVENS. Flexible skin or fabric.

A labile waterproofed by a pyroxylin compound which contains pyroxylin,
castor oil, beta-naphthol, and amyl acetate.

etS.SlS—May tS, JS99. L. L. BETHISY. Vninfiammahle nitrocellvlose product

It is composed of nitrocellulose with a binder rendereu incombustible by the
presence of zinc chloride, as alcohol, essential oil, vaseline oil, acetic ether,
zinc chloride, and white gelatine.

6ie,75:—June IS, 1S99. J.H.STEVENS. Pyroxylin compositimi.

A composition of pyro.xylln and strontium butyrate: capabfe of transparent
eflects.
651,3ei — June 11, 1900. I. KITSEE. Compomid useful as a substilute for rubber.

A composition consisting of a glue compound— as employed for printers'
rolls— and celluloid.

em.SHa-.'icpteiyil^er 11, 1900. C. G. HAGEMANN AND F. O. C. ZIMMERMANN.

Manufacture of celluloid.

A product lousisting essentially of gelatinized nitrocellulose and a hydrate or
hydroxid of a metal, as sulphate of alumina, produced by molecularly com-
bining with a solution nitrocellulose, a concentrated solution of a hydrate or
hydroxid of a metal: reacting with a concentrated solution of caustic soda; re-
moving the cellulose solvent and soluble constituents: drying, and gelatinizing
the compound with a solvent of nitrocellulose holding camphor in solution.

eet,961— December I.. 1900. X. N. I'ETIT. Solretit material for treating surfaces of

celluloid.

A mixture of a solvent of celluloid and a fatty acid or like material, as amyl
acetate and oleic acid.
6eS,7S9— December 11, 1900. J. DUQUESNOV. Process of making artiflcial-silk

thread.

Nitrocellulose is dissolved in a solvent composed of equal parts of acetone,
acetic acid, and amyl alcohol, and expressed from a capillary orifice.

665,975— January 15. 1901. A. PETIT. Composition of matter for manufacturing

artificial silk threads.

The composition consists of lOO pounds of dry nitrocellulose, 7 pounds of
india-rubber solution, and 5 pounds of stannous chloride, mixed with sufficient
solvent to bring It to the required consistency.

VISCOSE.

510,770— June 5, 189!,. C. F. CROSS, E. J. BE VAN. AND C. BEADLE. Plasticcom-

pound of cellulose.

A soluble plastic compound derived from cellulose, caustic alkali, and carbon
di-sulphide: as by treating cellulose, saturated with a strong solution of caustic
8oda, in a chamber with carbon di-sulphide.

SS0.836—necember 11, 189!,. C. F. CROSS AND E. J. BEVAN. Manufacture of

cellulose acetate.

The intermediate product manufactured by mixing cellulose hydrate with
zinc acetate solution and drying and dehydrating, is treated with acetyl
chloride, the crude product of the reaction washed, pressed, and dried, and
then treated with chloroform, whereby a solution of cellulose acetate is ob-
tained free from cellulose and the solvent finally evaporated.

571,530— Xmember 17, 1S96. R. LANGHANS. Method of and composition for

making artificial sUk.

A noninflammable silk, produced from cellulose and other analogous carbo-
hydrates by purifying the material, subjecting it to the action of phosphosul-
phuric, sulphuric,* and phosphoric acids until a viscid syrup is obtained, increas-
ing the stability of the syrup by ireatment with an ethyl ester, drawing it into
a^ilament. removing the acid, and hardening.

eOU,i06—May 17 . 189S. C. F. CROSS. E.J. BEVAN, AND C. BEADLE. Modifica-
tion of cellulose and method of preparing same.

A structureless insoluble modified cellulose, obtained by first treating cellu-
lose with caustic alkali and carbon di-sulphide (No. 5'20,770), and then de-
composing the soluble mass thus obtained, as, for example, by exposure tf)
heat above 100° C. or by exiHMure to steam at the same temperature.

617,009— January S, 1899. M. FREMERY AND J. URB.\N. Process of manufac-
turing artificial silk.

Cellulo.se is dissolved, without decomposing the same, in a cupro-ammonium
salt solution and caused to flow in a thread or liber-like stream into a bath con-
taining a precipitant of cellulose, such as an acetic-acid solution, whereby the
cellulose is precipitated from its solution in a thread or fiber-like form. The
thread is wound within the bath as precipitated, then unwound and wound
outside the bath, and slmultjineously subjected to the action of a drying agent.

6£5,0SS — May 16, 1899. J. F. HOYNE. Process of manufacturing fiberless thread.

Cellulose is dis.s<jlved in a basic solution of zinc nitrate, chloride, or other zinc
salts, filtered, and prc.s.sed through small holes into methylated spirits — thereby
coagulating the cellulose— when the threads are strained nearly to breaking and
dried under strain.

6SI,,571— October 10, 1S99. J. C. CHORLEY. Method of producing cellulose films for

photographic or other purposes.

Films of any desired length are produced by a continuous operation by sup-
plying viscose in a regulated and evenly distributed quantity or film, heating
the gradually moving film, and simultaneously subjecting it to a current of air
traveling in the opi»osite dire<'tion, and subjecting the film to the action of boil-
ing brine to decompose the viscose and regenerate the insoluble cellulose in
film form.

6ii5,0U— JtfarcA f7, 1900, E. THOMA.«. J. BONAVITA, AND M. OLIVIER. Man-
ufacture of vi«ct>se.
To alkali cellulose there is added 25 to 30 per cent of sodium sulphite, and

about 30 per cent of /iiic oxide, calculated on the cellulose contained in the

alkali cellulose, and the mixture is then treated with carbon disulphide; the

product being free from the objections of color and odor heretofore attaching to

viscose.

et,6,S51— March 27, 1900. E. BRONNERT. Production of cellulose solution for

manufacturing threads.

Clean cellulose is treated with a concentrated caustic alkali lye, washed with
much water, treated for two to tour hours with a weak bleaching liquor, sub-
mitted to centrifugal action, and finally dissolved while wet in an ammoniacal
solution of cupric oxide.
e!,6,SSl — March 27, 1900. E. BRONNERT. Production of celiuloae solutions far

mamtfacturing threads.

CeilulosSin a finely divided state! is treated for about one hour witt a cold,
concentrated solution of caustic alkali, then the product is mixed with a
powdered copper salt— such as copper sulphate— in proportion equivalent to the
caustic alkali used, avoiding a rise in temperature, and finally the product is
dissolved in strong ammonia solution.

61,6,799- Aprils, 1900. E. BRONNERT. Process of producing solutions of cellulose.
Cellulose, freed from fat and bleached, is treated with concentrated caustic-
alkali solution, as in the mercerizing process, at a low temperature, then sub-
mitted to centrifugal action and washed, then treated with an oxidizing agent,
and after again washing and submitting to centrifugal action, it Is dissolved
directly in concentrated zinc-chloride solution.

61,8,1,15— May 1, 1900. W. H. KRUG. Substilute for horn and process of manufac-
turing same.
A vegetable tissue, as pith, is subjected to the action of an alkali solution,

washed and ground, the nongelatinized fibers removed by washing, and the

resultant mass drained and dried.

650,715— May g9, 1900. JI. FREMERY AND J. URBAN. Process of manufactur-
ing cellulose products.
Cellulose products, as threads and films, are subjected for a short time to the

action of water at an elevated temperature of from (iO° to 100° C, and then Jned

at a comparatively low temperature not exceeding 40° C, to impart a glossy

appearance and a comparatively great strength.

665,975— January 15, 1901. A. PETIT. Composition of mailer for manufacturijig

artificial silk tlireads.

It consists of about 100 pounds of dry nitrocellulose, 7 pounds of india-rubber
solution, and 5 pounds of stannous chloride, mixed with a sufficiency of solvent
to bring it to the required consistency.

RUBBER AND RUBBER SUBSTITUTES.

S!,0—June 17, 18S7. C. GOODYE.VR. Improi'ement in the process of divesting
caoutchouc, gum-elastic, or india-rubber of its adhesive properties, and also of
bleaching the same, and thereby adapting it to various useful purposes.
The adhesiveness of the surface of caoutchouc is destroyed by the application

of an acid solution of themetal.s, as, for example, a nitrate of copper or a nitrate

of bismuth. Caoutchouc paste is bleached oy incorporating therewith lime,

preferably quicklime.

1,090— February Si,, 18S9. N. HAYWARD (ASSIGNOR TO C. GOODYEAR). Im-
provement in the mode of preparing caoutchouc with sulphur for the manufacture
of various articles.

Sulphur is combined with caoutchouc, cither in solution, as in oil of turpen-
tine, or in substance, causing the gum to dry more perfectly and to improve the
whole substance.

S,8S5—Jun€ 15, ISU. C. GOODY'EAR. (Keissues: 156 and 157— December S5, 181,9;
1,081,— November SO, 1860.) Improvement in process for manufacture of india-
rubber.

India rubber, combined with or in the presence of sulphur, is cured by sub-
jecting it to a high degree of artificial heat, say, from 212° to 350° F., or approach-
ing 27(i° F.; or a carbonate or other salt or oxide of lead is added, as India rubber
25 parts by weight, sulphur 5 parts, and white lead 7 parts. Layers of cotton
batting may be interposed between those of the gum.

!,,00S— April S3, 1845. N. GOODYEAR. Improvedmethodofmanitfaeturing india-
rubber cloth and sheet india rubtter.
The gum is impregnated with grit, iron or other "metal filings, or other hard

substances.

5,59S—May SS,1SI,S, R. A. BROOMAN. Applications oftlie substance called gulta-
jiercha idoneor in combination with other substances to certain manufacturing uses
andpuri)Oses and the modes or processes of preparing, combining, and applying
the same.

Gutta-percha is freed of foreign matter by soaking in water and squeezing
between rolls, then kneaded in a machine, when it may be mixed with caout-
chouc or sulphur or both, and pigments. If caoutchouc is added, a degree of
heat not less than 1.50° F. is necessary to effect the amalgamation. Pulverized
chalk or other soft powder may be added, or ground emery, sand, or other hard
substance. It is employed in manufacture by molding, stamping, or is used for
enveloping. It is reduced to a powder and employed in the making of casts,
forms, and impressions in relief, the mold or surface being heated until the
material becomes ductile and fills all parts of the mold or form.

8,075— May 6, 1851. N. GOODYEAR. (Rcissiics: May IS, 1858-556-557.) Improve-
ment in the manufacture of india rubber.
A combination of india rubber, sulphur, and magnesia, or lime, or a carl>on-

ate, or a sulphate of magnesia, or of lime, with or without shellac for making a

hard and inflexible substance.

10,711,— April SO, 1886. A. KISSEL. Hardening resins.

Resins or resinous products are hardened by partially or wholly neutralizing
the contained acid or acids with caustic lime or other caustic alkaline earth.

11,096— June IS, 1851,. THOMAS. EARL OF DUNDONALD. Improvement in
composilimisfor coating telegraph wires and for other puriioses.
A compound of bitumen, asphaltum, or mineral pitch, 75 parts: india rubber,

15 parts: and 10 parts of a mixture formed by dis.solving gum shellac (1 part)

and resin (4 or 5 parts) in oil of petroleum, dead-oil, or naphtha, with steam

heat.

15,067— June 10, 1856. A. G. DAY. {Reissues: 750 and 757— July IS, 1859.) Im-

provemetit in cleansing caoutchouc.

Alkali or its equivalent is used for separating Dark, sticks, etc., from crude
caoutchouc and other vulcanizable gums. The caoutchouc is charged with
alkaline liquor by means of an exhausting apparatus.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

263

tLlU—AHpuM 10, l/m. A. «. DAY. ( KrlMum: Ktit—S-nrmber 9, tSIS; 5,t30, i.tSl,

t\»ti fi,tsi— January J4. ttCS, ) Improvemrtit in hant rubber.

A niixtiirt- of 1 [HirtK by wolKht of iiulU rublior nr other viilFiinlublvjrum.
and 1 (wrt of »nl|>liiir, viilcHnUtHl nt a leni|>vratun.' cumiuunclnK >t •bout inlf V.
■nil ciirrled to ;iU(P or upward.

U.ltO—Awjutt m. IHm. C. GOODYEAR. Poroiu Indla-rubhrr eliith.

A wuvt'ii or (i|ulvalont (abrli- harln)( n thin pomiw rotttiiiR of liidln riiblivr or
allied K»m.

tf.lHi—Auiiuatti, ISS9. C. OOODYKAR. h>rniiii na/tprd huliariMx-r/abrlr.

A fattrd' i.*oiniw»'0<l ()f doth hikI indta ritblH-r r<'ink'rt'd porvloii!4 to air, by Imv-
ItiK tllH'rs ]n<'ori>orat4'd thorewilh. and Impervious to water, with a face of floolcfl,
elippingK, or tdiavlnKs of w(M>leu or other MtH'n^.

t6.«!U<— January S. l.lgo. J. MURPHY. Imiiriivanait In treating watte ami interim-

(tnwu.

The proeeKs consist.*! in: First, tli'.' nuinnfiu'tnrc of hard wtoek of vuleanlzablp

f;uin liy blen<liiiK it with suiphurnnd vulrtinizitiK: second, the reduetion of the
lunl stock to i)oW4ler; third, the formation of ii ccmipouiid of the ground hUkU.
and raw gum by )>lendinK; mid, fourth, the vuhmniztition of this com|M)iind.

K. 770— April 10. mw. .?. >t. BATCHELDKR. Imprmrmnit in itmulalion it} tub-

mariiif I'tttiniph irirrii.

A teU'Krapli wire or other conductor of electricity insulatiKl with a compound
aubstanie conipo.se<I of pulverized silex. Riawi, or other nonconducting material
mixed with India rubber and sulphur and subsequently vulcanized.

t7.KS7— April 10. ism. C. K. E. SIMON, frnproivmrmt in rrtlwing mute viitran-

ixetl rubtfer.

Ground or cut wai»le of vulcanized India rubber is mixed with chloridt^ of
lime ( 100 parts of rubber waste and 2 parte of chloride of lime) and cxpoNcd to
a heat of 900° to 1,200° F., with stirring, till the voUUUzatlon of the sulphur is
complete.
ta,7l7—AHffuft !l, IS60. A. C. RICHARDS. Improvement in demlcanixing mute

rvbber.

Rubber waste is ground to powder and treated with steam in a closed vessel
at a temperature of over 600° F.

ao.lSI— September tS. 1860. DU B. D. PARMELEE. Improvement in rettorlng

watte vmcanizeri rubber.

Waste rubber is powdered and then combined with India rubber which has
been moditied bv heat, so as to obtain it either in a semiliquid or melted condi-
tion or in u liquid or vaporous coniiition.

Sl.tiO— January 39. imn. R. F. H. HAVEMANN. ImprovetnentineomponUionaof

eaoutchonc.

A substitute for ivory and bone produced by the admixture of oxide of zinc
with chlorine-treated rubber or Its chlorine-treated allied gums. In the propor-
tion, say, of one part of zinc oxide to two parts of gum.

31,tU— January t9. isei. R. F. H. HAVEMANN. Improvement in componlions

«/ caoutchouc.

A substitute for wood. Ivory, and bone produced by the admixture with chlo-
rine-treated rubber or its chlorine-treated allied gums, of one-eighth of a dram
of aqua-ammonia, one-eighth of a dmm of powdered carbonate of ammonia,
and half a pound of lime, per pound of gum, with pressure and heat.

SS.09t,—Augutst SO, JS61. C. McBURNEY. Improvement in utilising waste vulcan-
ized ruttticr.
Comminuted waste rubber Is treated with an oil having no solvent action

upon the gum, such as resin oil, castor oil, etc.

SLSOD— February i, 1862. T. J. MAYALL. ImprovemenHnrettoring waste rubber.
Vegetable tar or pine oil is combined or incorporated with waste vulcanized
rubber.

t0,iO7— October f7. ISSS. C. H. & D. E. HAYWARD. Improvement in treating
n-agte rwWxT.

Waste rags of fibrous material and rubber are boiled in an acid or alkali to
destroy the tenacity of the fibers of the rags, so that the rubber may be reground
and the material will not blister when reused.

U>.i91—.yovanber S, isri.f. T.J. MACKALL. Improvement in restoring waste rubber^
Rubber waste is reduced to a fine condition and then subjected to the direct
action of the flames of gas or inflammable liquids.

i6,S10— February 28. 186S. E. L. SIMPSON. ImprovemetU in the process qf manu-

/acturing India rubber, gutta-percha, etc.

A eonceniraicd preparation of sulphur and linsee<l or other vegetable oil Is
employed in the manufacture of india rubber, to pnKluce a product free from
the disagreeable odor and deleterious effects of viiloanizefl rubber.

U,7B0— March 7. IS6S. S. C. BISHOP. Improved composiliiin for intulating tele-
graph wires.

A mixture of gutta-percha or India rubber. 4 parts: parafllnc, 1 part: wheat
flour, 2 parts: and resin, 1 part: or in lieu of this gutta-percha or India rubber,
6parts: paraffine, 2 parts: white.oxide of zinc, 1 part: catechu. X part; and gela-
tine or glue. 2 parts: mixed in solution or by heated rolls,

61. SSI— December 5. 1865. F. MARQUARD. (Reimue: t.l80— February to, 1866.)

Improvement in the vianit/acture of white rultber.

After blenching with chlorine gas ihe rubber or like gum is washed with hot
water, it is then .subjected to distillation. The product after straining, press-
ing, and drying, is redissoived in a small quantity of chloroform mixed with
phosphate of lime, and subjected to pres.sure in hot molds.

51. SS!— December B. 1865. E. MARQUARD. (Reitue: t,179—fibruary tO, 18t6.)

Improvement in Ihe manvjacture of white rubber.

Rubber dissolved in chloroform (or other solvent) Is bleached by treatment
with caustic ajimionia gas or chloride of ammonia. It is then washe<l with hot
water, subjecte<l to distillation, and redissoived as in No. 61,331, and combined
with phosphate of lime or a carbonate of zinc by means of pressure in hot molds.

5i.StS—}laii8.1866. C. L. FRINK. (Reismee: ti.Bit— June II, 1871; e.Oli— August
11, 1871,.) Improvement in vulcanized rubber compounds for packings and other
purjioses.

A vulcanized rubber compound formed of rubber, 10 parts; plumbago, 20 parts;
carbonate of lead or litharge, 6 parts; sulphur, 4 parts, and brass or other
metal filings, 6 parts.

5l„5K-)layS,l8»». N.JENKINR. (Keimu: t,a»-Aitfnm».lim.) lmpr>,rrmmt

In the manufacture ojelattle parking.

An elastic packing. comiMaietl of at least foiir-lentha of fineljr pulverized
refractory earthy material, such u French chalk, mingled with robber, pre-
pared fur vulcanizing and then vulcanized.

M.KIH—nrlnber 9, 1866. A. (i. DAY. (KeUtuea: 6.7017— f>nober 1», ms, produet;

6,708— (hiiiber 19, 187.1. process.) Improvement In arll/lrliil camUehoue.

VegeUibleand mineral oils are romhined with gumrealn* or other rMlDoui
iKHlies, and sulphur at a temperature sulllricnt t<> prodiire vulcanllatloD: th«
oils and reslas arc first mixed under hi>nl, himI the sulphur then added ana the
tempi'rtiture Increased. It may t>e mixed with India rubtter or futta-percfia,

tt.OSA— January t6, 186:7. W. MIILLEE. Improvement In process at prrpartng

India riMter.

Thin sheets of rubber are suspended In a bath of melted ralpbur heated to
220° to 230° F., then removed, the crystals of sulphur formed thereon removed,
and a pile of the sheets are then ktieaded, worki^l, and vulcanize*!.

.1S,0.11—Ortober IS. 1868. 8. O. BISHOP. Improrrd compimnd /or insulating tele-

(rraph and electric wires.

It consists of 2i pounds of asphnltum, one-quarter pound of gutta-percha, one-
quarter iiound of crude resin, naif n gallon of spirits of turpentine, with about
1 gill of boiled Unseed oil and 2 ounces of umber.

91,.6S1— .September 7, 1869. S. MOIM.TON. Impromt printers' Inking roller from
rubber sponge. «

To obtatn a subotance of a mossy nature, vulcanized India rubber Ispulrerized
I and subjected to a second vulcanization.

j !i7,.m>—Xovember 17, 1869. E. CHE8TERMAN. Improvement <i» the mammae-

I ture of rubber sponge.

' Artificial sponge Ls made by Incorporating into a homogeneous masa, on hot
rolls, si>ecilicd ingrc<lients — salt, salts <d soda, alum, or other deliquescent or
soluble solid not affected by moderate heat, either with(»r without such liquids
as molasses, etc. — and afterwards exf»anding. revulcanizing. and setting. It Is
expanded by treatment in a hot water, steam, or othir bath. Color is imparted
by the use of golden sulphuret of antimony Incorporated with the compoiudL

IS7.109— April 1, 1S7S. W. A. TORREY. Improvement In vuUxmiied rvtAer com-
pounds.

Mica is combined with rubber prior to vulcanization.

! liO.tSl—Juneti, 1S75. D.M.LAMB. Improvement in the production qfwalerpnxtf
gum.

Waterproof gum made from the inspissate<l juice of plants of the asclepiaa or
milkweed family, or any of the analogous plants poaseaslng like propertlea.

U0,t8t—June ti, t87S. D.M.LAMB. Improvement in the produilUm of aalerproqf

gums,

.\ waterproof gum is extracted from plantsof the ascleplas or milkweed fam-
ily, bv subjecting the plants to fermentation, and InspLssating the resulting
liquid by evaporation.

1W,S8S — Jwne itt, 187S. D.M.LAMB. Improvement in preparing waieryroqf ipsm9

from flaxseed, etc.

A vulcanizable gum is produced from flaxseed or other seeds poaseasing simi-
lar properties— as rape and cottonseed — by maceration, straining, and subae-
quent inspissation.

lil.908— September 16, 187S. C. L. FRINK. Improvement in raftfter compounds for

the mani(facture of packings, etc.

A mixture of India rubber or other vulcanizable gum with sulphur and other
solid materials, such as various earths, oxides, metal filings, and the like,
forming a nonvulcanized but vulcanizable compound; that la, rulcanlzed In
the place to be packed.

11,6.158— .January 6. 187/,. S. W. ANDREWS AND L. GODFREY.' Improvement
in compositions of rubber for use in separating cockles from grain.
A vulcanized composition of 8 ounces of linseed oil and 2 ounces of chalk; 8

Eounds of zinc white; and 4 pounds of rubber gum, with sufficient sulphur. It
I vulcanized at 260° F. for not to exceed 3 hours and then subjected to a beat
of about 212° F. for two hours, more or less.

llS.SSi— January IS, 187 It. P. FINLEY. Improvement in the preparation and treat-
ment of india-rubber varnish.

Dehydrated or baked iiidia rubber, produced by heating sliced or comminuted
j india-rubber at a temperature of from 138° to 160° C. for seven to ten hours. It*

is combined with sulphur and benzine or other solvent of India rubber to form
1 a vaniish.

l.'>S.U7—July 18, lS7i. L. O. P. MEY'ER. Improeement in proctua iff producing

vulcanizea sqfl indlarrubber goods.

Paraflln is used In covering the plastic compound with sheets or forms of
metal preparatory to vulcanization.

I.iS.iia—July IS, 1871,. L. O. P. MEYER. Improvement in »q/l vubxmued India

rubber with glossy surface.

Soft vulcanized rubber having a glossy surface: produced by prdeesa No.
l.')3,447. ,

158.1,1.9— July t8, 1871,. L. O. P. MEYER. Improvement <i» froee—e* for the pro-
duction of hard rublyer or vulcanite irith cloth surface or surfaces.
A thin coat of soft vulcanizable India rubber Is applied between the cloth

and the hard compound and then vulcanized.

18S,lt9— September tS, 187S. M. W. BEYLIKOY. Improvement in extracting nift-

ber from wctste.

Rubber solutions are solidified through the agency of a current of air circu-
lating over the surface of the solution, through a condenser to deposit the vola-
tile solvent, then through a beater an<l back to the solution vessel.

179,176— July i, 1876. W. D. LATHAM. Improvement in cement.

A cement compooed of 1 ounce of crude gutta-percha, 6 grains of India rub-
ber, and 1 pound of chloroform.

180.i81^August 1, 1876. Q. MAGNrS. Improvement in eomposMon* for billiard

balls and processes qf manufacturing the same.

A mixture of India rubber, sulphur, sulphate of baryta— the latter In qoantlty
at least bO per cent of the rubber— and coloring matter: Ihe composition a
subjected, in molds, to a slowly increasing heat for ten hours or more.

264

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

tlO,W5— December S, 1S78. A. G. DAY. Improvenient in the combination of vege-
table oils and grahamite/or the mantifaclure of vulcanized compounds.
A kerite product, formed by the combination of grahamite or its equivalent
with another resinous body, and with vegetable oil and sulphur; ns by mixing
cottonseed oil. liquid coal tar, and grahamite with a small quantity of oxide
of zinc, heating to about 330^ F.. cooling to '^00° F., and adding linseed oil,
and then raising the temperature slightly and adding the sulphur.

S10,!,06— December 5, 1813. A. G. DAY. ImproveintiU in compounds for the manu-
facture of kerite.
Clay or other equivalent earth is mixed as an absorbent with the oils, resinous

bodies, and sulphur in the manufacture of kerite.

S10,U07— December 5, WS. A. G. DAY. Improvement in compounds of india rub-
ber and kerite.
A vulcanized product consisting of the combination of crude kerite with

natural india rubber.

ilO.COS— December 3. 137S. A. G. DAY. Improvement in tlie manufacture of kerite

from gumjt and oih.

A vulcanized compound composed of vegetable or mineral oils, a resinous
body -or bodies, and sulphur: as cottonseed oil, linseed oil, coal tar, and sul-
phur, and preferably wax with or without paraffin or ozocerite.

210,!t09— December 3, 1878. A. G. DAY. Improvement in the manufacture of kerite.
The process of making a vulcanized product by combining crude kerite or
artificial caoutchouc with natural india rubber,

SlO.ilO—Decemba- 3, 1S7S. A. G. DAY. Improvement in preparing vegetable oile

for the manufacture of kerite.

Vegetable oils are subjected to the action of sulphur at a high temperature,
as 520*^ F.

2 10 JJ I— December 5, 1873. A. G. DAY. Improvement in the manufacture of arti-
ficial caoutchouc or kerite.

The process of making a vulcanized compound by combining cottonseed oil,
coal tar (or pitch or bitumen), linseed oil, and sulphur, with or without vege-
table or animal wax, ozocerite, and oxide of iron.

211,31,0— January U, 1S79. J. MURPHY. Improvement in vulcanized india-rubber

valves.

Composed of vulcanized rubber and gutta-percha, in the proportions of 2
parts of the former to 1 part of the latter, with or without the addition of
metallic earths and oxides; it will resist the action of oils.

216,155— June 3, 1879. D. F. CONNELL AND E. FAGAN. Improvement in hard

rubber compounds.

Strips or shreds of metal foil are incorporated with caoutchouc prior to vul-
canization.

218,81,2— August 26, 1879. J. W.
india rubber or caoutchouc.

W.VTTLES. Improvements in tnatiny vulcanized

Vulcanized rubber is treated in a bath of acetic acid, or it is otherwise applied
to increase its strength and elastic force.

219,033— August 26, 1879. J.STEPP.
and other articles with india rubber.

Improvement i7i the modes of covering wooden

Gum is first applied in solution, then the article is covered with a vulcaniza-
ble compound and the article subjected to liquid pressure during the process
of vulcanization.

226.017— March SO, 1880. C. V. BEACH. India rubber and oUter gum compounds
for surfacing cloth, and for other purposes.

Rubber and other gum compounds are deoderized by combining therewith
gum benzoin, say 5 per cent, or benzoic acid alone.

2-26.057—March SO, ISSO. H. G ERNER. Pr-'ccss of the treatment of india rubber, etc.
The process consists in washing india rubber and like gums in warm water in
which is dissolved some soda, then cutting into small particles, then freezing,
then grinding in a frigid mill, again washing in e^Md water, then subjecting to
the action of solvents in a closed vessel and mixing with desired substances and
completing the manufacture.

226,058— March SO, 1880. H. GERNER. Manufacture of goods from caoutchouc, etc.
The process consists in first mixingdissolved camphorand sulphur, then evap-
orating the moisture of the camphor solvent and mixing with eaoulehonc and
vulcanizing. The rubber compound consists of equal parts of dissolved cam-
phor, sulphur, and caoutchouc.

226,070— March 30, 1880. L. M. HEYER. Treating waste vulcanized caoutchouc.

Rubber waste, after the removal of the sulphur by the direct action of heat, is
subiected to the action of boiling water or steam until sufficiently fluid to strain,
ami then strained.

220.03S~~June 22, 1880. H. GERNER. Mamifacture of vulcanized india-rubber

compounds.

Camphor is mixed with sulphur— as by melting them together, cooling, and
grinding— and incorporated with india rubber, with or without the addition of
glycerine, and the mass vulcanized.

229,791,— Jultf IS, 1880. A. B. ALLEN. Manufacture of substitutes for hard rubber.
Hard wood and articles made therefrom are treated with resin oil at a slow
beat, and afterwards coated with a solution of gutta-percha vulcanized on the
wood.

229,817— July 13, 1880. H. GERNER. Manufacture of viUcanized india-rubber

products.

A mixture of india rubber, camphor, and flour made from the seed of agricul-
tural germs for the purpose of vulcanization

tS2,97U— October S, 1880. A. B. &. C. JENKINS. Vulcanized plastic compound.

Dialomaceous silica or insuferial earth is mixed with india rubber and gutta-
percha, or either, and sulphur, and vulcanized.

2SS. 296- October 12, 1880. E. M. STEVENS. Enameled rubber cloth.

The surface consists of substantially equal parts of boiled linseed oil, plastic
rubber, and suitable body or coloring matter, combined together by beat before
applying to the cloth, and hot calendered after application.

233,600— October 26, tSSO. J. H. CHEEVER. Process of reclaiming rubber from okl
and waste vulcanized rubber and utilizing the same in manufacturing i^-bber goods.
Old vulcanized rubber is boiled with raw petroleum and the resulting product
then mixed with new rubber and sulphur and exposed to vulcanizing tem-
perature.
336,21,0— January i, 18S1. G. M. MOWBRAY. Method of treating caoutchouc.

Caoutchouc is treated with naphthaline to preserve the properties of elasticity,
durability, etc., and the naphthalized caoutchouc mixed with elements not sol-
uble in naphthaline for 'he formation of articles. The naphthaline is removed
by spontaneous evaporation.

236,709— January IS, 1881. P. KROPP. Composition for treating rubber cloth, etc.
A composition for covering the rubber surface of cloth before printing, con-
sisting of linseed oil boiled to a tough paste, with a small proportion of oxide of
manganese, and of gum copal added, and then coloring matter equal in weight
to the mass.

236,778— January 18, 1881. H. A. CLARK. Process of desulphurizing and devnl-

canizing ivaste vulcanized india rubber.

Vulcanized india rubber waste is first moistened with water and the water
evaporated, and then moistened with turpentine, camphene or equivalent sub-
stance and the turpentine evaporated by heating.

236,779— January 18, 1S81. H. ,\. CLARK. Process of desulphurizing and devul-

canizing icasie vulcanized india rubber.

Vulcanized india rubber is treated to the vapors of turpentine or camphene,
after it has been boiled in water, to reduce the whole to a cohesive condition.

2S7, 21*9— February 1, 1381. H. A. CLARK. TreatmerU of vulcanized india rubber

ami gutta-percha.

Waste vulcanized india rubber is treated with a vegetable oil, such as palm
oil, and with a resinous matter.

21,3,782— July 5. ISSl. T. J, MAYALL. Compound substance for electric insulators.
It consists of 1 pound of rubber, one-quarter of a pound to 2 pounds of graphite.
and one-half pound to 2 pounds of sulphide or sulphuret of antimony, com-
mingled and cured by heat.

2U!,,7SS—July 26, 1331. L. BECKERS. Treating caoutchouc with hydrocarbon oils.
A waterproof compound consisting of, say, 1 part of caoutchouc to 4 parts of
hydrocarbon oil of a boiling temperature of about 250° to 300° C.

21,5,328— August 9, ISSl. J. H. TUTTLE. Process of making sheet packing of rub-
ber, paper, etc.

Sheet packing provided with a metallic facing; formed by attachment to the
face of any suitable fabric by means of rubber cement, or other adhesive ma-
terial, metal filings or grindliigs, and subjecting the sheet to pressure. Sulphur
may be added to the cement and the sheets vulcanized.

2!,7,SSl,— October /,, 1881. T. J. MAYALL. Manufacture of hard rubber.

The sulphides or sulphurets of antimony are mixed with rubber \ without the
addition of free sulphur) and cured by heat.

2U7 ,855— October i, 1881. T. J. MAYALL. Rubber veneer.

A compound of rubber and sulphide (or sulphuret) of antimony, colored and
cured by heat.

21,7 ,81,0— October !,, 1881. T. J. MAYALL. Hard rubber compound called "arti-
ficial hor7i."
A compound of rubber and sulphide (or sulphuret) of antimony and graphite.

hardened by heat.

A. B. ifc W. P. BROWN. Composition for coating

imd wax, dissolved

21,9,889— November 22, 1881.

7netals.

Composed of india rubber, gutta-percha, gum dammar,
in benzole.

21,9,970— Novanber 2i, 1881. N. C. MITCHELL. Recovering rubber from rubber

xvaste.

In the boiling of rubber waste in strong sulphuric or muriatic acid, steam is
injected into the acid, whereby the steam penetrates the mass and carries the
acid with it.

250,91^— December 13, 1881. N. C. MITCHELL. Recovering rubber from rubber

waste.

Rubber waste is tirst subjected to the action of hydrocarbon vapors to soften
or disintegrate the mass, and then to the action of strong and highly heated sul-
phuric or muriatic acid.

252,216— January 10, 1332. H. W. HENDRICKS. Elastic compound for truss-pads.
It consists of glue, honey, siugar, gutta-pcrclia, glycerine, borax, alum, black
lead, sulphur, and saltpeter, in certain specified proportions.

S5i,205— February 22, 1882. G. A. FOWLER. Temporary stopping for teeth.

A composition of wax, 4 parts; oxide of zinc. In parts; gutta-percha, H purts;
and chalk or whiting, 6 parts.

25U.I,62— March 7, 1382. J. D. CHEEVER. iVaterp roof and plastic composition.

Waste rubber is rendered plastic by treatment with vaseline and sulphur,
and mixed with short jule tiber or powdered bark, cither or both.

25U,U6S— March 7, 1S82. J. D. CHEEVER. ]Vaterproof and plastic compound.

To a compound of disintegrated fibrous material, earthy materials, sulphur,
and vaseline there is added siccative oil treated with chli'mde of sulphur, the
use of vaseline being claimed witii any of the products derived from the sicca-
tive or drying oils. Also the products derived from the siccative or drying oils
in combination with the plastic products obtained by heating waste vulcanized
rubber with vaseline, for cementing pigments and fibers.

25l„U65—March7, 1382. J. D. CHEEVER. Waterproof and plastic compound.

A product of the siccative oils, vaseline, and "piekum gum," protluced by
treatingasolution formed of, say 160 pounds of linseed oil, 20 pounds of vaseline.
and 40 pounds of piekum gum, dissolved with heat, with y pounds of proto-
chloride of sulphur and 9 pounds of bisulphide of carbon, and granulating after
cooling, and washing. A compound of the same is formed with powdered cork,
tan bark, short fibers, and coloring matter.

256,i,70^April 18, 1882. G. S. EVANS. Plastic composition and vulcanite.

A plastic material suitable for waterproofing or vulcanization is formed from
gums, such as gum kauri or gum mauila, by mixing such gum with palm oil

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES

265

mid then hoatlne the mixture to about 4(Xf V. Tlic mntorial In vulcnnlzcd by
trratliiK with ohioritc of aluminum nnd htsallnir.

CiS.OII-.Vtiij 16. ISSi. C. CONNOR. kiihlKr nimimund.

It con.ilstji i>f H vtilcnnizcd mlxtiim o( inilln rubber. 1 ponnil: »<kIb, 2 pound*:
llrac. 4 (luni'i's; ciunphor, S drum*; and sulphur. 1 ounce aud 10 drnma. It will
stand a high decree- of hoiit.

smMl—Jiilii i. IS6S. C. K. W. WOODWARD. I'rocrM nflreaUnn tmlia rubber.

The surfiicp of India rublwr l» «ubjc<'ted for a llmlte<l time to the action of
concentrated sulphuric add and Immediately washed topreimrc It foradhealon
to other objecto.

!6i.079—AH!jiifl I. ISSi. C. J. MoDERMOTT. RiiloHnii rubber imtU.

Rubber waste or scrap l» boiled In a solution of acid, bichrouate of poUwh, and
manganese, by means of live steam injected Into the mass.

SUS.Oei—Augutt tt, ISSi. H. A. CLARK. TrtatmnU «/ iudla rubbir and giiUa-
percha.

Restored or devulcanized India rubber or gutta-percha with water Is subjected
to heat sufhclent to evaporate the oils or spirits.

i>«!,,S!l—Srutember 19. ISSt. W. O. CAl.LENDER. Ompoittimi nf matter Jnr lu-

aidating telegraph utira and/or other purponet.

It consists of 40 to 80 parts of bitumen and 20 to 60 parts of elaatlkon. or a
residual product of vegelAble oils, with sulphur or other vulcanizing agents.

ses.tSl— September ««, ISSt. J. C. TITZEL. Process or treallmi vuleaui:yd india

Vulcanized india rubber is dissolved In luri>enline and linseed oil; then sul-
phuric acid is added until the pigment or tilling is all dissolved, when the mass
Is wa.shed. A cnuslio potash .solution is then added to saponify the oil, and the
rubber is precipitated from the soapy mass.

I76,916--Mau 1, 1.1SS. W. SMITH. InsulaXlng eteHrical conductors and a new
compound suitable to Ik usedjor this and other purposes.
A mixture of gutta-percha and ground coal.

i77.S77—)Iati Si. ISSS. E. BAUER. Process iif and composltimi for the manufnc-

lure o//ubslitutes/or ieatlier, horn, tortoise shell, etc.

It is composed of gelatine or glue, 2( to .'j parts; glycerine. 3 parts to one-half
part: fat or oil, 3 parts to one-half part: and caoutchouc, one-half to I part; when
dried it is treated with tannic acid, the tanning process being accelerated by
electric currents.

iSl.T69—Jul!/ Si. 1SS3. A. W. KENT. Separating foreign substances Srom india-
rubber waste.

Ground or subdivided india-rubber waste is agitated in water within a .sieve
that supports the rubber, which allows the heavier sub.st«nces to subside and
the loose fibers lo wash away.

SSi.THO—Sejitemlxr 11. ISSi. H. A. ROBINSON. Metallized rubber compound.

A compound consisting of 10 parts of finely divided metal and 1 part of vul-
canizable gum rendered plastic by a suitable solvent.

SSf,.»SO— October S, ISSS. W. E. DOL'D. lhd>ber cement/nr tlie manufacture of mem-

orandum blocks and tal>lets.

It is composed of 1 part of pure rubber, 6 pounds of bisulphuret of carbon, and
1 [lound of ultramarine.

SS6,U!— October 9, ISSS. M. HUGHES. Mastic composition Jnr tailors' cidting-

boards, and /or other purposes.

A mixture of sawdust, 10 parts: rubber or gutta-percha, S parts; flour, 4 to 5
pans; and linseed oil or soap-boilers' waste, with or without the addition of a
bituminous substance.

SSS, 01 3— November 6. ISSS. J . L. CH ADWICK. Methwi oj reclaiming ittdia rubber

andjityerjrom scraps of india-rubtter cloth.

The scraps arc first subjected to the action of muriatic acid to destroy the cot-
ton fibers and release the wool from the rubber, leaving the wool intact: and
then subjected to a beating and picliing action to detach the wool Irom the
rubber.

S90,909— December 15, ISSS. N.C.MITCHELL. Rubber compound.

Particles of leather are incorporated with the rubber comp<jund previous to
vulcanization.

S»S,S91—Februar!i.'i.l8S!,. A. O. BOURN. Process (if treating fiyrous rubber waste.
Rubber wa.ste containing cotton fiber is .subjected to the action of a sulphuric-
acid solution of sufficient strength to operate as a solvent of the fiber — 3 or 4
per cent solution — and permit Its removal with the solvent.

S9,'),61S— March SS. ISSi. A. O. BOURN. Process of treating /tbrous rubber waste

for the recovery of the rubber or caoutchouc tlierefrom.

Waste containing cotton fiber is treated with nitric or muriatic acid in solu-
tions of sufhcient strength to convert the fiber Into soluble matter and permit
its removal with the solution.

S00,'20—June 17, ISSi. N. C. MITCHELL. Recovering rubber from watte.

Rubber wa.ste is boiled in sulphuric or muriatic acid of a strength sufficient
to eliminate and destroy the fibrous material Including woolen fiber.

SUa.lSU—.'ieptember 16. ISSi. J.J. HAUG. SubstiliUe for caoutchouc.

Sitins and glycerine are boiled under pressure, then there is mixed with the
mass glycerine and chromatc or bichromate of iiotash or other suitable salt acted
upon by light, with or without the addition of ground cork, oxgall, and color.

3iiS,lS9— November IS, ISSi. J. J. MONTGOMERY. Devulcanizing and restoring

vulcanized rubt)er.

Finely cut particles of the rubber are heated in a cloaed vessel with hydro-
carbon oils obtained from petroleum to above 350° F. until it Is reduced to a
complete solution, from which the oils remaining in the mass may or may not
be extracted.

S0S.109— November IS. lS9i. J. J. C. SMITH. Manufacture ofriU>ber compositions.
A rubber compound, consisting of mineral wax or paraffin combined with
resin, sulphur, and rubber: formed by first melting together resin, one-fourth to
one-half jiound, and ozocerite, or similar maierial. 1 i>ound. and mixing the
same with 4 pounds of caoutchouc and 1 pound of sulphur.

Ull.tSli—Januari, to, ism. C. J. MrDERMOTT. Hrrvi^rlng rubber frrrm ruUrr
wast).

Kllier la eliminated from rubticr arnp by Imillnii th>- M-rap In iltluta wrkl— my
sulphiirli' acid of IS" B«um«— and afterwards waahlni th* nibher: or a untatlon
of aiilphuric acid, mU, and manganeM- 1» luwd.

Stt,M!l-F,trruaryU, tSM. C. H. BRAIiLEV. EIrctrimI cmdurtlnu malrrlal.

It eonslaU of gusretorl carbon or other carbon which haa grit, and njlU-
percha or India rublier vulcanized; tnay be vulcanized with bromine. The
material Is nonporoiis.

SIS.SM— April It,, ISSS. M. KELUKiU. Klectrieal Intulatm.

A mixture of 4 pounds of asphallum, 4 ounces caoutchouc of oil, 1 ounce of
asbestos, and 4 ounces India red; the aabeatoa and India red, either or both,
may be omittc<l.

StS,t^S—Mny 19, ISSS. J. L. CLARK. Manufacture ami prcparaUm nf maierial*

to be niiptoi/ed for iusulating.

A eomisiund of oxidized oil and asnhalt. pilch, or bitumen, with a small
quantity of hydrocarbon oil or hydrocarbon spirit, with or without india mbber
or gutta-percha, black wax or other elementu lo cheapen the mixture.

.119.079— June f , ISSS. }. W. ELLIS. Ojmjxisition iif matter for Uie prrnrrvnllon of
imper or vegetable tibing used for the insulidum nf Itlej/raph wires.
A mixture of asphaltum, 40 parts; resin, 14 paria; petroleum or dead oil, «

parts; vulcanized rubber, 3 parts, and sulphur, 1 part.

StO,9tl—June SO, ISSt. R. S. FERGUSON. W. SCHUMACHER, AND W. TUB-
MAN, f^mp^mndfnr insulating electric u-ires.
A mixture of pine pilch, 300 pounds; hard or soft rubUir. IJ pounds; and llouid

asbestos, 1 gallon, to which Is added beeswax or Ullow or linseed oil until of

the proper consistency to render the compound hard and yet flexible when

cool.

SSl.ilO—June SO, ISSS. F. WILHSFT. Vulcanized toft rubber and process nf mat-
ing same.

Vulcanized soft rubber in which all the sulphur Is chemically combined
with the rubber: produced by mixing it with 3| or leas per cent of sulphur and
subjecting it to a heat of 830° F. or over.

Sit. ."iiS— July 7, iS8.5. J. J. VARLEY. Plastic composUlm.

Articles made of a plastic composition— of the class conuining resins, gums,
etc.— are subjected to heat, gradually applied, whereby they are rendered
tough, hard, and heat resisting.

Stt,SOt—July il, ISSS. A. G. DAY. Process of making the compound termed
"kerile."

In the manufacture of kcrlte (see No. 210.4111 in place of sulphur, sulphide of
antimony, or other suitable sulphide Is added, either alone or united with a
greater or less proportion of sulphur, to enable the chemical heat to be con-
trolled by the sulphide and to prevent oxidation of the finished product.

Sil.S0l,—Juty •/„ ISSS. A. G. DAY. Process of manufacturing crude kerile
compounds.

In the manufacture of kerite according to Nos. 210,411 or 322,802. a vegetable
astringent— such as tannin or tannic acid, extract of gamhia, extract of pine,
spruce, or oak bark, extract of nut galls or sumac— is added either before or after,
or with the sulphur or sulphide; it imparts a more fibrous character to the
product.

SS7,I>S6— September t9, ISSS. S. LOEWENTHA L. Manufacture of ornamental wall

covering, leather cloth, etc.

A mixture of 100 pounds of African flake, 10 pounds of rubber, 100 pounds of
rubber substitute, 10 pounds of ozocerite, 100 pounds of infusoria, and 100 pounds
of wood pulp or ground cork, with 2t per cent of sulphuric acid and 5 per cent
of muriatic acid, is spread on a fabric printed with a pattern or design, with or
without embossing, and dried.

SS5,i9S— February g, isse. J.B.WILLIAMS. Composition qf matter for intulatiiui
nuiterial.

It consists of gutta-percha, india-rubber, colophony, gum dummar, and
asphalt, all in solution, and anhydrous paraffin oil with or without powdered
silica.

3S6,01S— February 9, 1SS6. W. J. RIGNEY AND J. WOLFF. Composition for

insulating electric wires.

An outer coating of balata, or of a mixture containing balala— obtained from
the milky juice of the .'iapota mu^ileri, and resembling india-rubtxT — is employe<l
in connection with an inner coat of adhesive maierial, as tuua — a substance
resembling gutta-percha— or tar.

SS7.ie6— March 9, 1SS6. ■ R. P. WALUS. Flexible lead peneU.
An elastic composition fonned of graphite and caoutchouc.

539,707— AprU IS, ISSS. E. D. KENDALL. Omiposiffon of mailer for dectrie
insulation.

A compound of wax tailings of petroleum refining, 32 parts: chicle, 16 to S2
parts; sulphur. 4 to 8 parta; and oil, 1 to 2 parts.

Sl^e.ttU—July a, ISSS. T. C. ROCHE. OmpotUion/or holding phalograpliir paper

an its supports: etc.

A mixture of rubber, pitch, and a solvent, as benzole; also a mixture of
rubber, beeswax, and a solvent: the mixtures being combinml or used alone.

SiS,59l—June IS, 1SS6. O. LUGO. Vulcanite and process nf producing the same.

A vulcanized mixture of hair or homy material, sulphur, and India rubber.
SiS.SSS— September IS, ISS6. G. W. HOLLEY. Mantffacturc nf paint,

A paint consisting of a given quantity of mineral oxides, earths, or other pig-
ments, combined with from one-tenth to one-half its weieht of pnlreris^
sulphur and linseed oil: formed b)' mixing the sulphur with :! >. then

gradually adding with constant stirring alnnil ime-lhird .>f it- ii.seed

oil previously heated to 80^ C. and at the same time gradual: ■ .- tem-

perature to lienor 125° C: then cooling slowly under con.st«iii Mirnng, and
lastly grinding.

SS0.iS9— October S. ISSS. A. KISSEL. Subttttule for india rubber, caoutehouc. etc.
A compound of the hanlened resin and balsams of the conifcrae and oil and
sulphur: formed by hardening the resin and balsams by means of caustic lime
or other causiio alkaline earth; dissolving the hardened resin or balsam In oil;
adding to the solution a sci-ond soIutii>n composed of sulphur and oil; afldinf
sulphur to the mixed solutions: and heating the mass.

266

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

S58M8S— February S2, 1SS7. A. W. SPERRY. Composition of matter as a siibsti-

tiUe for hard ruhber. etc.

It is composed of ivory dust or like material, forming 50 per cent of the com-
pound; a starch mixture consisting of starch, tannin, and an alkali, asalum* a
binder mixture consisting of a resinous gum dissolved in alkali, as caustic soda,
and milk, glue, shellac, and alcohol.

359,825— March S-2, 1SS7. C. M THOMPSON. Insulating material

A compound of dead-oil of pitch 1 part, and desulphurized old rubber, com-
monly known as "shoddy," 7 parts; pitch and desulpnurized rubber are mixed
with cold rollers, then steam is introduced and it is rolled into thin sheets and
thoroughly dried.

S59 907— March ^2, 1887. C. M. THOMPSON. Process of curing india rubber.

A compound consisting of India rubber and lampblack, produced by subject-
ing India rubber to the action of liot rollers, adding from 5 to 20 per cent of
lampblack, and then continuing the action of the roller:*.

SC 157 — June 21, 1887. H. W. LIBBEY. Rubber-covered elastic compound.

I consists of particles of sponge and india rubber; rubber is reduced by heat
and particles of sponge are distributed in the maes and mingled therewith.

368,171* — Augu.<t 9, 1SS7. H. VOGLEY. Composition for cementing rubber.

A composition formed by mixing and dissolving 2^ ounces of pure rubber
gum, 3 ounces of pulverized gum gamboge, and 11 ounces of dry white lead, in
1 gallon of benzine; and subsequently adding a mixture of 2 ounces of pul-
verized sulphur and 2i ounces of sulphuric ether, with or without one-half
ounce of alum and one-fourth pound of burnt brown sugar.

37 5,W5— December 27, 1887. F. WILHOFT. Method of manufacturing nonblooming

i*ulcanized soft rubber.

Rubber is mixed with a sulphur preparation in which this body is in a last-
ingly-amorphous condition by the addition of a greasy, fatty, resinous, or tur-
pentine IxHiy. and vulcanized. The said sulphur preparation is formed by
fusing 1 pound of sulphur, say, with one-fourth of a pound of Canada balsam.

37 5,!,36— December ?7, 1867. S. M. AI^LEN. Recovering and utilizing waste nibber.
Disintegrated rubber waste is treated in a mixture of nonvolatile oil, asphalt,
resin, and sulphur, and heated until the mass is devulcanized, and the fiber
converted into gelatine.

378,395— February 21, 1S8S. S. HEIMANN. Process of treating peat.

A vulcanized mixture of dry pulverized "peat, caoutchouc and sulphur, with
or without plaster of pans.

330,993— April 10, 1888. G. W. COOPER. Compound oil dressing for rubber belts.
To a mixture of 8 pounds of crude rubber, one-half gallon oil of turpentine,
1 pound oil of lemon-grass, 1 pound of citronelle, and 6 ounces gum arable,
there is added 8 gallons of light pressed lish oil, and cooked for eight hours;
after cooling there is added the condensed product of 4 gallons of linseed oil
boiled down to 2i gallons, and the composition is cooked for six hours.

383,098— May 22, 1888. D. BROOKS, Jr. Coreringfor electric wires and cables.

Electric wires are first covered with a fibronw tape saturated with an insulat-
ing compound, then with a plastic rubber preparation with interlpng canvas
wrappings and powdered sulphur, and then subjected to heat to vulcanize the
rubber.

38S,1S7—May 22, 1888. W. B. McGARVEY. Composititmfor converting india rub-
ber or its compounds into hardened rvbber.
A mixture of oxide of iron and petroleum or rocky oil is incorporated with

pur^; rubber or any of its compounds, and the mass fused and subjected to

pressure.

391,927— October SO, 1888. J. A. TITZEL. Rubber compound or mixture.

Composed of gilsonite asphaltum. 90 pounds; vulcanized rubber (scrap or
waste), 130 pounds; manganated linseed oil, 3i to 7 gallons: spirits of turpen-
tine, 9 gallons; deodorized petroleum naphtha, 9 gallons; ana powdered sul-
phur, 10 to 15 pounds; for use as a paint, baking-japan, or coating.

393,838^December U, 1888. \\. KIEL. Vulcanized plastic compound.

A vulcanized compound of pumice stone, india rubber, and sulphur, with or
without oil or beeswax, the pumice stone being from one to five limes the
weight of the crude rubber.

395,9S7—January 8, 1889. N. C. MITCHELL. Process of recm^ering rubber from

waste.

Rubber waste is immersed in a reclaiming solution containing for each 100
pounds of waste about 15 to 25 pounds of hydrochloric acid, or its specified sub-
stitute, in excess of the Quantity requisite to combine with the decomposable
mineral compounds, and heated in a close vessel under pressure to about 240° F.

396,77 U—January 29. 1889. A. SOMMER. Paint-oH.
A solution in hydrocarbons of the sulpho-chlorinated marine-animal oils.

1^1,269— April 9, 1889. F. GREENING. Process of productimt of material as substi-
tute for india-rubber, etc.

Fibrous material is steeped or saturated with a mixture of sulphuric acid and

nitrate of potash— 3 parts of the former to 2 parts of the latter by weight

washed, and then subjected to a bath of liquid carbonic acid or carbonic-acid
gas and dried. The converted fiber is then treated with a suitable solvent, as a
distillate composed of a mixture of methylated alcohol, resin, or colophony,
gum benzoin or benjamin, castor oil. and light hydrocarbon.

Un Ml— 'September 17, 188!f. C. A. A. H. SIEBERT. Substitute for gutta-percha.

A mixture of 1 part of asphaltum, one-fourth to 1 part of balsam of sulphur,
andup to one-half part of an ea.sily-melting solid hydrocarbon, such as paraffin.

A1S,26&— October 8, 1889. W. KIEL. Vulcanized plastic compound.
Wood is used as a constituent part of a vulcanizable compound.

Ut,t65— October 8,.18S9. W. KIEL. Process of manufacturing vulcanized plastic
compound.

Wood is Koaken in oil and subsequently combined by vulcanizing with sul-
phur and crude rubber.

Ult.X66— October 8, 1889. W. KIEL. Process of manufacturing vulcanized plastic
compounds.

Wood and sulphur are vulcanized and the product commingled with sulphur
and crude rubber and vulcanized.

U2,S67— October 8, 1889. W. KIEL. Process of manufacturing inUeanized plastic

compounds.

Wood is mixed with crude rubber dissolved by any solvent, and the product
combined with sulphur oil, and beeswax, with or without crude rubber, and
vulcanized.

U2, 268— October 8,1889. W. KIEL. Proce.-is of manufacturing vulcanized plastic

compounds.

A mixture of wood, sulphur, oil, and crude rubber is vulcanized to a hard
state, the product pulverized and combined with sulphur, oil, and crude rub-
ber, ready for vulcanization.

U2.269— October 8, 1889. W. KIEL. Process of manufacturing imlcanized plastic

compounds.

A mixture of wood, sulphur, and oil, or other commingHng vulcanizable sub-
stance, is vulcanized and the product subsequently combined with crude rubber
by vulcanization.

U8.0UU— December 2lt, 1889. N. C. MITCHELL. Art of restoring rubber.

Rubber stock is subjected to the action of live steam in a close vessel; air Is
drawn through the mass to remove surplus moisture, and finally the rubber is
rolled while in a moist condition, until dry.

1,18,208— December 31, 1889. A. E. MEUNUEZ. Insulating and waterproofing

composition.

A composition consisting of shoemaker's wax, gutta-percha with or without
india-rubber, a suitable solvent, such as chloroform, bisulphuret of carbon, and
japan; to which may be added a hardening wax, such as beeswax or paraffin
wax.

kl9, 697— January 21, 1890. N. C. MITCHELL. Process of reclaiming rubber from

waste rubber goods.

F^rst. the stock is ground; second, particles of- iron are eliminated by mag-
netic attraction; third, the fiber is separated from the rubber; fourth, it is
washed with water to remove soluble matter; fifth, it is sifted to separate raw
sand and other fine particles; sixth, the mass is acted on with a stream of water
to float off the rubber from the heavier foreign substances; and finally, it is
devulcanized and sheeted.

lt20,6IS— February U, 1890. J. B. WILLIAMS. Insuhding compound.

A compound of india-rubber, say 40 parts; paraffine. preferably that obtained
from ozocerite or mineral wax, 15 parts; a resinous body, as shellac. 40 parts;
and sulphur, 5 parts; with or without silica or bituminous matter, produced by
dissolving the india-rubber in a volatile solvent, dissolving the paraffine in the
india-rubber solution, distilling therefrom the volatile solvent, and then incor-
porating therewith the remaining ingredients.

U20, 820— February h, 1890. N. C. MITCHELL. Process of restoring rubber.

Rubber, after reduction to small pieces, is mixed with heavy oil and sulphide
of calcium, then subjected to the action of steam until devuleanization is com-
pleted, when air is drawn through the mass before its removal from the
devulcanizer.

h33,071— March 11,1890. N.C. MITCHELL. Production of restored or devulcanized

rubber.

The rubber is devulcanized by the action of live steam, then while the rubber
is yet moist it is rolled until reduced to a powder, and then dried, at the same
time agitating it to preserve the powdery condition.

!,28,5Ult—May 20, 1890. IZ. ANDREWS. Composition of matter for use in the me-

cktniicart^.

Finely ground or comminuted leatheroid or parchmentized paper mixed
with rubber in proportions varying from 40 to 90 per cent of the former to tiO
to 10 per cent of the latter, and vulcanized.

lJo,958—Jun€ 21,, 1890. W. KIEL. Vulcanized plastic compound.

A hard vulcanized plastic compound, consisting of crude rubber, sulphur, and
mineral oil, as kerosene; the sulphur being in proportion of not less than
approximately 80 per cent of the rubber by weight.

1,30,959— June 21,. 1890. W. KIEL. Process of manufacturing vulcanized plastic
compounds.

A mixture of sulphur and rubber, with or without oil — the sulphur being in
the proportion of not less than about 80 per cent of the rubber by weight— is
vulcanized with an initial temperature of not less than about 300° F, and for
stated periods of time.

m, 10!,- July 1. 1S90. J. H. CHEEVER. Protective covering for electric cables.

A compound of U parts of rubber, 9 parts of plumbago. 1* parts of asbestos,
and 2 parts of sulphur; it is vulcanized after application to a conductor.

m,895— August 5, 1890. J. FOTTRELL. Insulating material.

A mixture of india-rubber and aluminium oleate, say in equal parts by
weight. It is susceptible of vulcanization.

1,38,313— October U, 1890. O. A. ENHOLM. Composition for cells or retaining

vessels.

A composition of asbestos, mineral wax, and gutta-percha {No. 438,311 with
the omission of the hardening medium, shellac).

i,S3,595— October Ik, 1890. W. H. ALLEN AND C. LOVELL. Rubber compound.
A plastic compound composed of rubber, sulphur, and lithargite (pulverized
calcined magnesic silicate).

!,52,IS9—May 19, 1891. R. A. LOEWENTHAL. Production of reclaimed rubber.
The fiber is decomposed and eliminated from the rubber waste, which is then
partially dried and reduced to a fine powder before devuleanization.

1,52,760— May 19, 1891. F. SALATHfi. Cmnposition of matter for insulating pur-
poses.

A composition consisting of the hydrocarbon product of No. 452,764. with
sulphur, with or without the addition of india-rtibber, gutta-percha, or oxi-
dized linseed oil. It is subjected to a heat of from 121° to 162° C.

1,52,765— May 19, 1891. F. SALATHE. Compositio-n of matter for insulating pur-
poses.

A composition of gutta-percha, gum shellac, and a new hvdroearbon prod-
uct, a resinoid hydrocarbon of the C iqH lo series.

m,W5— ./une 16, 1891. N. C, MITCHELL. Production of waste rubber goods.

The devulcanized rubber is impregnated with moisture and kept wet during
the rolling or pressing process.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CilEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

267

kH.U<»-J<iM ttS. mi. 0. W. MELVILLE. nmpmiUonx/maWr.

A viili-iiniji'il mUtiiriMif Hne I'Hrii riiblHT, iK) inTi'fnliim; tlowcm of mlphiir,
fi per cell tu 111: c.xlde "I iimlinony. M per ceiitiiiii: iiml iiniKiieKlit. 'JO rwreentiiiii
It will resbl 11 hlifli lieat, and wUlislaiiil the Betlim of imll-waier. KreiUH.', or oil.

Ui,iiS—Jmt S3, 1S9I. A. W. 8PERRY. (>«m;«,«nrf /or Ute manufaelurr ,if inm-
ttUorif, pnckinijn, etc.

A TOuinound of 8 pound.i of mineral wool. 11 poundi of rubber and Unwed
oil combined, and .1 i>(>und.i of oxide of nine.

UyiA'tl—Aiiiiiiatm, is'jt. .]. L. MAKMAI'O. InKuMiiiii rompnuiid.

To n nii.xtiire of 1 part of calclne<l ll.xlvliiled hitiisoriiil enrtli, ii third of 1 part
of pulverized tale or soiip.stone. one lliirtv so<()iid imrl each of lampblack piil-
verlzeii sulphur and lllliarKe, one-»lxleeiith j>art of pulverlzi'd rcsln. and one
slxt.vfnnrth part of sllicnle of soda in soliiljon, there l.s added i'.! part.s of riibln'r
dlswilved in benzine or naphtha, one-llfth jairt of bisulphide of carbon, and
onc-tlft|i part of llr lialHaiu.

iSOJM—OcMM-r e. 1K9I. E. THOMSON. (hmpmUtnn Jur tntutntlng material.

A mixture of asbestos, rubber, and soapstone, say 15 to 25 per cent of rubber
and .'i 10 l^ per cent of soapstone, molded In a heated stjitc with great prcs.iure.

mJ.i^iO—Junuari/ se. I,S!«. D. H. PIFFARl). Omtpomlimi of matter tnr inruUtlimi
purpuMH.

A mixture of 5 parts of rubber, 24 parts of resin, and 26 parts of plaster ot
pari.«; the rubber and resin are first mixed and heated until the readily vola-
tlli/able parts are driven ofl.

4<W,6'.'7— /Vdrimn/ », /««. A. I. RATH. Manufacture qf india riililier.
A composition consisting of India rubber mixed with finely-reduced silk fiber.

mi.KXf— January a, 1S93. J. M. RAYMOND. ProeesB o/ trratitw vulcanised rub-
tKr to rendfr it adhfuiiv.

Vulcanized rubber first soaked in benzine or a substance having an analagous
action to open the ]x>res. then immersed In a s<ilution of p<>ta.<4sium |>ernianga-
nale to secure superhcial desulphurization, and again treated with benzine. In
certain cases, to give temicitv, before the last-named operation, it may be given
a bath of acetic acid or pyroligenous acid.

UtS.y.'i'— April 18, 1893. D. RIGOLE. Process of and apparattu for the extraction
ofi/uHa-pcrchafrom the leaves and twigs of the gutta-percha tree.
The condensed vapors of a solvent are passed through a mass of the leaves

and twigs, thereby dissolving the gum; the solvent with gum In solution iscon-

veyed away, and heated to vaporize the solvent and the vapors condensed for

reu.se.

Sm.neo— November lU, 1893. P. C. BEIERSDORF, Process of treating sruUa-percha
or balata.

To obtain gutta-percha or balata ot uniform qualities, a certain quantity la
deprive<l of the whole ot its resinous contents by subjecting it to the action of
a .solvent of said contents, and then there is mixed with the so-deprived quan-
tity a iiroper quantity of gutta-percha or balata, which is richer In resinous
matter than the quality de-sired.

SlO.S.'iS— December 19, 1S9S. J. BURBRIDGE. Procsss of produeinq variegated
rubber.

Variegated sheets are formed by twisting strips of consolidated layers of dif-
ferent colored compounds, making up the twisted strips into rings or cylinders,
and cutting shavings oi sheets before or after vulcanization.

S1S,0.'.6— April 10, 189/,. J. M. RAYMOND. Composition of matter for vuleanixing

rubber.

It consists of benzene, or its derivatives, 30 to 50 parts In weight; camphor, 2
to 5 f>arts; and chloride ot sulphur, 1 to 2 parts; with or without oleic acid, 1 to
2 parts.

5is..'ii7— April «, lS9i. R. HUTCHISON. Gutta-pereha or rubber compound.

A composition consisting of gutta-percha or rubber or mixtures thereof and
wool cholesterine.

6i0.196—itay a. 1891,. J. THOMSON. Methoil of manufacturing hard rubber

articles.

The crude compound is subjected to combined heat and pressure in a mold
until the plastic compound assumes the form of the mold cavity, when the
pres-iurc is wholly or partially removed, allowing the material to expand while
subjected to heat but not preis^ure, and then cooling under these conditions.

5ii,Sll—July 3, 1891,. A. A. BLANDY. Process of and composition for manufac-
turing substitutes for itidia rubtter, etc.

.\ composition consisting oi a drying oil, as lin.seed oil. a solvent tor the same,
such as carbon bisulphide, sulphur chloride, asphalt, rubber, and sulphur, with
or without a metallic oxide, such as lime. It is formed by mixing together the
drying oil, solvent, and sulphur chloride, gently heating the mixture, then
adding the asphalt and heating the product, and then incorporating rubber
anil .sulphur, and tlnally vulcanizing.

6S5,0S6— August H8, 1891,. J. PATTIGLER. Elastic or plastic composition .

A composition consisting ot vegetable or mineral oil, caoutchouc, zluk white,
soluble glass, minium, and asbestos.

Si8,tei,— October 30, 1891,. H. TRAUN. Process of vulcanizing hard rubber articles.
Pulverized luelallic aluminum, or an alloy ot aluminum, with tin, cadmium,
or nickel, is added to the soft rubber before vulcanization, it Increases the
heat-conducting power of the rubber and secures uniform vulcanization.

6i9,'!SO— November *7, 1891,. W. GRISCOM, JB. Hard, vulcanized compound.

It is composed of candle tar as a vulcanizable adhesive element, sulphur,
petroleum residuum, and finely divided solid matter.

M8,l!,7— April S3, 1895. C. BARUS. Process of manufacturing vulcanized rubber.
Rubber, at any stage ot vulcanization. Is impregnated with carbon disulphide
( with or without sulphur) and the mass subjected to the action of lieat (which
never exceeds '200° C.) in a hermetically closed vessel until it is melted down to
a homogeneous mass.

Sii.aSi—Augurt SO, 1895. H. E. SilRliLLAS. Process of extracting and purifying

gutta-percha.

The parts of the tree are treated with an alkali or its carbonates; the residue
then ireaie<l with dilute sulphuric acid: next the residue is spread out Into
sheets, and the sheets treated first witii a stream of ammoniacol copper liquid,
and afterwards with a current of carbonic-acid gas or hydrogen gas.

SiT.IIO-fklnbrr I, I.Hail. H. HKIMAN.V. Inmlatlnp rompnund.
.^° ■mixture of eqiiHl qiutnllties of pul verix<-<l ulmton and kI«m there Is nAitA
10 to 16 per cent of nibUT (the mixture rolled Into "tm.!. .in.l dl«>/.lv.d In b«n-
xlne), A |ier cent of castor oil and 211 p< : --oil.

and then 10 to l.')p<'rcent ofcellii
a wire It Is first given a etait of a

ifcelllllnld'l
inlxlii

■\nt

(ia.S/iS—.yorembrr It. IHIIf. R. S. PRATT ANK U. W. JUUSf p ,J

mnttrrfor compressed or molded artirUs.

It consists of asbestos and rublx-r. or other cementing Insulatiiiii «rii»l«nee,
and an Insulating natiiml lubricant, iia soapntooe.

Ml,S3i>—l)>,;:mlKr U), l.'iv.l. R. N. PKATT. OmpiMUm of mailer /<«• insulaltna
purjHtsrs.

A composition consisting of dense hard niblM-r, lamlnatnl mica, and (Ibroiu
asbestos, poKluced by dissolving rublwr and sulphur In naphtha, Incorporatlnc
therewith mica and aslawttM fit>ers. molding aii<l viileaiilzlng.

363,379— July 7. man. C. W. JEFFERSON. nxMe mica Insulating sheet.

The sheet consists of layers of mica scales and adhesive gutU-perctaa tlimie,
with or without fibrous layers, as of pajnT.

363.716— July 7, 1890. C. W. JEFFERSON. ElrrlririU insulating sheet.

A sheet formc<l of layers of asbestos and mica, or |juper, asbestos, mica and
paper, with adhesive gutta-percha tissue between any and every two of nid
layers.

B75,730— January 16. 1897. H. E. SfeRULLAS AND F. E. HOfRANT. Process

of extruding and purifyiug gutla-perrha.

The leaves or other [larts of gutta-percha plants are pulverized, the powder
dissolved in a hydrocarljon solvent, and the three principal eonstltuenta of gutta-
percha, viz— gutta-hydrocarbon, fluavil, and alban— then preclpluted by the
addition of acetone.

380,139— April 8. 1897. W. M0RI80N. OomposUion of matter for manufaeturing
bfittery cases, etc.

A composition ot a.sphaltum with or without a small quantity of gutta-
ircha, as much asbestos lus can lie absorbed, and a Utile sulphur; compounded
y melting the asphaltiim and adding the guttapercha, then intimately mix-
ing therewith the asbestos, spreailing out the mass on a hot surface and work-
ing, beating, and pounding, to drive out moisture and foreign suljstances;
dusting with sulphur and again l)eating, pounding, and working; the maai
being kept hot throughout the process; and tlnally forming into shape.

581,319— April S7, 1897. P. W. WIERD8MA AND J. Ki'IPERS. Substitute fin-
vulcanite, hard woods, etc., and process of manfacturing saau:.
The refuse remaining after the manufacture of potato flour is mixed with

water, passed through a sieve, washed, bleached, and dried, with or without

the addition of waterproofing material, ground into a powder, sifted, and

molded dry by great pressure.

mi,.939— June tt, 1897. C. V. PETRALUS. Rubber compound.

A rubber compound havln^in admixture with caoutchouc and sulphur, Bnely-
powdered native lead sulphide or galena, with or without lead oxide.

598.550— February 8, 1898. B. G. WORK. Processof treating rubber.

For the manipulation of raw vulcanizable india rubl)er in the formation of
covered articles in hollow shapes, tubes, etc., the rubber Is given a condition of
temporary inherent abnormal rigidity by freezing it.

599,69i— March 1, 1898. F. FENTON. Processof producing artifleial gutta-percha.
Tar or other pyroiigneous substance is mixed with an oxidizable vegetable
oil either in the raw state or more or less oxidized, and the product placed in a
bath of diluted nitric acid to form a nugma or tmse, which is then roasted.

601,091— March SS, 1898. P. L. CLARK. Processof devuleanizing rubber.

It Is saturated with a solvent ot rubber and sulphur adapted to vaporize at a
temperature below the melting or disorganizing point of rubber (such as gaso-
line) and maintained In such saturated condition bv the pressure of vapor of
such solvent while heating it in such vapor, to a temperature adequate to main-
tain the pre.s.sure therein, but lower than the melting or disorganizing point of
rubber, until dcvulcanization is effected.

601,823— A/n^ 5, 189S. O. B. DODGE. Leather ana rubber subMUute.

A compact sheet consisting of chemical wood fibers uniformly mixed with
and enveloped in a firmly adherent mass of cured rubber and pulverized male-
rial; produccl by drying chemical wikkI pulp, seisiniting the HIkts intoa floccu-
lent mass; mixing the fTocculent ma.ss with a mass of riiblK-r cement and a pul-
verized material, as chalk, lampblack, and sulphur; forming into shape; and
subjecting to a degree of heat wlilch is less than that usually employed for vul-
canization, preferably about i>5° to 105'* C.

6U,a6i— December 13, 1898. W. K. LEONARD. Process qf producing rubber sub-
stitutes and compositions of matter therefor.

A composition consisting of 76 per cent ot com oil. 21 per cent of snlphnr, and
3 per cent of parafiin wax, formed by subjecting the ma.s» to heat until the oil
is vulcanized or the process of vulcanization begins, about 310° F., then shutting
oflf the heat and allowing the processof vulcanization to continue until com-
plete and the mass cools.

615,8Si— December 13, 1898. W. L. LEONARD. Process iff producing rubber tub-

stitutes and compositions qf mailer Iherefur.

A rubber substitute consisting of a mixture of com oil, say W per cent, and
castor oil, 13 per cent, combined with a mixture of chloride of sulphur, naphtha,
and oxide of magnesia, say in relation to the entire mass of 21 per cent of chloride
of sulphur, 0.5 per cent of naphtha, and 1.5 per cent of oxide of magnesia; per-
centages by weight.

618,16i-January 24, JS99. T. CLARKE. Qmposilion (if matter for producbsg

enamel for reflxing dental plates qf artificial teeth.

It consists of U |>artsof dental rubber dissolved in machine oil and Kmtcd
with attar of roses: 5 parts of yellow gum shellac; 3 parts of phuter of parts col-
ored with caraiine; and one-twentieth part of pure Condy's Quid.

619,615— February II,, 1899. C. RATH. ComposUion qf matter.

It consists ot 76 fmrts of pure India mbber, 17 parts o( bran ot almonds, and
7 parts of calcined chalk, combined by kneading while the mbber is in aaoft,
plastic state: for rubber Implements for therapeutic treatment. It com blnea hard-
ness with elasticity, has a smooth, glossy surface, \a moderately porous, and
readily absorbs a lubricant.

268

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

611,060— March lU. 1899. E. GARNIER. Manu/acture of rubber or other gums.

Alum treated with a spiritous solution of a gum, as a solution of gum traga-
canth in benzol, is incorporated with rubber and the usual vulcanization dis-
pensed with.

et6,09i—May SO, 1899. J. C. PETMECKY. Rubber compound.

A viscous compound, for repairing pneumatic tires, etc., consisting of a mix-
ture of pure rubber dissolved ni a quick-drying solvent, as bisulphide of carbon,
ground and slightly vulcanized rubber, and cotton fiber cut to one-eighth to
one-sixteenth of an inch in length.

eS6,l,i9 — June 6, 1S99. P. C. BELL. Elastic compmmd.

A compound of vegetable oil, 59 parts; flower of sulphur, \h parts; liquid tar,
1 part: petroleum residue. 20 parts: and powdered talc, 5 parts. The petroleum
residue is heated to 112° F., the powdered talc and tar is mixed therewith, and
the vegetable oil then gradually added while maintaining the said temperature,
next raising the temperature to 200° F. and adding the flower of sulphur, and
finally raising the temperature to 310° F. and stirring until viscid.

6-27,689— June S7, IS99. C. HEINZERLING. Treatment of old or waste vulcanised

iiibber.

Waste rubber is dissolved by the action of anilin, toluidin, or xylidin, and the
solvent separated from the India rubber.

6S0,iSo— August 8, 1899. M. ZINGLER. Composition for treating decayed or other

rubber.

A solution for treating decayed or other rubber by long immersion, consisting
of 30 or 40 gallons of boiling water containing about 5 pounds of tartar emetic,
mixed afterwards with 7^ pounds of tannic acid and about 2J pounds of a
metallic sulphite salt such as calcium sulphite.

eSS.OS'i— August i9, 1899. C. REPIN. Process of treating india rubber, gutta-
percha, etc.

It consists in raising wood oil (expressed out of seeds of elaeococea vemicifera) ,
with which may be mixed a cheaper oil having greater density and lighter
color, to a suitable heat, as 2.')0° C, whereby the same will be coagulated; pul-
verizing the solidified oil and mixing with india rubber and the like.

6SS,lil— October 17, 1899. A. H. MARKS. Process of reclaiming rubber from vul-
canized rubber waste.
Finely ground rubber waste is submerged in a dilute alkaline solution in a

sealed vessel and subjected to a temperature of 344° to 370° F. for about twenty

hours

6ST,7T6—yovember 28, 1899. A. GENTZSCH. Plastic fell.

An intimate conglomeration of gutta-percha with shredded or macerated ani-
mal skins and hair.

65S,77S— December IS, 1899. A. E. J. V. J. THEILGAARD. Process of demUcaniz-

ing caoutchouc, india rubber, etc.

The comminuted vulcanized material is treated with a solution of sodium
sulphite— the amount being in proportion to the contained sulphur— under the
influence of heat, and then washed.

6S9,9S6— December 26, 1899. O. LUGO. Rubber substitute or artificial rubber.

It consists of sulphurized oil practically tree trom glycerine compounds.
Seventy-five per cent of the substitute may be mixed with rubber.

659,9S7— December S6, 1899. 0. LUGO, llanufaclure of mbber substitutes.

Process consists in subjecting sulphurized oil to hydrosaponiflcation until it
becomes liquid, then dehydrating the liquid vulcanite, adding sulphur, and
then heating the mass.

61,0,735 — January 9, 1900. P. C. BELL. White elastic compound.

It consists of vegetable oil, 65 parts; chloride of sulphur, 20 parts; mineral
matter, such as lime, ^ parts; and zinc oxide, 5 parts; and bisulphide of carbon,
5 parts. The vegetable oil is heated to 80° F., the chloride of sulphur and bisul-
phide of carbon added at 60° F., the mass stirred until it foams and kept in agi-
tation until the maximum bulk is reached, then the mass is broken, the mineral
matter added, whereupon it hardens, when the product is pulverized and
bleached.

6U!,76U— February 6, 1900. A. E. J. V. J. THEILGAARD. Process of devulcaniz-

ing caoutchouc, india rubber, etc.

The comminuted vulcanized rubber is treated with a cyanide solution (potas-
sium cyanide) in proportion to the amount of contained sulphur, the tempera-
ture being eventually raised; the material is then washed and dried.

eUil. 811,— February 6, 1900. R. CO WEN. Process of cleaning rubber.

Rubber is reduced to a plastic condition by heating, and then strained under
pressure to remove foreign materials.

ei,B,SSl— March IS, 1900. W. PRAMPOLINI. Composition of matter.

As a substitute for india rubber, the gummy matter of the shrub Synantheroeas
Mexicanas (known also by the Indian names of "Tule," " Copalin," "Terba del
Negro." "Guayle," " Jiguhite," and "Hule"), combined with the residual oil
of a volatile hydrocarbon solvent.

61,7 ,112— April 10, 1900. J. J. PEARSON. Composition ofcorkand rubber for boot-
heels, etc.

An intimate mixture of cork and rubber, the cork being held under great
compression in the rubber.

651,61,0— June IS, 1900. H. L. RUS.SEGUE. Elastic waterproof composition.

A composition of balata and vegetable fiber— a sheet of balata is united with
dry vegetable fiber by pressure.

651,58S— June 1-2, 1900. H.SCHNEIDER. SubstUute for gutta-percha.

A composition formed of .).5 per cent of asphalt tar, 40 per cent of resin, 10 per
cent of spirits of turpentine, and 6 per cent of linseed oil.

6S1,76S—June 12, 'l900. B. C. FOWLKES. Dental compound.

The compound comprises a solvent, vehicle, and drying constituents, as
carbon bisulphide, 2 ounces; benzin, 1 dram; and chloroform, 1 dram; with
black dental rubber, one-eighth of an ounce; and powdered aluminum, IJ
ounces.

CASEIN PLASTICS.

8S,710~f^dmiary 9, 1869. J. & W. THIEM. Improved composition for moldings.
A mixture of sawdust, 4 pints; milk curd, 1 pint; slaked lime, one-third of a
pint; and cotton, 1 ounce, more or less.

15S,9S9— August 11, 1871,. J. FRAUENBERGER. Improvement in artificial ivory,

corals, etc.

A composition made of casein 2 parts, heated in a closed vessel on a water
bath and then boiled under suitable heat with 1 part of a varnish-like solution
of copal in concentrated liquid ammonia and alcohol.

169,055— October 19, 1875. J. G. W. STEFFENS. Improvement in compositions for

ornaments.

A composition of curd, alkali, and resinous matter; fixed by steeping in whey
or milk before pressing, and in cold water containing oil of vitriol after pressure.

18S,li31— September 19. 1S76. J. FRAUENBERGER. Improvemeni. in compositions

and processes for making artificial coral, ivory, etc.

Casein is mixed with sal soda and waterand dissolved under the action of heat;
the oily matter is removed; and after cooling and coloring, acetic acid is added,
and tlie resulting pasty, gummy mass is freed from moisture by pressure and
evaporation.

SOT, 17 9— October 28, 188i. E. E. CHILDS. Preparation of casein aiid of artickn

made therefrom.

Casein prepared from milk curd or cheese is worked or kneaded in water at
or near the boiling point until it reaches a tough and glutinous consistency.

307,269— October 38, 1881,. E. E. CHILDS. Preparation of casein and of articles

made therefrom.

Casein is prepared from milk curd, having washed or eliminated from it
fattv and other objectionable matters, by working or kneading the curd in its
naturally saturated condition, sufficient water of saturation being retained to
admit of the working, at a temperature below the boiling point of water, until
it reaches a tough and glutinous consistency.

S5S,697— December 7, 1SS6. L. R. MESTANIZ. Making artificial bone, ebony, marble,

etc.

Skim milk is treated with salt, caustic soda, terra alba, hydrochloric, nitric,
and sulphuric acids, and coloring matter, or with an alum solution and glycer-
ine in lieu of a mixture of hydrochloric and nitric acids. Pot cheese may be
used as the base, with borax in place of caustic soda. ,

610,626— September IS, 1898. P. H. HENSEN. Composition containing casein for

electric insulating or other purposes.

A composition consisting mainly of casein, india rubber, and asphalt, sub-
jected to pressure in a hot mold.

632,1,08— September 5, 1S99. W. A. HALL. Process of producing casein.
See Group XVIII, Fine Chemicals, Proteids.

61,6,81,1,— Apra S, 1900. W. KRISCHE AND A. SPITTELER. Process ofmamifac-

tiiring ivater-resisting products from casein.

Soluble casein is rendered insoluble by the action of acids or salts, as by dis-
solving casein in water containing 5 per cent of sodium carbonate and coagulat-
ing bv gradually adding a weak solution of lead acetate, and is then treated
with formaldehyde, either while wet or after it has been dried.

61,9,690— May 15, 1900. W. A. HALL. Solid casein.

Solid homogeneous casein produced byhydrating the casein bygrinding and
thoroughly agitating the same in water so that the water is beaten into every
cell thereof, thus forming a thin pulp, and then draining and drying the product
and permitting the same to shrink together.

66S,Ul,l,— November 27, 1900. C.JUNG. Insulating composilimi.

A mixture, .say, of equal parts of crude caoutchouc and casein, with a minor
quantity of a resin, is vulcanized.

OTHER PLASTICS.

3,698— May 25, 18U. E. DEUTSCH. Improvement in walerproof cements, etc.

Bitumen, asphaltum, and like material is distilled, the residuum cooled and
used as a base to mix with various ingredients as protoxide of lead, siccative oil,
resin, wax, sulphur, etc., to form diflferent coating and protecting products.

I,,S6S— .January 23, 181,6. C. BRAN WHITE. Improvement in compositions for mak-
ing iiandles, molds, etc.

Half a pound of starch in one pint of cold water is added to one quart of boiling
water and well mixed, then allowed to cool, when finely sifted dry mahogany
sawdust (or wood ashes or whitening) is mixed therewith to form a dough.

17,91,9— August A, 1857. W. M. WELLING. Improvement in factitious ivory.

A mixture of shellac, ivory dust, and camphor, with pigments, as impalpable
white, vermilion, etc., according to the color, mixed and heated, preferably by
steam under pressure, to 115° to 138° C.

19,778— March so. 1858. J. BURROWS HYDE. Improvement in conqmsUiom for

coating telegraph wires.

A composition formed by mixing 1 part of boiled linseed, cotton seed, or
resin oil with 8 parts of asphaltum, the latter to be melted and the oil gradually
stirred in.

1,5,518— December SO, 1861,. I. N. PEIRCE. Improved composition for crayons.

A compound, using kaolin as the base, as kaolin 48 parts, calcined plaster of
paris 16 parts, white glue 1 part, and water.

50,658— October 21,, 1865.
tablets.

H. J. GRISWOLD. Improved transparent coniposiiion/or

A coating formed of 5 pounds of chemically prepared soapstone incorporated
with 18 pounds of white shellac varnish is applied to a card or other foundation.

51,009— Novariber th 1865. R. BORCHERDT AND H. BERGMAN. Improved

com-posiiivn Jor the manufacture of toys.

A mixture of glue, 5 pounds; sugar or honey, 10 pounds: glycerine. 2^ pounds,
and Perry's white, 3 pounds.

60, 98U~ January 1, 1867. H. WURTZ. Improved composition of glue or gelatine,

and other materials, called durogd.

A combination of bichromate of potash with glue or gelatine, as solutions of
250 parts of glue with 5 parts of bichromate of potash, heated together.

65,087— March 19, 1867. A. PELLETIER. Improved composition for coating wood,

cloth, Tnetais, and for forming various articles.

The compound consists of vegetable fiber, soapstone, silicate of soda, red
lead, and litharge. It is made impervious to water when coated by treatment
with diluted muriatic acid, 1 part acid and 3 parts water.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

269

tl.SlO—Sofrmber 19. im?. A. I'KLI.ETIKR. Improwt etrntpmUion /or coating
itiwil, iron, pajxT, etc.

A mixture o( vej{et«blc fiber p«lp. hIUphIp of ncwln, anil wwiwtone, In about
t'lliial pmiwrtlons by welRbl. made Into sheets or lined n* n eoatiiiK: It may be
(jiveii ft eoat o( coal tar aiul covered with powdered utenllle.

Tt.!<9.1. Drcnnber 10. /,W7. K. O. I,OWRKY. Impronrmr.nl In eompotrillon of
malttr/or the mani(/aeture of iKUerprwif paptr and other artielrt.

A uew eompoimd. produced by treatliiit voKeUible (ilHTor pulp, or artlrl«
made therefrom, lirst, with solution of gelatine or animal sine, soap, and glyc-
erine or saeeharine water, and then with a suitable astrinitent mlutlon
which win render it insoluble In water, as of alum and salt In about equal pro-
portlt>ns,

::.:i7—Prcrmberil. tSST. A. B. ELY. (RriMue: 1.969— Jiinr 9, IS8S.) Imprmv.-

matt in hal Miffaiers.

Fiber and resin are mixed and rolled, pressed or molded into form, or felted
and woven fabrlcn are saturated with gums or analogous sutwianees, and
heated and pressed in molds.

:6.77s— April 74, ims. H. W. JOHNS. Improved compound /or roofing and
other purposeg.

The I'ombination of asbestos with plsments. oleaginous or resinous matters or
varnishes, or spirits, or ground or powdered minerals, or rubber.

77.9SS—.Vay tS. I8S8. W. M. WELLING. {Reissue: .\9r,0—June SO, Wi.) Im-
provement in artificial ivory.
.\ mixture of shellac 16 parts, camphor 1 part, and talc 16 parts, all by weight:

mi.Ted, heated, ground and molded while in a heated state.

77.991- May 19. ises. R. O. LOWREY. Improved platlic compound /or roofing

and lither pttrposes.

Vegetable fiber, with or without the addition of sand. clay, or similar sub-
stances, is mixed with silieate of soda, and after rolling, pressing, or molding,
the article is treated with a solution of chloride of calcium: it may be saturated
therewith, and, when hard enough to handle, treated in a hot solution,

79.791, — July 7. Xxes. S. WHITMARSH. Imprnred composition /or /arming moulded

ami I'ttated articles.

.K composition of bloo<i with asbestos or other mineral or earthy matter,
mixed or ground together and exposed to a temperature of 176° C. to give It a
hard and waterproof character.

sa.OlS—Decnnber IS. 186S. J. M. MERRICK, Jr. Improved material /or the
man u/acture o/ boxes, jncture /rames. buttons, insulators, inkstands, and other
articles.
Powder of silica chemically prepared or in the form of diatomaceous deposits

or infusorial earth is mixed with gum shellac or other gums.

SS.O.V— December SS. ISm. C. E. BONNET. Improved composition /or ornamental

mouldings.

One-fourth of a pound of paper pulp is added to a solution of 2 pounds of
glue in 5 pints of water, then a mixture of zinc white or white lead and 1 gill
of linseed oil, and then sufficient Whiting to form a tough dough.

S.'i.^m— March m. 1S69. R.W.RUSSELL. Improved fibrosis composition, slab and

panel for roo/s. floors, walls, tanks, and /or other purposes.

Disintegrated cane fiber is charged with or mixed with bitumen and formed
into slabs, sheets, etc.

S9.100— April SO, 1S69. W. M. WELLING. Improved elastic eomposUton to imi-
tate ivory and similar materials.

.\n elastic compound is formed by a mixture of 1 pound of shellac, and,
say. 3 ounces ol India rubber: with this base there may be mixed gum-
camphor, kaoline, ivory dust, bone dust, or dust of holly, satin, or other woods.

S9.5S1 .ipril f7, 1S69. W. M. WELLING. Improved compofUion /or artificial
ivory.

A mixture of kaolin. 2 parts, and shellac, 1 part, with or without a small
portion of gumcamphor. The mixture is passed through heated rolls and
molded while warm.

91.090— June S, 1889. W. COMPTON. Improved composition-crayon.

A mixture of about 6 pounds paris white, 3J ounces starch, 3 ounces of soap,
and from one-half to 2J ounces of gum or glue.

91.303— July S, 1869. G. F. GOETZE. Improved papier-macht compound.

.\ mixture of paper piilp 5 parts, glue 5 parts, turpentine 2 parts, oil 2 parts,
flour 4 parts, and whiting to .suit; forming a petrified compound,

99. 3.'i.i— February 1. 1870. G. SCHLUETER. Improvement in compositions /or

molding /rom plaster o/ paris.

Dry pulverized gum is mixed with dry plaster and coloring matter, after
which water is added.

Wl.lOl— March 23, 1870. J. R. COLE. Improved composition /or the manv/adure o/

tottacco pipes, stems, and cigar holders.

Paper pulp is mixed with a solution of alum or other salts that will render it
incombustible, and molded.

ni.l52—Sorember II. 1S71. M. W. BROWN. Improvement in compotUion hop-
pers/or vessels.
A mixture of 30 parts of glycerine and 40 parts of gelatine, with or without 4

parts of an alkaline solution of 10° Baum(5.

ltl.963— January iS, 1371. C. H. POND. Improvement in insulating compounds

/or 1i legraphs, elc.

A mixture of coal tar, 1 part, and charcoal, or sawdust, tanbark, or other
nrganic body having fiber or structure, 2 parts. The woody matter may be
bilked or thoroughly kiln dried.

lii.i'n—.Varch 5. 187!. M.G. FARMER. Improvement in compounds /or innUat-

iny teh graph wires, etc.

A mixture of resin, 24 parts; beeswax, 16 parts; spermaceti. 8 parts; and oil,
1 part; for saturating porous insulators.

lS9.2li—July 16. 1872. A. K. EATON. Improvement in compounds of gelatine,

tannin, and cellulose.

A compound resulting from the chemical union of cellulose, tannin, and
gelatine: say, glue, H parts; tannin, 46 parts, in the form of catechu or any
of the crude tannin gums, and cellulose, ISO parts.

tU.Ht^—.lrplemtirr U, IH7.1. A. THIKLK. ImpronmrnI In nimpotUlim matllr.

A mixture of 40 partu of mnd, lu) porta nf chalk. |.'> parta of UII»w, and «
pnrliiof tar.

/U,«4«— AV/irmftrr /I, ;WS. J. I,. KENDALL. ImprorrmeM Im paper jmdwU.
Paper pulp and sjiongo la saturated with llnaeed oil and •iilijected to pramire.

Il,8,8t9— March ti. 1X71,. I. I. JACKSON. Impmvrmmi In eampotUlmu /or
printer^ inking roUrrt.

A mixture of glue, IS pounds, glycerine, 1« poanda: bonx, I pound: and
Japan, 1 pound.

m,9tO— March U, mi. A. WILKINSON. Improrrment in eompotltimu /or
coating trirgraph wiret.

A mixture In, say, the proportlona of white lead, 1 niund: Japan. I onnce:
pitch. 4 ounces; aheilac, 8 ounces; tallow, I ounce: naphtha, 1 ounce; and llnaeed
oil, 1 ounce.

Ii9,eis—Apra U, mu. D. O. and S. STAIQHT. Improrment in artOeial Iron,
/or piano keys and other articles. ,

Alabaster, gypsum, or other variety of sulphate of lime la treated with heat
and suhseqiient Immersion in white hard varnl.ih. olive oil. or other oleii«lnoiu,
fatty, or waxy matter, and then repeatedly Immersed in heated water or alum
water: the hardness being varied by the U8<! of the alum.

09,71,9— April n, IglL J. G. HALEY. Improvement In compound* /or amOer-
proo/ material.

A compound made of limesoap, prepare<l of hydraulic cement and lliueed
oil, mixed with sulphate of zinc, bisulphuret of carbon, alum, aabettm, and
clay.

150,191,— Apra tS, 1871. A. SCHMIDT. Improvement in compotUion moldingt.
A composition of ground tanbark, ground eggshells, and slacked lime, with
; an admixture of glue and linseed oil, is molded under a steam-heated dye with
a sheet of veneer for the face of the molding.

;«g.aS6— .S(p(«nh<T S8, 1S7S. F. B. DUFFEY. Improvement in plaMie compounds

/or making ornamental articles.

A mixture of Spanish whiting, 3 ponnds; white lead ground In oil, 1 pound:
coach varnish, 6 drams: dammar varnish, 6 drams; Japan drier, 3 drams, and
boiled Unseed oil, 10 ounces.

17 !,.Sg7— March 7, 1876. F. HICKMAN. Improvement in materials /or ehalr seaU,

backs, veneers, fioorings, etc.

Sawdust or fine shavings, saturated with dissolved glne or melted shellac. Is
spread upon a backing ofcloth or other material, and rolled or pressed before
it Is completely dry.

189,SS9— April 10, 1877. B. J. CLARKE. Improvement in crayons /or marking on
glass, etc.

A mixture of 6 ounces of beeswax, 7 ounces of suet, and I pound of dry color,
with half an iTunce of oil of cedar.

190.769— May !«, 1*77. A. KIESELE. Improvement in eompositions /or catting
\ ornamental /Iguret.

I A composition consisting of parafBn, I pound; stearine, 4 ounces; and pulver-
1 ized sugar, 12 ounces.

I 19t.77S—.July S. 1877. O. LONG AND P. H. DRAKE. Improvement in adhetivf

substances.

It consists of a solution of worn-out printers' inking rollers (composed of glue
and molasses, or glue, glycerine, and molasses) with the addition of tobacco to
t render it insect proof.

19S.tlS—July 17. 1877. H. BAYLE. Improvement in compotitiont /or molded
articles.

A compound consisting of 100 pounds of papler-mach^, 20 pounds of gum
arable, and 5 to 6 ounces of bronze powder.

198,881,— January 1, 1878. J. B. H AYDEN. Improvement in compotUion /or molded

articles.

Flexible threads or strips of wood cut with the grain and irregularly cro«8ed —
as excelsior — is saturated with glue and compacted under pressure.

tOl.067— March 5, 1878. J. W. SWARTS. Improvement in crayons.

Composed of glue, 8 parts, and an alkali, as a solution of cart>onate of soda.
1 part, boiled to a hard saponification of the mass: and 1 part of the same
mixed with 3 parts of parafBne wax and coloring matter.

!01,!83—.Warch IS, 1878. C. C. PARSONS. Improvement in compositions /or cray-
ons.
Composed of clay, fatty matter, resin, and coloring matter melted together.

as hard tallow, 4 parts; resin, 1 part; powdered clay. It parts, and lamp black,

one-half part.

tOl.flS— March 19. 1878. J. W. & C. M. HYATT. Improvement in silieeous mate-
rial to imitate ivory and similar tul>ttances. .

An alkaline silicate, as silicate of soda, is used to agglutinize a solid animal
tifflue. Comminuted bone, horn, or ivorv Is mixed with the silicate of the con-
sistency of sirup, and molded or rolled Into sheets and dried, or treated with
heat and pressure. The composition Is treated with calcium chloride to render
the silicate insoluble.

tOt.6S6—Apra tS. 1S78. W. H. DIBBLE. Improvement ra compotition /or mann-

/acturing molded articlet.

A dry pulverulent compoaltlon formed by Indurating and pulverizing blood
In combination with animal, vegetable, or mineral solids— about equal parts by
weight when dried

tO6,0O7—July 16, 1S78. G. R. EVANS. Improvement In noneonduetingeompoundt..
A Are-resisting and nonconducting compound, consisting of 3 or 4 parts of pul-
veriied petrifled wood. I part of mica, and 1 part of talc, with sulUcient clay or
other material to make a pasty mass.

tOS,0)6—Seplember 17. 1878. J. ROBLEY. Improrrment in manttfaeturt qffioor

doth.

A mixture of sawdust, ground woo<l. or other vegetable matter, with copal
varnish and dry paint or mineral coloring matter, spread on a canvas, textile,
or fibrous base.

270

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

109,5SS— October 29, 1S78. C. \V ALPU8KI. Imprmrmevt in the mamijacture oj col-
ored crayoiif.

A composition consisting of a suitable base, as kaolin, with starch and gelati-
nous matter combined with coloring matter; (the colors can be worked In a dry
state and fixed on paper with water).

ilO.iOi—yovcmber S6, 1878. A. KEMPENNER. Improvement in plastic composi-
tion/or the vianvjucture of aquarium frames, etc.
A mixture of sand, fire clay, coal tar, and asphaltum.

!U,7!i7 — May 27, 1879. A. KIESELE. Improvement in composUions for casting
omavientcU figures.
A mixt\ire of 5 parts of paraffin with 2 parts of starch.

S17.S60—JutyS, 1879. J. C. FRIEDRICHS. Improvement in compounds /or form-
ing letters, figures, or ornaments.
A mixture of one-half pound of umber, one-quarter pound of litharge, o

riunds of plasterofparis,,! pound of cla.v. one-quarter pound of terra-sienna,
pounds of boiled oil, 1 pound spirits of turpentine, and one-half pound of
Japan'drier.

;n,705—July S3, 1879. \V. F. NILES. Improvement in the manufacture of orna-
mental buttons from blood and other materials.
A compound formed of powdered blood and colored, lumped, powdered blood

with a gelatine or albumin substance, molded with pressure and heat.

S1S.5SS — August IS, 1879. J. B. KING. Improvement in composUions for walh a^id

ornaments.

.K mixture of 3 parts of clay; 1 part pulverized lava; 1 part dextrine or similar
gum: 1 part fibrous material, as cotton, paper, wool, orasbestos; 1 part ground
plumbago, and 1 part pulverized glass, with sufficient water to render the mass
plastic, with or without a small quantity of plaster of paris.

Sil.Si5 — Xovcmber IS, 1879. L. E. JANNIN. Improvement in composition for

stereotype molds.

A mold or matrix for forming stereotype plates is made of a cement com-
posed of protoxide of lead and glycerine.

Stl.SSl—Xovember IS, 1879. H. P. WEBB. Improvements in paints for filling the

seams of vessels.

A quick drying liquid-gum vehicle, composed of resin dis.solved in naphtha,
combined with an earthy base, as red oxide of iron.

SSS,S9S— January IS, 18S0. A. KRYZINSKI. Composition for covering moldings.
Composed of a solution of glue, 4 pounds; rye-flour, 8 pounds; and whiting,
190 pounds.

ilS.869— January t7, 1880. N. ULLM AN AND M. D. STILES. Crayon compound.
Formed of lampblack, 16 parts; alcohol (95 per cent), 48 parts; and Siberian
lead or graphite. 1 part; all by weight.

ttS.asO— January 37, 1880. J. BURBRIDGE, R. C. THORPE, AND T. OAKLEY.

Composition for elastic rollers.

Composed of sulphurized oil, fibrous material, and gum-resin or pitch; as from
3 J to 4i pounds of fibrous material added to U pounds of gum-resin and com-
bined with 6 pounds of sulphurized oil. The rollers are subjected to a heat of
about 150° C. for about three hours.

g35,sei— March 9. ISSO. O. F. WOODWARD. Composition of matter for making
. nuided articles of manufacture.

Gypsum and resin mixed together under heat — say in the proportion of 5
parts of the former to 4 of the latter.

S2.n.679— March 16, 1880. A. T. WOODWARD. Plastic compound.

A mixture of pulverized silica — such as flint, glass, or sand — and a mineral or
vegetable resin or pitch, with or without boiled linseed oil or other drying oil,
or turpentine, or benzine; impervious to water and suitable for insulating
purposes.

335,817— March 35, 1880. T.FLETCHER. ComposUion for filling leclh.

A paste composed of alumina pyrophosphate or phosphate triturated with
phosphoric or pvrophosphoric acid and mixed with a substance capable of com-
bining therewith and taking up excess of acid and solvent, as powdered hydrate
Of alumina, magnesia, or heavy oxide of lead.

ISe,5h7— April 13, 1880. J.L.POPE. Composition of matter.

A mass of pulverized cork mixed with a suitable binder (colored or not), with
or without any suitable substance susceptible of taking a polish, and solidified
by pressure.

336,583— April 30, 1880. J. B. ABRAHAMS. Plastic composition of matter for the
manufacture of jewelry and fancy articles.

One part of glue is dissolved in 2 parts of slightly acidulated water and mixed
with 1 part of resin or shellac liquefied by heat and the addition of turpentine,
when 4 parts of starch and a dilute acid is added with heating.

336,738— April 20, ISSO. T. FLETCHER. Composition for filling teeth.

A solution of phosphate of tin in phosphoric acid is combined with the pow-
dered product of a mixture of lime 1 part, and silica and alumina each 5 parts,
fused together.

337,391—May U, ISSO. E. L. ORMSBEE. Substance for mounting stuffed birds, etc.
A mixture of glue, sand or sawdust, and Marseilles green, in about equal pro-
portions; it forms an imitation of wood.

337,351— May 11, 1880. E. EVERHART. Composition for instdating telegraph

wires, coating jtietals, covering rf*ofs,andfor other purposes.

A mixture of 250 pounds of asphalt and 100 )>r>unds of resin, with 20 pounds
each of powdered charcoal and infusorial earth.

tt9.i91—June 39, ISSO. P. L. SYLVESTER. Manufacture of buttons from plastic

material.

An ornamental coatinij of tinsel, foil, brocade, or gold sand, combined with
shellac; produced bv mixing shellac and the tinsel, etc., with heat, then pul-
verizing, and sprinkling the surface of the mold with the powder.

339.01,— June 39, ISSO. p. L. SYLVESTER. Manufacture of buttons from plastic

material.

A plastic material composed of bleached shellac, I part, and mineral white
(carbonate of lime), 2 parts, without pigments.

331,51,0— AuguM 31,, 1880. J. COLLINS. Lining gas generators, acid chambers, and

fountainsfor mineral waters.

Powdered asphaltum with sufficient deodorized benzine to form a thick paste
is heated until the asphaltum is dissolved, and powdered plumbago added,
pound for pound.
331,736— August 31, 1880. J. TAY'LOR. Manufacture of fiexibk tubes.

A coating composition consisting of 4 ounces of a product, obtained by dissolv-
ing 1 ounce of alum with 1 pound of linseed oil and boiling, mixed with 1 pound
of molasses and 1 pound of gum arable.
335,909— December 38, 1880. G. F. SENTER. QympoMion from mineral wool for

journal bearings.

Three parts of mineral wool and 1 part of plumbago are mixed and ground
together and sufficient water glass added to form a paste, which is molded into
a compact mass with heavy pressure, dried, and dipped in melted paraffin or
other unctions material.

336,03U— December 38, ISSO. J. W. HYATT, C. S. LOCKWOOD, AND .7. H.

STEVENS. Factitous material to imitate ivory, horn, etc.

Bone dust is welded by heat and pressure, with or without the admixture of
a water repellant, as a gum solution, or an acid, as boracic acid, to facilitate
the welding.
336,1,80— January 11, 1881. S. BARR. Compound for manufacture of gas tubing.

A mixture of glue, 10 pounds; glycerine, 12 pounds; soap, 4 ounces; borax, 1
ounce; and copperas, three-fourths of an ounce; with sufficient water, using
heat, to form a paste.

337,569— Februarys, 1S81. H. B. MEECH. Dry-ground pulp.

The pulp of rags, jute, straw, or other wet-pulped vegetable fibers, is dried
and then ground or pulverized to a fine powder for admixture with varnishes,
gums, or oils.

338,980— March 15, ISSO. J. B. SPENCE. (Reissues: 9,983, 9.983, and 9,981,— Decem-
ber SO, ISSl.) Manufacture of metallic compounds from sulphur and sulphides.
"Spence's metal," composed of metallic sulphides, as sulphide of iron and
sulphide of copper, and sulphur; formed by pulverizing the sulphide and com-
bining it with fused sulphur.

SS9,W9— March 39, ISSl. W. A. WALLER AND J. P. HITCH. amposUim for

slating surfaces of blackboards.

A mixture of 1 pound of lampblack and 1 pound of gum arable in water with
8 pounds of Spanish white and 16 pounds of plaster of paris added.

339,1,66— March 39, ISSl. E. J. DE SMEDT. Insulating or nonconducting com-

pound.for electrical purjmses.

Telegraph wires and electrical conductors are insulated or covered with an
oxidized hydrocarbon obtained by treating coal tars and the heavy oils of
petroleum with an oxidizing agent.

359,951— April 13, 1881. W. M. GRAZE. IHaslic composition from paper-pulp far

fioors, brake-shoes, journals, etc.

A composition of matter, and articles made thereof, consisting of a mixture of
paper-pulp and metallic fillings (with or without a sizing of oil, resin, paraffin
or the like) solidified under pressure.

S!,S,75S—June 11,, 1881. C. CRABTREE. Composition to be used in making squibs

waterproof.

A mixtureof 1 pound of beeswax, 3 pounds of flowers of sulphur, 1 pint of alco-
hol and one-hau pound of gum shellac.

31,1,,331—July 13, 1881. J. C. SELLARS. Composition for molds and composition-
mold for forming concrete.

A lubricating binding material not affected by alkalis, such as paraffin, com-
bined with sand or charcoal.

2U, 1,86— July 19, ISSl. E. ROSENZI. Composition of matter for molded articles

to resnuble glass awl iron.

It consists of sand, 100 parts; coal ashes, 40 parts; lime (burned) , 10 parts; with
arsenic, magnesia, borax, and soda, in variable quantities, fused in a crucible and
cast.

31S, 391- August SO. ISSl. J. R. HOWELL. Composition of matter to be used in the
ornamnita'tion of moldings and picture frames and the manufacture of light hollow
ware, toys, trays, etc.
A mixture of 8 pounds of glue, 6 pounds of resin, 2 pounds of paper pulp, and

2quartsof linseed oil, thickened to a paste while hot by the addition of whiting.

21,7,797— October i, 1881. M.W.BROWN. Composition of matter.

A composition consisting of skin glue oi gelatine, water, glycorine, carbonate
of lime, and earth paint, to be applied to paper or fabrics to render them flex-
ible, tenacious, and resistant to wear.

2r,8,33l,— October 18, ISSI. H. W. JOHNS. Asbestos material and process of manu-
facturing the same.
Asbestos is reduced to fibers; formed into a bat, with or without wires or cords

placed therein; moistened, as with a glutinous or waterproofing solution; and

subjected to pressure.

350,257— Xovember 29, ISSl. O. O. KARSCH. Composition for artificial-wood

ornaments.

Ten pounds of glue dLssolved in 4 quarts of water is combined with 6 pounds
of resin dissolved in 1 quart of linseed oil with heat, and sifted whiting and
plaster of paris added and molded while warm and plastic.

251,1,73— December 27, 1S81. F. W. SCHROEDER. Instilating composition or com-
pound for coating electric and other wires or conductors.

A compound formed from 2 pounds of glue. 16 ounces of mastic, 14 ounces of
dextrine, 9 ounces of asbestos, 2i ounces of chrome-alum, one-fourth of an
ounce of chloride of iron, and 16 ounces of glyceiine, with or without the addi-
tion of 8 to 20 ounces of albumen.

351,1,71,—Deceniber 27, 1881. F. W. SCHROEDER. Insulating composition or com-
pound for coating electric and other wires or conductors.
The composition is like that of No. 251,473, with the omission of asbestos.

251,970— January 5, ISSS. J. TAYLOR. Coating and insulating wire for electrical

purposes.

A coating of benzoin is applied directly to the wire or outside of a fibrous
coating.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

271

f.l.l.'Wrt-AHriinri/ ?, I«W. T.GUILFORD, t'ompntilimforbutlont. rtc.

A niLxHirc of piilvcrltiKl lioni or hoof and ntcittlto, with or without coloring
piKmcnis.

».14.4«;— .VnrcA 7, JSS«. J. 1). CHEEVER. irafCTprw/compotfliem.

.\ composition, conslstlnir of short flhors, ns of Jiilp, ;» pounds; spent tnn Imrlc
powdered, 60 pounds: iiulverizinl pnKndltoornKiiMniit<iMt<', ;)0|i<iunds; powdered
red ehnik or red oxide of iron and elay. Ltl i«iunds; iind Hour sulphur. H [umuds.
mixed In n mill, with the addition of 10 ixiunds iif vivselino and 20 iMiunds of
enontehoue— the latter made niiscllile with eoal taror petroleum naphtha. Bur-
lap Im prepared to reeelve a eoalinir of the aliove hy apiilylUK to the same, by
hot ealenderlnf?, a eomposllion of Klue, yellow soap, and alum.

tiLSeL—ilarcli U. LVii. B. IIARKAS.S. i'fnufiV- eiimimimd.

For mnkhiK imitation wood objects, a mixture of 3 parts of paper pnip or cel-
lulose, ] part of starch, and '2 parts of Hour, boiled, and converted Into a tihrous
paste, is mixed with sawdust; or a mixture f>f '2 to 10 parts of cellulose, 6 to 30
parts of sawdust, 1 to .") parts of binding material— as dextrine, albumen, etc.—
1 to .S parl-H of fiour ana one-eighth to 2 parts uf clay, chalk, etc., lor backing
veneers,

tSr:937— April i. Ism. M. B. CHURCH, rinflic mfUcritt!.

For wall covering, a mixture of .S to 8 pounds of glue, with 1 to 1| pounds of
sulphate of zinc, and 100 pounds of plaster.

SS7,706-ifav9,lSSl. W. C. HORNE. Crauoii.

A luminous substance, such as a phosphorescent powder, is combined with a
ba.se or vehicle to form a paste which is molded and dried. It makes luminous
marks.

SSS.S^iS—.Vay SO, tSSi. V. BOREL. Inmilating material Jor ekctriml conducinn.
\ siccative oil. such as lin.seed oil. transformed by heat into a solid elastic
mass, with or without an admixture of a resinous matter, such as colophony.

iS9.S7S—Jum m. ISSi. C. 8. LOCKWOOD. Plastic compoHtion for the cores of

hilUard hatU, andjor other purposes.

Comminuted and desiccated glue, with or without glycerine, is welded and
agglutinated by heat and pressure.

i61.e;S—July SS. 1SS2. H. \V. morgan. Preparation oj whatebotte.

A solution of whalebone, formed by dissolving shavings, cuttings, etc., in an
alkali.

S6;.lil7—Amjuft S. ISSS. W.M.JACKSON. Cas-prooJ cement.

A compound of glycerine, 24 parts; gelatine, 1 part; and litharge or yellow
oxide of lead, 30 parts.

sei.771— September 19, ISSt. M.W.SAMUEL. Metboditfand means/or the produc-
tion oJjUjurei in reliej on variotts ttubstancea.

An adhesive plastic, consisting of 4.^ per cent of wax and 50 per cent of pow-
dered resin, combined with beat, to which 6 per cent of Venice turpentine is
added, with boiling.

tee,O.^S— October 17, 18Ht. J. J. SACHS. Production of materials for castings,

cements, lead pencUs, etc.

A composition consisting of stilphur and plumbago or other nonmetallic .stib-
etanccs or mixtures, in the proportion of 4 parts of the former to 3 parts of the
latter, or thereal)out.

266.1^3— October ii, ISSt. W. MATT. (Reissue: 10,SiS— June 19, 1883.) Artificial

ftonefor veneers, etc.

A mixture of glue, 6 pounds; resin, three-fourth of a pound; linseed oil, IJ
pounds; paper pulp, 1 pound; glycerine, one-fourth of a pound; and steatite or
its equivalent, and coloring pigments.

tm.OUS—yovember 1, 18Si. R. S. WARING. AND J. B. HYDE. (Reissue: 10,950—

July 3, 1.SS3. ) Insulalinff material for electric ttses.

An insulating compound composed of two or more of the heavier producta
arising from the redistillation of the residuum of petroleum, as obsldine tem-
pered with a softer residuum product to give flexibility.

seT.Oie—XofcmberT.lSSt. R. S. WARING. (Reissue: 10,3S1— July S, 18^.) Insu-

latintj compound fur electric wires.

A compound consisting of the liquid distillates of the residuum of petroleum
with resinous or bituminous substances, together with clay, chalk, pulp, or like
material.

271.1SO— January 13,1883. W. F. RIKEMAN. Composition for covering jyiano keys,

etc.

It consists of a mixture of gypsum, 60 parts; shellac, 30 parts; silica, 10 parts;
and ivory black, 10 parts.

i71,99U— February e. 1383. D. M. STEWARD. (Reissue: 10,3t^—June 19, 188S.)

Electrical insulator.

Steatite, in a natural block cut into the desired form, or in the form of powder,
is hardened or vulcanized by treating it with ammonia and muriatic acid and
then subjecting it to heat. The vulcanized powdered steatite is mixed with a
binding mateilal, as plaster of parls, and molded.

S7i,ess—.\fareh t7, 1883. J. F. MARTIN. Insulating compound for eledrieal work.
A mixture of marble dust, plaster of paris, and glue size; it Is formed Into
tubes.

S75.133— April 3, 1883. I. R. BLUMENBERG. IndettrueHblecompmmd for lining
and coaling tubes, cylinders, and other vessels, electric wires: also/or joint pticking,
taking impressions, making castings, molds.and ornaments, arid ornamental wort.
A compound of lampblack, about 4 per cent; asbestos, 20 per cent; Utbaigo,

45 per cent; and glycerine, 31 per cent.

ers,litt— April 10, 18SS. S. F. SHELBOURNE. Insulating compound for Oectrie

conductors.

A compound of parafflne and one or more of the heavier and separate distil-
lates pa-ssing over in the redistillation of the residuum of petroleum.

ns.yo!.— April 17, 1883. C. GRUNZWEIG AND P. HARTMANN. ArUfickU cork.
A composition formed of boiled starch and powdered cork.

t7a,607— May 1. 1883. G. J. LE.S.SER. Plastic and elastic composition for forming

aoJftic rolls, elastic pads, and for other usfjul purposes.

A compound of glue, 25 pounds; gelatine, 6 pounds; glucose, 25 pounds; extract
of lead, 1 pound; and glycerine, 15 pounds; formed by first forming a glue or

gelatine with the lead compound, and romblnlng nid rompnaixl with a cofn-
p<mnd of glue and glucow with the glycerine added.

«7«,W/— Jffij/ /. fWW. J, (i. S,\NI)KR.Mf>S rii0HUillng rlrelrteal eoiubulon.

A pulverulent mixture of nonfotiductlng metallic oxiito— M tb« •aqaloxhle
of Imn— and sulphur Is mixtxl with meltol bitumen.

t7tl.D»8~)tny 8. 1883. S. BARK. Oimpmind for coating gru-labine.

A mixturuof glucSOfiounds; glycerlnu, 30 pounds, and bichromate of polaab.
1} ounces.

177,707— May 13. ISM. P. E. OONOX. Manufacture of trad-pfnriU.

A iKmcll consisting of a marking core surrunnded by malerlal. as wo>i<l pulp,
presse<l around the core In a plastic nr semlUnld slate. (Claims lor the
apparatus. )

t78,iSI—May 19. 1883. 8. M. ALLEN. Material for rimjing purpose:

Powdered or pulped fiber Is mixed with heated asphalt and the paal« formcl
Into sheets, or applied to a web or becking of paper or other fabric.

t78,eS6—May i9, 1883. J. OREIVES. Electricnl tntulaling material.

A compound consisting of chalk and colophony, and containing from 40 to (0
percent of chalk.

t79,i9t—June It. 188g. A. MEUCCI AND T. DKNDI. llnstirpasU.

A composition consisting of gelatine or a sul)stjiiK-e containing gelatine. 2 to4
parts; fiber deprived of its mineral, gummy, and resinous sulMtances, one-fourth
to one-half part; an a<;id,asdllutemuriaticacid, I to2p«rts: starihoranalugous
substances, 1 to 2 parts; varnish, 1 to 2 parts; oxideof zlnc,6to)iparts; and terra-
alba, 2 to 4 parts.

t8l,999, July tU, 1883. J.B.HYDE. (Reissues: 10.UI3: lO.lfiU—Nooember e, ima.)
Insulating compound for electrical conductors and apparatus for compounding
and applying lite same.
A compound composed of petroleum or mineral oils combined under heat. In

aclosed vessel, with the har(I bituminous residuum from petroleum distillation.

tm,01l,—Augttsl7,l8H3. J.F.MARTIN. Compound for electric-wire insulators.
A compound of asphaltum and from 40 to GO per cent of fine marble dust.

t8S,0U,— August U, 1883. D.B.TURNER. Oamposition to insulaU, preserve, and

protect wire for electrical purposes.

A compound formed of 1 part by weight of castor oil, and 5 parts of the black
resinous substance obtained as a resi<luum of oil <llstillation, and known as
"Nubian pitch," "Nubian gum," and "<-olophony nlger."

tsa,l00— August li, 1883. H. R. BRISSETT AND J. HOWE. Vomposttlonfor coal-
ing and insulating underground wires.
A compf>sition of cottonseed oil. ,30 ounces; Venetian turpentine, 30 ounces;

resin. 18 ounces; asphaltum. :^9 ounces; steatite. 4« ounces; parafflne, 16 ounces;

pine tar, 12 ounces; sulphur, 174 ounces; and red lead, 15 oiinces.

iS3.5S6— August tl. 1883. J. W. STAN8BURY AND J. M. HEDRICK. Lining for

burial caskets, etc.

A compound composed of 3 pounds of alcohol. 4 pounds of white lead, 3
pounds of gum shellac, 1 pound of white glue, and plaster of paris.

183.793— A ugmt 28, 1883. C. S. LOCKWOOD. Plasiic material.

A Compound consisting of 8 pounds of powdered bone or similar material, 2
ounces of phosphate of ammonia or its elements, and 2 pounds of powdered
I shellac, may be subjected to pressure in heated molds or i ixed with a solvent
and mixing rolls. t

S83,79l,-Auinift !S, 1883. C. S. LOCKWOOD. Ptartic material.

Eight pounds of pulverized and desiccated l>one is mix . with 2 ounces of
phosphate of ammonia and subjected to pressure in heated molds.

t8S,796— August t.8, 1883. C. S. LOCKWOOD. Zincated bone.

Bone dust or like material is mixed with sulphate of zinc, the mixture sub-
mitted to a water l>ath, and then the free acid washed out to render the gelatine
insoluble.

t83,797— August 18. 1883. C. S. LOCKWOOD. PInstic material.

A mixture of tannate of Iron and l>one or horn dust is subjected to pressure
in a heated moid, as 8 parts of bone dust and 2 parts of tannate of iron, or a
mixture of 16 parts of bone dust, 4 parts of solifl extract of logwood, and 1 part
of sulphate of iron made into a lolutlon, and the moisture expelled.

tSlt,098— August IS, 1S8S. R. S. WARING. Insulating material and preparation of
the same.
An insulating material for lead-covered cables: produced by subjecting

a degree otheat above the vaiK>rizing point of water, to eliminate the latter and
the light and* easilv decomiMised nnxluets — approximate, 175^ C. — but l>elow

natural a.sphaltum, or the heavier distillates or residual products of petroleum to

■ ' . the I

,.p^ , -^ nnxluets — approximate, ny

the point at which destructive distillation or cracking begins.

lS7,3IS—Octobtr 13, 1883. C. J. V.\N DEPOELE. Insulating material.

A mixture of silicate of soda with earthy substances or metallic oxides, a*
zinc white or red lead; paper is saturated therewith.

t87,99i—Xoixmber e, 1883. U. ARMSTRONG AND J. A. LOUDON. Soilrr-cor-

ering.

Fibrous peat, separated or dlsinlegrated from the bulk of Its earthy matter.
Is mixed with cement as a covering for steam-pipes, N>ilers, etc.

tS8,llt—Kovembertl, 1883. W. MATT. ArilJIctat stone for reneert, molded attt-

cles. etc.

A compound consisting of glue, 10 pounds; asbestos. 10 pounds; linseed oil
Tarnish, one-half pound; colophony, one-half pound: glycerine, 1 pound:
turpentine, U pound; with steatite or kaolin and pigments.

l8$,tS7—Korembert7, 1883. L. EBERLE. CompoHtion for gOt molding:

A mixture of one-half pound each of stick-lac and sandarac, and one-eighth
pound each of galipot, gamtioge, and dragon's blood In alcohol.

t90,057—l)ecember II, 1883. J. BURROWS HYDE. Insulating eompomtd for dee-
trie conductors.

Mineral and coal-tar bitumens are melted an<1 combined with pettnlenm or
mineral oil. In coat Ingt bread -covere*! electric wires with an Insulating medium,
the c<*vering Is saturaleil with a volatile fluid, as crude pi'lroleum. before the
wire enters the heatc<l Insulating composition. The waste vapors CTolred are
stored in a sealed and floating holder and used for heating the furnace.

272

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

tgo.OSS— December 11. 1S8S. J. B. HYDE. InstUaling compound for electric con-
ductors and the process ofcompoundinr/ the same.

A compound ol (irv powdered peat with bituminous substances and hydrocar-
bon fluid added under heat; short lengths of vegetable fiber may be added to

the melted composition.

tao.SSS— December iS, 18SS. F. J. KALDENBERG. Manufacture of articles from
waste amber.
Articles made of piecesof amber and gum animft molded together: formed by

pulverizing the gum, mixing it with pieces of amber, and subjecting it to heat

and pressure.

t91,16l,— January 1, 188!,. A. DICKMAN AND M. HEINTZ. Veneer. ■
A composition veneer built up in alternate layers or wood shavings and glue;

the shavings are cut to particles nf a uniform size.

fgi.SSi— January 1, 1881,. E. BRADY. Composition of matter for molding fmiU,

fancy-topped tables, birds, etc.

It con.sists of 1 pound of pulverized hard stone, 1 pound of pulverized .slate
stone, one-quarter pound of common sand, one-quarter pound of white sand,
one-sixth pound of pulverized clam shells, one-quarter pound of common brick,
one-quarter pound of charcoal, 3 pounds of blue clay, 1 pint of linseed oil, and
water.
191,716— January 8, 1881,. J, GREIVES. Electric insulating material.

Caustic lime in jwwder, hydrated or otherwise, is combined with re.sin in a
fused state, the lime being in excess; from 2 to .■) per cent of a fixed oil, as resin
oil, may be added, to render the compound flexible.

£91,717— January 8. 1881,. J. GREIVES. Electric insulating material.

.k compound of resin and natural silicate of magnesia— as talc or soapstone—
combined by fusion, the silicate being in excess; from 5 to 10 per cent of a fat or
oil is added to temper the compounds
S91.718— January 8, 1S81,. J. GREIVES. Electrical ijisulating mcUerial.

It is composed of crystalline lime carbonate, as marble, spar, etc., reduced to
powder and combined with resin. by fusion of the latter, with or without the
addition of powdered asbestos,

S9l,77(h-January S9. 1881,. P. H. VANDER WEYDE. Manufacturing a rot-proof

covering for underground telegraph cables.

The fibrous envelope of a metallic conducting wire is saturated with Utah
claterite or mineral wax, combined with from 5 to 10 per cent of bitumen.

f9i,9M— February 5, 188i. M. SCHtJTZ. Compound for preserving the soles ofboott

and shoes.

It consists of 25 parts of shellac and 25 parts of alcohol, mixed with 50 parts
of boiled linseed oU.
g93,78!,— February 19, 188/,. W. S. RAVENSCROFT. Pulp caster-wheel.

A ca,ster wheel made of paper or wood pulp.
291,,l,B7— March i, ISSi. J. FOTTRELL. Composition for electrical insulation.

Metallic soap, which mav be formed from a common brown soap and an alum
solution, alone or combined with benzine, turpentine or gasoline, and linseed
oil and varnish, and with or without a thickening material, as white lead.

i97,62e— April t9, 1881,. J. H. PAGE. Indestructible compound for coating wires

for electrical purposes.

A compound of litharge and glycerine, formed into a thick paste.
S98,072—May 6, ISSi. D. H. DORSETT. Insulating material.

The residuum of 50 gallons of coal tar, distilled until it will resist 55° to 60° C.
without softening, combined with 2 gallons of crude petroleum paraffine, 100
pounds of fine silicious sand, and 50 pounds of pulverized coal-a.shes and cinders,
with or without one-half pound of black oxide ol manganese and one-fourth
pound of ammonia chloride.
300,1,81,— June 17, 188L L. HAAS. Compound material for the manufacture ctf sheets,

boards, blocks, artificial wood, etc.

Eighty percent of wood or vegetable fiber and 20 per cent of scrap leather
and shoe waste or shoddy waste and crude asbestos are ground or reduced to a
fiber, the moisture evaporated, and mixed with thinned asphaltum blended
with a suitable quantity of pitch, sulphur, whiting, crude asbestos, and litharge.

$00,719— June 17, 1881,. O. F. PARSON'S. Fire and water proof compound.

A mixture of 20 gallons of coal tar, 12 pounds of air-slacked lime, 7 pounds of
Spanish brown, 6 pounds of sulphur, 2 pounds of litharge, 8 pounds of salt, and
7 pounds of American ocher.

S02,977—August5, ISSi. W. M. BRASHER. Floor-covering.

One hundred and twenty pounds of litharge is added to a solution of 120
pounds of sugar of lead in I'OO gallons of water, and 10 gallons of the same is
then mixed with 300 pounds of whiting, 300 pounds of ocher, lO-gallons of glue
size, 10 pounds of wood pulp, and 20 gallons of linseed oil (three-fourths raw
and one-fourth boiled). It is spread on a textile base.

S03,S01— August 11, ISSi. C. LORTZING. Art of making artifleial asphaltum from
the residue of tanneries.
The precipitated residuum of the waste waters of tanneries and the like is

dried, powdered, mixed with powdered limestone, and subjected to heat and

pressure; the product possesses all of the qualities and appearance of asphaltic

mastic.

30l„0iO— August is, 1881,. C. G. MUSKAT. CompositUm for covering and insulat-
ing electric wires.
One i)Ound of castor oil is boiled with 2 pounds of gum copal and ineor-

porateu with 3 pounds of powdered slate.

SOI.,77R— September. 9, 1881,. S. BARRIER AND C. H. COIFFIER. Composition to
be used as a substitute for hard india-rubber, celluloid, iron, and the like.
A mixture of ivorj- waste, or dust, and horn agglomerated by means of albumen.

S06.t05— September IS, lS8i. C. S. LOCKWOOD AND J. W. HYATT. Plastic

material to imitate ivory, etc.

Organic or analogous material is thoroughly comminuted, say to one twenty-
thousandth of an inch, and then subjected to heat ( 100° C.) and great pressure
in a mold; a homogeneous mass being formed without the use of adhesfves.

S07,18t,— October S8, 188i. A.DERROM. Composition mastic for covering roofs, tele-
graph-moires, and the like.

A mixture of "crude, hard Venezuelan bitumen " and purified, soft Venezue-
lan bitumen.

.W8.778— December 2, ISSi. C. T. LEE. Composition for making nonconducting

handles for sad-irons, etc.

Powdered mica, or like material, is combined with glue which has been treated
with acetate of iron, so that the mass does not soften with moisture.

310,899— January SO, 1886. M, MACKAY. Plastic compound suitable for molding
into various useful articles, such as screw-stoppers for bottles, jars, etc.
It consists of a compound of 75 pounds of lac, 38 pounds each of gum-sandarac,

resin, and ivory-black, and 168 pounds of asbestos or other suitable fibrous

material or silicates.

311,87.5— Febmart/ 10, 1885. R. P. COUGHLIN. Manufacture of clock-cases, stat-
uary, rases, and other articles from plastic materials.

A composition of Keene's cement, resin, and alum, with or without coloring
matter. A composition for dyeing artificial marble consists of extract of log-
wood, copperas, tincture of iron, and water.

316,S7i— April SI, 1885. S. KRAUS. Artificial slate pencil.

Colored slate pencil, formed of coloring matter, 10 pounds; talc, 5 pounds;
and potters' clay. 10 pounds; mixed, formed, and baked.

317,388— May ,% 1885. C. S. LOCKWOOD AND J. W. HYATT. Process of treat-

ing silicate nf soda in combination with zinc oxide, etc.
A composition, and articles formed thereof, consisiii „
soda and zinc oxide, combined, comminuted and partly dehydrated; produced

A composition, and articles formed thereof, consisting essentially of silicate of

Id zinc oxide, combined, comminuted and partly dehydrated; produced

by forming an aqueous solution of the silicate of soda with an admixture of

zinc oxide in the proportion of 4 parts of silicate (26° Baum^) to 1 part of zinc
oxide, comminuting it. and subjecting it to treatment in an ammoniacal bath.

319,081,— .Tunes. 1885. J.A.FLEMING. Preparation and productiem of insulating

materials.

Finelv divided wood, or other vegetable fibrous material, is desiccated and
impregnated with a mixture of melted bitumen or asphalt incorporated with
silicates of magnesia, or lime, iron, alumina, or of two or more of them, and with
amber resin, or other resin having a high melting point, as kauri, and molded
under pre.«sure.

3il,956—July lU, 1885. .T.W. ELLIS. Compositionof matter for the preservation and

insrUation of wires.

A compound of roofing pitch with sulphur, one thirty-second part; resin, one-
sixteenth part; and lime, one thirty-second part.

3Si,80S—July 91, 1885. A. G. DAY. VulcajiUed product, termed "kerite."

A compound formed bv the mixture of cottonseed oil, linseed oil, coal tar or
bitumen, and the sulphide of antimony or other suitable sulphide (product of
No. 322,802).

3Si,805 — July 21, 1885. A. G. DAY. Vutcanizable compojind, or crude kerite.

A compound formed by the mixture of vegetable astringents with cotton-
seed oil, linseed oil. and coal tar or bitumen (product of No. 322,804).

3^3,996— July 28, 1886. S. P. M. TASKER. Manufacture of leathery compound.

Fibrous material— animal, vegetable, or mineral— is saturated with gelatine,
molded or worked into the desired form, and then treated with tannic acid.

325,890— September 8, 1885. I. P. WENDELL. Ccrmposilion nf matter for use as insu-
lating material.
A mixture of 2J pounds of asbestos, one-half a pound of antimony, one-eighth

of a pound of sulphur, and 2s pounds of liquid silicate of soda.

325,891— September 8, 1885. I. P. WENDELL. Composition of matter for use as insu-
lating material.
A mixture of 2 pounds of asbestos or talc, 1 pound of litharge, one-half a pound

of antimony, and 3 pounds of liquid silicate of soda.

327.1,62— September 9, 18SS. H.C.SPALDING. Insulating compound for electrical

cables, etc.

A permanently viscous or plastic in.sulating compound consisting of boiled
linseed oil and crude turpentine.

337 ,1,77— September 29. 1885. H. C. SPALDING. Compound for insulating under-
ground electric conductoi's.

A permanently plastic insulating material, as a filling for underground con-
duits containing electric conductors, consisting of refined asphalt, 90 parts, and
petroleum residue, 10 parts.

328,366— October IS, 1885. C. WALPUSKI. Composition for pencil-leads and

crayons.

A composition consisting of a base — such as potter's clay— a binding medium,
and two distinct colors — a writing color and a copying color.

3S9,3i9— October 27, 1885. W H, WIGGINS. Substitute for billiard-cue chalk.

Finely granular barytes is mixed with liquid dextrine, with or without a
small percentage of gypsum, and molded into blocks.

33I,,7S2— January 26, 1886. F. KIMBLE. .Making targets.

Composed of pitch, 100 pounds, and plaster of paris, or whiting, 25 to 76
pounds.

SSl,,97t,— January 26, 1886. A.A.OLIVER. Composition of matter for roofing, fur-
niture, etc.

A composition of manila or other fibrous stock, say, 1,000 pounds; asbestine
powder, 1,000 pounds; linseed oil, 170 pounds; oil of tar, 170 pounds, and tung-
state of soda, 90 pounds; with or without ground emery, 60 pounds.

337 ,1,72— March 9, 1886. S. M. ALLEN. Composition of matter for making molded

articles.

A mixture of, say, 100 pounds of asphalt, resin, or equivalent substance, with
10 pounds of a suitable nonvolatile oil— as Trinidad a.sphalt oil— and 700 pounds
of wood pulp or other vegetable or animal fiber. The fiber is saturated with
water or spirits preparatory to mixing with the resinous or gummy matter.

339.519— April 6, 1386. W. W. BARNES AND J. D. EMACK. Composition nf
matter suitable for casting medallions, tiles, picture frames, moldings, etc.
A mixture of soluble gla.ss, 100 parts; ground flint, 80 parts; ground iron, 3C

parts; and roll sulphur, 40 parts; combined by heating up to 180° C.

339,777— April IS, 1886. J. HOWE. Composition to be used for insulating wires.

A mixture of cottonseed oil, 1 quart; asphaltum, 6 pounds; white resin, 4i
pounds; paraffin wax, Ik pounds, and Venetian turpentine, 2 pounds.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

278

3iI.07!—.Vay i. IHHe. K. C. C. STAN KORD. Slanu/ndurc <tf uMiM pradueU/mm
gfautfd.

AIkIi' Hi'lil is priKliirwl from si-awct'd by nil adiiiixttiri- o( iin nikali with the
seiiwt'iMl from whiiOi ilii> siilui have Hrxt tweii extradiHl. Olio Iniiidred piirtu of
till' wasluMl scBWci'd Is idIxihI with (S jiarls of an alkali. ai cartionati' or hyilrate
of wKla or bllMinitf of noda, and the gelatinoiu aulutlou scparatva from the
undissolved iiiKredieiits.

Siljsr—Maij 11. isxtl, G. A. UNDOREN. Qmpound /or preeenling window
Jrott.

It eoniprlscs li ounces of so<llum ehloride. 3i ouiicfs of water. 7| ounces of glyc-
erine, H ounccaof isinglajis, 1 ounce of cologne spirit, and ouc-haU ounce of sul-
phuric acid.

Sii.S77—May U. ISSS. R. F. NBNNINGER. OampotUUm /or )loor and wall

einrrinyit, cic.

A mixture of paper pulp in a dry state and the gummy viscous reaidue derived

from hciiting linseed oil.

54i„?r.<— .1/a.v i?.';. lasfi. R. F. NENNINGER. ProccM of manufacluHng ampoMion

Jtir fiimr and it^tU covering)*, etc.

.\iiy fibrous material is molded or pressed into dcslreil .<ihaiH>and dried, then
treated with a (fuinniy or rcfinous walerprcxif substance, as linseed oil. after
heatintt to a high temperature, di-ssolved in a volatile solvent, such as naphtha,
and llnally the volatile solvent is evaporated.

i!a,K<U—Stay ts. 18S6. J. W. & F. R. HOARD. Initiating and protecting eledHc

ivirtx ami cables.

.\n electric conductor Insulated with a covering of linseed or equivalent <iry-
ing oil, highly oxidized throughout its matw by exposure to air or oxygen to
the consistency of a jelly, and applied without a solvent.

SU.SiS—July 6. issn. J. FOTTREI,L. Compoaition of matter /or the electrical
in«ulntion o/ wires covered with cotton, silk, or worsted braid or tape.
X compound of boiled linseed oil. 6 gallons; oxide of zinc. 10 pounds; Vene-
tian turtientine, 1 pound; lead shavings, '2 pounds; to which is added, after
mixing and boiling, copal varnLsh. 1 gallon, and sandarac varnish. 1 pint.

$US.Iild—.Jiily IS, J«6. A. L. REINMASX. Cement for gccuring metal rings to
electric-lamp bulbs and /or other purjMscg.

A mixture of 8 ounces of calamine and 4 ounces of chalk, and a suitable
adhesive material, as glue, with or without a small amount of glycerine.

SiS.OOl^Tiily 10, ISStl. C. N. WAITE. Marking crayon.

A hygroscopic .substance, such as glycerine or chloride of zinc, is combined
with the crayon material, so that the marks formed will not form a dry powder
or impair the .surface of the board.

Sue.SUl—AugutlS, ISSe. E. G. CHORMAN'N. CrmpoMion /or decorative jmrposcs.
It consists of a mixture of silex, an alkaline salt, carbon, clay, a metallic chlo-
ride, and a flux; to be used for coating purposes or to be molded.

SU,SS5— August n, 18S6. O. BRACH. Porous mass /or blotting purpoaet and /or
making cigar pipes, etc.

A porous compound consisting of vitreous sand, coarse river sand, pipeclay,
and hogslwan meal. The molded material Is dried and burned at nearly the
melting ixjint of silver.

Si8.99J,— September lU. 1S86. T. J. PEARCE AND M. W. BEARDSLEY. Insulat-
ing wire and conductors/or electrical purposes.
A mixture of bisulphide of carbon and maltha Is employed as an insulating

coating.

Si9,751— September Sg, 1SS6. A. H. ROW AND AND R. S. HUNZEKER. Ckmpo-
sUion of matter/or packing the joints o/ gas pijjes, etc.
It Is composed of pitch and molasses.

$51,611— October 18, ISSe. R.ALEXANDER. Compound /or imulaling telegraph

wires, etc.

A compound of mineral wool or gla.ss-flock, say, 1(K) pounds; asphaltum. 60 to
70 pounds; and cement or carbonate of lime, 20 to 30 pounds. The glass-flixik
is treated to a hot bath of boracic acid previous to mixture to anneal or soften
the fibers.

Sol,US—Xot'ember 9, ISSe. J. W. BUTLER. Composition /or the manu/acture (if

blocks/or cotUaining electric wires or cables.

A compound ot trinidad or other bitumen, say, 18 pounds; crude paraflin,
12 ounces; Portland cement, 6 ounces; Aylesford sand or finely powdered lime-
stone, 8 pounds; roughly pulped wood, or sawdust, or tan-yard waste, 8 pounds;
with or without Taranaki sand, 8 ounces.

S5g.UU9— November 9, 1896. C.W.COLLINS. Cement /or pipe-joint*.

Composed of plaster of paris and limewater; the latter neutralizing any free
acid.

SM.SSi—Novembcr 16, 1SS6. D. BROOKS, Jr. ImulaUng material /or electric
wires.
Resin and resin oil are combined In aboat equal proportions.

SSS.esS—Xoranbtsr SO, I.s,s«. C. J. VAN DEPOELE. Composition o/ matter /or insu-
lating electric conductors.

A mixture of pulverized mica, silicate of soda, and a pulverulent earthy sub-
stance.

S5S.776~January 11, 1887. W. J. MICHELS. Plastic composition /or wail-hang-
ings, etc.

One hundred pounds of a vulcanized composition composed of a vegetable
oil, as castor oil or castor oil and cottonseed oil, say 100 pounds; kauri gum, 25
pounds; resin, 6 p<iunds; camphor gum, IJ pounds; ana 25 pounds flowers of
sulphur is mixed with lOO pounds ofwood pulp and 1 pound of paraffin.

S56,ses— January m, 18X7. J. JAMETON. Composition /or Mackboards.

A mixture of coke-dust, 80 parts; soap-plaster, 39 parts; carbon-black, 10 parta;
and graphite, 1 part.

SS6,l,ll — ranuary IS, 1S87. T. McSWEENEY. ComposUvm /or packing joints and

oVter purposes.

It consistsof resin, 1 part, and mineral asphaltum, 4 parts, mixed together and
melted, and 6 parts of the mixture combined with 6 parta of black wax-tailings,
and 6 parts of thick yellow wax-tailings.
No. 210 18

.M»,7W-WorcA 1, fWff. H. «. MRYERfl. cipvlng-j^rU, rte.

It eonntiiU of a aoliiblr color (drM-rlbMi ). a ■r.liiblr color with lira* (dtwribcd),
mineral wool, map, oxgall, and Mia|>-pwi«. it glvii. ci>|>l« In black.

361,31,7— April lit, 1897. C. T. CROWKLL. I>irlrr1He rnmp<-iliim.

A mixture of sand or marble i\wl, i partu; pulveriz<'<l glaw. I t«rt' lime, 2
parts; renin, 1 part; Mnglan, I |«rt; and coal Ur or "iinltltr," 2 |iart*.

Mt,m»—itav a,im. a H. OIU)0-"«'. CompotUtm /ur inmlallng and other pw-

A compound of Ktlsonlte, W parts, and oil or (at, 10 parts; with or wltboal
lodla rubber.

M»,ltS—JiUy It, 1M7. R. r. »ILLIMAN. Vnderground mbU /nr telegraph wlrt$.
^ Wires are coated with powdered mica mixed with eanstic poUsb or soda,
dried, and heated to a red heat.

S66,3a8—July It. tStn. H. W. MERRITT. Oompouml /nr eotertng etrririe vires.
A comiK)und of quicklime, I pound, slaked In 1 quart of water; I pound of
nr-balsam; 4 |iouiids of ground asbestos; I ounce of sugar, and a small quantitT
of oxalic acid, 3 grains, dissolved in hot water.

m,l)S7-JiUy It. 1897. H. W. MERRITT. SemtelasUe eompomd /or cofering

electric wires, etc.

Two pounds ot fluid silicate of soda Is subMitated for the quicklime of No.

866,336.

368,898— ./lUy 19, IS87. J. TATHAM. Insulating compound.
A compound of 4 to 6 parts of resin to 1 part of cottonseed oil.

386,967— July 19, 1887. W. MATT. Plastic compound /or use in the deeontite
arts, etc.

It consists of gelatine, 10 pounds; water; digested skins, cut Into small
pie<:es: Venetian turpentine, 2 pounds; linseeaoil, 2 pounds; and n»ln. 6
pouiKis; thickened witli the addition of 20 pounds of paper pulp, with or without
marble dust.

369,099— Aumist 30, 1887. N. J. CLAYTON. OmpottUon to he used as a nmeim-

doctor o/ heat and/or other purposes.

Cottonseed hulls, or waste or refuse of cottonseed oil mills are saturated
with a .solution of alum to render them incombu.stible, and then combined with
sawdust treate<l with a hydrate of lime, and mixed with plaster of parts, in the
proportion of 1 of plaster to 4 of bulls.

S71,U>6—OcM>er 11, 1887. W. W. BARNES. Ptasiie composition /or insulaUng

electric wires, etc.

A mixture of mineral coal. !)0 parts, and sulphur, lOparts, each reduced to an
impalpable powder and then mixed, and fused by beat. Also available for
building and paving blocks, etc.

371,681— October 18, 1SS7. J. GRANT. Omduelor/or Oectrie vires.
A compound of resin and petroleum residuum, forming a semiplastic maas.

S7t,5Sl—Sovember I, 1887. T. McSWEENEY. Onnposition /or the manufacture cif
structural articles.

A mixture of asphaltum. 60 pounds: resin, 20 pounds; and coal tar 20 pounds;
the latter reduced to one-fourth of Its bulk by boiling; I part of the aforesaid
mixture being combined with 7 parts of paper pulp and 8 parts of polverixed
glass or flue sand.

37S.6SS— December £7, 1887. DE WITT C. JAMES. Underground electric con-
ductor.

An Inclosing and insulating compound of resin, pulverized glass, and sulphur.

378,1,36— January 17, 1888. C. WALPUSKL Copying peneU.

Composed of nigroslne, tannale of iron, a suitable oleate, and a binding
medium.

377,071— January 31, 1888. C. E. HAYNES. Compound for making paper leather-
board, etc.

To a mixture in water of silicate of soda, 1.42 parts; rosin. 1.42 parts; almn,.76
parts; crude potassa. .4 parts; and flsh glue, 2 parts; assisted by electro-chem-
ical action, and heated, there is added 39 parts of pulp, and it is then manip-
ulated iu the ordinary way.

377,081— January 11, 1888. J. F. MARTIN. Compound for coating iron, wood.

canvas, etc.

A ba.se or body composed of glue, sulphureted water or sulphur in solution,
paris-white and zinc white, with or without shellac and alconol, and coloring
matter.

J77 ,445— January 31, 1888. I. P. WENDELL. Compound for safe linings, etc.

A mixture of fiber or powdered asbestos, fossil meal or infusorial earth, and
silicute of soda; say In the proportions of 1 part each of asbestos and the earth,
and 1 to 2 parts of the silicate.

38t,8St—May IS. 1888. J. A. KIESELE. Composition of matter.

Composition tor castings, consisting of ozocerite and sugar; say 5 parts of the
former and 5 to 7 parts of the latter.

383,096— May ti, 1888. D. BROOKS. Jr. ^n/t'-fiufiu^ion composition for dettrte

cables.

A composition of low induction capacity, consisting of a powdered electrical
conducting material, as plumbago, gum copai, linseed oil, and turpentine, in
about equal parts.

383,698— Hay t9, 1888. C. F. BROADBENT. CUmpotUion (^ maUer to be used in

the manufacture of medaJUions, etc.

Sulphur and powdered pumice stone constitutes the l>aae, with powdered
antimony and buneblack.

386,06i-July 10. 1888. H. F. FERRIS. Malericifor raUvmy-mOs, buOdingliloeks.

paring-btocks. etc,

A mixture of paper pulp MO parts, silicate of soda 2S parts, and baiytea 10
parts.

387,017— July 31, IS88. W. A. SNYDER. Putty for making ornamental t

It consists of dissolved glue, reatu, and wititing, combined with paralBniaU
and spirits of turpentine.

274

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

SS7,0U—JtUtl 31, 1S38. W. S. BLAKE. Tobocco-pipe bowl.

A mixture of ground corncob and silicate of Boda, with or without earthy
material.
189,519— September 11, 1888. C. T. LEE. Compomiion of matter.

A laminated substance, such as mica, in a comminuted state, is mixed and
incorporated with a resinous gum, such as shellac.

S93.0S9— November 20, 1888. A. POITEVENT. Imulaling composition.

A mixture of common lime, say 2 parts; crude turpentine, 1 part; and pine tar,
2 part*.
S9S,S8S— November 27, 1888. F. A. MEYER. Plastic compound.

\ composition consisting of sulphur, fibrous material, finely divided mineral,
and a waxy or similar substance, such as parafflne, whose fusion point is below
that of the sulphur.
$9S,6U— November i7, 1888. S. HEIMANN. Nori-cmiducting compound.

A mixture nf 60 pounds of dry, pulverized peat, 25 pounds of ground asphaltum,
2i pounds of pulverized plumbago, and a thin solution of 5 pounds of plaster of
paris and of soluble glass; compacted by heat and pressure.
sgi.gsr— December 18, 1888. C. M. REQUA. Composition of matter for marking

pencils or crayons.

A mixture of 7 pounds of paraffine, 1 pound of beeswax, and 1 pound of resin,
with coloring matter.
395,U1— December S6, 1888. E. LANGEN. Substitute/or cork.

Powdered pith is mixed with an adhesive material— as starch, paste, and lin-
seed oil or tar, to render the mass elastic— and dried; a fireproof material, such
as water glass, may be added.

396,500— January 16, 1889. J. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS. Plastic min-
eral composition, etc.

A refractory crystalline compound, for incandescent illumination; formed of
magnesia oxide or carbonate. 37 per cent; caustic strontia, 37 per cent; calcium
fluoride, 26 per cent; and feldspar (added after first heating) , 3 grains to 100 grains
of the prior mixture. The resulting powder is mixed in glycerine, molded or
coated, and subjected to heat, it being white or opalescent, rough on the sur-
face, and practically infusible.

S96,S01—January IS, 1889. 3. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS. Plastic

mineral composition, etc.

A refractory crystalline compound for incandescent illumination: composed
of magnesia oxide or carbonate, 50 grains; caustic strontia or carbonate, 55
grains; alumina oxide or carbonate, 10 grains; calcium-fluoride, 30 grains; and
feldspar, five one-hundredths grain.

396,30^— Jamiary IS, 1889. J. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS. Plastic

mineral composition, etc.

A refractory crystalline compound for incandescent illumination; composed
of calcium oxide or carbonate, 210 grains; magnesia oxide or carbonate, 40
grains; caustic strontia or carbonate, 180 grains; alumina oxide or carbonate,
15 grains; calcium fluoride, 100 grains; and feldspar (added after first heating),
2 grains to 100 grains of the prior mixture.

396,303— January IB, 1889. J. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS. Plastic min-
eral composition, etc.
A refractory crystalline compound for incandescent illumination: composed

of calcium oxide or carbonate, 65 grains; magnesia oxide or carbonate, 50 grains;

strontia oxide or carbonate, 30 grains; alumina oxide or carbonate, 15 grains;

and cryolite, 20 grains.

396,301,— January IB. 1889. J. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS. Plastic min-
eral composition, etc.
A refractory crystalline compound for incandescent illumination: composed

of calcium oxide or carbonate, 480 grains; magnesia oxide or carbonate, 96 grains;

strontia oxide, 110 grains; strontia carbonate, 65 grains; feldspar, 100 grains;

and aluminite or ammonia alum, 32 grains.

396,305— January 15, 1889. J. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS. liaeHcmin-

era! composition, etc.

A refractory crystalline compound for incandescent illumination; composed
of arragonite, or the caustic lime from arragonite, 80 grains; magnesia oxide,
160 grains: celestine or strontia sulphate, 350 grains; barium sulphate, 17 grains;
and calcium fluoride, 142 grains.

396,306— January IB, 1889. J. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS. Plaeticmin-

eral composition, etc.

A refractory crystalline compound for incandescent illumination: composed
of celestine or strontia sulphate, 131 grains; magnesia carbonate, 96 grains; silica
or silicic add, 15 grains; oarljonate of soda, 24 grains; and carbonate of potassa,
32 grains.

396,307— January 15, 1889. J. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS. Plastic min-
eral composition, etc.

A refractory crystalline compound for incandescent illumination: composed
of magnesia oxide or carbonate, 438 grains; strontia oxide (caustic). 342 grains;
strontia carbonate, 90 grains; strontia sulphate, 90 grains; calcium oxide or car-
bonate, 208 grains: glucinium oxide or carbonate, 24 grains; with or without
zirconium oxide, 20 grains; and fluor spar, as a flux, 230 grains.

397,61i—Fibrurary 12, 1889. F. S. RANDALL. Composition for making articles oj

commerce and art.

A mixture of 2 parts of sawdust, 4 parts asbestos, 1 part alnm, 2 parts dex-
trine, and 6 parts of glue mixed with 1 part of acetic acid.

W0,335— March S6; 1889. J. L. HASTINGS. Plastic mineral composition.

A composition for forming a refractory compound for incandescent illumina-
tion, consisting of magnesium oxide, 250 grains; uranium oxide, 2J grains; cal-
cium fluoride (for flux), 60 grains; starch, 50 grains; and gum-tragacanth, 100
grains; the gum being treated in a solution of one or more salts of acetate,
chloride; or nitrate of magnesium, strontium, calcium, or aluminum.

U)0,3S6— March 2«, 1S89. J. L. HASTINGS. Plastic mineral composition.

A refractory compound for incandescent illumination, containing strontia
oxide, strontia carbonate (native rock), strontia sulphate (native roclt), calcium
oxide, calcium carbonate, magnesium oxide, magnesium carbonate, calcium
fluoride, magnesium chloride, magnesium sulphate, uranium oxide, and starch,
in varying proportions.

i01,01i— April 9, 1889. A. DE FIGANIftRE. Insulaling and coating compound.

A hard fusible compound consisting of 6 parts of pulverized semlbituminous
coal, 2 parts of unslaked lime, and 7 parts of coal tar pitch.
iOS.SiS—May 21, 1889. B. E. OLSEN AND C. GABRIEL. Compound for piping,

bou-ls. etc.

It consists of sand, 43 per cent; sulphur, 33 per cent; pitch, 1 per cent; and an
earth, such as ground burnt clay, 23 per cent; mixed together under the action
of superheated steam.
U)S,6Sl—May SI, 1889. A. T. WOODWARD. Plastic compound for vse in various

arts.

It consists of 100 pounds of powdered silica or silicate— such as glass— 50 pounds
of mineral or vegetable resin or pitch, 150 ounces of oxide of lead or zinc, and
the same of animal or vegetable wax, and 75 ounces of boiled linseed oil, with
a slight admixture of drying oil.
i06,i^—July 9, 1S89. J. R. CLUXTON. Compound for the scrubbing surfaces of

washboards.

A mixture of 4 pounds of powdered Are clay, 1 pound of litharge, 1 pound of
Spanish white, one-half pound finely granulated or powdered wood, one-fourth
pound of pitch, and one-fourth pound of gum shellac, with a solvent oil, mixed
with heat and molded.
1.07,S71—July 16, 1889. A. T. WOODWARD. Plastic compound.

A compound of 50 pounds of silica, 10 pounds of sulphur, 2 pounds of arsenic,
6 pounds of manganese, and 25 pounds of resin, or gum, with or without 3
pounds of wax, and 5 pounds of oil.
1,07,896— July SO, 1889. F. MARQUARD. Insulating composition.

A compound of 20 pounds of wood pulp, 1 pound extract of logwood, one-eighth
pound of bichromate of potash, one-eighth pound of sulphate of iron, 4 pounds
of animal glue, 10 pounds of rosewood sawdust, and 2S pounds of an albuminous
substance, as bullock's blood with or without vegetable fiber, such as flax, hemp,
etc.; forming a dark, almost black material.

1,07 ,9SS— July SO, 1889. F. MARQUARD. Insulating composition,

A compound of 20 pounds of fine rosewood sawdust, 1 pound extract of log-
wood, one-eighth pound bichromate of potash, one-eighth pound sulphate of
iron, and 5 pounds of an albuminous substance, such as bullock's blood, with
or without vegetable fiber.
l,08,m— August 6, 1889. M. L. DEERING. Composition of matter.

It consists of fibrous material, blood, waterproof gum, and creosote, in the
general proportions of 1 pound of fiber to 1 quart of blood.

■ U)8,9B1— August IS, 1889. C. S. BUSHNELL. Process of packing roofing compost-

tion.

The base material is placed in a shipping case and a tubular jacket introduced
to form a chamber within said material. The ingredients with which the base
is to be mixed are then melted and poured into said chamber, and the jacket
removed, leaving the ingredients in the center surrounded by the base material.

1,09,581,— August SO, 1889. J. L. HASTINGS. Plastic mineral composition.

A composition for forming a refractory compound for incandescent illumina-
tion, containing two or more metallic compound substances— such as oxides,
carbonates, or sulphates of metals— a flux, a moistening fluid, and one of flame
or light coloring substances, such as oxide of uranium, strontium, and lead
chromate or chromium oxide, permanganic acid, cadmium sulphide, sodium
salts, or indium oxide, and calcite.

J,09,986—August 27, 1889. C. T. LEE. Composition of matter.

A composition consisting solely of comminuted mica (in flakes or scales) and
silicate of soda.
Ullt.SOS— November 5, 1889. P. E. GONON. Composition of mailer for moldings.

It consists, essentially, of a mixture of dry fibrous or cellulose material treated
with coloring matter, with one-third pulverized soapstone, and an adhesive
material composed of one-third glue and two-thirds starch; 20 to 30 grains of the
binding material is used for 500 grains of the pulp and coloring matter.

iU,209— November 5, 1889. P. E. GONON. Composition of matter for moldings.

It consists of fibrous or cellular material, soapstone, an adhesive material
composed of glue and starcl}, and bronze powders.

l,lS,6l,S~November 26, 1889. S. H. GILSON. Composition for overhead insulators.
A compound of gilsonite, 20 parts; granulated material, as sand, 74 parts; and
petroleum-still wax, 6 parts.

U5,96S— November 16, 1889. 0. A. ENHOLM. Compositum for lining electric-battery

jars.

It consists of mineral wax, say, 50 per cent; sulphur, 25 percent; ground glass,
15 per cent; and resin, 10 per cent.

1,18,91,7— January 7, 1890. A. HART. Crayon.

Composed of a pigment and carnauba wax, 1 pound; stearic acid, 1 pound;
and paraf&ne wax, Ij pounds.

iSB.eiS—.iprUlB.lsgo. A. A. KNUDSON. Insulating compound.

A plastic compound of substantially equal proportions of carbolic acid and
shellac, or like meterial, capable of being brought to a viscous condition.

l,S6,S02 — April S2, 1890. J. F. MUNSIE. Insulating compound.

A composition consisting of paper pul_p treated so as to be noninflammable,
fire clay, Portland cement, and a noninflammable agglutinating or binding
agent, as white glue and silicate of soda. Molded articles after drying are
immersed in a hot bath of India rubber or fireproof paint.

iS7,167— May 6, 1890. N. C. FOWLER. Heat-insulating compound. ■

The base consists of sifted or lixiviated ashes (or carbonate of magnesia, dia-
tomaeeous earth, or clay) and carbonate of calcium, with which may be incor-
porated finely fiberized fiber, lampblack, and pumice stone.

l,Sl,6IS—July 8. 1890. W. A. BURROWS. Composition for the soles of boots and

shoes.

Leather waste reduced to flock is mixed with an aqueous solution of gelatine,
to which not more than one-tenth per cent of chrome alum has been added to
render the mixture nonabsorbent of water when dry.

1,31,71,3— July 8, 1890. C. R. GOODWIN. Composition for porous carbon structures.
A composition of finely divided gas or other hard carbon, with agglomerants
forming moldable paste "and with organic matter of cellular or fibrous structure
that when baked will form a highly porous structure.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

276

i/a.llH—Julu tg, 1890. 1. RABINOWICZ. Jntulaltng compound.

A compooltlon of 70 piumdii of palm utarlno pitch, 40 pounda of gllaonlte, 9
poiind!) of potasxlum tiltnrtrate, iind 'i pounds of tartaric Bcld.

i.16,7t>.l— September 16, 1S90. J. W. EA8T0N. InmUiting material.

Powdered goapstone, from 60 to 70 per cent, in mixed with flbroiw materUl, u
jute, and waterprooflUK material, an paratBnc.

iXS.Slt—OHnlier H, 1890. O. A. ENHOLM. Compotition ttf matter for making ceOt
iir rt^aininii-vesielg.
A mixture of Rslwstus fibers, say. 40 parts; mineral wax, 80 parts; gutta-percha,

30 parti: imd shellac, 10 parts.

4.M,«98— OcfofxT f«, ISSO. A. E. MENUEZ. Inmilaling compound.

A composition of equal parts, by mensure. o( [wwdered mineral wool, pow-
dered graphite or a hardening clay, and asbestus fiber, with liquid silicate of
soda to form a thick paste. The graphite may tw omitted.

U9,St«~Oetobertl,lS90. O. KLETTE. OompotUion /or paper ituec^.

VcKctable pulp Is impregnated with glue, piaster or whiting, siccative, <ml-
phurTc acid, and linseed oil. A tinisluMi stamped piece is covered with silk, by
applying a coat of gelatine and aftlxlng the silk, Hrst steamed, by pressure
under heat.
tM,796—yoi'ember i, 1S90. T. D. BOTTOME. Insulating compoiUUm.

Finely Dowdered silicon dioxide is mixed into a stiS paste with a solution of
orthosilioic acid.
U0,S9l—Xovember 11,1890. F. E. BLAISDELL. Intidating compotition.

Seventy-two parts of asbestos and 18 parts of plastic clay, mixed dry, arc
mixed with a flux, as of feldspar and borax.

I,!,i.775— January IS, 1891. A. & S. DU PONT. iVocess qf manu/aduring artificial

ivory.

Hydrate of lime is treated with nn aqneons solution of phosphoric acid to
form phosphate of lime; there is then mixed therewith carbonate of lime, mag-
nesia, alumina precipitate, gelatine, and albumen. The mass Is desiccated and
subjected to great pressure until solidified.

iis.lll— January to, 1891. .1. GROTE. Composition for treating article* made from

paper.

A composition comprising starch, water gloss, and a fatty substance, such as
beeswax.

U,e.S(>i— February 17, 1891. E. G. WEIGHT. Composition qf matter for cable-filling.

A mixture of crude petroleum, 1 pound 7| ounces: tallow, 1 pound 10 ounces;
gypsum, 8 ounces; whiting, 3 ounces; pine tar, 2 pounds; and paraffin wax, 1
pound.
!,!,7,Ult— March S, 1891. J. S. PALMER. Composition of plastic material.

A mixture of stearine, bitumin, wood-flour, and ground fiber, with or without
whiting, or pigment, or coloring substance.

U5S,182—May IS, 1891. F. C. GOODALL. Marine cement.

A mixture of 40 parts by weight of hard asphaltum, 40 parts of liquid asphal-
tum, 8 parts of boiled or other siccative oil, and 12 parts of finely ground cork.

ioS.reS—.Vaij 19, 1891. F. SALATHfi. Composition of matter.

It consists essentially of pulp or fibrous material and a certain r«sinoid hydro-
carbon of the CioHk series.

1,53,869— May tS, 1891. G. W. TOOKER. Artificial ivory.

A compound of albumen, bone-ash powder, and talc, with fibrous material
when it is desired to show a grain.

iSi,5i7—June IS, 1891. A. W. 8PERRY. Insulating material.

A compound of, say, 3 parts of mineral wool, 6 parts of liquid silicate ol soda,
and 1 part of zinc wlilte.

i60,Si9— September t9, 1891. R. F. FLYNN. Floor covering.

A base of palm-oil pitch with the addition of coarse granules of cork is applied
to a textile backing.

ISl.i67— October 10. 1891. M. O. FARRAR AND C. C. HOWE. Composition of

matter for insulating purposes.

It consists of silica, 434.7 to 478.4 parts; alumina, 297.6 to 362.3 parts; peroxide
of iron, 13.4 to 88 parts: magnesia. 3.7 to 21 parts: lime, 2.9 to 13.8 parts; soda,
3.2 to 41 parts: potash, .W.l to 124.4 parts; water, 14.5 to 62.2 parts; asphaltum, 60
to 75 per cent; mixed with the aid of heat and molded under pressure.

L6U,se7— December 1,1891. S.W.KIMBLE. Insulating composition.

It consists of pulverized mica, say, 40 parts; a mineral substance, such as talc
free from lime, 40 parts; and silicate of soda, 3 parts; combined and molded
under pressure.
l,6t,.569— December 1, 1891. S.W.KIMBLE. Composition (^ matter for insulating

purposes, etc.

A mixture of pulverized mica, say, 60 parts; a mineral substance, such as
a,«bcstos or feldspar, 50 parts; soluble glass, from 3 to 10 parts; and sulphur or
sulphur compound, as iron or copper pyrites, 2 parts; molded under high pres-
sure without heat.
!,71.ii8— March sa, I89S. G. SCHWARZWALD. Composition :if matter for pencils

or crayons.

It consists of 100 ounces of paraflln wax, 2 to 10 ounces of dammar gum, 2
ounces of bichromate of potassium, 100 ounces of bronze powder, and 25 ounces
of naphthol.
l,7:.Soi— Aprils, lS9t. I.HILL. Compound for ittsulating electric tcires.

A mixture of 1 pound each of pi'.tizite pitch, candle tar, and coal tar, and one-
half pound each of asphalt pitch and resin.

l,7U.86^—May 1 7, 189S. P. VON SLAMA. ComposUion for use as ornamental

moldings, etc.

It Is composed of dextrine, sulphate of lime, silicate of soda, and vegetable
fibers; 10 parts of soluble glass is mixed with a 40 per cent solution of dextrine
in water, 40 to 60 parts of sulphate of lime added, and vegetable flliers
worked in.

1,79,!>67—A<tgust I, 1893. R. G. DE VASSON. Plastic composition.

It consists of 1 to 2 volumes of fragments or powder of cork, and 2 to 1 vol-
umes of an agglutinant composed of plaster of pans, dextrine, and sesquioxlde

of Iron, with an oxjrcbloride, snob M th« oxyeblorlda oi ilne, irbm It Is to ba
used In damp places.

180,091— August t, IIM. 8. D. HOrrMANlt. OamposUim for amdmattiedqf mak-
ing hrnds and limbs r^doUs.
A coni|H>unil of 100 parts of glue and tf ports each of ftyesfllM, lino oxide,

and Jaiwnese wax.

KUJ)U^(Mober 11. 189t. J. T. SMITH. Proeeu qf trenttng cork.

It Is confined In a mold and mibjeclvd to beat under preesani. wberetqr tbe
resinous matter is vaporized and the pieces are cemenled and lolldUled.

i90,SI,t— January Sl, 180S. M. H. DEVEY. InmlaHnf

A mixture of slag. 8 parts, and glass, 2 ports; ground line, with a bindl
dium, as boiled llnsee<l oil, driers, shellac, and poroIRn, to form a paste.

m.sm— April 18, 1893. W.I'. EMERY, OamposUlon of matter for raOroadUa.ae.
A mixture of 479 parts of pni>er pulp, 10 parts of albumen, 6 ports of sour milk,

1 part of lime, and 5 parts of chloride of zinc.

SOS.UIS— August IS, 18U3. J. W. KIDWELL. Son-eorrodlbte pUulle eompoftHon.

A mixture of titanic minemls or natural oxide of titanium (as from the phos-
phate ores of Nebmn county, Va.), 8 jiarls: and asphaltum or like hydrocarbon,

2 ports. To render It extremely refractory it may be healed to about 1.400" C.

SOi.gSS— September it, 1S9S. J. MELLINGER. Metho<t of manufacturing artificial

ivood.

To a mixture of 150 pounds of fibrous material — as tan bark— ond 15 pounds ot
slaked lime, there is added a solution formed of 1 pound of liorax, 2 pounds ol
alum, one-half pound carbonate of potatsinm, one-hall pound zinc sulphate,

3 pounds sodium chloride, and 1 imund of sodium bicarbonate. In water, with
30 pounds of liquid silicate of scKlium and 25 [jounds of lye of 35 per cent; the
pulp is moldol and subjected to pressure,

SOS,916— October S. 189S. J. HOFFMA.S. Insulating compound onrf method <j/

Tnannfacturing the same.

A compound of asbestos fiber with a binding material composed of asphol-
tura, beeswax, and shellac: produced by spraying the asbestos with a mixture
of t)eeswax and asphaltum with a suitaljle sf)lvent, as benzine: drying; then
mixing powdered shellac, with or without albumen, with the mealy suwiance
thus formed; and molding under heat and pressure.

107,678— October SI, 189S. J. J. FANNING. Insulating compound.

A mixture of 6 ounces plaster of paris, 5 ounces pulverized asbestos, 4 ounces
dextrine, and 1 ounce of linseed or other oil.

S08.107—Xovember 7, 189S. H. HAYNES. Insulating compound for printing-
presses.
A mixture ot 1 gallon of machine oil, 1 quart of glycerine, three-quarters of

an ounce of paramne wax, and 2 ounces of castor oil; to be applied to the tym-

pan sheet of the press.

.'illt.OlS— February 6, 1891,. 3. L. MILLER AND W. T. CROSSE. OmpotUlon oj

matter for makmg chalk engraving-jilatrs.

It consists of 2i drams of silicate of soda. 4 drams of silicate of magnesio, one-
half pound of French chalk, and 1 pound of barytes.

SlS,191—F(bruary SO, 1891,. G. A. CANNOT. Material for insulating eleetrievire*.
An insulating coating for electric wires consists of. first, a coating of bittunen:
second, of peat fiber; third, of spermaceti; fourth, of tor; and, fifth, of peat
fiber. The wire is passed through a guide, by which its surface is leveled and
made uniform.

S17,t,St— April S, 1891,. A. GENTZSCH. Insulating compound.

The volatile elements of the fossil resins ozokerite, asphalt, and amber are
driven off by distillation, and the residuums are mixed in the proportion, soy,
of ozokerite, 60 parts; amber, 45 parts: and asphalt. 5 parts.

BtS.7iS-^uly 10, 1891,. 3. L. TRUSLOW, Jr. Insulating compotUion.

It is composed of ground cork, 90 parts, infusorial earth, 5 ports, and a binder,
binder, as resin, 5 parts.

StS,SSt— July ti, 1891,. C. KOsTER. Process qf manufacturing vejieers.

Concentric layers of a plastic mass in contrasting colors are formed on a core,
and then veneers arc cut therefrom In a direction transverse to the length of
t^e core. The composition consists of glue, glycerine, and fossil meal.

5Si,0tl— August 7, 1891,. A. HAGELE. Floorcloth.

A composition consisting of dried and ground leaves, and a binder, such as an
oil, resin, and gum, applied to a textile backing.

SS8,7hU— November «, 1894. O. STILES. Insulating compound.

A mixture of 6 parts of alcohol, 3 parts of shellac, 8 parts of asbestos, ond 1
part each of mica and alum.
St»,7t3— November t7, 1891,. W. GRI9COM. Jr. Vuleanisable compound.

It is composed of substantially equal parts of animal fat candle tor (a residual

Sroduct from the distillation of animal fats, oils, etc.), and a hard or nearly
ard residual product from petroleum distillation, and sulphurin proportionsof
from 2 to 8 per cent ot the mass,
BS7,Stl— April 9, 1895. A. C. THOMPSON. Insulating compound.

A mixture of 1 gallon alcohol. 5 pounds of gimi shellac. 6 pounds pulverised
asbestos, 4 pounifi pulverized French chalk. 1 pound balsam tolu gum, and 4
pounds ground mica.
5SS,eii— April 30, 1S9S. J. W. KIDWELL. Insulating materiat.

A mixture of titanic mineral (see No. 608,425), asplialtum, and sillcioiis
material, say 5 per cent, such as rice hulls or other organic material rich in
silicic acid.
SS1,S88— December 17, 189S. H. R. KNOCH. Artificial bnilding-bhek.

A mixture of 50 parts of paper pulp with 12 ports of peonut shells, 2 toSports
of gum-tragacanth, and 2 to 5 parts of dissolved caustic soda.

SSl.SSO— December 17. 189S. G. DOEBRICH. Composition for hands and feet of

dolls, lie.

A mixture of glne. 1 pound; glycerine, one-fourth pound; saccharine material,
one-half pound: flour, 1 tablespoontui: albumen and coloring matter.

s.W.tSii— December SI, 1S9S. W. L. WOODS. iYosfie compotOion and prottm ef

combining same.

A composition consisting of silica. 60 ports; magnesia. 90 ports: sulphur. dO
parts; and mineral wax, 3 to 10 parts; produced by grinding the silica and

276

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

magnesia to a powder and expelling the moisture therefrom, repeatedly melt-
ing the sulphur and the mineral wax and pouring them into cold water,
remelting the sulphur and mineral wax at about 150° C, adding the silica and
magnesia, and then gradually increasing the temperature to 260° C, and cook-
ing until the sulphurous fumes are expelled.

559,376— Matt 5, 1896. A. GENTZSCH. Composition for electric insulation and jyro-

ceM of making same.

A composition of shellac, 50 parts; resin, 50 parts; birch-tar oil, 5 parts; aniline
oil, 5 parts; and anthracene, 20 parts; produced by treating the shellac and resin
with repeated washings to dissolve out all soluble matter, then melting and
boiling together, melting the anthracene, mixing in a molten state, and adding
the aniline oil and birch-tar oil, which have been previously freed of water and
matter soluble in water.

560..131 — May 19, 1896. 3. J. MURPHY. ComposUion of matter for making and

sealing joints between pipes, etc.

A compound of flower of sulphur, 100 pounds; fine flintsand, 100 pounds: anti-
mony, 2 pounds; lead, 9 pounds; bismuth, 1 pound; powdered glass, 10 pounds;
and borax, 2 pounds.

5S6,6S3-Septeniber t9, 1896. L. HONIG. Insidating compound.

It consists of alcohol, SO parts; gum shellac, 25 parts; wheat flour, 20 parts;
powdered asbestos, 20 parts; glue, 2 parts; varnish, 2 parts; and glycerine, 1 part.

571,117— November 10, 1896. F.R.HALL. ComposUion of matter.

A mixture of 9 parts by weight of prepared pitch— roofing pitch which has
been distilled until a portion of its oil has been driven off and the melting point
raised to about 170° F. — 5 parts of asbestos fiber, and 4 parts of gum kauri.

m.016— November 24, 1S96. C. KOSTER. ComposUiom of matter for manufactur-
ing artificial veneers.

It consists of 11 grams of sawdust, 14 grams zinc-white, 40 grams flour paste
(from 4 grams of flour), 1 gram resin glue, 20 grams boiled linseed oil. and 10
grams grape sugar or like saccharine matter. (See No. 523,582.)

57»,51l,— March 9, 1897. W. HOSKINS AND W. A. SPINKS. Substitute forbilliard

efiatk.

A compound of normally white pulverized silica, with or without corundum,
a binding agent, as glue, and a coloring agent.

59U,8S8— December 7 , 1897. A. MILLAR. Process of obtaining usef id products from

silkworms.

The large intestines of silkworms, when they have attained the maximum
size and are about to begin spinning, are subjected to pressure, without pre-
liminary treatment, and the gelatin product drawn into threads and dried.

595.776— December Zl, 1897. H. D. HOLBROOK. Sheet material of cork and mech-
anism for producing same.

A flexible, elastic sheet consisting of a homogeneous body of granulated cork
and elastic cement molded under pressure, with threads running through the
body of the material, and with the cork protuberances removed by sandpaper-
ing "or otherwise.

597, SiS— .January 11, 189S. M. HOCQUET. Method of producing plastic composi-
tion from cork, etc.

A plastic composition consisting of cork impregnated with borax, a gelati-
nous substance, tannin, and bichromate of potash: produced by treating com-
minuted cork with a solution of borax, drying and then mixing with a solution
consisting of gelatin, 40 parts; Dutch glue, 25 parts; glycerin, 15 parts; crystal-
lized sugar, 16 parts; ammonia, 2 parts; and sulphur, 2 parts; with a tannin
solution and potassium bichromate solution added.

597,806— January 9.5, 1898. H. MARANGOLO. Compound for treating glass.

A fluid compound composed of 40 per cent of alcohol, 40 per cent of glycerine,
and 20 per cent of water. To impart luster and prevent formation of frost.

606,921 — July, 5, 1898. G. B. FHALEY. Composition of ^natter for electric heaters.
A mixture of talc, say, 60 ^arts; silicate of soda, 20 parts; carbonate of soda,
10 parts; and water, 10 parts.

611,811,— October h, 1898. A.MILLAR. Insoluble gelatine thread or filament.

An insoluble thread or filament composed of gelatine; produced by dissolving
the gelatine in hot water and adding the proper chemical substances, such as
bicromate of potash, either directly or in the form of a solution. The mixed
solution is then concentrated to a suitable degree of thickness and forced
through nipples in the form of threads. The threads may be formed of simple
gelatine and then hardened.

61S,76S— November 8, 1898. J. C. GRAFT. Plastic compound.

It is composed of 2 parts of shellac, 1 part of French chalk, 1 part rice flour,
and a small part of beeswax.

615.000— November 29, 1898. S. R. THOMPSON. Composition for pipe-joints or the

like.

A mixture of 12 parts of paris white (^calcium carbonate), 6 parts of oxide of
iron. 2i parts of brick dust, and one-half part of plumbago, with boiled linseed-
oil to form a stiff putty.

616.,'i60— December 27. 1898. H. REDHEAD AND G. W. EMMERSON. Composi-
tion ffrr making tight joints.
A mixture of cement, .50 parts; boiled oil, 20 parts; Venetian red, 10 parts;

litharge, 5 parts; and chalk 15 parts.

ei9.019—February 7, 1899. J. H.\VERSTICK. Composilionfor floor-coverings, etc.
It consists of a base or filling of ground corn-cob with a binding material.

619,337— J^ruary U, 1899. W. PAINTER. Gluten compound.

A compound of gluten and a ground or pulverized body material, produced
by mixing gluten in the i^lastic state with pulverized cork, wood pulp, or other
material — say in the proportions of 2 parts of gluten to 1 of cork — rolling or
molding into form, and .subjecting to heat, as a temperature of 120° C, for about
ten hours.

ei9,S3S— February lU, 1899. W. PAINTER. Gluten compound.

Gluten in its plastic slate is mixed with glycerine, and then with a body
material — as gluten 65 per cent, glycerine 5 per cent, and ground cork 30 per
cent— and the product subjected to heat— about 100° C. for seven hours.

621,807— March 38, 1899. B. FOKD. Insulating compound.

A liquid insulating compound heavier than water, composed of a mixture of
2 parts by weight of asphalt and 1 part of paraflin oil.

625,31,5— May 23, 1899. A. MILLAR. Insoluble thread or filament.

A thread or filament composed of a proteid strand insoluble in water; pro-
duced by treating threads of albumen or casein or the material before it is
formed Into threads, with chromic acid, tannic acid, picric acid, etc.

625,891,— May 30, 1890. J. J. NUGENT. Composition for blackboards.

It consists of slacked lime, 100 pounds; black stain, 25 pounds; ground quartz,
of a plurality of grades, 39 pounds; plaster of paris, 40 pounds; cement, 18
pounds; and glue, 6 ounces.

626,1,79— June 6, 1899. P. C. BELL. Elastic compound.

A compound consisting of vegetable oil, 59 parts; flour of sulphur, 15 parts;
liquid tar, 1 part; petroleum residue, 20 parts; and powdered talc. 5 parts; pro-
duced by heating the petroleum to 112° F., adding the talc and liquid tar, then
graduallv adding the vegetable oil while maintaining the same temperature,
raising the temperature to 200° F.. adding the sulphur, and finally raising the
temperature to 340° F., and stirring the mass until viscid.

627 ,008— June IS, 1899. Q. OLNEY. Composition of matter.

A mixture of sodium silicate, in a plastic or liquid state, say, 2 pounds; dry
paper pulp, 4 ounces; and powdered glass, 8 ounces.

627,207— June 20, 1899. D. ROGERS. Plastic material for manufacturing shuttles,

bobbins, etc.

A mixture of wool flock, resin, terra alba, china clay, Brits white, grated
potatoes, aluminum, shellac, alcohol, and coloring matter in equal or varying
proportions according to the hardness required.

627,S67—June 20, 1899. H. TZSCHUCKE. Translucent plastic compound.

A composition prepared by forming a milk of chalk or gypsum and .separate
solutions of glue, alum, magnesium sulphate and coloring matter, mixing and
stirring the same, then adding glycerine, oil, and alcohol, stirring, straining,
or filtering, heating to near the boiling point, and cooling slowly.

629,600— July 2.5, 1899. R. PLATZ. Composition of matter for molding purposes.

A mixture of saw dust, 17 parts; pulverized chalk, 27 parts; and water-glass,
56 parts.

632,011,— Augu^W, 1899. S. HACKELBERG. Composition for protecting panes of

glass.

A mixture of water, 30 parts; glycerine, 60 parts; sugar, 9 parts; and cumarin,
1 part; to prevent the deposit of vapor and hoar frost.

6S6,S67—Norember 7, 1899. A. P. TSCHIRNER. Dental cement.

A cement free from substances soluble in water, formed of phosphoric acid,
ammonia, and metallic oxides, such as zinc, tin, and aluminum.

636,657—Noreinber ", 1899. F. GATZSCHE. Composition of matter for soles and

heels of boots or shoes.

A mixture of waste of paper manufactories, 4 to 5 pounds; asphaltiim, 1
pound; resin, one-half pouncJ; turpentine oil, one-fourth pound; peroxide of
iron, 2 ounces; and tallow, one-fourth pound.

636,818— November II,, 1899. P. H. A. LEBER. Packing. •

An elastic and compressible packing, consisting e^entially of asbestos fibers,
cellulose, and parafliue.

637 ,106— November II,, 1899. F. GATZSCHE. Composition for making floor-cloth.

A mixture of water, 7 gallons; glue, 1 pound; wax, one-fourth pound; plum-
bic ocher, one-fourth pound; linseed oil, one-half pound; and tungstic acid,

1 ounce; made at a temperature of 80° C.

638,003— November 28, 1899. T. H. BLACKNALL AND W. T. JORDAN. Com-
posilionfor blackboards.

It consists of emery flour, about 3 per cent; pumice stone, 2 per cent; lamp-
black, 3 per cent: and chrome green, 1 per cent; mixed with an adhesive liquid,
and incorporated with 91 per cent of paper stock.

6iS,319— January 30, 1900. F. GATZSCHE. Composition for making artificial

leather fabric.

A mixture of glue, 1 part; wax, 1 part; oil, one-half part; turpentine, one-fourth
part; and alcohol, one-half part.

6I,S,251—February IS, 1900. G. MCKAY. Composition of mailer for sealing purposes.
It consists of 45 per cent of sulphur, 25 per cent of brick dust, 10 per cent of
foundry sand, 2 per cent of tin, 2 per cent of lead, 2 per cent of bismuth, 4 per
cent of plaster of paris, 5 per cent of iron filings, and 5 per cent of borax.

61,3,989— February 20, 1900. F. SEHR. Manufacture of cement.

It consists of 50 per cent of powdered hard porcelain, 35 per cent half-burnt
porcelain, 15 per cent of raw feldspar, and water glass to form a paste.

61,7,761,- Apra 17, 1900. O. H. SCHNEPPER. Plastic compound.

A composition consisting of a gelatin solution, calcium chloride, coloring
matter, and ether. Adapted to be applied to glass and give the effect of stained
glass, or as a backing for mirrors.

651.,688—Jidy 31, 1900. J. E. THORNTON AND C. F. S. ROTHWELL. SubstUute

for celluloid, etc., and process of manufacturing same.

A transparent substance consisting of a dissolved and hardened salt of alu-
minum and a fatty acid, as aluminum oleate treated with benzole.

61,5,689— July 31, 1900. J. E. THORNTON AND C. F. S. ROTHWELL. Article
applicable for various purposes, together with process of manufacturing same.
A transparent substance consisting of a dissolved and hardened salt of zinc

and a fatty acid, as zinc oleate treated with benzole.

656,252- August 21, 1900. F. G. KLEINSTEUBER. Compound for dissolving

resins.

A compound to be used with solvents of resin, consisting of 3 parts of dam-
mar dissolved in 5 parts of oil of turpentine, with a mixture of 50 parts of tung
or wood oil, 23 parts of benzole, and 5 parts of oil of turpentine added thereto;
a suitable proportion is added to the resin solvent, of benzole, alcohol, oil of
turpentine, or the like.

663,572— December 11, 1900. S. HEIMANN. Substitute/or gutla-percha.
A compound of flnely-pulverized peat, resin-oil, say, equal parts, and about

2 per cent of amyl acetate.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

277

PROCESSES.

S,(ll,a— April M. Mi/. 8. GOODWIN. ImiirnmnnUn lliemodet^luinteHlngmanu-

fndurrs qfcemrnt and Trndrring Ihrm impcrvioutlo moMure.

rcnu'iil ciuiti an ri'iidcrwl Impervious to «lr. moisture, or dcoajr by boiling
In n mixture of oil and reslu.

K.oes MnrcktS, ISSfi. A.MEUCCI. Tmprnredprocrt$/orrtmovin0mtiUTal, gummy,

ami rt-Kimms gitbt>tancfn/rom irffetabi( Jtbre,

The muti'riul is treiitol. Ilrst, in a dry slate with the pi»o)> proiliioeil by the
aetioii of nllriiniurialie acid ufion earlMiimte of lime and iron; second, in a wet
slate with the same subslaueea; and third, with a caustic alkali, with or with-
out oil.

Sl.ter— January 15.18«7. A.T.SCHMIDT. Impruvrmnil in the manufnflure qf
paper and traitmatt of paper pulp.

r«lier. impcr pulp, and textile fabrics of vegetable (Iher are treated with a
ml.\ture of glycerine, oil of vitriol, an<l water, and subsequently with an alka-
line bath, rendering them water prcxif and like parchment.

UH.iSi—Mai/ S. 1900. VV. M. BRYANT. Impromtimt in preparing the pilh nf

corn iftatks/or nitc in the art».

Vegetable pith is compressed and then coated with tenacious material, such
as cloth, imper, varnish, paint, etc.

103,199— .Vai/ 77, IS70. S. KINGAN, administrator of J. Anderson, deceased.

Jmprvvcmcni in the manufacture nf roafing-feit.

RtwAug sheets formed by saturating fibrous material with a mixture of puri-
fied usphaltum and oil, or tar, at or immediately before the felting operation.

m.UiU—April 4, J.W/. A. T. SCHMIDT. Imprtm-rnent in treating paper and

vegetable fibrOHH sni}ittanceit.

Paper (sized or unsi7.e<l), paper pulp, and other vegetable fabrics and sub-
stances are treated with a btith of the mother water of the chloridesof zinc, tin,
calcium, magnesium, or aluminium, or either of them, with or without the
admixture of carbonates and oxidesorothcr substances, and washed with water
or alkaline solution, to render them tough, impervious to water, and resistant
to the action of acids an<i alkalis. To impart flexibility and softness the
material is then treated with a solution of glycerine and water, or sugar and
water. layers of treated paper are combined with layers of vegetable cloth
similarly treated for the manufacture of belting, packing, etc.: also with emery,
jiowdered glass, sand, or otiier pulverized or granular metal or mineral for use
in the arts.

lU.SSO—.May 16, 1S71. T.TAYLOR. Improvement in the treatment 1:1/' paper and

jmper pulp.

Paper is treated in a concentrated solution of chloride of zinc, followed by
thorough washing.

liO,SSO—(klub€r SI, lg!l. D. W. HANNA. Improvement in method! qf utilizing

the teagte chloride of zinc in treating paper.

.-Vftcr paper has been treated in a bath of the solution as per No. 113,454, it is
washed in water until the amount of the liquor washed from the paper rai.ses it
to from :w° to 40° Baumt^-, The waste or surplus mot her- water is then concen-
trated by boiling to from 65° to 75° Baum£, at which gravity it is used for treat-
ing paper.

166.1,7.'' — August 10, 1S7B. W. F. NILES. Improvement inproceatet qf manufactur-
ing articles from horn aJid hoof.
Horn or hoof Is powdered, mixed with boneblack, bolted or sifted, then

slightly moistened and subjected to pressure in heated molds.

ISe.BSU— February 6, IS??. B. CARPLES AND J. M. KOEHLER. Improvement
in procfsises of treating animal bones and making artificial whalebones therefrom.
Bones are boiled in an acid bath, to remove the earthy salts, then repeatedly

washed in cold water, cut into shapes and sizes, and pre&sed until dry.

19S.S6S—July 10, 187.
sition articles.

\V.;h. dibble. Improvement in processes qf making compo-

Either organic or inorganic, pulverized or granulated substances, as sawdust
or clav or slate, are mi.xed with blood, as in equal quantities by weight, the
mass heated, and then subjected to great pressure in heated molds, forming
articles of great hardness.

19S.3SS—July 21,, IS??. \V. COURTENAY. Improvement in making hollow articles

of videauized fiber.

Tubular articles are formed from vulcanized fiber by partially dissolving the
edges in chloride of zinc, forming the tube upon a mandrel, cementing the edges
under heat and pres.sure, and wetting and snrinking upon a mold, or mandrel,
to impart the desired contour while drying.

19S,Si6— August 7. 1877. J. BLISS AND F.O. BADGER. Improvement in processes

of treating blood for fanning oniamental articles.

Blood alone is reduced to a dry and powdered condition and subjected to
heat and pressure in molds or dies.

196..'i!>!,—Xor(mber 6. 1877. T. HANNA. Improvement in the manufacture of uiiter-

proof vulranizcd JUter.

Vulcanized fiber having its substance rendered moisture proof Is formed by
submitting the article or the material to a bath of nitric acid or a mixture of
nitric and sulphuric acids, or sulphuric acid and nitrate of potash, or the fumes
arising in the manufacture of bisulphate of potash.

196,893— Xovembcr 6, IS??. T. HANNA. Improvement in the manufacture of vul-
canized fiber.
The waste or cleansing bath holding chloride of zinc in solution Is utilized

by submitting it to the acti<m of chemical reagents, as by adding toil a solution

of carbonate of soda, or any oi the alkaline carlionates, carbonate of zinc being

precipitated and sodium cfiloride remaining in solution.

197.088— November 13, IS??. J. F. BOYNTON. Improvenunt in ornamentation of

the surfaces of hard material.

The surface of shell, bone, marble, or other hard substance is dried and then
Impregnated, to a greater or less depth, with one or more halogens, such as
iodine or bromine.

110.617— December 10, 1S7S. W. J. LEWIS. Improvemeid in the manufacture of

buttons and other articles from vegetable ivory, etc.

Vegetable ivory is pulverized and subjected to pressure in heated molds, with
or without agglutlnlzing matter.

fattkt

ll.1,73»— April I, 1879. J. HI.I.VH. Impmoemntl in Ute IreatmaU 1/

proiturtion qf miMrd artiries.

Veftetahle or animal albumen In dried, piilverli«<t,an<1 M\»i,%nA
In healed mol<li> or dlen.

tl7.Uln-July 8. 1879. (i. H. SMITH. Imprmcmenl in Irtalmmt qf btme, wrgttMe
ivory, etc.

Rone, vegetable iTory, and other pnmnii hard matvrial la tmled with a nlu-
llon nf gum or other cimverling agent— n> a Miliiilon of gum In hl«nlphM« of
carlion or like volatile Milveiit— and the inulerlni then dralnol and the niprt-
lliKius convening agents removid by vnlnille wdvcuu, whereby the pom are
lilleil with trans|iar«ut or truntlileeiit material.

tSl,8M — Xonmb<r IS, W», W. F. NILES. ImpmemeiU te manufarturing

buttons, etc.

Paper pulp Is dried: separated liiloa llnty mass: uliinitol with albumen or
gelatin: dried; broken up Into small pieces or bunches, and »ubje<,'t<il to great
pressure In molds at a heat <if 100° (.'. or upward.

ltl,.03e—Frl)ruary 3, I.tso. W. F. NILES. Procttt qf manufaeturing buttons and

other artirirsfromfihrotm material arut jH/todered hijtif.

I'ap<'r pulp is dried; setiaral('<l into a linty mass; saturated with albumen or
gelatin; broken Intosmall pleeesor bunches: mlxe<l with dried powdered hoof,
one-fourth part by weight, and molded witb great pressure at a beat of 100° C.
or upward.

etS.SM— March I«. ISaO. J. BLLSS AMD F. O. BADGER. Xanitfaeture of button*

and other articles.

Coarsely powdered hoof Is moistened with a pigment, drlc<I, mixed with
dried blood, and finely ground, and subjected to high pressure In healed die*.

iiS.tn— October 19, 1880. L. A. ERODE. Manufacture qf slabs or btoettfrenn vood

or paper pulp, or from sheets made from such ptUp.

Slalwor blocks aie formed of pulp, treated with a solution of gum tragacanth
or tragacanthiu, and a paste formed of rye or whiaten flour, pitch powder
litharge, alum, and gelatine, and submitted to heat and prewure.

133,883— November t, 1880. W. H. SMITH. Art qf preparing waste vegetable prad-

uct»for ute and trantportation.

Loose fibrous or granulated vegetable material, as sawdust, bran, etc., la
heated to 65° to 150° C, to dry and soften the natural gums or resins, and then
subjected to impact In molds.

iS7,m—Fii)ruary 8, 1881. A. R. DAVIS. Method of mating artidet from laute

amber.

Amber is reduced to a plastic condition by the agency of solTents— aa bisul-
phide of carUm — and inen subjected to preasure under beat. Mottled or
blotched amber is pnxlueed by molding together ground amber with large
fragments.

139.776— April 5, 1881. W. T. HENLEY. Mode qf inmlating deetrUxd eondadors.
Submarine telegraph cables are insulated by first covering the wires with India
ru)il>er and then vulcanizing the same In ozocerite, parafflne, or similar hydro-
carbon.

SS9.79i, April 5, 1881. J. W. HYATT. Maniifacture qffattitiout material to imi-
tate ivory.

Articles are formed from an inert material, as zinc oxide, and an adhesive
agent, as shellac, by mixing, say, 8 parts of powdered shellac with 32 imrts of
a solvent, as aqua ammoitia, and 40 parts of zinc oxide, subjecting the mixture
to theaction of a mill, then desiccating the solid elements of the mixture
with, in sfime cases, a .second grinding In a dry state, and finally comprentng
and solidifying the jxiwder in heated molds.

S!a,963—July 5, 18SI. J. PATHE. Method of treating horn sharingt.

Horn shavings are soaked In a solution of Loracic acid and atsenious acid,
first cold and then warm, and the swelled horn shavings ar« then heated up to
120° C, under pressure, and united into a solid 1

SU,170—Iuly It, 1881. S. BARR. Manufacture of gas tidting.

Bichromated oil varnish is applied to the surface of a glue and glycerine com-
pound to render the same indestructible by beat and Insoluble In water.

!'.,7. 1,77— September S7, 1881. W. V. BRIGHAM. Art or method of maUng orna-
mented or variegated gelatinous sheets to imitate tortoise shell, etc.
A solution of gelatine, suitably colorc<l, is flowed upon glass, and sprinkled

with a second solution of gelatine or analagous substance, suitably colored or

Crei»ired, while liquid or semiliquid, which solutions are then 'mingled or
lende<l. The film is backed by covering It with ria|>er or cloth, which is per-
mitted to dry thereon, the film being detached from the glass after drying.

t36,0i3—Aprii i. i8Si. C. POPPENHUSEN. Molding artlela qf india-rubber and

other vtucanizabte gunts.

The mold is filled with a liquid, as linseed oil, to exclude all Hir therefrom,
and the liquid Is then displaced by pressing the compound into the mold so
filled.

t56.S7t— April iS, ISSt. F. BODINE. Method qf trtaUng pulp and the rettiUaMl

material.

Vegetable pulp is saturated with linseed or other vegetable or drying oil, and
rolled, pressed, or molded, with or without coloring material.

M7,e07—May 9. 188!. A. PARKES. Treatment qf cetlulose anil the mamtfaeture qf

articles tfurefrvm.

In the manufacture of articles of cellulose, or coating therewith, the cellulose
Is dissolved in a solution of Iodide or nitrate of zinc or nitrate of lime, moldetl
to the form required; the solvent then removed by wa.>hing and IrealliiK
with an alcoholic or vegetable naphtha solution, and the article rolled,
pressed, or calendered.

tS9.l71—June 6, l.iitl. J. A. FLEMING. Preparation qf materiatt for use in eke-

trie insulation.

Finely pulverized wood, desiccated. Is saturated or impregnated with par-
afHne wax or with a mixture of wax and resin, and molded under preawre.

tes,03i—.\orember tS, ISSt. M. MACKAY. Manufacture qf insulating comtpoundt.
A mixture of mineral wax, such aa paraffine wax or oioc«rite-wax, 1 part:
vegetable tar, 24 parts; and shellac and osbeatoa or other dry flbroua subatance,
32 parts of each, (ipiniid slate or silica or clay Ir«« from Iron la aomeUme*
employed In place of wax.

278

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

ng.SSk—June IS, ims. C. HEMJE and T. C. BRECHT. Machine /or compress-
ing plastic and other material.

The materials are subjected to a bath o£ a sprayed fluid and then to com-
pression.

281,.SS9— September i. 18SS. J. A. FLEMING. Preparation or production of insu-
lating materials or articles.

Finely pulverized wood, desiccated, is impregnated, under pressure, with a
mixture of melted bitumen or a.sphalt incorporated with a substance of the
resin type, and with or without a substance of the paraffin type or ol the
anthracene type, or of both parafHn and anthracene types.
288,300— Novemlyer IS, 1383. B. BOROWSKY. Method of uniting small pieces of
amber into a large block.

The pieces of amber are hermetically closed in a receptacle, subjected to a
light pressure, heated to a high degree of heat, about 500° C, a strong pressure
then applied, and finally it is slowly cooled.

297,659— April 29, ISSI.. R. SCHIMMEL. Process of manufacturing chair-seats of
vegetable fiber and chromic acid.

Ground rags and vegetable fioer, in equal parts, are mixed and formed into a
paste with the addition of chromic acid, 3 parts to 100 parts of water; formed
into sheets; backed with textile fabric; molded and pressed; varnished and
dried.

S01,l,05-^uly I, 188!,. F. THIEMER. Method of producing molded articles from
substances containing ligneous fibers.

Molded articles are produced from sawdust, wood shavings, wood pulp, straw,
etc., by treatment with chloride of zinc and basic chloride of magnesium, com-
pression into molds, and drying.

S(m,79S—Jidy 29, 188!,. F. TAYLOR. Method of treating vulcanized fiber and like
Tnateriat.

To impart softness and flexibility to vulcanized fiber, the fiber, after the
organic change has been produced, is subjected to the action of a solution of
deliquescent salt, as chloride of zinc, with or without glycerine or sugar water
combined therewith.

S17,SSr—May 5, 1886. C. S. LOCKWOOD AND J. W. HYATT. Process of treating

alkaline silicates, etc.

Articles are formed of an alkaline silicate with or without an inert material,
by forming a solution of the silicate, and introducing, if preferred, the inert
material, desiccating the solution, comminuting the compound, and subjecting
the powder to pressure in heated molds, with or without subsequent treatment
in a bath.

ai7,590-May S, 1885. C. S. LOCKWOOD, J. W. HYATT, AND J. H. STEVENS.

Process of treating gelatine when combined vnlli tannic acid, etc.

One hundred parts of gelatine, say, are combined with 5 to lO parts of tannic
acid, the compound dried and comminuted, and the desiccated powder sub-
jected to pressure in heated molds.
526,220— September 16, 1885. A. H. HDTH. Manufacture of compounds of iiulia-

rvbber, gutta-percha, and like matericds.

Earth wax and gums and resins are fused and maintained in a state of fusion
until all matters volatile at the fusing temperature are expelled, then cooled,
powdered and mixed with India rubber, gutta-percha, or analogous substances.

iSO, 019— November 10, 1885. A. HAMANN. Process of rendering billiard and writ-
ing chalk unbreakable.
Cubes or pieces of chalk are saturated with fluid-oil varnish or boiled linseed

oil or other drying oil.

il,S,690—June 16, 1836. O. LUGO. Producing solid compounds resembling vulcanite
from hair, etc.
Hair is subjected to heat and pressure.

S!S,760— September 28, 1886. E. C. C. STANFORD. Algin and other useful products.
Seaweed is mixed with a solution of carbonate of soda and boiled to produce
a cellulose residue; the solution is treated with sulphuric acid, or hydrochloric
acid may be used, producing alginic acid as a precipitate: the remaining solu-
tion is neutralized with alkaline earth, producing a precipitate of sulphate of
lime; the remaining solution is evaporated to a density at which sulphate of
Boda crvstallizes out as Glauber's salts; and the mother liquor is finally evapor-
ated to'drjTiess and the residue carbonized, forming kelp substitute.

$65,998— January 11, 1887. M. KAMAK. Treating horn.

Horn is subjected to the action of a solution of water, sugar of lead, and vine-
gar until it assumes a light brown hue. To give it the appearance of mother-
of-pearl it is then introduced into a solution of mtiriatic acid.

359,156— March 8, 1887. C. JACKSON. Manufacture of hardened asbestos.

Fibrous asbestos is combined with a binding material, as shellac, rendered
liquid in a solvent; the solvent is evaporated; the material pressed in molds;
exposed to heat to perish the binding material or change it so that it is no longer
soluble in the solvent; when the article is simultaneously subjected to heat and
heavy pressure.

366,31,1— July 12,183}. H.W.MORROW. Method of treating vulcanized fiber.

To impart softness and flexibility to vulcanized fiber, the fiber, after the
organic change has been produced, is subjected to the action of a solution of
deliquescent suit, as chloride of calcium, with or without glvcerine or sugar
water combined therewith. (See 302,795. )

370,61,5— September 27, 1887. H. ORDENSTEIN. Manufacture of articles from

plaster-of-paris or other compositions or materials.

A formed article of plaster of paris or other porous material is treated with
camaub-wax to fill the pores and strengthen and harden and give a polishable
surface.

S! 1,550— October 18, 1887. E. T. L. CLARK. Process of hardening and preserving
plaster-of-paris cast^ and molds, and making them imperious to'water.
The casta or molds are immersed in a solution of borax and then treated with

white or paraffinc wax.

3Sa,tlO— September 11, 1SS8. C. A. FAURE. Method of preparing asbestos.

A sheet of asbestos is immersed in a soluble salt, as chloride of calcium or
chloride of barium, dried, and again immersed in a second solution containing
a silicate, such as the silicate of soda or a fluosilicate, whereby it is rendered
insoluble in water and acid and its strength is Increased.

396,083— December 25. 1838. W. SIEMENS. Process of manufacturing insulated

conductors.

The fibrous matter covering wire strands is impregnated with caoutchouc, oil,
or similar liquid by drying the covered wires under vacuum by means of sul-
phuric acid or other hygroscopic substance, and then admitting the heated
caoutchouc, oil, or other substance into the vacuum chamber containing the
wire.
1,05,201— June 11, 1839. B. E. CHURCH. Process of treating asbestos.

Broken asbestos is mixed with a solution of rubber and napntha which has
been mechanically distended bv water— as by mechanically mixing a solution
of rubber in naphtha with water— then the water is removed by pressure, and
the mass is formed into shape by heat and pressure; the asbestos may be soaked
with water and the india-rubber solution then mixed therewith.
UO.OiS-August 27. 1SS9. J. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS. Process of

producing refractory compounds.

A refractory crystalline compound for incandescent illumination is produced
by pulverizing and mixing a strontium compound or salt with one or more
pulverized mineral substances and with a fl^ux composed of a fluoride or a
fluorine compound, making the mixture plastic and molding it into shape, then
subjecting the molded material to a moderate drying heat, and finally to a high
temperature.
1,19,779— January 21, 1890. G. KOLLER. Process of treating glue and gelatine

molds.

Glue or gelatine molds are treated with strong oxidizers, as an aqueous solu-
tion of anhydrous chromic acid, and afterwards exposed to light; or the glue
may be dissolved in an aqueous solution of an energetic oxidizer, the mold
formed, and afterwards exposed to the action of light.
iao,76S— February !,, 1890. W. BOOTH. Art of manufacturing articles from wood

pulp.

Wood pulp is reground, after it has been subjected to the indurating pickle
and dried, and the ground product is then compressed into the desired form.

1,22.760— March 4, 1390. R. P. FIRST. Article of chemically treated fibrous material

and mode of making the same.

Shaped articles composed of laminated forms of chemically treated fibrous
material are produced by producing a laminated body from a chemically
treated sheet of fiber, and then subjecting these lamlnse to endwise pressure,
whereby they are swaged into the desired form.
1,28,925— May 27 , 1390. I. W. MARSHALL, p-occss of treating fibrous material.

In washing sheets of fibrous material which have been treated with acids, the
sheets are confined under pressure between plates having corrugated faces with
or without perforations.
1,29,999— June 10, 1890. C. A. CATLIN. Plastic campositUm.

A fibrous material is combined with a cementing agent in a pulverulent state
by mixing the substances together with water and after a thorough mixture,
removing the surplus moisture, and compacting with heat and pressure.

1^7 fiU— September 23, 1890. F. L. RAWSON. Method of impregnaXing parts of
electncal apparatuses.

Hollowed or cored insulating parts of electrical apparatus formed of hydraulic
cement are impregnated with heavy, oily, or resinous matter, by means of a
closed, heated vessel placed with the molded article with the impregnating
matter around it.

iSS,a09— October U, 1890. T. A. EDISON. Method of insulating electrical con-
ductors.

Balata or similar gum is prepared for Insulating purposes by dissolving in a
solvent of chloroform and passing chlorine gas through the solution until the
hydrogen of the material is sufficiently replaced by the halogen, if the chlorl-
nation is carried so far that the material is brittle, a small quantity of the gum
solution not chlorinated is mixed therewith.

0,1,370— December 2, 1890. E. T. GREENFIELD AND J. NAGEL. Process of
working high-boiling hydrocarbons for impregnating purposes.
For impregnating fibrous, porous, or cellular bodies, a high-boiling hydro-
carbon is maintained in a liquid condition by adding from time to time a
lower-boiling hydrocarbon to supply the volatile matters evaporated.

1,11,951— December 2, 1990. G. W. GOETZ. Process of and apparatus for com-
minuting materials of a viscous or pasty nature.
Material of a viscous, pasty, or gummy nature is comminuted by subjecting

it to motion and attrition in a closed receptacle under a reduced temperature,

where the material becomes friable.

U,S,t85— January f7 , 1891. F. EGGE. Methodof molding amber.

Pieces of amber are molded into an integral article by the application of heat
and an automatic pressure constantly and uniformly applied; as by the action
of a weight applied through a lever.

1,60,056— Septeniber 22, 1891. E. FAHRIG. Process of manufacturing a composition

applicable for electrical insulating purposes, etc.

Properly prepared pulp — cellulose or linen pulp — is beaten up with manila
fiber; then there is added a soap solution and the mass is treated with a pre-
cipitate until precipitation shows in the whole mass; the pulp formed into
sheets; powdered with an insulating powder; subjected to pressure and dried;
treated with an insulating solution; and again subjected to heavy pressure.

1,68,222— February 2, 189i. H. B. GARRIGUES. Process of molding plastic material.
Plastic material is packed in foil oy introducing the material into molds of
thin foil while the latter are suspended in open-mouthed pockets, reducing the
diameter of the article by means of cold, and afterwards closing the open ends
of the molds by turning the edge of a blank over the end of the core and mold.

!SS,6!S— October 4, 1892. A. H. S. DYER. Process of making artificial mica siteets

for electrical insulation.

Overlapping mica scales are laid on a freshly varnished foundation plate, the
sheet is varnished, and additional layers of mica are laid in a similar manner
until the required thickness is obtained, when the sheet is heated to evaporate
the solvent of the varnish, rolled, submitted to heavy pressure, and cooled.

1S3.653— October H, 1892. C. W. JEFFERSON. Molding mica forms for electrical

insulators.

Laminated mica sheets are formed and set by cementing together laminae of
mica scales with overlapping edges, compressing the sheet into the desired
form while the cement is wet, drying the cement by evaporating the solvent
thereof, and chilling while under compression.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

279

i9t.<m-nbruary II, IStS. M. 8ICHKL. Method n/produelng dattal eemenl.

MHalllc iiliinilnuin la first lilwHilvert in Kl»<'<al phoiiphoric iiclil to iirtMliicc ■
pluwplmtc ot Hliiiiiiiumi; next oxide of /.liic in mibjivlcd to h wliiic lii'at to
n'ducc it to II K'liniii.v conilliioti. tin- two arc ihIxikI ami tlin (■oiniMjiiiiil «til>-
Jecteil to heat, then ciKiled and pulverized, more of ttiu Kiimmy oxide addwl,
and tlie whole mixed in « ixnvd.Ted pon<lition', and finally, when nwly for
lino, nuftlclent of the said phosphate of aluminum Is added to rcduee the whole
to a plastic rondttlon.

Uii.Xtil—ApriU, ma. R. REIMAN. Primtt qf manttfadurtng artOIHal bone.

Nnturul tionc ortmnc meal Is chemically dissolved, the elcmentx precipitated
filtertKi, and w«s1kkI, and then mixeil with albumen, alumina sulphate, ami
cellnlOM) In solution, and subsequently partly drle<l and subjecteil to a hlKh
temperature, at the siunv time keeping the mass under stronn preaaurc,

l,97.MI.-.Vay IS. 1893. C. W. JEFFERSON. Procett <-/ viaking mica innUalina

pUU'S.

Mica shcet.s are distributed evenly upon and within liquid cement by shower-
ing them thereon throusrh the air at a sufficient helKht so that the sheets be-
come NUbslantially parallel to a horizontal plane bemre reaching the cement-
say in (cct— and the exce.>w of cement is then expelled by pressure, the plates
dried, and the surfiice ground until parallel: successive showerings of mica
sheets are made into the cement, iron foundation sheets being Introduced be-
tween the showcrlngs, and the mass divided up Into separate i>arts.

601.Sii—JiUy 11. 1S9S P. C. DAME AND L. PRUD'HON. Method qf making aHi-
fieUU ifhalfbotte.

Animal hair Is subjected to a softening bath, as of lime and potagh, then im-
mersed in a bath of acetic acid, and Anally subjected to pressure.

fOS.eSS—Noivmlxr U, 1S9S. E. THOMSON. Ineulating componUion.

Silicioua or like material, as fine kaolin and soluble silicate of soda, is applied
to sheets of paper, the sheets piled together and dried; they may be baked and
the paper carl)onized, with layers formed of more or less vitrified silicious
material.

517,011— .Varrh SO. lS9i. J. C. PEABODY. Method of making indurated articlet

from plastic material.

WockI fiber or paper stock In dry condition is mixed in the presence of heat
with linseed oil and resin, and then powerfully compressed, while still warm
and plastic, in cold molds.

SS0,2SS—.Vay SJ, lS9t,. K. WITZ. Manufacture of plastic articles.

Paper board or like material is impregnated with hellebore juice to increase
its elasticity and tenacity, prior to subjection to pressure between dies.

Btt,tiX—JtUy S. 1891.. A. F. TINNERHOLM AND C. F. PETERSON. Procett of

manufacturing insulating material.

Mica plates are built up by forming superpcaed layers of mica scales covered
with finely jpowdercd gum or resin, and subjecting the combined layers to heat
and pressure.

lS9.90i~Non-mber *7, 189L W. GRISCOM, JB. Method of compounding vulcaniz-

able cnmpounds, and vulcanizing and applying same.

Vulcanizable compounds containing such plastic material as candle tar are
compounded by heating the plastic matter to a melted condition, separately
melting the sulphur, and then mixing the melted masses: the compound is
then applied in permanent adherence to fabricated material.

SSO.HIT—December 11. 1S9U. A. N. FORD. Process of manufacturing insulating

cumpimtionsfor ekctriccU purposes.

Fibrous material is saturated with a partially oxidized drying oil, then dried,
and then repeatedly saturated or coated and dried until the miuss has increased
in weight from 60 to 200 per cent; when the material is ground to a homogeneous
mass, mixed with gutta-percha or like material, reground, and formed into
blocks or sheets.

SS0.9&8— December 18, 1S9L B. McCABE AND A. THAYER. Method of molding

vegetable fOtrous material.

Vegetable fibrous material is first treated with acid, then forced through aper-
tures in a bead, whereby it Is formed into strips or strings, which are deposited
In a plastic condition in a mold, compressed, and finally immersed in water.

SSS,7l,e— February 5, 1S95. R. REIMAN. Process of manufacturing arti/icialbone.
Natural bone Is macerated, the liquid separated from the organic solids, the
gelatine separated from the residue of the organic matter, and the gelatine
product is then combined with a chromate and a drying oil, and a material that
will give body to the composition.

6SS,te5— April SO, 1895. H. P. LANE AND E. FOLK. Process of making maided
articles from wood pulp.

The article is molded of wood pulp, then impregnated with oil and resin,
baked, and then subjected to heavy pressure between smotjth mold surfaces,
warmed sufficiently to soften the coating, but not the material.

559,928— May SH, 1895. J.A.WHEELER. Process of molding fibrous pulp.

Fibrous pulp, moistened with water, is mixed with sodium silicate, and then
with pulverized calcined niagnesite sufficient to convert it into a doughy body;
then with pulverized qiiicklime: then pulverized resins or gums are added, and
the ma.ss heated and molded, dried or baked, and subjected to a tiath of a solu-
tion of chloride of magnesia or other chlorides.

5t.9.SSJ.—X(m:mber 5, 1S95. C. F. PETERSON. Method of making insiUator-rlngs.
In forming flanged insulator rings of built-up pieces of mica, the pieces of mica
are bent and assembled to form the predetermined ring and cemented together
as the irregular structure is built up: the structure is then subjected to pressure
and heat in a mold, and chilled.

561.938— June 9. 1896. T. G. B. GOLDMANN. Process of making articles from

homogeneous plastic compositions.

A binding substance is dissolved in a water-soluble solvent, such as alcohol;
then mixed with a filling material and pigment in finely divided state. In pro-
portion to their specific weights in dry state: next water is added to the mix-
ture under continuoas stirring until the iiulmately mixed ma.ss of binding
8Ut»itance and filling material is separated from the solvent and precipitated
as a thick paste; when the water Is removed, the paste dried, pulverized, and
compressed while subjected to heat.

e7i.79S— January 5, 1897. A. N. FORD. Art of making oU fabrics.

Fibers are loosely separated and repeatedly Immersed in boiling oil so as to
coat the separate fibers; the oil oxidized after each immersion by the action of
air. with the fibers maintained In their loosely separated condition, and the
coated fibers finally ground to form a homogeneous mass.

tS»,tl«-Augtuiat,lltn. J.ORAYAMDC.H.Ci»K. />n>en> ^ moMaa tanOattu

material. ' '

Piilp Is forme<l Into shape, healed In a hath of molten snlnbur. imo saU«it«d
U> hi-at under prcwiue, aad aubavqiMoUjr Immenad In • <wUl telb.

58».M7-fleplemlier 7, MV7. W. O. BBI8TOW. MMod <4 and mmm M molMmo

jAastic material. '

A jwrtlal vacuum is created beneath a flexible tianie placed over a natUim.
the plastle material la then cast within the llaue thus drawn lnb> the mold;
lianleni^t; and the pressnre Is then restored beneatb tJao tissue, (ondoc It Inm
the pattern and releasing the cast from the tlasoe.

595,168— />rermber 7, tSK. L. OROTE. Pmem qf mmutfaelmrtMt siofcl«6te i

or arttcleMfrom atbesio:

Asbestos Is steeped In a bath composed of a solution of 1 part of glue, 6 parts of
a solution of soluble glass of 20° to icfi Baum«. and 7 to « paru ol a solution of W
percent formaldehyde: It la then compn'ssed to remove superBuoti* moMora,
stibji^'tcd to a bath of u salt of alumina, dried, pulverized, compnsnd, and tiMn
dried first In the open air and then In an oveti.

Sl8eiit-Janwirv St, ISDg. V. LAMPLOCOH. Pmteu V stamtforturtno a sm»-
stanct having insulating properties.

Vegetable fiber is subnillled in presence of oxidliable reslDoos bodies and a
proportion of nonoxidi/able oil to a gradually-Increasing heat until all air
dampness, and volatile mailers are driven oft; the action of the beat Is con-
tinued until the nonoxidi/jible oil Is di-stroved and until the vecetable flber Is
changed Into a home>geneous mass, when the fluid [lortlon Is remOTed. air is
introduced under pressure to oxidize the material, and it Is prcMed and desic-
cated.

eit.SK— April U, 1S»9. H. BRUNSWIG. Method qf transforming ttirout etUutote
into a dense material.

Fibrous cellulose is reduced to an impalpable condition in water, tbe water
drained from the mass, with or without boiling to expel tbe air, and molded
and dried.

6tS,eo»-Aprtl U, 1899. C. IVES. Procett oftreaHng geUMn, glyeerin, md frfaAro-
mate qf potash.

A substance of rubber or gutta-percha like character Is prodnced from a com-
position of gelatine, glycerine.and blchromateof potaah.with which adulteraclnc
material may be combined, by mixing the Ingredients in as nearly an anbrdroaa
state as possible, whereby chemical action between the bichromate of potash
and gelatine is sufficiently inactive to allow lime for molding the compoilttOD
under pressure, and heating it while under pressure to 95° to 150° C.

6l5.S7t— May t3, 1899. J.A.WHEELER. Process of moldtng fitnmu fnOp.

To give more body and increase the solidity, fibrous pulp Is mixed with pul-
verizcd incombustible material; moistened with hot water; sodliun silicate
added, the mass kneaded, and quicklime added thereto: and pulverized resioa
are mixed with the mass while heated, with or without the subsequent addition
of calcined pulverized magnesite soaked In chloride of magnesia.

6X5,1.50— May tS, 1899. J. KAISER. Process of mantifaduHng maUriaU ItmOar to
wood from fibrous refuse.

Fibrous refuse is fluxed with lye, then saponified with resin, and subjected to
pres-sure, when ground wood and an agglutlnant, as grape sugar, is mixed with
the said material and the mixture dried and kneaded.

631,719— August es, 1899. A. IMSCHENETZKY. Refraetorji material.

The process of forming refractory material consisting of asbestos, with or
without the admixture of other material, bound together by means of silica,
consists In first saturating articles of asbestos with a solution of sodium silicale
mixed with scMlIum bicarbonate, then saturating the same first with a sodiiun-
silicale solution, and then with a sodlum-blcarlMnate solution.

6W.715-Januaru t, 1900. P. W. WIERDSMA AND 1. KUIPERS. Process rf

treating vegetable u^aste.

Vegetable waste— produced in the manufacture of potato flour— Is treated for
the removal of dirt and matters soluble In water; then dried and disintegrated:
mixed with resin or other gum to render the mass waterproof; dried; reduced
to a powder: and molded under pressure.

61,3.011— February «, 1900. A. SMITH. Process qf producing material nikMe far

electric insuiatioti or other purposes.

Two parts (by measure) of acetic paraldehyde and 1 part of methylated
spirit are mixed; 3 parts of liquid carbolic acid, which has been liquified by
adding 5 per cent of water, added: and to the mixture. In a cicaed vessel,
there is added in small doses, while I'oollng, 3 to 6 parts of methylated spirit,
which has been saturated with hydrocbloric-acid gas; and the material la
molded; the molded article may be impregnated with paraffin.

6i7,119—Apra 10,1900. T.SEEHAUSEN. Process qf compounding jmingt for rub-
ber tires.

Light ground vulcanized rubber is mixed with resin oil, heated for two hours
at a pressure of 45 pounds per square inch; then there is added a second mix-
ture of ground vulcanized patent rubber waste, which has first been washed In
water and dried with hx^fati fibres, .solar oil, and turpentine; and flnaltr there
Is added to this mass a mixture of India rubt>er, sulphur, ammonia, soda, aiid
neutral acetate of lead.

eSt.Ui—June 19. 1900. A. SKROBANEK. Procett qf producing artificial itood.

It is produced by cleaning and carding peat, separating the huniic and ulmic
acids as Ixinites and silicates, mixing the )>ea^mull with a filler and a harden-
ing material — such as a composition of silica, alumina, and s*Mllnni U^rate and
silicate— forming alternate layers therewith and with the eanli'd filxr laid In
different directions and molding the compound; the mull is treated with a hot
solution of sulphiunc acid and alum.

e51„6i6— July 31, 1900. F. G. KLEINSTEUBER. Method qf distotving rttins.

There Is mixed with the resin solvent a suitable quantity— 2 to 10 per cent at
the resin— of a compound composed of a solution ol dammar and tung or wood
oil in benzole, and oil of tiupentine with or without oil of rosemary.

65i.9Sl—July 31, 1900. W. J. CORDNER. i^oeess <^ wtamtifitetarinf m^^nlltUM

applicable for eteeirie insulation.

Rhea flber Ls treated In a solution of silicate of soda of 15° to 30° Baum^, dried,
saturated with a heavy hydrocarlxin. such as ivsln oil and the like, the sumlus
heavy hydnxairbon removed, the saturated fiber treated with beat to trsnsflirm
It into a heavy hydnicarbon cellulooe. which is dl«inlcgrale<l and mixed with
gums, resins, ozidizable oils, and tbe like to form a composite material.

280

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

655,130— Jutii 31, 1900. R. M. THeMPSON. Method oj treating wurtziUte.

The mineral is subjected to tlie action of steam heat to reduce it to a softened
or fused state.

855,131— July 31, 1900. R. M. THOMPSON. Wurlzilite method and product.

The mineral is softened, as by the action of neat, and combined with a hard-
ening material, as mica, asbestos, or soapstone, and afterwards a quantity of
Bulphur.

657,818— September 11, 1900. M. FEEMERY AND J. URBAN. Manufacture of

cellulose.

Cellulo.se material, such as cellulose, hydrate of cellulose or hj'drocellulose, is
subjected to an energetic preliminary treatment with reducing or oxidizing
bleaching media, such as sulphurous-acid salts or ehlorine in the form of hypo-
chlorite, and then subjected to the action of an ammoniacal solution of copper.

659,S58^0ctober 9, 1900. J. G. BIERICH. Process of producing homogeneous horn

mbsianccs.

Horn cuttings and shapings are cleaned, mixed with glycerine, and the mix-
ture subjected to a temperature of 100° C. for about forty minutes and at a
pressure of about two hundred atmospheres, the process being carried on under
exclusion of air.

66S.929—Dece}iiber /,, 1900. W. GELINEK. Process of manufacturing solid sub-
stances froyn fibrous material and product thereof.
A composition of fibrous material, with coal tar, colophony, asbestos, kaolin,

infusorial earth, and lime, compressed when hot in molds under high pressure.

GROUP XVI.— ESSENTIAL OILS.

ESSENTIAL OILS, PERFUMES, AND FLAVORS.

iet,5£9— April 27, 1876. A. G. CAMPBELL. Improvement in portable toilet waters

and extracts.

Fragrant attars are absorbed by carbonate of magnesia and then reduced to a
powder, the same being adapted to readily produce toilet waters and extracts
by lixiviation with alcohol. Thus, for cologne water, a mixture of 3 ounces of
attar of bergamot, 2 drams of attar of neroli, and 1 dram of attar of rose is poured
on 4 ounces of carbonate of magnesia.

iOO.ies— February 12, 1878. D. M. BUIE. [Reissue: 10,SS8— Junes, 1883.) Proc-
ess of manufacturing oils from organic sttbstances.
Steam and carbonic acid are injected into ;he retort containing the materials.

such as pitch pine, sassafras, juniper, myrtle, peanuts, cottonseed, etc., and

heated to a high temperature.

SSO,Z!t,— November 10,1885. A.M.TODD. (Meissue: 10.705— March 30, 1886.) Proc-
ess of obtainiiig menthol.
A crystalline product is obtained from the oil of meniha piperita by congealing

it to a jelly-like form and draining the oil therefrom; the crystals may be fused

and subjected then to a second congealing and draining and a gradual raising

in temperature.

556,9U— March 24, 1896. J. C. W. F. TIEMANN. Process of converting compounds

of the citral series into isomers.

Compounds of the citral (geranium) series are subjected for some time to the
action of dilute sulphuric acid, producing isomers having a lower b. p. and a
higher sp. gr. than the original bodies.

557,1^1— March 31, 1896. L. R. SCAMMEL. Process of obtaining eucalyptol.

A solution of phosphoric acid is added to the eucalyptus-oil or other volatile
oil containing eucalyptol, and the eucaiyptol phosphate formed is then decom-
posed by hot water.

688,766— August 2U, 1897. M. EKENBERG. Process of meOcing perfumes.

Perfumes, contained in closed vessels, have an inodorous hydrocarbon or ether
added, as butane, having a boiling point below 30° C, to be readily vaporized
at the temperature of the hand or the air of a living room.

600,iS9— March 8, 1S9S. E. DE LAIRE. lonotie derivative.

A new product, an isomerid of ionone, b. p. 140° C, of the odor of violets, is
produced by treating ionone or pseudo-ionone with a concentrated condensing-
acid, such as sulphuric acid.

601,193— March S2, 1898. J. ZIEGLER. Essence of violets.

Citral, or an oil containing citral, is treated in a mixture nf acetone and diluted
alcohol, with an active oxidizing agent, as a saturated solution of chloride of
limeorbarium peroxide, and the product furtheroxidized by Iroiling with ferric
chloride.

617.552— January 10, 1899. P. BARBIER.
making same.

Synthetic violet-oil and process of
A new product, CiiHj,0, a yellowish oil, b. p. 162° C, under pressure of

A new prmiuci, ^jjin24U, a yeiiowisn oil, D. p. iv^ v., unaer pressure

10 m. m., is produced by condensing an aldehyde of the formula CjoHijO

citral, with methylpentenone (oxide of mesityl) under the influence of an
alkaline reagent, and transforming the product into an isomeric ketone bv the
action of an acid condensing agent.

626,585— June 6, 1899. J. ZIEGLER. Synthetic violet-oil and process of nmking

same.

A new product, b. p. 138° to 149° C, under pressure of 12 m. m. It is produced
by heating a mixture of acetone, lemon-grass oil, alcohol, cobaltous nitrate, and
chloride of lime; distilling off first the lighter and bad-smelling portions, then
the essential oils, mixing these oils with sodium bisulphate and fractionally
distilling.

8S7 ,S09—November U, 1899. I. KLIMONT. Process of making ionone.

Citral and acetylacetone In acid solution are heated with reagents adapted
to combine with the water, and the oily matter is separated and purified.

650,028— May 22, 1900. J. C. W. F. TIEMANN. Process of decomposing ionone.

The ionone is boiled with an alkali sulphite in the presence of a binding
agent for any liberated alkaline hydrate; the solution .subjected to steam dis-
tillation; and alkali added to the remaining solution to liberate the alpha
ionone.

ARTIFICIAL MUSK.

U2,5iS— October 8, 1889. E. SCHNAUFER AND H. HUPFELD. Process of mak-
ing artificial musk.

An oil having the formula Cij Hi; NO,, adapted for use as a substitute for
musk, is made by digesting a mixture of metaxylol and isobuty alcohol with

chloride of zinc, nitrating the resulting hydrocarbon, and separating the oil by
dissolving out extraneous matter.

1,16.710— Decemher 10, 1889. A. BAUR. Process of making artificial musk.

Toluol is mixed with butyl chloride: the product of the reaction diluted with
water and distilled with steam; the vapors treated with a mixture of fuming
nitric and sulphuric acid; and the product, a substitute for musk, crystallized
from ftlcolTol.

i51.8i7—May 5, 1891. A. BADR. Artificial mtisk.

A new product, being a trinitrated hydro carbon derived from toluene or its
homologues, in solid crystalline form. It is made, for example, from toluene,
or xylene mixed witha"butyl halogen compound, distilled, treated with fuming
nitric and sulphuric acid, and crystallized with alcohol.

iSl.OSS— August SO, 1892. A. BAUR. Artificial musk and process of making the

same.

A new product, being a trinitro-derivative of the butylated or analogous meta-
eresol in a -.vhite crystalline form, is produced by mixing an ether of metacresol
or other substituted phenol, with a metallic chloride, as aluminium chloride:
heating, mixing with water, and isolating the butylated eresolether, thereby
obtaining an aromatic, colorle-ss liquid; introducing the ether into fuming nitric
(or nitric and sulphuric) acid; heating, and crystallizing from a solvent, as
alcohol.

536,321,— March 26, 1895. A. BAUR. Artificial musk.

A new compound, the trinitro-derivative of butylhydrindene, in the form of
white needles, sparingly soluble in alcohol having a m. p. 139°-140° C, is pro-
duced by heating an ethol-aromatic hydrocarbon, such as hydrindene, with a
chloride, such as butylic chloride, in presence of a metallic chloride, and nitrat-
ing the product.

51,6,086— September 10, 1895. A BISCHLER. Artificial musk and process of mak-
ing same.

A new compound, a white crystalline body, insoluble in water and soluble in
alcohol and ether, is produced by forming a cyanide derivative of an aromatic
butylic hydrocarbon — such as cyanide of butyl toluene — heating the same in a
mixture of fuming nitric and sulphuric acid, and cooling and precipitating
from a solvent, as alcohol.

559,783— May 5, 1896. A. MULLER-JACOBS. Process of making artificial musk.

A saturated solution of the soluble parts of kerosene or naphtha in ice-cold
sulphuric acid is nitrated, then gradually heated to 65° to 82° C., neutralized
with ammonia or other alkali, and the neutralized product, mixed with a
neutral resin soap. Is precipitated by means of a solution of a metallic salt, as
sulphate of aluminum.

560,771— May 26, 1896. A. BAUR. Artificial musk.

A new product, crystallizing in white needles, m. p. 137° C, insoluble in
water and soluble in organic solvents as alcohol, is produced by treating
butylxylene in the presence of aluminium chloride with homologous fatty
chlorides such as acetyl chloride, and nitrating the ketone thus obtained.

602,961— April 26, 1898. C. SCHMID. Process of making artificial musk.

A new product, derived from resins, a heavy orange-red oil, is produced by
distilling certain fossil resins, such as copal, amber, or retin resin, with super-
heated steam; treating the distillate of wax-like or oily consistency with
oxidizing reagents, as a mixture of potassium bichromate and .sulphuric acid;
neutralizing the filtered mass by ammonia and alcohol; driving oS thealcohol,
and extracting with ether.

For other products of this group, see Group XVIII, " Fine Chemicals."

GROUP XVII.— COMPRESSED AND LIQUEFIED GASES.
HYDROGEN.

229,339— June 29, 1880— C. M. TESSIE DU MOTAY. Process and apparatus for

manufacturing liydrogen pas.

A current of watergas and steam is passed through a body of highly heated
lime, thereby converting the mixture into hydrogen and carbonic acid, and
then through a body of lime at a lower temperature whereby the carbonic acid
is absorbed. The carbonate of lime is reconverted for reuse bv burning in its
presence a gas containing hydrogen.

229,31,0— June 29, 1880. C. TESSIE DU MOTAY. Process for the production of
hydrogen gas.

A current of coal gas is passed through a .secondary highlvheated converting-
generator, thereby increasingits volume, subsequently said gas is passed through
a highly heated body of lime, decomposing during the passage the hydrogen
compounds contained in the gas, in connection with water vapor, and then
the products are passed through lime at a lower temperature.

366.081— July 5, 1887. H. H. EDGERTON. Obtaining hydrogen from water gas.
Hydrogen is separated from the heavier constituents of water gas by dialysis.

CHLORINE.

506.61,0— October 10, 1893. E. KNIETSCH. Package of liquid chlorine.

A new article, liquid chlorine in an iron or steel vessel, and sufficiently anhy-
drous not to attack the iron or steel.

6W,565—May 15, 1900. C. E. ACKER. Process of vianvfaeturing caustic alkali and
halogen gas.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

OXYGEN.

66,279— Jidy 2, 1867. H. A. ARCHEREAU. Improved mode of preparing oxygen

and applying the same to useful purposes.

Sulphuric acid is heated and decomposed into sulphurous acid, water, and
oxygen, and the oxygen collected and compressed for use in producing high
temperatures in metallurgic operations.

71.657— December 3, 1867. B. R. SMITHSON. Improved apparatus for generating
oxygen gas.

Sulphuric acid is fed into a retort filled with pumice stone maintained at a
red heat; a washer absorbs the sulphurous-acid vapors, the oxygen passing to a
receiver.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

281

se.OJl—Januari/ M, JS69. O. M. PHILLIPS. Imprmvmmt in the manufactun of
oxygcn-ffcu. ^

In the prodiiptlnii or ox.vKon gnu fnim niknilne inniifrnnnt)'!) a partlnl vacuum
Is (onned «l I'crUitn IntvrvalH In ihe retort tu fnollltatp f(u" (JoncrHtlon.

S07M1—Orliitirr 21. ISSi. M. HKRZOO. Aiiparaliit /or Ihr iiialynlH t^f ait.

A (llnlyziiig n)>tinmtii.s tor air has a scries of chanibeni seimraled by n serloinf
colloid or caoutchouc septa with an air pump for creating a suction and elimi-
nating the nitrogen and producing superoxygenated air.

iSi.si.'.—Julii fS. 1»90. A. BRIX. PronnH t^ nbtainlHg oiyffen/rom air.

Barium o.xlde Is licatwl in a retort to from ftVr to W)0° C; air Is then admitted
until peroxidation takes place, when the air supply Is shut off, and the tmrlum
Is deoxidized by reducing the pressure without changing the temperature of the
retort.

l,in.777~A'<»tmberl8. 1S90. F.SALOMON. Prorem nj nblaining oxygen.

.\ mixture of n metallic oxide, such as lead monoxide or lead carbonate, and
on alkaline earth, such as lime, 1« heated In a current of air so as to cause
oxygeu to be absorbed, which Is then expelled by a current of carbonic-acid
gas.

500.R97—Juty i. 1S9S. G. WEBB, Jr., AND G. H. RAYNER. Proce»>of nuxiinq

oxygeu.

For the production of ogygcn gas from air a composition la used, formed of
caustic s<xla dissolvwl in hot water with oxide of manganese and manganate of
soda added, nil in equal parts; the muss being then hinted and evajHirnlwl to
dryness, and then heated to a tempernture in excess of that of the oxygen
manufacture. After cooling, the mass Is broken into pieces and rolled in iiow-
dered oxide of manganese prior to use.

bt,B.»7i—Se(>lanber 10. 1S9S. J. I'URVES. Process of vmking gas and apptmitus

therefor.

Fuel gas is made with denitrogenized air to increose its calorific [wwer.
Oxjrgen produced from air by the action of a metallic oxide— as barium oxide,
which will absorb oxygen from air when heated, and liberate Ihe absorbed
oxygen when raised to a higher temperature— is fed to the pro<lu(er, the heat
of the hot gases being used to heat the oxygen retorts. The latter are made
double and revolvnble, and the generation of oxygen continuous by the
periodic reversal of the retorts and alternate raising and lowering of their
temperatures.

576.9I.'>— February 9. 1S97. A. SWEETSER. Apparatus for malting oxygen.

As a new article of manufacture for feeding into an oxygen-generating
apparatus, oxygen-yielding material is formed into cakes or rods provided with
a covering that is nonconductive of heat.

SS.S.ei.'i— August Si. 1.197. E. B. STUART. Compound for separating oxygen and
metitod of iiKtking same.

.\ manganate and an alkali— as binoxide of manganese, 24 parts, and caustic
soda, 7ti parts — the alkali being in excess of that ncccs,sary to form a manganate,
are melted; the compound being liquid and nonvolatile above the temperature
at which steam forms and below that which decomposes steam.

SSS.6tS— August «, 1897. E. B. STUART. Process qf and compound for sepa-
rating oxygen.

.\tmospheric air and steam are alternately passed through a fused mixture of
a manganate and an alkali salt, as n chloride of an alkaline earth capable of
fusing and remaining in a permanent liquid form when fused.

588,616— August U, 1897. E. B. STUART. Oxygen-separating compound and

metliod of making same.

.\ nonaqueous oxygen-absorbing preparation, containing an oxygen-absorb-
ing material, as oxide of manganese, and sufficient fusible material, as caustic
soda, to cause the ma.ss to liquefy and remain so at a temperature below that
which decomposes steam, is formed by heating maiiganese, its oxide or salt,
with fusible material, in the presence of oxygen at a temperature between that
at which a manganate forms and that at wliich steam decomposes, and adding
the fusible material until the mass becomes liquid.

588,617— August Si, 1897. E. B. STUART. Method of obtaining oxygen and
nitrogen from air.

Air and steam are alternately pas.sed through a fusible chemical, such as a
manganate of soda, In liquid form.

NITROGEN.

tm.OSe—Atigust 13, 1878. G. A. TREUTLER. Improvement in processes for the

continuous prqjnration of nitrogen gas.

Nitrogen gas is continuously prepared by forcing air through iron tilings
mixed with a hygroscopic material and moistened with ferrous sulphate,
whereby the oxygen is absorbed from the air and the iron salt is converted into
ferric stilphate, and the latter is then deoxidized by the action of the metallic
iron.

!t6,7SO— March SS, 1880. T. B. STILLMAN. Manufacture qf nitrogen gat.

In the manufacture of nitrogen gas, to remove ail traces of oxygen, the gas Is
passed through melted sodium, potassium, or other metal having a high amnity
lor oxygen.

S16,6SS— April so, 1880. T. B. STILLMAN. Manufacture of nitrogen gas.

Nitrogen gas is purified and oxygen removed therefrom by passing it through
an apparatus containing anhydrous phosphoric acid, anhydrous sulphuric acid,
or anhydrous chlorideof zinc", and tiien overor in contact with melted sodium,
pota.ssium, or other metal having a high affinity for oxygen.

ISl.OOi—July 10, 18SS. J. F. BENNETT. Apparatus for separating nUrogm from

atmospheric air.

It employs a series of annular chambers with porous walls, together with an
air pump, to remove a part of the nitrogen from air by reason of Its more ready
diffusion through the porous walls.

NITROUS OXIDE.

87.S19— March S, 1869. W. P. BARKER. Improvement in the use qf nitrmu oxide
as an ansesthetic agent.
Nitrous oxide Is mixed with chloroform, or other antesthetic.

l!0.97S—Xoreml>er u, 1871. \V. F. & \V. A. JOHNSTON. Improvement in meOiodt

of compressing and liquefying nitrous oxide and other gases.

Claims the apparatus of process No. 120,977; a hydraulic pump with one or
more tanks or series of tanks.

SULPHUR DIOXIDE.

W,ont-Mav f I. Wi. S. V. AKIN. Improremrnl In Ike manmfatlHrt ^ rnOplmr-
oiu arid. ^^

■Sulphur or pyrites Is hiirnol In
sure, whii'h Is malntnlncd Ilk

Llould sulphurous acid and no :.
unliqueflcd i

and CWiJillMtl.
■I- VM IHMBIIM

gases are simultaneously protiuced.

t.V.ilH—yrliruaryia. 1X77. H. P. PUTET. Improremenlin proeeut* nf pndwlne
artiflntd cold by means qf anhydrous sidjthttrous oxide.
Anhydrous sulphurous oxide Is imhI n« a refrtgeniting aitmt.

191.778— June 11. 1877. K. P. PICTET. Imiirovemenl in manufariurlna luMtmnm*
anhydride.

Sulphur and sulphorlc add are hente<l, the product panMd Ihrooirb ■ clcmns-
Ing nu-dlum and a dehydrating medium, and llquefled bv preanire. In a

continuous operation.

37e.S8.'t— January ti. 188.1. E. HANI8CH AND M. 8CHR0EUER. Pnetu of

obtaining sulphurous acid.

Liquid sulphurous add Is prn<1uccd by [Mualng the furnace (taMMi thr»ii«h a
spray of water, heating the resulting solution olnilphunmii acid lo eTaporate
the sulphurous-ncid gas therefrom. <<Kiling the separated fraaca, and conTCTIinfr
the same into liquid form by compression and condensation.

CARBON DIOXIDE.

5S,0S8—May », 1868. 3. S. BALDWIN. Improved mrlhnd qf enUeeting and sepa-
rating carbonic acidfrmn mixtures if gases.
Water Is apra)e<I through mixed gases in a chamber under preaanre, taklns

up the carbonic-acid gas; the surcharge*) water then passing Into a lecond

chamber under a partial vacuum, where the gas la set free.

359,996— March S9, 1887. S. CABOT. I'rocess of and apparatus for mating carbon
dioxide.

Limestone Is alternately heated to redness by gaseous prodiictii of combustion
at a high tera[perature, and with superheated steam with exclusion of air, until
its carlHMi dioxide is expelled, the steam t>eing condensed and removed irom
the carbon dioxide evolved. A reduced atmospheric pressure Is produced and
maintained in the closed furn tee pending the passa^ of superheated steam.

.183.957— June 5, 1888. H. LEFFM ANN. Manufacture qf carbonie aeid and Vtwy

magiusia.

Native mngnesite, or magnesium carbonate, is decomposed byheatlnacloaed
retort, producing carbonic acid and extra-heavy magnesia.

i96.5i6—Mau t, 1893. W.WALKER. Frocetsqf and apparatus for recovering car-
bon dioxide.

Impure carbonic-acid gas is passed through retorts containing a solid carbon-
ate, as carbonate of sixla, which absorbs the carbonic add with the production
of a bicarbonate. The nitmgen and other gaseous impurities are thus removed
by exhaustion and the temperature raised to cause the pure carbonic-acid gas
to pass off. Water is sprayed upon the carbonate and the solution obtained
removed, and the carbonate crystallized out for reuse.

513.651— Jidv «, JS94. E. W. ENEQUIST. Process qf obtaining catbonte aeid,

sodium sidphate, and magnesium sulphate, etc.

A soUition of niter-cake (containing 24 lo2S per cent of free sulphuric acid) or
an alkaline acid sulphate is employed a-s a solvent for magneslte in the produc-
tlon of carb«inlc acid. Ironanii olherimpuritiesare precipitated and removed,
sodium carbonate is added, and the resulting magnesium carbonate separated
from the sodium sulphate.

APPARATUS.

17,S9lr— May tg, 1857. W.A.ROYCE. Reissued December th, ISTt. No.t.tOl—lm-
provemait in machinery for compressing gaseous bodies. No. SMt—Jinvroremenl
in maeliincry for compressing gaseous bodies.
Reissue 5.201 relates tu the compression of gaseous mediums with means (or

absorbing the evolved heat and for holding and transmitting the power: Ihe

metallic reservoir, pipes, etc.. are coated on'tne Inside with close-grained metal*.

vegetable gums, resins, or oils to retain the gas. Under reissue No. 6,202, serial

compression is employed with refrigeration.

1S0.977— November 14. 1S71. W. F. & W. A. JOHNSTON. Improvement in ap-
paratus/or Hqu^ying nitrous oxide and other gases.
Gaseous or aeriform matter is llquefled by pressure transmitted from a pump

by means of a liquid.

!U,161—April 8, 1879. F. LITTMANN. Improvement in apparatus for preparing
icaterfor ice machines.

The process consists in converting water Into steam, freeing the steam from
impurities, then condensing the steam, and finally heating the water resulting
from such condensation by means of a succeeding current of steam to drive OO
any remaining air.

SlO.SlO—June 16. 18SS. J. J. SUCKERT. Method qf and apparatus forteparxUino

a litituflable gas from a condensable vapor.

The process consists in first reducing the temperature of a solution of the gas
by the vaporization of a liquefied gas. and then passing the liqueflable gas and
intermingled vapor through such cooled solution, thereby liquefying the vapor
and separating it from the gas.

3S9,5S1— September 11, 1888. E. LtJHMANN. Apparatus for removing gate* from

liquids.

A vacuum pan havlnga spiral channel for the liquor, forma, with two vertical
pipes, a siphon, the pipes connecting with the respective ends of the spiral
channel.

i91, 699— February U, 1893. E. B. CUTTEN. Preparing liquid chlorine.

Chlorine gas is dehydrated by steps of cooling, by contact with calcium chlo-
ride, and by ixintact with anhydrous sulphuric acid, and is then liquefied by
pressure. The noncondeiised gases are then s»'parated. and flasks are charged
with liquid chlorine by drawing off from the bottom of the chlorine veSBel to
the bottom of a flask couphsl thereto, musing the air in flask to ci>mpres8 until
it attains the pressure of chlorine liquefaction, and then allowing the OOD-
pressed air in the flask to escape.

503.556— August IS, 1S»3. E. SOLVAY. Apparatus for treating
rial rrith gases.
Apparatus (or process No. e0!l,<lfi8.

282

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

B0S,5S3— August IB, 1S9S. E. SOLVAY. Treattng pulverulent material wUh gases.
The gas is passed from top to bottom through a body of the material contained
111 a closed vessel; then the ends o£ the vessel and the body are reversed and
fresh material is added at the temporarj- top and treated material removed from
the temporary bottom, when the vessel with the body of material is returned to
Its normal position and the passage of gas from top to bottom resumed.

B06.6S9— October 10, 1S9S. R. KXIETSCH. Process of and apjmratus for making
liquid chlorine.

Chlorine gas is forced through a body of heated sulphuric acid into a confined
space and is liquefied by pressure transmitted through the sulphuric acid. The
sulphuric acid is cut off from the parts of the apparatus exposed to the air by a
boay of mineral oil.

S!5,7U— January SS, ISffT. C. HEINZERLING. Process of recovering volatile

substaiKesfrom air or other gases.

The air or gas (as gases from coal distillation, distillation of peat and bitumi-
nous shale to obtain oils, distillation of wood, preparation of water-proof tex-
ture or tisJiue and iu the production of smokeless powder, and in the production
of chloroform, carbon bisulphide, or carbon tetrachloride) is compressed; indi-
rectly cooled by water while compressed ; further cooled by indirect contact
with previously expanded portions of the air or gas, a portion of the volatile
substances being separated by the latter reduction of temperature; and finally
the air or gas is permitted to expand to substantially normal pressure, whereby
the remaining volatile substances are separated.

635,759— May 30, 1899. E. C. HARGRAVE. Liquid air conveying conduit

The liquefied air is piped from one point to another, a portion being allowed
to evaporate, and conveyed through an annular space around the main body of
the air or gas to maintain said body in a liquefied state and prevent undue
pressure therefrom.

650,608— May 29, 1900. T. J. McTIGHE. Method of cooling gases.

A compressed gas, with the heat of compression removed, is caused to act
expansively in elevating within a heat-insulated tube a suitable liquid cooler
than itself, thereby doing work and falling iu temperature in proportion to the
work done, the expanded and cooled gas cooling a further body of compressed
gas.

GROUP XVIII— FINE CHEMICALS— INORGANIC.

BROMINE AND IODINE.

lS,m7— December 13, 1851,. E. STIEREN. Reissued June 1, 1869. No. 31,79— Im-
proved process of treating the mother-water of salines to obtain useful products.
No. 31,80— Improved apparatus for obtaining bromine and other products from the
mother-water of salines.

Sulphate of magnesia is obtained from bittern water of saline springs by evap-
orating to 36° Baum4, treating with lime, filtering, washing the precipitate,
treating with sulphuric acid, concentrating and crystallizing. Iodine is ob-
tained from the lye separated from the hydrate of matjnesia by treating with
soda sulphate, removing the sodium chloride, treating tlie liquor with sulphate
of copper and iron, and the precipitate thereof with manganese and heat.
Bromine is obtained from the liquor after heating with soda carbonate or caustic
soda.

6t,tSl, — February S6, 1867. D. ALTER. Improved apparatus for the manufacture

of bromine and iodine.

The retort consists of a stone box and >lid with a leaden heating flue.
6S,988 — March 19, 1867. D. ALTER. Improvement in the distillation of bromine

and iofiine.

The fumes of bromine and hydro-bromic acid are absorbed by an alkali.

81,309— September ««, 1868. G. A. HAGEM ANN.
of bromine from bittern.

Improvement in the manufacture

A sandstone trough or vessel is used, furnished with a bore, for the introduc-
tion of steam to dispense with the insertion of metallic pipes into the liquor.
Naked steam is introduced into the body of the liquor to combine the mechan-
ical action of the steam with the physical effects of its heat.

120,662 — January 3, 1871. J. J. JOhLER. Improvement in apparatus for the man-
ufacture of bromine.
Stills are made of wood, or with a lining of wood, which chars to a certain

depth, and then the destructive action of the bromine ceases.

$17,076— July 1, 1879.
iodine and bromine.

J. N. J, DUBREUIL. Improvement in manufacture of

To prepare green seaweed for the extraction of its useful salts, the weeds are
first disintegrated, then lime is mixed with the pulped mass and the liquid
extracted by straining or pressing. The salts are then precipitated from the
solution.

1 19, OOi— August «8, 1879. R. MOLLER AND H. BOCKEL. Improvement in the

manufaeturt of iodine and bromine.

To obtain iodine -nd bromine from bittern or other liquids containing them,
the liquor is subjected in a finely divided and heated state to the action of
chlorine gas.

S56,i91— January 18, 1887. V. C. PHILLIPS. Process of obtaining iodine from

bittern.

Iodine is first set free from its chemical combination in the bittern and is then
absorbed with dead-oil or equivalent oily or tarry substance, and the iodine
extracted from the oil by means of an alkali and distillation. The resulting
bittern liquor is distilled to extract the bromine therefrom.

$56,S9t — January 18, 1887. F. C. PHILLIPS. Eztraeting bromine and iodine from

bittern.

Bromine and iodine are first set free from the chemical combination in which
they occur in salt-water bittern, and dead oil. or heavy oil from coal tar, is then
mixed therewith to absorb them; the oil is then separated from the bittern, and
the bromine and iodine extracted from the oil by means of an alkali, as caustic
aoda.

U,7,9i6— March 10, 1891. H. H. WING. Process of obtaining tiromine and iodine.

Bittern, concentrated to a sirupy consistency, is mixed with silicious material
and calcined, producing fumes of chlorine, bromine, and iodine, which fumes
are brought in contact with bittern water in a tower, whereby the bromine and
iodine of the latter are liberated by the chlorine, and the iodine and bromine
collected.

klS,51,l— March 17,1891. T. PARKER AND A. E. ROBINSON. Process (if making

iodine by electrolysis.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
1,56,183— July il, 1S91. H. H. WING. Process of obtaining iodine.

The mother-liquor resulting from the purification of sodium nitrate is mixed
with silicious material and calcined, and the sublimed iodine collected from
the fumes. The uncondensed vapors are brought in contact with a further
quantity of said mother-liquor to effect a further purification of iodine.

ieo.STO-Septcmber i9, 1S91. H. H. DOW. {Reissue: ll,23i— April IS, 189«.)

Process of extracting bromine.

Bromine in brine or bittern water is first freed from its chemical combina-
tion, the bromine is then separated from the brine by means of an air blast,
and the bromine-laden air is forced through a metal or substance that will
combine with the bromine, producing a bromide, which is boiled to dryness
out of contact with the air.

1,61,681— October 20, 1891. J. C. KAUTZ. Process of purifying bromine.

The bromine vapors, before condensation, are passed through a solution of
the bromide maintained at the proper temperature.

SODIUM AND POTASSIUM.

31,3,897 — June 1, 1SS6. H. Y. CASTNER. Manufacture of sodium and potassium.
The reduction of the alkali is effected by the carbide of a metal diffused
through the alkali in a state of fusion at moderate temperatures. An easily
reducible metal or its oxide mixed with a hydrocarbon and coked will serve as
a carbide.

380,775— April 10, 1888. O. M. THOWLESS. Process of obtaining sodium, etc.

The substance containing the sodium or potassium, as caustic soda, is heated
and gradually supplied to heated carbonaceous matter, and the vapors con-
densed.

380,776— AprU 10, 1888. 0. M. THOWLESS. Apparatus for obtaining sodium, etc.

Apparatus for the practice of process No. 380,775.
391,110— October 16, 1888. H. S. BLACKMORE. Manufacture of sodium.

A mixture of calcium hydrate, 27.5 pounds; ferric oxide, 31.1 pounds; sodium
carbonate, 30.9 pounds; and carbon, 10.5 pounds; is heated and the vapors col-
lected and condensed.

IS0,985— October IS, 1391. C. NETTO. Process of making sodium or potassium.

.Caustic alkali is brought into contact with reducing carboniferous matter at
such a low temperature that only the caustic alkali is reduced to a metallic
state, while the alkali carbonate simultaneously formed remains uiidecom-
posed and is withdrawn out of reach of the carboniferous matter without inter-
ruption of the reducing process.

SELENIUM.

S35,616— December 21, 1880. A. G. BELL AND S. TAINTER. Process of treating

selenium to increase its electric conductivity.

To increase the electrical conductivity and sensitiveness to light of selenium
it is gradually heated to a point where the selenium is beginning to fu.^e and
then allowed to cool, the proper moment for stopping the heating being shown
by the ceasing of the increase of deflection of a galvanometer needle, and also
by a change from a leaden color to blackish or nearly black.

RARE EARTHS.

87,1,77— March S, 1869. C. M. TESSIE DU MOTAY. Improvement in preparing

zirconiafor use in producing light, and for other purposes.

The silicate of zirconium is treated with chlorine in the presence of charcoal,
transforming it into the double chloride of zirconium and of silicum; the latter
is volatilized off and the chloride of zirconium is then converted into an oxide;
the zirconia is then moistened and molded; an agglutinating agent can be used;
the pencils, disks, etc., are then highly heated and annealed.

377,701- February 7, 1888. C. A. VON WELSBACH.
cerium, etc.

Process of obtaining salts qf

Compounds of the rarer metals— cerium, lanthanum, and didymium — are
obtained from their earths by heating the mineral earth, plunging the heated
earth into water, crushing, dissolving the fragments in a mineral acid, as concen-
trated hydrochloric acid, and precipitating by oxalic acid, washing and filter-
ing the precipitate, heating it and afterwards dissolving it in nitric acid, digest-
ing the solution with excess of the earth, separating the precipitate and the
solution, dissolving the precipitate in nitric acid, and so producing cerium ni-
trate, concentrating the solution andlieating it with nitric acid and ammonium
nitrate, and then separating by fractional crystallization the ammonium double
nitrates of lanthanum and of praseod>*nuum and neodymium.

396,300— January 15, 1889. J. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS.
mineral composition, etc.
See Group XV, Plastics, Other Plastics.

Plastic

396.301- January 15, 1889.
mineral composition, etc.
See Group XV, Plastics,

396, SOi— January 15, 1889.
eral composition, etc.
See Group XV, Plastics,

306,303— January 15, 1889.
eral composition, etc.
See Group XV, Plastics,

396,301,— January 15, 1889.
eral composition, etc.
See Group XV, Plastics,

396,305— January 15, 1889.
eral composition, etc.
See Group XV, Plastics,

390,306~January 15, 1889.
eral composition, etc.
See Group XV, Plastics,

J. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS. Plastic

Other Plastics.

J. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS. PlasHc min-

Other Plastics.

J. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS. Plastic min-

Other Plastics.

J. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS. Plastic min-

Other Plastics.

J. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS. Plastic mfn-

Other Plastics.

J. L. STEWART AND J. L. HASTINGS. Plastic min-

Other Plastics.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

283

SOfi.Sm— January IS. 1889. J. L. STEWART AND J. I.. HASTINOfl. PUuUemtn-

cral romjnmtwn, ftc.

See Group XV, I'laatlo, Other I'laxtlex.

SSS.SBS— January M, 18S9. J. L. HASTINGS. Proeeu qf produeing rtfraelory

compound).

A refmelory orystnlline (H>miK>nn(i. tivallable for iiu'ftniU'seent illumination.
U pro<l\U'ereT>ulverlzed uii!u?ral wubstaiu'en —
Bueh Hsi uxUk'H, earbimato!*, or .HulphaloH «if inetalK, e. g.. an Intimate mUlure of
strontium oxide (caUMtio) and carbonate, calcium oxide and carbonate, and
magnesium oxide and carlKmale — mixing said base with a 6ux comitoHcd of one
or more haloid salts — such as chlorides, imlides. Ruorides, or bromides of
metals, c. jr., u mixture of calcium iiMllde. nuiKiieslum chloride, sCrontluni
chloride, and calchun fluoride— moLsteniUK the mixture with perchloric acid,
molding and drying, and llnally cx|>osing to a high temperature.

iOO.SSi— .March 16, 2SK9. J. L. HASTINGS. PtatUc mineral compoHtton.

See Group XV, Plastics, Other I'la-stics.
U)0.S36— March ts, 1SS9. J.L.HASTINGS. Plattic mineral composition.

See Group XV, Plastics, Other Plastics.
U)9,SSi—Auiru»t ?0. 1SS9. J. L. HASTINGS. PUutic mineral compotUlon.

See Group XV, Plastics, Other Plastics.

U)9.65S—AugitMto,lSS9. C. A. VON WELSBACH. Procenqf obtaining sirconium

nitrate.

Zirconium nitrate In a form suitable for an incandescent body is produced by
first iMinverting the zirconi\uu into a sulphate, ami after treating with ammonia
dissolving the same in nitric acid, thereby obtaining a precipitate which is
digested with ammonia, dissolved in nitric acid, and evaporated.

U0,S6S — September 10, 1SS9. F. THIELE. Process of making zirconium nitrate.

Water-soluble nitrate of zirconium is produced by subjecting zirconium ores
to the action of hydrochloric acid, heating the residue with sulphuric acid for
several hours to form zirconium sulphate, and adding a concentrated solut on
of barium nitrate to form by reaction therewith zirconium nitrate, barium sul-
phate being precipitated.

571,551— November 17, 1896. R. LANGHANS. Process o/ producing coatings com-
posed 0/ earthy oxids.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

571,B»t— November 17. 1S96. R. LANGHANS. Process qf producing cooUngs cam-
posed of earthy oxids.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
617,656— January, 10, 1S99. W. BUDDEUS. Process qf obtaining thorium oxids.

Monazitc sand is comminuted and introduced Into molten alkali hydrate;
the resvUtant nuu-w di.isolved in hot water; the resultant alkali phosphate crys-
tallized out; the mother liquor evaporated; water added to the residue, stirred,
and the liquor containing the oxides of thorium and of the cerium bases is
decanted or otherwise removed from the heavy sediment of ferrous titanate
and zircon. The mixture of the oxides of thorium and of the cerium bases is
treated with sulphurous acid to dissolve out the oxides of the cerium bases and
leave the thorium oxide.

PLATINUM METALS.

til.lie.—May 10,1881. J. HOLLAND. I'riKess nf /using and molding iridium.

The metal is subjected to a high heat and then about one-fourth its weight of
phosphonis is added, when it quickly fuses and is cast in highly heated
molds. As soon as set it is placed in a crucible with lime, and again highly
heated to eliminate the phosphorus.

HYDROCARBONS.

CARBON COMPOUNDS.

150,909— August^} , 1871. H. J. FENNER AND F. VERSMANN. Improvem/mtin

the manufacture of anthracene.

Anthracene Is obtained bv the distillation of coal-tar pitch by a regulated
temperature of from 315° to 425° C. from heat externally applied. A partial
vacuum assists the distillation.
n5,86t—February ii, 1876. C. LOWE AND J. GILL. Improvement in processes for

separating mixed coal-tar products.

Carbolic acid is crvstallized from mixed tar acids by successive steps of re-
frigeration, crystallization, and dehydration, the mixed tar acids being In a
state of partial* or complete hydration.

tt7,58S—May 11, 1880. F. SALATHE. Mamifacture of anthracene.

Anthracene tar. produced by treating petroleum or ite derivatives In the
presence of charcoal at a dull red heat (400° to 550° C.),and condensing the
tarry matter produced.
S7t,tl,5— October 25, ISS7. J. VAN RUYMBEKE. Aniline tar.

Tar containing about 7 per cent of nitrogen and available for the direct pro-
duction of aniline by treatment with acid is obtained from concentrated tank
waters by distillation.
aas;8S0—July 1, 1S88. W. KELBE. process of obtaining retene.

Retene (Ci,H„) Is produced by heating resin-oil— a product of the dry distilla-
tion of colophonv— with sulphur until the fornnition of hydrogen sulphide Ls
flnLshcd. The raw retene obtained bv distillation of the residue, or by extrac-
tion by a solvent, is puilfled by repeated crystallizations.
56S,5SS—July 7, 1896. T. L. WILLSON. Process of manufacturing hydrocarbon gas.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
S8S,t50— August 17, 1897. E. F. MACKUSICK. Process of generating gat from

carbides.

The carbide is treated with a mixture of water and glycerine, or other non-
volatile, niminflammable, and recoverable fluid which does not react umu the
carbide, the whole ma-ss of carbide being exposed to the action of the liquid,
which is compounded In accordance with the desired strength of the current ol
gas.
596,159— December S8, 1897. W.BOLTON. Process of generating acetylene gas.

Calcium carbide is Impregnated with a substance substantially Insoluble In
water— such as stearlne, the rate of gas generation being regulated by the
degree of impregnation.

MS,U»—ltay *S, tSM. F. ULLMANN. Proeeu of purWng meUfkm f-

Impure acMirlene fM Is treated with oxldiiinv cliromie ooBpoawll IB wUeb
the chrome Is presenc u an acidiner— for Insuncv, with ihromieMid oriqluoiM
or acldlArd chromlcacid solution or acldlfled Ucbromate aoliitiOD— lor IM par
poac of oxidizing the Impurities.

65.1,017— October J7, Ism. C. B. JACOBS. Proress of mating baaiiit amd ikano-
logue*.
Hydmcarbons are produced by mixing toftetber a metallic carbMa and • tail-

ble metnlllc hydrate of molerulnr equivalent welghtJi — as barium r«rtrfd« and
barium hy<lrit(e— and subje'-ting the iuhmh (on beat sufTlclent to fiU4> the hydrate,
forming an oxide and bcuz(*ne and IL^ homologiRti, Riithnurcne, napthalene.

958,1711— November tS. 1899. E. 8. DOLAN. MMod of generating aeeiytene gas.

Small quantities of calcium carbide are tightly wrapped In a pluralltr of
thicknesses of pliable, noroiut material — as coarae cheesecloth — and sereral of the
packages are placed within a gas-generating chamber In contact with each other
and water Is applied.

eil.lM— January 18, 1900. E. DE FAZI. ltan^faeture of gas.

A mixture of calcium monoxide, colophony, and calcium carbide— a* caldtun
monoxlde.tn parts; colophony, 10 parts; and calcium carbide, A part*— if treated
with water.

81S,019— March *7. 1900. E. DE FAZI. Manufarture of gas.

A mixture of calcium monoxide, bitumen, and calcium carbide— aa caldtun
monoxide, 80 parts; bitumen. 10 parts; and calcium carbide, 5 parte— to treated
with water.

6U7.t9l>—AprU to, 1900. O. ERNST AND A. PHILIPS. Material for purifying

acetylene gas.

A solid, highly porous metal containing a salt of hypochlorous acid; aa
bleaching powder stirred Into a sludge with slacked lime and calcium chloride
and dried at such a temperature that the salt of hypochlorous add does not
decompose.

6i7,5S9— April 17, 1900. J. A. DEUTHER. Process of producing ethylene gas.

Ethylene gas. CtHx, Is produced by decomposing water in the presence of a
compound compcecd of a metal capable of decomposing water, and the carbide
of such metal, whereby the nascent hydrogen traiuforms the generated acety-
lene Into ethylene.

eiS,68$— May 1, 1900. J.H.GREEN. Process of manufacturing gas.

Calcium carbide and liquid hydrocarbons, as gasoline, are placed in a veoel
and water fed at Intervals to the mixture, whereby the generated gaa will pan
through tbe liquid hydrocarlwns and collect gas from the same.

659,1,1,8— October 9, 1900. M. P. E. LETANG. Process qf generating acetylene gat

from carbide of calcium.

Calcliun carbide and glucose, or like substance, which will render lime soluble
or fluid, are simultaneously subjected to the action of water.

eei.iOl— November 6, 1900. E. FOUCHfl. Process of storing explosive gates.

The receiver is filled with a porous substance provided with numerous sepa-
rate small Imres or |>erforstions. filled with a suitable fluid, and the compressed
gas Is charged into the receiver where It is absorbed by the liquid and stored
in Isolated quantities; or the gas itself is compressed Into liquid form and stored
thereby In Isolated quantities in the porous substance.

6H,t58— November to, 1900. E. N. DICKERSPN. Process qf storing acetyiene gat.
Liquefied acetylene gas is mingled. In mlsclble proportions, with a solvent,
such as fusel oil. and maintained under a reduced pressure.

HALOID COMPOUNDS

CHLORIDES

tl8,671— August 19, 1879. J. F. GESNER. Improvement in manitfaeture qf ethyl-

chloride.

A current of hydrochloric-acid gas is passed through a boiling alcoholic solu-
tion, the water and alcohol separated from the resulting gas. and the chlorlde-of-
cthyl vapor purified and condensed as a continuous operation.

SS0.S97— October 7, 1879. J. W. MALLET. Improvement in the manufacture qf

chloroform and allied products.

Chlorine, or other analogous element, and methane, ethane, or other hydro-
carbon gas, are passed through a body of porous material not acted uponby the
chlorine, as prepared carbon. The temperature should be between 30° and
90° C.
5tt,19lr—July li, 18SS. G. MICHAELIS. Manufacture qf chlorqform and qf purl'

fled acetates.

Crude acetates are subjected to dry distillation at high temperatures to remove
the fluid products therefrom, which are subjected to the action of a hypocUo-
rite and tne chloroform condensed, the residual products of the dry distillation
being suitable for conversion into acetic acid or purified acetates.

585,991— June 6, 1888. O. RUMPF. Manufacture qf chloroform from cuxtone.

Acetone in a dilute state Is periodically Introduced into the bottom of a still
containing cloride of lime solution with agitation of the solution. The chloride
of lime employed Is more than five times the weight of the acetone, resulting in
the chloroform produced equaling the acetone In volume.

ia7,7U— May 15,1890. T.F.COLIN. Process qf obtaining chlorine eompattnds from
natural gas.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

US.set— September t, 1890. E. G.SCOTT. Process qf mating eatbo»felradikr1de.
Chlorine Is passed Into Iodine and carbon bisulphide and the resultant masi
fractionally distilled, whereby the tetrachloride Is separated from the sulpbtir
bichloride, the latter being left as a byproduct. The Iodine Is separated from
the tetrachloride bv caustic alkali, and a mixture or compound of cartran sul-
phide and iodine is" produced, suitable for use In the first step.

iS9.S9t— January 10, 1S95. R. P. PICTET. Process qf purifying eUorqform.

Commercial chloroform Is cooled to -t(f to -82° C. and the solid bodlea
removed bv filtration. It is then cooled l>elow -80°C. andthenoncrystallliable
parts, which contain inipuritii's, removed. The chloroform Is then dLstllled at
a very low temperature and the middle 80 per cent of the product taken aa
chemically pure.

284

MANUFACTURINO INDUSTRIES

S35,Z70— March 5, 1S95. K. AUSCHfjTZ. Procees of obtaining chloroform.

Chemically pure chloroform is prodiiced by decomposing: by heat double com-
pounds of chloroform and lactid-like condensation products, derived from
ortho-phenol carbonic acids, as salicylid, and condensing the pure chloroform.
Salieylid-chloroform is prepared by boiling salicylid in chloroform.

5S1,1S1— December 10. 1S9S. P. MONNET. Process of making toluaiesiUphochlorids.
Liquid or ortho-toluenesulphochioride is produced by the direct action of
chlorsulphonic acid on toluene at a temperature not exceeding .5° nor below 0°
C, in the presence of a large exces.s of said acid and with constant agitation.

55i,971,— February IS. 1S96. H. BAUM. Process of making orthohalogaipheiwl.

Orthohalogens of phenol, particularly the bromine and chlorine combinations,
are produced by the action of the desired halogen upon phenol heated to about
150° C. It is purified by binding a portion of the product to an alkali base and
the ortho compound is separated in a pure state by distillation.
S7S,i8S— December ii, 1S96. O. PORSCH. Process of making ehlorn/orm and appa-

raius therefor.

Vapors from the dry distillation of an acetate, and chlorine gas, are continu-
ously discharged, in opposite directions, under pressure, in an aqueous bath of
an alkaline earth, as milk of lime, subjected to neat. The hydrochloric acid is
separated from the resultant vapors and the chloroform vapors condensed.

378.S.f9— March le, 1S97. B. R. SEIFERT. Process of making aromatic nltrosiLtfo
chlorids.

Aromatic nitro compounds are heated with chlorhydrin sulphuric acid in
excess of one molecule. The liquid mass is then poured onto ice and the
precipitated nitrobenzenesulpho-chloride strained otf . The acid in the mother-
lye is converted into sodium salt, and then treated with the chloride of a min-
eral acid to obtain a further quantity of the chloride.

603,195- April 26, 1S9S. W. MAJERT. Process of purifying orthotoiuenesuffo-

chlorid,

A part of the orthotoluene-sulpho-chloride is distilled out from a mixture of
the ortho and paia-chlorides; the residue is then cooled to crystallize out a part
of the paratoluene-sulpho-chlorides, when the liquid is again distilledand again
cooled.

606,1,70— June 28, 1898. P. P. MONNET. Process of making chlorin derivatives of

tolitene.

The ortho or paratoluene-sulpho-chloride when heated to 150° C. is treated
with a current of dry chlorine gas and the reaction maintained at 150° to 200°
C. until the required chlorine has been absorbed.

BROMIDES.

ISi.BIA— November S, 1891. F. H. FISCHEDICK AND C. E. KOECHLING. Bro-
mine compound.
Bromamid, (tribrom bromanilid), a new compound for use as an anti>'pyretic,

of the formula CoHjBs, NH. HBr; m. p. 116° C. It is formed by the action of

bromine on a solution of aniline in alcohol.

631,519— March Bl, 1899. J. BREDT. Bromin derivative of phthalimid, and process

of making same.

A new compound, C^HjNO.^ Br, a white crystalline powder, m. p. 206° to
207° C, yielding bromine \vhen strongly heated, is produced by dissolving phthal-
imid in dilute caustic lye, stirring: the solution into an ice-cold aqueous solution
of bromine, and filtering and drying at a low temperature.

IODIDES.

Slt,9i0—July SS, 18SB. T. KEMPF. Manufacture of iodoform, bronmfonn, end
chloroform.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

iS6.250— September 9, 1890. J. MESSINGER AND G. VORTMANN. Substitute

for iodoform.

A new product; a red brown odorless powder; m. p. 225° C. It is derived
from iodine and salycylic acid.

UIS,876— February %, 1891. J. MESSINGER AND G. VORTMANN. Compound

of iodine with thymol.

A new iodine substitution product of thjTnol; an amorphous odorless brown-
red powder; m. p. 110° C. It is produced by the action on an aqueous solution
of thymol to which soda lye has been added, of a solution of iodine in an
alkaline iodide at a temperature of 15° C.

iSi,S2S—Jutie 16, 1891. E. OSTERMAYER. Compound of aniipyrine and iodine.
A new compound for medicinal purposes, having the formula CHnlNoO;
m. p. 160° C. It is formed by the action of potassuim carbonate and iodine
upon a solution of antipyrine.

1,711,818— April 12, 1891. L. SCHOLVIBN. Iodine derivatives of acetyl paramido-
phenetole.

Tri-iodine-diacetyl paramidopenetole, or "iodophenin," is a new product of
the formula CV.HjsN.OiIa; M. P. 130°. It is produced by combining a solution of
acetyl paramido-phenetolc with a solution of iodine.

609,617— November 28, 1893. F. GOLDMANN. Pharmaeeutical compound.

A new compound, of the formula C7H5OI5, a white crystalline powder, m. p.
121.6° C, soluble in ether, etc., but with difficulty in alcohol, is produced by
treating one molecular proportion of creosotinic acid with three of iodine.

561,531— June 2, 1896. L. C. URBAN. Carvacrol iodid.

A new product, an amorphous yellowish-gray or buff powder, m. p. 153° C,
insoluble in water and alkali, is produced by dissolving in water a mixture of
carvacrol 1 part, and sodium hydroxide 2 parts, and adding an aqueous iodine
solution with constant stirring at 15° C.

575,175— January 12, 1897. A. SCHUFTAN. Iodoform substUute.

A new product, a yellow, light powder, insoluble in water, soluble in alcohol,
etc., decomposing at 127° C, is produced by dis.solving methvlenebisphenyldi-
methylpyrazolon in hydrochloric acid and adding bromine water to the solution.

57e,iii—F^ruary g, 1897. A. CLAUS. MetaiodinorlhoSiyquinolinnna-sulfonic
acid.

A new product, m. p. 285° C, with separation of iodine, sparingly soluble in
water; is produced by subjecting an alkaline solution of ortnooxyquinolinana-
sulphonic acid to the action of an iodine, and then to the action of hydrochloric
acid.

618,167 — January H, 1899. A.CLASSEN. Sodium salt of iodin compound.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

618,168— JaniMry 24, 1899. A. CLASSEN. lodin derivatives of phenols and Ins-

muth salts thereof.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
627.981^uly 4, 1899. A. CLASSEN. lodin compound and process of making same.

New compounds, odorless, derived from phenolphtalein in the form of pow-
ders, of the general formula C.2(iH,i,l40(, in which the hydrogen atoms of the
hvdroxvl groups may be replaced by metallic atoms, astetraiodophenolphtalein.
They are produced liy reacting with iodating agents upon a solution of phenol-
phtalein. The product is treated with an acid; the precipitate dis.solved in
sodium hydrate, and treated with a metallic salt.

627,982 — Jidy h, 1899. A. CLASSEN. lodin derivatives of aromatic aniins and

process of making same.

New odorless compounds are produced by treating a secondary aromatic amin,
as diphenylamin, with iodine, and absorbing the hydroiodie acid formed with
mercury oxide. The product is combined with a substance, such as acetyl
chloride, adapted to form a derivative containing the iodine atoms in the
nucleus.

eil.Wl— January 16, 1900. A. BISCHLER. lodocMoronjquinolin.

A new product, a greyish-yellow, scentless powder, almost insoluble in water,
is obtained by treating an aqueous solution of an alkaline salt of the chlor-5-
oxy-8-quinolin with potassium iodide and hypochlorites.

IIS.IUU — February 13, 1900. L. LEDERER. Process of preparing haloid derivatives

of acetone.

A halogen is caused to react with acetone dicarbonic acid in the presence of
a substance adapted to act on the corresponding halogen hydrogen acid

FLUORIDES.

61,3,835— February 20, 1900. F. VALENTINER. Process of making jluoroform.

An intimate mixture of iodoform, fluoride of silver, and inert granular mate-
rial, as sand, is warmed,

ALCOHOLS AND PHENOLS.

252,782— January 21,, 1882. A. LIEBM ANN. Manufacture of the higher liomologues

(if phenol, naphthol, and resorcin.

Phenol, naphthol, and resorcin are transformed into their higher homologues
by subjecting them in a suitable still to the action of the corresponding fatty
alcohols in the presence of chloride of zinc.

i07,l,ii£—July 23, 1889. E. MEYER. Process of obtaining methyl alcohol from wood-

put]) lyes.

Lyes produced in the manufacture of wood pulp are concentrated, mixed with
charcoal, briquetted, distilled, and the methyl products condensed. The char-
coal is revived for further use by llxiviation. The distillate is free from formic,
acetic, and other tar acids.

1,27.620— May 13, 1890. K. SCHOLZ. Obtaining permanent hydroquinone.

Permanent or durable hydroquinone in citron yellow crystals is obtained by
recrystalUzing in the presence of sulphuric acid.

i66,913— January 12, 1892. B. R. SEIFERT. Carbonate of giiaiaeol and creosol.

New medical compounds obtained by the action of phosgene on guaiacol or
the nomologue creosol. Carbonate of guaiacol, having a m. p. of 85° C, is of
the formula CO (OC6H4OCH3) o. If creosol is used, the homologous carbonate
has a m. p. of 146° C.

1,79,781— August 2, 1892. C. W. BRUNSON.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
1,82,101— September 6, 1S92. B. R. SEIFERT. Process of making disinfectants.

Phenols difficultly soluble in jvater, as cresol or crude carbolic acid, are eon-
verted into soluble disinfecting mixtures by mixing with water and a metallic
salt of an aromatic compound of the classes of aromatic acids and phenols, as
salicylate of soda.

1,95,201,— April 11, 1893. J. MESSINGER, G. VORTMANN AND H. JANSSEN,

Compound of cresol, etc.

A new compound, para-isobutyl-ortho-cresoliodide, n yellow powder, insolu-
ble in water and caustic alkalis, decomposing above 60° C, is produced by
treating para-isobutyl-alpha-cresol in alkaline solution with iodine.

501,235— July 11, 1893. B. R. SEIFERT. Creosote compound.

A new compound, creosote chemically united with carbon dioxide, being a
semi-fluid oil, not caustic, is produced by treating creosote dissolved in soda lye
with phosgene, or by heating creosote with ethers of carbonic acid,

516,358— March IS. 1891,. B. R. SEIFERT. Phenol-bismuth compound.

New antiseptic compounds of phenols in chemical combination with bismuth,
nearly non-poisonous, neutral and insoluble in water, alcohol and ether, are
produced by treating the poisonous phenols in an acid, neutral or alkaline solu-
tion with bismuth salts, filtering and washing.

526,786— October 2, 1891,. O. MANASSE. Process of making phenol alcohol.

Formaldehyde is caused to act on phenol or phenol-like substances in the
presence of alkaline or neutral condensing agents, such as soda Ive, potassa.
lye, pfttassium cyanide, etc.

51,1,096— June IS, 1895. E. R. KOBERT. Process of precipitatintj blood by pyro-
gallic acid.

A blood-forming iron preparation is formed by treating blood with pyrogallie
acid and washing the precipitate with alcohol.

51,3,21!,— July 23, IS9.5. W. MAJERT. Aromatic glycocol derivative.

Glycocol derivatives, crystalline or crystallizable, and having but one ace-
x?2'A?>^'"''™'''°''*'' ^"^"^ to "he nitrogen atom, and containing the group
MICOCH.NHj. are produced by treating a glvcocol ether or glvcocolamid, pref-
erably the hydrochlorides, with primary aromatic amins, and separating the
derivative by means of an excess of ammonia.

51,3,719— October 29, 1895. P. P. MONNET. Process of making rhodinot.

Raw rhodinol. obtained by fractional distillation of oil ^of geraniums, is
treated with acetic acid; the acetic ether of rhodinol is purified by washing and
distillation, and the rhodinol regenerated by saponification of this acetic ether

Process of purifying liquids.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

286

ot rhiKlinol by (llKi-stlnK It with alcoliolie cauntio alkali. The product la then
Biibjei'ted to wvpral fmi'tlonal ilinllllHtlonii. with thv M'puratlon ax u by-product
of a ml^turvof llcarOol and au acetuiu', haviiiK an odor of nii'iithviic.

SSi.aSH—Frbruarn IS. («*;, L. LEDERKR. PrnrrM n/ iMainlnij pltmiilt.

SubntaiU'esroiilninliiKiilU'iiols. a i crude crt'sol*. etc.. arc subjcrtol to the action
ot choloracctic acid in the presence of Hoda lyo. The alkaline wit produced in
then treated with n suitable dilute mineral acid to pruduce free phenoxacctic
acids, which arc treated with mineral a<'lds to pniduec phenols.

66S.'J7S—Julii lU. is:ii;. L. LEDERER. I'nmKi iij tMiiiniinj lutijIunzyUr alcohol.

An aronuitlc phenol Is caused to react with formic aldehyde in the preaence
of a nonai'id condensing agent: the tree phenol Is reniovea by stvam, and the
oxybcnzyllc acid cxtracti-d with ctheri

l71„iiI—Jauiianj/i.lS97. L. O. HELMERS. Pwcat qf Matning aqueoiu toluOoiu

(i/phrnolfi.

A new priHluct, of a visc^id brown color, smelUnK ot phenol, consisting of a
phenol and the sulphonicacid compound ot tclithyol or thiol (a chemicHl com-
bination ot a .lulpliurcted hydrocnrtxm computiml, containing at least 5 per cent
of sulphur and sulphuric acid) and solui>le in water, is produced by the reaction
of the said constituents In a solvent, and evaporation.

577, sot— l^bntary US, 1S97. A. HES.SE. TYrpfnc alcohol.

A new prcxluct, Ci„H»iO, (b. p. at air pressure 226° C). noncombining with cal-
cium chloride. Is produced from volatile saponified oils, particularly Afrtcan,
Reunion, an<l other );erauiuin oils, hv heating with an acid anhydrid,' removing
the nonalcoholic ingredients by distillation with steam, stt[s>nltying the residual
esters with all^alies, also under pressure, and distilling the terpene alcohol with
steam.

607. M— July 19, 1S9S. O. TOBIAS. Pmccsn o.f makinu pyrocakchin.

Saltsof the phenoltrlsulpho-acid arc heated with caustic alkali to above 200° C,
and the alkaline salt of the pyroeatechindisulpho-acid thus obtained is heated
with water in a closed vessel to about 100° C. tor several hours.

eiS.USO—May iS, 1899. H. VIETH. Procru of rmdering ichthyol otlorlcsn.

Ichthyol compounds are distilled with steam imder a pressure less than an
atmosphere,

esl.oei—June 5. 1900. A. WEINBERG. DiamMonaphlhnl.

A newdlamidonaphthol, having the constitution NH...;KH3:OH=2:8:7, melting
at 220° C, while decomposing. Is produced by the combination of the 2-7-aml-
donaphthol with diazo bodies in an alkaline solution, and reduction ol the thus
obtained azo dyestufTs.

ALDEHYDES AND THEIR PRODUCTS.

WS.fPO— Sfpfemfter i7. lS9g. I. ROOS. Procegs nj making mUcylatdehydc-alpha-

phenytmethyt hydrazone.

A new compound, being a white crystalline powder, insoluble In water, of
m. p. 73° C. It is produced by combining salicylaldehyde and alphametbyl-
phenyl hydrazine in a solvent, such as methyl alcohol.

mi.,6i6—Sepkmber S, JS9S. }. SCHMID. Medical compound.

A new compound, crystallizing in yellowish flat needles, m. p. 90°-91° C, and
ins<»iuble In water, is produced by the action of salicylaldehyde on paraphe-
netidin.

SiS.WS—JiUy as, 1895. A.SCHMIDT. Production <if protocatechuic atdehyde-meta-

alkyl ethers.

A new group, as protocatechuic aldeliyde-meta-ethyl-ether, which cr>'8tallizes
out ot water in small glittering -scales and has a m. p. of 77. .5° C, is produced
by the reaction of a comisiund of the type of benzenesulpho chloride upon a
mono-metallic salt ot protocatechuic aldehyde, alkylating a salt ot the so-tormed
compounds of the type of prtra-benzene-sulphoproto<'atechuic aldehyde, and
splitting off the ether product from the <'ompounasof the type of para-beuzene-
sulphoprotocatechuic aldehyde-meta-alkyl ether obtained in that way by means
of saponification agents, such as potassium or soda lye.

SiS.09»—A<igust Zi. 1895. A. SCHMIDT. Protocatechuic aldehyde-meta-atkyl ethers

and process of making same.

The ethers are produced by causing a suitable compound ot the type of benzyl
chloride to act upon a mono-metjilllc salt ot prolocatechuic-aldehyde. alkylating
a salt of the so-lormcd compounds of the type of para-lx>nzyl-protocatechuic-
aldehyde, and separating from the product the protocatechuic-aldehyde-meta-
alkyl ether by decomposition, as by hydrochloric or hydrobromic acid.

575.^S7 — January 12, 1897. B. HOMOLKA. Process of mnnufacturing aromatic

aldehydes.

Monobenzylanilin. its homologues or nitro products, is oxidized in the pres-
ence ot a dilute mineral acid, such as an acidulated bichromate solution.

581,055— April SO, 1897. F. ACH. Process of obtaining cinnamic aldedyde.

Benzaldehyde and acetic aldehyde are dissolved in alcohol, cooled to 10 C,
and treated with concentrated soda lye with agitation.

598,911^— February 15, 1S9S. E. H. C. DURKOPF. Formaldehyde tannin.

New compounds, methylcnc-di-tannlns — as methylene-dl-gallotannlc acid.
CggHni^Oih. — a reddish-white light powder, decomiMwingat 230°C.— are produced
by reacting upon tannin with formic aldehyde in the presence ot a condensing
agent, as hydrochloric acid, the formic aldehyde being molecularly e<iuivalent
to one-half tlie amount of tannin.

601,072— March fj, 1898. E. H. C. DORKOPF. FhrmaUlehydeproteids containing

iodin.

New compounds, reddish-yellowish powders, liberating iodine on decomposi-
tion, are produced by allowing Iodine or an Iodine .solution, as that of potassium
iodide, to act upon a formaldehyde-proteid— as for instance casein — combination.

602.697— April 19, 1893. A. CLASSEN . Formaldehyde starch and method qf making

same.

New chemical compounds of formaldehyde and starch, not decomposed by
heating to 180° C. are produced bv heating the said substances together under
pressure to about 100° C, the compounds obtained lx;ing again treated with
formaldehyde, aud excess of formaldehyde removed.

ei3,i60—Xorember 1, 1898. 1". P. MONNET. Process of making aromatic aldekydet.
The methyl group in componnds of the aromatic hydrocarbon series Is alde-
hydized by treating the compound, such as nitrotoluene. with an oxidizing agent,
such as manganese binoxide iWeldon mud) and sulphuric acid, in such a pro-
portion thai the agent is InsuHicienl f(jr the oxidation of the total methyl to
aldehyde, and then separating out the aldehyde produced.

»M,l>9i—Xorrmber IS. I*'"
orthn and para nitro '-
Nltrolienzvlidenanll .

poaltion to the CH vrou'

IMUH-. and the nUrobvii/^ . i

crnl acid.

H->M>iLKA AND A.HTOCK. Pneanif Malnlnt

'•. wher<- the nitro iroup Is In ortlloor pam

I' ui react with the Nilbiois prtin*rT*raaMl<<

' ' '"• tbiu obtained arv (reatwl with dllul* oito-

The elements of water arc linked u> the amldotonsrlMeneanllln eompoai
and the mixture of aniline ImM and aldehyde thiia obulned aepacalM in

9U).MI,—Ja»Muiryl^ IM». B. HOMOLKA AMD A. STOCK. Pneim t4 making

oda,

. , I IIm

luiul manner

6SO.otf— Mat U. 1900. H.OPPERMANN. VolatUt thtaral mmpmtnd, and fnetm
qf making tame.

Bromine Is flrat treated with menthol, slowly and while kw|>liis than eool,

and then chloral is added.

VANILLIN

m,n»—M<m 19,18; t,. W. HAARMANN. ImproTonenHnlhemannfaeltmtfarti-

ftciiil vanillin.

Artillcial vanillin is profluced by treating a solution formed ofconlferlnor the
cambium of coniteroiis wcxxls, witn cbromate of potossa and sulphuric acid, heal-
ing, distillinx, and treating the residuum with ether.

19l,5l,t—June to, JS77. F. TIEMANN. Improrrment in mamtfaeture i^f mniBin.
The proceiw consists, first, in adding to an cthcric mlutlon of oil of clove*.
hydrate of sodium (or isita.s.sium i and acidulating with sulphnrii' or hydro-
chloric add, eliminating the ether l)y distillation: se<iind. heating the eugenol
so obtained with the addition of acetic anhydride, adding warm water to the
cooled liquid, and |>ermanganale of |K>tasBiiim. eliminating therefrom the
manganes4! dioxide; third, adding an ex<'esMOt hydrate of sodium to the filtered
liquid, and evaporating: aud, tinally, adding sntphuric or hydniehlorlc acid to
the concentrattHl.'*oIution, agitating the same with an addition of ether, and puri-
fying the vanillin so obtained by any ot the known methods.

iS7,8SS— August IS. 1891. G. DE LAIRE. Process iif making itoeugenol.

Isoeugenol, for use in the production of vanillin, is made by heating eugenol
or essence of cloves with hydrate of pota.ssa and alcohol, expelling the alcohol
with steam, and separating the i<Mii'Ugenol by treating the mass with acid and
decanting It It is an oily substance, boiling at from ISSf to 262° C.

U7.8ei^August IB, 1891. G. DE LAIRE. Process of making cmnpomds qf

isoetigaiol.

Monoinolecnlar derivatives of Isoeugenol are obtained by heating a mixture
of isoeugenol and an organic anhyilride acid, as anhydrous acetic acid. Acetyl
isoeugenol melts at 80° iC., benzoyl Isoeugenol at 104° C.

tS7,167— November t9, ta9t. F. ACH. Eugenol benzyt-eUter and proeeu qf preparing

tame.

A new compound, a colorless oil, solidifying In thick prisms, m. p. 29° to M^'C.,
is produced hv <llssoIving eugenol in rectified spirits, adding caustic potash and
benzyl chloride, heating the mixture, and then distilling oft the spirits, and pre-
cipitating eugenol benzyl-ether with water. It is purified by shkiting with
alkali f ' " ■■■■' ' ...

dilute i

i and distilling in a partial vacuum.

1^ ,!0i— November 19, 1S92. F. ACH. Process of preparing vanillin.

The pnwess consists in the following steps: First, di-ssolving eugenol In alcohol,
adding thereto alkaline hydrate and a halogen compound of benzyl, and heat-
ing the mixture; second, di.s.solving tlie resulting eugenol l>enzvl-ether in alco-
hol, adiling thereto alkaline hydrate, keeping the same at the Wling point for
some time, then itartially distilling off the alcohol, and adding water to the
residue: third, adding to tlie resulting isoeugenol benzyl-ether a mixture of
sodium chromale. siilphuriit acid, ami water; and, finally, adding hydrochloric
acid to the resulting vanillin benzyl-ether.

Vanillin benzyl-ether, a new compotmd, ttos a m. p. of 63° to 64° C. and a for-
mula of Q H„ CHO, OCHj, OCH, C, Hj.

1,37, iOi— November 19. lS9i. F. ACH. Isoeugenol benzyl-ether and proeett <y pre-
paring the same. «

A new compound, crystallizing in fine felted needles, m. p. 88° to SW C, and
used in the preparation of vanillin, is priMluceii by dissolving eugenol benzvl-
ether in rectified spirits, adding caustic n«>tash. keepitig at the txiiling p<iint for
from sixteen to twenty-four hours, and tlien partially distilling off the alcohol
and adding water to the residue. The Lsoeiigenol benzyl-ether is purified by
pressing and recrv-stalllzing from alcohol.

i97,5i6—.Vay 16, 1S9S. G. DE LAIRE. Process of making ranilloyl-carbonic acid

and vanillin.

Crude vanillin is first treated with btsulphlte of soda in water: alcohol Is then
added little by little until the latter takes up the vanillin silts; when the alov
holic and aqueous .solutions are se(Mirated and the aqueous liquor Is treated with
sulphuric acid to set free the vanllloyl-carbonic acid, whicli is dKs«>lved out
with ether and the solvent evaporati^d. Vauilloyl-carlKmic acid is heated above
134° C, its M. P., when it si-parates Into vanillin ami carlxinlc acid; the fused
mass is dis.solved in ether, agitateil with an ai|Ueous solution of carUmate of
magnesia, and the ether which holds the vanillin in solution evaporated.

S19,69S—May 15, 1891,. 3. BERTRAM. Process of making raniUin.

Vanillin and its Isomers are prxxluced by treating the metallic compounds
of protocatechuic aldehyde, such as so<llum pn>tm'atechnic aldehyde, with
haloid compounds of methyl, as methyl-iodide, or methyl sulphates.

55S.0S9— January li, 1896. M. OTTO AND A. VERLEY. Proeett qf aUaining

vanillin, etc.

A carbon compound, as laocugenol, having a benzene nucleus with a lateral
chain CjHs. in order to produce its corres|>onding oldehydc, lus vanillin, is
oxidized by ozone (as by pH-<sing a current of ozone through It), aud the
resulting aldehyde is then isolated.

65S,6l<i— January tl, 1S9S. M. OTTO AND A. VERLEY. yannfatture qf tttnOUn.

See Group X. Electnx'hemistry.
560.i»l,—May 19. 1S96. \V. HAARMANN. Process qf obtaining raniOin.

Isoeugenol is oxidized in a strong alkaline solution by means of a peroxide, ai
sodium peroxide.

S61.077— June t, 1896. F. ACH.. Proeett of obtaining ranillin.

Vanillin benzvl ether is deeompoaed by treating it with an acid in the presence
of an alcohol, then distilling oil the alcohol, driving off the beiuyl-etbyl-ether
and separating the vauillln.

286

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

5es,91S—AuffMt IS, 1S96. J. L. NOVAEINE. Process of obtaining vanillin.

A solution of eugenol in a suitable solvent, such as a carbon bisulphide, is sub-
jected to the action ot a solution of chromylchloride, the dichlorochromyl-
etigenic compound thus obtained is decomposed by water, the products extracted,
and the vanillin isolated. The dichlorochromyl-eugenic compound, a new prod-
uct, is a brown or greenish brown powder, more or less crystalline and easily
decomposed by water.
665,919— AuguaiS, 1896. J. L. NOVAEINE; Process of obtaining vanillin.

A solution ot eugenol, or its ether in glacial acetic acid, is subjected to the
action of chromyl-chloride in the same solvent; the solution diluted with water;
the products extracted, saponified, and the vanillin isolated.

671,917— Novembers!,, 1896. C. BERGMANN, Process of obtaining vanillin.

Paraoxybenzaldehvde is changed into the meta-nitro and meta-amido com-
bination, and the latter is then transformed into metamethoxv-paraoxyben-
laldchyde (vanillin) by the action of nitrous acid in alcoholic solution.

gri,S90— December 8, 1S96. C. GOLDSCHMIDT. Vanillin paraphcnctidin.

A new compound, CieHogOoN, yellow crystals, m, p. 97° C, soluble in water,
insoluble in ether, is produced by acting upon vanillin with paraphenetidin.

675,<y!0— January 12, 1897. B. R. SEIFERT. Isohomoranillin.

New aromatic substances of the formula C6Hs(OC„Hj.-)-l)l(OH)2(CH3)4
(COH) 5, whercbv the general group C„H». + 1 is limited to the special casesCHj
and CoHo, soluble in soda-lye, ether, and alcohol, forming colorless or yellowish
scales" and needles, and being especially ohnracterized by a vanilla-like scent
and taste. Thcv may be produced bv t he action of chloroform on isohomopyro-
catechinether of the formula C6H3(OC„H;„ -1-1)1 (OH)2(CH3)4 or by chloro-
form on an alkaline solution of isocresol with successive treatment of the
product by acid, ether, and sodium bisulphite.

685,681,— June 19, 1897 . W. MAJERT. Process of obtaining vanillin.

An aqueous solution of isoeugenol sodium and a sodium salt of halogen
nitrobenzene sulpho-acid is boiled, producing isoeugenol-phenylether nitro-
sulphate of sodium; the isoeugenol phenylether nitrosulphonic acid is oxidized
to a salt of vanillin phenylether nitrosulphuric acid, and the vanillin separated
by means of an alkali.
esi, 756— August SS, 1S99. F. ACH. Process of making iso-eugenol and derivatives

thereof.

A new compound, mono-eugenol-phosphoric acid, m. p. when hydrated 105°
C, is produced by treating eugenol in a neutral condition with phosphorous-
oxy-chloride: making an alkaline solution of the product, and acidifying.
Treated with alkali, iso-cugenol-phosphoric acidispro<luced, melting in a dehy-
drated condition at 133° C. An acid alkali salt is prepared from the last acid,
dried and heated, producing iso-eugenol.

ETHERS.

616,766— March 20, 1891,. F. KRAFFT AND A. RODS. Process of making ether.

Sulphonic acids, or their ethers, are heated with alcohols producing ethers; as
ethyl alcohol added to benzene-sulphonlc acid and heated to 135° to 145° C.
prmluces ethyl ether.

1,76,61,0 — Jantmry 19, 1897. P. FRITZSCHE. Process of obtaining ether.

Gases containing ethylene, after removal of tar, ammonia, benzol, and
hydrogen sulphide, are washed with dilute sulphuric acid to remove hydro-
■arbons ot condensation, then treated with concentrated sulphuric acid at from
100° t« 140° C., to absorb the ethylene, and, after dilution, to distillation; the
vapors of ether, alcohol, and water, according to their alcohol and ether con-
tents, being passed through ethyl sulphuric acid of varying degrees of dilution.

680,575— April IS, 1897. F. H. HAHLE. Catechol ether.

Monoethyl ether of pyrocatechin. a new substance of the formula CcH,.OH.
OCoHs having a b. p. of 215° C, solidifying at 26° to 27° C, and crystallizing
easily into colorless, bright transparent prisms. It is easily soluble in alcohol,
in ether, and in diluted aqueous soda-lye, solidifying with concentrated soda-
lye into a white salt having an agreeable aromatic smell resembling thymol.

ACIDS.

SSt,8g9— December St, 1885. H. PRINZ. Manrtfacture of beta-naphthylamine etUpho-
acid.
See Group XI, Dyestuffs, Artificial, Organic.

S3S,0Slr— December Hi, 1885. H. VOLLBRECHT AND C. MENCSHING. Manu-

facture of color-producing acids.

See Group XI, Dyestuffs, Artificial, Organic.
518,989: 518,990— May 1, 1891,. H. A. FRASCH. Petroleum sulfo-acid.

See Group XI, DyestuiTs, Artificial, Organic.

663,sae—July 7, 1896. F. KRECKE AND I. ROSENBERG. Amidonaphtholdi-
sulpho-acid K.
See Group XI, Dyestuffs, Artificial, Organic.

569,1,19 — October 13, 1896. H. LADBMANN. Dinilroanthrachrysone-dlsulphonicacid
and method of making same.
See Group XI, Dyestuffs, Artificial, Organic.

569,1,35 — October IS, 1896. A. PIUTTI. Paraethoxyphenylsuccinamic acid and

melliod of making same.

A new product, easily soluble in alcohol and acetic acid, crystallizing in
lustn)us colorless plates, m. p. 160°-161° C, is produced by heating succinic acid
with paraphenetidin until formation of water ceases, dissolving the product in
caastic soda, and precipitating by a mineral acid.

e06.t„V—June S8, 1898.- F. BENDER. Amidonaphtkoldiiulpho-acid and process of
making same.
See Group XI, Dyestuffs, Artificial, Organic.

607 ,056— July 12, 1898. 3. KOETSCHET. Process qf making aldeliydo-benzoic

acid.

A new anilin salt, slightly soluble in water, m. p. 166° C, with evolution of
gas, becoming on melting an insoluble body with m. p. above 250° C, is obtained
by treating ortho-oxalyl-bcnzoic acid with anilin in a<)ueous solution. Aiiilido-
benzylidene-ortho-carl)Oxylic acid is obtained by boiling this new anilin salt
with a neutral solvent, such as toluene or xylene, and the acid thus obtained
is converted into aldehydo-benzoic acid by extracting with ether and vaporiz-
ing the ether.

ei6,ns— December SO, 1898. I. LEVINSTEIN AND C. MENSCHING. Process of
making alphylamidonaphthol-sulfonic acids.
See Group XI, DyestufIs, Artificial, Organic.

6S1.679— March SI, 1899. M. H. ISLER. Oxyanthraquinimc sulfa acid and process
of making same.
See Group XI, Dyestuffs, Artificial, Organic.

6SS,6S7—May SS, 1899. H. A. MERNTHSEN. OxynaphthindophenoWdosulfonic
add and process of making same.
See Group XI, Dyestuffs, Artificial, Organic.

ESTERS OR SALTS.

96.817— August 17, 1869. h. D. GALE .\.ND I. M. GATTMAN. Improvement in
the mamifacture of sugar of lead and acetic acid.
See Group I, Acetic Acid.

172.999 — February 1, 1876. J. W. HAAS. Improvementin processes for manufactur-

ing cream of tarter.

Argols with hydrochloric acid, chloride of potassium, and water are treated in
a closed vessel with superheated steam for about three hours and the solution
then allowed to crystallize.

1SS,697— October Si, 1876. G. SCHNITZER. (Reissue: 10,001,— January S, 188S.)

Manufacture of cream of tarter.

Argols with hydrochloric acid, chloride of potassium, and water are subjected
to steam pressure for the necessary length of time, and the cream of tarter sepa-
rated from the residual solution after it has crystallized. (Same as No. 172,999.)

217 ,235— July 8, 1S19. E. MULLER. Improvement in the manufacture of bitartrate

ofpotassa.

Hydrochloric acid is added to the solution of argols and water — one equiva-
lent bv weight of hydrochloric acid to the contained tartrate of lime — and after
crystallization of the cream of tarter chalk is added to the mother water to pre-
cipitate the tartrates.

222,598— December 16, 1879. E. MUELLER. (Eeiseue: 10,011— January 17, 1882.)

Manufacture of cream of tartar.

Argols are boiled in water, in the proportion of about 3 pounds to a gallon ot
water, under pressure of 60 jiounds, by steam injected into the water md which
is allowed to escape from the converter, the cream of tartar being separated
by crystallization.

S77,016—May 8, 18SS. A. DREYFUS. Apparatus for treating argols in the manu-
facture of cream of tartar.
In the boiling of argols with steam under pressure, boneblack and china clay

are successively introduced into the vessel alter the boiling has commenced, but

before the settling of the solution. The steam is permitted to partially escape

during the boiling.

S9l„592— March U. ISSU. F. DIETRICH. Mamifacture of cream of tartar.

Dissolved argols are treated with phosphoric acid or its compounds to precip-
itate iron and alumina, clarified and decolorized.

513,629— March 10, 1885. R. SILBERGER. Manufacture of cream of tartar.

The mother liquor obtained in the manufacture of tartaric acid from argols is
treated with soda and potassium chlorate to obtain potassium bitartrate, and
chlorate ot sodium as a by-product.

335,1,85— FebriiaryS,lSS6. E. SCHAAL. (Reisgue: 10,825— March 29, 1887.) Man-

ufactttrc of resin-acid ethers,

Raw resin acids are treed from volatile or soft constituents by distillation or
extraction; the hard resin-acid residues are then condensed to ether by treat-
ment with alcohols or phenol at a high temperature, with or without pressure
or the addition of substances favoring the reaction, and finally the resin-acid
ether is separated into softer and harder resin-like bodies by distillation in vacuo.

338,365- March S3, 1886. R. SCHMITT. Mamifacture of salicylic-acid Compounds.
The application ot the process ot No. 334,290 to the substituted phenolates
results in the production ot substituted salicylic salts, likewise without any
separation of phenol.

31,8,1,83— August 31, 1886. H. VON PERGER. Production of phenyl-methyl oxy-

quinicinc.

A new product; m. p. 122° C. It is produced by the action of hydrazobenzole
upon acetylacetic ether.

550,012— September 28, 1886. M. V. NENCKI AND R. SEIFERT. Production of

salol.

A new product; m. p. 43° 0. It is produced by the action of oxychlorlde ot
phosphorous upon a mixture of salicylic acid and a phenol.

S50,U68— October 5.1886. R. SCHMITT AND C. KOLBE. Manufacture of naphthol-

carbonic alkaline salts.

They are produced by the action of dry carbonic acid at atmospheric tempera-
ture, either without pressure or with pressure, in conjunction with a cooling
process, upon naphthol alkaline salts; the dry naphthol-carbonic alkaline salts
thus obtained being converted into alpha or beta carbonaphthol-acid alkaline
salts by heating in an hermetically closed ves,sel at from 120° to 140° C. Car-
bonaphthol-acid salts are produced direct by the reaction of carbonic acid upon
the alkaline salts of alpha or beta naphthol under pressure at 120° to 145° C.

361,690— April 26, 1887. R. GNEHM. Production of a new ethyl-ether.

A new ethyl-ether, of the formula CnH2,N;0,; m. p. 126° C. It is produced
by the action of acetyl-acctic ether upon ethylenediamine.

566,885— July 19, 1887. E. SCHAAL. Process of making ethers from petroleum.

Liquid petrol acid, obtained from petroleum by the process of No. 335,962, is
mingled with an alcohol, heated, and the petrol ethers, separated by distillation,
are washed and purified.

977,311— January 51, 1888. C. KOLBE. Manufacture of salicylic aeid ester.

Salol Is produced from a mixture of salicylic acid and a phenol by passing a
current of phosgene gas therethrough at a "temperature of about 170° C.

58S.306—May 22, 1888. C. KOLBE. Manufacture vf salicylic-acid esters.

Salol is produced from a mixture of salicylic acid and a phenol, which may
be melted or dissolved in a solvent— as benzole— by the action of trichloride of
phosphorus.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

287

SBl.tilt— October It. ISSS. P. W. HOFMANN. Proem qf mannfaeturtng tatoL

Salol la prodnpod by heating pbcnolate of wxllum In an almnxphere of phon-
(fcn K""- Sallcylnle of ao<lliim. previously produced, may be mixed therewith.

UlLKtVi—XovembfT i. IS90. A. MARTIONIEK. Proceu qf MalaOtg tream <\{
tartar,

l.yea.arKol«. tartan, and other tartarotismatteni are treated with an alkaline
sulphate, naofsoilR or potash, the residuum xeparatol from the liquid and cream
of tartar pret'ipitatcd from the latter with sulphuric acid.

tSf.O.f.'i—Mai/te.iSat. J. BONGARTZ. Ouauirol ellur.

A new product, the bensolc ether of j-unlacol, having the compa«ltlon

C.H, loxH,''''^'} *"■' ■"• P- •'^ '^- *'""•'' K"a'ft™l '' converted into a salt,

&r<>tembly its ptrtiUHsium salt, and purifletl, heated with benzoyl chloride and the
enzoyl compound roerystalllzed from alcohol.

IS6J70— November «, lS9t. P. ERNfcRT. Prrmtf of making talieylate of phenyl.

Salicylic acid is heated at or about 230° C, with exclusion of air and vaporiza-
tion of water.

Wf ,«.<— .Warcft 7, ISM. H. JANSSEN. Salicylic-acid compound.

A new compound, crystallizing out of alcohoi in small white scales. Insoluble
in cold water, m. p. 187°('.. is produced by rcactiuK upon paranitrophcnol In
the presence of dehydratiuK agents with salicylic acid, reducing the nitro
phcnylestcr of salicylic acid thus obtained, mid trialing the forme<l amido
phenylester of .salic.vlic aci<l with acetic neid anhydride, or acetyl chloride In
such c|uatitity as is necessary to replace one hydrogen atom of the amido group
by an acetyl group.

i9S,m— April 18, 189S. A. LIEBRECHT. Basic bismuth gallate.

A new compound, a yellow powder, without odor, st)luble in a latge exce.ss of
mineral acids, and containing .W per cent to 56 per cent ot bismuth oxide — a
suitable substitute for iodoform— is produced by dissolving neutral bismuth
nitrate in dilute nitric acid, adding a solution of gallii' acid in alcohol and
water, and to the mixture adding caustic alkali, alkali carbonate or the like
until the whole remains but slightly acid, and precipitating with acetate of
soda or by diluting with water.

Kl.U6—Julti 11, 1S93. E. SCHAAL. .Vam^facture of resin-acid etterg.

The aqueous vapors formed during the heating of a resin acid in the presence
of an alcohol or nydroxyl derivative are dmwn off by suction as soon as the
formation of the esters begin, and the alcohols distilled off are replaced by a
fresh supply until the formation of the product is 'completed.

BOS.Tl^S— August St, 189S. F. GEROMONT. Lactylrparaphenetidid and process of
making it.

A new compound, of the formula C11H15NO3. crystallizing in white needles,
m. p.. 117.5° C, and soluble in an abundance of water. Is produced by heating
the lactate 01 paraphcnetidin to 130° to 180° C. until the resulting watery vapors
are completely driven off. The said lactate is formed bv dis.sf»Ivirig para-
phenetidin in dilute sulphnric acid, mixing with a solution of calcium lactate,
precipitating the calcium sulphate with alcohol, filtering, and evaporating to
dryness.

500.0S5— November SI, 1S93. H. THOMS. Salicylate of iolyldimdhylpyrazolon.

A new crystalline compound, having the formula C,2H,4N«0. C;HbO.,, and m. p.
100.5° C, is produced by heating together aceto-acetic ether and orthotolylhy-
drazin, inethylating the product, and combining therewith salicylic acid.

509,530— November S8, 1S95. P. FRITSCH. Salicylic ester of acelol.

An alkaline salicyate, as salicylate of soda, is heated with mono-halogen-ace-
tone and the alkaline chloride separated from the resulting acetol.

511.11,3— December 19, 1S93. \V. H. HIGGIN. Process of making so'litcm acetate.

Esparto-liquor and similar alkaline liquors are evaporated and the residue
treated by regulated heat, so that the temperature shall exceed 200° C, but shall
never reach the heat at which sodium acetate is decomposed (about 400° C.j,
thereby pro<lucing a mass of "char," which upon treatment with water yields
a solution of acetate of sodium along with other matters.

t53.01S—July 17. 1S91,. C. STOEHR. DimethylpiperaziH tartrate.

A new compound, having the formula C()HnNoC4HjO|): awhitepowderwhen
water free, easily soluble in water, insoluble in alcohol, and m. p. 242°-243° C;
is produced by combining tartaric acid and dimethylpiperazin in equal molecu-
lar projKirtions.

5S0.SS6— December 11. 1891,. C. F. CROSS AND E. J. BEVAN. Mamtfaaureof ceUu-

lose acetate.

A compound, or intimate mixture, of cellulose and zinc acetate is produced
by mixing cellulose hydrate with zinc acetate solution, drying and dehvdrating
the compound. This product is treated with chloroform, whereby a solution of
cellulose acetate is obtained free from cellulose, and the solvent "is evaporated.

633.718— February 5. 1S05. ]. MEYER. Tannin compound.

A new compound, cousisting of a mixture of mono-and diacetyl tannin, an
amorphous light-yullow j)ow<ier, soluble in alcohol and insoluble in water: is
produced by heating tannin with a mixture of glacial acetic acid and acetic acid
anhydride.

5S7.8U— April 25, 1895. J. F. VON MERING. Process of making ethers qfpara-oxy-

phenylurethane.

-Vew compounds, acidyl combinations of the para-oxyphenylurethans, crystal-
lizing readily, are produced by heating para-oxyphen}'lurethan with an acidyl
reagent.

51.1. iS9- June ts. 1895. J. F. VON MERING. Aeidyl compound qfpara-oxypheny-

Itirethan ethers.

New compounds, reiwiily crystallizabie and more or less soluble in alcohol and
benzene, are produced by healing the ethers of para-oxyphenylurethans with
reagents containing the acidyl group, as acetic acid anhydrid.

5r,l,)i99— July S, 1895. B. THIEME. Process of making nitropcntoerythrit.

The pentaerythrit produced by condensation in the presence of lime of acet-
aldehyde and formaldehyde, is treated with concentrated nitric and sulphuric
acids.

5U, tOi— August 6, 1895. F. Lt)D\ . Bismuth oxyiodtdgaUate and proeemqf prepar-
ing same.

A new product, a grayish-green amorphous powder, insoluble In water and
ordinary solvents and decomfKising slowly in moist air, is produced by the reac-
tion of gallic acid upon bismuthoxyiodid.

»i9.r*»-N(ntmber It, mi. T. KRAFrT AND A. ROOJ. Pmttm qf mnUna
etirrs.

Ruen are produced by ihi> action of an alooho'. and ■ cmrtMMi acM at • tem-
perature above 100° C, In the presence of an artmiatlc Nlpboale MM.

SM.tm-AprU U. UM. A. ,MCLI>RK-JAC0B8. PnttH V mmm/Mlmrttt tKmMi
Uf zirconium.

A hot saturated solution of tannic acid la slowly added to a hot lolation of a
soluble nit of tireonium,and the precipitate Is washwl and dried.

Sei.790— June 9.11m. B. R. HKIPERT. SubtlllHlfti mUit.

.New comiounds, solid, (•rysiBlline, coiorlcii", without smell, aolnble In alco-
hol, insoluble in water, and \\. 1'. from .Vp° to I7(f C... arc priidiice<l by heaUnc a
mixture of a substituH'il phciinl niid snlh'yllc adil to \¥f<:. nddlns a deny-
dratiiig agent as phosphorous iH'Utachloride; rohtinulug the UtiLUng until

yeneration ot hydrucUluric acid ceases: and then washing and rrcrystalllxinc
rom alcohol.

set.V.i3—.June le. 1S9S. M. OTTO AND A. VERLEY. Process of obtaining ether.

The acid ethers of geraninol are produce<i by heating the natural iiinim
which contain this alcohol with the chiorldeo of organic acids, as butyric chlor-
ide, and iin alkaline metal, as siHllum. in the presence of a neutral wlvent, and
separating the ether by distillation. The acid ethen are transformed into new
perfumes bv partial sap<initlcatlou by hetiting in an aqueous solution of caldtun
carbonate for some days in a closed vessel.

563,999— July li, 189«. O. A. WELTER. Amidoalkylsalteylle acid.

It Is produced by treating nitroalkylsallcylic acid with reducing agent*.
such as tin and hydrochloric acid. When the pMduct is treated with an acetyl
compound, such as glacial acetic acid, acctylamidoalkylsalicvllcr acid la pro-
duced; a new compound, characterized by antipyretic iind antlueuralgic prop-
erties.

569.1,11— October 13. lS»e. O. HINSBERG. Anlipyrin mandeUUe and method of
making same.

A new product, m. p. 52° C, soluble in nearly all aolventa and separating out
as an oil, and solidifying as an ofiaque powder, la produced by the reactlmi of
antipyrin with pheuylglycollic add.

5e9.it9— October 13. 189«. R. SCHIFF. .^alteytte compound and method (ff makbio

same.

A new white crystalline product, a compound of salicylic acid and hezame-
thylenetetramin, easily soluable in alcohol and water, M. P. 96° C, Is produced
by simultaneously dissolving the constituents In benzene while heating the
mixture and crystallizing.

67 l.SSg— November 17. 1896. E. FISCHER. MHhod of obtaining letra-alkyl uric

acid.

The salt of a dialkyl uric acid is treated with a haloid ether in an tndiflerent
or inert diluting agent, such as ethyl ether, a.1 l>y warming an alkaline solution
of a dimethyl uric acid with a solution of TKitassio-tartratcof copper in exceM,
then treating the resulting cuprous salt of dimethyl uric acid, mixed with pow-
dered glass, with a haloid ether.

S7t.3iS— December 1. 1896. H. T. JARRETT. Process of making potassium bilar

trate.

Argols are first dissolved in a solution of caustic soda and its carbonate to the
point of neutralization, one-tenth of the weight of argols addod in potassium
chloride, filtered, a decolorizing agent added, and the potassium bitartrate
precipitated directly from the mixture by an acid.

675,St7— January It, 1897. A. G ALLINEK AND E. COCRANT. Process of manu-
facturing esters of dtiodosatieylic acid.
New products, as the alkyl ester of the diiodoeallcyllc acid, a white crystalline

compound, m. p. 132° C, of the formula C,.H-II■^(;^^^^|^ are produced by

subjecting salicylic acid esters to the action of iodine In the presence of a com-
pound, as mereury oxide, which combines with the hydrolodlc acid formed.

680,575— .April 13, 1897. F. H. HAHLE. Catechol ether.

A new product, monoethyl ether of pyrocatechln, m. p. 26°-27° C, b. p. 215''
C, solidifying with concentrated soda-lye into a white salt, is produced bv the
ethylization of pyrocatechln by means of caustic soda and sodium ethyl sul-
phate.

5S0,6SI>-Apra IS, 1897. G. WENDT AND J. LEHMANN. Valerie esters qf creo-
sote.

New products, slightly yellowoily liquids, soluble In alcohol, b. p. 260° C. and
In vacuum between 117° and 121° C, are produced by boiling a mixture of the
main constituents of creosote— creoeol and gnaiacol, respectively— with valeri-
anic acid.

5SO,7U,— April IS, 1897. Q. H. WEISS. Carbonyl metadiamido saiieyUe aeid.

A new product, crystallizing in white lamina, m. p. 262° C, soluble with dif-
ficulty in water and alcohol, is produced by treating nitroamldo salicylic acid
with phosgene and rediicInK the product. The diazo compound forms aso dye-
stutTs which are easily moofanted.

581,853— .Vay i, 1897. L. SELL. Snlicin compound and process of making samie.

An extract from the fruit of the A'seidus hippocastanum in combination with
salicin. sallgcnin. glucose, and free hydrochloric acid, a stable, grayish-yellow
powder freely .soluble In water: is produced by subjecting salicin incorporated
in the vegetable extract to the action of hydrochloric acid, and then adding
more salicin.

586,068— June tt, 18S7. A. WELLER. QHinin-earbonie ether a»d process qf mak-
ing same.
New products, derivatives of the levogyrate alkaloids of cinchona bark,

tasteless, stiluble with difficulty in water, readily stiluble in chloroform and in

acid: are produced by the action on the said alkaloids with an ether of chloro-

carlionlc acid.

S.SS.ilt— August 17, 1SS7. E. FISCHER. Trimethylbenxyl-urie aeid and proeos ^

making same.

New compounds, as trimethyltx>nzyl-uric add, m. p. 171° to Vnf C, crys-
tallizing from alcohol In large crystaK insoluble in alkalis, are produced by
treating a trialkyl-uric add together with an alkali, with a haloid ether.

S9l,iSS— October It, UK. G. MERLING. CbrnpoaiKt qf gamwui-oin>iperidim-

earboaeids and process qfrnakinu same.

New product", containing acidyl as weil as alkyl gronps. mostly coiorleaa
crystals, nearly Insoluble in water, adapted to combine with inorganic and
strong organic acids, are produced by combining triacctoiumin and its aualo-

288

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

gous combinations, as, for instance, benzaldiacetonamin-vinyl-diacetonamin,
with hydrocyanic acid, and then saponifying the so-obtained cyanhydrins
(nitryls) Gamma-ox j-piperidin-carbo acid is heated with both acidyl and
alkyl reagents.

699,1SS — February 15, 1S9S. H. ENDEMANN. Glycerol ether 0/ aromatic compounds.
New products, the glycerin ethers of aromatic substances containing oxygen
in the form of hydroxy!, such as guaiacol, and which split and liberate a phenol-
like substance and glycerin, are produced by combining the phenol-like sub-
stance with sodium hydrate and causing same to act upon monochlorhydrin in
molecular proportions, generally at 140° to 150° C.

602,6/,6—Apra 19, 1898. C. F. M. SCHAERGES AND P. SCHWARZ. Procens of

making alkaliTie acetostU/anilate.

A new product, soluble in water, is produced by acetylizing an alkaline salt
of sulphanilic acid by means of glacial acetic acid, and removing free sulphanilic
acid and alkaline acetate with water and alcohol.

602,S5i — April S6, 1898. O. DOEBNER. Condemation product from salicylic and

gallic acids.

A new compound, C14H10O7. a white amorphous powder, is produced by the
reaction of phosphorous oxychloride on a equimolecular mixture of salicylic and
gallic acids, which may be in the presence of a solvent and diluent, as toluene;
subsequently removing the formed metaphosphoric acid by pouring the mixture
on ice water ard then washing and drying.

605, SJ:,6— June 7, 1898. E. DtJRKOPF. Bismuth methylene-di-gaUate and process of

making it.

A new chemical compound, characterized by a voluminous powdery form, a
blue-gray color, insoluble in water, and soluble in alkaline solutions with an
orange color, is produced by precipitating bismuth hydroxid from a bismuth
salt by an aqueous solution of ammonia, washing the precipitate, and acting
upon "it by methylene-di-galHc acid and water by gradual addition and slow
digestion at a slightly elevated temperature.

606,950— July 5, 1898. L. LEDERER. Process of obtaining hydroxylized phenyl

ethers.

Mixtures of hydroxylized phenyl ethers with phenols, such as wood-tar oils,
guaiacol, etc., are mixed with potassium carbonate, and the resulting mixture
is then treated with ether.

607, 17S — July 12, 1898. K. HOCK. Pharmaceutical compound and process qf making

same.

A new condensation product is produced by the reaction of cold concentrated
solutions of one molecule of hexamethylenetetramin and of three molecules of
tannin. The precipitate, of a yellowish-brown color, is rendered insoluble,
odorless, and tasteless, by heating in a porcelain pan until it forms a hard lump.

610,31,8— September 6, 189S. A. EINHORN. Ester of paradmidometaoxybenzoic acid.
Obtained by heating para ami dometaoxy benzoic acid in alcoholic solution with
mineral acids; a white crystalline product, m. p. 120° to 122° C; useful as an
ointment.

6U,991— November 29, 1898, P. SCHIDROWITZ AND O. ROSENHEIM. Piperidyl

carbamate of piperidin and process of making same.

A new product, CnHssNgOo, white, crystalline, soluble in water, alcohol, etc.,
m. p. 79° to 80° C. is produced by treating piperidin dissolved in a solvent, as
acetone, with carbonic acid.

615,051'-November29, 1898. P. SCHIDROWITZ AND O. ROSENHEIM. Piperidin

salts and process of making same.

New product*!, dicarboxylic salts of piperidin, having the form of prismatic
plates and soluble in water, as tartrate of piperidin. C9H17NO6. m. p. 136° to 137°
C., are produced by treating piperidin with a dicarboxy fatty acid, such as tar-
taric acid.

615,307— December 6, 1893. H. REINHABDT. Orexin tannate and process of

making same.

A new product, an odorless, tasteless, white, or slightly yellow powder, in-
soluble in water, is produced by mixing an aqueous solution of orexin hydro-
chlorate with an aqueous solution of tannin at 45° to 50° C, and precipitating
with an aqueous solution of sodium acetate.

616,656— December 27, 1398. E. FISCHER. Process of obtaining alkyl-uric acid.

The ester of an acid possessing considerable electrical conductivity, such as
nitric acid, is added to a solution of uric acid proper with an alkali; the solu-
tion is heated under pressure and with agitation, and after adding hydrochloric
acid to the hot solution it is cooled and crystallized.

616,700— Decanber 27, 1898. E. FISCHER. Alkyl derivatives of uric acid and proc-
ess of making same.

New compounds, mixed alkyl derivatives of uric acid, as dimethyl-benzyl-
uric acid. C5(CH3)3(C6H5CH2)03, m. p. 282° to 283° C, soluble only in alcohol, are
produced by acting upon a mixture of an alkali solution and uric acid with a
haloid ether; cooling and separating the monoalkyl derivative of uric acid;
then acting upon a mixture of the said derivative and an alkali solution with a
haloid ether; cooling; adding more alkali, etc., whereby the tetraalkyl deriva-
tive is obtained.

619, 5U9— February U, 1899. A. EINHORN. Glycocol ester and process of making

same.

New products, as the methyl ester of diethyl-glycocol-para-amidosalieylic acid,
a thick colorless oil, soluble with ditticulty in water. They are produced by
treating amid(x;arbonic-acid esters with halogen-substituted acid chlorides and
allowing an amin to act upon the resulting halogeu-alkyl derivatives.

620, Ul— February 28, 1899. H. JANSSEN. Bismuth compound and process of mak-
ing same.

A new compound, a brown powder, insoluble in benzene and ligroin, dissolv-
ing partially in alcohpl under decomposition, is produced by healing a mixture
of Dismuthoxy iodide and dibromgallic acid at 60° to 80° C. until development of
cartxHi dioxide has ceased.

ftW,W5— -MdrcA 7. 1899. R. BLANK. Process of obtaining indoxylic compounds of
amido malonic esters.

The aromatic amido malonic acid esters are heated to 200° to 270° C. until one
molecule of alcohol is eliminated.

6Sl,80i— March 28, 1899. E. FISCHER. Alkyl derivative qf uric acid and process of

<A)iQiniug same.

A sufficient amount both of an alkali and a haloid-ether, such as methvliodid,
is added to uric acid proper to make the ratio each of the reagents to the uric

acid proper as 4 to 1, whereby tetra-alkyl-uric acid and trialkyl-uric acid are
directly obtained.

621,805— March 28, 1899. E. FISCHER. Process of making alkyl derivatives of uric

acid.

Uric acid is reacted on with an alkali and a haloid ether, as potash lye and
methyl iodide, under heat and agitation, in the proportions of two molecules
each of the alkali and the haloid ether to one of the uric acid.
622,1*56— April It, 1899. H. C. FKHRLIN. Process of manufacturing saloL

Basic salicylate of soda with the necessary quantity of phenol is treated with
phosphorus oxychloride at from 120° to 140° C. The product is then treated
with carbonate of soda, and salol distilled off with steam.
623,789— April 25. 1899. E. KAUDER. Process of making alkyl-ethers of morphine.

A neutral alkyl-ester of phosphoric acid is caused to act on a suitable solution
of morphine whose replaceable hydroxyl-hydrogen has been replaced by a metal
whose hydroxide possesses alkaline reaction.
62U,772—May 9, 1399. A. EINHORN. Glycocolphenolester and process of making

same.

Glycocolphenolesters of the general formula alphyl— O— COCHo— NX2,
wherein NX^ represents the residue of a secondary amin, are produced by mix-
ing halogeri-aceticacidphenolesters with secondary amins. as by mixing
chloracetylguaiacol with diethylaniin, forming thick oils easily soluble 'ii alco-
hol, ether, and benzine, little soluble in water, and with acids forming salts
soluble in water, and which act as powerful antiseptics.

625,158— May 16, 1898. A. EINHORN. Esters of para-oxy-meta-amidobenzoic acid

and process of making same.

A new product, a white crystalline compound, m. p. above 100° C, is produced
by the action of mineral acids upon the alcoholic solutions of para-oxy-meta-
amidobenzoic acid.

625,159— May 16, 1899. A. EINHORN. Glycocolamidoeinnamic-acid ester and proc-
ess of making same.

Alkyl-amidoacetyl-meta-amidocinnamic-acid esters produced by tirst combin-
ing meta-amido-cihnamic-acid ester with chloracetylchloride and then with
amins; an oil soluble in alcohol, ether, and benzene, with difficulty in water,
forming with acids salts soluble in water, its chlorhvdrate having tlie M. P.
165° C.

626,910— June 15, 1389. E. KAUDER. Process of making alkyl ethers of morphine.
A suitable alkaline solution of morphine is acted upon by a nitric-acid ester of
the desired alkyl.

627,031— June 13, 1899. C. O. WEBER AND C. F. CROSS. Method of making cellu-
lose tetracetate.

The reactions of acetylchloride and acetic anhydride on a mixture of cellu-
lose and magnesium acetate are controlled by adding regulated quantities of
nitrobenzene after the reaction has started.

629,1,33— July 25, 1899. A. EHRENBERG. Process of making alkyl ethers of

morphin.

A neutral inorganic oxygen-acid-ester of an alkyl, as methyl sulphate, is
caused to act upon an alkaline solution of morphine.

630,522 — August 5, 1899. L. SELL. SaUgenin compound and process of making

same.

A new preparation of saligenin is produced by the reaction of same with a
physiological tannic acid (a tannic acid that is not reconverted into gallic acid
on boiling with dilute acids) in the presence of a dilute acid at an elevated
temperature.

631,761— August 22, 1399. F. ACH. Process of preparing alkyl-uric acid.

An oxymethylene uric acid is dissolved in an acid, as hydrochloric acid, and
reduced by tin, producing 7-methyl-uric acid.

631,763— August 22, 1899. F. ACH. Process of making oxymethylene-uric acid.

An alkaline solution of an oxymethelene-uric acid is treated with methyl-
iodide.

632,605— September 5, 1899. C. O. WEBER AND C. F. CROSS. Process of making
cellulose esters

Structureless cellulose is mixed with a salt of a fatty acid and the mixture
treated with the acid chlorides and a minimum of 10 per cent of the anhydrides
of the said acid.

656, 38U— November 7, 1899. F. HOFMANN. Process of making carbonates of aro-
matic series.
One of the chlorocarbonyl derivatives of the pyridin base series is first made

to act on an aromatic phenol, and the so-formed carbonate is then separated

from the reaction mixture.

639,171,— December 12, 1899. F. HOFMANN. Ethyl ether of salicylo-carbonie acid.
A new product, a white crystalline powder, m. p. 95° C, is obtained by the
action of the ethy lie ether of chloro-carbonic acid having the formula C2H5O.
CO. CI. on salicylic acid in the presence of a suitable basic compound, such as
dimethyl-anilin.

61,2,218— January 30, 1900. H. C. FEHRLIN. Process of making salol

Alkaline and earthy alkaline salts of acid-phenyl-carbonic ether are subjected
to the action of phosphorus oxychloride.

61,5,280— February 13, 1900. A. WELLER. Salicylates of the yUrium group.

New antiseptic products, consist of a metal of the yttrium group, as didymium
salicylate, obtained from the double earth didvmium in the form of a pale pink
powder, insoluble in water, of the formula Dio(C6H4(OH)C006).

61,6,631- AprU 3, 1900. A. WELLER. Phenol ether of quinin carbonic acid.

A further series of new products is produced according to the process of No.
585,068, a phenyloxy group taking the place of the alkyloxy group.

61,7 ,263— April 10, 1900. B. HEYMANN. Ester of acetylphenylglycinortho carbonic
acid.

New compounds, yielding an indigo leuco compound when heated with dry
caustic alkalis. They are produced by subjecting the neutral esters of phenyl-
glycinortho carbonic acid to the action of acetylizing agents.

61,8,580— May 1, 1900. A. BEHAL. Process of making ethereal saUs of formic acid.
Equimolecular proportions of formic acid free from water and the anhydride
of another organic acid are mixed at a moderate temperature.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

289

gSO.m—May t9. 1900. E. MENSEL. Proctu ^ maUtui acidyl morjihln f»ler$.

An ftlphii-wnno-ftoidy! comixmiicj of morpliitie. whn*w acldyl conntlttient if»of
thu tiittyiiclil siTR's, In irnilt'ii with a i'lili>n> (iirlxixvllo ester uiiil an nlknll,
producing u farboxy-alkyllc estor o( an acidyl-morphlnc.

KETONES.

e75,ltS— April S, 1S83. J. BRONNER. MtUml vf purifying impure anthToehlmme

and alizarine.

The solvent Is vaporized and the vapor condensed and percolated throtiKh the
mass, the ()iiantitv of solvent used Ix'Inffsuch aa to retain the soluble impurities
in solution as well as the pure anihmeninono, whereby the repeated evap(trn-
tions. condensations, and percolations dissolve out the' soluble imptirltle's and
the pure anthrachinone. the insoluble impurities being retained by lillrHlion,
and the soluble Impurities are separated from the pure anthrachinone by the
crystallization of the latter.

SS.'i,777—July 10, isas. O. KUMPF. Manufacture of acetone.

An acetate Is subjectixl to slow destructive di.stlllatlon in a closed vessel at a
low temperature (about 300° C), with stirring and steam to prevent too high
a temperature. The crude acetone Is diluted to9ei>arate oily matters, treated
with lime to remove higher ketones and other compounds, and recUBed in a
column still.

S'JO. Mi— October i. 1S8S. M. J. SCHREITER. Process of reflntni/ camphor.

Camphor is rcetlflcd by dissolving it with heat in camphor oil in such propor-
tions that the camphor is separated as line crystals; filtering the solution with
animal charcoal, asbestos, or cellulose; and separating the remaining crystals
by centrifugal force.

S9S.079—Xorember 10, 18.SS. G. RUMPF. Manufacture of acetone.

An acetate is purified by passing it continuously through a system of exter-
nally heated tubes with stirrers, and is then subjected to destructive distillation
to make acetone.

US. U)t— December SS, iS90. M. V. NENCKI. Gallacetophenone.

A new product, corresponding to CgHsO,; m. p. 168° C. It is obtained by the
action of pyrogallic acid with glacial acetic acid and zinc chloride.

IM.OOi-^anuarii f>, ISBl. H. lCTTKE AND L. SCHOLVIEN. SiMcylate of

phcnyldimelhiitpi/razolone.

A new compound of the formula CiaHijNjO,; m. p. 91.5° C. It is produced by
heiitinK— preferably under pressure — phenylhydrazinc, acetyl, acetic ether, and
methyl-salicylic ether in the presence of a haloid hydric acid.

ieo.l.ie— September to, 1S91. L. SCHOLVIEN. Proccm of mtiking dimethylphcnijl-

pi/razolone.

Molecular quantities of methylphenylpyrazolone and sodium methyl sulphate
are licated under pressure, with nydrioaic acid and alcohol as a diluent.

ie:,.sni— December S, 1S9S. G. EBERT. Process of making phenylelhytmelhylpyra-

Zfitone.

A new product, a homologue of antipyrine, of the formula C|.Hi,NsO; m. p.
between 71° and 72.5° C. It is obtained by heating phenylmetnylpyrazolone
with iortethyl; decomposing the product by soda lye; taking up the oil with
benzine; treating with hydrochloric acid and dissolving the hydrochlorate in
alcohol; treating with ether. Altering and drying the product; then treating It
with s<xla lye and separating and drying the oil as a final product, which sets in
crystalline form.

SOS.Oett—Auffust S, lS9f. H. THOMS. .'salicylate of para-tolyldimetkylpyrazolon.
A new compound, m. p. 101° C. not readily soluble in water, is produced by
combining para-tolyihyarazin with acetic acid ether, heating, methylatlng the
resulting para-tolylmethylpyrazolon, and melting the product with salicylic
acid in equi-moleeular proportions.

51S. 707— March SO, 1891,. L. KNORR. Paratolytdimcthylpyra^oleme.

Paralolyldimethylpyrazolone of the formula CisH„N.O. m. p. 137° C, crystal-
lizing In colorless pnsms soluble In water, of difficult solubility in ether, is pro-
duced by condensing paratolyl hydrazin with acetyl acetic ether, separating
water and heating to eliminate alcohol, and methylizlng the product of the
condensation.

55li,5!>t— March 11, 1895. O. PORSCH. Process of making acetone.

Commercial acetate of lime mixed with calcium hydrate in excess is sub-
jected to distillation under addition of superheated steam and constant agita-
tion to separate the acetone vapors from the carbonated lime. The condensed
vapors mixed with "water are allowed to stand to separate out tar oils and sedi-
ments, and are then purified by fractional distillation and rectification.

5iS,3S2— October S3, 1895. A. BOEGLIN. Antipyrin compomid.

A new medicinal compound, (Cn HijN, O), Fe^ CU, brittle, nonhygroscoplc
crystals, of a reddish-brown color, soluble in water and m. p. 225° C. is pro-
duced by the combination of aqueous solutions of antipyrine and ferric
chloride.

I56.9i3— March «, 1896, J. C. W. F. TIEMANN. Aromatic ketone and procem of

making same.

A new product of the formula Cu Hjo O, insoluble in water, soluble In
alcohol, is prrKluced by treating a mixture of citral and acetone with alkaline
agents. rtis.srilving the product in ether, purifying by fractional distillation,
and converting into a fragrant isomeric ketone by dilute acids and subsequent
fractional distillation.

659,aSS—May 5, 1890. J. C. W. F. TIEMANN. Process of making ketone from

orris-root.

A new product. Cu H»„ O, insoluble in water, soluble in alcohol, etc. It is
produced bv distilling orris-ro<H extract in a current of steam; treating the
distillate \vith alkali and subsequent distillation; treating with oxidizing
agents to eliminate the alkali; treating the resulting ketone with phenyl-
hydrazin; and separating the pure fragrant ketone with a dilute acid.

57!,.715— January 5, 1897. J. R. FRANCE. Process of purifying camphor.

Crude camphor is dis.solved in a hydrocarbon of less sp. gr. than water, as
naphtha; the supernatant solution of pure camphor is drawn off, flltered, the
solvent distilled off, and the pure anhydrous granular camphor crystolUzed.

579.!,n— March iS, 1897. V. STOLZ. Pyrazoton compound and process of making

same.

A new product, the phenyl 2.3 dimethyl ■» dimethylamidoS pyrazolon, a w^e
crystallized compound, easily soluble In water and alcohol, m. p. 107°-108° C,
No. 210 10

with m. p. of lu wllcjrUlo of «9> C. to pfodaBtd br aMthflatlnc I phenyl XS
dimethyl 4 amido 5 pynuolon.

SSt.ttl—May tl, tim. O. NAflHI. rrncrta nf maUng artltMat ramphnr.

llydroohloHiialrd lerp'-' . i riiduccd byw'f ■ "hy-

drous turpentine with anh :gM«hll«lr<' 1 by

ice. The nitultlng crystal- nni«torerao\' nml

oxidized by nitric acid, prixlucing cuniphor, C|„il|«U.

IIHS,7l»~June I, tSSfl. J. C. W, F. TIEMANS. Proceu of maUng artmtUlc

ketimes.

Citral and the homoloKues of acetone are Iri'aled with an alkaline condeiwlnc
agent to form new ketones (melhyllziNl, ethyllzed, etc., ketones), which arv
then converted, by means of acids. Into ketones Isomeric with thooc fliM (ormMl.

683,710— Jane I, »«97. J. C. W. 7. TIEMANN. ^OfTrnBI ketone.

The process of No. ,'>H3.719 Is appllol to cllmiiellone, an aldehyde ront«lnln(
two atoms more of hydrogen than cltrttl.

008,019— July to, I89S. A. BAl.'SCHLICHER. Procra of nnrt apparatv for

making acetone.

A dry mixture nf acetate of lime and calcium hydrate Is treated with •npcr-
heated steam under continuous stirring and constant temperature to wparate
the acetone va|>ors, which are condensed and rectitle«l; the crude a4*etone
mixed with water In excess, settled, and rectified. The secondary producu, at
acetone oils, are Injected Into water under pressure and the mixture rectlHed.

eiO,S6t— September «, 1898. O. MAKA.4.SE. Ozycamphor and proeeu of maUng It
A new proiiuct, C,nH,«(V white. crysUilline. ra. p. 203° to 205° C, vblatlle with
steam vapor, and having a weak pep|>er-like taste, is produced by dlssfdvlng
cainphotiuinone in acetic acid, adding zinc dust until the yellow color disap-
pears, then treating with soda lye, and then with ether, and cTaporalIng tbe
ether.

eiO.eeie— September IS, 1S9S. W.SCHMIDT. Proeeu qf refining camphor.

Crude camphor Is dissolved in a closed chamber In a solvent that does not
mix with water and of leas sp. gr., as benzine or naphtha, the supernatant solu-
tion being withdrawn and filtered In a cl<ise<l filtering chamber, the solvent
I distilled off. and the pure anhydrous camphor crystallizetl.

etS,t9S—July 4, 1899. R. WILLSTATTER. Tropin ketone and proeeu of mating

same.

New products, ketones of tropin bodies, are produced by adding chromium
trioxlde in .small Instjillments to a tropin body, in the presence ofacetic acid,
with agitation; the amount just equaling two-thirds of the molecular equiva-
lent of the tropin iHXly; theti heatiiig to 100° C, cooling, neutralizing the acid
with fixed alkali, and separating.

eiS,SS9—May I, 1900. H. O. CHUTE. Procen qf making acetone.

The pulverulent material is continuously conveyed In a thin film or layer
over a heated surface maintained at the proper temjKTature. and the acetone is
removed by a current "of oxygen-free gas moving in the opixmlte direction, under
a partial vacuum, the gas being reheated and reused.

650,sa—May !t, 1900. A. VERLEY. Process of making oumiied terplnol.

Ozone is caused to act upon terplnol and the ozonized terpinol Is isolated with
ether.

SULPHUR COMPOUNDS.

818,602— May 16, 188S. E. W. R. SCHROTER. Topical remedy.

Icthyolsulphur acid, a new product, applicable for medicinal uses. Is an oil
containing sulphur and sulphuric acid chemically combined, formed by the
action of sulphuric acid on an oil containing sulphur.

S19.0St—Junet, 1SS5. C. FAHLBERG. (Reisxie: 10,667— December 1, 1S8S.) Jtfdau-

faeture of saccharine compounds.

A new saccharine compound, benzoic sulphlnlde. of the formula C7HtOjSN;
sweeter than cane sugar; m. p. 2(K>° C. It Is made from the derivatives of coal-
tar by converting toluene into toluene-sulphonic acid, oxidizing said acid or Itt
salts'intosulplioix-nzoic acid or its salLs, then evaporating the latter and treat-
ing it with phitsphorpentachluride and caustic or carlxtnate of ammonia, and
finally separating the pure saccharine from the ammonia salts thus obtained.

Toliicne is regenerated and hydrochloric and sulphurous acids generated at
the same time from the solid toluene-mono-sulphochloride by the action of car-
bon, water, and superheated steam under pressure. Chlorine is generated for
the preparation of phosphor-pentachloride from pbosphoroxychlorlde, bleach-
ing powder, and water, respectively, hydrocblorlc and phosphoric acids, or one
of them.

891,875— October SO, 188S. E. A. BAUMANN. Medical compound.

Diaithylsulphondlmethylmetban. a new product of general composition of
CrHieSiO.: m. p. 128° C, b. p. 800° C. It Is formed by the oxidation of
acetoneetnylmercaptol with an aqueous solution of potassium permanganate.

S9S,SS8—yorembrr t7, ISSS. E. OSTERMAYER. Production nf iodized tuipho-

acids of phenols, etc.

lodinized phenol, cresol, or thymol sulpho-aclds are produced by treating tba
respective sulfihivaclds or thelrsalts with Iodine or a salt of Iodine In presence
of an oxidizing agent.

890,516— January tl, 1889. E. BAUMANN. Sulphvr compound.

Dicthylsulphonemethylethyimcthane, a new product, of the formulaCiHi#,04:
m. p. 7<i° C. It Is produce<l by the oxidation with potassium (>i'rmangaiiate to a
BUlphone of a new mercaptol formed from a mixtiir*- of melhyletbylketone with
etbylsulphohydrate, with addition of hydrochloric acid.

iOl.iOO— April 16, 18S9. F. KRCoER. Medical compound.

A new product having the formula C«HsCH(SO|&^)t. m. p. 133° C, which to
forme<l by tlie oxidation of the elhylmercaptol of the beiualdehyde C(U}CH
(SOiHs)i by means of permangHimte of potasnum.

m.SOl— April 16. 1889. F. KKCgER. Medical compommd.

A new product, tetramethyl-disulphonmethane, hartnK the formula (CHjWC
(SOiCHs)«, m. p. 120° C. is pri)ducea by the action of gaseous hydnx*b!oric acid
on a mixture of methylmen-aptau and acetone well cooled, the melhylmercap-
tol formed being transformed into the disulphonate by oxidation with (wrman-
ganate of potassium.

iSl,i7i—July I, 1890. M. LANUE. Proeeu qf mak(»g IMIiHa^ipltenflawUne.

A new product, useful as a medicament: m. p. liCfi C. It la formed by beat-
ing together a salt of metaoxydiphenylamine, water, and sulphur. Tbe reac-
tion to promoted by adding an alkali or alkaline carbonate in ezcaii.

290

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

m,09lr-December 9, 1890. E. A. BAUMANN. Sulpho compound.

A new product, diethylsulphone-diethyl-methano. of the formula €982041120;
m. p. 87° C. It is obtained by the action of diethylketone with ethyl-mercaptan
In tne presence of hydrochloric acid, the product being oxidized with perman-
ganate.

i9S.12l,— April n, J89S. A. SPIEGEL. Sulphur compound.

Hydrocarbons, such as mineral oils, are first treated with caustic soda, then
■with sulphuric acid, the product then washed with waterand brine successively,
neutralized with alkaline lye, and the salt and sulphones separated by treat-
ment with a solvent of the sulphones.

m.SiS—AprU 11, 1S9S. E. JACOBSEN. Sulphur compound 0/ hydrocarbon.

New compounds, being neutral hydrocarbon bodies, nonhygroscopic, of a
foliated or pulverulent form, soluble in water, nearly devoid of taste or smell,
and consisting of unsaturated parafHns. or mixtures containing unsaturated
paraffin, combined with sulphur, are produced by combining sulphur by
means of heat with a hydrocarbon free from .sulphur, treating with sulphuric
acid, separating the crude soluble product, and purifying, neutralizing, and
drying.

U9e,llt— April 25, 1S9S. C. FAHLBERG. Process of making pure saccharin.

Saccharin, or anhydro-orthosulpharain-benzoic acid, is purified by introducing
the dry crude product — a mixtureof the said acid with para sulphamin-benzoic
acid — into an aqueous solution of an alkali, as caustic pota.sh, containing such
quantity of the alkali as will neutralize and dissolve only the said ortho-acid —
e. g., 55 "parts by weight of caustic potash for 185 parts of ortho-acid — filtering,
and adding to the filtrate an acid, as a mineral acid, stronger than the ortho-
acid, whereby pure saccharin is precipitated.

liSe.llS— April t5, 1S9S. 0. FAHLBERG. Proceis o/purifying saccharin.

A solution of a mixtureof the alkaline salts of anhydro-ortho sulphamin-
benzoic acid and para-sulphamin-benzoic acid is treated "with an acid, as hydro-
chloric or oxalic, which is stronger than the para-acid, in such quantity as is
requisite to separate out the para-acid only; heated, cooled, and then filtered,
when the ortho-acid, or pure saccharin, is precipitated from the filtrate by the
addition of a stronger acid, preferably a mineral acid.

i97.7iO—May 16,1S93. J. ZIEGLER. Quinolin compound.

A new antiseptic, oxyquinoliu phenol sulphonate of oxyquinoline, soluble in
water and forming iimber-colored hexagonal crystals, is produced by digesting
a mixture of phenol, oxyquinoliu and sulphuric acid, then treating the so-
obtained oxyquinolin-phenolete with a solution of sulphuric acid in water at a
temperature near the boiling point.

Ba.mu— January iS,189!,. E. \V. R. SCHROTER. Process of nmklng pure sulfonic

compounds.

A hydrocarbon containing sulphur in chemical combination is treated with
concentrated sulphuric acid, and the crude sulphonic compound obtained is
several times treated with hydrochloric acid and the acid eliminated.

6eU,78U—July iS,lS9e. C. FAHLBERG. Process of making saccharin.

Toluene is treated with sulphuric acid, and the ortho and para toluene-sulphonic
acids are converted into their magnesium salts by means of a magnesium salt.
The greater part of the para-magnesium salt is separated from the ortho by
crystallization of the former, and the ortho salt and the remainder of the para
salt are converted into sjilts of s(xlium or potassium by treatment with carbonate
of sodium or pota-ssium and oxidized into the corresponding neutral ortho and
para sulphobenzoates of sodium or potassium. The neutral salts are treated
with acid, and the acid salts treated with alcohol and hydrochloric acid gas
and converted into ortho and para ester-acids, which are neutralized with sodium
carbonate and treated with phosphorous pentachloride to convert them into
ester-benzosulphochlorides. These are transformed into their amids by am-
monia and saponified into para-sulphaminbenzoates and a salt of saccharine,
which is then separated out.

679,898— March 50, 1897. G. L. SCHAEFER. Medical compound.

New compounds, comprising an alkaloid base, such as quinine and guaiacol
sulphonic acid, are produced by heating guaiacol with concentrated sulphuric
acid, diluting, neutralizing with a carbonate or hydrate, as pota.«sium carbon-
ate, and treating the salt with a mineral acid, and thus forming guaiacol sul-
phonic acid and then dissolving the alkaloid therein.

SSi.i'l—June 15, 1897. L. 0. HELMERS. Water-soluble compound of ethereal oils.
A new compound, consisting of an ethereal oil or a camphor and the sul-
phonic-acid compound of ichthyol and thiol— and the process applies to like
insoluble substances— is produced by causing the constituents to react, said
sulphonic-acid compound being soluble in water.

601.681— April 19, 1898. \V. DIETERLE. Process of producing orthotoluene stU-

fonic acid.

Orthothiocresol is subjected to the action of an oxidizing agent, as potassium
permanganate, producing orthotoluene sulphonic acid. A continuance of the
oxidation converts the latter Into orthobenzene sulphonic acid.

60t,9!a— April g6, 1898. L. O. HELMERS. lodin derivatii-e of ichthyol and thiol.
A new compound, soluble in water, is produced by reacting upon iodine with
a sulphonic-acid compound of a sulphureted hydrocarbon that is soluble in
water.

eit,85l,— April 11, 1899. B. HOMOLKA AND A. STOCK. Mtrobenzyliden sulfonic

acid and process of making same.

New products, as the ortho or para-nitro-benzylidenanilin-sulphonic acids
and their homologues, are produced by oxidizing the ortho or para-nitrobenzy-
lanilin sulphonic acids or their homologues. They are soluble in water, with a
yellowish color, insoluble in alcohol, ether, etc., and give, on decomposition with
diluted mineral acids, nitrobenzaldehyde.

6K,0t7—May i, 1899. L. O. HELMERS. Tasteless compound from sulfureted hy-
drocarbons, and process of making same.

New products, pulverulent neutral salts, insoluble in water and devoid of taste
and smell, consist of an alkaline-earthy and metallic base, and a sulphonic-
acid compound derived from sulphureted hydrocarbons combined with sul-
phuric acid. They are produced by extracting the salts with a solvent, such as
alcohol, adapted to dissolve only the bitter substances,

6ti,0l8—May S, 1899. L. O. H ELM ERS. Tasteless crmipoundfrom sulfureted hydro-
carbons, and process of making same.

New products, sulphonic-acid salts of alkaline-earthy metals and metals proper
derived from sulphureted hydrocarbons combined w'ith sulphuric acid, devoid
ol taste and smell, are produced by beating the salts up to 130° to 140° C.

6i5,SSi—May SS. 1899. L. O, HELMERS. Deodorized compound of mineral oils,

and process of making same.

Sulphonized compounds derived from sulphureted mineral oils by treatment
with sulphuric acid are made odorless, or nearly so, by treating aqueoas solu-
tions thereof, while cool, with an oxidizing agent, and then concentrating by
heating.

61!S.50S—July 11. 1S99. E. TWITCHELL. Fttlty aromatic sulfa compound and
process of making same.

A new compound, a sulpho-fatty-aromatic acid, a combination of the sul-
phonic radical with the stearic radical and one of the aromatic radicals of the
general formula RtHSOaJCijHasO., a stable, viscous, nonvolatile oil. It forms
water-soluble salts with the alkali metals, and insoluble salts with the other
metals, and is produced by mixing any member of the fatty-acid series with
a member of the aromatic series and treating with sulphuric acid.

628,881— July 11. 1899. G. WENDT AND J. LEHMANN. Process of making siUfo-

acids of aliphatic creosotesters.

The esters, under continuous stirring, are subjected to the action of concen-
trated sulphuric acid at below 150° C, the mixture allowed to stand for two
hours, neutralized, and the sulpho-acids separated out.

61,6,772— April 3. 1900. A. VERLEY. Process of making sulfonates.

Pyridln and chloro-sulphonic acid are caused to react in a neutral solvent; a
phenol is added; thesolvent removed, and the resulting mixture is treated with
potash and the pyridin driven ofl, and the potassium salt obtained is saturated
with an acid.

61,7,237— April 10, 1900. F. SCHMIDT. Diamldodiphenylamin sulfonic acid and

process of making same.

A new product, yielding dyestuffs, is produced by condensing molecular
quantities of para-chlomitrobenzenesulpnonic acid or its salts with para-
phenylenediaminsulphonic acid or its salts and subsequent reduction.

ei8.261— April 21,, 1900. B. HOMOLKA AND A. STOCK. NitrobenzylanUin sulfonic

acid and process of making same.

A new product, where the nitro group is in the ortho or para position, being
a yellow powder, is produced by heating nitrobenzyl-chioride — where the nitro
group is in ortho or para position — with an aqueous solution of a salt of anilin-
sulphonic acid in the presence of alkaline substances.

61,8,568- May 1, 1900. J, KOETSCHET. Process of making toliume sulfochlorid.

Toluene is treated with three or more parts by weight of chloro-sulphonic acid
free from sulphuric anhydride, the temperature being maintained between 5°
and 35° C. or about 10° C. 1

650,218— May 2i, 1900. E. BARELL. Orthoguaiacol sulfo-acid and process of mak-
ing same.

A new product, crptallized in small laminse which do not melt up to 270° C,
is produced by treating pure guaiacol with concentrated sulphuric acid at from
70° to 80° C, isolating a solution of the barium salt thus formed, decomposing
same with sulphuric acid, concentrating and crystallizing out by refrigeration,

651.01,5— June 5, 1900. J. LAGUTT. Process of making saccharin.

Orthosulphamidobenzoic acid is dissolved in a dehydrating agent, as sul-
phuric acid, and after standing at ordinary temperature it is poured upon ice and
water, thereby causing the precipitation "of saccharine.

NITROGEN COMPOUNDS.

NITROSUBSTITUTION COMPOUNDS.

252,1,73— January 17, 1882. J.A.KENDALL. Manufacture of dinitro-benzole from
gas obtained by distillation of coal.

It is obtained from benzole or nitro-benzole existing in gas produced from
carbonaceous substances, by passing the gas through a mixture of nitric and
sulphuric acids, the latter being in excess.

1,11,680— October 8, 1889. C. SAVIGNY. I'rocess of treating the mother liquors of

phenol nitrates.

The mother liquors resulting from the manufacture of nitro-phenols are
heated, and nitric acid distilled therefrom; then cooled, and picric or nitro-
cresylic acid precipitated; then heated, and the sulphuric acid concentrated, and
nitrates added to effect the nitrification of phenols, cresols and the like.

650,332— May 22, 1900. M. IfANDT AND R. HOLDMANN. Process of oxidizing

orthonitrototuene.

Ortho-nitro-toluene is oxidized in the side chain by treatment with sulphuric
acid and maganese peroxide at a temperature above 100° C.

SUBSTITUTED AMMONIAS.
295,825— March 21, 1881,. Z. H. SKRAUP. Manufacture of parachinanisol.

A new product; an oily liquid. It is obtained from the methylic ether of
phenol by heating mixtures of nitro and amido anisol with glycerine and sul-
phuric acid.

308,g86—November 18, ISSi. Z. H. SKRAUP. Production of tetrahydro-parachi-
nanisol.

A new product; m. p. 43° C, b, p. 283° C. It is obtained from parachinanisol
by the action of na.scent hydrogen, and develops an intensely green color by
the action of perchloride of iron, bichromate of potash, or an aqueous solution
of chlorine upon the free base or its saline compounds; hence it is also stvled
"thalline,"

31,3,803— June 15, 1886. C. FAHLBERG. Medicated benzoic sulphinide compound.
A medicated compound, consisting of benzoic sulphinide and an organic
alka!oid,as quinine, produced by dis.solving benzoic sulphinide and the alka-
loid in alcohol or water and crystallizing out the salt.

1,00,086— March 26, 1899. O. HINSBERG. Phenacetine.

A new product of the general composition C10H13O.N; m. p. IS.!" C. It Is
obtained by reducing nitrophenetole and fusing the phenctidin-chlorhydrate
thus formed with dried sodium acetate and glacial acetic acid.

1,22,251- February 25, 1890. S. RADLAUER. Process of preparing a hypnotic.

Chloral-urethane and alcohol are caused to act upon each other in a vacuum at
a temperature of 100° C, and the product, having the formula CvHisClaOsN, with
m. p. 42° C, is crystallized in water.

1,22,331,— February 25, 1890. T. OURTIUS. Hydrazin.

A new product, expressed by the formula NjH,, which, in the form of a gas, is
set free from its hydrate by metallic sodium. The hydrate is formed by the

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

291

action orsodlnm nitrite nn the rhinrhydrnto nf Kljrcnooll ether, the dliuo-acoUo
ether imKluee<l t)elng coiivertwl Intii the trliizo aceliile mid the milt of hydmiln
derived Iheretrotn nnd eonverttKl Into the hydrate iif thl« hydrazln.

iK.OSD— Aprils. I S!K). J. F. VON MERIXti. ClilorairtmimmMe.

A new produet, hnvlni; aniesthellc prwpertles atid m. p. 1180-116° C. of the
formula C^HCUO.CHO.NHs. ' '

USMO-AprilS.lSao. J. K. VON MERINO. Chlom(formamlde.

The proeessof producing the wme (No. 425.03i>) consists In trcfttlng chloral
with formamlde, In the proportion of their molecular welKhts.

iSS.lf:6—.Va!i to, 1890. C. PA.\L. Plifni/liiihydriiquinnzotine.

A new medical compound, having the formula C„H|,Ns, and m. p. 96° C
It is pro<luced by acting with reducing aKcnts upon the formyl derivative of the
ortnonilrobcnzyl anallne.

iSg.rtH-January 10. ma. J. BERLINERBLAU. fnraphenelol-earbamUle and
process ft/ making same.

A new compound, having a sweet taste, crystallizing in white needles and
soluble ill hot water and tne ordinary solvents, is pr(Hiiice<l by treating para-
phenetidinc or para-anlsldlne with phosgene, each in a solvent, as benzole,
filtering, adding ammonia to the filtrate, distilling oS the solvent, and crystal-
lizing.

SOl.SOi— August 1. 1S9S. H. THOMS. Process o/ making paraphmelol carbamide.
A compound having a strong sweet taste, and a m. p. of 170° C, Is produced
by boiling an aqueous solution of para-phenetidin-hydrochloride (three mole-
cules) with common urea (two molecules), or the carbamide salt of ammonia
or ammonium carbonate may be used.

603.71,8— August H. 1S9S. L. LEDERER. Amido-crolonytanUid and process of
making it.

A new compound, of the formula Cif,H,o(NH5)NO. moderately soluble In most
solvents, crystallizing in colorless needles, and having am. p. of 146°-147°C.. is
priKlueed by treating acetylacetanilld with ammonia and allowing It to stand
twenty-tour to thirty hours.

Me.lSS— September 18, lS9ti. S. RADLAUER. Salicylauilid.

A new compound, soluble in alcohol, but not in water, m. p. 100° C. Is pro-
duced by healing acetanilid with salicylic acid in molecular proportions.

SS5,8i6— March 19, 1895. J. F. VON MERINO. SubslUiUion jiroduct of phenetidin.
New compounds, antipyretic bodies, difiBcult of solution in water, are pro-
duced by heating together phenetidin. a suitable acid such as propionic or
butyric acid, and a condensation product, such as zinc chloride, in such pro-
portions that one hydrogen atom of the amido group in the phenetidin is re-
placed by an acid remainder of greater molecular weight than acetyl.

5Se.5SU— March 26, 1895. W. HERZBERG. Amidotriazin.

Sec Group XI. DyestufTs. Artificial. Organic.
5W.7S3—June 11. 1S95. M. FREUND. Hydrastinin.

A new product. CuH^NOs, m. p. 116°-n7° C. combining with one equiva-
lent of an acid, is produced by subjecting hydrastine to the action of an oxidiz-
ing agent.

5i5,579—JtUyS0. 1895. L. LEDERER. Frocessqfpro<luclngphenoxaceticanilide,etc.
The anilids of the phenoxacetic acids, as phenoxacet-para-phenetidids. are
produced by reacting on phenoxacetic acids with aromatic amido-compounds,
as para-phenetidin, and crystallizing out with alcohol-

558,863— April tl, 1896. F. VALENTINER. Process qf making acelophenonphenct-
idin.

Molecular weights of acetophenon and para-phenetidin are heated together.

563,009— June SO. 1896. A. BISCHLER. Melhoxy-acetphenetidin.

A new product, crystallizing in white needles, m. p. 102° C, of general formula
C11H15NO3. and soluble in cold water. It is formed by heating the allcyloxy-
fatly acids or the chlorides of the amids thereof, with primary and secondary
aromatic amins, as by heating para-phenetidin with methoxy-acetic acid.

567,968— September 22. 1896. A. EICHENGROn. lodo/onn combination wilh hexa-

methylenUiramine.

New compounds, crystalline inodorous additive combinations of iodoform
with hexamethylentctrainine, or its haloidalkyi derivatives, which arc not sol-
uble in water and are decomposed by acids or alkalis, liberating io<loform. are
produced by the reaction of the constituent in a solvent, as iodoform and hexa-
methylenamine in absolute alcohol.

569,l,ie—Octoberl3,lS96. O. HINSBERG. Ester 0/ atkoytamidophenoU and meUiod
of making same.

Carbonic esters of alkoylamidophenol, colorless compounds, m. p. 80° to
161° C. easily soluble in hot water or alcohol, are produced, together with their
derivatives, by treating alkovlamidophenols. and their derivatives, the nitrogen
atom of which is alkylated, m the form of their salts with esters of chlorcar-
bonic acid.

57t,,S95— January 5. 1897. R. W. CORNELISON AND W. H. WARREN. Process

of obtaining aceto deriratives of aromatic amins.

They are produced directly by the reaction of an acetic-acid salt and an
aromatic-amin salt upon each other; the acetic-acid radical being replaced with
another acid radical, such as a sulphuric-acid radical, and the acetic-acid radi-
cal thus liberated cau.scd to react finally with an aromatic amiu, as anilin.

57 1..396— January 5, 1897. R. \V. CORNELISON AND W. H. WARREN. Process

nf obtaining aceto derivatives of aromatic amins.

They arc produced by the reactions of an acid salt of acetic acid with the
desired aromatic amin. •

57 i,S7i— January 12, 1897. H. BAU.M. Paraphenetidin compound.

New medicinal paraphenetidin compounds, as meta-alkyloxy, salicylldenpa-
raphenetidin, are produced by condensing gentisinaldehyde with parapheneti-
din, and alkylating the product of condensation.

576,379— Februarys, 1897. I. ROOS. Saiicyl paraphenetidin.

New products, as the orthoiixybenzylidcn-alkyl derivative of amido phenol,
insoluble in water, soluble in alcohol, etc.. m. p. 94° C, of the formula Alk.
0C8H,N(CHCfH,0H) arc productKl by condensing salicylaldebyde with an
alkyl derivative of amidophenol.

»7H.a.si^MnTch ». IHf7. V. T. At'HTEN ASf. H. f. TrTTLK. Pncimq/ making

acftanUid. ric. ^ "

Acetanilid or the aerloliilds are ti.rmert by healInK anllln or tiM lotiiMlm
with dilute acetic acid, or even with crude pyn>llirne<iiw acid. iiiMlcr ynmun.
iag,IHH—July to. 1807. V. W. FRERICHi*. proca, of mamtfaetaHmg iuttnnUi>t.

Acetic acid and anllln oil arc subjcrnil to distillation with ajrlUtlnn undCT
reduced pressure until mont of the lre<- anllln oil and ai-etlc arid hax been
removed: the lost tracea are then removed by distlllalion under Ibe aetfam of
live flteam.

im.aiu-July to. jgfT. W. MAJERT. Proem of mnUnffommomfaealeamlm.

A tiew compound. In drv solid form, eaally soluble In water, la pmdDcad br
treating flnely-powdcre<l dry casein with ammonia gas.

596,897— December It, ISff7. H. R. VIDAL. Process of maktiie paramUoplienoL
0«y»«)beDxol Is reducefl hy so<llum sulphide In the preeeneeof • caualie

I9e,7»7—Januarii I,, 1S»8. E. TAUBER. Process r^f making amldins.

New prodiicla. the amidlns of amidophenol ether< »• "'>"'"^'lpiirB[«radietb-
oxydinhenylamidln, m. p. 121° (!., are produced 1. In- acetyl com-

pounds of amido-phenol ethers with amldophem^l n wive* and a

dehydrating agent, such as a halogen compound if , .. ,,.... us, phuaphorons
sulp^ilde, and hydrochloric acid.

60t.l09— April It. 1898. I. ROOS. Procot qf making saUs of iMranMophenot.

New produots. the prlmar>- salts nf citric icld with alkyl ethers of paramldo-
phenol. white or crystalline comjiounds m. p. l»«°-l«7° C.. soluble In water and
less so in alcohol, arc produced by dissolving molecular quantities of citric acid
and amidophenol alkyl ether In a solvent, as alcohol, and crysulllzlng.

60t.6!iO-April 19, I8U8. C. F. M. 8CHAER0ES AND l>. SCHWARZ. Aeetvl

derivative of phenetidin.

New products, the acetyl derivatives of alkaline phenetidin sulphonate* as
sodium acetyl phenetidin sulphonate. a reddish-while mlcroerystalline hygro-
scopic body, soluble in water, are prepared by treating phenetidin with con-
centrated sulphuric acid, converting the phenetidin-siilphonic acid Into a nit.
and acetylizing this salt by means of glacial acetic acid and acetic anbydrid.

606,977— June tl, 1S98. B. R. SEIFERT. Oxyphenyl-guarMtn and proef of
making same. '

CerUin new oxyphenyl-giianldins adapted to cause ane«thesia, are produced
by melting or dissolving together a carbodiimid with an amldophenolbody.

et5.8tS— December 13. 1S9S. H. C. FEHRLIN. Process of purifying aectanUid.

Crude acetanilid is distilled, preferably under diminished pressure, by a cur-
rent of superheated vapors of acetic acid of a temperature not lower than the
boiling point of acetanilid at the vacuum used.

615,8t9, December 13, 1898. H. 0. FEHRLIN. Process <tf making aeeUmilUl.

A current of superheated vapors of acetic acid at I8S° C. is paned through
anilin oil heated to 160° C. and the woter simultAneoualy removed, until the
conversion of the anilin-oil Into acetanilid is satisfactorily completed.

613,809— Janwiry 31, 1899. H. B. VIDAL. Process of making amitlophmoU.

An amldo-sulphonlc acid of the aromatic series in a concentrated sulphuric
acid solution is reacted upon by an oxidizing agent, as manganese peroxide.

et9.099-Jtdy 18, 1899. F. VALENTINER. Process of making aettophenonvHe-
netidid.

Acetophenone and paraphenetidin In molecular proportions are heated in a
vacuum to the combination temperature, when the desired product is distilled
oil in vacuum.

6i0.5es— January t. 1900. B. HOMOLKA AND A. STOCK. Proetst qf making
amidobenzyliden anilin compounds.
Nitrobenzylanilins are subjected to the action of alkali sulphlds while heated.

6il. 100— January 9. 1900. H. GU8SMANN. Process of making panyoxy-para-
amido-ortho-oxydiphenylamin,

Para-oxy-para-amido-dlphenylamln-ortlio-sulphonic acid is heated with caus-
tic alkalis at 150° to 200° C.

61,1.870— January t3, 1900. L. KNORR. yaphthalanmorphotin.

New product.*, as cthylnaphthalanmorpholin. a thick oil. distilling at 820° C.
forming crystals, m. p. 237° to iS*" C. are produced bv the action of eihanol-
amins upon dihydronaphthalene oxide, and heating of the iiaphthol pttxlnct
with acids.

61,7,075— Apra 10, 1900. \V. H. CLAUS. A. RfeE, AND L. MAKCHLKWSKI. Pro-
cess of making compound* of paraphenetidin.

A solution of paraphenetidin and glucose In a solvent is heated, the aolveiit
thereafter separated, and the uncombined coiutitnents diaaolved out with sol-
vents.

PURINS AND DERIVATIVES.

Purint.

559,31,7— April t8. 1896. E. FISCHER. Chtoro-thmphyUin ana process of prepar-
ing it.

A new compound, CjH (CH,) ,CIN«0,: m. p. 300° C. soluble in hot alcohol.
It is produced by heating 1 part dimethyl-uric acid with 2 parts phosphorus
pentachloride and 4 parts phosphorus oxychloride to 180° C. for several noun.

571.353— Xovember 17, 1S96. E. FISCHER. Bromotheopk^ain andproceme^ mak-
ing same.

A new compound. C5H (CH,) jBrN^O,. m. p. 318° to S20° C. soluble with dlO-
culty in alcohol and water. Is produced by beating a mixture of IheophylUn,
1 port, and bromine. 5 parts, under pressure: driving of! the excess of bromine,
and purifying the residue.

598.50i— February 8. 1898. E. FISCHER. Proeas qf making purint.

A new product, trichloropurin, CjHN.CI, -I- HtO, m. p. 184° to 188° C, Is pro-
duced by heating dichloroxypurin, 1 part, with phosphonis oxychloride. 70
parts: and agitation: then evaporating in vacuo. To purity the crude prnluct
ether is added, the ether removed, and the residue lx>lled in water.

6m.0tS—Jutu It, 1898. E. FISCHER. Process iif making puHn drrimtiret.

New crystalline compounds, amido purin derivatives which have the amido
radical bound to the alloxan nucleus of the purin residue, are produced by lb*

292

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

action of ammonia upon a chlorine derivative of purin having chlorine bound
to the alloxan nucleus. They dissolve with difficulty in alcohol or water and
decompose at high temperature before or while melting.

607,029— July IS, J8SS. E. FISCHER. Adenin and process of making same.

A new compound, methvl-adenin. m. p. 347° C, is produced by agitating amido
dichloropurin with hvdri'odic acid and phosphonium iodide for several hours
atordinars' temperature, then heating to the boiling point and uutil a clear
solution results: filtering and treating with ammonia.

617,080— January 17, 1S99. E. FISCHER. - Atkyt-purin and process of making same,
A new compound, 7-methyl-2-6-diehlaropurin. m. p. 196° to 197° C, is prepared
by heating theobromine with phosphorus o.\ychloride under pressure, then
removing e.'ccess of phosphorus oxychloride, adding water, and treating with
dilute soda lye. Methylized oxypurins are prepared by treating methyldichlo-
ropurin with an alkali, and paraxanthin by subsequent treatment of the fore-
going with a mineral acid.

6S5.U1—M(iy S3, 1399. E. FISCHER. Thio derivative of purin and making same.
New compounds, a thiopurin having the group SH bound to one or more of
the carbon atoms of the purin molecule, as l-3-7-trimethyl-2-6-dioxy 8-thio-
purin or thiocaffein, crystalliEing in fine flexible needles, m. p. 308° C. They
are produced bv heating under pressure a halogen-purin derivative with the
solution of an a"lkaline sulphydrate and then acidulating the solution.

6S1,705— August SS, 1S99. E. FISCHER. Process of making theobromin.

3-7-dimelhyl-6-amido-2-8-dioxypurin is treated with phosphorous-oxy-chlor-
ide, the resulting oxychloropuri'n Is isolated and treated with a reducing agent,
and the then resulting 3-7-dimethyl-6-amido-2-oxypurin, a new product, is iso-
lated and acted upon with nitrous acid.

651,706- August 22, 1899. E. FISCHER. Oxypurin and process of making same.

Trichloro-purin is acted upon with an alcoholic alkali; the 2-8-dichloro-6-
Rlkvl-oxypurin is then acted upon with hydrochloric acid and the resulting
dichloro-oxypurin alkalized; the product, l-7-dimethyl-6-oxy-2-8-dichloro purin,
being a new compound, m. p. between 245° and 255° C. Subsequent treatment
produces alkylized hypoxanthins, etc.

631,708— August 22, 1899. E. FISCHER. Oxypurin and process of making same.

A new compound, 8-chloro-2-6-diethoxypurin, m. p. 205° C, is produced by
heating trichloropurin with excess of sodium-ethylate. This product is dis-
solved in hydriodic acid and treated with phosphonium-iodide to produce
xanthin.

631,709- August 2i, 1899. E. FISCHER. Oxypurin and process of making same.

A new compound, 6-oxy-2-8-dichlor-purin, is produced by treating 2-8-dichlor-
6-ethoxy-purin with fuming hydrochloric acid and heat. This product is
treated with hydriodic acid and phosphonium iodide to obtain hypoxanthin.

632,828- September 12, 1899. F. ACH. Process of making uric-acid derivatives.

An alkaline solution of a uric acid is treated with a haloid ether at a low tem-
perature.

6!,7,S92— April 10, 1900. E. FISCHER. Oxypurin and process of making same,

2-8-dichloro-6-ethoxy-purin, a new compound, m. p. 200° C, is produced by
dissolving trichloropvirin in ethyl alcohol, treating with a sodium solution, and
finally supersaturating with acetic acid. Said compound is treated with a
reducing agent to produce hypoxanthins.

Xant/iiju.

B69,ttH9 — October 13, 1896. E. FISCHER. Process of making xanthin derivatives.

Dialkyl uric acid is treated with a pentahalogen compound of phosphorus in
the presence of a solvent, such as phosphorus oxychloride, and the resulting
halogen derivative is treated with a reducing ageut to convert it into a homo-
logue o/ xanthin of the type of theophyllin.

169,1^0— Oclobcr IS, 1898. E. FISCHER. Process of making derivatives of yanthin,
A halogen dialkyl derivative of xanthin (No. 569,489) is converted into its salt,
which salt is then alkylized and the resulting halogen trialkyl derivative of
xanthin reduced, whereby the homologue of xanthin of the type of caflein is
produced.

£8S,327—August 17, 1897. E. FISCHER. Process of obtaining xanthin derivalives.

Tetramethyl-urie acid is heated with five times its weight of phosphorus
oxychloride iu a closed vessel to 160° to 165° C. for ten hours, and the crude
product then subjected to the action of fuming hydrochloric acid, the solution
evaporated to dryness, and t eated with soda lye. The chlorocaffein remaining
is acted upon by reducing agents to obtain caffein.

617,986- January 17, 1S99. E. FISCHER. Process of making heteroxanthin.
7-methyl-2-6-dichloropurin is heated with hydrochloric acid under pressure.

618,01,1— January 17, 1S99. E. FISCHER. Alkyl-hypoianthin and process of mak-
ing same.
A new compound, methyl hypoxanthin, m. p. 3-53° C, readily soluble in

water, assuming a brown color when heated to 340° C, is produced by heating

7-methyl-6oxy-2-chloropurin with hydriodic acid and phosphonium iodide. The

product is methylated to produce dimethyl-hypoxanthin.

631,707— August SI, 1899, E. FISCHER, XaiMin derivatives and process of mak-
ing same.
A new product, chloroxanthin, or 8-chloro-2-6-dioxy-purin, is produced by

treating an 8-chloro-2-6-dialkyl-oxpurin with hydrochloric acid. The product is

subsequently alkylized and treated with methyl Iodide.

631,7B7— August 22, 1899. F. ACH. Xanthin derivative and process of making

tame.

Certain alkyl-uri« acids, as 3-methyl-urlc acid, are treated with phosphorus-
oxy-chloride, producing a new compound, 3-methyl-chloro xanthin, having no
melting point, but decomposing at 345° C. This compound is submitted to the
action of reducing and methylatiug agents.

631,768— August 22, 1899. F. ACH. Alkyl-xanlhin derivative and process of making
same.

A 7-alkyl-uric acid, as 7-methyl-uric acid, is heated with phosphorus-oxy-
chloride alone and the product purified and crystallized. The new compound,
chloro-heteroxauthin, has no melting point, but decomposes at 340° C. It is
alkylized and reduced.

esl,769—August 22, 1S99. F. ACH. Alkyl-xanthin and process of making same.

A new product, chloro-theo-bromin, m. p. 292° to 293° C, is produced by heat-
ing 8-7-dimethyl-uric acid with phosphorus-oxy-chloride alone, crystallizing,
dis.solving in alkali, and precipitating with acid. This product is alkylized and
reduced.

031,760— August'22, 1889. F. ACH. Alkylized xanthin atid process of making same.
A new compound, 3-methyl-xanthin, having no melting point, but decompos-
ing at 400° C, is produced by heating 3-methyl-chloro-xanthin with hydriodic
acid and phosphonium-iodide. This product is alkylized and reduced.

PYRAZ0LE3.

S07,S99—October 28, JSSi. T;. KNORR. Preparation of dimethyl-phenyl-oxypiyrazol.
A new product, m. p. Ii3° C. Acetylacetic ether is mixed with a molecular
quantity of phenyl-hydrazine, water is eliminated, and the condensed product,
phenyl-hydrazine-acetylacetic ether, is heated to 100° to 160° C. and crystallized,
forming methyl-phenyl-oxypyrazol. This is heated with methyl chloride, bro-
mide, or iodide and converted intodimethyl-phenyl-oxypyrazol.

CHINOLINES OR QUINOLINES.

237,917— February 15, 18S1. Z. H. SKRAUP. Production of oxychinoline.

A new product, for the manufacture of blue dyestuffs and other purposes, pro-
duced by the action of glycerine and sulphuric acid upon a mixture of ortho-
nitro-phenol and ortho-amido-phenol.

2S7 ,918— February 15, 1881. Z. H. SKRAUP. Production of oxychinoline.

A new product, for the manufacture of blue dyestuffs and other purposes,
produced by the action of glycerine and sulphuric acid upon a mixture of para-
nitro-phenol and para-amido-phenol.

2kl,733—May 17, 1881. Z. H. SKRAUP. Manufacture of artificial chinoline.

A new product. It is produced by the action of glycerine and sulphuric acid
upon a mixture of nitro-benzole and aniline.

252,81,6— January 21,, 1882. \V. PICKHARDT AND H. ENDEMANN. Preparation

oj cfitnoline.

Citrate of chinoline, a new product, is made by treating purified artificial
chinoline (No. 241,738) with citric acid.

252,81,7— January 2i, 1882. W. PICKHARDT AND H. ENDEMANN. Preparation

of chinoline.

Sulphate of chinoline, a new product, is made by treating purified artificial
chinoline dissolved in alcohol with sulphuric acid.

25l,,097— February 21, 1882. W. PICKHARDT AND H. ENDEMANN. Medical

compound.

Hydrochlorate of chinoline, white and free from lepidine. Is made by dissolv-
ing purified artificial chinoline in aqueous hydrochloric acid and evaporating.

2Si,098— February 21, 1882. W. PICKHARDT AND H. ENDEMANN Manufac-
ture of chinoline.
The artificial chinoline of Skraup is refined and purified by treatment with

tartaric acid, the acid tartrate of chinoline being separated from the solution,

ana the chinoline liberated by the action of caustic alkalis.

256,1,1,1,— April 11, 1882. W. PICKHARDT AND H. ENDEMANN. Salicylate of

chinoline.

A new product. It is made from purified artificial chinoline by treatment in
alcohol with salicylic acid.

256,1,1,5— April 11, 1S82. W. PICKHARDT AND H. ENDEMANN. Benzoate of

chinoline.

A new product. It is made from purified artificial chinoline by the distilla-
tion of a mixture of pure benzoic acid and chinoline.

257,828— May 9, 1S82. W. PICKHARDT AND H. ENDEMANN. Tartrate of oxy-

chinoiine.

It is prepared by the action of tartaric acid upon the oxychinoline of Skraup,
(No. 237,918).

257,829— .May 9, ISSl. W. PICKHARDT AND H. ENDEMANN. Hydrochlorate of

oxycliinoline.

It is prepared by the action of hydrochloric acid upon the oxychinoline of
Skraup.

seo.317— June 27, 1832. W. PICKHARDT AND H. ENDEMANN. Acid tannateof

chinoline.

A new product. It is prepared by evaporating a mixture of tannic acid, 5
pounds, and artificial chinoline, 1 pound, in a minimum quantity of water.

260,318— June 27, 1882. W. PICKHARDT AND H. ENDEMANN. Neutral tannate,
of chinoline.

A new product. It is prepared by evaporating a mixture of tannic acid, 5
pounds, and artificial chinoline, 2 pounds, in a minimum quantity of water.

260,319— June 27, 1SS2. W. PICKHARDT AND H. ENDEMANN. Basic tamiate of

chinoline.

A new product. It is prepared by evaporating a mixture of tannic acid, 5
pounds, and artificial chinoline, 3 pounds, in a minimum quantity of water.

270,01,5— January «, 18S3. O. FISCHER. Method of preparing oxyquinoline.

Oxyquinoline, a new antiseptic, is obtained by treating quinoline-sulphonic
acid with caustic soda or potash, under the action of heat.

273,1,98- Match 6, 1SS3. O. FISCHER. Process of pre}>aring oxyliydro-cthyl cliino-

line.

Oxyhydro-ethyl chinoline, a new product, is made by first converting chino-
line into oxychinoline, then treating the same with tin and hydrochloric acid
and converting the oxyhydro-chinoline produced into oxyhydro-ethyl chino-
line by treatment of the isomeric oxyhydro-chinoline with ethyl iodide by heat
in a water bath, and extracting the base with water and precipitating with
caustic soda.

276.796— May 1, 1383. O. FISCHER. Preparation of oxyhydro-methyl chinoline.

Oxyhydro-methyl chinoline, a new product, is produced by substilutingmethyl
iodide for ethyl iodide in the process of No. 273,498.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

298

tSt,iSS—AuguH 7, 18SS. A. b6hRIN(5ER. Method <\f prodwlng mOHola/lUal

hi/dro-b<usff.

They are proditcwl by flnit oonvertltiK (ho tcrllRry biucii (an rhlnollnc) Into
fiiltsorihpnmnidnhim base* (bii ohiorlilc ol mcthyl-chlnnline) by alcylimtloo,
and then hy(lrii|tenl7.lnK wlrt salts to produce aelilnalu which liberate the mona-
eylated hydro-bases (lusmono-ethyl-hydro-chliiollnc).

Sf.i.Sit—Jmuani tl. 'SX7. K.SCH.MITT. Mnnufncture((fox!ichiiiiUinfnirbmmUii.
Tlioy arc produced by treatiiiK the (.xychlnoUne alkalic'* and earthy nikalles
with cnrhonio acid under pressure and at an elevated temperature.

Ue,707— January S, 18»t. J. ZIEGLEK. Proctu of prfparing phmol tuiphonoUt
qfojychinolinr.

The ortho and para phenol sulphonates o( ortho-oxychlnollnc are (ormcd by
the production of ortfio-oxyplilnoline by dlRestinK orthoamldo-phenolpamsuf-
phonic acid w'th orthonilrophcnolparasulphonlc add and with Klycerlne and
sulphuric add: precipitating theoxycblnollne from the product ot "the reaction
by means otsfKlu and pnrifyinB it; and then heating it with ortho or para phenol
tulplionic acid in molecular proportions. The phenol sulphonate of oxychlno-
Uncisa yellow sirup, solidifylnK In crystals at a low degree of colder in a
vacuum chamber.

IS6.708— January B, tS9S. J. ZIEOLER. Procegf of preparing oxychinnline tiU-

phate.

The substitution of sulphuric acid for the ortho or para phenol sulphonic add
of process No. 4t)«i.707 (In the nrotmrtion ot two molecules of oxyehlnollne toone
of sulphuric add) results in tiic production of the .sulphate ol ortbo-oxychino-
llne, a new product of the formula Ci8Hi4N.iO«. HjSO,; m. p. 172°-173° C.

I7»,i9/i—july S. !S9t. J. ZIEGLER. Antiseptic qiUnoline.

A .soluble antiseptic, conslstins of quinollne combined with a saponaceous
Bolmion. It is formed by saponifying oils or fats in the presence of quinollne;
boiling until the solution is complete; and thereafter adding water to the solu-
tion.

ise.seS—XovcTnher 15, lS9t. 3. ZIEGLER. Chinolinehinopfienol-wlplmte and

vitihoii n/ obtaining same.

A new compound, a sulphur-yellow powder, soluble in water, m. p. 114° C, Is
prodijced from ortho-oxychinoiine and chinoline by heating a mixture of one
of the said substances and a sulphate of the other.

Slt.SSO— January 9. lH9i. G. N. VIS. Orthooxyelhyt-alpha-benzoylaml'lo-quiiwlin.
A new compound, crystallizing in small needles, m. p. 206° C, and scarcely
soluble in water, is produced by treating tethoxy amido quinollne or a hydro-
chloric acid salt thereof with bcnzoyl-chloride.

563,116— June $0, IS'jS. ,1. ZIEGLER. Proceis of malting quinolin eompoundi.

An antiseptic disinfectant, soluble in water, is produced by boiling for ten
hours two molecules O-oxyquinoline in alcohol witn one molecule pyrosulphate
of potassium, separating and drying the product.

CHINALDINES.

S09.9Si— December SO, lasi. O. DOEBNER AND W. VON MILLER. Xanu/adure

of bates called ehinaldinee.

New products applicable for the manufacture of coloring matters or for anti-
septics and medicinal uses. They are obtained by combining an acid and a
nietalllc salt, acting as a reducing agent, with aldehyde or Its equivalents, and
a primary aromatic ba.se; purifying the base obtained by the reaction. Chinal-
. dine Is a fluid, b. p. 240° C.

Sie,l!,S— April tl, 1S85. O. DOEBNER AND W. VON MILLER. Formation of

meihoxy and ethoxy chinaldine.

New products, derivatives ol chinaldine and applicable for the manufacture
of coloiing matters, or for antiseptic and antipyretic purposes. They are obtained
from the sulpho-acid of the chinaldines by melting the same with alkali, and
subsequent alkylation of the oxychinaldincs formed; or by the action of alde-
hyde or the salts of amidr henols, amidophenol methyl, and amidophenol
ethylethers. Methoxy-chiualdlne, m. p. 125°C.; ethoxy-chinaldme, m. p. 72° C.

Sie.lia— April 21, 1885. O. DOEBNER AND W. VON MILLER. Formation of

the hydrobase of chinaldine.

Chinaldine bases or the oxymethoxy and althoxy chinaldlnesare boiled with
tin and coiiccntnited sulphuric acid, the product freed from tin. and the liydm-
ba*e separated by treatment with poda lye and distillation. They are new "pro<l-
ucts applicable for the manufacture of grey coloring matter or as antiseptic or
medicinal agents. Hydrochlnaldinelsanaromatic fluid, b. p. 246°C.; methoxy-
hydrochinaldine, b. p. 270° C.

ISATINS.

SW,60i— January IS, 1885. P. J. MEYER. Manufacture of isatins ami substituted

isallnt.

Isatins and substituted isatins, available for the manufacture of artiScial
indigo, are obtained from dihalogenlzed acids, their salts, amides, ethers, and
aldehydes, or from aromatic amines or substituted amines, by directly fusing or
boiling their solutions, and treating the product with a strong add.

618,096— January tu, 1809. B. HEYMANN. Diacctyl-tndoxyl and process of making

same.

A new product, a white powder, nearly insoluble in water, m. p. 82° C, on
heating with caustic lyes transformed into indoxyl, the latter yielding Indigo
by oxidation. It Is produced by heating an alkaline salt of phenylglycinortho-
earbonic acid with acetic anhydrid.

ALKALOIDS.

S79,I9S— March IS, 1888. L.B.WELD. Preparing hydrochioralc qf qutnia.

Sulphate of quinine is dissolved In boiling alcohol with sodium chloride; sul-
phate of soda and excess of sodium chloride is precipitated by concentration;
and the alcohol evaporated to deposit the bydrochlorate of quinine as crystals.

i50.8S7— April tl, 1891. C. T. LIEBERMANN AND F. GIESEL. Procet* qf

obtaining ecgonine.

Ecgonine Is prtnluced from the amorphous alkaloids contained in coca leaves
or In crude cocaine, by decomposing the amorphous alkaloids by a suitabic
medium, as by boiling in hydrochloric acid, into organic adds and ecgonine,
separating the organic acids by tiltration, evaporating the solution, and crystal-
lizing the ecgonine with alcohol. The ecgonine is converted, by treatment
with benzoyl or benzoic anhydride. Into benzoyl-ccgonlne, and the latter may
be converted Into cocaine.

lOI.Ott July II, lsi/,'1. E. OHIMAdX. proerti ,,f making tails qf^mMne.

Chlorhydni-suliplmic or bromhydro-aulphatc of qulnini>, double witn paiawB.
ing great xilulilllty, are prciwred by nddltig to and IncoriKiratIng with baite
quinine onlphate. hydriK'hlorleand hydrobromlc«ckls,nma«lrcly,anil rvnor-
Ing the excen of the reagent.

tSI,,.rKS— June l.y 1897. J. K. K. VON M KKI.\(i llmzUnu^l.ln

A new rin«lnct (■|,H,.\(>30c,,H,.ru.. .ri ,nl prtaoa,

but allghtlv aoluble In water, enslly •oltible i ■ dhf hw>

Ing morphin In presence of an alkali— a> ,-,r,,.,,„ „,.,,, i.—^ i„i,ty\ hakifm
anil n suitable aolvent. on alcohol M'pamtlng the predplUle, neutnlUlnc It br
an add, as hydnM'hloric add, and then purifying.

l85,«IO-Junet9, lim. K. WILI>TATTER. Prorrss „f making psnd/Mnptm.

Tropin Is treate<1 with alkalies at an elevated temiX'mture, a> by boiling wltb
a concentiated amyl-alcohollc solution of irMllttm aroylale.

m. 801,— January M. lata. J. V. LLOYD. Melliod iff and apparabufor eitraeHma
nicotine.

A column of tobacco in a closed chamber l« bumetl from the liottom, the prod-
ucts of combustion iH'ingilrawn up through the mawof iinburned t»t>arro, and
the nicotine vapors absorbed in an add solution.

me.itl—June It, lana. E. LANUHELD. Quinine lUritaUve and pntam^tmaUoa
same.

A new derivative, C,,H^N,0,. a yellowish amorphous powder, very aolnhle In
water, alcohol, etc., ami having an acid reaction. Is produced by treating a
quinine solution wltb ozonized gas until precipitation will not be caused bran
alkali.

6tu,l,06— February ta, 1S99. F. D. B ANNINO. Pmee— qf esttnuUnn nieoUist.

Steam and ammoDla are poaaed through the tobtwco fiber and then Into re-
claiming acid.

6tS,798— April's, 1899. R. MACKILL. Extrnrting nirnlin.

A tobacco extract is first agitated with a cau»tic.si>da solution, then gamline
la added and again agitated, when the gasoline with the nicotine In solution la
decanted and distilled.

eU,07S—May 16, 1899. A. WELLER. Carbonic esters qf einehma alkaMdt and

process of making same.

New, tasteless products. Insoluble In water and benzene, soluble In alcohol
and acids. They are produced by reacting with phongene upon sufflcient
cinchona alkaloid to dl.splace both chlorine molecules of the phosgene with the
cinchona alkaloid; then adding an acid to form the corresponding salt.

6t9.»eir-JiUy 18, 1899. F. J. VON MERING. Process of making ethyl nunTihln.

Ethyl bromide is caiuied to act upon an alkaline solution o( morphine.
637, 8S»— November 38, 1899. A. WELLER. Tasteless r/ulnin compound.

Tasteless products, derivatives of the quinine or cinchonldin carbonic add.
are prepared by causing the cinchona alkaloids or their salts to act either upon
substituted Isoc.vanates or upon substituted carbonic chlorides.

640,977 — January 9. 1900. H. THRON. Process of making quinln cartonie eUur.
The .salts of the alkaloids of the cinchona bark are acted upon with an ether

of chlorocarbonic add.

PYRAZINES AND PIPERAZINES.

ai.StO— March tt. 1892. W. MAJERT. Process of making pipemzin.

It Is obtained from Us hydrwarbon compounds, asdlnaphthvlpiperazin, by
Isolating the pipcrazin by means of an alkaline solution, distilling off the piper-
azin into a suitable acid to form salts, and crystallizing out the salt*.

i8t, lOS— September 6, ISat. P. VOLKMANN. Process of making plperattn.

The dinltroso com(>ounds of diphenvlniperazin. ditolylpinerazln. dlxylylpl-
perazin. dinaphthylpiperazin, or the suipno adds or othersubstitntion products
thereof.are treated with sulphurousacld, sulphur dioxlde,oralkaline bisulphites.

500,665— Jtdy i, 1S9S. W. MARCKWALD. Process qf obtaining pipcrazin.

A salt of ethylene or an aromatic amide Is caused to act uprjn an aromatic
sulpho-compound of an amide in the presence rtf an alkali at a temperature
alKive the normal. prcKludng an aromatic disulphonic piperazlilc This product
is mixed with water or an inorganic add solution and heated, whereby the
plperszln Is split oil as an add sulphate, and the add salt is neutralized at a
temperature oDove the normal, whereby free piperazin is obtained.

509.087— November tl, 1S9S. W. MAJERT. Process of making piperarine.

Piphcnyl or ditolyl plperazine, or a salt thereof, is subjei'led to the action of
the fumes of anhydrous sulphuric acid, the sulpho product is treated with fum-
ing sulphuric add, and an alkali or alkaline earth is then mixed therewith and
the mixture heated.

511,303— December 19, 1S9S. W. MAJERT AND A. SCHMIDT. Itprraiin.

Anhydrous plperazine, a new compound, of the formula C,H„uN'}.a yellowlah
crystalline substance, m. p. 1(M° to 112° C. and a strong solvent of iinc add, is
produce<l by distilling a mixture of pii>erazine hvdrateand a solid alkali hydrate,
several times repeated, then heating the distillate In a closed vessel wltb an
alkall-hydroxlde or barium oxide, and tinally distilling the mixture over
sodium.

5U,eSt— February 13, 189i. C, 8T0EHR. Dlmethylpiperastn.

A new compound, CtH|,N|. forming white crystals, m. p. 110° C, and b. p.
182° C, and easily soluble in water and alcohol, is produced oy distilling glycer-
ine with ammonium chloride and ammonium carbonate, or agenu gtvlng off
ammonia, and then Isolating the thus formed dlmethylpyraxinc and reducing it,
as by metallic .sodium alcohol.

S97,i5i—Januaiv la, ia»a. W. B. & A. BISHOP. Proeen qf mating pipenttm

salts.

Stable salts are produced by thoroughly mixing plperazine or piperaxfne hr-
drate and an organic hvdroxy ad<l. as citric or tartaric acitl. by melting or In
solution, crystallizing slowly, and afterwards heating to vx\*ei ii'ioisture.

597. 71S— January tS.iaaa. P. 8CUIDR0WITZ AND O. K06ENHEIM . /■^pcrMfa

derivative.

New products, as a derivative ol nlperidln with guaiacol of the formula (Cr
H,0|)iCiH,tN, are proilnced by acting upon piperidin or its homnlogucs with
an ether of a monoxypheuol.

294

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

615,iS8— December 6. 1S9S. L. KNORR. MorphoUn and procegs of miking same.

A new product, the moiT)holin C,HaNO, a liquid witli b. p. 128° C, soluble in
water, alcohol, etc., having an odor .similar to piperidin, is produced by heat-
ing certain derivatives of dioxyethylamin with acid condensation agents, then
making the solution alkaline and distilling with steam.

PROTEIDS.
Sii,91l—Au(jtist so, 1S95. N. R. FINSEN. Process o/ making hxmalin albumen.

A new food product Is produced by mixing deflbrinated blood with nitric
acid, coagulating with heat, washing and drying the albumen, heating the prod-
uct in vacuo, and powdering.

S66.280—Augmt IS, 1S96. O. &CHMIEDEBERG. Process of obtaining iron deriva-
tives of albumen.

An iron derivative of albumen is extracted Irom the liver or other animal
organ bv slowly heating with water to the boiling point, separating the coagu-
lum and' treating it with dilute tartaric acid.

ee? ,70e— September 15, JS'96. D. FIXKLER. Method of obtaining albumm.

The fatty constituents ol albuminous substances being first saponified and
washed out, the other undesirable constituents are decomposed by boiling with
a suitable reagent, as peroxide of hydrogen; the products of decomposition are
washed out with a neutral salt solution, the albumen separated from the solu-
tion, and trace.-i of the latter removed with alcohol.

6Si,t,0S— September 5, 1899. W. A. HALL. Process of producing casein.

The curd is precipitated from milk by means of muriatic acid, and the casein
thus formed is subjected to a temperature sufficient to volatilize the acid— about
120° F.— and preferably in the presence of a current of air.

GROUP XIX.— CHEMICALS NOT OTHERWISE
ENUMERATED.

INORGANIC.

166,S79— August 5, 1S75. S. H. JOHNSON. Improvement in methods of and appa-
ratus for separating free sulphur.

The sulphur-bearing substance in a dry state is mixed with carbon bisulphide
and heated in a closed vessel with agitation; the agitation stopped, and the
liquid contentii forced through the settled granular residuum forming a filter
by the vapor pressure generated. A fresh charge of carbon bisulphide is then
admitted into the extractor, mixed with the residuum by agitation, settled, the
liquid contents discharged into a separate receiver, and the resultant product
applied to a fresh charge of sulphur-bearing material, thus securing a strong
solution for evaporation.

ISl.sei—Septnnber 19, 1S76. E. J. ERASER. Improvement in processes and appa-
ratus for refining and packing sulphur.
Fused sulphur is run into wet sacks.
SI,9,9S1— September tS, 1SS6. C. F. CLAUS. Obtaining sulphur from hydrogen sul-
phide.

Hydrogen sulphide mixed with a chemical equivalent of atmospheric oxygen
is passed through anhydrous oxide of iron preheated to not less than 93° C,
whereby the desired lieat of the oxide is maintained, and free sulphur is con-
tinuously formed,

S5U,S9S— December U, 1SS6. C. F. CLAUS. Process of obtaining sulphur from sul-

phureted hydrogen.

As an improvement on the process of No. 349,981, the iron oxide is mixed with
lime, magnesia, alumina, or like substances to prevent the formation of clinkers.

Se9,16l,-MarchS, 1SS7. H. L. LIGHTNER. Apparatus for atomizing sulphur.

Sulphur is reduced to an impalpable powder by atomizing liquid sulphur
with a jet of hot air or steam.

Sei,T61— April te, 1887. E. HANISCH AND M. SCHROEDER. Process of ob-
taining sulphur from furnace-gases.
The furnace gases are passed through water or a water-tower; which water

is then heated, and the sulphurous acid gas thereby absorbed and given off is

passed through or over a glowing bed of fuel, and then through a glowing mass

of fire-brick in the absence of a reducing agent,

US,6g9— December SO, 1S90. E. F.WHITE. Manufacture of fUmers of sulphur.

Liquid sulphur, melted by a steam coil without boiling, is fed through a
siplion into a retort and boiled under less than an atmospheric pressure, the
vapor being passed to a condenser and the condensed sulphur forced by an air
blast to a receiver. The air blast creates the partial vacuum in the retort and
the flow of liquid sulphur thereinto.

1,93,193— March?, 1893. C. W. STICKNEY. Process of roasting sulphur-bearing

ores.

One portion of the ore is roasted with steam generating hydrogen sulphide,
and another portion is roasted with air generating sulphurous acid gas, and
the gases are mingled in contact with a solution of a sulphate of iron, copper,
or zinc, resulting in the deposition of the sulphur.

60t,iSl— August 1, 1S9S. II. H. EAMES. Process of desulphurizing metallic ores.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

616,391— December SO, 1S9S. V. DE BARANOFF AND E. HILDT. Process of

obtaining sulfur from sulfates.

Sulphur, sulphurous acid, and sulphides are simultaneously produced direct
from Kulpliates by reducing a metallic sulphate by means of carbim under heat,
causing the carlKinic acid generated to act in presence of water upon a metallic
sulphide to generate hydrogen sulphide; and then treating a metallic sulphate
with the liydrogen sulphide under heat and decomposing the sulphate into sul-
phur, sulphurous acid, and sulphides.

PHOSPHOROUS.

171,813— January 4, 1876. A. G. HUNTER. Improvement in retorts far distiUimj

phosphorous.

The phosphoric-acid mixture is heated in a retort and the volatilized products
are caused to pass through carbon in another portion of the retort heated to a
while heat before passing to the condenser,

il7,9i$— December 24, 18S9. J. B. READMAN, Process cf dbtaining phosphorous.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
iee,sn—May se, 1S91. H. H. wing. Manufacture qf phosphorus.

A mixture of a phosphate and a silicate is calcined by a reducing flame at a
high temperature, whereby phosphoric anhydride is expelled and reduced,
the fumes passing to a depositing chamber maintained at about 260° C, in which
red phosphorus is deposited, the remaining fumes being conducted through
water chambers in which yellow phosphorus is condensed.

6«!,16S— October 9, 1891,. A. SHEARER AND R. R. CLAPP. Process of making

phosphorus.

A pulverized mixtureof a metallic chloride — as sodium or potassium chloride —
and carbon and calcined phosphate of alumind is heated In a retort in the
presence of dried hydrochloric acid gas.

60i,7 U— April 19, 1898. C. K. HARDING. Process of smelting phosphorus.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

CARBON.

90,SH— June 1 , 1869. J. DICKINSON. Improvement in the preparation of mitieral

carbon for use i7i the arts.

Black diamonds are shaped with drill points and cutting edges and faces for
dressing or cutting stones, etc., and firmly setting In meta,l tools, by rubbing or
abrading one diamond or carbon against another.

263,758— September 5, 1882. C.F. BRUSH. Process of baking carbon rods.

For baking, the rods are stacked in pyramidal form in a receptacle and the
interspaces ana spacer at ends and sides of the pyramidal pile filled with sand.

379,960 — March 37, ISSS. C. H.LAND. Manufacture of ri^radory carbon.

Carbonaceous matter is subjected in an open muffle, located in a furnace, to
the products of combu-stion under pressure, whereby a counter-resistance is
offered to expel oxygen from the muffle, prevent ignition of said matter, and
drive off determined elements therefrom.

568,323— September 29, 1896. E. G. ACHESON. Manufacture of graphite.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
698,51,9— February 8, 1898. H. H. WING. Process of manufacturing graphite.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

617,979— January 17, 1899. E. G. ACHESON. Method of manufacturing graphite

articles.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
61,5,285— March 13, 1900. E. G. ACHESON. Method of manufacturing graphite, i

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

HALOID COMPOUNDS.

696,57S—Octbber8,lS67. J.E.MILLS. Impro^iement in the manufacture of chloride

of zinc.

Zinc chloride is produced direct from its oxide, carbonate, or silicate ores by
digesting same with muriatic acid. In the case of silicate ores the chloride is
freed from the gelatinous .silica by evaporating the water and excess of acid
and redissolving the zinc chloride. Iron and manganese, when present, are
separated by drying the digested mass, oxidizing, and redis-solving the zinc
chloride,

175,583— April 4, 1876. J. WYETH. Improvement in compressed chloride of am-

monium.

Chloride of ammonium is compressed into a rod or cylinder, for convenience
in use.

196,1,61, — October 23, 1877. C. LENNIG. Improvement in manufacture of sal am-
moniac and sulphate of soda or potash.

A mixture of sulphate of ammonia and muriate of soda, or potash, is continu-
ously fed into and through a furnace chamber heated to a dull cherry-red heat,
and sulphate of soda, or potash, continuously withdrawn; sal ammoniac being
continuously condensed in a condensing chamber in the form of flaky particles.

212,596 — February 25, 1879. W. GENTLES. Improvement in manufacture of muri-
ate of ammonia.

Suitable ammoniacal liguor is distilled and the volatilized carbonate of am-
monia pas,sed into a solution of calcium chloride, the resultant solution heated,
the remaining clear liquor treated with hydrochloric acid, and the arsenic of
the calcium-chloride and hydrochloric acid precipitated as tartar-sulphide of
arsenic plus a little sulphur. The clear and settled liquor is rendered alkaline
with the ammoniacal liquor evolved, the iron settled, and the liquor condensed
to crystallization.

220,1,10— October 7, 1879. W. H. WAHL AND E. Y. ELTONHEAD. Improvement

in the manufacture of chloride of zinc.

Crude chloride of zinc Ls made from precipitated dross by granulating the
same and treating with hydrochloric acid.

231,860— Aiigust 31, 1880. E, SOLVAY. Manufacture ofclUoride of lime.

The hydrate of lime is formed into small fragments of uniform size, as little
balls.

23l,.596— November 16, 1880. J. F. N. MACAY'. Manufacture of ferric oxide and

cupric chloride.

See Group XIX, Inorganic, Oxides.
236,051- December 28, 1880. E. J. MALLET, jR. Manufacture of chloride of zinc.

A refrigerant is applied to the surface stratum only of a solution containing
zinc sulphate and a salt, such as sodium chloride, and the crystallization
excited extends throughout the warmer body of the solution as well as the cold
top stratum.

319,118— June 2, 1885. A. PATCHEN. Solution of dicldoride of copper, etc., for

treating ores.

A solution of sulphate of copper with sodiiun chloride and metallic copper is
subjected to pressure and heat in a closed retort.

330,155— November 10, 1885. T. SCHMIDTBORN. Process of making ammonium

chloride.

Ammonium sulphate and potassium chloride ar? brought togetherln an aque-
ous solution and heated to about 150° C. for an hour, cooled until needles begin

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

295

to form, when the siipemnlnnt liquor l« removed snd cvnnonileil to obtain the
ammoiiliini ehlorlde, while the precipitate— iwlntwlum nulphnte— In (rewl from
ailluTliiK ll(|ii(ir.

ass.mi—Mairli Hi, intie. II. GRATZKL. ProctM i{f makiug ftiuirine mlt».

Fluoride of aluminium and double fluorides of aluminium ami potaxilum or
of nlumlnlinn and sodium, are pniduced from fluorides of alkali metals by treat-
ment with ehlorlde of aluminium.

ait.lSi—Orlubrr 19, ISSS. C. F. MABERY. PrmlKciny anhudroiii aluminium
eliloHtle.

Hydrochlorlc-acid las Is passed over aluminium or aluminium alloy heated
to frt)ni aOO° to 300° C. and the vaporized alumlnlmn ('hloride formed Is con-
densed; or hydroehlorl<-Held gna is passed lliniUKli nn electric furnace where
aluminium is being reduced from Us ore or com|Hiunds.

iSii.ni—Junimrii 18. 18S7. G. JARMAY. Separatina ammonium cUoride/romsolu-
ti'irm hi/ ffjrifrfratiun.

Siidium chloride is added to the warm liquor obtiiiiu'd In the ammonia-soda
prmcss. contiiininK ammonium chloride, sodium clilorlde. and carlMinuIi's of
amuKmium and of siKlium, and it is then rcfriKcrutcd and ammonium I'hiorlde
diposiled. The liquor may bo then warmed, more sodi\un chloride added and
HKiiin rcfrlgerattKl with deposition of Hnimonium chloride; the mother liquor
being then used in the ammonla-s<xla process Instead of brine.

SS»,601— March it, 1S87. W. FRISHMUTH. Proeat o/making aluminium ehlo-
ridf.

An intimate mixture of aluminium oxide, sodium chloride, and carlxm. in
equal parts by weight, with a carbonlzablcugglulliiHting malerial, hs moliisscs,
is molded Into lumps and subjccte<i to a tempenuurc high enough to carlxjnizc
without disintegrating the lumps, and then distilled in a retort in the presence
of chlorine gas.

J»\5..1i.5 — Julys, IHSS. (;. A. FAURE. Prucem of obtaining aluminium Moride.

An aluminium ore is heated In direct contact with the flame to a projwr com-
bining temperature, then a mixture of hydrochlorlc-acid gas and hydrocarbon
vapor is pas.scd over the heated ore and the resulting vapor condensed.

SSH.lsr—Jubj 17, J8SS. G. JARMAY. Separating amnumium chloride.

To the residual liquor from the nmmonla-soda prwess there Is adde<l at one
operation the requisite quantity of sodium clilonde to replace the ammonium
chloride, such amount being greater than what would saturate the original
ammonium chloride liquor. The salt Is kept in susjicnsion byconstautagltation,
and at the .siime time cooled, whereby ammonium chloride'sepanites out. The
mother liquor is applicable in the ammonla-so<la pro^'css in tlic place of brine.

SS6,70l.—July Si, ISSS. L. GRABAU. Manufacture of aluminium fluoride.

The alkali fluoride in crjollte is converted into aluminium fluoride by treat-
ing cryolite with sulphate of ammonia, evaporating the solution, heating the
product to redness and finally washing the same.

Produclimi of zinc chloride, etc.

S9S.578— November 27, 18S8. L. PAGET.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

U)9,66S—Augmtt7, 1S89. H. Y. CASTNER. Purifying aluminium chloride!.

Anhydrous double chlorides of aluminium are melted with a suitable quan-
tity of a mittal, as aluminium or sodium, adapted to reduce the contained iron
to a metallic state, which Is then separated.

il 2. S00~ October 15, 1889. W. SHAPLEIGH. Procest ^making lead chloride.

Finely divided lead isintroducedintoanaqueous.solutionof nitric add. a blast
of air being forced through the liquor while it is undergoing chemical action.
Lead chloride is then precipitated by the addition of hydrochloric acid together
with a blast of air to oxidize the lower oxides of nitrogen given off, and lead
nitrate Is then added to remove the excess of hydrochloric acid.

m.SSS—Xoremb'T IS, 1889. F. W. A. FRERICHS. Proofs* of making bromides <tf

the alkalis.

Bromides of potassium, of sodium, and of ammonium are produced from their
respective sulpnates by mixing the sulphate with calcium nydroxide. calcium
sulphite, or calcium bisulphite, water, and bromine. By evaporation and crys-
tallization the pure bromides are obtained.

iSS.HOO— March i, 1S90. H. Y. CASTNER. Process of purifying aluminium chloride.
The anhydrous double chloride compounds of aluminium containing iron are
melted and pa-ssed through a series of electrolytic tanks, the Iron chlorides
being decomposed and metallic irbn deposited. The electric current gradually
decreases in quantity proportioned to the gradually decreasing quantity of
iron.

Ui.Oili—July 1, 1890. O. O. B. FROELICH. Process of making antimony fluoridet.
A powdered mixture of antimony ore, alkaline nitrates, and fi uor spar is treated
with oil of vitriol, and the soluble matter then e-xtracteii with water and steam.
After neutralizing with alkalis the liquor is evaporated to crystallization.

U,7.06S— February 24. 1891. E. RICHTER. Procees of making artificial cryolite.

Gaseous silicic fluoride, obtained in treating phasphates containing fluorine
with sulphuric acid, is converted with water into a solution of hydrofluosilieic
acid, and treated with alumina hydrate and a caustic alkali or an alkali car-
bonate to form artificial cryolite and silicic acid, which are separatetl by filtra-
tion.

1,79,925— Augusts. 1891. C. WACHENDORFF. Double satttcffluoridenf antimony

and sxUphate of ammonia.

A new double salt of fluoride of antimony and .sulphate of ammonia having
the formula (SbFla) o.lj (NH,) jSO,. is produced by iK)uring Into not too much
water the pro<luct obtained by'heating crude antimony with sulphuric acid,
producing a basic sulphate of antimony which is put into the theoretical quan-
tity of ammonium fluoride in aqueou.s solution, heated, and then crystallized
out. Also by charging fluoride of antimony with less than the theoretical
quantity of ammonium sulphate for crystallization.

608,79&^November tu, ISSS. W. ACKERMANN. Process of making a/umintim

fluoride.

To produce an aluminium fluoride solution free from silicious bodies, calcined
silicate of aluminium is treated with an acid, as hydrofluoric acid, whereby the
silicon is converted into insoluble silicic acid which is removed by filtration.

509,1,78— November S8, 189S. T.MAYER. Anlimony compound and process qf mak-
ing same.
A new series of double salts, crystalline compounds corresponding to the type

2SbF, .M, SO4, are produced by causing an alkali sulphate to act upon antimoni-

o«» fluoride In qnanlltliii nf two moleculm of r ■rmrt

Oxide of antimony l.i||mlvi'<l Ins mlxiurt- »l .. d kihI

Iwivthlrds hydnifluoric acid and then ihealknU , ,, .......1.

llS.ini— January 16. IHH. H. .1. RLA(;KM<)KK. Prornu of mating nUnIt tn/U.

Soluble non-ailtclous Milts of the alkalla nr.' or..!,,. ...1 fr,,,,, i„_,i,,i.i i.

nations or mixlur»-»coiitniiiliig alkali «il:

(UorlhiK'Inn-l to Ihearlliin of lhei>xi<le ,<

oxiile and calcium (rhioride) at a high leiiu . _ .• ■

" .r"'^X''"'"!^'^ ."'•■■'^P under au|>er-atmaaph«rk> pitmutie'. Uwii miiuun aiHl asw-

ratlng the soluble alkali Mil or saltn.

1,15.971— Febmnry » 1891,.
fluoride.

W. A(;KEKMANK. Proecm qT making olitmiHum

Iron is rem<ived from solutions of aluminium fluorld* by eonrertln* It Inloa
ferrous combination by means of hydroaulphuric acid, and then cmUIIUilnK

out the aluminium fluoride.

61Ut5-F>*,ruary 8. ISl)!.. F. M. LYTE AND O. LUSOB. Proeeu of mnklmg

caiuttc alkali and trail chloriiie.

See Group II. Caustic Soda.
5tS,715-July SI, 1891,. A. 80>rM EK. Process qf mating liquid ehlorida.

Chlorides are made from solid aubsunces by exponlnc the same to chlofine
and allowing the liquid chloride to rlrain away as rapidly as formed without
previous volatilization. In flowing through a oioler In a thin •tmuo Ut m
receiver It is subjected to the action of chlorine gas.

5ta,07O— November IS, J89I,. P. GREDT. Process ttfrecoveHng iodide*, ehloridet, or

other salts from blaslfumaee gases.

The ga-ses are subjected to water showered as fine rain, the »«mp
pumi)ed up and used until a strong lye is pnxluced, which b. cvap.
the volatile constitutenis being (Iriven olT. and the solid residii,
iodide and chloride of potassium is dissolve*! in water and separated by frac-
tional cryHtalllzation.

552,150— January 8, 1S95. O. O. B. FROELICH. DoubU salU tj antimony.

A new antimony mordant, a soluble crystalline compound of antlmoav fluo-
ride with a double oxalate of antimony and alkali, is produced by comblniDs
solutions In water of antimony fluoride and of oxalate of antimony and alkali.
In the proportion of one molecule of oxalic acid to three moleculex' of hydroflo-

555,601— March It, 1S9S. C. 8CHILL AND C. 8EILACHER. Double nU nt anti-
mony and process of obtaining same.

A new comjiound. a double salt of antimonious fluoride, having the fomuda
SSbFj.NliiF. forming rhombic prisms and soluble in the proportion of lu part* of
salt to 8 parts of water, is produced by dissolving 100 parts of antlmonlixis oxide
in excess of hydrofluoric acid, then adding 4 part* of ammoDia, aiterinir and
crystallizing.

558,725— April 21, 1S96. F. A. GOOCH. Process qf producing hydrtnu chloride o^

aluminium.

Aluminous material heated and under pressure is treated with dilute hydro-
chloric acid of half strength: the filtered solution is treated with ga-seous
hydrochloric acid to the point of saturation, and the resulting precipitated
hydrous aluminium chloride is separated out and washed with concentrated
hydrochloric acid.

658,726— April 21, 1896. F. A. GOOCH. Process Iff producing hydroiu cMortde of

aluminium.

A suitable aluminous earth is heated with sulphuric acid until the acid fames
cease to be evolved, and the process is then proceeded with according to So.SS»,TA.

5S2.9SS—May IS, 1S97. W. MILl,S. Process itf making fluorides.

Metallic fluorides are prepared from aqueous solutions of metallic chloride*
by heating together a mixture of ammonium sulphate and calcic fluoride ( fluor-
spar) at atwut li-'iO^ C, and then adding tlie ammonium fluoride thus obtained to
the chloride solution.

599.111— February 15. ISSS. F. RAYNAUD. Process <if making aluminUaiModism

chloride.

A current of hydrogen sulphide and a current of atmospheric air are famed
alternately through a mass of blocks of a porooa mixture of tiaazite, caibon,
and sea salt heated to redness until the whole of the aluminlom ii conrectra
Into chloride.

61,0,908— January 9, 1900. H. K. HESS. Process of and apparatus for making

chloride of xinc.

Hydnigen §as is produced by heating chloride of zinc above its melting point
by contact with a body of Incandescent carlxm In a state of combiLstlon. Intro-
ducing steam into the carbon, and roluciug the zinc chloride, thereby forming
hydriH'hIoric acid and zinc, vaporizing the hydrochloric acid which passvnover
to a condcn.scr. the metallic zinc passing through the cartiun into a receptacle,
and finally uniting the zinc and the acid, and re-forming chloride of zinc and
producing hydrogen.

61,1.1,06— JantMry 18. 1900. J. O. A. RHODIN. Process of obtaining soitMe patat-
slum salts from feldspar.

A pulverized mixture of feldspar (orthoclase), lime, both equal parts, and
sodium chloride, one-fifth part, is heated to a bright yellow heat and main-
tained for a considerable time without melting or fusion. After cooling the
pota.ssiiim readily combines with acids to form salts. For fertiliser purpoaei aa
excess of lime is advantageous.

6i8.809— May 1,1900. O. J.STEINHART,J.L.F.VOOKL, AND H.E.rKY. Pnetm

of making anhydrous zinc chloride.

A zinc chloride solution is boiled in a partial vacuum. A current of prartoailT
dried air is passed through and over the molten chloride.

OXIDES.

151,219— May M, 1871. R. OUKNTHER. Imprtmwtent in Ike mauitfadUTt <^ dry

soluble silica.

Concentrated silicate of soda or potash is added to hyposnlphite of soda « liich
has Ijeen heated until the water of crystallization is nearly evaporated, causing
the liquid glass to ctwgulate. The latter is taken out, fre^i of adhering hypo-
sulphite by presiure while yet warm, and subsequently pulverised. The byfo*
sulphite is evaporated and again used.

296

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

S06.63S—JtUy so, 1S7S. R. &C. STEINAU. Improvemait in preparation 0/ peroxide

of iron.

Water is caused to alternately rise and fall through a laj'er or mass of iron
scraps, as lathe turnings, and the peroxide formed is collected.

tSI,.B95— November 18, 18S0. J. F. N. M ACA Y. Manufacture of ferric oxide and

cupric chloride.

Modified hydrated ferric oxide, after being calcined, known as "colcothor"
or "jewelers' rou^e," and cupric chloride are produced at one operation by the
mutual reaction, m the presence of air, of cupric oxychloride and solution of
ferrous chloride: or ferrous or ferric sulphate and cupric oxychloride are digested
in a solution of sodium chloride with access of air.

S39,M,e— March 29, ISSl. C. SCHEIBLER. Process of obtaining magnesia.

Dolomite or other lime and magnesia compound is burned and then treated
with a saccharine solution, 10 to 1.5 per cent of sujar, to dissolve out the lime,
the magnesia being separated from the other insoluble constitt^euts after
precipitation by decantation, filtration^ or otherwise. The caustic product may
be comminuted by slaking to a pulverulent hydrate and then treated with the
saccharine solution.

151,98s— January SI, 1S8S. J. WEBSTER. Manufacture of soluble alumina.

Aluminousmaterial.ascommercialalum, is mixed with carbonaceous material,
as gas pitch, and roasted; then treated with dilute hydrochloric acid and
allowed to give off sulphureted hydrogen; then steam and air is passed through
thecompound while heated to carry off sulphur and ferric sulphide; and finally
the residuum is boiled and the liquor drawn off after cooling, leaving the solu-
ble alumina as a precipitate. The vapors of sulphur and ferric sulphide are
condensed for use m the manufacture of colors, etc.

266,115— October 17, ISSS. A.K.EATON. Preparing peroxide of lead.

Red lead is treated with acetic acid, by which the peroxide component of the
red lead is removed, producing acetate of lead and leaving the peroxide of lead
as a residuum.

266,970- Noveniber 7, 1882. J. B. M. P. CLOSSON. Manufacture of magnesia.

Crude or artificially recarbonated dolomite is digested with a solution of chlo-
ride of calcium and the resulting solution of magnesium chloride is heated \vith
calcined dolomite or ordinary burned lime.

267 ,551- November lU, 1882. C. M.\RCHAXD. Manufaciureof bin oxides of barium
and calcium.

Barium or calcium binoxide is produced by subjecting baryta or lime, heated
to a red heat, to the action of ozonized oxygen or ozonized air.

285,579— September 25, 1883. J. D. DARLING. Process of producing alumina.

Alumina is obtained from alum salts or compounds, or from aluminum sul-
phate by forming a gelatinous hydrated precipitate, subjecting the precipitate
to a suitable heat to convert it into a calcined oxide and expel therefrom the
sulphate of ammonia contained therein, and finally leaching therefrom the
remaining sulphates or other impurities.

t9!„051— February 26, 188U. J. K, KESSLER. Process of making copper salts by
the aid of electricity.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

S05. 828— September SO, 188!,. C. MARCHAND AND V. M. PICABIA. Mamifac-

ture of anhydrous caustic baryta.

Barium nitrate is subjected in a closed vessel to the direct action of gases
heated to 1,000° to 1.300° C, driving off the oxide of nitrogen and liquefying the
baryta. The retort has a removable top and is mounted on trunnions and, after
solidification, the cake is dumped,

S18.603— May 26,1885. G. DEUMELANDT. Process of separating basic compounds
from slags.

The free bases contained in basic slag are separated by treating the pulverized
slag at the boiling temperature with a solution of a suitable ammonium salt,
filtering off the solution, and treating the filtered solution with a mixture of air
and carbonic acid in the presence of ammonia, to precipitate the dissolved
oxides.

S58,628— March 25,1886. L. Q. & A. BRIN. Manufacture of anhydrous oxide of

barium.

In the manufacture of anhydrous oxide of barium or baryta by calcining
barium nitrate, moisture and carbonic acid are excluded from the baryta while
cooling by exhausting the air of the cooling chamber, or filling same with a gas,
such as nitrogen, destitute of moisture, and carbon dioxide.

S59.i2S— March 15,1887. A. BRIN. Process of making barium bioxide.

Barium nitrate is first heated to form caustic baryta, then the caustic baryta
is reheated in a closed vessel with an exhaust to remove the nitrous and other
gases given off, and when the vapors cease to be given off atmospheric air is
admitted to form barium bioxIde.

S70,5n— September 27, 1887. C. L. & W. J. WIGG AND M. STEELE. Obtain-
ing ferric oxide from the waste liquors of copper-works.

The residual liquorsobtained in the precipitation of copper bv the wet process
and the residual chloride-of-calcium liquor obtained in the "manufacture of
chlorine by the Weldon process are mixed and agitated, the precipitate and
supernatant liquor separated, and the liquor treated with an equivalent of
lime to precipitate the iron, which is oxidized and furnaced. The white pre-
cipitate first formed is treated with dilute hydrochloric acid, washed, pressed,
and gently heated to purify and prepare the sulphate of lime for use as a by-
product.

S8t,197—May 1, 1888. F. J. SEYMOUR. Method of obtaining alumina from clay.
Clay or aluminous earth mixed with a deoxidizing agent, as pulverized car-
bon, and a flux, .such as chloride of sodium, and with copper or other metal
of greater specific and atomic weight than aluminum, is heated to a tempera-
ture of 1,400° to 2,000° C, and the mixed vapors are condensed and collected in
a conduit, silica first depositing, and beyond, alumina mixed with the metallic
oxide.

S8l,27S—Mav 1, 1S8S. F. J. SEYMOUR. Method of obtaining alumina from clay.
A modification of the process of No. 382,197, theclay being mixed with zinc,
carbon, and a flux.

182,50.5— May 8, 1888. K. J. BAYER. Process of obtaining alumina.

Pure alumina compounds are obtained from bauxite and othermaterials con-
taining alumina, by subjecting the aluminate lye under constant stirring and
at ordinary temperature to the action of hydrate of alumina, so as to decompose

said solution and precipitate hydrate of alumina, the remaining mother liquor
being concentrated, mixed with bauxite or other material con^ning alumina,
and the mixture calcined.

U,0,5S9— November 11, 1890. F. CANDY. Process of preparing iron ore for filters.

Argillaceous carbonate of iron is subjected in a closed retort to a carbonizing
but not a fusing heat, gradually cooled and then pulverized for use for filtering
purposes.

1,55,229 — June SO, 1891. L. MOND. Process of making compounds of nickel and

carbon monoxide.

Oxidized nickel ore is exposed to the reducing action of carbon monoxide,
hydrogen, or a hydrocarbon, at from 300° to 360° C; then the reduced oxide is
cooled to below 150° C. and treated with carbon monoxide (free from uncom-
bined oxygen and halogens) till the nickel is extracted and the vapors are con-
densed.

1,55,229 — Jmie 30, 1891. L. MOND. Compound of nickel and carbon monoxide.

Nickel-carbon oxide, a compound of nickel and carbon monoxide of the
formula NiCOi, is a colorless liquid. B. P. about 43° C, but very volatile in the
presence of other gases. Solidifies at —25° C.

1,5.5.611— July 7, 1891. P. A. EMANUEL. Process of reducing kaolins and clays to

their component oxides.

The clay, stirred in with water until in a state of suspension, is treated with
sulphuric acid and heat, and the sulphate of alumina separated from the silica,
iron being removed with binoxide of lead or manganese, and the solution evap-
orated to recover the sulphate of aluminium. Sulphate of aluminium is reduced
to alumina by mixing with sulphur and heating, the fumes being conducted to
sulphuric-acid chambers.

!,61.U6— October 20, 1891. J. A. BRADBURN AND J. D. PENNOCK. Process of

obtaining alumina from bauxite.

The iron and organic matter in ferrous bauxite is oxidized by mixing the
ground mineral with a solution of hypochlorite and then passing carbonic-acid
gas into the solution. The oxidized bauxite is then treated with a caustic-soda
solution, filtered, and the hydrate of aluminium precipitated and calcined.

i9l,,7 57— April h. 1893. H. Y. CASTNER. Manufacture of oxides of tlie alkaline

metals.

The alkaline metals, heated to about 300° C. are oxidized by the action of air
with a decreasing proportionate mixture of nitrogen, the material being moved
through a tubular retort in one direction with a current of air moving in the
opposite direction.

5U,039— February 6, 189!,. H. F. D. SCHWAHN. Process of purifying aluminous

minerals.

Minerals containing alumina are roasted, ground, and mixed with hydro-
chloric and nitric acids — or crude material as sodium chloride and sodiiim or
potassium nitrate to produce the same — then sulphuric acid is added, thedecom-
posed mass is heated, the waste nitro-hydrochloric acid and produced ferric
chloride are evaporated and expelled, and the remaining soluble and insoluble
impurities respectively removed by washing and floating.

615,895— March 6, 1S9L K.J. BAYER. Process of making alumina.

Alumina is dis.solved direct from bauxite by mixing pulverized bauxite in a
concentrated aluminate lye formed by subjecting an aluminate Ive under
constant stirring and at ordinary temperature to the action of hydrate of
alumina so as to decompose said solution and precipitate hydrate of alumina,
then filtering off the precipitate and concentrating the remaining aluminate
lye. The mixture is subjected to constant agitation at a pressure of three to
four atmospheres at a temperature of 160° to 170° C.

519,701,— .May 15, 189!,. A. G. FELL. Obtaining lead salts from native ores.

Ground lead ores are treated in an acid solution containing free sulphuric
acid and formed of sulphuric acid, another inorganic acid, as muriatic or
nitric acid, sulphate of soda, and water. The undissolved residue is separated
from the solution of soluble salts, any contained silver is removed, and the
residue is subjected under a moderate heat to a compound, as sal-soda, which
contains an alkaline base. The insoluble lead salts are separated from this
solution, nitric acid or nitrate is mixed with the residue, and it is roasted if an
oxide is to be produced.

5!,!,,319—Augmt 13, 1895. A. W. NIBELIUS. Process of extracting aluminium
oxid.

The raw material — clay, clay-slate, anthracite-slate, minerals, and rocks,
alone or mixed with pj^rites— is mixed with the sulphate or bisulphate of an
alkali and subjected while heated to a petroleum air flame, the acid being con-
densed and utilized for lixiviating the alumina, which is finally precipitated.

585,522— June 29, 1897. H. JAEGER. Process of making tin oxid.

Metallic tin is raised to a high temperature, 1,200° C, in the absence of air;
then, when at said high temperature, abundance of air is admitted to the
molten metal, and the tin oxide formed is removed.

621,,01,1—May 2, 1899. C. B. JACOBS. Process of manufacturing soluble barium
compounds.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
626.SS0—June 6, 1899. C. LDCKOW. Process of producing peroxide of lead.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
626,51,7— June 6, 1899. C. LUCKOW. Process of producing oxid of copper.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

61,1,550— January 16, 1900. M. E. ROTHBERG. Process of making magnesia and

plaster-of-paris.

Limestone containing carbonate of magnesia is dissolved in hydrochloric
acid producing a solution of the chlorides of calcium and magnesia; calcium
oxide is added to precipitate magnesia and form additional calcium chloride;
the liquor is drawn off, leaving the magnesia to be washed and dried, and
sulphuric acid is added to precipitate calcium sulphate, which is separated,
dried, and calcined. The hydrochloric-acid solution is reused.

61A,050— February 27, 1900. H. BECKMANN. Manufacture of lead peroxide and
its application to electrical storage batteries.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

61.7,320— April 10, 1900. S.B.NEWBERRY. Process of making strontia.

A mixture of strontium sulphate, or celestite, and an oxide of an alkaline
earth, as lime, is calcined at a high temperature. The calcined product is
leached.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

297

esO.OtS—Mav M, 1900. H. OPPERMANK. Proceu qf making magnuium tuper-

oxi't.

MuKiieslum hydralc. SO piirtn. miiii'lciUKl to such hii extent (inly that It rctnliiii
Its [owdery form, is mixed with dry, pulviTized. sodium »ii|>iTiixldc, lOtn l^iinrtn.
An excess o( dry, pulverlze<l m«Kiieiiiini hydrate Is iidiled during the reiii'iioii to
reduce the temiK'riUure ol the mixture heiow thut at which oxygen Is liberated.

esO.SIS—Xav tv, 1900. C. SAVIONV. PmaMo/ making tUaziitqf barium.
A mixture of hydrated crystallized biirytft and finely divided carlK)n In eqii»I
«rla is heiited to IW C. to drive off the Krealer part of the water; the mixture
s then heated iu a metallic basin for two to three houni at 100° to l.W ('., when

the inaRma is transferred to and heateil In a cnielble lined with carbonaceous

luaterlul, ns lardlxiard, to 1 ,000° to 1 .200° C. for from live to eight boun, produving
porous anhydrous oxide of barium, which i.s then deoxidized.

sm.lS.i— May fj, 1900. K. RAYNAUD. Method <\f iibtaining lUumina from ittortt.
A mixture of crushed aluminous on', ores which re«ist attack whollv or par-
tially by sulphuroiu acid, and a quatitlty of a sulphureted compouiid of an
alkaline metal, as sodium sulphide, smaller than would be iieces.sary for formlUK
aluminates, is heated to a dark red heat for about two hours; then llxlvlatol.
and the residue treated to the action of a current of sulphurous-aeid jjas In
combination with water, the alumina dissolving aa a sulphite. The solution Is
then liltered, heated, and the precipitate calcined, yielding alumUia and sul-
phurous gas.

SULPHIDES.

tt6,t!5 — April SO, lS7t. A. K. EATON, [mprommcnt in the manufacture o/ »iU-

phideofmititim.

Crude sulphate of soda Is melted In a heated tube and percolated through
highly heated carbon, whereby It Is decomposed and sodium sulphide produced.

tfS.eso—Octfjber ««, 18S0. E. C. E. & L. L. LABOIS. Manufacture qf carbon
bisulphide and aiUphttric acid from pyrites, and apparatus therefor.

See Group I, Acids, Sulphuric Acid.

t78,S18—Ju»e 5, ISSS. C. E. PARSONS. Method of producing goUlcn sulphuret
(yT antimony.

Native sulphide of antimony (antimony glance) and sulphur are separately
lis-solved in saturate<l solutions oi caustic alkali, which solutions are then mixed
ind the mixture treated with acid.

tSt,736—Decanber ii, ISSS. H. J. F. NIEVVERTH. Metallic alloy or compound in

producing the lame.

Heavy metals are alloyed with the sulphuretsof metals by first dissolving the
ntlphuret of the metal in molten zinc, and then mixing the product with the
heavv metals desired to form the alley in their molten condition, and finally
iupcfiing oil the zinc. In the formation of alloys of heavy metals with the sul-
phuret of metals, small quantities of the sulphuret of an alkaline metal are
Idded to the heavy metals in their molten condition, so that the decomposition
of the sulphuret takes place gradually, and the sulphur and nascent alkali are
enabled to combine with the heavy metals.

iUS.67l,—Jmiel5,18S6. E. W. PARNELL AND J. SIMPSON. Process of treating

ammonium sulphide to obtain hydrogen sulphide.

A mixture of ammonium sulphide and ammonium scsquicarbonate in solu-
tion Is subjected to the action of heat — or of a partial vacuum— hydrogen sul-
phide being evolved.

l,S5,0Sl~AprilS, 1S90. A. KEILLER. Process of making zinc stUphide.

In the precipitation of zinc sulphide from neutral hydrated solutions of zinc
salts by means of hydiothionic acid, a precipitation of all of the zinc is secured
by the addition of an alkaline sulphate which Is soluble in water and IndifTerent
to the hydrothionic acid, as potassium sulphate.

ies.liS—Sovember 17, 1S9!. P. A. EMANUEL. Process of, and apparatus for, pre-
paring aluminium siUphide.

Dry aluminium sulphate mixed with sulphur Is heated in a retort, and car-
bon bl.sulphlde is injected into the residual product. An angular entrance for
the carbon bisulphide jet gives a rotary movement to the charge.

Sli,e60— January SO, lS9i. C. T. J. VAUTIN. Process of making aluminum

sutfid.

Metallic aluminium, slightly in excess, and lead sulphide (galena) are melted
together at a bright red heat, producing metallic lead and aluminium sulphide.

SS6,567—July iO, 1897. B. VON SCHENK. Process of making potysuljids.

A mixture of sulphur and hydrated lime in the proportions, respectively, of 60
and 40 per cent, is boiled in water and a lye formed of 10° Baurat^, descanted,
and reduced to about 6°Baumt', when an alkali carbonate is added, and the solu-
tion descanted and evaporated to dryness, cooled, and ground, thus producing
alkaline polysulphides by a reaction betweeu soluble polysulphides of calciiun
and alkaline cartwnates, or sulphates.

605,S78—June7, 1S9S. H. S. BLACKMORE. Process of making aluminium sulfid.
A heated mixture of aluminium oxide and carbon bisulphide is blown into a
retort containing a chemically Inert molten bath capable of dis.-^)lving alumi-
nium sulphide, as cryolite, with a mixture of pota-ssium and sodium chlorides.

605,1,58— June 7, 1898. H. S. BLACKMORE. Process of making sulfids.

Carbon-bisulphide vapor is passed through a molten alumlnate of an alkali or
other metal— as sodium aluminate or a mixture of sodium and potassium
aluminate— producing aluminium sulphide with sulphides of the alkali or other
metals. Aluminium oxide is added to molten sodium hydroxide to i^turatlon,
and the vapor passed therethrough.

60S,81S—June li, 1898. If. S. BLACKMORE. Process qf making aluminium sulfid.
Carbon bisulphide vapor is introduced Into a fused bath— a mixture of cryo-
lite and potassium fluoride— containing dissolved aluminium oxide, transform-
ing the latter into aluminium sulphide.

606,576— June iS. 1898. D. A. PENIAKOFF. Aluminium sulfid and proem qf

making same.

A new substance, porous aluminium sulphide, is produced by treating heated
dehydrated sulphate of aluminium, alone or mixed with other miMllic sul-
phates, by means of bisulphide of carbon or oxysulphlde of carbon ut a tem-
perature twlow the fusing point of aluminium sulphide.
6l,8.77t—May I, 1900. A. MOFFATT. Process of making hydrosuffids.

To produce in .solution a hvdrosulphide of an alkaline-earth metal, such aa
barium, calcium, o rontium', two equivalents of the sulphide of an alkaline-
earth metal are m.xed with one equivalent of a magnesium salt. A dry
mechanical mixture of the ingredients is suitable for shipment and storage.

BASIC HVOROXIOCt.
Ammonia.
e7,U7— August 6. tan. a. PARAF. Imfimrement in the miuutfmtmn qf

Ammonlacal liquor la distilled and the vapon purtIM br VM^OI
charcoal. ■- r # r— -.

W,ao-JaM i, Wt. R. J. KVF.RF.TT. ImprmemaU i» Urn anmaittlam ^ on-

mania, sulphur, and <Mtr priDliuis from gnt-llmr.

Spent gns-purlfyiiiK nntcrlals nr<' \wnUi\ In n r«U>rt, th« llaa*a«l Nlplmr
colIc<'te<l. an<l the sulphur va|i<ir« anil ammonia rund«twe<l. Tb* fnnilMiain
product Is washiil to obtain tbcn-from sulphur and a Kihillnn of ih« ammonia
mllK. which latter, on Ixilllng, filtering, and evapofatlng, givm aulBbate of am-
monia.

13t,tSi-0ftnber IS, lS7t. H. H. A C. J. KAME8. IwtpnttmnU to tnaUag
ammouiaenl tiijuors qf gat-Kurks, de.

Ammonlacal liquor is sub]e<-te<l to the direct action of smun or nipartiwtad
I steam, while flowing In a stream, to eliminate the contained volatile rabflaiioM
; by vap<irizatioii.

IS7,0S»— March U,IS7S. T. CHRISTY, Jl«., AND A. BORROWNICKI. tmpnm-
ment in processes for trcallnij sewage and ammoniaml waters for the praduefltm if

fertillters, etc.

Ammonlacal and other liquids of gas works, wwa«e. etc., are treated «ilh a
solution of a hydrated silicate to agglomerate suspended or dIsaolTed mailer.
Ammonia in recovered and the pnxluct may be treated Iu produce cjraoogen

and other matters.

150,007— AprUtl, lH7i. C. M. TESSlt: DU MOTAY. rmproi-ement in traniiform-

ing atmospheric gases into oxygen and amm<mia, etc.

Ammonia Is produced by the reaction of carbureted hydrogen upon nitride of
titanium— the latter being formeil by the reduction of oxides of titanium or Iba
Bi>ent nitride of titanium from a former of>i'raiion— with coke In a blast fumacv.
Cyanimltridc of titanium Is prtKluccd by prolonging the o|ieration in the
retort. The cyano-nltridc is removed and treated with a soda or potash aola-
tlon, setting free ammonia and forming the cyanides of sodium or poUMfum
and titanic acid. The cyanides are obtained by evaporation. Pure nydrogen
gas combined with light carbon vaiMirs at a low temperature— «. g„ lero— majr
DC used In place of carbureted hydrogen for producing cyanogen compaand*.

166.181— October to, 187i. J. E. SIEBEL. Jmprocemenl in recovering photpharic

acid and purifying ammonia.

A solution of phospate of lime obtained In the treatment of bone* with pboa-
phoric acid is saturated with ammonia, phraphate of lime precipitated, ana the
solution evaporated, the ammonia collected. an<l the phospnoric acid recovered.
By tising crude ammonia the same can be purlhed.

15S,S65— December 19, mi. L.S. FALES. Improvement in proeetses aisd apparalMt
for the manufacture qfaqua ammonia.

The spent liquor of gas works Is heated in a closed ve«el, and so long aa ml-
phureted hydrogen escapes the gas is conducted into a vessel charged with
sulphuric acid, and after sulphureted hydrogen is no longer apparentlt Is con-
ducteil through a cold worm Into a closed receiver, from thence into the lower
compartment of a Alter charged with alternate beds of charcoal and caustic
alkalis, from the top of the filter into an oil chamber, and from tiience Into an
ascending series of closed ves.sels containing water, having communication from
one to another consecutively, ond also with a common branched pipe, which
conducts into one or more settlers.

161,137— Marches, 1875. F. MAXWELL-LYTE. ImprovemaU in processes qf malt-

tifacturing ammonia.

A triad or pentad element, as antimony or bismuth, combined with a readilT-
oxidizable element, a.s |M:)ta.ssium or soflium, is used a-s a body for the synthetic
manufacture of ammonia from aqueous vaixir and nitrogen. A lemperatare
between 100° and 400° C. should be maintained. The alloy is regenerated by
means of a reducing agent at a red heat.

19S.9»)— August 7, 1S77. S. CABOT, JB. Improvement in processes for obtaining

ammonia mlts.

Salts of ammonia and bicarboiute of soda are produced as independent pro-
ducts by spraying a saline soda solution through voIatUixed mooo-cartioDaM
of ammonia charged with carbonic-acid gas.

1S0,S0S— July 10, 1880. J. L. MARSH. Manufacture qf aquarommonia.

A mixture of sulphate of ammonia, lime and water is heated and volatlliced
In a steam jacketed ves.sel, with agitation around a horizontal axis, to expose a
maximum area of surface to the heat.

SSt,991— October 5, 18S0. H. P. LORENZEM. MeUiod ami appantus for obtaining

ammonia.

In the recovery of ammonia from nitrogenous substances by distillation,
ammonia is developed from the gases by contact with incandescent oxide of
calcium. It is then subjected to a cooling agent and to the action of sulphiiric
acid.

tSS,0l,i— January SI, 188t. H. J. E. HENNEBUTTE Pnxtm qf treating awmoni-

acat salts.

Id the treatment of ammonlacal salts the liquor is acidulated to prevent the
formation of froth and foam before adding lime to decompoae the fixed ammo-
nlacal salts.

tS8.i9»-May tS, ISSt. 0. A. STEVENS AND E. U DU BARRY. QnMntdfn'

nace and stack for destroying noxious or poitomms gates.

Noxious gaaes evolved in the treatmentof gat Uqoor are first paiinl In ascend-
ing currents over moist retarding surfaces and through a aprey of water, and
are then burned at an intense heat.

t59,ll,5—June 6, ISSt. H. J. E. HENNEBLTTE AND C. J. F. R. DE J. MENARD.

Process tif treating ammoniticxU liquors.

Salts of ammonia are produced from ammonlacal liquors by subjecting the
liquor to the action of the mixed chlorides of calciiun and iron and evapomtiiic
or concentrating the resulting liquor. A small quantity of the double chloride
of ammonium and lead Is added when evaporating In sheet metal reaaela to pre-
serve the same.

t6a.8i6—tieptemberi, 18St. H. Y. <k E B. CA8TNER. Mannfaeturt qf maioiiia

anfi bone-black.

Bonebla<!k an<l ammonia are produced by paaatng the bone coolinooialr
through a closest, highly heateil chamber, drawing oothe Tolatile portion* and
heating the same niixe<l with air. then paadng the gars* over hot aiakad Umc
through a cooler and Hnally In contact with acid.

298

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

S6!,,mi— September 19, ISSt. E. W. WALLACE AND C. F. CLAUS. VtUkaiion of

by-products in the manufacture of coat-gas.

Ammonia is separated from ammoniacal liquor by treating the liquor with
sodium ehloride ana carbonic acid, then separating the ammonium chloride
from the solution and decomposing it by lime.

t65,79i— October 10, 18SS. T. B. FOGARTY. Process of, and apparatus for, manu-
facturing gas.

In the manufacture of water gas cyanogen and cyanides are produced and
the gas freed from nitrogen by burning in a combustion chamber the carbonic
oxide and hydrogen produced in a generator furnace, and then passing the in-
candescent products of such combustion through a mass of carbon and alkali.
Ammonia is then produced by decomposing the cyanides in another chamber
with steam. The charge is then returned to the cyanidizing chamber.

W5,79S— October 10, 188B. T. B. FOGARTY. Process of manufacturing gas.
The claim is for the specific production of cyanogen by process No. 265,792.

267. SSO— November U, 18Si. J. G. MACFARLAN. Process of and apparatus for

the manufacture of ammonia and animal charcoal.

Superheated steam, decomposed by being passed through carbonaceous mat-
ter, is passed into the bone retorts, accelerating the carbonization and increas-
ing the ammonia product.

S69,309— December 19, 188£. L. MOND. Manufacture of cyanogen compounds and

ammonia.

In the manufacture of cyanogen compounds or of ammonia therefrom, the
materials— carbon, carbonate or oxide of barium, and a basic absorbing material,
as magnesia — are mixed and molded into blocks and calcined out of contact
with air before exposing them in a heated state to the action of nitrogen.

S77 ,01,1— Hay 8, 1883. F. LORENZ. Process of and apparatus for obtaining ammx>nia.
Relates to a series of consecutive steps for treating the hot gases of bone and
other furnaces; moistening, cooling, passing through towers, heating, contact
with acid, reusing fluid products for collecting ammonia, etc.

278,8183— June 5. 18SS. J. P. RICKMAN AND J. B. THOMPSON. Manufacture of

aminonia and its salts.

Ammoniacal salts are produced from urine or like animal excreta by mixing
therewith stale urine, or a portion of similar material in a state of fermentation,
and distilling the ammoniacal eases into a vessel containing acid. The impure
solution lhu.s formed is then drawn off into a still, and the ammoniacal sub-
stances volatilized through an intercepting still to remove impurities, into a
vessel containing sulphuric acid, for the formation of sulphate of ammonia.

282,1,11 — July SI, 1883. B. TERNE. Process of treating tank-waters of slaughter-
houses.
The liquor is concentrated to a semi-solid condition and then passed into and

upon the floor of a heated retort, whereby it is rapidly distilled to dryness; the

ammonia being collected and the residual partly nitrogenized animal matter

utilized as a fertilizing compound.

288,323— November IS, 1883. T. b. FOGARTY. Process of and apparatus for mak-
ing ammonia.

The process involves the formation of incandescent generator gas and the
decomposition of the undecomposed steam in the crude gas by the carbonic
oxide contained in the gas, the conversion of the nitrogen into ammonia by
contact with a falling column of pulverized carbon and alkali, and the decom-
position of the cyanogen produced by steam; the temperature being controlled
by an adjustment of the amount of falling cyanidized carbon and the volume
of steam,

288,321,— Novernber IS, 1883. T. B. FOGARTY. Processof and apparatus for manu-
facturing ammonia.

The process consists in treating a falling shower ot pulverized alkalized car-
bon with a current of highly-heated nitrogenous or furnace gases to form
cyanogen and cyanogen salts, then transferring these compounds to separate
chambers, in which they are decomposed by steam with the formation of
ammonia.

291,261,— January 1, 1881,. J. & J. ADDIE. Process of obtaining ammonia from

furnace-gases.

Sulphurous acid, or the gas of sulphuric acid, is mixed with the gases from
blast and other furnaces to fix the ammonia, and the ammonia salts are then
recovered by condensing or dissolving.

S0I„2B0— August 26, 1881,. E. CAREY, H. GASKELL, Jr., AND F. HURTER.

Process of obtaining ammonia from ammonium sulphole.

Sulphate of ammonia is intimately mixed with sulphate of soda and at an
elevated temperature — about 300° C. — ammonia and bisulphate of soda are pro-
duced, in which latter form the sulphuric acid may be utilized for many pur-
poses. A current of steam is required to make the reaction complete.

337,21,6— March 2, 1886. C. F. CLAUS. Process of purifying coal-gas and obtaining

ammonia and other products therefrom.

Coal gas is purified by passing it with gaseous ammonia, supplied by the proc-
ess, through a mixing chamber and a series of gas scrubbers, showering the
liquor successively through a series of coke towers against an ascending flow of
carbonic acid, separating the sulphide of hydrogen from the carbonated ammo-
nia liquor, and then heating the latter from 75° to 90° C— using the carbonic
acid in the coke towers— and distilling the heated liquor and condensing the
carbonate of ammonia.

SS7,S87— March 9, 1886. A. FELDMANN. Process of manufacturing ammonia.

In the manufacture of spirits of sal ammoniac, a liquor free from lime and lime
combinations is obtained by mechanical filtration- by a filter press or a cen-
trifugal machine — in contradistinction to precipitation and decanting.

31,2,237— May 18, 1886. J. VAN RUYMBEKE. Process of obtaining ammonia.

Ammonia compounds are produced from liquids containing organic sub-
stances in solution by showering them through forced air currents over porous
substances charged with putrid ferments, and subjecting the putrefied liquor
mixed with an alkali to heat in closed boilers, and collecting the gases In
refrlgerating.and sulphuric-acid condensers.

SUl,7tt—May 26, 1886. W. C. WREN. Process of and apparatus for distilling

amm&nia.

The process consists in vaporizing aqua ammonia, cooling the vapor and dis-
charging it Into a receiver, the vapor being under constant pressure during the
entire operation.

31,3,675— June 15, 1886. E. W. PARNELL AND J. SIMPSON. Recovery of ammo-
nia in ammonia-soda manufacture.

Ammonia and sulphureted hydrogen are produced by heating alkali waste —
from the Le Blanc process— with a solution of chloride of ammonium producing
sulphide of ammonium, which latter is decomposed by acid sulphate of am-
monia evolving sulphureted hydrogen. The neutral .sulphate of ammonia Is
heated till it parts with a portion of its ammonia, leaving acid sulphate of
ammonia available for another charge.

351,1,12— October 26, 1886. J. VAN RUYMBEKE. Process of obtaining ammonia

and illuminating gas from tank waters.

Concentrated tank waters are distilled at a heat not exceeding 260° C, and
the volatile products collected, whereby highly-Illuminating and ammoniacal
gases are obtained and decomposition of valuable substances are avoided.

351,865— November 2, 1886. C. W. ISBELL. Process of concentrctting ammoniacal

liquor.

A suitable quantity of the weak liquor is supplied to a closed heating vessel,
and a'.so a further quantity of the weak liquor to a receiving vessel submerged
In cooling water, then the liquor is heated In the heated vessel, the ammonia
vapor driven off passed through a cooling worm above the heating vessel, so
that all aqueous vapor will be condensed and returned to the heating vessel,
and finally the ammonia vapor is introduced into the weak liquor in the receiv-
ing vessel to increase the strength thereof.

352,287— November 9, 1886. J. YOUNG, DEC'D. Process of producing currents of

liquids in vacuo.

In the separation of ammonia from sewage or other liquids in a vacuum, the
force of the liquid entering the vacuum chamber is employed to operate a pump
for the removal of the liquid from the chamber.

356,610— January 25, 1887. W. YOUNG AND G. T. BEILBY. Process of and

apparatus for obtaining ammonia from coal.

The process oi treating coal, shale, and other substances to obtain ammonia
and ammoniacal compounds consists in heating the material to a temperature
sufficient to separate Its volatile matter, which latter is exhausted from the
retort, passed through a condenser, and the nonconden.sable gases returned to
the retort to aid the combustion and prevent the carrying off of air or fire gases
by supplying any excess of the exhaust.

367 ,992— August 9, 1887. P. J. McMAHON. Process of preparing anhydrous

ammonia.

The method consists in evaporating concentrated ammonia, separating the
weaker solution resulting from said evaporation and conducting it to a recep-
tacle, and continuously and directly conducting any aqueous vapors arising
therefrom to and re-evaporating the same with the concentrated ammonia be-
ing treated. Impurities taken up by the reabsorbing liquid of a motor or other
apparatus are removed and a unifofm strength of liquid ammonia maintained
in the system, by heating the same to expel the gases therefrom and conduct-
ing said gases to' the ammonia tank, discharging the residuum, and adding to
the liquid in the system water sufficient to absorb the quantity of gas collected
from the reabsorbing liquid.

371,187— October 11, 1887. T. B. FOGARTY. Process of and apparatus for making

ammonia.

Relates to modifications of No. 371,186 (Sulphites and Sulphates); as a sub-
process steam is introduced in excessive volumes simultaneously with the nitro-
gen gas in the same superheated retort and at about the same point.

57t,,61S — December 13, 1387. W. F. NAST. Obtaining ammonia from manure, etc.
Ammonia is extracted from manure or other organic matters by adding an
alkaline base, treating with sodium chloride (5 per cen( lime and 2 per cent
sodium chloride) in a closed ves.sel at a high temperature- about 150° C— and
passing the vapors through an acid bath.

379,1,87 — March 13, ISSS. L. MOND. Obtaining ammonia and hydrocldoric acid.

The vapor of ammonium chloride is passed through a vessel containing one
or more salts or oxides — as the protoxide of iiic'kel — whereby ammonia is
produced and collected. The residual ammonia is then driven off by means ot
a neutral gas, and collected, and superheated steam is then injected to form
hydrochloric acid and complete the cycle of operations. The process is then
repeated.

379,1,88 — March 13, 1888. L. MOND. Obtaining ammonia and chlorine fi'om ammo-
nium chloride.

Process No. 379,487 is modified by injecting hot, dry air in lieu of steam, pro-
ducing chlorine instead of hydrochloric acid.

381,832— April 21,, ISSS. F. EGNER. Process of obtaining ammonia and bone-
black.

In the manufacture of bone-black and ammonia, the gaseous products of the
bone retortsare mixed with gas from a gas producer, the ammonia is then removed
therefrom, and the gas is then consumed in the furnaces, to heat the retorts.

389,781— Sepember IS, ISSS. W. WEBSTER, Jr. Process of electrolysing sewage and
sea-water.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

396,705— January 22, 1889. E. MEYER. Obtaining ammonia and ojcalic acid from
sugar waste,

A solution of a caustic akall is heated and a predetermined quantity of con-
centrated desacharized lye, or Its equivalent, in the form of molasses, is gradu-
ally added at intervals with continued heat. The caustic alkali must be in
excess of the organic matter — at least 8 times, but -not to exceed 20. The
oxalic salts are separated from the resultant mass, and the alkaline residue
rendered caustic and again used.

il7 ,777— December 2/,, 1SS9. T. B. FOGARTY. Process of making ammonia.

In the manufacture of ammonia by the cyanide process, incandescent gases and
air to burn the gases are introduced into a moving mixture of pulverized carbon
and alkali and they travel together, as in a descending column, producing
alkaline cyanides and cyanates, steam being subsequently introduced to pro-
duce ammonia and other products.

1,17,778— December 21,, 1889. T. B. FOGARTY. Process of making ammonia.

As a modification of the process of No. 417,777, the air is in excess of the quan-
tity required to burn the gases.

1,17,779— December 21,, 1889. T. B. FOGARTY. Apparatus for making ammonia
Apparatus for the processes Nos. 417,777 and 417,778.

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTKIES.

iHJOS-Jiinete, mi. H. E. BAl'DOUIX AND E. T. H. DEIX)RT. Maiiufacturt nf
ttmninnin/rom tttKlinin nitniti .

Nllratp of wmU 1» mixnl witli a suitablo hydro-cnrlmn, na tar or co«l knd
hi'iilwl 111 a li'UiiHTHtiirf niilHeieiit to ilocnnipose the hydro-carbon, SOD- to
«(K)° 0.. whori'liy iho ri'siiltliiK hydroKi-n decomposes the nllreto and forma
aminonia with carboimle of (Mxla as a by-prtxiuet.

Ua.iaS—SeplembrrS, ISm. A. HENNIN. Procest qf making ammonia and g<u.

Gaaand ammonia are NinitiltantH>u.Hly produced from eo«l bylnJectlnKairand
steam into a be(i of ini-andoscent fiiil and controllinR the temperature of the
generator by rcKiihitiiiK Iho proportions of steam and oxvften or air, and by
regulatintr llie supply of fresh fuel aliove the zone of combustion.

i77,0S9-Jun€ n. me. H. von STROMBECK. J>roee»t of purifying ammonia.

Crude ammonia gas is purified by exposing it to the action of comminuted
metallie SHiium, \vhich combines with the alcholic bodies.

4*!.«7— A'wemftfr tt. 189S. L. STERNBERG. Process of obtaining ammonia or

other salts fntm moltissfs.

The waste lyes resulting from the extraction of sugar or the manufacture of
alcohol from molasses are free<l from any ex(!ess of lime, stromla, and barvta,
and concentrated to. say. 4.'>° Bannii>. then mixed with a carrier, as granulated
coke, dried, and calcined in an atmosphere of superheated steam, producing
ammonia gas. which is comiensed ami treated tor the production of ammonia
sulphate or otherwi.se, and the potassium and other salts recovered.

iS.'i.im— December SO, tS9t. P. KUNTZE. Process of and ap}mralus for making

ammonia.

Nitrogenous material, such as peat, isdried and then calcined, and the aqueous
and the tarry vapors conducte<I off separately; the latter pas.sed through incan-
descent material— as calcareous porous tar coke — forming liir, unimonlH, and
combustible gas. The calciniii material i.s siniultaueouslv treated with heated
air and the aqueous vaiwr to form ammonia and heating gases, the latter being
utilized for heating the air and calcining the nitrogenous material.

SOO.Sao—Julij i, 1S9S. T. B. FOGARTY. Apparatus forand process of obtaining

combined nitrogen and fuel gases.

A priHiucer gas. consisting chiefly of the oxides of carbon, free nitrogen, and
hydrogen, is formed and mingtel with hydrocarbon vapors and highly heated,
and then passed along with a fallinj; pulverized carbon-alkali mixture and in
the same direction, producing alkali cyanides, ammonia, and fuel gas.

600.661— July U. lS9i. T. B. FOGARTY. Method of and apparnlus for producing
cyanides and ammonia.

Nitrogenous gas, hydrocarbon gases and vapors, and a suitable alkali are
pa.s.sed together in a falling column through an incandescent retort, and pro-
duce alkaline cyanides, ammonia, and fuelgas.

605.!^— September 19, 189S. G. L. VAIL AND T. CHARLTON. Process of puri-
fying ammonia gas.

The process consists in passing the gas under a pressure of nine to twelve
atmospheres, approximately, through a quantity of aqua ammonia at a tem|>er-
atnre sufficiently low, as 66° F., to remove by conden.«ation the moisture and
other impurities with which the gas is laden; the aqua ammonia containing
such a per cent of ammonia gas, say from 29 per cent to 32 per cent by weight,
that it has practically reached the limit of gas absorption.

515.909— March 6. 1891,. H. A. FRASCH. Art of manufacturing ammonia.

The ammoniacal liquor isdistilled, the vapors cooled and the condensed matter
separated, and the cooled and dehydrated ammotiiacal vapors are then passed
through a saturated solution of ammonia maintained at a temperature which
adapts it to take up the pyridin and kindred impurities and thus act as a washer
for the ammonia gas. The vapors are then absorbed.

BlS.iiS— April IT, 1891,. E. SOLVAY. Process of purifying ammonia.

The process of purifying a flowing stream of ammonia liquor consists in rais-
ing the temperature of separate portions of said stream to unequal heat increas-
ing in the direction of flow, and thereby evolving carbonic anhydride and sul-
phureted ga-ses from the warmer jiortion, passing the evolved gases through the
cooler portions of said liquor for preventing the escape of ammonia evolving
similar gases from .said cooler portions, passing said gases through an independ-
ent cooler portion of said liquor, and finally passing the heated vapors thereof
in proximity to and in a direction opposite to the flow of said stream of liquor
for heating the same unequally.

Bn.iOl-Jtuie IS, 1891.. T. CHARLTON AND K. M. MITCHELL. Process cifand

apparatus for manufacturing aqua ammonia.

A superheated mixture of air and steam is passed through ammoniacal liquor
and through a condenser and absorbers; the strong liquor withdrawn from the
first absorber; and the residuum liquor returned in the reverse direction from
the last to the first absorber.

Stt,S57—July 3, 1891,. L. STERNBERG. Apparatus for obtaining ammonia.
Apparatus for process No. 523.819.

6ta,819—July 31, 189L L.STERNBERG. Process of making ammonia.

Ammonia is produced from nitrogenous organic matter by calcining such
material in a retort in an atmosphere of steam and of hot nonoxidating gas or
gases. The gases and vapors ili.«charged from the retort are freed from am-
monia by means of sulphuric acid and returnetl to the retort.

5S8.999—Soi<ember 13. 1891,. L. TRALLS. Process of obtaining fertUiiers from

waste lyes.

Lyes — obtained by leaching brown coal ashes — containing acid salts of
alumina and oxide of iron, and waste ammoniacal liquor are mixed in such

f proportions as to convert the sulphuric acid combined with the aluminium and
ron oxide into ammonium sulphate and leave the alumina in the form of a
hydrate, and the peroxide of iron in the form of a hydroxide, and evaporated
to dryness.

Ii7,i76— October 1, 1895. h. MOND. Process of and apparatus for obtaining am-
moniacal products.

In the extraction of ammonia and tar from producer gases, the hot gases are
cfwied with water, and the air for the producer is heated by the water, the cool-
ing and heating alternating. The free ammcmia is serrated by a weakly acid
solution of a salt of ammonia, the tar separateil from the solution, and tne solu-
tion brought up to the required strength of acid and again utilized.

557,166— March 31, 1896. L. STERNBERG. Process of obtaining ammonia from
waste sugar lyes.

Gaseous nitrogenous organic compounds are transformed into ammonia by
conducting the gases over a glowing contact body composed essentially of an

nluminnte, m the alumlnate of polanHum. Wuto Irn from

siigar or the manufacture of alcohol from molawa an coonM

Brlx then ml«.-tl with alumina and an alumlmto iomllw . v.mMu

molded into bricks, dried, and hcat4-.l In . remrt J^-!^^^ -?-"»"'""

299

'Ml (rf

■•r. M

57H.un-itarrh 9 im. C. KEI.LNF.K. ItortM (/ and amralw A/r .imuli.,
neoutty proilucing ammonia, mutium hydratld. andthlorinT
SecOnaipX. KU-ctro-chemlstry.

5SS.t6t-May U. im. H. J. KREB8. fVow*. f,f and apaoratuM fm dUUIUMa
ammonia. » »-# / '""""^

An aqueous solution of ammonia Is pontlniiotisly fed inU) a •till and a nmrnt
of high pressure steam fnmi a steam boiler t> discharged Inu. (he •111); Ih«i
is i-onvey.-d swav and c<k. e<l and the residual water and the condensrd »ta
are fe<l back to the sleam IkiIUt

m,9S0-July SO, 1897. F. W. A. FRERICH.'*. l^roeat i^jmrV^ing as.>«,»fa.

Commer<!lal water of ammonia, while under premure, U sablwtwl lo a lem
perature of at least 1M°C. and preferably higher p. „.t fr.^all of ihe «-mmn.m
giusos which can develop un.ler c.in.llil.ius prevailing In lie iiiachln.i. whhn

si and the r*-"'*'" '-■ — " •' -' '- — -■

J — .»,.- .-> .•t.^kiiiAtlon at a i»*** lempiTaiure, pn'ie
condense and se|>aratc out the carbon compounds.

- 1 . r ...-,..- |.11>U1IIIIK II) II V IIIHITIIIIICN wfii(*n

fJZt^'y ";?'!',yr',""'' Ibi-resuUIng ammoulagas llquellwl; It may then be .ub^
jected to distillation at a low lemperalure, nn-ferably trom 10° to 20° (J la

condentie find luttinratn ^tf» fitn i.oi.K.r... »..».,.».. !..f. ' » -w •*! V. •>#

598, K&-February 1, 1898. T. F. COLI N. Process of making q/anidi and ammonia.
Powdered heated alkali Is continuously showered IntoaelOMd tanuceshah.
Into the base of which there is directly and iieparal.lv introduced, under pk»
sure, highly heated air and fuel gas. and als.veth' t.-d liquid hy(lrf>-

carbon; the succes.sive steps edected iK'iiig ihe . : air and gas the

dlsdoclation of the liquid hydroearUin. and the .; , .,f the alkall'and

fonnatlou of cyanides: followed, outside of the furnace, by the decomixxltloD
of the cyanides by steam, and the formation of ammonia.

598,91S--mruani 15. 1898. T. B. FOG A RT V. Process <4 and apparatiufor maHna
cyamds and ammonia. ^ rr j "»

Prior to bringing producer gas Into contact with a shower of pulrerlsed alka-
lized carbon to form alkaline cyanides, an adjusted quantity of highly heated
air IS added to effect further combustion, and pulverize<l anthracite coal or
coke or material rich in free carbon Is showered through the gases lo rcmoTa
all oxygeu and carbonlc-acld gas. * naw>T«

eo7,9l,S-July 16,1898. H. MEHNER. Method qf proititeittg ammonia.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

OUier hydroxide*.

1U,,517— November 11, 1S7S. C. M. T. DU MOT AY. Impronment in Ihe manufac-
ture of baryta. ^

Sulphate of barium, mixed with coal, is reduced to sulphuret of barium and
then transformed Into hydrated baryta, or into carbonate of baryta the Inter-
mediate reagents used being reviviiled and reused.

159,US—fibruary t, WS. C. H. PHILUPS. Impromnent in manufaeturing mtik

of magnesia.

Magnesia hydrate is prepared by subjecting a soluble salt of magnesia— a«
magnesia sulphate— to the action of ammonia.

336,066— September 8, 1SS5. W. Q. STRYPE. Procet* qf mating hydrala of barium
and of strontium.

A solution of sulphide of barium or strontium is subjected to the action of air
forced up through the solution in the presence of an oxide of iron, such as
ochre or other hydrated ferric oxide.

SSS.iTS— October SO, 1885. H. C. FREIST. Mant^faeture qf hydrate of alumina.

A mixture of pulverized aluminous material, sulphate of soda, carlxjnaie of
lime, coal dust, and fluorspar issubjectctl to a high heat; the man leached and
the solution, either before or after removal of Insoluble impurities, treated with
a metallic peroxide, sesquloxide, or, hyperoxide to precipitate the icon in
Insoluble form; which precipitate is removed and the clear liquor subjected to
the action of carbonic-acid gas to form a carbonate of soda and precipitate the
alumina as hydrate of alumina.

SSl,18t— November Si, 1885. G. F. BIHN. Method qf obtaining hydraU of alumina
for paper makers' usefrtrm tniuxite, etc.

To produce an artlflcial hydrate of alumina free from iron, an intimate mix-
ture of bauxite, salt cake, and coal is calcine<l. the maie lixiviated with water,
and the liquor, .separated fnim the Insoluble matter, boiled with finely divided
metallic copper or a suitable icipper comiKiund. The resulting liquor, separated
from insoluble matter, is then treated with cartwnlc-acid gas or Dicarbonate of
soda, precipitating hydrate of ammonia.

539,889— May SS, 1S9S. M. N. D'ANDRIA. Process of making magnaium kydralt.
Calcined and slacked dolomite la subjected to the action of water, repeatedly
agitated, settled, and decanted until the residue is mainly magnaium nydrate.
Large tanks into which the tide can flow are preferably used.

571,533— Norember 17, 1896. R. LANGHANS. Eleetrolvtic proem <4 conterting
hydroxids qf earth and earth alkali metals into inditntubk organic or inorganic
salts, etc.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

CHLORATES.

38S,S17— August SI, 1888. E. K. MCgPRATT AND O. ESCBELLMAMN. Mam-
fact u re of s(Htiu m-ehloratr.

Magnesia suspended in water by agitation is treated with chlorine, the remit-
ingniagnesian liquor boiled down to crystallise out magnesium chloride, and
the liquor then decomposed by means of caiLsilc soda or carbonate of soda, or
mixtures of the same, to produce sodium chlorate.

SS8.997— September i. 1888. E. K. MCSPRATT AND O. ESCBELLMANN. JToim-

faeiure of potassium cMorate.

In the manufacture of potassium chlorate by means of magnesia and rhlorin*
the magnesia liquor is boiled down to crysulliie out magnesium chloride. th«
liquor Is then heate«l with {>otas.sii)m chlorhle. and the potanlum ctilorate sep-
arated from the magnesium chloride by crystalliiatlon. The mother iiquur u
now treated with hydrochloric acid and steam lo obtain chlorine and magne-
sium chloride.

iSO.uts— August 9, ISSt. E. B. CUTTEN. Method qf electTotfOeallt pnimiag
potassium chlorate.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

300

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

iSO.iSS— August 9. 1S9S. E. B. CUTTEN. Method of eUarolyticxOly producing

potassiuvi chlorate.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
1^1,701— February U, 189S. E. B. CUTTEN. Method of electrolyticany producing

potassium chlorate.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

iSl.OOS— February 21, 189S. H. GALL AND A. DE VILLARDY DE MONTLAUR.
Mantifacture o} chlorates of the alkaline metals and metals of the alkaline earths.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

iSS.OiS— March 7 189$. W. T. GIBBS AND S. P. FRANCHOT. Process of obtain-
ing chlorates of the alkalis or of the alkaline earth metals by electrolysis.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
S19,iOO—May «, 1S9J,. H. BLUMENBERG, Jr. Electrolysis.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
f3e,SI,S— April S, 189S. H. BLUMENBERG, jR. Electrolysis.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
537,179— April 9, 1S96. H. BLUMENBERG, .Tr. Klectrolysis.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
S38,S1U— April SO, 1891. K.J. BAYER. Process qf producing potassium chlorate.

Zinc oxide (used in place ol lime) is treated with chlorine gas; the hypochlo-
rite of zinc obtained is split into zinc chlorate and zinc chloride; the solution is
mixed with potassium chloride, and the potassium chlorate separated by crys-
tallization, while the zinc is obtained in the liquor in the form of zinc chloride.

5i3.SSe—July fS, 1895. K. J. BAY'ER. Process of producing potassium chlorate.

Potassium chloride is added to a mixture of zinc oxide and water up to the
saturation point of the mixture, the solution is heated to near the boiling tem-
perature, and chlorine is introduced until the zinc oxide is dissolved, when the
potassium chlorate is crystallized out and the zinc chloride liquor is concen-
trated.
ms.Sik— August h, 1896. H. BLUMENBERG, Jr. Electrolysis.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

SS7.i37— August 3, 1897. F. HURTER. Apparatus for manufacturing chlorate of
potash by electrolysis.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

K0,683— March 7 , 1899. T. A. UEHLING. Process of and ap/paratus far reducing

and oxidizing salts.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
6$7,000— June 13, 1899. P. IMHOFF. Process of making oxyhalogen salts.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
617,063— June 13, 1899. P. IMHOFF. Manufacture of oxyhtUogen salts.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

633.272— September 19, 1899. T. PARKER. Process of manufacturing chlorates by
electrolysis.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

NITRITES AND NITRATES.

Si9,S7i— November 8, 1881. T. VARNEY'. Process of drying nitrates.

A portion is melted and mixed with an unmelted crystalline portion, thereby
expelling the water from the crystals.

iOO.xW — March S6, 1889. C. N. HAKE. Process of making ammonium nitrate.

Nitric-acid vapor is combined with ammonia gas in an air chamber or
ammonia-gas with tine spray of nitric a«id with the temperature maintained
below 120° C. Nitrate of ammonia is produced in the first case as a tine powder
and in the second case as a supersaturated liquid which solidifies on cooling.

U8,361— March 17, 1891. R. S. PENNIMAN. Process of manufacturing nitrate of

ammonia.

Protected nitrate of ammonia is produced by dehydrating the nitrate and
while it is in a melted condition mixing therewith a protecting medium, as any
ol the soft products of petroleum distillation— e. g., vaseline— then cooling and
graining by agitation.

l,l^,36S—Marchl7, 1891. R. S. PENNIMAN. Preparing nitrate of ammonia.

The nitrate is dehydrated while in a melted condition by mechanical agita-
tion accompanied with the injection of air. It is then cooled and grained by
mechanical agitation and a protecting medium, as vaseline, is applied to the
mass.

i78,067—June S8, 189H. R. S. PENNIMAN. Method of manufacturing nitrate of

ammonia.

Nitrate of ammonia liquefied under a high temperature is subjected to mechan-
ical agitation together with injected blastsof air to prevent decomposition from
overheating and to fully eliminate watery vapors.

600.9lU--JtUy i, 1893. J. LANDIN. Process of making ammonium nitrate.

Alcohol is percolated through a mixture of sodium nitrate and ammonium sul-
phate to produce an alcoholic solution containing ammonium nitrate plus some
sodium nitrate, and a residue of sodium sulphate plussome ammonium sulphate.
The>lcoholic solution is treated,by passing it first through ammonium sulphate,
and'next through ammonium chloride, producing an alcoholic solution of
ammonium nitrate and a precipitate of sodium sulphate and .sodium chloride,
and the sodium chloride is then sublimed with the mixture of sodium sulphate,
and ammonium sulphate to produce sodium sulphate and ammonium chloride.

672,819— December 8, 1896. L. G. PAUL. Process of making nitrites.

An alkaline nitrate is melted together with the caustic compound of the same
alkali, and sulphur Is gradually added to the melted mass.

573,96i— December i9, 1896. G. CRAIG. Process of purifying ammonium nitrate.

Nitrate of ammonia is dissolved out of mixtures by percolating or digesting
with anhydrous or high-strength ammonia, and then the solvent is evapora-
ted off.

691,178— December 7, 1897. A. KNOP. Process of making nitrites.

A nitrite is manufactured by heating a mixture of a nitrate, a caustic alkali.
and carbon. Fused caustic soda, 120 parts, and coke, 31 parts, are first mixed and

cooled. Then 300 parts of saltpeter are melted with 120 part* of 90 per cent
caustic soda, and the first mixture added in fragments.

597,006— January 11, 1898. R. N. LENNOX. Process of making ammonium nitrate.
A mixture of sulphate of ammonia, 13 parts, and a nitrate of a metal capable of
double decomposition, as sodium nitrate, 17 parts, is distilled at less than atmos-
pheric pressure, and at a temperature not exceeding 230° C.

63S!,S9h— September 5, 1899. H. K.BAYNES. Process of decomposing alkali nitrates.

See Group I, Acids, Nitric.
633,893— ApriliS, 1889. T. F.4IRLEY. Process of making ammonium nitrate.

Bicarbonate of ammonium is subjected to the action of a saturated solution
of sodium nitrate, the liquid separated from the moistened solid, and the for-
mer cooled to about 15° C. to crystallize out the ammonium nitrate.

SULPHITES AND SULPHATES.

17,830— July HI, 1857. L. 6AM0TIS AND S. MARTIN. Improved apparatus for

making acid sulphite of time.

The fumes from burning sulphur are drawn by suction successively through
a series of vats filled with milk of lime.

S9,S39 — October 30, 1866. G. T. LEWIS. Improvement in the manufacture of sulpho-

acetate of alumina.

Alumina (obtained from cryolite) is treated with acetic acid and sulphuric
acid, or in place of the latter sulphate of alumina or alum.

8i,15k— September 15, 1S6S. W. M. PAGE AND E. B. KRAUSSE. Improved process

of preparing sulphate ofbarytes.

Sulphate of baryta is first boiled in water to render it more friable, then
dried, and boiled in a weak acid solution— as of sulphuric acid— followed by a
weak solution of silicate of soda to purify, then boiled in a saturated alum
solution to whiten, and dried and pulverized, to be subsequently mixed in dis-
tilled water and floated for a fine product.

108,177— October 11, 1870. H. PEMBERTON. Improvement in the manufacture of •

paper.

Sulphate of lime, for use in paper manufacture, is made from a solution of
calcium chloride, for which bittern may be used, and a solution of impure soda
sulphate or niter cake.

11,306— January 31, 1S71. R. DE WITT BIRCH. Imprmement in the manufac-
ture of copperas.

The waste liquor from manufactures using sulphuric acid for cleaning iron
is settled, the free acid neutralized with wrought iron, concentrated to from 28°
to 40° Baum<^. the vapors being passed over lime to a condenser, the liquor settled
and crystallized on crystallizing sticks, and the crystals dried with air warmed
by the'hot vapors.

135,153— Aprils, 187S. H. A. WHITING. Improvement in processes and ap^mra-

tusfor the manufacture of sulphate of lead.

Sulphate of lead is manufactured by the direct action of hot concentrated sul-
phuric acid upon an alloy of lead and zinc, 1 per cent zinc. The dried sulphate
of lead is whitened by calcining at a red heat.

151,3S9—May S6, 1871,. J. HARGREAVES AND T. ROBINSON. Improvement in

the manufacture of sulphate of soda and potassa.

Mixed sulphurou.s-acid gas, air, and water vapor are used in the proportions
of 2 volumes each of gas and water vapor, and air to furnish 1 volume of free
oxygen, the mixture being passed through the chambers in series, each in tur.i
being the first of the series. Sodium chloride, or potassium chloride, is used in
pieces containing about three-quarters of a cubic inch, with the smaller pieces
packed near the sides of the chamber, or tower.

195,998— October 9, 1877. L. S. TALES. Improvement in treating gas-liquor for

ammonia salts.

The incoming ammoniacal liquor is heated by means of the sulphureted-
hydrogen gas, and the latter thereby cooled previous to passing it into water to
absorb it, in the manufacture of sulphate of ammonia.

200,13k — February 12, 1878. C. FAHLBERG. Improvement in processes for utiliz-
ing zinc sulphate.
Zinc sulphate is treated with sodium carbonate or bicarbonate to precipitate

the zinc as a carbonate, and the sodium bicarbonate is then recovered Dy an

ammonio-soda process.

216.323— June 10, 1879. H. GROUVEN. Improvement in tlie manufacture of sul-
phate of ammonia.

Sulphate of ammonia is made from turf and similar material by decomposing
the vapors and gases obtained from heating a mixture of turf and chalk by
means of a contiict mass; converting the carbonate of ammonia to sulphate of
ammonia in the presence of sulphate of lirae,and purifying and crystallizing
the sulphate of ammonia.

220,005— September 23, 1879. Z. C. WARREN. Improvement in the manufacture qf

srdphale of lime.

Sulphate of lime, of about the specific gravity of paper pulp, is made by com-
mingling cooled streams of milk of lime and sulphuric acid prepared in com-
bining proportions.

S2i,101— February 3, 1880. W. J. MENZIES. Process for the maufacture of sulphate

of soda.

A pure sulphate of soda is obtained from niter cake and muriatic-acid cylin-
der-cake, by neutralizing the free acid of the one and the free sodium chloride
of the other, treating them in a reverberatory furnace, either together or singly,
with the addition, respectively, of sodium chloride or sulphuric acid, and then
precipitating the iron salts and impurities from a hot .saturated solution of the
product with an alkali or alklline earth and bleaching-powder. An anhydrous
sulphate of soda is produced, white and free from iron.

229,2J,9—June 29, 1380. C. N. HAKE. Manufacture of potassium sulphate from

kainit.

A solution of magnesium sulphate is added to ground kainit, the chlorides of
magnesium and sodium going into solution while a residue of schonit is formed,
the schonit being separated from the said chlorides by decantution. Caustic
lime, baryta, or .strontla is added to pulverized schiinit and the product calcined,
lixiviated, and concentrated to secure the potassium .sulphate.

21,3,310— June 21, 1881. C. SCHEIBLER. Proccs.^ of separating gypsum from the
solutions of starch-sugar produced by treating the latter with sulphuric acid.
The solution is neutralized by means of lime, the bulk of the gypsum removed

by filtratitm or decantatiou, and the solution then treated with an excess ol

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES.

801

bnriiim-oxalate or other iniioluble barium mlt obuiincd (n>m a imliiblo oxalatv
and which forinn uii insuluhic ooinbhiatloii with iitnv, tho roroatninK Kypotim
boliiK reiiioVLHl with tho Hcuin during ooufoiitrutioii,

W.OIS— September !S. ISSl. H.HKOUVEN. PritreM nf and u]tiMraliu/<ir miMng

ammonium sulphate.

As an Improvt'iiit'iit on tlie process of No. 21i'i.3'23, the peat, or animal refuse
rich In nitroKt'ii. i» charged suceossively into a series of retorts, and the va|x>n
and gases are jmssed through all In series ending with tho one longest rharged.

tfU.ISO—June 6, ISSi. F. UOHLWEG. I'rocett of iMalning mafpunium mlphate

from crude minerat.

Crude uiinenil containing carbonate or slliciitc of niognesin is powdered and
trentit] with a solution of sodium bisulphnte and the inuguesitun sulphate
separated by crystallizHlioii. With the addition of cttrl«>nnte of soila the mag-
nesia is precipitated from the solution as u carbonate in the usiml manner.

^S7.^s^~^'ovemberU,I8S^. R. N. R. PHELHS AND \V. A.CLARK, JH. Procrm

of treating the waste piekU-liquor of iron -vorks.

See Group I, Adds, Sulphuric.
tse,7Sli— October 18, ISXI. II. k6ssLER. Proceu qf making mprte aulphaie.

Gases containing sulphurous acid, as the waste gases of chemical works, arc
injected jiiinily with air and steam into an oxidizing solution of cupric sulphate
containing free copper, tis cement copper.

t»2,S60— January tt, ISSi. C. SEMPER. VtUizing tcatte catcium chloride and

sulphate.

Waste calcium sulphate, produced In the manufacture of acetic acid from
acetate of lime. Is calcined at a high temperature and the Impurities driven oH.

S1S,97S — June Sit, ISS5. E. A. F.\LES. Prorcnif of luaHng ammonium sulphate.
In the distillation of amraoniacal liquor and the passage of the vapor through

sulphuric acid, the acid is covered with a layer of coal oil to give white sulphate

of ammonia crystals and avoid discoloration.

SSt.SU—JuneSO, 1SS5. E. CAREY, H. GASKELL, JR., AND F. HURTER. Proc-
ess qf making stHliinn sulphite.

Salts — monohydrated carix>nate of soda — are exposed to the action of sul-
phurous-acid gas.

SS9,216—Oc(ober 17, ISSS. E. B. RITTER AND C. KELLNER. Process qf making

solutions of bisulphites.

The carbonate of a bose is first subjected to the action of sulphurous acid,
whereby carbonic acid is expelled and the sulphite formed is dissolved in the
weakened acid solution. The sulphite solution is then reimpregnated with
sulphurous acid and a combination with the second base effected and the for-
mation of a double salt.

SSS.HoS— .March J.?, 1SS6. E. B. RITTER AND C. KELLNER. Process of manu-
facturing sulphites.
In the manufacture of sulphites, sulphurous-acid gas is purified, prior to making

a solution of the .same, by passing it through asolid material, as limestone, which

will combine with sulphuric acid, and a nlterof solid material for dry particles,

and then cooling the acid.

S39,97i— April IS, 1SS6. W. O. & W. P. CROCKER. Producing suipniie or Utul-

phite of sodium.

For the production of sulphite-of-sodium liquor from sulphate of sodium for
the reduction of wood to pulp, the sulphate of .sodium mixed with carbonaceous
matter is roasted, leached, evaporated to dryness, and the pro<luct granulated,
and heated with agitation in contact with air or oxygen until inguude-scence
ceases, when it is made into a solution. It may be charged witii an additional
portion of sulphurous or other acid before introduction into the digester. By
the addition of a small quantity of bisulphite of calcium any sulphide or sul-
phate of sodium is decomposed, sulphate of calcium being precipitated.

339,975— April 13, 1SS6. W. O. & W. P. CROCKER. Process ofmakiny bisulhites.
Bisulphite-of-sodium liquor is produced by roasting tlie acid sulphate of sodium
to reduce it to neutral sulphate and recover one proportion of sulphuric acid, sus-
pending neutral .™lphite of calcium in the solution by agitation, and finally
charging the mixture with sulphurous acid, which may be obtained by decom-
position of the sulphuric ucid recovered. The neutral sulphite of calcium is ob-
tained by treating the used bisulphite-of-sodium liquor with oxide or carbonate
of calcium.

S65,Sl»—Junetl.lSS7. W. M. PAGE AND E. B. KRAUSSE. Process of and appa-
ratus for treating barium sulphate.

The crude material is subjected to successive steps of grinding, boiling with
dilute acid, washing, drying, regrinding, agitation in hot water, screening, set-
tling in water, and drying.

S7l,im— October 11, Ism. T. B. FOGARTY. Processof and apparatus for making

ammonium sulphate.

Highly heated nitrogenous generator gas is mixed with adjusted volumes of
superheated steam and air and mingled with a falling mass of pulverized car-
bon and alkali in a retort, producing cyanogen, which in turn is decomposed
by the steam to ammonia, hydrogen and carbon oxides: the ammonia and car-
bonic acid being then treated with sulphuric acid and lime of gypsum to pro-
duce sulphate of ammonia and carbonate of lime.

S7S,l6i—Xorcmbcr 15, ISS7. H. BAUM. Process of making pyrosulphates.

Pyrosulphatesof the alkali metals, as also of ammonia, are produced by beating
the ocid sulphates thereof in a vacuum to a temperature of from 200° to 400° 0.

376,189— January 10, 18SS. A. FRANK. Production of sulphite solutions.

Free as well as combined sulphurous acid is recovered from the lyes result-
ing from the manufacture of cellulose by the sulphite process, by converting
the sulphurous acid into a monosulphite by means of calcium or a calcium salt,
separating the monosulphite from tlie lye and purilying the same by washing
In a solution of sulphurous acid or of an alkali sulphite or an alkaline earth.

376,190— January 10, 1S8S. A. FRANK. Production of sulphite solutions.

A(Md sulphite solutions are produced from calcium monosulphite (a product
of the process No. 37B,18a) witn calcium sulphate as a by-product, by treating
the calcium monosulphite with suliihuric acid or with aiid sulphate of soda.

S79,SiO— March SO, 1S8S. A. SCHANSCHIEFF. New mercuric laU for battery-

fluids.

A new salt, yellow ba.sic sulphate of mcrcurv cnmbined with bi.sulphate of
mercury, substantially of the formula 2HgU,S04-l-iIgSO,i-3H.O, is produced by
dissolving mercury iu sulphuric acid, evaporating excess of acid, adding water,

wparatliig the iirecipltatv and tri-«tin( It with «rtd iind «Kaln with w«I«- not
Ml on. cither retaining the anlutlun In Ihv liquid fiwm or cvaporallnc lo obtain

tlicaolld mil.

3;rt.ts,l—.\;,iemltrrH,IHliH. II ii i'lN.Ja. iJrhvlrnltnii -••IIkih t-',' ■-

The cryiiHls of nalunil or .. ji«<r'« mlt are IrcaliHl with • )•.

united sohitlMn of «»lluin »uli .; . ihey mrll: the anbydrniu wli i>„i u,

soluthm Is then alloweil tosettle.ana the Mluralod •olutlonia runoffor allowfd
to recrystalllzc to be used affaln.

3!ii,l5!t—l)eeemberts,is.in. W. MANNINd. Proeeu of treiUing gfptum.

In the treatment of gyiMuin lor the proliiilloniil i>n lm|>«l|«bl«oMnQ« anhr-
drous powder. It la given a second calcination and iinlMr<|umt (TiMlnv loaxiwl
all water of crystalllMtinn.

i07,»t5—July SO, IH-W. C. J. E. DK HaBS. Dmihie nUphnlr of nutlmrmy.

A new pnxluct. the double saltof tluorldeol nil' tinfflo-

nia, having the forniula .sl)Fl,i .Ml,).-<i,— .iviillu iieu of

tartar emetic— Is pnxluceil by nilxi'iiK fluoride , : .'iat» of

ammonia and evaporating the mixture.

1,15,739— Korember te. isa». H. A. 8EE0ALL. Proeem tif maUtig ehmmlum

sulphates.

Chromic or chromoua sulphates are producc<l from chrome material* by beat-
ing the same to 600° C. In closed receptacles with the acid aulpbatoof any llxeil
alkali, such as sodium bisulphate. with the chrome nialerUla held In ■iup<'n
sion by agitation: and tlieii condensing the va|M>r< and rcgnining the •ulphun<'-
acld which has not entered Into the reaition. The qunnlTly of vapor la rvdiH'e<l
by mixing with the mass a substance that do«« not melt or decompose at WO' c,
as barium sulphate.

Ut,37ii-iray 19, 1S91. P. DE LACHOMETTE. Proetu iff making ammoHlmm-

sulphite.

Crude ammonlacal liquor Is first purified with oxide of Iron and then dia-
tilled: the oxide of iron used la roasted, and the dry amnmnla from the distilla-
tion and the sulphurous gas from the roasting, conducted in suitable proportions
into a saturating tank, form ammonium sulphite or bisulphite.

1,51,3'm—May 19, 1S91. H. PENNINGTON. Process of mnking lea-l salphiUf.

Metallic lead In shreds or flakes is subjected to the alternate action of dilute
acetic acid and of atmospheric air: the mass of lead is drained and loosencl up
after the acetic solution is drawn ofT: and the said solution is mixed with a suf-
ndent quantity of sulphuric acid to thoroughly reduce the lead acetate to a
lead sulphate without excess of free .sulphuric acid, the solution being agitated
to prevent the formation of aclcular crystals and leave the sulphate practically
amorphous.

1^3,137— May !6, IS91. J. VAN RUYMBEKE. Proee— of makiagbatie pernlphaU

of iron.

Pulverized Iron ore — oxide of Iron— Is first mixed with sulphuric add and
then heated to from 190° to 260° C. until the water has been expelled and a
persulphate of requisite basicity is produced.

503,900— August tS, 1893. W. £. CASE. Process qf making alumiRium JluonU-

phate.

Aluminium fluosulphatefree from Iron Is produced by adding caldam fluoride
to an aqueous sfjltition of crude aluminium sulphate, then adding a quantity
of the freshly precipitated white pro<liiet obtained by adding a solution of an
alkaline carbonate to an aluminium Huosniphate solution which has been freed
from iron. The resulting ferruginous precipitate is separated from the fluo-
sulphate solution by mechanical means.

50!,,S!l,— September 5, 1S93. W. £. CASE. Process of making aluminium com-
pounds.

An insoluble aluminium compound is produced by combining alumlnlnm
sulphate and calcium fluoride to form an aluminium fiuosulphato .solution, and
adding an alkali carbonate. If Inm is present the alkali I'arbonate is added
until u filtered test sample shows the solution free of iron in the ferric form:
the iron precipitate is then removed and additional alkali carbomite added to
precipitate the aluminiuta compound.

50U,315— September 5, isa3. W. E. CASE. Process of making alnminum jIuonU-

phate.

An aluminium alkali fluosulphate free from iron is produced by adding cal-
cium fluoride to an aqueous solution of crude aluminium sulphate, then addtng
a solution of an alkaline carbonate, as of sodium carbonate, to precipitate Iron,
and separating the aluminitmi fluosulphate solution from the solid products.

5li,10.-l— January 16, ia9i. W. E. CASE. Process qf making ahunlnum com-
pourvls.
An insoluble aluminium compound is formed by combining alumlnlnm ral-

fihatc and calcium fluoride to form an aluminiiuu-fluo-sulphate solution, add-
ng thereto a caustic alkali, as ammonium hydrate, to precipitate the iron,
removing the iron, and then adding a further quantity of the caustic alkali lo
precipitate the aluminium compound.

Sn.OI^O-fibruary 6, /i»«. H. F. D. 8CH WAHN. ProetM V PM^W^V »««*« "*

/(l/«q/'iKlrl«m.

The process of No. SU,039 (Group XIX. Oxides) is speclflcally applied to the
purification of native sulphate of barium from Iron. etc.

515,765— March 6, 1S9I,. C. VON GRABOWSKL Process qf and apparatus/or puri-
fying sulfate lyes.
See Group X, Electro-chemistry.

et8, 076— September IS, tS9i. M. L. GRIFFIN. Process of making caleiwn blnf/Ue

liquor.

To prepare "lime sludge." resulting from the treatment of caibonaled-aoda
liquors with lime in the manufacture of caustic soda, for use as a subrtitute tor
lime in the manufacture of bisulphite liqiion. It Is washed to remove the alkali,
flowed over riflles to remove heavy impurities, and the predpltate of carbonate
of lime thus purified is separated from the water by settling or fllterlug. The
sludge is then charged with suipburous-acld gas.

51,1.593— Janets, 1S9I. J. D. DARLING. Process qf ntlUiing niter-eakt or oUtir

acid sidfales.

See Group X. ElectnM-hemlstry.
5ia,ia9—July9.1S9S. E. A. STARKE. Process i^mati^ neutral alkaline lil^tet

from bistt(fates.

Neutral alkaline sulphate Is made by adding a portion of sulphur lo the add
sulphate and heating the mass. The sulphurous add fumes are cullecled and
converted into sulphuric add.

302

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

5l,S.0Oi—JulyiS, 1S95. S. H. EMMENS. P}-oces.i of making ferric sulfate.

The eases from a sulphnret or sulphate roasting or calcining furnace are
passed into water in which ferric hydrate is suspended.

S65,9SS—AuguiillS. 1S96. E. ANDREOLI. Apparatus for indirect cledrolyns.

See Group X, Electro-chemistry.
601,00e—^farch 21, 1S9S. H. E. STURCKE. Preparing sulfate of lime from residues.

Residues from the manufacture of caustic soda, and comprising essentially
carbonate of lime, are dissolved in muriatic acid, filtered, precipitated with
sulphuric acid to form sulphate of lime, filtered, and the sulphate of lime washed
ana dried. The last filtrate is used for treating fresh quantities of residues. A
waste calcium-chloride solution from the ammonium-soda process is filtered,
precipitated with sulphuric acid to form sulphate ol lime, and filtered, and the
fast filtrate used for caustic soda residues.

601,179— March a. 1S98. H. E. STURCKE. Process of and apparatus for making

gulf ate of lime.

Residues from the manufacture of caustic alkali, comprising essentially car-
bonate of lime, are made into a thin milk, the insoluble impurities are mechan-
ically removed, and the milk of carbonate is then treated with sulphuric acid
to convert the carbonate into sulphate of lime, which is separated out and
dried.

60S.697—June li, 189S. R. E. CHATFIELD. Process of utilising acid sulfates of

soda.

Residue acid sulphate of soda solutions are acted upon by ammoniacal com-
pounds from gas liquor or other sources to produce mixed sulphates of ammo-
nia and soda. The solution is then evaporated to a specific gravity of 1.380 at
boiling temperature to crystallize out sulphate of soda: the evaporation is then
continued to crystallize out the mixed salts, which latter crystals are dis,solved
in cold mother liquor to a specific gravity of 1.285 and evaporated to crystallize
out sulphate of ammonia.

6Si,751— October 10, 1S99. O. HOFMANN. Method ofreflningcnpric-sulfale solutions.
A cupric-sulphate solution containing salts of iron, arsenic, antimony, etc.,
is neutralized and heated to 75° to 80° C, when pulverized cupric oxide is
added and air is injected to precipitate the impurities.

eU>,0S6— December t6, 1S99. A. S. KAMAGE. Process of and apparatus for mak-
ing copperas.

Carbonate of magnesium is added to the waste liquor of pickling vats to neu-
tralize the free sulphuric acid, and the liquor is then filtered, evaporated, and
crystallized, giving a copperas mixed with a little magnesium sulphate which
improves the same for the manufacture of Venetian red.

6il.550 — January 16, 1900. M. E. ROTHBERG. Process of making magnesia and
placer of par is.
See Group XIX, Oxides.

650,980— June 5, 1900. O. MEURER. Process of making metaUtc sulfates.

To produce sulphates free from iron from sulphide ores containing sulphide
of iron, the ores are heated with polysulphides of the alkalis, cooled and caused
to be crumbled in the air, after tlie addition of water: dried and subjected to
spontaneous oxidation in air preferably at 205° C. The mass is then lixiviated
with water and the sulphates are dissolved.

PHOSPHATES.

lii.UO— March 29, 186k. E. N. HORSFORD. Improved double phosphate of lime

and soda for cidinary and other purposes.

To a mixture of 5,000 pounds of water and 500 pounds of oil of vitriol there is
added 700 pounds of burned bones and constant agitation is continued for six-
teen to eighteen hours, when the mass is leached and lixiviated, forming a
liquid acid phosphate ol lime, in which about two-ninths of the lime of the
original phosphate of lime remains in combination with the phosphoric acid.
This is concentrated with the addition of hydrate of soda in the proportion of
0.0144 of a pound for each degree of Baumt^ until it becomes an emulsion of
crvstals. The product is rendered nonhygroscopic by diluting the emulsion of
crystals with gelatinized water, and subjecting to slow crystallization, and
potato starch is mixed therewith, or it is treated with a weak solution of boiled
starch.

es.S77— February 19, 1867. J. E. LAUER. Improved acid compound for use in

baking and cooking.

An acid salt, obtained by treating boneblack with hydrochloric acid and
then adding sulphuric acid to the liquor.

7B,S71— March 10, 1868. E. N. HORSFORD. Improved preparation of acid phos-
phate of lime.

Sulphuric acid is added to a solution of acid phosphate of lime in a solution
of a salt of lime, the acid of which .salt is volatile, as nitric acid, and the volatile
acid driven off by heat, leaving acid phosphate of lime mixed with or feebly
combined with sulphate of lime, which is separated by leaching.

75,SS8— March 10, 1888. G. F.WILSON. Improvement iti the manufacture of acid

phosphates.

Farinaceous matter is mixed with acid phosphate of lime by feeding a coarse
mixture of the material between rollers, preferably of dressed granite.

75,Si9— March 10, 186S. Q. F. WILSON. Improvement in preparing bones for the

manufacture of acid phosphates.

Bones are distilled in horizontal retorts with condensation of the products of
distillation, the remaining gases being conveyed to the furnace and burned.
Each charge of distilled bone is raked from the retort into an iron cooler which
is sealed and the bone cooled under exclusion of air.

75,330 — March 10, 1868. G. F. WILSON. Improvement in drying acid phosphates.
Granulated acid phosphate of lime is exposed to continuous currents of heated
air on both sides of vertical columns thereof, which are progressively fed
downward.

76,331— March 10, 1888. G. F. WILSON. Improvement tn burning bones for the

manufacture of acid phosphates.

Bones are burned white by subjecting them to a steady, long-continued, uni-
form heat, with sufficient regulated air to secure perfect combustion without
cooling off the furnace, the temperature of distillation being not for once inter-
mittel.

75,336— March 10, 1S6S. G. F. WILSON AND E. N. HORSFORD. Improvement
in the manufacture of phosphates and in extracting phosphoric acid from bones.
Burned bones are treated with sulphuric acid diluted with a weak solution

of acid phosphate of lime to or beyond the point of precipitating the sulphate

of lead present, and the mixture is treated with continuous agitation.
The material is leached in broad shallow pans with alternate affusion of water

and tamping to secure leaching of the whole mass.

78,763— April U, 1S6S. E. N. HORSFORD. Improved method of prei>aring acid

phospliate of lime.

Sulphuric acid purified of sulphate of lead is employed in the manufacture
of pulverulent acid phosphate of lime, to be used for raising bread.

86,289— January 26, 1869. A. DUVALL. Improved method of mixing liquids with
dust or powder for the manufacture of phospliates, and for other purposes.
The pulverized material and the acidarefedintoablast of airor jet of steam,

either or both, and thereby thoroughly mixed and projected into a receiving

chamber.

110,680 — January 3, 1871. N. B. RICE. Improvement in the manufacture of acid

pliosphates for use in baking-powders, etc.

To 1,000 pounds of pulverized phosphate of lime, as contained in apatite or
bone, there is added 1,400 pounds of terhydrated phosphoric acid, diluted with
2,800 pounds of water, with enough more phosphoric acid to neutralize and
saturate all carbonates, oxides, etc. After standing a week with frequent agita-
tion the superphosphate of lime in solution is decanted or leached out. Part of
the liquor is treated with sulphuric acid to deposit the lime in solution and
leave a dilute phosphoric acid, and part is treated with alkaline sulphates
depositing the lime as a sulphate and leaving a superphosphate of the base.

123,7 IS— February IS, 1872. B. TANNER. Improrement in the manufacture of

pliosphates of the alkalis.

Monosodic, bisodic, or trisodic phosphates, or like phosphates of potash or
ammonia, are produced by mixing sodium chloride, or potassium or ammonium
chloride, with phosphoric acid in the proper combining proportions, and sub-
jecting the mixture to the action of steam, superheated steam, or mixtures of
hot air and steam.

123,7 U,— February IS, 1872. B. TANNER. Improvement in the mantifactttre of
superphosphates of lime.
See Group VIII. Fertilizers.

130,298— August 6, 1872. E. N, HORSFORD. Imi»-oveme7it in the manufacture of

phosphate of lime and yeast-poicders.

Solid monocalcic phosphate, produced by evaporating, with a current of
heated air, a solution of monocalcic, orthophosphate, and free phosphoric acid,
mingled with a solution of the phosphate of lime of burned bones in hydro-
chloric acid, in such proportions that tne total number of lime atoms equals the
total number of atoms of phosphoric acid. The monocalcic phosphate :s mixed
with starch to preserve its available strength, with alkaline carbonates to form
a yeast powder, and the latter with flour for the production of self-raising flour.

137,635— April 8, 1873. F. M. LYTE AND H. STORCK. Improvement in the

manufacture of acid phosphates.

Soluble acid phosphates are produced by attacking earthy phosphates, espe-
cially phosphate of calcium, with properly diluted phosphoric acid, precipitat-
ing the earthy matter by means of al ka line sulphates, as sulphate of ammonium,
anil then extracting the sulphuric acid of the residual liquor with the phos-
phate of barium, lead, or strontium, or the carbonates or other suitable salts of
these bases. The residues are either treated with sodium carbonate, caustic
soda, and the phosphoric acid precipitated from the liquid with lime, or in cer-
tain other specified ways.

IW.OSl-Junc 17, 1873. J. E. LAUER. Improvement in manufacturing crystalline

acid pliosphate of lime for yeast-powders.

Boneblack is first treated with dilute sulphuric acid to deposit the sulphate
of lime, and it is then treated with muriatic acid evaporated and crystallized.
(See No. 62,277.)

16lt,k57 — June 15, 1875. A. JAS. Improvement in dissolving tribasic pliosphate of

lime in water containing carbonic acid.

Tribasic phosphate is dissolved in water by means of a current of carbonic
acid gas, at a greater or less pressure, according to the quantity to be dissolved.

178,11,6— May 30, 1876. J. V. HECKER. Improvement in acid-powders and proc-
esses of producing them.

An acid powder consisting of monocalcic ortho-phosphate, sodium chloride,
and calcium chloride: produced by treating boneblack with sulphuric acid and
then with hydrochloric acid and sodium chloride, leaching and evaporating to
dryness.

196,771— November 6, 1877. J. E. SIEBEL. Improvement in processes of producing

the mono or acid phosphate of ammonia.

A mixture of ground bone-ash and sulphate of ammonia in water is subjected
to a boiling heat for a sulficient length of time to form sulphate of lime and
monophosphate of ammonia, which latter is leached out and evaporated to dry-
ness. The evolution of free ammonia is avoided by replacing a proper amount
of the sulphate of ammonia with sulphuric acid.

219,518— July 8, 18S0. C. A. CATLIN. Acid phosphate for baking-powders.

An acid phosphate in which the active ingredient has an excess of base over
a dihydrogen calcic phosphate, and in which both the phosphoric acid and the
sulphate of lime are completely hydrated: produced by treating bone-ash or
other tricalcic phosphate with oil of vitriol diluted with an excess of water
under agitation and heat.

229,573— July 8, 1880. G. F. WILSON AND C. A. CATLIN. Preparation of potas-
sium phosphate for baking-powder.
An acid powder containing as the active ingredient an acid potassium phos-

ghate with an excess of base over a dihydrogen potassic phosphate, and having
oth the acid phosphate and the sulphate of lime completely hydrated: pro-
duced by treating tricalcic phosphate with dilute oil of vitriol" under agitation
and heat, decomposing the hydrogen dicalcic phosphate into hydrogen dipota£-
sic phosphate with potassium sulphate, and converting the mass into a dry
powder.

229.571,— Jidy 8, 1880. G. F. WILSON AND 0. A. CATLIN. Preparation of sodium

phospliate for baking-powder.

An acid powder in which the active ingredient is an acid sodium phosphate
having an excess of base over a dihydrogen sodic phosphate, and with the acid
phosphate and sulphate of lime completely hydrated: produced by decompos-

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL INDUSTKIES.

.303

Ing tricalcic pborohntc with dilute oil of vttilol, and then effoctlnir * double
dfcumpoettinu with mxlUim aulphato under ii«llatlon and heat, and convortlnc
the mass Into a dry (xiwder. •

SUl.m; SOl.un-Jiilut.lxtA. S.Q.THOMAS. ManufnetureqfaUmUnephotphala.

See Omup VIII, Fertlllrera.
»1*,J69— .tfarfA.I, ;h«. C. V. I'ETRAEUS. Solution qf acM iihiuiiluUrt.

A combination ot free phoaphorlc acid with pho«phate of soda. I'oniiliitinK of
dlhydroKeii. sodic phoni>hate, phosphoric add. and water. In priHiuced by leach-
inij a mixture of bone ash, KX) parts, with sulphuric acid of 49° Haumii, 1(X) parta
dilute<l U> Xfi OT •2.'<'> Baumc; and addinif to the solution 161 parta of Glauber's
salts for each 28 parts of lime therein.

Sii.eim—Julii tt, isat. F. DIBBEN. Manufacture qf «uperpho«pluUe».

One part of acid soda sulphate Is dissolved In 4 parta of water at a temperature
of 130° F., allowed to stand until the neutral .sulphate is crv»talliz«'d out of the
mother liquor, when SJ poiniiis of the mother liquor is aildwl to 1 |K)und of
phosphate of lime, and heated until the surplus water Is evajurate*!.

)ii,li71—Augwil 18, 18SS. L. IMPERATORI. Eitraction <,f phomhate toda from

tlag>.

Slags from phosphatlc materials, as from the Thomas Gilchrist process, arc
smelted with sulphate of {mtash or so<ia and carbon, and subsequently treated
with carbonic acid.

S7!..mi—I)t:efmlHr«,lsS7. C. V. PETRAEU8. Procett qf making acid potatui urn
-. phosphatei*.

Impure acid plKwphatc of lime, produced by decomposing bone or .similar
phosphate with a suiliitile acid and leaching, is decompo.sed bv sulphate of pot-
ash: then cnrboimic of potash or caustic |Hitash is nd(ic<i In "excess, that is, in
sufticient ciuantity to form in the solution an acid pliospliate of potash contain-
ing an excess of pota.sh over that in the dihydrogen pota.ssium phosphate; and,
after tiltmtion, the solution is evaporated to crystallization.

SSy,6<U;~S,'plrmli)r IS. ISSS. C. GLASER. PrMess of makiny acid phmpluUe.

Insoluble phosphoric acid contained in mineral and petrified phosphates is
converted into available phosphoric acid by Hncly pulverizing the mineral and
then applying phosphoric acid directly thereto. The ground mineral iiiav be
divideti into 2 parts, and the phosphoric acid extracteil from 1 portion, by any
method, and applied to the other portion.

US.791— October IS. 1SS9. J. REESE. CrygtaUlne calcic tetraphotphate and the pro-
cess of making the itame.
Crystallized tetrabasiic phosphate of lime; produced by oxidizing phosphorus

at a high temperature while in the presence of lime, until the lime is charged

with phosphoric acid, and then withdrawing the charged lime and subjecting

it to slow cooling. It is pulverized and used as a fertilizer.

Ui.THS^Octolxr 15, ISSV. J.REESE. Process of makinij phosphatea.

In the manufacture of calcium phosphate from phosphorilic iron, the molten
phosphoritic iron is blown with an air blast, in a ba.sic-lined vessel and in the
presence of lime additions, until the phosphorus has been reduced to not less
than one-half of 1 per cent (but little iron being oxidized when the phos-
phorus Isin excess thereof ), when the phosphate so lorraed is withdrawn. After
lime is charged to the desired amount of phosphorus it is withdrawn and a
charge of fresh lime added, whereby phosphates having any deaired percentage
of phosphoric acid may be produced.

UT.SSO—Deccmbtr tk, 18S9. C. GLASER. Process of making acid photphate.

Mineral and petrified phosphates are ground and exposed to the action of
dilute phosphoric acid, and the moisture subsequently evaporated; the amount
of acicl used is theoretically insufficient to convert all ot the tricalcic phos-
phate (or corresponding compounds) into monocalcic phosphate, but exceeds
the theoretical amount necessary to convert the same into bicalcic phosphate,
thus forming a mixture of monocalcic and bicalcic phosphates, or equivalents.
(See No. 389,566.)

US.iSH—December SI, 18S9. C. E. D. WINSSINGER. Process qf making bicalcic

phoifphate.

In the production ot bicalcic phosphates, a mother liquor of monocalcic
phosphate of lime is produced by lorming a phosphoric-acid solution— by treat-
ing suitable phosphatlc material with an excess of sulphuric acid— liltering, and
treating the solution with carbonate of lime, or milk of lime, to convert it into
a monocalcic-phosphate solution free frt)m iron, etc. The solid residue from
the filtration may be treated with a phosphoric-acid solution and sulpnute of
lime obtained as a by-product. Tlie monocalcic solution is' converted into a
monosodic solution by treatment with sulphate of soda, which is then treated
with carbonate of soda, and the resulting neutral solution is treated with lime;
the phosphate of lime separated from the resulting caustic-soda solution (a by-
product), and the separated phosphate treated with an aqueous monocalcic
solution, and the bicalcic phosphate separated.

US,567— February S. 1891. A. MEMMINGER. Process of making acid phoDphaU-t.
The drying of a compound of phosphatlc material and acid is accelerated by
adding thereto a fluoride compound, as calcium fluoride, and the drying period
is graduated by comminuting to a detinite degree and adding a greater or less
proportion of the fluoride compound, or by varying the degree of comminution.

Ue.SlS — February 17, 1S91. C. GLASER. Process of making alkaline phoKphat^s. \

Pure phosphates of the alkalis are obtained from crude commercial phoa-
phoric acid by decomposing the salt of an alkali and an acid volatile at higher
temperature (as nitrate of soda) by fusing same with crude commercial phos-
phoric acid in excess of the amount re«juircd to form a pyrophosphate; then
dissolving the fused mass in water and boiling until conversion «tf meta and pyro
phosphoric acid is effected; then treating with the carbonate of an alkali (or
free alkali) till alkaline reaction is obtained; and finally separating the solution
from insoluble impurities and crystallizing.

i9S.8S9— March 11, 1S9S. S. L. GOODALE. Method qf treating hydratedpho»phate»

of alumina.

Insoluble hydrated phosphates of alumina and iron are heated by indirect
heat in suitable receptacles until all the water of constitution is exi>elled, or
usually until the entire mass has a temperature of about 325° C, when the heat
is arrested and the mass cooled before unfavorable molecular rearrangement is
developed.

SOi.iai,— August 1,1S»S. H. PRECHT. Processqf obtainingmetaor pyrn phosphoric-
acid combinations.

To produce a soluble potassium phosphate the insoluble potassium metanhos-
phate is melted and rapidly cooled to prevent crystjillization. A basic body, as
potash or soda, is added either before or during the melting, so that phosphoric
acid in the form of pyrophosphate will in part be present in the molten salt.

8m Uroup X, Eleciro-cliemliitry.
Sm,IDt—nbruani I, lim. H. P(X)LK. Prorru nf mnkli>g pKotptuUt.

Pulvcrlted native aliimlnnm pho^phair l» mln-d with a tio1ltng«olnttnT) of
caustic soda to decnmpfMe f •■ - • .'

added to the)H>lliiig noluti'
mlna is precipitated ax a si

out; and Hnafly the alumlmoii Mjicnie ireaied wini •uipiiuric »<id when br
aluminum nilpbate In formed.

«Of,OW-afor<-* K. iMM. J.U.WIBORO. Photplialeamdmeand qfrnaJth^mmf.

A tetm-cslclum-ndlam (or pola«lnm ) phcMpbalc. 8m Oroup VIII. PFrtlliMn,
Product*.

«t7,Pn—Jiaie to, 1899. C. LUCKOW.
copper by meant qf ^edrolytit.
See Oroup X, Electrochemintry.

Proeet qf pmUtdma iatle jitw^itnln 4f

CARBONATES.

tOO.lSi—fUnruttry It, IS78. C. FAHLBKRO. rmpronmenttmpnermet/br
zinc aulphaU.

See Group XIX, Sulphites and Sulphates.
t3S.t31— December 7, ISSO. F. OL'TZKOW. Mam^iiHurr,,/ n,Tt.onale qf awigHCTto.

It is obtained In a light and flo<^culent form by forcing emttmalc^elA KM
through the pulp of magnesium hydrate in a healed sute.

tlS.tSS—May tt, I8SS. V. SIDERSKY AN'D H. PROBOT. Pneem iif otbtMrna
carbonate qf strontium.

To recover the strontium salts from the residues of the treatment of aoeha-
rine solutions with strontium, the strontianlte Is dissolve<l in said rcaldiM* with
an excess of hydrtx,'hloric acid, the strontium solution tillered oil, tbe atronUimi
in the solution converted into a sulphate, and the latter Anally icoonrertad
into a carbonate.

tSO.irs—June 16, ISSS. H. GROL'VEN. Manufacture of ttruntium cattonate.

Powdered celestine, or strontium sulphate, is mixed with a double sulphate of
potassium and magnesium, and [xiwdered carbon or coal, and the mixture
lurnaced in crucibles with exclusion of air. The maia la then lixiviate<l with
excliLsion of air, and the solution evaporated with Introduction of carbonic-acid
gas until the development of hydrogen sulphide ston. The prccipitan-d stron-
titun carbonate is separated from the polasnum carDonale left in the solution.

MLSS-i-July 1, J«S4. E. A. MEBUS AND J. W. DE CASTRO. Mamtfaclure qf

carbtmate of strontium.

Sulphate of strontium is finely ground, mixed with water, and treated with

carbonate of ammonia, or ammonia and carbonic-acid gaa— water may be tiaed

producing carbonate of stroutium and sulphate of ammonia. Ammonia la
recovered by distillation of the sulphate of ammonia with lime.

103,961— August 19, imu. A. WCnsCHE. MelhiHl of obtaining earbonaU: qf maff-
nesia.

Ammonia and carbonic acid are introduced into a solution of aoluble maa-
nesic salt-s, whereby ammonium-magnesium carbonate is formed, which T»
separated from the lye and heated to drive oil the ammonia and a part or all of
the carbonic acid. Caustic magnesia may be adde<l to the compoimd salt of
ammonia and magnesia to drive off the ammonia separately.

610,979— December 19, 1893. O. LUNGE AND C. H. M. LYTE. Process qf mating
basic lead salts and caustic alkali.

Basle lead carbonate is formed and caostic soda.
See Group II, Sodas, Caustic Soda.

5Si,177— February It, 1893. E. RDEFF. Procat qf making UgU baiU

carbonate.

Carbonic-acid gas is Introduced with agitation into a mixture of magnesia,
1 part, and water. 25 part.s, until about 1 part by weight of gas has been abaorbed,
when tbe mixture is boiled down.

SSl^Slt—PAruary It, 189S. H. ENDEMANN. Process of making ligU

carbonate.

A mixture ot magnesia, 20 parts: carbonate of ammonia, 30 parts: and water,
,'iOO parts, is agitated and allowed to Imrtlcn intoa cake. The ammonia may be
expelled by exposing to a temperature of (iO° C. in a partial vacuum, or the cake
can be broken up and washed.

SSI„S1S— February 11, 1S9S. H. ENDEMANN. iVowsi qf making light earbonaU (/

magnesia.

A mixture of magnesia, 10 parts, and the bichromate of a fixed alkali, as of
soda, 32 parts, in 250 parta of water, is subjected to agitation under a gradually-
rising temperature to about KP C, the light carbonate of magnesia then belnc
collected.

601,007— March tt, 1898. H. E. STURCKE. Amorpkous earbonaU qf Urn* and

methtxi qfand apparatus for obtaining same.

A new product: dry powdered carbonate of lime, in extremely fine partlclea
having a specific weight of from 7M to (H grams per 100 c. c. when dried at not
exceeulng 100^ C, is pnxiuced tnim tlie residues of the manufacture of caustic
alkali by removing the caustic lime, mixing the re«idue with water, mechan-
ically separating the impurities, then subjecting the carbonate and water to the
action of a vacuum filter and drying.

60S,tt5— April te, 1898. H. li. STU RCKE. Process qf preforing oawrpAoM c

ale qf lime from residues.

Amorphous calcium carbonate Is produced from leiiduea hj ftnt removlac
tbe insoluble impurities from calcium oxide and alkali oarbonale by mechan-
ical separation, then causing the oxide and carbonate to react upon each other
In water, and separating the calcium carbonate formed from the alkali hydrate
and from all soluble imnuritics Including calcium hjrdiale. The calcium car-
bonate is then mixed witn water. pai^^Ki through a mechanical sefianior. filtered,
and dried.

608,116— April 16, 1898. H. E. 8TURCKE. Protess <4 preparing anarpAmu ear-

bonate of lime from residues.

Calcium carbonate, when made from leddtMa according to No,MIS.216 and app-
anted from Insoluble Impurities, Is dried, ground, and bolted.

304

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

SILICATES.

t8,5Ut—ifay », 1860. G. E. VAN DERBOURGH. Reimie AprU 1, 1S63. No.

1197. Reissue May 17. isei; 1.671,, (A). Improred mode of reducing silicatea to

a liquid or getalinous 8iate. 1.075 (B). Improvement in apparatus/or treating sUi-

eioiis substances.

Superheated steiim is employed In a digester to reduce silicious and other re-
fractory substances to a liquid or gelatinous state.
S9.1SS— July 7,1863. T. ELKINTOX. Improvement in the manufacture of alkaline

silicates.

The ingredients are fed through roof openings onto the sloping bed of a fur-
nace, down which the fused silicate flows in a continuous stream to an outlet,
subject to the direct heat of the furnace.
SOIt.OkU— August 16, 188!,. S. G. THOMAS. Manufacture of alkaline salts.

Alkaline chlorides are decomposed, and alkaline silicates and other non-
haloid alkaline salts and hydrates produced, together with chlorine and hydro-
chloric acid, by acting on sodium chloride in a Bessemer converter or Siemens
or puddling furnace by the silicon contained in molten pig iron in presence of
oxygen, oxide of iron, or any oxygen-yielding body. Tlie chlorides are sub-
mitted to treatment inclosed in iron cases or compressed into shapes with or
without oxide of iron to render the reaction more effective and prevent vola-
tilization.
seo.SiO— April 11, 1887. J. T. ADAMS. Batch for making gUuis.

A substance containing volatile hydrocarbon, as coal or sawdust, is mixed
with a glass batch to clarify the bath.
S?6,U>9— January 10, 1888. A. KAYSER. Process of making alkaline silicates and

carbonates.

The oxide of sodium or potas.sium is obtained from the chloride by mixing
the chloride with clav, heating the mixture in a converter directly by pa.ssing
highlv-heated ga.ses containing steam through the converter, smelting the con-
verted material together with an alkali, and then extracting the sodium or
potassium combinations by lixiviation.

S7e.!,10— January 10, 1888. A. KAYSER. Process of making alkaline silicates.

Silicate of sodium or potassium is made from the chloride thereof by mixing
the chloride with silica, molding into bricks, and heating in a converter with
highly-heated gases containing steam passed through the converter.

Us,091— January gO, 1891. P. SIEVERT. Process of dissolving water-glass.

A clear solution of water glass is made by softening and partially dis)!olving
the lumps by intimate contact with a jet of steam and treating them with a
spray of alkaline lye, the solution being enriched by flowing over the gla.ss
lumps and continuously discharged as it forms.

U,S.77t--Marchil„ 1891. M. W. BEYLIKGY. Silicate compound.

A new product, an alkaline-magnesian silicate solution, in which the silicate
has the general formula, 7(NaoO,6SiOo), 2(Mg" OSiO.), insoluble after per-
fect drying, is produced by the action of a compound /salt of fluosilicate of
magnesium and hydrocarbonatc of magnesia on a solution of tersilicate of
soda.

S90.1I,S— September lU, 1897. W. GARROWAY. Process of making alkaline silicates

and niiric acid.

Silica and an alkaline nitrate are heated with superheated steam pa.sscd
through the retort or furnace.

633,81,1— September te, 1899. F. HENKEL. Process of making soluble alkaline

silicates.

Six parts of a solid alkaline silicate is mixed with 1 part of water and heated
at from 100° to 120° C. until the water disappears and a nomogeneons mass forms
which is easily soluble in cold water. Or the solid alkaline silicate is mixed
with a hot concentrated solution of the silicate. Sawdust, peal, or other sub-
stance may be added as a loosening agent when it is to be used as a fertilizer.

ALUMINATES.

l,6lt,137 — June 16, 1891. A. K.\YSER. Process of making sodium aluminate.

A mixture of insoluble sodium .silico-aluminate — produced by process No.
376,409 (see Group II, Sodas, Sodium Carbonates)— and lime is subjected to a
decomposing temperature and the product leached.

1,72,668— April 11, 1891. E. FLEISCHER. Process of making aluminates of alkalies.
In the manufacture of alkali aluminates from aluminous substances and
alkaline sulphates, thiosulphates, or sulphides, the ingredients are mixed with
iron and lime and heate<l in the presence of a reducing agent, the iron and
lime being so proportioned that the sulphur present is taken up by the iron and
the silicic acid by the lime, while the latter is in excess to prevent the forma-
tion of soluble combinations of sulphide of iron with the alkalis,

S7t,026—Nox!ember Si, 1896. D. A. PfeNIAKOFF. Process of making aluminate.

A mixture of an alkaline sulphate and an alkaline sulphuret and a substance
containing alumina is heated to incandescence, producing an alkaline alumi-
nate. The gas mi.ted with heated air is passed into retorts filled ^vith calcined
alkaline chloride to produce chlorine and alkaline sulphate.

603,657— May 10, 1898. D. A. PfiNIAKOFF. Process of making alkaline alumi-
nates.

Aluminates, free from sulphides of iron and the like, are produced by calcin-
ing a mixture of bauxite, alxaline sulphate, and carbon in the proportions indi-
cated by the formula 2 HAlsOa-FCsOa) +8Na.2S04-(-5C, the proportions of the car-
bon being such that only one-fourth of the oxygen in the alkaUne sulphate
will be combined therewith.

SlS.36i— October 11, 1898. F. RAYNAUD. Process of making alkaline aluminates.
Alkaline aluminates free from silicates are produced by passing steam through
a heated mixture of aliiminous ore and any sulphide, the base of which is capa-
ble of combining with ahimina, sulphurcted hydrogen being simultaneously
produced. I'referably, briquets are formed of aluminuous ore (alumina 640
parts); carbon, 207 partii: and an alkaline sulphate, as sulphate of soda, 900 parts;
and dried for treatment.

618,779— January 31, 1899. H. S. BLACKMORE. Process of making alkali alumi-
nates.

An alkali aluminate is produced by gradually introducing aluminium hy-
droxide, or aluminium hydraled oxide Into a molten alkali salt. With sodium
chloride, sodium aluminate and hydrochloric acid are produced.

MANGANATES AND PERMANGANATES.

Si6,657—Septemberi2, 1885. T. KEMPF. Proccssof manufacturing permanganates.
Solutions of the manganic-acid salts are electrolyzed in the positive compart-
ment of a cell having a porous diaphragm, producing permanganic-acid salts
and free metallic hydroxides.

515,1,1,3— February 27, 1S91,. J. H. PARKINSON. Porous permanganate block and

process of making same.

Permanganate of potash or soda Is thoroughly mixed with kaolin— say from
10 to 121 per cent — and formed with water into a stiff paste, which is baked hard
and dry m a partial vacuum for use in the production of oxygen.

538,611,— August iU, 1897. E. B. STUART. Manganate and process of producing

same.

A double manganate of sodium and calcium, for tise in extracting oxygen
from air, is produced by subjecting sodium hydrate 80 parts, calcium oxide 66
parts and binoxide of manganese 88 parts, with oxygen 128 parts, to a tempera-
ture of from 300° to 400° C. An excess of from 5 to 15 per cent of caustic soda is
preferred.
631.S18— August 15, 1899. R.H.REEVES. Method of disinfecting.

Sulphuric acid is mixed with a dry mixture of manganate of soda and carbon
or wood dust to evolve ga.ses for suppre.s.sing noxious vapors. After the gases
are evolved water is added to form permanganic acid, which acts on sewage.

PROCESSES AND APPARATUS.

9,11,5— July 27, 1853. H. W. ADAMS. Process for tlie nmnvfactming of metallic zinc

in the form of a fine poivder by the use of steam.

Vaporized zinc is brought into contact with steam, the temperature of the
steam being less than the melting point of the zinc, \yhereby the zinc vapor is
instantly cooled and reduced to an impalpable metallic powder.

li,S19—May 8, 1855. B. HARDINGE. t^Reimue;SUr-Jamuirym,ia56.) Improve-
ment in apparatus for dissolving silica.
The solvent is taken from the upper part of the charge in the digester, passed

through a heater, and the vapor discharged into the bottom of the charge in

connection with a stirrer.

iS.eSi— December 27, iseu. E. SONSTADT. Improvement in the manufacture and

purification of magnesium.

A solution of magnesium chloride and potassium chloride is evaporated to
dryness and the residue heated to redne.ssand acted upon by sodium, producing
magnesium, which is distilled and purified, using an iron retort with exclusion
of air. ,

5i,e66— April ii, 1866. C. H. WING. Improved method of preparing magnesium

for burning.

Magnesium wire or ribbon is formed into a spiral coil.
77,987— May 19, 1868. C. KUEHN. Improved mode of utilizing tin scrap or waste.

The scrap is boiled in water and 2.5 per cent of muriatic acid and 2i per cent of
nitric acid (of weight of scrap metal) is added, and the tin dissolved. Succes-
sive charges are treated in the same batli with additions of acid until it is satu-
rated with chloride of tin, which may be deposited on zinc plates, or the bath is
evaporated and the chloride of tin is obtained.

96.531,— Novinber 2, 1869. F. WILCOX. Improved process of refining the waste from

German silver and other metals.

It is carbonized by pouring the molten waste into a crucible containing nitrate
of soda, or other material supplying oxygen.

96,535— November 3, 1869. F. WILCOX. Improved process of utilizing the waste

formed in cleaning copper and brass goods.

The waste is settled and the sediment dissolved with the aid of steam and the
copper deposited out by means of iron plates. The liquor is then filtered, evap-
orated, and the sulphate of iron obtained. The deposited copper is washed,
fused, and cast.

103,11,8— AprU 19, 1870. D. D. PARMELEE. Improvement in treating tin scrap to

(^tain useful products.

Tin is removed from tin scrap by treating the same in an inclosed vessel with
chlorine gas, carrying off the fumes and condensing them as chloride of tin.

107 ,711— September 27, 1S70. A. OTT. Improvement in treating tin scrap for the

manufacture ofstannate of potash, etc.

Fifty pounds of tin scrap is digested with 8 quarts of a lye of caustic soda 18°
Baumi5, 10 pounds of litharge, li pounds of sodium nitrate, and IJ pounds of
sodium manganate along with steam. The liquor is decolorized by filtering
through boneblack evaporated to 1.8° Baumd and cooled when stannate of
soda chrvstallizes. For stannate of potash in place of the soda compounds, 14
pounds of a lye of caustic potash, 2 pounds of potassium nitrate and 2 pounds
of potassium manganate are used.

113,839— M&rch 31, 1871. A. OTT. Improvement in preparing tin salts from tin-
ners' waste.

Scrap tin is digested with muriatic acid and steam. The lic^nor is evaporated
to 60° Baumd', and bichloride of tin formed by heating it with muriatic acid
sulphuric acid, and water. It is then distilled, bichloride of tin going over and
chloride of iron remaining. The bichloride is reconverted into chloride by
heating it with granulated tin.

119,367—September 36. 1871. F. W. DORN. Improvement in processes of utilizing

tinners' clippings.

Scrap metal is treated with a mixture of muriatic acid gas, hj-ponitric-acid
gas, and steam, or muriatic-acid gas and steam alone, followed by a jet of steam
to wash off the muriate of tin.

131,91S— December 19, 1S71. C. LENNIG. Improvement in removing tin from tin

scrap.

A solution of caustic soda or potash is poured over the scrap metal, drawn ott
and then air forced through the mass of metal, and the operation successively
repeated. Stannate of soda or potash is deposited out of the liquor.

128,385— June 35, 1S73. T. F. WELLS. Improvement in processes of separating tin

from iron in tinners' clippings.

Tin is separated from iron by means of hydrochloric acid to which nitric acid
is gradually added in conjunction with chlorate of potash when the original
bath gets exhausted. The tin is deposited out of the charged solution by zinc

DIGEST OF PATENTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL 1ND[ISTRIP:S.

305

or othiTWiKO. And the ri'mftiiiiiiK 1I(|Uor— ii wiTiitlon of tho rtiloridr oflnxi hihI
xinc - is iivnilnltU' for ttif |>r<'|tiimlioii of imiIiiIs. for a (tislnfccinnt, or for lliu
prcHtTviitloiiof W(>(h1.

It!i.l.l7—Julii 1(1. imi. I). MenANtKf,. W. It. SIMCAR. AND J. W. RICHARDS.

ImprttifmeiU in iitftfuxtj* of Htilizinii iiHinte lilt w'rap itntt ffutl'dnizftl iron.

Till wmp is (Irst Iri'alcd wilh iniiriHtir acfd to iIIrsoIvi' tlu' tin. and the iron
iMi-lal liflnf? rt'inovcd, Kalvani/.t>d lrt>n KTap is iinuu-rsvd in Hit* l>atli. Tlien to
tlu> tit|uor IS HtidiMl wasit: s}iI-an)inoniac .sltiniminiis, and a clii'mical (><inivalent
of waste antiiioniacal litiimr from Kas worlcs, Itu* iron priM-ipilattMl, and tlie
liquor I'oolftl and i-rystailixi'il, yioldlnK a sulistitiite for sai auinioniat; as a fiux
for zinc i>«iatin»; tMitlis.

tW.iSS—Jtmuaru 6, tSTi. H. HIKOKR. ImprovcmenlinreeovcrinQ zine fntrntinc

/nmcu.

Tho funics of zinc and the ga-scs evolved diiriSK tlie operation of trvatlng
altovHof zinc in a dry state are pas.scd tiiroiiKh a chani)>cr containiitgciirtK)nic
o.xi(U', anti liu> zini* f'niues conilen.Hud ina nietjillic stale.

IMMS—SffilrmlHr IS. W74. W. S. SAMPSON. Impmmmenl i« methmit nf pre-

srrriwj lime.

Lime is compres.sed into a solid maas, the harri'l 1x>in)(heid in au adJtiHtal>ie
clamp. It pre-scrves it from air slacking' and reilnccs built.

mo.ulS—Fibrmini-i.l.lsr.':. J. HOi.ljiDAy AND 11. M. BAKKR. Impruvcmait in
prfuv»»f» Jor n'lnin'iiiii tinjfinn tin siTiip.

Tin scrap is healeil in a inttli of fust^il alkaline nitrate and then piunge<] into
water.

tU0..V:O—Mivj8. tsm. O. A.CATLIN AND li. K. WlI-SON. Jmpmveinent inproc-

fsuff o/ lUitizinif tin ncrap.

The scrap metal is sprinkletl wilh dry chloride of sislinm or potassium and
nitrate of .sodium or p^ttassinm, and then immersed in a caustic alkaline solu-
tion. Slaniiatc crystals of the alkaiint; ha.se are obtained from the evaporation
of the saturated so'lution.

lyl.SSn—.Iiine ff. 1ST7. C. HOKNB0.STEL. JmprmemeiU in proceaea of applying

(uygcntttfd air in blast Jiinuirei.

Cxygen (<ai is supplied by forcing a current of air through a mixture of black
oxide of manganese; and sulphnrie acid.

nie.aM—.Viimnbrr 6, 1!<77. J. M. SANDER.S. Impmivmeiit in manttfaeture o/
oriitr iif tin.

Scrap tinned iron is subjcetetl to a heat that will volatilize the tin, which is
oxidized by the admission of air, and the tin oxide .settled in a condensing
chamber.

iOO.Mr—nhriuiri/ In. (.s7.v. I'. (',. VIKJELLUS. Impruvcinenlinaeparatingtin/rum

tin-scrap.

Scrai) metal is treated in a dilute nitric-atnd bath, the iron being in contact
with the i>ositive i>ole of an cleetric battery, or otherwise rendered pa.ssive.

sns.rsr,— October H. 1S7S. .1. HOLLIDAY AND J. LAMBERT. Iiiiprofemcnt in

utiti::ing tin scrap aiitt nianiifacturt of iftannales.

Tin wrap is treated in a l>ath coinp<).He<l of a .si;>lution of caustic soda or isjtash
and aualkalinearsenite, nitrate or nitrite. Tlie.saturated s4tIution of staunate
of ,so<la or potiusii is evaiwrated.

tSl.SSS— December 27, 1S8I. V. C. HUGHES. Preparation of whitewash from lime.
A whitewash free from grit is made by mixing lime with water and then
grinding it. The product may be evaporated to a paste and packed in cans or
barrels.

:6S,971,— October 17, /.fSS. F. B. NICHOLS. Apparatus for emporating or concen-
trating tUtuids and saturating litiuitls with gases.
Siphon slips, operating by .surface attraction, are used to feed fluids out of

troughs.

t6S,701—Deeeml>err>, tust. J. A. MATHIEU. Process of and apparatus for enipn-

rating litinids.

Solid matter is separated from a heated solution thereof'by showering it into
a vacuum.

177. SHU— May ti, 1883. J. CL.^RK. .Wetluxl of reducing metals from their ores.

Refractory ores or material compressed into a bar or block, is exposed to con-
eentrate<l s('>lar heat at the fo<*us of a lens or retleetor and suitable reageuLs
applied.

t77,885 — May SS, 18,sS. J.CLARK. Metliod of reducing metals from Uteir ores.

Ores are melted or disintegmte<l by concentrated solar heat and simultane-
ously earbonaeisjus reagents are applied, whereby ores containing chlorides
may be reduced without the use of stxlium or potassium.

t9S,ll^—.Vaji 6, 1881,. C. K. A. WRKi H T. Process of dissolvituj metals in ammuiii-

a£id soliUions.

Cuprammonium hydrate, or**copperized ammonia," or an analogous ammoni-
acjil solution conlftihing zinc, is i>riKluced by passing air through a .solution of
ammonia in water having fragments of tiie metal immersed Iherein.

Sii,W—July II,, 1886. C. A. CATLIN. Process of recorering tin from tin-scrap.

The tin is dis.solved in uti alkaline bath, and an oxide or salt, .such as oxide
of lime, is adde<l, which will precipitate the tin as an insoluble .stannate.

XSU.iOT— January IS, 1886. J. 1'. VVETUERILL. ApiMralns for filtering and sepa-
rating metals.

A furnace for process No. 334,208. It has a chamber filled with refractory
filtering material on which the metal to be llltered is placed, and one or more
settling ihambers with loosely built tire-brick division walls.

i%,208— January It, 1886. J. H. WETH ERI LL. Process offUtering ami Kparating

vielats.

MeUilsand alloysof metals arc heated to a temperature intermediate between
the fusing points of the metals, and the metal having the lower fu.siiig point is
fused and pa-ssed througli liltering material at the intermediate temperature.

SlA.57i>—Junet9. 1886. W. HASENBACH. Pritccssof separating the tin from scrap
or pieces vftin-itiale or tinned iron by means of hydroctdoric lu'itt.
The scrap metal is heated and treateil wilh gaseous hydro<hlorie acid. The

proUicblorlde of tin formed distills oH auU is caugtit iu a coudeusiu.i{ chamber.
No. 210 20

MtS.I.\n~May 17, 1887, W. IIAHENBACH. Rrrovrry of tin ftnrn snims nf tinned
plate.

I'rotiixhie of tin 1.^ nhlalnol from lyM enntaining ptntiMhinrlde of tin nnt\
iron, oblained in the rwovery of tin from lin-wrnp hy hyilfiwhliFrlc arid, bf
treating the lyes in cli«<sl vckscIs w Ith pulverized cnrtxniitle of lime In eiccai.
then separaling the fornii'd Insoluble ox vproUx'hlorlde of tin from thedlvolved
oxyproiiH'hIoride of inai. and aflerwanis Irenliiig the oxvpfoiia'hl<iftil<- of tin
wilh earlH>iiiilc of limeut a high limiK'nilure in a rlismf veiM-l, whrrrb; Iha
oxypnitiM'lilorideof tin is (converted into a protoxide of tin.

S6S,17S—Ma!i 17, 1887. U. itCHENOK. Proeat qf awl apparaliu /or tkmttmt

liquids with gases.

For charging lii|nids with gases, as in thi' mannfneiure of hisulphlleK, lh«
gases arc forced iritothell<|Uor Ina lank iliroiigh liilies revolving ihinln liemiilh
the surfture of llie liquor, and slmullnneously the lli|Uor. drawn fmm an up|«r
to a lower tank, is discharged in spray IhroiiKh the gnvs in the tup of the lowrr
tank.

380.118— July S, 18V. A. LAMBOTTE. Process of reenrering tin from Un-ptalr
and other materials.

The ser&p metal is stibjected to a ennUniioiu current of chlorine gui diluted
with air at a temiierntiirc alMve the boiling point of stannic chloride, and the
va|K>rs are ccmducled liiUi a stannic chloride solution. The iHuicentraled s<iln-
tion is cva|iorated down with a current of warm air.

S70,tta— .September to, /.«i7. O. M. THOWLESS. Process ofejtrneiing alumlHlum.
Aluminium chloride Is mixed with wHiiumpnMiiicing suLotatn'Cs, us a mix-
ture nf aluminium chloride, 10 |>arts: chalk, .1 |«rLs: cual, IO|nrls: an<i earlionale
of scKla or soda iish, 10 luirLs; with or without I part of crvollte as a Hux. and
heated In a vessel: then ground and washed to remove the carUin and other
matter.

37.^.mn— December t7, 1887. G. G. CONVERS. Process qf trtnllng tal-ammfmlac or

flux skimmings.

The raw skimmings of a galvanizing bath aresnbiected tothe^ctionof steam,
which is injccttsl into the ma.ss, and simultaneously the condensed vaptir con-
taining the soluble chloridesof zinc is dmiiie<l ofT. The drained skimmings are
then calcined and reduce<l.

389.618— September 18, 1888. E. WALSH, Jr. Art of rondenslng turtaUie zinc from

tite vapors or fumes arising in tlie process lif zinc-smdliiig.

The zinc vapors and aKtcwialed vapors from the smelting fnnia<!e arc per-
mitted to expand an<l separate l)y gravity In a condenser, the t4'm|H-rature of
wliicli is maintained at a iioint aii'ive the melting iM>int and Ih-Iow the vapor-
izing iH>int of zinc, whereby the fixed gases absorb heat fnmi and lii|tiefy the
zinc Tapore.

W5,368— J««« 18, 1889. E. MENNEL. Process ofmakfug double sails of mereurf.

A unl or multi valeut phenol is treate<i with an acidulated solution of a pcnall
of mercury.

i07,SI8— July SO, 1889. C. A. CATLtN. Process of charging liquids with gat.

A current of mixed gas is continuously passed through a series of tanks in
onedlrection. while the liquid is intermittfngly passe<Ltbrough the tanks in the
opposite direction, with agitation of the liquid and gol.

i09,i09—.iugiitt SO, 1819. CLANGER. Apparatus for treating salitls urith gase*.

It has a plurality of parallel intersecting spirals or Archimcdian screws, hav-
ing intersecting (;ireles of rotation.

I,10,067~.tugust t7, 18S.9. H. BOWER. Process of facilitating chemical rtadiouA

Two or more substances to be combined are subjected to the effect of impart
and attrition from opposing jets. A finely divided solid may tie used to iuten-
.sify the impact and attrition.

I,lt,il,7— October 8, 1SS9. W. W. FRANTZ. Process of preserving lime.

Quicklime, hot from the kiln, is pulverized and herineticaliy aealed in luxes
in a hot state.

ilt,780— October IB, 1889. J. McNAB. Process of filtering.

A soluble salt is leachegeneoti8 paste, adding suf-
ficient water to dissolve the soluble portion.s, and forming a thoroughly-tiuid
liomogencous mixture in an agitating tank, and then forcing the mixture into
the nitrous bags of a filter press by means of a fitree pump.

1,11.935— Felirnari/ S5, 1890. J. HOLLIDAY. Process q/ making albUine salts of

antimony.

Alkaline antimonites, or antimoeo-antimouates, ale made by treating pal-
verized metallic antimony in a hot aqueous solution of an alitaline nitrate or
nitrite and caustic alkali.

i30,B.'i3— June Sf,, 1890. (i. KASSNER. Process of producing plumhate* of alkatint

earths.

I'lumlwtes of alkaline earths are producc<l by roasting in free air a mixture
of lead oxide (or a mixture of such salts of lead as are reducoi to oxides bjr
heat) and the carbonate or hydrate or caustic eompouuil of an alkaline earth.

UIS,iSO— August 16, 1890. E. CAREZ. Proeris of making ammonium nitrate.

Barium sulphate is calcined out of contact with air, with a mixture of char-
coal and a tiyiirocarboii, as resin-oil, and the pnMtiict boiksl wilh sulphur and
water to pro<iucc jiolysulphide. which is transformed inht tmrium nitrate by
means of MMliuin nilratc, then crystallized and <l(s'om|>oseii witli ammonium
sulphate to produce ammonium nitrate on Ihc one liand and to rei^iver the
barium sulphate.

IM,tl,3— April U, 1891. C. LIESENBERG. Process i^f eUtrffftng liqtddt.
A clarifying liquid for solutions is preiwrcd by treatinc a pliaspliale in the

presence of water with sulphurous a<'id.

l^,OSU — September 8, 1891. J. M. G. BONNET. Proeeu of rreorerimg tin from

waste tin-plale.

Stannatesarc formed by agitating the platol scrap in an alkaline solution and
simultaneoasly forcing liot air into the solution. I'he solution is then dnirn
off and sulphurous acid introduced, pre<-ipitating the tin as stannic acid.

VIS.OSa—Ocbiber U, 1891. H. O. W. HARMSBN. Process of separating tim from

tin-plale waste.

The tin Is disHolved In a l»th nf dilute sniphnrie arid and nitric arid, and
the .saturated tin sulphate s<ilution is then mixed wilh h<-ale<i dIUiie nitric
acid, and lemp^^rature maintaintsl at not len tliau W C, whereby the dlauived
tiu is precipitated as alauuie aeld.

306

MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES.

iW9,««4— Jnnimn/ 70, lS9f. C. t. C. BERT0T7. Prorceii nfprcelnllnttng nj^Me of tin
Jrom sottttiQim.

Carbonate of limo is gradimlly nrtded to Iho snliitlon with tho latter at a
tcmpemtui^ near tnit helow ebullition and exposed to the air until the pre-
ripitation of tin is romplete. It is then cooled, the precipitate colleeted and
w<u«hed with cold water and suspended in solution of a carboiuite of an alkali
metal, the strength of wliii'h is gradually increased until it presents a slightly
alkaline reaction.

It'Jl.mi.—Feb'niary 7. 1S9S. T. TWYX.\>r.
itterl.

PtnceifA of rrparatinr/ tin from iron or

The metal is first coated with a lilm which will formascale when heated, as bv
dipping in a slightly glutinous solution of calcium chloride; it is then heated
until the tni is oxidized and plunged into a water bath, the lilin of oxide falling
off. The oxides may then be treated to separate the iron and tin oxides.

1,9' .trs—May 9, 189$. M. W ANNKR. Process of rerlueiiir/ sulphide ores and manu-
facturing carbon bisulphide.

SiUphide ore, cleaned from ganguc and pulverized, is mixed with carbon or
hydro-carbon and subjected to destructive distillation: the carbon-bisulphide
vapor Is collected and condensed and the reduced metal obtained.

619.391— May S, 1S91,. J. KEESE. Method of utilizing irmi ore.

The entire contents of phosphoretie iron ores are utilized by magneticalK .sep-
arating therefrom the larger portion of the magnetic oxide, tinelv pulverizing
the tailings and treating with sulphuric acid to make the phosphates soluble
and available for plant food.

Ml. 1,1,1.— June 13, 1S9I,. E. A. UEHIJNO. Process of and apparatus for analyzing
gases.

The percentage of a constituent of a gas— say of the waste gas of blast furnaces-
is continuously indicated by means of eontinuous suction through minute inlet
and outlet apertures and tho abstraction of the constituent from the gas in its
pas.sage between said minute apertures, whereby the tension of the gas is varied
and is employed as an index of the percentage of .said constiluent.

MS.7lS-Jxdy 10. mt,. E. A. ITEHLING AND A. STEINBART. Process of and
apjinratus/or analyzing ga»es.

As an improvement on tho process of No.!J21,414, the gas is filtered and pa.s.sed
through a number of absorption chambers, each having a miiuite inlet and out-
let chamber, and eaeii abstracting from the gas a constituent, the percentages
of which are severally determined by the changes from the normal tensions.

RX.91,1— April 23, lS9.'i. H. F. I). SCHWAHN. Method of roasting ores and recov-
t ring vapors therefrom.

The ores or minerals ground and mixed with nitrate of sodium or pota.ssium—
10 per cent— are roa.sled and sublimated, steam being injected into the cham-
ber, and the resultant vapors are forced through one or more baths of solutions
of nitric acid, hydrochloric acid, a salt of an alkali metal— preferably sodiimi
chloride— in water of about 10° BaninO, caiLsing reactions with the prixiuction
of chlorides and carbonates of the metallic vapors and .sulphates of the alkalis
which are further treated as seems advisable or profitable.

CSS,7S6—May 7, JS9.5. E. E. LUXGWITZ. Process of smelting ores.

Ores, containing a volatilizabic metallic element, are smelted in a furnace
under a maintained pre.ssure higher than the pressure at which the resulting
metal or regulus, or one of its constituents, would boil at the temperature ob

taiued in the furnace.

61,9. ■',9e— November 12. 1S95.
erotts maieriais.

' tempe
A. ERLENBACH. Method of utilizing tin of stannif-

Stanniferous materials, as tin scrap, stanniferous waste of dveing and finishing
factories, etc., are heated with muriatic acid to turn the tin iiito solutions of per-
chlciride of tin; the solution is concentrated, and the heating continued to dis-
till oft the perehloride of tin, and simultaneously therewith a .stream of muriatic
acid is introduced into tlic pen^hloride of tin.

65G,6es— March 17, l.Vje. E. WAKZEE. Process of prccipUalimi iron from solutions
coniatning iron and zinc.

Iron is precipitated as ferroso ferric oxide from solutions containing iron and
tine— as the spent electrolytes of galvanic batteries— by adding zinc in excess
and blowing in air at a temperature of 90°C. to produce oxidation and agitation

T. K. KLIMMER.

Process of making alkaline salts of

B.W,Sl,<i— April 21, ISOe.
metallic acids.

For the production of alkaline snlt.^ with oxvacids of heavy metals from ores
containing the heavy metals combined with oxvgcn, the ore— such as chrome
ore---is mixed with ferric oxide and an excess of alkaline carbonate calcined
111 the presenile of air, and lixiviated. The residue, dried and ground is used
ill u subsequent operation. '

6Si,US—May 11, 1S97. J. n. MILLIARD. Chemical app.iratus.

To prevent ga-ses froin interniiugliug while passing through liquids, inclined
niyerted, open channels are used for the gas, with entrance pii)es eonneeted
with the lower ends of the channels and eseaiie pipes connected with the upper

69S,a6—Nm'ember 9, 1S97. S. GANELIN. Metliod-of treating sulftd ores as lead-

I*ad snlphide ores are inlro<liiced Into a bath of a fused halogen salt oanable
of being decomiK>sed by the snlphiijc- as diloride of zinc-elleeiing a double

002.032— April 19, ISgS.
silicon.

decomposition and tho oonverslon of the lead sulphide Into a halogen salt of
lead, and of tho base of tho halogen salt of the bath into a snlphide.

000. sa— March S, 1S9S. T. HUNTINGTON AND F. HEBERLEIN, Process oj

treating sulfid ores of lead, etc., preparatory to smelting.

Sulphide ores of lead are oxidized by mixing the ore with an oxide of an
alkaline earth metal — as caleiuin oxide— heating the mixture in the presence
of air to a bright red heat ("(K)" C), then cooling to a dull red heat (u(K)° C),
and finally forcing air through the mas-i until the lead ore, reduced to an oxide,
fuses.

c;. DE CHALMOT. Method of obtaining free amorphous

Silicon in the presence of copper is reclaimed in a free condition by heating
finely pulverized silicon-copper alloy mixed with sulphur in a clo.scd vis.sel to
a temperature between 2.W and 300° C. The silicon is .set free as an amorphous
powder. The amount of sulphur is regulated to form Cn^-S or CiiS.

605,379— June 7. I89S. H. S. BLACKMORE. Petorl and method of m,i^^k same .

An impervious, noncorrodible retort for manufacture of carbon titflhtihide is
made of fire clay lined witli a glaze of lead sulphide formed bv coating it with
fusible oxide of lead and then exposing to tlie action of carlxdi-bisiilphide vaixjr
when at a red heat.

eo7,ia7—Jldy 19. 1S9S. G. M. WESTMAX. Process of and apparatus for pyritic
smelting.

Hot air from regenerators is forced up through a column of pyritic ore free
from carbonaceous fuel; the gases and volatilized prixiucts pass off, the oxides
are condensed, and the remaining gases, nitrogen and sulphurous acid, produce
sulphuric acid, while matte and slag arc continuously drawn olt from the ba'e
of the ore column,

616,821— December 27, 1.198. .1. BOCK. Process of and apparatus for nlitaininq

crystals.

Large individual crystals are obtained from a heated saturated solution by
passing it through a long, thin mass of crystals of the .substance being crystal-
ized, subjecting it to a gentle and slow disturbance and to a gradual cixilirig.

02i,S3S—May 9, IS99. E. E. LUNGWITZ. Process of roasting ores.

The mass^^s opened by roasting under sniier-atmospheric pressure and sud-
denly hiirtoving the external pressure while the blast is shut off, whereby the
expansion of the compressed ga.ses within the mass break it open.

r,SU,66Ci— October W, 1899. F. BALLOU. Art of smelling ores.

Water-saturated coke Is used In the charge for a stack furnace, resniting in
reduction of coke consumption due to the retarding ol coke combustion until
the charge has suuk to the smelting zone.

ORGANIC.

PROCESSES AND APPARATUS,

1,9,995— fkptember 19, 1805. .1. FRASER.
the rem(rval of jmraffine.

Hot carbonic oxide is used for heating oil wells v
carbons.

Improved metiiod of treating oil veils for
redis-solve the solid hvdro-

80,835— August 11, 1868.
ether.

F. RENZ. Imprmed process of manufacturing sulphuric

The vapor from corn mash Is parsed through .sulphuric acid at a temperatureof
240° F., forming suipho-viiiic acid, which Is washed at a temperature of 19.=i° F
and then pas.sed through sulpliiiric acid at a temperature of 27&° to 300° F., pro-
ducing sulphuric ether and water, which Is then purified bv means of an alkali
and water baths, and the water condensed, leaving pure su'iphuric ether.

136,623— March 11, 1873. W, F. SIMES. Jmprorement in preparing camphor.
Distilled or refined camphor Is formed into blocks or tablets by pressure.

161,,1,78—June 1,'i, 1875. I. M. I'HELf'S. ImproveineiU iupermanadftour of camphor.
Pulverulent camphor is produce<i by subliming crude camphor in combination
with glycerine. The glycerinated camphor is compressed into blocks.

169,727— November S, 1S75. C. PETERS. Improvement in reagnUs for testing tlie
straigth of vinegar.

A mixture of litmus, one-half pound; concentrated liquid ammonia, 1 [<iu
alcohol, 1 quart; and water enough to make in all 17 quarts, <-oustilutes a b
testing liquid that is turned red by vinegar.

Siips—Octolieri.mi. W. II. ATKIN.SON. lieflniwi camphor and apparatus
ther^or.

Camphor is refined while surrounded by sheet metal or alio
wants be stripped from the t;ake.

nd;
blue

ly, which can after-

5 11. US— December 19. 1893. W. H. HIGGIN. Process of making sotlium acetate.

Esparto liquor and other alkaline waste liquors containing sodium acetate are
evaporateil, the residue (Mrefully heated at about 400° c., but below the heat ai
which sodium acetate is deeo.ufaised, and the eliaiTcd mass leachei.

'its -^fM ^-^^''W '^'^MfwWw^m

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Chemicals and allied products"

See other formats